Mineralogy Text 00 Dana Rich

CAUFOR ilA
EAHTK
LIBRARY
DANA'S
SERIES OF MINERALOGIES
System of Mineralogy
Sixth edition, entirely rewritten. With Appendices I and II,
completing the work to 1909. 1333 pages, 6f by 10, over
1400 figures Half leather, net $15.00.
Third Appendix to the Sixth Edition of Dana's

System of Mineralogy
Completing the Work to 1915. By William E. Ford, Pro-
fessor of Mineralogy, Sheffield Scientific School of Yale
University, 87 pages, 6f by 10 Cloth, net $2.00
A Text-book of Mineralogy
With an extended Treatise on Crystallography and Physical
Mineralogy. By Edward Salisbury Dana, Professor of
Physics and Curator of Mineralogy, Yale University. New
edition, entirely rewritten and reset. By William E. Ford
(1922). 720 pages, 6 by 9, nearly 1000 figures Cloth, net $5.00
.
Minerals, and How to Study Them

A book for beginners in Mineralogy. By Prof. E. S. Dana.
380 pages, 319 figures. Cloth, net $2.00
BY DANA AND FORD

Manual of Mineralogy
For the Student of Elementary Mineralogy, the Mining
Engineer, the Geologist, the Prospector, the Collector, etc.
Thirteenth edition, entirely revised and rewritten, by Wil-
liam E. Ford. 460 pages, 5 by yj, 357 figures, and 10 plates.
Cloth, net $3.00
Flexible binding, net $3.50
A TEXT-BOOK
OF
MINERALOGY
WITH AN EXTENDED TREATISE ON
CRYSTALLOGRAPHY AND PHYSICAL MINERALOGY
BY
EDWARD SALISBURY DANA ft
Professor Emeritus of Physics and Curator of Mineralogy

Yale University
THIRD EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED
BY
WILLIAM E. FORD
Professor of Mineralogy, Sheffield Scientific School of
Yale University
TOTAL ISSUE, TWENTY-SEVEN THOUSAND
NEW YORK
JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.
LONDON: CHAPMAN & HALL, LIMITED

1922
EARTH
SCIENCES
LIBRARY
COPYRIGHT, 1898
BY
EDWARD S. DANA.
COPYRIGHT, 1922
BY
EDWARD S. DANA
AND
WILLIAM E. FORD.
TECHNICAL COMPOSITION CO.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A.
PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION
The first edition of this book appeared in 1877 and approximately twenty
years later (1898) the second and revised edition was published. Now,
again after more than twenty years, comes the third edition. The changes
involved in the present edition are chiefly those of addition, the general
character and form of the book having been retained unchanged. In the
section on Crystallography the important change consists in the introduction
of the methods employed in the use of the stereographic and gnomonic pro-
jections. A considerable portion of the section on the Optical Characters of
Minerals has been rewritten in the endeavor to make this portion of the book
simpler and more readily understood by the student. In the section on
Descriptive Mineralogy all species described since the previous edition have
been briefly mentioned in their proper places. Numerous other changes and
corrections have, of course, been made in order to embody the results of
mineral investigation during the last two decades. Only minor changes have
been made in the order of classification of the mineral species. It was felt
that as this book is so closely related to the System of Mineralogy it was
unwise to attempt any revision of the chemical classification until a new

edition of that work should appear. The description of the methods of
Crystal Drawing given in Appendix has been largely rewritten. A new
A
table has been added to. Appendix B
which the minerals have been grouped
in
into lists according to their important basic elements. Throughout the book
the endeavor has been to present in a clear and concise way all the information
needed by the elementary and advanced student of the science.
The editor of this edition is indebted especially to the published and un-
published writings of the late Professor Samuel L. Penfield for much ma-
terial and many figures that have been used in the sections of Crystallog-
raphy and The Optical Character of Minerals. He also acknowledges the

cordial support and constant assistance given him by Professor Edward S.
Dana.
WILLIAM E. FORD
NEW HAVEN, CONN., Dec. 1, 1921.
469105
m
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION
THE remarkable advance in the Science of Mineralogy, during the years

that have elapsed since this Text-Book was first issued in 1877, has made it
necessary, in the preparation of a new edition, to rewrite the whole as well as
to add much new matter and many new illustrations.
The work being designed chiefly to meet the wants of class or private
instruction, this object has at once determined the choice of topics discussed,
the order and fullness of treatment and the method of presentation.
In the chapter on Crystallography, the different types of crystal forms are
described under the now accepted thirty-two groups classed according to their
symmetry. The names given to these groups are based, so far as possible,
upon the characteristic form of each, and are intended also to suggest the
terms formerly applied in accordance with the principles of hemihedrism.
The order adopted is that which alone seems suited to the demands of the
elementary student, the special and mathematically simple groups of the
isometric system being described first. Especial prominence is given to the
"
normal group" under the successive systems, that is, to the group which is
relatively of most common occurrence and which shows the highest degree of
symmetry. The methods of Miller are followed as regards the indices of the
different forms and the mathematical calculations.
In the chapters on Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, the plan of the
former edition is retained of presenting somewhat fully the elementary prin-
ciples of the science upon which the mineral characters depend; this is par-
department of Optics. The effort has been made to give
ticularly true in the
the student the means of becoming practically familiar with all the modern
methods of investigation now commonly applied. Especial attention is,
therefore, given to the optical properties of crystals as revealed by the micro-
scope. Further, frequent references are introduced to important papers on
the different subjects discussed, in order to direct the student's attention to
the original literature.
The Descriptive part of the volume is essentially an abridgment of the
Sixth Edition of Dana's System of Mineralogy, prepared by the author (1892).
To this work (and future Appendices) the student is, therefore, referred for
fuller descriptions of the crystallographic and optical properties of species, for
analyses, lists of localities, etc.; also for the authorities for data here quoted.
In certain directions, however, the work has been expanded when the interests
VI PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION
of the student have seemed to demand it; for example, in the statement of
the characters of the various isomorphous groups. Attention is also called to
the paragraph headed "Diff.," in the description of each common species, in
which are given the distinguishing characters, particularly those which serve
to separate it from other species with which it might be easily confounded.
The list of localities of minerals, which appeared as an Appendix
American
in the earlier edition, has been omitted, since in its present expanded form
it requires more space than could well be given to it; further, its reproduc-
tion here is unnecessary since it is accessible to all interested not only in the
System of Mineralogy but also in separate form. A full topical Index has
been added, besides the usual Index of Species.
The obligations of the present volume to well-known works of other au-
thors particularly to those of Groth and Rosenbusch are too obvious to
require special mention. The author must, however, express his gratitude
to his colleague, Prof. L. V. Pirsson, who has given him material aid in the
part of the work dealing with the optical properties of minerals as examined
under the microscope. He is also indebted to Prof. S. L. Penfield of New
Haven and to Prof. H. A. Miers of Oxford, England, for various valuable
suggestions.
EDWARD SALISBURY DANA
NEW HAVEN, CONN., Aug. 1, 1898.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
INTRODUCTION 1
PART I. CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
GENERAL MORPHOLOGICAL RELATIONS OF CRYSTALS 7
GENERAL MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF CRYSTALS 26
I. ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 52
1. Normal Class (1). Galena Type , 52
2. Pyritohedral Class (2). Pyrite Type 63
3. Tetrahedral Class (3). Tetrahedrite Type 66
4. Plagiohedral Class (4). Cuprite Type 71
5. Tetartohedral Class (5). Ullmannite Type 72
Mathematical Relations of the Isometric System 72
II. TETRAGONAL SYSTEM 77
1. Normal Class (6). Zircon Type 77
2. Hemimorphic Class (7). lodosuccinimide Type . 84
3. Pyramidal Class (8). Scheelite Type 85
4. Pyramidal-Hemimorphic Class (9). Wulfenite Type 86
5. Sphenoidal Class (10). Chalcopyrite Type 87
6. Trapezohedral Class (11). Nickel Sulphate Type 89
7. Tetartohedral Class (12) 89
Mathematical Relations of the Tetragonal System 90
III. HEXAGONAL SYSTEM 94
A. Hexagonal Division 95
1. Normal Class (13). Beryl Type 95
2. Hemimorphic Class (14). Zincite Type 98
3. Pyramidal Class (15). Apatite Type 100
4. Pyramidal-Hemimorphic Class (16). Nephelite Type 101
5. Trapezohedral Class (17) 102
B. Trigonal or Rhombohedral Division 103
1. Trigonal Class (18). Benitoite Type 103
2. Rhombohedral Class (19). Calcite Type. 104
3. Rhombohedral-Hemimorphic Class (20). Tourmaline Type 109
4. Trirhombohedral Class (21). Phenacite Type 110
5. Trapezohedral Class (22). Quartz Type 112
6. 7. Other Classes (23) (24) 114
Mathematical Relations of the Hexagonal System 115
IV. ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM 121
1. Normal Class (25). Barite Type 121
2. Hemimorphic Class (26). Calamine Type 126
3. Sphenoidal Class (27). Epsomite Type 128
Mathematical Relations of the Orthorhombic System 128
vii
yiii TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
V. MONOCLINIC SYSTEM 133
1. Normal Class (28). Gypsum Type 133
2. Hemimorphic Class (29). Tartaric Acid Type 138
3. Clinohedral Class (30). Clinohedrite Type '138
Mathematical Relations of the Monoclinic System 139
VI. TRICLINIC SYSTEM 143
1. Normal Class (31). Axinite Type 144
2. Asymmetric Class (32). Calcium Thiosulphate Type 147
Mathematical Relations of the Triclinic System 148
MEASUREMENT OP THE ANGLES OF CRYSTALS 152
COMPOUND OR TWIN CRYSTALS 160
Examples of Important Methods of Twinning 165
Regular Grouping of Crystals 172
IRREGULARITIES OF CRYSTALS 174
1. Variations in the Forms and Dimensions of Crystals 174
2. Imperfections of the Surfaces of Crystals 176
3. Variations in the Angles of Crystals 178
4. Internal Imperfection and Inclusions 178
CRYSTALLINE AGGREGATES 182
PART II. PHYSICAL MINERALOGY

PHYSICAL CHARACTERS OF MINERALS 185
I. Characters depending upon Cohesion and Elasticity 186
'
II. Specific Gravity, or Relative Density 195

III. Characters depending upon Light 200
General Principles of Optics 200
Optical Instruments and Methods 241
General Optical Characters of Minerals . . / ,
246
1. Diaphaneity -
247
2. Color 247
3. Luster 249
Special Optical Characters of Minerals belonging to the different Systems 251
A. Isometric Crystals 252
B. Uniaxial Crystals 253
General Optical Relations 253
Optical Examination of Uniaxial Crystals 259
C. Biaxial Crystals 270
General Optical Relations 270
Optical Examination of Biaxial Crystals 278
IV. Characters depending upon Heat 303
V. Characters depending upon Electricity and Magnetism 306
VI. Taste and Odor 310
PART III. CHEMICAL MINERALOGY

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY AS APPLIED TO MINERALS 311
CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF MINERALS 327
Examination in the Wet Way 328
Examination by Means of the Blowpipe 329
TABLE OF CONTENTS IX
PART IV. DESCRIPTIVE MINERALOGY

PAGE
NATIVE ELEMENTS 344
SULPHIDES, SELENIDES, TELLURIDES, ETC 357
SULPHO-SALTS 383
CHLORIDES, BROMIDES, IODIDES, FLUORIDES 394
OXIDES 402
CARBONATES 436
SILICATES 454
TlTANO-SlLICATES, TlTANATES 583
NIOBATES, TANTALATES 587
PHOSPHATES, ARSENATES, VANADATES, ETC 592
NITRATES 619
BORATES 619
URANATES '
623
SULPHATES, CHROMATES, ETC 624
TUNGSTATES, MoLYBDATES 641
OXALATES, MELLATES 644
HYDROCARBON COMPOUNDS 645
APPENDIX A.
ON THE DRAWING OF CRYSTAL FIGURES 649
APPENDIX B.
TABLES TO BE USED IN THE DETERMINATION OF MINERALS 663
GENERAL INDEX 695

INDEX TO SPECIES. . 703
INTRODUCTION
1. THE SCIENCE OF MINERALOGY treats of those inorganic species called
minerals, which together in rock masses or in isolated form make up the

material of the crust of the earth, and of other bodies in the universe so far
as it is possible to study them in the form of meteorites.
2. Definition of a Mineral. A
Mineral is a body produced by the proc-
esses of inorganic nature, having a definite chemical composition and, if formed
under favorable conditions, a certain characteristic molecular structure which
is exhibited in form and other physical properties.
its crystalline
This definition some further explanation.
calls for
First of all, a mineral must be a homogeneous substance, even when
minutely examined by the microscope; further, it must have a definite
chemical composition, capable of being expressed by a chemical formula.
Thus, much basalt appears to be homogeneous to the eye, but when examined
under the microscope in thin sections it is seen to be made up of different
substances, each having characters of its own. Again, obsicftan, or volcanic
glass, though it may be essentially homogeneous, has not a definite composition
corresponding to a specific chemical formula, and is hence classed as a rock,
not as a mineral species. Further, several substances, as tachylyte, hyalome-
lane, etc., which at one time passed as minerals, have been relegated to
petrology, because it has been shown that they are only local forms of basalt,
retaining an apparently homogeneous form due to rapid cooling.
Again, a mineral has in all cases a definite molecular structure, unless the
conditions of formation have been such as to prevent this, which is rarely true.
This molecular structure, as will be shown later, manifests itself in the physical
characters and especially in the external crystalline form.
It is customary, as a matter of convenience, to limit the name mineral to
those compounds which have been formed by the processes of nature alone,
while compounds made in the laboratory or the smelting-furnace are at most
called artificial minerals. Further, mineral substances which have been pro-
duced through the agency of organic life are not included among minerals,
as the pearl of an oyster, the opal-silica (tabasheer) secreted by the bamboo,
etc. Finally, mineral species are, as a rule, limited to solid substances; the
only liquids included being metallic mercury and water. Petroleum, or
mineral oil, is not properly a homogeneous substance, consisting rather of
several hydrocarbon compounds; it is hence not a mineral species.
It is obvious from the above that minerals, in the somewhat restricted
sense usually adopted, constitute only a part of what is often called the
Mineral Kingdom.
3. Scope of Mineralogy. In the following pages, the general subject
of mineralogy is treated under the following heads :
(1) Crystallography. This comprises a discussion of crystals in general

and especially of the crystalline forms of mineral species.
1
INTRODUCTION
(2) Physical Mineralogy. This includes a discussion of the physical

characters of minerals, that is, those depending upon cohesion and elasticity,
density, light, heat, electricity, and so on.
(3) Chemical Mineralogy. Under this head are presented briefly the
general principles of chemistry as applied to mineral species; their charac-
ters as chemical compounds are described, also the methods of investigating
them from the chemical side by the blowpipe and other means.
(4) Descriptive Mineralogy. This includes the classification of minerals
and the description of each species with its varieties, especially in its relations
to closely allied species, as regards crystalline form, physical and chemical
characters, occurrence in nature, and other points.
4. Literature. Reference is made to the Introduction to the Sixth
Edition of Dana's System of Mineralogy, pp. xlv-lxi, for an extended list of
independent works on Mineralogy up to 1892 and to its Appendices I, II
and III for works published up to 1915; the names are also given of the
many scientific periodicals which contain original memoirs on mineralogical
subjects. For the convenience of the student the titles of a few works,
mostly of a general character, are given here. Further references to the
literature of Mineralogy are introduced through the first half of this work,
particularly at the end of the sections dealing with special subjects.
Crystallography and Physical Mineralogy

*
EARLY WORKS include those of Rome de Flsle, 1772; Haiiy, 1822; Neumann, Krys-
tallonomie, 1823, and Krystallographie, 1825; Kupffer, 1825; Grassmann, Krystallonomie,
1829; Naumann, 1829 and later; Quenstedt, 1846 (also 1873); Miller, 1839 and 1863;
Grailich, 1856; Kopp, 1862; von Lang, 1866; Bravais, Etudes Crist., Paris, 1866 (1849);
Schrauf, 1866-68; Rose-Sadebeck, 1873.
RECENT WORKS include the following:
Bayley. Elementary Crystallography, 1910.
Beale. Introduction to Crystallography, 1915.
Beckenkamp. Statische und kinetische Kristalltheorien, 1913-.
Bruhns. Elemente der Krystallographie, 1902.
Goldschmidt. Index der Krystallformen der Mineralien; 3 vols., 1886-91. Also
Anwendung der Linearprojection zum Berechnen der Krystalle, 1887. Atlas der Krystall-
formen, 1913-.
Gossner. Kristallberechnung Und Kristallzeichnung, 1914.
Groth. Physikalische Krystallographie und Einleitung in die krystallographische
Kenntniss der wichtigeren Substanzen, 1905.
Klein. Einleitung in die Krystallberechnung, 1876
Lewis. Crystallography, 1899.
Liebisch. Geometrische Krystallographie, 1881. Physikalische Krystallographie,
1891.
Mallard. Traite de Cristallographie geometrique et physique; vol. 1, 1879; vol. 2,
1884.
Moses. Characters of Crystals, 1899.
Reeks. Hints for Crystal Drawing, 1908.
Sadebeck. Angewandte Krystallographie (Rose's Krystallographie, II. Band), 1876.
Sohncke. Entwickelung einer Theorie der Krystallstruktur, 1879.
Sommerfeldt. Physikalische Kristallographie, 1907; Die Kristallgruppe, 1911.
Story-Maskelyne. Crystallography: the Morphology of Crystals, 1895.
Tutton. Crystalline Structure and Chemical Constitution, 1910; Crystallography and
Practical Crystal Measurement, 1911.
Viola. Grundziige der Kristallographie, 1904.
Walker. Crystallography, 1914.
*
The full titles of many of these are given in pp. li-lxi of Dana's System of Miner-
alogy, 1892.
INTRODUCTION 3
Wallerant. Cristallographie, 1909.

Websky. Anwendungder Linearprojection zum Berechnen der Krystalle (Rose's
Krystallographie III. Band), 1887.
Williams. Elements of Crystallography, 1890.
Wulfing. Die 32 krystallographischen Symmetrieklassen und ihre einfachen Formen,
1914.
In PHYSICAL MINERALOGY the most important general works are those of Schrauf
(1868), Mallard (1884), Liebisch (1891), mentioned -in the above list; also Rosenbusch,
Mikr. Physiographic, etc. (1892). Important later works include the following.
Davy-Farnham. Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, 1920.
Duparc and Pearce. Traite de Technique Mineralogique et Petrographique, 1907.
Groth. Physikalische Krystallographie, 1905.
Groth- Jackson. Optical Properties of Crystals, 1910.
Johannsen. Determination of Rock-Forming Minerals, 1908. Manual of Petrographic
Methods, 1914.
Murdoch. Microscopical Determination of the Opaque Minerals, 1916.
Nikitin, translated into French by Duparc and de Dervies. La Methode Universelle
de Fedoroff, 1914.
Winchell. Elements of Optical Mineralogy, 1909.
Wright. The Methods of Petrographic-Microscopic Research, 1911.
General Mineralogy
Of the many works, a knowledge of which is needed by one who wishes a full acquaint-
ance with the historical development of Mineralogy, the following are particularly im-
portant. Very early works include those of Theophrastus, Pliny, Linnaeus, Wallerius,
Cronstedt, Werner, Bergmann, Klaproth.
Within the nineteenth century: Hauy's Treatise, 1801, 1822; Jameson, 1816, 1820;
Werner's Letztes Mineral-System, 1817; Cleaveland's Mineralogy, 1816, 1822; Leonhard's
Handbuch, 1821, 1826; Mohs's Min., 1822; Haidinger's translation of Mohs, 1824; Breit-
haupt's Charakteristik, 1820, 1823, 1832; Beudant's Treatise, 1824, 1832; Phillips's Min.,
1823, 1837; Shepard's Min., 1832-35, and later editions; yon Kobell's Grundzuge, 1838;
Mohs's Min., 1839; Breithaupt's Min., 1836-1847; Haidinger's Handbuch, 1845; Nau-
mann's Min., 1846 and later; Hausmann's Handbuch, 1847; Dufrenoy's Min., 1844-1847
(also 1856-1859); Brooke & Miller, 1852; J. D. Dana's System of 1837, 1844, 1850, 1854,.
1868.
More RECENT WORKS are the following:
Bauer. Lehrbuch der Mineralogie, 1904.
Bauerman. Text-Book of Descriptive Mineralogy, 1884.
Baumhauer. Das Reich der Krystalle, 1889.
Bayley. Descriptive Mineralogy, 1917.
Blum. Lehrbuch der Mineralogie, 4th ed., 1873-1874.
Brauns. Das Mineralreich, 1903. English, translation by Spencer, 1912.
Clarke. The Data of Geochemistry, 1916.
Dana, E. S. Dana's System of Mineralogy, 6th ed., New York, 1892. Appendix I,
1899; 1909; III, 1915.
II, Also (elementary) Minerals and How to study them, New
York, 1895.
Dana-Ford. Manual of Mineralogy, 1912.
Des Cloizeaux. Manuel de Mineralogie; vol. 1, 1862; vol. 2, ler Fasc., 1874; 2me.
1893.
Groth. Tabellarische Uebersicht der Mineralien, 1898.
Hintze. Handbuch der Mineralogie, 1889-1915.
Iddings. Rock Minerals, 1906.
Kraus. Descriptive Mineralogy, 1911.
Lacroix. Mineralogie de la France et de ses Colonies, 5 vols., 1893-1913.
Miers. Mineralogy, 1902.
Moses and Parsons. Mineralogy, Crystallography and Blowpipe Analysis, 1916.
Merrill. The Non-metallic Minerals, 1904.
Phillios.Mineralogv, 1912.
Rogers. Study of Minerals, 1912.
Schrauf. Atlas der Krystall-Formen des Mineralreiches, 4to, vol. 1, A-C, 1865-1877.
Tschermak. Lehrbuch der Mineralogie, 1884; 5th cd., 1897.
4 INTRODUCTION
Weisbach. Synopsis Mineralogica, systematische Uebersicht des Mineralfeiches, 1875.

Zirkel. 13th edition of Naumann's Mineralogy, Leipzig, 1897.
Wiilfing. Die Meteoriten in Sammlungen, etc., 1897 (earlier works on related subjects,
see Dana's System, p. 32).
For a catalogue of localities of minerals in the United States and Canada see the volume
(51 pp.) reprinted from Dana's System, 6th ed. See also the volumes on the Mineral Re-
sources of the United States published (since 1882) under the auspices of the U. S. Geo-
logical Survey.
Chemical and Determinative Mineralogy
Bischoff.Lehrbuch der chemischen und physikalischen Geologic, 1847-54; 2d ed.,

1863-66. (Also an English edition.)
Blum. Die Pseudomorphosen des Mineralreichs, 1843. With 4 Nachtrage, 1847-1879.
Brush-Penfield. Manual of Determinative Mineralogy, with an Introduction on Blow-
pipe Analysis, 1896.
Doelter. Allgemeine chemische Mineralogie, Leipzig, 1890. Handbuch der Mineral-
chemie, 1912-.
Duparc and Monnier. Traite de Technique Mineralogique et Petrographique, 1913.
Eakle. Mineral Tables for the Determination of Minerals by their Physical Properties,
1904.
Endlich. Manual of Qualitative Blowpipe Analysis, New York, 1892.
Kobell, F. von. Tafeln zur Bestimmung der Mineralien mitteist einfacher chemischer
Versuche auf trockenem und nassem Wege, lite Auflage, 1878.
Kraus and Hunt. Tables for the Determination of Minerals, 1911.
Lewis. Determinative Mineralogy, 1915.
Rammelsberg. Handbuch der krystallographisch-physikalischen Chemie, Leipzig,
1881-82. Handbuch der Mineralchemie, 2d ed., 1875. Erganzungsheft, 1, 1886; 2, 1895.
Roth. Allgemeine und chemische Geologic; vol. 1, Bildung u. Umbildung der Minera-
lien, etc., 1879; 2, Petrographie, 1887-1890.
Websky. Die Mineral Species nach den fiir das specifische Gewicht derselben ange-
nommenen und gefundenen Werthen, Breslau, 1868.
Weisbach. Tabellen zur Bestimmung der Mineralien nach ausseren Kennzeichen,
3te Auflage, 1886. Also founded on Weisbach's work, Frazer's Tables for the determina-
tion of minerals, 4th ed., 1897.
Artificial Formation of Minerals
Dittler. Mineralsynthetisches Praktikum, 1915.

'Gurlt. Uebersicht der pyrogeneten ktinstlichen Mineralien, namentlich der krystal-
lisirten Hiittenerzeugnisse, 1857.
Fuchs. Die. kiinstlich dargestellten Mineralien, 1872.
Daubree. Etudes synthetique de Geologic experimentale, Paris, 1879.
Fouque and M. Levy. Synthese des Mineraux et des Roches, 1882.
Bourgeois. Reproduction artificielle des Mineraux, 1884.
Meunier. Les methodes de synthese en Mineralogie.
Vogt. Die Silikatschmelzlozungen, 1903-1904.
Mineralogical Journals
The following Journals are largely devoted to original papers on Mineralogy:
Amer. Min. The American Mineralogist, 1916.
Bull. Soc. Min. Bulletin de la Societe Francaise de Mineralogie, 1878-.
Centralbl. Min. Centralblatt fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und Palseontologie, 1900-.
Fortschr. Min. Fortschritte der Mineralogie, Kristallographie und Petrographie,
1911- .
Jb.Min. Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und Palaeontologie, etc., from 1833.
Min. Mag. The Mineralogical Magazine and Journal of the Mineralogical Society of
Gt. Britain, 1876-.
Min. Mitth. Mineralogische und petrographische Mittheilungen, 1878- ; Earlier,
from 1871, Mineralogische Mittheilungen gesammelt von G. Tschermak.
Riv. Min. Ri vista di Mineralogia e Crystallografia, 1887-.
Zs. Kr. Zeitschrift fiir Krystallographie und Mineralogie. 1877-.
INTRODUCTION 5
ABBREVIATIONS
Ax. pi. Plane of the optic axes. H. Hardness.

Bx, Bxa . Acute bisectrix (p. 277). Obs. Observations on occurrence, etc.
Bxo. Obtuse bisectrix (p. 277). O.F. Oxidizing Flame (p. 331).
B.B. Before the Blowpipe (p. 330). Pyr. Pyrognostics or blowpipe and
Comp. Composition. allied characters.
Diff. Differences, or distinctive char- R.F. Reducing Flame (p. 331).
acters. Var. Varieties.
G. Specific Gravity.
The sign A is used to indicate the angle between two faces of a crystal, as am (100 A 110)
= 44 30'.
PART I. CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
GENERAL MORPHOLOGICAL RELATIONS OF
CRYSTALS
5. Crystallography. The subject of Crystallography includes the
description of the characters of crystals in general; of the various forms of
crystals and their division into classes and systems; of the methods of study-
ing crystals, including the determination of the mathematical relations of
their faces, and the measurement of the angles between them; finally, a de-
scription of compound or twin crystals, of irregularities in crystals, of crystal-
line aggregates, and of pseudomorphous crystals.
Definition of a Crystal.
6. A crystal
*
is the regular polyhedral form,
bounded by smooth surfaces, which is assumed by a chemical compound, under
the action of its intermodular forces, when passing, under suitable conditions,
from the state of a liquid or gas to that of a solid.
As expressed in the foregoing definition, a crystal is characterized, first, by
its definiteinternal molecular structure, and, second, by its external form. A
crystal is the normal form of a mineral species, as of all solid chemical com-
pounds; but the conditions suitable for the formation of a crystal of ideal
perfection in symmetry of form and smoothness of surface are never fully
realized. Further, many species usually occur not in distinct crystals, but
in massive form, and in some exceptional cases the definite molecular struc-
ture is absent.
7. Molecular Structure in General. By definite molecular structure
is meant the special arrangement which the physical units, called molecules,^
assume under the action of the forces exerted between them during the forma-
tion of the solid. Some remarks are given in a later article (p. 22 et seq.) in
regard to the kinds of molecular arrangement theoretically possible, and their
relation to the symmetry of the different systems and classes of crystals.
The definite molecular structure is the essential character of a crystal, and
the external form is only one of the ways, although the most important, in
which this structure is manifested. Thus it is found that all similar direc-
tions in a crystal, or a fragment of a crystal, have like physical characters,}:
*
In its original signification the term crystal was applied only to crystals of quartz,
which the ancient philosophers believed to be water congealed by intense cold. Hence the
term, from KpvaraXXos, ice.
t Recent studies, particularly those made by the use of the X-ray, would indicate that
the unit of crystalline structure is the atom rather than the molecule. The grouping of
the atoms to form a molecule is extended in the analogous grouping of the molecules to
form a crystal.
t This subject is further elucidated in the chapter devoted to Physical Mineralogy,
where it is also shown that, with respect to many, but not all, of the physical characters,
the r^ rr r " T>co ~- f t.hi^ prop nation is true, viz., that unlike directions in a crystal have in
general unlike properties.
7
8 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
as of elasticity, cohesion, action on light, etc. This is clearly shown by the

cleavage, or natural tendency to fracture in certain directions, yielding more
or less smooth surfaces; as the cubic cleavage of galena, or the rhombohedral
cleavage of calcite. It is evident, therefore, that a small crystal differs from
a large one only in size, and that a fragment of a crystal is itself essentially a
crystal in all its physical relations, though showing no crystalline faces.
Further, the external form without the corresponding molecular structure
does not make a crystal of a solid. A
model of glass or wood is obviously
not a crystal, though having its external form, because there is no relation
between form and structure. Also, an octahedron of malachite, having the
form of the crystal of cuprite from which it has been derived by chemical
alteration, is not a crystal of malachite, but what is known as a pseudomorph
(see Art. 478) of malachite after cuprite.
On the other hand, if the natural external faces are wanting, the solid is
not called a crystal. A
cleavage octahedron of fluorite and a cleavage rhom-
bohedron of calcite are not properly crystals, because the surfaces have been
yielded by fracture and not by the natural molecular growth of the crystal.
8. Crystalline and Amorphous. When a mineral shows no external
crystalline form, it is said to be massive. It may, however, have a definite
molecular structure, and then it is said to be crystalline. If this structure, as
shown by the cleavage, or by optical means, is the same in all parallel direc-
tions through the mass, it is described as a single individual. If it varies from
grain to grain, or fiber to fiber, it is said to be a crystalline aggregate* since it

is made up of a multitude of individuals.
in fact
in a granular mass of galena or calcite, it may be possible to separate
Thus
the fragments from one another, each with its characteristic cubic, or rhom-
bohedral, cleavage. Even if the individuals are so small that they cannot be
separated, yet the cleavage, and hence the crystalline structure, may be evi-
dent from the spangling of a freshly broken surface, as with fine-grained statu-
ary marble. Or, again, this aggregate structure may be so fine that the
crystalline structure can only be resolved by optical methods with the aid of
the microscope. In all these cases, the structure is said to be crystalline.
If optical means show a more or less distinct crystalline structure, which,
however, cannot be resolved into individuals, the mass is said to be crypto-

crystalline; this is true of some massive varieties of quartz.
If the definite molecular structure is entirely wanting, and all directions in
the mass are sensibly the same, the substance is said to be amorphous. This
is true of a piece of glass, and nearly so of opal. The amorphous state is rare
among minerals.
A piece of feldspar which has been fused and cooled suddenly may be in the glass-like
amorphous condition as regards absence of definite molecular structure. But even in such
cases there is a tendency to go over into the crystalline condition by molecular rearrange-
ment. A transparent amorphous mass of arsenic trioxide (AsaOa), formed by fusion,
becomes opaque and crystalline after a time. Similarly the steel beams of a railroad bridge
may gradually become crystalline and thus lose some of their original strength because of
the molecular rearrangement made possible by the vibrations caused by the frequent jar of
passing trains. The microscopic study of rocks reveals many cases in which an analogous
change in molecular structure has taken place in a solid mass, as caused, for example, by
great pressure.
* The consideration of the various forms of crystalline aggregates is postponed to the

end of the present chapter.
9. External Form. A crystal -is bounded by smooth plane surfaces,

called faces or planes,*showing in their arrangement a certain characteristic
symmetry, and related to each other by definite mathematical laws.
Thus, without inquiring, at the moment, into the exact meaning of the
term symmetry as applied to crystals, and the kinds of symmetry possible,
which will be explained in detail later, it is apparent that the accompanying
figures, 1-3, show the external form spoken of. They represent, therefore,
certain definite types.
Galena Vesuvianite Chrysolite
10. Variation of Form and Surface. Actual crystals deviate, within

certain limits, from the ideal forms.
First, there may be variation in the size of like faces, thus producing what
are defined later as distorted forms. In the second place, the faces are rarely
absolutely smooth and brilliant; commonly they lack perfect polish, and they
may even be rough or more or less covered with fine parallel lines (called
striations), or show minute elevations, depressions or other peculiarities.
Both the above subjects are discussed in detail in another place.
It may be noted in passing that the characters of natural faces, just
alluded to, in general make it easy to distinguish between them and a face
artificially ground, on the one hand, like the facet of a cut gem;
or, on the other hand, the splintery uneven surface commonly
yielded by cleavage.
11. Constancy of the Interfacial Angles in the Same
Species. The angles of inclination between like faces on
the crystals of any species are essentially constant, wherever
they are found, and whether products of nature or of the m,'
laboratory. These angles, therefore, form one of the im-

portant distinguishing characters of a species.
Thus, in Fig. 4, of apatite, the angle between the adjacent
faces x and m
(130 18') is the same for any two like faces,
similarly situated with reference to each other. Further, this
angle is constant for the species no matter what the size of
the crystal may be or from what locality it may come. Moreover, the angles
between all the faces on crystals of the same species (cf Figs. 5-8 of zircon
.
below) are more or less closely connected together by certain definite

mathematical laws.
10 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
12.Diversity of Form, or Habit. While in the crystals of a given

species there is constancy of angle between like faces, the forms of the crystals
may be exceedingly diverse. The accompanying figures (5-8) are examples

of a few of the forms of the species zircon. There is hardly any limit to the
number of faces which may occur, and as their relative size changes, the
habit, as it is called, may vary indefinitely.
Zircon
13. Diversity of Size. Crystals occur of all sizes, from the merest
microscopic point to a yard or more in diameter. It is important to under-
stand, however, that in a minute crystal the development is as complete as
with a large one. Indeed the highest perfection of form and transparency is
found only in crystals of small size.
A single crystal of quartz, now at Milan, is three and a quarter feet long and five and a
half in circumference, and its weight is estimated at eight hundred and seventy pounds.
A single cavity in a vein of quartz near the Tiefen Glacier, in Switzerland, discovered in
1867, afforded smoky quartz crystals, a considerable number of which had a weight of 200
to 250 pounds. A gigantic beryl from Acworth, New Hampshire, measured four feet in
length and two and a half in circumference; another, from Grafton, was over four feet long,
and thirty-two inches in one of its diameters, and weighed about two and a half tons.
14. Symmetry in General. The faces of a crystal are arranged

according to certain laws of symmetry, and this symmetry is the natural
basis of the division of crystals into systems and classes. The symmetry
may be defined in relation to (1) a plane of symmetry, (2) an axis of symmetry,
and (3) a center of symmetry.
These different kinds of symmetry may, or may not, be combined in the
same crystal. It will be shown later that there is one class, the crystals of
which have neither center, axis, nor plane of symmetry; another where there
is only a center of symmetry. On the other hand, some classes have all these
elements of^symmetry represented.
15. Planes of Symmetry. A solid is said to be geometrically * sym-
metrical with reference to a plane of symmetry when for each face, edge, or
solid angle there is another similar face, edge, or angle which has a like posi-
tion with reference to this plane. Thus it is obvious that the crystal of am-
phibole, shown in Fig. 9, is symmetrical with reference to the central plane
of symmetry indicated by the shading.
*
The relation between the ideal geometrical symmetry and the actual crystallographic
symmetry is discussed in Art. 18.
In the ideal crystal this symmetry is right symmetry in the geometrical

sense, where every point on the one side of the plane of symmetry has a cor-
responding point at equal distances on the other side,
measured on a line normal to it. In other words, in
the ideal geometrical symmetry, one half of the crystal
is the exact mirror-image of the other half.
A crystal may have as many as nine planes of sym-
metry, three of one set and six of another, as is illustrated
*
by the cube (Fig. 16). Here the planes of the first set
pass through the crystal parallel to the cubic faces; they
are shown in Fig. 10. The planes of the second set join
the opposite cubic edges; they are shown in Fig. 11.
16. Axes of Symmetry. If a solid can be revolved
through a certain number of degrees about some line as
an axis, with the result that it again occupies precisely
the same position in space as at first, that axis is said
to be an axis of symmetry. There are four different
Amphibole
kinds of axes of symmetry among crystals; they are de-
fined according to the number of times which the crystal repeats itself in ap-
pearance during a complete revolution of 360.
Symmetry Planes in the Cube
(a) A crystal is said to have an axis of binary, or twofold, symmetry when

a revolution of 180 produces the result named above; in other words, when it
repeats itself twice in a complete revolution. This is true of the crystal shown
in Fig. 12 with respect to the vertical axis (and indeed each of the horizontal
axes also).
(6) A crystal has an axis of trigonal, or threefold, symmetry when a revo-
lution of 120 is needed; that is, when it repeats itself three times in a com-
plete revolution. The vertical axis of the crystal shown in Fig. 13 is an axis
of trigonal symmetry.
(c) A
crystal has an axis of tetragonal, or fourfold, symmetry when a
revolution of 90 is called for; in other words, when it repeats itself four
times in a complete revolution. The vertical axis in the crystal shown in
Fig. 14 is such an axis.
(d) Finally, a crystal has an axis of hexagonal, or sixfold, symmetry when
a revolution of 60 is called for; in other words, when it repeats itself six
times in a complete revolution. This is illustrated by Fig. 15.
*
This is the cube of the normal class of the isometric system.
12 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The different kinds of symmetry axes are sometimes known as diad, triad, tetrad and
hexad axes.
12 13 14 16
Chrysolite Calcite Rutile Beryl

*
The cube illustrates three of the four possible kinds of symmetry with respect to axes
of symmetry. It has six axes of binary symmetry joining the middle points of opposite
edges (Fig. 16). It has four axes of trigonal symmetry, joining the opposite solid angles
(Fig. 17). It has, finally, three axes of tetragonal symmetry joining the middle points of
opposite faces (Fig. 18).
16 17 18
-v
Symmetry Axes in the Cube
17. Center of Symmetry. Most crystals, besides planes and axes of

symmetry, have also a center of symmetry. On the other hand, a crystal,
though possessing neither plane nor axis of symmetry, may yet be sym-
Rhodonite Heulandite
metrical with reference to a point, its center. This last is true of the triclinic
crystal shown
in Fig. 19, in which it follows that every face, edge, and solid
angle has a face, edge, and angle similar to it in the opposite half of the crystal.
This is again the cube of the normal class of the isometric system.
18. Relation of Geometrical to Crystallographic Symmetry. Since

the symmetry in the arrangement of the faces of a crystal is an expression of
the internal molecular structure, which in general is alike in all parallel direc-
tions, the relative size of the faces and their distance from the plane or axis of
symmetry are of no moment, their angular position alone is essential. The
crystal represented in Fig. 20, although its faces show an unequal develop-
ment, has in the crystallographic sense as truly a vertical plane of symmetry
(parallel to the face 6) as the ideally developed crystal shown in Fig. 21.
The strict geometrical definition of symmetry would, however, apply only
to the second crystal.*
22 23 24
Cube Distorted Cubes
Also in a normal cube (Fig. 22) the three central planes parallel to each
pair of cubic faces are like planes of symmetry, as stated in Art. 15. But a
crystal is still crystallographically a cube, though deviating widely from the
requirements of the strict geometrical definition, as shown in Figs. 23, 24, if
only can be proved, e.g., by cleavage, by the physical nature of the faces,
it
or optical means, that the three pairs of faces are like faces, independently
by
of their size, or, in other words, that the molecular structure is the same in
the three directions normal to them.
25 26
Cube and Octahedron
Further, in the case of a normal cube, a face of an octahedron on any solid

angle requires, as explained beyond, similar faces on the other angles. It is
not necessary, however, that these eight faces should be of equal size, for in
the crystallographic sense Fig. 25 is as truly symmetrical with reference to
the planes named as Fig. 26.
*
It is to be noted that the perspective figures of crystals usually show the geometrically
ideal form, in which like faces, edges, and angles have the same shape, size, and position.
In other words, the ideal crystal is uniformly represented as having the symmetry called
for by the strict geometrical definition.
14 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
19. On
the other hand, the molecular and hence the crystallographic
symmetry not always that which the geometrical form would suggest.
is
Thus, deferring for the moment the consideration of pseudo-symmetry, an

illustration of the fact stated is afforded by the cube. It has already been
implied and will be fully explained later that while the cube of the normal
class of the isometric system has the symmetry described in Arts. 15, 16, a
cube of the same geometrical form but belonging molecularly, for example,
to the tetrahedral class, has no planes of symmetry parallel to the faces but
only the six diagonal planes; further, though the four axes shown in Fig. 17
are still axes of trigonal symmetry, the cubic axes (Fig. 18) are axes of binary
symmetry only, and there are no axes of symmetry corresponding to those
represented in Fig. 16. Other more complex cases will be described later.
Further, a crystal having interf acial angles of 90 is not necessarily a cube :
in other words, the angular relations of the faces do not show in this case
whether the figure is bounded by six like faces; or whether only four are
alike and the other pair unlike; or, finally, whether there are three pairs of
unlike faces. The question must be decided, in such cases, by the molecular
structure as indicated by the physical nature of the surfaces, by the cleavage,
or by other physical characters, as pyro-electricity, those connected with
light phenomena, etc.
again, the student will learn later that the decision reached in regard
Still,
to the symmetry to which a crystal belongs, based upon the distribution of the
only preliminary and approximate, and before being finally accepted
faces, is
it must be confirmed,first, by accurate measurements, and, second, by
a
minute study of the other physical characters.
The method based upon the physical characters, which gives most conclusive results
and admits of the widest application, is the skillful etching of the surface of the crystal by
some appropriate solvent. By this means there are, in general, produced upon it minute
depressions the shape of which conforms to the symmetry in the arrangement of the mole-
cules. This process, which is in part essentially one involving the dissection of the molecu-
lar structure, is more particularly discussed in the chapter on Physical Mineralogy.
20. Pseudo-symmetry. The crystals of certain species approximate

closely in angle, and therefore in apparent symmetry, to the requirements
of a system higher in symmetry than that to which they actually belong:
they are then said to exhibit pseudo-symmetry. Numerous examples are
given under the different systems. Thus the micas have been shown to be
truly monoclinic in crystallization, though in angle they seem to be in some
cases rhombohedral, in others orthorhombic.
It will be shown later that compound, or twin, crystals may also simulate
by their regular grouping a higher grade of symmetry than that which belongs
to the single crystal. Such crystals also exhibit pseudo-symmetry and are
specifically called mimetic. Thus aragonite is an example of an orthorhombic
species, whose crystals often imitate by twinning those of the hexagonal
system.* Again, a highly complex twinned crystal of the monoclinic species,
phillipsite,may have nearly the form of a rhombic dodecahedron of the iso-
metric system. This kind of pseudo-symmetry also occurs among the
classes of a single system, since a crystal belonging to a class of low sym-
metry may by twinning gain the geometrical symmetry of the corresponding
* The terms used in this and similar cases explain themselves.

pseudo-hexagonal, etc.,
form of the normal class. This is illustrated by a twinned crystal of scheelite

like that figured (Fig. 416) in the chapter on twin crystals.
Pseudo-symmetry of still another kind, where there is an imitation of the
symmetry another system of lower grade, is particularly common in
of
crystals of the isometric system (e.g., gold, copper). The result is reached in
" "
such cases by an abnormal development of distortion in the direction of
certain axes of symmetry. This subject is discussed and illustrated on a
later page.
21. Possible Classes of Symmetry. The theoretical consideration of
the different kinds of symmetry possible among crystals built up of like mole-
cules, as explained in Arts. 30-32, has led to the conclusion that there are
thirty-two (32) types in all, differing with respect to the combination of the
different symmetry elements just described. Of these thirty-two natural
classes among crystals based upon their symmetry, seven classes include by
far the larger number of crystallized minerals. Besides these, some thirteen
or fourteen others are distinctly represented, though several of these are of
rare occurrence. The remaining classes, with possibly one or two excep-
tions, are known among the crystallized salts made in the laboratory. The
characters of each of the thirty-two classes are given under the discussion of
the several crystalline systems.
22. Crystallographic Axes. In the description of a crystal, especially
as regards the position of its faces, it is found convenient to assume, after
the methods of analytical geometry, certain lines passing through the center
of the ideal crystal, as a basis of reference. (See further Art. 34 et seq.)
These lines are called the Crystallographic axes. Their direction is to a
greater or less extent fixed by the symmetry of the crystals, for an axis of
*
symmetry is in almost all cases a possible Crystallographic axis. Further,
the unit lengths assigned to these axes are fixed sometimes by the symmetry,
sometimes by the position of the faces assumed as fundamental, i.e., the
unit forms in the sense defined later. The broken lines shown in Fig. 18 are
the Crystallographic axes to which the cubic faces are referred.
23. Systems of Crystallization. The thirty-two possible crystal classes
which are distinguished from one another by their symmetry, are classified
in this work under six systems, each characterized by the relative lengths
and inclinations of the assumed Crystallographic axes. These are as follows :
I. ISOMETRIC SYSTEM. Three equal axes at right angles to each other.

II. TETRAGONAL SYSTEM. Three axes at right angles to each other, two
of them the horizontal axes equal, the third the vertical axis
longer or shorter.
III. HEXAGONAL SYSTEM. Four axes, three equal horizontal axes in one
plane intersecting at angles of 60, and a vertical axis at right angles to this
plane and longer or shorter.
IV. ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM. Three axes at right angles to each other,
but all of different lengths.
V. MONOCLINIC SYSTEM. Three axes unequal in length, and having
one of their intersections oblique, the two other intersections equal to 90.
VI. TRICLINIC SYSTEM. Three unequal axes with mutually oblique
intersections.
*
Exceptions are found in the isometric system, where the axes must necessarily be the
axes of tetragonal symmetry (Fig. 18), and cannot be those of binary or trigonal symmetry
(Figs. 16, 17).
16 CRYSTALLOGRAPH
24. Each one of the six systems, as will be understood from Art. 21,
embraces several classes differing among themselves in their symmetry.
One of these classes is conveniently called the normal class, since it is in
general the common one, and since further it exhibits the highest degree of
symmetry possible for the given system, while the others are lower in grade
of symmetry.
It is important to note that theclasses comprised within a given system
are at once essentially connected together by their common optical characters,
and in general separated * from those of the other systems in the same way.
Below is given a list of the six systems together with their subordinate
classes, thirty-two in all. The order and the names given first are those that
are used in this book while in the following parentheses are given other
equivalent names that are also in common use. Under nearly all of the
classes it is possible to give the name of a mineral or an artificial compound
whose crystals serve to illustrate the characters of that particular class.
There is some slight variation between different authors in the order in which
the crystal systems and classes are considered but in the main essentials all
modern discussions of crystallography are uniform.
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM
(Regular, Cubic System)
1. NORMAL CLASS. (Hexoctahedral. Holohedral.) Galena Type.

2. PYRITOHEDRAL CLASS. (Dyakisdodecahedral. Pentagonal Hemihe-
dral.) Pyrite Type.
3. TETRAHEDRAL CLASS. (Hextetrahedral. Tetrahedral Hemihedral.)
Tetrahedrite Type.
4. PLAGIOHEDRAL CLASS. (Pentagonal Icositetrahedral. Plagiohedral
Hemihedral.) Cuprite Type.
5. TETARTOHEDRAL CLASS. (Tetrahedral Pentagonal Dodecahedral.)
Sodium Chlorate Type.
TETRAGONAL SYSTEM
6. NORMAL CLASS. (Ditetragonal Bipyramidal. Holohedral.) Zircon
Type.
7. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Ditetragonal Pyramidal. Holohedral Hemi-
morphic.) lodosuccinimide Type.
8. TRIPYRAMIDAL CLASS. (Tetragonal Bipyramidal. Pyramidal Hemi-
hedral.) Scheelite Type.
9. PYRAMIDAL-HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Tetragonal Pyramidal. Hemihe-
dral Hemimorphic.) Wulfenite Type.
10. SPHENOIDAL CLASS. (Tetragonal Sphenoidal. Sphenoidal Hemihe-
dral. Scalenohedral.) Chalcopyrite Type.
11. TRAPEZOHEDRAL CLASS. (Tetragonal Trapezohedral. Trapezohe-
dral Hemihedral.) Nickel Sulphate Type.
12. TETARTOHEDRAL CLASS. (Tetragonal Bisphenoidal.) Artif.
2 CaO.Al 2 3 .SiO 2 Type.
*
Crystals of the tetragonal and hexagonal systems are alike in being optically unaxial;
but the crystals of all the other systems have distinguishing optical characters,
HEXAGONAL SYSTEM
A. HEXAGONAL DIVISION
13. NORMAL CLASS. (Dihexagonal Bipyramidal. Holohedral.) Beryl
Type.
14. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Dihexagonal Pyramidal. Holohedral Hemi-
morphic.) Zincite Type.
15. TRIPYRAMIDAL CLASS. (Hexagonal Bipyramidal. Pyramidal Hemi-
hedral.) Apatite Type.
16. PYRAMIDAL-HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Hexagonal Pyramidal. Pyrami-
dal Hemihedral Hemimorphic.) Nephelite Type.
17. TRAPEZOHEDRAL CLASS. (Hexagonal Trapezohedral. Trapezohedral
Hemihedral.) /3-Quartz Type.
B. TRIGONAL OR RHOMBOHEDRAL DIVISION

(Trigonal System)
18. TRIGONAL CLASS. (Ditrigonal Bipyramidal. Trigonal Hemihedral.)
Benitoite Type.
19. RHOMBOHEDRAL CLASS. (Ditrigonal Scalenohedral. Rhombohedral
Hemihedral.) Calcite Type^
20. RHOMBOHEDRAL HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Ditrigonal Pyramidal. Tri-
gonal Hemihedral Hemimorphic.) Tourmaline Type.
21. TRI-RHOMBOHEDRAL CLASS. (Rhombohedral. Rhombohedral Te-
tartohedral.) Phenacite Type.
22. TRAPEZOHEDRAL CLASS. (Trigonal Trapezohedral. Trapezohedral
Tetartohedral.) Quartz Type.
23.' (Trigonal Bipyramidal. Trigonal Tetar-
tohedral.
24. (Trigonal Pyramidal. Trigonal Tetarto-
hedral Hemimorphic.) Sodium Periodate Type.
ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM
(Rhombic or Prismatic System)
25. NORMAL CLASS. (Orthorhombic Bipyramidal. Holohedral.) Barite
Type.
26. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Orthorhombic Pyramidal.) Calamine Type.
27. SPHENOIDAL CLASS. (Orthorhombic Bisphenoidal.) Epsomite Type.
MONOCLINIC SYSTEM
(Oblique System)
28. NORMAL
CLASS. (Prismatic. Holohedral.) Gypsum Type.
29. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS. (Sphenoidal.) Tartaric Acid Type.
30. CLINOHEDRAL CLASS. (Domatic. Hemihedral.) Clinohedrite Type.
TRICLINIC SYSTEM
(Anorthic System)
31. NORMAL
CLASS. (Holohedral. Pinacoidal.) Axinite Type.
32. ASYMMETRIC CLASS. (Hemihedral.) Clacium Thiosulphate Type.
18 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
25. Symmetry of the Systems. In the paragraphs immediately fol-

lowing, a synopsis is given of the symmetry of the normal class of each of the
different systems, and also that of one subordinate class of the hexagonal
system, which is of so great importance that it is also often conveniently
treated as a sub-system even when, as in this work, the forms are referred to
the same axes as those of the strictly hexagonal type a usage not adopted
by all authors.
*
I. ISOMETRIC SYSTEM. Three like axial planes of symmetry (principal
planes) parallel to the cubic faces, and fixing by their intersection the crystal-
lographic axes; six like diagonal planes of symmetry, passing through each
opposite pair of cubic edges, and hence parallel to the faces of the rhombic
dodecahedron.
Further, three like axes of tetragonal symmetry, the crystallographic
axes normal to the faces of the cube; four like diagonal axes of trigonal sym-
metry, normal to the faces of the octahedron; and six like diagonal axes of
binary symmetry, normal to the faces of the dodecahedron. There is also
obviously a center of symmetry.! These relations are illustrated by Fig. 27
also by Fig. 35; further by Figs. 92 to 125.
27 28 29
\m
a
Galena Rutile Rutile
II. TETRAGONAL SYSTEM. Three axial planes of symmetry of these, two

:
are like planes intersecting at 90 in a line which is the vertical crystallo-

graphie axis, and the third plane (a principal plane) is normal to them and
hence contains the horizontal axes. There are also two diagonal planes of
symmetry, intersecting in the vertical axis and meeting the two axial planes
at angles of 45.
Further, there is one axis of tetragonal symmetry, a principal axis this is ;
the vertical crystallographic axis. There are also in a plane normal to this
four axes of binary symmetry like two and two those of each pair at right
angles to each other. Fig. 28 shows a typical tetragonal crystal, and Fig. 29
a basal projection of it, that is, a projection on the principal plane of sym-
metry normal to the vertical axis. See also Fig. 36 and Figs. 170-192.
*
Two planes of symmetry are said to be like when they divide the ideal crystal into
halves which are identical to each other; otherwise, they are said to be unlike. Axes of
symmetry are also like or unlike. If a plane of symmetry includes two of the crystallo-
graphic axes, it is called an axial plane of symmetry. If the plane includes two or more
like axes of symmetry, it is called a principal plane of symmetry
;
also an axis of symmetry
in which two or more like planes of symmetry meet is a principal axis of
symmetry.
t In describing the symmetry of the different classes, here and later, the center of
symmetry is ordinarily not mentioned when its presence or absence is obvious.
III. HEXAGONAL SYSTEM. In the Hexagonal Division there are four

axial planes of symmetry; of these three are like planes meeting at angles of
60, their intersection-line being the vertical crystallographic axis; the fourth
plane (a principal plane) is at right angles to these. There are also three
other diagonal planes of symmetry meeting the three of the first set in the
making with them angles of 30.
vertical axis, arid
Further, there is one principal axis of hexagonal symmetry; this is the
vertical crystallographic axis; at right angles to it there are also six binary
axes. The last are in two sets of three each. Fig. 30 shows a typical hex-
agonal crystal, with a basal projection of the same. See also Fig. 37 and
Figs. 220-227.
32
m
20 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
26. The
relations of the normal classes of the different systems are further
illustrated both as regards the crystallographic axes and symmetry by the
accompanying figures, 35-40. The exterior form is here that bounded by
faces each of which is parallel to a plane through two of the crystallographic
axes indicated by the central broken lines. Further, there is shown, within
this, the combination of faces each of which joins the extremities of the unit
lengths of the axes.
34
Pyroxene Axinite
The full understanding of the subject will not be gained until after a
study of the forms of each system in detail. Nevertheless the student will do
well to make himself familiar at the outset with the fundamental relations
here illustrated.
35 37
Isometric Tetragonal Hexagonal
It will be shown later that the symmetry of the different classes can be
most clearly and easily exhibited by the use of the different projections ex-
plained in Art. 39 et seq.
27. Models. Glass (or transparent celluloid) models illustrating the different sys-
tems, having the forms shown in Figs. 35-40, will be very useful to the student, especially
in learning the fundamental relations as regards symmetry. They should show within, the
crystallographic axes, and by colored threads or wires, the outlines of one or more simple
forms. Models of wood are also made in great variety and perfection of form; these are
indispensable to the student in mastering the principles of crystallography.
Orthorhombic Monoclinic Triclinic
28. So-called Holohedral and Hemihedral Forms. It will appear

later that each crystal form * of the normal class in a given system embraces
all the faces which have a like geometrical position with reference to the
crystallograpfeic axes; such a form is said to be holohedral (from bXos, com-

plete, and Mpz, face). On the other hand, under the classes of lower sym-
metry, a certain form, while necessarily having all the faces which the sym-
metry allows, may yet have but half as many as the corresponding form of
the normal class these half -faced forms are sometimes called on this account
;
hemihedral. Furthermore, it will be seen that, in such cases, to the given

holohedral form there correspond two similar and complementary hemihedral
forms, called respectively positive and negative (or right and left), which
together embrace all of its faces.
41 43
Octahedron Positive Tetrahedron Negative Tetrahedron
A single example will help to make the above statement intelligible.

"
In the normal
class of the isometric system, the octahedron (Fig. 41) is a holohedral" form with all
the possible faces eight in number which are alike in that they meet the axes at equal
distances. In the tetrahedral class of the same system, the forms are referred to the same
crystallographic axes, but the symmetry defined in Art. 19 (and more fully later) calls for
but four similar faces having the position described. These yield a four-faced, or "hemi-
hedral/' form, the tetrahedron. Figures 42 and 43 show the positive and negative tetra-
hedron, which together, it will be seen, embrace all the faces of the octahedron, Fig. 41.
*
The use of the word/orw is defined in Art. 37
22 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
In certain classes of still lower symmetry a given crystal form may have
ut one-quarter of the faces belonging to the corresponding normal form, and,
after the same method, such a form is sometimes called tetartohedral.
The development of the various possible kinds of hemihedral (and tetarto-
hedral) forms under a given system has played a prominent part in the crystal-
lography of the past, but it leads to much complexity and is distinctly less
simple than the direct statement of the symmetry in each case. The latter
method is systematically followed in this work, and the subject of hemihe-
drism is dismissed with the brief (and incomplete) statements of this and the
following paragraphs.
29. Hemimorphic Forms. In several of the systems, forms occur
under the classes of lower symmetry than that of the normal class which are
characterized by this that the faces present are only those belonging to one
:
extremity of an axis of symmetry (and crystallographic

axis)
. Such forms are conveniently called hemimorphic
(half-form). A simple example under the hexagonal
system is given in Fig. 44. It is obvious that hemi-
morphic forms have no center of symmetry.
30. Molecular Networks. Much light has re-
cently been thrown upon the relations existing between
the different types of crystals, on the one hand, and of
these to the physical propertied of crystals, on the other,
by the consideration of the various possible methods of
grouping of the molecules of which the crystals are
supposed to be built up. This subject, very early
Zincite treated by Haiiy and others (including J. D. Dana),
was discussed at length by Frankenheim and later by
Bravais. More recently it has been extended and elaborated by Sohncke,
Wulff, Schonflies, Fedorow, Barlow, and others.
All solid bodies, as stated in Art. 7, are believed to be made up of definite
physical units, called the physical, or crystal, molecules. Of the form of the
molecules nothing is definitely known, and though theory has something to say
about their size, it is enough here to understand that they are almost infinitely
'
small, so small that the surface of a solid e.g., of a crystal may appear to
the touch and to the eye, even when assisted by a powerful microscope, as
perfectly smooth.
The molecules are further believed to be not in contact but separated from
one another if in contact, it would be impossible to explain the motion to
which the sensible heat of the body is due, or the transmission of radiation
(radiant heat and light) through the mass by the wave motion of the ether,
which is believed to penetrate the body.
When a body passes from the state of a liquid or a gas to that of a solid,
under such conditions as to allow perfectly free action to the forces acting
between the molecules, the result is a crystal of some definite type as regards
symmetry. The simplest hypothesis which can be made assumes that the
form of the crystal is determined by the way in which the molecules group
themselves together in a position of equilibrium under the action of the inter-
molecular forces.
As, however, the forces between the molecules vary in magnitude and
direction from one type of crystal to another, the resultant grouping of the
molecules must also vary, particularly as regards the distance between them
and the angles between the planes in which they lie. This may be simply
represented by a series of geometrical diagrams, showing the hypothetical
groupings of points which are strictly to be regarded as the centers of gravity
of the molecules themselves. Such a grouping is named a network, or point-
system, and it is said to be regular when it is the same for all parallel lines
and planes, however they be taken. For the fundamental observed fact, true
in all simple crystals, that they have like physical properties in all parallel
directions, leads to the conclusion that the grouping of the molecules must be
the same about each one of them (or at least about each unit group of them),
and further the same in all parallel lines and planes.
1
24 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
then II, nn, and so on. This is found to be true in the study of crystals, for
the common forms are, in nearly all cases, those whose position bears some
simple relation to the assumed axes; forms whose position is complex are
usually present only as small faces on the simple predominating forms, that
is, as modifications of them-
So-called vicinal forms, that is, forms taking
the place of the simple fundamental forms to which they approximate very
closely in angular position, are exceptional.
Orthorhombic Point System
(2) When a variety of faces occur on the same crystal, the numerical rela-
tion existing between them (that which fixes their position) must be rational
and, as stated in (1), a simple numerical ratio is to be expected in the common
cases. This, as explained later, is found by experience to be a fundamental
law of all crystals. Thus, in Fig. 47, starting with a face meeting the section
in mm, II would be a common face, and for it the ratio is 1 2 in the directions
:
b and a; nn would be also common with the ratio 2:1.

(3) a crystal shows the natural easy fracture, called cleavage, due to a
If
minimum of cohesion, the cleavage surface must be a surface of relatively
great molecular crowding, that is, one of the common or fundamental faces.
This follows (and thus gives a partial, though not complete, explanation of
cleavage) since it admits of easy proof that that plane in which the points
are closest together is farthest separated from the next molecular plane.
Thus in Fig 47 compare the distance separating two adjoining planes parallel
to bb or aa, then two parallel to mm, II, nn, etc Illustrations of the above
will be found under the special discussion of the
subject of cleavage.
32. Kinds of Molecular Groupings. The discussion on the basis just

described shows that there are fourteen possible types of arrangement of the
molecules. These agree as to their symmetry with the seven classes defined
in Art. 25 as representing respectively the normal classes of the six systems
with also that of the trigonal (or the
rhombohedral) division of the hex-
agonal system. Of the fourteen,
three groupings belong to the iso-
metric system (these are shown, for
sake of illustration, in Fig. 48 from
Groth; a, cube lattice; &, cube-
centered lattice; c, face centered Isometric Lattices
cube lattice) two to the tetragonal;
;
one each to the hexagonal and the rhombohedral; four to the orthorhombic
system; two to the monoclinic, and one to the triclinic.
In its simplest form, as above outlined, the theory fails to explain the ex-
istence of the classes under the several systems of a symmetry lower than that
of the normal class. It has been shown, however, by Sohncke and later by
Fedorow, Schonflies and Barlow, that the theory admits of extension. The
idea supposed by Sohncke is this: that, instead of the simple form shown, the
network may consist of a double system, one of which may be conceived of as
having a position relative to the other (1) as if pushed to one side, or (2) as if
rotated about an axis, or finally (3) as if both rotated as in (2) and displaced
as in (1) The complexity of the subject makes it impossible to develop it
here. It must suffice to say that with this extension Sohncke concludes that
there are 65 possible groups. This number has been further extended to 230
by the other authors named, but it still remains true that these fall into 32
distinct types as regards symmetry, and thus all the observed groups of forms
among crystals, described under the several systems, have a theoretical
explanation,
Literature. A complete understanding of this subject can only be gained
by a careful study of the many papers devoted to it. An excellent and very
clear summary of the whole subject is given by Groth in the fourth edition of
his Physikalische Krystallographie, 1905, and by Sommerfeldt, in his Physi-
kalische Kristallographie, 1907.
33. X-Rays and Crystal Structure. In 1912, while attempting to
prove a similarity in character between X-rays and light, Dr. Laue, of the
University of Zurich conceived the idea of using the ordered"
arrangement of
"
the molecules or atoms of a crystal as a diffraction grating for their analysis
By placing a photographic plate behind a crystal section which in turn lay
in the path of a beam of X-rays he found that not only did the developed
plate show a dark spot in its center where the direct pencil of the X-rays had
hit it but it also showed a large number of smaller spots arranged around the
center in a regular geometrical pattern. This pattern was formed by the
interference of waves which had been diffracted in different directions by the
molecular structure of the crystal. In this way he succeeded in proving that
X-rays belong to the same class of phenomena as light but with a much
shorter wave length. The experiment showed indeed that the wave lengths
of the X-rays must be comparable to the distances between the layers of
molecular particles of crystals. Another, and, from the crystallographic point
of view, a very important, result of this investigation was the furnishing of a
26 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
method for the study of the internal structure of crystals. The position of
the smaller dark spots in the Laue photographs corresponded to that of
various planes existing in the crystal network parallel to possible crystal
faces and their arrangement indicated the symmetry of the crystal.
Following these investigations of Laue and his colleagues another fruitful
method of investigation of crystal structure by means of X-rays was devised
by W. H. and W. L. Bragg. In this method the beam of X-rays meets the
crystal section with varying acute angles of incidence and the reflection of
the rays is studied. The X-rays are not reflected from the surface of the
section like light rays but because of their short wave lengths penetrate the
crystal section and are reflected from the successive layers of its molecular
structure. In studying the reflection phenomena we have to consider the
effect upon each other of these different wave trains originating from the
different layers of the crystal. In general these various reflected waves
would be in different phases of vibration and so would tend to interfere with
each other with the consequent cessation of all vibrations. But with a cer-
tain angle of incidence and reflection it would happen that the different re-
flected rays would possess on emergence from the crystal the same phase of
vibration and would therefore reinforce each other. This angle would vary
with the wave length of the X-ray used (for it has been found that the wave
length of X-rays varies with the metal that is used as the anticathode in the
X-ray bulb) and with the spacing between the molecular layers of the mineral
used. It is also obvious that there might be other angles of incidence at
which the successive wave trains would each differ in phase by two or even
more whole wave lengths from the preceding one and a similar strong re-
flected beam obtained. By the use of a special X-ray spectrometer the angles
at which these reflections take place can be accurately measured. If the
character of the X-ray used is therefore kept constant these angles of reflec-
tion give the data necessary for calculating the distance between the succes-
sive molecular layers in the particular mineral used and for the direction
perpendicular to the surface used for reflection. The spacing of the molec-
ular layers was found to vary with different substances and in different
directions in the same substance and by making a series of observations it
has been possible to arrive at some very interesting conclusions as to the
character of the molecular structure of certain minerals as well as to the
relationship existing between the structures of different but related com-
pounds. The possibilities lying in these methods of attack are very great
and unquestionably much new information concerning crystal structure will
soon be available. An excellent summary of the methods employed and the
" "
results already obtained will be found in X-rays and Crystal Structure
by W. H. and W. L. Bragg, 1915.
GENERAL MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF

CRYSTALS
34. Axial Ratio, Axial Plane. The crystallographic axes have been
defined (Art. 22) as certain lines, usually determined by the symmetry, which
are used in the description of the faces of crystals, and in the determination of
their position and angular inclination. With these objects in view, certain
lengths of these axes are assumed as units to which the occurring faces are
referred.
The axes are, in general, lettered a, b, c, to correspond to the scheme in
Fig. 49. If two of the axes are equal, they are designated a, a, c; if the three
are equal, a, a, a. In one system, the hexagonal, there are
four axes, lettered a, a, a, c. 49
Further, in the systems other than the isometric, one

of the horizontal axes is taken as the unit to which the other
axes are referred; hence the lengths of the axes express
strictly the axial ratio. Thus for sulphur (orthorhombic,
see Fig. 49) the axial ratio is
a : b : c = 0'8131 : 1 : 1'9034.
For rutile (tetragonal) it is
a : c = 1 :
0'64415, or, simply, c = 0'64415.
The plane of any two of the axes is called an axial plane,

and the space included by the three axial planes is an octant,
since the total space about the center is thus divided by the
three axes into eight parts. In the hexagonal system, how- Orthorhombic
ever, where there are three horizontal axes, the space about Crystal Axes
the center divided into 12 parts, or sectants.
is
35. Parameters, Indices, Symbol. Parameters. The parameters of
a plane consist of a series of numbers which express the relative intercepts
of that plane upon the crys-
tallographic axes. They are
given in terms of the estab-
lished unit lengths of those
axes. For example, in Fig.
50 let the lines OX, OY, OZ
be taken as the directions of
the crystallographic axes, and
let OA, OB, OC represent
their unit lengths, designated
(always in the same order) by
the letters a, b, c. Then the
intercepts for the plane (1)
HKL are OH, OK, OL; for
the plane (2) ANM
they are
OA, ON, OM. But in terms
of the unit lengths of the
axes these give the following
parameters,
(1)
and (2) la 2c.
It is to be noted that since

planes and the two HKL
MNA are parallel to each other and hence crystallographically the same,
these two sets of parameters are considered to be identical. Obviously each
of them may be changed into the other by multiplying (or dividing) by 4.
28 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Indices and Symbol. Simplified and abbreviated expressions which have

been derived from the parameters of a crystal form are commonly used to
give its relations to the crystallographic axes. These are known as indices.
A number of different methods of deriving indices have been devised and
several are in use at present. The so-called Miller indices are most widely
employed and will be exclusively used in this work.* Below, a description
of the other important systems of indices is given together with the neces-
sary directions for transforming one type into another.
The Miller indices may be derived from the parameters of any form by
taking their reciprocals and clearing of fractions if necessary. For instance
take the two sets of parameters as given above.
(1) \a |6 \c, :and (2)
: la |6 2c. : :
By inversion of these expressions we obtain

(1) 4a 36 2c,: and :
(2) la :
|6 :
ic.
In the case of (2) it is necessary to clear of fractions, giving

(2) 4a : 36 : 2c.
The indices of this form then are 4 a 3 6 2 c. The letters indicating the : :
different axes are commonly dropped and the indices in this case would be
written simply as 432, the intercepts on the different axes being indicated by
the order in which the numbers are given.
A
general expression frequently used for the indices of a form belonging
to crystal system which has three crystallographic axes is hkl. In the
any
hexagonal system, which has four axes, this becomes hkil. If the parameters
of a form be written so that they are fractions with the numerators always
unity then the denominators will become the same as the corresponding in-
dices. The
general expression in this case would therefore be T r 7
rl K L
The symbol of a given form is the indices of the face of that form which
has the simplest relations to the crystallographic axes. The symbol is com-
monly used to designate the whole form.
Various examples are given below illustrating the relations between param-
eters and indices.
Parameters Miller's Symbol
}
= %a : kb : Ic = 221
fe 16
16 =
:
%c 212
la 26
}a 006 c
= =
l l :
jc 201
la GO6 2c/
la 16 ooci = =
la 26 ooc ) \a :
& :fc 210
la 006 ooc = ja : 6 : c = 100
the axial intercepts are measured in behind on the a axis, or to the

If
left 6 axis, or below on the c axis, they are called negative, and a minus
on the
sign is placed over the corresponding number of the indices; as
Parameters Indices
-\a -\b :
\c
= 221
-io 201
*In the hexagonal system the indices used are those adapted by Bravais after the
method of Miller.
Different Systems of 'Indices. The Weiss indices are the same as the parameters
described above. The different axes are represented by the letters a, b and c, each being
preceded by a number indicating the relative intercept of the face in question upon that
particular axis. For instance, a possible orthorhombic pyramid face might be represented
as la 26 fc.
: : The Weiss indices may be converted into the Miller indices by inversion
and clearing of fractions, the above symbol becoming then 213. In the Naumann indices
the unit pyramidal form is indicated by O in the isometric system where the three crystal
axes all have the same unit lengths or by P where the axes differ in their unit lengths.
For other forms the indices become mPn (or mOn) in which m gives the intercept upon the
vertical axis, c, and n the intercept upon one of the horizontal axes (a or 6), the intercept
upon the other horizontal axis being always at unity. To which particular horizontal axis
this number refers may be indicated by a mark over it as n for the b axis, ft or n' for the
a axis. If the intercept m or n is unity it is omitted from the indices. The pyramid face
used as an example above would therefore in the Naumann notation be represented by
|P2. Other examples are given in the table below. J. D. Dana modified the Naumann
indices by substituting a hyphen for the letter P or O and i for the infinity sign, oo .He
designated the fundamental pyramid form simply by 1. When the only parameter differ-
ing from unity was that one which referred to the intercept upon the vertical axis, it was
written alone; for example the pyramid face having the parameter relations of la 16 2c
: :
would be indicated by 2. The Naumann and Dana indices are easily converted into the
Miller indices by arranging them in the proper order, inverting and then clearing of frac-
tions. Goldschmidt has proposed another method of deriving indices. This has the
advantage that the indices for any particular face can be derived directly from the position
of its pole on the gnomonic projection. The first number gives the linear position of the
pole in respect to the left to right medial line of the projection and in terms of the unit
pace distance of the projection (see Art. 84). The second figure similarly gives the
position of the pole in reference to the front to back medial line. These two figures con-
stitute the Goldschmidt indices of the face. If the two numbers should be the same the
second is omitted. The Goldschmidt indices are easily converted into the Miller indices
by adding 1 as the third figure and clearing of fractions and eliminating any oo sign.
The relations between the Miller and the Miller-Bravais indices for the hexagonal
system are given in Art. 169.
EXAMPLES OF INDICES ACCORDING TO VARIOUS SYSTEMS OF

NOTATION
30 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
37. Form. A form in crystallography includes all the faces which

have a like position relative to the planes, or axes, of symmetry. The full
meaning of this will be appreciated after a study of the several systems. It
will be seen that in the most general case, that of a form having the symbol
(hkl), whose planes meet the assumed unit axes at unequal
lengths, there must be forty-eight like faces in the isometric
*
system (see Fig. 121), twenty-four in the hexagonal (Fig. 226),
sixteen in the tetragonal (Fig. 187), eight in the orthorhombic
(Fig. 51), four in the monoclinic, and two in the triclinic. In
the first four systems the faces named yield an enclosed solid,
and hence the form is called a closed form; in the remaining
two systems this is not true, and such forms in these and
other cases are called open forms. Fig. 298 shows a crystal
bounded by three pairs of unlike faces; each pair is hence an
open form. Figs. 52-55 show open forms.
The unit or fundamental form is one where parameters cor-
respond to the assumed unit lengths of the axes. Fig. 51 shows the unit
pyramid of sulphur whose symbol is (111); it has eight similar faces, the
position of which determines the ratio of the axes given in Art. 34.
52 53
Basal Pinacoid Prism

(001) (110) (/i/cO)
54
Dome Dome
(101), (MM) (Oil), (OW)
* The normal referred to in each case.

cla,ss is
The forms in the isometric system have special individual names, given later. In the
other systems certain general names are employed in this book which may be briefly men-
tioned here. A form whose faces are parallel to two of the axes * is called a pinacoid (from
Trufa^j a board). It is shown in Fig. 52. One whose faces are parallel to the vertical axis
but meet both the horizontal axes is called a prism, as Fig. 53. If the faces are parallel to
one horizontal axis only, it is a dome (Figs. 54, 55)
. If the faces meet all the axes, the form
is a pyramid (Fig. 51); this name is given even if there is only one face belonging to the
form.
In Fig. 56, a(100), 6(010) are pinacoids; w(110), s(120) are prisms; d(101) and fc(021)
are domes; all these are open forms. Finally, e(lll) is a pyramid, this being a closed form.
The relation existing in each of these cases between the symbol and the position of the
faces to the axes should be carefully studied.
As shown in the above cases, the symbol of a form is usually included in parentheses,
as (111), (100); or it may be in brackets [111] or UH \.
38. Zone. A zone includes a series of faces on a crystal whose inter-

section-lines aremutually parallel to each other and to a common line drawn
through the center of the crystal, called the zone-axis. This
56
parallelism means simply that the given faces are either all
parallel to one of the crystallographic axes or that their
parameters have a constant ratio for two of the axes. Some
simple numerical relation exists, in every case, between all
the faces in a zone, which is expressed by the zonal equation
(see Art. 45). The faces m, s, b (Fig. 56) are in a zone;
also, b and k.
If a face of a crystal falls simultaneously in two zones,
it follows that its symbol is fixed and can be determined
from the two zonal equations, without the measurement of
angles. Further, it can be proved that the face correspond-
ing to the intersection of two zones is always a possible
crystal face, that is, one having rational values for the indices
which define its position.
In many cases the zonal relation is obvious at sight, but
it can always be determined, as shown in Arts. 45, 46 by an
easy calculation.
Illustrations will be given after the methods of representing a
crystal by the various projections have been explained. Chrysolite
39. Horizontal Projections. In addition to the usual
perspective figures of crystals, projections on the basal plane (or more gener-
ally the plane normal to the prismatic zone) are very conveniently used.
These give in fact a map of the crystal as viewed from above looking in the
direction of the axis of the prismatic zone. Figs. 30-33 give simple examples.
In these the successive faces may be indicated by accents, as in Fig. 56, passing
around in the direction of the axes a, 6, a, that is, counter-clockwise. On
the construction of these projections see the Appendix A.
40. Spherical Projection. The study of actual crystals, particularly
as regards the angular and zonal relations of their faces, is much facilitated
by the use of various projections. The simplest of these and the one from
which the others may be derived is known as the spherical projection.
In making a spherical projection of a crystal it is assumed that the crystal
lies within a sphere, the center of which coincides with the center of the
*
In the tetragonal system the form (100) is, however, called a prism and (101) a
pyramid.
32 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
crystal the point of intersection of its crystallographic axes). From this

(i.e.
common center normals are drawn to the successive faces of the crystal and
continued until they meet the surface of the sphere. The points in which
these normals touch that surface locate the poles of the respective faces and
together form the spherical
projection of the crystal.
The method of formation
and the character of the
spherical projection is shown
in Fig. 57.
It is to be noted that all
the poles of faces which lie
in the same zone on the
crystal, i.e. faces whose in-
tersection lines are mutually
parallel, fall upon the same
great circle on the sphere.
TTulTls illustrated in the
figure in the case of the
zone a-d-a and a-o-d. Con-
versely, of course, all faces
whose poles fall on the same
great circle of the spherical
projection must lie in the
same zone. A face whose
pole falls at the intersection
of two or more great circles
Spherical Projection (after Penfield)
lies in two or more inde-
pendent zones, as for instance o(lll), in Fig. 57. The angular relations
between the faces on the crystal are of course preserved in the angles exist-
ing between their respective poles on the spherical projection. The angles
between the poles, however, are the supplementary angles to those between
the faces on the crystal, as shown in Fig. 58. The
supplementary angles are those which are commonly
measured and recorded when studying a crystal, see
Art. 230.
The spherical projection is very useful in getting
a mental picture of the relations existing between the
various faces and zones upon a crystal but because of
its nature does not permit of the close study and ac-
curate measurements that may be made on the other
projections described below which are made on plane
surfaces.
41. The Stereographic Projection. The stereo- ioi
j [
* s
graphic projection may be best considered as derived projection
from the spherical projection in the following man-
ner. The plane of the projection is commonly taken as the equatorial
plane of the sphere. Imaginary lines are drawn from the poles of the spheri-
cal projection to the south pole of the sphere. The points in which these
lines pierce the plane of the equator locate the poles in the stereographic pro-
jection. The relation between the two projections is shown in Fig. 59.
Fig. 60 shows the same stereographic projection without the foreshortening

of Fig. 59. Commonly only the poles that lie in the northern hemisphere,
including those on the equator, are transferred to the stereographic projection.
Certain facts concerning the stereographic projection need to be noted.
Its most important charac- -*
ter is that all circles or cir-
cular arcs on the spherical
projection are projected as
arcs of true circles on the
oft
stereographic projection.*
111
The poles of all crystal
faces that are parallel to
the vertical crystallogra-
phic axis fall on the equa-
tor of the spherical pro-
jection and occupy the
010
same positions in the stere-
ographic projection. The
pole of a horizontal face
will fallon the center of
the stereographic projec-
tion. All north and south
meridians of the spherical
projection will appear as
straight radial lines in the
stereographic projection
(i.e. as arcs of circles hav-
ing infinite radii). Other Relation between Spherical and Stereographic Projections
great circles on the spher-
ical projection, as already stated, will be transferred to the stereographic as
circular arcs. Examples of all these are shown in Fig. 60.
The angular relations between the poles of the various faces are preserved
in the stereographic projection but the linear distance corresponding to a
degree of arc naturally increases from the center of the projection toward its
circumference. This is illustrated in Fig. 61 where the circle represents a
vertical section through the spherical projection and the line A-B represents
the trace of the horizontal plane of the stereographic projection. A point
20 from N
on the sphere is projected to the point a on the stereographic
projection, a point 45 from N
is projected to b, etc. In this way a protractor
can be made by means of which angular distances from the center of the
stereographic projection can be readily determined. Fig. 62 represents such
a protractor which was devised by Penfield.f The mathematical relation
between the linear distance from the center of the projection and its angular
value is seen by study of Fig. 61. If the radius of the circle of the projection
is taken as unity the distance from its center to any desired point is equal to
the tangent of one half of the angle represented. For instance the distance
*
this statement see Penfield, Am. Jour. Sci., 11, 10, 1901.
For proof of
?
This protractor and the other protractors and scales used by Penfield pan be ob-
f
tained from the Mineralogical Laboratory of the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale Uni-
versity, New Haven, Ct.
34 CR YSTALLO GR APH Y
60
duo dlio
a 01 a 010
a 100
Stereographic Projection of the Isometric Forms, Cube, Octahedron, and Dodecahedron
61
from the center to the point a is equivalent to the tangent of 10, to point c
the tangent of 35, etc.
Fig. 63 represents a chart used by Penfield for making stereographic
projections. The circle has a diameter of 14 cm. and is graduated to de-
grees. With it go certain scales that are very useful in locating the desired
points and zonal circles. These will be briefly described later.
For detailed descriptions of the principles of the stereographic projection

and the methods of its use the reader is referred to the various books and
articles, the titles of which are given beyond. It is possible here to give only
a brief outline of the more important methods of construction used.
62
Stereographic Protractor for plotting Stereographic Projections (after Penfield;

reduced one-half)
(1) To locate the pole of a face lying on a known north and south great circle,
.
its angular distance from the center or a point on the circumference of the pro-
jection being given. The stereographic protractor, Fig. 62, or the tangent rela-
tion as stated above, gives the proper distance. The poles labeled o (iso-
metric octahedron), Fig. 60, may be located in this way.
(2) To locate the projection of the arc of a great circle which is not a north
and south meridian or the equator. The projections of three points on the
arc must be known. Then, since the projection of the circle will be still a
circular arc, its position can be determined by the usual geometric construc-
tion for a circle with three points on its arc given. If, as is commonly the
case, the points where the great circle crosses the equator and the angle it
makes with the equator are known it is possible to get the radius of the pro-
jected arc directly from Scale No. 1, Fig. 63. The location of such a desired
arc is shown in Fig. 64. The arcs shown in Fig. 60 were also located in this
way.
(3) To a face lying on a known great circle,
locate the position of the pole of
which is not a north angle from a point on the circum-
and south meridian, its
ference of the projection being known. The projected arc of a small vertical
circle, whose radius is the known angle, is drawn about the point on the cir-
cumference of the projection and since all points on this arc must have the
required angular distance from the given point the intersection of this circle
with the known great circle will give the desired point. The radius of the
projected arc of the small vertical circle can be determined by finding the
position of three points on the projection which have the required angular
distance from the point given on the circumference of the projection and
then obtaining the center of the required circle in the usual way. Or by the
use of Scale No. 2, Fig. 63, the required radius is obtained directly. It is
to be noted that the known point on the circumference of the projection,
while the stereographic center of the small circle, is not the actual center of
the projected arc. The center will lie outside the circumference on a con-
tinuation of the radial line that joins the given point with the center of the
projection. Therefore, even if the radius of the required arc is taken from
36 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
II
s i
E
3 E
r-
3-
P
Scale No. be necessary to establish at least one point on the re-

2, it will
order to find its center.
circle in These methods of construction are
Zedtrated in Fig. 65, in which the position is determined of the pole n (iso-
Location of the arc of a great circle in the Stereographic Projection at a given angle
above the equator
a Oil
dllQ
Location of pole of trapezohedron, n(211), in Stereographic Projection
metric trapezohedron) which lies on the great circle passing through the
poles a (isometric cube) and o (isometric octahedron), and makes a known
angle (35J) with a.
38 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
(4) To locate the position of the pole of a face given the angles between it and
two other faces whose poles lie within the divided circle. Circumscribe about
the poles of the two known points small circles with the proper radii and
the desired point will be located at their intersection. The two small circles
may touch at only a single point or they may intersect in two points. In
the latter case both points will meet the required conditions. The positions
of the projected small circles are readily found by drawing radii from the
center of the projection through the two known poles and then laying off on
these radii points on either side of the known poles with the required angular
distances. The center is then found between these two points in each case
and a circle drawn through them. This line of this circle will then be every-
where the required number of degrees away from the known pole. The re-
quired points may be found readily by means of the Stereographic Protrac-
tor, Fig. 62, remembering that the zero point on the protractor must always
lie at the center of the projection. This construction is illustrated in Fig. 66,
in which the points s (isometric hexoctahedron), are 22 12' and 19 5' from
the points o (isometric octahedron), and d (isometric dodecahedron). It is
to be noted here, also, that while the points o and d are the stereographic
centers of the circles about them, the actual centers are points which are
somewhat farther out from the center of the projection.
a 010
duo
a loo
Location of two poles of hexoctahedron, s, in Stereographic Projection
(5) To measure the angle between two given points on the stereographic
projection. If the two points lie on the circumference of the projection the
angle between them is read directly from the divisions of the circle. If they
lie on the same radial line in the projection, the angle is given by the use of
the Stereographic Protractor, Fig. 62. In other cases it is necessary first to
find the arc of a great circle upon which the two points lie. This is most
easily accomplished by the use of a transparent celluloid protractor upon
which the arcs of great circles are given, Fig. 67. Place this protractor over
the projection with its center coinciding with the center of the projection and
turn it about until the required great circle is found. Note the points where
this circle intersects the circumference of the projection. Then place a
second transparent protractor on which small vertical circles are given,
Fig. 68, over the projection with its ends on the points of the circumference
just determined. Now

note the angular distance between the two given
points. The whole operation may also be done by use of a third trans-
parent protractor, on which the arcs of both great and small circles are
given.
67
Stereograph! c Protractor, giving the great circles of every alternate degree (second, fourth,
etc.) (After Penfield, reduced one-half)
Stereograph] c Protractor, giving small circles for every degree measured from a given point
on the circumference. (After Penfield, reduced one-half)
(6) To measure the angle between the arcs of two great circles on the stereo-
graphic projection. This is most conveniently accomplished by construct-
ing the arc of a great circle which shall have a 90 radius about the point at
which the two arcs in question cross each other and then measuring the
angular distance between the two points at which they intersect this great
circle. Fig. 69, after Penfield, will serve to illustrate the method. First, if
it is wished to measure the angle between the divided circle and the arc of
the great circle that crosses it at C it is only necessary to draw a straight
line through the center of the projection, N, which shall intersect the divided
circle at points 90 distant from C. This line will be the projection of the
arc of a great circle about the sphere at 90 distant from C. The angle at C
is then determined by measuring with the stereographic protractor the angle
between u and v.
In the case of the angle between two great circles that meet at some
point within the divided circle as at A, Fig. 69, it is necessary to construct
the projected arc of the great circle 90 distant from this point This is done
40 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
by drawing the radial line through Nand A and measuring with the stereo-
graphic protractor an angle of 90 from A to the point B. The required arc
f
will pass through this point and the points p and p which are each 90 away
from the points at which the line A-N-B crosses the divided circle. The
angle between x and y measured on this great circle gives the value of the
required angle at A. This is most
69 readily measured by the use of the
transparent protractor showing small
circles, Fig. 68. This is placed across
the projection from p to p' and the
angle between x and y read directly
from it.
Wiilfing has described a stereo-

graphic net, which gives both great
and small circles for every two de-
grees. Over this is placed a sheet of
tracing paper upon which the stereo-
graphic projection is made. If the
paper is fastened at the center of the
drawing so that it can be turned into
various positions in respect to the
stereographic net below, the various
great and small circles needed can be
sketched directly upon the drawing.
Or the required points can be trans-
ferred from the net to a separate drawing by means of three point dividers.
Examples of the use of the stereographic projection will be given later
under each crystal system.
70
no
^100
Relation between Spherical and Gnomonic Projections
42. The Gnomonic Projection. The characters of the gnomonic pro-

jection can best be understood by considering it to be derived from the
spherical projection (see Art. 40). In the case of the gnomonic projection
the plane of the projection is usually taken as the horizontal plane which
,
liestangent to the north pole of the sphere of the spherical projection. Im-
aginary lines are then taken from the center of the sphere through the poles
of the crystal faces that lie on its surface and extended until they touch the
plane of the projection. The points in which these lines touch that plane
constitute the gnomonic projection of the forms represented. Fig. 70 shows
the relations between the spherical and gnomonic projections, using the same
isometric crystal forms (cube, octahedron and dodecahedron) as were em-
ployed to illustrate the principles of the Stereographic Projection (Art. 41).
Fig. 71 shows the gnomonic projection of the same set of forms.
100
Gnomonic Projection of Cube, Octahedron and Dodecahedron
The following features of the gnomonic projection are important. All

great circles on the spherical projection become straight lines when trans-
ferred to tho gnomonic. The poles of a series of crystal faces which belong
in the same zone will, therefore, on the gnomonic projection, lie on a straight
line. This primary distinction between the stereographic and gnomonic pro-
jections will be readily seen by a comparison of Figs. 60 and 71. The pole
of a horizontal crystal face (like the top face of the cube) will fall at the center
of the projection. The poles of vertical crystal faces will lie on the plane
of projection only at infinite distances from the center. This is shown by a
consideration of Fig. 70. Such faces are commonly indicated on the pro-
jection by the use of radial lines or arrows which indicate the directions in
which their poles lie. This is illustrated in the case of the vertical cube and
dodecahedron faces in Fig. 71. Crystal faces having a steep inclination with
the horizontal plane must frequently be indicated in the same way.
42 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
A simple relation exists between the linear distance from the center of
the projection to a given point and the angular distance represented. This
is shown in Fig. 72 where the circle is assumed to be a vertical cross-section
of the sphere of the spherical projection and the line A-B represents the
trace of the plane of the gnomonic projection. It is evident from this figure
that if the radius of the
circle is taken as unity
d' B the linear distances
N-a', N-b', etc., are the
tangents of the angles
20, 35, etc. Conse-
quently in the gnomonic
projection the distance
of a given pole from the
center of the projection,
considering the funda-
mental distance 0-Ar ,
Fig. 72, to be unity, is

equal to the tangent of
the angle represented.
In the case of the stereo-
graphic projection this
distance is equal to the
tangent of one half the angle, see Art. 41. The stereographic scale, used
hi trie stereographic protractor, Fig. 62, can therefore be adapted for use
in the gnomonic projection by taking the point on it reading at twice the
desired angle. The simplest method of plotting, however, is to make a
direct use of the tangent relation. The distance 0-N Fig. 72, is taken at
t
some convenient length and then

by multiplying this distance by the
natural tangent of the angle desired
the linear distance of the pole in
question from the center of the
projection is obtained. Frequently
the distance 0-N is taken as 5 cm.
In making a gnomonic projection
a circle is commonly drawn about
the center of the projection, known
as the fundamental circle, with a
radius equal to this chosen dis-
tance. Points th at have an angular
distance of 45 with the center
point of the projection will lie on
the circumference of this circle. Measurement of
angle between any two poles
Commonly also the gnomonic pro- (Ai, A 2 ) on the Gnomonic Projection
jection is surrounded by a square
border of two parallel lines on which is indicated the directions in which lie
the poles that cannot appear on the projection because of the vertical or
steeply inclined position of their faces. These characters are shown in
Fig. 71.
To measure the angle between two poles on the gnomonic projection. In
Fig. 73 let Ai and A

2 be any two points the angle between which is desired.
First draw a straight line through them or, in other words, find the direction
of the zonal line upon which they lie. Next erect the line 0-A perpendicular
to this zonal line and passing through the center of the projection. On
this line establish the point N, the distance A-N
being equal to the hypo-
thenuse of the right triangle A OP
or the distance A-P. The point TV is
known as the angle-point of the zone Ai-Az. The angle AiNAz is equal to
the desired angle between the points AI and A 2 In the case of zonal lines
.
that pass through the center of the projection this angle-point will lie on
the circumference of the fundamental circle at the terminus of a radius
which is at right angles to the zonal line in question. In the case of vertical
crystal faces whose poles lie at an infinite distance the center of the projec-
tion is itself the angle-point.
The explanation of the above method may be given as follows. In Fig. 74 let the circle
represent a vertical section through the sphere of the spherical projection and the line
N-A the trace of the plane of the gnomonic projection. Let the line A-C represent the
intersection of a zonal plane lying at right angles to the plane of the drawing. The zonal
line representing the intersection of this zonal plane with the plane of the gnomonic pro-
jection would therefore be a straight
line through point A which would be 74
perpendicular to the plane of the draw-
ing. The angle between any two poles N O A
lying on this zonal line would be deter-
mined by the angle formed by the lines
drawn from these poles to the point C.
Ifj we consider this zonal line which
passes through A perpendicular to the
drawmg as an axis around which we
may revolve its zonal plane, the point
C may be moved so that it will lie 'in
the plane of the gnomonic projection
and fall at N, the distance A-N being
equal to A-C. The character of the
point C has not been changed by this
transfer and the point N
becomes the
angle-point of the zonal line running
through A and the angle between any two poles on this line may be determined by running
lines from them to this point and measuring the included angle. The point N lies on the
line running through O (center of the gnomonic projection) and the distance A-N is equal
to the hypothenuse, A-C, of the right triangle one side of which is equal to A-O and
the other to O-C (the raclius of the fundamental circle).
To measure the angle between parallel zonal lines on the gnomonic projection.
In Fig. 75 let the two lines Zone 1 and Zone 2 represent two parallel zonal
lines the angle between which is desired. Draw the. radial line trom the
center of the projection, 0, at right angles to these zonal lines intersecting
them at the points AI and A 2 Make 0-P at right angles to 0-AiA 2 The
. .
angle AiPAz will give the angle between the two zones. The construction
will be readily understood if the figure is supposed to be turned on the line
0-AiAz as on an axis until the point P becomes the center of the spherical
projection The broken arc now represents a vertical cross section of the
sphere of the spherical projection and the points i and 02 the points where
the two zonal lines cross it. The angle at P is obviously the angle between
the two zones.
angle between Zone 2 and the prism zone, the line of which
The lies at
infinityon the gnomonic projection, is given in Fig. 75 by the angle A%PN
which is the same as
44 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
A net, similar in character to the stereographic net described
gnomonic
in Art. 41, useful in plotting the points of a projection or in making meas-
is
urements upon it. The straight lines upon it represent the projection of the
arcs of great circles of the spherical
projection, while the hyperbola curves
represent those of the small vertical
circles.
The gnomonic projection is most
commonly used in connection with
the measurement of crystal angles by
means of the two-circle goniometer.
This use will be explained later, see
Art. 232. For more detailed descrip-
tions of the principles and uses of
the gnomonic projection the reader is
referred to the literature listed below.
References on the Stereographic and

Gnomonic Projections.
In addition to the descriptions of these
Measurement of the angle between parallel projections that are given in many general
zones on the Gnomonic Projection crystallographic texts the following books
and papers are of value.
Boecke, H. E. Die Anwendung der stereographischen Projektion bei kristallographi-
schen Untersuchungen, 1911. Die gnomonische Projektion in ihrer Anwendung auf kris-
tallographische Aufgaben, 1913.
Evans, J. W. Gnomonic Projections in two planes. Min. Mag., 14, 149, 1905.
Goldschmidt, V. Uber Projektion und graphische Kristallberechnung, 1887.
Gossner, B. Kristallberechnung und Kristallzeichnung, 1914.
Hilton, H. The Gnomonic Net, Min. Mag., 14, 18-20, 1904. The Construction of
Crystallographic Projections, Min. Mag., 14, 99-103, 1905. Some Applications of the
Gnomonic Projection to Crystallography, Min. Mag., 14, 104-108, 1905.
Hutchinson, A. On a protractor for use in constructing stereographic and gnomonic
projections of the sphere, Min. Mag., 15, 94-112, 1908.
Palache, Charles. The Gnomonic Projection. Amer. Min., 6, 67, 1920.
Penfield, S. L. The Stereographic Projection and Its Possibilities from a Graphical
Standpoint, Am. J. Sci., 9, 1-24, 115-144, 1901. On the Solution of Problems in Crystal-
lography by Means of Graphical Methods based upon Spherical
and Plane Trigonometry. Am. J. Sci., 14, 249-284, 1902. On the
Drawing of Crystals from Stereographic and Gnomonic Projections,
Am. J. Sci., 21, 206-215, 1906.
Smith, G. H. H. On the Advantages of the Gnomonic Projec-
tion and its use in the Drawing of Crystals, Min. Mag., 13, 309-321,
1903.
43. Angles between Faces. The angles most con-

veniently used with the Miller symbols, and those given
in this work, are the normal angles, that is, the angles be-
tween the poles or normals to the facts, measured on arcs
of great circles joining the poles as shown on the stereo Chrysolite
graphic projection. These normal angles are the supple-
ments of the actual interfacial angles, as has been explained.
The relations between these normal angles, for example in a given zone, is much simpler
than those existing between the actual interfacial angles. Thus it is always true that, for a
series of faces in the same zone, the normal angle between two end faces is equal to the
sum of the angles of faces falling between. Thus (Figs. 76, 77) the normal angle of
06(100 A 010) is the sum of aw(100 A

110), ms(110 A
120), and s6(120 010). A
This
relation holds true in all the systems.
Furthermore, it will be seen that, supposing oca! (Fig. 77) is a plane of symmetry as in
the orthorhombic system, the angle
100 A 110, or am (Fig. 76), is half 77
the angle 110 A 110(rara'"). Similarly
010 A 120(6s) is half the angle 120 A
120(ss')j again, 100 A lll(ae) is the
complement of half the angle 111 A
111(66') and 010 A lll(6e) the_comple-
ment of half the angle 111A 111(60.
Here, as throughout this work, the
sign A is used to represent the angle
between two faces, usually designated
by letters.
44. Use of the Stereographic

fcoio 010 ft
Projection to Exhibit the Sym-

metry. The symmetry of any
one of the crystalline classes may
be readily exhibited by the help
of the stereographic projection.
The axes of binary, trigonal,
tetragonal and hexagonal sym-
metry are represented respec-
tively by the following signs:
.
Further, a plane of stereographic Projection of Faces on Chrysolite
symmetry is represented by a full Crystal, Fig. 76
line (zone-circle), while a dotted
line indicates that the plane of symmetry is wanting. The position of the
crystallographic axes is shown by arrows at the extremities of the lines. The
pole of a face in the upper half of
the crystal (above the plane of pro-
jection) is represented by a cross;
one below by a circle. If two like
faces fall in a vertical zone a double
sign is used, a cross within the
circle. Figs. 91, 128, 140, etc.,
give illustrations.
45. General Relations be-
tween Planes in the Same Zone.
- Certain important relations
Y exist between the indices of faces
that lie in the same zone. All
faces to belong to the same zone,
tautozonal faces as they are called,
must have their mutual intersec-
tions parallel to a given direction,
see Art. 38. This direction is
known as the axis of the zone.
The position of this zonal axis can
be expressed by what is known as
the zonal symbol. Consider Fig. 78, where is represented two crystal faces,
ABC, and CDE, intersecting the crystallographic axes X, Y and Z. In the
illustration, for simplicity, both faces have been assumed to pass through
46 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
the point C on the axis Z. This, of course, is possible since any crystal
plane may be moved parallel to itself without altering its relative intercepts
on the crystal axes. These two planes intersect in the line C-W, which
then becomes the direction of the zonal axis for the zone in which they
lie. Let the line 0P
which has been drawn parallel to this direction
represent that axis. In the parallelogram of which it is the diagonal the
length of the edge 0-S and its parallel edges have been taken as equal to the
distance 0-C. The point P on the zonal axis and therefore the direction
of the axis itself is fixed by the three coordinates, 0-M, 0-R, and 0-S. By
means of the consideration of similar triangles it is possible to prove that the
values of these coordinates may be expressed by,
0-M = (Ar
- lq)a; 0-R = (Ip
- hr)b; 0-S = (hq
- kp)c,
where represent the unit lengths of the three crystallographic axes,

a, 6, c
X, Y, Z and and (pqr) represent the indices of the two faces
(hkl) and ABC
CDE. These expressions are usually simplified by substituting u = kr Iq,
v = Ip hr, w
= hq kp, giving
= ua, 0-R = vb and 0-S = we.
0-M
The three figures [uvw] are said to be the symbol of the zone in question.
They represent the reciprocals of the values of the three coordinates, or in
other words are the indices of a point, P, on the zonal axis. They may
most readily be obtained by a system of cross-multiplication and subtraction
according to the following scheme. Write the indices of one face twice in
their proper order and directly under them the corresponding indices of the
second face. Cross off the first and last number of each series. Then mul-
tiply the figures joined by the cross lines, see below, and substract the prod-
uct of the two joined by light lines from that of those joined by heavy lines,
working from left to right. The three numbers obtained will in their order
correspond to u,.v and w.
k I h k I
P q
XXX r p q
u = kr Iq, v
= Ip hr, w = hq kp.
Since the zonal symbol for a given zone may be obtained from the indices
of any two faces lying in that zone it follows that the indices of every pos-
sible face in that zone must have definite relations to the zonal symbol. For
a given face with indices (xyz), in a zone having the symbol [uvw] the follow-
ing equation, known as the zonal equation, must hold true.
ux -\- vy + wz = 0.
In this way it can be readily shown whether or not a given face can lie in a
certain zone.
Further if [uvw] be the symbol of one zone and [efg] that of another inter-
secting it, then the point of intersection will always be the pole of a possible
crystal face. Its indices (hkl) must satisfy the equations of both zones and
may be obtained by combining them or the same result may be had by tak-
ing the symbols of the two zones and subjecting them to the same sort of cross-
multiplication by which they were themselves originally derived.
46. Examples of Zones and Zonal Relations. The following are cases in which the
zonal equation is seen at once. In Figs. 76 and 77 the faces a(100), ra(110), s(120), 6(010)
form a vertical zone with mutually parallel intersections, since they are all parallel to the
vertical axis; that is, for all faces in this zone it must be true that I = 0.
Again, the faces a(100), d(101), c(001) are in a zone, all being parallel to the horizontal
axis 6; hence for them and all others in this zone k = 0. Also 6(010), fc(ti21), /i(011), c(001)
are in a zone, all being parallel to the axis a, so that h = 0.
Also the faces /(121), e(lll), d(101), e' ''(111), /"'(121) are in a zone, since they have a
common ratio for the axes arc. With them, obviously, h = I.
The faces c(001), e(lll), m(110) are also in a zone, and again c(001), /(121), s(120),
though intersections do not happen to be made between c and e in the one case, and c and
/ in the other. For each of these zones it is true that there is a common ratio of the hori-
zontal axes, that is, of h to k in the indices. For the first it may be shown that h = k; for
the second, that 2h = k.
All the relations named may be obtained at once from the 79
above scheme. For example, for the faces s(120) and /(121)
the scheme gives
XXX
2. T, 0; .'. 2h - k = 0, or 2h = k.
The symbol of a face lying at once in two zones, as stated

above, must satisfy the zonal equation of each; these symbols
are hence easily obtained either by combining the equations
or by a scheme of multiplication like that given above.
For example, in Fig. 79, of sulphur, the face lettered x is in
the zone in zone (2) with p(lll)
(l)_with 6(010) andsdlS), als9
and n(01T). These zones give, respectively: Sulphur
(1) 01 1 (2) 1
3 1
v = 0, w = 1. 6=0, 9 1.
Hence for (1) the zonal equation is 3h = I: for (2) k = I. Combining these, we obtain
h = 1, k = 3, -I
= 3.
The symbol of the face x is, therefore, 133.
The same result is given by multiplying the zonal symbols Oil, 301, together after the
same method, thus;
01 10 11
133
This method of calculation belongs to all the different systems. In the hexagonal
Hence, again, x = 133.
system, in which there are four indices, one of the three referring to the horizontal axes
(usually the third) is omitted when the zonal relations are applied. See Art. 166.
47. Methods of Calculation. In general the angles between the poles

can be calculated by the methods of spherical trigonometry from the tri-
angles shown in the spherical projection which for the most part are right-
angled. Certain fundamental relations connect the axes with the elemental
angles of the projection; the most important of these are given under the
individual systems. Some general relations only are explained here.
48 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
48. Relations between the Indices of a Plane and the Angle made by it
with the Axes. In Fig. 80 let the three lines, X, Y, and Z represent three
80 crystallographic axes making any angles with each
other and let a, b and c represent their unit lengths.
Assume any face cutting these axes with the HKL
intercepts 0-H, O-K and 0-L. Let 0-p-P be a
normal to the plane intersecting the plane at HKL
p and the enveloping surface of the spherical pro-
jection at P. Let hkl represent the indices of the
given form. Since the line 0-p is normal to the
plane HKL
the triangles HOp, KOp and LOp are
right angles and the following relations hold true.
- cos HOp; Qr = cos KOp; = cos LOp.
The angles HOp, KOp, and LOp are equal, respectively, to the angles repre-
sented on the spherical projection by the arcs PX, PY and PZ and OH = ^,

=
7 ,
OL = = .
By substituting we have,
OP = = cos PY = j
cos PZ.
h n I
This equation is fundamental, and several of the relations given beyond are
deduced from it.
81
no
The most useful application is that when the axial angles are 90, as represented in Fig.
81; then X, Y, Z are the normals to 100, 010, 001, respectively. Also if the plane is HKL
taken as a face of the unit pyramid, that is, if its intercepts on the axes are taken as the
unit lengths
OH = a, OK = b, OL = c.
Then the HK, HL,

lines KL give
also the intersections of the planes 110, 101, Oil on
the three axial planes, and their poles are hence at the points fixed by normals to these
lines drawn from O. It will be obvious from this figure, then, that the following relations
hold true:
tan (100 A 110) = ;
^
tan (001 A 101) = -

;
tan (001 A Oil) =

^-
These values are often used later.
49. Cotangent and Tangent Relations. In the case of four faces in a

zone concerning which we know, either the angles between all the faces and
the indices of three of them, or the angles between three faces and all the
indices, it is possible by either a simple graphical method of plotting or by
to determine the missing angle or indices.
^calculation
To illustrate the graphic method first let Fig. 82 represent a cross section
perpendicular to the prism zone of a rhodonite crystal. The traces upon the
plane of the drawing of the faces a(100) and 6(010) provide the direction
of the lines of reference X
and Y. It is assumed that the position of the third
face w(110) is known and a line drawn parallel to its trace upon the plane of
the drawing from the point X
will give its relative intercepts upon the two
lines of reference. These intercepts do not correspond to the unit lengths
of the axes a and 6 since, rhodonite being triclinic, these axes do not lie in
the plane of the drawing but they represent rather the unit lengths of these
axes as foreshortened by projection upon that plane. This makes no dif-
ference, however, since it will still be true that all faces lying in the prism
zone of rhodonite must intercept these two lines in distances which will have
rational relations to the lengths of the intercepts of w(110). It is now as-
sumed that a fourth face / has the indices (130) and its angular position in
respect to the other faces in the zone is required. From its indices it must
intercept the two lines of reference X-X' and Y-Y' in the ratio of 1 to ^.
Let OXequal 1 on X-X' and OZ equal f on Y-Y'. Then a line joining
these two points will give the direction of the trace of / upon the plane of
the drawing and so determine the angles it will make with the other faces in
the zone.
If, on the other hand, the angles between / and the other faces in the
zone were known, the position of the trace of / upon the plane of the drawing
could be found, and so its relative intercepts (and indices) upon
the two lines of reference be determined.
If the method of calculation is used let P, Q, S and be the poles of R
four faces in a zone (Fig. 83) taken in such an order
*
that PQ and < PR
let the indices of these faces be respectively
fs
P Q R S
hkl pqr uvw xyz
Then it may be proved that
cot PS - cot PR = (P.Q) (S.R)
cot PQ - cot PR (Q.R) (P.S)
*
In the application of this principle it is essential that the planes should be taken in
the proper order, as shown above to accomplish this it is often ne_cessary to use th& in-
;
dices and corresponding angles, not of (hkl), but the face opposite (h k F), etc. r
50 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
where
(P.Q)
(Q.R)
(S.R)
(P.S)
Thus the tangents of angles between the base, 001, and 102, 203, 302, 201, etc., are
respectively |, f, |, 2 times the tangent of the angle between 001 and 101. Again, the
tangent of the angle 100 A 120 is twice the tangent of 100 A 110
(here
v = 2 V and one-
half the tangent of 010 A 110.
These last relations are shown clearly in Fig.
84 which represents a cross-section of a barite
crystal showing the macrodome zone between
a(100) and c(001). It is assumed that the angles
between the faces a, u, d, I and c have been
measured and the positions of their poles deter-
mined as indicated in the figure. The broken
lines drawn from a point x on the line represent-
ing the a crystallographic axis show the direction
of the traces of these faces upon the plane of the
a and c axes. If the face u is assumed to be the
unit dome (101) it will intersect the two axes at
distances proportional to their unit lengths,
namely O-X and O-Y. The other faces d and I
are seen to intersect the c axis at | and i the
distance O-Y, giving them the indices (102) and
(104). But the intercepts on O-Y for the three
faces u, d and I are proportional to the tangents
of the angles between their poles and that of
c(001) as shown below.
tan 58 10%' = 1.6112 = 1
tan 38 5H' = .8056 = %
tan 21 56|' = .4028 = i
52 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
I. ISOMETRIC SYSTEM
(Regular or Cubic System)
50. THE ISOMETRIC SYSTEM embraces all the forms which are referred to
three axes of equal lengths and at right angles to each other. Since these
axes are mutually interchangeable it is customary to designate them all by
the letter a. When properly orientated (i.e. placed in
85
the commonly accepted position for study) one of
a3 these axes has a vertical position and of the two
which lie in the horizontal plane, one is perpendicular
and the other parallel to the observer. The order in
which the axes are referred to in giving the relations
-i of any face to them is indicated in Fig. 85 by lettering
^^ a*
ox them ai, 0% and a s The positive and negative ends
.
of each axis are also shown.

There are five classes here included; of these the
normal class,* which possesses the highest degree of
Isometric Axes symmetry for the system and, indeed, for all crystals,
is by far the most important. Two of the other
classes, the pyritohearal and tetrahedral, also have numerous representatives
among minerals.
1. NORMAL CLASS (1). GALENA TYPE

(Hexoctahedral or Holohedral Class)
51. Symmetry. The symmetry of each of the types of solids enumer-
ated in the following table, as belonging to this class, and of all their com-
binations, is as follows.
Axes of Symmetry. There are three principal axes of tetragonal sym-
metry which are coincident with the crystallographic axes and are some-
times known as the cubic axes since they are perpendicular to the faces of
the cube. There are three diagonal axes of trigonal symmetry which emerge
in the middle of the octants formed by the cubic axes. These are known as
the octahedral axes since they are perpendic ular to the faces of the octahedron.
Lastly there are six diagonal axes of binary symmetry which bisect the plane
angles made by the cubic axes. These are perpendicular to the faces of the
dodecahedron and are known as the dodecahedral axes. These symmetry
axes are shown in the Figs. 86-88.
Planes of Symmetry. There are three principal planes of symmetry
which are at right angles to each other and whose intersections fix the posi-
*
Itcalled normal, as before stated, since it is the most common and hence by far the
is
most important class under the system ; also, more fundamentally, because the forms here
included possess the highest grade of symmetry possible in the system. The cube is a pos-
sible form in each of the five classes of this system, but although these forms are alike geo-
metrically, it is only the cube of the normal class that has the full symmetry as regards
molecular structure which its geometrical shape suggests. If a crystal is said to belong to
the isometric system, without further qualification-, it is to be understood that it is included
here. Similar remarks apply to the normal classes of the other systems.
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 53
tion of the crystallographic axes, Fig. 89. In addition there are six diagonal
planes of symmetry which bisect the angles between the principal planes,
Fig. 90
87
Axes of Tetragonal Symmetry Axes of Trigonal Symmetry Axes of Binary Symmetry

(Cubic Axes) (Octahedral Axes) (Dodecahedral Axes)
90
Principal Symmetry Planes Diagonal Symmetry Planes
The accompanying stereographic projection

(Fig. 91), constructed in accordance with the
principles explained in Art. 44, shows the dis-
tribution of the faces of the general form, hkl
(hexoctahedron) and hence represents clearly
the symmetry of the class. Compare also the
projections given later.
52. Forms. The various possible forms
belonging to this class, and possessing the
symmetry denned, may be grouped under seven
types of solids. These are enumerated in the
following table, comiQencing with the sim-
plest.
Symmetry of Normal Class,
Isometric System
54 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Indices
1. Cube (100)
2. Octahedron (Ill)
3. Dodecahedron .'
(110)
4. Tetrahexahedron (AfcQ) as, (310) (210); (320), etc.
5. Trisoctahedron (hhl) as, (331) (221); (332), etc.
6. Trapezohedron (hll) as, (311) (211); (322), etc.
7. Hexoctahedron (hkl) as, (421); (321), etc.
Attention is called to the letters uniformly used in this work and in Dana's System of
Mineralogy (1892) to designate certain of the isometric forms.* They are:
Cube: a.
Octahedron: o.
Dodecahedron: d.
Tetrahexahedrons: e = 210; / = 310; g = 320; h = 410.
Trisoctahedrons: p =
221; q
= 331; r = 332; p = 441.
Trapezohedrons: m = 311; n = 211; /3
= 322.
Hexoctahedrons: s = 321; t = 421.
53. Cube. The

cube, whose general symbol is (100), is shown in
Fig. 92. bounded by six similar faces, each parallel to two of the axes.
It is
Each face is a square, and the interfacial angles are all 90. The faces of
the cube are parallel to the principal or axial planes of symmetry.
92
^^\
ISOMETRIC SYSTE!^ 55
It will be remembered that, while the forms described are designated respectively by
the symbols (100), (111), and (110), each face of any one of the forms has its own indices.
Thus for the cube the six faces have the indices
100, 010, 001, TOO, OTO, 001.
For the octahedron the indices of the eight faces are:

Above 111, 111, TTl, 111;
Below 111, 111, ITT.
For the dodecahedron the indices of the twelve faces are:

110, 110, no, 110,
101, Toi, Toi, 101,
Oil, Oil, on; on.
These should be carefully studied with reference to thefigures (and to models), and also
to the projections (Figs. 125, 126). The student should become thoroughly familiar with
these individual indices and the relations to the axes which they express, so that he can
give at once the indices of any face required.
95 96
Cube and Octahedron Cube and Octahedron Octahedron and Cube
100
Dodecahedron and Cube Octahedron and Dodecahedron and

Dodecahedron Octahedron
56. Combinations of the Cube, Octahedron, and Dodecahedron.

Figs. 95, 96, 97 represent combinations of the cube and octahedron; Figs.
98, 101 of the cube and dodecahedron; Figs. 99, 100 of the octahedron and
dodecahedron; finally, Figs. 102, 103 show combinations of the three forms.
The predominating form, as the cube in Fig. 95, the octahedron in Fig. 97,
etc., isusually said to be modified by the faces of the other forms. In Fig.
96 the cube and octahedron are sometimes said to be "in equilibrium,"
since the faces of the octahedron meet at the middle points of* the edges of
the cube.
56 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
It should be carefully noticed, further, that the octahedral faces replace

the solid angles of the cube, as regular triangles equally inclined to the adja-
cent cubic faces, as shown in Fig. 95. Again, the square cubic faces replace
the six solid angles of the octahedron, being equally inclined to the adjacent
octahedral faces (Fig. 97) . The faces of the dodecahedron truncate * the
twelve similar edges of the cube, as shown in Fig. 101. They also truncate
the twelve edges of the octahedron (Fig. 99). Further, in Fig. 98 the cubic
faces replace the six tetrahedral solid angles of the dodecahedron, while the
octahedral faces replace its eight trihedral solid angles (Fig. 100).
101 102 103

ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 57
There be a large number of tetrahexahedrons, as the ratio of the

may
intercepts of the two axes, and hence of h to k varies; for example (410)
(310), (210), (320), etc. The form (210) is shown in Fig. 104; (410) in
Fig. 105, and (530) in Fig. 106. All the tetrahexahedrons fall in a zone
with a cubic face and a dodecahedral face. As h increases relatively to k the
form approaches the cube (in which h k = <x> 1 or 1 0), while as it dimin-
: : :
ishes and becomes more and more nearly equal to k in value it approaches
the dodecahedron; for which h = k. Compare Fig. 105 and Fig. 106; also
Figs. 125, 126. The special symbols belonging to each face of the tetra-
hexahedron should be carefully noted.
106
Tetrahexahedrons
107 108 109
Cube and Tetrahexa- Octahedron and Dodecahedron and

hedron Tetrahexahedron Tetrahexahedron
*
The faces of the tetrahexahedron bevel the twelve similar edges of the
cube, as in Fig. 107; they replace the solid angles of the octahedron by four
faces inclined on the edges (Fig. 108;/ = 310), and also the tetrahedral
solid angles of the dodecahedron by four faces inclined on the faces (Fig.
109; h = 410).
59. Trisoctahedron. The trisoctahedron (Fig. 110) is bounded by
twenty-four similar faces; each of these is an isosceles triangle, and three
together occupy the position of an octahedral face, whence the common
name. Further, to distinguish it- from the trapezohedron (or tetragonal
trisoctahedron), it is sometimes called the trigonal trisoctahedron. There are
two kinds of edges, lettered A and B in Fig. 110, and the interfacial angle
corresponding to either is sufficient for the determination of the special
symbol.
*
The word bevel is used when two like faces replace the edge of .a form and hence are
inclined at equal angles to its adjacent similar faces.
58 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The general symbol is (hhl)', common forms are (221), (331), etc. Eacn
face of the trisoctahedron meets two of the axes at a distance less than unity
and the third at the unit length, or (which is an identical expression*) it
meets two of the axes at the unit length and the third at a distance greater
than unity. The indices belonging to each face should be carefully noted.
The normal interfacial angles for some of the more common forms are given
on a later page.
Ill 112
Trisoctahedron Cube and Trisoctahedron Octahedron and

Trisoctahedron
60. Trapezohedron. The trapezohedron f (Figs. 113, 114) is bounded

by twenty-four similar faces, each of them a quadrilateral or trapezium. It
also bears in appearance a certain relation to the octahedron, whence the
name, sometimes employed, of tetragonal trisoctahedron. There are two
kinds of edges, lettered B
and C, in Fig. 113. The general symbol is hll\
common forms are (311), (211), (322), etc. Of the faces, each cuts an axis
at a distance less than unity, and the other two at the unit length, or (again,
an identical expression) one of them intersects an axis at the unit length and
the other two at equal distances greater than unity. The indices belonging
to each face should be carefully noted. The normal interfacial angles for
some of the common forms are given on a later page. Another name for this
form is icositetrahedron.
61. The combinations of these forms with the cube, octahedron, etc.,
should be carefully studied. It will be seen (Fig. Ill) that the faces of the
trisoctahedron replace the solid angles of the cube as three faces equally
inclined on the edges; this is a combination which has not been observed on
crystals. The faces of the trapezohedron appear as three equal triangles
equally inclined to the cubic faces (Fig. 115).
Again, the faces of the trisoctahedron bevel the edges of the octahedron,
Fig. 112, while those of the trapezohedron are triangles inclined to the faces
at the extremities of the cubic axes, Fig. 119; m(311). Still again, the faces
of the trapezohedron n(211) truncate the edges of the dodecahedron (110),
as shown in Fig. 118; this can be proved to follow at once from the zonal
{c = la
*
Since \a %b: : :16 2c.
: The student should read again carefully the ex-
planations in Art. 35.
t It will be seen later that the name trapezohedron is also given to other solids whose
faces are trapeziums conspicuously to the tetragonal trapezohedron and the trigonal
trapezohedron.
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 59
relations (Arts. 45, 46), cf. also Figs. 125, 126. The position of the faces of
the form m(311), in combination with o, is shown in Fig. 119; with d in
Fig. 120.
113 114
Trapezohedrons
It should be added that the trapezohedron n(211) is a common form both

alone and in combination; m(311) is common in combination. The trisoc-
tahedron alone is rarely met with, though in combination (Fig. 112) it is not
uncommon.
115
Analcite. Cube and Analcite. Trapezohedron Garnet. Trapezohedron and

Trapezohedron and Octahedron Dodecahedron
118 119
Garnet. Dodecahedron Spinel. Octahedron Magnetite. Dodecahedron

and Trapezohedron and Trapezohedron and Trapezohedron
62.
Hexoctahedron, The hexoctahedron. Figs. 121, 122, is the gen-
eralform in this system; it is bounded by forty-eight similar faces, each of
which is a scalene triangle, and each intersects the three axes at unequal
60 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
distances. The general symbol is (hki)\ common forms are s(321), shown in
Fig. 121, and (421), in Fig. 122 The indices of the individual faces, as
shown in Fig. 121 and more fully in the projections (Figs. 125, 126), should
be carefully studied
The hexoctahedron has three kinds of edges lettered A, B, C (longer,

middle, shorter) in Fig. 122; the angles of two of these edges are needed to
fix the symbol unless the zonal relation can be made use of In Fig. 124 the
faces of the hexoctahedron bevel the dodecahedral edges, and hence for this
form h = k + 1; the form s has the special symbol (321). The hexocta-
hedron alone is a very rare form, but it is seen in combination with the cube
(Fig 123, fluorite) as six small faces replacing each solid angle. Fig. 124 is
common with garnet.
123
Fluorite Cube and Garnet Dodecahedron

Hexoctahedron and Hexoctahedron
64. Pseudo-symmetry in the Isometric System. Isometric forms, by

development in the direction of one of the cubic axes, simulate tetragonal
forms. More common, and of greater interest, are forms simulating those of
rhombohedral symmetry by extension, or by flattening; in the direction of an
octahedral axis. Both these cases are illustrated later. Conversely, certain
rhombohedral forms resemble an isometric octahedron in angle.
65. Stereographic and Gnomonic Projections. The stereographic
projection, Fig 125, and gnomonic projection, Fig. 126, show the positions
of the poles of the faces of the cube (100), octahedron (111), and dodecahe-
dron (110); also the tetrahexahedron (210), the trisoctahedron (221), the
trapezohedron (211), and the hexoctahedron (321).
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 61
126
110
010 H
Stereographic Projection of Isometric Forms (Cube (100), Octahedron (111), Dodecanedron

(110), Tetrahexahedron (210), Trisoctahedron (221), Trapezohedron (211), Hexocta-
hedron (321))
Finally, note the prominent zones of planes; for example, the zone between two cubic
faces including a dodecahedral face and the faces of all possible tetrahexahedrons. Again,
the zones from a cubic face (as 001) through an octahedral face (as 111) passing through
the trisoctahedrons, as 113, 112, 223, and the trapezohedrons 332, 221, 331, etc. Also the
zone from one dodecahedral face, as 110, to another, as 101, passing through 321, 211, 312,
etc. At the same time compare these zones with the same zones shown on the figures
already described. A study of the relations illustrated in Fig. 127 will-ê found useful.
From it is seen that any crystal face falling in the zone between the cube and dodecahedron
must belong to a tetrahexahedron; any face falling in the zone between the cube and octa-
hedron must belong to a trapezohedron; and any face falling in the zone between the
octahedron and dodecahedron must belong to a trisoctahedron, further any face falling
outside these three zones must belong to a hexoctahedron.
62 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
126
821 321
120
321
Gnomonic Projection of Isometric Forms (Cube (100), Octahedron (111), Dodecahedron

(110),Tetrahexahedron (210), Trisoctahedron (221), Trapezohedron (211), Hexocta-
hedron (321))
128
UOO)
Symmetry of Pyritohedral class

ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 63
66. Angles of Common Isometric Forms.*
TETRAHEXAHEDRONS.
Cf. Fig. 104.
410
310
520
210
530
320
430
540
64 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
jection (Fig. 91) for the normal class, so that the lower grade of symmetry
here present be thoroughly understood. In studying the forms described
and illustrated in the following pages, this matter of symmetry, especially in
relation to that of the normal class, should be continually before the mind.
It will be observed that the faces of both the pyritohedron (Fig. 129) and
the diploid (Fig. 135) are arranged in parallel pairs, and on this account
these forms have been sometimes called parallel hemihedrons. Further, those
authors who prefer to describe these forms as cases of hemihedrism call this
type parallel-faced hemihedrism or pentagonal hemihedrism.
68. Pyritohedron. The pyritohedron (Fig. 129) is so named because
it is a typical form with the common species, pyrite. It is a solid bounded
by twelve faces, each of which is a pentagon, but with one edge (A, Fig. 129)
longer than the other four similar edges (C). It 4s often called a pentagonal
dodecahedron, and indeed it resembles closely the regular dodecahedron of
geometry, in which the faces are regular pentagons. This latter form is,
however, an impossible form in crystallography.
129 130
Pyritohedrons Showing Relation between

Pyritohedron and Tetra-
hexahedron
The general symbol is (MO) or like that of the tetrahexahedron of the

normal class. Hence each face is parallel to one of the axes and meets the
other two axes at unequal distances. Common forms are (410), (310), (210),
(320), etc. Besides the positive pyritohedron, as (210), there is also the com-
*
plementary negative form shown in Fig. 130; the symbol is here (120).
Other common forms are (250), (230), (130), etc.
The positive and negative pyritohedrons together embrace twenty-four
faces, having the same position as the twenty-four like faces of the tetra-
hexahedron of the normal class. The relation between the tetrahexahedron
and the pyritohedron is shown in Fig. 131, where the alternate faces of the
tetrahexahedron (indicated by shading) are extended to form the faces of
the pyritohedron.
69. Combinations. The faces of the pyritohedron replace the edges
of the cube as shown in Fig. 132; this resembles Fig. 101 but here the faces
make unequal angles with the two adjacent cubic faces. On the other
hand, when the pyritohedron is modified by the cube, the faces of the latter
truncate the longer edges of the pentagons.
*
The negative forms in this and similar cases have sometimes distinct letters, some-
times the same as the positive form, but are then distinguished by a
subscript accent, as
e(210) and e 4 (120).
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 65
Fig. 133 shows the combination of the pyritohedron and
m octahedron, and
Fig. 134 these two forms are equally
developed. The resulting combina-
tion bears a close similarity to the
icosahedron, or regular twenty-faced solid
of geometry Here, however of the twenty faces, the
eight octahedral are
equilateral triangles, the twelve others
belonging to the pyritohedron are
isosceles triangles.
132
134
Cube and Pyritohedron Octahedron and Octahedron and

Pyritohedron Pyritohedron
70. Diploid. The diploid is bounded by twenty-four similar faces,
each meeting the axes at -unequal distances; its general
symbol is hence
(hkl), and common forms are s(321), 2(421), etc. The form (321) is shown
in Fig. 135; the symbols of its faces, as
giveii, should
be carefully studied. As seen in the figure, the faces
are quadrilaterals or trapeziums; moreover, they are
grouped in pairs, hence the common name diploid. It
is also sometimes called a dyakisdodecahedron.
The complementary negative form bears to the
positive form of Fig. 135 the same relation as the
negative to the positive pyritohedron. Its faces have
the symbols 312, 231, 123, in the front octant, and
similarly with the proper negative signs in the others.
The positive and negative forms together obviously
embrace all the faces of the hexoctahedron of the
Diploid
normal class. The diploid can be considered to be
derived from the hexoctahedron by the extension of the alternate faces of
the latter and the omission of the remaining faces, exactly as in the case
of the pyritohedron and tetrahexahedron (Art. 68).
In Fig. 136 the positive diploid is shown in combination with the cube.
Here the three faces replace each of its solid angles. This combination form
resembles that of Fig. Ill, but the three faces are here unequally inclined
upon two adjacent cubic faces. Other combinations of the diploid with the
cube, octahedron, and pyritohedron are given in Figs. 137 and 138.
71. Other Forms. If the pyritohedral type of symmetry be applied to
planes each parallel to two of the axes, it is seen that this symmetry calls for
six of these, and the resulting form is obviously a cube. This cube cannot be
distinguished geometrically from the cube of the normal class, but it has its
own characteristic molecular symmetry. Corresponding to this ijb is com-
mon to find cubes of pyrite with fine lines (striations) parallel to the alter-
nate edges, as indicated in Fig. 139. These are due to the partial develop-
66 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
ment of pyritohedral faces (210). On a normal cube similar striations, if
present, must be parallel to both sets of edges on each cubic face.

136
Cube and Diploid Cube, Octahedron and Cube, Diploid and

Diploid Pyritohedron
Similarly to the cube, the remaining forms of this

pyritohedral class, namely, (111), (110), (hhl), (Ml), have
the same geometrical form, respectively, as the octahedron,
dodecahedron, the trisoctahedrons and trapezohedrons of
the normal class. In molecular structure, however, these
forms are distinct, each having the symmetry described
in Art. 67.
Pyrite. Striated Cube ^ 2> A^g* 68

- The following tables contain the angles
of some common forms.
PYBITOHEDRONS.
Cf. Fig. 129.

ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 67
141, 142. There are also three other distinct forms, shown in Figs. 149,
150, 151.
The symmetry of this class is as follows. There are three axes of
binary
symmetry which coincide with the crystallographic axes. There are also
four diagonal axes of trigonal symmetry which coincide with the octahedral
axes. There are six diagonal planes of sym-
metry. There is no center of symmetry.
The stereographic projection (Fig. 140)
shows the distribution of the faces of the
general form (hkl), hextetrahedron, and thus
exhibits the symmetry of the class. It will be
seen at once that the like faces are all grouped
in the alternate octants, and this will be seen
to be characteristic of all the forms peculiar
to this class. The relation between the sym-
metry here described and that of the normal
class must be carefully studied.
In distinction from the pyritohedral forms
whose faces were in parallel pairs, the faces of
the tetrahedron and the analogous solids are
Symmetry of Tetrahedral Class
inclined to each other, and hence they are
sometimes spoken of as inclined hemihedrons, and the type of so-called hemi-
hedrism here illustrated is then called inclined or tetrahedral hemihedrism.
74. Tetrahedron. The tetrahedron,* as its name indicates, is a four-
faced solid, bounded by planes meeting the axes at equal distances. Its
general symbol is (lll)_,_and_the_four faces of the positive form (Fig. 141)
have the symbols 111, 111, 111, 111. These correspond to four of the faces
of the octahedron of the normal class (Fig. 93). The relation between the
two forms is shown in Fig. 143.
Positive Tetrahedron Negative Tetrahedron Showing Relation between

Octahedron and Tetrahedron
Each of the four faces of the tetrahedron is an equilateral triangle; the

(normal) interfacial angle is 109 29' 16". The tetrahedron is the regular
it must be so placed
triangular pyramid of geometry, but crystallographically
that the axes join the middle points of opposite edges, and one axis is vertical.
*
This is one of the five regular solids of geometry, which include also the cube, octa-
hedron, the regular pentagonal dodecahedron,
and the icosahedron; the last two, as already
noted, are impossible forms among crystals.
68 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
There are two possible tetrahedrons: the positive tetrahedron (111),

designated by the letter o, which has already been described, and the nega-
tive tetrahedron, having the_same_geometrica_l form and symmetry, but the
indices of its four faces are 111, 111, 111, 111. This second form is shown
in Fig. 142; it is usually designated by the letter o,. These two forms are,
as stated above, identical in geometrical shape, but they may be distinguished
in many cases by the tests which serve to reveal the molecular structure,
particularly the etching-figures; also in many cases by pyro-electricity (see
under boracite, p. 306), Art. 438. It is probable that the positive and
negative tetrahedrons of sphalerite (see that species) have a constant differ-
ence in this particular, which makes it possible to distinguish them on crystals
from different localities and of different habit.
144 145 146
\/
Positive and Negative Cube and Tetrahedron Tetrahedron and Cube

Tetrahedrons
both tetrahedrons are present together, the form in

If
Fig. 144 results.
This geometrically an octahedron when the two forms are equally de-
is
veloped, but crystallographically it is always only a combination of two

unlike forms, the positive and
negative tetrahedrons, which can be distin-
guished as already noted.
147
Tetrahedron and Boracite. Cube, Dodecahedron with

Dodecahedron Positive and Negative Tetrahedrons
The tetrahedron in
combination with the cube replaces the alternate solid
angles as in Fig. 145. The cube modifying the tetrahedron truncates its
edges as shown in Fig 146. The normal angle between
tetrahedral faces is 54 44'.
adjacent cubic and
In Fig. 147 the dodecahedron is shown
modify-
fnL with
P S 1Ve tet hedr n whlle
^ ' m
Fl S- 148 the cube is the
predominating
form -t l? the
positive and negative tetrahedrons and dodecahedron.
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM gg
75. Other Typical Forms. - There
are three other distinct
types of
solids in this class, having the
general symbols (hhl), (hll), and The
first of these is shown in (hkl)
Fig 149; here the symbol is 221). There are
faces each a quadrilateral
twelve
belonging to this form, distributed as determined
by the tetrahedral type of symmetry. They correspond to twelve of the
faces of the trisoctahedron,
namely, all those falling in alternate octants
I his type of solid is sometimes called a
tetragonal tristetrahedron, or a deltoid
dodecahedron It does not occur alone
among crystals, but its faces are
observed modifying other forms
Tetragonal Tristetrahedron Trigonal Tristetrahedron Hextetrahedron
There is also a complementary negative form, corresponding to the posi-

tive form, related to it in precisely the same way as the
negative to the posi-
tive tetrahedron. Its twelve faces are those of the trisoctahedron which
belong to the other set of alternate octants.
152
Tetrahedrite Sphalerite Boracite
Another form, shown in Fig. 150, has the general symbol (hll), here (211);
it isbounded by twelve like triangular faces, distributed after the type de-
manded by tetrahedral symmetry, and corresponding consequently to the
faces of the alternate octants of the form (hU) the trapezohedron of the
normal class. This type of solid is sometimes called a trigonal tristetrahedron
or trigondodecahedron.* It is observed both alone and in combination,
*
It is to be noted that the tetragonal tristetrahedron has faces which resemble those of
the trapezohedron (tetragonal trisoctahedron), although it is related not to this but to the
trisoctahedron (trigonal trisoctahedron). On the other hand, the faces of the trigonal tris-
tetrahedron resemble those of the trisoctahedron, though in fact related to the trapezo-
hedron.
70 CR YST ALLO GR APH Y
especially with the species tetrahedrite; it is much more common than the
form (hhl). There is here again a complementary negative form. Fig. 152
shows the positive form n(211) with the positive tetrahedron, and Fig. 153
the form m(311) with a(100), o(lll), and d(110). In Fig. 154, the negative
form 71X211) is present.
The fourth independent type of solids in this class is shown in Fig. 151.
It has the general symbol (hkl), here (321), and is bounded by twenty-four
faces distributed according to tetrahedral symmetry, that is, embracing all
the faces of the alternate octants of the forty-eight-faced hexoctahedron.
This form is sometimes called a hextetrahedron or hexakistetrahedron. The
complementary negative form (hkl) embraces the remaining faces of the
hexoctahedron. The positive hextetrahedron, 0(531), is shown in Fig. 154
with the cube, octahedron, and dodecahedron, also the negative trigonal
tristetrahedron n t (2 1 1 )
.
76. If the tetrahedral symmetry be applied in the case of planes each

parallel to the two axes, it will be seen that there must be six such faces.
They form a cube similar geometrically to the cube both of the normal and
pyritohedral class but differing in its molecular structure, as can be readily
proved, for example, by pyro-electricity (Art. 438). Similarly in the case
of the planes having the symbol (110), there must be twelve faces forming a
rhombic dodecahedron bearing the same relation to the like geometrical
form of the normal class. The same is true again of the planes having the
position expressed by the general symbol (hkQ); there must be twenty-four
of them and they together form a tetrahexahedron.
In this class, therefore, there are also seven types of forms, but only four
of them are geometrically distinct from the corresponding forms of the
normal class.
77. Angles. The following tables contain the angles of some com-
mon forms :
TETRAGONAL TRISTETRAHEDRONS.
Cf. Fig. 149.

ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 71
4. PLAGIOHEDRAL CLASS (4). CUPRITE TYPE.

(Pentagonal Icositetrahedral, Plagiohedral Hemihedral
Class)
78. Typical Forms and Symmetry. - The fourth class under the iso-
metric system is called the plagiohedral or
gyroidal class because the faces
of the general form (hkl) are arranged in This is shown on the
spiral order.
stereographic projection, Fig. 155, and also in
Figs. 156, 157, which represent the single typ-
ical form of the class. These two complemen-
tary solids together embrace all the faces of the
hexoctahedron. They are distinguished from
one another by being called respectively right-
handed and left-handed pentagonal icositetra-
hedrons. The other forms of the class are
geometrically like those of the normal class.
The symmetry characteristic of the class in
general is as follows:
There are no planes of symmetry and no
center of symmetry. There are, however, three
axes of tetragonal symmetry normal to the
cubic faces, four axes of trigonal symmetry
Symmetry of Plagiohedral Class
normal to the octahedral faces, and six axes of
binary symmetry normal to the faces of the dodecahedron. In other words,
it has all the axes of symmetry of the normal class while without planes or
center of symmetry.
156 168
Right and Left-handed Pentagonal Icositetrahedrons Cuprite
79. be noted that the two forms shown in Figs. 156, 157 are alike
It is to
geometrically, but are not superposable; in other words, they are related
to one another as is a right- to a left-hand glove. They are hence said to be
enantiomorphous, and, as explained elsewhere, the crystals belonging here
may be expected to show circular light polarization. It will be seen that
the complementary positive and negative forms of the preceding classes,
unlike those here, may be superposed by being rotated 90 about one of the
crystallographic axes. This distinction between positive and negative
forms, and between right- and left-handed enantiomorphous forms, exists
also in the case of the classes of several of the other systems.
This class is rare among minerals; it is represented by cuprite, sal am-
moniac, sylvite, and halite. It is usually shown by the distribution of the

small modifying faces, or by the form of the etching figures. Fig. 158 shows
a crystal of cuprite from Cornwall (Pratt) with the form 2(13' 10' 12).
5. TETARTOHEDRAL CLASS (5). ULLMANNITE TYPE.

(Tetrahedral Pentagonal Dodecahedral Class)
80. Symmetry and Typical Forms. The fifth remaining possible class
under the isometric system is by Fig. 160, which represents the
illustrated
twelve-faced solid corresponding to the general symbol (hkl). The distri-
bution of its faces is shown in the projection,
Fig. 159. This form is sometimes called a
tetrahedral-pentagonal dodecahedron. It is
seen to have one-fourth as many faces as the
form (hkl) in the normal class, hence there are
four similar solids which together embrace all
the faces of the hexoctahedron. These four
solids, which are distinguished as right-handed
(positive and negative) and left-handed (posi-
circular polarization. The remaining forms of

the class are (besides the cube and rhombic
the tetrahedrons, the pyritohe-
Symmetry of Tetartohedral Class dodecahedron)
drons, the tetragonal and trigonal tnstetrahe-
drons; geometrically they are like the solids of the same names already
described. This class has no plane of symmetry and no center of symmetry.
There are three axes of binary symmetry normal to the cubic faces, and four
axes of trigonal symmetry normal to the faces of the tetrahedron.
160
This group is illustrated by artificial crystals of barium nitrate, stron-

tium nitrate, sodium chlorate, etc. Further, the species ullmannite, which
shows sometimes pyritohedral and again tetrahedral forms, both having
the same composition, must be regarded as belonging here.
MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF THE ISOMETRIC SYSTEM

81. Most of the
problems arising in the isometric system can be solved at once by the
right-angled triangles in the sphere of projection (Fig. 125) without the use of any special
formulas.
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 73
It will be
remembered that the angles between a cubic
face, as 100, and the adjacent
face of a tetrahexahedron, 310, 210,
320, etc can be obtained at once, since the > '
tangent of
this angle is equal to ->->-> or in general r
o 6 h
tan (hkO A 100) =~
162
ac k = 1
6c ft =2
Z c = 90
Z a&c
= 26 34'
(100) A (210)
This relation is illustrated in Fig. 162, which also shows the method of graphically
determining the indices of a tetrahexahedron, the angle between one of its faces and an
adjacent cube face being given.
Since all the forms of a given symbol under different species have the same angles, the
tables of angles already given are very useful.
These and similar angles may be calculated immediately from the sphere, or often more
simply by the formulas given in the following article.
82. Formulas. (1) The distance of the pole of any face P(hkl) from the cubic faces is
given by the following equations. Here Pa is the distance between (hkl) and (100); Pb is
the distance between (hkl) and (010); and PC that between (hkl) and (001).
These equations admit of much simplification in the various special cases, for (hkQ),
(hfd), etc.:
(2) The distance between the poles of any two faces P(hkl) and Q(pqr) is given by the
following equation, which in special cases may also be more or less simplified:
hp + kq+ Ir
cosPQ
(p*
(3) The calculation of the supplement interfacial or normal angles for the several forms
may be accomplished as follows:
Trisoctahedron. The angles A and B are, as before, the supplements of the interfacial
angles of the edges lettered as in Fig. 110.
V
A = + 2hl.
cos B =
9/,2_/2
cos ,
2
,
2
,
For the tetragonal-tristetrahedron (Fig. 149), cos B =
Trapezohedron (Fig. 113). B and C are the supplement angles of the edges as lettered in
the figure.
cos B = T0 , ^ 70 J cos C
For the trigonal-tristetrahedron (Fig. 150), cos B =

Tetrahexahedron (Fig. 104).
cos A = , . >* cos C =

2
^2
74 CR YST ALLO GR APHY
h2 k2 hk
Forthepyritohedron(Fig. 129), cos A = >'
cos C =
^2 _^_ fc2 ^rqrp*
Hexoctahedron (Fig. 122).
-
/+y;v ^ B =
2
c =
I
A = c OS
/;y; p-
cos
;2 ;^ + ;
8
;
For the diploid (Fig. 135), cos A- M ,

M ,
n ;
cos C= ,,
h 2 - 2kl
For the hextetrahedron (Fig. 151), cos B =
h2 +k + 2
I
2
83. To determine the indices of any face (fcfel) of an isometric

form, given the posi-
tion of its pole on the stereographic projection. As an illustrative example of this problem
the hexoctahedron (321) has been taken, It is assumed that the angles 100 321 = 36 42' A
ISOMETRIC SYSTEM 75
and 111 A 321 = 22 12' are given. The methods by which the desired pole is located
from these measurements have been described on page 38 and are illustrated in Fig. 163.
Having located the pole (hkl) a line is drawn through it from the center O of the projec-
tion. This line O-P represents the intersection with' the horizontal plane (which is the
plane of the horizontal crystal axes, a and 6) of a plane which is normal to the crystal face
(hkl) .Since two planes which are at right angles to each other will intersect a third plane
in lines that are at right angles to each other, it follows that the plane of the hexoctahedral
face will intersect the plane of the horizontal axes in a line at right angles to O-P. If,
therefore, the distance 0-M be taken as representing unity on the a axis and the line
M-P-N be drawn at right angles to O-P the distance 0-N will represent the intercept of
the face in question upon the 6 axis. 0-N is found in this case to be f 0-M in value.
The intercepts upon the two horizontal axes are, therefore la, |6. The plotting of the
intercept upon the c axis is shown in the upper left hand quadrant of the figure. The
angular distance from to the pole (hkl) is measured by the stereographic protractor as
74 30'. This angle is then laid off from the line representing the c axis and the line repre-
senting the pole (hkl) is drawn. The distance O-P. is transferred from the lower part of
the figure. Then we can construct the right triangle, the vertical side of which is the
c axis, the horizontal side is this line O-P (the intersection of the plane which is normal to
the crystal face with the horizontal plane) and the hypothenuse is a line lying in the face
and therefore at right angles to the pole of the face. This line would intersect the c axis
at a distance equal to 30-M. The same relation may be shown by starting this last line
from a point on the c axis which is at a distance from the center of the figure equal to 0-M.
In this case the intercept on the horizontal line O-P would be at one third its total length.
By these constructions the parameters of the face in question are shown to be la, |6, 3c,
giving (321) as its indices.
84. To determine the indices of the faces of teometac

their poles on the gnomonic projection.
-
As an illustrative
m 126
2
lower right hand quadrant of the gnomonic projection
been taken and reproduced in Fig. 164. The lines
of ômetric
O-M
and ( forn^
re at ""*
Fig
each other and may represent the horizontal ?3^^^^^

pole of the projection lines are drawn perpendicular
to these two axial
^ relations to
seen that the intercepts made upon these lines have
rational
76 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
since weare dealing with the isometric system in which the crystallographic axes are all
alike and interchangeable with each other, it follows that the different intercepts upon
O-M and O-N are identical. The distance O-R (i.e. the distance from the center to the
45 point of the projection) must equal the unit length of the axes. That this is true is
readily seen by the consideration of Fig. 165. The intercepts of the lines drawn from the
different poles to the lines O-M and O-N are found to be |, 5, f, 1, |, 2 and 3 times this
unit distance. To find the Miller indices of any face represented, it is only necessary to
165
Plane of Gnomonic Projection
take the intercepts of the two lines drawn from its pole upon the two axes a\ and ct 2 place
,
these numbers in their proper order and add a 1 as a third figure and then if necessary
clear of fractions. Take for exa'mple the hexoctahedrqn face with indices 312. The lines
drawn from its pole intercept the axes at lai and a2 which gives the expression | \ 1, which,
,
again, on clearing of fractions, yields 312, the indices of the face in question. In the case
of a face parallel to the vertical axis, the pole of which lies at infinity on the gnomonic
projection, the indices may be obtained by taking any point on the radial line that points
to the position of the pole and dropping perpendiculars to the lines representing the two
horizontal axes. The relative intercepts formed upon these axes will give the first two
numbers of the required indices while the third number will necessarily be 0.
TETRAGONAL SYSTEM 77
II. TETRAGONAL SYSTEM

85. THE TETRAGONAL SYSTEM includes all the forms which are referred
to three axes at right angles to each other of which the two horizontal axes
are equal to each other in length and interchangeable and the third, the
vertical axis, is either shorter or longer. The horizontal axes are desig-
nated by the letter a; the vertical axis by c (see Fig. 166). The length of
the vertical axis expresses properly the axial ratio of a c, a being uniformly
:
taken as equal to unity. The axes are orientated and their opposite ends
designated by plus and minus signs exactly as in the case of the Isometric
System.
Seven classes are embraced Of these the normal class is
in this system.
common and important among minerals; two others have several represen-
tatives, and another a single one only. It may be noted that in four of the
classes the vertical axis is an axis of tetragonal symmetry; in the remaining
three it is an axis of binary symmetry only.
1. NORMAL CLASS (6). ZIRCON TYPE

(Ditetragonal Bipyramidal or Holohedral Class)
86. Symmetry. to the normal class of the

The forms belonging
tetragonal system (cf Figs. 170
. to 192) have one principal axis of tetragonal
symmetry (whence name of the system) which coincides with the vertical
crystallographic axis, c. There are also four horizontal axes of binary sym-
metry, two of which coincide with the horizontal crystallographic axes
while the other two are diagonal axes bisecting the angles between the first
two.
166 167
eta
Axes of Tetragonal Mineral, Symmetry of Normal Class

Octahedrite a c = 1 178
: : Tetragonal System
Further they have one principal plane of symmetry, the plane of the
horizontal crystallographic axes. There are also four vertical planes of
symmetry which pass through the vertical crystallographic axis c and make
of 45 with each other. Two of these latter planes include the hori-
angles
of symmetry.
zontal crystallographic axes and are known as axial planes
The other two are known as diagonal planes of symmetry.
78 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The axes and planes of symmetry are shown in Figs. 168 and 169.
The symmetry and the distribution of the faces of the general form, hkl,
is shown
in the stereographic projection, Fig. 167.
87. Forms. The various possible forms under the normal class of
this system are as follows:
Symbols
1. Base or basal pinacoid (001)
2. Prism of the first order (110)
3. Prism of the second order (100)
4. Ditetragonal prism (hkO) as, (310) ; (210) f (320), etc.
5. Pyramid of the first order (hhl) as, (223); (111); (221), etc.
6. Pyramid of the second order (hQl) as, (203) ; (101) ; (201), etc.
7. Ditetragonal pyramid (hkl) as, (421); (321); (122), etc.
168 169
Symmetry of Normal Class, Tetragonal System
88. Base or Basal Pinacoid. The 6ase is that form which includes
the two similar faces which are parallel_to the plane of the horizontal axes.
These faces have the indices 001 and 001 respectively; it is an "open form,"
as they do not inclose a space, consequently this form can occur only in com-
bination with other forms. Cf. Figs. 170-173, etc. This form is always
lettered c in this work.
170 171 172

OQL 001
4-
010
100
no
First Order Prism Second Order Prism Firstand Second

Order Prisms
89. Prisms. Prisms, in systems other than the isometric, have been
defined to be forms whose faces are parallel to the vertical axis
(c) of the
crystal, while they meet the two horizontal axes; in this system the four-
faced form whose planes are parallel both to the vertical and one horizontal
axis is also called a prism. There are hence three types of prisms here
included.
90. Prism of First Order. The prism of the first order includes the
four faces which, while parallel to the vertical
axis, meet the horizontal
axes at equal distances; its general symbol is
consequently (110). It is a
square prism, with interfacial angles of 90. It is shown in combination with
the base in Fig. 170. It is uniformly designated
by_the letter m. The in-
dices of its faces, taken in order, are 110,
110, 110, 110.
91. Prism of Second Order. The prism of the second order shown*
in combination with the base in Fig. 171 includes the four faces which are
parallel at once to the vertical and to a horizontal axis; it has, therefore, the
general symbol (100). It is a square prism with an angle between
any two
adjacent faces of 90. It is uniformly designated by _the letter a, and its
faces, taken in order, have the indices 100, 010, 100, 010.
It will be seen that the combination of this form with the base is the
analogue of the cube of the isometric system.
The faces of the prism of the first order truncate the edges of the prism
of the second order and vice versa. When both are equally developed, as in
Fig. 172, the result is a regular eight-sided prism, which, however, it must
be remembered, is a combination of two distinct forms.
It is evident that the two prisms described do not differ
geometrically
from one another, and furthermore, in a given case, the symmetry of this
class allows either to be made the first order, and the other the second order,
prism according to the position assumed for the horizontal axes. If on crys-
tals of a given species both forms occur together equally developed (or, on
the other hand, separately on different crystals) and without other faces
than the base, there is no means of telling them apart unless by minor char-
acteristics, such as striations or other markings on the
173
surface, etchings, etc. 001
92. Ditetragonal Prism. The
ditetragonal prism is
the form which is bounded by eight similar faces, each one
of which is parallel to the vertical axis while meeting the
two horizontal axes at unequal distances. It has the general
symbol (hkQ). It is shown in Fig. 173, where (hkO) = (210).
The successive faces_ have here the indices 210, 120, 120,
210, 210, 120, 120, 210.
In Fig. 185 a combination is shown of this form (y = 310)
with the second order prism, the edges of which it bevels.
In Fig. 189 (h = 210) it bevels the edges of the first order
prism m. In Fig. 190 = 310) it is combined with both
(I Ditetragonal Prism
orders of prisms.
93. Pyramids. There are three types of pyramids in this class, cor-
responding, respectively, to the three prisms which have just been described.
*
In Figs. 170-173 the dimensions of the form are made to correspond to the assumed
length of the vertical axis (here c = 178 as in octahedrite) used in Fig. 177. It must be
noted, however, that in the case of actual crystals of these forms, while the tetragonal
symmetry is usually indicated by the unlike physical character of the face c as compared
with the faces a, m, etc., in the vertical prismatic zone, no inference can be drawn as to the
relative length of the vertical axis. This last can be determined only when a pyramid is
present; it is fixed for the species when a particular pyramid is chosen as fundamental or
unit form, as explained later.
80 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
As already stated, the name pyramid is given (in systems other than the iso-
metric) to a form whose planes meet all three of the axes; in this system
the form whose planes meet the axis c and one horizontal axis while parallel
to the other is also called a pyramid. The pyramids of this class are strictly
double pyramids (bipyramids of some authors).
94. Pyramid of First Order. A pyramid of the first order, is a form
whose eight similar faces intersect the two horizontal axes at equal distances
and also intersect the vertical axis. It has the general symbol (hhl). It is
a square pyramid with equal interfacial angles over the terminal edges, and
the faces replace the horizontal, or basal, edges of the first order prism and
the solid angles of the second order prism. If the ratio of the vertical to the
horizontal axis for a given first order pyramid is the assumed axial ratio for
the species, the form is called the fundamental form, and it has the symbol
(lll)_as in_Fig. 174. The indices of its_faces_ me oned in order are: Above
111, 111, 111, 111; below 111, 111, 111, 111.
175 176 177
in
in
First Order Zircon, First Order Zircon, First Order Apophyllite, Second
Pyramid Prism and Pryamid Prism and Pyramids Order Prism and
First Order Pyramid
Obviously the angles of the first order pyramid, and hence its geometrical
aspect, vary widely with the length of the vertical axis. In Figs. 174 and
182 the pyramids shown have in both cases the
symbol (111) but in the first
case (octahedrite) c = 1.78, while in the second
(vesuvianite), c = 0.64.
For a given species there may be a number of second order
pyramids,
varying in position according to the ratio of the intercepts upon the vertical
and horizontal axes. Their symbols,
passing from the base (001) to the unit
prism (110), may thus be (115), (113), (223), (111), (332), (221),
(441), etc.
In the general symbol of these forms
(hhl), as h diminishes, the form approx-
imates more and more nearly to the base
(001), for which h = 0- as h in-
creases, the form passes toward the first order prism. In Fig. 176 two pvra-
mids of this order are shown, p(lll) and
w(331).
95. Pyramid of Second Order. The pyramid of the second order is
the iorm, .big. 178, whose faces are
parallel to one of the horizontal axes
while meeting the other two axes. The
general symbol is (hOl) These faces
.
replace the basal edges of the second order prism

(Fig. 179), and the solid
angles of the first order prism (cf. Fig. 180). It is a square pyramid since its'
basal section is a square, and the interfacial
angles over the four terminal
edges, above and below, are equal. The successivejaces of the form (101)
are as follows: Above 101, Oil, 101, Oil; below 101, Oil, 101, Oil.
If the ratio of the intercepts on the horizontal and vertical axes is the
assumed axial ratio of the species, the symbol is (101), and the form is desig-
nated by the letter e. This ratio can be deduced from the measurement of
either one of the interfacial angles (y or z, Fig. 178) over the terminal or basal
edges, as explained later. In the case of a given species, a number of second
180
Second Order Second Order Prism Rutile, Firstand Second

Pyramid and Pyramid Order Prisms and Pyra-
mids
order pyramids may occur, varying in the ratio of the axes a and c. Hence
there is possible a large number of such forms whose symbols may be, for
example, (104), (103), (102), (101), (302), (201), (301), etc. Those men-
tioned first come nearest to the base (001), those last to the second order
prism (100); the base is therefore the limit of these pyramids (hQl) when
h = 0, and the second order prism (100) when h = 1 and I = 0. Fig. 186
shows the three second order pyramids w(105), 6(101), g(201).
182 183
Vesuvianite Cassiterite
Vesuvianite
Order Prism, First Order Pyramid and First and Second Order
First
First and Scond Order Pyramids
Pyramid and Base
Prisms
of a given first
A second order pyramid truncating the pyramidal edges
as in 183 has the same ratio as itJor>h to I
,
Thus (
order pyramid Fig.
of etc. This is obvious
truncates the terminal edge of (111); (201) (221),
of the
because each face has the same position as the corresponding edge
other form (see Fig. 183, when - 111 and e = 101; also Figs. 186, 191,
truncates the
where r = 115, u = 105). Again, if a first order pyramid
second order its ratio for h to I is half
pyramidal edges of a given pyramid,
82 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
is, (112) truncates the pyramidal edges

that of the other form; that of (101);
(111) of (201), etc. This relation is exhibited by Fig. 186, where p(lll)
truncates the edges of 0(201). In both cases the zonal equations prove the
relations stated.
184 185 186
Vesuvianite Apophyllite Octahedrite

First and Second Order Second Order Prism, Dite- Two First Order Pyra-
Prisms, First Order Pyr- tragonal Prism, First mids, First Order Prism,
amid and Base Order Pyramid and Base Three Second Order
Pyramids and Base
96. Ditetragonal Pyramid. The ditetragonal pyramid, or double eight-

sided pyramid, is the form each of whose sixteen similar faces meets the
three axes at unequal distances. This is the most general case of the symbol
(hkl), where h, k, I are all unequal and no one is equal to 0. That there are
sixteen faces in a single form is evident. Thus, for example, for the form
(212) the face 212 is similar to 122, the two lateral axes being equal (not,
however, to 221). Hence there are two like faces in each octant. Similarly
the indices of all the faces in the successive octants are, therefore, as follows:
Above 212 122 122 212 212 122 122 212

Below 212 122 122 212 212 122 122 212
187 188 189 190
Ditetragonal Pyramid Zircon Cassiterite Rutile

First and Second Order
Prisms, First Order
Pyramid, Ditetrag-
onal Pyramid
This form is common with the species zircon, and is hence often called a
zirconoid. It is shown in Fig. 187- It is not observed alone,
though some-
times, as in Figs. 188 (x = 311) and 189 (z = 321), it is the predominating

form. In Fig. 190 two ditetragonal pyramids occur, namely,
/(313) and
Z\OZ\.), -g-
97. In addition to the perspective figures already
given, a basal projection (Fig. 191) is added of
the crystal of octahedrite already referred to (Fig.
186) also a stereographic (Fig. 192) and gnomonic
;
(Fig. 193) projections of the same with the faces of

the forms w(22l) and $(313) added. These exhibit
well the general relations of this normal class of the
tetragonal system. The symmetry here is to be
note<l first, with respect to the similar zones 100,
001, 100 and 010, 001, OH); also, to the other pair of
similar zones, 110, 001, 110, and Octahedrite
110, 001, 110.
192
no
010* :010
11
Stereographic Projection of Octahedrite

84 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
193
110
110\_221
\UO
4*
Gnomonic Projection of Octahedrite
2. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS (7).

IODOSUCCINIMIDE TYPE
(Ditetragonal Pyramidal or Holohedral
Hemimorphic Class)
98. Symmetry. This class differs from
the normal class only in having no horizontal
plane of symmetry; hence the forms are hemi-
morphic as defined in Art. 29. It is not known
to be represented among minerals, but is shown
on the crystals of iodosuccinimide. Its sym-
Symmetry of Hemimorphic Class P 6
^ S
f
" lu r ed
fo ^ * stereographic pro-
&
jection (Fig. 194). Here the two basal planes
are distinct forms, 001 and 001; the prisms do not differ geometrically from
those of the normal class, though distinguished by their molecular structure;

further, the pyramids are no longer double pyramids, but each form is rep-
resented by one half of Figs. 174, 178, 187 (cf. Fig. 44, p. 22). There are
hence six distinct pyramidal forms, corresponding to the upper and lower
halves of the first and second order pyramids and the ditetragonal pyramid.
3. TRIPYRAMIDAL CLASS (8). SCHEELITE TYPE.

( Tetragonal Bipyramidal or Pyramidal Hemihedral Class)
99. Typical Forms and Symmetry. The forms here included have
one plane of symmetry only, that of the horizontal crystallographic axes,
and one axis of tetragonal symmetry (the vertical crystallographic axis)
normal to it. The distinctive forms are the tetragonal prism (hkO) and
pyramid (hkl) of the third order, shown in Figs. 196, 197.
The stereographic projection, Fig. 195, 195
exhibits the symmetry of the class and the
distribution of the faces of the general form
(hkl). Comparing this, as well as the figures
immediately following, with those of the nor-
mal class, it is seen that this class differs from
itin the absence of the vertical planes of sym-
metry and the horizontal axes of symmetry.
100, Prism and Pyramid of the Third
Order. The
typical forms of the class,
as above stated, are a square prism and a
square pyramid, which are distinguished
respectively from the square prisms a (100)
and m(110), shown in Figs. 170 and 171 and
y Tri-Pyramidal Class
from the square pyramids (hOl) and (hhl)
"
of Figs. 174 and 178 by the name third order."
196 197 198
120
100
Third Order Prism Third Order Pyramid
The third order prism and pyramid may be considered as derived from
the ditetragonal forms of the normal class by taking only one half the faces
of the latter and the omission of the remaining faces. There are therefore
two complementary forms in each case, designated left and right, which
and dite-
together include all the faces of the ditetragonal prism (Fig. 173)
tragonal pyramid (Fig. 187) of the normal class.
CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
.
The indices of the faces of the two complementary prisms, as (210), are:
Left: 210, 120, 210, 120.

Right: 120, 210, 120, 210.
The indices of the faces of the corresponding pyramids, as (212), are:
Left: above 212, 122, 212, 122; below 212, 122, 212, 122.
Right: above 122, 212, 122, 212; below 122, 212, 122, 212.
Fig. 198 gives a transverse section of the prisms a(100)

and m(110), also
the prism of the third order (120). Figs. 196, 197 show the right prism (120)
and pyramid (122) of the third order.
101. Other Forms. The other forms of this class, that is, the base
c(001); the other square prisms, a(100) and ra(110); also the square pyra-
mids (hQl) and (hhl) are geometrically like the corresponding forms of the
normal class already described. The class shows therefore three types of
square pyramids and hence is called the tripyramidal .class.
102. To this class belongs the important species scheelite; also the
isomorphous species stolzite and powellite, unless it be that they are rather
to be classed with wulfenite (p. 87). Fig. 199 shows a typical crystal of
199 201
Scheelite Scheelite Meionite
scheelite,and Fig. 200 a basal section of one similar; these illustrate well the
characteristics of the class. Here the forms are e(101), p(lll), and the
third-order pyramids 0(212), s/131). Fig. 201 represents a meionite crystal
withr(lll), and the third-order pyramid 2(311). See also Figs. 203, 204, in
which the third-order prism is shown.
The forms of this class are sometimes described (see Art. 28) as showing
pyramidal hemihedrism.
4. PYRAMID AL-HEMIMORPHIC CLASS (9). WULFENITE TYPE

(Tetragonal Pyramidal or Hemihedral Hemimorphic Class)
103. Symmetry. The fourth class of the tetragonal system is closely

related to the class just described. It has the same vertical axis of tetrag-
onal symmetry, but there is no horizontal plane of symmetry. The forms
are, therefore, hemimorphic in the distribution of the faces (cf. Fig. 202).
The species wulfenite of the Scheelite Group among mineral species prob-
ably belongs here, although the crystals do not always show the difference
between the pyramidal faces, above and
below, which would characterize
distinct complementary forms.
Figs. 203, 204 could, therefore, serve as
illustrations of the preceding class, but in 203
Fig. 205 a characteristic distinction is exhib- M
ited. In these figures the forms are u(W2), *.
e(101), n(lll); also /(230), fc(210). z(432), S*
5. SPHENOIDAL CLASS (10).

CHALCOPYRITE TYPE
(Tetragonal Sphenoidal, Sphenoidal
Hemihedral or Scalenohedral Class)
104. Typical Forms and Symmetry. -
The typical forms of this class are the
sphenoid (Fig. 207) and the tetragonal sca- Symmetry of Pyramidal-Hemi-
morphic Class
lenohedron (Fig. 208). They and all the
combinations of this class show the following symmetry. The three
203
Wulfenite
crystallographic axes are axes of binary symmetry and there are two
vertical diagonal planes of symmetry.
This symmetry is exhibited in the stereo-
206 graphic projection (Fig. 206), which shows
also the distribution of the faces of the gen-
eral form (hkl). It is seen here that the faces
are present in the alternate octants only, and
it will be remembered that this same state-
ment was made of the tetrahedral class under
the isometric system. There is hence a close
analogy between these two classes. The sym-
metry of this class should be carefully compared
with that of the first and third classes of this
system already described.
105. Sphenoid. The sphenoid, shown in
-t" Fig. 207, is a four-faced solid, resembling
a tetrahedron, but each face is an isosceles
Symmetry of Sphenoidal Class 1
(not an equilateral) triangle. It may be consid-

88 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
ered as derived from the first order pyramid of the normal class by the
of only the alternate faces of the latter. There are therefore
development
two complementary forms known as the positive and negative
possible
unit sphenoid is (111), and
sphenoids. The general symbol qf_the_ positive
its faces have the jndices: 111, 111, 111, 111, while the negative sphenoid
has the symbol (111). When the complementary forms occur together, if
equally developed, the resulting solid, though having
two unlike sets of faces,
cannot be distinguished geometrically from the first order pyramid (111).
208
Sphenoid Tetragonal Scalenohedron
In the species chalcopyrite, which belongs to this class, the deviation in

angle and in axial ratio from the isometric system is very small, and hence
the unit sphenoid cannot by the eye be distinguished from a tetrahedron
(compare Fig. 209 with Fig. 144, p. 68). For this species c = 0'985 (instead
of 1, as in the isometric system), and the normal sphenoidal angle is 108 40',
instead of 109 28', the angle of the tetrahedron. Hence a crystal of chal-
copyrite with both the positive and negative sphenoids equally developed
closely resembles a regular octahedron.
In Fig. 210 the second order pyramids e(101) and z(201) and base c(001)
are also present.
209
Chalcopyrite
106. Tetragonal Scalenohedron. The sphenoidal symmetry yields

another distinct type of form, that shown in Fig. 208. It is bounded
by
eight similar scalene triangles, and hence is called a tetragonal Scalenohedron;
the general symbol is (hkl). It may be considered as derived from the
ditetragenal pyramid of the normal class by taking the alternate pairs of
faces of the latter form. The faces of the complementary positive and nega-
tive forms therefore embrace all the faces of the ditetragonal pyramid. This
form appears in combination in chalcopyrite, but is not observed inde-
pendently. In Fig. 211 the form s(531) is the positive tetragonal scaleno-
hedron.
107. Other Forms. The other forms of the class, namely, the first and
second order prisms,, the ditetragonal prism, and the first and second order
pyramids (hhl) and (MM), are geometrically like those of the normal class.
The lower symmetry in the molecular structure is onlv revealed by special
investigation, as by etching.
6. TRAPEZOHEDRAL CLASS (11). NICKEL SULPHATE TYPE

(Tetragonal Trapezohedral or Trapezohedral Hemihedral Class)
108. The trapezohedral class is analogous to the plagiohedral class under
the isometric system; it is characterized by the absence of any plane or
center of symmetry; the vertical axis, however, is an axis of tetragonal syi: -
metry, and perpendicular to this there are four axes of binary symmetry.
This symmetry and the distribution of the faces of the general form (hkl)
212 213
Symmetry of Trapezohedral Class Tetragonal Trapezohedron
are shown in the stereographic projection, Fig. 212, and Fig. 213 gives the
It may be derived from the dite-
resulting solid, a tetragonal trapezohedron.
the extension of the alternate faces
tragonal pyramid of the normal class by
of that form. There are two complementary forms called right- and left-
handed which embrace all the faces of the ditetragonal pyramid of the normal
class. These two forms are enantiomorphous, and the salts belonging to
this class show circular polarization.
Nickel sulphate and a few other artificial salts belong in this class.
7. TETARTOHEDRAL CLASS (12)
Tetartohedral Class)
(Tetragonal Bisphenoidal or Sphenoidal
109 Symmetry. The seventh and last possible class under this
system has no plane nor center of symmetry, but the vertical axis is an axis
of binary symmetry. The symmetry and the distribution of the faces of the
90 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
general form (hkl) are shown in the stereograph] c projection (Fig. 214), and
the solid resulting is known as a sphenoid of the third order. It can be derived
from the ditetragonal pyramid of the normal
class by taking only one quarter of the faces
of that form. There are therefore four com-
plementary forms which are respectively
distinguished as right ( and ) and left +
(+ and ). These four together embrace all
.
the sixteen faces of the ditetragonal pyramid.

The other characteristic forms of this class
are the prism of the third order ](hkty, the
positive and negative sphenoids of the first
order (111), and also those of the second
order (101). It is said that an artificial
compound, 2CaO.Al 2 03.SiO 2 crystallizes in ,
Symmetry of Tetartohedral Class this class.
MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF THE TETRAGONAL SYSTEM

llOo Choice of Axes. It appears from the discussion of the symmetry of the seven
classes of this system that with all of them the position of the vertical axis is fixed. In
classes 1, 2, however, where there are two sets of vertical planes of symmetry, either set
may be made the axial planes and the other the diagonal planes. The choice between these
two possible positions of the horizontal axes is guided particularly by the habit of the
occurring crystals and the relations of the given species to others of similar form. With
a species whose crystal characters have been described it is customary to follow the orien-
tation given in the original description.
111. Determination of the Axial Ratio, etc. The following relations serve to connect
the axial ratio, that is, the length of the vertical axis c, when a = 1, with the fundamental
angles (001 A 101) and (001 A 111):
tan (001 A 101) - c; tan (001 A 111) X

For faces in the same rectangular zone the tangent principle applies. The most im-
portant cases (cf. Fig. 214) are:
tan (001 A hOl) =
~ h
tan (001 A 101) I
'
tan (001 A OfcQ

=
" k
tan (001 A Oil) I
'
tan (001 A hhl) =

~ h
tan (001 A 111) l'
For the prisms
tan (010 A fcfcO)
= tan (100 A hkQ] =
112. Other Calculations. It will be noted that in the stereographic projection (Fig.
214) all those spherical triangles are right-angled which are_ formed by great circles (diam-
eters) which meet the prismatic zone-circle 100, 010, 100,_010. Again, all those formed by
great circles drawn between 100 and 100, or 010 and 010, and crossing respectively the
zone-circles 100, 001, 100, or 010, 001, 010. Also, all those formed by great circles drawn
between 110 and 110 and crossing the_zone-circle 110, 001, 110, or between 110 and 110
and crossing the zone-circle 110, 001, 110.
These spherical triangles may hence be readily used to calculate any angles desired; for
example, the angles between the pole of any face, as hkl (say 321), and the pinacoids 10_0,
010, 001. The terminal angles (x and z, Fig. 187) of the ditetragonal pyramid, 212 A 212
(or 313 A 313, etc.), and 212 A 122 (or 313 A 133, etc.), can also be obtained in the same
way. The zonal relations give the symbols of the poles on the zones 001, 100 and 001, 110
for the given case. For example, the zone-circle 110, 313, 133, 110 fneets 110, 001, 110 at
the pole 223, and the calculated angle 313 A 223 is half
given bek>w
r ^ the angle 313 A 133
"* tO ** Calculated tt is more Convenient If a laree
to use a formula
>
113. Formulas. It is sometimes convenient to have

the normal interfacial angles
expressed directly in terms of the axis c and the indices h, k, and I Thus '
These may also be expressed in the form
P& = |Ti
2 2
', tan 2 PC
'- <- /CC 2
(2) For the distance between the poles of any two faces (hkl), (pqr), we have in general
cos PQ = v : -^
[(# + k 2 )c 2 + +r
2 2 2 2 z
I ] [(p -f o )c ]
The above equations take a simpler form for special cases often occurring; for example,
for hkl and the angle of the edge y of Fig. 187.
114. Prismatic Angles. The angles for the commonly occurring ditetragonal prisms
are as follows*
Angle on Angle on Angle on Angle on

0(100) w(110) o(100) w(llO)
410 14 21' 3057f 530 30 57*' 14 21'
310 18 26 26 34 320 33 41J 11 18|
210 26 34 18 26 430 36 521 8 7|
115. To determine, by plotting, the axial ratio, a c, of a tetragonal mineral from the
:
stereographic projection of its crystal forms. As an illustrative example it has been

assumed that the angles between the faces on the crystal of rutile, represented in Fig 180,
have been measured and from these measurements the poles of the faces in one octant
located on the stereographic projection, see Fig. 215. In determining the axial ratio of a
tetragonal crystal (or what is the same thing, the length of the c axis, since the length of
the a axes are always taken as equal to 1) it is necessary to assume the indices of some
pyramidal form. It is customary to take a pyramid which is prominent upon the crystals
of the mineral and assume that it is the fundamental or unit pyramid of either the first or
second order and has as its symbol either (111) or (101). In the example chosen both a
first order and a second order pyramid are present and from their zonal relations it is evi-
dent that if the symbol assigned to the first order form be (111) that of the second order
form must be (101), In order to determine the relative length of the c axis in respect to
the length of the a axis for rutile therefore, it is only necessary to plot the intercept of
either of these forms upon the axes. In the case of the second order pyramid it is only
necessary to construct a right angle triangle (see upper left hand quadrant of Fig. 215) in
which the horizontal side shall equal the length of the a axis, (1), the vertical side shall
represent the c axis and the hypothenuse shall show the proper angle of slope of the face.
The angle between the center of the projection and the pole e(101) is measured by the
stereographic protractor and a line drawn making that angle with the line representing the
c axis. The hypothenuse of the triangle must then be at right angles to this pole. Its
intercept upon the vertical side of the triangle, when expressed in relation to the distance
(0-M) which was chosen as representing unity on the a axis, will therefore give the length
of the c axis. In rutile this is found to be 0.644.
The same value is obtained when the position of the pyramid of the first order s(lll)
is used. In this case the line M-P-N is first drawn at right angles to the radial line 0-P
drawn through the pole s(lll). The triangle to be plotted in this case has the distance
O-P as the length of its horizontal side. Its hypothenuse must be at right angles to the
line representing the pole to (111). The intercept on the c axis is the same as in the first
case.
CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
216
H010
116. To determine, by plotting, the indices of any face (hkl) of a tetragonal form from
the position of its pole on the stereographic projection. The solution of this problem is
like that given in a similar case under the -Isometric System, see p. 74, except that the
intercept of the face on the vertical axis must be referred to the established unit length of
that axis and not to the length of the a axis. The method is exactly the reverse of the
one used in the problem discussed directly above.
117. To determine, by plotting, the axial ratio, a c, of a tetragonal mineral from the
:
gnomonic projection of its crystal forms. As an illustrative example consider the crystal
of rutile, Fig. 180, the poles to the faces of which, are shown plotted in gnomonic projec-
tion in Fig. 216. The pyramids of the first and second order present are taken as the
unit forms with the symbols, s(lll) and e(101). The lines O-M and O-N represent the
two horizontal axes a\ and az and the distance from the center O to the circumference of
the fundamental circle is equal to unity on these axes. The intercepts on O-M and O-N
made by the poles of e (101) or the perpendiculars drawn from the poles of s(lll) give the
unit length of the vertical axis, c. In this case this distance, when expressed in terms of
the assumed length of the horizontal axes (which in the tetragonal system always equals
1) is equal to 0.64.
That the above relation is true is -obvious from a consideration of Fig. 216. This rep-
resents a vertical section through the spherical and gnomonic projection including the
horizontal axis, 02. The slope of the face e(011) is plotted with its intercepts on the a2
and c axes and the position of its pole in both the spherical and gnomonic projections is
shown. It is seen through the two similar triangles in the figure that the distance from
the center to the pole e(011) in the gnomonic projection must be the same as the intercept
of the face e upon the vertical axis c. And as e is a unit form this must represent unity on c.
118. To determine, by plotting, the indices of any face of a tetragonal form from the
It is assumed that in this case a mineral
position of its pole on the gnomonic projection.
is being considered whose
axial ratio is known. Un- 217
der these conditions draw
perpendiculars from the
pole in question to the
lines representing the two
horizontal axes. Then
space off on these lines
distances equivalent to the
length of the c axis, remem-
bering that it must be
expressed in terms of the
length of the horizontal
axes which in turn is equal
to the distance from the
center of the projection
to the circumference of the
fundamental circle. Give
the intercepts of the lines
drawn from the pole of
the face to the axes a\
and a2 in terms of the
length of the vertical axis,
add a 1 as the third figure
and if necessary clear of
fractions and the required
indices are the result. This
is illustrated in Fig. 217,
which is the lower right
hand quadrant of the gno-
monic projection of the
forms shown on the rutile
drawn from its pole
e dttetragonal pyramid ,(321), Perpendiculars .interact
as
- h
sr
94 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
the indices of the face in question. The indices of a prism face like (310) can be readily
obtained in exactly the same manner as described under the Isometric System, Art. 84.
p. 75.
III. HEXAGONAL SYSTEM

119. The HEXAGONAL SYSTEM includes all the forms which are referred
to four axes, three equal horizontal axes in a common plane intersecting at
angles of 60, and a fourth, vertical axis, at right angles to them.
Two sections are here included, each embracing a number of distinct
classes related among themselves. They are called the Hexagonal Division
and the Trigonal (or Rhombohedral) Division. The symmetry of the former,
about the vertical axis, belongs to the hexagonal type, that of the latter to
the trigonal type.
Miller (1852) referred all the forms of the hexagonal system to three equal axes parallel
to the faces of the fundamental rhombohedron, and hence intersecting at equal angles, not
90. This method (further explained in Art. 169) had the disadvantage of failing to bring
out the relationship between the normal hexagonal and tetragonal types, both characterized
by a principal axis of symmetry, which (on the system adopted in this book) is the vertical
crystallographic axis. It further gave different symbols to faces which are
crystallq-
graphically identical. It is more natural to employ the three rhombohedral axes for tri-
gonal forms only, as done by Groth (1905), who includes these groups in a Trigonal System;
but this also has some disadvantages. The indices commonly used in describing hexagonal
forms are known as the Miller-Bravais indices, since they were adopted by Bravais for use
with the four axes from the scheme used by Miller in the other crystal systems.
120. SymmetryClasses. There are five possible classes in the Hex-

agonal Division. Of these the normal class is much the most important, and
two others are also of importance among crystallized minerals.
In the Trigonal Division there are seven classes; of these the rhombo-
hedral class or that of the Calcite Type, is by far the most common, and
three others are also of importance.
121. Axes and Symbols. The position of the four axes taken is
shown in Fig. 218; the three horizontal axes are called a, since they are equal
and Interchangeable, and the vertical axis is c, since it has a different length,
218 being either longer or shorter than the horizontal
axes. The length of the vertical axis is expressed
in terms of that of the horizontal axes which in turn
isalways taken as unity. Further, when it is de-
between the horizontal axes
sirable to distinguish
they may be designated i, a2 a 3 When properly
,
.
orientated one of the horizontal axes (a 2 ) is par-

allelto the observer and the other two make angles
of 30either side of the line perpendicular to him.
The axis to the left is taken as ai, the one to the
right as a 3 . The positive and negative ends
Hexagonal Axes
of
^
e axes are shown in Fig. 218. The general
position of any plane may be expressed in a
manner analogous to that
1111
applicable in the other
h^'-k^'-i"*''!*' . ;
systems, viz.-
The corresponding indices for a given plane are then h, k, i, I; these

always
refer to the axes named in the above scheme. Since it is found convenient
HEXAGONAL SYSTEM 95
to consider the axis a3 as negative in front and positive behind, the

general
symbol becomes hkll. Further, as following from the angular relation of
the three horizontal axes, it can be readily shown to be always true that the
algebraic sum of the indices h, k f i. is equal to zero:
h +k+i= 0.
A. Hexagonal Division
1. NORMAL CLASS (13). BERYL TYPE

(Dihexagonal Bipyramidal or Holohedral Class)
122. Symmetry. Crystals belonging to the normal class of the Hex-

agonal Division have one principal axis of hexagonal, or sixfold, symmetry,
which coincides with the vertical crystallographic axis; also six horizontal
axes of binary symmetry; three of these coincide with the horizontal crystal-
lographic axes, the others bisect the angles between them. There is one
principal plane of symmetry which is the plane of the horizontal crystallo-
graphic axes and six vertical planes of symmetry 219
which meet in the vertical crystallographic axis.
Three of these vertical planes include the hori-
zontal crystallographic axes and the other three
bisect the angles between the first set.
The symmetry of this class is exhibited in the
accompanying stereographic projection, Fig.
219, and by the following crystal figures.
The analogy between this class and the
normal class of the tetragonal system is
obvious at once and will be better appreciated
as greater familiarity is gained with the indi-
vidual forms and their combinations.
123. Forms. -
The possible forms in this of Normal claas
class are as follows:
MUler-Bravaia.
1. Base (0001)
2. Prism of the first order (1010)
3. Prism of the second order (1120)
4. Dihexagonal prism (hkiG) as, (2130)
(2021) etc.
5. Pyramid of the first order (M)W)_as, (1011);
6. Pyramid of the second order (h-h-Zh-l) as, (1122)
7. Dihexagonal pyramid (ftM) as, (2131)
In the above h > k, and h +k= i.
124. Base. The

base, or basal pinacoid,
includes the two faces, 0001
d
and OOOT, parallel to the plane of the horizontal axes. It is uniformly
nated by the letter c; see Fig. 220 et seq. .
125, Prism of the First Order. There are three types of prisms, or
forms in which the faces are parallel to the vertical axis.
96 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The prism of the first order. Fig. 220, includes six faces, each one of which
parallel to the vertical axis and meets two adjacent
is horizontal axes at
It has hence
equal distances, while iîs parallel to the third horizontal axis.
the general symbol (1010) and is uniformly designated by the letter m; the
indices of its six faces taken in order (see Figs. 220 and 229, 230) are:
10TO, OlTO, TlOO, 1010, 0110, lIOO.
221
HEXAGONAL SYSTEM 97
2130, 1230, 1320, 2310, 3210, 3120,

2130, 1230, 1320, 2310, 32lO, 3l20.
128. Pyramids of the First Order. Corresponding to the three types

of prisms just mentioned, there are three types of pyramids
A pyramid of the first order, Fig. 224, is a double six-sided pyramid (or
bipyramid) bounded by twelve similar triangular faces six above and six
below which have the same position relative to the horizontal axes as the
faces of the first order prism, while they also intersect the vertical axis above
and below. The general symbol is hence (hOhl). The faces of a given form,
as 1011), are:
Above 1011, 0111, 1101, 1011, 0111, 1101.
Below 1011, 0111, 1101,, 1011, 0111, lIOl.
On a given species there may be a number of pyramids of the first order,

differing in the ratio of the intercepts on the horizontal to the vertical axis,
and thus forming a zone between the base (0001) and the faces of the unit
prism (1010). Their symbols, passing from the base (0001) tojthe unit
prism (1010), would be, for example, 1014, 1012, 2023, 1011, 3032, 2021,
etc. In Fig. 228 the faces p_and u are first order pyramids and they have
the symbols respectively (1011) and (2021), here c = 0.4989. As shown in
these cases the faces of the first order pyramids replace the edges of the first
order prism. On the other hand, they replace the solid angles of the second
order prism a(112Q).
224 226
First Order Pyramid Second Order Pyramid Dihexagonal Pyramid
129. Pyramids of the Second Order. The pyramid of the second order
a
isdouble six-sided pyramid including the twelve similar faces
(Fig. 225),
which have the same position relative to the horizontal axes as the faces
of the second order prism, and which also intersect the vertical
axis. They
have the general symbol (h'h-2h-l). The indices of the faces of the form
(1122) are:
Above 2112, 1122, 1212, 2112.
1122, 1212,
Below 2112, 1122, 1212, 2112.
1122, 1212,
The faces of the second order pyramid replace the edges between the faces
of the second order prism and_the base. Further, they replace the solid angles
of the first order prism m(1010). There may be on a single crystal:a .num-
the base c(0(
ber of second order pyramids forming a zone between
98 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
the faces_of the second order prism a(1120), as, naming them in order: JL 124,
1122, 2243, 1121, etc. In Fig. 227, s is the second order pyramid (1121).
130. Dihexagonal Pyramid. The dihexagonal pyramid, Fig. 226, is a
double twelve-sided pyramid, having the twenty-four similar faces embraced
under the general symbol (hk'd). It is bounded by twenty-four similar
faces, each meeting the vertical axis, and also meeting two adjacent hori-
zontal axes at unequal distances, the ratio of which always lies between
1 : 1 and 1:2. Thus the form (2131) includes the following twelve faces in
the upper half of the crystal:
2131, 1231, 1321, 2311, 3211, 3121,

2131, 1231, 1321, 2311, 3211, 3121.
And similarly below with I (here 1) negative, 2131, etc. The dihexagonal
pyramid is often called a berylloid because a common form with the
species
beryl. The dihexagonal pyramid v(2131) is shown on Figs. 224, 225.
131. Combinations. Fig. 227 of beryl shows a combination of the
227
Beryl
base_c(0001) and prism m(1010) with the_first order pyramids p(10ll) and
tt(2Q21); the second order pyramid s(1121) and the dihexagonal pyramid
p(2131). Both the last forms lie in a zone between m
and s, for which it is
true that k = I. The basal projection of a similar crystal shown in
Fig. 228
is very instructive as
exhibiting the symmetry of the normal hexagonal
class. This is also true of the stereographic and gnomonic
projections in
Figs. 229 and 230 of a like crystal with the added form 0(1122).
2. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS (14). ZINCITE TYPE

(Dihexagonal Pyramidal or Holohedral Hemimorphic Class)
132. Symmetry. This class differs from the normal class

only in
having no horizontal plane of principal symmetry and no horizontal axes
of binary symmetry. It has, however, the same six vertical
planes of sym-
metry meeting at angles of 30 in the vertical crystallographic axis which is
2110
0110
1100
1010
100 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
an axis of hexagonal symmetry. There no center of symmetry. The

is
symmetry exhibited in the stereographic

is
projection, Fig. 231.

133. Forms. - - The forms to belonging
this are the two basal
class planes, 0001
and 0001, here distinct forms, the positive
(upper) and negative (lower) pyramids of
each of the three types; also the
three prisms,
which last do not differ geometrically from
the prisms of the normal class. An example
of this class is found in zincite, Fig. 44,
p. 22. lodyrite, greenockite and wurtzite are
also classed here.
Symmetry of Hemimorphic Class
3. TRIPYRAMIDAL CLASS (15). APATITE TYPE

(Hexagonal Bipyramidal or Pyramidal Hemihedral Class)
134. Typical Forms and Symmetry. This class is important because
it includes the common species of the Apatite Group, apatite, pyromorphite,
mimetite, vanadinite. The typical form is the hexagonal prism (hklO) and
the hexagonal pyramid (hktl), each designated as of the third order. These
forms which are shown in Figs. 233 and 234 may be considered as derived
from the corresponding dihexagonal forms of the normal class by the omis-
sion of one half of the faces of the latter. They and the other forms of the
class have only one plane of symmetry, the plane of the horizontal axes, and
also one axis of hexagonal symmetry (the vertical axis).
The symmetry is exhibited in the stereo-
graphic projection (Fig. 232). It is seen here,
as in the figures of crystals given, that, like
the tripyramidal class under the tetragonal
system, the faces of the general form (hk~l)
are half of the possible planes belong-
present
ing to each sectant, and further that those
above and below fall in the same vertical
zone.
135. Prism and Pyramid of the Third
Order. The prism of the third order (Fig.
233) has six like faces embraced under the
general symbol (hkiQ) and the form is a regular
,
hexagonal prism with angles of 60, not to be

distinguished geometrically, if alone, from the Symmetry of Tripyramidal Class
other hexagonal prisms; cf. Figs. 220, 221,
p. 96. The six faces of the right-handed form (2130) have the indices
2130, 1320, 3210, 2l30, 1320, 32lO.
The faces of the complementary left-handed form have the indices:
1230, 23lO, 3120, 1230, 2310, 3l20
As already stated these two forms together embrace all the faces of the
dihexagonal prism (Fig. 222).
HEXAGONAL SYSTEM 101
233 234 236
Third Order Prism Third Order Pyramid
The pyramid isalso a regular double hexagonal pyramid of the third

order, and in its relations to the other hexagonal pyramids of the class
(Figs.
224, 225) it is analogous to the square pyramid of the third order met with
in the corresponding class of the_ tetragonal system (see Art. 100). The
faces of the right-handed form (2131) are:
Above 2131, 1321,
3211, 2131, 1321, 3211.
Below 2131, 3211,
1321, 2131, 1321, 3211.
There is also a complementary left-handed form, which with this embraces
all the faces of the dihexagonal pyramid. The cross section of Fig. 235 shows
in outline the position of the first order prism, and also that of the right-
handed prism of the third order.
The prism and pyramid just described do not often appear on crystals as
predominating forms, though this is sometimes the case, but commonly these
faces are present modifying other fundamental forms.
136. Other Forms. The remaining forms of the class are geometri-
cally like those of the normal class, viz., the base (0001) the first order prism
;
(1010); the second order prism (1120);_ the first order pyramids (hQhl);
and the second order pyramids (h'h'2h'l). That their molecular struc-
ture, however, corresponds to the symmetry of this class is readily proved, for
example, by etching. In this way it was shown that
pyromorphite and mimetite belonged in the same
group with apatite (Baumhauer), though crystals with
the typical forms had not been observed. This class
is given its name of Tripyramidal because its forms
include three distinct types of pyramids.
137. A
typical crystal of apatite is given_ in Fig.
236. It shows the third order pjism ft(2130), and
the third order pyramids, M_(2131), n_(3141); also
the order pyramids r(1012), z(1011), </(2021),
first
the second order pyramids K1122), s(1121);
finally, the prism w(1010), and the base c(0001). Apatite
4 PYRAMIDAL-HEMIMORPHIC CLASS (16). NEPHELITE TYPE

(Hexagonal Pyramidal or Pyramidal Hemihedral Hemimorphic Class)
138. Symmetry. A fourth class under the hexagonal division, the
that the
pyramidal-hemimorphic class, is like that just described, except
102 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
is absent,
forms are hemimorphic. The single horizontal plane of symmetry
but the vertical axis is still an axis of hexagonal symmetry. This symmetry
is shown in the stenographic projection of Fig.
237. The typical form would
be like the upper half of Fig. 234 of the pyramid of the third order.
The
is shown by the character of the etching-figures (Kg.
species nephelite
Groth after Baumhauer) to belong here.
237
Symmetry of Pyramidal-Hemimorphic Class Nephelite
5. TRAPEZOHEDRAL CLASS (17)
(Hexagonal Trapezohedral or Trapezohedral Hemihedral Class)

139.Symmetry. The last class of this division is the trapezohedral
class. It hasno plane of symmetry, but the vertical axis is an axis of hex-
agonal symmetry, and there are, further, six horizontal axes of binary sym-
metry. There is no center of symmetry. The symmetry and the distribu-
tion of the faces of the typical form (hkll) is shown in the stereographic pro-
jection (Fig. 239). The typical forms may be derived from the dihexagonal
pyramid by the omission of the alternate faces of the latter. There are two
possible types known as the right and left hexagonal trapezohedroris (see
239 240
/ V o,{ >
(--AA-H
V ?% /
Symmetry of Trapezohedral Class Hexagonal Trapezohedron
Fig. 240), which are enantiomorphous, and the few crystallized salts falling
in this class show circular polarization. A modification of quartz known as
is also described as The

/3-quartz belonging here. indices of the right form
(2131) are as follows:
Above 2131, 1321, 3211, 2131, 1321, 32ll.
Below 1231, 2311, 3121, 1231, 23ll, 3l2l.
B. Trigonal or Rhombohedral Division
(Trigonal System)
140. General Character. As stated on p. 19, the classes of this division
are characterized by a vertical axis of trigonal, or threefold, symmetry.
There are seven classes here included of which the rhombohedral class of the
Calcite Type is by far the most important.
1. TRIGONAL CLASS (18). BENITOITE TYPE

(Ditrigonal Bipyramidal, Trigonal Hemihedral or Trigonotype Class)
141. Typical Forms and Symmetry. This class has, besides the ver-
tical axis of trigonalsymmetry, three horizontal axes of binary symmetry
which are diagonal to the crystallographic axes. There are four planes of
symmetry, one horizontal, and three vertical diagonal planes intersecting at
angles of 60 in the vertical axis. The symmetry and the distribution of the
faces of the positive ditrigonal pyramid is shown in Fig. 241. The char-
acteristic forms are as follows. Trigonal prism consisting of three faces
comprising one half the faces of the hexagonal prism of the first_order. They
are of two types, called positive (1010) and negative (0110). Trigonal
241 242
Symmetry of Trigonal Class Benitoite (Palache)
faces corresponding
pyramid, a double three-faced pyramid, consisting of six
to one half the faces of the hexagonal pyramid of the first order. The faces
of the upper and lower halves f alj_ in vertical zones with each other. There
are two types, called positive (1011) and negative (0111). Ditrigonal prism
consists of six vertical faces arranged in three similar sets of two faces and
It may be de-
having therefore the alternate edges of differing character.
rived from the dihexagonal prism by taking alternating pairs of faces. Ditri-
gonal pyramid consists of twelve faces, six above

and six below. It, like the
prism, may be derived from the dihexagonal
form by taking alternate pairs
of faces of the latter. The faces of the upper and lower halves fall in vertical
104 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
zones. The only representative of this class known is the rare mineral
in Fig. 242. This crystal shows
benitoite, a crystal of which is represented
the trigonal prisms m(1010) and ^(01 10), the hexagonal_ prism of_the second
order, a(1120), the trigonal pyramids, p(1011]
and Tr(Olll); 6(0112) and the
hexagonal pyramid of the second order, x(2241)
2. RHOMBOHEDRAL CLASS (19). CALCITE TYPE .
Hemihedral Class)
(Ditrigonal Scalenohedral or Rhombohedral
142. Typical Forms and Symmetry. The typical forms of the rhom-
bohedral class are the rhombohedron (Fig. 244) and the scalenohedron (Fig.
259). These forms, with the projections,
243
Figs. 243 and 269, illustrate the symmetry
I
-^ characteristic of the class.
!
There are three
>.-- planes of symmetry only; these are diangoal
to the horizontal crystallographic axes and
intersect at angles of 60 in the vertical crystal-
lographic axis. This axis is with these forms
an axis of trigonal symmetry; there are,
further, three horizontal axes diagonal to the
crystallographic axes of binary symmetry.
Compare Fig. 244, also Fig. 245 et seq.
By comparing Fig. 269 with Fig. 229, p.
of Rhombohedral 99, it will be seen that all the faces in half
Symmetry
Class the sectants are present. This group is hence
analogous to the tetrahedral class of the iso-
metric system, and the sphenoidal class of the tetragonal system.
143. Rhombohedron. Geometrically described, the rhombohedron is
a solid bounded by six like faces, each a rhomb. It has six like lateral edges
forming a zigzag line about the crystal, and six like terminal edges, three
above and three in alternate position below. The vertical axis joins the two
trihedral solid angles, and the horizontal axes join the middle points of the
opposite sides, as shown in Fig. 244.
244 245 246
Positive Rhombohedron Calcite Negative Rhombohedron Positive Rhombohedron

Hematite
The general symbol of the rhombohedron is (hQhl), and the successive
faces of the unit form (1011) have the indices:
Above, lOll, IlOl, Olll; below, OlIT, Toil, llol.
The geometrical shape of the rhombohedron varies widely as the angles

change, and consequently the relative length of the vertical axis c (expressed
in terms of the horizontal axes, a = 1). As the vertical axis diminishes, the
rhombohedrons become more and more obtuse or flattened; and as it increases
they become more and more acute. A cube placed with an octahedral axis
vertical is obviously the limiting case between the obtuse and acute forms
where the interfacial angle is 90. In Fig. 244 of calcite the normal rhom-
bohedral angle is 74 55' and c = 0-854, while for Fig. 246 of hematite this
angle is 94 and c
= 1-366. Further, Figs. 246-251 show other rhombohe-
drons of calcite, namely, I (0112), (0554), /(0221), M(4041), and p(16-0-16-l) ;
</>
here the vertical axes are in the ratio of J, f 2, 4, 16, to that of the funda-
,
mental (cleavage) rhombohedron of Fig. 244, whose angle determines the

value of c.
247 249 250 261
253 254
Figs. 247-252, Calcite Figs. 253-254, Gmelinite
144. Positive and Negative Rhombohedrons. To every positive

rhombohedron there may be an inverse and complementary form, identical
in the_ alternate sectants. Thus
geometrically, but bounded by faces falling
the negative form of the unit rhombohedron (0111) shown in Fig. 245 has
the faces:
1101; below, 1101, 0111, 1011.
Above, Olll, 1011,
270) should be care-
The position of these in the projections (Figs. 269,
studied. Of the figures already referred to Figs .244, 246, 250 are
fully
249 negative, rhombohedrons; Fig. 251
positive, and Figs. 245, 247, 248,
shows both forms. . ,
It will be seen that the two complementary positive

and negative rhom-
all the like faces of the
bohedrons of given axial length together embrace
double six-sided hexagonal pyramid of the
first order. When these two
rhombohedrons are equally developed the form
is geometrically
.identical
with this pyramid. This is illustrated by Fig. 254 of gmelimte r(1011),
106 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
of quartz, r(1011), 3(0111).* In each

p(0111) and by Figs. 284, 285, p. 113,
case the form, which is geometrically a double hexagonal pyramid (in Fig.
254 with c and m), is in fact a combination of the two unit rhombohedrons,
positive and negative. Commonly a difference in size between the two forms
be as in Figs. 253 and 286, where the form taken as the posi-
may observed,
tive rhombohedron predominates. But even if this distinction cannot be
established, the two rhombohedrons can always
be distinguished by etching,
or, as in the case
of quartz, by pyro-electrical phenomena.
145. Of the two series, or zones, of rhombohedrons the faces of the posi-
tiverhombohedrons replace the edges between the base (0001) and the first
order prism (1010). Also the faces of the negative rhombohedrons replace the
alternate edges of the same forms, that is, the edges between (0001) and
(0110) (compare Figs. 253, 254, etc.). Fig. 255 shows the rhombohed_ron
in combination with the base. Fig. 256 the same with the prism a(1120).
When the angle between the two forms happens to approximate to 70 32'
the crystal simulates the aspect of a regular octahedron. This is illustrated
by Fig. 257; here co
= 69 42', also oo = 71 22', and the crystal resembles
closely an octahedron with truncated edges (cf. Fig. 99, p. 55).
255 257 258
Figs. 255, 256, Hematite Coquimbite Eudialyte

There is a very simple relation between the positive and negative
146.
rhombohedrons which it is important to remember. The form of one series
which truncates the terminal edges of a given form of the other will have one
half the intercept on the vertical crystallographic axis of the latter. This
ratio is expressed in the values of the indices of the two forms. Thus (0112),
truncates the terminal edges of the positive unit rhombohedron (1011);
(1014) truncates the terminal edges_of (0112),_(1015) of (2025). Again (1011)
truncates the edges of (0221), (4041) of _(0221), etc. This is illustrated by
Fig. 252 with the forms r(1011) and /(0221). Also in Fig. 258,_a basal pro-
jection^ 2(1014) truncates the edges of e(0112); c(0112) of r(1011); r(1011)
of s(0221).
147. Scalenohedron. The scalenohedron, shown in Fig. 259, is the
general form for this class corresponding to the symbol hkll. It is a solid,
bounded by twelve faces, each a scalene triangle. It has roughly the shape
of a double six-sided pyramid, but there are two sets of terminal edges, one
more obtuse than the other, and the lateral edges form a zigzag edge around
the form like that of the rhombohedron. It may be considered as derived
from the dihexagonal pyramid by taking the alternating pairs of faces of
*
Quartz serves as a convenient illustration in this case, none the less so notwithstand-
ing the fact that it belongs to the trapezohedral class of this division.
that form. It is to be noted that the faces in the lower half of the form do
not vertical zones with those of the upper half.
fall in Like the rhombohe-
drons, the scalenohedrons may be either positive or negative.
The positive forms correspond in position to the positive
rhombohedrons and conversely.
The positive scalenohedron (2131), Fig. 259, has the fol-
lowing indices for the several faces:
Above 2131, 2311, 3211, 1231, 1321, 3l21
an
Below 1231, 1321, 3121, 2131, 2311, 3211.
For the complementary negative scalenohedron (1231) the
indices of the faces are:
Above 1231, 1321, 3121, 2131, 2311, 32ll.
Below 2311, 3211, 1231, 1321, 3l2l, 2131.
148. Relation of Scalenohedrons to Rhombohedrons. It was
noted above that the scalenohedron in general has a series of Q ,
bcaler
, X
zigzag lateral edges like the rhombohedron. It is obvious, further,
that for every rhombohedron there will be a series or zone of scalenohedrons
having the same lateral edges. This is shown in Fig. 262, where the scalenohedron
260 261 262 263
Figs. 260-263, Calcite

264 265 266 267
Figs. 264, 265, Corundum Figs. 266, 267, Spangolite*
w(2l3l) bevels the lateral edges of the fundamental

rhombohedron r(10Tl); the same
would be true of the scalenohedron (3251), etc. Further, in Fig. 263, the negative scaleno-
hedron 3(1341) bevels the lateral edges of the negative rhombohedron /(0221). The rela-
for example, for the
tion of the indices which must exist in these cases may be shown to be,
= k, etc. See also the pro-
rhombohedron r(lOTl), h - k + l\ again for /(0221), h + 21
defined with
jections, Figs. 269, 270. Further, the position of the scalenohedron may be
reference to its parent rhombohedron. For example in Fig. 262 the scalenohedron y (2 131)
in Fig. 263
has three times the vertical axis of the unit rhombohedron r(1011). Again
re (1341) has twice the vertical axis
of /(0221).
* to the next (hemimorphic) group, but this fact does not

Spangolite belongs properly
destroy the value of the illustration.
149. Other Forms. The remaining forms of the normal class of the
rhombohedral division are geometrically like
those of the corresponding class of the hexa-
gonal division viz._,
the base c(0001); the
prisms ra(lOlO), a(1120), (teO); also the second
order pyramids, as (1121). Some of these
forms are shown in the accompanying figures.
For further illustrations reference may be made
to typical rhombohedral species, as calcite, hema-
tite, etc.
With
respect to the second order pyramid, it
interesting to note that if it occurs alone
is
(as in Fig. 264, n

= 2243) it is impossible to
Calcite say, on geometrical grounds, whether it has the
trigonal symmetry of the rhombohedral type
or the hexagonal symmetry of the hexagonal type. In the latter case,
2110
m l
1120
1010
m
Calcite
the form might be made a first order pyramid by exchanging the axial and
diagonal planes of symmetry. The true symmetry, however, is often indi-
cated, as with corundum, by the occurrence on_ other crystals_^)f rhombo-

hedral faces, as r(1011) in Fig. 265 (here z = 2241, co = 14-14-28-3). Even
if rhombohedral faces are absent (Fig. 266), the etching-figures (Fig. 267)
will often serve to_ reveal the true trigonal molecular symmetry; here
o = (1124), p = (1122).
150. A basal projection of a somewhat complex crystal of calcite is given
in Fig. 268, and stereographic and gnomonic projections of the same forms
in Figs. 269 and 270; both show well the symmetry in the distribution
270
of the faces. Here the forms are: prisms, a(l_120), ra(10lO); rhombohedrons,
e(0112), /(0221); scalenohedrons. positive,
positive, r(lOll), negative,
3. RHOMBOHEDRAL-HEMIMORPHIC
CLASS(20). TOURMALINE TYPE
(Ditrigonal Pyramidal or Trigonal
Hemihedral Hemimorphic Class)
151. Symmetry. A number of prominent
rhombohedral species, as tourmaline, pyrar-
to a hemimorphic class
gyrite, proustite, belong
under this division. For them the symmetry
in the grouping of the faces differs at
the two
the vertical axis. The forms have
extremities of Symmetry of
of symmetry Rhombohedral-Hemimorphic
the same three diagonal planes
in the vertical axis, Class
meeting at angles of 60
110 CRYSTALLOGRAP
which is an axis of trigonal symmetry. There are, however, no hori-

zontal axes of symmetry, as in the rhombohedral class, and there is no
center of symmetry. Cf. Fig. 271.
152. Typical Forms. In this class the basal planes (0001) and (0001)
are distinct Jorms. The other characteristic forms are the two trigonal
prisms ra(1010) and ra/0110) of the first order series; also the four trigonal
first order pyramids, corresponding respectively to the three upper and
three lower faces of a positive rhombohedron, and the three upper and
three lower faces of the negative rhombohedron; also the hemimorphic
second order hexagonal pyramid; finally, the four ditrigonal pyramids,
corresponding to the upper and lower faces respectively of the positive
.
and negative scalenohedrons. Figs. 272-275 illustrate these forms. Fig.

274 is a basal section with r/0111^ and e/1012) below.
272 274 275
Figs. 272-275, Tourmaline
4. TRI-RHOMBOHEDRAL CLASS (21). PHENACITE TYPE

(Rhombohedral or Rhombohedral Tetartohedral Class)
153. Symmetry. This class, illustrated by the species dioptase,
phenacite, willemite, dolomite, ilmenite, etc., is an important one. It is
276
characterized by the absence of all planes of
symmetry, but the vertical axis is still an axis
of trigonal symmetry, and there is a center of
symmetry. Cf. Fig. 276.
154. Typical Forms. The distinctive forms
of the class are the rhombohedron of the second
;.._..,. v_... order and the hexagonal prism and rhombo-
hedron, each of the third order. The class is
thus characterized by three rhombohedrons of
distinct types (each and - ), and hence the
+
name given to it.
^
The second order rhombohedron may be de-
rived by taking one half the faces of the nor-
Symmetry of
Tri-Rhombohedral Class mal hexagonal pyramid of the second order.
There will be two complementary forms known
as positive and negative. For example, in a given case the indices of the
faces for the positive and negative forms are:
Positive (above) 1122, 2112, 1212; (below) 12l2, Il22, 2ll2

Negative (above) 1212, 1122, 2112; (below) 2112, 1212, 1122!
The rhombohedron of the third order has the general symbol (hkll), and
may be derived from the normal dihexagonal pyramid, Fig. 226,
by taking
one quarter of the faces of the latter.
There are therefore four complementary third order rhombohedrons, dis-
tinguished respectively as positive right-handed (2131), positive left-handed
(3121), negative right-handed (1321), and negative left-handed (1231). The
indices of the six like faces of the positive right-handed form (2131) are:
Above 2131, 3211, 1321; below 1321, 2l3l, 3211.
The hexagonal prism of the third order may be derived from the normal
dihexagonal prism, Fig. 219, by taking one half the faces of the latter. There
are two complementary forms known as right- and left-handed. The faces
of these forms in a given case (2130) have the indices:
Right 2130, 1320, 3210, 2130, 1320, 32lO

Left 1230 2310 3120 1230 2310, 3l20.
155. The remaining forms are geometrically like those of the rhombo-
hedral class, viz. Base c(0001) first order prism m(1010) ;_ second order
:
;
prism a(1120); rhombohedrons of the first order, as (1011) and (0111),

etc.
156. The forms
of this group are illustrated by Figs. 277-279. Fig. 277
is and shows the hexagonal prism_of the second order a(1120)
of dioptase
with a negative first order rhombohedron, s(0221) and the third order rhom-
bohedron #(1341). Figs. 278 and 279 show the horizontal and clinographic
279
Dioptase Phernacite
forms: first order

projections of a crystal of phenacite with_the following
order prism, a(1120); third _order rhombohedrons,
prism, ra(1010); _second
x(1232) and s(2131); first order rhombohedrons, r(1011)
and d(0112).
In order to make clearer the relation of the faces of the different types of
forms under this class, Fig. 280 is added. Here the zones of the positive and
are indicated (+R and
negative rhombohedrons of the first order R)
also the general positions of the four types of the third order rhombohedrons
(_l_p f I
I l\
The following scheme may also be helpful in connection with Fig. 280. It
112 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
loio 280
1100
10J50
shows the distribution of the faces of the four rhombohedrons of the third ojder
(+r, +/, r, I) relatively to the faces of the unit hexagonal prism (1010).
PHENACITE TYPE
+1 +r
3121 2131
158. Typical Forms. The characteristic form of the cJass is the

trigonal trapezohedron shown in Fig. 282. This is the general form corre-
sponding to the symbol (hkil), the faces being distributed as indicated in the
accompanying stereographic projection (Fig. 281). The faces of this form
correspond to one quarter of the faces of the normal dihexagonal pyramid,
Fig. 226. There are therefore four such trapezohedrons, two positive, called
respectively right-handed (Fig. 282) and left-handed (Fig. 283), and two simi-
lar negative forms, also right- and left-handed (see the scheme
given in
Art. 160). It is obvious that the two forms of Figs. 282, 283 are enantio-
morphous, and circular polarization is a striking character of the
species
belonging to the class as elsewhere discussed.
The indices of the six faces belonging to each of these will be evident on
consulting Figs. 281 and 229 and 230. The complementary positive form
(r and I) of a given symbol include the twelve faces of a positive scalenohe-
dron, while the faces of all four as already stated include the twenty-four
faces of the dihexagonal pyramid.
Corresponding to these trapezohedrons there are_two ditrigonal prisms,
respectively right-and left-handed, as (2130) and (3120).
The remaining characteristic forms are the right- and left-handed trigonal
prism a(H20) and_a(2110); also the right- and left-handed trigonal pyramid,
as (1122) and (2112). They may be derived by taking respectively one half
the faces of the hexagonal prism of the second order (1120) or of the corre-
sponding pyramid (1122); these are shown in Figs. 221 and 225.
159. Other Forms. The other forms of the class are geometrically
like those of the normal class. They are the base c(0001), the hexagonal
firstorder prism ra(1010), and the positive and negative rhombohedrons as
(1011) and (0111). These cannot be distinguished geometrically from the
normal forms.
160. Illustrations. The forms of this class are best shown in the
species quartz. As already remarked (p. 106), simple crystals often appear
to be of normal hexagonal symmetry, the rhombohedrons r(1011) and 2(0111)
being equally developed (Figs. 284, 285). In many cases, however, a differ-
ence in molecular character between them can be observed, and more com-
284 285 288
Figs. 284-288, Quartz

in size; the distinction can
monly one rhombohedron, r(1011), predominates
show as
always be made out by etching. Some crystals, like Fig. 286,
with a right positive
modifying faces the right trigonal pyramid *(ll2l),
as Such crystals are called right-handed and rotate
trapezohedron, z(5161).
114 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
the plane of polarization of light transmitted in the direction of the vertical

axis to the right. A crystal, like Fig. 287, with _the left trigonal pyramid
s(2111) and one or more left trapezohedrons, as x(6151), is called left-handed,
and as regards light has the opposite character to the crystal of Fig. 286.
Fig. 288 shows a more complex right-handed crystal with several positive
and negative rhombohedrons, several positive right trapezohedrons and the
negative left trapezohedron, N.
The following scheme shows the distribution of the faces of the four
trapezohedrons (+r, -\-l, r, I) relatively to the faces of the unit hex-
agonal prism (lOlO); it is to be compared with the corresponding scheme,

given in Art. 156, of crystals of the phenacite type. _In the case of the nega-
tive forms some authors prefer to make the faces 2131, 1231, etc., right, and
3121, 1321, etc., left.
QUARTZ TYPE
+1 +r
3121 2131
MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF THE HEXAGONAL SYSTEM.
162. Choice of Axis. The position of the vertical crystallographic axis is fixed in all
the classes of this system since it coincides with the axis of hexagonal
symmetry in the
hexagonal division and that of trigonal symmetry in the rhombohedral division. The three
horizontal axes are also fixed in direction except in the normal class and the subordinate
hemimorphic class of the hexagonal division; in these there is a choice of two positions
according to which of the two sets of vertical planes of symmetry is taken as the axial set.
163. Axial and Angular Elements. The axial element is the length of the vertical
axis, c, in terms of a horizontal axis, a; in other words, the axial ratio of a c. A single :
measured angle (in any zone but the prismatic) may be taken as the fundamental angle
from which the axial ratio can be obtained.
The angular element is usually taken as the angle between tfhe base c(0001) and the
unit first order pyramid (1011), that is, 0001 A 1011.
The relation between this angle and the axis c is given by the formula
tan (0001 A lOll) X - Vs = c.

The vertical axis is also easily obtained from the unit second order pyramid, since
tan (0001 A 1122) = c.
These relations become general by writing them as follows:
tan (0001 A hOhl) X-^3 = -Xc;

2i I
tan (0001 A h'h'2h'l)

= X c.
In general it is easy to obtain any required angle between the poles of two faces on the
spherical projection either by the use of the tangent (or cotangent) relation, or by the
solution of spherical triangles, or by the application of both methods. In practice most of
the triangles used in calculation are right-angled.
164. Tangent and Cotangent Relations. The tangent relation holds good in any zone
from c(0001) to a face in the prismatic zone. For example:
tan (0001 A hOhl) = h. tan (0001 A h'h'2Ji'l) _"
2h
'
tan (0001 A lOll) I tan (0001 A 1122) l"
In the prismatic zone, the cotangent formula takes a simplified form; for example, lor a
dihexagonal prism, hklQ, as (2130) :
cot (1010 A M*0) =

^
cot (1120 A feHO) = M
L
The sum of the angles (lOlO A hkiO) and (1120 A MnO) is equal to 30.
Further, the last equations can be written in a more general form, applying to any
pyramid (hkil) in a zone, first between 1010 and a face in the zone 0001 to 0110, where the
angle between 1010 and this face is known; or_again, for the
same pyramid, in a zone
between 1120 and a face in the zone 0001 to 1010, the angle between 1120 and this face
being given. For example (cf. _Fig. 229, p. 99), if the first-mentioned zone is
lOlO'/iEZ-OlIl and the second is llSfrAHMOll, then
cot (10TO A hM) = cot (lOlO A Olll) .
^
and
A = A
cot (1120 Mil) cot (1120 lOll) .
j-p
Also similarly for other zones,
cot (1010 A MB) = cot (1010 A 0221) .
f->
etc.
116 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
cot (1120 A = cot (1120 A 2021) etc.
hkil) .
~7
165. Other Angular Relations. The following simple relations are of frequent use:
(1) For a hexagonal pyramid of the first order,
tan \ (lOTl A OlTl) = sin Vj, where tan = c,
and in general
tan \ (hOhl A Qhhl) = sin where tan ,=

,V|, ^-c.
For a hexagonal pyramid of the second order, as (1122),

(2)
2 sin \ (1122 A I2l2) = sin ,
and tan = c.
(3) For a rhombohedron

sin (lOTl A TlOl) = sin a Vf, where a = (0001 A lOTl);
in general
sin \ (hOhl A hhOl) = sin a, Vf ,
where a, = (0001 A
166. Zonal Relations. The zonal equations, described in Arts 45, 46, apply here as
in other systems, only that it is to be noted that one of the indices referring to the horizontal
axes, preferably the third, i, is to be dropped in the calculations and only the other three
employed. Thus the indices (u, v, w) of the zone in which the faces (hkil), (pqft) lie are
given by the scheme
I
XXX
where u = kt Iq, v = lp ht, w= hq kp.
For example (Fig. 226) the face n

the zone mv, IOTO'2131
lies in
and^ also in the zone
'
au, 1120 2021. For the_first zone the values obtained are: u = 0, v = I, w = 1; for the
second zone, e = !,/=!, = 2. Combining these zone symbols according to the usual
scheme
1
The face n has, therefore, the indices 314i, since further i = (h k). +
167. Formulas. The following formulas in which c equals the unit length of the
vertical axis are sometimes useful:
(1) The_distances (see Fig. 229) of the pole of any face (hkil) from the poles of the faces
(10TO), (0110), (1100), and (0001) are given by the following equations,
= c (k+ 2h)
_
cos (hkil) (1010)
+ 4c (h + k + hk)
2 2 2
c (2k + h)
cos (M#) (OlTO) =
+ 4c + k + hk)
2
(/i
9- 2
c (h - k)
cos (hkil) (TlOO) =
4c2 (As hk)
cos (hkil) (0001)

v 3? + 4c 2 2
(A
2
+ fc
2
4- A/c)
(2) The distance (PQ) between the poles of anv two faces P(hkil) and Q(pqrt) is given
by the equation
W, + 2c (hq + 2
pk + 2hp +
cos PQ = v
-7= 2kq)
[3J + +k
2
4c2 (h 2 2
(3) For special cases the above formula becomes simplified; it serves to give the value
of the normal angles for the several forms in the system. They are as follows:
(a) Pyramid of First Order (hQhl), Fig. 224:
cos X (terminal) cos Z (basal)

=
3/2
(6) Pyramid of Second Order (h'h'2fcl), Fig. 225:
Y = cosZ ( basal )-
+ 4^
cos (terminal)
P + 4W' P
(c) Dihexagonal Pyramid (hkil) :
+ O~2
J^
Q/2 I
/J,2 _|_ ]fZ .
cos X (see Fig. 226)

-
^ 2
fc2 ;
-
cos Y ,
= .
3l 2 + 2c (2h + 2hk - k
2 2 2
)
(see Fig. 226)
3. + 4^ fr, + &. + M.)
cos Z (basal)
= '
3/ 2 + 4c 2
(h
2
+ k + hk)
2
(d) Dihexagonal Prism (hkiQ), Fig. 222:

+ 2hk -
(e)
cos X (axial)
Rhombohedron (1011):
=
^^^ . cos Y (diagonal)
2ft 2
2 (h* + +
A;
2
cos X (terminal)
=
Scalenohedron (hkil):
(f)
cos X = 2c (2A:
2
+ 2hk -
(see Fig. 259) 3/2
Y Cft ==
. 3Z2 + 2c 2 (2h*
cos (see Fig. 259) &+ 4** (h* + k* + hk)
2c2 (W +
168. Angles. The angles for some commonly occurring dihexagonal prisms with the
first n second order prisms
and owng table:
iven in the following
risms are given
w(1010) a(1120)
5160 8 57' 21
4150 10 53^ 19 61
3140 13 54 16 6
5270 16 6 13 54
2130 19 10 53^
3250 23 24i
5490 26 19{
169. The Miller Axes and Indices. The forms of the hexagonal system were referred
by Millerto a set of three equal
291 oblique axes which were taken
parallel to the edges of the unit
positive rhombohedron of the
species. Fig. 291 represents
such a rhombohedron with the
position of the Miller axes shown.
This choice of axes for hexa-
gonal forms has the grave objec-
tion that in several cases the
faces of the same form are rep-
resented by two sets of different
indices; for example the faces of
.the pyramid of the first order
This objection, however, disappears if the
would have the indices, 100, 221,010, 122, 001, 2l2.
118 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Miller axes and indices are used only for forms in the Rhombohedral Division, that is for forms
belonging to classes which are characterized by a vertical axis of trigonal symmetry. It is
believed, however, that the mutual relations of all the classes of both divisions of the hex-
agonal system among themselves (as also to the classes of the tetragonal system), both
morphological and physical are best brought out by keeping throughout the same axes,
namely those of Fig. 218, Art. 121. The Miller method has, however, been adopted by a
number of authors and consequently it is necessary to give the following brief description.
(1120) 110
0210)
Oil
(1010)
Miller and Miller-Bravais Indices Compared
Fig. 292 shows in stereographic projection the common hexagonal-rhombohedral forms

.vith their Miller indices and in parentheses the corresponding indices when the faces are
referred to the four axial system. It will be noted that the faces of the unit positive rhom-
bohedron have the indices 100, 010, and 001 and those of the negative unit rhombohedron
have 221, 122, 212. These two forms together give the faces of the hexagonal pyramid_of
the first order (see above). The hexagonal prism of the first order is represented by 211,
etc., while the second order prism has 101, etc. The dihexagonal pyramid has also two
sets of indices (hid) and (efg) ;
of these the symbol (hkl) belongs to the positive scaleno-
hedron and (efg) to the negative form. In this as in other cases it is true that
e = 2h + 2k - I, f = 2h - k + 21, g
= -h + 2k + 21. For example, the faces of the
form 201, etc., belong in the Rhombohedral Division of this system to the_scalenohedron
(2131) while the complementary negative form would have the indices 524, etc.
The relation between the Miller-Bravais and the Miller indices for any form can be
obtained from the following expression, where (hktt) represents the first and (pqr) the
second.
h k i
_
p - q p -r r -p~p
The relation between the Miller indices for hexagonal forms and those of isometric
forms should be noted. If we conceive of the isometric cube as a rhombohedron with
interfacial angles of 90 and change the orientation so that the normal to the octahedral
face (111) becomes vertical we get a close correspondence between the two. This will be
seen by a comparison of the two stereographic projections, Figs. 292 and 125.
170. To determine, by plotting, the length of the vertical axis of a hexagonal mineral,
given the position on the stereographic projection of the pole of a face with known indices.
To illustrate this problem it is assumed that the mineral in question is beryl and that the
position of the pole p(10ll) is known, Fig. 293. Let the three lines ai, a2 a 3 represent the,
horizontal axes with their unit lengths equalling the radius of the circle. Draw a line
from the center of the projec-
tion through the pole p. Draw
another line (which will be at
right angles to the first) joining
the ends of ai and 3 This
.
will be parallel to a2 and will

represent the intercept of
p(1011) upon the plane of the
horizontal axes. In order to
plot the intercept of p upon the
vertical axis construct in the
upper left-hand quadrant of
the figure a right-angle triangle
the base of which shall be equal
to O-P, the vertical side of
which shall represent the c axis
and the hypothenuse shall show
the slope^ of the face and give
its intercept upon the c axis.
The direction of the hypothe-
nuse is determined by locating
the normal to p from the angle
measured from the center of
the projection to its pole.
Since the face has been as-
sumed to have an unit intercept
on the vertical axis the dis-
tance O-M. which equals 0-49
Determina tion of unit length of c axis, having given the
(in terms of the length of the position of p(10Tl)
horizontal axes, which equals
1*00), gives the unit length of the c axis for beryl.
171. To determine the indices of a face of a hexagonal form of a known mineral, given
the position of its pole on the stereographic projection. In Fig. 294 it is assumed that the
position of the pole v of a crystal face on calcite is known.
To determine its indices, first draw
a radial line through the pole and then erect a perpendicular to it, starting the line from the
end of one of the horizontal axes. This line will represent the direction of the intersection of
the crystal face with the horizontal plane and its relative intercepts on the horizontal axes
will give the first three numbers of the parameters of the face, namely lai, 2a 2 3-3-
To,
determine the relative intercept on the c axis transfer the distance O-P to the upper left-
hand quadrant of the figure, then having measured the angular distance between the center
of the projection and v by means of the stereographic protractor draw the pole to^tne
face
in the proper position. Draw then a line at right angles to this pole starting from the
the line representing the vertical
point P'. This line gives the intercept of the face upon
axis. In this case the intercept has a value of 17 when the length of the horizontal axes
is taken as equal to I'O. This distance 17 is seen to be twice the unit length of the
c axis for calcite, 0'85. Therefore the parameters of the face in question upon the four
axes are lai,2a 2, | a3,
which give 2131 for the indices of the face v.
2c,
120 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
2 e =1,70 294
Determination of the indices for v on calcite
172. To determine, by plotting, the indices of hexagonal forms, given the position of
295 then: poles on the gno-
monic projection. To
illustrate this problem
one sectant of the gno-
monic projection of the
important forms of beryl,
Fig. 228, is reproduced in
Fig. 295. The directions
of the three horizontal
axes, ai, 02 and 3 are in-
dicated by the heavy lines.
From the poles of the faces
perpendiculars are drawn
to these three axes. It
will be noted that the va-
rious intercepts made
upon the axes by these
lines have simple rational
relations to each other.
One of these intercepts is
chosen as having the
length of 1 (this length
will be equivalent to the
unit length of the c crys-
tallographic axis, see
below) and the others are
then given in terms of it.
ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM 121
The indices of each face are obtained directly by
taking these intercepts upon the three
horizontal axes in their proper order and by adding a 1 as the fourth figure If necessarv
clear of fractions, as in the case of the second order
pyramid, 1122.
173. To determine the axial ratio of a hexagonal mineral from the
gnomonic projection
of its forms. The gnomonic projection of the beryl forms, Fig. 295,
may be used as an
The radius of the fundamental circle, a, is taken as
illustrative example.
equal to the
length of the horizontal axes and is given a value of 1. Then the length of the funda-
in the same manner as in the case of the tetragonal system, see Art.
117, p.
IV. ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM

(Rhombic or Prismatic System)
174.Crystallographic Axes. The orthorhombic system includes all the
forms which are referred to three axes at right
296
angles to each other, all of different lengths.
Any one of the three axes may be taken as the
vertical axis, c. Of the two horizontal axes the
*
longer is always taken as the b or macro-axis and
when orientated is parallel to the observer. The
a or brachy-axis is the shorter of the two horizontal
axes and is perpendicular to the observer. The length
of the b axis is taken as unity and the lengths of
the other axes are expressed in terms of it. The
axial ratio for barite, for instance, is a b c = 0*815 : :
: TOO 1*31.:
Fig. 296 shows the crystallographic
axes for barite.
1. NORMAL CLASS (25). BARITE TYPE

Orthorhombic Axes
(Orthorhombic Bipyramidal or Holohedral Class)
(Barite)
175. Symmetry. The forms of the normal class
of the orthorhombic system are characterized by three axes of binary sym-
297 metry, which directions are coincident with
the crystallographic axes. There are also
three unlike planes of symmetry at right
angles to each other in which lie the crystal-
lographic axes.
The symmetry of the class is exhibited in
the accompanying stereographic projection,
Fig. 297. This should be compared with Fig.
91 (p. 53) and Fig. 167 (p. 77), representing
the symmetry of the normal classes of the
isometric and
tetragonal systems respec-
tively. be seen that while normal iso-
It will
metric crystals are developed alike in the
three axial directions, those of the tetragonal
Symmetry of Normal Class type have a like development only in the
Orthorhombic System direction of the two horizontal axes, and
*
The prefixes brachy- and macro- used in this system ((and also in the triclinic system)
are from the Greek words, ppaxvs, short, and MKPOS, long.
122 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
those of the orthorhombic type are unlike in the three even axial directions.
Compare also Figs. 92 (p. 54), 171 (p. 78) and 298 (p. 122).
176. Forms. The various forms possible in this class are as follows :
jr>^ Indices
1. Macropinacoid or a-pinacoid (100)

2. Brachypinacoid or 6-pinacoid (010)
3. Base or c-pinacoid (001)
4. Prisms (hkO)
5. Macrodomes .
(hQl)
6. Brachydomes (OfcZ)
7. Pyramids (hkl)
In general, as defined on p. 31, a pinacoid is a form whose faces are parallel to two of
the axes, that is, to an axial plane; a prism is one whose faces are parallel to the vertical
*
axis, but intersect the two horizontal axes; a dome (or horizontal prism) is one whose
faces are parallel to one of the horizontal axes, but intersect the vertical axis. A pyramid
is a form whose faces meet all the three axes.
These terms are used in the above sense not only in the orthorhombic system, but also
in the monoclinic and triclinic systems; in the last each form consists of two planes only.
177. Pinacoids. The macropinacoid includes two faces, each of which

is parallel both to the macro-axis b and to the vertical axis c; their indices
are respectively 100 and 100. This form is uniformly designated by the
letter a, and is conveniently and briefly called the a-face or the a-pinacoid.
The brachypinacoid includes two faces, each of which is parallel both to
the brachy-axis a and to the vertical axis c; they have the indices 010 and
010. This form is designated by the letter 6; it is called the b-face or the
b-pinacoid.
The base or basal pinacoid includes the two faces parallel to the plane of
the horizontal axes, and having the indices 001 and 001. This form is desig-
nated by the letter c; it is called the c-face or the c-pinacoid.
Each one of these three pinacoids is an open-form,! but together they
make the so-called diametral prism, shown in Fig. 298, a solid which is the
analogue of the cube of the isometric system. Geometrically it cannot be
distinguished from the cube, but it differs in having the symmetry unlike in
299 300
diametral prism, as just stated, has three pairs of unlike faces. It has three
kinds of edges, four in each set, parallel respectively to the axes a, 6, and c;
it has, further, eight similar solid angles. In Fig. 298 the dimensions are
arbitrarily made to correspond to the relative lengths ojkthe chosen axes,
but the student will understand that a crystal of this shape gives no informa-
tion as to these values.
178. Prisms. The prisms proper include those forms whose faces are
parallel to the vertical axis, while they intersect both the horizontal axes;
their general symbol is, therefore, (hkQ). These all belong to one type of
rhombic prism, in which the interfacial angles corresponding to the two un-
like vertical edges have different values.
The unit prism, (110), is that form whose faces intersect the horizontal
axes in lengths having a ratio corresponding to the accepted axial ratio of
a b for the given species; in other words, the angle of this unit prism fixes
:
the unit lengths of the horizontal axes . This form is shown in combination
with the basal pinacoid in Fig. 299; it is uniformly designated by the letter
m. The four faces of the unit prism have the indices 110, IlO, TlO, iTO.
There is, of course, a large number of other possible prisms whose inter-
cepts upon the horizontal axes are not proportionate to their unit lengths.
These may be divided into two classes as follows: macroprisms, whose faces
lie between those of the macropinacoid and the unit prism, brachyprisms
with faces between those of the brachypinacoid and the unit prism. A
macroprism has the general symbol (hkQ) in which h > k and is represented
by the form Z(210), Fig. 300. A brachyprism has the general symbol (hkQ)
with h < k and is represented by n(120), Fig. 300.
301 302 303
101
Macrodome and Brachydqme Pyramid

Brachypinacoid and Macropinacoid
179. Macrodomes, Brachydomes. The macrodomes are forms whose
faces are parallel to the macro-axis b, while they intersect the vertical axis
c and the horizontal axis a; hence the general symbol is (hOl). The angle
of the unit macrodome, (101), fixes the ratio of the axes a c.: This form is
with the brachypinacoid.
shown in Fig. 301 combined (since it is an open form)
In the macrodome zone between the base c(001) and the macropinacoid
a (100) there may be a large number of macrodomes having the symbols,
taken in the order named, (103), (102), (203), (101), (302), (201), (301) etc.
;
Cf. Figs. 318 and 319 described later.

The brachydomes are forms whose faces are parallel to the brachy-axis, a,
while they intersect the other axes c and 6; their general symbol is (0/cZ).
The angle of the unit brachydome, (Oil), which is shown with a(100) in
Fig. 302, determines the ratio of
the axes b c.
:
The brachydome zone between c(001) and 6(010) includes the forms
(021), (031), etc. Cf. Figs. 318 and 319.
(013), (012), (023), (Oil), (032),
124 CRYSTALLOGEAPHY
Both sets of domes are often spoken of as horizontal prisms. The pro-
priety of this expression is obvious, since they are in fact prisms in geo-
metrical form; further, the choice of position for the axes which makes
them domes, instead of prisms in the narrower sense, is more or less arbitrary,
as already explained elsewhere.
180. Pyramids. The pyramids in this system all belong to one type,
the double rhombic pyramid, bounded by eight faces, each a scalene triangle.
This form has three kinds of edges, x, y, z (Fig. 303), each set with a different
interfacial angle; two of these angles suffice to determine the axial ratio.
The symbol for this, the general form for the system, is (hkl).
The pyramids may be divided into three groups corresponding respec-
tively to the three prisms just described, namely, unit pyramids, macro-
pyramids, and br achy pyramids.
The unit pyramids are characterized by the fact that their intercepts on
the horizontal axes have the same ratio as those of the unit prism; that is,
the assumed axial ratio (a b) for the given species. For them, therefore,
:
the general symbol becomes (hhl).

There may be different unit pyramids on crystals of the same species
with different intercepts upon the vertical axis, and these form a zone of faces
lying between the base c(001) and the unit prism m(110). This zone would
include the forms, (119), (117), (115), (114), (113), (112), (111). In the
symbol of all of the forms of this zone h = k, and the lengths of the vertical
axes are hence, in the example given, ^, \, J, f J of the vertical axis c of
, ,
the unit pyramid.

The macropyramids and brachypyramids are related to each other and to
the unit pyramids, as were the macroprisms and brachyprisms to themselves
and to the unit prism. Further, each vertical zone of macropyramids (or
brachypyramids), having a common ratio for the horizontal axes (or of h k :
in the symbol), belongs to a particular macroprism (or brachy prism) char-

acterized by the same ratio. Thus the macropyramids (214), (213), (212),
(421), etc., all belong in a common vertical zone between the base (001) and
the prism (210). Similarly the brachypyramids (123), (122), (121), (241),
etc., fall in a common vertical zone between (001) and (120).
181. Illustrations. The following figures of barite (304-311) give
305 306 307
Barite Crystals
excellent illustrations of crystals of a typical orthorhombic

species, and show
also how the habit of one and the same The axial ratio
species may vary.
for this species is a b c = 0'815 1
: : 1'314.
: : Here d is the macrodome
(102) and o the brachydome (Oil); m as always, the prism (110).

is, Figs.
304-307 and 309 are described as tabular c; Fig. 308 is prismatic in habit
j|
in the direction of the macro-axis (6), and 310, 311 prismatic in that of the
brachy-axis (a).
Figs. 312-314 of native sulphur show a series of crystals of pyramidal
habit with the dome n(011), and the pyramids p(lll), s(113). Note n trun-
cates the terminal edges of the fundamental pyramid p. In general it should
314
Sulphur Crystals
315 316 317
Staurolite Figs. 316-318, Topaz

must
be remembered that a macrodome truncating the edge of a pyramid
etc.
have the same ratio oth:l', thus, (201) truncates the edge of (221),
truncates the edge of (221), etc. Ji.
Similarly of .the brachydomes: (021)
Figs. 319-321.
Again, Fig. 315, of staurolite,
shows the
pinacoids 6(010), c(001), the prism m(110),
and the macrodome r(101).
Figs. 316-318are prismatic crystals of
topaz. Here m
is the prism (110); I and n
are the prisms (120), (140); d and p are the

macrodomes (201) and (401); /and y are the
brachydomes (021) and (041); i, u, and
o are
the pyramids (223), (111), (221).
- -
182. Projections. Basal, stereographic,
and gnomonic projections are given in Figs.
of the
319-320a, on pp. 125, 126, 127 for a crystal
319 is the basal projection Topaz
species topaz. Fig.
of the crystal shown in *ig. 318. Figs. 320 and 320a give the stereographic
and gnomonic projections of these forms present upon it.
110
Stereographic Projection Topaz Crystal
2. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS (26). CALAMINE TYPE

(Orthorhombic Pyramidal Class)
183. Class Symmetry and Typical Forms. The forms of the ortho-
rhombic-hemimorphic class are characterized by two unlike planes of sym-
metry and one axis of binary symmetry, the line in which they intersect;
there is no center of symmetry. The forms are therefore .hemimorphic, as
defined in Art. 29. For example, if, as is usually the case, the vertical axis
is made the axis of
symmetry, the two planes of symmetry are parallel to the
pinacoids a(100) and 6(010). The prisms are then geometrically like those
of the normal class, as are also the macropinacoid and brachypinacoid;
but the two basal planes become independent forms, (001) and (001). . There
are also two macrodomes, (101) and (101), or in general (hQl) and (MM); and
similarly two sets, for a given symbol, of brachydomes and pyramids.
The general symmetry of the class is shown in the stereographic projec-
120 120
041 r010
Gnomonic Projection Topaz Crystal

321 322
-*^
Calamine Struvite (127)

Symmetry of Hernimorphic Class
128 CR YSTALLO GR APHY
Further, Figs. 322, of calamine, and 323,

of struvite, represent
tion Fig 321.
of this class. In Fig. 322_the forms present are (301), i(031),
typical crystals
t>(12l); in Fig.
323 they are 8(101), i(101), 0(011).
3. SPHENOIDAL CLASS (27). EPSOMITE TYPE.

(Orthorhombic Bisphenoidal Class)
184. Symmetry and Typical Forms. The forms of the remaining

324 325 class the system, the ortho-
of
rhombic-sphenoidal class, are char-
acterized by three unlike rec-
tangular axes of binary symme-
try which coincide with the crys-
tallographic axes, but they have
no plane and no center of sym-
metry (Fig. 324). The general
form hkl here has four faces only,
and the corresponding solid is a
rhombic sphenoid, analogous to
the sphenoid of the tetragonal
system. The complementary pos-
Symmetry of Sphenoidal Class Epsomite itive and negative sphenoids are
enantiomorphous. Fig. 325 represents a typical crystal, of epsomite, with
the positive sphenoid, z(lll). Other crystals of this species often show
both positive and negative complementary forms ,
but usually unequally
developed.
MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF THE ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM
186. Choice of Axes. As explained in Art. 175, the three crystallographic axes are
fixed as regards direction in all orthorhombic crystals, but any one of them may be made
the vertical axis, c; and of the two horizontal axes, which is the longer (6) and which the
snorter (a) cannot be determined until it is decided which faces to assume as the funda-
mental, or unit, pyramid, prism, or domes.
The choice is generally so made, in a given case, as to best bring out the relation of the
crystals of the species in hand to others allied to them in form or in chemical composition,
or in both respects; or, so as to make the cleavage parallel to the fundamental form; or, as
suggested by the common habit of the crystals, or other considerations.
186. Axial and Angular Elements. The axial elements are given by the ratio of the
lengths of the three axes in terms of the macro-axis, b, as unity. For example, with barite
the axial ratio is
a 6 c = 0'81520 1 1'31359.
: : : :
The angular elements are usually taken as the angles between the three pinacoids and
the unit faces in the three zones between them. Thus, again for barite, these elements are
'
100 A 110 = 39 11' 13", 001 A 101 = 58 10' 36", 001 A Oil = 52 43' 8".
Two of these angles obviously determine the third angle as well as the axial ratio. The
degree of accuracy to be attempted in the statement of the axial ratio depends upon the
character of the fundamental measurements from which this ratio has been deduced. There
is no good reason for giving the values of a and c to many decimal places if the probable
error of the measurements amounts to many minutes. In the above case the measurements
(by Helmhacker) are supposed to be accurate within a few seconds. It is convenient, how-
ever, to have the angular elements correct, say, within 10", so that the calculated angles
obtained from them will not vary from those derived direct from the measured angles by
more than 30" to 1'.
187. Calculation of the Axes. The following simple relations (cf . Art. 48) connect the
axes with the angular elements :
tan (100 A 110) = a, tan (001 A Oil) = c, tan (001 A 101) = -
These equations serve to give either the axes from the 'angular elements,
or the angular elements from the axes. It will be noted that the axes are not
needed for simple purposes of calculation, but it is still important to have
them, for example to use in comparing the morphological relations of allied
species.
In practice it is easy to pass from the measured angles, assumed as the
basis of calculation (or deduced from the observations by the method of
least squares), to the angular elements, or from either to any other angles
by the application of the tangent principle (Art. 49) to the pinacoidal zones,
and by the solution of the right-angled spherical triangles given on the sphere
of projection.
Thus any face hkl lies in the three zones, 100 and Qkl, 010 and hOl, 001
and hkO. For example, the position of the face 312 is fixed if the positions
of two of the poles, 302, 012, 310, are known. These last are given, respec-
tively, by the equations
Stibnite tan (001 A 302) = f x tan (001 A 101),
tan (001 A 012) = \ x tan (001 A Oil) tan (100 A 310) = \ X tan (100 A 110).
m'
:010
Stereographic Projection Stibnite Crystal

130 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
of stibnite from Japan and Fig. 327

188 Example. Fig. 326 represents a crystal
the stereographic projection of its forms, p(lll), r(343), 77(353), co 3 (5-10'3), ra(110) and
6(010). On this the following measured angles were taken as fundamental:
7777' (353 A 353) =55 1' 0",
7777'" (353 A 353)

= 99 39' 0".
Hence, the angles 353 A 010

= 40 10*' and 353 A 053 = 27 30|' are known with-
*
out calculation. The right-angled spherical triangle 010'053'353 yields the angle
A and hence (001 A 053); also the angle at 010, which is equal to (001 A 101).
(010 053) = c. Also, since tan
But tan (001 A Oil) = f X tan (001 A 053), and tan (001 A Oil)
(001 A 101) = --, the axial ratio is thus known, and two of the angular elements.
The third angular element (001 A 110) can be calculated independently, for the angle
at 001 in the triangle 001'053'353 is equal to (010 A 350) and tan (010 A 350) x f
=
(010 A 110), the complement of (100 A 110).
Then since tan (100 A 110) = a, this can be used to check the value of a already
obtained. The further use of the tangent principle with the occasional solution of a right-
either the fundamental angles
angled triangle will serve to give any desired angle from
direct, or from the angular elements.
if two measured
Again, the symbol of any unknown face can be readily calculated
angles of tolerable accuracy are at hand. For example, for the face co, suppose the meas-
ured angles to be
6co (010 A hkl) = 30 15', coco' (hkl A hkl) = 51 32'.
The solution of the triangle b'u'Okl gives the angle (010 A Okl)
= 16 25' 20", and
tan (001 A Okl) _

~ tan 73 34|' = k '
tan (001 A Oil) tan 45 30^' I
But the ratio of k : I must be rational and the number derived agrees most closely with
10 : 3.
Again, the angle (001 A hOl) may now be calculated from the same triangle and the
value 59 38 f obtained. From this the ratio of h to I is derived since
tan (001 A hOl )

= tan 59 38f
'
= _
= h '
tan (001 A 101) tan 45 43J' I
This ratio is nearly equal to 5 3, and the two values thus obtained give the symbol 5'10'3.
:
is calculated, the value 26

If, however, from the triangle 001' Okl'u, the angle at 001 42f
is obtained, which is also the angle (010 A MO). From this the ratio h k is deduced, since :
tan (010 A 110) ~ tan 45 12f "

= ~ k '
tan (010 A hkO) tan 26 42f h
The value of -r is hence closely equal to 2; this combined with that first obtained f =- = -5-
J
gives thesame symbol 5" 10*3.

This symbol being more than usually complex calls for fairly accurate measurements.
How accurate the symbol obtained is can best be judged by comparing the measured angles
with those calculated from the symbol. For example, in the given case the calculated
angles for u(5'10'3) are 6(010 A 5'10'3) = 30 16', coco'(5'10-3) = 51 35'. The correctness
of the value deduced is further established if it is found that the given face falls into
prominent zones.
It will be understood further that the zonal relations, explained on pp. 45-47, play an
important part in all calculations. For example, in Fig. 326, if the symbol of r were un-
known, it could be obtained from a single angle (as br), since for this zone h = I.
189. Formulas. Although it is not often necessary to employ formulas in calculations,
a few are added here for sake of completeness. Here a and c in the formulas are the lengths
of the two axes a and c.
*
The student in this as in every similar case should draw a projection, cf. Fig. 327
(not necessarily accurately constructed), to show, if only approximately, the relative posi-
tion of the faces present.
(1) For the distance between the pole of any face P(hkl) and the pinacoids a, 6, c, we
have in general:
cos 2 Pa = cos 2 (Md A 100) =

he2 + k a?c +
2 2
I
2
a?
(2)
cos 2
cos2 PC
P6 =
=
cos 2
cos2 (Md
For the distance (PQ) between the poles

(Md A
A
010)
001) =
=
of
We2
_
Me* +
+
any two
A;
Pa?
/c
2
2
a2c2
a2 c 2
+ Pa?
+
faces (Md)
I
2
a?
'
'
and (par)
hpc
2
+ kqa?c
2
+ Ira2
cos PQ = ,
'
V(h2 c2 +&ac 2 2 2
+ Z
2
a2 ]
2 2
[p c +?ac +ra 2 2 2 2 2
]
190. To determine, by
plotting, the axial ratio of an orthorhombic crystal, having given
the stereographic projection of its forms. In order to solve this problem it is necessary
that the position of the pole of a pyramid face of known indices be given or the position
of the faces of a prism and one dome or of both a macro- and a brachydome. For illus-
tration it is assumed that a crystal of barite, such as represented in Fig. 305, has been
measured on the goniometer and the poles of its faces plotted in the stereographic projec-
tion. The lower right-
hand quadrant of this
projection is shown in
Fig.
328. The forms present
are common ones on bar-
ite crystals and have
been given the symbols,
ro(110), d(102), o(011),
c(001). The ratio of a 6 :
102
can be determined readily
from the position of the
pole m(110). A radial Oil
line is drawn to the pole
of the face and then a 111
perpendicular erected to
it from the end of the line
representing the b crys-

tallographic axis. The
intercept of this perpen-
dicular on the line repre-
senting the a axis, when
assumed unit length of
the b axis, gives the length
of a. It is to be noted
that the fact that this
line in the present case
passes very nearly through
the pole 111 is wholly
accidental. The length
of the vertical axis can
be determined from the
position of the pole of
either d(102) or o(011).
8
given^n the upper left- Determination of the Axial Ratio for Barite
hand quadrant of the . , .
,.
line that the inchnA-
figure. brachydome, o(011), is used the sloping
If the gives
line equivalent to the length
tion of the face is started from a distance on the horizontal
of the 6 axis, or 1, and its intercept .on the c axis will equal
the unit length of that axis.
If however, the position of d(102) is used the base line of
the triangle must be made equal
to the unit of the a axis as already established and the intercept
on the c axis will
length
equal ? of the Tatter's unit length.
132 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The problem could have been wholly solved from the position of the pyramid face, 111,
if that form had been present on the crystal. The construction in this case is also
illustrated.
191. To determine, by plotting, the indices of a face upon an orthorhombic crystal,
given the position of iis
329 pole upon the stereographic
projection and the axial ratio
of the mineral. To illustrate
this problem it is assumed
that theposition of the
pole in the stereographic
projection of the face o, Fig.
329, upon a topaz crystal is
known. First draw a radial
line through the pol e o Next .
erect a perpendicular to this

line, starting it from the
distance selected as repre-
senting 1 on the b crystallo-
graphic axis. The intercept
of this line upon the line
representing the a axis when
unit length of the b axis is
0'53. This is equivalent to
the established unit length
of the a axis and therefore
the parameters of the face o
on the horizontal crystallo-
graphic axes are la, 16. Next
the distance O-P is transfer-
red into the upper left-hand
quadrant of the figure. The
position of the normal to the face is determined by measuring with a protractor the angular
distance between O and o. The line giving the slope of the face is next drawn perpendicu-
lar to this normal and its intercept upon the line representing the vertical axis determined.
This distance when expressed in
terms of the length of the 6 axis is
0'95. This is twice the established
length of the c axis (0'476) and
consequently the third parameter
of the face o is 2c. This gives the
indices 221 for the face.
192. To deter mine, by plotting,
the axial ratio of an orthorhombic
crystal having given the gnomonic
projection of its forms. To illus-
trate this problem the gnomonic
projection of the crystal of topaz
already given in Fig. 320a will be
used. In Fig. 330 one quadrant
of this projection is reproduced.
From each pole lines are drawn
perpendicular to the two lines
representing the a and b crystal- 2<
lographic axes. It will be found
that the intercepts made in this
way upon the a axis have rational
relations to each other. The same
is true of the intercepts upon
the 6 axis. The intercepts upon
the two axes, however, are
irrational in respect to each other. A convenient intercept upon each axis is chosen as 1
and the other intercepts upon that axis are then expressed in terms of this length. Of
MONOCLINIC SYSTEM 133
course with a known mineral, whose forms have already had indices assigned to them,
the intercept that shall be considered as 1 is fixed.
If we take r as equivalent to the radius of the fundamental circle of the projection,
q as equal to the chosen intercept upon the 6 crystallographic axis and p that upon the
a axis, then the axial ratio can be derived from the following expressions:
b r . a r
c q c p
The proof of these relationships is similar to that already given under the Tetragonal
System, Art. 117, p. 93.
193. To determine, by plotting, the indices of a face upon an orthorhombic crystal,
given the position of its pole upon the gnomonic projection and the axial ratio of the min-
eral. The method of construction in this case is the reverse of that given in the problem
above and is essentially the same as given under the Isometric and Tetragonal Systems,
Arts. 84 and 118. In the case of an orthorhombic mineral the intercepts of the perpendicu-
lars drawn from the pole of the face to the a and b axes must be expressed in each case in
terms of the unit intercept on that axis. These values, p and q, can be determined from the
equations given in the preceding problem.
V. MONOCLINIC SYSTEM
(Obliqw System)
194. Crystallographic Axes. The monoclinic system includes all the
forms which are referred to three 331
i
unequal axes, having one of their
axial inclinations oblique.
The axes are designated as
follows: the inclined or clino-axis
is a; the ortho-axis is b, the ver-
tical axis is c. The acute angle
between the axes a and c is rep-
resented by the letter (3;

the
angles between a and b and b and c
are right See Fig. 331.

angles.
When properly orientated the
inclined axis, a, dopes dawn.toward
the observer, the b axis is hori-
SÔmi^^W 1
zontal and parallel to the observer and the

c axis vertical.
1. NORMAL CLASS (28). GYPSUM TYPE

(Prismatic or Holohedral Class)
195. Symmetry. In the normal class of the
monoclinic system there is one plane of sym-
metry and one axis of binary symmetry normal
to it. of symmetry is always the
The plane
plane of the axes a and c,
and the axis of sym-
coincides with the axis b, normal to this
metry
The of one axis (6) and that of
position
plane.
the plane of the other two axes (a and c) is thus
fixed by the symmetry; but the latter axes may
occupy different positions in this plane. Fig. 332
Symmetry of Normal Class
sn ows the typical stereographic projection, pro-
are the projections of an actual
jected on the plane of symmetry. Figs. 347, 348
crystal of epidote; here, as is usual, the plane of projection is normal to the

prismatic zone.
196. The various forms * belonging to this class, with their
Forms.
symbols, are given in the following table. As more particularly explained
later, an orthodome includes
two faces only, and a pyramid four only.
Symbols
1. Orthopinacoid or a-pinacoid (100)
2. Clinopinacoid or 6-pinacoid (010)
3. Base or c-pinacoid (001)
4. Prisms (hkO)
5. Orthodomes.. ' (/^

6. Clinodomes. .
7.
197. Pinacoids.The pinacoids are the orthopinacoid, clinopinacoid,

and the basal plane.
The orthopinacoid, (100), includes the two faces parallel to the plane of
the ortho-axis b and the vertical axis c. They have the indices 100 and 100.
This form is designated by the letter a, since it is situated at the extremity of
the a axis; it is hence conveniently called the a-face or a-pinacoid.
The clinopinacoid, (010), includes the two faces parallel to the plane of
symmetry, that is, the plane of the clino-axis a and the axis c. They
have the indices 010 and 010. The clinopinacoid is designated by the letter
6, and is called the b-face or b-pinacoid.
The base or basal pinacoid, (001), includes the two terminal faces, above
and below, parallel to the plane of the axes a, 6; they have the indices 001
and 001. The base is designated by the letter c, and is often called the
c-face or c-pinacoid. It is obviously inclined to the orthopinacoid, and the
normal angle between the two faces (100 A 001) is the acute axial angle 0.
333 335
101 I
Ortho-, Clmo - Prism and Orthodomes

and Basal Pinacoids Basal Pinacoid and Clinopinacoid
The diametral prism, formed by these three pinacoids, taken together,

Fig. 333, is the analogue of the cube in the isometric system. It is bounded
by three sets of unlike faces; it has four similar vertical edges; also
four similar edges parallel to the axis a, but the remaining edges, parallel
to the axis b, are of two sets. Of its eight solid angles there are two sets of
On the general use of the terms pinacoid, prisms, domes, pyramids, see pp. 31, 122.
four each; the two above in front are similar to those below
behind, and
the two below in front to those above in behind.
198. Prisms. -- The prisms are all of one
type, the oblique rhombic
prism. They may be divided into three classes as follows: the unit prism,
(110), designated by the letter m, shown in Fig. 334; the orthoprisms, (hkQ),
where h > k, lying between a(100) and m(110), and the
clinoprisms, (MO)
where h < k, lying between m(110) and 6(010). The orthoprisms and clino-
prisms correspond respectively to the macroprisms and brachyprisms of the
orthorhombic system, and the explanation on p. 123 will hence make their rela-
tion clear. Common cases of these prisms are shown in the figures given later,
199. Orthodomes. The four faces parallel to the ortho-axis 6, and
meeting the other two axes, fall into two sets of two each, having the general
symbols (hOl) and (hOl). These forms are called orthodomes; they are strictly
hemiprthodomes. For example, the unit orthodome (101) has the faces 101
and 101; they would replace the two obtuse edges between a(100) and c(001)
in Fig. 333. The other unit orthodome (101) has the faces 101 and 101, and
they would replace the acute edges between a(100) and c(001). These two
independent forms are shown _together, with 6(010), in Fig. 33_5.
Similarly the faces 201, 201 belong tq_the form (201), and 201, 201 to the
independent but complementary form (201).
200. Clinodomes. The clinodomes are the forms whose faces are
parallel to the inclined axis, a, while intersecting the other two axes. Their
general symbol is hence (Qkl) and they lie between the base (001) and the
clinopinacoid (010). Each form has Jour Jaces thus for the unit clinodome
;
these have the symbols, Oil, Oil, Oil, Oil. The form n(021) in Fig. 342 is
a clinodome.
201. Pyramids. The pyramids in the monoclinic system are all hemi-
pyramids, embracing four faces only in each form, corresponding to the
general symbol (hkl) This obviously follows from the symmetry; it is
.
shown, for example, in the fact already stated that the solid angles of the
diametral prism (Fig. 333, see above), which are replaced by these pyramids,
fall into two sets of four each. Thus any general symbol, as (321), includes
the two independent forms (321) and (321) with the faces
321, 321, 321, 321, and 321, 321, 321, 321
The pyramids may also be divided into three classes as unit pyramids,
(hhl)' orthopyramids, (hkl), when h > fc; or clinopyramids, (hkl), when h < k.
These correspond respec- 336 337 339
tively to the three prisms
already named. They are
analogous also to the unit
pryamids, rnacropyramids,
anTf brachypyramids of the
orthorhombic system, and
the explanation given on
p. 124, should serve to
make their relations clear.
But it must be remembered
that each general symbol
7 Pyroxene
embraces two forms, (hhl)
and (hkl) with four faces each, as above explained.
136 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
202. Figs. 336-339 of pyroxene (a b

Illustrations. c = 1'092
: : 1 : :
0-589, ft 74 == o(100) A c(001)) show typical monoclinic forms. Fig. 336

shows the diametral prism. Of the other forms, m
is the unit prism (110);
p(101) is an orthodome; w(lll), 0(221), s(lll) are pyramids; for other

figures see p. 475. Again, Figs. 340-342 represent common crystals of
orthoclase (aj b c = 0'659
: 1 0'555, ft = 64).
: : Here z (130) is a prism;
#(101) and 2/(201) are orthodomes n(021) is a clinodome; 0(111) a pyramid.
;
Since (Fig. 340) c and x happen to make nearly equal angles with the vertical
edge of the prism m, the combination often simulates an orthorhombic
crystal.
340 341 342
Orthoclase
shows a monoclinic crystal, epidote, prismatic in the direction of

Fig. 343
the ortho-axis; the forms are a(100), c(001), r(101) and w(Ill). Fig. 344
of gypsum is flattened 6(010); it shows the unit pyramid /(111) with the
||
unit prism w(110).
Epidote Epidote
203.
Projections. Fig. 345 shows a projection of a crystal of epidote
(cf. Fig. 897, p. 531) on a plane normal to the prismatic zone, and Fig. 346
one of a similar crystal on a plane parallel to 6(010) both should be care-
;
fully studied, as also the stereographic and gnomonic projections of the same
species, Figs. 347, 348. The symbols of the prominent faces are given in
the latter figures.
Stereographic Projection of Epidote Crystal
210
IV 211 10211
a 100
Gnomonic Projection of Epidote Crystal (137)
138 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
2. HEMIMORPHIC CLASS (29). TARTARIC ACID TYPE

(Sphenoidal Class)
204. The monoclinic-hemimorphic class is characterizedby a single axis
of binary symmetry, the
349 350 crystallographic axis 6, but
^ it has no plane of sym-
metry. It is illustrated
X. ^^ 7^ by the stereographic pro-
jection (Fig. 349) made
upon a plane parallel to
6(010). 350 shows a
Fig.
common form of tartaric
acid; sugar crystals also
belong here. The hemi-
morphic character is dis-
tinctly shown in the
distribution of the clino-
Symmetry of Hemimorphic Class Tartaric Acid domes and pyramids; cor-
responding to this the
artificial salts belonging here often exhibit marked pyroelectrical pheno-
mena.
3. CLINOHEDRAL CLASS (30). CLINOHEDRITE TYPE
(Domatic or Hemihedral Class)
205. The
monoclinic-clinohedral class is characterized by a single plane
of symmetry, parallel to the clinopinacoid, 6(010), but it has no axis of sym-
metry. This symmetry is shown in the stereographic projection made upon
a plane parallel to 6(010), Fig. 351. In this class, therefore, the forms parallel
to the 6 axis, viz., c(001), a(100), and the orthodomes, are represented by a
353
Symmetry of Clinohedral Class Clinohedrite
single face only. The other forms have each two faces, but it is to be noted
that, with the single exception of the clinopinacoid 6(010), the faces of a
given form are never parallel to each other. The name given to the class is
based on this fact.
Several artificial salts belong here in their crystallization, but the only
known representative among minerals is the rare silicate, clinohedrite

(H 2 CaZnSiO 5 ),* a complex crystal of which is shown in two positions in Figs.
352, 353. As seen in these figures, the crystals of the group have a hemi-
morphic aspect with respect to their development in the direction of the
vertical axis, although they cannot properly be called
hemimorphic since this
is not an axis of symmetry. The forms shown in Figs. 352 353 are as
follows: pinacoid, b (010) ;_ prisms, w(110), Wi(IlO), fc(3_20), n_(120), Z(130);
orthodomes, e(10_l), ei(l_01); pyramids, p(lll), Pi(lll), tf(lll), r(331),
s(551), *(771), w(531), o(131), z(131), y(121).
It is to be noted that crystals of the common species pyroxene (also of
segirite and titanite) occasionally show this habit in the distribution of their
faces, but it is not certain that this may not be accidental^
MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF THE MONOCLINIC SYSTEM

206. Choice of Axes. It is repeated here (Art. 196) that the fixed position of the
plane of symmetry establishes the direction of the plane of the a and c crystallographic
axes and also of the axis b which is the symmetry axis and lies at right angles to this plane.
The a and c axes, however, may have varying positions in the symmetry plane according
to which faces are taken as the pinacoids a(100) and c(001), and which the unit pyramid,
prism, or domes.
207. Axial and Angular Elements. The axial elements are the lengths of the axes
a and c in terms of the unit axis b, that is. the axial ratio, with also the acute angle of
inclination of the axes a and c, called /3. Thus for orthoclase the axial elements are:
a : b : c = 0'6585 : 1 : 0'5554 = 63 56f.
The angular elements are usually taken as the angle (100 A 001) which is equal to the angle
/3; also the angles between the three pinacoids 100, 010, 001, respectively, and the unit
prism 110, the unit orthodome (101 or 101) and the unit clinodomeOll. Thus, again, for
orthoclase, the angular elements are:
001 A 100 = 63 56f ,
100 A 110 = 30 36'.
001 A 101 = 50 16', 001 A Oil = 26 31'.
208. The mathematical relations connecting axial and angular elements are given in
the following equations in which a, b, and c represent the unit lengths of the respective
crystallographic axes.
= tan (10 A 110)

or tan (100 A 110)= a. sin 0;
a (1)
sin /3
= tan (001 A Oil)

Qr t an A Oil) = c sin
(001 .
/3; (2)
sin.tf
a tan (001 A 101)

-
.
.
(m A 101)
a +c
sin ? cos tan (001 A 101)
.
. cos
(3)
a. tan (001 A 101) A =
( = :
.
or
Ul an ^vyv/i
tUCkU 101)
(001 /\ J.WA/
a -
sin + cos tan (001 A 101)
.
c . cos
These relations may be made more general by writing in the several cases
i
in (1) MO for 110 and a for a; in (2) OW for Oil and

Before;
^
in (3) hOl for 101 and c for c..

j-
, 38, 115, ,889.

140 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Also
c
= sin (001 A 101) = sin (001 A 101)
;
a sin (100 A 101) sin (TOO A TOl)'

and more generally
h '
c
~ sin (001 A hOl) =
~ sin (001 A hQl)
a I sin (100 A hOl) sin (TOO A hQl)
Note also that
tan = a and tan f = c,
where is the angle (Fig. 347) between the zone-circles (001, 100) and (001, 110); also f is
<f>
the angle between (100, 001) and (100, Oil).

All the above relations are important and should be thoroughly understood.
209. The problems which usually arise have as their object either the deducing of the
axial elements, i.e., the angle /3 and the values of a and c in terms of 6(= 1), from three
measured angles, or the finding of any required interfacial angles from these elements or
from the fundamental angles.
The simple relations of the preceding article connect the angular and axial elements,
*
and beyond this all ordinary problems can be solved either by the solution of spherical
triangles on the sphere of projection, or by the aid of the cotangent (and tangent) relation.
It is to be noted, in the first place, that all great circles on the sphere of projection (see
the stereographic projection, Fig. 347) from 010 cut the zone circle 100, 001, 100 at right
angles, but those from 100 cut the zone circles 010, 001, 010 obliquely, as also those from
001 cutting the zone circle 100, 010, 100.
210. Tangent and Cotangent Relations. The simpje tangent relation holds good for all
zones from 010 to any pole on the zone circle 100, 001. 100; in other words, for the prisms,
clinodomes, and also zones of pyramids in which the ratio of h I is constant (from 001 to :
hOl or to (M). Thus it is still true, as in the orthorhombic system, that the tangents of the
angles of the prisms 210, 110, 120, 130 from 100 are in the ratio of * 1 2 3, or, more : : :
generally, that
tan (100 A MO) =~~
k tan (010 A hkO) _
~ h
tan (100 A 110) h tan (010 A 110) k'
Also for the clinodomes the tangents of the angles of 012, Oil, 021 from 001 are in the
ratio of\ 1 2, etc.
i
A^similar relation holds for the tangents of the angles of pyramids in
: :
the zones mentioned, as 121, 111, 212, etc.

For zones other than those mentioned as from 100 to a clinodome, or from 001 to a
prism, the more general cotangent formula given in Art. 49 must be employed. This rela-
tion is simplified for certain common cases.
For any zone starting from 001, as the zone 001, 100, or 001, 110, or 001, 210, etc.; if
two angles are known, viz., the angles between 001 and those two faces in the given zone
which fall (1) in the zone 010, 101, and (2) in the prismatic zone 010, 100; then the angle
between 001 and any other face in the given zone can be calculated.
Thus,
Let 001 A 101 = PQ and 001 A 100 = PR,
" = PQ " = PR,
or
"
001 A 111 001 A 110
or 001 A 212 = PQ 001 A 210 = PR, etc.
Then for these, or any similar cases, the angle (PS) between 001 and any face in the given
zone (as 201, or 221, or 421, etc., or in general hQl, hhl, etc.) is given by the equation
cotPS - cot PR ~
= l_
cotPQ - cot PR h
For the corresponding zones from 001 to 100, to 110, to 210, etc., the expression has the
same value; but here
PQ = 001 A TOl, PR = 001 A TOO, PS = 001 A hOl,

or 001 A Til, etc., 001 A TlO, etc., 001 A hhl, etc.
*
The general formulas, from which it is possible to calculate directly the angles between
any face and the pinacoids, or the angle between any two faces whatever, are so complex
as to be of little value.
If, however, 100 is the starting-point, and
100 A 101 100 A 001 PR,
or 100 A 111 100 A Oil PR, etc.,
then the relation becomes

cot PS - cot PR
cot PQ - cot PR
211 To determine, by
plotting, the axial elements of a monoclinic crystal eiven the
stereographjc projection of its forms. As an of this problem t [fassumld that
an orthoclase crystal similar to the one shown example
in Fig 341 has been measured andThe
of its faces located on the pol?s
stenographic projection, Fig. 354. The inclination of the a axis
or the angle is given directly
by measuring, by means of the stenographic protractor the
angular distance between the poles of a(100) and c(001). In the
form does not actually occur on the present case the a(100)
crystal, p is measured as 64 If thp basp ii rmt
present upon the crystal it will be usualfy possible to locate its
zone circle on which it must he position by mean^ of some
In the present case the great circle of the zone of
m
the oie to the base
"^ t0 ba k llne (Z ne f the orthodomes at
)
m'(TlO),
point of ^
mllO
fc'oio*
6010
a 100
Determination of Axial Elements of Orthoclase from Stereographic Projection
The ratio between the lengths of the a and b axes can be readily determined from the
position of the pole, m(110). Draw the radial line O-P from the center of the projection
to m(110). From the end of the b axis draw a line at right angles to O-P. This repre-
sents the intersection of the prism face with the horizontal plane and the distance O-R
gives the intercept of the prism upon the horizontal projection of the a axis. The distance
O-R therefore is not the unit length of the a axis but is that distance foreshortened some-
what because of the inclination of that axis. The construction by which the true length
of the a axis is obtained is shown in Fig. 355. The line R-O-S-T represents the horizontal
projection of the a axis upon which the distance O-R is transferred from Fig. 354. As the
prism face is vertical its intercept upon the 'a axis can be found by dropping a perpendicu-
lar from R to intersect the line which represents the a axis. The inclination of this last
142 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
line is found by use of the angle ft, which has been already determined. The length of the
a axis when expressed in terms of the b axis (TOO) was found to be 0' 66.
The length of the c axis can be found best from the inclination of the ?/(201) face. This
face will intersect the negative end of the a axis and the upper end of the c axis at either
\a, Ic or la, 2c. The angle between the center of the projection, O, Fig. 354, and the
pole y is measured by means of the stereographic protractor. From this angle the position
of the normal to y, as shown in Fig. 355, is determined. The line representing the slope of
the face is drawn at right angles to this normal, starting from the negative unit length of
the inclined a axis. The intercept on the c axis was found to be equal to I'll, which, as
it is equal to 2c, would give the unit length of the c axis as, 0'55.
The length of the c axis could also be determined from the inclination of the pyramid
face, o(Tll). The method of construction would be similar to that described in the prob-
lem below.
212. To determine the indices of a face upon a monoclinic crystal, having given the
position of its pole upon the stereographic projection and the axial elements of the min-
eral. The pyramid face o on orthoclase will be used to illustrate the problem. First, see
Fig. 354, a radial line is drawn through the pole o and a perpendicular S-T erected to it,
starting from the unit length of the b axis. It is to be noted that the point T
is the inter-
section of the face o with the horizontal projection of the a axis Transfer the distance
Determination of Axial Elements, etc. of Orthoclase
O-S to the horizontal line in Fig. 355 and locate the position
of the normal to o by the
angle, Fig. 354, between O and o. The line giving the slope of the face can then be drawn
from the point S (Fig. 355) perpendicular 'to the normal. This line intersects the line
representing the vertical axis at a distance equal to its unit length. Two points of inter-
section of the pyramid face with the plane of the a and c axes have now been
determined,
namely Ic and T. A line joining these two points will give the intersection of the two
planes and the point where it crosses the line representing the a axis will therefore give
the intercept of the pyramid upon that axis. This is also found to be at the unit
length
and therefore the indices of o must be 111.
213. To determine, by plotting, the axial elements of a monoclinic
crystal, having given
the gnomonic projection of its forms. The construction
by which this problem is solved
is shown in Fig. 356. The poles of the unit forms (101), (Oil), (001) and (111) are located
(in this case tor pyroxene) and the zonal lines drawn. The angle /S is complementary to
TRICLINIC SYSTEM 143
the angle from the center of the
projection to 001. This can be measured directly bv
means of the gnomonic tangent scale. Then construct the
and triangles CST and XYZ
The
angles p *, and[v and .are measured. This can most
easily be done by means of the
divided circle and the fact that an angle at the
circumference of Lircle ?s mL?ureTby one
half its subtended arc. The following relations will then yield the axial ratio
sin p. sin v
sin TT' sin v
the explanation f the
366
Determination of Axial Elements of Pyroxene from Gnomonic Projection
214. To determine, by plotting, the indices of a face on a monoclinic crystal, having

given the position of its pole upon the gnomonic projection. There is no essential differ-
ence between the orthorhombic and monoclinic systems in the determination of indices
from the gnomonic projection. The intercepts of perpendiculars from the poles of the
faces upon th< front to back and left to right zonal lines running through the pole of c(001)
give directly the first two numbers of the indices. The gnomonic projection of the epi-
dote crystal already given (Fig. 348) will serve to illustrate this problem.
VI. TRICLINIC SYSTEM

(Anorthic System)
215. Crystallographic Axes. The tridinic system includes all the forms
which are referred to three unequal axes with all their intersections oblique.
When orientated in the customary manner one axis has a vertical posi-
144 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
tion and is called the c axis (cf. Fig. 357), a second axis lies in the front-to-
back plane, sloping down toward the observer, and is
357
called the a axis. The remaining axis is designated as
the b axis. Usually the a and b axes are so chosen that
the a axis is the shorter and, like in the orthorhombic
system, is sometimes called the brachy-axis. In that
case the 6 axis is longer and is known as the macro-
axis. But this is not invariably true; thus with rho-
donite the ratio of a :b = 1*073 : 1. The angle
between the axes b and c is called a, that between a
Triclinic Axes
and c is 0, and that between a and b is 7 (Fig. 357).
It is to be noted that there is no necessary relation between the values of
a, p, and 7, any one may be greater or less than 90; this is determined by
the choice of the fundamental forms.
1. NORMAL CLASS (31). AXINITE TYPE
(Holohedral or Pinacoidal Class)
216. Symmetry. The normal class of the triclinic system is character-

ized by a center of symmetry, the point of intersection of the three axes,
but there is no plane and no axis of symmetry. This symmetry is shown in
the accompanying stereographic projection (Fig. 358).
358
Symmetry of Normal Class Triclim'c Pinacoids
217. Forms. Each form of the class includes two faces, parallel to
one another and symmetrical with reference to the center of
symmetry.
This is true as well of the form with the general symbol as of one o the
(hkl)
special forms, as, for example, the a-pinacoid (100).
__ Hence, as shown in the following table, the four pjismatic faces 110, TlO,
10, 110 include two forms, namely, 110, 110, and The same is
110, 110.
true of the
domes._ Further, _any eight corresponding pyramidal faces, as,
for example, 111,
111_,_111,_111, 111, _1_11, 111, 111 belong to four distinct
forms, namely, 111, 111; 111, 111; Hi, lll;-in, 111, and similarly in
general.
The various types of forms are given in the

following table:
Indices
Macropinacoid or a-pinacoid ' "

(100)
Brachypinacoid or 6-pinacoid (010)
Base or c-pinacoid
(001)
Prisms { >,
I
W
(MO)
MacrodomeS
(P)
BrahydomeB
(g
Pyramids
I
(hkl)
\(hkl)
In the above table it is assumed that the axial ratio is such that a < b. If the oppo-
site were true the names brachy- and macro- would be interchanged.
218. The explanations given under the two preceding systems make it
unnecessary to discuss in detail the various forms individually, except as
illustrated in the case of crystals belonging to certain typical triclinic species.
It may be mentioned, however, that Fig. 359 shows the diametral prism,
which is bounded by three sets of unlike faces, the pinacoids a, 6, and c.
This is the analogue of the cube of the isometric system, but here the like
faces, edges, and solid angles include only a given face, edge, and angle, and
that opposite to it.
219. Illustrations. A typical triclinic crystal is shown in_Fig. 360 of
axinite. Here a (100) is the macropinacoid; m(110)_and M(110) the two
unit prisms; s(201) a macrodome, and z(lll) and r(lll) two unit pyramids.
The axial ratio is as follows:
a : b : c = 0'49 : 1 :
0'48, a
= 82 54', ft
= 91 52', 7 = 131 32'.
Figs. 361, 362 show two crystals of rhodonite, a species which is allied to
pyroxene, and which approximates to it in angle and habit. Here the faces
361 362
Rhodonite
are:
Pina_coids a(l_00), 6(010), c(001);
prisms m(110), M(lTO); pyramids
Further illustrations are given by Fig. 363 of albite and Fig. 364 of anor-
thite. The symbols of the faces, besides the pinacoids and the unit prisms,
146 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
domes
are as follows: Fig. 363, z(101); _Fig. 364, prisms /(1 30), z(130);
*(207), t/(201), e(021), r(061), n(021); pyramids m(lll), a(lll), o(lll),
363 365
&0104 &010
mllO
a 100
MllQ
Stereographic Projection of an Axinite Crystal
. In Fig. 364 of anorthite the similarity of the crystal to one of ortho-

clase is evident on slight examination (cf. Figs. 340, 341), and careful study
with the measurement of angles shows that the
correspondence is very close
Hence in this case the choice of the fundamental planes is
readily made.
Fig. 365 represents a crystal of axinite; Figs. 366 and 367 its stereo-
graphic and gnomonic projections.
367
M110
6010-4
K110
a 100
Gnomonic Projection of an Axinite Crystal
2. ASYMMETRIC CLASS (32). CALCIUM THIOSULPHATE TYPE

(Hemihedral Class)
220. Besides the normal class of the triclinic system there is another
possible class, possessing symmetry neither 368
with respect to a plane, axis nor center; in it
a given form has one face only. This class finds *
^- ..
examples among a number of artificial salts.

One of these is calcium thiosulphate
(CaS2 O 3 .6H 2 O) as yet no mineral species is
;
known to be included here. This is the most

general of all the thirty-two types of forms
classified according to their symmetry and
comes first, therefore, if the classes are arranged \
in order according to the degree of symmetry
characterizing them. This class is one of those
whose crystals may show circular polarization.
This is true of eleven of the classes which have Symmetry of Asymmetric Class
been described in the preceding pages.
148 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS OF THE TRICLINIC SYSTEM

221. Choice of Axes. It is obvious, from what has been said as to the symmetry of
this system, that any three faces of a triclinic crystal may be chosen as the pinacoids, or
the faces which fix the position of the axial planes and the directions of the axes; moreover,
there is a like liberty in the choice of the unit prisms, domes or pyramids which further fix
the lengths of the axes.
When the crystal in hand is allied in form or composition to other species, whether of
the same or different systems, this fact simplifies the problem and makes the choice of the
fundamental forms easy. This is well illustrated, as already noted, by the triclinic feldspars
(e.g., albite and anorthite, Figs. 363, 364)
which are near in angle to the allied monoclinic
species orthoclase. Rhodonite (Figs. 361, 362), the triclinic member of the pyroxene
group, is another good example.
In other cases, where no such relationship exists, and where varied habit makes different
orientations plausible, there is but little to guide the choice. This is illustrated in the case
of axinite (Fig. 360), where at least ten distinct positions have been assumed by different
authors.
222. Axial and Angular Elements. The axial elements of a triclinic crystal are :
(1) the axial ratio, which expresses the lengths of the axes a and c in terms of the third
axis, 6; and (2) the angles between the axes a, 3, 7 (Fig. 357). There are here five quanti-
ties to be determined which obviously require the measurement of five independent angles
between the faces.
The angular elements are usually taken as the angles between the pinacoids and, in
addition, those between each pinacoid and the unit face lying in the zone of the other pina-
coids; that is,
100 A 010, ac, 100 A 001, be, 010 A 001;
also am 100 A 110, 001 A 101, 001 A Oil;
or, instead, any one or all of these,
aM, 100 A 110, 001 A 101, 001 A Oil.
Of these six angles taken,one is determined when the others are known.
223. The mathematical relations existing between the axial angles and axial
ratio, on the
one hand, and the angles between the faces on the other, admit of being drawn out with
great completeness, but they are necessarily complex and in general have little practical
value. In fact, most of the problems likely to arise can be solved by means of the
triangles
of the spherical projection, together with the cotangent formula
connecting four planes in
the same zone (Art. 49, p. 49); this will often be laborious and may
require some ingenuity
but in general involves no serious difficulty. In connection with the use of the
cotangent
formula, it is to be noted that in certain commonly occurring cases its form is much simpli-
fied; some of these have already been explained under the monoclinic system (Art. 210).
The formulas given there are of course equally applicable here.
224. The first problem may be to find the axial elements from measured
angles. Since
these elements include five unknown quantities, viz., the three axial
angles a /3 7 and
the of
lengths the axes a and c in terms of b, five measured angles are required, as already
stated.
Fig. 369 represents the crystallographic axes of the triclinic mineral rhodonite The
positive ends of the three axes are joined by lines forming three triangles the angles of
which are very important. In the triangle, for instance, which has the b and c
axes for
two of its sides since the length
of the b axis is taken as
I'O, it
is only necessary to know
the angle a and either p or ?r
in order to determine the
length
of the c axis. In the triangle
that has the a and b axes for
two of its sides it is necessary
to know the value of 7 and
either a or T in order to deter-
mine the length of the a axis.
And lastly in the triangle
formed between the a and c
axes, if the length of either of
of the other can be determined from the
angle and either'f orT &S*?
âf a
rhodonite ho D
the for ms o(100), 6(010),
^*k
370, has
i{ ? *j ,
c(001) and p(lll), see Fie
poles of the faces plotted in the
bee^meûral andê stereogr^hic'projectio^
great circles which connect these 371
poles are the same as those shown 100
in the triangles built upon the
crystallographic axes, Fig. 369. With
the angles between the different crys-
tal faces known by measurement, it
is easy, by the formulas of
spherical
trigonometry, to calculate the value
of these other angles and from them
obtain the axial ratio.
That the angles shown on the stere-
ographic projection, Fig. 371, are
identical with those in Fig. 369 may
be proved as follows. Let Fig. 372
represent a vertical section cut
through the spherical projection of
rhodonite in such a way as to
include the 6 and c crystallographic
axes. The triangle, which has these
axes as two sides and the three
angles a, -K and p, lies therefore in
the plane of the figure. The nor-
a ioo
mals to all faces parallel to the
c axis, i.e. the prism zone, would lie in a
plane at right angles to that axis. This plane
would intersect the sphere of the spher-
372 ical projection in a great circle which is
represented on the stereographic pro-
jection, Fig. 371, by the divided circle.
On Fig. 372 this great circle would
appear in orthographic projection as the
line C-C' lying at right angles to the c
axis. In the same way all faces lying
parallel to the b axis, i.e. the zone (100)-
(101)- (001), would have their normals
in a plane which would be foreshortened
to the line B-B' in Fig. 372. Since
the lines C-C' and B-B' are at right
angles respectively to the c and b axes
the angle between them must equal the
axial angle, a. This same angle will
appear therefore on the stereographic
projection, Fig. 371, between the great
circles of the two zones, the faces of
which are parallel respectively to the c
and b axes. Further the normals to all
faces which intersect the b and c axes at
their unit lengths would lie in a plane at
right angles to the line b-c, Fig. 372.
This plane would appear in orthographic projection as the line P-P'. On the stereographic
projection, Fig. 371, this would be represented
as the zonal circle passing through (100), (111), 373
(Oil), (100). The angle between B-B' and P-P'
will by construction equalV and that between C-C'
and P-P' will equal p. These same angles will appear
therefore in the stereographic projection between the
corresponding zone circles. In the same way the
identity of the angles j, a, T, 0, n and v in Figs. 369
and 371 can be proved.
With the necessary number of these angles given
the formulas required for the calculation of the
axial lengths are given below. The angles T', a', t>',
//, if' and p' are the corresponding angles to T, o-, etc..
in the adjacent quadrants, see Fig. 373.
150 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
a sin v' c sin _ sin TT'
_ c
sin T _
~~
sin T' _
~ sin v _
~ _ '
-w
'
sin <r sin a' b

'
sin M sin M' sin p sin p' b
If the angles given are between the three pinacoids and the pyramid hkl (not the unit form)
the relations are similar. That is, if for the face hkl the corresponding angles be represented
by TO, ffo, etc., where T O <TO are the angles between the zone circles 100, 001 and 100, 010
,
in the general
respectively and the zone circle 001, hkO, these relations may be expressed
form '
sin TO _ sin T O _ k a
~ '
a_
sin o-o sin o- h, h b'
sin vn sin VQ c he
sin MO sin MO' I
tt
la <>
h
sin TTO _ sin TH/ _ c _ k c
'
sin PO sin p I, I b
Thus for the face 321 the formulas become

sin TO _ _ sin v _ 3c sin XQ _ 2c
a^ 2_a ^
sin (TO |6 36 sin MO a sin po b
It is also to be noted that

a = 180 - A, ft
= 180 - B, 7 = 180 - C,
where A, B, C are the angles in the pinacoidal spherical triangle IOO'010'OOI at these
poles respectively. That is,
= * P = TO PO = (180
A + - a); +
B = ^+ M = ^ + /io= (180 -0);
C = T-f-<r = T + <r = (180
- 7).
Also
180 -A = TT' + P' = TTO' 4- PO' = .
Hence, having given, by measurement or calculation, the angles between the faces
ab(100 A 010), ac(100 A 001) and 6c(010 A 001), which are the sides of this triangle, the
angles A, B, C are calculated and their supplements are the axial angles a, /3, 7 respectively.
Still another series of equations are those below, which give the relations of the angles
/*, v, p, etc.,
to the axes and axial angles. By means of them, with the sine formulas given
above, the angular elements (and other angles) can be calculated from the axial elements.
a sin )8 c sin 8
tan tan v = .
c + a cos /3 a + c cos 8
fj. ; ;
= b sin a - c sin a
tan p , tan '
, ,
6 cos a ;
'
b + c cos a
a sin 7' 6 sin 7
tan T = r tan a =
b + a cos 7
'
;
'
a + b cos 7
These equations apply when M v, etc., is less than 90; if their + sum is greater than
90 the sign in the denominator is negative.
207. The following equations are also often useful.
2 sin P sm P'
tan a = = 2 sin ?r sin w'
**
-
sin (p p') sin (TT
- TT')
'
, ,,
_ 2 sin fj. sin // _ 2 sin v sin v'
sin (n n'} sin (v v')
2 sin T sin T' 2 sin a sin <r'
tan
sin (T - T') sin (<r
- a')
'
Also,
a + 7r+p=/3+ M + y = + (r = 180. 7+r
Thecalculation, from the angular elements or from the assumed fundamental measured
angles, either (1) of the angular position of any face whose symbol is given, or (2) of the
symbol of an unknown face for which measured angles are at

hand, requires no further
explanation. The cotangent formula is all that is needed in a single zone, and the solution
of spherical triangles on the projection (with the use of the sine
formulas) will suffice in
addition in all ordinary cases.
225. To determine, by plotting, the axial elements of a triclinic
crystal, having given
the stereographic projection of its forms. In order to solve this problem it is
necessary
to have given the position of the poles of
the unit forms (100), (010), (001), (111) or
to be able to locate them by means of
their zonal relations. Through these poles
the various zonal circles are drawn as
shown in the case of rhodonite, Fig. 371.
The angles a, /3, 7, TT, p, etc., are then given
upon the projection. These angles can be
measured as described in Art. 41, p. 39.
Taking next a certain line as representing
the unit length of the b axis and knowing
the angles a, TT and p the triangle that
includes the b and c axes, see Fig. 369, can
be drawn to scale and the unit length of
the c axis determined. In a similar way
the length of the a axis can be found.
226. To determine, by plotting, the indices
of a face upon a triclinic crystal, having
given the position of its pole in the stereo-
graphic projection and the axial elements a(100)
of the mineral. To illustrate this problem
a possible pyramid face on rhodonite will be used. Its pole is located in the stereograp-
hic projection at x, Fig. 374. The position of the poles of the faces a(100) and 6(010)
must also be known. The directions of the intersections of the planes of the a-c and
b-c axes with the plane of the
375 projection can then be drawn.
These lines will represent the
1-93 /C
Intercept upon O horizontal projections of the a
and b crystallographic axes.
A radial line is then drawn from
the center of the projection, O,
through x. Another line,
A-P-B, drawn perpendicular
is
to this line at any convenient
distance from the center, O.
The line A-P-B will represent
the direction of intersection of
the face x with the horizontal
plane of the projection. The
intercept that the face will
make upon the vertical axis can
be found by the construction of
a right triangle with O-P as its
base, a line representing the c
axis as its vertical side and the
angle between O-x as the angle
between the base and the hy-
pothenuse, see Fig. 375. Under
the assumed conditions the face
will intersect the c axis at a dis-
tance of T93, the radius of the
circle in the figure being
TO. The face will also pass
through the points A and B on the horizontal projections of the a and 6 axes.
With the known angles and a it is possible to construct the a and b axes with their proper
these two axes will be
angular relations to the c axis. The intercepts of the face upon
the c axis to the points A and B.
given by the extension of the lines from the point T93 on
In this way the intercepts of the face upon the three axes were obtained as 1'lla, 1'556,
152 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
l'93c.
;.
By dividing these numbers by 1'55 we get the intercepts expressed in terms of the
h of the 6 axis, considering that as 1*0. The intercepts then become 0'71a, 16, l'24c.
length
When these are compared with the axial ratio of rhodonite, a b c = T114 1 0'986,
: : : :
the parameters of the face are found to be fa, 16, 2c. The indices of x are therefore 321.
227. To determine, by plotting, the axial elements of a triclinic crystal having given the
gnomonic projection of its forms. To illustrate this problem it is assumed that the posi-
tions of the poles of the faces, (100), (010), (001), (101), (Oil) and (111) O n rhodonite are
known, see Fig. 376. If this figure is compared with the stereographic projection of the
same forms given in Fig. 371, it will be seen that the angle between the zones (100)-(101)-
(001) and (100)-(111)-(011) is equal to TT, that between the zones (100)-(111)-(011) and
(100)-(110)-(010) is equal to p, between (010)-(011)-(001) and (010)-(111)-(101) is equal
to v and between (010)-(111)-(101) and (010)-(110)-(100) is equal to M- The method
-by which the angles between these various zones may be measured was explained in Art.
^2, p. 43, and is illustrated by the construction of Fig. 376. From these angles triangles
can be readily constructed to give the lengths of the a and c axes in terms of the 6 axis,
with its length taken as equal to 1 '0.
228. To determine, by plotting, the indices of the forms of a triclinic

crystal, having
given the position of other poles upon the gnomonic projection. The method for the solu-
tion of this problem is similar to that already described under the previous
systems. The
difference lies in the fact that the lines of reference upon which are
plotted the intercepts
of the lines drawn to them from the poles of the faces make
oblique angles with each other
These reference lines are taken as the zonal lines (OOl)-(lOl) and (OOl)-(Oll) and the
intercepts from which the indices are determined are measured from the A
pole of (001)
study of the gnomonic projection of axinite, Fig. 367, will illustrate this problem.
MEASUREMENT OF THE ANGLES OF CRYSTALS

229. Contact-Goniometers. The interfacial angles of crystals are
measured by means of instruments which are called goniometers.
MEASUREMENT OF THE ANGLES OF CRYSTALS 153
COntact " or hand -goniometer one form of which is
This contact-goniometer consists of a card on

which is printed a semi-
circular arc graduated to half
degrees at the center of which is fastened a
celluloid arm which may be turned to
any desired position. The method of
use of the goniometer is illustrated in The bottom of the card and
Fig. 377.
77
Penfield Contact Goniometer, Model B
the blackened end of the celluloid arm are brought in as accurate contact as
possible with the two crystal faces, the angle between which is desired. Care
must be taken to see that the plane of the goniometer is at right angles to the
edge of intersection between the two faces. Another model of the contact-
goniometer, Fig. 378, has two arms swiveled together and separate from the
graduated arc. The crystal angle is obtained by means of the arms and then
the angle between them measured by placing them upon the graduated arc.
This latter type is employed in cases where the crystal lies in such a position
as to prevent the use of the former.*
*
These simple types of contact-goniometers were devised by S L. Penfield and can be
obtained by addressing the Mineralogical Laboratory of the Sheffield Scientific School of
Yale University, New Haven, Ct.
154 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The contact-goniometer is useful in the case of large crystals and those

whose faces are not well polished; the measurements with it, however, are
378
Penfield Contact Goniometer, Model A

seldom accurate within a quarter of a degree. In the finest specimens of
crystals, where the faces are smooth and lustrous, results far more accurate
379 may be obtained by means of a different

instrument, called the reflecting goni-
ometer.
230. Reflecting Goniometer. - This
type instrument
of was devised by
Wollaston in 1809. It has undergone exten-
sive modifications and improvements since
that time. Only the perfected forms that
are in common use to-day will be
described.
The principle underlying the construction
of the reflecting will be
goniometer
understood by reference to the figure (Fig.
379), which represents a section of a
crystal, whose angle, abc, between the faces ab, be, is Let the
required.
eye be placed at P and the point M
be a source of light. The eye at P,
looking at the face of the crystal, be, will observe a reflected image of m,
in the direction of Pn. The crystal may now be so changed in its position
that the same image is seen reflected
by the next face and in the same direction,
fn. lo effect this, the crystal must be turned
around, until abd has the
present direction of be. The angle dbc measures, therefore, the number of
degrees through which the crystal must be turned; it may be measured by
attaching the crystal to a graduated circle, which turns with the crystal.
This angle is the supplement of the interior angle between the two faces, or
in other words is the normal angle, or angle between the two poles (see Art.
43, p. 44). The reflecting goniometer hence gives directly the angle needed
on the system of Miller here followed.
231. Horizontal Goniometer. A form of reflecting goniometer well
adapted for accurate measurements is shown in Fig. 380. The particular
form of instrument here figured * is made by Fuess.
One-circle Reflection Goniometer
The instrument stands on a tripod with leveling screws. The central

axis, o,has within it a hollow axis, 6, with which the plate, d, turns, carrying
the verniers and also the observing telescope, the upright support of which is
shown at B. Within b is a second hollow axis, e, which carries the graduated
circle, /, above, and which is turned by
the screw-head, 0; the tangent screw,
a, serves as a fine adjustment for the observing telescope, B, the screw, c, being
for this purpose raised so as to bind b and e together. The tangent screw, 0,
is a fine adjustment for the graduated circle. Again, within e is the third
axis, h, turned by the screw-head, i,
and within h is the central rod, which
carries the support for the crystal, with the adjusting
and centering con-
trivances mentioned below. This rod can be raised or lowered by the screw, fc,
from the catalogue of Fuess.

The figure here used is
156 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
so as to bring the crystal to the proper height that is, up to the axis of the
telescope; when this has been accomplished,
the clamp at p, turned by a
set-key, binds s to the axis, h. The movement of h can take place independ-
these two axes are
ently of g, but after the crystal is ready for measurement
bound together by the set-screw, /. The signal telescope is supported at C,
firmly attached to one of the legs of the tripod.
The crystal is mounted on
the plate, u, with wax, the plate is clamped by the screw, v. The centering
apparatus consists of two slides at right angles to each other (one of these is
shown in the figure) and the screw, a, which works it; the end of the other
corresponding screw is seen at a'. The adjusting arrangement consists of f
two cylindrical sections, one of them, r, shown in the figure, the other at r ;
the cylinders have a common center. The circle on / is graduated to degrees

and quarter degrees, and the vernier gives the readings to 30".
A brilliant source of light is placed behind the collimator tube which is
at the top of the support C. Openings of various size and character are pro-
vided at the rear end of this tube in order to modify the size and shape of the
beam of light that is to be reflected from the crystal faces. The most com-
monly used opening is one made by placing two circular disks nearly in con-
tact with each other leaving between them an hour-glass shaped figure. The
telescope tube L is provided with several removable telescopes with lenses
which have different angular breadths and magnifying powers and hence are
suitable for observing faces varying in size and degree of polish. At the front
of the tube L there is a lens which is so pivoted that it may be thrown into or
out of the axis of the telescope. When this lens lies in the axis of the tube it
converts the telescope into a low-power microscope with which the crystal
may be observed. Without this lens the telescope has a long-distance focus
and only the beam of light reflected from the crystal face can be seen.
The method of use of the instrument is briefly as follows. The little plate u is removed
and upon it is fastened by means of some wax the crystal to be measured. The faces of
the zone that is to be measured should be placed as nearly as possible vertical to the sur-
face of this plate. It will usually facilitate the subsequent adjustment if a prominent face
in this zone be placed so that it is parallel to one of the edges of the plate u. This plate
with the attached crystal is then fastened in place by the screw v. During the preliminary
adjustments of the crystal the small lens in front of the tube L is placed in its axis and the
crystal observed through the microscope thus formed. It is usually better also to make
these first adjustments outside the dark room in daylight. By means of the screw-head k
the central post is raised or lowered until the center of the crystal lies in the plane of the
telescope. Next by means of the two sliding tables controlled by the screw-heads a and a'
the crystal is adjusted so that the edge over which the angle is to be measured coincides
with the axis of the instrument. This adjustment is most easily accomplished by turning
the central post of the instrument until one of these sliding plates lies at right angles to
the telescope and then by turning its screw-head bring the intersection in question to coin-
cide with the vertical cross-hair of the telescope tube. Then turn the post until the other
plate lies at right angles to the telescope and make a similar adjustment. Then in a similar
manner by means of the tipping screws x and y bring the intersection between the faces
to a position parallel with the vertical cross-hair of the telescope. By a combination of
these adjustments this edge should be made to coincide with the vertical cross-hair and to
remain stationary while the crystal is revolved upon the central post of the instrument.
Next the instrument is taken into the dark room and a light placed behind the collimator
tube, and the crystal turned until one of the faces is seen through the tube L to be brightly
illuminated. Then the little lens in the front of this tube is raised and the reflection of the
beam of light, or signal as it is called, should lie in the field. If the preliminary adjust-
ments were accurate the horizontal cross-hair will bisect this signal. In the majority of
cases, however, further slight adjustments will be necessary. Before the angles between
the faces can be measured their various signals must all be bisected by the horizontal cross-
hair. When these conditions are fulfilled each signal in turn is brought into place so that
it is bisected also
by the vertical cross-hair and its angular position read by means of the
graduated scale and vernier. The difference between the angles for two
normal angle between them. In making these LeTgfves the
readings care must be taken that the plate
on which the graduated circle is engraved is turned with the central
post. In order to
do this only the screw-head g must be used unless, as is
wise, the two screw-heads i and a
have been previously clamped together by means of I. For the accurate
adjustment of the
signals on the vertical cross-hair the tangent screw /3 is used. In making a record of the
angles measured it is important to note accurately the face from which each
signal is derived
a
?ith character of the signal. It is frequently helpful to make a sketch of the outlines
of the different faces and number or letter them.
232. Theodolite-Goniometer. A form of goniometer * having many

practical advantages and at present in wide use has two independent circles
381
Two-circle Reflection Goniometer
and is commonly known as the two-circle goniometer. It is used in a manner

analagous to that of the ordinary theodolite. Instruments of this type were
devised independently by Fedorow, Czapski and Goldschmidt. Other
models have been described since. In addition to the usual graduated hori-
zontal circle of Fig. 380, and the accompanying telescope and collimator, a
second graduated circle is added which revolves in a plane at right angles to
the first. Fig. 381, after Goldschmidt, gives a cross-sectional view of one of
*
Fedorow, Universal or Theodolit-Goniometer, Zs. Kryst., 21. 574, 1893; 22, 229,
1893; Czapski, Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenkunde, 1, 1893; Goldschmidt. Zs. Kryst., 21, 210,
1892; 24, 610, 1895; 25, 321, 538, 1896; 29, 333, 589, 1898. On the method of Gold-
schmidt, see Palache, Am. J. Sc., 2, 279, 1896; Amer. Mineral, 6, No. 2, et seq., 1920. A
simplified form of the theodolite-goniometer is described by Stober, Zs. Kryst., 29, 25,
1897; 64,442.
158 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
the earlier machines devised by him. It will serve to illustrate the essential
features of the instrument.
The crystal to be measured is attached at the end of the axis (h) of the
vertical circle and so adjusted by means of suitable centering and tipping
devices that a given plane, called the polar plane, is normal to this axis and
lies directly over the axis of the horizontal circle. In using the instrument,
instead of directly measuring the interfacial angles of the crystal, the position
of each face is determined independently of the others by the measurement of
its angular co-ordinates, or what might be called its latitude and longitude.
These co-ordinates are the angles (<f> and p of Goldschmidt) measured, respec-
tively, in the vertical and horizontal circles from an assumed pole and merid-
ian, which are fixed, in most cases, by the symmetry of the crystal. In prac-
tice the crystal is usually so mounted that its prismatic zone is perpendicular
to the vertical circle. A
plane at right angles to this zone, i.e., the basal plane
in the first four systems, is known as the polar plane and its position when
reflecting the signal into the telescope establishes the zero position for the
horizontal circle. The position of a pinacoid, usually the 010 plane, in the
prism zone establishes the zero position for the vertical circle. For example,
with an orthorhombic crystal, for the pyramid 111, the angle (measured on <f>
the vertical circle) is equal to 010 A 110 and p (measured on the horizontal
circle) is equal to 001 A 111.
Goldschmidt has shown that this instrument is directly applicable to the
system of indices and methods of
calculation and projection adopted
by him, which admit of the deducing
of the elements and symbols of a
given crystal with a minimum of
labor and calculation.* Fedorow
has also shownthat this in-
strument, with the addition of the
appliances devised by him, can be
most conveniently used in the crys-
tallographic and optical study of
crystals.
The following hints as to the methods of

using this instrument may prove helpful.
The telescope and colhmator tube
are placed at some convenient angle
to each other (usually about 70)
and then clamped in position. The
next step is to find the polar posi-
tion of the horizontal circle, i.e., the
position at which a crystal plane lying at right angles
to the axis of the vertical circle will throw the reflected beam of
light on to the cross-hairs
of the telescope. the
Obviously plane under these conditions must be normal to the
bisector of the angle between the axes of the collimator and
telescope, the line B-P Fig
382. The method by which this polar position is found is as follows: Some reflecting sur-
face is mounted upon the end of the
post h, Figs. 381, 382, making some small inclined
angle to the plane normal to that post. Then by
turning the instrument in both the hori-
*
See Goldschmidt's
Krystallographische Winkeltabellen (432 pp., Berlin, 1897).
e a les rec* ulre( b his g y stem f <* all known
9Q TTa -?
The i T
same author's ,
species.
atlas der Krystallformen, 1913 et
See also Zs. Kryst.,
work </ -11
wnrV giving .
all previously
seq., is a monumental
published crystal figures together with a discussion of the forms
ooserveu upon tnem.
zpntal and vertical planes this surface is brought into the proper position to reflect the
signal into the telescope, see position I, Fig. 382. The horizontal angle of this position is
noted. Then the vertical circle is turned through an angle of 180. This brings the
reflecting surface into the position indicated by the dotted lines in the figure. In order
to again bring this surface back to its reflecting position the vertical circle with the post
h must be moved in the horizontal plane until the position II is reached. The horizontal
reading of this position is also noted. The angle midway between these two readings is
the polar position desired. That is, when the post h lies in the direction of the broken
line P-B a plane normal to its axis would reflect a beam of light from the collimator into
the telescope. This position constitutes the zero position of the horizontal circle from
which the p angles are measured.
The method used to adjust a crystal upon the instrument so that it will occupy the
proper position for measurement will vary with the character of the crystal. Afew illus-
trations follow. 1. // the crystal has a basal plane at right angles to a prism zone. The
crystal is mounted upon the post h so that the faces of the prism zone lie as nearly as pos-
sible parallel to the axis of the post or the basal plane as nearly as possible normal to it.
Then the instrument is moved until the reading of the horizontal circle agrees with the
polar position already determined. Then by means of the tipping screws the crystal is
moved until the reflection from the basal plane is center ed upon the cross-hairs of the tele-
scope. If the adjustments have been accurately made the signal will remain stationary
while the vertical circle is revolved. Next the horizontal circle is moved through an angle
of 90. This will bring the reflections from the faces of the prism zone into the telescope.
If the pinacoid 010 is present the vertical circle is turned until the reflected signal from this
face falls on the horizontal cross-hair. The reading of the vertical circle under these con-
ditions establishes the position of the meridian from which the </>angles are measured.
If the pinacoid 010 is not present it is usually possible to determine its theoretical position
from the position of other faces in the prism zone or in the zone between 010 and 100.
2. // there is no basal plane present upon the crystal but a good prism zone. Under these cir-
cumstances the horizontal circle is turned until it is exactly 90 away from its determined
polar angle and then the crystal adjusted by means of the tipping scr ews until the signals
from the faces of the prism zone all fall on the vertical cross-hair as the vertical circle of
the goniometer is turned. 3. // neither basal plane or prism zone is available but there are
two or more faces present which are equally inclined to a theoretical basal plane. First adjust
the crystal as nearly as possible in the proper position and then obtaining reflections from
these faces note the horizontal
circle reading in each case.
Take an average of these read-
ings and adding or subtracting
this angle from the polar angle
of the horizontal scale place H 6010
the instrument in this position.
Then by tipping the crystal [0=0; p=90
try to bring it into such a
position that all of these faces
will successively reflect the sig-
nal into the telescope as the
vertical circle is turned. The
operation may have to be re-
peated two or three times before
the final adjustment is made.
If the angle between the inclined
faces and the theoretical base 120
is known the instrument can 43 24; P90
be set in the proper position
at once and the crystal
brought into adjustment very
quickly. Other problems wil
arise in practice but their
It may frequently happen
solution will be along similar lines to those suggested above.
In that rase
that more than one method of adjustment may be used with a given crystal.
,
in all possible ways before making the measurements.

160 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
After these adjustments have been completed the crystal is turned about both the
horizontal and vertical planes so that each face upon it successively reflects the signal
into the telescope. The horizontal and vertical readings are made in each case. The
forms present can then be readily plotted in either the stereographic or gnomonic projec-
tions. Fig. 383 shows how the forms of a simple crystal of topaz could be plotted in the
stereographic projection from the <f> and p angles obtained from it the two circle goni-
ometer measurements. For each face the vertical circle angle, <, is plotted on the divided
circle, the position of 6(010) giving the zero point while the horizontal circle angle is plotted
on a radial line from the center of the projection, the position of c(001) giving its zero point.
COMPOUND OR TWIN CRYSTALS

233. Twin Crystals. Twin crystals are those in which one or more
parts regularly arranged are in reverse position with reference to the other
part or parts. They often appear externally to consist of two or more crystals
symmetrically united, and sometimes have the form of a cross or star. They
also exhibit the composition in the reversed arrangement of part of the faces,
384 386
Thenardite Columbite Fluorite
in the striae of the surface, and in re-entering angles; in certain cases the
compound structure can only be surely detected by an examination in polar-
ized light. The above figures (Figs. 384-386) are examples of typical kinds of
twin crystals, and many others are given on the pages following.
To illustrate the relation of the parts in a twin crystal, Figs. 387, 388 are
given. Fig. 387 shows a regular octahedron divided into halves by a plane
parallel to an octahedral face. If now the lower half be supposed to be re-
volved 180 about an axis normal to this plane, the twinned octahedron of
Fig. 388 results. This is a common type of twin in the isometric system,
and the method here employed to describe the position of the parts of the
crystal to one another is applicable to nearly all twins.
234. Distinction between
Twinning and Parallel Grouping. It is
important to understand that crystals, or parts of crystals, so grouped as to
occupy parallel positions with reference to each other that is, those whose
similar faces are parallel are not called twins; the term is applied only
where the crystals or parts of them are united in their reversed
position in
accordance with some deducible mathematical law. Thus
Fig. 389, which
represents a cluster of partial crystals of is a case of
analcite, parallel
grouping simply (see Art. 252); but Fig. 407 illustrates twinning, and this is
true of Fig. 416 also. Since though in these cases the axes remain
parallel
the similar faces (and planes of
symmetry) are reversed in position.
235. Twinning-Axis. The relative position of the parts of a twinned
crystal can be best described as just explained, by reference to that line or
axis called the twinning-axis, a revolution of 180 about which
would serve to
388
Twinned Octahedron Analei'te
bring the twinned part parallel to the other, or in other words, which would
cause one of the parallel parts to take a twinned position relatively to the other.
The twinning-axis is always a possible crystalline line that is, either
a crystallographic axis or the normal to some possible face on the crystal,
usually one of the common fundamental forms.
It is not to be supposed that ordinary twins have actually been formed by
such a revolution of the parts of crystals, for all twins (except those of second-
ary origin, see Art 242) are the result of regular molecular growth or enlarge-
ment, like that of the simple crystal. This reference to a revolution, and an
axis of revolution, is only a convenient means of describing the forms.
In certain rare cases, particularly of certain pseudo-hexagonal species, a
revolution of 60 or 120 about a normal to the base has been assumed to
explain the complex group observed.
236. T winning-Plane. The plane normal to the axis of revolution is
called the twinning-plane. The axis and plane of twinning bear the same
relation to both individuals in their reversed position; consequently, in the
majority of cases, the twinned crystals are symmetrical with reference to the
twinning-plane.
The twinning-plane is, with rate exceptions, parallel to a possible occurring
face on the given species, and usually one of the more frequent or fundamental
forms. The exceptions occur only in the triclinic and monoclinic systems,
where the twinning-axis is sometimes one of the oblique crystallographic axes,
and then the plane of twinning normal to it is obviously not necessarily a
crystallographic plane; this is conspicuously true in albite.
237. Composition-Plane. The plane by which the reversed crystals
are united is the composition-plane. This and the twinning-plane very com-
monly coincide; this is true of the simple example given above (Fig. 388),
where the plane about which the revolution may be conceived to take place
(normal to the twinning-axis) and the plane by which the semi-individuals are
united are identical. When not coinciding, the two planes are generally at
right angles to each other that is, the composition-plane is parallel to the
axis of revolution. Examples of this are given below. Still again, where the
162 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
crystals are not regularly developed,

and where they interpenetrate, the con-
tact surface may be interrupted, or may be exceedingly irregular. In such
cases the axis and plane of twinning have, as always, a definite position, but
the composition-plane loses its significance.
Thus in quartz twins the interpenetrating parts have often no rectilinear
boundary, but mingle in the most irregular manner throughout the mass,
showing this composite irregularity by abrupt variations in the character of
the surfaces. This irregular internal structure, found in many quartz crystals,
even the common kinds, is well brought out by means of polarized light; also
by etching with hydrofluoric acid.
The composition-plane has sometimes a more definite signification than the
twinning-plane. This is due to the fact that in many cases,
whereas the former
is fixed, the twinning-axis (and twinning-plane) maybe exchanged
390 for another line (and plane) at right angles to each, respectively,
7v since a revolution about the second axis will also satisfy the
'
* c conditions of producing the required form.
'
An example of this
is furnished by Fig. 390, of orthoclase; the composition-plane
is here fixed namely, parallel to the crystal face, 6(010).

But the axis of revolution may be either (1) parallel to this
face and normal to a (100), which is then consequently the
twinning-plane, though the axis does not coincide with the
crystallographic axis; or (2) the twinning-axis may be taken as
__ coinciding with the vertical axis, and then the twinning-plane
Orthoclase normal to it is not a crystallographic face. In other simpler
cases, also, the same principle holds good, generally in con-
sequence of the possible mutual interchange of the planes of twinning and
composition. In most cases the true twinning-plane is evident, since it is
parallel to some face on the crystal of simple mathematical ratio.
238. An interesting example of the possible choice between two twinning-axes at right
angles to each other is furnished by the species staurolite. Fig. 439 shows a prismatic twin
from Fannin Co., Ga. The measured angle for bb was 70 30'. The twinning-axis deduced
from this may be normal to the face (230), which would then be the twinning-plane. Or,
instead of this axis, its complementary axis at right angles to it may be taken, which would
equally well produce the observed form. Now in this species it happens that the faces, 130
and 230 (over 100), are almost exactly at right angles with each other, and, according to the
latter supposition, 130 becomes the twinning-plane, and the axis of revolution is normal to
it. Hence, either 230 or 130 may be the twinning-plane, either supposition agreeing closely
with the measured angle (which could not be obtained with great accuracy). The former
method of twinning (tw. pi. 230) conforms to the other twins observed on the species, and
hence it may be accepted. What is true in this case, however, is not always true, for it
will seldom happen that of the two complementary axes each is so nearly normal to a face
of the crystal. In most cases one of the two axes conforms to the law in being a normal
to a possible face, and the other does not, and hence there is no doubt as to which is the
true twinning-axis.
Another interesting case is that furnished by columbite. The common twins of the
species are similar to Fig. 385, p. 160, and have e(021) as the twinning-plane; but twins
also occur like Fig. 434, p. 169, where the twinning-plane is g(023). The two faces, 021
and 023, are nearly at right angles to each other, but the measured angles are in this case
sufficiently exact to prove that the two kinds cannot be referred to one and the same law.
239. Contact- and Penetration-Twins. In contact-twins, when nor-

mally formed, the two halves are simple connate, being united to each other
by the composition-plane; they are illustrated by Figs. 385, 388, etc. In
actual crystals the two parts are seldom symmetrical, as demanded by
theory, but one may preponderate to a greater or less extent over the other;
in some cases only a small portion of the second individual in the reversed
position mayexist. Very great irregularities are observed in nature in this
respect. Moreover, the re-entering angles are often obliterated by the abnor-
mal developments of one or other of the parts, and often only an indistinct line
on some of the faces marks the division between the -two individuals.
Penetration-twins are those in which two or more complete crystals inter-
penetrate, as it were crossing through each other. Normally, the crystals have
a common center, which is the center of the axial system for both practically, ;
however, as in contact-twins, great irregularities occur.

Examples of twins of this second kind are given in the annexed figures,
Figs. 386 and 391 of fluorite, Fig. 392 of tetrahedrite, and Fig. 393 of chabazite.
Other examples occur in the pages following, as, for instance, of the species
staurolite (Figs. 438-441), the crystals of which sometimes occur in nature
with almost the perfect symmetry demanded by theory. It is obvious that
the distinction between contact- and penetration-twins is not of great import-
ance, and the line cannot always be clearly drawn between them.
392 393
Fluorite Tetrahedrite Chabazite
240. Paragenic and Metagenic Twins. The distinction of paragenic and metagenic
so
twins belongs rather to crystallogeny than crystallography. Yet the forms are often
obviously distinct that a brief notice of the distinction
is important.
In ordinary twins, the compound structure had its beginning in a nucleal compound
molecule, or was compound in its very origin;
and whatever
394 are only irregularities in the devel-
inequalities in the result, these
the crystal was at
opment from such a nucleus. But in others, in itself or in
first simple; and afterwards, through some change
the condition of the material supplied for its increase, received
new
in a reversed position. This mode ot
layers, or a continuation,
to the origin of the
twinning is metagenic, or a result subsequent
crystal; while the ordinary mode
is paragenic. One form ot it is
illustrated in Fig. 394. The middle portion had attained
a length of
half an inch or more, and then became geniculated simultaneously
at either extremity. These geniculations are often repeated in
rutile, and the ends of
the crystal are thus bent into one another,
and occasionally produce nearly regular prismatic forms.
the successive
This metagenic twinning is sometimes presented by
as in some quartz crvstals, especia
layers of deposition in a crystal,
thin, being of oppos
Rutile amethyst, the inseparable layers, exceedingly
kinds. In a similar manner, crystals of the triclmic feldspars,
_-
albite, etc.,
.,
osc
are often made up of thin plates parallel to 6(010) by oscillatory
and the face c(001), accordingly, is finely striated parallel to the edge
composition,
and Symmetrical. In the

241. Repeated Twinning, Polysynthetic has been mentioned, that
preceding paragraph one case of repeated twinning
or parallel grouping in re-
of the feldspars; it is a case of parallel repetition
successive lamellae. This kind of twinning is
versed position of crystalline
164 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
often called polysynthetic twinning, the lamellae in many cases being extremely
thin, and giving rise to a series of parallel lines (striations) on a crystal face or
a surface of cleavage. The triclinic feldspars show in many cases polysyn-
thetic twinning and not infrequently on both c(001) and 6(010), cf. p. 172.
It is also observed with magnetite (Fig. 474) pyroxene, barite, etc.
,
Another kind of repeated twinning is by Figs. 395-400, where

illustrated
the successively reversed individuals are not parallel. In these cases the axes
may, however, lie in a zone, as the prismatic twins of aragonite, or they may
be inclined to each other, as in Fig. 397 of staurolite In all such cases the
repetition of the twinning tends to produce circular forms, when the angle
between the two axial systems is an aliquot part of 360 (approximately).
Thus six-rayed twinned crystals, consisting of three individuals (hence called
trillings), occur with chrysoberyl (Fig. 395), or cerussite (Fig. 396), or staurolite
(Fig. 397), since three times the angle of twinning in each case is not far from
360. Again, five-fold twins, or fivelings, occur in the octahedrons of gold and
397
Spinel Rutile Phillipsite
spinel (Fig 398), since 5 X 70 32' = 360 (approx.). Eight-fold twins, or

eigktlings, of rutile (Figs. 399, 413) occur, since the angle of the axes in twinned
position goes approximately eight times in 360.
Repeated twinning of the symmetrical type often serves to give the com-
pound crystal an apparent symmetry of higher grade than that of the simple
individual, and the result is often spoken of as a kind of pseudo-symmetry
(Art. 20) cf. Fig. 431 of aragonite, which represents a basal section of a
,
pseudo-hexagonal crystal. Fig. 400 of phillipsite (cf. Figs. 452-454) is an inter-

EXAMPLES OF IMPORTANT METHODS OF TWINNING 165
esting case, since it shows how a multiple twin of a monoclinic crystal may
simulate an isometric crystal (dodecahedron).
Compound crystals in which twinning exists in accordance with two laws
at once are not of common occurrence; an excellent example is afforded by
staurolite, Fig. 441. They have also been observed with albite, orthoclase,
and in other cases.
242. Secondary Twinning. When there is reason to believe that the
twinning has been produced subsequently to the original formation of the
crystal, or crystalline mass, as, for example, by pressure, it is said to be
secondary. Thus the calcite grains of a crystalline limestone often show such
secondary twinning lamellae. The same are occasionally observed (||c, 001)
in pyroxene crystals. Further, the poly synthetic twinning of the triclinic
feldspars is often secondary in origin. This subject is further discussed on a
later page, where it is also explained that in certain cases twinning may be
produced artificially in a crystal individual e.g., in calcite (see Art. 282).
EXAMPLES OF IMPORTANT METHODS OF TWINNING

Isometric System.
243. With few exceptions the twins of the normal
system are of one kind, the twinning-axis an octahedral axis, and
class of this
the twinning-plane consequently parallel to an octahedral face; in most cases,
also, the latter coincides with the composition-plane. Fig. 388, p. 161,*
401 402 403
Galena Hauynite Sodalite
shows this kind as applied to the simple octahedron; it is especially common

with the spinel group of minerals, and is hence called in general a spinel-twin.
to designate the faces on
*
It will! be noted that here and elsewhere the letters used
the twinned parts of crystals are distinguished by a subscript
line.
166 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Fig. 401 is a similar more complex form; Fig. 402 shows a cube twinned by this
method, and Fig. 403 represents the same form but shortened in the direction
of the octahedral axis, and hence having the anomalous aspect of a triangular
pyramid. All these cases are contact-twins.
Penetration-twins, following the same law, are also common. A simple
case of fluorite is shown in Fig. 391, p. 163; Fig. 404 shows one of galena;
Fig. 405 is a repeated octahedral twin of haiiynite, and
Fig. 406 a dodecahedral twin of sodalite.
244. In the pyritohedral class of the isometric system
penetration-twins ot the type shown in Fig. 407 are
common (this form of pyrite is often called the iron
cross). Here the cubic axis is the twinning-axis, and
obviously such a twin is impossible in the normal
class.
408 and 409 show analogous forms with par-
Figs.
axes for crystals belonging to the tetrahedral
allel
class. The peculiar development of Fig. 408 of
Pyrite
tetrahedrite is to be noted. Fig. 410 is a twin of the
ordinary spinel type of another tetrahedral species, sphalerite; with it,
complex forms with repeated twinning are not uncommon and sometimes
polysynthetic twin lamellae are noted.
408 409 410
Tetrahedrite Eulytite Sphalerite
245. Tetragonal System. The most common method is that where

the twinning-plane is parallel to a face of the It is especially
pyramid, e(101) .
characteristic of the species of the rutile

group viz., rutile and cassiterite:
411 413
Cassiterite Zircon Rutile
also similarly the allied species zircon. This is illustrated in Fig. 411, and
again in Fig. 412. Fig. 413 shows a repeated twin of rutile, the twinning
according to this law; the vertical axes of the successive six individuals lie
in a plane, and an inclosed circle is the result. Another repeated twin of rutile
according to the same law is shown in Fig. 399; here the successive vertical
axes form a zigzag line; Fig. 414 shows an analogous twin of hausmannite.
Another kind of twinning with the twinning-plane parallel to a face of the
pyramid (301) is shown in Fig. 415.
246. In the pyramidal class of the same system twins of the type of Fig.
416 are not rare. Here the vertical axis, c, is the twinning-axis; such a crystal
may simulate one of the normal class.
414 415 416
Hausmannite Rutile Scheelite
In chalcopyrite, of the sphenoidal class, twinning with a face of the unit

As the angles
pyramid, /(111), as the twinning-plane is common (Fig. 417).
differ but a small fraction of a degree from those of a
417 often resemble closely
regular octahedron, such twins
The face 6(101) may also be a twinning-
spinel-twins.
been noted.
plane and other rarer types have
247. Hexagonal System. In the hexagonal divis-
ion of this system twins are rare. An example is
furnished by pyrrhotite, Fig. 418, where the twinning-
is the pyramid (1011), the vertical
axes of the
plane
individual crystals being nearly at right angles to each
other (since 0001 A 1011 = 45 8').
Chalcopyrite 248. In the species belonging to the trigonal or
rhombokedral division, twins are common. Thus the
as in the
twinning-axis may be the vertical axis,
contact-twins of Figs. 419 and 420, or the penetration-
twin of Fig. 393. Or the twinning-plane may be
the obtuse rhombohedron e(0112), as in Fig.
421, the vertical axes crossing at angles of 127 2

and 52i. Again, the twinning-plane may be
as in 422-425, the_ vertical axes
r(10ll) Figs.
or (0221), as in Fig. Pvrrhotite
nearly at right angles (90f);
5.
426, the
tne axes inclined 53f
004 and
auu j.^ 4
126| .
several methods
In the trapezohedral class, the species quartz shows
427 the is the pyramid {(1122}, the axes
twinning. In Fig. twinning-plane
crossing at angles of 84| and 95i-
In Fig. 428 the twmmng-axis is c, the
168 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
axes hence parallel, the individuals both right- or both left-handed

but un-
to and coinciding with 2(0111). The re-
symmetrical, r(]0ll) then parallel
420 421 422
Figs. 419-426, Calcite
suiting forms, as in Fig. 428, are mostly penetration-twins, and the parts are
often very irregularly united, as shown by dull areas (z) on the plus rhombo-
hedral face (r); otherwise these twins are recognized by pyro-electrical
phenomena. In Fig. 429 the twinning-plane is a(1120) the Brazil law
the individuals respectively right- and left-handed and the twin symmetrical
with reference to an a-face; these are usually irregular penetration-twins; in
these twins r and r, also z and z, coincide These twins often show, in con-
427 428 429
Figs. 427-429, Quartz

verging polarized light, the phenomenon of Airy's spirals. It may be added
that pseudo-twins of quartz are common that is, groups of crystals which
nearly conform to some more or less complex twinning law, but where the
grouping is nevertheless only accidental
430 431
249. Orthorhombic System. In the
orthorhombic system the commonest
method of twinning is that where the
twinning-plane is a face of a prism of 60,
or nearly 60. This is well shown with the
species of the aragonite group. In accord-
ance with the principle stated in Art. 241,
the twinning after this law is often
repeated, and thus forms with pseudo-
hexagonal symmetry result. Fig. 430
shows a simple twin of aragonite; Fig. 431
shows a basal section of an aragonite triplet
\
Aragonite
which although it resembles a hexagonal
prism reveals its twinned character by the striations on the basal plane and
by irregularities on its composite prism faces due to the fact that the pris-
matic angle is not exactly 60. With witherite (and bromlite), apparent
hexagonal pyramids are common, but the true complex twinning is revealed
in polarized light, as noted later.
Twinning of the same type, but where a dome of 60 is twinning-plane,
is common with arsenopyrite (tw. pi. e(101)), as shown in Figs. 432, 433; also
434
Arsenopyrite Columbite
Fig. 434 of columbite, but compare Fig. 385 and remarks in Art 238, Another
example is given in Fig. 395 of alexandrite (chrysoberyl) .
Chrysolite, man-
435 436 437
Marcasite Arsenopyrite
ganite, humite, are other species with which this kind of twinning is common.
Another common method of twinning is that where the twinning is parallel
170 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
to a face of a prism of about 70J, as shown in Fig. 435. With this method
symmetrical fivelings not infrequently occur (Figs. 436, 437).
The species staurolite illustrates three kinds of twinning. In Fig. 438 the
twinning-plane is (032), and since (001 A 032)
= 45 41', the crystals cross
nearly at right angles. In Fig. 439 the twinning-plane is the prism (230). In
Fig. 440 it is the pyramid (232) the crystals then crossing at angles of about
;
60, stellate trillings occur (see Fig. 397), and indeed more complex forms. In
Fig. 441 there is twinning according to both (032) and (232).
440
Staurolite
441
Staurolite Struvite
In the hemimorphic class, twins of the type shown in Fig. 442, with c(001)
as the twinning-plane, are to be noted.
250. Mpnoclinic System. In the monoclinic system, twins with the ver-
tical axis as twinning-axis are common this is illustrated by Fig. 443 of augite
;
(pyroxene), Fig. 444 of gypsum, and Fig. 445 of orthoclase (see also Fig. 390,
443 444 445
Augite Gypsum Orthoclase
p. 162). With the latter species these twins are called Carlsbad twins (because
common in the trachyte of Carlsbad, Bohemia) they may be contact-twins
;
(Fig. 390), or irregular penetration-twins (Fig. 445). In Fig. 390 it is to be

noted that c and x fall nearly in the same plane.
In Fig. 446, also of orthoclase, the twinning-plane is the clinodome
(021),
and since (001 A 021) = 44 56^', this method of
twinning yields nearly
square prisms. These twins are called Baveno twins (from a prominent
locality at Baveno, Italy) ; they are often repeated (Fig. 447). In Fig. 448 a
446 447 448
Orthoclase
Manebach twin is shown; here the twinning-plane is c(001). Other rarer

types of twinning have been noted with orthoclase. Polysynthetic twinning
with c(001) as twinning-plane i& common with pyroxene (cf. Fig. 461, p. 173).
Twins of the aragonite-chrysoberyl type are not uncommon with mono-
clinic species, having a prominent 60 prism (or dome), as in Fig. 449. Stellate
twins after this law are common with chondrodite and clinohumite. An
analogous twin of pyroxene is shown in Fig. 450; here the pyramid (122) is the
twinning-plane, and since (010 A 122)
= 59 21', the crystals cross at angles
of nearly _60; further, the orthopinacoids fall nearly in a common zone, since
(100 A 122)
= 90 9'. In Fig. 451 the twinning-plane is the orthodome
449 450 461
Wolframite Pyroxene Pyroxene
and the crystals

(101) Phillipsite and harmotome exhibit multiple twinning,
with
often show pseudo-symmetry. Fig. 452 shows a cruciform fourling
the twinning shown by the stnations on the side face.
c(001) as twinning-plane,
This is compounded in Fig. 453 with twinning-plane (Oil), making nearly
with ra(110) as twinning-plane
square prisms, and this further repeated
yields the form in Fig. 454, or even Fig. 400, p. 164, resembling an isometric
dodecahedron, each face showing a fourfold striation.
452 453 454
Phillipsite
251. Triclinic System. The most
interesting twins of the triclinic
system are those shown by the feldspars. Twinning with 6(010) as the
twinning-plane is very common, especially polysynthetic twinning yielding
thin parallel lamellae, shown by the striations on the face c (or the correspond-
ing cleavage-surface), and also clearly revealed in polarized light. This is
known as the albite law (Figs. 455, 456). Another important method (Fig.
457) isthat of the pericline law; the twinning-axis is the crystallographic
axis b. Here the twins are united by a section (rhombic section) shown in the
figure and further explained under the feldspars. Polysynthetic twinning after
this law is common, and hence a cleavage-mass may show two sets of striations,
one on the surface parallel to c(001) and the other on that parallel to 6(010).
The angle made by these last striations with the edge 001/010 is character-
istic of the particular triclinic species, as noted later.
455 456 457
Albite
Twins of albite of other rarer types also
occur, and further twins similar
458 to the Carlsbad, Baveno, and Manebach twins of ortho-
clase. Fig. 458 shows twinning according to both the
albite and Carlsbad types.
REGULAR GROUPING OF CRYSTALS

252. Parallel Grouping. Connected with the sub-
ject of twin crystals is that of the parallel position of
associated crystals of the same species, or of different
species.
Crystals of the same species occurring together are
Albite very commonly in parallel position. In this way large
crystals, as of calcite, quartz, fluorite, are sometimes buiJt up of smaller

individuals grouped together with corresponding faces This
parallel.
parallel grouping is often seen in crystals as they lie on the supporting
rock. On glancing the eye over a surface covered with crystals a reflection
from one face will often be accompanied by reflections from the corres-
ponding face in each of the other crystals, showing that the crystals are
throughout similar in their positions.
With many species, complex crystalline forms result from the growth of
parallel partial crystals in the
459 460
direction of the crystallographic
axes, or axes of symmetry. Thus
dendritic forms, resembling branch-
ing vegetation, often of great del-
icacy, are seen with gold, copper,
argentite, and other species, espe-
cially those of the isometric sys-
tem. is shown in Fig. 459
This
(ideal),and again in Fig. 460,
where the twinned and flattened
cubes (cf. Fig. 403, p. 165) are
grouped in directions corresponding
to the diagonals of an octahedral
Co
face which is the twinning-plane.
253. Parallel Grouping of Unlike Species. Crystals of different spe-
cies often show the same tendency to parallelism in mutual position. This is
true most frequently of species which are more or less closely similar in form
and composition. Crystals of albite, implanted on a surface of orthoclase,
are sometimes an example of
461 462
this; crystals of amphibole and
pyroxene (Fig. 461), of zircon
and xenotime (Fig. 462), of va-
rious kinds of mica, are also at
times observed associated in par-
allel position.
The same relation of position
also occasionally occurs where
there is no connection in composi-
tion, as the crystals of rutile
on tabular crystals of hematite,
the vertical axes of the former
coinciding with the horizontal
Amphibole enclosing Xenotime enclosing zircon ax es of the latter. Crystals of
in parallel position
pyroxene in parallel calcite have been observed whose
position rhombohedral faces had a series
of quartz crystals upon them, all in parallel position; sometimes three
such quartz crystals, one on each rhombohedral face, entirely envelop
the calcite, and unite with re-entering angles to form pseudo-twins (rather
Parallel growths of the sphenoidal chalcopyr-
trillings) of quartz after calcite.
in crystal
ite upon the tetrahedral sphalerite are common, the similarity
chal-
structure of the two species controlling the position of the crystals of
copyrite.
174 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
IRREGULARITIES OF CRYSTALS
254. The laws of crystallization, when unmodified by extrinsic causes,
should produce forms of exact geometrical symmetry, the angles being not
only equal, but also the homologous faces of crystals and the dimensions in the
directions of like axes. This symmetry is, however, so uncommon that it can
hardly be considered other than an ideal perfection. The various possible
kinds of symmetry, and the relation of this ideal geometrical symmetry to the
actual crystallographic symmetry, have been discussed in Arts. 14 and 18 et
seq. Crystals are very generally distorted, and often the fundamental forms
are so completely disguised that an intimate familiarity with the possible
irregularities is required in order to unravel their complexities. Even the
angles may occasionally vary rather widely.
The irregularities of crystals may be treated under several heads: 1,
Variations of form and dimensions; 2, Imperfections of surface; 3, Varia-
tions of angles; 4, Internal imperfections and impurities.
1. VARIATIONS IN THE FORMS AND DIMENSIONS

OF CRYSTALS
255. Distortion in General. The variations in the forms of crystals,
or, inother words, their distortion, may be irregular in character, certain faces
being larger and others smaller than in the ideal geometrical solid. On the
other hand, it may be symmetrical, giving to the distorted form the symmetry
of a group or system different from that to which it actually belongs. The
former case is the common rule, but the latter is the more interesting.
256. Irregular Distortion. As stated above and on p. 13, all crystals
show to a greater or less extent an irregular or accidental variation from the
ideal geometrical form. This distortion, if not accompanied by change in
the interfacial angles, has no particular significance, and does not involve any
deviation from the laws of crystallographic symmetry. Figs. 463, 464 show
distorted crystals of quartz they may be compared with the ideal form, Fig.
;
284, p. 113. Fig. 465 is an ideal and Fig. 466 an actual crystal of lazulite.
463 464 465 466
Quartz Lazulite
The correct identification of the forms on a
crystal is rendered much more difficult
because ol this prevailing
distortion, especially when it results in the entire obliteration of
urtain laces by the enlargement of others. In deciphering the distorted crystalline forms
it must be remembered that while
the appearance of the crystals may be entirely altered,
e intertacial angles remain the
same; moreover, like faces are physically alike that is
alike in degree of luster, in striations, and so on. Thus the prismatic faces of quartz show
almost always characteristic horizontal striations.
In addition to the variations in form which have just been described, still
greater irregularities are due to the fact that, in many cases, crystals in nature
are attached either to other crystals or to some rock surface, and in consequence
of this are only partially developed. Thus quartz crystals are generally
attached by one extremity of the prism, and hence have only one set of pyra-
midal faces; perfectly formed crystals, having the double pyramid complete,
are rare.
257. Symmetrical Distortion. The most interesting examples of the
symmetrical distortion of crystalline forms are found among crystals of the
isometric system. An elongation in the direction of one cubic axis may give
the appearance of tetragonal symmetry, or that in the direction of two cubic
axes of orthorhombic symmetry; while in the direction of an octahedral axis
a lengthening or shortening gives rise to forms of apparent rhombohedral
symmetry. Such cases are common with native gold, silver, and copper.
A cube lengthened or shortened along one axis becomes a right square prism, and if
varied in the direction of two axes is changed to a rectangular prism. Cubes of pyrite,
galena, fluorite, etc., are often thus distorted. It is very unusual to find a cubic crystal
that is a true symmetrical cube. In some species the cube or octahedron (or other iso-
metric form) is lengthened into a capillary crystal or needle, as happens in cuprite and pyrite.
An octahedron flattened parallel to a face that is, in the direction of a trigonal sym-
metry axis is reduced to a tabular crystal resembling a rhombohedral crystal with basal
plane (Fig. 467). If lengthened in the same direction (i.e. along line A-B, Fig. 468), to the
obliteration of the terminal octahedral faces, it becomes an acute rhombohedron.
When an octahedron is extended in the direction of a line between two opposite edges,
467 468 469
Distorted Octahedrons
470 471 472 473
Distorted Dodecahedrons
or that of a binary symmetry axis, it has the general form of a recf ^

tan la oct he( on
f, ^ }f. domes
of two orthorhombic jn
d
still farther extended, as in Fig. 469, it resembles a combination
(spinel, fluorite, magnetite).

176 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
The dodecahedron lengthened in the direction of a trigonal symmetry axis becomes a

six-sided prism with three-sided summits, as in Fig. 470. If shortened in the same direc-
tion, it becomes a short prism of the same

kind (Fig. 471). Both resemble rhombohedral
forms and are common in garnet. When lengthened in the direction of one of the cubic
axes, the dodecahedron becomes a square prism with pyramidal summits (Fig. 472), and
shortened along the same axis it is reduced to a square octahedron, with truncated angles
(Fig. 473).
The trapezohedron elongated in the direction of an octahedral (trigonal) axis assumes
rhombohedral (trigonal) symmetry.
If the elongation of the trapezohedron takes place alonga cubic axis, it becomes a double
eight-sided pyramid with four-sided summits; or if these summit planes are obliterated
by a farther extension, it becomes a complete eight-sided double pyramid.
Similarly the trisoctahedron, tetrahexahedron and hexoctahedron may show distortion
of the same kind. Further examples are to be found in the other systems.
2. IMPERFECTIONS OF THE SURFACES [OF CRYSTALS

258. Striations Due to Oscillatory Combinations. The parallel lines
or furrows on the surfaces of crystals are called strice or striations, and such
surfaces are said to be striated.
Each little ridge on a striated surface is inclosed by two narrow planes
more or less regular. These planes often correspond in position to different
faces of the crystal, and these ridges have been formed by a continued
oscillation in the operation of the causes that give rise, when acting uninter-
ruptedly, to enlarged faces. By this means, the surfaces of a crystal are
marked in parallel lines, with a succession of narrow planes meeting at an
angle and constituting the ridges referred to.
This combination of different planes in the formation of a surface has been
termed oscillatory combination. The horizontal striations on prismatic
crystals of quartz are examples of this combination, in which the oscillation
has- taken place between the prismatic and rhombohedral faces. Thus
crystals of quartz are often tapered to a point, without the usual pyramidal
terminations.
Other examples are the striations on the cubic faces of pyrite parallel to
the intersections of the cube with the faces of the
pyritohedron; also the striations on magnetite due
to the oscillation between the octahedron and do-
decahedron. Prisms of tourmaline are very com-
monly bounded vertically by three convex surfaces,
owing to an oscillatory combination of the faces in
the prismatic zone.
259. Striations Due to Repeated Twinning. The
striations of the basal plane of albite and other
triclinic feldspars, also of the rhombohedral surfaces
x
of some calcite, have been explained in Art. 241 as

due to polysynthetic twinning. This is illustrated by
Magnetite
Fig. 474 of magnetite from Port Henry, N. Y. (Kemp.)
260. Markings from Erosion and Other Causes. The faces of crys-
tals are often uneven, or have the
crystalline structure developed as a con-
sequence of etching by some chemical agent. Cubes of galena are frequently
thus uneven, and crystals of lead sulphate
(anglesite) or lead carbonate (cerus-
site) are sometimes present as evidence with regard to the cause.
Crystals
of numerous other
species, even of corundum, spinel, quartz, etc., sometimes
show the same result of partial change over the surface often the incipient
stage in a process tending to a final removal of the whole crystal. Interesting

investigations have been made by various authors on the action of solvents
on different minerals, the actual structure of the crystals being developed in
this way. This method of etching is fully discussed, with illustrations in
another place (Art. 286).
The markings on the surfaces of crystals are not, however, always to be
ascribed to etching. In most cases such depressions, as well as the minute
elevations upon the faces having the form of low pyramids (so-called vicinal
prominences) are a part of the original molecular growth of the crystal, and
,
often serve to show the successive stages in its history. They may be imper-
fections arising from an interrupted or disturbed development of the form, the
perfectly smooth and even crystalline faces being the result of completed
action free from disturbing causes. Examples of the markings referred to
occur on the crystals of most minerals, and conspicuously so on the rhombo-
hedral faces of quartz.
Faces of crystals are often marked with angular elevations more or less
distinct, which are due to oscillatory combination. Octahedrons of fluorite
are common which have for each face a surface of minute cubes, proceeding
from an oscillation between the cube and octahedron. Sometimes an examina-
tion of such a crystal shows that though the form is apparently octahedral,
there are no octahedral faces present at all. Other similar cases could be
mentioned.
Whatever their cause, these minute markings are often of great importance
as revealing the true molecular symmetry of the crystal. For it follows from
the symmetry of crystallization that like faces must be physically alike
that is, in regard to their surface character; it thus often happens that on all
the crystals of a species from a given locality, or perhaps from all localities, the
same planes are etched or roughened alike. There is much uniformity on
the faces of quartz crystals in this respect.
261. Curved surfaces may result from (a) oscillatory combination;
or (6) some independent molecular condition producing curvatures in the
laminae of the crystal or (c) from a mechanical cause.
;
Curved surfaces of the first kind have been already mentioned (Art. 258).
A singular curvature of this nature is seen in Fig. 475, of calcite; in the lower
476 476
Calcite Diamond Beryl
part traces of a scalenohedral form are apparent

which was in oscillatory com-
bination with the prismatic form.
178 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Curvatures of the second kind sometimes have all the faces convex. This
isthe case in crystals of diamond (Fig. 476), some of which are almost spheres.
The mode of curvature, in which all the faces are equally convex, is less
common than that in which a convex surface is opposite and parallel to a
corresponding concave surface. Rhombohedrons of dolomite and siderite are
usually thus curved. The feathery curves of frost on windows and the
flagging-stones of pavements in winter are other examples. The alabaster
rosettes from the Mammoth Cave, Kentucky, are similar. Stibnite crystals
sometimes show very remarkable curved and twisted forms.
A third kind of curvature is of mechanical origin. Sometimes crystals
appear as if they had been broken transversely into many pieces, a slight
displacement of which has given a curved form to the prism. This is common
in tourmaline and beryl. The beryls of Monroe, Conn., often present these
interrupted curvatures, as represented in Fig. 477.
Crystals not infrequently occur with a deep pyramidal depression occupy-
ing the place of each plane, as is often observed in common salt, alum, and
sulphur. This is due in part to their rapid growth.
3. VARIATIONS IN THE ANGLES OF CRYSTALS

262. The greater part of the distortions described in Arts 256, 257
occasion no change in the interfacial angles of crystals. But those imper-
fections that produce convex, curved, or striated faces necessarily cause such
variations. Furthermore, circumstances of heat or pressure under which
the crystals were formed may sometimes have resulted not only in distortion
of form, but also some variation in angle. The presence of impurities at the
time of crystallization may also have a like effect.
Still more important is the change in the angles of completed crystals
which is caused by subsequent pressure on the matrix in which they were
formed, as, for example, the change which may take place during the more or
less complete metamorphism of the inclosing rock.
The change of composition resulting in pseudomorphous crystals (see
Art. 273) is generally accompanied by an irregular change of angle, so that
the pseudomorphs of a species vary much in angle.
In general it is safe to affirm that, with the exception of the irregularities
arising from imperfections in the process of crystallization, or from the sub-
sequent changes alluded to, variations in angles are rare, and the constancy
of angle alluded to in Art. 11 is the universal law.
In cases where a greater or less variation in angle is observed in the crystals
of the same species from different localities, the cause for this can usually be
found in a difference of chemical composition. In the case of isomorphous
compounds it is well known that an exchange of corresponding chemically
equivalent elements may take place without a change of form, though usually
accompanied with a slight variation in the fundamental angles.
The effect of heat upon the form of crystals is alluded to in Art. 433.
4. INTERNAL IMPERFECTIONS AND INCLUSIONS

263. The transparency of crystals is often destroyed by disturbed crystal-
lization; by impurities taken up from the solution during the process of
crystallization; or, again, by the presence of foreign matter resulting from
partial chemical alteration. The general name, inclusion, is given to any

foreign body inclosed within the crystal, whatever its origin. These inclusions
are extremely common; they may be gaseous, liquid, or solid; visible to the
unaided eye or requiring the use of the microscope.
Rapid crystallization is a common explanation of inclusions. This is
illustrated by quartz crystals containing large cavities full or nearly full of
water (in the latter case, these showing a movable bubble); or, they may
contain sand or iron oxide in large amount. In the case of calcite, crystalliza-
tion from a liquid largely charged with a foreign material, as quartz sand, may
result in the formation of crystals in which the impurity makes up as much
as two-thirds of the whole mass; this is seen in the famous Fontainebleau
limestone, and similarly in that from other localities.
264. Liquid and Gas Inclusions. Attention was early called by
Brewster to the presence of fluids in cavities in certain minerals, as quartz,
topaz, beryl, chrysolite, etc. In later years this subject has been thoroughly
studied by Sorby, Zirkel, Vogelsang, Fischer, Rosenbusch, and others. The
nature of the liquid can often be determined, by its refractive power, or by
special physical test determination of the critical point in the case of
(e.g.,
CO 2 ), or In the majority of cases the observed
by chemical examination.
liquid is simply water; but it may be the salt solution in which the crystal was
formed, and not infrequently, especially in the case of quartz, liquid carbon
dioxide (CO 2 ), as first proved by Vogelsang. These liquid inclusions are
marked as such, in many cases, by the presence in the cavity of a movable
bubble of gas. Occasionally cavities contain two
liquids, as water and liquid carbon dioxide, the
latter then inclosing a bubble of the same sub-
stance as gas (cf. Fig. 478). Interesting exper-
iments can be made with sections showing such
inclusions (cf. literature, p. 181). The mixture
of gases yielded by smoky quartz, meteoric iron,
and other substances, on the application of heat,
has been analyzed by Wright.
In some cases the cavities appear to be empty;
if they then have a regular form determined by
the crystallization of the species, they are often
called negative crystals. Such cavities are com-
monly of secondary origin, as remarked on a later Beryllonite
pase.
265. Solid Inclusions. The solid inclusions are almost infinite in
Sometimes they are large and distinct, and can be referred
to
their variety.
or hematite, to which the
known mineral species, as the scales of gothite
peculiar character of aventurine feldspar
is due. Magnetite is a very common
impurity in many minerals, appearing, for example, in the Pennsbury mica;
is also often mechanically mixed, as in staurolite and gmelinite
quartz such
the other hand, quartz crystals very commonly inclose foreign material,
other minerals.
as chlorite, tourmaline, rutile, hematite, asbestus, and many
(Cf. also Arts. 266, 267.) , , ,
The consist of a heterogeneous mass of material;

<<
inclusions may
in a porphyntic granite; or the
granitic matter seen in orthoclase crystals or
inclosed in large coarse crystals of beryl
feldspar, quartz, etc., sometimes
veins.
spodumene, occurring in granite
180 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
266. Microlites, Crystallites. The microscopic crystals observed as

inclusions may sometimes be referred to known species, but more generally
their true nature is doubtful. The term microlites, proposed by Vogelsang,
is often used to designate the minute inclosed crystals; they are generally of
needlelike form, sometimes quite irregular, and often very remarkable in their
arrangement and groupings; some of them are exhibited in Fig. 484 and Fig.
485, as explained below. Where the minute individuals belong to known
species they are called, for example, feldspar microlites, etc.
Crystallites is an analogous term used by Vogelsang to cover those minute
forms which have not the regular exterior form of crystals, but may be con-
sidered as intermediate between amorphous matter and true crystals. Some
of the forms are shown in Figs. 479-483; they are often observed in glassy
volcanic rocks, and also in furnace-slags. A
series of names has been given to
varieties of crystallites, such as globulites, margarites, etc. Trichite and
belonite are names introduced by Zirkel; the former name is derived from
i, hair; trichites, like that in Fig. 483, are common in obsidian.
479 480 481 482
Crystallites
The microscopic inclusions may also be of an irregular glassy nature; this

kind often observed in crystals which have formed from a molten mass, as
is
lava or the slag of an iron furnace.
267. Symmetrically Arranged Inclusions. In general, while the solid
inclusions sometimes occur quite irregularly in the crystals, they are more
generally arranged with some evident reference to the symmetry of the form,
or external faces of the crystals. Examples of this are shown in the following
484 486
Augite (Zirkel) Leucite (Zirkel) Garnet inclosing quartz

(Heddle)
figures. Fig. 484 exhibits a crystal of augite, inclosing magnetite, feldspar

and nephelite microlites, etc. Fig. 485 shows a crystal of leucite, a species
whose crystals very commonly inclose foreign matter, Fig. 486 shows a sec
tion of a crystal of garnet, containing quartz.
487
Andalusite
Another striking example is afforded by andalusite (Fig. 487), in which the

inclosed carbonaceous impurities are of considerable extent and remarkably
arranged, so as to yield symmetrical figures of various forms. Staurolite
occasionally shows analogous carbonaceous impurities symmetrically dis-
tributed.
The magnetite common as an inclusion in muscovite, alluded to above,
is always symmetrically disposed, usually parallel to
488
the directions of the percussion-figure (Fig. 491, p. 189).
The asterism of phlogopite is explained by the presence
of symmetrically arranged inclusions (cf, Art, 368).
Fig. 488 shows an interesting case of symmetrically arranged

inclusions due to chemical alteration. The original mineral,
spodumene, from Branchville, Conn., has been altered to a
substance apparently homogeneous to the eye, but found
under the microscope to have the structure shown in Fig. 488.
Chemical analysis proves the base to be albite and the inclosed
hexagonal mineral to be a lithium silicate (LiAlSO 4 ) called
eucryptite. It has not yet been identified except in this
form. Eucryptite in Albite
LITERATURE
Some of the most important works on the subject of microscopic inclusions are referred
to here; for a fuller list of papers reference may be made to the work of Rosenbusch (1904) ;
also that of Zirkel and others mentioned on pp. 3 and 4.
Brewster. Many papers, published mostly in the Philosophical Magazine, and the
Edinburgh Phil. Journal, from 1822-1856.
Blum, Leonhard, Seyfert, and Sochting. Die Einschlusse von Mineralien
in krystalli-
sirten Mineralien. Haarlem, 1854. (Preisschrift.)
Sorby. On the microscopical structure
of crystals, etc. Q. J. G. Soc., 14, 453, 1858
(and other papers).
Sorby and Butler. On the structure of rubies, sapphires, diamonds,
and some other
minerals. Proc. Roy. Soc., No. 109, 1869.
Reusch. Labradorite. Pogg. Ann., 120, 95, 1863.
1868.
Vogelsang. Labradorite. Arch. Neerland, 3, 32,
Fischer. Kritische-microscopische mineralogische Studien. Freiburg in Br., 64 pp.,
96 pp., 1873
1869; Ite Fortsetzung, 64 pp., 1871; 2te Forts.,
Kosmann. Hypersthene. Jahrb. Min., 532, 1869; 501, 1871.
Schrauf. Labradorite. Ber. Ak. Wien, 60 (1) 996, 1869.
Vogelsang. Die Krystalliten. 175 pp., Bonn, 1875.
Vogelsang and Geissler. Ueber die
Natur der Flussigkeitsemschlusse in gewissen
Mineralien. Pogg. Ann, 137, 56, 257, 1869
Liquid CO 2 in cavities, etc. J. Chem. Soc., 1, 137; 2, 237, 1876, 1, 241, 2,
Hartley.
271, 1877; also, Proc. Roy. Soc, 26, 137, 150,
1877 _
Gumbel. Enhydros. Ber. Ak. Miinchen, 10, 241, 1880; 11, 321, 1881.
Hawes. Smoky quartz (CO.). Am. J. Sc 21,203, 1881
A. W. Wright. Gases in smoky quartz. Am J. fee, 21, 209, l?
Notes on Crystallites. Mm. MM., t, 2W-, 18M.

Rutley.
Vater. Das Wesen der Krystalliten, Zs. Kr, 27, 505, 189b.
182 CEYSTALLOGBAPHY
CRYSTALLINE AGGREGATES
268.The greater part of the specimens or masses of minerals that occur
may be described as aggregations of imperfect crystals. Many specimens
whose structure appears to the eye quite homogeneous, and destitute internally
of distinct crystallization, can be shown to be composed of crystalline grains.
Under the above head, consequently, are included all the remaining varieties
of structure among minerals.
The individuals composing imperfectly crystallized individuals may be:
1. Columns, or fibers, in which case the structure is columnar or fibrous.
2. Thin lamince, producing a lamellar structure.
3. Grains, constituting a granular structure.
269. Columnar and Fibrous Structure. A mineral possesses a col-
umnar structure when it is made up of slender columns, as some amphibole.
When the individuals are flattened like a knife-blade, as in cyanite, the struc-
ture is said to be bladed.
The structure again is called fibrous when the mineral is made up of fibres,
as in asbestus, also the satin-spar variety of gypsum. The fibres may or may
not be separable. There are many gradations between coarse columnar and
fine fibrous structures. Fibrous minerals have often a silky luster.
The following are properly varieties of columnar or fibrous structure :
Reticulated: when the fibers or columns cross in various directions and

produce an appearance having some resemblance to a net.
Stellated: when they radiate from a center in all directions and produce
star-like forms. Ex. stilbite, wavellite.
Radiated, divergent: when the crystals radiate from a center without
producing stellar forms. Ex. quartz, stibnite.
270. Lamellar Structure. The structure of a mineral is lamellar
when it consists of plates or leaves. The laminae may be curved or straight,
and thus give rise to the curved lamellar and straight lamellar structure. Ex.
wollastonite (tabular spar), some varieties of gypsum, talc, etc. If the plates
are approximately parallel about a common center the structure is said to be
concentric. When the laminae are thin and separable, the structure is said to
be foliaceous or foliated. Mica is a striking example, and the term micaceous
is often used to describe this kind of structure.
271. Granular Structure. The particles in a granular structure differ
much in size. When coarse, the mineral is described as coarse-granular; when
fine, fine-granular; and if not distinguishable by the naked eye, the structure is
termed impalpable. Examples of the first may be observed in granular crys-
talline limestone, sometimes called saccharoidal; of the second, in some varie-
ties of hematite; of the last, in some kinds of sphalerite.
The above terms are indefinite, but from necessity, as there is every degree
of fineness of structure among mineral species, from perfectly impalpable,
through all possible shades, to the coarsest granular. The term phanero-crys-
talline has been used for varieties in which the grains are distinct, and crypto-
crystalline for those in which they are not discernible, although an indistinct
crystalline structure can be proved by the microscope.
Granular minerals, when easily crumbled in the fingers, are said to be friable.
f
-272. Imitative Shapes. The following are important terms used in
describing the imitative forms of massive minerals.
CRYSTALLINE AGGREGATES 183
Reniform: kidney-shaped. The structure may be radiating or concentric

Ex. hematite.
Botryoidal: consisting of a group of rounded prominences. The name is
derived from the Greek Corpus, a bunch of grapes. Ex.
limonite, chalcedony
prehnite.
Mammillary: resembling the botryoidal, but composed of larger promi-
nences. Ex. malachite.
Globular: spherical or nearly so; the globules
may consist of radiating
fibres or concentric coats. When attached, as they usually are, to the surface
of a rock, they are described as implanted globules.
Nodular: in tuberose forms, or having irregular protuberances over the
surface.
Amygdaloidal: almond-shaped, applied often to a rock (as diabase) con-
taining almond-shaped or sub-globular nodules.
Coralloidal: like coral, or consisting of interlaced flexuous
branchings of a
white color, as in the variety of aragonite called flos ferri.
Dendritic: branching tree-like, as in crystallized gold. The term den-
drites is used for similar forms even when not
crystalline, as in the dendrites
of manganese oxide, which form on surfaces of limestone or are inclosed in
"moss-agates."
Mossy: like moss in form or appearance.
Filiform or Capillary: very slender and long, like a thread or hair; con-
sists ordinarily of a succession of minute crystals. Ex. millerite.
Acicular: slender and rigid, like a needle. Ex. stibnite.
Reticulated: net-like. See Art. 269.
Drusy: closely covered with minute implanted crystals. Ex. quartz.
Stalactitic: when the mineral occurs in pendent columns, cylinders, or
elongated cones. Stalactites are produced by the percolation of water, hold-
ing mineral matter in solution, through the rocky roofs of caverns. The
evaporation of the water produces a deposit of the mineral matter, and grad-
ually forms a long pendent cylinder or cone. The internal structure may be
imperfectly crystalline and granular, or may consist of fibres radiating from
the central column, or there may be a broad cross-cleavage. The most famil-
iar example of stalactites is afforded by calcite. Chalcedony, gibbsite,
limonite, and some other species, also present stalactitic forms.
The term amorphous is used when a mineral has not only no crystalline
form or imitative shape, but does not polarize the light even in its minute
particles,
and thus appears to be destitute wholly of a crystalline structure
internally, as most opal. Such a structure is also called colloid or jelly-like,
from the Greek /coXXa (see p. 8), for glue. The word amorphous is from a
privative, and MP</>??, shape.
273. Pseudomorphous Crystals. Every mineral species has, when

distinctly crystallized,a definite and characteristic form. Occasionally,
however, crystals are found that have the form, both as to angles and general
habit, of a certain species, and yet differ from it entirely in chemical composi-
tion. Moreover, it is often noted in such cases that, though in outward form
complete crystals, in internal structure they are granular, or waxy, and have
no regular cleavage. Even if they are crystalline in structure the optical
characters do not conform to those required by the symmetry of the faces.
1 84 CR YSTALLO GR APH Y
Such crystals are called pseudomorphs, and their existence is explained by

the assumption, often admitting of direct proof, that the original mineral has
been changed into the new compound; or it has disappeared through some
agency, and its place been taken by another chemical compound to which the
form does not belong. In all these cases the new substance is said to be a
pseudomorph after the orginal mineral.
Common illustrations of pseudomorphous crystals are afforded by mala-
chite in the form of cuprite, limonite in the form of pyrite, barite in the form of
quartz, etc. This subject is further discussed in the chapter on Chemical
Mineralogy.
PART II. PHYSICAL MINERALOGY
274. The PHYSICAL CHARACTERS of minerals fall under the following
heads :
I. Characters
depending upon Cohesion and Elasticity viz., cleavage,
fracture, tenacity, hardness, elasticity, etc.
II. Specific Gravity, or the Density
compared with that of water.
III. Characters depending upon Light viz., color, luster, degree of trans-
parency, special optical properties, etc.
IV. Characters depending upon Heat viz., heat-conductivity, change of
form and of optical characters with change of temperature, fusibility, etc.
V. Characters depending upon Electricity and Magnetism.
VI. Characters depending upon the action of the senses viz., taste,
odor, feel.
275. General Relation of Physical Characters to Molecular Structure.
It has been stated on pp. 7, 8 that the geometrical form of a crystallized min-
eral is the external evidence of the internal molecular structure. A full
knowledge in regard to this structure, however, can only be obtained by
the study of the various physical characters included in the classes enumerated
above.
Of these characters, the specific gravity merely gives indication of the
atomic mass of the elements present, and further, of the state of molecular
aggregation. The first of these points is illustrated by the high specific
gravity of compounds of lead; the second, by the distinction observed, for
example, between carbon in the form of the diamond, with a specific gravity
of 3' 5, and the same chemical substance as the mineral graphite, with a specific
gravity of only 2.
All the other characters (except the relatively unimportant ones of Class
VI) in general vary according to the direction in the crystal; in other words
they have a definite orientation. For all of them it is true that directions
which are crystallographically identical have like physical characters.
In regard to the converse proposition viz., that in all directions crystal-
lographically dissimilar there may be a variation in the physical characters, an
important distinction is to be made. This proposition holds true for all
crystals, so far as the characters of Class I are concerned;
that is, those
depending upon the cohesion and elasticity, as shown in the cleavage, hard-
It is also true
ness, the planes of molecular gliding, the etching-figures,
etc.
in the case of pyro-electricity and piezo-electricity.
It does not apply in the same way with respect to the characters which
involve the propagation of light (and radiant heat), the change of volume with
etc.
change of temperature; further, electric radiation, magnetic induction,
185
186 PHYSICAL MINERALOGY
Thus, although it will be shown that the optical characters of crystals are
in agreement in general with the symmetry of their form, they do not show
all the variations in this symmetry. It is true, for example, that all directions
are optically similar in a crystal belonging to any class under the isometric
as may be
system; but this is obviously not true of its molecular cohesion,
shown by the cleavage. Again, all directions in a tetragonal crystal at right
angles to the vertical axis are optically similar;
but this again is not true of
the cohesion. These points are further elucidated under the description of
the special characters of each group.
I. CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON COHESION AND

ELASTICITY
\
276. Cohesion, Elasticity. The name cohesion is given to the force of
attraction existing between the molecules of one and the same body, in con-
sequence of which they offer resistance to any influence tending to separate
them, as in the breaking of a solid body or the scratching of its surface.
Elasticity is the force which tends to restore the molecules of a body back
into their original position, from which they have been disturbed, as when a
body has suffered change of shape or of volume under pressure.
The varying degrees of cohesion and elasticity for crystals of different
minerals, or for different directions in the same crystal, are shown in the
prominent characters: cleavage, fracture, tenacity, hardness; also in the
gliding-planes, percussion-figures or pressure-figures, and the etching-figures.
277. Cleavage. Cleavage is the tendency of a crystallized mineral to
break in certain definite directions, yielding more or less smooth surfaces.
It obviously indicates a minimum value of cohesion in the direction of easy
fracture that is, normal to the cleavage-plane itself. The cleavage parallel
to the cubic faces of a crystal of galena is a familiar illustration. An amor-
phous body (p. 8) necessarily can show no cleavage.
As stated in Art. 31, the consideration of the molecular structure of
crystals shows that a cleavage-plane must be a direction in which the mole-
cules are closely aggregated together; while normal to this the distance
between successive layers of molecules must be relatively large, and hence this
last is the direction of easy separation. It further follows that cleavage can
exist only parallel to some possible face of a crystal, and, further, that this
must be one of the common fundamental forms. Hence in cases where the
choice in the position of the axes is more or less arbitrary the presence of
cleavage is properly regarded as showing which planes should be made funda-
mental. Still again, cleavage is the same in all directions in a crystal which
are crystallographically identical.
Cleavage is defined, (1) according to its direction, as cubic, octahedral,
rhomobohedral, basal, prismatic, etc. Also, (2) according to the ease with
which it is obtained, and the smoothness of the surface yielded. It is said to
be perfect or eminent when it is obtained with great ease, affording smooth,
lustrous surfaces, as in mica, topaz, calcite. Inferior degrees of cleavage are
spoken of as distinct, indistinct -or imperfect, interrupted, in traces, difficult.
These terms are sufficiently intelligible without further explanation. It may
be noticed that the cleavage of a species is sometimes better developed in some
of its varieties than in others.
CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON COHESION AND ELASTICITY 187
278. Cleavage in the Different Systems. (1) In the ISOMETRIC SYSTEM, cleavage
is cubic, when parallel to the faces of the
cube; this is the common case, as illustrated by
galena and halite, it is also often octahedral that is, parallel to the octahedral faces as
with fluonte and the diamond. Less frequently it is
dodecahedral, or parallel to the faces
of the rhombic dodecahedron, as with sphalerite.
In the TETRAGONAL SYSTEM, cleavage is often basal, or
parallel to the basal plane, as
with apophylhte; also prismatic, or parallel to one (or both) of the
square prisms as with
rutile and wernerite; less frequently it is
pyramidal, or parallel to the faces of the square
pyramid, as with scheelite.
In the HEXAGONAL SYSTEM, cleavage is usually either basal, as with beryl, or prismatic,
parallel to one of the six-sided prisms, as with nephelite; pyramidal cleavage, as with
pyromorphite, is rare and imperfect.
In the RHOMBOHEDRAL DIVISION, besides the basal and prismatic
cleavages rhombo-
hedral cleavage, parallel to the faces of a rhombohedron, is also
common, as with calcite
and the allied species.
In the ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM, cleavage parallel to one or more of the
pinacoids is
common. Thus it is basal with topaz, and in all three pinacoidal directions with anhydrite.
Prismatic cleavage is also common, as with barite; in this case the
arbitrary position
assumed in describing the crystal may make this cleavage parallel to a "horizontal prism,"
or dome.
In the MONOCLINIC SYSTEM, cleavage parallel to the clinopinacoid, is common, as with
orthoclase, gypsum, heulandite and euclase; also basal, as with the micas and orthoclase,
or parallel to the orthopinacoid; also prismatic, as with amphibole. Less frequently
cleavage is parallel to a hemi -pyramid, as with gypsum.
In the TRICLINIC SYSTEM, it is usual and proper to so select the fundamental form as to
make the cleavage directions correspond with the pinacoids.
279. In some cases cleavage which is ordinarily not observed may be developed by a
sharp blow or by sudden change of temperature. Thus, quartz is usually conspicuously
free from cleavage, but a quartz crystal heated and plunged into cold water often shows
*
planes of separation parallel to both the and +
rhombohedrqns and to the prism as
well. Similarly, the prismatic cleavage of pyroxene is observed with great distinctness in
thin sections, made by grinding, while not so readily noted in large crystals.
When the cleavage is parallel to a closed form that is, when it is cubic, octahedral,
dodecahedral, or rhombohedral (also pyramidal in the tetragonal, hexagonal, and ortho-
rhombic systems) solids resembling crystals may often be broken out from a single
crystalline" individual, and all the fragments have the same angles. It is, in general, easy
to distinguish such a cleavage form, as a cleavage octahedron of fluorite, from a true
crystal by the splintery character of the faces of the former.
280. Cleavage and Luster. The face of a crystal parallel to which there is perfect
cleavage often shows a pearly luster (see p. 249), due to the partial separation of the crystal
into parallel plates. This is illustrated by the basal plane of apophyllite. the clinopina-
coid of stilbite and heulandite. An iridescent play of colors is also often seen, as with
calcite, when the separation has been sufficient to produce the prismatic colors by
interference.
281. Gliding-planes. Closely related to the cleavage directions in

their connection with the cohesion of the molecules of a crystal are the gliding-
planes, or directions parallel to which a slipping of the molecules may take
place under the application of mechanical force, as by pressure.
This may have the result of simply producing a separation into layers in
the given direction, or, on the other hand, and more commonly, there may be
a revolution of the molecules into a new twinning-position, so that secondary
twinning-lamellce are formed.
Thus, if a crystal of halite, or rock salt, be subjected to gradual pressure
in the direction of a dodecahedral face, a plane of separation is developed
normal to this and hence in the direction of another face of the same form.
There are six such directions of molecular slipping and separation in a crystal
of this substance. Certain kinds of mica of the biotite class often show
*
Lehmann (Zs. Kr., 11, 608, 1886) and Judd (Min. Mag., 8, 7, 1888^ regard these as
gliding-planes (see Art. 281).
which are undoubtedly secondary in origin that

pseudo-crystalline faces,
is, have been developed by pressure
exerted sub-
sequently to the growth of the crystal (cf. Fig. 489).
In stibnite, the base, c(001), normal to the plane of perfect
cleavage, is a gliding-plane. Thus a slipping of the molecules
without their separation may be made to take place by
pressure in a plane (||c) normal to the
direction of perfect
cleavage (||6). A slender prismatic crystal supported near
the ends and pressed downward by a dull edge is readily bent,
or knicked, in this direction without the parts beyond the
support being affected.
282. Secondary Twinning. The other case
- -
Biotite
mentioned in the preceding article, where molecular
slipping is accompanied by a half -re volution (180)
of the molecules into a new twinning-position (see p. 160 et seq.)jis well illus-
trated by calcite. Pressure upon a cleavage-fragment may result in the forma-
tion of a number of thin lamella in twinning-position to the parent mass, the
twinning-plane being the obtuse negative rhombohedron, 0(0112). Second-
ary twinning-lamellaB similar to these are often observed in natural cleavage-
masses of calcite, and particularly in the grains of a crystalline limestone, as
observed in thin sections under the microscope.
Secondary twinning-lamellse may also be produced (and are often noted in
nature) in the case of the triclinic feldspars, pyroxene, 490
barite, etc. A secondary lamellar structure in quartz
has been observed by Judd, in which the lamellae
consisted of right-handed and left-handed portions.
By the proper means a complete calcite twin may be artificially
produced by pressure. Thus, if a cleavage-fragment of prismatic
form, say fr-8 mm. in length and 3-6 mm. in breadth, be placed
with the obtuse edge on a firm horizontal support, and pressed by
the blade of an ordinary tableknife on the other obtuse edge (at a,
Fig. 490), the result is that a portion of the crystal is reversed in
position, as if twinned parallel to the plane (0112) which in the
figure lies in a vertical position. If skillfully done, the twinning
surface is perfectly smooth, and the re-entrant angle corresponds Artificial Twinning
in Calcite
exactly with that required by theory.
283. Parting. The secondary twinning-planes described are often

directions of an easy separation conveniently called parting which may
be mistaken for cleavage.* The basal parting of pyroxene is a common
example of such pseudo-cleavage; it was long mistaken for cleavage. The
basal and rhombohedral (1011) and the less distinct prismatic (1120) parting
of corundum; the octahedral parting of magnetite (cf. Fig. 474, p. 176), are
other examples.
An important distinction between cleavage and parting is this parting can :
exist only in certain definite planes that is, on the surface of a twinning-lamel-
la while the cleavage may take place in any plane having the given direction.
284. Percussion-figures. Immediately connected with the gliding-
planes are the figures called percussion-figures f produced upon a crystal
*
The lamellar structure of a massive mineral, without twinning, may also be the cause
of a fracture which can be mistaken for cleavage.
t The percussion-figures are best obtained if the crystal plate under investigation be
supported upon a hard cushion and a blow be struck with a light hammer upon a steel rod
the slightly rounded point of which is held firmly against the surface.
section by a blow or pressure with a suitable point. In such cases, the method
described serves to develop more or less well-defined cracks whose orientation
varies with the crystallographic direction of the surface. Thus upon the
cubic face of a crystal of halite a four-rayed, star-shaped
figure is produced
with arms parallel to the diagonals that is, parallel to
the dodecahedral faces. On an octahedral face a three-
rayed star is obtained.
The percussion-figures in the case of the micas have
been often investigated, and, as remarked later, they form
a means of fixing the true orientation of a cleavage-plate
having no crystalline outlines. The figure (Fig. 491) is
here a six-rayed star one of whose branches is parallel to
the clinopinacoid (6), the others approximately parallel
to the intersection edges of the prism (m) and base (c).*
Pressure upon a mica plate produces a less distinct six-rayed star^diagonal
to that just named; this is called a pressure-figure.
285. Solution-planes. In the case of many crystals, it is possible to prove the ex-
istence of certain directions, or structure-planes, in which chemical action takes place most
readily for example, when a crystal is under great pressure. These directions of chemi-
cal weakness have been called solution-planes. They often manifest themselves by the
presence of a multitude of oriented cavities of crystalline outline (so-called negative crystals)
in the given direction.
These solution-planes in certain cases, as shown by Judd, are the same as the directions
of secondary lamellar twinning, as is illustrated by calcite. Connected with this is the
schillerization (see Art. 369), observed in certain minerals in rocks (as diallage, schillerspar).
286. Etching-figures. Intimately connected with the general sub-

jects here considered, of cohesion in relation to crystals, are the figures pro-
duced by etching on crystalline faces; these are often called etching-figures.
This method of investigation, developed particularly by Baumhauer, is of high
importance as revealing the molecular structure of the crystal faces under
examination, and therefore the symmetry of the crystal itself.
The etching is performed mostly by solvents, as by water in some cases,
more generally the ordinary mineral acids, or caustic alkalies, also by steam at
a high pressure and hydrofluoric acid; the last is especially powerful in its
action, and is used frequently with the silicates. The figures produced are in
the majority of cases angular depressions,
492 493
such as low triangular or quadrilateral
pyramids, whose outlines may run par-
allel to some of the crystalline edges.
In some cases the planes produced can be
referred to occurring crystallographic
faces. They appear alike on similar
faces of crystals, and hence serve to
distinguish different forms, perhaps in
appearance identical, as the two sets of
faces in the ordinary double pyramid of
quartz; so, too, they reveal the corn-
Quartz, right- Quartz, left- pound twinning-structure common on
handed crystal handed crystal some crystals, as quartz and aragonite.
*
Cf. Walker, Am. J. Sc., 2, 5, 1896, and G. Friedel, Bull. Soc. Min., 19, 18, 1896.
Walker found the angle opposite 6(010) (x in Fig. 491) to be 53 to 56 for muscovite, 59
for lepidolite, 60 for biotite, and 61 to 63 for phlogopite.
Further, their form in general corresponds to the symmetry of the

group to which the given crystal belongs. They thus reveal the trape-
zohedral symmetry of quartz and the difference between a right-handed and
left-handed crystal (Figs. 492, 493); the distinction between calcite and
dolomite (Figs. 496, 497) the distinctive character of apatite, pyromorphite,
;
etc.; the hemimorphic symmetry of calamine and nephelite (cf. Fig. 237,
p. 102), etc.; they also prove by their form the monoclinic crystallization of
muscovite and other micas (Fig. 495).
Fig. 494 shows the etching-figures formed on a basal plane (cleavage) of topaz by fused
caustic potash; Fig. 495, those on a cleavage-plate of muscovite by hydrofluoric acid; Fig.
496, upon a rhombohedral face of calcite, and Fig. 497, on one of dolomite by dilute hydro-
chloric acid.
494 495 497
Topaz Muscovite Calcite Dolomite

499 500
Spangolite
The shape of the etching-figures may vary with the same crystal with the nature of the
solvent employed, though their symmetry remains constant. For example, Fig. 498 shows
the figures obtained with spangolite
601 502 by the action of sulphuric acid,
Fig. 499 by the same diluted, and
Fig. 500 by hydrochloric acid of
different degrees of concentration.
Of the same nature as

the etching-figures artificially
produced, in their relation to
the symmetry of the crystal,
are the markings of ten observed
on the natural faces of crys-
These are sometimes
tals.
Corundum Fluorite secondary, caused by a natural
,, etching process, but are more
rften an irregularity in the
crystalline development of the crystal. The
inverted triangular depressions often seen on the octahedral faces of
diamond
crystals are an example. Fig. 501 shows natural depressions, rhombohedral
C h aracter observed on corundum
1
'
crystals from Montana (Pratt). Fig.
shows a twin crystal of fluorite with natural -
etching-figures (Pirsson)
these are minute pyramidal depressions whose sides are parallel to the faces
of the trapezohedron (311).
287. Corrosion Forms. If the etching process spoken of in the pre-
ceding article whether natural or artificial is continued, the result may
be to destroy the original crystalline surface and to substitute for it perhaps a

multitude of minute elevations, more or less distinct; or, further, new faces
may be developed, the crystallographic position of which can often be deter-
mined, though the symbols may be complex. The mere loss of water in some
cases produces certain corrosive forms.
Penfield subjected a sphere of quartz (from a simple right-handed individual) to the

prolonged action of hydrofluoric acid. It was found that it was attacked rapidly
in the
direction of the vertical axis, but barely at all at the -\- extremities of the horizontal axes.
Figs. 503, 504 show the form remaining after the sphere had been etched for seven weeks;
Fig. 503 is a basal view; Fig. 504, a front view; the circle shows the original form
of the
sphere, the dotted hexagon the position of the axes.
288. The term fracture is used to define the form or kind

Fracture.
of surface obtained by breaking in a direction other than that of cleavage in
crystallized minerals, and 503
in any direction in mas-
sive minerals. When
the cleavage is highly
perfect in several direc-
tions, as the rhombo-
hedral cleavage of calcite,
fracture is often not
readily obtainable.
Fracture is defined as :
(a) Conchoidal; when

a mineral breaks with Etched Sphere of Quartz
l
the valve
SS?dS"1ft ^S3tod from the resemblance of the concavity to also
This well illustrated by obsidian, by
of a shell, from concha, a shell. is
If the resulting forms are small, the

fracture is said to be smaK-con-
flint.
choidal- only partially distinct, it is subconchoidal.
if
with numerous
(6)
the surface of fracture, though rough
aL,when to a plane surface.
small elevations and depressions, still approximates
the surface is rough and entirely irregular,
t
(c) Uneven; when
f
broken iron.
f Hackfwhen the elevations are sharp or jagged; 1
sista'nc^ wS
a smooth
ne SffitSî^tV*&*
,*^
surface offers to abrasion.
by the re-
with
determined by observing the comparative ease or difficulty
that of talc impressible

diamond. To
by he fingeaa, to that ofthe
this character, a scale of hardness
was introduced by
scale of Mohs is now universally accepted.

1. Talc. 6. Orthoclase.
2. Gypsum 7. Quartz.
3. Caltite. 8. Topaz.
4. Fluorite. 9. Corundum.
5. Apatite. 10. Diamond.
Crystalline varieties with smooth surfaces should be taken so far as

possible.
Ifthe mineral under examination is scratched by the knife-blade as easily
as calcite its hardness is said to be 3; if less easily than calcite and more so
than fluorite its hardness is 3' 5. In the latter case the mineral in question
would be scratched by fluorite but would itself scratch calcite. It need
hardly be added that great accuracy is not attainable by the above methods,
though, indeed, for purposes of the determination of minerals, exactness is
quite unnecessary.
It should be noted that minerals of grade 1 have a greasy feel to the hand;
those of grade 2 are easily scratched by the finger-nail; those of grade 3 are
rather readily cut, as by a knife; of grade 4, scratched rather easily by the
knife; grade 5, scratched with some difficulty; grade 6, barely scratched by a
knife, but distinctly by a file moreover, they also scratch ordinary glass.
Minerals as hard as quartz (H. = 7), or harder, scratch glass readily but are
little touched by a file; the few species belonging here are enumerated in
Appendix B; they include all the gems.

290. Sclerometer. Accurate determinations of the hardness of min-
erals can be made in various ways, one of the best being by use of an instru-
ment called a sclerometer. The mineral is placed on a movable carriage, with
the surface to be experimented upon horizontal this is brought in contact with
;
a steel point (or diamond point), fixed on a support above; the weight is then
determined which is just sufficient to move the carriage and produce a scratch
on the surface of the mineral.
By means of such an instrument the hardness of the different faces of a
given crystal has been determined in a variety of cases. It has been found
that different faces of a crystal (e.g., cyanite) differ in hardness, and the same
face may differ as it is scratched in different directions. In general, differ-
ences in hardness are noted only with crystals which show distinct cleavage;
the hardest face is that which is intersected by the plane of most complete
cleavage. Further, of a single face, which is intersected by cleavage-planes,
the direction perpendicular to the cleavage-direction is the softer, those
parallel to it the harder.
This subject has been investigated by Exner (p. 194), who has given the form of the
cwrves of hardness for the different faces of many crystals. These curves are obtained as
follows: the least weight required to scratch a crystalline surface in different directions,
for each 10 or 15, from to 180, is determined with the sclerometer; these directions
are laid off as radii from a center, and the length of each is made proportional to the weight
fixed by experiment that is, to the hardness thus determined; the line connecting the
extremities of these radii is the curve of hardness for the given face.
The following table gives the results obtained * (see literature) in comparing the hard-
ness of the minerals of the scale from
corundum, No. 9, taken as 1000, to gypsum, No. 2.
Pfaff used the method of
boring with a standard point, the hardness being determined by
the number of rotations; Rosiwal used a standard
powder to grind the surface, Jaggar
employed his micro-scle rometer, the method being essentially a modification of that of
*
The numbers are here given as tabulated by Jaggar.
Pfaff. By means
of this instrument he is able to test the hardness of the minerals
present
under the microscope. Measurements of absolute hardness have also been
in a thin section
made by Auerbach. Holmquist has recently made many hardness tests
by the grinding
method. His results with regard to the minerals of the scale of hardness
agree fairly well
with those ot Rosiwal given below but show considerable
discrepancies with the results
obtained by the other methods. He, like Rosiwal, finds that topaz is lower in the scale
than quartz.
Pfaff, 1884 Rosiwal, 1892 Jaggar, 1897
9. Corundum 1000 1000 1000
8. Topaz 459 138 152
7. Quartz 254 149 40
6. Orthoclase 191 287 25
5. Apatite :... 53'5 6'20 1'23
4. Fluorite 37'3 470 75
3. Calcite 15'3 2'68 '26
2. Gypsum 12'03 '34 '04
291. Relation of Hardness to Chemical Composition. Some general facts of impor-

tance can be stated * in regard to the connection between the hardness of a mineral
and its chemical composition.
1. Compounds of the heavy metals, as silver, copper, mercury, lead, etc., are soft, their
hardness seldom exceeding 2 '5 to 3.
Among the compounds of the common metals, the sulphides (arsenides) and oxides of
iron (also of nickel and cobalt) are relatively hard (e.g., for pyrite H. = 6 to for
6'5;
hematite H. = 6, etc.); here belong also columbite, iron niobate;- tantalite, iron tantalate;
wolframite, iron tungstate.
2. The sulphides are mostly relatively soft
(except as noted in 1), also most of the
carbonates, sulphates, and phosphates.
3. Hydrous salts are relatively soft. This is most distinctly shown among the silicates
e.g., compare the feldspars and zeolites.
4. The conspicuously hard minerals are found chiefly among the oxides and silicates;
many of them are compounds containing aluminium e.g., corundum, diaspore, chryso-
beryl, and many alumino-silicates. Outside of these the borate, boracite, is hard (H. = 7);
also iridosmine.
On the relation of hardness to specific gravity, see Art. 302.
292. Practical Suggestions. Several points should be regarded hi the trials of
hardness:
(1) If the mineral is slightly altered, as is often the case with corundum, garnet, etc.,
the surface may be readily scratched when this would be impossible with the mineral itself;
a trial with an edge of the latter will often give a correct result in such a case.
(2) A mineral with a granular surface often appears to be scratched when the grains
have been only torn apart or crushed.
(3) A relatively soft mineral may leave a faint white ridge on a surface, as of glass,
which can be mistaken for a scratch if carelessly observed.
(4) A crystal, as of quartz, is often slightly scratched by the edge of another of the same
species and like hardness.
(5) The scratch should be made in such a way as to disfigure the specimen as little as
possible.
293. Tenacity. Minerals may be either brittle, sectile, malleable, or

flexible.
(a) Brittle; parts of a mineral separate in powder or grains on
when
attempting to cut it, as calcite.
(b) Sectile; when pieces may be cut off with a knife
without falling to
powder, but still the mineral pulverizes under a hammer. This character is
intermediate between brittle and malleable, as gypsum.
(c) Malleable; when slices may be cut off, and
these slices flattened out
under a hammer; native gold, native silver.
*
See further in Appendix B.
(d) Flexible; when the mineral will bend without breaking, and remain
bent after the bending force is removed, as talc.
The tenacity of a substance is properly a consequence of its elasticity.
294. Elasticity. The elasticity of -a solid body expresses at once the
resistance which it makes to a change in shape or volume, and also its tendency
to return to its original shape when the deforming force ceases to act. If the
limit of elasticity is not passed, the change in molecular position is proportional
to the force acting, and the former shape of volume is exactly resumed; if
this limit is exceeded, the deformation becomes permanent, a new position of
molecular equilibrium having been assumed; this is shown in the phenomena
of gliding-planes and secondary twinning, already discussed. The magni-
tude of the elasticity of a given substance is measured by the coefficient of
elasticity, or, better, the coefficient of restitution. This is denned as the rela-
tion, for example, between the elongation of a bar of unit section to the force
acting to produce this effect; similarly of the bending or twisting of a bar.
The subject was early investigated acoustically by Savart; in recent years,
Voigt and others have made accurate measures of the elasticity of many sub-
stances and of the crystals of the same substance in different directions.
The elasticity of an amorphous body is the same in all directions, but it changes
in value with change of crystallographic direction in all crystals.
The distinction between elastic and inelastic is often made between the
species of the mica group and allied minerals. Muscovite, for example, is
"
described as highly elastic/' while phlogopite is much less so. In this case
it is not true in the physcial sense that muscovite has a
high value for the
coefficient of elasticity; its peculiarity lies rather in the fact that its
elasticity
is displayed through unusually wide limits.
LITERATURE
Hardness
Seebeck. Sklerometer. Programm d. Coin Realgymnasiums, 1833.
Franz. Pogg., 80, 37, 1850.
Grailich u. Pekarek. Ber. Ak. Wien, 13, 410, 1854.
Pfaff. Mesosklerometer. Ber. Ak. Munchen, 13, 55, 1883.
Sohncke. Halite. Pogg., 137, 177, 1869.
Exner. Ueber die Harte der Krystallflachen, 166 pp. Vienna, 1873
(Preisschrift
Wiener. Akad.).
Auerbach. Wied. Ann., 43, 61, 1891; 45, 262, 277, 1892; 68, 357, 1896.
Rosiwal. Verb. G. Reichs., 475, 1896.
T. A. Jaggar, Jr. Microsclerometer. Am. J. Sc., 4, 399, 1897.
Schroeder van der Kolk. Ueber Harte in Verland mit Spaltbarkeit, Verb. Ak. Am-
sterdam, 8, 1901.
Holmquist. Ueber den Relativen Abnutzungswiderstand der Mineralien der Harte-
skala. Geol. For. Forh., 33, 281, 1911. Die Schleifharte der Feldspathe, ibid., 36, 401,
1914. Die Hartestufe, 4-5, ibid., 38, 501, 1916.
Etching-figures, etc.
Goldschmidt and Wright. Ueber Aetzfiguren, Lichtfiguren und Losungskorper. With

exhaustive references to the literature. N. Jb. Min.
Beil-Bd., 17, 355-390, 1903.
Gliding-planes, Secondary Twinning, etc.
)be," halite, calcite. Pogg. Ann., 132, 441, 1867. Mica, ibid.,
136, 130,
~
632, 1869. Gypsum, ibid., p. 135. Ber. Ak., Berlin, 440, 1873.
61
\1, vSoMfe' Pogg< Ann 138 337 1869 Zs
-' > ' > " G - Ges -> 26 137 1874 -
Galena,
L., L6&,
SPECIFIC GRAVITY OR RELATIVE DENSITY 195
Baumhauer. Calcite. Zs. Kr., 3, 588, 1879.
Caldte> augite stibnite etc.
> > Jb. Min., 1, 32, 1883; 2,
13, 1883. Also
1 7 898 ibid.,
1887. ^
?
JU
LiJ* Structure
d<
Solution-planes etc. Q. J. G. Soc., 41, 374, 1885;
planes of corundum, Min. Mag., 11, 49 1895
Min. Mag., 7, 81,
Voigt. See below.
Elasticity
Savart. Ann. Ch. Phys., 40, 113, 1829; also in Pogg. Ann., 16, 206, 1829.
1,
Neumann. Pogg. Ann., 31, 177, 1834.
Angstrom. Pogg. Ann., 86, 206, 1852.
Baumgarten. Calcite. Pogg. Ann., 152, 369, 1874.
Groth. Halite. Pogg. Ann., 157, 115, 1876.
Coromilas. Gypsum, mica. Inaug. Diss., Tubingen, 1877 (Zs.
Kr., 1, 407, 1877)
Reusch. Ice. Wied. Ann., 9, 329, 1880.
Klang. Fluorite. Wied. Ann., 12, 321, 1881.
Koch. Halite, sylvite. Wied. Ann., 18, 325, 1883.
Beckenkamp. Alum. Zs. Kr., 10, 41, 1885.
Voigt. Pogg. Ann., Erg. Bd., 7, 1, 177, 1876. Wied. Ann., 38, 573, 1889. Calcite,
39, 412, 1890. Dolomite, ibid., 40, 642, 1890. Tourmaline, ibid., 41, 712, 1890; 44, 168
1891. Also papers in Nachr. Ges. Wiss. Gottingen.
Tutton. The Elasmometer. Crystalline Structure and Chemical Constitution, 1910.
II. SPECIFIC GRAVITY OR RELATIVE DENSITY

295. Definition of Specific Gravity. The specific gravity of a mineral
is the ratio of its density * to that of water at 4 C. (39'2 F.). This relative
density may be learned in any case by comparing the ratio of the weight of a
certain volume of the given substance to that of an equal volume of water;
hence the specific gravity is often defined as: the weight of the body divided by
the weight of an equal volume of water.
The statement that the specific gravity of graphite is 2, of corundum 4, of
galena 7'5, etc., means that the densities of the minerals named are 2, 4, and
7'5, etc., times that of water; in other words, as familiarly expressed, any
volume of them, a cubic inch for example, weighs 2 times, 4 times, 7*5 times,
etc., as much as a like volume, a cubic inch, of water.
Strictly speaking, since the density of water varies with its expansion or
contraction under change of temperature, the comparison should be made with
water at a fixed temperature, namely 4 C. (39'2 F.), at which it has its maxi-
mum density. If made at a higher temperature, a suitable correction should
be introduced by calculation. Practically, however, since a high degree of
accuracy is not often called for, and, indeed, in many cases is impracticable to
attain in consequence of the nature of the material at hand, in the ordinary
work of obtaining the specific gravity of minerals the temperature at which
the observation is made can safely be neglected. Common variations of tem-
perature would seldom affect the value of the specific gravity to the extent of
one unit in the third decimal place.
* mass of Thus if a cubic centi-

The density of a body is strictly thethe unit volume.
meter of water (at its maximum C. or 39'2 F.) is taken as the unit of mass, the
density, 4
density of any body as gold is given by the number of grams of mass (about 19) in a
cubic centimeter; in this case the same number, 1.9, gives the relative density or specific
gravity. If, however, a pound is taken as the
unit of mass, and the cubic foot as the unit of
volume, the mass of a cubic foot of water is 62'5 Ibs., that of gold about 1188 Ibs., and the
specific gravity is the ratio of the second to the first, or, again, 19.
For the same reason, it is not necessary to take into consideration the fact
that the observed weight of a fragment of a mineral is less than its true weight
by the weight of air displaced.
Where the nature of the investigation calls for an accurate determination
of the specific gravity (e.g., to four decimal places), no one of the precautions
in regard to the purity of material, exactness of weight-measurement, temper-
ature, etc., can be neglected.* The accurate values spoken of are needed in
the consideration of such problems as the specific volume, the relation of molec-
ular volume to specific gravity, and many others.
296. Determination of the Specific Gravity by the Balance. The
direct comparison by weight of a certain volume of the given mineral with an
equal volume of water is not often practicable. By making use, however, of
a familiar principle in hydrostatics, viz., that a solid immersed in water, in
consequence of the buoyancy of the latter, loses in weight an amount which is
equal to the weight of an equal volume of the water (that is, the volume it dis-
places) the determination of the specific gravity becomes a very simple
process.
The weight of the solid in the air (w) is first determined in the usual man-
ner; then the weight in water is found (w')] the difference between these
weights that is, the loss by immersion (w w) f
is the weight of a volume
505 of water equal to that of the solid finally, the quotient of

;
the first weight (w) by that of the equal volume of water

as determined (w w') is the specific gravity (G).
Hence,
w
.
w w'
A common method of obtaining the specific gravity of

a firm fragment of a mineral is as follows: First weigh
the specimen accurately on a good chemical balance.
Then suspend it from one pan of the balance by a horse-
hair, silk thread, or, better still, by a fine platinum wire,
in a glass of water conveniently placed beneath, and take
the weight again with the same care; then use the results
as above directed. The platinum wire may be wound
around the specimen, or where the latter is small it may
be made at one end into a little spiral support.
297. The Jolly Balance. Instead of using an ordin-
ary balance and determining the actual weight, the spiral
balance of Jolly, shown in Fig. 505, maybe conveniently
employed; this is also suitable when the mineral is in the
form of small grains. The instrument consists of a spiral
Spring or
Jolly Balance
for'spedSfGravitv
or ^
spring at the lower end of which are suspended two pans
baskets ' and d, Fig. 505.
> Upon the movable
stand -B rests a beaker filled with water. When in adjust-
ment for reading this stand has such a position that the pan d is immersed in
the water while c hangs above it. Upon the upright A there is a mirror upon
which is marked a scale. The position of the balance at any time is obtained
by so placing the eye that the bead, m, and its reflection in the mirror coincide
*
Cf. Earl of Berkeley in Min. Mag., 11, 64, 1895.
and then reading the position of the top of the bead upon the scale. The first
step in the operation consists in getting the position of the spring alone, having
the pan d immersed in the water in the beaker. Let this reading be represented
by n. The mineral whose specific gravity is to be determined is then placed
on the pan or basket, c, and the platform B raised until d is properly immersed
in the water. The position of the bead m
is again read. Let this value be
by NI. If from N\ be subtracted the number n,
represented expressing the
amount to which the scale is stretched by the weight of spring and pans alone,
the difference will be proportional to the weight of the mineral. Next, the
mineral is placed in the lower pan, d, immersed in the water, and again the
corresponding scale number, Nz, read. The difference between these readings
(Ni Nz) is a number proportional to the loss of weight in water. The
specific gravity is then
Nj-n .
It is obviously necessary to have the wires supporting the lower pan immersed
to the same depth in the case of each of the three determinations. If care is
taken the specific gravity can be obtained accurately to two decimal places.
298. The Beam Balance. A beam balance described by Penfield is
another very simple and quite accurate device for measuring the specific
gravity. It is illustrated in Fig. 506, which will make clear its essential parts.
The beam is so balanced by a weight on its shorter end that it is very nearly
in equilibrium when the lower pan is immersed in water. An exact balance
is then obtained by the small rider d. When the beam is once balanced this
rider is kept stationary and its position disregarded in the subsequent readings.
The mineral is first placed in the upper pan and the beam balanced by another
rider of such a weight that its position will be near the outer end of the beam.
506
Beam Balance for Specific Gravity, th Natural Size (after Penfield)
The position of this rider is then read

from the scale engraved upon the beam.
Let this value be equal to Ni. The mineral is next transferred to the lower
pan and the beam again brought into balance by moving this same rider back.
The second reading may be represented by 2 N
The formula for obtaining the
.
specific gravity is now:

n = Nl .
N^^" 2
299. If the mineral is in the form of grains or small

Pycnometer.
may be obtained by use of the pycnometer.
fragments, the specific gravity
This is a small bottle (Fig. 507) having a stopper which fits tightly and ends in
a tube with a very fine opening. The bottle is filled with distilled water, the
stopper inserted, and the overflowing water carefully removed
607 with a soft cloth and then weighed. The weight of the water
is obviously the difference between this last weight and that
of the bottle and mineral together, as first determined. The
mineral whose density is to be determined is also weighed.
Lastly the bottle is weighed with the mineral in it and filled
with water as described above.* The weight of the water
displaced by the mineral is obviously the difference between
this last weight and that of the bottle filled with water plus
the weight of the mineral. The specific gravity of the min-
eral is equal to its weight alone divided by the weight of the
equal volume of water thus determined. Where this method
is followed with sufficient care, especially avoiding any change
Pycnometer of temperature in the water, the results may be highly

accurate.
Ifthe mineral forms a porous mass, it may be first reduced to powder, but
it is to be noted that it has been shown by Rose that chemical precipitates
have uniformly a higher density than belongs to the same substance in a less
finely divided state. This increase of density also characterizes, though to a
less extent, a mineral in a fine state of mechanical subdivision. It is explained
by the condensation of the water on the surface of the powder.
300. Use of Liquids of High Density. It is often found convenient
both in the determination of the specific gravity and in the mechanical separa-
tion of fragments of different specific gravities (e.g., to obtain pure material
for analysis, or again in the study of rocks) to use a liquid of high density
that is, a so-called heavy solution. One of these is the solution of mercuric
iodide in potassium iodide, called the Sonstadt or Thoulet solution. When
made with care it has a maximum density of nearly 3 '2, which by dilution
may be lowered at will.
A second solution, often employed, is the Klein solution, the borotungstate
of cadmium, having a maximum density of 3*6. This again may be lowered
at will by dilution, observing certain necessary precautions. Still a third
solution of much practical value is that proposed by Brauns, methylene iodide,
which has a specific gravity of 3*324. A number of other solutions, more or less
practical, have also been suggested.! When one of these liquids is to be used
for the determination of the specific gravity of fragments of a certain mineral
it must be diluted until the fragments just float and the specific gravity then
obtained, most conveniently by the Westphal balance (Art. 301).

When, on the other hand, the liquid is to be used for the separation of the
fragments of two or more minerals mixed together, the material is first reduced
to the proper degree of fineness, the dust and smallest fragments being sifted
out, then it is introduced into the solution and this diluted until one con-
stituent after another sinks and is removed. For the convenient application
*
Care should be taken to prevent air-bubbles being included among the mineral
particles. This may be accomplished by placing the bottle under an air-pump and ex-
hausting the air or by suspending the bottle for a short time in a beaker filled with boiling
water and then allowing it to cool again before weighing.
t Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic Methods, p. 519 et seq., gives in detail an account
of the various solutions, the methods of their preparation, etc.
of thismethod a suitable tube is called for and certain
precautions must be
observed; compare the papers noted in the literature (p. 200), especially one
by Penfield.
301. Westphal's Balance. -The Westphal balance is conveniently used to determine

SP e C g Y ? a qm< nd ence a mineral when a heavy solution is
Â. Q n^
(Art. 300).
i essentially
i? consists
It
?
? n 5 j
of a graduated steelyard
employed
arm, upon which the weights
in the form of riders are placed. These must be so adjusted that the sinker is freely sus-
pended m
the given liquid while the index at the end
points to the zero of the scale and
shows that the arm is horizontal (cf. Johannsen, p. 533). The
graduation usually allows
of the specific gravity being read off directly without calculation.
302. Relation of Density to Hardness, Chemical The density or
Composition, etc.
specific gravity, of a solid depends, first, upon the nature of the chemical substances which
itcontains, and, second, upon the state of molecular aggregation.
Thus, as an illustration of the first point, all lead compounds have a high density
(G.
= about 6), since lead is a heavy metal, or,
chemically expressed, has a high atomic
weight (206'4). Similarly, barium sulphate, barite, has a specific gravity of 4'5, while for
calcium sulphate or anhydrite the value is only 2'95 {atomic weight for barium 137 for
calcium about 40).
On the other hand, while aluminium is a metal of low density (G. = 2'5 and atomic
weight = 27), its oxide, corundum, has a remarkably high density (G. = 4) and is also very
hard (H. = 9). Again, carbon (atomic weight = 12) has a high density in the diamond
= 3'5) and low in graphite (G. = 2); also, the first is hard (H. =
(G. 10), the second soft
(H. = 1'5). In these and similar cases the high density signifies great molecular
aggrega-
tion, and hence it is natural that it should be accompanied by great hardness and resistance
to the attack of acids.
As bearing upon this point, it is to be noted that the density of many substances is
altered by fusion. Again, the same mineral in different states of molecular aggregation
may differ (but only slightly) in density. Furthermore, minerals having the same chemical
composition have sometimes different densities, corresponding to the different crystalline
forms in which they appear. Thus in the case of calcium carbonate (CaCO 3 ), calcite has
G. = 27, aragonite has G. = 2'9.
303.- Average Specific Gravities. It is to be noted that among minerals of NON-
METALLIC LUSTER the average specific gravity ranges from 2'6 to 3. Here belong quartz
(2'66), calcite (27), the feldspars (2'6-275), rmiscovite (2'8). A specific gravity of 2'5 or
less is low, and is characteristic of soft minerals, and often those which are hydrous (e.g.,
gypsum, G. = 2'3). The common species fluorite, tourmaline, apatite, vesuvianite, amphi-
bole, pyroxene, and epidote lie just above the limit given, namely, 3'0 to 3'5. A specific
gravity of 3'5 or above is relatively high, and belongs to hard minerals (as corundum, see
Art. 302), or to those containing a heavy metal, as compounds of strontium, barium, also
iron, tungsten, copper, silver, lead, mercury, etc.
With minerals of METALLIC LUSTER, the average is about 5 (here belong pyrite, hematite,
etc.), while if below 4 it is relatively low (graphite 2, stibnite 4'5); if 7 or above, relatively
7
high (as galena, '5).
Tables of minerals arranged according to their specific gravity are given in Appendix B.
304. Constancy of Specific Gravity. The specific gravity of a mineral species is a
character of fundamental importance, and is highly constant for different specimens of the
same species, if pure, free from cavities, solid inclusions, etc., and if essentially constant in
composition. In the case of many species, however, a greater or less variation exists in the
chemical composition, and this at once causes a variation in specific gravity. The different
kinds of garnet illustrate this point; also the various minerals intermediate between the
tantalate of iron (and manganese) and the niobate, varying from G. = 7'3 to G. = 5'3.
305. Practical Suggestions. It should be noted that the determination of the specific
gravity has little value unless the fragment taken is pure and is free from impurities, internal
and external, and not porous. Care must be taken to exclude air-bubbles, and it will often
be found well to moisten the surface of the specimen before inserting it in the water, and
sometimes boiling (or the use of the air-pump) is necessary to free it from air. If it absorbs
water this latter process must be allowed to go on till the substance is fully saturated. No
accurate determinations can be made unless the changes of temperature are rigorously
excluded and the actual temperature noted.
In a mechanical mixture of two constituents in known proportions, when the specific
of the other can be readily obtained.
gravity of the whole and of one are known, that This
method is often important in the study of rocks.
be noted that the hand

It is to be soon trained to detect a difference of specific
may
like volumes are taken, even in a small fragment thus the difference between
eravitv if
calcite or albite and barite, even the difference between

a small diamond and a quartz
crystal, can be detected.
LITERATURE. Specific Gravity
General:
Beudant. Pogg. Ann., 14, 474, 1828.
Jenzsch.Pogg. Ann., 99, 151, 1856.
Jolly. Ber. Ak. Miinchen, 1864, 162.
Gadolin. Pogg., 106, 213, 1859.
G. Rose. Pogg. Ann., 73, 1; 75, 403, 1848.
Scheerer. Pogg. Ann., 67, 120, 1846.
Schroder. Pogg. Ann., 106, 226, 1859. Jb. Min., 561, 932, 1873; 399, 1874, etc.
Tschermak. Ber. Ak. Wien, 47 (1), 292, 1863.
Websky. Die Mineralien nach den fur das specifische Gewicht derselben angenom-
menen und gefundenen Werthen. 170 pp. Breslau, 1868.
Use of Heavy Solutions, etc.:
Sonstadt. Chem. News, 29, 127, 1874.

Thoulet. Bull. Soc. Min., 2, 17, 189, 1879.
Breon. Bull. Soc. Min., 3, 46, 1880.
Goldschmidt. Jb. Min., Beil.-Bd., 1, 179, 1881.
D. Klein. Bull. Soc. Min., 4, 149, 1881.
Rohrbach. Jb. Min., 2, 186, 1883.
Gisevius. Inaug. Diss., Bonn., 1883.
Brauns. Jb. Min., 2, 72, 1886; 1, 213, 1888.
Retgers. Jb. Min., 2, 185, 1889.
Salomon. Jb. Min., 2, 214, 1891.
Penfield. Am. J. Sc., 50, 446, 1895.
Merwin. Am. J. Sc., 32, 425, 1911.
III. CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON LIGHT

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF OPTICS
306.Before considering the optical characters of minerals in general, and
more particularly those that belong to the crystals of the different systems, it
is desirable to review briefly some of the more important principles of optics
upon which the phenomena in question depend.

For a fuller discussion of the optics of crystals, special reference is made to the works
of Groth (translation by Jackson), Liebisch, Mallard, Duparc and Pearce, Rosenbusch
(translation by Iddings), Iddings, Johannsen, Winchell, mentioned on p. 3 also to the
various advanced text-books of Physics.
307. The Nature of Light. Light is now considered to be an electro-

magnetic phenomenon due to a periodicJvariation in the energy given off by
vibrating electrons. This energy is transmitted by a series of periodic changes
that show all the characters of ordinary wave phenomena. The light waves,
as they are commonly called, possess certain short wave-lengths that are of the
correct magnitude to affect the optic nerves. Other similar waves with longer
or shorter wave-lengths belong to the same class of phenomena. Immediately
"
beyond the violet end of the visible spectrum come the so-called ultra-
violet" waves with still shorter wave-lengths and on beyond these we have
"
the X-rays and the gamma" rays produced by radium. Of the waves
having greater lengths than those of light waves we have the waves that give
CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON LIGHT 201
rise to the sensation of heat and the Hertzian waves
used in wireless All of
these vibrations, while varying
enormously in their wave-lengths, belong to
the same order of phenomena and obey the same laws. The
proportion that
the section of the series which produces the effect of
light bears to the whole
may be strikingly shown when we say that if ordinary white light is broken up
into a spectrum a yard long and this then considered to be
extended on either
end so as to include all known electro-magnetic waves the entire
spectrum
would be over five million miles in length.
The transmission of light through interstellar space,
through liquids and
transparent solids, has for some time been explained by the assumption that
a medium, called the luminiferous ether, pervades all
space, including the
intermodular space of material bodies. In this medium the vibrations of
light waves are assumed to take place. For the purposes of the present work,
however, it is unnecessary to consider closely the exact nature of light or the
mode of its transmission. It will assist greatly, however, in obtaining a clear
idea of the behavior of light in crystals if we assume that
light waves are me-
chanical in nature and consist of periodic vibrations in an
all-prevailing ether.
308. Wave-motion in General. A familiar example of wave-motion
is given by the series of concentric waves which on a surface of smooth
water
go out from a center of disturbance, as the point where a pebble has been
dropped in. These surface-waves are propagated by a motion of the water-
particles which is transverse to the direction in which the waves themselves
travel; this motion is given from each particle to the next adjoining, and so
on. Thus the particles of water at any one spot oscillate up and down,*
while the wave moves on as a circular ridge of water of constantly
increasing
diameter, but of diminishing height. The ridge is followed by a valley,
indeed both together properly constitute a wave in the physical sense. This
compound wave is followed by another wave and another, until the original
impulse has exhausted itself.
Another familiar kind of wave-motion is illustrated by the sound-waves
which in the free air travel outward from a sonorous body in the form of
concentric spheres. Here the actual motion of the layers of air is forward
and back that is, in the direction of propagation of the sound and the
effect of the transfer of this impulse from one layer to the next is to give rise
alternately to a condensed and rarefied shell of air, which together constitute
a sound-wave and which expand in spherical waves of constantly decreasing
intensity (since the mass of air set in motion continually increases). Sound-
waves, as of the voice, may be several feet in length, and they travel at a rate
of 1120 feet per second at ordinary temperatures.
309. It is important to understand that in both the cases mentioned, as in
every case of free wave-motion, each point on a given wave may be considered
as a center of disturbance from which a system of new waves tend to go out.
These individual wave-systems ordinarily destroy each other except so far as
the onward progression of the wave as a whole is concerned. This is further
discussed and illustrated in its application to light-waves (Art 312 and Figs.
509, 510).
In general, therefore, a given wave is to be considered as the resultant of
all these minor wave-systems. If, however, a wave encounters an obstacle in

its path, as a narrow opening (i.e., one narrow in comparison with the length
*
Strictly speaking, the path of each particle approximates closely to a circle.
of the wave) or a sharp edge, then the fact just mentioned explains how the
waves seem to bend about the obstacles, since new waves start from them as
centers. This principle has an important application in the case of light-
waves, explaining the phenomena of diffraction (Art. 331).
310. another case of wave-motion may be mentioned, since it is particularly help-
Still
ful in giving a correct apprehension of light-phenomena. If a long rope, attached at one
end, be grasped at the other, a quick motion of the hand, up or down, will give rise to a half
wave-form in one case a crest, in the other a trough which will travel quickly to the
other end and be reflected back with a reversal in its position; that is, if it went forward
as a hill-like wave, it will return as a trough. If, just as the wave has reached the end. a
second like one be started, the two will meet and pass in the middle, but here for a brief
interval the rope is sensibly at rest, since it feels two equal and opposite impulses. This
will be seen later to be a case of the simple interference of two like waves opposed in phase.
Again, a double motion of the hand, up and down, will produce a complete wave, with
crest and trough, as the result, and this again is reflected back as in the simpler case. Still
again, if a series of like motions are continued rhythmically and so timed that each wave
is an even part of the whole rope, the two systems of equal and opposite waves passing in
the two directions will interfere and a system of so-called stationary waves will be the
result, the rope seeming to vibrate in segments to and fro about the position of equilibrium.
Finally, if the end of the rope be made to describe a small circle at a rapid, uniform,
rhythmical rate, a system of stationary waves will again result, but now the vibrations of
the string will be sensibly in circles about the central line. This last case will be seen to
roughly indicate the kind of transverse vibrations by which the waves of circularly polar-
ized light are propagated, while the former case represents the vibrations of waves of what
iscalled plane-polarized light.
All these cases of waves obtained with a rope deserve to be carefully considered and
studied by experiment, for the sake of the assistance they give to an understanding of the
complex phenomena of light-waves.
311. Light-waves. In the discussion that follows, in order to make

the explanations simpler and clearer, light waves have been treated as if they
consisted of mechanical disturbances in a material medium called the ether.
The vibrations in the ether caused by the transmission of a light wave
take place in directions transverse to the direction of the movement of the
wave. These oscillations have the following characters. When an ether par-
ticle is set vibrating it moves from its original position with gradually decreas-
ing velocity until the position of its maximum displacement is reached. Then
with gradually increasing velocity it returns to its original position and since
it is moving without friction it will continue in the same direction on past this
point. Its velocity will then again diminish until it has reached a displace-
ment equal but opposite in direction to its first swing, when it will start back
on its course and repeat the oscillation. The varying velocity of such an
oscillation would be the same as that shown by a particle moving around a
circle with uniform speed if the particle was observed in a direction lying in the
plane of the circle. Under these conditions the particle would appear to move
forward and backward along a straight line with constantly changing velocity.
Such a motion is called simple harmonic motion.
The motion of one ether particle is communicated to another and so on,
each, in order, falling a little behind in the time of its oscillation. Conse-
quently, while the individual particles move only back and forth in the same
line the wave disturbance moves forward. If, at a given instant of time, the
positions of successive particles in their oscillations are plotted, a curve, such
as shown in Fig. 508, will be formed. Such a curve is known as a harmonic
curve. The oscillatory motion of the particles in a light wave is called a
periodic motion since it repeats itself at regular intervals. The maximum dis-
placement of a particle from its original position of rest is called the amplitude
of the wave
(distance C-D, Fig. 508). The phase of a particle at a given
instant is its position in
the vibration and the 608
direction in which it is D
moving. /^
The distance between /
any particle and the next /
which is in a like position r
i.e., of like phase, as A \
and B is the wave-length; \~ j\l I/
and the time required for
this completed movement Harmonic Curve
is the time of vibration,
or vibration-period. The wave-system therefore travels onward the distance
of one wave-length in one vibration-period. The intensity of the light varies
with the amplitude of the vibration, and the color, as explained in a later ar-
ticle, depends upon the length of the waves; the length of the violet waves is
about one-half the length of the red waves.
In ordinary light the transverse vibrations are to be thought of as taking
place in all planes about the line of propagation. In the above figure, vibra-
tions in one plane only are represented light that has only one direction of
;
transverse vibration is said to be plane-polarized.

Light-waves have a very minute length, only 0'000023 of an inch for the
yellow sodium flame, and they travel with enormous velocity, 186,000 miles
per second in a vacuum; thus light passes from the sun to the earth in about
eight minutes. The vibration-period, or time of one oscillation, is conse-
quently extremely brief; it is given by dividing the distance traveled by light
in one second by the number of waves included.*
312. Wave-front. In an isotropic medium, as air, water, or glass
that is, one in which light would be propagated in all directions about a lumi-
nous point with the same velocity the waves are spherical in form. The
wave-front is the continuous surface, in this case spherical, which includes
all
particles that commence their vibration at the same moment of time. Obvi-
of the source
ously the curvature of the wave-front diminishes as the distance
of light increases, and when the light comes from an indefinitely great distance
(as the sun) the wave-front becomes sensibly
a plane surface. Such waves are
usually called plane waves. These cases are illustrated by Figs. 509 and 510.
In Fig. 509 the luminous point is supposed to be 0, and the medium being
isotropic, il is obvious that the wave-front,
as ABC .
G, is spherical.
. . It is
also made clear by this figure how, as briefly stated in Art. 309, the resultant
of all the individual impulses which go out from the successive points, as
A, B, C, etc., as centers, form a new wave-front,
abc g, concentric with
. . .
ABC G. In Fig. 510 the luminous body is supposed to be at a great dis-
*
"On accountof the tremendous speed at which light travels the rapidity of vibration,
or "frequency
"
of light as it passes through a fixed point, is extremely great. About eight
hundred trillion waves of violet light would pass through such a point in a second. Ine
extreme brevity of the interval of time required for the passage of a single wave
of this
of a
sort may perhaps be realized better when it is said that one eight-hundred-trillionth
second is a vastly smaller part of a second than a second is of the whole of historic
time.
Comstock and Troland, "The Nature of Matter and Electricity, p. 157.
tance, so that the wave-front AB . F is a plane surface. Here also the

individual impulses from A, B, etc.,
609
unite to form the wave-front ab .
/
. .
parallel toAB . F.
. .
313. Light-ray. The study of

light-phenomena is, in certain cases,
facilitated by the conception of a
light-ray, a line drawn from the
luminous point to the wave-front,
and whose direction is taken so as
to represent that of the wave itself.
510
constant under all
ave 1 en gt h of conditions, it follows
of the same color must be
mpL It
media. ^ ;,
is, therefore,
.
"fht
rather
the frequency with which the
different in different
the eye tLat determines the color light waves reach

sensation.
produced by the combination of several different
Commonly a given color t
wave-lengths of light It I
strictly monochromatic only when it
corresponds to one definite wave-length
this is nearly true of the
this consists of
bright-yellow sodium line, though strictly
two sets of waves of slightly different
TpeS
lengths.
The effect of white light" is obtained the waves from the red to the
if all
violet come together to the
eye simultaneously; for this reason a piece of
platinum at a temperature of 1500 C. appears " white hot"
The radiation from the sources
named, either the sun, the
electric carbons or the glowing
platinum, includes also longer waves
which do not affect the eye, but
which, like the light-waves, produce the
effect of sensible heat when received
upon an absorbing surface, as one of lamp-
black. There are also, particularly in the radiation from
the sun, waves
shorter than the which also do not affect the eye.
violet The former are
called infra-red, the latter
ultra-violet waves.
The brightness of light
depends upon the am-
plitude of its vibrations
and varies directly as the
square of this distance.
315. Complementary
Colors. - The sensation
-
of white light mentioned

above is also obtained
when
, i
to a given color
.
T 1
^ \rV
"*
\^
** x
\,<
n* \^
T"*
^X
/T*
M
that is, light-waves of
- -
given wave-length is
combined a certain other
so - called complementary
color. Thus certain shades
of pink and green combined, as by the rapid rotation of a card on
which the colors form segments, produce the effect of white. Blue and
yellow of certain shades are also complementary. For every shade of color in
the spectrum there is another one complementary to it in the sense here
defined. The most perfect illustration of complementary colors is given by
the examination of sections of crystals in polarized light, as later explained.
316. Reflection. When light- waves come to the boundary which
separates one medium from another, as a surface of water, or glass in air,
they are, in general, in part reflected or returned back into the first medium.
The reflection of light-waves is illustrated by Figs. 511 and 512. In Fig.
511, MM
is the reflecting surface here a plane surface and the light-
waves have a plane wave-front (Abcde); in other words, the light-rays
(OA, Ob, etc.) are parallel. It is obvious that the wave-front meets the sur-
face first at A and successively from point to point to E. These points are to
be regarded as the centers of new wave-systems which unimpeded would be
propagated outward in all directions and at a given instant would have
traveled through distances equal to the lines Aa', Bb' etc. Hence the com- ,
mon tangent fghkE to the circular arcs

drawn with these radii from A, B,
the direction of the new or reflected wave-front. But geomet-
etc., represents
rically the angle eAE is
512
equal to fEA, or the in-
cident and reflected wave-
fronts make equal angles
with the reflecting surface.
If NA is a normal at A,
the angle OAN - -
called
the angle of incidence is
equal to NAF, the angle

of reflection. Hence the
familiar law:
The angle of incidence is
equal to the angle of reflec-

tion.
"
Furthermore, the in-
cident and reflected rays"
both lie in the same plane
with the normal .to the
reflecting surface.
In Fig. 512, where the luminous point is at 0, the waves going out from it
will meet the plane mirror MM
first at the point A and successively at points,
as B, C, D, etc., farther away to the right (and left) of A. Here also it is easy
to show that all the new impulses, which have their centers at A, B, C, etc.,
must together give rise to a series of reflected waves whose center is at 0', at a
distance equally great from MM measured on a normal to the surface
(OA = O'A}.
Now the lines OA, OB, etc., which are perpendicular to the wave-front,
represent certain incident light-rays, and the eye placed in the direction BE,
CF, etc., will see the luminous point as if at 0' It follows from the construc-
.
tion of the figure and can be proved by experiment that if BN, CN', etc., are
normals to the mirror the angles of incidence, OBN, OCN' etc., are equal to
',
the angles of reflection, NBE, N'CF, etc., respectively. Hence the above law
applies to this case also.
If the reflecting surface is not plane, but, for example, a concave surface,
as that of a spherical or parabolic mirror, there is a change in the curvature of
the wave-front after reflection, but the same law still holds true.
The proportion of the reflected to the incident light increases with the smoothness of
the surface and also as the angle of incidence diminishes. The intensity of the reflected
light is a maximum for a given surface in the case of perpendicular incidence (OA, Fig. 512).
If the surface is not perfectly polished, diffuse reflection will take place, and there will
be no distinct reflected ray. It is the diffusely reflected light which makes the reflected
surface visible; if the surface of a mirror were absolutely smooth the eye would see the
reflected body in it only, not the surface itself. Optically expressed, the surface is to be
considered smooth if the distance between the scratches upon it is considerablv less (say
one-fourth) than the wave-length of light.
317. Refraction. When light passes from one medium into another
there is, in general, an increase or decrease in its velocity, and this commonly
results in the phenomenon of refraction that is, a change in the direction of
propagation. The principles applicable here can be most easily shown in the
case of light-waves with a plane wave-front, as shown in Fig 513 that is
where the light-rays OA, OB, etc., are parallel. Suppose, for example, that
a light-wave, part of whose wave-
front is Abcde, passes from air 513
obliquely into glass, in which its
velocity is about two-thirds as
great as it was in the air and
suppose the surface of the glass to
be plane. At the moment that the
ray0-A enters the glass the ray
0-E has reached the point e.
During the time that the latter
ray travels from e to E, the ray
0-A will have advanced in the
glass a distance equal to %e-E, or
to some point on an arc having this
distance as a radius (A-f). In the
same way during the time ray 0-E
passes from the point p to E, ray
0-B will have traveled in the glass the distance B-g, equal to
f p-E. In this arcs may be drawn about each one of the points A, B,
way
C, etc., and the position of the new wave-front in the glass determined by their
common tangent, Ekhgf. It is seen that there is a change of direction in the
wave-front, or otherwise stated, in the light-ray, the magnitude of which
depends on the ratio between the light-velocities in the two media, and, as
discussed later, also upon the wave-length of the light. The light-ray is here
said to be broken or refracted, and for a medium like glass, optically denser
than air (i.e., with a lower value of the light- velocity), the refraction is toward
the perpendicular with the angle of refraction, r, smaller than the angle of
incidence, i. In the opposite case when light passes into an optically
rarer medium the refraction is away from the perpendicular and the angle
of refraction is larger than that of incidence (Art. 323).
318. Refractive Index. It is obvious from the figure that whatever
the direction of the wave-front that is, of the light-rays relatively to the
given surface, the ratio of eE to Af, which determines the direction of the new
wave-front (i.e., the direction of a refracted ray, AF) is constant. This ratio
y
is equal to where V is the value of the light-velocity for the first medium
(here air) and v for the second (as glass). This constant ratio is commonly
represented by n and is known as the index of refraction. Therefore
eE
In Fig. 513, by construction,

/ eAE = / i and / AEf = / r.
Al eE
Also, and
Therefore, eE_
sn AE = eE
sin r Af Af
AE
sin
= - -^ ,
The law of refraction then is given by the expression, n olll /

,
or may be
formulated as follows:
The sine of the angle of incidence bears a constant ratio to the sine of the
angle of refraction.
In the case of light passing from air into crown glass this ratio is found to
3in ^
be,
= T608, and this number consequently gives the value of the
sin r
refractive index, or for this kind of glass.
The above relation holds true for
514 any wave-system of given wave-
length in passing from one medium
into another, whatever the wave-
front or shape of the bounding sur-
face. In Fig. 514 the luminous
pointis at 0, and it can be readily
shown that the new wave-front
propagated in the second me-
dium (of greater optical density)
has a flattened curvature and
corresponding to this a center
at 0' f where ^4^ = ). Here the

OA v
incident rays OB, OC, are re-
fracted at J3*and C, the correspond-
ing refracted rays being and CF. BE
For this case also the relation holds
good,
sin i sin i
n -, ,
etc.
sinr sin r
If the bounding surface is not plane but curved, as in lenses, there is a

change in the curvature of the wave-front in the second medium, but the
simple law, n = - > holds true here also, so long as the medium is isotropic.
The relation between wave-length and refractive index is spoken of in

Art. 328.
319. Relation of Refractive Index to Light- velocity. The discussion
of the preceding article shows that if n is the refractive index of a given sub-
stance for waves of a certain length, referred to air, the velocity in air and v V
the velocity in the given medium, then
V
n =
v
For two media whose indices are n\ and nz respectively, it consequently follows
that
n\ _ v% t
nz v\
Therefore, The indices of refraction of two given media for a certain wave-
length are inversely proportional to their relative light-velocities.
In other words, if the velocity of light in air is taken as
equal to 1 and
the velocity of the same light is found to be one half as great when
passing
through a given substance, the index of refraction, or n, of that substance
when referred to air (n = TO) will be equal to 2*0.
320. Principal Refractive Indices. The refractive index has, as
stated, a constant value for every substance, referred, as is usual, to air (or
it may be to a vacuum). In regard to solid media, it is evident from Art.
318 and will be further explained later that those which are isotropic, viz.,
amorphous substances and crystals of the isometric system, can have but a
single value of this index. Crystals of the tetragonal and hexagonal systems
have, as later explained, two principal refractive indices, e and co, corresponding
to the velocities of light-propagation in certain definite directions in them.
Further, orthorhombic, monoclinic, and triclinic crystals have similarly
all
three principal indices,
a, |S, 7. In the latter 'cases of so-called anisotropic
media, the mean refractive index is taken, namely, as the arithmetical mean
321. Effect of Index of Refraction upon Luster, etc. The luster and
general appearance of a transparent substance depend largely upon its refrac-
tive index. For instance the peculiar aspect of the mineral cryolite, by means
of which it is usually possible to readily identify the substance, is due to its
low index of refraction. If cryolite is pulverized and the powder poured into
a test tube of water it will disappear and apparently go into solution. It is
quite insoluble, however, but becomes invisible in the water because its index
of refraction (about 1*34) is near that of water (T335). The light will travel
with practically the same velocity through the cryolite as through the water
and consequently suffer little reflection or refraction at the surfaces between
the two. On the other hand powdered glass with a higher index of refraction
than that of water appears white under the same conditions because of the
reflection of light from the surfaces of the particles.
Substances having an unusually high index of refraction have an appear-
ance which it is hard to define, and which is generally spoken of as an adaman-
tine luster. .This kind of luster may be best comprehended by examining
specimens of diamond (n = 2*419) or of cerussite (n
= 1*98). They have a
flash and quality, sometimes almost a metallic appearance, which is not
possessed by minerals of a low refractive index. Compare, for example, spec-
imens of cerussite and fluorite (n = 1'434). The usual index of refraction for
minerals may be said to range not far from 1*55, and gives to minerals a luster
which has been termed vitreous. Quartz, feldspar, and halite show good
examples of vitreous luster.
Below is given a list of common minerals arranged according to their indices
of refraction. For minerals other than those of the isometric system the
here.
average value (as defined in the preceding article) is given
Water ........... 1
'
335 Muscovite ....... 1 582

Fluorite ......... 1'434 Beryl ........... 1'582
Orthoclase ....... 1523 Calcite .......... T601
Gypsum ......... 1'524 Topaz ........... 1622
"547 Tremolite ....... 1 '622
Quartz .......... 1
Dolomite ........ 1626 Anglesite ........ T884

Aragonite ....... 1 633 Zircon ........... 1 952
Apatite ......... 1 633 Cerussite ........ T 986
Barite ........... 1640 Cassiterite ....... 2'029
Diopside ........ T 685 Sulphur .......... 2'077
Cyanite .......... 1'723 Sphalerite ........ 2369
Epidote .......... 1750 Diamond ........ 2 419
Corundum ....... 1 765 Rutile ........... 2 711
Almandite ....... 1*810 Cuprite .......... 2849
'
Malachite ........ 1 880 Cinnabar ........ 2 969
322. Relations between Chemical Composition, Density, and Refractive Index. That
definite relations exist between the chemical composition of a substance, its specific gravity,
and its index of refraction, has been conclusively shown in many cases. With the plagio-
clase feldspar group, for instance, the variation in composition which the different members
show is accompanied by a direct variation in density and refractive index. Attempts
have been made to express these relations in the form of mathematical statements.
The two most satisfactory expressions are the one proposed by Gladstone and Dale,*
l
= constant, and the one proposed independently by Lorentz f and Lorenz,t
-^
n~
2
-. = constant. In these n is equal to the mean refractive index and d to the density.
These were originally proposed for use with gases and solutions and for these bodievS have
been found to serve about equally well. When attempts are made, however, to apply them
to crystalline solids the results are at the best only approximate. This is probably because
the formulas do not take into consideration the modifications that the crystal structure
must introduce.
323. Total Reflection. Critical Angle. In regard to the principle

stated in Art. 318 and expressed by the equation n = -
,
two points are to be
noted. First, the angle i = 0, then sin i
if 0, and obviously also r
= 0; in
other words, when the ray of light (as OA, Fig. 514) coincides with the per-
pendicular,
no change of direction takes place, the ray proceeds onward (AD)
into the second medium without deviation, but with a change of velocity.
Again, if the angle i = 90, then sin i = 1, and the equation above becomes
n = - or sin r = -. Asn has a fixed value for every substance, it is obvi-
sin T 7i
ous that there will also be a corresponding value of the angle r for the case
mentioned. From the above table it is seen that for water, sin r = VT^H
1 OOO
r = 48 31'; for crown glass (n = 1'608), sin r

= and r = 38 27'; for
diamond, sin r = ^r
- and r = 24 25'.
This fact, that for each substance at a particular value of the angle r~the
angle becomes equal to 90, has an important bearing on the behavior of
i
light when it is passing from an optically denser into an optically rarer medium.
*
Phil. Trans., 153, 317, 1863.
t Wiedem. Ann., 9, 641, 1880.
J Wiedem. Ann., 11, 70, 1880.
E. S. Larsen, Am. Jour. Sci., 28, 263, 1909. See also Cheneveau, Ann. Chem. Phys.,
12) 145, '28 J, 1907.
In Fig. 515 we may assume that light rays coming from various directions
meet the surface between a block of glass and the air at the point A.
Light
traveling along the path O-A will 515
pass out into the air without a B
change in its direction but with an
increase in its velocity. If it
emerges from the glass at any
other angle than 90 the ray on
entering the air will be bent away
from the perpendicular and the
angle of deviation will vary with
the angle at which the ray touched
the surface and with the index of
refraction of the glass. The same
law holds true in this case as in
the case of a ray entering from the
air,
except that the formula nows reads n = . where r = the angle the ray in
szn v ,
air makes with the normal to the surface and i =

the angle that the ray makes
within the glass to the same normal. In Fig. 515 the ray C-A will pass out
into the air along the line A-D. But the angle i for the ray E-A = 38 27'
and, as shown in the preceding paragraph, for glass, where n = 1*608, the
angle r in the air will be 90 and the ray will travel along the surface of the
glass in the direction A-F. Consequently any ray, such as G-A, which meets
the surface of the glass at an angle greater than 38 27', will be unable to pass
out into the air and will suffer total reflection at the surface, passing back into
the glass in the direction A-G', with angle GAG = angle GAG'. The angle
at which total reflection takes place for any substance is known as its critical
The phenomenon of total reflection is taken advantage of in the cutting

of gem stones. According to common practice such a stone is cut with a flat
surface on top and with a number of inclined facets on the bottom. The
light that enters the stonefrom above is in a large measure totally reflected
from the sloping planes below and comes back to the eye through the stone.
The amount of light reflected in this way and the consequent brilliancy of the
gem increases with its index of refraction. Two stones cut exactly alike, one
from diamond and the other, perhaps, from quartz, would have very different
516 517
Total Reflection in Fluorite n = 1.43 Total Reflection in Diamond n = 2.42
reflected from
appearances due to this difference in the amount of light totally
their lower facets. This principle is illustrated in Figs. 516 and 517. They
one from fmorite and the

represent cross sections of two hemispheres cut,
from diamond. It is assumed that light from all directions is focused
other
on the center of the plane surface of each hemisphere. All the light that meets
will be
this surface at an angle greater than the critical angle for the mineral
totally reflected back through the spherical
surface. The shaded areas of the
in each case that would be so reflected and
figures show the amount of light
clearly illustrate the optical difference between the two substances.
324. Effect of Index of Refraction upon Microscopic Phenomena. In
the study of minerals, especially in thin sections under the microscope, varia-
tions in the index of refraction give effects which are of importance. In Fig.
518 let it be assumed that L is the objective lens of a compound microscope,
and that the instrument is exactly focused upon a point O, Fig. 518, A. If
now we imagine that a section of some mineral of mean index of refraction is
518
;
Cover glass
br~~Section in balsam
A-Glass slide
placed under the lens, Fig. 518, B, the point O' will now be in focus, or as in
Fig. 518, C, where the mineral is supposed to have a high index of refraction,
the focus will be at O". Thus it is that with two sections of equal thickness
and with the lens in the same position, one looks deeper into the mineral of
higher index of refraction. Consequently, when there are two minerals in
the same section, the one having a high and the other a low index of refraction
(for example, a crystal of zircon, n
= 1.95, embedded in quartz, n = 1.55), the
one having the higher index of refraction will apparently have the greater
thickness and will appear to stand up in relief above the surface of the mineral
of lower index. The apparent relief is furthermore augmented by other
properties to be explained below.
In preparing thin sections of minerals or rocks for study with the micro-
scope the process, in brief, is to make first a flat surface upon the mineral or rock
by grinding it upon a plate supplied with some abrasive. This flat surface is
then cemented to a piece of glass by means of Canada balsam and the re-
mainder of the mineral is ground away until only a thin film remains, which in
the best rock sections is not over 0'03 mm. in thickness. The section is finally
embedded in balsam, n about 1'54, and over it a thin cover glass is laid. In
the preparation of a section the surfaces are not polished, hence, from the
nature of the abrasive, they must be pitted and scratched and it may be
assumed that in cross section such a preparation would be somewhat as repre-
sented in Fig. 518, D. When a thin section is examined under the
microscope
the light enters the section from below, having been reflected up into the
microscope tube by an inclined mirror. Before it reaches the section it will
have passed through a nicol prism and through a slightly converging lens. Let
it be assumed that the mineral at a, Fig. 518, D, is one of mean refractive
index. The convergent light entering the section will pass with little or no
refraction from the mineral into the balsam because their refractive indices
are nearly alike. Hence the roughness of the surface of the section is not
apparent and the mineral appears as if polished. If there is a crack, as at 6,
so much light penetrates it that it is scarcely visible when the convergent
lens is close to the object, but when the latter is lowered, and especially when
the light is restricted by the use of an iris diaphragm inserted into the micro-
scope tube, the nearly parallel rays of light will suffer some total reflection
along the line of the crack and so make it visible. On the other hand, if the
mineral has a high index of refraction there will be innumerable places all over
the section where the surfaces are so inclined that the light will suffer total
reflection in attempting to pass from the optically dense mineral into the rarer
balsam. Hence the uneven surface of the section due to its grinding is plainly
visible. This effect is more pronounced if the convergent lens is lowered.
The cracks that may exist in a mineral of high index of refraction are for the
same reasons much more distinct than in a mineral of low index. Further,
if a mineral of high index of refraction is embedded in one of low, c, Fig. 518,
D, there will be places along its outer edge where total reflection will take place,
thus causing its outline to be dark and distinct. This effect combined with
the roughened aspect of the surface and the apparent increase in thickness,
as described in the preceding paragraph, all tend to make a mineral of high
index of refraction stand out conspicuously in relief.
325. Determination of the Indices of Refraction of Mineral Grains
under the Microscope. The considerations of the preceding article sug-
gest a means of determining the indices of refraction of mineral grains under
the microscope. If a grain is immersed in a liquid of known index of refrac-
tion it is possible to determine whether it has a higher or lower index of
refraction than the liquid and by the use of a series of liquids of varying
refractive indices it is possible to determine with considerable accuracy the
index of refraction of the mineral. A list of liquids in common usejfor such
*
purposes, with their indices of refraction is given below.

Mixtures of refined petroleum oils and turpentine 1 450-1 '475
'
Turpentine and ethylene bromide or clove oil 1 480-1 535

'
Clove oil and a-monobromnaphthalene 1 540-1 635

'
Petroleum oils and a-monobromnaphthalene 1 475-1 650

'
1' 650-1 740

a-monobromnaphthalene and methylene iodide
dissolved in methylene iodide 1 740-1 790
Sulphur
Mixtures of methylene iodide with iodides of antimony,
arsenic and tin, also sulphur and iodof orm (see Merwin) ... 1 740-1 870
1 740-2 280
Methylene iodide and arsenic trisulphide (see Merwin)
Resin-like substances formed from mixtures of piperine and
*
Wright, Methods of Petrographic-Microscopic Research, p. 98; Merwin, Jour. Wash.
Acad. Sc., 3, 35, 1913.
the tri-iodides of arsenic and antimony. These fuse easily

and mineral grains can be thus embedded in a thin film of the
'
material 1 '680-2 10
The indices of refraction of the test liquids can be determined either b

the use of the total refractometer or by filling a hollow glass prism with th
liquid and using the metho'ds employed with ordinary mineral prisms, se
Art. 327.
A series of these liquids should be prepared which for most purposes migh
conveniently show differences in the indices of the different liquids of 0*01
For more exacting work smaller differences betw.een the indices of the member
of the series would be of advantage. If these are kept in well stopperei
bottles and are protected from the light they will show very little change ove
considerable periods of time. It is advisable, however, to check their indice
at least once a year.
The mineral to be studied should be broken down into uniform sma]
grains. (0'05 mm. is usually a good diameter) and then a few grains place<
upon a glass slide. A drop of liquid with a known index of refraction is the]
placed upon the grains and the whole covered with a thin cover glass. Whei
a mineral grain is immersed in a liquid of closely the same index of refractio]
it loses its sharpness of outline and if the mineral is colorless and the corre
spondence of the two indices exact it will quite disappear. Certain tests
however, are commonly used to determine the relative indices of the minera
and the liquid which with proper care can distinguish differences as small a
O'Ol or with practice and especial care as small as O'OOl. To make these test
the condenser below the microscope stage should be lowered and, if the instru
ment has a sub-stage iris diaphragm, this should be partly closed. Unde:
these conditions the obliquity of the light is reduced and only a small penci
of light composed of nearly parallel rays enters the section. Let Fig. 511
519 520 represent a mineral grair
illuminated in this way wher
immersed in a liquid o1
higher index of refraction
The light rays as the}
pass from the mineral intc
the higher refracting liquic
above will be bent awa^
from the perpendicular. In
the opposite case, Fig. 520,
where the mineral has the
higher index the reverse wil]
be true and the light rays
will be bent toward the
perpendicular. This will
Grain with Low Refractive Grain with High Refractive
Index immersed in produce in one case a
LiquidIndex immersed in Liquid
of High Refractive Index of Low Refractive Index brighter illumination of the
borders of the mineral grain
and in the other a brighter illumination of
ference in illumination is,
_ __.
_ its. center. This dif-
however, commonly so slight as to be cer-
_ ^
tainly detected only with difficulty. The so-called Becke Test is commonly
used under these circumstances. This consists in
focusing upon the grain
with a high power objective and then
slowly raising or lowering the micro-
scope tube. In the case illustrated by Fig. 519, when the tube is raised, a
narrow line of light willbe seen to move outward from the mineral, while
when the tube is lowered this line will move inward. In the case illustrated
in Fig. 520 the opposite conditions will prevail. A convenient rule to remem-
ber is that when the microscope tube is raised the Becke line will move toward the
material of higher refractive index and when the tube is lowered this line will
move toward the material of lower index. This makes a very satisfactory and
quite delicate test for distinguishing differences in refractive indices. Some-
times two lines will appear moving in opposite directions and it may be diffi-
cult to decide which is the Becke line. This is usually obviated by lowering
the condenser or decreasing the aperture in the iris diaphragm. For the use
of the Becke test in rock sections, see Art. 326.
The test upon mineral grains immersed in a liquid may also be made by
means of oblique illumination. An oblique pencil of rays may be obtained
most conveniently by placing a pencil, a finger, or a piece of cardboard between
the reflecting mirror and the polarizer in such a way as to darken one-half of
the field of vision. The best results will be obtained by the use of an objective
of medium magnifying power. When a mineral grain is viewed under these
conditions it be noted that one of its edges is more brightly illuminated
will
than the other. With the condenser
lens lowered and mineral with a lower
index of refraction than the liquid, the
bright edge of the mineral will be away
from the shadow, while if the mineral
has a higher index than the liquid the
bright edge will be on the side toward the
shadow. These conditions are pre-
sented in Fig. 521, where L and H
represent grains with indices respectively
lower and higher than the liquid in
Darker
....
>/\
( L ^Brighter
which they are immersed. If the con-
.
denser lens is raised effects exactly op-

posite to those described above will be
noted. It is wise, at first at least, to
test the apparatus used by observing
mineral fragments of known indices and taking note of the effects produced.
Commonly the liquids used have a higher dispersion than the mineral to
be tested. In other words the liquid will have distinctly different indices of
refraction for red and for blue light. If the mineral should have an index
intermediate between those for red and blue light in the liquid the grain
when illuminated in oblique light will show colored borders. With the con-
denser lens lowered the edge of the mineral next to the shadow will be colored
an orange-red while the edge away from the shadow will be pale blue. If the
amount of the dispersion in the liquid (i.e., the difference between the indices
for blue and red light) is not too great this effect gives very closely the refrac-
tive index of the mineral.
It should be pointed out here that all minerals, except those of the isometric
the crystal direc-
system, show different indices of refraction depending upon
tion in which the light is passing through the mineral. Consequently un-
orientated grains of a mineral, unless it belongs to the isometric system, will
show a variation in the refractive indices depending upon their position on
the slide. Sometimes it is possible to determine the crystal orientation of a

grain due to some significant cleavage or structure and so obtain the index
for some particular crystal direction, but ordinarily all that can be determined
is the mean index of refraction of the mineral.
326. The Becke Test in Rock Sections. The Becke test can be often
used in a rock section to determine the relative indices of refraction of two
different minerals lying in contact with each other. Their contact plane should
be nearly vertical in order to give clear results. The position of this plane
can be determined by focusing on the surface of the section and then when
the microscope tube is lowered note whether or not the position of the dividing
line between the two minerals remains stationary or moves. If it remains
stationary or moves only a little, the dividing plane is vertical or nearly so.
Under these conditions assume that the cone of light entering from below is
focused at point O, Fig. 522, lying on the dividing plane between L (mineral
with lower index) and H (mineral with higher index). The light rays 1-6
passing as they do from
522 a mineral of lower index
12 11 10 7 8 9654 3 2 into one of higher will
sufferno total reflection
and emerge from the
all
section on the side of H.
On the other hand, rays
7-12 attempting to pass
from H to L will only in
part pass across the
dividing plane while the
others will be totally
reflected and add them-
selves to rays 1-6 on the
side of H. H will there-
fore show a brighter
illumination than L. In
this case also when the
tube of the microscope is
raised the Becke line will
be seen moving toward
the mineral of higher
12 3456 index or when the tube is
lowered toward that of
lower index. The best results will be obtained by
using an objective of high
magnification and the condenser lens must be lowered.
327. Determination of the Index of Refraction
by Means of Prisms or
Plates. For the more accurate determination of the indices of refraction of
minerals a natural or cut prism or plate of the mineral is used. In all cases,
except minerals of the isometric system, the prism or plate used must have a
certain crystallographic orientation. This matter, however, will be discussed
when the optical characters of such minerals are given. For the
present, we
will assume that the mineral whose index of refraction
is to be determined is
isometric in its crystallization. There are two chief methods of determining
the index of refraction by the use of a
prism.
1. The Method
of Perpendicular Incidence. This method, although not
the one most generally employed, is an excellent one to become
acquainted
with, as it may be used to
advantage in some cases and from it the formula
necessary for making the calculations is readily derived. It is necessary to
have a prism of the mineral which has two
plane surfaces meeting at a small angle.
This angle should be small enough so that
the light may pass freely through the prism
and not suffer any total reflection as it
attempts to pass out into the air. For in-

stance with fluorite in which n = 1*434, the
prism angle must be less than 44 12', for at a
this angle total reflection would take place.
For a mineral of higher index the angle
would have to be smaller still, as with dia-
mond, n = 2 '4 19, where total reflection
would take place at 24 24'. On the other
hand, more accurate results will be obtained Refraction of Light through a Prism
if the prism angle is fairly near to the limit Method of
Perpendicular Incidence
for the mineral being used.*
Let Fig. 523 represent the cross section of such a prism. Let a-b represent
a ray of light striking the face of this prism at 90 incidence. It will suffer
no deviation in its path on entering the prism but will proceed with somewhat
diminished velocity until it reaches c. In passing out of the prism at this point,
from a denser to a rarer medium, the light will be deflected away from the
normal to the surface, P-P', making a. deviation 5 in the direction o-d. The
data necessary for the calculation of the index of refraction under these
conditions are the angle of the prism, a, and that of the deviation in
the path of the light, 5. It is easy to see from the figure that a and a' are
equal, for they are both parts of right-angled triangles having the angle
bP'c in common, and a" is equal to a! because they are opposite angles. The
angle of incidence, as defined in Art. 317, is equal to a 8 and +
the angle of
refraction is equal to a. Therefore the usual formula - - n becomes here

sin r
Sm a
=
. n. In order to make a determination of the index of refraction,
sin a
therefore, necessary to measure these two angles, a and 5.
it is
The prism is mounted on a one-circle reflection goniometer and its angle
a measured in the same way as an angle upon a crystal. The instrument is
then adapted to the uses of a refractometer. For this purpose it is necessary
to note that the telescope and vernier are both fastened to the outer rim of the
instrument and move together. The graduated circle being clamped, the
telescope tube is first moved to the position T', Fig. 524, so that the rays from
the collimator tube, C, passing the edge of the prism, cause the light signal to
fall on the vertical cross-hair of the telescope. The inner being clamped
Circle
the telescope is next moved through an arc of exactly 60 to position T" and
then clamped. Next the prism is turned to the first position so that the
s falls on the
light from C is reflected from its right-hand face and the signal
cross-hair of T". In this position the normal, N, to the prism face, must bisect
the angle between the axes of C and T". The prism is now turned throughT
an angle of exactly 60 to its second position, which brings the normal A
exactly in line with the axis of the collimator tube. When this has been
accomplished the graduated circle is securely clamped. The telescope may

524 now be undamped and
moved without altering the
position of the prism, and
somewhere between T' and
T" a position T'" will be
found where the refracted
ray falls on the cross-hair
of the telescope. The move-
ment of the telescope from
the position T"' back to
T' gives the angle of devia-
tion, or 5, of the light
ray that has been refracted
by the prism. In practice
it is repeat the
well to
measurements both of a and
d several times and to
go through all the opera-
tions of shifting the posi-
tions of the prism and
telescope. If white light is
used for illumination the
refracted ray seen at T"
f
will appear as a narrow

spectrum. To make an
exact determination a mono-
chromatic light (sodium light
is best) must be employed.
2. The Method of Min-
Determination of Index of Refraction imum Deviation. - - This is
Method of Perpendicular Incidence the method that is most
generally employed for determining indices of refraction by the use of
prisms. It depends upon
the principle that when a
525
beam of light,abed, Fig.
525, traverses a prism in such
a way that the angles i and i'
are equal, the beam suffers
the minimum amount of
deviation in its path of any
possible course through the
prism. This fact may be
proven empirically by experi-
mentation on the refrac-
tometer. In order to make
a determination, the angle a
of the prism is first measured
on the goniometer. The
angle of the prism with this
method may be considerably larger than when the method of perpendicular
incidence is used.
the position
in
& .
_, W110
526
telescope undamped and moved until
the refracted ray appears in it.
Now,
turn the central post with the
prism
on it toward the left and follow the
signal
with the telescope. The position of
minimum deviation is soon reached,
when, on turning the prism, the signal
seems to remain stationary for a moment
and then moves away to the right,
no matter in which direction the prism is
turned. A little practice is needed
to determine exactly the position of min-
imum deviation and the measurement
should be made in a monochromatic
light. When the telescope is properly
placed at this point the graduated circle
is clamped and the telescope turned
until the direct signal from the collimator
tube is fixed upon the vertical cross-
hair. The angle between these two
positions of the telescope is the same as
the angle of deviation, or 5. The for-
mula for making the necessary calcu-
lation from these measurements follows
very simply from a comparison of
Figs. 525 and 523. It may be imagined that Fig. 525 is
composed of two
prisms like Fig. 523 placed back to back. This results in doubling the angles
a and 5 so that the formula now becomes
sn 8)
sn -J-a
The Method of Total Reflection.

3. This method is based upon the prin-
ciple that light cannot always pass from an optically dense into an optically
rarer medium but at a certain angle, known as the critical
angle, will suffer
total reflection. The critical angle for any substance varies with the index of
refraction of that substance as explained in Art. 323. Consequently if we
can measure this critical angle we can calculate the index of refraction of the
substance. This method is particularly useful because the measurement
can be made upon a single polished surface, which may be quite small in area.
This measurement is made by means of an instrument, known as the Total
Refractometer, a description of which will be found in Art. 352. The essential
feature of this instrument is a hemisphere of glass with a known, high index
of refraction. The upper surface of the hemisphere is plane and should be
accurately adjusted in a horizontal position. The mineral to be tested may
be of any shape provided that some surface upon it has been ground plane
and polished. A drop of some liquid of high index of refraction is placed be-
tween the surface of the glass hemisphere and the flat surface of the mineral.
This serves to unite the two substances and dispel the thin layer of air that
would otherwise separate them. The liquid should have an index of refraction
intermediate between that of the glass and that of the mineral. As the liquid
lies between the two substances in the form of a thin film with parallel surfaces
whatever optical effect it has upon the light as it enters will be balanced by
the opposite effect as the light leaves the film. So the optical effect of the
liquid can be ignored. Fig. 527 represents a cross section of such a hemi-
sphere with a mineral plate resting upon it. Let it be now supposed that by
means of a mirror a beam of monochromatic light is thrown upon the apparatus
from the direction of X. Rays 1 and 2 will suffer partial refraction at the
527 dividing plane between the
glass and the mineral to rays
1' and 2' and also partial
reflection to rays 1" and 2".
Ray 3 strikes the mineral at
the critical angle for the
combination of the glass and
mineral and will in part be
refracted at a 90 angle and
emerge as ray 3', just grazing
the surface of the hemisphere.
The greater part of ray 3 will
however be reflected as ray 3".
Beyond this point, all the light
must be totally reflected, thus
4 to 4". If the optical
axis of a telescope is now
Determination of Index of Refraction
Method of Total Reflection, I. brought to the direction 3",
what appears to be a marked
shadow will appear in the field of vision. One side will be illuminated by the
total reflection of all rays beyond those of the critical
angle while the other
side will be distinctly darker since
528
here a considerable amount of
the light passed out into the
mineral. The angle between the
position of the shadow and the
normal to the surface of the
hemisphere, /*, Fig. 527, will be
the critical angle for the combina-
tion of glass and mineral. As the
index of refraction of the glass is
known it is possible to calculate
what the index of refraction of the
mineral must be. If the mineral
plate is
transparent enough so
that light may pass
through
it into the glass hemisphere
another method of illumination
may be used, as illustrated m Determination of Index of Refraction
Fig. 528. The mirror Method of Total Reflection, II.
reflecting
is so arranged that the
light comes from the direction X. Rays 1 and 2 will
be refracted to 1' and 2' and 3 which
just grazes the surface to 3'. Beyond
this point no light will
pass into the hemisphere and a telescope placed with
its axis the line 3' will show in its field a dark shadow.
along The contrast
between the light and dark portions of the field, by this method of illumination,
is much
stronger than by the one first described. The telescope is so placed
that the line of the shadow exactly divides the angle between the diagonal
cross-hairs of the eyepiece. The telescope is attached to a graduated circle
from which the angle M can be directly read. With each of these instruments
comes ordinarily a table giving the indices of refraction corresponding to the
different possible values of ju. This table can easily be converted into a curve
plotted on co-ordinate paper in such a way that the index of refraction for a
particular angle can be read at a glance. Further, the calculation can be made
having given the index of refraction of the glass of the hemisphere and the
value of for a special mineral plate.
fji Let n' equal the index of refraction of
the glass of the hemisphere and // the critical angle measured; then the index
of refraction of the mineral, n, = sin ju X n'.*
328. Dispersion. Thus far the change in direction which light suffers in
reflection and refraction has alone been considered. It is further true that
the amount of refraction differs for light of different wave-lengths, being
greater for blue than for red. In consequence of this fact, if ordinary light be
passed through a prism, as in Fig. 525, it will not only be refracted, but it will
also suffer dispersion or be separated into its component colors, thus forming
the prismatic spectrum.
This variation for the different colors depends directly upon their wave-
lengths; the red waves are longer, their transverse vibrations are slower, and
it may be shown to follow from this that they suffer less change of velocity
on entering the new medium than the violet Waves, which are shorter and
whose velocity of transverse vibration is greater. Hence the refractive index
for a given substance is greater for blue than for red light. The following
are values of the refractive indices for diamond determined by Schrauf :
2-40845 red (lithium flame).

2*41723 yellow (sodium flame).
2*42549 green (thallium flame).
329. Spectroscope. The instrument most commonly used for the
analysis of the light by dispersion is familiar to all as the spectroscope. There
-
* From the ordinary law for the index of re-
The derivation of this formula follows.
n - But when the critical angle h
reached
n = -- i =
mineral
90 and sin i 1.
or velocity of light
=
velocity of light in
in the same svay for the highly refracting glass
-,
Therefore we may
in mineral
and have
substitute
= -
n Further, we may derive
.
of the hemisphere whose refractive index,
n 1
,
is known, the expression, velocity of light in glass
= .
Further, we have in the case
of the light attempting to pass from the glass (optically denser medium) into the mineral
the expression,
velocity of light in mineral _ sin 90
velocity of light in glass sin /x (measured on instrument).
By substituting this becomes
n _ sin 90 _ 1
1 sin n sin n
n'
or -=
sin M n
or n = sin /n X '
222 PHYSTCAL MINERALOGY
are a number of varieties of spectroscopes made, the simplest of which consists

of a glass prism mounted at the center of the instrument with two tubes
pointing away from it. The light from the given source
is received through
a narrow slit in the end of one tube and made to fall as a plane-wave (that is,
" The
as a pencil of parallel rays ") upon one surface of a prism at the center.
light is dispersed by its passage through
the prism and the spectrum produced
is viewed through a suitable telescope at the end of the second tube.
If the light from an incandescent solid which is ''white hot" (Art. 314)
is viewed through the spectroscope, the complete band of colors of the
spectrum is seen from the red through the orange, yellow, green, blue, to the
If, however, the light from an
violet. incandescent vapor is examined, it is
found to give a spectrum consisting of bright lines (or bands) only, and these
in a definite position characteristic of it as the yellow line (double line) of
sodium vapor; the more complex series of lines and bands, red, yellow, and
green, characteristic of barium; the multitude of bright lines due to iron
vapor (in the intensely hot electric arc), and so on.
330. Absorption. Of the light incident upon the surface of a new
medium, not only is part reflected (Art. 316) and part transmitted and re-
fracted (Art. 317), but, in general, part is also absorbed at the surface and part
also during the transmission. Physically expressed, absorption in this case
means the transformation of the ether-waves into sensible heat, that is, into
the motion of the molecules of the body itself.
The color of a body gives an evidence of this absorption. Thus a sheet of
red glass appears red to the eye by transmitted light, because in the trans-
mission of the light-waves through it, it absorbs all except those which to-
gether produce the effect of red. For the same reason a piece of jasper
appears red by reflected light, because it absorbs part of the light-waves at the
surface, or, in other words, it reflects only those which together give the
effect of this particularshade of red.
Absorption in general is selective absorption; that is, a given body absorbs
particular parts of the total radiation, or, more definitely, waves of a definite
wave-length only. Thus, if transparent pieces of glass of different colors are
held in succession in the path of the white light which is passing into the
spectroscope, the spectrum viewed will be that due to the selective absorption
of the substance in question. A layer of blood absorbs certain parts of the
light so that its spectrum consists of a series of absorption bands. Certain
rare substances, as the salts of didymium, etc., have the property of selective
absorption in a high degree. In consequence of this, a section of a mineral
containing them often gives a characteristic absorption spectrum.
This latter property may be made use of in testing certain minerals, more
especially those that contain the rare earths or uranium. These give char-
acteristic absorption bands in the spectrum. They may be tested by passing
a strong white light through a thin section of the mineral and observing the
resulting spectrum by means of a direct vision spectroscope. Often a better
result will be obtained by illuminating the surface of the mineral and testing
the reflected light for absorption bands. The light will have sufficiently
penetrated the mineral before reflection to have had some of it absorbed.
These tests can be made best by some sort of a microspectroscope, which
will give a clear spectrum superimposed upon a scale of wave-lengths.*
*'
For details of this method of testing minerals see Wherry. Smithsonian Misc. Coll..
66, No. 5, 1915.
The dark lines of the solar spectrum, of which the so-called Fraunhofer
lines are the most prominent, are due to the selective absorption exerted by
the solar atmosphere upon the waves emitted by the much hotter incandescent
mass of the sun.
331. Diffraction. When monochromatic light is made to pass through
a narrow slit, or by the sharp edge of an opaque body, it suffers diffraction, and
there arise, as may be observed upon an appropriately placed screen, a series
of dark and light bands, growing fainter on the outer limits. Their presence
is explained (see Arts. 335, 336) as due to the
interference, or mutual reaction,
of the adjoining systems of waves of light, that is, the initial light-waves,
and further, those which have their origin at the edge or sides of the slit in
question. It is essential that the opening in the slit should be small as com-
pared with the wave-length of the light. If ordinary light is employed,
the phenomena are the same, and for the same causes, except that the bands
are successive colored spectra.
Diffraction spectra, explained on the principles alluded to, are obtained from diffraction
gratings. These gratings consist of a series of extremely fine parallel lines (say, 15,000 or
20,000 to an inch) ruled with great regularity upon glass, or upon a polished surface of
speculum metal. The glass grating is used with transmitted, and the speculum grating
with reflected, light; the Rowland grating of the latter kind has a concave surface. Each
grating gives a number of spectra, of the first, second, third order, etc. These spectra
have the advantage, as compared with those given by prisms, that the dispersion of the
different colors is strictly proportional to the wave-length.
332. Double Refraction. As implied in Art. 320, all crystallized sub-

stances be divided into two principal optical classes, viz. isotropic, in
may :
which light has the same velocity no matter what the direction of its propaga-
tion, and anisotropic, in which the velocity of light in general varies with the
direction of propagation. The anisotropic class is further divided into
uniaxial, which includes crystals of the tetragonal and hexagonal systems, and
biaxial, which includes crystals of the orthorhombic, monoclinic, and triclinic
systems. The characters of these various optical classes will be explained
in detail further on.
In the discussion of Art. 317, applying to isotropic media, it was shown that
light-waves passing from one medium into another, which is also isotropic,
suffer simply a change in wave-front in consequence of their change in velocity.
In anisotropic media, however, which include all crystals but those of the
isometric system, there are, in general, two wave-systems propagated with
different velocities and only in certain limited cases is it true that the light-
ray is normal to the wave-front. This subject cannot be adequately explained
until the optical properties of these media are fully discussed, but it must be
alluded to here since it serves to explain the familiar fact
that, while with glass, for example, there is only one
refracted ray, many other substances give two refracted rn
rays, or, in other words, show double refraction. I
The most familiar example of this property is fur- /
nished by the mineral calcite, also called on account

of this property "doubly-refracting spar." If mnop
(Fig. 529) be a cleavage piece of calcite,

and a ray of
be
light meets it at b, it will, in passing through,
divided into two rays, be, bd. For this reason, a dark
spot or a line seen through a piece of
calcite ordinarily appears
double. As implied above, the same property is enjoyed by all crystallized
minerals, except those of the isometric system. The wide separation of the
two refracted rays by calcite, which makes the phenomenon so striking, is a
consequence of the large difference in the values of its indices of refraction; in
other words, as technically expressed, it is due to the strength of its double
refraction, or its birefringence.
333. Double refraction also takes place in the anisotropic media just
mentioned, in the majority of cases, even when the incident light is perpen-
dicular to the surface. If the medium belongs to the uniaxial class (see p. 253,
et seq.), one of the rays always retains its initial direction normal to the sur-
face; but the other, except in certain special cases, is more or less deviated
from it. With a biaxial substance, further, both rays are usually refracted and
bent from their original direction. In the case of both uniaxial and biaxial
media, however, it is still true that the normal to the wave-front remains unre-
fracted with perpendicular incidence.
334. Interference of Waves in General. The subject of 'the inter-
ference of light-waves, alluded to in Art. 331, requires detailed discussion. It
is one of great importance, since it serves to explain many common and beauti-
ful phenomena in the optical study of crystals.
Referring again to the water-waves spoken of in Art. 308, it is easily
understood that when two wave-systems, going out, for example, from two
centers of disturbance near one another, come together, if at a given point
they meet in the same phase (as crest to crest), the result is to give the particle
in question a double amplitude of motion. On the other hand, if at any point
the two wave-systems come together in opposite phases, that is, half a wave-
length apart, the crest of one corresponding to the trough of the other, they
interfere and the amplitude of motion is zero. Under certain conditions,
therefore, two sets of waves may unite to form waves of double amplitude; on
the other hand, they may mutually interfere and destroy each other. Obvi-
ously an indefinite number of intermediate cases lie between these extremes.
What is true of the waves mentioned is true also of sound-waves and of wave-
motion in general. A very simple case of interference was spoken of in con-
nection with the discussion of the waves carried by a long rope (Art. 310).
335. Interference of Light-waves. Interference phenomena can be
most satisfactorily studied in the case of light-waves. The extreme cases are
as follows: If two waves of like length and intensity, and propagated in the
same direction, meet in the same phase, they unite to form a wave of double
intensity (double amplitude). This, as stated in Art. 311, will cause an
increase in the intensity of the light. If, however, the waves differ in phase
by half a wave-length, or an odd multiple of this, they interfere and extinguish
each other and no light results. For other relations of phase they are also
said to interfere, forming a new resultant wave, differing in amplitude from
each of the component waves. In the above cases monochromatic light- waves
were assumed (that is, those of like length). If ordinary white light is used
interference for certain wave-lengths may result with the consequent sub-
traction of the corresponding color from the white light and so give rise to
various spectrum colors.
336. Illustrations of Interference. A simple illustration is afforded by
the bright colors of very thin films or plates, as a film of oil on water, a soap-
bubble, and like cases,. To understand these, it is only necessary to remember
that the incident light-waves are reflected in part from the upper and in part
from the lower surface of the film or plate. The rays that are reflected from
the under surface of the very thin film (see Fig. 530) having traveled a greater
distance and with a different velocity will, when they unite with those
rays
reflected from the upper surface, show in
general a different phase. For some partic-
ular wave-length of light this difference is
likely to be exactly a half wave-length or
some odd multiple of this amount and so the
corresponding color will be eliminated
(assuming that ordinary white light is being
used) and its complementary color will be
seen. It is to be noted that the phenom-
ena of interference by reflection are some-
what complicated by the fact that there is
a reversal of phase (that is, a loss of
half a wave-length) at the surface that
separates the medium of greater optical density from the rarer one.
Hence the actual relation in phase of the two reflected rays, as AC, BD (sup-
posing them of the same wave-length) is that determined by the retardation.
due to the greater length of path trav-
531
ersed by BD, together with the loss of a
A half wave-length due to the reversal
of phase spoken of. As shown in the
figure, there are also two transmitted waves which also interfere in like manner.
A plano-convex lens of long curvature, resting on a plane glass surface
(Fig. 531), and hence separated from it, except at the center, by a film of air
of varying thickness, gives by reflected monochromatic light a dark center and
about this a series of light and dark rings, called Newton's rings. The dark
center is due to the interference of the incident and reflected waves, the
later half a wave-length behind the former. The light rings correspond
to the distances where the two sets of reflected waves meet in the same
phase, that is (noting the explanation above) where the retardation of those
having the longer path is a half wave-length or an odd multiple of this (JX,
fX, fX, etc.). Similarly the dark rings fall between these and correspond to
the points where the two waves meet in opposite phase, the retardation being
a wave-length or an even multiple of this. The rings are closer together with
blue than with red because of the smaller wave-length of blue light. In each
of the cases described the ring is properly the intersection on the plane surface
of the cone of rays of like retardation.
In ordinary white light we get, instead of the alternate light and dark rings
described above, a series of colored bands. If the illumination was originally
by sodium light the position of the dark rings indicates where light for that
particular wave-length has been extinguished through interference. When
white light is used the conditions in respect to its component having the
yellow sodium-light wave-length have not changed and this light will still be
eliminated at the same points, but now, instead of dark rings, we get rings having
the complementary color blue. If our original illumination was by means of
a red light the dark rings would have had different positions from those pro-
duced in sodium light. And again when white light is used red light is elim-
inated at those points and its complementary color shows. In this way we
obtain a series of colored rings, each showing the successive colors of the
spectrum. The series of the spectrum colors are repeated a number of times
due to successive interferences produced by differences of phase of J, 1J, 2|,

etc., wave-lengths. The different series are distinguished as of the first,
second, third, etc., order; for a given color, as red, may be repeated a number
of times. The interference rings for different colored lights are not evenly
spaced, the rings shown in blue light being, for instance, closer together than
for red. Consequently after three or four repetitions of the spectrum bands
the different interference rings begin to overlap one another and the resulting
colors become fainter and less pure. Ultimately this overlapping becomes
so general that the effect of color is lost and white light, the so-called white of
the higher orders, is shown.
Another most satisfactory illustration of the interference of light-waves is given by
means of the diffraction gratings spoken of in Art. 331.
Other cases of the composition of two systems of light-waves will be con-
sidered after some remarks on polarized light.
337. Polarization and Polarized Light. Ordinary light is propagated
by transverse vibrations of the ether which may take place in any direction as
long as it is at right angles to the line of propagation. The direction of vibra-
tion is constantly changing and the resulting disturbance of the ether is a
complex one. A ray of ordinary light will be symmetrical, therefore, only to
the line of its propagation.
Plane-polarized light, on the other hand, as stated briefly in Art. 311, is
propagated by ether-vibrations which take place in one plane only. The
change by which ordinary light is converted into a polarized light is called
polarization, and the plane at right angles to the plane of transverse vibration
is called the plane of polarization*
Polarization may be accomplished (1) by reflection and by single refrac-
tion, and (2) by double refraction.
338. Polarization by Reflection and Single Refraction. In general,
light which hassuffered reflection
532
from a surface like that of polished
glass is more or less completely po-
larized; that is, the reflected waves
are propagated by vibrations to a
large extent limited to a single plane,
viz., (asassumed) the plane normal
to the plane of incidence, which last
is hence the plane of polarization.
Furthermore, in this case, the light
transmitted and refracted by the
reflecting medium is also in like
manner partially polarized; that is,
the vibrations are more or less limited
to a single plane, in this case a plane at
right angles to the former and hence
coinciding with the plane of incidence.
For instance, in Fig. 532, let a-b rep-
resent an incident light ray in which
the vibrations are taking place in all possible transverse directions as
represented
*
> It is necessary to keep clear the distinction between the
plane of polarization and the
plane in which the vibrations take place. All ambiguity is avoided by speaking uniformly
of the vibration-plane of the light.
by the arrows, x-x, y-y, and z-z. When this ray strikes the polished surface
at 6 light with vibrations parallel to x-x will be reflected
along b-c and
other vibrations near to x-x in direction will be shifted to this direction so
that the reflected ray will be
largely polarized. In a similar
manner the light having z-
vibrations will enter the
transparent substance as the
refracted ray b-d and other
vibrations will be shifted to
this direction so that the re-
fracted ray is also largely
polarized and in a plane at right
angles to that of the reflected
ray. Light reflected from a
polished and transparent sur-
face is not Brewster's Law
completely
polarized but there is an angle of incidence for every substance
at which the amount of polarization will be at its maximum. This will hap-
pen, as illustrated in Fig. 533, when the angle between the reflected and
refracted rays AB and AC
equals 90. It is evident from a consideration of
the figure that the angle r is the complement of i\ hence the formula ? - = n
becomes in this case
sin i
:
= tan i = n.
cos ^
This law, established by Brewster, may be stated as follows :
The angle of incidence for maximum polarization is that angle whose tangent
is the index of refraction of-the reflecting substance. For crown glass this angle
is about 57 (see Fig. 533) .If light suffers repeated reflections from a series
of thin glass plates, the polarization is more complete, though its intensity is
weakened. Metallic surfaces polarize the light very slightly.
339. Polarization by Double Refraction. When light in passing
through a crystalline medium is doubly refracted (Art. 332) or divided into
two sets of waves, it is always true that both are completely polarized and in
planes at right angles to each other. This subject can only be satisfactorily
explained after a full discussion of the properties of anisotropic crystalline
media, but it. may be alluded to here since this principle gives the most satis-
factory method of obtaining polarized light. For this end it is necessary that
one of the two wave-systems should be extinguished, so that only that one
due to a single set of vibrations is transmitted. This is accomplished by
natural absorption in the case of tourmaline plates and by artificial means in
the nicol prisms of calcite.
340. Polarized Light by Absorption. Light passing through a
strongly colored but transparent thin section of a tourmaline crystal the
section being cut parallel to the vertical crystallographic axis will be almost
completely polarized. This can be easily demonstrated in the following way.

Select a polished floor surface, or a table top and stand in such a position that
light from a window is reflected from the polished wood to the eye. Look at
this reflected light through the tourmaline section, holding it first with the
direction 'of the c crystal axis in a horizontal position and then turning the
section until the c axis becomes vertical. The light passing into the tour-
maline section is in considerable part polarized through its reflection from
the wood surface and possesses a horizontal vibration direction. It will be
noted that when the c axis of the tourmaline is horizontal the section readily
transmits light but when this axis is vertical the section becomes practically
opaque. crystal structure of the tourmaline is such that light entering
The
it is (i.e., it is doubly refracted), one of which has its
broken up into two rays
vibrations parallel to the c axis, while the vibrations of the other lie in the
plane of the horizontal crystal axes. From the foregoing experiment it is
obvious that the light vibrating parallel to the c axis is readily transmitted by
the crystal but that the other ray, vibrating in the horizontal axial plane, is
almost completely absorbed. Under these conditions it is clear that the trans-
mitted light belongs almost wholly to one ray, the vibrations of which take
place in a single direction. In other words, the light transmitted by such a
tourmaline section is polarized.
If two such sections of tourmaline are available it is instructive to make
the following experiment with them. Place them together, first with their
c axes parallel to each other, and then turn one section upon the other until
these axes are at right angles to each other. In the first case, the light comes
through the sections because the vibration planes of the transmitted rays in
the two sections are parallel to each other. In the second case, all light is
cut off because now these two vibration planes are at right angles to each
other, the light that did get through the first section being wholly absorbed
in the second.
341. Polarized Light by Double Refraction. Calcite, as already stated
in Art. 332, possesses in an unusual degree the power to doubly refract light.
If we take a cleavage block of clear calcite (Iceland spar) and look at an image
through it, such as a dot or line drawn on a piece of paper, the image will appear
double. If we take a card and make in it a pinhole, place the card upon
one face of a cleavage rhombohedron and, looking through the calcite, hold
it up against a source of light, we will observe two bright dots. Now if we
look in the same way at the light reflected from a polished wooden surface,
as described in the preceding article, we will find that when a line bisecting
the acute angles of the rhombic face of the cleavage block is horizontal one of
these images is bright while the other is almost invisible. If we then turn
the block so that the line bisecting the obtuse angles of the rhombic face is
horizontal the first image will fade while the second becomes bright. Remem-
bering that the light reflected from the polished wooden surface is largely
polarized with a horizontal vibration direction, it becomes evident from this
experiment that the two rays into which the light is broken up in passing
through the calcite are polarized and that their planes of vibration are at
right angles to each other and respectively bisect the angles of the rhombic
face of the cleavage block. As the double refraction of calcite is strong, it
follows that the indices of refraction of the two rays show considerable differ-
ences. This fact is taken advantage of in constructing a prism from calcite
in such a way as to wholly eliminate one of these
rays
and so, as only the other
ray can come through the prism, effectively polarizing the light that emerges.
The prism referred to above is called the Nicol Prism or simply the nicol.
A full explanation of the nicol cannot be made at this time, as there would be
required a knowledge of the optical properties of hexagonal crystals, but a
description may be given enabling one to understand its construction and

uses. In Fig. 534 is represented a cleavage rhombohedron of calcite with its
edges vertical. Let d represent a point of light underneath the rhombo-
hedron. Light coming from d will be broken into two rays whose paths
through the rhombohedron are shown 535
by the lines o and e. As shown above,
these two rays are polarized, with
vibration directions as indicated .by
the double arrows in the top view in
Fig. 534. In the construction of a
nicol, the top and bottom surfaces of
such a cleavage rhombohedron are
ground and polished so that they
make angles of 68 with the vertical
edges. Then the block is cut in two
along the diagonal a-/, as shown in
Fig. 535. These two surfaces, after
being polished, are cemented together
by means of a thin layer of Canada
balsam. Let us assume that a ray of
light enters the prism from below, as
shown in Fig. 535. It is broken up
into the rays o and e. The ray o
travels with the slower velocity, has
therefo're the higher index of refraction,
and shows a greater deviation from
the original path. The Canada balsam Nico1 Prism
has a lower index of refraction than ray a, which, therefore, when it strikes the
layer of balsam, is attempting to pass from an optically dense into a rarer
medium. The construction of the prism is such that this ray meets the layer of
balsam at an angle greater than the critical angle for. this optical combination
and suffers therefore total reflection toward the side of the prism, and will
be absorbed by whatever fastening holds the nicol. The second ray e
passes through the prism with almost no deviation from its original course.
Its index of refraction and that of the Canada balsam are nearly the same,
hence the ray suffers almost no deflection at this point and passes out of the
upper face of the prism. The light, therefore, that emerges from a nicol
belongs wholly to one ray and is all vibrating parallel to the shorter diagonal
of the rhombic end surface. It should be noted, however, that some prisms
are made in a different way and that the above statement concerning the
plane of vibration of the light emerging from the prism may not always hold
true. It is always wise to test the plane of vibration of a nicol by looking
through it at the floor or a table top as previously described. The prism will
show bright when its plane of vibration is horizontal, thus corresponding to
the plane of vibration of the reflected light.
342. Polariscope. Polarizer. Analyzer. The combination of two
nicols, or other polarizing contrivances, between which transparent mineral
sections may be examined in polarized light is called, in general, a polariscope;
the common forms of which are described later. In any polariscope the lower
prism, or other contrivance, which polarizes the light given from the outside
source is called the polarizer; the upper prism is the analyser. If these prisms
have their vibration-planes at right angles to each other, they are said to be
crossed; the incident light polarized by the polarizer will then be extinguished
by the analyzer; briefly, under these conditions it is said to suffer extinction.
343. Interference of Plane-polarized Waves. Interference Colors.
When sections of doubly refracting minerals are examined in polarized light
certain interference effects are commonly obtained that are of great impor-
tance. As shown in Art. 341, calcite when it doubly refracts light also polarizes
the two rays and in planes that are at right angles to each other. In general,
this is true of sections of doubly refracting minerals. Consider, then, what
takes place when a general section of a doubly refracting mineral is placed in
a polariscope between the polarizer and analyzer the planes of vibration of
which are at right angles to each other. In Fig. 536 let the rectangular out-
line represent such a section. The double arrows marked o and e show the
two possible directions of vibration of light in the section. The direction
P-P' represents the plane of vibration of light which emerges from the polar-
izer below and A-A' shows the direction in which light must vibrate when it
emerges from the analyzer above. In the first case to be considered the
directions o and e are taken as parallel to P-P' and A-A' respectively. The
light that enters the section from below must all vibrate parallel to the direc-
tion P-P'. It enters the mineral section and must vibrate there as the ray
labeled o. There will be no ray in the mineral vibrating parallel to the direc-
tion e, as a vibration parallel to o cannot be resolved into another at right
angles to it. The light will leave the section, therefore, still vibrating parallel
to P-P' and enter the analyzer above. It will, however, be entirely reflected
in the analyzer at the'layer of balsam since only light vibrating parallel to A-A',
which is at right angles to P-P', can emerge from the analyzer. Consequently,
when such a section has its planes of vibration parallel to those of the polar-
izer and analyzer, the section will appear dark. The same reasoning holds
true when the section is turned to a position at 90 from the first. Con-
sequently with such a section there are four positions at 90 to each other
in which it appears dark during its complete rotation upon the stage of the
polariscope. At such positions the section, is said to be extinguished.
636 537 538
A'
-P' P
Next consider what happens when the vibration directions of the section
are at oblique angles to those of the polarizer and In Fig. 537
analyzer.
let o and e represent the directions of vibration in a section which makes
some
oblique angle. with the directions P-P' and A-A'. In Fig. 538A let the line
P-P' represent the direction and amplitude of the vibration of the enter-
light
ing the mineral section having come through the polarizer below. The light
must vibrate in the mineral in directions parallel to o and e, Fig. 537. The
vibration P-P' will therefore be resolved into two vibrations at
right angles
to each other which will be parallel respectively to o and e. In Fig. 538A the
lines o and e representing the direction and amplitudes of such vibrations are
found by the application of the principle of the parallelogram of forces. The
two rays emerge from the mineral section vibrating in these two planes and
enter the analyzer above. Since the planes of vibration in the analyzer are
parallel to A-A' and P-P' these two rays o and e will resolve each into two
new rays which will vibrate now parallel to A-A' and P-P'. The two rays
labeled P and P' in Fig. 5385 will be absorbed by the analyzer but the rays
marked A and A' will emerge and meet the eye. The section in this position,
therefore, will be illuminated. Consequently the section will be illuminated
in all possible positions in which the directions of vibration of the light in the
mineral make inclined angles with the directions of vibration of the polarizer
and analyzer. It is easy to prove that this illumination will be at its maxi-
mum when the angle between the directions o and e and A-A' and P-P' is
45. In addition to being illuminated, the section, if thin, will also be colored.
This interference color, as it is called, of mineral sections when examined in
a polariscope, now needs explanation.
The amount of refraction which any ray of light suffers on entering a
mineral depends upon two things, namely, the angle of incidence at which the
light enters and the index of refraction of the mineral. In the case of a doubly
refracting mineral we have a light ray entering the section at a given angle of
incidence and then being broken up into two polarized rays which have differ-
ent angles of refraction and so travel different paths. Consequently the
indices of refraction for these rays must be different and from this it follows
that the two rays must have different velocities and will therefore emerge
from the mineral in different phases. Light waves having different phases
will in a greater or less degree interfere with each other and in case of light of
certain wave-lengths, i.e., light of some particular color, the interference may
lead to extinguishment of that particular wave-length. If one particular
color is subtracted in this way from white light the result will be to produce
the complementary color and under such conditions the section will no longer
be white but colored. The color of thin sections of minerals when seen under
the polariscope is known as their interference color. To develop this subject
further use will be made of an accessory of the microscope known as the
Quartz Wedge.
The Quartz Wedge consists simply of a very thin tapering wedge the faces
of Which are approximately parallel to the prism of a quartz crystal. It is
mounted on a narrow glass plate, Fig. 539, A. The plate is generally marked
with the letter Q (quartz) and with an arrow. If the wedge is cut, as is
usually the case, with its longer direction at right angles to the vertical axis
of a quartz crystal, the arrow is marked X (or a), which indicates that of the
two directions of vibration of light in the wedge the one which is parallel to
this direction is that of the ray which is propagated with greater velocity.
Some wedges are cut with their longer direction parallel to the vertical
axis of quartz, and the arrow in this case would be marked Z (or c), which
indicates that this is the direction of vibration of the slower ray. It is abso-
lutely essential that the optical orientation of the wedge be known.

The quartz wedge furnishes a prismatic section of varying thickness and
of known orientation and may be used to study the effects of polarized light
on plates (short sections of the wedge) of different thicknesses. Take the
simplest form of polariscope, a combination of polarizer and analyzer without
539
A
is the plane of the analyzer, and a quartz wedge is between them at such an
angle that the direction of the vertical crystal axis lies parallel to C-C'. If we
explain the action of light in the wedge in a purely mechanical way we may say,
let the amplitude of vibration of an ether particle before the light has entered
the wedge be represented in the figure by the line 0-p. The vibration may be
likened to that of a pendulum', swinging back and forth from p to p'. If the
impact, or disturbance, of an ether particle is communicated to the ether
particles of the quartz when it is at at the middle of an oscillation from
p to p', there will result two disturbances, one to r parallel to C-C' and the
other to s at right angles thereto. The amplitude of the vibrations repre-
sented by 0-r and 0-s are determined by the parallelogram of forces, as indi-
cated by the dotted lines in the figure.^ During the passage of these two rays
through the quartz the one whose vibrations are represented by s-s' travels
the faster and it is assumed that the thickness of the quartz wedge at the place
under consideration is such that, on emerging, this ray is just one wave-length
ahead of the one whose vibrations are parallel to r-r'. Now, when one ray is
exactly one wavelength ahead of another (it may be two, three or any exact
number of wavelengths) the conditions are such, that, at the middle of the
vibration, when an ether particle of the ray s-s' is just starting from to s,
an ether particle of the ray r-r' will be just starting from to r. Now con-
sider the effects produced by the simultaneous impacts in the directions to
s and to r upon the ether particles of the calcite constituting the analyzer.
A* vibration from s' to s acting at will displace the ether particles of the
calcite to a and a'. Likewise a vibration from r' to r acting at will displace
the ether particles to p and p'. Two of these resulting disturbances, namely
0-<j' and 0-p', are easily disposed of, for being in the plane P-P' their effects
cannot pass beyond the layer of Canada balsam in the nicol. The other dis-
turbances 0-ff and 0-p are both in the plane A-A' and can emerge from the
nicol, but since the ether particles at Oare acted upon simultaneously by forces
of equal magnitude acting in opposite directions no disturbance can take
place and under these conditions the section is dark. From the above it
540 641
P\
\
follows that, when a section of a doubly refracting mineral is observed be-

tween crossed nicols with its vibration planes making some oblique angle
with the vibration planes of the nicols, complete interference will take place
for some particular wave-length of light whenever the two polarized rays
corresponding to this color emerge from the section in the same phase.
It is well to consider next the effects that result when, with the planes of
vibration of the nicols crossed, light travels through such thicknesses of the
quartz wedge that one ray gains -J-,f or some other half wave-length over the
,
second ray. Let it be supposed, Fig. 541, that at 0, the middle of an oscilla-
tion from p to p', the impact is communicated to the ether particles of a
quartz section the vertical crystal axis of which lies parallel to the direction
CC r
. There will result two disturbances in the quartz, one from to r and
the other from to s. After traversing the section the phases of the two rays
differ by one half wave-length so that when the direction of the first oscilla-
f
tion is from to r, that of the other will be from to s The impulse 0-r
.
gives rise in the analyzer to two disturbances 0-p and 0-p'. The impulse
0-s' results in the two displacements O-a- and 0-a'. Of these disturbances
0-p' and 0-a' do not extend beyond the layer of Canada balsam of the analyzer,
while 0-p and 0-a, both of equal magnitude and vibrating in the plane A-A',
are additive and give rise to a disturbance and the sensation of light. Hence,
in the experiment with the quartz wedge in sodium light, there are areas of
light between the dark bands, Fig. 539, B.
An instructive experiment with the wedge should also be tried with
sodium light illumination but with the planes of vibration of the polari-
scope parallel to each other instead of crossed as in the previous cases.
If light traverses such a thickness of quartz that, on emerging, one ray
has gained one half of a wave-length over the other the conditions up to
the time the vibrations enter the analyzer will be the same as in the
previous case. The vibrations, however, which can now pass through
the analyzer result, Fig. 542, from the disturbances 0-p' and 0-a', and these
acting on an ether particle in opposite directions but with unequal force would
produce a disturbance in the direction 0-p' and, therefore, give rise to the
sensation of light. A wedge with the direction of the vertical crystal axis
about parallel to C-C' will appear yellow throughout its entire length. This
will not be the case, however, if the wedge is turned so that the vertical axis
542 543
makes an angle of 45 with the plane of polarization, Fig. 543, for then the
upon an ether particle at
forces acting are 0-p' and 0-a, which, being equal
and in opposite directions, will neutralize each other and
therefore will not
produce any sensation of light. A wedge in the 45
position will therefore
show a series of dark bands, the first,
starting from the thin end of the wedge,
being where one ray has gained J wave-length, the second where it has
gained
wave-lengths, etc., over the second ray. In Fig. 539, B, the
j positions of the
bands in this experiment are indicated
by the crosses marked on the strip of
paper pasted upon one side of the quartz wedge. The lines and crosses on
this paper strip indicating
gains of whole and one half wave-lengths for yellow
light may now serve as starting points for further considerations.
For the next experiment use a
microscope with crossed nicols, a number 3 or
4 objective, and illuminate with
ordinary light; place the wedge in the 45
position and focus on that part of it opposite the first line drawn on the
paper
strip The field will show at its center a blue color, about at the
point where
it is beginning to
merge into red. A moment's consideration will indicate
what this color really is. It is a mixture of all colors of the
spectrum except
yellow. That this is the case may be proved by analyzing the blue
by means
of a small direct-vision This will show a spectrum through
spectroscope.
which runs a dark band between the red and
green, that is, where the yellow
would normally appear. The blue of the wedge at this
point is therefore the
complement of yellow, which has been made to disappear by interference.
Next focus the microscope on the wedge opposite the second line. Here the
color will be nearly a sky blue, with
perhaps a tinge of green. Upon analysis
with the spectroscope again a dark band will be found in the
yellow, this time
due to interference brought about by a difference in phase of two
wave-lengths
for sodium light. Proceeding next to opposite the third line the color will
be found to be a light green, which on analysis shows a band where
yellow
should occur and a perceptible shortening of the spectrum, especially
by cut-
ting off the extreme blue and violet. Opposite the fourth line the color would
be a very pale green which upon analysis with the spectroscope would show
two dark bands, one in the yellow and another in the blue. The pale green
color is therefore due to a mixture of red, green, and violet.
If, in the original
experiment the wedge had been illuminated by a monochromatic blue light
it would have been found at the thicker end of the
wedge, where the fourth
band for yellow light was located, there would have been a fifth band for the
blue light. Consequently the interference color at this point of the wedge is
equivalent to white light from which both yellow and blue have been sub-
tracted. If a wedge of extra length was available for study it would have been
noted that opposite the eighth band for sodium light the color showing, when
the wedge is studied in the polarizing microscope, was white. This upon
analysis would show a spectrum crossed by bands in the red, yellow, green, and
blue. In other words, in traversing the thickness of the quartz at this point,
the faster ray has gained for red seven wave-lengths over the slower ray, for
yellow eight, for green nine, for blue ten. The white polarization effect
seen when looking at this point with the microscope is known as white of the
higher order. It is a mixture of the several primary colors of the spectrum,
some portions of all of which are present and combine to give the effect of white.
It is important to study carefully the polarization colors of the quartz
wedge under the microscope, using Fig. 544 as a guide. It will be noted that
the colors occur in general in the following order as the thickness of the quartz
increases violet, blue, green, yellow, orange, red.
: This sequence of colors is
repeated quite distinctly three times and then as the thicker end of the wedge
is approached the colors become fainter and not so clear. This series of
interference colors is divided into orders as indicated in Fig. 544. It is to be
544
Ll
i I!
Ai o&JS
(C fa
JJfg s 122
3. The crystallographic orientation of the section. This will be explained
later when the optical characters of the different crystal
systems are described
346. Determination of the Order of the Interference
Color of a Min-
eral Section. It is often important to determine to which order
(see last
paragraph of Art. 343) the interference color of a given section belongs. If,
as is often the case, the section has somewhere a
tapering wedge-like edge, the
successive bands of color shown there can be counted and the order of
the
color of the surface of the section determined. In other words the order of
the color can be told in the same way as
upon the quartz wedge itself. If
such an edge cannot be found the quartz wedge is used as described below.
Suppose a certain mineral section showed an interference color of orange-
red and it was desired to ascertain whether this color
belonged to the first or
second order. Under the microscope with crossed nicols find a
position of
extinction of the section and then turn it upon the
stage of the microscope
through an angle of 45. By doing this the vibration directions of the section
are brought into such a position that they make
angles of 45 with the vibra-
tion directions of the polarizer and analyzer. Then insert above the section
and below the analyzer a quartz wedge, the optical orientation of which is
known. A slot running through the microscope tube just above the objective
and making an angle of 45 to the cross-hairs is provided for this purpose.
Under these conditions there are two possibilities. Either the optical
orientation of the section and the quartz wedge agree; i.e., the X direction of
the section is parallel to the X direction of the wedge, or these two directions
are at right angles to each other. The effect of the introduction of the wedge
above the section will be either to increase or decrease the amount of double
refraction of the light due to the mineral section. If the double refraction is
increased, the optical effect will be as if the mineral section had been thickened
and in this case its interference color will rise in its order. On the other hand,
if the double refraction of the
light is decreased by the introduction of the
quartz wedge the effect will be as if the mineral section had been thinned and
the interference color will fall in its order. In the first case the red interfer-
ence color of the section would be changed as the wedge is pushed in, first to
blue and then to green. In the second case it would change to orange, then
to yellow and green. Arrange the section, therefore, so that upon the intro-
duction of the quartz wedge the interference color will fall in its order. Then
gradually continue to push in the wedge, noting the successive colors that
occur as the amount of the double refraction is decreased. Finally the point
will be reached where the thickness of the wedge will give practically the same
amount of double refraction as the mineral section. The two having oppo-
site optical orientations the result will be to eliminate all interference and a
gray color of the first order will result. When this condition arises the quartz
wedge is said to compensate the mineral. By noting the succession of colors
that occurs until this point is reached the order of the original color of the
section can be determined.
347. Determination of Strength of Birefringence. The birefringence,
or amount of double refraction, varies with different minerals. It is expressed
numerically by a figure that is the difference between the greatest and least
indices of refraction of a given mineral. In the case of calcite, for instance,
the index of refraction for one ray is 1'486 and for the other is T658. The
birefringence of calcite therefore equals 0'172. This is much higher than for
most minerals, the strength of the birefringence of quartz being only 0*0091.
An accurate estimation of the strength of the birefringence of a mineral is to

be made only by determining the greatest and least indices of refraction. An
approximate determination, however, can often be made in a thin section under
the microscope. The order of the interference color of a section, as stated in
Art. 345, varies with the thickness of the mineral, its crystallographic orienta-
tion and the strength of its birefringence. If the first two factors are known
the birefringence can be estimated by noting the interference color of the'
section. Fig. 545 will aid in this determination. The thickness of the sec-
tion is shown in the column at the left. The strength of the birefringence is
expressed along the top and right-hand side of the figure. Suppose that a
given section was 0*03 mm. in thickness and showed an orange-red interference
color of the first order. By following the diagonal line that crosses the hori-
zontal line marked 0*03 mm. at a point lying in the middle of the orange-red
of the first orderit will be seen that the birefringence of the mineral must be
about Q'015. This method of determining birefringence is most commonly

used in the case of minerals observed in rock sections. In the case of the best
rock sections the thickness of the section is usually about 0'03 to 0'04 mm.
The thickness of the section can also be judged from the interference color
shown by some known mineral, like quartz or feldspar, which is to be observed
in the section. As the strength of the birefringence of a mineral varies with
its crystallographic orientation it is necessary always to look over the rock
section and use in the observations that section of the mineral which shows the
highest order of interference color. The birefringence of a mineral is always
545
ill
* White of higher
O II i^jtf
, I order.
I! 3 /* .1^3122
ffl
s,i
.2o
|MfS -i
SS3 g "S .2 ll diii &-M
11 I,OP^P3O >o'w
.><= oo o He>^ o <A > o^^dtf'S^S o
0.06
0.045
0.05
0.050
0.055
0.04 0.060
0.065
| 0.070
0.03
I
\ .1 0.02 0.100
0.120
0.160
0.01 0.200
0.300
0.00
Determination of the Strength of Birefringence (after Pirsson and Robinson)
expressed as the maximum difference between the indices of refraction. Con-

sequently, with a uniform thickness, such as is obtained in a rock section, that
section of a mineral which shows the highest order of interference color most
nearly approaches the proper orientation for the maximum birefringence.
The order of the interference color of a given section is to be determined
by the method of compensation as explained in Art. 346. Special quartz
wedges are made with scales upon them giving the birefringence produced by
the varying thicknesses of the wedge. If such a wedge is available it is
only
necessary to note the birefringence corresponding to that thickness of the
quartz which produced compensation. This will obviously equal the bire-
fringence of the section being tested. For a detailed description of the various
wedges and compensators used for this purpose the reader must be referred
to more special text-books.*
348. Determination of the Relative Optical Character of the Extinc-
tion Directions of any Section of a Doubly Refracting Mineral. It fre-
quently becomes important to determine which of the two rays of light in a
doubly refracting mineral is being propagated with the greater or less velocity;
in other words, to determine which of the two directions of vibration corre-
sponds to the X and which to the Z direction. Place the given section under
the microscope with the nicols crossed. Find a position of extinction and then
turn the section through an arc of 45 so that its vibration directions make
that angle with the planes of vibration of the nicols. If the section in this
position shows a strong color or white of the higher order the quartz wedge is
used. The optical orientation of the wedge must be known, i.e., which are
its X and Z directions. The wedge is then pushed through the slot above the
objective lens, the thin end of the wedge being introduced first. The vibra-
tion directions of the wedge and the section will now coincide and the effect
of the gradual introduction of the wedge above the mineral will be to slowly
increase or decrease the birefringence due to the section. The result will
be to either raise or lower the order of the interference color obtained. If the
X directions of the wedge and the section coincide the effect will be additive
in character and the color will rise in its order. If the optical directions of
the two are opposed to each other the birefringence is decreased and the color
will fall. By noting which effect takes place the X and Z directions of the
section are determined.
In this use of the quartz wedge the following precaution must be observed.
If the section originally showed a color of the first order and the wedge was
introduced in the opposed position the effect would be to cause the color to fall
rapidly to gray of the first order. The optical effect of the quartz wedge would
thus quickly compensate that of the section. From this point on as the quartz
wedge is pushed further in, the optical effect of the wedge will more and more
preponderate over that of the section and the interference colors will now
appear in ascending order. Under these conditions, if the first effect of the
quartz wedge was overlooked, a wrong deduction would be made. It is
always best to repeat the test with the section rotated 90 from the first posi-
tion. The two results should be of opposite character and so serve to confirm
each other.
Frequently a thick section of a mineral will show a tapering edge somewhere
which will show bands of color. When the quartz wedge is introduced above
the section these color bands will move, either toward the center of the section,
*
See Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic Methods; Wright, The Methods of Petro-
graphic-Microscopic Research.
or go off toward the edge. When the color bands move up on the section it
means that the effect of the quartz wedge is such that a thicker part of the
section is now showing the same interference as a thinner part did originally.
In other words, the result is as if the section had been thinned. If this is
so, then the X and Z directions of the section and the wedge must be opposed
to each other. On the other hand, if the color bands move off the section it
means that a thinner part of the section is showing the same interference
effect that a thicker portion did originally. The introduction of the quartz
wedge has in effect thickened the section and therefore the similar optical
directions of the two coincide. This test is particularly useful for determin-
ing the X and Z directions of deeply colored minerals, as the natural color of
the mineral may, over the thicker portion of the section, completely mask
the interference color.
If a mineral section shows an interference color of white or gray of the first
order the sensitive tint will give better results than the quartz wedge. If the
similar optical directions of the section and the sensitive tint coincide the
effect will be to raise the color of the sensitive tint (red of the first order) to
blue. On the other hand, if the optical orientations of the two are opposed
the color will fall to yellow. This test can be made to advantage only when
the birefringent effect of the section is small enough to just raise or lower the
color of the sensitive tint respectively to blue or yellow.
\ 349. Circularly and Elliptically Polarized Light. In the preceding
articles the two interfering light-rays, after emerging from the second nicol,
were assumed to be polarized in the same plane; for them the resulting phe-
nomena as indicated are comparatively simple. If, however, two plane-
polarized rays propagated in the same direction have their vibration-directions
at right angles to each other, and if they differ one-quarter of a wave-length
(JX) in phase (assuming monochromatic light), then it may be shown that
the composition of these two systems results in a ray of circularly polarized
light. Briefly expressed, this is a ray that, looked at end-on, would seem to
be propagated by ether-vibrations taking place in circles about the line of
transmission. From the side, the onward motion would be like that of a
screw, and either right-handed or left-handed.
If, again, two light-rays meet as above described, with a difference of phase
differing from JX (but not equal to an even multiple of |X), then the resulting
composition gives rise to elliptically polarized light, that is, a light-ray propa-
gated by ether-motions taking place in ellipses.
The above results are obtained most simply by passing plane-polarized
light through a doubly refracting medium of the proper thickness (e.g., a mica
plate) which is placed with its vibration-planes inclined 45 to that of the
polarizer. If the thickness is such as to give a difference in phase of JX or an
odd multiple of this, the light which emerges is circularly polarized. If the
phase differs from \\ (but is not equal to |X or X), the emergent light is ellip-
tically polarized.
350. Rotation of Plane of Polarization. In the case of certain doubly
refracting crystallized media (as quartz), and also of certain solutions, (as of
sugar), it can be shown that the light is propagated by two sets of ether-
vibrations which take place, not in definite transverse planes as in plane-
polarized light but in circles; that is, each ray is circularly polarized, one
being right-handed, the other left-handed. Further, of these rays, one will
uniformly gain with reference to the other. The result is, that if a ray of
plane-polarized light fall upon such a medium (assuming the simplest case, as
of a section of quartz cut normal to the vertical crystal
axis), it is found that
the two rays circularly polarized within unite on emerging to a
plane-polar-
ized ray, but the plane of polarization has suffered an angular
change or rota-
tion, which may be either to the right (to one looking in the direction of the
ray), when the substance is said to be right-handed, or to the left, when it is
called left-handed.
This phenomenon is theoretically possible with all crystals of a given
system belonging to any of the classes of lower symmetry than the normal
class which show a plagiohedral development of the faces *; or, more
simply,
those in which the corresponding right and left (or + and ) typical forms
are enantiomorphous (pp. 71, 112), as noted in the chapter on crystallography.
In mineralogy, this subject is most important with the common species quartz,
of the rhombohedral-trapezohedral class, and a further discussion of it is
postponed to a later page (Art. 394).
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS AND METHODS

351. Measurement of Refractive Indices. Refractometer. For the
determination of the refractive indices of crystallized minerals various methods
are employed. The most accurate results, when suitable material is at hand,
may be obtained by the ordinary refractometer. This requires the observa-
tion of the angle of minimum deviation (5) of a light-ray on passing through a
prism of the given material, having a known angle (a}, and with its edge cut in
the proper direction. The measurements of a and 5 can be made with an
ordinary refractometer or with the horizontal goniometer described in Art.
231. For the latter instrument, the collimator is made stationary, being
fastened to a leg of the tripod support, but the observing telescope with the
verniers moves freely. Further, for this object the graduated circle is clamped,
and the screw attachments connected with the axis carrying the support, and
the vernier circle and observing telescope are loosened. Light from a mono-
chromatic source passes through an appropriate slit and an image of this is
thrown by the collimator upon the prism. With a doubly refracting substance
two images are yielded and the angle of minimum deviation must be measured
for each the proper direction for the edge of the prism in this case is discussed
;
later. When a and 5 are known the formula in Art. 327 is used.
352. Total Refractometer. The principle of total reflection (Art. 323)
may also be made use of to determine the refractive index. No prism is re-
quired, but only a small fragment having a single polished surface; this may
have any direction with an isometric crystal, but in other cases must have a
definite orientation, as described later. A number of different instruments
have been devised by means of which indices of refraction may be measured
by the use of total reflection. A type widely used at present is represented
in Fig. 546. This particular instrument was made by Leiss. It consists of a
hemisphere of glass (H) having a high refractive index which is mounted upon
a glass post through which light may be reflected from the mirror Sp. The
*
Of the thirty-two possible classes among crystals, the following eleven may be char-
acterized by circular polarization: Class 4, p. 71; 5, p. 72; 11 and 12, p. 89; 17, p. 102;
147.
22, p. 112; 23 and 24, p. 114; 27, p. 128; 29, p. 138; 32, p.
tube P contains a nicol prism so that when a thin section of a mineral is placed
upon the plane surface of the hemisphere it is possible to obtain its optical
orientation in the same manner as with the polarizing microscope. The
546
polished mineral sur-
face is placed upon
the plane surface of
H with a film of
some high refract-
ing oil between them.
Then a beam of
light from some
source of illumination,
usually a mono-
chromatic light, is
reflected by means
of the mirror Bl in
such a way as to
produce a total reflec-
tion shadow down
on the opposite side
of the hemisphere.
For further details
of the operation see
Art. 327. The tel-
escope F is attached
to the disk V which
in turn carries a scale
on its edge. The
telescope is moved
up or down until the
line between the light
and dark portions of
Total Refractometer the field lies on the
cross-hairs. The angle
which is read on the scale under these conditions is the desired critical angle
for the combination of the glass of the hemisphere and the mineral plate.
Knowing this angle and the index of refraction of the glass of the hemisphere
it is possible to calculate the index of refraction of the mineral see Art. 327.
;
Usually a table is furnished with the total ref ractometer by means of which the
desired refractive index is obtained directly from the value of the measured
critical angle. The post carrying the glass hemisphere may be revolved in
the horizontal plane and the angle of rotation measured on the scale K. This
permits the measurement of indices corresponding to different vibration direc-
tions in the mineral. L is an eye lens which in combination with the other
lenses of the tube F makes a low power microscope, which is used in the pre-
liminary operations in order to center the mineral plate, etc. In the tube A
is an iris diaphragm and
usually a small nicol prism that may be pushed in
or out of the tube.
Fig. 547 represents a small total refractometer devised by G. F. H. Smith
which depends upon the same principle. The mineral plate is placed upon
the glass surface shown on the top of the instrument. The instrument is so
held that light enters at the forward end, and the
totally reflected light is sent
by means of an inclined mirror to the eyepiece. A scale is placed in the instru-
647
Smith Total Refractometer (Actual Size)
ment in such a way that the boundary between the light and dark areas is
seen superimposed upon it and so yields directly the value of the refractive
index. For rapid and approximate determinations this instrument is very
useful.
353. Tourmaline Tongs. A very simple form of polariscope for con-
verging light is shown in Fig. 548; it is convenient in use, but of limited appli-
cation. Here the polarizer and analyzer are two tourmaline plates such as
were described in Art. 340. They are mounted in pieces of cork and held in
a kind of wire pincers. The object to be examined is placed between them and
supported there by the spring in the wire. In use they are held close to the
eye, and in this position the crystal section is viewed in converging polarized
light, with the result of showing (under proper conditions) the axial inter-
ference-figures (Arts. .389 and 407) .
Tourmaline Tongs
354. Polariscope. Conoscope. The common forms of polariscopes

employing nicol prisms are shown in Figs. 549 and 550.* Fig. 549 represents
the instrument arranged for converging light, which is often called a conoscope.
The essential parts are the mirror S, reflecting the light, which after
It is then rendered
passing through the lens e is polarized by the prism p.
the of lenses nn, before passing through the
strongly converging by system
section under examination placed on a plate at k. This plate can be revolved
* These figures are taken from the catalogue of Fuess.

through any angle desired, measured on its circumference. The upper tube
contains the converging system oo, the lens t, and the analyzing prism q.
The arrangements for lowering or raising the tubes need no explanation, nor
649 550
Conoscope Polariscope
indeed the special devices for setting the vibration-planes of the nicols at
right angles to each other.
The accompanying tube (Fig. 550) shows the arrangement for observations
in parallel light, the converging lenses having been removed.
Fig. 551 represents in cross-section a simple, inexpensive but quite efficient

form of polariscope. The polarizing device, P, is in the form of two or three
thin glass sheets, the back of the bottom
561
one being blackened. These glass plates
are set at the appropriate angle to secure the
maximum amount of polarization of the
light reflected from them up through the
opening in the stage K. M represents an
adjustable mirror by means of which light is
reflected upon P. The analyzer, A, is a
small nicol prism which is held over the
opening in the stage by means of the stand-
ard S. A double series of lenses may be
placed upon the stage of the instrument and
so convert it into a conoscope.
355. Polarization -Microscope. The
investigation of the form
and optical
properties of minerals when
in microscopic
form has been much facilitated by the
use of microscopes * specially adapted for
this purpose. First arranged with reference
to the special study of minerals as seen in
thin sections of rocks, they have now been so
elaborated as largely to take the place of the
older optical instruments. They not only
allow of the determination of the optical
Polariscope (| natural size)
properties of minerals with greater facility,
but are applicable to many cases where the crystals in hand are far too small
for other means.
A highly serviceable microscope is the Laboratory Model made by the
Bausch and Lomb Optical Co., and illustrated in Fig. 552. The essential
arrangements of this instrument are as follows: The eyepiece at A, which is
removable, contains the cross-hairs with an eye lens adjustable for focusing
upon them. At B is a Bertrand lens that slides in and out of the tube, with
an iris diaphragm immediately above it. At C is the analyzer box which slides
in and out of the body tube. This prism may be revolved through a quarter
turn. D is a slot in the microscope tube with a dust-proof shutter for the
introduction of various accessories, such as the quartz wedge, etc. At E is
the nosepiece which can be centered by the two screws which work at right
angles in the N and E positions. The objective F is held in place by a spring
clamp and is quickly detached. The stage, G, revolves and carries a scale
graduated into degrees, the attached vernier permitting the reading of angles
to one-tenth degree. The substage at H carries condensing lenses, iris dia-
phragm and the polarizing prism. It can be moved upward and downward
by means of a screw-head and when at its lowest point can be sprung to one
side, out of the optical axis. The mirror at / is adjustable and has both a
plane and concave surface. The coarse focusing adjustment is at J, while
the milled head at K provides a fine adjustment by means of which a vertical
movement of 0'0005 mm. can be read.
*
For detailed descriptions of the polarizing microscope and its accessories see Johannsen,
Manual of Petrographic Methods; Wright, The Methods of Petrographic Research; etc.
356. The Research Model of the Bausch and Lomb microscope is illus-
trated in Fig. 553. This instrument is patterned after one described by
552 553
Petrographical Microscope Petrographical Microscope

(Laboratory Model, Bausch and (Research Model, Bausch and
Lomb, | actual size) Lomb j actual size)
Wright to whose papers reference is made for a more detailed account. The
outstanding features of the instrument may be briefly summarized as follows :
It has a large body-tube within which are always contained the analyzer and
the Bertrand lens, both when they lie in or outside the optical axis of the micro-
scope. The two nicols may be connected by means of the upright bar and
rotated simultaneously through an arc of 90. This enables the measurement
of extinction angles, etc., to be made without the necessity of revolving the
stage and the consequent difficulty in keeping the mineral grain under observa-
tion exactly centered in the field. This bar carries verniers that lie against
the scale engraved upon the stage so that the angle of rotation of the nicols
can be accurately measured. The polarizing prism can be entirely removed
from the optical axis. A revolvable carrier for a sensitive plate is attached
to the iris diaphragm mount of the substage.
GENERAL OPTICAL CHARACTERS OF MINERALS

357. There are certain characteristics belonging to all minerals alike,
crystallized and non-crystallized, in their relation to light. These are:
1. DIAPHANEITY: depending on the relative quantity of light transmitted.
2. COLOR: depending on the kind of light reflected or

transmitted, as
determined by the selective absorption.
3. LUSTER: depending on the power and manner of
reflecting light.
1. DIAPHANEITY
358. Degrees of Transparency. The amount of light transmitted by
a solid varies in intensity, or, in other words, more or less light may be absorbed
in the passage through the given substance (see Art. 330). The amount of
absorption is a minimum in a transparent solid, as ice, while it is greatest in
one which is opaque, as iron. The following terms are adopted to express the
different degrees in the power of transmitting light :
Transparent: when the outline of an object seen through the mineral is

perfectly distinct.
Subtransparent, or semi-transparent: when objects are seen, but the
outlines are not distinct.
Translucent: when light is transmitted, but objects are not seen.
Subtranslucent: when merely the edges transmit light or are translucent.
When no light is transmitted, even on the thin edges of small splinters, the
mineral is said to be opaque. This is properly only a relative term, since no
substance fails to transmit some light, if made sufficiently thin. Magnetite is
translucent in the Pennsbury mica. Even gold may be beaten out so thin as
to be translucent, in which case it transmits a greenish light.
The property of diaphaneity occurs in the mineral kingdom, from nearly
perfect opacity to transparency, and many minerals present, in their numerous
varieties, nearly all the different degrees.
2. COLOR
359. Nature of Color. As briefly explained in Art. 314, the sensation
of color depends, in the case of monochromatic light, solely upon the length
of the waves of light which meet the eye. If the light consists of various
wave-lengths, it is to the combined effect of these that the sensation of

color is due.
Further, since the light ordinarily employed is essentially white light, that
is, consists of all the wave-lengths corresponding to the successive colors of the
spectrum, the color of a body depends upon the selective absorption (see
Art. 330) which it exerts upon the light transmitted or reflected by it. A
yellow mineral, for instance, absorbs all the waves of the spectrum with the
exception of those which together give the sensation of yellow. In general,
the color which the eye perceives is the result of the mixture of those waves
which are not absorbed.
360. Streak. The color of the powder of a mineral as obtained by
scratching the surface of the mineral with a knife or file, or, still better, if the
mineral is not too hard, by rubbing it on an unglazed porcelain surface, is
called the streak. The streak is often a very important quality in distinguish-
ing minerals. This is especially true with minerals having a metallic luster,
as defined in Art. 364.
361. Dichroism; Pleochroism. The selective absorption, to which
the color of a mineral is due, more especially by transmitted light, often varies
with the crystallographic direction in which the light passes through the
mineral. It is hence one of the special optical characters depending upon the
crystallization, which are discussed later. Here belong dichroism or pleochro-

ism, the property of exhibiting different colors in different crystallographic
directions by transmitted light. This subject is explained further in Arts.
396 and 411.
302. Varieties of Color. The following eight colors were selected by
Werner as fundamental, to facilitate the employment of this character in
the description of minerals: white, gray, black, blue, green, yellow, red, and
brown.
(a) The varieties of METALLIC COLORS recognized are as follows:

1. Copper-red: native copper. 2. Bronze-yellow: pyrrhotite. 3. Brass-yellow:
chalcopyrite. 4. Gold-yellow: native gold. 5. Silver-while: native silver, less distinct

in arsenopyrite. 6. Tin-white: mercury; cobaltite. 7. Lead-gray: galena, molybdenite.
8. Steel-gray: nearly the color of fine-grained steel on a recent fracture; native plati-
num, and palladium.
(6) The following are the varieties of NON-METALLIC COLORS:
A. WHITE. 1. Snow-white: Carrara marble. 2. Reddish white, 3. Yellowish white
and 4. Grayish white: all illustrated by some varieties of calcite and quartz. 5. Greenish
white: talc. 6. Milk white: white, slightly bluish; some chalcedony.
B. GRAY. 1. Bluish gray: gray, inclining to dirty blue. 2. Pearl-gray: gray, mixed
with red and blue; cerargyrite. 3. Smoke-gray: gray, with some brown; flint.
4. Greenish gray: gray, with some green; cat's-eye; some varieties of talc. 5. Yellowish
gray: some varieties of compact limestone. 6. Ash-gray: the purest gray color; zoisite.
C. BLACK. 1. Grayish black: black, mixed with gray (without green, brown, or blue
tints); basalt; Lydian stone. 2. Velvet-black: pure black; obsidian, black tourmaline.
'
3. Greenish black: augite. 4. Brownish black: brown coal, lignite. 5. Bluish

black: black cobalt.
p. BLUE. 1. Blackish blue: dark varieties of azurite. 2. Azure-blue: a clear shade
of bright blue; pale varieties of azurite, bright varieties of lazulite. 3. Violet-blue: blue,
mixed with red; amethyst, fluorite. 4. Lavender-blue: blue, with some red and much
gray. 5. Prussian-blue, or Berlin blue: pure blue; sapphire, cyanite. 6. Smalt-blue:
some varieties of gypsum. 7. Indigo-blue: blue, with black and green; blue tourmaline.
8. Sky-blue: pale blue, with a little green; it is called mountain-blue by painters.
E. GREEN. 1. Verdigris-green: green, inclining to blue; some feldspar (amazon-stone).
2. Celandine-green: green, with blue and gray; some varieties of talc and It is
beryl.
the color of the leaves of the celandine. 3. Mountain-green: green, with much blue;
beryl. 4. Leek-green: green, with some brown; the color of leaves of
garlic; distinctly
seen in prase, a variety of quartz. 5. Emerald-green: pure deep green; emerald.
6-. Apple-green: light green with some yellow; chrysoprase. 7. Grass-green: bright
green, with more yellow; green diallage. 8. Pistachio-green: yellowish green, with some
brown; epidote. 9. Asparagus-green: pale green, with much
yellow; asparagus stone
(apatite). 10. Blackish green: serpentine. 11. Olive-green: dark green, with much
brown and yellow; chrysolite. 12. Oil-green: the color of olive-oil; beryl, pitchstone.
13. Siskin-green: light green, much inclining to
yellow; uranite.
F. YELLOW. 1.. Sulphur-yellow: sulphur. 2. Straw-yellow: pale yellow; topaz.
3. Wax-yellow: grayish yellow with some brown; sphalerite, opal. 4. Honey-yellow:
yellow, with some red and brown; calcite. 5. Lemon-yellow: sulphur, orpiment.
6. Ocher-yellow: yellow, with 7. Wine-yellow: topaz and fluorite.
brown; yellow pcher.
8. Cream-yellow: some varieties of kaolinite. 9. Orange-yellow: orpiment.
G. RED. 1. Aurora-red: red, with much yellow; some realgar. 2. Hyacinth-red:
red, with yellow and some brown; hyacinth garnet. 3. Brick-red: polyhalite, some jas-
per. 4. Scarlet-red: bright red, with a tinge of yellow; cinnabar. 5. Blood-red: dark
red, with some yellow; pyrope. 6. Flesh-red: feldspar. 7. Carmine-red: pure red;
ruby sapphire. 8. Rose-red: rose quartz. 9. Crimson-red: ruby. 10. Peachblossom-
red: red, with white and gray; 11. Columbine-red: deep red, with some blue;
lepidolite.
garnet. 12. Cherry-red: dark red, with some blue and brown; spinel, some jasper.
13. Brownish-red: jasper, limonite.
H. BROWN. 1. Reddish brown: garnet, zircon. 2. Clove-brown: brown, with red
and some blue; axinite. 3. Hair-brown: wood-opal. 4. Broccoli-brown: brown, with
blue, red, and gray; zircon. 5. Chestnut-brown: pure brown. 6. Yellowish brown:
jasper. 7. Pinchbeck-brown: yellowish brown, with a metallic or metallic-pearly luster;
several varieties of talc, bronzite. 8. Wood-brown: color of old wood nearly rotten; some
specimens of
10.
asbestus- 9. Liver-brown:
brown, with some gray and green;
Blackish brown: bituminous coal, brown coal. jasper.
-
3. LUSTER
363. Nature The luster of minerals varies with the nature
of Luster.
5- 1*
surfaces - A
variation in the quantity of light reflected
produces
different degrees of intensity of
luster; a variation in the nature of the reflect-
ing surface produces different kinds of luster.
364. Kinds of Luster. The kinds of luster recognized are as follows:
1. METALLIC: the luster of the
metals, as of gold, copper, iron, tin.
In general, a mineral is not said to have metallic luster unless it is
in the mmeralogical
opaque
sense, that is, it transmits no light on the edges of thin
splinters. Some minerals have varieties with metallic and others with non-
metallic luster; this is true of hematite.
Imperfect metallic luster is expressed by the term sub-metallic, as illus-
trated by columbite, wolframite. Other kinds of luster are described briefly
as NON-METALLIC.
2. NON-METALLIC. A. Adamantine: the luster of the diamond. When
also sub-metallic, it is termed
metallic-adamantine, as cerussite, pyrargyrite.
Adamantine luster belongs to substances of high refractive index. This
may be connected with their relatively great density (and hardness), as with
the diamond, also corundum, etc. or because; they contain heavy molecules,
thus most compounds of lead, not metallic in luster, have a
high refractive
index and an adamantine luster.
B. Vitreous: the luster of broken glass. An imperfectly vitreous luster
is termed sub-vitreous. The vitreous and sub-vitreous lusters are the most
common in the mineral kingdom. Quartz possesses the former in an eminent
degree; calcite, often the latter.
C. Resinous: luster of the yellow resins, as opal, and some yellow varieties
of sphalerite.
D. Greasy: luster of oily glass. This is near resinous luster, but is often
quite distinct, as nephelite.
E. Pearly: like pearl, as talc, brucite, stilbite, etc. When united with
sub-metallic, as in hypersthene, the term metallic-pearly is used.
Pearly luster belongs to the light reflected from a pile of thin glass-plates;
similarly it is exhibited by minerals, which, having a perfect cleavage, may be
partially separated into successive plates, as on the basal plane of apophyllite.
It is also shown for a like reason by foliated minerals, as talc and brucite.
F. Silky: like silk; it is the result of a fibrous structure. Ex. fibrous cal-
cite, fibrous gypsum.
The
different degrees and kinds of luster are often exhibited differently by
unlike faces of the same crystal, but always similarly by like faces. For
example, the basal plane of apophyllite has a pearly luster wanting in the pris-
matic faces, which have a vitreous luster.
As shown by Haidinger, only vitreous, adamantine, and metallic luster belong to faces
perfectly smooth and pure. In the first, the refractive index of the mineral is I'S-l'S;
in the second, l'9-2'5; in the third, about 2'5. The true difference between metallic and
vitreous luster is due to the effect which the different surfaces have upon the reflected light;
in general, the luster is produced by the union of two simultaneous impressions made upon
the eye. If the light reflected from a metallic surface be examined by a nicol prism (or the
dichroscope of Haidinger, Art. 393), it will be found that both rays, that vibrating in the
plane of incidence and that whose vibrations are normal to it, are alike, each having the
color of the material, only differing a little in brilliancy; on the contrary, of the light
reflected by a vitreous substance, those rays whose vibrations are at right angles to the
while those whose vibrations
plane of incidence are more or less polarized, and are colorless,
are in this plane, having penetrated somewhat into the medium and suffered some absorp-
tion, show the color of the substance itself.
A
plate of red glass thus examined will show
a colorless and a red image. Adamantine luster occupies a position between the others.
365. Degrees of Luster. The degrees of intensity of luster are classi-
fied as follows:
1. Splendent: reflecting with brilliancy and giving well-defined images, as
hematite, cassiterite.
2. Shining: producing an image by reflection, but not one well-defined, as
celestite.
3.Glistening: affording a general reflection from the surface, but no
image, as talc, chalcopyrite.
4. Glimmering: affording imperfect reflection, and apparently from points
over the surface, as flint, chalcedony.
A mineral is said to be dull when there is a total absence of luster, as chalk,
the ochers, kaolin.
366. Play of Colors. Opalescence. Iridescence. The term play of
colors is used to describe the appearance of several prismatic colors in rapid
succession on turning the mineral. This property belongs in perfection to the
diamond, in which it is due to its high dispersive power. It is also observed
in precious opal, where it is explained on the principle of interference; in this
case it is most brilliant by candle-light.
The expression change of colors is used when each particular color appears
to pervade a larger space than in the play of colors and the succession pro-
duced by turning the mineral is less rapid. This is shown in labradorite, as
explained under that species.
Opalescence is a milky or pearly reflection from the interior of a specimen.
Observed in some opal, and in cat's-eye.
Iridescence means the exhibition of prismatic colors in the interior or on
the surface of a mineral. The phenomena of the play of colors, iridescence,
etc., are sometimes to be explained by the presence of minute foreign crystals,
in parallel positions; more generally, however, they are caused by the presence
of fine cleavage-lamellae, in the light reflected from which interference takes
place, analogous to the well-known Newton's rings (see Art. 336).
367. Tarnish. A
metallic surface is tarnished when its color differs
from that obtained by fracture, as is the case with specimens of bornite. A
surface possesses the steel tarnish when it presents the superficial blue color of
tempered steel, as columbite. The tarnish is irised when it exhibits fixed
prismatic colors, as is common with the hematite of Elba. These tarnish and
iris colors of minerals are owing to a thin surface or film, proceeding from
different sources, either from a change in the surface of the mineral or from
foreign incrustation; hydrated iron oxide is one of the most common sources
of it and produces the colors on anthracite and hematite.
368. Asterism. This name is given to the peculiar star-like rays of
light observed in certain directions in some minerals. This is seen by reflected
light in the form of a six-rayed star in sapphire, and is also well shown by
transmitted light (as of a small flame) with the phlogopite mica from South
Burgess, Canada. In the former case it is explained by the presence of thin
twinning-lamellse symmetrically arranged. In the other case it is due to the
presence of minute inclosed crystals, also symmetrically arranged, which are
probably rutile or tourmaline in most cases. Crystalline faces which have
been etched also sometimes exhibit asterism. The
artificially
peculiar light-
figures sometimes observed in reflected light on the faces of
crystals either
natural or etched, are of similar nature.
369. Schillerization. The general term schiller is applied to the
liar luster, sometimes
pecu-
nearly metallic, observed in definite directions in certain
minerals, as conspicuously in schiller-spar (an altered variety of bronzite)
also in diallage, hypersthene,
sunstone, and others. It is explained by the
reflection either from minute inclosed
plates in parallel position or from the
surfaces of minute cavities (negative
crystals) having a common orientation
In many cases it is due to alteration which has
developed these bodies (or
the cavities) in the direction of The process
solution-planes (see Art. 285).
by which it has been produced is then called schillerization.
370. Fluorescence. The emission of light from within a substance
while it is being exposed to direct
radiation, or in certain cases to an electrical
discharge in a vacuum tube, is called fluorescence. It is best exhibited by
fluorite, from which the phenomenon gained its name. Thus, if a beam of
white light be passed through a cube of colorless fluorite a delicate violet color
is called out in its This effect is chiefly due to the action of the ultra-
path.
violet rays, and is connected with a change of
refrangibility in the transmitted
light.
The electrical discharge from the negative pole of a vacuum tube calls out
a brilliant fluorescence not only with the diamond, the
ruby, and many gems,
but also with calcite and other minerals. Such substances
may continue to
emit light, or phosphoresce, after the discharge ceases.
371. Phosphorescence. The continued emission of light by a sub-
stance (not incandescent) produced especially after heating, exposure to
light
or to an electrical discharge, is called phosphorescence.
Fluorite becomes highly phosphorescent after being heated to about
150 C. Different varieties give off light of different colors; the chlorophane
variety, an emerald-green light; others purple, blue, and reddish tints. This
phosphorescence may be observed in a dark place by subjecting the pulverized
mineral to a heat below redness. It may even be produced by a sharp blow
with a hammer. Some varieties of white limestone or marble, after slight
heating, emit a yellow light; so also tremolite, danburite, and other species.
The X-ray and ultra-violet light will produce phosphorescence in willemite,
kunzite, and some diamonds. The fact that willemite glows when exposed to
ultra-violet light is made use of in testing the residues from a willemite ore to
make certain the separation has been complete. Radium emanations cause
certain minerals to phosphoresce, as willemite and wurtzite.
Exposure to the light of the sun produces very apparent phosphorescence
with many diamonds, but some specimens seem to be destitute of this power.
This property is most striking after exposure to the blue rays of the spectrum,
while in the red rays it is rapidly lost. A mixture of calcium sulphide and
bismuth will phosphoresce for a considerable period after being exposed to
sunlight.
SPECIAL OPTICAL CHARACTERS BELONGING TO CRYSTALS

OF THE DIFFERENT SYSTEMS
372. All crystallized minerals may be grouped into three grand classes,
which are distinguished by their physical properties, as well as their geometri-
cal form. These three classes are as follows:
A. Isometric class, embracing crystals of the isometric system, which are

referred to three equal rectangular axes.
B. Isodiametric class, embracing crystals of the tetragonal and hexagonal
systems., referred to two, or three, equal horizontal axes and a third, or fourth,
axis unequal to them at right angles to their plane. Crystals of this class have
a fixed principal axis of crystallographic symmetry.
C. Anisometric class, embracing the crystals of the orthorhombic, mono-
clinic, and triclinic systems, referred to three unequal axes. Crystals of this
class are without a fixed axis of crystallographic symmetry.
373. Isotropic Crystals. Of the three classes, the ISOMETBIC CLASS
includes all crystals which, with respect to light and related phenomena involv-
ing the ether, are isotropic (from the Greek, signifying equal turning) ; that is,
those which have like optical properties in all directions. Their distinguishing
characteristic is that light travels through them with equal velocity in all
directions, provided their molecular equilibrium is not disturbed by external
pressure or internal strain. If it be imagined therefore that light starts from
a point within an isotropic medium at a given moment of time the resulting
wave surface will be a sphere.
It must be emphasized here, however, that such a crystal is not isotropic
with reference to those characters which depend directly upon the molecular
structure alone, as cohesion and elasticity. (See Art. 275.)
Further, amorphous bodies, as glass and opal, which are destitute of any
orientated molecular structure that is, those in which all directions are sensi-
bly the same are also isotropic, and not only with reference to light, but
also as regards their strictly molecular properties.
374. Anisotropic Crystals ; Uniaxial and Biaxal. Crystals of the ISO-
DIAMETRIC and ANISOMETRIC CLASSES, on the other hand, are in distinction
anisotropic (from the Greek, signifying unequal turning) . Their optical prop-
erties are in general unlike in different directions, or, more particularly, the
velocity with which light is propagated varies with the direction.
Further, in crystals of the isodiametric class that variable property of the
light-ether upon which the velocity of propagation depends remains constant
for all directions which are normal to, or, again, for all those equally inclined
to, the vertical crystallographic axis. In the direction of this axis there is no
double refraction; it is hence called the optic axis, and the crystals of this
class are said to be uniaxial.
Crystals of the third or anisometric class have more complex optical rela-
tions requiring special explanation, but in general it may be stated that in them
there are always two directions analogous in character to the single optic axis
spoken of above; hence, these crystals are said to be optically biaxial.
A. ISOMETRIC CRYSTALS
375. has been stated that crystals of the isometric system are optically
It
isotropic,and hence light travels with the same velocity in every direction in
them. Light can, therefore, suffer only single refraction in passing into an
isotropic medium; or, in other words, there can be but one value of the
refractive index for a given wave-length. If this be represented by n, while
V is the velocity of light in air and v that in the
given medium, then
V = V
n = ,
or v
v n
The wave-front for light-waves propagated from
any point within such an
isotropicmedium is, as already stated, a sphere. The sphere, therefore,
be taken to represent the optical properties of an
may
isotropic medium. Sec-
tions of a sphere normal to any diameter will
always be circles. These cir-
cular sections with like radii in all directions to the fact that the
correspond
optical character of an isotropic substance is the same in all directions normal
to the line of light propagation.
Or, in other words, light vibrations may
take place in any direction normal to the direction of the
transmission; i.e.,
light is not polarized. Further velocity remains uniform no matter what
its
may be the direction of its vibration.
This statement holds true of all the classes of isometric In other
crystals.
words, a crystal of maximum symmetry, as fluorite, and one having the
restricted symmetry characteristic of the tetrahedral or
pyritohedral divisions,
have alike the same isotropic character. Two of the classes, however,
namely,
the plagiohedral and the tetartohedral classes, differ in this
particular: that
crystals belonging to them may exhibit what has already been defined (Art.
350) as circular polarization.
376. Behavior of Sections of Isometric Crystals in Polarized
Light.
In consequence of their isotropic character, isometric crystals exhibit no
special phenomena in polarized light. As a section of an isotropic substance
(isometric crystal or some amorphous material) has no polarizing or doubly
refracting effect upon light it does not change at all the character of light that
enters it from the polarizer of a polariscope. Therefore thin sections of iso-
tropic media when examined in a polariscope or polarizing microscope with
the nicols crossed will appear dark in all positions. In other words, they are
always extinguished. Further, when a colored mineral is examined without
the analyzer there will be no change in its color when the section is revolved
with the stage of the microscope. Some anomalies are mentioned on a later
page, (Art. 429).
The single refractive index of an isotropic substance may be determined
by means of a prism (see Art. 327) with its edge cut in any direction whatever.
B. UNI AXIAL CRYSTALS

General Optical Relations
377. The
crystallographic and optical relations of crystals belonging to
crystals of the tetragonal and hexagonal systems have already been briefly
summarized (Art. 374); it now remains to develop their optical characters
more fully. This can be done most simply by making frequent use of the
familiar conception of a light-ray to represent the character and motion of the
light-wave.
378. Behavior of Light in Uniaxial Minerals. Light entering a uni-
axial mineral is in general broken up into two rays which are polarized in planes
perpendicular to each other and which travel with different velocities and
therefore have different indices of refraction. One of the two rays derived
from a single incident ray always vibrates in the plane of the horizontal crys-
tallographic axes. The other ray vibrates at right angles to the first and
always in a vertical plane that includes the vertical crystallographic axis.
The optical character of a uniaxial mineral is uniform for all directions lying
in the horizontal crystallographic plane and therefore the ray whose vibra-
tions lie in this plane will have uniform velocity no matter what its direction
of transmission. This ray will therefore have a single and constant index of
refraction, commonly designated by co. Since this ray follows the usual law
as to the constant ratio between the sines of the angles of incidence and refrac-
tion and in general behaves in an ordinary way it is called the ordinary ray.
The ray which vibrates in a plane that includes the vertical crystallographic
axis will have the direction of its vibration constantly changing as the direc-
tion of its path through the crystal changes and its velocity will correspond-
ingly vary. Its index of refraction will therefore depend upon the direction
of its propagation and it will not in general obey the usual sine law. This
ray is therefore called the extraordinary ray.
When light travels in a uniaxial mineral in a direction parallel to the
vertical crystallographic axis, since all its vibrations must take place in the
horizontal plane, it behaves wholly as the ordinary ray with a single velocity
and refractive index. There can be no double refraction of light, therefore,
along this direction and in this case the mineral will behave like an isotropic
substance. This direction of no double refraction, coincident with the ver-
tical crystal axis, is known as the optic axis and as there is only one such direc-
tion in this optical group the latter is called uniaxial. As soon as the direc-
tion of transmission becomes inclined to the vertical crystal axis the light is
doubly refracted and as the inclination increases the direction of vibration of
the light of the extraordinary ray departs more and more from the plane of
vibration of the ordinary ray with a corresponding change in its velocity and
refractive index. The difference between the refractive indices of the two
rays becomes a maximum when the light passes through the mineral in a
horizontal direction with the direction of vibration of the extraordinary ray
parallel to the vertical crystal axis or in other words as divergent as possible
from the horizontal plane. The value of the refractive index of the extra-
ordinary ray when at its maximum difference from the constant index of the
ordinary ray is the one always quoted and is indicated by"e. These two indices,
w and e, are called the principal indices of a uniaxial crystal. A principal
section of a uniaxial crystal is a section passing through the vertical axis.
379. Positive and Negative Crystals. Uniaxial crystals are divided into
two classes, depending upon whether the velocity of the extraordinary ray is
greater or less than that of the ordinary ray. Those in which the refractive
index of the ordinary ray, co, is less than that of the extraordinary ray, e
(co < e), are called positive. This is illustrated by quartz for which (for yel-
low sodium light) :
co = T544. e = 1-553.
On the other hand, if e is less than co (e <

co), the crystal is said to be negative*
Calcite is an example for which (for sodium light)
co = T658. e = 1-486.
Other examples are given later (Art. 383) .
380. Determination of the Refractive Indices in Uniaxial

Crystals.
The indices of refraction of uniaxial minerals are measured in much the same
*
It will assist in
remembering these relations to note that the first vowel in the words
positive and negative agrees with the
symbol used fo* the smaller index of refraction in
each case.
way as in the case of isotropic substances. With uniaxial crystals, however,

the prism or plate used must have a definite crystallographic orientation. If
a prism is employed its edge should be parallel to the optic axis, or in other
words parallel to the vertical crystal axis of the mineral. When such a prism
is examined on the refractometer two refracted
rays are seen, the angles of
refraction of which can be measured by either the method of minimum devia-
tion or perpendicular incidence as described in Art. 327. The two rays are
polarized, the ordinary ray vibrating in the horizontal plane and the extra-
ordinary ray vibrating in the vertical plane, i.e., parallel to the edge of the
prism. The plane of vibration of each ray must be determined by the use of
a nicol prism held in front of the eyepiece of the refractometer. When the
plane of the nicol is horizontal the image belonging to the ordinary ray will be
visible and when the plane of the nicol is vertical only that of the extraordi-
nary ray will appear. In this way the indices of the two rays are determined
and the positive or negative character of the mineral is established. It is pos-
sible to obtain these measurements in prisms with different crystallographic
orientation but the difficulties attending their preparation are so great that
such prisms are very seldom used.
If the method of >total reflection is used a single plate will suffice, provided
it lies either in the prism zone of the crystal, or is parallel to the basal plane.
In each case two shadows will be observed, corresponding in their position
to the angles of total reflection of the two rays: When the plate is cut parallel
to a face in the prism zone one of these shadows, that belonging to the ordi-
nary ray, will remain stationary as the plate is revolved on the hemisphere of
the total refractometer while the shadow of the extraordinary ray will vary
from being coincident with that of the ordinary ray to a certain maximum
divergence from that position. This maximum difference in position, which
may yield a greater or less angle than that of the ordinary ray, depending upon
the optical character of the mineral, is the angle corresponding to the true
value of the refractive index of the extraordinary ray. There will be two
positions at 180 apart during the complete revolution of the section at which
this value may be measured. If the plate was cut parallel to the basal plane
of the crystal the two shadows would both be stationary during such a revolu-
tion and the value of the angle for both rays can be measured in any position
of the plate.
381. Wave-surface. Remembering that the velocity of light-propa-
gation is always inversely proportional to the corresponding refractive index,
it is obvious that the velocity of the ordinary ray for all directions in a
uniaxial crystal must be the same, being uniformly proportional to . In
other words, supposing light originates at a point within a uniaxial crystal

the ordinary ray would travel out in all directions with uniform velocity and
its wave-front would form a sphere.
For the extraordinary ray, however, the velocity varies with the direction,
- in a horizontal direction and becoming sensibly equal

being proportional to
to when nearly coincident with the direction of the vertical axis. The
CO
law of the varying change of velocity between these values, - and -, is given
by an ellipse whose axes (OC, OA, Figs. 554, 555) are respectively proportional
to the above values.
554 555
c
00:OA=-
The wave-front of the extraordinary ray is then a spheroid, or an ellipsoid

of revolution axis coincides with the vertical crystallographic axis,
whose
that is, the optic axis. In the direction of the vertical axis it is obvious that
the wave-fronts of the ordinary and extraordinary rays will coincide.
Figures 556 and 557 represent vertical sections of the combined wave-
666 557
Negative crystal, Positive crystal, ox: e.
surfaces for both "rays. 556 gives that for a negative crystal like calcite
Fig.
(e < <o), the ellipsoidal wave
surface of the extraordinary ray being outside
the spherical surface of the ordinary ray; Fig. 557 that of a positive crystal
like quartz (co < e) with the ellipsoidal surface within that of the sphere.
Fig. 558 is an attempt to show the relations of the two wave-fronts of a nega-
tive crystal in perspective for a single octant. The constant value of the
-
velocity of the ordinary ray ( \ whatever its direction in the plane of Figs.
556 and 557, is expressed by the radius of the circle (= OC). On the other
hand, the velocity of the extraordinary ray in the horizontal direction is given
by OA (-1 while in any oblique direction, as Osr, Fig. 556 (Ors, Fig. 557), it is
558
expressed by the length of this line, becoming more and more nearly equal to
OC (
- as its direction approaches that of the vertical axis.
J
382. Uniaxial Indicatrix. The optical structure of a uniaxial crystal

can be represented by an ellipsoid of revolution, called the Indicatrix* from
which can be obtained the directions of vibration and indices of refraction of
the ordinary and extraordinary rays derived from any single incident ray.
Fig. 559 represents a principal section of such an ellipsoid for an optically nega-
tive crystal the line C-C being its axis of revolution.
,
The axes of this ellip-
soid are made inversely proportional to the indices of refraction of the two
rays, co and e, as follows :
OC OA =
:
- :
- or 6 CO.
CO 6
In this figure letOr be a direction of transmis- 659

sion of light. Let Vr and VR be tangents to
the elliptical surface at the points r and R and
OR be a radius vector parallel to the tangent
Vr. Or and OR form then what are known
as conjugate radii. From the geometrical
properties of an ellipse it follows that the
area of any parallelogram with conjugate
radii forming two sides, such as ORVr in Fig.
559, is constant and equal to the area of a par-
allelogram having OC and OA as two sides.
Let RN
be perpendicular to the extended line
Or. Then the area of ORVr will be equal to
RN'Or. It follows since RN'Or = OA'OC = a constant, k, that
_ OA'OC (Jr
~ k
J^ also
. .
T-.IT T-k-r
RN RN'
*
The Optical Indicatrix and the Transmission of Light in Crystals, by L. Fletcher,
London, 1892.
From the last expression we see that OA and OC are inversely proportional to
each other, or, in other words, as OC represents the minimum index, OA will
represent the corresponding velocity of light which will be the maximum for
any transmission direction in the crystal. In the same way Or and are RN
inversely proportional to each other, the distance Or representing the velocity
of the extraordinary ray traveling along that direction while RN
will represent
its refractive index. The line RN
will also give the direction of vibration of
the extraordinary ray.
For the radius vector Or there will be another possible direction perpendic-
ular to it and also normal to the ellipsoidal surface. This will be a line from
perpendicular to the section represented in Fig. 559. This line will
principal
lie in the horizontal circular section of the indicatrix ellipsoid with its length
equal to OA which in turn is proportional to the index of the ordinary ray, co.
So for a given direction of transmission of light, such as Or, the two lines that
are perpendicular to it and at the same time normal to the surface of the
indicatrix yield both the indices of refraction of the two rays and the directions
of their vibrations.
If, however, the light passing parallel to the principal axis of the indica-
is
trix, i.e., C-C, Fig. 559, therewill be an infinite number of lines which are
perpendicular to this direction and at the same time normal to the surface of
the indicatrix. These will lie in the horizontal circular section of the ellip-
soid and consequently will be of a uniform length. From this it is evident
that such a transmitted ray may vibrate in any transverse direction and will
possess a single index of refraction and velocity. Along this direction, known
as the optic axis, there will consequently be no double refraction of the light.
383. Examples of Positive and Negative Crystals. The following lists give promi-
nent positive and negative uniaxial crystals, with the values of the refractive indices, co and
e, for each, corresponding to yellow sodium light.* The difference between these, o> e or
e co, is also given; this measures the birefringence or strength of the double refraction.
It may be remarked that in some species both + and varieties have been observed.
Certain crystals of apophyllite are positive for one end of the spectrum and negative for
the other, and consequently for some color between the two extremes it has no double
refraction. The same is true for some other species (e.g., chabazite) of weak double
refraction.
NEGATIVE CRYSTALS
Proustite. . 2 '979
Tourmaline
Examination of Uniaxial Crystals in Polarized Light

384. Section Normal to the Axis in Parallel Polarized Light. Sup-
pose a section of a uniaxial crystal to be cut perpendicular to the vertical
crystallographic axis. It has already been shown that light passing through
the crystal in this direction suffers no double refraction; consequently, such a
section examined in parallel polarized light behaves as a section of an isotropic
substance. If the nicols are crossed it appears dark, or extinguished, and re-
mains so when revolved.
385. Section Parallel to the Axis. A section cut parallel to the verti-
cal axis, as already explained,, has two directions of light- vibration, one parallel
to this axis, that of the extraordinary ray, and the other at right angles to it,
that of the ordinary ray. A ray of light falling upon such a section with
perpendicular incidence is divided into the two rays, ordinary and extraor-
dinary, which travel on in the same path through the crystal, but one of them
retarded relatively to the other. When such a section is examined in polar-
ized light with crossed nicols it will appear dark, or be extinguished, when its
vibration directions lie parallel to the vibration directions of the nicols.
Assume that the section abed, Fig. 560, lies with the direction of its vertical
crystallographic axis parallel to P-P, which represents the vibration direction
of the polarizer. The light entering the section under these conditions will
be vibrating parallel to the vertical axis of the crystal and will therefore pass
into the mineral wholly as the extraordinary ray, there being no vibration
560
386. Parallel Extinction. When the vibration directions of a section

coincide with those of the polarizer and analyzer, assuming them to be crossed,
the section appears dark and it is said to be in the position of extinction. If a
section extinguishes when its crystallographic axis or axial plane is -parallel to
one of the planes of vibration of the nicols it is said to show parallel extinction.
If, on the other hand, no such parallelism exists between the crystallographic
directions and the directions of vibration in the mineral the section is said to
show inclined extinction.
In the case of uniaxial minerals, since the vibration directions always lie
in some crystallographic axial plane, all sections of such minerals will show
parallel extinction.
387. Determination of the Relative Character of the Extinction Direc-
tions of a Given Uniaxial Mineral. The relative characters of the ex-
tinction directions of a section of a uniaxial mineral are to be determined by
the use of the quartz wedge or the sensitive tint as described in Art.
348. If the orientation of the section is known so that it can be told which of
the directions of vibration belongs to the ordinary and which to the extraor-
dinary ray the positive or negative character of the mineral can be determined.
For instance, if the ordinary ray is proved to be the faster of the two (i.e., the
X direction) it follows that its index is the smaller, i.e., co <
e, and the
mineral is positive.
388. Interference Colors of Uniaxial Minerals. Birefringence. The
interference color of any section of a uniaxial mineral depends upon the fol-
lowing: first upon the thickness of the section, second upon the strength of
the double refraction of the mineral, i.e., its birefringence, this being measured
by the difference between the indices of refraction of the two rays in the sec-
tion, and third upon the crystallographic orientation of the section. A section
cut parallel to the basal plane shows no double refraction and therefore cannot
exhibit any interference color. The strength of the birefringence, the other
conditions remaining uniform, increases as the inclination of the section to
the basal plane increases. The highest birefringence of a given mineral is
therefore shown by its prismatic sections.
The following table * gives the thickness (in millimeters) of sections of a
few uniaxial crystals which yield red of the first order:
Birefringence Thickness in
(03 e) or (e o>) Millimeters
Rutile 0-287 0'0019
Calcite 0172 0'0032
Zircon 0'062 0*0089
Tourmaline 0'023 0'0240
Quartz 0'009 0*0612
Nephelite 0*004 01377
Leucite 0*001 0*5510
Again, as another example, it may be noted that with zircon (e co = 0*062), a thick-
ness of about 0'009 mm. gives red of the first order; of 0'017 red of the second order: of
0*026 red of the third order.
The methods ordinarily used to determine the birefringence of a section (not J_ c axis)
of a uniaxial crystal, as also to fix the relative value of its two
vibration-directions, have
already been discussed, see Arts. 347 and 348.
389. Effects of Convergent Polarized Light upon Sections of Uniaxial
Minerals. Uniaxial Interference Figures. When certain sections of uni-
*
See further, Rosenbusch (Mikr. Phys. Min., 1904, p. 292), from whom these are taken.
axial minerals are observed in convergent polarized light they show what
are known as interference figures. A symmetrical interference figure is obtained
in uniaxial minerals by allowing converging polarized light to pass through a
basal section of the crystal. Parallel polarized light entering such a section
would suffer no double refraction and consequently give no interference. To
convert the parallel polarized light that comes from the polarizer into con-
vergent light a lens is placed between the polarizer and the section. Under
these conditions a sharply converging cone of light rays enters the section.
Another lens is placed above the section to change these oblique rays back
again into a parallel postion. Such an instrument is known as a conoscope
and may be obtained by placing a pair of lenses between the polarizer and
analyzer of a polariscope, or, in case the polarizing microscope is used, the small
converging lens that lies above the polarizer is swung into position by a lever
and at the same time a small lens known as the Bertrand lens is introduced
into the microscope tube.
Under such conditions the light entering the section is composed of a
562 converging system of rays polarized and
( vibrating in the plane P-P, Fig. 562.
Let B-B (Fig. 562, A) be a vertical
cross section of the mineral section
along the line B-B, Fig. 562, B.
Consider any ray, as a, entering the
section. Since the ray enters the
section obliquely it will be doubly
a refracted into the rays o and e.
563
this difference in phase until they reach the upper 'nicol; there they are each
resolved into rays vibrating in the plane A-A, Fig. 562, B, and are now in
condition to interfere with each other. Let it be assumed that the conditions
are right for the extraordinary ray to emerge from the section just one wave-
length ahead of the ordinary ray. Their components in the upper nicol will
have opposite phases and therefore compensate each other, see Art. 335. If
the section is viewed in a monochromatic light (for instance, sodium light)
this interference will result in a black point. But as these rays are converging
in the form of a cone they will make, when they strike the section, a circular
trace upon its surface and their interference will result in a dark ring. Going
out from the center of the section there will be a succession of these rings
corresponding to the interference of waves 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., wave-lengths
apart. As the distance from the center of the section is increased, the paths
of the refracted rays in
the section are lengthened
and the points of inter-
ference are brought closer
together. This will cause
the interference rings to
lie nearer together as the
distance from the center
of the figure increases.
Fig. 564 is a top view
of the section without
taking into consideration
the effects of the upper
nicol. Let the two circles
represent the traces of the
emergence of the two rays
e and o into which one
incident conical ray is
divided e, being the least
;
refracted (for calcite), will

be the inner one. The
plane of vibration of e
is always parallel to some plane passing through the vertical axis
of the crystal, therefore the trace of its
plane of vibration upon
the surface of the section will
always be in a radial direction. The plane of
vibration of o is at right angles to that of the
extraordinary ray and parallel
to the horizontal axes of the
crystal, therefore the trace of its plane of vibra-
tion upon the surface of the section will
always be in a tangential direction,
see Fig. 564. Along the line P-P, Fig. 564, only light vibrating in a radial
plane or that of the extraordinary ray can come through the section, since the
light entering the section cannot be resolved into the vibrations of the ordinary
ray. The intensity and direction of vibration of the light that emerges from
the section along the line P-P is
represented by the double arrow on that line.
Along the line A-A, since the light entering the section is still vibrating in
the plane P-P, all the
light passing through the section must vibrate as the
ordinary ray. It is evident, therefore, that along these two directions, P-P
and A-A the plane of vibration of the
light is not changed by passage through
the section and consequently such
light will be completely absorbed in the
In this way dark brushes will be formed
along the lines P-P
upper nicol.
and A- A. A
dark spot will also be formed in the center of the field because
any light entering the section at this point must enter in the direction of the
optic axis and therefore will not be doubly refracted and consequently will
also be absorbed in the analyzer.
Now consider point B, Fig. 564, which lies 45 away from P and A. Here
the directions of vibration of e and o would be equally inclined to the
planes of
vibration of the polariscope, A-A and P-P. Light
striking the section at B
would be vibrating in the plane P-P but by resolution a component
vibrating
in the direction B-B would come through the section as the
ray e; in the same
manner a component vibrating in a direction at right angles to B-B would
emerge as o. The intensities and directions of vibration of these two rays at
this point are represented by the double arrows. When these rays meet the
analyzer above they would again each be resolved and their components
which vibrate in the plane A-Awould emerge from the In this
analyzer. way
it isseen that, except at the special points where complete interference takes
place, light will result in the interference figure at all points away from the
center of the figure and from the lines P-P
and A-A. From the consideration of Fig.
564 it is evident that the greatest amount
of light will come through the section at
the 45 points, such as B. When viewed
in monochromatic light, therefore, the
interference figure consists of a series of
concentric dark and light rings crossed by a
vertical and a horizontal dark brush in-
tersecting in the center of the field of the
microscope, like Fig. 565.
If a basal section of a uniaxial mineral
while in the conoscope is viewed in daylight
colored rings will take the place of the light
and dark rings observed in the monochro-
matic light. The change will be like that Uniaxial Interference Figure
shown by the quartz wedge in the similar
case described in Art. 343. Where the first few dark rings near
the center of the figure were formed by the interference of rays
having the wave-length of sodium, light colored rings will result in the daylight
illumination. These rings will be composed of all the components of white
light with the yellow of sodium subtracted. The other colors are obtaind in
a similar manner by the elimination though interference of some particular
wave-length of light. While the interference figure when illuminated in the
monochromatic light showed a large number of distinct black rings in day-
light, the corresponding colored rings are limited in number and their colors,
gradually becoming fainter as the distance from the center of the figure
increases, finally merge into the white of the higher order. This is due to the
overlapping of the interference rings of the various colors in the same manner
as observed in the quartz wedge, see Art. 343. The interference figure
viewed in daylight will of course retain the black cross and center since these
are due to the cutting out of all the light by the analyzer and are not the result
of interference.
The distance of each successive ring from the center of the interference
figure obviously depends upon the birefringence, or the difference between the
refractive indices, for the ordinary and extraordinary ray, and also upon the
thickness of the plate. The stronger the double refraction and the thicker
the plate, the smaller the angle of the light-cone which will give a certain
amount of retardation, or, in other words, the nearer the circles will be to the
center. Further, for the same section the circles will be nearer for blue light
than for red, because of their shorter wave-length. When the plate is either
quite thin or quite thick only the black brushes will be distinctly seen.
390. Determination of the Positive or Negative Character of the Bire-
fringence of a Uniaxial Mineral from Its Interference Figure.
Use of the Mica Plate. For the identification of a uniaxial mineral it
is naturally important to determine whether the character of its birefringence
is positive or negative. This can usually be best accomplished by tests made
upon its interference figure. One of the common ways of making this 'test is
by the use of a sheet of muscovite mica, cleaved so thin that, of the two rays
of light passing through it, one has gained one quarter of a wave-length in
phase over the other. The mica is usually mounted between long and narrow
glass plates and is known as the one quarter wave-length mica plate. It is
commonly marked 1 /4M with
an arrow indicating the Z
optical direction. In testing
an interference figure by
means of the mica plate the
latter is inserted somewhere
between the polarizer and
analyzer the microscope
(in
commonly through the slot
just above the objective) and
is so orientated that the Z
direction makes an angle of
45 with the planes of vibra-
tion of the nicols.
In Fig. 566 let P-P rep-
resent the plane of vibra-
tion of the polarizer and
A-A the plane of vibration of
the analyzer of a conoscope.
Let be the point of emer-
gence of the optic axis of a
positive uniaxial mineral.
Suppose a single conical ray of light enters the section. It is broken up in the
mineral into two rays, o and e, which emerge from the section along the arcs of
the circles shown in Fig. 566. The trace of the
ordinary ray, o, will be within
that of the extraordinary ray, e, because in a
positive mineral the o ray travels
the and is less refracted. The directions of vibration of these two rays at
faster
the 45 points R and R' are represented by the double-headed arrows. When
these rays reach the analyzer they will be resolved into
components vibrating
parallel to A-A . There are an infinite number of such rays entering and pass-
ing through the mineral section with varying angles of inclination and there-
fore varying lengths of path. At some certain distance out from the center
two rays will emerge on the same circle with a difference of phase of one
whole wave-length and when resolved in the upper nicol into
rays vibrating
in the same plane will interfere with each other and
produce the first dark
ring of the interference figure as it is viewed in monochromatic light.
If the mica plate is introduced above the section a
change in the inter-
ference figure is noted. The optical character of the mica cannot be
fully
explained at this point. It is sufficient for present purposes to know that
it is a doubly refracting mineral which breaks light up into two
rays which
are polarized in planes at right angles to each other and
which, traveling with
different velocities through the mica, will emerge from it with different
phases.
As stated above, the mica plate is cleaved to the requisite thickness so that the
two rays emerge from it with a difference of phase of one quarter of a wave-
length. Consider what takes place when such a plate is introduced above the
section represented in Fig. 566 in such a position that its vibration direction
Z is parallel to the direction R-O-R of the figure. Consider what takes place
at the points R. There the vibration direction of the e ray coincides with
the vibration direction Z of the mica plate. These vibration directions in
each case are those of the rays traveling with the smaller velocity. On the
other hand, at the same point the vibration direction of the o ray in the mineral
coincides with the vibration direction X in the plate, both of these being of
the rays with the greater velocity. So at this point the effect of the mica
plate is to increase the difference of phase between o and e and to produce the
same result as if the mineral section had been thickened. Consequently the
interference rings along the line R-O-R are increased in number and drawn
toward the center of the figure. At the points R' the opposite is true. The
vibration direction of e coincides now with that of X in the mica plate; the
direction of least velocity in the mineral with that of the greatest in the mica.
Also the vibration direction of o coincides with that of Z\ that of the greater
velocity in the mineral with the less velocity in the mica. So at this point
the mica will decrease the difference in phase between o and e and produce the
effect of thinning the section and so spreading the interference rings farther
apart along the line R'-O-R'. In quadrants 2 and 4, therefore, the rings will
be drawn nearer the center, while in quadrants 1 and 3 they will be spread
farther apart. Another effect caused by the introduction of the mica plate is
even more pronounced. In quadrants 1 and 3, in the case illustrated in Fig.
566, black dots will appear near the center of the figure. In the interference
figure, before the introduction of the mica plate, there were points in quadrants
1 and 3 at short distances from the center, 0, where the two rays, o and e,
emerged from the section with a difference of phase of one quarter wave-length.
Under these conditions no interference could take place and these spots were
light. The effect of the mica plate in these two quadrants is to everywhere
reduce the birefringence due to the mineral by one quarter of a wave-length.
Therefore at these two points the difference of phase caused by the birefring-
ence of the mineral is annulled by the mica plate and consequently at these
points interference will result and black dots appear. The mica plate produces
still other effects. The brushes which were dark in the interference figure be-
come light. Light coming from the crystal section along the lines of the brushes
is vibrating only in the vibration direction of the polarizer and ordinarily is
wholly cut out by the analyzer above. But with the mica plate intervening this
light is broken up in the mica into two rays which vibrate in the vibration
planes of the mica and as these are inclined to the plane of the analyzer a
portion of the light will come through to the eye. As the light coming from
the section along the lines of the brushes had only a single velocity (was
entirely either the ordinary or extraordinary ray) there are only two rays
emerging from the mica plate along these directions and their difference of
phase is one quarter of a wave-length. Under these conditions there can be no
interference and white brushes result. In the same way the dark center of
the interference figure becomes light.
667
Determination of Optical Character with Mica Plate
Fig. 567, A, is a diagrammatic representation of the interference figure of

a positive mineral as affected by the insertion of the mica plate, the direction
of the arrow indicating the direction Z of the mica, i.e., the direction of vibra-
tion of the ray having the smaller velocity. In the case of a negative mineral
the conditions as described above will be completely reversed. Fig. 567, B,
represents the appearance of an interference figure of a negative mineral when
the mica plate is used.
Therefore, to determine the optical character of a uniaxial mineral from
its interference figure insert a mica plate above the section with its Z direction
making 45 with the vibration planes of the nicols. Then, if this direction Z
is at right angles to a line joining the two black dots that appear near the cen-
ter of the figure (i.e., the two lines form a plus sign), the mineral is positive;
if, on the other hand, these two directions coincide (form together a minus
sign) the mineral is negative.

Use of the Sensitive Tint. The sensitive tint, see Art. 344, is used to deter-
mine the positive or negative character of a uniaxial mineral from its inter-
ference figure when the mineral section is so thin, or the mineral possesses
such a low birefringence, as to show in the figure only a black cross without
any rings. Under such conditions the mica plate would not give a decisive
test. The sensitive tint is usually so mounted that its longer direction coin-
cides with the direction of the vibration of the faster ray, i.e., the direction X.
The sensitive tint is introduced somewhere between the polarizer and ana-
lyzer in such a position that its vibration directions are at 45 with the planes
of vibration of the nicols. Let it be assumed that we have the interference
figure from a positive mineral, such as is represented in Fig. 566. If the
sensitive tint is introduced in such a position that its X direction is parallel
to the line R-O-R the X direction of the sensitive tint will be parallel to the
direction of vibration of the e ray in the mineral. Since the mineral is positive
the e ray will have the smaller velocity and therefore in quadrants 2 and 4 the
optical orientation of the mineral and the sensitive tint will be opposed to
each other. The sensitive tint alone would produce an interference color of
red of the first order. But if the effect of the birefringence of the mineral is
such as to subtract from the birefringence of the sensitive tint the color will
change to yellow. Consequently in these quadrants yellow spots will appear
near the center of the field at the points where the effect of the mineral has
been sufficient to lower the interference color to that extent. In the other
quadrants, 1 and 3, the faster and slower rays of the mineral and sensitive
tint coincide in their directions and the effect of the two substances is an addi-
tive one. Con-
568
sequently in these two
quadrants the color
will rise to blue.
In making the above
test with the sensitive
tint it is convenient
to follow the rule that

if the direction X
of
the sensitive tint
crosses a line uniting
the two blue dots
(makes a plus sign)
the mineral is positive ;
if, on the other hand,

these two directions Determination of Optical Character with Sensitive Tint
( make
coincide to-
These conditions are illustrated
gether a minus sign) the mineral is negative
Minerals.
391. Interference Figures from Inclined Sections of Uniaxial
569
Eccentric Uniaxial Interference Figures

An interference figure obtained from such an inclined section will of course be

eccentric to the microscope field. If the section is inclined only a little to the
basal plane, the center of the figure (i.e., the point of emergence of the optic
axis) will still be within the field of vision and will move in a circle about the
center of the field wtien the section is revolved upon the microscope stage.
Fig. 569, A, shows the successive positions of such an interference figure during
revolution. If the section is more sharply inclined the center of the inter-
ference figure may be quite outside the field. As the section is turned on the
stage the four arms of the interference cross will traverse the field in succession.
They will move across the field as straight bars and, provided the section has
been cut not too highly inclined to the optic axis, will move across the field
parallel to the cross-hairs of the microscope. This fact is of importance in
order to distinguish such a uniaxial interference figure from certain biaxial
figures. The latter will often show similar bars which, however, will always
curve as they cross- the field of the microscope. If the first of these bars in
the uniaxial figure moves from left to right across the field, the second will
move from the top to the bottom, the third from right to left and the last
from the bottom to the top, etc. Fig. 569, B, shows the different position of
such a figure during one quarter of a revolution.
The positive or negative character of the mineral can usually be deter-
mined from an eccentric figure if care is taken
570 to make certain which quadrant is visible
.
when the test is made. For instance, in Fig.

570 is shown how the test is made with the
sensitive tint upon the eccentric interference
figure of a positive mineral.
In examining unorientated sections of a
mineral, such as the random section found in
a rock section or the small fragments of a
mineral placed upon a glass slide, it is advis-
able always to hunt for that section that gives
the lowest interference color. The amount
of birefringence shown in various sections
of a uniaxial mineral decreases as the section
approaches the orientation of the basal plane.
Sensitive Tint with Consequently that section showing the
Eccentric Interference Figure lowest interference color will yield the most
nearly symmetrical interference figure.
392. Interference Figure from a Prismatic Section of a Uniaxial
Mineral. When a prismatic section of a uniaxial mineral is examined
for an interference figure an indefinite result is obtained. The figure is analo-
gous to one obtained in the case of biaxial crystals. The reasons for this
resemblance will be pointed out in a later article. The two
types of figures
cannot be in this case easily differentiated. Two dark and
usually indefinite
hyperbolas approach each other as the section is turned on the microscope
stage, form an indistinct cross, and rapidly separate. These bars differ from
those obtained in a biaxial interference
figure in that
they rapidly fade out as
they move away from the crossed position. This type of interference figure
can be obtained easily from the
quartz wedge.
wu 393: AbsorP tion Phenomena of Uniaxial Crystals. Dichroism.
When light enters colored minerals as rays of white light, i.e.,
containing vibra-
tions of all wave-lengths from that of violet
light at one end of the spectrum
to that of red light at the other, certain
wave-lengths will be absorbed during
the passage of the light through the mineral, so that the
light, as it emerges,
has a definite color. It happens in certain colored minerals that
deeply the
amount and character of this absorption depends upon the direction of the
light vibration. For instance in the case of uniaxial minerals, the
ordinary
and extraordinary rays may emerge from the section with
distinctly different
colors. Take, for instance, a prismatic section of a brown colored tourmaline
and observe it in plane polarized light without the use of the
upper nicol. As
the section is revolved upon the stage of the the color
polariscope may change
from a dark brown to a light yellow-brown.The greatest difference in the
color occurs at positions 90 apart and when the
crystallographic directions of
the section, i.e., the vertical crystallographic
axis and the trace of the plane of the horizontal
axes, are either parallel or perpendicular to the
vibration plane of the polarizer. In other
words, these extremes of color occur when the
directions of the vibration of the ordinary and
P 1
extraordinary rays in the section are parallel or
perpendicular to the vibration plane of the
light entering the section. In Fig. 571, A, let
P-P represent the vibration direction of the
light entering the section. The mineral section
is so placed that the direction of the vertical
crystal axis is perpendicular to P-P. The Vertical Axis ^

light on entering the section will therefore
vibrate in the plane of the horizontal axes or 1
as the ordinary ray, o. In this position the

tourmaline section is dark colored and con-
sequently it is seen that light vibrating in the
mineral as the ordinary ray is largely absorbed.
Now turn the section through a 90 angle to
the position shown in Fig. 571, B. In
this position the light must vibrate in the section wholly as the
extraordinary ray, e, and the color is a light yellow-brown. There-
fore the extraordinary ray is only slightly absorbed. This difference in
the absorption or the color of the two rays is known as dichroism. Either
the ordinary or the extraordinary ray may be the most absorbed and the two
cases are expressed as either o > e (o> > e) or e > o (e > co). In uniaxial
minerals dichroism is to be best observed in prismatic sections where it attains
its full intensity. Basal sections show no dichroism, since light passing through
the section parallel to the optic axis must all vibrate in the horizontal axial
plane and belong wholly to the ordinary ray.
An instrument called a dichroscope, contrived by Haidinger, is sometimes used for
examining this property of crystals. An oblong rhombohedron of Iceland spar is placed
in a metallic cylindrical case, having a convex lens at one end, and a square hole at the
other. On looking through it, the square hole appears double; one image belongs to the
ordinary and the other to the extraordinary ray. When a pleochroic crystal is examined
with it by transmitted light, on revolving it the two squares, at intervals of 90 in the revo-
lution, have different colors, corresponding to the vibration-planes of the ordinary
and
extraordinary ray in calcite. Since the two images are situated side by side, a very slight
difference of color is perceptible. A similar device is sometimes used as an ocular in the
microscope.
394. Circular Polarization. The subject 9f elliptically polarized light and circular
in Art. 350. This phenomenon is most dis-
polarization has already been briefly alluded to
to the rhombohedral-
tinctly observed among minerals in the case of crystals belonging
trapezohedral class, that is, quartz and cinnabar.
It has been explained that a section of an ordinary uniaxial crystal cut normal to the
vertical (optic) axis appears dark in parallel polarized light for every position between
crossed nicols. If, however, a similar section of quartz, say 1 mm. in thickness, be examined
under these conditions, it appears dark in monochromatic light only, and that not until
the analyzer has been rotated so that its vibration-plane makes for sodium light an angle
of 24 with that of the polarizer. In other words, this quartz section has rotated the plane
of vibration some 24, and here either to the right or to the left, looking in the direction of
the light. The amount of this rotation increases with the thickness of the section, and, as
the wave-length of the light diminishes (for red this angle of rotation for a section of 1 mm.
is about 19, for blue 32). The direction of the rotation is to the right or left, as denned
above according as the crystal is crystallographically right-handed or left-handed (p. 113).
If the same section of quartz (cut perpendicular to the axis) be viewed between crossed
nicols in converging polarized light, it is found that the interference-figure differs from that
of an ordinary uniaxial crystal. The central portion of the black cross has disappeared,
and instead the space within the inner ring is brilliantly colored.* Furthermore, when the
analyzing nicol is revolved, this color changes from blue to yellow to red, and it is found
that in some cases this change is produced by revolving the nicol to the right, and in other
cases to the left; the first is true with right-handed crystals, and the second with left-handed.
If sections of a right-handed and left-handed crystal are placed together in the polariscope,
the center of the interference-figure is occupied with a four-rayed spiral curve, called, from
the discoverer, Airy's spiral. Twins of quartz crystals are not uncommon, consisting of
the combination of right- and left-handed individuals (according to the Brazil law) which
show these spirals of Airy. With cinnabar similar phenomena are observed. Twins of
this species also not infrequently show Airy's spirals in the polariscope.
395. Summary of the Optical Characters of Uniaxial Crystals. All

sections of uniaxial crystals show double refraction except those that are cut
parallel to the basal plane. All doubly refracting sections show parallel ex-
tinction. When viewed in convergent polarized light with crossed nicols all
sections show a characteristic uniaxial interference figure except those that
lie in the prism zone of the crystal or that are only slightly inclined to that
zone. All doubly refracting sections have two refractive indices correspond-
ing to the two extinction directions one of these is always co and the other has
:
a value (c') ranging from co to e, dependent on the inclination of the section to

the optic axis. Dark colored minerals may show dichroism. Tetragonal
and hexagonal substances cannot be distinguished from each other by optical
tests. They may be at times told apart by characteristic cross sections of
their crystals.
C. BIAXIAL CRYSTALS
General Optical Relations
Thecrystals of the remaining systems, i.e., the orthorhombic, monoclinic,

and belong optically to what is known as the Biaxial Group.
triclinic
396. The Behavior of Light in Biaxial Crystals. In biaxial crystals
there are three especially important directions at right angles to each other
which are designated as X, Y, and Z (also a, fo, and c). These three direc-
tions are sometimes spoken of as axes of elasticity in reference to certain
assumed differences in the ether along them. The nature of these three direc-
tions is as follows. Light which results from vibrations parallel to (axis of X
greatest elasticity) is propagated with the maximum velocity; that from vibra-
*
Very thin sections of quartz, however, show (e.g., with the microscope) the dark cross
of an ordinary uniaxial crystal.
tions parallel to Z (axis of least
elasticity) with minimum velocity; and that
from- vibrations parallel to Y with an intermediate
velocity. It is to be
emphasized that these directions, X, Y, and Z refer to directions of vibration
and not to directions of propagation.
Corresponding to the maximum inter-
mediate and minimum light velocities are three
principle indices of refraction
designated respectively as a, ft and y. Of these a, belonging to light with the
maximum velocity, will have the least value and 7
belonging to light with the
minimum velocity, will have the greatest value. The value of B will be inter-
mediate between the other
two, sometimes being 572
nearer to a and at other
times being nearer to 7; it
is not the arithmetical
mean between them. The
various methods of deter-
mining the values of these
three principal indices of
refraction will be consid-
ered in a later article.
In studying the prop-
agation of light within a
biaxial crystal let it be
assumed that Fig. 572
represents a rectangular
parallelopiped in which
the front to back axis is
the direction X, the left to
right axis is Y, and the
vertical axis is Z. In
connection with the figure and those which follow it is helpful to
make use of a model (a pasteboard box would answer) orientated so that its
longer edge runs from front to back, its mean edge from left to right and its
shortest edge vertical, corresponding to the X, Y, and Z directions of the figure.
In the development of the figures that follow it has been assumed that the
three principle indices of refraction are a = 1.5, (3 = 1.6, 7 = 2.5, a difference
between a and 7 far exceeding anything observed in actual crystals. In
general, this difference does not exceed 0.1; hence it is necessary to greatly
exaggerate the actual values in order that the phenomena may be distinctly
shown by diagrams drawn on a small scale.
In the discussion that follows it will be assumed that light originates at the
center of a crystal, 0, Fig. 572, and the endeavor will be made to determine
the character of the rays which radiate from in all directions. The simplest
directions, and the ones which in reality are the most important, are those
that lie in the axial planes of the figure, XOY, YOZ, and XOZ. These will
be considered first.
Consider the plane of the X
and Y directions, Fig. 572. Light will radiate
from toward Xand Y and in all intermediate directions with vibrations
parallel to Z and hence traveling with a uniform and at the same time mini-
mum velocity, 1/7. The distance such light will travel in a given moment of
time may be plotted by drawing a circle about with the radius, 1/7, Fig.
573. In the direction OX
there must also travel a second polarized ray result-
ing from vibrations parallel to OF,

hence traveling with mean velocity 1/0.
Likewise in the direction OF there will be a ray resulting from vibrations
parallel to OX, hence travel-
573
ing with the maximum
velocity, I/a. In all direc-
tions intermediate between
X and F
the light velocities
will be proportional to the
radii of an ellipse having
1/0 and I/ a respectively as
its semi-minor and semi-major
diameters, Fig. 573. In the

plane of the X and F
directions,therefore, in a
given moment of time light
will radiate from the center
as ordinary and extraordinary
rays, the wave fronts being
represented by a circle within
an ellipse.
Consider next the plane of
the F and Z directions, Fig.
572. Light will radiate
from toward F and Z and in all intermediate directions resulting
from vibrations parallel to OX. It will therefore travel with uniform and the
maximum velocity, I/a. The
distance traveled in a given
moment of time may be
plotted by drawing a circle
about with the radius
I/a, Fig. 574. Likewise
there will travel in the
direction OF a second ray
resulting from vibrations
parallel to OZ, hence mov-
ing with the minimum
velocity, l/y. Also in the
direction OZ there will be a
ray resulting from vibrations
parallel to OF with the
velocity 1/0. In directions
intermediate between F and
Z the light velocities will be
proportional to the radii of
an ellipse having l/y and
1/0 respectively as its semi-
minor and semi-major
diameters, Fig. 574. In
the plane of the F and Z directions, therefore, in a given moment of time, light
will radiate from the center as ordinary and extraordinary rays, the wave
fronts being represented by an ellipse within a circle.
The last and most important plane to be consideredis that of the X
and Z
directions, Fig. 572. Light will radiate from toward X and Z and all in-
termediate directions with vibrations parallel to OF, hence traveling with a
uniform and intermediate veloc-
ity, 1/jS. The distance traveled
in a given moment of time is
represented in Fig. 575 by the

circle with the radius 1/0.
There will likewise travel in the
direction OZ a ray resulting
from vibrations parallel to OX,
hence moving with the max-
imum velocity, I/a. Also a
ray will travel in the direction
OX with vibrations parallel to
OZ, hence having the minimum
velocity, l/y. In intermediate
positions the light velocity will
be proportional to the radii of
an ellipsewith I/a and l/y
respectively as its semi-major
and semi-minor diameters, Fig.
575. In the plane of the and X
Z directions, therefore, in a given
moment of time, light will
radiate from the center as or-
dinary and extraordinary rays,
the wave fronts represented, by a circle intersecting an ellipse. It is to be
noted that in this last plane there are four points where the two wave
fronts coincide. In other
words, light traveling along
the radial lines connecting
these points will be moving
with uniform velocity and
consequently along these
directions there will be no
double refraction. These
known as the
directions are
optic axes of the crystal
and since there are two of
them the optical group is
spoken of as biaxial. The
character of these optic
be more fully
axes will
developed in a later article.
In the above paragraphs
the wave fronts for light
Ellipse
moving in the three prin-
cipal optical planes of the
crystal have been discussed. Fig. 576 represents the wave fronts in these
three planes as they appear when bounding one octant. The complete wave
surfaces for light propagated in all directions consist of warped figures

which conform to the circular or elliptical wave fronts already described in
the three principal planes and have intermediate positions elsewhere. The
only satisfactory way to represent these complete surfaces is by means of
a model.
397. Biaxial Indicatrix. It is found further that the optical structure
of a biaxial crystal can be represented by an ellipsoid, .known as the indicatrix,
having as its axes three lines which are at right
angles to each other and proportional in length to
the indices a, /3, 7. This is analogous to the similar
figure for uniaxial crystals described in Art. 382.
This ellipsoid, whose axes represent in magnitude
the three principal refractive indices, a /3, 7 (where
a < |8 < 7), (see Fig. 577), not only exhibits
the character of the optical symmetry, but from it
may be derived the direction, velocity and plane of
vibration of any light ray traversing the crystal.
In general it may be stated that the character of
the two light rays which result from a single incident,
ray may be derived from a study of that elliptical
section of the indicatrix which is normal to the
incident ray. If this section happens to be one of
the three principal sections of the indicatrix, A BAB,
ACAC, or BCBC, Fig. 577, its major, and
minor diameters give the directions of vibration
and their semi-lengths the indices of refrac-
Biaxial Indicatrix tion of the two rays. If the incident ray has some
direction different from the directions of the
three axes of the indicatrix ellipsoid the derivation of the character of the
two refracted rays is not as simple. Let Fig. 578 represent such an elliptical
section normal to the inclined ray L-L. In this case the major and minor
diameters R-O-R and r-0-r of the
elliptical section lie in the vibration L
planes of the two rays but the
directions of vibration of the
latter will be somewhat inclined
to the elliptical section. These
directions of vibration may be
obtained by erecting normals to
the surface of the indicatrix at
the points R and r where the
major and minor diameters of the
elliptical section meet that surf ace.
These normals RN and rn, when
extended to the line of the incident
ray L-L, yield the directions of
vibration and the refractive indices of the two refracted Their direc-
rays.
tions of transmission (the lines OS and
OT) will be perpendicular to these
normals and since neither of the latter lie in the elliptical section both
rays
will be refracted and behave as
extraordinary rays.
There are two special sections of the indicatrix that The
require notice.
line B-O-B (Fig. 577) is longer than the line A-O-A but shorter than the line
C-O-C. Obviously, in some position intermediate between A-O-A and
C-O-C there will be a diameter of the ellipse ACAC which will be equal in
length to B-O-B. There are two such lines, as S-O-S and S'-O-S' in Fig.
577. The major and minor diameters of these sections of the indicatrix,
BSBS and BS'BS', are equal and the sections therefore become circles. Con-
sequently light passing through a section of a crystal cut parallel to either of
these circular sections of its indicatrix will have a uniform velocity and
may
vibrate in any transverse direction. In other words, there will be no double
refraction along the lines normal to these two sections. These lines consti-
tute what are known as the primary optic axes of the crystal; see further in
Art. 398.
The major and minor diameters of
any section of the indicatrix yield the
traces upon that section of the planes of vibrations of the two
rays into which
the ray normal to the section is refracted. In other words, the major and minor
diameters of the elliptical section of the indicatrix give the directions of extinc-
tion of a crystal section having this optical orientation. Further, these
extinction directions bisect the angles made by the traces upon the section of
two planes, each of which includes the pole of the section and one of the two
optic axes. This may be demonstrated by aid of Fig. 579 which represents
A
a general elliptical section of an indicatrix. A- and B-B are the major and
minor diameters of the ellipse and so represent the extinction directions of the
mineral section. C-C and C'-C' represent the intersections of the two circu-
lar sections of the indicatrix with this elliptical section. As these lines are
diameters of equal circles they must be equal in length and it therefore follows
from the geometrical nature of an ellipse that the angles AOC and AOC' are
equal. Let the line P-P represent the intersection with this elliptical section
of a plane in which lie the normal to the section and one of the optic axes.
Since this plane includes an optic axis it must
579
be perpendicular to the circular section of
the indicatrix of which the line C'-C' is a
diameter. Also since this plane includes the
normal to the elliptical section under consid-
eration it must be at right angles to the
latter plane. Under these conditions it is
obvious that the lines P-P and C'-C' in Fig.
579 must be at right angles to each other.
In the same way it can be proved that the
lines P'-P' and C-C are also at right angles
to each other. Since the angles AOC and
AOC' are equal and the angles POC' and
P'OC are also equal it follows that the angles
A OP* and A OP' are likewise equal. In other
words the lines A-A and B-B representing
the directions of extinction of the section
bisect the angles made by the traces upon
the section of the two planes which
respectively pass through each optic axis and
the normal to the section. This fact will be
made use of later, see Art. 407, in explaining the characters of the biaxial
interference figure.
It has already been stated

Primary and Secondary Optic Axes.
(Art. 397) that there aretwo directions, namely, those normal to the circular
cross sections of the indicatrix (SS, S'S',
580
Fig. 577) in which all light is propagated
with uniform velocity. Hence in these
directions there can be no double refraction
within a crystal; nor is there when the ray
emerges. These two directions bear so close
an analogy to the optic axes of a uniaxial
crystal that they are also called optic axes,
and the crystals here considered are hence
named biaxial. In Fig. 575, which represents
a cross section of the wave-surfaces in the
plane of the X
and Z directions, these optic
axes have the direction SS, S'S' normal to
the tangent planes tt, t't', and the direction
of the external wave is given by the normal
Str (Fig. 580).
Properly speaking the directions mentioned
are those of the primary optic axes, for there
are also two other somewhat analogous directions, PP, P'P', of Fig. 575,
called for sake of distinction the secondary optic axes. The properties of the
latter directions are obvious from the following considerations.
In the section of the wave-surface shown in Fig. 575 (also enlarged, in Fig.
580), corresponding to the axial plane XZ, it is seen that the circle with radius
- intersects the ellipse whose major and minor axes are - and - in the four
points P, P, P f
P'. Corresponding to these directions the velocity of propa-
,
gation is obviously the same* for both rays. Hence within the crystal these
rays travel together without double refraction. Since, however, there is
no common wave-front for these two rays (for the tangent for one ray is repre-
sented by mm and for the other by nn, Fig. 580) they do suffer double refrac-
tion on emerging; in fact, two external light-waves are formed whose directions
are given by the normals Pju and Pv. These directions, PP, P'P', therefore,
have a relatively minor interest, and whenever, in the pages following, optic
axes are spoken of, they are always the primary optic axes, that is, those having
the directions SS, S'S' (Fig. 575), or OS, Fig. 580. In practice, however, as
remarked in the next article, the angular variation between the two sets of
axes is usually very small, perhaps 1 or less.
399. Interior and Exterior Conical Refraction. The tangent plane to the wave-surface
drawn normal to the line OS through the point S (Fig. 580) may be shown to meet it in a
small circle on whose circumference lie the points S and T. This circle is the base .of the
interior cone of rays SOT, whose remarkable properties will be briefly hinted at. If a
section of a biaxial crystal be cut with its faces normal to OS, those parallel rays belonging
to a cylinder having this circle as its base, incident
upon it from without, will be propagated
within as the cone SOT. Conversely, rays from within corresponding in position to the
surface of this cone will emerge parallel and form a circular cylinder. This phenomenon
is called interior conical
refraction.
On the other hand, if a section be cut with its faces normal to OP, those rays having
the direction of the surface of a cone formed by mm
perpendiculars to and nn will be propa-
gated within parallel to OP, and emerging on the other surface form without a similar cone
on the other side. This phenomenon is called exterior conical refraction.
In the various figures given (573-580) the relations are much
exaggerated for the sake
of clearness; in practice the relatively small difference between the indices of refraction
a and 7 makes this cone of small angular size, rarely over 2.
400. Optic Axial Angle. Bisectrices. Positive and Negative Biaxial

Crystals. The optic axes always lie in the plane of the and Z optical X
directions; this plane is called the optic axial plane (or, briefly, ax. pi.). It is
obvious from a consideration of the indicatrix ellipsoid that the position of
its circular sections and consequently of the optic axes normal to
them, will
vary with a variation in the relative values of the indices of refraction. As
already stated the index is not an arithmetical mean between a and
7 but
may at times be nearer to a than to 7 or the reverse. As these relations
change, the shape of the indicatrix and the position of its circular sections and
the angle between the optic axes will also change. The mathematical relations
between the optic axial angle and the principle refractive indices are given in
the next article. From the above it is obvious that for certain relative values
of the refractive indices, the optic angle must be 90.* Such a case, however,
is rarely observed and when it occurs it is true for light of a certain color
f
(wave-length) only and not for others.
The X
and Z optical directions bisect the angles between the optic axes
and are therefore known as bisectrices. The one that bisects the acute axial
angle is called the acute bisectrix (or Bx a ) while the one bisecting the obtuse
angle is the obtuse bisectrix (or Bx ) If the word bisectrix is used alone with-
.
out special qualification it is always to be understood as referring to the acute

bisectrix.
Either X or Z may be the acute bisectrix. If X is the acute bisectrix the
substance is said to be optically negative, while if Z is the acute bisectrix it is
optically positive.
Roughly expressed, the optic axes will lie nearer to Z than to that is, X
Z will be the bisectrix when the value of the intermediate index, /3, is nearer
to that of a than to that of 7. It is obvious (cf Fig. 575) that in this case, as
.
the angle diminishes and becomes nearly equal to zero, the form of the ellip-
soid then approaches that of the prolate spheroid of the positive uniaxial
crystal as its limit (Fig. 557, p. 256) this shows the appropriateness of the
;
+ sign here used.

On the other hand, the optic axes will lie nearer to than to Z that is, X
X will be the bisectrix if the value of the mean index is nearer to that of
7 than to that of a. Such a crystal, for which Bxa = X, is called optically

negative. In this case the smaller the angle the more the ellipsoid approaches
the oblate spheroid of the negative uniaxial crystal (Fig. 556, p. 256).
The following are a few examples of positive and negative biaxial crystals:
Positive (+). Negative (-).
Sulphur. Aragonite.
Enstatite. Hypersthene.
Topaz. Muscovite.
Barite. Orthoclase.
Chrysolite. Epidpte.
Albite. Axinite.
* when the indices satisfy the following equation:

The axial angle will equal 90
1 _! - I 1 '
a2 j8
2
ft
2
72
t For danburite axial angle
= 89 14' for green (thallium) and 90 14' for blue (CuSO 4).
401. Relation of the Axial Angle to the Refractive Indices. If in a
given case the values of a, 0, and 7 are known, the value of the interior optic
axial angle known as 2V; see also Art. 408, can be calculated from them by
the following formulas:
11 11
cos2 F P 7
2
or tan 2 V=
2
a2 7
Examination of Biaxial Crystals in Polarized Light

402. Sections in Parallel Polarized Light with Crossed Nicols.
Interference Colors. Thin sections of biaxial crystals when examined between
crossed nicols in general show some interference color. This color will depend
upon the following factors the thickness of the section,
: the thicker the sec-
tion the higher the order of color; the birefringence of the substance, the higher
the birefringence (i.e., the greater the difference between the values of a and
7) the higher the order of color; the optical orientation of the section, in gen-
eral, the nearer the section comes to being parallel to the optic axial plane,
in which he the vibration directions of the fastest and slowest rays, the higher
will be its birefringence and the order of its interference color.
Extinction Directions. A
section which, in general, is colored will show dur-
ing a complete revolution on the microscope stage four positions at 90 inter-
vals in which it appears dark. These are the positions of extinction, or are
those positions in which the vibration planes of the section coincide with those
of the nicols. When the directions of extinction of a section are parallel or
at right angles to a crystallographic axis or to the trace, upon the section, of
a crystallographic axial plane it is said to show parallel extinction. If the
extinction directions are not parallel to these
681
crystallographic directions the extinction is
said to be inclined.
For example, in Fig. 581, let the two larger
rectangular arrows represent the vibration
., 6
' directions for the two nicols, and between
which suppose a section of a biaxial crystal,
^-P abed, to be placed so that one edge of a known
crystallographic plane coincides with the direc-
tion of one of these lines. The vibration
directions of the section are indicated by the
dotted arrows and as in this position of the
section these directions do not coincide with the
vibration directions of the nicols the section will
appear light. The section will have to be turned to the position a'b'c'd'
in order to achieve this coincidence and so
bring about extinction. The
angle (indicated in the figure) which it has been necessary to revolve the
plate to obtain the effect described, is the angle which one of the vibration
directions in the given plate makes with the
given crystallographic edge ad',
it is called the extinction angle.
403. Measurement of the Extinction Angle. It frequently becomes
important to measure as accurately as possible the extinction angle of a sec-
tion. This is most commonly done with a microscope which is provided with
a revolving stage having a graduated circle for measuring angles of rotation.
In order to measure an extinction angle it is of course necessary to be able to
locate in the section some definite crystallographic direction. This is usually
provided by some crystal outline or cleavage crack. This crystallography
direction is brought parallel to one of the cross-hairs of the microscope and
the angular position of the microscope stage noted. Then the stage is rotated
until the section shows its maximum darkness. The angle between these two
positions is the angle of extinction desired. The difficulty in the measure-
ment lies in the accurate determination of the position of maximum extinction.
Frequently it is possible to rotate the microscope stage through an arc of one
to two degrees without any appreciable brightening of the field. It will help
in determining the point of maximum extinction if the plate is turned beyond
the point of extinction until the first faint illumination is observed and then
back in the other direction until the same strength of illumination occurs.
The point half way between these two positions should be very close to the
point desired. The measurements should be repeated a number of times and
the average taken. It is also advisable to make the measurements on both
sides of the position of the crystallographic direction. The illumination in
most cases had better be in the monochromatic sodium-light.
Various devices are used at times in order to increase the accuracy with
which the position of maximum extinction can be determined.* The sensi-
tive tint is sometimes used for this purpose. If this is inserted in the diagonal
slot of the microscope tube below the analyzer the field will be uniformly
colored red of the first order when the section on the microscope stage is at
the position of extinction. But if the section is turned, even very slightly,
from this position it will also affect the light and change the interference
color observed. The sensitive tint in specially favorable cases can be used
in this way to advantage but it has been shown that in the majority of cases
its use does not materially increase the accuracy of the measurements.
The power of quartz plates cut normal to the vertical crystallographic
axis to rotate the plane of polarization of light (see Art. 394) is used in other
devices to increase the accuracy of the measurement of the angle of extinction.
The Bertrand ocular contains four such sectors of quartz; two of these placed
diagonally opposite to each other are from a right-handed quartz crystal while
the other two are from a left-handed crystal. This ocular is inserted in the
microscope tube in place of the regular ocular; the analyzer is pushed out of
the microscope tube and a nicol prism mounted in an appropriate holder is
placed over the ocular. If this upper nicol is turned
about in various positions it will be noted that, in general,
opposite quadrants of the field are colored alike but differ
in color from the adjacent quadrants, see Fig. 582. But
when the plane of the cap nicol is exactly at right angles
to the plane of the polarizer below all four quadrants
show the same color. If a double refracting mineral
be placed on the stage of the microscope with its vibration
directions parallel to those of the nicols, since in this
Bertrand~Ocular
position it has no birefringent effect upon the light, the
field will still remain uniformly colored. But if the section is turned from its
*
Detailed descriptions of these various devices with comment on their accuracy are
given by F. E. Wright in The Methods of Petrographic-Microscopic Research.
position of extinction its birefringent effect is added to that of the two

opposite quadrants of the ocular and subtracted from that of the remaining
two. Consequently adjacent quadrants become differently colored. very A
slight rotation of the section is sufficient to produce an appreciable effect.
Another microscope accessory using the same principle as the Bertrand
ocular the so-called bi-quartz wedge plate described by Wright. This con-
is
sists oftwo adjacent plates of quartz cut normal to the c crystal axis, one from
a left-handed and the other from a right-handed crystal. Above these are
placed two wedges of quartz, a right-handed wedge above the left-handed
plate, etc. At the point where the wedge is equal in thickness to the plate
beneath there will be zero rotation of the light and between crossed nicols this
will produce a dark line across the field. As the distance increases from this
point the amount of rotation of the light increases equally but in opposite
directions on either side of the central dividing line of the plate. Both halves
of the plate will be equally illuminated if the mineral section is in the position
of extinction, but if the latter is turned so that it adds or subtracts its bire-
fringent effect to that of the quartz plate the two halves become differently
illuminated. By moving the plate in or out a position can be found where
this change in illumination is most marked. This quartz plate is used with
a special ocular provided with a slot in such a position that the quartz plate
may be introduced into the microscope tube at the focal plane of the ocular
and with the medial line of the plate parallel to the plane of vibration of the
polarizer. A cap nicol is used above the ocular.
404. Determination of the Birefringence with the Microscope. The
value of the maximum birefringence (7 a) is obviously given at once when
the refractive indices are known. It can be approximately estimated for a
section of proper orientation and of measured thickness by noting the inter-
ference-color as described in Art. 347.
405. Determination of the Relative Refractive Power. The relative
refractive power of the two vibration-directions in a thin section is readily
determined with the microscope (in parallel polarized light) by the method of
compensation. This Is applicable to any section, whatever its orientation and
whether uniaxial or biaxial. The methods employed have already been
described in Art 348.
A crystal-section is said to have positive elongation if its direction of exten-
sion approximately coincides with the ether-axis Z; if with X the elongation
is negative. The same terms are also used, in general, according to the relative
refractivepower of the two directions.
406.Determination of the Indices of Refraction of a Biaxial Mineral.
The indices of refraction of a biaxial mineral are determined by the same
methods as outlined previously, see Art. 327, the only modification introduced
being necessitated by the fact that three principal indices, a, ft and 7, are to
be determined.
Measurement of the Angles of Refraction by Means of Prisms. Two or
three prisms must be used to determine the three indices. If three prisms
are used they are cut so that their edges are
parallel respectively to the X, F,
and Z directions of the mineral. In the case of an orthorhombic mineral, in
which these directions are parallel to the directions of the three
crystallo-
graphic axes, the prism edges would have to be respectively parallel to the
a, b, and c crystal axes. In crystals of the monoclinic and triclinic systems
the proper orientation of the three prisms is a matter of considerable
difficulty.
Each such prism will yield two refracted and polarized rays but only the one
whose light has its vibrations parallel to the edge of the prism (to be deter-
mined by the use of a nicol) is considered. In certain cases all three indices
may be obtained from two prisms. If one prism is cut so that not only is its
edge parallel to one of the directions X, Y, and Z but so that its medial plane
contains not only this direction but one other, then by the use of the method
of minimum deviation an index may be determined from each of the two
refracted rays. Or with a small angle prism cut so that one of its faces con-
tains two of these directions the corresponding two indices may be determined
when the method of perpendicular incidence is used upon this face. In mak-
ing these measurements it is important to note the crystallographic directions
parallel to which the different rays vibrate. In this way the optical orienta-
tion in respect to the crystallographic directions can be determined.
Method of Total Reflection. The method of total reflection for determining
the indices of refraction of a biaxial mineral has the obvious advantage that
only polished plates of the mineral are required instead of carefully orientated
prisms. In general, the plane surface of a plate will give with the total
refractometer two boundaries of total reflection. Both of these shadows move
when the section is rotated. Four readings should be taken corresponding
to the maximum and minimum positions of each boundary. The largest and
smallest angles read will give on calculation the values for the greatest and
least indices of refraction, i.e., j and a. The mean index of refraction, 0, can
be derived from one of the other measurements. There are certain more or
less complicated methods by which these two intermediate readings can be
tested in order to prove which is the correct one for the index |8. It is com-
monly simpler to make use of another plate having a different crystallographic
orientation. It will be found that in the second plate one of the intermediate
angles corresponds with one already observed on the first plate while the
second angle shows no such correspondence. The angle that is common to
the two plates is the one desired. If the plate is orientated so that its plane
contains two of the three optical directions, X, Y and Z, all three indices can
be obtained easily from the single plate. In this case one of the boundaries
of total reflection is stationary for different positions of the plate. This
corresponds to the ray whose vibrations are normal to the surface of the plate.
The other boundary will vary its position as the plate is rotated and yield at
its maximum and minimum positions the angles corresponding to the other
two indices of refraction.
407. Sections of Biaxial Crystals in Convergent Polarized Light. - In
general, sections of biaxial crystals when examined in convergent polarized
light show interference figures. The best and most symmetrical figures are
to be observed when the section has been cut perpendicular to a bisectrix,
and preferably to the acute bisectrix. If such a section is examined under
the conditions described in the case of uniaxial crystals, see Art. 389, figures
similar to those shown in Fig. 583 will be observed. When the axial plane,
i.e., the plane including the two optic axes, lies parallel to the
direction of
vibration of the polarizer the figure is similar to that of Fig. 583, A. When
these two directions are inclined at a 45 angle the figure is like that shown in
Fig. 583, B.
First consider the interference figure in the parallel position, Fig. 583, A
and when viewed in monochromatic light. It consists of two black bars that
form a cross somewhat similar to the cross of a uniaxial figure. The horizon-
talbar is thinner and better denned than the vertical one. About two points
on the horizontal bar, there will be observed a concentric series of dark ellip-
tical curves which, as they enlarge, coalesce, forming first a figure eight and
583
Biaxial Interference Figures
then a double curve. As the section is rotated on the microscope or polar-

iscope stage, the black bars forming the cross separate at the center and curve
across the field pivoting on these points until at the 45 position, Fig. 583, B,
they form the two arms of a hyperbola.
A biaxial mineral has two directions, the directions of the optic axes, along
which light travels with no double refraction. At these points there would
be no birefringence and consequently dark spots would result. As the paths
of the light rays become inclined to the directions of the optic axes the light
suffers double refraction and in increasing degree as the amount of inclination
becomes greater. Consequently at short distances away from these points
the light must be refracted into two rays which have a difference of phase of
one wave-length for a certain colored light, the yellow of the sodium flame in
this case. The result will be extinguishment at such points. The assem-
blage of all points where the difference of phase equals one wave-length yields
the first dark elliptical-like curve, called a lemniscate, shown in the figure.
ire.
Further out will be found curves embracing the points where the difference o"
phase is two wave-lengths, three wave-lengths, etc.
If the interference figure is viewed in daylight instead of the monochr TOV i
niatic light the black curves will be replaced by colored ones. Each colored
curve is produced by the elimination from the white light of some particular
wave-length of light on account of the interference explained above.
The convergent bundle of light rays that pass through the section will each
have its own particular plane of vibration. The directions of the planes of
vibration for light emerging from the section at any given point can be found,
as explained in Art. 397, by bisecting the angles made by two lines connecting
this point with the two points of emergence of the optic axes. Fig. 584 shows
how the direction of vibration of the two rays emerging from given points
can be obtained in this way. These directions of vibration vary over the
field and consequently some of them must always be parallel or very nearly
so to the planes of vibration of the nicol prisms. When this happens the light
is extinguished and darkness results. This explains the formation of the black
bars of the interference figure. Fig. 585 shows the bars in the crossed position
and Fig. 586 when separated into the hyperbola arms. As the section is
turned the vibration directions of new points successively become parallel
to the planes of the nicols and so the dark bars sweep and curve across the field.
584 585 586
With a thick section or one of a mineral of high birefringence, the number

of colored curves (when the figure is viewed in daylight) is greater than with
a thinner section or one with low birefringence. An instructive experiment
can be made by noting the changes in the interference figure obtained from a
section of muscovite as the mineral is cleaved into thinner and thinner sheets.
In most rock sections the minerals are ground so thin that their interference
figures do not show any colored curves but rather only the dark hyperbola
bars.
The biaxial interference figure varies in appearance with the change in
the angle between the optic axes. Where this angle is very small the figure
becomes practically the same as that of a uniaxial crystal. Where this
angle becomes greater than 60 the points of the emergence of the optic axes
will commonly lie outside the microscope field. In the latter case the hyper-
bola arms will appear as the section is brought into the parallel position, form
a cross, and then as the section is further revolved will curve out of the field
again. The larger the axial angle the more rapidly will the bars disappear
from the field. A comparative measurement of the axial angles of two
minerals can be made by noting the angle through which the microscope stage
has to be turned in order to cause the bars to leave the field. The system of
lenses must be kept the same for the two experiments. Or by experimenting
with various minerals with known axial angles a scale could be derived for a
certain microscope and system of lenses so that the axial angle of any other
mineral could be approximately measured in this way.
A symmetrical interference figure may also be obtained from a section cut
perpendicular to the obtuse bisectrix. In general, the obtuse axial angle is
considerably larger than the acute angle and the interference figure will differ
therefore in this respect from that obtained from the section cut perpendicular
to the acute bisectrix.
It is important to be able to recognize the biaxial interference figures
which are obtained from inclined sections. They are chiefly characterized
by the fact that the hyperbola bars curve as they cross the field. This charac-
teristic distinguishes the figure from an eccentric uniaxial figure in which the
bars of the cross move in straight lines as the section is turned. Fig. 587
shows in the row A a series illustrating the appearance in different positions
inclined to the bisectrix. In row B,

of the figure when the section is slightly
cut to an optic axis and the hyper-
a series where the section is perpendicular
bola bar revolves in the field as upon a pivot.
In this case the bar curves
687
Eccentric Biaxial Interference Figures
with its convex side toward the acute bisectrix. If the axial angle was 90
there would be no distinction between acute and obtuse bisectrices and the
bar would then revolve as a straight line. Therefore such a figure indicates
by the amount of the curvature of the bar the size of the axial angle. The
figures given by planes cut nearly normal to an optic axis are often of great
use in the optical examination of a mineral. Sections which will furnish them
are easily found by noting those sections of the mineral that remain dark or
nearly so during their rotation between crossed nicols. If the single bar
shown in such a figure exhibits a decided curvature it indicates that the
direction of the acute bisectrix is not very much inclined to the plane of the
section and consequently its character, whether X
or Z, can be determined by
noting the character of that extinction direction which symmetrically bisects
the curve. From this observation the positive or negative character of the
mineral can be determined. In row C, Fig. 587, is shown a series of figures
where the section has a still greater inclination. A section cut parallel to the
axial plane does not give a decisive interference figure. Often it is difficult to
distinguish it from the figure obtained from a section cut parallel to the optic
axis of a uniaxial mineral, see Art. 392. It should be pointed out that, while
in general the interference figures of these two optical classes are to be clearly
distinguished from each other, cases may arise in which such differentiation
is difficult ifnot impossible.
408. Measurement of the Axial Angle. The determination of the angle
made by the optic axes is most accurately accomplished by use of the instru-
ment shown in Fig. 588. The section of the crystal, cut at right angles to the
bisectrix, is held in the pincers at p, with the plane of the axes horizontal, and
making an angle of 45 with the vibration-plane of the nicols. There is a
cross-wire in the focus of the eyepiece, and as the pincers holding the section
are turned by the screw at the top (here omitted) one of the axes, that is, one
black hyperbola, is brought in coincidence with the vertical cross-wire, and
then,by a further revolution, the second. The angle which the section has
been turned from one axis to the second, as read off at the vernier on the
graduated circle above, is the apparent angle for the axes of the given crystal
688
Axial Angle Apparatus
as seen in the air (aca = 2E, Fig. 589). It is only the apparent angle, for, on
passing from the section of the crystal to the air, the true axial angle is more or
less increased, according to the refractive power of the given crystal. The
relation between the real interior angle and
the measured angle is given below.
If the axial angle is large, the axes may
suffer total reflection. In this case some
oilor liquid with a high refractive power
is interposed so that the axes will no
longer be totally reflected but emerge into
the liquid and thence into the air. In the
instrument described a small receptacle
holding the oil is brought between the
tubes, as seen in the figure, and the pincers
holding the section are immersed in this
and the angle measured as before.
In the majority of cases it is only the
acute axial angle that it is practicable to Measurement of Axial Angle
measure; but sometimes, especially when
oil (or other liquid) is made use of, the obtuse angle can also be
determined
from a second section normal to the obtuse bisectrix.
If E = the apparent semi-acute axial angle in air (Fig. 589),
" u "
H =a
"
" "
in oil,
Ho = semi-obtuse angle in oil,

Va = the (real or interior) semi-acute angle,
V =
the (real or interior) semi-obtuse angle,
n =
refractive index for the oil or other medium,
|8
= the mean refractive index for the given crystallized substance,
the following simple relations connect the various quantities mentioned:
Bin E= sin 7; sin E = n sin H a; sin Va = sin H a; sin V = sin H .
^ ^
These formulas give the true interior angle (2F) from the measured
apparent angle in air (2E) or in oil (2H) when the mean refractive index (0)
is known.
409. Axial Angle Measured with the Microscope. Approximate measurements of
the axial angle may be made by various methods with the microscope. In most cases some
sort of a micrometer ocular is used which contains an engraved scale. By means of this
scale the distance between the points of emergence of the optic axes can be determined.
Mallard * showed that the distance of any point from the center of the interference figure
as observed in the microscope is very closely the same as the sine of the angle which the
ray emerging at this point makes with the axis of the microscope. The Mallard equation
for the derivation of the axial angle is = D K
sin E, in which D
equals one half the meas-
ured distance between the optic axes and K
a constant which varies with the microscope
and the system of lenses used. K
for a given set of lenses may be determined by observing
the interference figures derived from plates of minerals with known axial angles and then
substituting the values for D
and E
in the above equation. The angular values of the
divisions on the micrometer scale of the ocular may also be determined directly by the use
of an instrument known as the apertometer. The measurement of an axial angle by means
of the microscope is naturally most easily accomplished when the points of emergence of
both optic axes are visible in the field. It is possible, however, by various ingenious methods
to determine its value when only one optic axis is in view. These methods are too com-
plicated and too seldom used to be explained here and the reader is referred to the text
books on the methods of petrographic investigation- for their details, f
410. Determination of the Optical Character of a Biaxial Mineral
from Its Interference Figure. Use of the Quartz Wedge. If the section
is turned until its interference figure is in the 45 position and then the quartz
wedge inserted above the section through the 45 slot in the microscope tube
the vibration directions of the section along a line that joins the optical axes
and a line at right angles to this through the center of the figure will be paral-
lel to the vibration directions of the quartz-wedge. Under these circum-
stances the effect of the introduction of the quartz wedge will be to gradually
increase or diminish along these lines the birefringence due to the section alone.
If the directions of vibration of the faster and slower rays in the quartz coin-
cide with the vibration directions of the similar rays in the section, the total
birefringence will be increased and the effect upon the interference figure will
be as if the section had been thickened. Complete interference will take place
with rays of less obliquity and the colored curves will be drawn closer together.
They will move, as the quartz wedge is pushed in over the section, as indicated
by the arrows shown in Fig. 590. On the other hand, if the quartz wedge is so
placed that its optical orientation is opposed to that of the section, the effect
will be the same as if the section was being gradually thinned. The colored
rings about the points of the optic axes will expand until they meet in the cen-
ter as a figure eight and then grow outwards as a continuous curve. The
directions of their movements are shown by the arrows in Fig. 591. There-
fore, by knowing the optical orientation of the quartz-wedge and noting the
*
Bull. Soc. Min., 6, 7787, 1882.
See especially Wright, The Methods of Petrographic Microscopic
t Research, and
Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic Methods.
effect of its introduction over a section

upon the interference figure, it is pos-
sible to determine the relative character of the two extinction
important
directions of the sections; that is, to determine whether the
ray vibrating in
the plane which includes the optic axes is faster or slower than the one which
vibrates in the plane at right angles to this direction.
In the case of a positive mineral the acute bisectrix, which in a sym-
metrical interference figure is the direction normal to the section, is the
direction Z. Consequently the direction of the line in the section which
passes through the points of emergence of the two optic axes is the direction
of the obtuse bisectrix, or in this case the direction X. The direction Y then
will lie in the plane of the section and at right
angles to the line joining the
points of emergence of the optic axes. In the case, therefore, of a positive
Determination of Optical Character of Biaxial Mineral with Quartz Wedge
mineral, the faster ray has its vibrations lying in the optical axial plane
With a negative mineral the X
direction becomes the acute bisectrix and
will be normal to the section, while the direction Z will lie in the section
along the line connecting the points of emergence of the optic axes. With
a negative mineral, therefore, the vibration direction which lies in the
optical axial plane is of the slower ray. By finding, therefore, the
relative character of these two vibration directions the optical char-
acter of the mineral is determined. The effects produced by an
interference figure which is perpendicular to an obtuse bisectrix would be
exactly opposite to those described above. It is imperative, therefore, that
the positions of the two bisectrices be definitely known. With sections that
are very thin or with minerals of low birefringence the interference figure may
show only the black hyperbolas without any colored rings. In such cases,
frequently the introduction of the quartz wedge in such a position that its
optical orientation is parallel to that of the section will suffice to so thicken
the section in effect as to cause the appearance of colored rings. Further, with
such sections it is possible to establish the directions in the section that are
parallel and at right angles to the trace upon the section of the optical axial
plane. Then, by use of the sensitive tint, when the convergent lens has been
removed the character of the vibrations parallel to these two directions is
easily determined.
411. Absorption Phenomena of Biaxial Crystals. Pleochroism.

Colored biaxial crystals like similar uniaxial crystals may show different de-
grees or kinds of absorption of the light passing through
them depending upon
the direction of vibration of the light. In biaxial crystals there may be three
different degrees of absorption corresponding to three different directions of
vibration lying at right angles to each other. In general, these directions co-
incide with the optical directions X, F, and Z. Variations from this parallel-
ism may be observed, however, in crystals of the monoclinic and triclinic
the absorption as it is ob-
systems. It is customary, however, to describe
served parallel to the directions X, Y, and Z. If light vibrating parallel to
X is the most absorbed and light vibrating parallel to Z is the least absorbed
these facts are expressed asX > Y > Z. There are various other possibili-
ties, such as X
> Y = Z, Z > X
> F, etc. Further, according to the kind
of selective absorption, the crystal may show distinctly different colors for
light vibrating in the different directions, or in general show pleochr9ism.
'
The character of the pleochroism is stated by giving the colors correspond-

ing to the vibrations parallel to X, F, and Z. For instance, in the case of
riebeckite, X= deep blue, F = light blue, Z = yellow-green. In order to
investigate the absorption properties of a biaxial crystal at least two sections
(
must be obtained in which will lie the directions X, F, and Z. These sec-
tions are examined on the stage of the polariscope or microscope without the
upper nicol. They will show as they are rotated upon the stage, variations
in absorption and in color as the light passing through them vibrates parallel to
first one and then the other of their vibration directions. See the discussion
of dichroism in uniaxial minerals, Art. 393.
When a section cut normal to an optic axis of a crystal characterized by a high degree
of color-absorption is examined by the eye alone (or with the microscope) in strongly con-
verging light, it often shows the so-called epoptic figures, polarization-brushes, or houppes
somewhat resembling the ordinary axial interference-figures. This is true of andalusite,
epidote, iolite, also tourmaline, etc. A cleavage section of epidote ||c(001) held close to the
eye and looked through to a bright sky shows the polarization-brushes, here brown on a
green ground. These figures are caused by the light being differently absorbed as it passes
through the section with different degrees of inclination.
In certain minerals small circular or elliptical spots may be observed in which the pleo-
chroism is stronger than in the surrounding mineral. These are commonly spoken of as
pleochroic halos. They are found to surround minute inclusions of some other mineral.
There have been many diverse theories to account for these ''halos" but recently it has
been shown that they are probably due to some radioactive property of the inclosed crystal.
Pleochroic halos have been observed in biotite, iolite, andalusite, pyroxene, hornblende,
tourmaline, etc., while the included crystals belong to allanite, rutile, titanite, zircon, apa-
tite, etc.
Special Optical Characters of Orthorhombic Crystals

412. Position of the Ether-axis. In the ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM, in
accordance with the symmetry of the crystallization, the three axes of the
indicatrix, that is, the directions X, F, and Z, coincide with the three crystal-
lographic axes, and the three crystallographic axial planes of symmetry cor-
respond to the planes of symmetry of the ellipsoid. Further than this, there
is no immediate relation between the two sets of axes in
respect to magnitude,
for the reason that, as has been stated, the choice of the
crystallographic
axes is arbitrary so far as relative length and position are concerned, and hence
made, in most cases, without reference to the optical character.
Sections of an orthorhombic crystal parallel to a pinacoid plane (a (100),
6(010), or c(001)) appear dark between crossed nicols, when the axial directions
coincide with the vibration-planes of the nicols; in other
words, such sections
show parallel extinction.
The same is true of all sections that are
parallel to one of the three crys-
tallographic axes, i.e., sections lying in the prism, macrodome and brachydome
zones. Sections, however, that are inclined to all three crystallographic
axes, i.e., pyramidal sections, will show inclined extinction.
413. Determination of the Plane of the Optic Axes. The plane of
the optic axes, that is, the plane including the directions X and Z, must be
parallel to one of the three pinacoids. Further, the acute bisectrix must be
normal to one of the two pinacoids that are at right angles to the optic axial
plane while the obtuse bisectrix is normal to the other such pinacoid. The
optical orientation, i.e., the relation between the principal optical and crystal-
lographic directions, can be easily determined by the examination of sections
of a crystal which are cut parallel to the three pinacoids. To illustrate by
an example, let it be assumed that such sections of the mineral aragonite are
available. These are represented in Fig. 592, A, B, and C. If the relative
414. Dispersion of the Optic Axes in Orthorhombic Crystals. In

determining the indices of refraction of a crystal by
means of the prism method
is of white light the refracted ray
it is to be noted that when the incident ray
will in general show this white light dispersed into

its primary colors. The
amount of this dispersion is usually small but in certain substances becomes
considerable. Obviously since the angle of refraction varies in this way
with the different wave-lengths of light the indices of refraction will also vary.
In biaxial minerals, as already stated, the optic axial angle is directly depend-
ent upon the relative values of the three indices of refraction, a, 0, and y.
As these indices may show considerable differences, depending upon the
wave-length of the refracted ray, it follows
that the optic axial angle will also vary with
the color of the light used. In other words,
the optic axes may be dispersed. Fig. 593
represents such a case in which the angle
between the optic axes for red light is
greater than that for blue. The opposite
condition may hold, in which the angle for
blue is greater than for red. From this it
follows that the interference figure when
observed in blue light will not exactly co-
incide with that produced by rod light.
The bisectrices of both figures will be the
same but the position of the points where
the optic axes emerge will be different and
consequently the positions of the hyper-
bolas and lemniscate curves will also be
orthorhombic Ditpemoo
different. In the case of orthorhombic
crystals the dispersion will always be symmetrical to the two symmetry
planes of the indicatrix that pass through the acute bisectrix, i.e., the direc-
tions M-M and N-N 594 595
in Figs. 594 and 595. A A
This particular type of
dispersion is said to be
Orthorhombic Disper-
sion, in order to distin-
guish it from that ob-
served in biaxial crys-
tals of other systems.
The two possible cases
of orthorhombic disper- N
sion are shown in Figs.
594 and 595. In expres-
two cases the Orthorhombic Dispersion
sing these
Greek and v (for violet) are used. When the axes for red
letters p (for red)
light are more dispersed than those for blue that fact is expressed as p > v
or in the reverse case it is p < v.
In the majority of cases the effect produced upon the interference figure
by the dispersion of the optic axes is too slight to be noted. In exceptional
cases where the amount of dispersion is large the effects are clearly seen. The
hyperbola bars, which are ordinarily black throughout, will, when the figure
is light, be seen, near the center, to be bordered on one side

observed in white
by a red fringeand on the other by a blue one. The first one or two of the
colored lemniscates will also be broadened out along the line joining the two
optic axes. As already stated these changes in the appearance of the figure
will always be symmetrical in respect to the traces of the two symmetry
planes
596 597
'Blue -Red
Orthorhombic Dispersion
lying at right angles to each other. In the case, Fig. 594, where the axes for
red light are farther apart than those for blue (p >
v), the hyperbolas in the
interference figure for the two different wave-lengths of light will not coincide
and the ones where the red light is extinguished will be farther out than those
for blue light. When red light is taken out of the white light, blue remains,
and conversely when blue is subtracted the resultant color is red. Conse-
quently in this case the hyperbola bars will be bordered on their concave sides
by blue and on their convex sides by red, Fig. 596. In the other case, where
p < v, the hyperbolas will be bordered on their concave sides by red and on
their convex sides by blue, Fig. 597. In other words, if blue light shows at the
larger angle it means that red light has been eliminated from these positions
and the optic axes for red are more dispersed than those for blue, etc.
Special Optical Characters of Monoclinic Crystals

415. Optical Orientation of Monoclinic Crystals. In monoclinic crys-
stals there is one axis of symmetry, the b crystallographic axis, and one plane
of symmetry, the plane of the a and c crystallographic axes. These are the
only crystallographic elements that are definitely fixed in position. One of
the three chief optical directions, X, Y, or Z, is coincident with the 6 crystal-
lographic axis, while the other two lie in the symmetry plane, (010), but not
parallel to any crystal direction. There are obviously three possible cases.
If Y coincides with the axis b (and this is apparently the most common case)
the directions Xand Z will lie in the crystal symmetry plane, which therefore
becomes the optic axial plane. If Xor Z coincides with the" 6 axis the optic
axial plane will be at right angles to (010) and either the acute or obtuse bisec-
trix -will be normal to that plane. This clino-pinacoid of a monoclinic crystal
is usually the best plane upon which to study its optical orientation. Fig.
598 represents such a section cleaved from an ordinary crystal of gypsum.
The cleavages parallel to (100) and (111) will serve to give its crystallo-
graphic orientation. Examination of the section in convergent light fails to
show a distinct interference figure, consequently it is to be assumed that the
section itself is parallel to the optic axial plane and that the direction Y is
normal to the section. the section is rotated on the microscope stage

When
between crossed nicols extinction directions are seen to be inclined to the
its
direction of the c crystallographic axis, the angle of inclination being measured

as 52J. The relative character of the two extinction directions can be
easily determined by the use of the quartz wedge
598 and so the position of X and Z established. In
this way the orientation of the X, Y and Z
directions can be determined. It is also pos-
sible from this section to determine whether
to (111)
the mineral is optically positive or negative. If
the section is viewed in convergent light a some-
what vague interference figure is observed.
When the section is turned from its position of
extinction it will be noted that faint dark
hyperbolas rapidly move out of the field.
Careful observation will show that they disappear
(100) more slowly into one set of -quadrants than into
the other. The line the opposite
bisecting
quadrants into which the hyperbola bars
disappear more slowly is the direction of the
acute bisectrix. The X
or Z character of this
direction can be determined and from this the
positive or negative character of the mineral. In
Optical Orientation of Gypsum a similar way the clino-pinacoid section of crystals
belonging to the two other possible classes would
yield data concerning their optical orientations.
416. Extinction in Monoclinic Crystals. Since only one of the three
principal optical directions, X, F, or Z, of a monoclinic crystal coincides with
a crystallographic axis, namely the symmetry axis 6, it follows that only sec-
tions that are parallel to this axis, i.e., sections 599
in the orthodome zone, will show parallel
extinction. All other sections will exhibit
inclined extinction.
417. Dispersion in Monoclinic Crystals. -
As previously stated there are three possible
optical orientations of a monoclinic crystal. In
the first case the vibration direction coincidesY
with that of the symmetry axis 6 and the optic
axial plane coincides with the symmetry plane
(010). In the other cases either the vibration
direction X
or Z coincides with the crystal-
lographic axis b and the optic axial plane is at
right angles to "the crystallographic symmetry
plane. Under these conditions either the acute
or obtuse bisectrix may coincide with the axis b.
Each of these three possibilities may produce a
different kind of dispersion. It should be em-
phasized that the phenomenon of dispersion is
seldom to be clearly observed and then com-
in unusually thick mineral sections. Inclined Dispersion
monly only
Case 1. Inclined Dispersion. Inclined dispersion is observed in the case
where the directionY coincides with the axis 6. This is illustrated in Fig. 599.
In this case not only may the axial angles vary for light of different
wave-lengths but -the bisectrices of these angles may lie along different lines.
600 601
Red
Inclined Dispersion, p=*v
So, here, both the optical axes and the bisectrices may be dispersed. In Fig.
599 with p > v the angle between the optic axes for red light is greater than
that for blue. But because of the
602
dispersion of the bisectrices it follows
that on one side the point of emergence
of the optic axis for red light lies beyond
that for blue, while on the other side
the conditions are reversed. Also the
optic axes for red and blue will be
farther apart on one side of the interfer-
ence figure than on the other side.
With this sort of dispersion the interfer-
ence figure will be symmetrical only in r all Colon
respect to the line which is the trace
upon the section of the optic axial plane,
N-N, Fig. 600, but is unsymmetrical to J
the line at right angles to it, M-M.

Inclined dispersion is shown in the
interference figure by the fact that the
colored borders to the hyperbola bars
are reversed in the two cases, i.e., if blue
is on the concave side of one, red will
be on the concave side of the other. Horizontal Dispersion
Further, tho amount of dispersion shown
is much greater with one bar than with the other. Fig. 601 represents a
case of inclined dispersion.
Case 2. Horizontal Dispersion. In this case the crystallographic axis b
coincides with the obtuse bisectrix which may be either the X
or Z direction,
depending upon whether the crystal is optically positive or negative in charac-
ter. In this case the direction of the obtuse bisectrix is fixed for light of all
wave-lengths. The angle between the optic axes may vary and further the
position of the acute bisectrix may vary as long as it lies in the crystallographic
symmetry plane. In other words, the axial planes may be dispersed, see
Fig. 602. The points of emergence of the optic axes, when p > v, for blue and
red light, might therefore be like that shown in Fig. 603. It will be noted that
in this case the interference figure (obtained of course from a section approx-
imately perpendicular to the acute bisectrix) is symmetrical

to the line M-M
but unsymmetrical in respect to the line N-N. Fig. 604 shows the effect of
horizontal dispersion upon the interference figure.
603 604
Axis for Red
p Axis for Blue

P
Horizontal Dispersion. p>v

Case 3. Crossed ion. In this case the crystallographic axis b
605, coincides with the acute bisectrix,
which may be either the X
or Z direc-
tion depending upon the optical char-
acter of the crystal. In this case the
direction of the acute bisectrix is fixed
for light of all wave-lengths. The
Red angle between the optic axes may vary
and further the position of the axial
planes for different wave-lengths may
vary as long as they remain perpendic-
r all Colors ular to the crystallographic symmetry
plane. A case of this sort is shown
in Fig. 605. The points of emer-
Blue gence of the optic axes when p > v f or
blue and red light might therefore be
like that shown in Fig. 606. It will be
seen that in this case the figure is sym-
metrical to neither the line M-M nor
N-N but only to the central point of
the figure, i.e., the point of emergence
Crossed Dispersion
of the acute bisectrix. Fig. 607 shows
the effect of crossed dispersion upon the interference figure.
606 607
Crossed Dispersion p>v

Special Optical Characters of Triclinic Crystals

418. Optical Orientation of Triclinic Crystals. The center of the
optical ellipsoidal figure coincides with the center of the system of crystallo-
graphic axes but there is no further correspondence between optical and crys-
tallographic directions.
419. Extinction in Triclinic Crystals. Since there is no parallel rela-
tion existing between optical and crystallographic directions in triclinic crys-
tals all sections will show inclined extinction.
420. Dispersion in Triclinic Crystals. Because of the lack of coinci-
dence between any optical and crystallographic direction in triclinic crystals it
follows that the optic axes and bisectrices for different wave-lengths of light
may be dispersed in any direction. Consequently the dispersion shown in
an interference figure obtained from a triclinic crystal is irregular and without
symmetry.
421. Suggestions as to Methods and Order of Optical Tests upon an
Unknown Mineral. Preparation of Material. The size and character of
the fragments or section of a mineral to be studied will depend upon various
circumstances. In the majority of cases it will probably be most convenient
to crush the mineral into small uniform sized fragments. In other cases a
cleavage flake of the mineral will serve, and under still other conditions it may
be preferable to cut an unorientated or, better, an orientated section. For at
least the preliminary examination small irregular fragments of varying orienta-
tion will most often be used. Take a few of these mineral grains and place
them upon an object glass and immerse ^them either in Canada balsam or in
some oil with known refractive index and cover with a piece of thin cover
glass. In the majority of cases it will prove more expeditious and conven-
ient to place the fragments in an oil.
Order of Optical Tests. Below is given a brief outline of the natural order
of observations and tests to be made upon the mineral.
1. Observations in plane polarized light without the upper nicol.
a. Note color of mineral, whether uniform or not.
b. By rotating slide on microscope stage test for possible pleochroism.
If the mineral exhibits pleochroism it cannot be isotropic. Con-
nect as far as possible the directions of absorption with crystal-
lographic directions.
c. Note crystal outline, any; cleavage cracks, etc.
if
d. Note any inclusions, and arrangement.

their shape
e. Index of refraction. Determine approximately the refractive index.
Note character of relief and determine whether mineral has a
higher or lower index than the medium in which it is immersed
(see Art. 325).
2. Observations in plane polarized light with crossed nicols.
a. If the section is dark between crossed nicols and remains so during
the rotation of the stage the mineral is either isotropic or
orientated perpendicular to an optic axis. In the latter case test
as indicated below under 3a.
b. If the section is alternately light and dark during the rotation of the
stage the mineral is anisotropic.
c. Note position of extinction directions. If they are inclined to some
known crystallographic direction measure the angle of inclina-
tion.
d. Determine the relative character of the two vibration directions of

the section (i.e., the two extinction directions), as to which cor-
responds to the faster and which to the slower ray. Test to be
made with quartz wedge or sensitive tint, see Art. 348.
e. Find the grain showing the highest order of interference color and
so approximately determine the strength of the mineral's bire-
fringence.
/. By immersion in oils of known refractive indices determine as
accurately as possible the range of the refractive indices shown
by the mineral. It may be possible in connection with tests
made under 3 to determine the values for certain of the prin-
.
cipal refractive indices.
3. Observations in convergent polarized light with crossed nicols.
a. Note whether the mineral shows an interference figure, and if so
whether it is uniaxial or biaxial.
6. If mineral is uniaxial determine the position of the optic axis in
respect to the plane of the given section and if possible determine

the positive or negative character of the mineral.
c. If the mineral is biaxial determine the position of the axial plane in
respect to the section. Determine, if possible, the positive or
negative character of the mineral. Obtain, if possible, an approx-
imate idea as to the size of the axial angle. Note any evidences
of dispersion.
Note. In making the above tests it is helpful to keep, as far as possible,
a graphic record of the results, something like that illustrated in Fig. 592.
422. Effect of Heat upon Optical Characters. The general effects of
heat upon crystals as regards expansion, etc., are spoken of later. It is con-
venient, however, to consider here, briefly, the changes produced by this
means in the special optical characters. It is assumed that no alteration of
the chemical composition takes place and no abnormal change in molecular
structure. In general, the effect of a temperature change causes a change in
the refractive indices. In the majority of cases the indices decrease in
value with rise of temperature but in certain cases the reverse is true. It
is consequently important in any exact statement of a refractive index to
give the temperature at which it was determined. The particular facts for
the different optical classes are as follows :
(1) Isotropic crystals remain isotropic at all temperatures. Crystals, how-

ever, which, like sodium chlorate (NaClO 3 of Class 5, p. 72), show circular
polarization may have their rotatory power altered; in this substance it is in-
creased by rise of temperature.
(2) Uniaxial crystals similarly remain uniaxial with rise or fall of tempera-
ture; the only change noted is a variation in the relative values of co and e, that
is, in the strength of the double refraction. This increases, for example, with
calcite and grows weaker with beryl and quartz. It is, further, interesting to
note that the rotatory power of quartz increases with rise of temperature, but
the relation for all parts of the spectrum remains sensibly the same.
(3) With Biaxial crystals, the effect of change of temperature varies with
the system to which they belong.
The axial angle of biaxial crystals may be measured at any required temperature by the
use of a metal air-bath. This is placed at P (Fig. 588) and extends
beyond the instrument
on either side, so as to allow of its being heated with
gas-burners; a thermometer inserted
in the bath makes it possible to regulate the temperature as may be desired. This bath has
two openings, closed with glass plates, corresponding to the two tubes carrying the lenses,
and the crystal-section, held as usual in the pincers, is seen through these glass windows.
Suitable accessories to the refractometer also allow of the measurement of the refractive
indices at different temperatures.
In the case of orthorhombic crystals, the position of the three rectangular

ether-axes cannot alter, since they must always coincide with the crystallo-
graphic axes. The values of the refractive indices, however, may change, and
hence with them also the optic axial angle; indeed a change of axial plane or
of the optical character is thus possible.
With monodinic crystals, one ether-axis must coincide at all temperatures
with the axis of symmetry, but the position of the other two in the plane of
symmetry may alter, and this, with the possible change in the value of the
refractive indices, may cause a variation in the degree (or kind) of dispersion as
well as in the axial angle.
With triclinic crystals, both the positions of the ether-axes and the values
of the refractive indices may change. The observed optical characters may
therefore vary widely.
A striking example of the change of optical characters with change of temperature is
furnished by gypsum, as investigated by Des Cloizeaux. At ordinary temperatures, the
dispersion is inclined, the optic axial plane is 6(010) and 2Er = 95. As the temperature
||
rises this angle diminishes; thus, at 47, 2Er = 76; at 95, 2Er = 39; and at 116, 2Er = 0.
At this last temperature the axes for blue rays have already separated in a plane _1_ 6(010);
at 120 the axes for red rays also separate in this plane (_L 6) and the dispersion becomes
horizontal. The motion toward the center of one red axis is more rapid than that of the
other, namely, between 20 and 95, one axis moves 33 55' while the other moves only
22 38'; thus Bx r moves 5 38'.
Another interesting case is that of glauberite. Its optical characters under normal con-
ditions are described as follows: Optically .Ax. pi. J_ 6(010), Bx a r A c axis =
. 31 3',
Bxa.y A c axis = -30 46', Bx a .bi A c axis = -30 10'. The optical character (-) and
the position of the axes of elasticity remain sensibly constant between and 100. The
ax. pi., however, at first _l_ 6(010) with horizontal dispersion and v < p becomes on rise of
temperature 6 with inclined dispersion and v > p. The axial angle accordingly diminishes
1 1
to at a temperature depending upon the wave-length and then increases in the new
plane. In white light, therefore, the interference-figures are abnormal and change with
rise in temperature.
Des Cloizeaux found that the feldspars, when heated up to a certain point, suffer a
change in the position of the axes, and if the heat becomes greater and is long continued
they do not return again to their original position, but remain altered.
In addition to the typical cases referred to, it is to be noted that when eleva-
tion of temperature is connected with change of chemical composition wide
changes in optical characters are possible. This is illustrated by the zeolites
and related species, where the effect of loss of water has been particularly
investigated.
Further, with some crystals, heat serves to bring about a change of molec-
ular structure and with that a total change of optical characters. For exam-
ple, the greenish-yellow (artificial) orthorhombic crystals of antimony iodide
(SbI 3 ) on heating (to about 114) change to red uniaxial hexagonal crystals.
Note also the remarks made later in regard to the effect of heat upon leucite
and boracite (Art. 429).
423. Some Peculiarities in Axial Interference-figures.* In the case of uniaxial crys-
tals,the characteristic interference-figure varies but little from one species to another, such
*
Variations in the axial figures embraced under the head .of optical anomalies are spoken
of later (Art. 429).
variation as is observed being usually due 19 the thickness of the section and the bire-
fringence. In some cases, however, peculiarities are noted. For example, the interference-
since its birefringence is very weak, and it may
figure of apophyllite is somewhat peculiar,
be optically positive for one part of the spectrum and negative for the other.
In the case of biaxial crystals, peculiarities are more common. The following are some
typical examples:
Brookite is optically + and the acute bisectrix is always normal to a (100). While, how-
=
and yellow, with 2ET 55, 2E V= 30, it is com-
ever, the axial plane is || c(001) for red
monly || 6(010) for green and blue, with 2Egr = 34. Hence a section a(100) in the cono-
1 1
scope shows a figure somewhat resembling that of a uniaxial crystal

but with four sets of
hyperbolic bands.
Titanite also gives a peculiar interference-figure with colored hyperbolas because of
the high color-dispersion, p > v, the variation between 2E for red and green light being
approximately 10; the dispersion of the bisectrices is, however, very small.
The most striking cases of peculiar axial figures are afforded by twin crystals (Art. 425).
424. Relation of Optical Properties to Chemical Composition. The
effect of varying chemical composition upon the optical characters has been
minutely studied in the case of many series of isomorphous salts, and with
important results. It is, indeed, only a part of the general subject of the rela-
tion between crystalline form and molecular structure on the one hand and
chemical composition on the other, one part of which has been discussed in
Art. 322. It was shown there that the refractive index can often be approx-
imately calculated from the chemical composition.
Among minerals, the most important examples of the relation between composition and
optical characters are afforded by the triclinic feldspars of the albite-anorthite series.
Here, as explained in detail in the descriptive part of this work, the relation is so close
that the composition of any intermediate member of this isomorphous group can be pre-
dicted from the position of its ether-axes, or more simply from the vibration directions on
the fundamental cleavage-directions, || c(001) and || 6(010).
The effect of varying amounts of iron protoxide (FeO) is illustrated in the case of the
monoclinic pyroxenes, where, for example, the angle Bx a A c axis is 38 in diopside (2'9
p. c. FeO) and 47 in hedenbergite (26 p. c. FeO). This is also shown in the closely related
orthorhombic species of the same group, enstatite, MgSiOs with little iron, and hypersthene,
(Mg,Fe)SiO 3 with iron to nearly 30 p. c. With both of these species the axial plane is
parallel to 6(010), but the former is optically (Bxa = Z) and the dispersion p < v, the
+
latter is optically (Bxa = A^) and dispersion p > v. In other words,the optic axial angle
changes rapidly with the FeO percentage, being about 90 for FeO = 10 p. c. In the case
of the chrysolites, the epidotes, the species triphylite and lithiophilite, and others, analogous
relations have been made out.-
425. Optical Properties of Twin Crystals. The examination of sec-

tions of twin crystals of any other than the isometric system in polarized light
serves to establish the compound character at once a'nd also to show the
relative orientation of the several parts. This is most distinct in the case of
contact-twins, but is also well shown with penetration-twins, though here the
parts are usually not separated by a sharp line.
Thus the examination of a section parallel to 6(010) of a twin crystal of
gypsum, type of Fig. 608, makes it easy not only to establish the fact
of the
of the twinning but also to fix the relative positions of the ether-axes in the
two parts. The measurement can in such cases be made between the extinc-
tion-directions in the two halves, instead of between one of these and some
definite crystallographic line, as the vertical axis.
The polysynthetic twinning of certain species, as the triclinic feldspars, appears with
great distinctness in polarized light. For example, in the case of a section of albite, parallel
to the basal cleavage, the alternate bands
extinguish together and assume the same tint
when the quartz section is inserted. Hence the angle between these directions is easily
measured, and this is obviously double the extinction-angle made with the edge 6(010)
A c(001). A basal section of microcline in the same way shows its compound twinning
CHAEACTERS DEPENDING. UPON LIGHT 299
according to both the albite and pericline laws, the characteristic grating structure being
clearly revealed in polarized light. Fig. 609 of a section of chondrodite (from Des Cloizeaux)
shows how the compound structure is shown by optical examination; the position of the
609
001
axial plane is indicated in the case of the successive polysynthetic lamellae. The complex
penetration-twins of right- and left-handed crystals of quartz (see the description of that
species) also have their character strikingly revealed in polarized light.
610 612
Witherite Bromlite (Des Cloizeaux)

Still again, the true structure of complex multiple twins, exhibiting pseudo-symmetry
in their external form, can only be fully made out in this way. This is illustrated by Fig.
610, a basal section of an apparent hexagonal pyramid of witherite. The analogous six-
613 614 615
Stilbite (Lasaulx)
sided pyramid of bromlite (Fig. 611) has a still more complex structure, as shown in Fig.
612. Fig. 613 shows a simple crystal of stilbite; Fig. 614 is the common type of twin-
crystal, and Fig. 615 illustrates how the complex structure (||6010) is revealed in polarized
light. Other illustrations are given in Art. 429. It will be understood that the axial
interference-figures of twin crystals, where
the parts are superposed, often show many
of quartz (p. 270) will serve as an illustration.
peculiarities; the Airy spirals
426. related to the subject discussed in the

A particularly interesting case,
preceding article, is that of the special properties of superposed cleavage-
sections of mica. If three or more of these, say of rectangular form, be super-
posed and so placed that the lines of the axial planes make equal angles of
60 (45, etc.) with each other the effect is that polarized light which has passed
a rotation to right or
through the center suffers circular polarization, with
left according to the way in which the sections are built up. The inter-
ference-figure resembles that of a section of quartz
cut normal to the axis.
If the sections are numerous and very thin the imitation of the phenomena
of quartz is closer. These facts throw much light upon the ultimate molec-
ular structure of a crystallized medium showing circular polarization. Fur-
ther, it is easy from this to understand how
it is possible to have in sections
of certain crystals (e.g., of clinochlore) portions which are biaxial and others
that are uniaxial, the latter being due to an intimate twinning after this
method of biaxial portions.
427. Optical Properties of Crystalline Aggregates. The special optical phenomena of

the different kinds of crystalline aggregates described on pp. 182, 183, and the extent to
which their optical characters can be determined, depend upon the distinctness in the
development of the individuals and their relative orientation. The case of ordinary granu-
lar, fibrous, or columnar aggregates needs no special discussion. Where, however, the
doubly refracting grains are extremely small, the microscope may hardly serve to do more
than to show the aggregate polarization present.
A case of special interest is that of spherulites, that is, aggregates spherical in form and
radiated or concentric in structure; such aggregates occur with calcite, various chlorites,
feldspars, etc. If they are formed of a doubly refracting crystalline mineral, or of an
amorphous substance which has birefringent characters due to internal tension, they com-
monly exhibit a dark cross in the microscope between crossed nicols; further, this cross, as
the section is revolved on the stage, though actually stationary, seems to rotate backward.
A distinct and more special case is that of spherical aggregates of a mineral optically
uniaxial (or biaxial with a small angle) .Sections of these (not central) in parallel polarized
light show more or less distinctly the interference-figure of a uniaxial crystal. The objec-
tive must be focussed on a point a little removed from the section itself, say on the surface
of the sphere of which it is a part. In such cases the + or character of the double
refraction can be determined as usual.
428. Change of Optical Character Induced by Pressure. As the difference between
the optical phenomena exhibited by an isometric crystal on the one hand and a uniaxial or
biaxial crystal on the other is referred to a difference in molecular structure modifying the
properties of the ether, it would be inferred that if an amorphous substance were subjected
to conditions tending to develop an analogous difference in its molecular structure it would
also show doubly refracting properties.
This found to be the case. Glass which has been suddenly cooled from a state of
is
fusion, and which is therefore characterized by strong internal tension, usually shows
marked double refraction. Further, glass plates subjected to great mechanical pressure in
one direction show in polarized light more or less distinct interference-curves. Gelatine
sections, also, under pressure exhibit like phenomena. Even the strain in a glass block
developed under the influence of unlike charges of electricity of great difference of potential
on its opposite sides is sufficient to make it doubly refracting.
In an analogous manner the double refraction of a crystal may be changed by the appli-
cation of mechanical force. Pressure exerted normal to the vertical axis of a section of a
tetragonal or hexagonal crystal which has been cut _L c axis, changes the uniaxial inter-
ference-figure into a biaxial, and with substances optically positive, the plane of the optic
axes is parallel, and with negative substances normal, to the direction of pressure.
The o.uartz crystals in rocks, which have been subjected to great pressure, are often
found to be in an abnormal state of tension, showing an undulatory extinction in polarized
light.
429. Optical An6malies. Since the early investigations of Brewster,

Herschel, and others (1815 et seq.) it has been recognized that many crystals
exhibit optical phenomena which are not in harmony with the apparent
symmetry of their external form. Crystals of many isometric species, as
analcite, alum, boracite, garnet, etc., often show more or less pronounced
double refraction, and sometimes they are distinctly uniaxial or biaxial. A
section examined in parallel polarized light may show more or less sharply
denned doubly refracting areas, or parallel bands or lamellae with varying
extinction. Occasionally, as noted by Klein in the case of garnet, while most
crystals are normally isotropic, others show optical characters which seem to
be determined by the external bounding faces and edges; thus, a dodecahedron
may appear to be made up of twelve rhombic pyramids (biaxial) whose apices
are at the center; a hexoctahedron similarly may seem to be made up of forty-
eight triangular pyramids, etc.
Similarly, crystals of many common tetragonal or hexagonal species, as
vesuvianite, zircon, beryl, apatite, corundum, chabazite, etc., give interfer-
ence-figures resembling those of biaxial crystals. Also, analogous contra-
dictions between form and optical characters are noted with crystals of
orthorhombic and monoclinic species, e.g., topaz, natrolite, orthoclase, etc.
All cases such as those mentioned are embraced under the common term of
optical anomalies.
This subject has been minutely studied by many investigators in recent
years and important additions have been made to it both on the practical and
the theoretical side. The result is that, though doubtful cases still remain,
many of the typical ones have found a satisfactory explanation. No single
theory, however, can be universally applied.
The chief question involved has been whether the anomalies are to be
considered as secondary and non-essential, or whether they belong to the
inherent molecular structure of the crystals in question. On the one hand,
it has been urged that internal tension suffices (Art. 428) to call out double
refraction in an isotropic substance or to give a uniaxial crystal the typical
optical structure of a biaxial crystal. On the other hand, it is equally clear
that twinning often produces pseudo-symmetry in external form, and at the
same time conceals or changes the optical characters. From the simplest case,
as that of aragonite, we pass to more complex cases, as witherite (Fig. 610),
bromlite (Figs. 611, 612), phillipsite (Figs. 400, 452-454), which last is some-
times pseudo-isometric in form though optical study shows the monoclinic
character of the individuals.* Reasoning from the analogy of these last cases,
Mallard was led (1876) to the theory that the optical anomalies could in most
cases be explained by the assumption of a similar but still more intimate
grouping of molecules which themselves without this would unite to form crys-
tals of a lower grade of symmetry than that which their complex twinned
crystals actually simulate.
In regard to the two points of view mentioned, it seems probable that
internal tension (due to pressure, sudden cooling, or rapidity of growth, etc.)
can be safely appealed to to explain the anomalous optical character of many
species, as diamond, halite, beryl, quartz, etc. Again, it has been fully proved
that the later growth of isomorphous layers of varying composition may
*
Crystals showing pseudo-symmetry of highly complex type are called mimetic crystals
by Tschermak.
produce optical anomalies, probably here

also to be referred to tension. Alum
isa striking example. The peculiarities of this species" were early investigated
lamellar polarization,"
by Biot and made by him the basis of his theory
of
but the present explanation is doubtless the true one. Fig. 616 (from Brauns)
shows the appearance in polarized light of a section 0(111) from a crystal in
||
which the successive layers have different composition. Further, according to

be referred to this
Brauns, the optical peculiarities of many other species may
same cause. He includes here, particularly, those cases (as with some garnets)
in which the optical characters seem to depend upon the external form, as
noted above. Here belongs also apophyllite, a section of which (from Golden,
Col., by Klein) is shown in Fig.
617. The section has been cut c(001) ||
616 617 618
Alum, ||
111 Apophyllite, ||
001 Leucite, ||
100
through the center of the crystal and is represented as it appears in parallel
polarized light.
Another quite distinct but most important class is that including species
such as boracite and leucite, which are dimorphous; that is, those species
which at a certain elevation of temperature (300 for boracite and 500 to 600
for leucite) become strictly isotropic. Under ordinary conditions, these species
are anisotropic, but the fact stated makes it probable that originally their
crystalline form and optical characters were in harmony. The relations for
leucite deserve to be more minutely stated.
Leucite usually shows very feeble double refraction: to = 1'508, e = 1'509. This
anomalous double refraction, early noted (Brewster, Biot), was variously explained. In
1873, Rath, on the basis of careful measurements, referred the seemingly isometric crystals
to the tetragonal system, the trapezohedral face 112 being taken as 111 and 211, 121 as
421, 241 respectively; also 101, Oil as 201, 021.
;
Later Weisbach (1880), on the
same ground, made them orthorhombic; Mallard, however, referred them (1876), chiefly on
optical grounds, to the monoclinic system, and Fouque and Levy (1879) to the triclinic.
The true symmetry, corresponding to the molecular structure which they possess or tend
to possess at ordinary temperatures, is in doubt, but it has been shown (Klein, Penfield)
that at 500 to 600 sections become isotropic; and further (Rosenbusch) that the twinning
striations disappear on heating, to reappear again in new position on cooling. Sections
ordinarily show twinning-lamellae d(110); in some cases a bisectrix (+) is normal to what
|j
corresponds to a cubic face, the axial angle being very small. The structure corresponds in
general (Klein) to the interpenetration of three crystals, in twinning position d, which||
may be equally or unequally developed; or there may be one fundamental individual with
inclosed twinning-lamellse. Fig. 618 shows a section of a crystal (|| a, 100) which is ap-
parently made up by the twinning of three individuals.
again, in a limited number of cases, it can be shown that -the inter-

Still
growth of lamellae having slightly different crystallographic orientation is the

cause of the optical peculiarities. Prehnite is a conspicuous example of
this class.
CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON HEAT 303
After all the various possible explanations have been applied there still
remain, however, many species about which no certain conclusion can be
reached. To many of these species the theory of Mallard may probably be
applicable. Indeed it may be added that much difference of opinion still exists
as to the cause of the " optical anomalies " in a considerable number of minerals.
LITERATURE
*
.
Optical Anomalies
Brewster. Many papers in Phil. Trans., 1814, 1815, and later; also in Ed. Trans.,
Ed. Phil. J., etc.
Biot Recherches sur la polarisation lamellaire, etc. C. R., 12, 967, 1841: 13. 155,
391, 839, 1841; in full in Mem. de I'Institut, 18, 539.
Volger. Monographic des Boracits. Hannover, 1857.
Marbach. Ueber die optischen Eigenschaf ten einiger Krystalle des tesseralen Systems.
Pogg. Ann., 94, 412, 1855.
Pfaff. Versuche iiber den Einfluss des Drucks auf die optischen Eigenschaften der
Krystalle. Pogg. Ann., 107, 333, 1859; 108, 598, 1859.
Des Cloizeaux. Ann. Mines 11, 261, 1857; 14, 339, 1858, 6, 557, 1864. Also Nou-
velles Recherches, etc., 1867.
Reusch. Ueber die sogennante Lamellarpolarisation des Alauns. Pogg. Ann., 132,
618, 1867.
Rumpf. Apophyllite. Min. petr. Mitth., 2, 369, 1870.
Hirschwald. Leucite. Min. Mitth., 227, 1875.
Lasaulx. Tridymite. Zs. Kr., 2, 253, 1878.
Mallard. Application des phenomenes optiques anomaux que presentent un grand
nombre de substances cristallisees. Annales des Mines (Ann. Min.) 10, pp. 60-196, 1876
(Abstract in Zs. Kr., 1, 309-320). See also Bull. Soc. Min., 1, 107, 1878. Sur les pro-
prietes optiques des melanges de substances isomorphes et sur les anomalies optiques des
cristaux. Bull. Soc. Min., 3, 3, 1880, Also ibid., 4, 71, 1881; 5, 144, 1882.
Bertrand. Numerous papers in Bull. Soc. Min., 1878-1882.
Becke. Chabazite. Min. petr. Mitth., 2, 391, 1879.
Baumhauer. Perovskite. Zs. Kr., 4, 187, 1879.
"
Tschermak. Mimetische Formen." Zs. G. Ges., 31, 637, 1879.
Jannettaz. Diamond. Bull. Soc. Min., 2, 124, 1879; alum, ibid., 2, 191; 3, 20.
Bucking. Ueber durch Druck hervorgerufene optische Anomalien. Zs. G. Ges., 32,
199, 1880. Also, Zs. Kr., 7, 555, 1883.
Arzruni and S. Kock. Analcite. Zs. Kr., 5, 483, 1881.
Klocke. Ueber Doppelbrechung regularer Krystalle. Jb. Min., 1, 53, 1880 (also
2, 97, 13 ref.; 1, 204, 1881, and Verh. nat. Ges. Freiburg, 8, 31). Ueber einige optische
Eigenschaften optisch anomaler Krystalle und deren Nachahmung durch gespannte und
gepresste Colloide. Jb. Min., 2, 249, 1881.
C. Klein. Boracite. Jb. Min., 2, 209, 1880; 1, 239, 1881; 1, 235, 1884. Garnet.
Nachr. Ges. Gottingen, 1882; Jb. Min., 1, 87, 1883. Apophyllite (influence of heat).
Jb. Min., 2, 165, 1892. Garnet, vesuvianite, etc. Ibid., 2, 68, 1895.
W. Klein. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der optischen Aenderungen in Krystallen unter
dem Einflusse der Erwarmung. Zs. Kr., 9, 38, 1884.
Brauns. Die optischen Anomalien der Krystalle. (Preisschrift), Leipzig, 1891. Also
earlier papers: Jb. Min., 2, 102, 1883; 1, 96, 1885; 1, 47, 1887.
Ben Saude. Beitrag zu einer Theorie der Optischen Anomalien der regularen Krys-
talle. Lisbon, 1894. Also earlier: Analcite, Jb. Min., 1, 41, 1882. Perovskite (Preiss-
chrift), Gottingen, 1882.
Wallerant. Theorie des anomales optiques, de 1'isomorphisme et du polymorphisme.
Bull. Soc. Min., 21, 188, 1898.
IV. CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON HEAT

430. The more important of the special properties of a mineral species with
respect to heat include the following: Fusibility; conductivity and expansion,
*
A complete bibliography is given in the memoir by Brauns (1891), see above.
in optical charac-
especially in their relation to crystalline structure; change
ters with change of temperature; specific heat; also diathermancy, or the power
of transmitting heat radiation. The full discussion of these and other related
subjects lies outside of the range of the present
text-book. A few brief
remarks are made upon them, and beyond these reference must be made to
text-books on Physics and to special memoirs, some of which are mentioned
in the literature (p. 305).
431. Fusibility. The approximate relative fusibility of different min-
erals is an important character in distinguishing different species from one
another by means of the blowpipe. For this purpose a scale is conveniently
used for comparison, as explained in the articles later devoted to the blowpipe.
Accurate determinations of the fusibility are difficult, and though of little
importance for the above object, they are interesting from a theoretical stand-
point. They have been attempted by various authors by the use of a number
of different methods. The following are the approximate melting-point
values for the minerals used in von KobelPs scale (Art. 491) Stibnite, 525
: :
natrolite, 965; almandite, 1200; actinolite, 1296; orthoclase, 1200;

bronzite, 1380; also for quartz, about 1600.
432. Conductivity. The conducting power of different crystallized
media was early investigated by Senarmont. He covered the faces of the sub-
stance under investigation with wax and observed the form of the figure
melted by a hot wire placed in contact with the surface at its middle point.
Later investigations have been made by Rontgen (who modified the method of
Senarmont), by Jannettaz, and others. In general it Is found that, as regards
their thermal conductivity, crystals are to be divided into the three classes
noted on p. 252. In other words, the conductivity for heat seems to follow
the same general laws as the propagation of light. It is to be stated, however,
that experiments by S. P. Thompson and 0. J. Lodge have shown a different
rate of conductivity in tourmaline in the opposite directions of the vertical
axis.
433. Expansion. Expansion, that is, increase in volume upon rise of
temperature, is a nearly universal property for all solids. The increment of
volume for the unit volume in passing from to 1 C. is called the coefficient
of expansion. This quantity has been determined for a number of species.
Further, the relative expansion in different directions is found to obey the
same laws as the light-propagation. Crystals, as regards heat-expansion, are
thus divided into the same three classes mentioned on p. 252 and referred to
in the preceding article.
The amount of expansion varies widely, and, as shown by Jannettaz, is
influenced particularly by the cleavage. Mitscherlich found that in calcite
there was a diminution of 8' 37" in the angle of the rhombohedron on passing
from to 100 C., the form thus approaching that of a cube as the tempera-
ture increased. The rhombohedron of dolomite, for the same range of tem-
perature, diminishes 4' 46"; and in aragonite, for a rise in temperature from
21 to 100, the angle of the prism diminishes 2' 46". In some
rhombohedrons,
as of calcite, the vertical axis is lengthened (and the horizontal
shortened),
while in others, like quartz, the reverse is true. The variation is such in both
cases that the birefringence is diminished with the increase of
temperature,
for calcite possesses negative double
refraction, and quartz, positive.
It is to be noted that in general the
expansion by heat, while it may serve
to alter the angles of crystals, other than those of the isometric
system, does
CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON HEAT 305
Oeberg
01291
01645
01758
0-1861
A. Schrauf. Sulphur. Zs. Kr., 12, 321, 1887; TiO 2 , ibid., 9, 433, 1884.
L. Fletcher. Expansion of crystals. Zs. Kr., 4, 337, 1880.
Joly. Meldometer. Ch. News, 65, 1, 16, 1892, and Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., 2, 38,
1891.
X. heat.
AXV/C*V Proc.
J.W. -*.vv^
Roy. Soc., 41, 250, 352,
. F 1887.
Specific
kJfJV/V-'ll.lV-'
"
-1.
f^ e A Ctj._-l_t_1TVT_ O /IO 1OOC

f^. 1 Ct C.
Specifn heat.
Oeberg. Specific Oefv. Ak. Stockh., No. 8, 43, 1885.
Doelter. For m methods and results in fusing silicates, see Handbuch der Mineral-
chemie, 1, 628 et seq.
V. CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON ELECTRICITY

AND MAGNETISM
1. ELECTRICITY
436. Electrical Conductivity. The
subject of the relative conducting
power of different minerals is In general most min-
one of minor interest.*
erals, except those having a metallic luster among the sulphides
and oxides, are
non-conductors. Only the non-conductors can show pyro-electrical phenom-
ena, and only the conductors can give a thermo-electric current.
437. Frictional Electricity. The development of an electrical charge
on many bodies by friction is a familiar subject. All minerals become electric
by friction, although the degree to which this is manifested differs widely.
There is no line of distinction among minerals, dividing them into positively
electric and negatively electric for both electrical states may be presented by
;
different varieties of the same species, and by the same variety in different
states. The gem& are in general positively electric only when polished; the
diamond, however, exhibits positive electricity whether polished or not. It is
a familiar fact that the electrification of amber upon friction was early observed
(600 B. C.), and indeed the Greek name (^Xe/crpo*/) later gave rise to the
word electricity.
438.Pyro-electricity. The simultaneous development of positive and
negative charges of electricity on different parts of the same crystal when its
temperature is suitably changed is called pyro-electricity. Crystals exhibiting
such phenomena are said to be pyro-electric. This phenomenon was first
observed in the case of tourmaline, which is rhombohedral-hemimorphic in
crystallization, and it is particularly marked with crystals belonging to groups
of relatively low symmetry, especially those of the hemimorphic type. It is
possible, of course, only with non-conductors. This subject was early inves-
tigated by Riess and Rose (1843), later by Hankel, also by C. Friedel, Kundt.
and others (see literature).
In all it is true that directions of like crystallographic symmetry
cases
show charges of like sign, while unlike directions
may exhibit opposite charges.
Substances not crystallized cannot show pyro-electricity. few of the many A
possible examples will serve to bring out the most essential points.
Boracite (isometric-tetrahedral, p. 66) on heating exhibits electricity + on
one set of tetrahedral faces and electricity on the other. Cf. Fig. 619.
Tourmaline (rhombohedral-hemimorphic, p. 109) shows opposite charges at
the opposite extremities of the vertical axis corresponding to its hemimorphic
crystallization. In this and in other similar cases, the extremity which
*
On the conductivity of minerals, see Beijerinck, Jb. Min.,
Beil.-Bd., 11, 403, 1898.
CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 307
becomes positive on heating has been called the analogous pole, and that which
becomes negative has been called the antilogous pole.
Calamine and struvite (orthorhombic-hemimorphic, p. 126) exhibit
phenom-
ena analogous to those of tourmaline.
Quartz (rhombohedral-trapezohedral, p. 112) shows + electricity on heating
at the three alternate prismatic edges and electricity at the three remaining
edges; the distribution for right-handed crystals is opposite to that of left-
handed. Twins may exhibit a high degree of complexity. Cf. Figs. 620, 621.
Axinite (triclinic, p. 144), when heated to 120 or 130, has an
analogous
619 620 621
pole (Riess & Rose) at the solid angle rxM'; the antilogous pole at the angle
mr'M' near plane n.
A very convenient and simple method for investigating the phenomena is
the following, which is due to Kundt: First heat the crystal or section care-
fully in an air-bath; pass it several times through the flame of an alcohol
lamp and then place it on a little upright cylinder of brass to cool. While
cooling, a mixture of red lead and sulphur finely pulverized and previously
agitated is dusted over it through a fine cloth from a suitable bellows. The
positively electrified red lead collects on the parts having a negative charge,
and the negatively electrified sulphur on those with a positive charge. This is
illustrated by Figs. 619-621, and still better by the illustrations given by
Kundt and others. (Cf. Plate III of Groth, Phys. Kryst., 1905.)
439. Piezoelectricity. The name piezo-electricity has been given to
the development of electrical charges on a crystallized body by pressure. This
is shown by a cleavage mass of calcite, also by topaz. This phenomenon is
most interesting where a relation can be established between the electrical
excitement and the molecular structure, as is conspicuously true with quartz,
tourmaline, and some other species.
This subject has been investigated by Hankel, Curie, and others, and
discussed theoretically by Lord Kelvin (see literature). Hankel has also
employed the term actino-electricity or, better, photo-electricity, for the phe-
',
nomenon of producing an electrical condition by the influence of direct

radiation; fluorite is a conspicuous example.
440. Thermo-electricity. The contact of two unlike metals in gen-
eral results in electrifying one of them positively and the other negatively. If,
further, the point of contact be heated while the other parts, connected with
a wire, are kept cool, a continuous current of electricity shown, for example,
by a suitable galvanometer is set up at the expense of the heat-energy sup-
plied. If, on the other hand, the point of junction is cooled, a current is set
up in the reverse direction. This phenomenon is called thermo-electricity ,
and two metals so connected constitute a thermo-electric couple. Further it

is found that different conductors can be arranged in order in a table a
so-called thermo-electric series according to the direction of the current set
up on heating and according to the electromotive force of this current. Among
the metals, bismuth (+) and antimony ()
stand at the opposite ends of the
series; the current passes through the connecting wire from antimony to
bismuth.
This subject is so far important for mineralogy, as it was shown by Bunsen
that the natural metallic sulphides stand farther off in the series than bismuth
and antimony, and consequently by them a higher electromotive force is
produced. The thermo-electrical relations of a large number of minerals were
determined by Flight.
It was early observed that some minerals have varieties which are both -f-
and Rose attempted to establish a relation between the positive and
.
negative pyritohedral forms of pyrite and cobaltite, and the positive or nega-
tive thermo-electrical character. Later investigations by Schrauf and Dana
have shown, however, that the same peculiarity belongs also to glaucodot,
tetradymite, skutterudite, danaite, and other minerals, and it is demonstrated
by them that it cannot be dependent upon crystalline form, but rather upon
chemical composition.
*
LITERATURE
Pyro-electricity, etc.
Rose. Tourmaline. Pogg. Ann., 39, 285, 1836.
Riess and Rose. Pogg. Ann., 59, 353, 1843: 61. 659, 1844.
Kobell. Pogg. Ann., 118, 594, 1863.
Hankel. Pogg. Ann., 49, 493; 50, 237, 1840; 61, 281, 1844. Many important papers
in Abhandl. K. Sachs. Ges., 1865 and later; also Wied. Ann., 2, 66, 1877;
11, 269, 1880,
etc.
J. and P. Curie. C. R., 91, 294, 383, 1880; 92, 186, 350, 1881; 93, 204, 1882.
Kundt. Ber. Ak. Berlin, 421, 1883; Wied. Ann., 20, 592, 1893.
Kolenko. Quartz. Zs. Kr., 9, 1, 1884.
C. Friedel. Sphalerite, etc. Bull. Soc. Min., 2, 31, 1879.
C. Friedel and Curie. Sphalerite, boracite. Bull. Soc. Min., 6. 191, 1883.
Mack. Boracite. Zs. Kr., 8, 503, 1883.
Voigt. Abhandl. Ges. Gottingen, 36, 99, 1890.
Kelvin. Phil. Mag., 36, 331, 453, 1893.
G. S. Schmidt. Photo-electricity of fluorite. Wied.
Ann., 62, 407, 1897.
Thermo-electricity
Marbach. C. R., 45, 705, 1857.
Bunsen. Pogg. Ann., 123, 505, 1864.
Friedel. Ann. Ch. Phys., 17, 79, 1869; C. R., 78, 508, 1874.
Rose. Pyrite and cobaltite. Pogg. Ann., 142,
1, 1871.
Schrauf and E. S. Dana. Ber. Ak. Wien, 69 (1),
142, 1874; Am. J. Sc., 8, 255, 1874.
2. MAGNETISM
441. Magnetic Minerals. Natural Magnets. A
few minerals in their
natural state are capable of being attracted
by a strong steel magnet; they
are said to be magnetic. This is conspicuously true of magnetite, the magnetic
oxide of iron; also of pyrrhotite or
magnetic pyrites, and of some varieties of
native platinum (especially the
variety called iron-platinum).
A number of other minerals, as hematite, franklinite, etc., are in some
*
See Liebisch Phys.
Krystallographie, 1891, for a full discussion of the topics briefly
touched upon in the preceding pages, also for references to
original articles.
CHARACTERS DEPENDING UPON ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 309
cases attracted by a steel magnet, but probably in most if not all cases because
of admixed magnetite (but see Art. 443). Occasional varieties of the three
minerals mentioned above, as the lodestone variety of magnetite, exhibit them-
selves the attracting power and polarity of a true magnet. They are then
called natural magnets. In such cases the magnetic polarity has probably been
derived from the inductive action of the earth, which is itself a huge magnet.
442. Paramagnetism. Diamagnetism. In a very strong magnetic
field, as that between the poles of a very powerful electromagnet, all minerals,
as indeed all other substances, are influenced by the magnetic force. Accord-
ing to their behavior they are divided into two classes, the paramagnetic and
diamagnetic; those of the former appear to be attracted, those of the latter to
be repelled. For purposes of experiment the substance in question, in the
form of a rod, is suspended on a horizontal axis between the poles of the magnet.
If paramagnetic, it takes a position parallel to the magnetic axis; if
diamag-
netic, it sets transversely to it. Iron, cobalt, nickel, manganese, platinum are
paramagnetic; silver, copper, bismuth are diamagnetic. Among minerals
compounds of iron are paramagnetic, as siderite, also diopside; further, beryl,
dioptase. Diamagnetic species include
calcite, zircon, wulfenite, etc.
By the use of a sphere it is possible to determine the relative amount of
magnetic induction in different directions of the same substance. Experiment
has shown that in isometric crystals the magnetic induction is alike in all
directions; that in those optically uniaxial, there is a direction of maximum
and, normal to it, one of minimum magnetic induction; that in biaxial
crystals, there are three unequal magnetic axes, the position of which may be
determined. In other words, the magnetic relations of the three classes of
crystals are analogous to their optical relations.
443. Corresponding to the facts just stated, that all compounds of iron
are paramagnetic, it is found that a sufficiently powerful electromagnet
attracts all minerals containing iron, though, except in the cases given in Art.
441, a bar magnet has no sensible influence upon them; hence the efficiency
of the electromagnetic method of separating ores.
Plucker * determined the magnetic attraction of a number of substances
compared with iron taken as 100,000. For example, for magnetite he obtained
40,227; for hematite, crystallized, 533, massive, 134; limonite, 71; pyrite, 150.
LITERATURE
Magnetism
Plucker. Pogg. Ann., 72, 315, 1847; 76, 576, 1849; 77, 447, 1849; 78, 427, 1849; 86,
1, 1852.
Plucker and Beer. Pogg. Ann., 81, 115, 1850; 82, 42, 1852.
Faraday. Phil. Trans., 1849-1857, and Experimental Researches, Series XXII,
XXVI, XXX.
W. Thomson (Lord Kelvin). Theory of Magnetic Induction. Brit. Assoc., 1850, pt. 2,
23; Phil. Mag., 1, 177, 1851, etc. Reprint of Papers on Electrostatics and Magnetism,
1872.
Tyndall. Phil. Mag., 2, 165, 1851; 10, 153, 257, 1855; 11, 125, 1856; Phil. Trans.,
1855, 1.Researches on diamagnetism and magne-crystallic action. London, 1870.
Knoblauch and Tyndall. Pogg. Ann., 79, 233; 81, 481, 1850 (Phil. Mag., 36, 37,
1850).
Rowland and Jacques. Bismuth, Calcite. Am. J. Sc., 18, 360, 1879.
Tumlirz. Quartz. Wied. Ann., 27, 133, 1886.
Koenig. Wied. Ann., 31, 273, 1887.
Stenger. Calcite. Wied. Ann., 20, 304, 1883; 35, 331, 1888.
*
Pogg. Ann., 74, 343, 1848.
VI. TASTE AND ODOR

In their action upon the senses a few minerals possess taste, and others
under some circumstances give off odor.
444. Taste belongs only to soluble minerals. The different kinds of
taste adopted for reference are as follows :
1. Astringent: the taste of vitriol.

2. Sweetish astringent: taste of alum.
3. Saline: taste of common salt.
4. Alkaline: taste of soda.
5. Cooling: taste of saltpeter.
6. Bitter: taste of Epsom salts.
7. Sour: taste of sulphuric acid.
445. Odor. Excepting a few gaseous and soluble species, minerals
in the dry unchanged state do not give off odor. By friction, moistening with
the breath, and the elimination of some volatile ingredient by heat or acids,
odors are sometimes obtained which are thus designated :
1. Alliaceous: the odor of garlic. Friction of arsenopyrite elicits this

odor; it may also be obtained from arsenical compounds by means of heat.
2. Horse-radish odor: the odor of decaying horse-radish. This odor is
strongly perceived when the ores of selenium are heated.
3. Sulphurous: friction elicits this odor from pyrite, and heat from many
sulphides.
4. Bituminous: the odor of bitumen.
5. Fetid: the odor of sulphureted hydrogen or rotten eggs. It is elicited
by friction from some varieties of quartz and limestone.
6. Argillaceous: the odor of moistened clay. It is obtained from serpen-
tine and some allied minerals, after moistening them with the breath; others,
as pyrargillite, afford it when heated.
446. Feel. The FEEL is a character which is occasionally of some
importance; it is said to be smooth (sepiolite), greasy (talc), harsh, or meager,
etc. Some minerals, in consequence of their hygroscopic character, adhere to
the tongue when brought in contact with it.
PART III. CHEMICAL MINERALOGY
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY AS APPLIED

TO MINERALS
447. Minerals, as regards their chemical constitution, are either the
uncombined elements in a native state, or definite compounds of these elements
formed in accordance with chemical laws. It is the object of Chemical Min-
eralogy to determine the chemical composition of each species; to show the
chemical relations of different species to each other where such exist; and also
to explain the methods of distinguishing different minerals by chemical means.
It thus embraces the most important part of Determinative Mineralogy.
In order to understand the chemical constitution of minerals, some knowl-
edge of the fundamental principles of Chemical Philosophy is required; and
these are here briefly recapitulated.
448. Chemical Elements. Chemistry recognizes about eighty sub-
stances which cannot at will be decomposed, or divided into others, by any
process of analysis at present known these substances are called the chemical
;
elements. A list of given in a later article (452) common examples

them is ;
are: Oxygen, nitrogen, hydrogen, chlorine, gold, silver, sodium, etc.

449. Atom. Molecule. The study of the chemical properties of sub-
stances and of the laws governing their formation has led to the belief that
there is for each element a definite, indivisible mass, which is the smallest
particle which can play a part in chemical reactions; this indivisible unit is
called the atom.
With some rare exceptions, the atom cannot exist alone, but unites by the
action of what is called chemical force, or chemical affinity, with other atoms
of the same or different kind to form the molecule. The molecule, in the
chemical senso, may be defined as the smallest particle into which a given
kind of substance can be subdivided without undergoing chemical decomposi-
tion. For example, two atoms of hydrogen unite to form a molecule of hydro-
gen gas. Again, one atom of hydrogen and one of chlorine form a molecule
of hydrochloric acid gas; two atoms of hydrogen and one of sulphur form
a molecule of the gas hydrogen sulphide.
450. Atomic Weight. The atomic weight of an element is the weight,
or, better expressed, the mass of its atom compared with that of the element
hydrogen taken as the unit or with the weight of an atom of oxygen taken as
16. Of the methods by which the relation between the masses of the atoms is
determined it is unnecessary here to speak the results that have been obtained
;
are given in the table on p. 312.

311
312 CHEMICAL MINERALOGY
451. Symbol. Formula. The symbol of an element is the initial

letter, or letters, often of its Latin name, by which it is represented when
expressing in chemical notation the constitution of substances into the compo-
sition of which it enters. Thus O is the symbol of oxygen,H of hydrogen, Cl
of chlorine, Fe (from ferrum) of iron, Ag (from argentum) of silver, etc. Fur-
ther, this symbol is always understood to indicate that definite amount of the
given element expressed by its atomic weight; in other words, it represents one
atom. If twice this quantity is involved, that is, two atoms, this is indicated
by a small subscript number written immediately after the symbol. Thus,
Sb2 S 3 means a compound consisting of two atoms of antimony and three of
sulphur, or of 2 X 120 parts by weight of antimony and 3 X 32 of sulphur.
This expression, Sb 2 S 3 is called the formula of the given compound, since
,
it expresses in briefest form its composition. Similarly the formula of the

mineral albite NaAlSisOg.
is
Strictly speaking, such formulas are merely empirical formulas, since they
express only the actual result of analysis, as giving the relative number of
atoms of each element present, and make no attempt to represent the actual
constitution. A formula developed with the latter object in view is called a
rational, structural, or constitutional formula (see Art. 469).
452. Table of the Elements. The following table gives a list of all
the definitely established elements with their accepted symbols and also their
atomic weights.*
Of the elements given in this list more than eighty in all only a very
small number, say twelve, play an important part in making up the crust of
the earth and the water and air surrounding it. The common elements con-
cerned in the composition of minerals are: Oxygen, sulphur, silicon, alu-
minium, iron, calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium. Besides these, hydro-
gen is present in water, nitrogen in the air, and carbon in all animal and
vegetable substances. Only a very few of the elements occur as such in nature,
as native gold, native silver, native sulphur, etc.
Of the elements, oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, chlorine, and fluorine are
gases; bromine is a volatile liquid; mercury is also a liquid, but the others
are solids under ordinary conditions.
= 16
Symbol At. Weieht
Symbol
Iron (Ferrum) Fe
The passage of a sufficiently strong electrical current through a chemical com-

pound in many cases results in its decomposition (or electrolysis) into its ele-
ments or parts. In such cases it is found that for each compound the atoms
of one element collect at the negative pole (the cathode) and those of the other
at the positive pole (the anode). The former is called the electro-positive
element and the latter the electro-negative element. Thus in the electrolysis
of water (H 2 0) the hydrogen collects at the cathode and is hence called posi-
tive, and the oxygen at the anode and is called negative. Similarly, in hydro-
chloric acid (HC1) the hydrogen is thus shown to be positive, the chlorine
negative. This distinction is also carried to complex compounds, as copper
sulphate (CuSO 4), which by electrolysis is broken into Cu, which is found to be
electro-positive, and SO 4 (the last separates into SO 3 forming H 2 SC>4 and free
,
oxygen).
For reasons which will be explained later, the positive element is said to
play the basic part, the negative the acidic. The metals, as already stated, in
most cases belong to the former class, the non-metals to the latter, while the
semi-metals may play both parts.
It is common in writing the formula to put the positive or basic element
first, thusH H
2 O, 2 S, HC1, H2 SO 4
,
Sb 2 S 3 As2 O 3 AsH 3 NiSb, FeAs2
, , ,
. Here
it will be noted that antimony (Sb) and arsenic (As) are positive in some of
the compounds named but negative in the others.
455. Periodic Law. In order to understand the relations of the
chief classes of chemical compounds represented among minerals, as still more
their further subdivision, down finally to the many isomorphous groups
groups of species having analogous composition and closely similar form, as
explained in Art. 471 the fundamental relations and grouping of the ele-
ments must be understood, especially as developed of recent years and shown
in the so-called Periodic Law.
Although the subject can be only briefly touched upon, it will be useful to
give here the general distribution of the elements into Groups and Series, as
presented in the Principles of Chemistry (Engl. Ed., 1891) of D. Mendeleeff,
to whom is due more than any one else the development of the Periodic Law.
When the elements are arranged according to the values of their atomic weights
it is seen that they fall more or less into groups consisting of eight elements
each, or double groups containing sixteen elements. The corresponding

members of each group show similar chemical characters. The table given
below will illustrate these relationships. For the thorough explanation of
this subject, more particularly as regards the periodic or progressive relation
between the atomic weights and various properties of the elements, the reader
is referred to the work above mentioned or to one of the
many other excellent
modern text-books of chemistry.
The relations of some of the elements of the first group are exhibited by
the isomorphism (see Art. 471, also the description of the various groups and
species here referred to, which are given in Part IV of this work) of NaCl,
KC1, AgCl; or again of LiMnP0 4 and NaMnPO 4 etc. In the second group,
,
reference may be made to the isomorphism of the carbonates and sulphates

(p. 322) of calcium, barium, and strontium; while among the sulphides, ZnS,
CaS, and HgS are doubly related. In the third group, we find boron and
aluminium often replacing one another among silicates. In the fourth group,
the relations of silicon and titanium are shown in the
titano-silicates, while
the compounds Ti0 2 SnO2 Pb0 2 (and
, , MnO 2 ), also ZrSiO 4 and ThSi0 4 have
,
II
5
3
II II
O 02
43
^ II
23 ffl
ii
J
8
8
u
closely similar form. In the fifth group, many compounds of arsenic, anti-
mony, and bismuth are isomorphous among metallic compounds, while the
relations of phosphorous, vanadium, arsenic, also antimony, are shown among
the phosphates, vanadates, arsenates, and antimonates; again the mutual
relations of the niobates and tantalates are to be noted.
In the sixth group, the strongly acidic elements, sulphur, selenium,
tellurium, are all closely related, as seen in many sulphides, selenides,
tellu-
rides; further, the relations of sulphur and chromium, and similarly of both
of these to molybdenum and tungsten, are shown among many artificial sul-
phates, chromates, molybdates, and tungstates.
In the seventh group the relations of the halogens are too well understood
to need special remark. In the eighth group, we have Fe, Co, Ni alloyed in
meteoric iron, and their phosphates and sulphates are in several cases closely
isomorphous; further, the relation of the iron series to that of the platinum
series is exhibited in the isomorphism of FeS 2 FeAsS, FeAs 2 etc., with PtAs 2
, ,
and probably RuS 2 .
456. Combining Weight. Chemical investigation proves that the

mass of a given element entering into a compound is always proportional
either to its atomic weight or to some simple multiple of this; the atomic
weight is hence also called the combining weight. Thus in rock salt, sodium
chloride, the masses involved of sodium and chlorine present are found by
analysis to be equal to 39'4 and 60'6 in 100 parts, and these numbers are in
proportion to 23 35*4, the atomic weights of sodium and chlorine; hence it is
:
concluded that one atom of each is present in the compound. The formula is,
therefore, NaCl. In calcium chloride, by the same method the masses pres-
ent are found to be proportional to 39'9 :
70*8, that is, to 39'9 : 2 X 35'4;
hence the formula is CaCl2 .
Still again, a series of compounds of nitrogen with oxygen is known in which the ratios
of the masses of the two elements are as follows: (1) 28 16, (2) 14 16, (3) 28 48, (4) 14 32,
: : : :
(5) 28 80.
: It is seen at once that these must have the formulas (1) N 2 O (2) NO, (3) N 2 O 3
; ,
(4) NO 2 (5) N 2 O 6
,
. On the contrary, atmospheric air which contains these elements in
about the ratio of 76 '8 to 23 '2 cannot be a chemical compound of these elements, since
(aside from other considerations) these numbers are not in the ratio of n X 14 X 16 : m
where n and m are simple whole numbers.
457. Molecular Weight. The molecular weight is the weight of the

molecule of the given substance, expressed in terms of the mass of the hydro-
gen atom as unit. The molecular weight of hydrogen is 2 because the mole-
cule can be shown to consist of two atoms. The molecular weight of hydro-
chloric acid (HC1) is 36*4, of water vapor (H 2 O) 18, of hydrogen sulphide
(H 2 S) 34.
Since, according to the law of Avagadro, like volumes of different gases
under like conditions as to temperature and pressure contain the same number
of molecules, it is obvious that the molecular weight of substances in the form
of gas can be derived directly from the relative density or specific gravity.
If the density is referred to hydrogen, whose molecular
weight is 2, it will
be always true that the molecular weight is twice the density in the state of a
gas and vice versa. Thus the observed density of carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) is 22,
hence its molecular weight must be 44. It is this principle that makes it
possible in the case of a gas to fix the constitution of the molecule when the
ratio in number of the atoms entering into it has been determined
by analysis.
In the case of solids, where the constitution of the molecule in
general cannot
be fixed, it is best, as already stated, to write the molecular formula in its

simplest form, as NaAlSi 3 Os for albite. The sum of the weights of the atoms
present is then taken as the molecular weight.
458. Valence. The valence of an element is given by a number
representing the capacity of its atoms to combine with the atoms of some
unit element like hydrogen or chlorine. Thus, using the examples of Art.
456, in NaCl, since one atom of sodium unites with one of chlorine, its
valence is one; or, in other words, it is said to be univalent. Further,
calcium (as in CaCl 2 ), also barium, etc., are bivalent; aluminium is triva-
lent; silicon is tetravalent, etc. The valence may be expressed by the
number of bonds by which one element in a compound is united to another,
thus:
Na-Cl, Ba = Cl2 ,
Au=Cl 3, SniiCU, etc.
A considerable number of the elements show a different valence in different

compounds. Thus both Sb 2 3 and Sb 2 O 5 are known; also FeO and Fe2 p 3 ;
CuCl and CuCl 2 These possible variations are indicated in the following
.
table which gives the valences for the common elements.

Univalent: H, Cl, Br, I, F; Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Ag, Hg, Cu, Au.
Bivalent: O, S, Se, Te; Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Pb, Hg, Cu, Zn, Co, Ni, Fe,
Mn, Cr, C, Sn.
Trivalent: B, Au, Al, Fe, Mn, Cr, Co, Ni, N, P, As, Sb, Bi.
Tetravalent: C, Si, Ti, Zr, Sn, Mn, Pb.
Pentavalent:N, P, As, Sb, V, Bi, Nb, Ta.
459. Chemical Reactions. When solutions of two chemical sub-
stances are brought together, in many cases they react upon each other with
the result of forming new compounds out of the elements present; this phe-
nomenon is called a chemical reaction. One of the original substances may be
a gas, and in many cases similar results are obtained from a liquid and a solid,
or less often from two solids.
For example, solutions of sodium chloride (NaCl) and silver nitrate
(AgNO3 ) react on each other and yield silver chloride (AgCl) and sodium
nitrate (NaNO 3 ). This is expressed in chemical language as follows:
NaCl + AgNO =3 AgCl + NaN0 3.
This is a chemical equation, the sign of equality meaning that equal weights
are involved both before and after the reaction.
Again, hydrochloric acid (HC1) and calcium carbonate (CaCO 3 ) yield
calcium chloride (CaCl 2 ) and carbonic acid (H 2 CO 3 ) which last breaks up
;
into water (H 2 O) and carbon dioxide (CO 2 ), the last going off as a gas with
effervescence. Hence
CaCO + 2HC1 = CaCl + H O + C0
3 2 2 2.
460. Radicals. A compound of two or more elements according to

their relative valence in which all their bonds are satisfied is said to be satu-
rated. This is true of H
2 O, or, as it may be written,
H OH.
If, however,
one or more bonds is left unsatisfied, the resulting combination of elements is

called a radical. Thus H, called briefly hydroxyl, is a common radical,
O
having a valence of one, or, in other words, univalent ;
NH
4 is again a univalent
or Radicals often enter into a com-

radical; so, too, (CaF), (MgF) (A10).
pound like a simple element; for example, in ammonium chloride, 4 C1, the NH
univalent radical NH
4 plays the same part as the univalent element in Na
NaCl. In the chemical of mineral species, the commonest radical
composition
is hydroxyl H) already defined. Other examples are (CaF) in apatite

(
(see Art. 471), (MgF) in wagnerite, (A1O) in many basic silicates, etc.
461. Chemical Compound. A chemical compound is a combination
of two or more elements united by the force of chemical attraction. It is
always true of it, as before stated (Art. 456), that the elements present are
combined in the proportion of their atomic weights or some simple multiples
of these. A substance which does not satisfy this condition is not a compound,
but only a mechanical mixture.
Examples of the simpler class of compounds are afforded by the oxides, or
compounds of oxygen with another element. Thus, among minerals we have
Cu2 O, cuprous oxide (cuprite); ZnO, zinc oxide (zincite); A12 3 alumina ,
(corundum); SnO 2 tin dioxide (cassiterite)

,
SiO 2 silicon dioxide (quartz); ; ,
As2 O3 arsenic trioxide.(arsenolite).

,
Another simple class of compounds are the sulphides (with the selenides,
tellurides, arsenides, antimonides, etc.), compounds in which sulphur (selen-
ium, tellurium, arsenic, antimony, etc.) plays the same part as oxygen in the
oxides. Here belong Cu2 S, cuprous sulphide (chalcocite) ZnS, zinc sulphide ;
(sphalerite); PbTe, lead telluride (altaite); FeS 2 iron disulphide (pyrite); ,
Sb 2 S 3 antimony trisulphide (stibnite).

,
462. Acids. The more complex chemical compounds, an understanding

of which is needed in a study of minerals, are classed as acids, bases, and
salts; the distinctions between them are important.
An a compound of hydrogen, or hydroxyl, with a non-metallic
acid is
element phosphorus, etc.), or a radical con-
(as chlorine, sulphur, nitrogen,
taining these elements. When dissolved in water they all give the positive
hydrogen ion and a negative ionic substance such as Cl, SO 4 etc. The ,
hydrogen atoms of an acid may be replaced by metallic atoms; the result

being then the formation of a salt (see Art. 464). Acids in general turn blue
litmus paper red and have a sharp, sour taste. The following are familiar
examples:
HC1, hydrochloric acid,
HNO nitric acid.
3,
H CO carbonic acid.
2 3,
H S0 sulphuric acid.
2 4,
H Si0 metasilicic acid.

2 3,
H PO4, phosphoric acid.

3
H Si04, orthosilicic acid.

4
It is to be noted that with a given acid element several acids are possible.
Thus normal, or orthosilicic, acid is H 4 SiO 4 in which the bonds of the ele- ,
ment silicon are all satisfied by the hydroxyl (HO). But the removal of one
molecule of water, H O,
2 from this gives the formula H SiO
2 3, or metasilicic
acid.
Acids which, like 3 HN0
contain one atom of hydrogen that may be
,
replaced by a metallic atom (e.g., in 3 ) are called monobasic. KNO

If, as in
H2 CO 3 and H
2 SO 4 there are two atoms or a
,
single bivalent atom, (e.g., in
CaC03 BaSO 4) the acids are dibasic. Similarly, 3 PO 4 is tribasic, etc.
, H
Most acids are liquids (or gases), and hence acids are represented
very
sparingly among minerals; B(OH) 3 boric acid (sassolite), is an illustration.
,
463. Bases. The bases, or hydroxides, as they are also called, are
compounds which may be regarded as formed of a metallic element (or radical)
and the univalent radical hydroxyl, (OH) or, in other words, of an oxide ;
with water. Thus potash, K 2 O, and water, 2 O, form 2K(OH), or potassium H

hydroxide; also CaO H 2 O similarly give Ca(OH) 2 or calcium hydroxide.
+ ,
In general, when soluble in water, bases give an alkaline reaction with turmeric
paper or red litmus paper, and they also neutralize an acid, as explained in
the next article. Further, the bases yield water on ignition, that is, at a
temperature sufficiently high to break up the compound.
Among minerals the bases are represented by the hydroxides, or hydrated
oxides, as Mg(OH) 2 magnesium
, hydrate (brucite); A1(OH) 2 ,
aluminium
hydrate (gibbsite); also, (A1O)(OH), diaspore, etc.
464. Salts. A third class of compounds are the salts; these may be
regarded as formed chemically by the reaction of a base upon an acid, or, in
other words, by the neutralization of the acid. Thus calcium hydrate and sul-
phuric acid give calcium sulphate and water:
Ca(OH) 2 -f H S0 =
2 4 CaSO4 + 2H2 O.
Here calcium sulphate is and in this case the acid, sulphuric acid, is
the salt,
said to be neutralized base, calcium hydroxide.
by the It is instructive to
compare the formulas of a base, an acid, and the corresponding salt, as
follows :
Base, Ca(OH) 2 ; Acid, H S02 4 ; Salt, CaS0 4 .
Here it is seen that a salt may be simply described as formed from an acid by
the replacement of the hydrogen atom, or atoms, by a metallic element or
radical.
465. Typical Salts. The commonest types of salts represented

among minerals are the following:
Chlorides: salts of hydrochloric acid, HC1; as AgCl, silver chloride (cerar-
gyrite).
Nitrates: salts of nitric acid, 3 as HN0 3 ;
KNO
potassium nitrate (niter). ,
Carbonates: salts of carbonic acid, 2 C0 3 H

as CaC0 3 calcium carbonate
; ,
(calcite and aragonite).

Sulphates: salts of sulphuric acid, 2 S0 4 H
as CaS0 4 calcium sulphate ; ,
(anhydrite).
Phosphates: salts of phosphoric acid, 3 P0 4 H
as Ca 3 (PO 4 ) 2 calcium phos-; ,
phate.
Silicates: several classes of salts are here included. The most common are
the salts of metasilicic acid, 2 SiO 3 H
as MnSi0 3 manganese metasilicate
; ,
(rhodonite). Also salts of orthosilicic acid, 4 Si0 4 as 2 Si0 4H manganese ;

Mn ,
orthosilicate (tephroite) .
Numerous other classes of salts are also included among mineral species;
their composition, as well as that of complex salts of the above types, is
explained in the descriptive part of this work.
466. Normal, Acid, and Basic Salts. A neutral or normal salt is one
in which the basic element completely neutralizes the acid, or, in other words,
one of the type already given as examples, in which all the hydrogen atoms of
the acid have been replaced by metallic atoms or radicals. Thus, K 2 SO 4 is
normal potassium sulphate, but HKSO 4 on the other hand, is acid potassium
,
sulphate, since in the acid H 2 SO 4 only one of the bonds

is taken by the basic
element potassium. Salts of this kind are called acid salts. The formula in
* the consisted of a normal salt and
such cases may be written as if compound
an acid; thus, for the example given, K SO H SO
2 4 . 2 4.
A is one in which- the acid part of the compound is not sufficient

basic salt
to satisfy the bonds of the base. Thus malachite is a basic salt
all basic
carbonate of copper its composition being expressed by the formula
_ f^r\
Cu2 (OH) 2 C0 3 This may be written CuCO Cu(OH) 2 or (Cu 2 ) =
. 3 .
,
^g^
The majority of minerals consist not of simple salts, as those noted above, but
of more or less complex double salts in which several metallic elements are
present. Thus common grossular garnet is an orthosilicate containing both
calcium and aluminium as bases; its formula is Ca3 Al2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
467. Sulpho-salts. The salts thus far spoken of are all oxygen salts.
There are also others, of analogous constitution, in which sulphur takes the
place of the oxygen; they are hence called sulpha-salts. Thus normal sulph-
arsenious acid has the formula 3 AsS 3 H
and the corresponding silver salt is
,
AgsAsS 3 the mineral proustite. Similarly the silver salt of the analogous
,
antimony acid is Ag3 SbS 3 the mineral pyrargyrite. From the normal acids
,
named, a series of other hypothetical acids may be derived, as HAsS 2 4 As 2 S 5 ,

H ,
etc. ; these acids are not known to exist, but their salts are important minerals.
H
Thus zinkenite, PbSb 2 S4, is a salt of the acid 2 Sb 2 S4, and jamesonite, Pb 2 Sb 2 S 5 ,
of the acid H4Sb 2 S 5 etc. ,
468. Water of Crystallization. As stated in Art. 463, the hydroxides,

or bases, and further basic salts -in general, yield water when ignited. Thus
calcium hydroxide Ca(OH) 2 breaks up on heating into CaO and 2 O, as H
expressed in the chemical equation
2Ca(OH) 2 = 2CaO + H 0. 2
So also the basic cupric carbonate, malachite, Cu 2 (OH) 2 C0 3 yields water on ,
ignition; and the same is true of the complex basic orthosilicates, like zoisite,
whose formula is (HO)Ca2 Al 3 (Si04) 3 It is not to be understood, however, in
.
these or similar cases, that water as such is present in the substance.

On the other hand, there is a large number of mineral compounds which
yield water readily when heated, and in which the water molecules are regarded
as present as so-called water of crystallization. Thus, the formula of gypsum
is written
CaSO 4 + 2H2 O,
and the molecules of water (2H 2 O) are considered as water of crystallization.
So, too, in potash alum, KA1(S0 4) 2 +
12H 2 O, the water is believed to play the
same part.
469. Formulas of Minerals. The strictly empirical formula expresses
the kinds and numbers of atoms of the elements present in the given com-
pound, without attempting to show the way in which it is believed that the
atoms are combined. Thus, in the case of zoisite the empirical formula is
HCa2Al 3 Si 3 Oi 3 While not attempting to represent the structural formula
.
(which will not be discussed here), it is convenient in certain cases to indicate

the atoms which there is reason to believe play a peculiar relation to each other.
Thus the same formula written (HO)Ca2 Al 3 (SiO 4 ) 3 shows that it is regarded as
a basic orthosilicate, in other words, a basic salt of orthosilicic acid, 4 SiO 4 H .
*
This early form of writing the composition explains the name often given to the com-
pound, namely, in this case, "bisulphate of potash."
Again, the empirical formula of common apatite is Ca 5 FP3 Oi 2 but if this ;
is written (CaF)Ca 4 (PO 4 )3, it shows that it is regarded as a phosphate of the

acid H
3 PO4, that is, H^PO^s, in which the nine hydrogen atoms are replaced
by four Ca atoms together with the univalent radical (CaF). In another kind
of apatite the radical (CaCl) enters in the same way. Similarly to this the
formula of pyromorphite is (PbCl)Pb 4 (PO 4 )3, of vanadinite (PbCl)Pb 4 (VO 4 ) 3 .
Further, it is often convenient to employ the method of writing the form-

ulas in vogue under the old dualistic system. For example,
CaO.CO 2 for CaCO 3,
3CaO . A1 2 O 3 3SiO 2 for

. Ca3 Al2Si3 Oi 2 ,
3Ag2 S Sb 2 S 3 for
.
Ag SbS3 etc.
3 ,
It isno longer believed, however, that the molecular groups CaO, A1 2 3 etc., ,
actually exist in the molecule of the substance. But in part because these
groups are what analysis of the substance affords directly, and in part because
so easily retained in the memory, this method of writing is still often used.
470. Calculation of a Formula from an Analysis. The result of an
analysis gives the proportions, in a hundred parts of the mineral, of either the
elements themselves, or of their oxides or other compounds obtained in the
chemical analysis. In order lo obtain the atomic proportions of the elements :
Divide the percentages of the elements by the respective ATOMIC WEIGHTS;
or, forthose of the oxides: Divide the percentage amounts of each by their
MOLECULAR WEIGHTS; then find the simplest ratio in whole numbers for the
numbers thus obtained. .
Example. An analysis of bournonite from Wolfsberg gave C. Bromeis the results under
(1) below. These percentages divided by the respective atomic weights, as indicated, give
the numbers under (2). Finally the ratio of these numbers gives very nearly 1 3 1 1. : : :
Hence the formula derived is CuPbSbS 3 The theoretical values called for by the formula
.
are added under (4).

(1) (2) (3) (4)
Sb 24'34 -r- 120 = 0'203 1 247
S 1976 * 32 = 0'617 3 19'8
Pb 42-88 -5- 206-4 = 0'208 1 42'5
Cu 13-06 -r- 63-2 = 0-207 1 13'0
100-04 lOO'O
Second Example. The mean of two analyses of a garnet from Alaska gave Kountze the
results under (1) below. Here, as usual, the percentage amounts of the several molecular
,
O
groups (SiO 2 A1 2 3 etc.) are given instead of those of the elements. These amounts
,
divided by the respective niolecular weights give the numbers under (2). In this case the
amounts of the protoxides are taken together and the ratio thus obtained is 3 '09 1 2 "92, : :
which corresponds approximately to the formula 3FeO.Al 2 3 .3SiO 2 or Fe 3 Al2(SiO 4 ) 3 The O ,

.
magnesium in this garnet would ordinarily be explained by the presence of the pyrope
molecule (Mg 3 Al 2 [SiO 4 ] 3) together with the simple almandite molecule whose composition
is given above.
(1) (2) (3)

SiO 2 39-29 -5- 60 = 0'655 3'09
A1 2 O 3 21-70 -5- 102 = 0-212 1
Fe2 3 tr.
FeO 30-82 H- 71 -9 = 0'429

MnO 1-51 -f- 70-8 = 0'022 L.
l A1Q 9 Q9
.
MgO 5-26 -^40 = 0-132

CaO 1-99 -J- 55-9 = 0'036
100-57
It is necessary, small quantities only of certain elements (as MnO, MgO, CaO
when very
above) are present, to neglect them in the final formula, reckoning them in with the elements
which they replace, that is, with those of the same quanti valence. The degree of corre-
if the latter is correctly assumed,
spondence between the analysis and the formula deduced,
depends entirely upon the accuracy of the former.
!
471.
Isomorphism. Chemical compounds which have an analogous
composition and a closely related crystalline form are said to be isomorphous.
This phenomenon, called ISOMORPHISM, was first clearly brought out by Mit-
scherlich.
examples of groups of isomorphous compounds will be
found among
Many
the minerals described in the following pages. Some examples are mentioned
here in order to elucidate the subject.
In the brief discussion of the periodic classification of the chemical ele-
ments of Art. 455, attention has been called to the prominent groups among
the elements which form analogous compounds. Thus calcium, barium, and
strontium, and also lead, form the two series of analogous compounds,
Aragonite Group Barite Group
CaCO 3, aragonite. Also CaSO 4 , anhydrite.
BaC03 ,
witherite. BaS0 4 ,
barite.
SrCO 3 ,
strontianite. SrS0 4 ,
celestite.
PbCO 3, cerussite, PbSO 4 , anglesite.
Further, the members of each series crystallize in closely similar forms. The
carbonates are orthorhombic, with axial ratios not far from one another; thus
the prismatic angle approximates to 60 and 120, and corresponding to this
they all exhibit pseudo-hexagonal forms due to twinning. The sulphates also
form a similar orthorhombic series, and though anhydrite deviates somewhat
widely, the others are close together in angle and in cleavage.
Again, calcium, magnesium, iron, zinc, and manganese form a series of car-
bonates with analogous composition as shown in the list of the species of
the Calcite Group given on p. 437. This table brings out clearly the close
relation in form between the species named.
Further it is also generally true with an isomorphous series that the various
molecules may enter in greater or less degree into the constitution of one of the
members of the series without causing any marked change in the crystal
characters. For instance, in the Calcite Group, calcite itself may contain
small percentages of MgCO 3 FeCO3 and MnCO 3
,
These different molecules
.
may assume in the crystal structure of the mineral the same functions as the
corresponding amounts of CaC0 3 which they have replaced. The molecules
of magnesite and siderite, MgCO 3 and FeCO 3 may replace each other in any
,
proportion and the same is true with siderite and rhodochrosite, MnC0 3 .
Various intermediate mixtures of these latter molecules have been described

and given distinctive names to which definite formulas have been assigned. It
is doubtful, however, if these compounds have any real existence but merely
represent certain points in the complete isomorphous series that lies between
the end members. Dolomite, CaMg(CO 3 ) 2 on the other hand, is a definite
,
compound and not an isomorphous mixture of CaCO 3 and MgCO 3 It may, .
however, contain varying amounts of FeCO 3 MnCO 3 and also an excess of

,
CaCO3 or MgCO 3 all of which enter the regular molecule in the form of
,
isomorphous replacements.
The Apatite Group forms another valuable illustration since in it are
represented the analogous compounds, apatite and pyromorphite, both phos-
phates, but respectively phosphates of calcium and lead; also the analogous
lead compounds pyromorphite, mimetite, and vanadinite respectively lead

phosphate, lead arsenate, and lead vanadate. Further, in all these compounds
the radical (RC1) or (RF) enters in the same way (see Art. 469). Thus the
formulas for the two kinds of apatite and that for pyromorphite are as follows :
(CaF)Ca 4 (P0 4)3, (CaCl)Ca 4 (PO 4 )3, (PbCl)Pb 4 (PO 4 ) 3 .
Some of the more important isomorphous groups are mentioned below. For a discus-
sion of them, as well as of many others that might be mentioned here, reference must be
made to the descriptive part of this work.
Isometric System. The Spinel group, including spinel, MgAl 2 O 4 ; also magnetite,
chromite, franklinite, gahnite, etc. The Galena group, as galena, PbS; argentite, Ag->S,
etc. The Garnet group, as grossularite, CasAiiSiiOn, etc.
Tetragonal System. Rutile group, including rutile, TiO2,' cassiterite, SnC>2. The
Scheelite group, including scheelite, CaWO 4 ;
PbW0
wulfenite,
stolzite, 4 4
; PbMoO .
Hexagonal System. Apatite group, already mentioned, including apatite, pyromor-

phite, mimetite, and vanadinite. Corundum group, corundum, A1 2 3 ; hematite, FesOs.O
Calcite group, already mentioned. Phenacite group, etc.
Orthorhombic System. Aragonite group, and Barite group, both mentioned above.
Chrysolite group, (Mg,Fe)2SiO 4 Topaz group, etc.
;
Monodinic System. Copperas group, including melanterite, FeSO 4 THizO; bieberite, +

CoSO 4 + 7H 2 O, etc. Pyroxene and Amphibole groups, and the Mica group.
Monodinic and Triclinic Systems. Feldspar group.
472. Isomorphous Mixtures. It is important to note that the inter-

mediate compounds in the case of an isomorphous series, such as those spoken
of in the preceding article, often show a distinct gradation in crystalline form,
and more particularly in physical characters (e.g., specific gravity, optical
properties, etc.). This is illustrated by the species of the calcite group already
referred to; also still more strikingly by the group of the triclinic feldspars as
fully discussedunder the description of that group. See further Art. 424.
The feldspars also illustrate two other important points in the subject,
which must be briefly alluded to here. The triclinic feldspars have been shown
by Tschermak to be isomorphous mixtures of the end compounds in varying
proportions :
Albite, NaAlSi 3 O 8 .
Anorthite, CaAl2 Si 2 O 8 .
Here it is seen that these compounds have not an analogous composition in the
narrow sense previously illustrated, and yet they are isomorphous and form an
isomorphous series. Other examples of this are found among the pyroxenes,
the scapolites, etc.
Further, the Feldspar group in the broader sense includes several other
species, conspicuously the monoclinic orthoclase, KAlSi 3 Os, which, though
belonging to a different system, still approximates closely in form to the
triclinic species.
473. Variation in Composition of Minerals. Isomorphous Replacement
and Solid Solution. The idea that a mineral must rigidly conform in its
chemical composition to a theoretical composition derived from its formula
can no longer be strictly held. It is true that the majority of minerals do show
a close correspondence to that theory, commonly within the limits of possible
errors in the analyses. On the other hand, many minerals show slight and
certain ones considerable variations from their theoretical compositions.
These variations. can usually be explained by the principle of isomorphism.
An instructive example is the case of sphalerite. Note in the analyses quoted
below how the percentages of zinc diminish and those of iron correspondingly
increase. It is evident from these analyses that iron, and in a much smaller
degree other metals, may enter into the

chemical compound and while replac-
as it, in the crystalline structure of the
ing the zinc perform the same function
mineral. The iron is therefore spoken of as being isomorphous with the zinc
or the iron sulphide molecule as isomorphous with the zinc sulphide molecule.
There is no definite ratio between the amounts of the iron and zinc that may
be present but there is a constant ratio (1 1) between the sum of the atoms
:
of the metals and the atoms of sulphur. That is, although the composition
may vary, the atomic ratios and the crystalline structure remain constant. In
some cases this interchange between elements or radicals may be complete,
in other cases there may be distinct limitations to the amount by which any
element or radical may be replaced by another. For instance in sphalerite
the maximum percentage of the isomorphous iron seems to be about 16 to
18 per cent.
Colorless Sphalerite Brown Sphalerite Black Sphalerite
S 32.93 S 33.36 S 33.25
Zn 66.69 Zn 63.36 Zn 50.02
Fe 0.42 Fe 3.60 Fe 15.44
moi 100.32 Cd 0.30
100.02
Further, we have cases where a compound may, in a certain sense, dissolve

another unrelated substance and form what is known as a solid solution.
This kind of phenomenon is well recognized among artificial salts and has
recently been definitely proved with certain minerals. For instance, it has
been shown experimentally that the artificial iron sulphide, FeS, correspond-
ing to pyrrhotite, can dissove an excess of sulphur up to about 6 per cent.
Natural pyrrhotite always contains an excess of sulphur over that required by
the formula, FeS, and various formulas such as Fe 7 S 8 Fe n S n +i, etc., have been
,
assigned to the mineral. This extra sulphur in the mineral varies in amount
but also has as its maximum about 6 per cent. In view of the experimental
data there is no doubt but that pyrrhotite should be considered as the mono-
sulphide of iron containing varying small amounts of excess sulphur in the
form of a solid solution.
Another case of solid solution is undoubtedly shown by nephelite which
commonly contains a small excess of SiO 2 It is very probable that further
.
investigation will show that many minerals have this power of holding in
solid solution small amounts of foreign substances and that many hitherto
inexplicable discrepancies in their analyses may be explained in this way.
Such an assumption should not be made, however, without convincing proof
undoubtedly due to
of its probability, since many analytical discrepancies are
either faulty analyses or to impure material.
474. Colloidal Minerals or Mineral Gels.* It has been recognized
recently that our amorphous hydrated minerals frequently do not conform in
their analyses to the usually accepted formulas and cannot be regarded in the
strict sense as definite chemical compounds. They show rather the proper-
ties of solid colloids or as they are
commonly called mineral gels. A colloidal
solution may be conceived as being intermediate in its characters between a
true solution and the case where the mineral material is definitely in suspen-
*
For a resume of the subject of gel minerals and a complete bibliography reference is
made to articles by Marc and Himmelbauer, Fortschritte Min. Krist.
Pet., 3, 11, 33, 1913.
sion in a liquid. It is probable that all gradations between these two extremes
may occur. The mineral gels, or hydrogels, as they are sometimes called,
since water is the liquid involved, are apparently formed from such colloidal
solutions by some process of coagulation. They are considered therefore to
consist of a micro-heterogeneous mixture of excessively minute particles of
mineral material and water.
These mineral gels are formed at low temperatures and pressures and are
characteristically found among the products of rock weathering and in the
oxidized zone of ore deposits. Some of them also occur in hot spring deposits.
These minerals ordinarily assume botryoidal, reniform or stalactitic shapes,
although, when the conditions of formation do not permit free growth, they
may be earthy or dendritic. Frequently a mineral originally colloidal may
become more or less crystalline in character through a molecular rearrange-
ment and develop a fibrous" or foliated structure. These have been designated
as meta-colloids.
One importantcharacter of the gel minerals is their power to adsorb foreign
materials. Ifthrough some change in condition one of these hydrogels should
lose a part of its water content the remaining material would have a finely
divided and porous structure exactly adapted to exert a strong power of
adsorption. Consequently, although in many cases the main mass of the
mineral may have a composition closely similar to some definite crystallized
mineral, it will commonly show a considerable range in composition due both
to the non-molecular relations of the contained water and to this secondary
adsorption. Common mineral gels or substances derived from them are opal,
bauxite, psilomelane, various members of the phosphate and arsenate groups,
etc. As suggested above, gel varieties of minerals that occur also in crystal-
lineforms are thought to exist. For example some authors speak of bauxite
as the gel form of hydrargillite, stilpnosiderite as the gel form of goethite,
chrysocolla of dioptase, and further give new names, such as gelvariscite,
gelpyrophyllite, etc., to the gel phases of the corresponding crystalline minerals.
475. Dimorphism. Isodimorphism. A chemical compound, which
crystallizes in two forms genetically distinct, is said to be dimorphous; if in
three, trimorphous, or in general pleomorphous. This phenomenon is called
DIMORPHISM Or PLEOMORPHISM.
An example is given by the compound calcium carbonate (CaCO3 ), which
isdimorphous appearing as calcite and as aragonite. As calcite it crystallizes
:
in the rhombohedral class of the^ hexagonal system, and, unlike as its many
crystalline forms are, they may be all referred to the same fundamental axes,
and, what is more, they have all the same cleavage and the same specific
gravity (27) and, of course, the same optical characters. As aragonite, cal-
cium carbonate appears in orthorhombic crystals, whose optical characters
are entirely different from those of calcite; moreover, the specific gravity of
aragonite (2'9) is higher than that of calcite (27).
Many other examples might be given: Titanium =dioxide (TiO2 )=is tri-
morphous, the species being called rutile, tetragonal (c 0'6442), G. 4*25;
octahedrite, tetragonal (c
= 1778), G. = 3 '9; and brookite, orthorhombic,
G. = 4' 15. Carbon appears in two forms, in diamond and graphite. Other
familiar examples are pyrite and marcasite (FeS 2 ), sphalerite and wurtzite
(ZnS), etc.
When two or more analogous compounds are at the same time isomorphous
and dimorphous, they are said to be isodimbrphous, and the phenomenon is
called ISODIMORPHISM. An example of this is given in the Pyrite and Mar-

casite groups described later. Thus we have in the isometric Pyrite Group,
pyrite, FeS 2 smaltite, CoAs 2 in the orthorhombic Marcasite Group, marcas-
, ;
ite, FeS 2
, safflorite, CoAs 2 etc.
,
476. Chemical and Microchemical Analysis. The analysis of min-

erals is a subject treated of in chemical works, and need not be touched upon
here except so far as to note the convenient use of certain qualitative methods,
as described in the later part of this chapter.
Of more importance are the microchemical methods applicable to sections
under the microscope and often yielding decisive results with little labor.
This subject has been particularly developed by Boricky, Haushofer, Behrens,
Streng, and others. Reference is made to the discussion by Rosenbusch.
(Mikr. Phys., 1904, p. 435 et seq.), to Johannsen (Manual of Pet. Methods,
559, et seq., including a bibliography). Microchemical methods used upon
polished surfaces of opaque minerals are described by Murdock (Micro.
Deter. Opaque Min., 1916) and by Davy-Farnham (Micro. Exam, of the
Ore Min., 1920).
477. Mineral Synthesis. The occurrence of certain mineral com-
pounds (e.g., the chrysolites) among the products of metallurgical furnaces
has long been noted. But it has only been in recent years that the formation
of artificial minerals has been made the subject of minute systematic experi-
mental study. In this direction the French chemists have been particularly
successful, and now it may be stated that the majority of common minerals
quartz, the feldspars, amphibole, mica. etc. have been obtained in crystal-
lized form. Even the diamond has been formed in minute crystals by
Moissan. These studies are obviously of great importance particularly as
throwing light upon the method of formation of minerals in nature. The
chief results of the work thus far done are given in the volumes mentioned in
the Introduction, p. 4.
478. Alteration of Minerals. Pseudomorphs. The chemical altera-
tion of mineral species under the action of natural agencies is a subject of
great importance and interest, particularly when it results in the change of the
original composition into some other equally definite compound. A
crystal-
lized mineral which has thus suffered change so that its form no longer belongs
to its chemical composition has already been defined (Art. 273, p. 183) as a
pseudomorph. It remains to describe more fully the different kinds of pseudo-
morphs. Pseudomorphs are classed under several heads :
1. Pseudomorphs by substitution.
2. Pseudomorphs by simple deposition, and either by (a) incrustation or
(b) infiltration.
3. Pseudomorphs by alteration; and these may be altered
(a) without a change of composition, by paramorphism;
(b) by the loss of an ingredient;
(c) by the assumption of a foreign substance;
(d) by a partial exchange of constituents.
1. The first class of pseudomorphs,
by substitution, embraces those cases
where there has been a gradual removal of the original material and a cor-
responding and simultaneous replacement of it by another, without, however,
any chemical reaction between the two. A common example of this is a piece
of fossilized wood, where the original fiber has been
replaced entirely by
silica. The first step in the process was the filling of the pores and cavities
by the silica in solution, and then as the woody fiber, by gradual decomposi-
tion, disappeared the silica further took its place. Other examples are quartz
after fluorite, calcite, and many other species; cassiterite after orthoclase;
native copper after aragonite, etc.
2. Pseudomorphs by incrustation form a less
important class. Such are
the crusts of quartz formed over fluorite. In most cases the removal of the
original mineral has gone on simultaneously with the deposition of the second,
so that the resulting pseudomorph is properly one of substitution. In pseudo-
morphs by infiltration a cavity made by the removal of a crystal has been
filled by another mineral.
3. The third class of pseudomorphs, byalteration, includes a considerable
proportion of the observed cases, of which the number is very large. Con-
clusive evidence of the change which has gone on is often furnished by a
nucleus of the original mineral in the center of the altered crystal e.g., a
kernel of cuprite in a pseudomorphous octahedron of malachite; also of
chrysolite in a pseudomorphous crystal of serpentine, etc.
(a) An example of paramorphism that is, of a change in molecular con-
stitution without change of chemical substance is furnished by the change
of aragonite to calcite (both CaCO 3 ) at a certain temperature also the
;
paramorphs of rutile after brookite (both TiO 2 ) from Magnet Cove, Arkansas.
(6) An example of the pseudomorphs in which alteration is accompanied
by a loss of ingredients is furnished by crystals of native copper in the form
of cuprite.
(c) In the change of cuprite to malachite e.g., the familiar crystals from
Chessy, France an instance is afforded of the assumption of an ingredient
viz., carbon dioxide (and water). Pseudomorphs of gypsum after anhydrite
occur where there has been an assumption of water alone.
(d) A partial exchange of constituents in other words, a loss of one and
gain of another takes place in the change of feldspar to kaolin, in which the
potash silicate disappears and water is taken up; pseudomorphs of limonite
after pyrite or siderite, of chlorite after garnet, pyromorphite after galena,
are other examples.
The chemical processes involved in such changes open a wide and impor-
tant field for investigation. Their study has served to throw much light on
the chemical constitution of mineral species and the conditions under which
they have been formed. For the literature of the subject see the Introduc-
tion, p. 4 (Blum, Bischof, Roth, etc.).
CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF MINERALS

479. The complete investigation of the chemical composition of a min-
eral includes, first, the identification of the elements present by qualitative
analysis, and, second, the determination of the relative amounts of each by
quantitative analysis, from which last the formula can be calculated. Both
processes carried out in full call for the equipment of a chemical laboratory.
An approximate qualitative analysis, however, can, in many cases, be made
quickly and simply with few conveniences. The methods employed involve
"
either (a) the use of acids or other reagents in the wet way," or (6) the use
of the blowpipe, or of both methods combined. Some practical instructions

will be given applying to both cases.
EXAMINATION IN THE WET WAY

480. Reagents, etc. The most commonly employed chemical re-
agents are the three mineral acids, hydrochloric, nitric, and sulphuric acids.
To these may be added ammonium hydroxide, also solutions of barium chlo-
ride, silver nitrate, ammonium molybdate,
ammonium oxalate; finally, dis-
tilled water in a wash-bottle.
A few test-tubes are needed for the trials and sometimes a porcelain dish
with a handle called a casserole; further, a glass funnel and filter-paper.
The Bunsen gas-burner (p. 330) is the best source of heat, though an alcohol
lamp may take its place. It is unnecessary to remark that the use of acids
and the other reagents requires much care to avoid injury to person or clothing.
In testing the powdered mineral with the acids, the important points to be
noted are: (1) the degree of solubility, and (2) the phenomena attending entire
or partial solution; that is, whether (a) a solution is obtained quietly, without
effervescence, and, if so, what its color is; or (6) a gas is evolved, producing
effervescence; or (c) an insoluble constituent is separated out.
481. Solubility. In testing the degree of solubility hydrochloric acid
is most commonly used, though in the case of many metallic minerals, as the
sulphides and compounds of lead and silver, nitric acid is required. Less
often sulphuric acid and aqua regia (nitro-hydrochloric acid) are resorted to.
The trial is usually made in a test-tube, and in general the fragment of
mineral to be examined should be first carefully pulverized in an agate
mortar. In most cases the heat of the Bunsen burner must be employed.
(a) Many minerals are completely soluble without effervescence; among
these are some of the oxides, as hematite, limonite, gothite, etc.; some sul-
phates, many phosphates and arsenates, etc. Gold and platinum are soluble
only in aqua regia or nitro-hydrochloric acid.
A yellow solution is usually obtained if much iron is present; a blue or
greenish blue solution (turning deep blue on the addition of ammonium hy-
droxide in excess) from compounds of copper; pink or pale rose from cobalt, etc.
(b) Solubility with effervescence takes place when the mineral loses a
gaseous ingredient, or when one is generated by the mutual reaction of acid
and mineral. Most conspicuous here are the carbonates, all of which dissolve
with effervescence, giving off the odorless gas carbon dioxide (C0 2 ), though
some of them only when pulverized, or, again, on the addition of heat. In
applying this test dilute hydrochloric acid is employed.
Hydrogen sulphide (H 2 S) is evolved by some sulphides when dissolved in
hydrochloric acid: this is true of sphalerite, stibnite, etc. This gas is readily
recognized by its offensive odor.
Chlorine is evolved by oxides of manganese and also chromic and vanadic
when dissolved in hydrochloric acid.
acid salts
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2 ) is given off, in the form of red suffocating fumes,
by many metallic minerals, and also some of the lower oxides (cuprite, etc.),
when treated with nitric acid.
(c) The
separation of an insoluble ingredient takes place: With many
silicates, the
silica separating sometimes as a fine
powder, and again as a jelly;
in the latter case the mineral is said to In order
gelatinize (sodalite, analcite).
to test this point the finely pulverized silicate is
digested with strong hydro-
chloric acid, and the solution afterward slowly evaporated nearly to dryness.
With a considerable number of silicates the gelatinization takes place only
after the mineral has been previously fused; while some others, which ordi-
narily gelatinize, are rendered insoluble by ignition.
With many sulphides (as pyrite) a separation of sulphur takes place when
they are treated with nitric acid.
Some compounds of titanium and tungsten are decomposed by hydro-
chloric acid with the separation of the oxides of the elements named (TiO2,
WO 3) . The same is true of salts of molybdic and vanadic acids, only that here
the oxides are soluble in an excess of the acid.
Compounds containing silver, lead, and mercury give with hydrochloric
acid insoluble residues of the chlorides. These compounds are, however,
soluble in nitric acid.
When compounds containing tin are treated with nitric acid, the tin
dioxide (SnO 2 ) separates as a white powder. A
corresponding reaction takes
place under similar circumstances with minerals containing arsenic and
antimony.
Insoluble Minerals. A large number of minerals are not sensibly attacked
by any of the acids. Among these may be named the following oxides:
corundum, spinel, chromite, diaspore, rutile, cassiterite, quartz; also cerar-
gyrite; many silicates, titanates, tantalates, and niobates; some of the sul-
phates, as barite, celestite; many phosphates, as xenotime, lazulite, childrenite,
amblygonite; also the borate, boracite.
482. Examination of the Solution. If the mineral is difficultly, or
only partially, soluble, the question as to solubility or insolubility is not always
settled at once. Partial solution is often shown by the color given to the
liquid, or more generally by the precipitate yielded, for example, on the addi-
tion of ammonium hydroxide to the liquid filtered off from the remaining
powder. The further examination of the solution yielded, whether from par-
tial or complete solution, after the separation by filtration of any insoluble
residue, requires the systematic laboratory methods of qualitative analysis.

It may be noted, however, that in the case of sulphates the presence of
sulphur is shown by the precipitation of a heavy white powder of barium
sulphate (BaSOO when barium chloride is added. The presence of silver in
solution is shown by the separation of a white curdy precipitate of silver
chloride (AgCl) upon the addition of any chlorine compound; conversely, the
same precipitate shows the presence of chlorine when silver nitrate is added
to the solution.
Again, phosphorus may be detected if present, even in small quantity,
in a nitric acid solution of a mineral by the fine yellow powder which separates,
sometimes after standing, when ammonium molybdate has been added.
EXAMINATION BY MEANS OF THE BLOWPIPE*

483. The use
of the blowpipe, in skilled hands, gives a quick method of
obtaining a partial knowledge of the qualitative composition of a mineral.
The apparatus needed includes the following articles :
*
The subject of the blowpipe and its use is treated very briefly in this place. The
student who wishes to be fully informed not only in regard to the use of the various instru-
ments, but also as to all the valuable reactions practically useful in the identification of
minerals, should consult a manual on the subject. The Brush-Penfield Manual of Deter-
minative Mineralogy, with an introduction on Blowpipe Analysis, is particularly to be
recommended.
Blowpipe, lamp, forceps, preferably with platinum points, platinum wire,

charcoal, glass tubes; also a small hammer with sharp edges, a steel anvil an
inch or two long, a horseshoe magnet, a small agate mortar, a pair of cutting
pliers, a three-cornered file.
Further, test-paper, both turmeric and blue litmus paper; a little pure
tin-foil; also in small wooden boxes the fluxes: borax (sodium tetraborate) ,
soda (anhydrous sodium carbonate), salt of phosphorus or microcosmic salt

(sodium-ammonium phosphate), acid potassium sulphate (HKS0 4 ); also a
solution of cobalt nitrate in a dropping bulb or bottle; further, the three acids
mentioned in Art. 480.
484. Blowpipe and Lamp. A good form of blowpipe is shown in Fig.
622. The air-chamber, at a, is essential to stop the condensed moisture of
the breath, the tip (6), which is removable, is usually of brass, (c) is a remov-
able mouthpiece which may or may not be used as preferred.
The most convenient form of lamp is that furnished by an ordinary Bunsen
*
gas-burner (Fig. 623), provided with a tube, 6, which when inserted cuts off
the air supply at a; the gas then burns at the top with the
622 usual yellow flame. This flame should be one to one and
a half inches high. The tip of the blow-pipe is held near
(or just within the flame, see beyond), and the air blown
through it causes the flame to take the shape shown in
Fig. 625.
It is necessary to learn to blow continuously, that
is, to
keep up a blast of air from the compressed reservoir in
the mouth-cavity while respiration
is maintained through the nose.
To accomplish this successfully and
at the same time to produce a clear
flame without unnecessary fatiguing
effort calls for some practice.
When the tube, 6, is removed, the
gas burns with a colorless flame and
is used for heating glass
tubes, test-
tubes, etc.
485. Forceps. Wire. The for-
ceps (Fig. 624) are made of steel,
nickel-plated, and should have a spring
strong enough to support firmly the
small fragment of mineral between the
platinum points at d. The steel points
at the other end are used to pick
up small pieces of minerals, but must not be
inserted in the flame. Care must be taken not to injure the platinum
by allow-
ing it to come in contact with the fused mineral, especially if this contains
antimony, arsenic, lead, etc. Cheaper forceps, made of steel wire, etc., while
not so convenient, will also serve well.
A short length of fairly stout reasonably
platinum wire to be used in the making of
bead tests should be available. A similar
length of finer wire for making
flame tests is also desirable.
*
Instead of a good stearin candle will
this, answer, or an oil flame with flat wick.
486. Charcoal. The charcoal employed should not snap and should
yield but little ash; the kinds made from basswood, pine or willow are best.
It is most conveniently employed in rectangular pieces, say four inches long,
an inch wide, and three-quarters of an inch in thickness. The surface must
always be perfectly clean before each trial.
487. Glass Tubes. The glass tubes should be preferably of two
grades; a hard glass tubing with about 5 mm. interior diameter to be cut in
five inch lengths and used in open tube tests and a soft glass tubing with about
624 3 mm. interior diameter to be in about six inch lengths, each length
yielding two closed tubes.
488. Blowpipe Flame. The blowpipe flame, shown in Fig. 625,
consists of three cones an inner of a blue color, c, a second pale violet
:
cone, b, and an outer invisible cone, a. The cone c consists of

unburned gas mixed with air from the blowpipe. There is no
625
combustion in this cone and
therefore no heat. The cone
b is the one in which combus-
tion is taking place. This cone
carbon monoxide
contains
which
a strong reducing
is
agent, see below. Cone a is merely a

gas envelope composed of the final
products of combustion, C02 and
Blowpipe Flame
the tip of the cone 6, and the mineral
R
is
^The ^
^ mogt intense near
held at this point when its fusibility
is to be tested.
The point o, Fig. 625, is called the OXIDIZING FLAME (O.F.) it is character- ;
izedby the excess of the oxygen of the air and has hence an oxidizing effect
upon the assay. This flame is best produced when the jet of the blowpipe
is inserted a very little in the gas flame; it should be entirely non-lu-
minous.
The cone 6 is called the REDUCING FLAME (R.F.); it is characterized by
the excess of the carbon or hydrocarbons of the gas, which at the high tem-
perature present tend to combine with the oxygen of the mineral brought into
it (at r), or, in other words, to reduce it. The best reducing flame is produced
when the blowpipe is held a little distance from the gas flame; it should retain
the yellow color of the latter on its upper edge.
489. Methods of Examination. The blowpipe investigation of min-
erals includes their examination, (1) in the forceps, (2) in the closed and the
open tubes, (3) on charcoal or other support, and (4) with the fluxes on the
platinum wire.
1. EXAMINATION IN THE FORCEPS
490. Use of the Forceps. Forceps are employed to hold the fragment
of the mineral while a test is made as to its fusibility; also when the presence
of a volatile ingredient which may give the flame a characteristic color is tested
for, etc.
The following practical points must be regarded: (1) Metallic minerals, especially those
containing arsenic or antimony, which when fused might injure the platinum of the forceps,
*
should first be examined on charcoal; (2) the fragment taken should be thin, and as
small as can conveniently be held, with its edge projecting well beyond the points; (3) when
if this does not prevent it,
decrepitation takes place, the heat must be applied slowly, or,
the mineral may be powdered and a paste made with water, thick enough to be held in the
forceps or on the platinum wire; or the paste may,
with the same end in view, be heated on
charcoal; (4) the fragment whose fusibility is to be tested
must be held in the hottest part
of the flame, just beyond the extremity of the blue cone.
491. Fusibility. All grades of fusibility exist among minerals, from

those which fuse in large fragments in the flame of the candle (stibnite, see
below) to those which fuse only on the thinnest edges in the hottest blowpipe
flame (bronzite) and still again there are a considerable number which are
;
entirely infusible (e.g., corundum).

The exact determination of the temperature of fusion is not easily accom-
plished (cf Art. 431 p. 304), and for purposes of determination of species it is
unnecessary. The approximate relative degree of fusibility is readily fixed by
referring the mineral to the following scale, suggested by von Kobell:
1. Stibnite. 4. Actinolite.
2. Natrolite (or Chalcopyrite). 5. Orthoclase.
3. Almandite Garnet. 6. Bronzite.
492.In connection with the trial of fusibility, the following phenomena

may be observed: (a) coloration of the flame (see Art. 493); (b) swelling up
(stilbite), or exfoliation of the mineral (vermiculite) or (c) glowing without
;
fusion (calcite); and (d) intumescence, or a spirting out of the mass as it

fuses (scapolite).
The color of the mineral after ignition is to be noted; and the nature of
the fused mass is also to be observed, whether a clear or blebby glass is
obtained, or a black slag; also whether the bead or residue is magnetic or not
(due to iron, less often nickel, cobalt), etc.
The ignited fragment, if nearly or quite infusible, may be moistened with
the cobalt solution and again ignited, in which case, if it turns blue, this
indicates the presence of aluminium (as with cyanite, topaz, etc.) but note ;
that zinc silicate (calamine) also assumes a blue color. If it becomes pink,
this indicates a compound of magnesium (as brucite).
Also, if not too fusible, it may, after treatment in the forceps, be placed
upon a strip of moistened turmeric paper, in which case an alkaline reaction
proves the presence of an alkali, sodium, potassium; or an alkaline earth,
calcium, barium, strontium.
493. Flame Coloration. The color often imparted to the outer blow-
pipe flame, while the mineral held in the forceps is being heated, makes pos-
sible the identification of a number of the elements.
The colors which may be produced, and the substances to whose presence
they are due, are as follows:
Color Substance
Carmine-red Lithium.
Purple-red Strontium.
Orange-red Calcium.
Yellow. Sodium.
Yellowish green Barium.
Siskine-green Boron.
*
Arsenic, antimony, and easily reducible metals like lead, also copper, form more or
less fusible alloys with platinum.
Emerald-green Oxide of copper.

Bluish green Phosphoric acid (phosphates).
Greenish blue Antimony.
Whitish blue Arsenic.
Azure-blue Chloride of copper; also selenium.
Violet Potassium.
A yellowish green flame is also given by the oxide or sulphide of molybdenum; a bluish
green flame (in streaks) by zinc; a pale bluish flame by tellurium; a blue flame by lead.
494. Notes. The presence of soda, even in small quantities, produces a yellow flame,
which (except in the spectroscope) more or less completely masks the coloration of the
flame due to other substances, e.g., potassium. A filter of blue glass held in front of the
flame will shut out the monochromatic yellow of the sodium flame and allow the charac-
teristic violet color of the potassium to be observed. Silicates are often so difficultly
decomposed that no distinct color is obtained even when the substance is present; in such
cases (e.g., potash feldspar) the powdered mineral may be fused on the platinum wire with
an equal volume of gypsum, when the flame can be seen (at least through blue glass).
Again, a silicate like tourmaline fused with a mixture of fluorite and acid potassium sul-
phate yields the characteristic green flame of boron. Phosphates and borates give the
green flame in general best when they have been pulverized and moistened with sulphuric
acid. Moistening with hydrochloric acid makes the coloration in many cases (as with the
carbonates of calcium, barium, strontium) more distinct.
2. HEATING IN THE CLOSED AND OPEN TUBES

495. The tubes are useful chiefly for examining minerals containing
volatile ingredients, given off at the temperature of the gas flame.
In the case of the closed tube, the heating goes on practically uninfluenced
by the air present, since this is driven out of the tube in the early stages of
the process. In the open tube, on the other hand, a continual stream of hot
air, that is, of hot oxygen, passes over the assay, tending to produce oxidation
and hence often materially changing the result.
496. Closed Tube. A small fragment is inserted, or a small amount
of the powdered mineral in this case with care not to soil the sides of the
tube and heat is applied by means of the ordinary Bunsen flame. The
presence of a volatile ingredient is ordinarily shown by the deposit, or subli-
mate, upon the tube at some distance above the assay where the tube is rela-
tively cool.
Independent of this, other phenomena may be noted, namely: decrepita-
tion, as shown byfluorite, calcite, etc.; glowing, as exhibited by gadoliriite;
phosphorescence, of which fluorite is an example; change of color (limonite),
and here the color of the mineral should be noted both when hot, and again
after cooling; fusion; giving off oxygen, as mercuric oxide; yielding acid or
alkaline vapors, which should be tested by inserting a strip of moistened
litmus or turmeric paper in the tube.
Of the sublimates which form in the tube, the following are those with
which it is most important to be familiar:
Substance Sublimate in the Closed Tube
Water (H 2 0) Colorless liquid drops.
Sulphur (S) ; Red to deep yellow, liquid pale yellow, solid.
;
Tellurium dioxide (TeO 2 ) Pale yellow to colorless, liquid; colorless or white, solid.
Arsenic sulphide (As 2 S 3 ) Dark red, liquid; reddish yellow, solid.
Antimony oxysulphide (Sb 2 S 2 O) Black to reddish brown on cooling, solid.
Arsenic (As) Black, brilliant metallic to gray crystalline, solid
Mercury sulphide (HgS) Deep black, red when rubbed very fine.
Mercury (Hg) Gray metallic globules.
In addition to the above: Tellurium gives black fusible globules; selenium the same, but
and oxides of arsenic and antimony
in partdark red when very small; the chloride of lead
give white solid sublimates.
497. Open Tube. The small fragment is placed in the tube about
an inch from the lower end, the tube being slightly inclined (say 20),
but not
to cause the mineral to slip out, and heat applied beneath. The cur-
enough
rent of air passing upward through the tube during the heating process
has an
oxidizing effect. The special phenomena to be observed are the formation of
a sublimate and the odor of the escaping gases. The acid or alkaline character
of the is tested for in the same way as with the closed tube.
vapors
The
most common gas to be obtained in this way is sulphur dioxide, S0 2 when
,
is to be recognized by its irritating,

sulphides are being oxidized. This gas
odor and its acid reaction upon moistened blue litmus paper.
pungent
The more important sublimates are as follows:
Substance Sublimate in the Open Tube
Arsenic trioxide (AsaOa) White, crystalline, volatile.

Antimony antimonate (Sb2 O 4 ) Straw-yellow, hot; white, cold. Infusible, non-volatile,
amorphous, settling along bottom of tube. Obtained
from compounds containing sulphur as stibnite, also the
sulphantimonites (e.g., bournonite) as dense white fumes.
Usually accompanied by the following:
Antimony trioxide (Sb 2 O 3) . . . White, crystalline, slowly volatile, forming as a ring on
walls of tube.
Tellurium dioxide (TeO 2 ) White to pale yellow globules.
Selenium dioxide (SeO 2 ) White, crystalline, volatile.
Molybdenum trioxide (MoO 3) Pale yellow, hot; white, cold.
Mercury (Hg) Gray metallic globules, easily united by rubbing.
It is also to the heating process is too rapid for full oxidation, subli-
be noted that if
mates, like those of the closed tubes, may be formed, especially with sulphur (yellow),
arsenic (black), arsenic sulphide (orange), mercury sulphide (black), antimony oxysulphide
(black to reddish brown).
3. HEATING ON CHARCOAL
498. The fragment (or powder) to be examined is placed near one end of
the piece and this so held that the flame passes along its length. If the
mineral decrepitates, it may be powdered, mixed with water, and then the
material employed as a paste.
The reducing flame is employed if it is desired to reduce a metal (e.g..,
silver, copper) from its ores this is the common case. :
If, however, the min-
eral is to be roasted, that is, heated in contact with the air so as to oxidize and
volatilize, for example, the sulphur, arsenic, antimony present, the oxidizing
flame is needed and the mineral should be in powder and spread out.
The
points to be noted are as follows :
(a) The
odor given off after short heating. In this way the presence of
sulphur, arsenic (garlic or alliaceous odor), and selenium (odor of decayed
horseradish) may be recognized.
(b) Fusion. In the case of the salts of the alkalies the fused mass is
absorbed into the charcoal; this is also true, after long heating, of the car-
bonates and sulphates of barium and strontium. (Art. 501.)
(c) The Sublimate. By this means the presence of many of the metals
may be determined. The color of the sublimate, both near the assay (N) and
at a distance (D) as also when hot and when
,
cold, is to be noted.
The important sublimates are the following:
Substance Sublimate on Charcoal
Arsenic trioxide (As2 O 3 ) White, very volatile, distant from the assay; also
garlic fumes.
Antimony oxides (SbaOe and Sb2C>4) Dense white, volatile; forms near the assay.
Zinc oxide (ZnO) Canary-yellow, hot; white, cold; moistened with
cobalt nitrate and ignited (O.F.) becomes green.
Molybdenum trioxide (MoO 3) Pale yellow, hot; yellow, cold; touched for a moment
with the R.F. becomes azure-blue. Also a copper-
red sublimate (MoO 2 ) near the assay.
Lead oxide (PbO) Dark yellow, hot; pale yellow, cold. Also (from
sulphides) dense white (resembling antimony), a
mixture of oxide, sulphite, and sulphate of lead.
Bismuth trioxide (IÔs) Dark orange-yellow (N), paler on cooling; also bluish
white (D). See further, p. 338.
Cadmium oxide (CdO) Nearly black to reddish brown (N) and orange-yellow
(D) often iridescent.
;
To
the above are also to be added the following:
Selenium dioxide, SeO 2 sublimate steel-gray (N) to white tinged with red (D) touched
, ;
with R.F. gives an azure-blue flame; also an offensive selenium odor.

Tellurium dioxide, TeOz, sublimate dense white (N) to gray (D); in R.F. volatilizes
with green flame.
Tin dioxide, SnO2, sublimate faint yellow hot to white cold; becomes bluish green
when moistened with cobalt solution and ignited.
Silver (with lead and antimony), sublimate reddish
(d) The Infusible Residue. This may (1) glow brightly in the O.F., indi-
cating the presence of calcium, strontium, magnesium, zirconium, zinc, or tin.
(2) It may give an alkaline reaction after ignition: alkaline earths. (3) It
may be magnetic, showing the presence of iron (or nickel). (4) It may yield
a globule or mass of a metal (Art. 499) .
499. Reduction on Charcoal. In many cases the reducing flame alone

suffices on charcoal to separate the metal from the volatile element present,
with the result of giving a globule or metallic mass. Thus silver is obtained
from argentite (Ag2 S) and cerargyrite (AgCl) copper from chalcocite (Cu2 S)
;
and cuprite (Cu 2 0), etc. The process of reduction is always facilitated by the
use of sodium carbonate or borax as a flux, and this is in many cases (sulph-
arsenites, etc.) essential.
The finely pulverized mineral is intimately mixed with two or three times
its volume of soda, and a drop of water added to form a paste. This is placed
in a cavity in the charcoal, and subjected to a strong reducing flame. More
soda is added as that present sinks into the coal, and, after the process has
been continued some time, a metallic globule is often visible, or a number of
them, which can be removed and separately examined. If not distinct, the
remainder of the flux, the assay, and the surrounding coal are cut out with a
knife, and the whole ground up in a mortar, with the addition of a little water.
The charcoal is carefully washed away and the metallic globules, flattened out
by the process, remain behind. Some metallic oxides are very readily reduced,
as lead, while others, as copper and tin, require considerable skill and care.
The metals obtained (in globules or as a metallic mass) may be: copper,
color red; bismuth, lead-gray, brittle; gold, yellow, not soluble in nitric acid;
silver,white, soluble in nitric acid, the solution giving a silver chloride pre-
cipitate (p. 340); tin, white, harder than silver, soluble in nitric acid with
separation of white powder (Sn0 2 ); lead, lead-gray (oxidizing), soft and
fusible. The coatings (see the list of sublimates above) often serve to identify
the metal present.
500. Detection of Sulphur in Sulphates. By means of soda on char-

coal the presence of sulphur in the sulphates may be shown, in the following
manner. Fuse the powdered mineral with soda and charcoal dust. The
latter acting as a strong reducing agent changes the sulphate to a sulphide
with the formation of sodium sulphide. When
the fused mass is placed with
a drop of water upon a clean silver surface a black or yellow stain of silver
sulphide will be formed. A similar reaction would of course be obtained from
a sulphide. The latter can however be readily distinguished by roasting in
the open tube or upon charcoal and noting the formation of SO 2 .
4. TREATMENT ON THE PLATINUM WIRE

501. Use of the Fluxes. The three common fluxes are borax, salt of
phosphorus, and carbonate of soda (p. 330). They are generally used with the
If the wire is employed it
platinum wire, less often on charcoal (see p. 335) .
must have a small loop at the end; this is heated to redness and dipped into
the powdered flux, and the adhering particles fused to a bead; this operation
is repeated until the loop is filled. Sometimes in the use of soda the wire may
at first be moistened a little to cause it to adhere.
When the bead is ready, it is, while hot, brought in contact with the pow-
dered mineral, some of which will adhere to it, and then the heating process
may be continued. Very little of the mineral is in general required, and the
experiment should be commenced with a minute quantity and more added if
necessary. The bead must be heated successively first in the oxidizing flame
(O.F.) and then in the reducing flame (R.F.), and in each case the color noted
when hot and when cold. The phenomena connected with fusion, if it takes
place, must also be observed.
Minerals containing sulphur or arsenic, or both, must be first roasted (see p. 334) till
these substances have been volatilized. If too much of the mineral has been added and the
bead is hence too opaque to show the color, it may, while hot, be flattened out with the
hammer, or d'rawn out into a wire, or part of it may be removed and the remainder diluted
with more of the flux .
With salt of phosphorus, the wire should be held above the flame so that the escaping
gases may support the bead ; this is continued till quiet fusion is attained.
It is to be noted that the colors vary much with the amount of material present ; they
are also modified by the presence of other metals.
502. Borax. - - The following list enumerates the different colored beads
obtained with borax, both in the oxidizing (O.F.) and reducing flames (R.F.),
and also the metals to the presence of whose oxides the colors are due. Com-
pare further the reactions given in the list of elements (Art. 504).
Color in Borax Bead Substance

1. OXIDIZING FLAME
Colorless, or opaque white. . .
calcium, aluminium; also silver, zinc, etc.
Silica,
Iron, cold (pale yellow, hot, if in small amount).
Ked, red-brown to brown Chromium (CrO 3 ), hot (yellowish green, cold).
Manganese (Mn2 O 3 ), amethystine-red (violet, hot).
Iron (Fe2 O 3 ), hot (yellow, cold) if saturated.
Nickel (NiO) red-brown to brown, cold (violet, hot).
Uranium (UO 3 ), hot (yellow, cold).
Green Copper (CuO), hot (blue, cold, or bluish green if highly
saturated).
Chromium (CrO 3 ), yellowish green, cold (red, hot).
Yellow Iron (Fe2 O 3 ), hot (pale yellow to colorless, cold) but

red-brown and yellow if saturated.
Uranium (UOs), hot, if in small amount; paler on cooling.
Chromium (CrO 3 ), hot and in small amount (yellowish
green, cold).
Blue Cobalt (CoO), hot and cold.
Copper (CuO), cold if highly saturated (green, hot).
Violet ,.
. Nickel (NiO), hot (red-brown, cold).
O
Manganese (Mn 2 3 ), hot (amethystine-red, cold).
2. REDUCING FLAME (R.F.)

Colorless Manganese (MnO), or a faint rose color.
Red Copper (Cu2 O, with Cu), opaque red.
Green Iron (FeO), bottle-green.
Chromium (CrjOs), emerald-green.
Uranium (UÔs), yellowish green if saturated.
Blue Cobalt (CoO), hot and cold.
Gray, turbid Nickel (Ni).
503. Salt of Phosphorus. This flux gives for the most part reactions
similar to those obtained with borax. The only cases enumerated here are
those which are distinct, and hence those where the flux is a good test.
With silicates this flux forms a glass in 'which the bases of the silicate are
dissolved, but the silica itself is left insoluble. It appears as a skeleton readily
seen floating about in the melted bead.
The colors of the beads, and the metals to whose oxides these are due, are :
Color Substance
Red : Chromium in O.F., hot (fine green when cold).
Green Chromium in O.F. and R.F., when cold (red in O.F., hot).
Molybdenum in R.F., dirty green, hot; fine green, cold (yellow-green
in O.F.).
Uranium in R.F., cold; yellow-green, hot.
Vanadium, chrome-green in R.F., cold (brownish red, hot). In O.F.,
dark yellow, hot, paler on cooling.
Yellow Molybdenum, yellowish green in O.F., hot, paler on cooling (in R.F.,
dirty green, hot; fine green, cold).
Uranium in O.F. hot; yellowish green, cold
, (in R.F. yellowish green,
,
hot; green, cold).

Vanadium in O.F., dark yellow, hot, paler on cooling (in R.F.,
brownish red, hot; chrome-green, cold).
Violet Titanium (TiO2 ) in R.F., yellow, hot. (Also in O.F., yellow, hot; color-
cold.)
CHARACTERISTIC REACTIONS OF THE IMPORTANT ELEMENTS AND OF SOME

OF THEIR COMPOUNDS
504. The following list contains the most characteristic reactions, chiefly
before the blowpipe and in some cases also in the wet way, 'of the different
elements and their oxides. It is desirable for every student to gain familiarity
with them by trial with as many minerals as possible. Many of them have
already been briefly mentioned in the preceding pages. For a thoroughly full
description of these and other characteristic tests (blowpipe and otherwise)
reference should be made to the volume by Brush and Penfield referred to on
p. 329.
It is to be remembered that while the reaction of a single substance may
be perfectly distinct if alone, the presence of other substances may more or
less entirelyobscure these reactions; it is consequently obvious that in the

actual examination of minerals precautions have to be taken, and special
methods have to be devised, to overcome the difficulty arising from this cause.
These will be gathered from the "pyrognostic characters" (Pyr.) given in con-
nection with the description of each species in the Fourth Part of this work.
Aluminium, The presence of aluminium in most infusible minerals, containing a con-
siderable amount, may be detected by the blue color which they assume when, after being
heated, they are moistened with cobalt solution and again ignited (e.g., cyanite, andalusite,
etc.). Very hard minerals (as corundum) must be first finely pulverized. The test is not
conclusive with fusible minerals since a glass colored blue by cobalt oxide may be formed.
It is to be noted that the infusible calamine (zinc silicate) also assumes a blue color when
treated with cobalt nitrate. From solutions aluminium will be precipitated as a flocculent
white or colorless precipitate on the addition of ammonium hydroxide in excess.
Antimony. Antimonial minerals roasted on charcoal give dense white odorless fumes;
metallic antimony and its sulphur compounds give in the open tube a white sublimate of
oxide of antimony (see p. 334). Antimony sulphide (stibnite), also many sulpharitimonites,
give in a strong heat in the closed tube a sublimate of antimony oxysulphide, black when
hot, brown-red when cold. See also p. 333.
In nitric acid, compounds containing antimony deposit white insoluble metantimonic
acid.
Arsenic. Arsenides, sulpharsenites, etc., give off fumes when roasted on charcoal,
usually easily recognized by their peculiar garlic odor. In the open tube they give a white,
volatile, crystalline sublimate of arsenic trioxide. In the closed tube arsenic sulphide
gives a sublimate dark brown-red when hot, and red or reddish yellow when cold; arsenic
and some arsenides yield a black mirror of metallic arsenic in the closed tube. In arsenates
the arsenic can be detected by the garlic odor yielded when a mixture of the powdered
mineral with charcoal dust and sodium carbonate is heated (R.F.) on charcoal.
Barium. A
yellowish green coloration of the flame is given by all barium salts, except
the silicates; an alkaline reaction is usually obtained after intense ignition.
In solution the presence of barium is proved by the heavy white precipitate (BaSO 4 )
formed upon the addition of dilute sulphuric acid.
Bismuth. On charcoal alone, or better with soda, bismuth gives a very characteristic
orange-yellow sublimate; brittle globules of the reduced metal are also obtained (with
soda). Also when treated with 3 or 4 times the volume of a mixture in equal parts of
potassium iodide and sulphur, and fused on charcoal, a beautiful red sublimate of bismuth
iodide is obtained; near the mineral the coating is yellow.
Boron. Many compounds containing boron (borates, also the silicates, datolite, dan-
burite, etc.) tinge the flame intense yellowish green, especially if moistened with sulphuric
acid. For some .silicates (as tourmaline) the best method is to mix the powdered mineral
with one part powdered fluorite and two parts potassium bisulphate. The mixture is
moistened and placed on platinum wire. At the moment of fusion the green color appears,
but lasts but an instant.
A hydrochloric acid solution containing boron gives a reddish brown color to
clilute
turmeric paper which has been moistened with it and then dried at 100; the color changes
to black when ammonia is poured on the paper.
Cakium. Many calcium minerals (carbonates, sulphates, etc.) give an alkaline reaction
on turmeric paper after being ignited. A yellowish red color is given to the flame by some
compounds (e.g., calcite after moistening with HG1) the strontium flame is a much deeper
;
red.
In weakly acid or alkaline solutions calcium is precipitated as oxalate by the addition of
ammonium oxalate.
Cadmium. On charcoal with soda, compounds of cadmium give a characteristic sub-
limate of the reddish brown oxide.
Carbonates. All carbonates effervesce with dilute
hydrochloric acid, yielding the odor-
less gas CO 2 (e.g.,
calcite); many require to be pulverized, and some need the addition of
heat (dolomite, sidente). Carbonates of lead should be tested with nitric acid.
LMprides. If a small portion of a mineral
containing chlorine (a chloride, also pyro-
morphite, etc.) is added to the bead of salt of phosphorus, saturated with copper oxide, the
bead when heated is instantly surrounded with an intense
purplish flame of copper chloride.
In solution chlorine gives with silver nitrate a white
curdy precipitate of silver chloride
which darkens in color on exposure to the
light; it is insoluble in nitric acid, but entirely
soluble m ammonia.
Chromium. Chromium gives with borax a bead which (O.F.) is yellow to red (hot) and
yellowish green (cold) and R.F. a fine emerald-green. With salt of phosphorus in O.F.
the bead is dirty green (hot) and clear green (cold); in R.F. the same. Cf. Vanadium
beyond (also pp. 336, 337).
Cobalt. A beautiful blue bead is obtained with borax in both flames from minerals
containing cobalt. Where sulphur or arsenic is present the mineral should first be
thoroughly roasted on charcoal.
Copper. On charcoal, at least with soda, metallic copper can be reduced from most of
its compounds. In the case of sulphides the powdered mineral should be roasted first in
order to eliminate the major part of the sulphur before fusion with soda. With borax it
gives (O.F.) a green bead when hot, becoming blue when cold; also (R.F.), if saturated, an
opaque red bead containing Cu2 O and often Cu is obtained. Copper chloride, obtained by
moistening the mineral with hydrochloric acid (in the case of sulphides the mineral should
be previously roasted) yields a vivid azure-blue flame; copper oxide gives a green flame.
Most metallic compounds are soluble in nitric acid. Ammonia in excess produces an
intense blue color in the solution.
Fluorine. Heated in the closed tube with potassium bisulphate and powdered glass
produces a white sublimate of SiO 2 . This sublimate and the hydrofluosilicic acid present
form a volatile combination. But if the lower end of the tube is broken off and the open tube
then dipped in a test tube of water so that the acid is removed, the deposit of SiO 2 which
will appear when the tube is dried will be found to be no longer volatile.
Heated gently in a platinum crucible with sulphuric acid, many compounds (e.g.,
fluorite) give off hydrofluoric acid, which corrodes the exposed parts of a glass plate placed
over it which has been coated with wax and then scratched.
Iron. Minerals which contain even a small amount of iron yield a magnetic mass
when heated in the reducing flame. With borax iron gives a bead (O.F.) which is yellow
to brownish red (according to quantity) while hot, but is colorless to yellow on cooling;
R.F. becomes bottle-green (see pp. 336', 337).
Lead. With soda on charcoal a malleable globule of metallic lead is obtained from lead
compounds; the coating has a yellow color near the asay; the sulphide gives also a white
coating (PbSO 3 ) farther off (p. 335). On being touched with the reducing flame the coat-
ing disappears, tingeing the flame azure-blue.
In solutions dilute sulphuric acid gives a white precipitate of lead sulphate; when
delicacy is required an excess of the acid is added, the solution evaporated to dryness, and
water added; the lead sulphate, if present, will then be left as a residue.
Lithium. Lithium gives an intense carmine-red to the outer flame, the color somewhat
resembling that of the strontium flame but is deeper; in very small quantities it is evident
in the spectroscope.
Magnesium. Moistened, after heating, with cobalt nitrate and again ignited, a pink
color is obtained from some infusible compounds of magnesium (e.g., brucite). In solution
the addition of ammonium hydroxide in large excess and a little hydrogen sodium phos-
phate produces a white granular precipitate of NH 4 MgPO 4 . Elements precipitated by
ammonium hydroxide or ammonium oxalate should be removed first.
Manganese. With borax manganese gives a bead violet-red (O.F.), and colorless (R.F.).
With soda (O.F.) it gives a bluish green bead; this reaction is very delicate and may be
relied upon, even in presence of almost any other metal.
Mercury. In the closed tube a sublimate of metallic mercury is yielded when the
mineral is heated with dry sodium carbonate. In the open tube the sulphide gives a mirror
of metallic mercury; in the closed tube a black lusterless sublimate of HgS, red when
rubbed, is obtained.
Molybdenum. On charcoal molybdenum sulphide gives near the assay a copper-red
stain (O.F.), and beyond a white coating of the oxide; the former becomes azure-blue when
for a moment touched with the R.F. The salt of phosphorus bead (O.F.) is yellowish
green (hot) and nearly colorless (cold); also (R.F.) a fine green.
Nickel. With borax, nickel oxide gives a bead which (O.F.) is violet when hot and
red-brown on cooling; (R.F.) the glass becomes gray and turbid from the separation of
metallic nickel.
Niobium (Columbium). An acid solution boiled with metallic tin gives a blue color.
The reactions with the fluxes are not very satisfactory.
Nitrates. These detonate when heated on charcoal. Heated in a tube with sulphuric
acid they give off red fumes of nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 ).
Phosphorus. Most phosphates impart a green color to the flarne, especially after having
beenn moistened with sulphuric acid, though this test may be rendered unsatisfactory by
the presence of other coloring agents. If they are used in the closed tube with a fragment
of metallic magnesium or sodium, and afterward moistened with water, phosphureted
hydrogen is given off, recognizable by its disagreeable odor.
A few drops of a nitric acid solution, containing phosphoric acid, produce in a solu-
tion of ammonium molybdate a pulverulent yellow precipitate of ammonium phospho-
molybdate.
Potassium. Potash imparts a violet color to the flame when alone. The flame is best
observed through a blue glass filter which will eliminate the sodium flame color which will
almost invariably be present. It is best detected in small quantities, or when soda or
lithia is present, by the aid of the spectroscope. See also p. 333.
Selenium. On charcoal selenium fuses easily, giving off brown fumes with a peculiar
disagreeable organic odor; the sublimate on charcoal is volatile, and when heated (R.F.)
gives a fine azure-blue flame.
Silicon. A small fragment of a silicate in the salt of phosphorus bead leaves a skeleton
of silica, the bases being dissolved.
If a silicate in a fine powder is fused with sodium carbonate and the mass then dissolved
in hydrochloric acid and evaporated to dryness, the silica separates as a gelatinous mass and
on evaporation to dryness is made insoluble. When strong hydrochloric acid is added and
then water to the dry residue in the test tube, the bases are dissolved and the silica left
behind.
Many silicates, especially those which are hydrous, are decomposed by strong hydro-
chloric acid, the silica separating as a powder or, after evaporation, as a jelly (see p. 328).
Silver. On charcoal in O.F. silver gives a brown coating. A globule of metallic silver
may generally be obtained by heating on charcoal in O.F., especially if soda is added.
Under some circumstances it is desirable to have recourse to cupellation.
From a solution containing any salt of silver, the insoluble chloride is thrown down
when hydrochloric acid is added. This precipitate is insoluble in acid or water, but entirely
so in ammonia. It changes color on exposure to the light.
Strontium. Compounds of strontium are usually recognized by the fine crimson-red
which they give to the blowpipe flame; many yield an alkaline reaction after ignition.
(Cf. barium.)
Sodium. Compounds containing sodium in large amount give a strong yellow flame.
Sulphur, Sulphides, Sulphates. In the closed tube some sulphides give off sulphur; in
the open tube they yield sulphur dioxide, which has a characteristic odor and reddens a
strip of moistened litmus paper. In small quantities, or in sulphates, sulphur is best
detected by fusion on charcoal with soda and charcoal dust. The fused mass, when sodium
sulphide has thus been formed, is placed on a -clean silver coin and moistened; a distinct
black stain on the silver is thus obtained (the precaution mentioned on p. 336 must be
exercised).
A solution of a sulphate in hydrochloric acid gives with barium chloride a white insoluble
precipitate of barium sulphate.
Tellurium. Tellurides heated in the open tube give a white or grayish sublimate,
fusible to colorless drops (p. 334). On charcoal they give a white coating and color the
R.F. green.
Tin. Minerals containing tin (e.g., cassiterite), when heated on charcoal with soda or
potassium cyanide, yield metallic tin in minute globules; these are malleable, but harder
than silver. Dissolved in nitric acid, white insoluble stannic oxide separates out.
Titanium. Titanium gives in the R.F. with salt of phosphorus a bead which is violet
when cold. Fused with sodium carbonate and dissolved with hydrochloric acid, and
heated with a piece of metallic tin, the liquid takes a violet color, especially after partial
evaporation.
Tungsten. Tungsten oxide gives a blue color to the salt of phosphorus bead (R.F.).
Fused and treated as titanium (see above) with the addition of zinc instead of tin, gives a
fine blue color.
Uranium. Uranium compounds give to the salt of phosphorus bead (O.F.) a greenish
yellow bead when cool; also (R.F.) a fine green on cooling (p. 337).
Vanadium. With borax (O.F.) vanadates give a bead yellow (hot) changing to yellow-
ish green and nearly colorless (cold) also With
; (R.F.) dirty green (hot), fine green (cold).
ri
(R.F.)
P hos P horus (O.F.) a yellow to amber color (thus differing from chromium); also
fine green (cold).
Zinc. On charcoal in the reducing flame compounds of zinc give a coating which is
yellow while hot and white on cooling, and moistened by the cobalt solution and again
heated becomes a fine green. Note, however, that the zinc silicate
(calamine) becomes blue
when heated after moistening with cobalt solution.
Zirconium. A dilute hydrochloric acid solution, containing zirconium, imparts an

orange-yellow color to turmeric paper, moistened by the solution.
DETERMINATIVE MINERALOGY
505. Determinative Mineralogy may be properly considered under the
general head of Chemical Mineralogy, since the determination of minerals
depends mostly upon chemical tests. But crystallographic and all the physi-
cal characters have also to be carefully observed.
There is but one exhaustive way in which the identity of an unknown
mineral may in all cases be fixed beyond question, and that is by the use of a
complete set of determinative tables. By means of such tables the mineral in
hand is referred successively from a general group into a more special one,
until at last all other species have been eliminated, and the identity of the one
given is beyond doubt.
A careful preliminary examination of the unknown mineral should, how-
ever, always be made before final recourse is had to the tables. This examina-
tion will often suffice to show what the mineral in hand is, and in
any case it should not be omitted, since it is only in this way that a
practical familiarity with the appearance and characters of minerals can be
gained.
The student will naturally take note first of those characters which are at
once obvious to the senses, that is: crystalline form, if distinct; general struc-
ture, cleavage, fracture, luster, color (and streak), feel; also, if the specimen is
not too small, the apparent weight will suggest something as to the specific
gravity. The characters named are of very unequal importance. Structure,
if crystals are not present, and fracture are generally unessential except in
distinguishing varieties; color and luster are essential with metallic, but
generally very unimportant with nonmetallic, minerals. Streak is of impor-
tance only with colored minerals and those of metallic luster (p. 247) Crystal-
.
line form and cleavage are of the highest importance, but may require careful
study.
The first trial should be the determination of the hardness (for which end
the pocket-knife is often sufficient in experienced hands). The second trial
should be the determination of the specific gravity. Treatment of the pow-
dered mineral with acids may come next; by this means (see pp. 328,329) a
carbonate is readily identified, and also other results obtained. Then should
follow blowpipe trials, to ascertain the fusibility; the color given to the flame,
if any; the character of the sublimate given off in the tubes and on charcoal;
the metal reduced on the latter; the reactions with the fluxes, and other points
as explained in the preceding pages.
How much the observer learns in the above way, in regard to the nature
of his mineral, depends upon his knowledge of the characters of minerals in
general, and upon his familiarity with the chemical behavior of the various
elementary substances with reagents and before the blowpipe (pp. 338 to 341).
If the results of such a preliminary examination are sufficiently definite to
suggest that the mineral in hand is one of a small number of species, reference
may be made. to their full description in Part. IV of this work for the final
decision.
A number of tables, in which the minerals included are arranged according
to their crystalline and physical characters, are added in the Appendix. They
will In many cases aid the observer in reaching a conclusion in regard to a

specimen in hand.
The first of these tables gives lists of minerals arranged primarily accord-
ing to their principle basic elements and secondarily according to their acid
radicals.
The second of these tables is intended to include all well-defined species,
grouped according to the crystalline system to which they belong and arranged
under each system in the order of their specific gravities; the hardness is also
added in each case. The relative importance of the individual species is shown
by the type employed. Following this are minor tables enumerating species
characterized by some one of the prominent crystalline forms; that is, those
crystallizing in cubes, octahedrons, rhombohedrons, etc. Other tables give
the names of species prominent because of their cleavage; structure of
different types; hardness; luster; the various colors, etc. The student is
recommended to make frequent use of these tables, not simply for aid in the
identification of specimens, but rather because they will help him in the
difficult task of learning the prominent characters of the more important
minerals.
PART IV. DESCRIPTIVE MINERALOGY
506. Scope of Descriptive Mineralogy. It is the province of De-
scriptive Mineralogy to describe each mineral species, as regards: (1) form
and structure; (2) physical characters; (3) chemical composition including
blowpipe and chemical tests; (4) occurrence in nature with reference to geo-
graphical distribution and association with other species; also in connection
with the above to show how it may be distinguished from other species. Fur-
ther, it should classify mineral species into more or less comprehensive groups
according to those characters regarded as most essential. Other points which
may or may not be included are the investigation of the methods of origin of
minerals; the changes that they undergo in nature and the results of such
alteration; also the methods by which the same compounds may be made in
the laboratory; finally, the uses of minerals as ores, for ornament and in the
arts.
507. Scheme
of Classification. The method of classification adopted
in this work,and the one which can alone claim to be thoroughly scientific, is
that which places similar chemical compounds together in a common class and
which further arranges the mineral species into groups according to the more
minute relations existing between them in chemical composition, crystalline
form and other physical properties.
Upon this basis there are recognized eight distinct chemical classes, begin-
ning with the Native Elements; these are enumerated on the following page.
Under each of these, sections of different grades are made, also based on chem-
ical relationships. Finally, the mineral species themselves are arranged, as
far as possible, in isomorphous groups, including those 'which have, at once,
analogous chemical composition and similar crystallization (see Art. 471). It
is unnecessary to take the space here to develop the entire scheme of classi-
fication in detail, since a survey of the successive sub-classes under any one of
the divisions will make the principles followed entirely clear. A few remarks,
only, are added for sake of illustration.
Under the Oxides, for example, the classification is as follows: First, the
Oxides of silicon (quartz, tridymite, opal). Second, the Oxides of the semi-
metals, tellurium, arsenic, antimony, bismuth, also molybdenum, tungsten.
Third, the Oxides of the metals, as copper, zinc, iron, manganese, tin, etc.
The third section is then subdivided into the anhydrous and hydrous species.
Further, the former fall into the four divisions Protoxides, RoO and
: RO
Ses-;
quioxides, R
2 O3 Intermediate oxides, RO,R 2 O 3 Dioxides,
; ;
RO2 .Under each
of these heads come finally the individual species, arranged so far as possible
in isomorphous groups. Thus we have the Hematite group, the Rutile group,
etc.
343
344 DESCRIPTIVE MINERALOGY
In regard to the various classes of salts it may be stated that, in general,

basic and hydrous sections; the
they are separated into anhydrous, acid,
subdivisions called for, however, vary in the different cases.
special
For an explanation of the abbreviations used in the description of species, see p. 5.
SCHEME OF CLASSIFICATION
I. NATIVE ELEMENTS.
II. SULPHIDES, SELENIDES, TELLURIDES, ARSENIDES, ANTIMONIDES.
III. Sulpho-salts. SULPHARSENITES, SULPHANTIMONITES, SULPHO-
BISMUTHITES.
IV. Haloids. CHLORIDES, BROMIDES, IODIDES J FLUORIDES.
V. OXIDES.
VI. Oxygen Salts.
1. CARBONATES.
2. SILICATES, TITANATES.
3. NIOBATES, TANTALATES.
4. PHOSPHATES, ARSENATES, VANADATES; ANTIMONATES.
NITRATES.
6. BORATES. URANATES.
6. SULPHATES, CHROMATES, TELLURATES.
7. TUNGSTATES, MOLYBDATES.
VII. Salts of Organic Acids: Oxalates, Mellates, etc.
VIII. HYDROCARBON COMPOUNDS.
I. NATIVE ELEMENTS
The NATIVE ELEMENTS are divided into the two distinct sections of the
Metals and the Non-metals, and these are connected by the transition class of
the Semi-metals. The distinction between them as regards physical characters
and chemical relations has already been given (Art. 453) .
The only non-metals present among minerals are carbon, sulphur, and
selenium; the last, in one of its allotropic forms, is closely related to the
semi-metal tellurium.
The native semi-metals form a distinct group by themselves, since all
crystallize in the rhombohedral class of the hexagonal system with a funda-
mental angle differing only a few degrees from 90, as shown in the following
list:
Tellurium, rr
r
= 93 3'. Arsenic, rr' = 94 54'.
Antimony, rr' = 92 53'. Bismuth, rr' = 92 20'.
An artificial form of selenium is known with metallic luster and rhombo-

hedral in crystallization, with rr' = 93. Zinc (also only artif .) is rhombohe-
dral (rr' = 93 46') and connects the semi-metals to the true metals. Metallic
tantalum has been described in cubic crystals.
Among the metals the isometric GOLD GROUP is prominent, including gold,
silver, copper, mercury, amalgam (AgHg), and lead.
NATIVE ELEMENTS 345
Another related isometric group includes the metals platinum, iridium,

palladium, and iron. An allot ropic form of palladium and also iridosmine
(IrOs) are both rhombohedral.
DIAMOND.
Isometric, tetrahedral, but with the + and forms usually equally devel-
oped and not to be distinguished from each other. Commonly showing octahe-
dral, hexoctahedral, and other forms faces frequently rounded or striated and
;
with triangular depressions (on o(lll)). Twins common with tw. pi. 0(111).
Crystals often distorted. In spherical forms; massive.
627 628
Cleavage: o( 111) highly perfect. Fracture conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 10.

G. = 3-516-3-525 crystals. Luster adamantine to greasy. Color white or
colorless; occasionally various pale shades of yellow, red, orange, green, blue,
brown; rarely deeply colored; sometimes black. Usually transparent; also
translucent, opaque. Refractive and dispersive power high; index n = 2-4195.
(See Art. 328.)
Var. -- 1 Ordinary. In crystals usually with rounded faces and varying from those
.
which are colorless and free from flaws (first water) through many faint shades of color,
yellow being the most common; often full of flaws and hence of value only for cutting pur-
poses.
2. Bort or Boort; rounded forms with rough exterior and radiated or confused crystal-
line structure.
3. Carbonado or Carbon; black diamond. Massive, crystalline, granular to compact,
without cleavage. Color black or grayish black. Opaque. Obtained chiefly from Bahia,
Brazil.
Comp. Pure carbon; the variety carbonado yields on combustion a slight

ash.
Pyr., etc. Unaffected by heat except at very high temperatures, when (in an oxygen
atmosphere) it burns to carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) out of contact with the air transformed into
;
a kind of coke. Not acted upon by acids or alkalies.

Diff. Distinguished (e.g., from quartz crystal) by its extreme hardness and brilliant
adamantine luster; the form, cleavage, and high specific gravity are also distinctive charac-
ters; it is optically isotropic; transparent to X-rays.
Artif. Minute diamonds have been formed artificially in several ways. Moissan
first produced them by dissolving carbon in molten iron and then cooling the mass suddenly
under pressure; they have been formed by dissolving graphite in fused olivine or artificial
magnesium silicate melts; they have been formed when an electric current was passed
through an iron spiral embedded in carbon while under high pressure in an atmosphere of
hydrogen.
Obs. The diamond occurs chiefly in alluvial deposits of gravel, sand, or clay, asso-
ciated with quartz, gold, platinum, zircon, octahedrite, rutile, brookite, hematite, ilmenite,
and also andalusite, chrysoberyl, topaz, corundum, tourmaline, garnet, etc.; the associated
minerals being those common in granitic rocks or granitic veins. Also found in quartzose
conglomerates, and further in connection

with the laminated granular quartz rock or
in thin slabs is more or less flexible. This
quartzose hydromica schist, itacolumite, which
rock occurs at the mines of Brazil and the Ural Mts.; and also in Georgia and North Caro-
lina, where a few diamonds
have been found.
It has been reported as occurring in situ in a pegmatite vein in gneiss at Bellary in
India. It occurs further in connection with an eruptive peridotite in South Africa and in a
similar formation in Pike County, Ark. It has been noted as grayish particles forming one
also in the form
per cent of the meteorite which fell at Novo-Urei, Russia, Sept. 22, 1886;
of black diamond (H. = 9) in the meteorite of Carcote, Chile; in the meteoric iron of
Canon Diablo, Ariz.
India was the chief source of diamonds from very early times down to the discovery of
the Brazilian mines the yield is now small. Of the localities, that in southern India, in the
;
Madras presidency, included the famous "Golconda mines." The diamond deposits of
Brazil have been worked since the early part of the 18th century, and have yielded very
largely, although at the present time the
amount obtained is small. The most important
also from Bahia, etc.
region was that near Diamantina in the province of Minas Geraes;
The discovery of diamonds in South Africa dates from 1867. They were first found in
the gravel of the Vaal river; they occur from Potchefstroom down to the junction with the
Orange river, and along the latter as far as Hope Town. More recently they have been
found in gravels in the Somabula Forest, Rhodesia and at Liideritzbucht, German South
West Africa. These river diggings are now of much less importance than the dry diggings,
discovered in 1871.
The latter are chiefly in Griqualand-West, south of the Vaal river, on the border of the
Orange Free State. There are here near Kimberley a number of limited areas approxi-
mately spherical or oval in form, with an average diameter of some 200 to 300 yards, of
which the Kimberley, De Beer's, Dutoitspan and Bultfpntein mines are the most important.
A circle 3 miles in diameter encloses these four principal mines. The general structure is
similar: a wall of nearly horizontal black carbonaceous shale with upturned edges enclos-
ing the diamantiferous area. The upper portion of the deposit consists of a friable mass of
little coherence of a pale yellow color, called the "yellow ground." Below the reach of
atmospheric influences, the rock is more firm and of a bluish green or greenish color; it is
called the "blue ground" or simply "the blue." This consists essentially of a serpentinous
breccia: a base of hydrated magnesian silicate penetrated by calcite and opaline silica and
enclosing fragments of bronzite, diallage, also garnet, magnetite, and ilmenite, and less
commonly smaragdite, pyrite, zircon, etc. The diamonds are rather abundantly dissemi-
nated through the mass, in some claims to the amount of 4 to 6 carats per cubic yard. The
original rock seems to have been a peculiar type of peridotite. These areas are believed
to be volcanic pipes, and the occurrence of the diamonds is obviously connected with the
eruptive outflow, they having probably been brought up from underlying rocks. Other
important mines, similar in character to those near Kimberley, are the Jagersfontein mine
in Orange Free State and the Premier, near Pretoria, Transvaal.
The South African mines up to the beginning of 1914 are estimated to have yielded
about 120 million carats (26 tons) of diamonds valued at nearly 900 million dollars.
Diamonds are also obtained in Borneo, associated with platinum, etc.; in Australia,
and the Ural Mts.
In the United States a few stones have been found in gravels in N. C., Ga., Va,, Col.,
Cal. and Wis. Reported from Idaho and from Oregon with platinum. In 1906 diamonds
were found in Pike County, Ark., both loose in the soil and enclosed in a peridotite rock.
Considerable exploration work has been done at this locality and probably between two
and three thousand stones found. The stones have been of good color but usually small.
Some of the famous diamonds of the world with their weights are as follows: the Kohi-
noor, which weighed when brought to England 186 carats, and as recut as a brilliant, 106
carats; the Orloff, 194 carats; the Regent or Pitt, 137 carats; the Florentine or Grand
Duke of Tuscany, 133 carats. The "Star of the South" found in Brazil weighed before
and after cutting respectively 254 and 125 carats. Also famous because of the
rarity of
their color are the green diamond of
Dresden, 40 carats, and the deep blue Hope diamond
from India, weighing 44 carats.
at the Premier mine. It was named the Cullinan and was

presented by the Transvaal
Assembly to King Edward VII of England. When found it weighed 3,025 carats or over
li Ibs. It has since been cut into 105
separate stones, the two largest weighing 516 and 309
NATIVE ELEMENTS 347
carats, respectively, being the largest cut stones in existence. The history of the above
stones and of others is given in many works on gems.
Use. In addition to its use as a gem, the diamond is extensively used as an abrasive.
Crystal fragments are used to cut glass. The fine powder is employed in grinding and
polishing gem stones. The noncrystalline, opaque varieties, especially the carbonado, are
used in the bits of diamond drills. The diamond is also used in wire drawing and in the
making of tungsten filaments for electric lights.
CLIFTONITE. Carbon in minute cubic and cubo-octahedral crystals. H. = 2'5.
G. = 2' 12. Color and streak black; from the Youndegin, West Australia, meteoric iron,
found in 1884, and other meteoric irons.
GRAPHITE. Plumbago. Black Lead.
Rhombohedral. In six-sided tabular crystals. Commonly in embedded

foliated masses, also columnar or radiated; scaly or slaty; granular to con>
pact; earthy.
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Thin laminae flexible, inelastic. Feel greasy.
H. = 1-2. G =
2'09-2'23. Luster metallic, sometimes dull, earthy. Color
iron-black to dark steel-gray. Opaque. A
conductor of electricity.
Comp. Carbon, like the diamond; often impure from the presence of
ferric oxide, clay, etc.
Pyr., etc. At a high temperature some graphite burns more easily than diamond,
other varieties less so. B.B. infusible. Unaltered by acids.
Diff. Characterized by its extreme softness (soapy feel); iron-black color; metallic
luster; low also by infusibility.
specific gravity; Cf. molybdenite, p. 360.
Artif. It is a common
furnace product being formed from the fuel. It is produced
extensively by heating coke in the electric furnace.
Obs. Graphite is most commonly formed through the metamorphism of carbona-
ceous deposits and is most frequently found in metamorphic rocks, contact metamorphic
deposits, etc. Coal beds may be largely converted into graphite by intense metamorphism
It is not always of organic origin, however, as is shown by its occurrence in meteorites, in
pegmatite deposits and as a magmatic separation in various igneous rocks. Frequently its
origin is obscure. Found as beds and embedded masses, as laminae or scales in granite,
gneiss, mica schist, quartzite, crystalline limestone. The deposits of crystalline graphite
which are of the greatest commercial importance have formed as veins along rock fractures.
Important localities are: Island of Ceylon from which the largest part of the world's
supply comes; Passau district in Bavaria; southern Bohemia; Korea; Madagascar;
Sonora in Mexico eastern Ontario and adjacent portions of Quebec in Canada. The most
;
productive locality in the United States is in the eastern and southeastern Adirondack
region in Essex, Warren, Saratoga and Washington Counties, N. Y. It occurs here in
graphitic quartzites, with quartz in small veins running through gneiss and in pegmatite
veins. Also found in metamorphosed Carboniferous rocks near Providence and Tiverton,
R. I.; in granite and schists in Clay, Chilton and Coqsa Counties, Ala.; as amorphous
graphite near Raton, N. M.; in irregular veins near Dillon, Mon.; near Turret, Chaffee
Co., Col.
Use. making crucibles and other refractory products, in lubri-
Its chief uses are for
tove polish, "lead" pencils and for foundry facings.
cants, paint,
The name black lead, applied to this species, is inappropriate, as it contains no lead.
The name graphite, of Werner, is derived from ypa<t>cu>, to write, alluding to its use for
pencils.
QUISQUEITE. A black lustrous material composed chiefly of carbon and sulphur from
the vanadium ores of Minasragra, Peru.
SULPHUR.
Orthorhombic. b c = 0'8131
Axes a : 1 1-9034.
: : :
Crystals commonly acute pyramidal; sometimes thick tabular c(001). ||
See also Fig. 79, p. 47. Also massive, in reniform shapes, incrusting, stalac-
titic and stalagmitic; in powder.
Cleavage: c(001), m(110), 'p(lll) imperfect. Fracture conchoidal to

uneven. Rather brittle to imperfectly sectile. H. = 1/5-2 -5. G. = 2 '05-
2-09. Luster resinous. Color sulphur-yellow, straw- and honey-yellow,

yellowish brown, greenish, reddish to
629 630 yellowish gray. Streak white. Trans-
parent to translucent. A non-con-
ductor of electricity; by friction neg-
atively electrified. A poor conductor
of heat. Optically + . Double refrac-
tion strong. Ax.
plane 6(010). ||
Bx _L c(001). Dispersion p < v.

2 V = 695'. Refractive indices,
a = 1-958, j8 = 2-038, 7 = 2 -245.
- Pure often
Comp. -
sulphur;
contaminated with clay, bitumen,
and ofher impurities.
Sulphur may also be obtained in the laboratory in other allotropic forms; a monoclinic
form is common.
Pyr., etc. Melts at 108 C., and at 270 burns with a bluish flame yielding sulphur
dioxide. Insoluble in water, and not acted on by the acids, but soluble in carbon disulphide.
Diff. Readily distinguished by the color, fusibility and combustibility.
Obs. The great repositories of sulphur are either beds of gypsum and the associate
rocks, or the regions of active and extinct volcanoes.
Sulphur may have several different modes of origin. At times it is a volcanic sublimate
formed by reactions between sulphur dioxide and hydrogen sulphide gases. It occurs fre-
quently around mineral springs where it has been formed by the incomplete oxidation of
hydrogen sulphide. Where such waters act upon limestone rocks both gypsum and sul-
phur may be formed. In a small way it is formed in many coal deposits and elsewhere by
the slow decomposition of pyrite and other sulphides.
Found in large amounts on the Island of Sicily, often in fine crystals and associated
with celestite, calcite, aragonite, gypsum, and barite. Important deposits are found in
the volcanic districts of Japan, Hawaii, Mexico, and western South America. In the
United States the most productive deposits are in Louisiana and Texas. In Calcasieu
Parish, Louisiana, a bed of sulphur 100 ft. in thickness is found at a depth of between 300
and 400 ft. It is underlain by beds of gypsum and salt. A
similar deposit occurs near
Freeport in Brazoria Co., Texas. It is found in numerous other Western localities; Utah,
at Sulphurdale, Beaver Co., in a rhyolitic tuff; Wy., in limestones near Cody and Ther-
mopolis and about the fumeroles of the Yellowstone Park; Nev., in Esmeralda Co. near
Luning and Cuprite, near Rosebud, Humbolt Co., sometimes in crystals and at Eureka,
Eureka Co.; Cal., in Colusa, Lake, San Bernadino and other Counties, at the geysers of
Napa Valley, Sonoma Co., on Lassen Peak, Tehema Co.; Col., at Vulcan, Gunnison Co.,
and in Mineral Co.
Use. In manufacture of sulphuric acid, in the process of making paper from wood
pulp, in making matches, gun powder, fireworks, insecticides, for vulcanizing rubber, for
medicinal purposes, etc. Sulphuric acid is now largely derived from the oxidation of
pyrite.
Selensulphur. Contains sulphur and selenium, orange-red or reddish brown; from
the islands Vulcano and Lipari.
ARSENIC.
Rhombohedral. Generally granular massive; sometimes reticulated,
reniform, stalactitic.
Cleavage: c(0001) highly perfect. Fracture uneven and fine granular.
Brittle. H. = 3'5. G. =
5'63-573. Luster nearly metallic. Color and
streak tin-white, tarnishing to dark
gray.
Comp. Arsenic, often with some antimony, and traces of iron, silver,
gold, or bismuth.
P ~~ B> on cnarcoa l volatilizes without fusing, coats the coal with white arsenic
yf' *:i' .
tnoxide, and affords a garlic odor; the coating treated in R.F. volatilizes, tingeing the
flame blue. In the closed tube gives a volatile sublimate of arsenic.
NATIVE ELEMENTS 349
Micro. In polished section shows white color similar to galena. Smooth surface.
With HNOs slowly effervesces, turning dark. Changes color in same way with Feds.
Unaffected by KCN
and HC1.
Obs. Occurs in veins in crystalline rocks and the older schists, often accompanied by
ores of antimony, the ruby silvers, realgar, sphalerite, and other metallic minerals. Thus
in the silver mines of Saxony; also Andreasberg, Harz Mts., Germany; Joachimstal and
Pfibram, Bohemia; in Hungary; Norway; Zmeov, Siberia; Prov. Echizen, Japan, etc.
Abundant at Chanarcjllo, Chile. In the United States sparingly at Haverhill and Jackson,
N. H.; near Leadville, Col.; Washington Camp, Santa Cruz Co., Ariz. In Canada at
Watson Creek, British Columbia; Montreal, Quebec.
Use. An ore of arsenic.
Allemontite. Arsenical Antimony, SbAs3 .In reniform masses. G. = 6'203. Luster
metallic. Color tin-white or reddish gray. From Allemont, France; Pfibram, Bohemia,
etc.
Tellurium. Rhombohedral. In prismatic crystals; commonly columnar to fine-gran-
ular massive. Perfect prismatic cleavage. H. = 2-2'5. G. = 6'2. Luster metallic.
Color and streak tin-white. B.B. wholly volatile. In warm concentrated sulphuric acid
gives red solution. From Transylvania, West Australia, and a number of places in
Colorado.
ANTIMONY.
Rhombohedral. Generally massive, lamellar and distinctly cleavable;
also radiated; granular.
Cleavage: c(0001) highly perfect; also other cleavages. Fracture uneven;
brittle. = 3-3'5. G. = 6'65-672. Luster metallic.
H Color and streak
tin-white.
Comp. Antimony, containing sometimes silver, iron, or arsenic.
B.B. on charcoal fuses very easily and is wholly volatile giving a white coating.
Pyr.
The white coating tinges the R.F. bluish green. Crystallizes readily from fusion.
Obs. Occurs near Sala in Sweden; Andreasberg in the Harz Mts., Germany; Alle-
mont, Dauphine, France; Pfibram, Bohemia; Mexico; Chile; Borneo. In the United
Warren, N. J., rare; in Kern Co., and at South Riverside, Cal.
States, at At South Ham,
Quebec; Prince William parish, York Co., New Brunswick.
Use. An ore of antimony.
BISMUTH.
Rhombohedral. Usually reticulated, arborescent; foliated or granular.
Cleavage: c(0001) perfect. Sectile. Brittle, but when heated somewhat
malleable. H. = 2-2*5. G. = 970-9-83. Luster metallic. Streak and
color silver-white, with a reddish hue; subject to tarnish. Opaque.
Comp. Bismuth, with traces of arsenic, sulphur, tellurium, etc.
Pyr., etc. B.B. on charcoal fuses very easily and entirely volatilizes, giving a coating
orange-yellow while hot, lemon-yellow on cooling. With potassium iodide and sulphur
B.B. on charcoal gives a brilliant red coating. Dissolves in nitric acid; subsequent dilu-
tion causes a white precipitate. Crystallizes readily from fusion.
Micro. In polished section shows creamy white color with pink tinge. Smooth and
metallic surface. With HC1 slowly darkens and dissolves. Rapidly darkens with effer-
vescence with HNO
3 and aqua regia.
Obs. Occurs in veins in gneiss and other crystalline rocks and clay slate, accom-
panying various ores of silver, cobalt, lead and zinc. Thus at the mines of Saxony and
Bohemia, etc.; Meymac, Correze, France. Also at Modum, Norway; at Falun, Sweden.
In Cornwall and Devonshire; near Copiapo, Chile; Bolivia.
Occurs at Monroe, Conn.; Brewer's mine, Chesterfield district, S. C.; near Cummins
City, and elsewhere in Col. Abundant with silver ores at Cobalt, Ontario.
Use. An ore of bismuth.
Zinc. Probably does not occur in the native state. In the laboratory it is obtained
in hexagonal prisms with tapering pyramids; also in complex crystalline aggregates. It
also appears to crystallize in the isometric system, at least in various alloys.
Tantalum. Isometric. In cubic crystals and fine grains. Color grayish yellow.
Found containing small amounts of niobium in the gold washings of the Ural and Altai
Mis.
Gold Group
GOLD.
Isometric.Distinct crystals rare, 0(111) most common, also d(110) and
in direction of an octahedral axis, giving
ra(311); crystals often elongated
also in plates
rise to'rhombohedral-like forms, and arborescent shapes;
flattened o(lll),
||
and branching at 60 parallel either to the edges or diag-
onals of an o face (see pp. 172, 173). Twins: tw. plane o. Skeleton crystals
633 634
common; edges salient or rounded; in filiform, reticulated, dendritic shapes.

Also massive and in thin laminae; often in flattened grains or scales.
Cleavage none. Fracture hackly. Very malleable and ductile.
H. = 2*5-3. G. = 15-6-19-3, 19'33 when pure. Luster metallic. Color
and streak gold-yellow, sometimes inclining to silver-white and rarely to
orange-red. Opaque.
Comp. Gold, but usually alloyed with silver in varying amounts and
sometimes containing also traces of copper or iron.
Var. 1. Ordinary. Containing up to 16 p. c. of silver. Color varying accordingly

from deep gold-yellow to pale yellow, and specific gravity from 19'3 to 15'5. The ratio of
gold to silver of 3 1 corresponds to 15'1 p. c. silver.
: For G. = 17'6, Ag = 9 p. c.;
G. = 16'9, Ag = 13'2; G. = 14'6, Ag = 38'4. The purest gold which has been described
is that from Mount Morgan, in Queensland, which has yielded 99'7 to 99'8 of gold, the
remainder being copper with a little iron; silver is present only as a minute trace.
2. Argentiferous; Electrum. Color pale yellow to yellowish white; G = 15'5-12'5.
Ratio for the gold and silver of 1 1 corresponds to 36 p. c. of silver; 1|
:
1, to 26 p. c.; :
2 1, to 21 p. c.; 1\
:
1, to 18 p. c.
: The word in Greek means also amber; and its use for
this alloy probably arose from the pale yellow color it has as compared with gold.
Varieties have also been described containing copper up to 20 p. c. from the Ural Mts.;
palladium to 10 p c. (porpezite), from Porpez, Brazil; bismuth, including the black gold of
.
Australia (maldonite); also rhodium (?).

Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses easily (at 1100 C.). Not acted on by fluxes. Insoluble in
any single acid; soluble in aqua regia, the separation not complete if more than 20 p. c.
Ag is present.
Diff. Readily recognized (e.g., from other metallic minerals, also from scales of yel-
low mica) by its malleability and high specific gravity, which last makes it possible to sepa-
rate it from the gangue by washing distinguished from chalcopyrite and
; pyrite since both
sulphides are brittle and soluble in nitric acid.
Micro. In polished section shows a golden yellow color with a smooth, metallic sur-
face. Unaffected by reagents except KCN, with which it quickly darkens and its surface
becomes rough.
Obs. Gold is widely distributed in the earth's crust. It has been found in various
igneous rocks, more commonly in the acid types, and sometimes in visible particles. It
occurs in sedimentary rocks and quite
frequently in connection with metamorphic rocks.
NATIVE ELEMENTS 351
It is a constituent of sea water. It is most frequently found in notable amounts in quartz

veins and in the various forms of placer deposits.
The gold, when occurring in quartz, is often irregularly distributed, in strings, scales,
plates, and in masses which are sometimes an agglomeration of crystals. Frequently the
scales are invisible to the naked eye. The associated minerals are: pyrite, which far exceeds
in quantity all others, and is generally auriferous; next, chalcopyrite, galena, sphalerite, arsen-
opyrite, each frequently auriferous; often tetradymite and other tellurium ores, native
bismuth, native arsenic, stibnite, cinnabar, magnetite, hematite; sometimes barite, scheelite,
apatite, fluorite, siderite, chrysocolla. The quartz at the surface, or in the upper part of a
vein, is usually cellular and rusted from the more or less complete disappearance of the
pyrite and other sulphides by decomposition; but below, it is commonly solid.
The gold of the world wasearly gathered, not directly from the quartz veins (the "quartz
reefs" of Australia and Africa), but from the gravel and sand deposited in the valleys in
auriferous regions, or on the slopes of the mountains or hills, whose rocks contain in some
part, and generally not far distant, gold bearing veins. Such deposits are known as placer
deposits. The gold is obtained by some method involving the use of a current of water
and the separation of the gold from the sand and gravel by means of its high specific gravity.
These hydraulic methods have been very extensively used in California and Alaska and
indeed most of the gold of the Ural Mts., Brazil, Australia, and many other gold regions
has come from such alluvial washings. At the present time, however, placer deposits are
much less depended upon and in many regions all the gold is obtained directly from the rock.
The alluvial gold is usually in flattened scales of different degrees of fineness, the size
depending partly on the original condition in the quartz veins, and partly on the distance
to which it has been transported and assorted by running water. The rolled masses when
of some size are called nuggets; in rare cases these occur very large and of great value. The
Australian gold region has yielded many large nuggets; one of these found in 1858 weighed
184 pounds, and another (1869) weighed 190 pounds. In the auriferous sands, crystals of
zircon are very common; also garnet and cyanite in grains; often also monazite, diamond,
topaz, corundum, iridosmine, platinum.
Besides the free gold of the quartz veins and gravels, much gold is also obtained from
auriferous sulphides or the oxides produced by their alteration, especially pyrite', also
arsenopyrite, chalcopyrite, sphalerite, marcasite, etc. The only minerals containing gold in
combination are the rare tellurides (sylvanite, calaverite, etc.).
Gold is widely distributed over the earth. It occurs under many different conditions
and with many different rocks, being, however, more commonly associated with the acid
types. A brief summary of the more important districts follows.
Europe. The gold deposits of Europe are to be found chiefly in three great districts,
namely the Ural mountains, eastern Hungary and a less important Alpine district reaching
from Carinthia through the Austrian Tyrolând the Italian Alps to the Pyrenees. There
are three gold districts in Hungary. Two of these are of minor importance and lie one to*
the north of Buda-Pesth and the other near the Galician frontier. The third district,
which is the most important district in Europe, is in Transylvania, lying in the southeastern
portion of the Bihar mountains. Its important centers are Offenbanya, Verespatak, Nagyag
(largely tellurides), Boicza and Ruda.
Asia. In Siberia gold is found on the eastern slope of the Ural mountains for a distance
of 500 miles. The important districts from north to south are Bogoslov, Nizhni Tagilsk,
Beresov and other localities near Ekaterinburg, Syserstk and Kyshtimsk, the Miask dis-
trict including Zlatoust and Mt. Ilmen, Kotchkar and at the southern limit of the fields,
Orsk. Siberia also has the important placer districts in Tomsk, which include Altai and
Marinsk, and in Yeniseisk, the Atchinsk, Minusinsk and the north and south Yenisei dis-
tricts. .Farther east there are deposits in Transbaikalia and the Lena district in Yakutsk.
In India the chief districts are the Kolar field near Bangalore in Mysore and the Gadag
and Hutti districts a little further north. Gold has been mined in China in Chili, Shantung
Weihaiwei, Szechuen, Yuman and Fo-Kien. In Manchuria on the Lua.u-tung Peninsula.
In Korea principally at Unsan. Gold-quartz veins, many of which have been worked for
a long time, occur on a number of the Japanese islands.
Australasia. The most important districts in New Zealand lie on the Hauraki Penin-
sula with the Waihi mine as the most famous. Other districts are the West Coast area on
the western slopes of the Alps of the South Island and the Otago area. In Queensland the
districts of Charter Towers and the Mount Morgan mine are important. There are many
gold districts in New South Wales among which are Hillgrove, Mount Bpppy and Hill
End. Rich districts in Victoria are the Bendigo and Ballarat. The principal gold fields
of Tasmania are Beaconsfield, Mathinna and the copper deposits at Mount Lyell. The
chief gold field in West Australia is near Kalgoorlie where the ores are largely tellurides.
Africa. Gold is found in Egypt in the section between the Nile and the Red Sea. Some
of these deposits were worked in very early days. Gold has been produced for a long time
from the Gold Coast district on the Gulf of Guinea. Important deposits are found in
Matabeleland and Mashonaland in Southern Rhodesia. The most important gold district
in the world is that of the Witwatersrand in the Transvaal. The mines occur in an east
and west belt, some sixty miles in length, near Johannesburg. The gold is found scattered
in small amounts through a series of steeply dipping quartz conglomerate rocks.
South America. Colonlbia has in the past produced large amounts of gold. The chief
districts today are in the states of Antioquia and Cauca. Comparatively small amounts
are produced at the present time in the other northern countries. The important deposits
of Brazil lie 200 miles to the north of Rio de Janeiro in Minas Geraes along the Sierra do
Espinhaco. The gold deposits in Chile lie chiefly in the coast ranges in the northern and
central parts of the country.
Mexico. While Mexico is chiefly noteworthy for its silver output it produces also con-
siderable gold. Important districts are as follows: Altar, Magdalena and Arizpe in Sonora;
various places in Chihuahua, especially about Parral, and the Dolores mine on the western
border of the state; the El pro mines in the state of Mexico; the Pachuca district in
Hidalgo; also various places in Guanajuato and Zacatecas.
Canada. The three important placer districts of Canada are the Klondike in Yukon
Territory and the Atlin and Cariboo in British Columbia. The most productive vein
deposits are found in British Columbia in the West Kootenay and Yale districts. Gold is
also found in Ontario and Nova Scotia. ,
-
United States. Gold occurs in the United States chiefly along the mountain ranges in
the western states. Smaller amounts have been found along the Appalachians in the
states of Virginia, North and South Carolina and Georgia. The more important localities
in the western states are given below, the states being arranged approximately in the order
of their importance. California. At the present time about two thirds of the state's out-
put comes from the lode mines and one third from placer deposits. The quartz veins are
chiefly found in what is known as the Mother-Lode belt that lies on the western slope of
the Sierra Nevada and stretches from Mariposa County for more than 100 miles toward
the north. The veins occur chiefly in a belt of slates. The lode mines are found chiefly
in Amador, Calaveras, Kern, Nevada, Shasta, Sierra and Tuolumne Counties. The
important placer mines are located in Butte, Sacramento and Yuba Counties. About 90
per cent of the placer gold is obtained by the use of dredges. Colorado. Gold is mined in
various districts in Gilpin County, from the Leadville district and others in Lake County,
in the region of the San Juan mountains in the Sneffels, Silverton and Telluride districts,
Cripple Creek district (telluride ores) in Teller County, placer deposits in the Breckenridge
district in Summit County. Alaska. The most important lode mines are in the Juneau
district, while the chief placer deposits are those of Fairbanks and Iditarod in the Yukon
basin and the Nome district on the Seward Peninsula. Nevada. The most important
districts are those of Goldfield in Esmeralda County and Tonapah in Nye County. South
Dakota. The output is chiefly from the Homestake mine at Lead in Lawrence County.
Montana. There are various producing districts, the more important being in Madison
(largely placers), Deer Lodge and Silver Bow Counties. Arizona. The important counties
are Mohave and Cochise. Utah. Gold is produced chiefly from the Bingham and Tintic
districts in Salt Lake County and from Juab
County.
Use. The chief ore of gold.
SILVER.
Isometric. Crystals commonly distorted, in acicular forms, reticulated or
arborescent shapes; coarse to fine filiform; also massive, in plates or flattened
scales.
Cleavage none. Ductile and malleable. Fracture hackly. H. = 2'5-3.
G. =10-1-11 -1, pure 10*5. Luster metallic. Color and streak silver-white,
often gray to black by tarnish.
Comp. Silver, with some gold (up to 10 p. c.), copper, and sometimes
platinum, antimony, bismuth, mercury.
r ? 5'?i
y etC *
~
B B on charcoal fuses easily to a silver-white globule, which in O.F. gives
- -
a faint ,
dark red coating of silver oxide;

crystallizes on cooling; fusibility about 1050 C.
Soluble in nitric acid, and deposited
again by a plate of copper. Precipitated from its
solutions by hydrochloric acid in white
curdy forms of silver chloride.
NATIVE ELEMENTS 353
Diff. Distinguished by its malleability, color (on the fresh surface), and specific
gravity.
Micro. In polished section shows a creamy white color with a
metallic, smooth
surface. With aqua regia and FeCl 3 tarnishes quickly with bright iridescent color-s
Blackens with HNO
?
.
Obs. Native silver occurs in masses, or in arborescent and filiform

shapes, in veins
traversing gneiss, schist, porphyry, and other rocks. Also occurs disseminated, but usually
invisibly, in native copper, galena, chalcocite, etc. It is commonly of
secondary origin
having been derived from the reduction of sulphides and other compounds of silver.
Native silver is found at a great many localities, some of the most famous of which
follow: Kongsberg, Norway, in magnificent specimens and in very large
masses; Freiberg
Schneeberg, etc., in Saxony; Pribram and Joachimstal in Bohemia; Andreasberg in the
Harz Mts., Germany; Allemont in Dauphine, France; at various points in Cornwall
England. At Chanarcillo and other localities in Chile; in large masses at Huantaya'
Peru. In many places in Mexico, especially at Batopilas in Chihuahua; in Zacatecas and
Guanajuato. A very important district is at Cobalt, Ontario, where native silver occurs in
masses up to 1000 pounds in weight; it occurs there associated with various cobalt and
nickel minerals.
In the United States ithas been found with native copper in the Lake Superior
copper
district; at Silver Islet, Lake Superior; at Butte and the Elkhorn mine in Mon.; at the
Poor Man's Lode in Idaho; in Col., with various sulphide deposits,
especially at Aspen.
Use. An ore of silver.
COPPER.
Isometric. The tetrahexahedron a common form (Fig. 635) ;
also in octa-
hedral plates. Distinct crystals rare. Frequently
irregularly distorted and passing into twisted and
wirelike forms; filiform and arborescent. Massive;
as sand. Twins: tw. pi. o (111), very common,
often flattened or elongated to spear-shaped forms.
Cf. p. 173.
Cleavage none. Fracture hackly. Highly ductile
and malleable. H. = 2-5-3. G. = 8'8-8'9. Luster
metallic. Color copper-red. Streak metallic shining.
Opaque. An excellent conductor for heat and
(410).
electricity.
Comp. Pure copper, often containing some silver, bismuth, mercury,
etc.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses readily; on cooling becomes covered with a coating of black
oxide. Dissolves readily in nitric acid, giving off red nitrous fumes, and produces a deep
azure-blue solution with excess of ammonia. Fusibility 780 C.
Micro. In polished section shows pink color with smooth, metallic surface. With
3 dissolves and shows iridescent tarnish. With FeCl 3 blackens and shows a
cone. HNp
solution pit.
Obs. Copper is usually, if not always, secondary in its origin. It has either been
deposited from solution by some reducing agent which is commonly a compound of iron
or by the gradual reduction of some solid compound. Pseudomorphs of copper after cu-
prite, azurite, chalcocite, etc., are well known. It is associated with other copper ores,
especially cuprite, malachite and azurite in the upper zone of copper veins; also with the
sulphides, chalcopyrite, chalcocite, etc.; often abundant in the vicinity of dikes of igneous
rocks; also in clay slate and sandstone.
Occurs in crystals at Bogoslovsk, Nijni Tagilsk and elsewhere in the Ural Mts. In
Nassau, Germany. Common in Cornwall, England. Occurs in Brazil, Chile, and Peru.
Found in pseudomorphs after the pseudo-hexagonal twins of aragonite at Corocoro, Bolivia.
Abundant at Wallaroo, South Australia and at Broken Hill, New South Wales. Occurs
at various places in Mexico.
Occurs native throughout the red sandstone region of the eastern United States, spar-
ingly in Mass., Conn., and more abundantly in N. J. Near New Haven, Conn., a mass
was found in the drift weighing nearly 200 pounds; smaller isolated masses have also been
found. Found in minor amounts at Bisbee, Ariz, (in branching crystal groups) at George- ;
town N M
(pseudomorphs after azurite) Ducktown, Tenn.; Cornwall, Pa.;
;
and Frank-
lin N The most important region in the world for native copper is the Lake Superior
J.
Mich. The rocks of this district con-
copper district on the Keweenaw peninsula, northern
sist of a series of interbedded lava flows, sandst9nes
which
and conglomerates dip steeply
to the northwest. The copper is obtained practically all in the native state, sometimes m
immense masses. It occurs as (1) a cement filling the interstices in the sandstone and
the grains and pebbles themselves, (2) fill-
conglomerate, sometimes replacing in large part
ing the amygdaloidal cavities in the diabase
and (3) in veins that traverse all kinds of rock.
The was into the district by the igneous rocks. It is associated
copper probably brought
with native silver, calcite, prehnite, datolite, analcite, etc.
Use. An ore of copper.

MERCURY. Quicksilver.
fluid globules scattered

In small through its gangue. G
=
13 '6. Luster
metallic, brilliant. Color tin-white. Opaque.
Comp. Pure mercury (Hg) ;
with sometimes a little silver.
B.B. entirely volatile, vaporizing at 350 C. Becomes solid at
Pyr., etc.
40 C.,
crystallizing in regular octahedrons with cubic cleavage;
G. = 14 '4. Dissolves in nitric
Obs. Mercury in the metallic state is a rare mineral, and is usually associated with
the sulphide cinnabar, from which the supply of commerce is obtained. The rocks afford-
ing the metal and its ores are chiefly clay shales or schists of different geological ages. Also
found in connection with hot springs. See cinnabar.
LEAD.
Isometric. Crystals rare. Usually in thin plates and small globular
masses. Very malleable, and somewhat ductile. = 1-5. G. = 11*4. H
Luster metallic. Color lead-gray. Opaque.
Comp. Nearly pure lead; sometimes contains a little silver, also
antimony.
B.B. fuses easily, coating the charcoal with a yellow to white oxide. Fusi-
Pyr.
bility 330 C. Dissolves easily in dilute nitric acid.
Obs. Of rare occurrence. Found at Pajsberg, Harstig, and Langban in Sweden;
similarly at Nordmark; also in the gold washings of the Ural Mts.; reported elsewhere,
but localities often doubtful. In the United States, occurs at Breckinridge and Gunnison,
Col.; Wood River district, Idaho; Franklin, N. J.
AMALGAM.
Isometric. Common habit dodecahedral. Crystals often highly modified.
Also massive in plates, coatings, and embedded grains.
Cleavage: dodecahedral in traces. Fracture conchoidal, uneven. Rather
brittle to malleable. H. = 3-3'5. G, = 1375-14-1. Luster metallic, bril-
liant. ^Color and streak silver-white.
Opaque.
Comp. (Ag,Hg), silver and mercury, varying from Ag2 Hg 3 to Ag 36 Hg.
Var. Ordinary amalgam, Ag2 Hg 3 (silver 26'4 p. c.) or AgHg (silver 35-0); also
Ag 5Hg3 , etc. Arquerite, Agi 2 Hg (silver 86 "6); G. = 10'8; malleable and soft. Kongsber-
gite, AgasHg or Ag 36 Hg.
Pvr., etc. B.B. on charcoal the mercury volatilizes and a globule of silver is left. In
the closed tube the mercury sublimes and condenses on the cold
part of the tube in minute
globules. Dissolves in nitric acid. Rubbed on copper it gives a silvery luster.
Obs. From Germany in the Rhine-Palatinate at and at
Moschel-Landsberg
Jriednchssegen, Nassau; from Sala, Sweden; Kongsberg, Norwav; Allemont, Dauphine",
France; Almaden, Spain; Chile; Vitalle Creek, British Columbia (arquerite).
. . Tm '~
Native tin has been reported from several localities. The
only occurrence
fairly above doubt is that from the washings at the headwaters of the Clarence
river, near
>ban, New bouth Wales. It has been found here in
grayish white rounded grains, with
platinum, mdosmine, gold, cassiterite, and corundum
NATIVE ELEMENTS 355
Platinum-Iron Group
PLATINUM.
Isometric. Crystals rare; usually in grains and scales.
Cleavage none. Fracture hackly. Malleable and ductile. H. = 4-4-5.
G. = 14-19 native; 21-22 chem. pure. Luster metallic. Color and streak
whitish steel-gray; shining. Sometimes magnetic and occasionally shows
polarity.
Comp. Platinum alloyed with iron, iridium, rhodium, palladium,
osmium, and other metals.
Most platinum yields from 8 to 15 or even 18 per cent of iron, 0*5 to 2 p. c. palladium,
1 to 3 p. c. each of rhodium and iridium, a trace of osmium and finally 0'5 to 2 p. c. or more
of copper.
Var. 1. Ordinary. Non-magnetic or only slightly magnetic. G. = 16'5-18'0 mostly.
2. Magnetic. G. about 14. Much platinum is magnetic, and occasionally it has polarity.
The magnetic property seems to be connected with high percentage of iron (iron-platinum),
although this distinction does not hold without exception.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible. Not affected by borax or salt of phosphorus, except in the
state of fine dust, when reactions for iron and copper may be obtained. Soluble only in
heated aqua regia.
Diff. Distinguished by its color, malleability, high specific gravity, infusibility and
insolubility in ordinary acids.
Obs. The platinum of commerce comes almost exclusively from placer deposits. Its
original source, however, is in the basic igneous rocks, usually peridotites. The associated
minerals are commonly chrysolite, serpentine and chromite. Platinum was first found in
pebbles and small grains, associated with iridium, gold, chromite, etc., in the alluvial de-
posits of the river Pinto, in the district of El Choco, Colombia South America, where it
;
received its name platina (platina del Pinto) from plala, silver. The greater part of the
world's supply comes from Russia (discovered in 1822) where it occurs in alluvial material
in the Ural Mts. at Nijni Tagilsk, and with chromite in a serpentine probably derived from
a peridotite; also in the Goroblagodat and Bisersk districts. Also found in Borneo; in
New Zealand, from a region characterized by a chrysolite rock with serpentine; in New
South Wales, at the Broken Hill district, and in gold washings at various points.
In Cal. in small amounts in the gold placers, chiefly in Trinity Co.; at Port Orfqrd in
Ore. At various points in Canada, the most important being the Tulameen District in
British Columbia
Use. Practically the only ore of platinum.
Iridium.Platin-iridium. Iridium alloyed with platinum and other allied metals.
Occurs usually in angular grains of a silver-white color. H. = 6-7. G. = 22 '6-22 '8.
With the platinum of the Ural Mts. and Brazil.
IRIDOSMINE. Osmiridium.
Rhombohedral. Usually in irregular flattened grains.
Cleavage: c(0001) perfect. Slightly malleable to nearly brittle. H. =
6-7. G. = 19-3-21 -12. Luster metallic. Color tin-white to light steel-
gray. Opaque.
Comp. Iridium and osmium in different proportions. Some rhodium,
platinum, ruthenium, and other metals are usually present.
Var. 1. Nevyanskite. H. = 7; G. = 18'8-19'5. In flat scales; color tin-white.
Over 40 p. c. of iridium. 2. Siserskite. In flat scales, often six-sided, color grayish white,
steel-gray. G. =
20-21'2. .Not over 30 p. c. of iridium. Less common than the light-
colored variety.
Diff. Distinguished from platinum by greater hardness and by its lighter color.
Obs. Occurs with platinum in South America; in the Ural Mts.; in auriferous drift
in New South Wales. Rather abundant in the auriferous beach-sands of northern Cali-
fornia and Oregon.
Palladium. Isometric. Palladium, alloyed with a little platinum and iridium.
Mostly in grains. H. = 4'5-5. G.

= 11 '3-11 '8. Color whitish steel-gray. Occurs with
platinum in Brazil; also from the Ural Mts.
Allopalladium. Palladium under the hexagonal-rhombohedral class (?). From Til-
kerode in the Harz Mts. in small hexagonal tables with gold.
IRON.
Isometric. Usually massive, rarely in crystals.
Cleavage: a( 100), perfect; also a lamellar structure || 0(111) and d(110). ||
Fracture hackly. Malleable. H. = 4-5. G. = 7-3-7-8. Luster metallic.

Color steel-gray to iron-black. Strongly magnetic.
Var. Terrestrial Iron.
1. Found in masses, occasionally of great size, as well as
in small embeddedparticles, in basalt at Blaafjeld, Oyifak (or Uifak), Disko Island, West
Greenland; also elsewhere on the same coast. This iron contains 1 to 2 p. c. of Ni. In
small grains with pyrrhotite in basalt from near Kassel, Hesse Nassau, Germany. In
minute spherules in feldspar from Cameron Township, Nipissing Dist., Ontario. Some
other occurrences, usually classed as meteoric, may be in fact terrestrial.
A nickeliferous metallic iron (FeNi 2 ) called awaruite occurs in the drift of the Gorge
river, which empties into Awarua Bay on the west coast of the south island of New Zea-
land; associated with gold, platinum, cassiterite, chromite; probably derived from a
partially serpentinized peridotite. Josephinite is a nickel-iron (FeNia) from Oregon, occur-
ring in stream gravel. Similar material from near Lillooet on the Fraser river, British Co-
lumbia, has been called soucsite. Native iron also occurs sparingly in some basalts; reported
from gold or platinum washings at various points.
2. Meteoric Iron. Native iron also occurs in most meteorites, forming in some cases
(a) the entire mass (iron meteorites) also (6) as a spongy, cellular matrix in which are
;
embedded grains of chrysolite or other silicates (siderolites)} (c) in grains or scales dissemi-
nated more or less freely throughout a stony matrix
636 (meteoric stones). Rarely a meteorite consists of a
single crystalline individual with numerous twinning
lamellse !(o(lll). Cubic cleavage sometimes observed:
also an octahedral, less often dodecahedral, lamellar
structure. Etching with dilute nitric acid (or iodine)
commonly develops a crystalline structure (called
Widmanstdtten figures) (Fig. 636); usually consisting
of lines or bands crossing at various angles according
to the direction of the section, at 60 if || 0(111),
90 a(100), etc.
|! They are formed by the edges of
crystalline plates, usually o, of the nickeliferous iron
1 1
of different composition (kamacite, tcenite, plessite), as

shown by the fact that they are differently attacked
by the acid. Irons with cubic structure and with
twinning lamellse have a series of fine lines correspond-
riloneta iv/r<u AT m
& to those developed by etching (Neumann lines) . A
4.
Mt., New TV/T

Mexico damascene luster is also produced in some cases, due
to quadrilateral depressions. Some irons show no
distinct crystalline structure upon
etching.
The exterior of masses of meteoric iron is usually more or less
deeply pitted with rounded
thumblike depressions, and the surface at the time of fall is covered with a film of iron oxide
in fane ridges showing lines of flow due to the
melting caused by the heat developed by the
resistance of the air; this film
disappears when the iron is exposed to the weather.
Meteoric iron is always alloyed with
nickel, which is usually present in amounts varying
rom 5 to 10 p. c., sometimes much
more; small amounts of other metals, as cobalt, man-
rare. sometimes
Cohenite, identified, is (Fe,Ni,Co) 3 C in tin-white crystals.
Moissanite. CSi. This material, originally produced

been found occurring artificially as carborundum, has
naturally as small green hexagonal plates in the meteoric iron of
Canon Diablo, Ariz
SULPHIDES, SELENIDES, TELLURIDES, ARSENIDES, ANTIMONIDES 357
II. SULPHIDES, SELENIDES, TELLURIDES, ARSENIDES,

ANTIMONIDES
The sulphides, etc., fall into two Groups according to the character of the
positive element.
I. Sulphides, Selenides, Tellurides of the Semi-metals.
II. Sulphides, Selenides, Tellurides, Arsenides, Antimonides of the
Metals.
I. Sulphides, etc., of the Semi-Metals
This section includes one distinct group, the Stibnite Group, to which
orpiment is related the other species included stand alone.
;
637
REALGAR.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 1-4403 :1 :
0*9729; = 66 5'.
mm'", 110 A HO = 105 34'.' rr', 012 A 012 = 47 57'.
Crystals short prismatic; striated vertically. Also gran-

ular, coarse or fine; compact; as an incrustation.
Cleavage: 6(010) rather perfect. Fracture small con-
choidal. Sectile. H. = 1-5-2. G. = 3 '56. Luster resinous.
Color aurora-red or orange-yellow. Streak varying from
orange-red to aurora-red. Transparent translucent.
Comp. Arsenic monosulphide, AsS = Sulphur 29*9, arsenic 70*1 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube melts and gives a dark red liquid when hot and a red-
dish yellow solid when cold; in the open tube (if heated very slowly) sulphurous fumes, and
a white crystalline sublimate of arsenic trioxide. B.B. on charcoal burns with a blue flame,
emitting arsenical and sulphurous odors. Soluble in caustic alkalies.
Artif . Realgar is frequently noted as a sublimation product from furnaces roasting
ores of arsenic. Crystals are produced when arsenic sulphide is heated in a sealed tube
with a solution of sodium bicarbonate.
Obs. Realgar occurs usually in veins associated with silver and lead ores. It has
been found in volcanic regions as a sublimation product. It has also been noted as a deposit
from hot spring waters. It is often associated with orpiment. It occurs at Felsobdnya,
Kapnik and Nagy^g, Hungary; Allchar, Macedonia. Binnental, Switzerland, in dolomite.
In the United States, at Mercur, Utah; in the Norris Geyser Basin, Yellowstone Park, as a
deposition from the hot waters. Found at the Monte Cristo mining district, Snohomish
Co., Washington; the name realgar is from the Arabic, Rahj al ghar, powder of the
mine.
Use. Was used in fireworks to give a brilliant white light when mixed with saltpeter
and ignited. The artificial material is now used for this purpose.
ORPIMENT.
Monoclinic. Axes a :b :c = 0'596 1 : :
= 9041'.
0;665,
Crystals small, rarely distinct. Usually in foliated or columnar masses;
sometimes with reniform surface.
Cleavage: 6(010) highly perfect, cleavage face vertically striated; a(100)
in traces; gliding-plane c (001). Sectile. Cleavage laminae flexible, inelastic.
H. = T5-2. G. = 3'4-3'5. Luster pearly on b (cleavage); elsewhere
resinous. Color lemon-yellow of several shades; streak the same, but paler.
Subtransparent sub translucent.
Comp. Arsenic trisulphide, A^Sa = Sulphur 39*0, arsenic 61*0 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Same as for realgar, p. 357.

Diff. by its fine yellow color, pearly luster, easy cleavage, and flexi-
Distinguished
bility when in plates.
Artif . Orpiment has been synthesized by heating solutions of arsenic with ammo-
nium sulphocyanate in a sealed tube; also by the treatment under pressure of arsenic acid
with hydrogen sulphide.
ObSc Occurs under same conditions as realgar with which it is commonly associated.
It is found in Hungary at Tajowa in small crystals, in foliated and fibrous masses at Mol-
dowa, in metalliferous veins at Kapnik and Felsob&nya; with realgar at Allchar, Macedonia.
A large deposit occurred near Julamerk in Kurdistan. Occurs in fine crystals at Mercur,
Utah. Among the 'deposits of the Steamboat Springs, Nevada; also with realgar in the
Yellowstone Park.
The name orpiment is a corruption of its Latin name auripigmentum, "golden paint,"
given in allusion to the color, and also because the substance was supposed to contain gold.
Use. For a pigment, in dyeing and in a preparation for the removal of hair from skins.
The artificial material is largely used as a substitute for the mineral.
Stibnite Group
a b : : c
Stibnite Sb 2 S 3 0*9926 1 1-0179
: :
Bismuthinite Bi 2 S 3 0-9679 1 0'9850

: :
Guanajuatite Bi 2 Se3 1 : 1 approx.

The species of the Stibnite Group crystallize in the orthorhombic system
and have perfect brachypinacoidal cleavage, yielding flexible- laminae.
The species orpiment is in physical properties somewhat related to stibnite, but is
mpnoclinic in crystallization. Groth notes that in a similar way, the oxide, As2 O 3 is mono- ,
clinic in claudetite, while the corresponding compound, Sb 2 O 3

(valentinite), is orthorhombic.
STIBNITE. Antimonite, Antimony Glance.

Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'9926 1 : 1-0179.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 89 34'. bv, 010 A 121 = 35
pp
f
,
111 A 111 = 71 24|'. br,,010 A 353 = 40
ss', 113 A 113 = 35 52'. br, 010 A 343 = 46 33'
ss'", 113 A 113 = 35 36'. bp, 010 A 111 = 54 36'
Crystals prismatic; striated or furrowed vertically; often curved or twisted

(cf. p. 188). Common in confused aggregates or radiating groups of acicular
crystals; massive, coarse or fine
640
columnar, commonly bladed, less
often granular to impalpable.
Cleavage b (010) highly
:
perfect. Slightly sectile. Frac-

ture small sub-conchoidal. H.
= 2. -
G.
4-52^-62.= Luster
metallic, highly splendent on
cleavage or fresh crystalline sur-
faces. Color and streak lead-
gray, inclining to steel-gray: sub-
ject to blackish tarnish, sometimes
iridescent.
California
Hungary Japan Comp. ~ Antimony trisul-
antimony 71'4 = 100. Sometimes auriferouâlso

p~ fc
Ife^^
sublimate which B.B. is non-volatile. On charcoal fuses, spreads out, gives sulphurous
fumes, and coats the coal white with oxide of antimony; this coating treated in R.F.
volatilizes and tinges the flame greenish blue. When pure, perfectly soluble in hydrochloric
acid; in nitric acid decomposed with separation of antimony pentoxide.
Diff. Distinguished (e.g., from galena) by cleavage, color, softness; also by its fusi-
bility and other blowpipe characters. It is harder than graphite. Resembles sometimes
certain of the rarer sulphantimonites of lead, but yields no lead coating on charcoal.
Micro. In polished section shows white color like galena with a smooth surface.
Darkens with HNO 3 and aqua regia; withKOH turns oranffe-vpllnw t.n radish hrjyvn
Artif. Stibnite, like orpiment, has been artificially produced by heating in a sealed
tube, a solution of antimony with ammonium sulphocyanate; also by passing hydrogen
sulphide at a red heat over compounds of antimony.
Obs. Stibnite has been noted in deposits of solf ataric origin but usually has appar-
ently been deposited from alkaline solutions in intimate association with quartz. It is
found in beds or veins in granite and gneiss, often accompanied with various other antimony
minerals produced by its alteration. Also associated in metalliferous deposits with sphal-
erite, galena, cinnabar, barite, quartz; sometimes accompanies native gold.
Stibnite is the most common ore of antimony and is found in quantity in many countries
but has never been extensively mined in the United States. In Europe it has been found
in notable deposits at Wolfsberg, Harz Mts.; at Braunsdorf near Freiberg in Saxony; at
the Caspari mine near Arnsberg, Westphalia; in Hungary at Felsobanya, Kremnitz and
Kapnik; at various points in France. Groups of large splendent crystals have come
from the antimony mines in the Province of Ivo, island of Shikoku, Japan. Important
deposits are located in southern China, particularly in the Province of Hunan. Mexico and
Chile produce considerable antimony ore.
In the United States the more important deposits are in C#l., on Telescope Peak in the
Panamint Ra'nge, in Kern County and in the eastern part of San Benito County. Nev.
has several deposits, mostly in the northwest section.
Use. The most important ore of antimony.
Metastibnite. An dmorphous brick-red deposit of antimony trisulphide, Sb 2 S 3 ,
occurring with cinnabar and arsenic sulphide upon siliceous sinter at Steamboat Springs,
Washoe Co., Nev.
BISMUTHINITE. Bismuth Glance.

Orthorhombic. Rarely in acicular crystals, mm"', 110 A 110 = 88 8'.
Usually massive, foliated or fibrous.
Cleavage: 6(010) perfect. Somewhat sectile. H.
= 2. G. = 6'4-6*5.
Luster metallic. Streak and color lead-gray, inclining to tin-white, with a
yellowish or iridescent tarnish. Opaque.
Comp.. Bismuth trisulphide, Bi 2 S 3 = Sulphur 18'8, bismuth 81*2 =
100. Sometimes contains a little copper and iron.
Pyr., etc. Fusibility = 1. In the open tube sulphurous fumes, and a white sublimate
which B.B. fuses into drops, brown while hot and opaque yellow on cooling. On char-
coal at first gives sulphurous fumes; then fuses with spirting, and coats the coal with
yellow bismuth oxide; with potassium iodide and sulphur gives a yellow to bright red
coating of bismuth iodide. Dissolves readily in hot nitric acid, and a white precipitate
of a basic salt falls on diluting with water.
Artif. Bismuthinite has been produced artificially by treating the volatilized chlo-
ride of bismuth with hydrogen sulphide; in crystals by heating bismuth sulphide in a sealed
tube with an alkaline sulphide.
Micro. In polished section shows white color like galena with a smooth surface,
with HNO 3 blackens, leaving a rough surface; with aqua regia slowly turns brown.
Obs. Found in Cornwall, England, at Carrock Fells, Redruth, etc. in France at
;
Meymac, Correze; in Saxony at Schneeberg and Altenberg; in Hesse at Bieber; in Hun-

gary at Rezbany a and Oravicza; in Sweden at Riddarhyttan in Bolivia at San Baldamero
;
near Sovata and in the Chorolque and Tazna districts. Occurs in the United States in Beaver
Co., Utah; in Rowan and Jackson Cos., N. C.; at Wicks, Jefferson Co., Mon.; Delaware
Co., Pa.; Haddam, Conn.
Use. An ore of bismuth.
Guanajuatite. Frenzelite. Bismuth selenide, Bi 2 Se 3 sometimes with a small amount
,
of sulphur replacing selenium. In acicular crystals; also massive, granular, foliated or

fibrous. Cleavage: 6(010) distinct. H. = 2'5-3'5. G. = 6'25-6'62. Luster metallic.
Color bluish gray. From the Santa Catarina mine, near Guanajuato, Mexico. Noted
from Salmon, Idaho.
TETRAD YMITE.
Rhombohedral. Crystals small, indistinct. Commonly in bladed forms
foliated to granular massive.
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Laminse flexible; not very sectile. H. 1-5-2;
=
soils paper. G. = 7-2-7-6. Luster metallic, splendent. Color pale steel-gray.
Comp. Consists of bismuth and tellurium, with sometimes sulphur
and a trace of selenium; the analyses for the most part afford the general
formula Bi 2 (Te, S) 8 .
Var. Free from sulphur. Bi 2 Te3 = Tellurium 48' 1, bismuth 51*9. G. = 7'642
1.
from Dahlonega. Var. 2. Sulphurous. 2Bi2 Te 3 Bi 2 S 3 = Tellurium 36 '4, sulphur 4 '6,
.
bismuth 59'0 = 100. This is the more common variety and includes the tetradymite in
crystals from Schubkau.
Pyr. In the open tube a white sublimate of tellurium dioxide, which B.B. fuses to
colorless drops. charcoal fuses, gives white fumes, and entirely volatilizes; tinges the
On
R.F. bluish green; coats the coal at first white (TeO 2 ), and finally orange-yellow (Bi 2 O 3 );
some varieties give sulphurous and selenous odors.
Obs. Occurs in Hungary at Schubkau near Schemnitz at Rezbanya and Orawitza;
at Carrock Fells, Cumberland, England. Occurs on Liddell Creek, Kaslo river, West
Kootenay, British Columbia. In the United States, in Va., at the Whitehall gold mines,
Spottsylvania Co.; in Davidson Co., N. C., and in the gold washings of Burke and
McDowell counties, etc.; near Dahlonega, Ga.; in Mon. At the Montgomery mine
and near Bradshaw, Ariz. Named from TeTp'dvuos, fourfold, in allusion to complex twin
crystals sometimes observed.
Griinlingite. Bi 4 TeS 3 Massive. One
. distinct cleavage. Color, gray. G. = 7'321.
From Cumberland, England. Oruetite is a similar mineral, Bi8 TeS 4 from ,
Serrania de
Ronda, Spain.
Joseite. A bismuth telluride (Te 80 p. c., also S and Se). G. = 7'9. San Jose,
Brazil.
Wehrlite. A foliated bismuth telluride (Te 30 p. c.) of doubtful formula. G. = 8'4.
Deutsch-Pilsen, Hungary.
MOLYBDENITE.
Crystals hexagonal in form, tabular, or short prisms slightly tapering and
horizontally striated. Commonly foliated, massive or in scales; also fine
granular.
Cleavage: basal eminent. Laminse very flexible, but not elastic. Sectile.
H. = 1-1-5. G. = 4-7-4-8. Luster metallic. Color pure lead-gray; a
bluish gray trace on paper. Opaque. Feel greasy.
Comp. Molybdenum disulphide, MoS = 2 Sulphur 40 -0, molybdenum
60-0 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the open tube sulphurous fumes and a pale yellow crystalline sublimate
of molybdenum trioxide (MoOg). B.B. in the forceps infusible, imparts a yellowish green
color to the flame; on charcoal the
pulverized mineral gives in O.F. a strong odor of sul-
phur dioxide and coats the coal with crystals of molybdic oxide, yellow while hot, white on
cooling; near the assay the coating is copper-red, and if the white coating be touched with
an intermittent R.F., it assumes a beautiful azure-blue color.
Decomposed by nitric acid,
leaving a white or grayish residue.
Diff. Much resembles graphite in softness and structure (see p. 347), but has a bluer
trace on paper and readily yields
sulphur fumes on charcoal.
Artif. Molybdenite has been made artificially by adding molybdic oxide to a fused
mixture of potassium carbonate and
sulphur; also by heating a mixture of molybdates and
lime in an atmosphere of hydrochloric acid and
hydrogen sulphide.
Micro. In polished section shows grayish white color with smooth surface. Un-
affected by reagents.
Obs. Generally occurs embedded in, or disseminated through, granite, gneiss, zircon-
syenite, granular limestone, and other crystalline rocks. At Arendal and Laurvik in
Norway; Altenberg, Saxony; Zinnwald and Schlaggenwald, Bohemia; near Miask, Ural
Mts.; Chessy in France; in Italy, on island of Sardinia; Carrock Fells, in Cumberland; at
several of the Cornish mines. In large crystals at Kingsgate, Glen Innes, N. S. W.
In Me. at Blue Hill Bay; in Conn., at Haddam, in gneiss; in Ver., at Newport; in
N. H., at Westmoreland; in N. Y., two miles southeast of Warwick; in N. J., at Franklin;
in Pa., in Chester, near Reading and at Frankford; near Concord, Cabarrus Co., N. C.; in
quartz vein at Crown Point, Wash. Molybdenite has been mined in various places in
Ariz., Col., Nev., Mon., Tex., Utah. etc. In Canada, at St. Jer6me, Quebec; in large crys-
tals in Renfrew county, Ontario; also in Aldfield township, Pontiac Co., Quebec.
Named from tSoXvpdos, lead; the name, first given to some substances containing lead,
later included graphite and molybdenite, and even some compounds of antimony. The
distinction between graphite and molybdenite was established by Scheele in 1778-79.
Use. An important ore of molybdenum.
Tungstenite. Probably 2 WS
Earthy or foliated. Color and streak, dark lead-
.
gray. H. = 2'5. G. = 7'4. Found at Emma mine, Salt Lake Co., Utah.
Patronite. Rizopatronite. large amounts of a
Complex composition, containing
vanadium sulphide, perhaps Amorphous. Color black. Occurs in a complex mix-
84.
ture of mineral substances among which are quisqueite and bravoite, at Minasragra, Peru.
II. Sulphides, Selenides, Tellurides, Arsenides, Antimonides of the

Metals
The sulphides of this second section fall into four divisions depending
upon the proportion of the negative element present. These divisions with
the groups belonging to them are as follows :
A. Basic Division
ii
B. Monosulphides, Monotellurides, etc., RjjS, RS, etc.
1. Galena Group. Isometric-normal.

2. Chalcocite Group. Orthorhombic.
3. Sphalerite Group. Isometric-tetrahedral.
4. Cinnabar Wurtzite Millerite Group. Hexagonal and rhombo-
hedral.
C. Intermediate Division
Embraces Melonite, Te2 S 3 ; Bornite, 5Cu2 S.Fe2S 3 ; Linnaeite, 08.00283;
Chalcopyrite, Cu2 S.Fe2 S 3 etc. ;
[D. Disulphides, Diarsenides, etc., RS2 RAs2

, ,
etc.
1. Pyrite Group. Isometric-pyritohedral.

2. Marcasite Group. Orthorhombic.
A. Basic Division
The basic division embraces several rare basic compounds of silver, copper
or nickel chiefly with antimony and arsenic. Of these the crystallization of
dyscrasite and maucherite only is known.
DYSCRASITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0-5J75 1 :(V6718. Crystals rare, pseu-
: : :
dohexagonal in angles (mm'", 110 A 110 = 60 1') and by twinning. Also

massive. Fracture uneven. Sectile. H. = 3'5-4. G. = 9 '44-9 '85. Luster
metallic. Color and streak silver-white, inclining to tin-white; sometimes

tarnished yellow or blackish. Opaque.
Comp. A silver antimonide, including Ag3 Sb = Antimony 27' 1, silver
72 '9 = 100, and AgeSb = Antimony 157, silver 84 -3 = 100, and perhaps other
compounds.
Analyses vary widely, S9me conforming also to Agj>Sb, Ag4 (Sb,As) 3
etc. By some
,
authors classed with chalcocite.

Pyr., etc. B.B. on charcoal fuses (1'5) to a globule, coating the coal with white anti-
mony trioxide and finally giving a globule of almost pure silver. Soluble in nitric acid,
leaving antimony trioxide.
Obs. Occurs near Wolfach, Baden; Andreasberg in the Harz Mts., Germany; Alle-
mont, France. Noted at Cobalt, Ontario, Canada. Also from Mexico arid Chile. Named
from dvffKpacrts, a bad alloy.
HENTILITE, ANIMIKITE. The ores from Silver Islet, Lake Superior, apparently contain
a silver arsenide (huntilite, Ag3 As?) and perhaps also a silver antimonide (animikite, Ag 9 Sb?),
the latter probably a mixture.
Horsfordite. A silver-white, massive copper antimonide, probably Cu6 Sb (Sb 24 p. c.).
G. = Asia Minor, near Mytilene.
8'8.
Domeykite. Copper arsenide, Cu 3 As. Reniform and botryoidal; also massive, dissem-
inated. G. = 7'2-775. Luster metallic. Color tin-white to steel-gray, readily tarnished.
From several Chilian mines; also Zwickau, Saxony. In North America, with niccolite
at Michipicoten Island, Lake Superior. Microscopic examination shows this mineral to be
an intimate mixture of two unknown constituents. Usually identical with algodonite.
Mohawkite. Like domeykite, Cu3 As, with Ni and Co. Massive, fine granular to
compact. Color gray with faint yellow tinge; tarnishes to dull purple. H. = 3'5. Brittle.
G. = 8 '07. Microscopic examination, shows it to be a mixture. From Mohawk mine,
Keweenaw Co., Mich. Ledouxite from the Mohawk minesaid to be Cu 4 As has been shown
to be a mixture.
Algodonite. Copper arsenide, Cu 6 As (As 16'5 p. c.); G. = 7'62. Resembles domey-
kite. From Chile; also Lake Superior. Microscopic examination shows this mineral to be
a mixture of two constituents.
Whitneyite. Copper arsenide, Cu 9 As (As 11'6 p. e). G. = 8'4-8'6. Color pale red-
dish white. From Houghton Co., Mich.; Sonora, Lower California.
Chilenite. Perhaps Ag6 Bi. Copiapo, Chile.
COCINERITE. Copper, silver sulphide, CiÂgS. Massive. Color silver-gray, tarnish-
ing black, H = 2'5. G. = 6*1. From Cocinera mine, Ramos, San Luis Potosi, Mexico.
Stiitzite. A
rare silver telluride (Ag4 Te?). Probably from Nagyag, Transylvania.
Rickardite. Cu4 Te 3 Massive. H. = 3'5. G. = 7'5. Color deep purple, dulling on
.
exposure. Fusible. Found at Vulcan, Col.

Maucherite. Ni 3 As 2 Tetragonal. Habit, square tabular. H. =5. G. = 7'83. Color
.
reddish silver-white tarnishing to gray copper-red. Streak blackish gray. Easily fusible.
From Eisleben, Thuringia. The furnace product, placodine, is identical wfth maucherite.
B. Monosulphides, Monotellurides,* etc., R S,

2 RS, ETC.
1. Galena Group. Isometric.
Galena PbS Argentite Ag2 S
Also, (Pb,Cu 2 )S, (Cu2 ,Pb)S Jalpaite (Ag,Cu) 2 S
Altaite PbTe Hessite Ag2 Te
Clausthalite PbSe Aguilarite Ag2 Se
Naumannite (Ag2 ,Pb)Se
The following, known only in massive form, probably also belong here:
Berzelianite Cu 2 Se Zorgite (Pb,Cu2,Ag2 )Se?
Lehrbachite (Pb,Hg2 )Se t Crookesite (Cu,Tl,Ag) 2 Se
Eucairite Cu2 Se.Ag2Se
The GALENA GROUP embraces a number of monosulphides, etc., of the

related metals, silver, copper, lead, and mercury. These crystallize in the
normal class of the isometric system, and several show perfect cubic cleavage.
These characters are most distinctly exhibited in the type species, galena.
GALENA. GALENITE. Lead glance.
Isometric. Commonly in cubes, or cubo-octahedrons, less often octa-

hedral. Also in skeleton crystals, reticulated, tabular. Twins: tw. pi.
o(lll), both contact- and penetration-twins (Figs. 401, 404, p. 165), sometimes
repeated; twin crystals often tabular || o. Also other tw. planes giving poly-
synthetic tw. lamellae. Massive cleavable, coarse or fine granular, to impal-
pable; occasionally fibrous or plumose.
641 642 643 644
! a
p(221), w
Cleavage: cubic, highly perfect; less often octahedral. Fracture flat sub-
conchoidal or even. H. = 2-5-275. G. = 7*4-7 '6. Luster metallic. Color
and streak pure lead-gray. Opaque.
Comp. Lead sulphide, PbS = Sulphur 13'4, lead 86'6 = 100. Often
contains silver, and occasionally selenium, zinc, cadmium, antimony, bismuth,
copper, as sulphides; besides, also, sometimes nativ,e silver and gold.
Var. 1. Ordinary, (a) Crystallized; (6) somewhat fibrous and plumose; (c) cleav-
able, granular coarse or fine; (d) crypto -crystalline. The variety with octahedral cleavage
is rare; in it the usual cubic cleavage is obtained readily after heating to 200 or 300; the
peculiar cleavage may be connected with the bismuth usually present. One variety showing
octahedral cleavage contained a small amount of tellurium.
2. Argentiferous. All galena is more or less argentiferous, and no external characters
serve to distinguish the kinds that are much so from those that are not. The silver is
detected by cupellation, and may amount from a few thousandths of one per cent to one
per cent or more; when mined for silver it ranks as a silver ore.
3. Containing arsenic, or antimony or a compound of these metals, as impurity.
,
Here
belong bleischweif f rom Claustal, Harz'Mts., with 0'22 Sb, and steinmannite from PHbram,
Bohemia, with both arsenic and antimony.
Pyr. In the open tube gives sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal fuses, emits sul-
phurous fumes, coats the coal yellow near the assay (PbO) and white with a bluish border
at a distance (PbSO 3 chiefly), and yields a globule of metallic lead. Decomposed by strong
,
nitric acidwith the separation of some sulphur and the formation of lead sulphate.
Diff. Distinguished, except in very fine granular varieties, by its cubic cleavage; the
color and the high specific gravity are characteristic; also the blowpipe reactions.
Micro. In polished section shows white color with smooth surface usually showing
triangular pits. With HNO 3 blackens; with FeCl 3 becomes bright, iridescent.
Artif. Crystallized galena has been formed in numerous ways. In nature it is appar-
ently commonly formed by hydrochemical reactions perhaps similar to the following labora-
tory methods galena was produced by allowing a mixture of lead chloride, sodium bicar-
:
bonate and a solution of hydrogen sulphide to remain in a sealed tube for several months.
of lead chloride will produce galena; a solution of

Pyrite or marcasite heated with a solution
lead nitrate when heated with ammonium sulphydrate will yield galena. Galena is fre-
quently observed in furnace slags.
Obs. One of the most widely distributed of the metallic sulphides. Occurs in beds
and veins, both in crystalline and uncrystalline rocks. Very commonly found together with
zinc ores in connection with limestone rocks. It is often associated with pyrite, marcasite,
in a gangue of quartz, calcite, barite or fluorite,
sphalerite, chalcopyrite, arsenopyrite, etc.,
etc.; also with cerussite, anglesite,
and other salts of lead, which are frequent results of its
alteration. It is also common with gold, and in veins of silver ores.
A few of the notable localities at which galena has been found are as follows:
At Freiberg in Saxony in veins in gneiss; at Claustal and Neudorf, etc., in the Harz Mts.,
and at Pribram in Bohemia, it forms veins in clay slate; similarly in Styria; in limestone
at Bleiberg, Carinthia; in Silesia, Prussia; at Gonderbach near Laasphe, Westphalia; at
Schemnitz, Kapnik, etc., Hungary; Joachimstal, Bohemia; at Poullaouen and Huelgoet,
Brittany, France; in Moresnet district in Belgium; in province of Cagliari, Sardinia; in
Spain, in granite at Linares, also in Catalonia, Grenada, and elsewhere; in veins through the
graywacke of Leadhill, Scotland, and the contact hornstones of Cornwall; filling cavities in
the limestone of Derbyshire, Cumberland, and the northern districts of England, associated
with calcite, dolomite, fluorite, barite, witherite, calamine and sphalerite; in many places in
Australia, Chile, Bolivia, Peru, etc.
Extensive deposits of this ore in the United States exist in Missouri, Illinois, Iowa,
and Wisconsin. The ore occurs usually filling cavities or chambersin stratified limestone,
of different periods, from Silurian to Carboniferous. It is associated with sphalerite, smith-
sonite, calcite, pyrite, etc. The Missouri mines are situated in three districts in the southern
part of the state, (1) Southeastern, chiefly in St. Francis, Washington and Madison counties,
(2) Central, (3) Southwestern or Joplin district, the latter producing chiefly zinc. Other
districts in the upper Mississippi Valley are found in southwestern Wis., eastern Iowa and
northwestern 111. Also occurs in N. Y., at Rossie, St. Lawrence Co., in crystals with calcite
and chalcopyrite; in Pa., at Phcenixyille and elsewhere. In Col., at Leadville and Aspen,
there are productive mines of argentiferous galena, also at Georgetown, the San Juan dis-
trict and elsewhere. Mined for silver in the Cceur d'Alene region in Idaho; at the Park
City and Tintic districts in Utah.
The name galena is from the Latin galena (ya\i)t>rj), a name 'given to lead ore or the
dross from melted lead.
Use. The most important ore of lead and frequently a valuable ore of silver.
CUPROPLUMBITE. A massive mineral, from Chile, varying in characters from galena to
those of chalcocite and covellite; composition, Cu2 S.2PbS(?). Material classed here from
Butte, Mon., gave formula, 5Cu2 S.PbS. Alisonite is massive, deep indigo-blue quickly
tarnishing; corresponds to 3(?u2 S.PbS. From Mina Grande, Chile. Whether these and
similar minerals represent definite homogeneous compounds, or only ill-defined alteration-
products, is uncertain, and if so it is not clear whether they should be classed with isometric
galena or with orthorhombic chalcocite.
Altaite. Lead telluride, PbTe. Rarely in cubic or octahedral crystals, usually massive
with cubic cleavage. G. =
8 '16. Color tin-white, with yellowish tinge tarnishing to
bronze-yellow. From the Altai Mts., with hessite; Coquimbo, Chile; Cal., Col., British
Columbia. (
Clausthalite. Lead selenide, PbSe. Commonly in fine granular masses resembling

galena. Cleavage: cubic. G. = 7 '6-8 -8. Color lead-gray, somewhat bluish. From
Claustal, Harz Mts., Germany; Cacheuta mine, Mendoza River, Argentina. Tilkerodite
is a cobaltiferous variety.
Naumannite. Silver-lead telluride (Ag2,Pb)Se. In cubic crystals; also massive,

granular, in thin plates. Cleavage: cubic. G. = 8'0. Color and streak iron-black.
From Tilkerode in the Harz Mts , Germany.
ARGENTITE. Silver Glance.
Isometric. Crystals often octahedral, also cubic; often distorted, fre-
quently grouped in reticulated or arborescent forms; also filiform. Massive;
embedded; as a coating.
Cleavage: a(100), d(110) in traces. Fracture small subconchoidal. Per-
fectly sectile. H. = 2-2-5. G. = 7'20-7'36. Luster metallic. Color and
streak blackish lead-gray; streak
shining. Opaque.
Comp. Silver sulphide, AgaS = Sulphur 871 =
12-9, silver 100.
Pyr., etc. In the open tube gives off sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal fuses with
intumescence in O.F., emitting sulphurous fumes, and yielding a globule of silver.
Diff. Distinguished from other sulphides by being readily cut with a knife; also by
yielding metallic silver on charcoal.
Micro. In polished section shows grayish white color with a smooth surface which is
easily scratched. Turns brown with HNO
3 ,KCN and FeCl 3 ; with cone. HC1 tarnished
iridescent by fumes and blackened by acid.
Artif. Argentite is very easily prepared artificially and in numerous ways. Sulphur,
sulphur dioxide or hydrogen sulphide will act upon metallic silver or any of its common
compounds, either in solution or as solids, to. produce silver sulphide.
Obs. Found at Freiberg, etc., Saxony; Andreasberg, Harz Mts., Germany; Schemnitz,
Hungary: Joachimstal, Bohemia; Kongsberg, Norway; Sardinia. In South America at sil-
ver mines in Chile, Peru and Bolivia. In Mexico in the states of Chihuahua, Guanajuato,
etc. Important ore at Comstock Lode, Tonapah, etc., Nev.; Aspen, Leadville, etc. Col.
Found at Port Arthur on north shore of Lake Superior.
Use. An important ore of silver.
JALPAITE is a cupriferous argentite from Jalpa, Mexico.
Hessite. Silver telluride, Ag2Te. Isometric. Usually massive, compact or fine-
grained. Cleavage indistinct.Somewhat sectile. H. = 2*5-3. G. = 8 '31-8 '45. Color
between lead-gray and steel-gray. From the Altai Mts.; at Nagyag, Botes and Rezbdnya
in Transylvania; Chile near Arqueros, Coquimbo. In Mexico at San Sebastian, Jalisco.
In the United States, Calaveras Co., Cal.; Boulder Co., Col.; Utah. This species also
often contains gold and thus graduates toward petzite.
Petzite. (Ag,Au) 2 Te with Ag Au = 3 1. Massive; granular to compact. Slightly
: :
sectile to brittle H. = 2*5-3. G. = 8 '7-9 '02. Color steel-gray to iron-black tarnishing. ;
From Nagyag, Transylvania; Kalgoorlie, West Australia; Yale District, British Columbia;
Col.; Poverty Hill, Tuolumne Co., and elsewhere, Cal.
Aguilarite. Silver selenide, Ag2 S and Ag2 (S,Se). In skeleton dodecahedral crystals.
Sectile. G. = 7'586. Color iron-black. From Guanajuato, Mexico.
Berzelianite. Copper selenide, Cu 2 Se. In thin dendritic crusts and disseminated.
G. = 671. Color silver-white, tarnishing. From Skrikerum, Sweden; Lehrbach, in the
Harz Mts., Germany.
Lehrbachite. Selenide of lead amd mercury, PbSe with HgSe. Massive, granular.
G. = 7'8. Color lead-gray to iron-black. From Lehrbach, in the Harz Mts., Germany.
Eucairite. Cu 2 Se.Ag2 Se. Massive, granular. G. = 7-50. Color between silver-
white and lead-gray. From the Skirkerum copper mine, Sweden; also Chile.
Zorgite. Selenide of lead and copper in varying amounts. Perhaps a mixture. Mas-
sive, granular G. = 7-7 '5. Color dark or light lead-gray. From the Harz Mts., Germany;
Cacheuta, Argentina.
Crookesite. Selenide of copper and thallium, also silver (1-5 p. c.), (Cu,Tl,Ag) 2 Se.
Massive, compact. G. = 6*9. Luster metallic. Color lead-gray. From the mine of
Skirkerum, Sweden.
Umangite. CuSe.Cu 2 Se. Massive, fine-granular to compact. H. =3. G. = 5-620.
Color dark cherry-red. From La Rioja, Argentina.
2. Chalcocite Group
a :b : c
Chalcocite Cu2 S 0'5822 : 1 0'9701

Stromeyerite Ag2 S.Cu2 S 0'5822 : 1 0.9668
Sternbergite Ag2 S.Fe 4S 5 0-5832 : 1 0.8391
Frieseite 0-5970 : 1 0-7352
Acanthite Ag2 S 0-6886 : 1 0-9944
The species of the CHALCOCITE GROUP
crystallize in the orthorhombic
system with a prismatic angle approximating to 60; they are hence pseudo-
hexagonal in form, especially when twinned. The group is parallel to the
Galena Group, since Cu 2 S appears in isometric form in cuproplumbite and Ag2 S
also in argentite. Some authors include dyscrasite here (see p. 361).
CHALC0CITE. Copper Glance. Redruthite.

Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0'5822
: : : 1 0-9701.
110 A 110 = 60 25'. p, 001 A 111 = 62 35*'.
dd'f (021) A 021
= 125 28'. pp"
r
,
111 A 111 =53-
645 646 647
Crystals pseudo-hexagonal in angle, also by twinning (tw. pi. w(110)).

Often massive, structure granular to compact and impalpable.
Cleavage: m(110) indistinct; etching of orientated crystals develops cleav-
ages parallel to the three pinacoids. Fracture conchoidal. Rather sectile.
H. = 2-5-3. G. = 5-5-5-8. Luster metallic. Color and streak blackish
lead-gray, often tarnished blue or green, dull. Opaque.
Comp. Cuprous sulphide, Cu 2 S = Sulphur 20*2, copper 79'8
= 100.
Sometimes iron in small amount is present, also, silver.
Pyr., etc. In the open tube gives sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal melts to a
globule, which boils with spirting; the fine powder roasted at a low temperature on charcoal,
then heated in R.F., yields a globule of metallic copper. Soluble in'nitric acid.
Diff. Resembles argentite but much more brittle; bornite has a different color on
the fresh fracture and becomes magnetic B.B.
Micro. In polished section shows grayish or bluish white color with smooth surface.
With HNO 3 effervesces and etches, turning more or less blue, and develops cleavage direc-
tions; wibh KCN blackens and etches.
Artif . Chalcocite has been prepared artificially by heating the vapors of cuprous
chloride and hydrogen sulphide or by the treatment of cupric oxide with hydrogen sulphide;
also by the heating of cupric solutions with ammonium sulphocyanate in a sealed tube.
Obs. Chalcocite is an important ore of copper. It is usually secondary in its origin,
being found in the upper, enriched portions of copper veins. It is commonly associated with
chalcopyrite, bornite, pyrite, cuprite, malachite, azurite, etc.
Cornwall affords splendid crystals, especially the districts of Saint Just, Camborne, and
Redruth (redruthite). Occurs at Joachimstal, Bohemia; Tellemarken, Norway; compact
and massive varieties in Siberia; Saxony; Mte. Catini mines in Tuscany; Mexico; South
America.
In the United States, Bristol, Conn., has afforded large and brilliant crystals also found ;
at Simsbury and Cheshire; at Schuyler's mines, *N. J.; in Nev., in Washoe, Humboldt,
Churchill and Nye counties; at Clifton, Ariz.; in Mon., massive at Butte in great amounts.
Notable deposit at Kennecott, Copper River District, Alaska. Found in Canada, with
chalcopyrite and bornite at the Acton mines and elsewhere in the province of Quebec.
Use. An important ore of copper.
Stromeyerite. (Ag,Cu) ? S, or Ag2 S.Cu 2 S. Rarely in orthorhombic crystals, often
twinned. Commonly massive, compact. H. = 2 '5-3. G. = 6'15-6'3. Luster metallic.
Color and streak dark steel-gray. From the
Zmeinogorsk mine, Siberia; Silesia; also Chile,
Zacatecas, Mexico; Cobalt, Ontario; the Heintzelman mine in Ariz.; Col.
Chalmersite. Cu 2 S.Fe 4 S 5
. Orthorhombic. Axial ratio near that of chalcocite. In
thin elongated prisms vertically striated. Twins cdmmon with ra(110) as tw. pi. resem-
bling chalcocite. H. = 3'5. G. = 47. Color brass- to bronze-yellow. Strongly mag-
netic. From the Morro Velho gold mine, Minas Geraes, Brazil.
STERNBERGITE
Orthorhombic. Crystals tabular c(001).
|| Commonly in fan-like aggre-
gations; twins, tw. pi. ra(110). Cleavage :
c(001), highly perfect. Thin
laminae flexible, like tin-foil. H. = 1-1*5. G. = 4-215. Luster metallic.
Color pinchbeck-brown. Streak black. Opaque.
Comp. AgFe 2 S3 or Ag2 S.Fe 4 S 5 = Sulphur 30.4, silver 34.2, iron 35.4
= 100.
Obs. Occurs with pyrargyrite and stephanite at Joachimstal, Bohemia, and Johann-
georgenstadt, Saxony.
FRIESEITE. Near sternbergite. In thick tabular crystals. H. = 2 '5; G. = 4 '22.
.Color dark gray. Composition Ag2 Fe 5 S 8
. Occurs with marcasite at Joachimstal, Bohemia.
Acanthite. Silver sulphide, Ag2 S, like argentite. In slender prismatic crystals (or-
thorhornbic) . Sectile. G. = 7'2-7'3. Color iron-black. Occurs at Joachimstal, Bohemia;
also at Freiberg and Schneeberg, Saxony; at Rico, Col.
It has been suggested that acanthite may be only argentite in distorted isometric crys-
tals.
Sphalerite Group. RS. Isometric-tetrahedral

Sphalerite ZnS Onofrite Hg(S,Se)
Metacinnabarite HgS Alabandite MnS
Guadalcazarite (Hg,Zn)S Cotoradoite HgTe Massive
Tiemannite HgSe
The SPHALERITE GROUP embraces a number of sulphides, selenides, etc.,
of zinc, mercury, and manganese. These are isometric-tetrahedral in crystal-
lization. *
SPHALERITE, ZINC BLENDE or BLENDE. Black-Jack, Mock-Lead, False Galena.

Isometric-tetrahedral. Often in tetrahedrons. Twins common: tw. pi.
648 649 650
m= (311)
o(lll); twinning often repeated, sometimes as polysynthetic lamellae. Com-

monly massive cleavable, coarse to fine granular and compact; also foliated,
sometimes fibrous and radiated or plumose; also botryoidal and other imita-
tive shapes. Cryptocrystalline to amorphous, the latter sometimes as a
powder.
Cleavage: dodecahedral, highly perfect. Fracture conchoidal. Brittle.
H. = 3-5-4. G. = 3-9-4-1; 4-063 white, N. J. Luster resinous to adaman-
tine.. Color commonly yellow, brown, black; also red, green to white,
and
when pure nearly colorless. Streak brownish to light yellow and white.
Transparent to translucent. Refractive index high: n
= 2-3692.
Comp. Zinc sulphide, ZnS = Sulphur 33, zinc 67 = 100. Often con-
taining iron and manganese, and sometimes cadmium, mercury and rarely lead
and tin. Also sometimes contains traces of indium, gallium and thallium;
may be argentiferous and auriferous.
Var. 1. Ordinary. Containing little or no iron; from colorless white to yellowish
brown, sometimes green; G.
= 4-0-4 '1. The red or reddish brown transparent crystallizec
kinds are sometimes called ruby blende or ruby zinc. The massive cleavable forms are the
most common, vary ing from coarse to fine granular; also cryptocrystalline. Schalenblende
is a closely compact variety, of a pale liver-brown color, in concentric layers with reniform
surface; galena and marcasite are often interstratified.

The fibrous forms are chiefly
wurtzite. A soft white amorphous form of zinc sulphide occurs in Cherokee Co., Kan.
2. Ferriferous: Marmatite. Containing 10 p. c. or more of iron; dark-brown to black;
G. = S'9-4'05. The proportion of FeS to ZnS varies from 1 5 to 1 2, and the last ratio is
: :
that of the christophitc of Breithaupt, a brilliant black sphalerite from St. Christophe mine,
at Breitenbrunn, having G. = 3 '91-3 '923.
3. Cadmiferous: Pribramite, Przibramite. The amount of cadmium present in any
sphalerite thus far analyzed is less than 5 per cent.
Pyr., etc. Difficultly fusible. In the open tube sulphurous fumes, and generally
changes color. B.B. on charcoal, in R.F., gives a coating of zinc oxide, which is yellow while
hot and white after cooling. If cadmium is present a reddish brown coating of cadmium
oxide will form first. With cobalt solution the zinc oxide coating gives a green color when
heated in O.F. Most varieties, after roasting, give with borax a reaction for iron. Dissolves
in hydrochloric acid with evolution of hydrogen sulphide.
Diff. Varies widely in color and appearance, but distinguished by the resinous luster
in all but deep black varieties; usually exhibits distinct cleavage; nearly infusible B.B.;
yields a zinc oxide coating on charcoal.
Micro. In polished section shows a grav'color with smooth surface. Transparent,
yellow to brown with oblique illumination. /HiVith HNOs becomes slowly brown, often
showing crystal structure; with aqua regia effervesces and blackens.
Arttf .
Sphalerite has been artificially formed by heating zinc solutions in hydrogen
sulphide inclosed in a sealed tube; also by passing hydrogen sulphide over heated zinc
chloride.
Obs. Sphalerite is the most important ore of zinc. It occurs in both crystalline and
sedimentary rocks, being especially common in the limestones, where it often occurs as
beds of considerable size. It is frequently associated with galena, also with chalcopyrite,
pyrite, barite. fluorite, siderite, etc. Commonly found with silver ores. Of the two forms
of zinc sulphide, sphalerite is the form which crystallizes below 1020 while wurtzite is
deposited at higher temperatures. Zinc sulphide is deposited from alkaline solutions as
sphalerite; from acid solutions both forms are deposited, the amount of sphalerite increas-
ing with the temperature while that of wurtzite increases with the acidity of the solution.
Some of the chief localities for crystallized sphalerite are: Alston Moor in Cumberland
and at St. Agnes and elsewhere in Cornwall, England; Andreasberg and Neudorf in the
Harz Mts., Freiberg, and other localities in Saxony; Pfibram, and Schlackenwald in Bohe-
mia; Kapnik, Schemnitz and Felsobanya, in Hungary; Nagyag and Rodna in Transyl-
vania; the Binnental in Switzerland, isolated crystals of great beauty, yellow to brown, in
cavities of dolomite. A beautiful transparent variety yielding large cleavage masses is
.
brought from Picos de Europa, Santander, Spain, where it occurs in a brown limestone.
A similar variety with golden brown to green colors from Chivera mine, Cannanea, Mexico.
Large crystals from Ani copper mines, Ugo, Japan. Fibrous varieties (see wurtzite) are
obtained at Pribram; Geroldseck in Baden; The origi-
Raibl, Carinthia; also in Cornwall.
nal marmatite is from Marmato near
Popayan, Italy.
The important zinc ore districts of the United States in which sphalerite is the chief
zinc mineral are found in
Missouri, Colorado, Montana, Wisconsin, Idaho and Kansas,
borne localities noteworthy for the
specimens they have produced are as follows: In Conn.,
?in, i
y 'j
N * J- a white variety
'
(cleiophane) at Franklin Furance. In Pa., at the
Wheatley and Perkiomen lead mines, in crystals; near Friedensville, Lehigh Co., a grayish
waxy variety. In 111., near Rosiclare, with galena and calcite; at Marsden' diggings, near
Galena, m stalacites, with crystallized marcasite, and galena; at Warsaw. In Wis., at
Mineral Point, in fine crystals. In
Ohio, at Tiffin. In Mo., in beautiful crystallizations with
galena, marcasite and calcite at Joplin and other points in the southwestern part of the state;
deposits here occur in limestone and are of great extent and
value; also in adjoining
parts of Kan. In Col., at many places.
Named blende because, while often
resembling galena, it yielded no lead, the word in
German meaning blind or deceiving. Sphalerite is from cr0aXepds, treacherous.
use. ine most important ore of zinc.
Metacinnabarite. Mercuric sulphide, HgS.
In composition like cinnabar, but occurs
in black tetrahedral crystals; massive. G. = 77. In Cal., from the
also
Reddington
mine, Lake county, with cinnabar, quartz and marcasite; and from San Joaquin, Orange
Co. Found also at Idria in Austria.
Guadalcazarite. Near metacinnabarite, but contains zinc (up to 4 p. c.). Guadal-
cazar, Mexico. Probably a mixture.
Tiemannite. Mercuric selenide, HgSe. Isometric-tetrahedral. Commonly massive'
compact. G. = 8'19 Utah; 8'30-8'47 Claustal. Luster metallic. Color steel-gray to
blackish lead-gray. Streak nearly black. Occurs at Claustal in the Harz Mts.; Cal., in
the vicinity of Clear lake; MarysVale, Piute Co., Utah.
Onofrite. Hg(S,Se) with Se = 4'5 to 6'5 p. c. San Onofre, Mexico; Marysvale, Utah.
Coloradoite. Mercuric telluride, HgTe. Massive. Conchoidal fracture. H. = 2'5.
G. = 8'07 (Kalgoorlie). Color iron-black. Originally found sparingly in Colorado.
Rather abundant at the Kalgoorlie district, West Australia. Material called kalgoorlite
is a mixture of coloradoite and petzite.
*
Alabandite. Manganese sulphide, MnS. Isometric-tetrahedral; usually granular
massive. Cleavage: cubic, perfect. G. = 3 '95-4 '04. Luster submetallic. Color iron-
black. Streak green. Occurs at Nagyag, Transylvania; Kapnik, Hungary; Mexico;
Peru; crystallized and massive on Snake River, Summit county, Col.; Tombstone, Ariz.
Oldhamite. Calcium sulphide, CaS. In pale brown spherules with cubic cleavage in
the Busti meteorite. Also noted in Allegan meteorite.
PENTLANDITE.
Isometric.Massive, granular. Cleavage: octahedral. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. =
3*5^. G. = 5-0.
H. Luster metallic. Color light bronze-
yellow. Streak light bronze-brown. Opaque. Not magnetic.
Comp. A sulphide of iron and nickel, (Fe,Ni)S. In part, 2FeS.NiS
= Sulphur 36-0, iron 42-0, nickel 22-0 = 100.
Obs. Occurs with chalcopyrite near Lillehammer, Norway. Also from Sudbury,
Ontario, where it is intimately associated with nickeliferous pyrrhotite. It can be dis-
tinguished from the latter by its cleavage.
4. Cinnabar-Wurtzite-Millerite Group. Rhombohedral or Hexagonal

c
Cinnabar HgS Rhombohedral-Trapezohedral 1*1453
Covellite CuS 1-1466
c c
Greenockite CdS Hexagonal-Hemimorphic 0*8109 or 0*9364
"
Wurtzite ZnS 0*8175 0*9440
Millerite NiS Rhombohedral 0*9883

"
Niccolite NiAs 0*8194 0*9462
Breithauptite NiSb 0'8586 0*9915
Arite Ni(Sb,As)
Pyrrhotite FenSw, etc. Hexagonal 0*8701 1*0047
Troilite FeS
This fourth group among the monosulphides includes several subdivisions,
as shown in the scheme above, and the relations of the species are not in all
cases perfectly clear. It is to be noted that the sulphides of mercury and zinc,
already represented in the sphalerite group, appear here again.
If, as suggested by Groth, the prominent pyramids
of wurtzite, greenockite, etc., be
made pyramids of the second series (e.g., x = 1122, instead of 1011), then the values of c
in the second column are obtained, which correspond to millerite. The form of several of
these species, however, is only imperfectly known. A rhombohedral form for greenockite
has been suggested.
CINNABAR.
Rhombohedral-trapezohedral. Axis c = 11453.
rr' 1011 A 1011 = 87 23'.
u', 4045 A 4045 = 78 0'.
cr, 0001 A 1C11 = 52 54'.
or thick tabular in habit, rarely showing
Crystals usually rhombohedral
also acicular pris-
trapezohedral faces; in rhombohedral penetration twins;
matic. In crystalline incrustations, granular, massive; sometimes as an
earthy coating.
Cleavage: ra(1010) perfect. Fracture subconchoidal, uneven. Some-
what sectile. H.
2-2;5. = G..= 8-0-8-2. Luster adamantine, inclining to
metallic when dark-colored, and to dull in friable varieties. Color cochineal-
red, often inclining to brownish
red and lead-gray. Streak scarlet. Trans-
to opaque. Optically Indices: o> r = 2 -82, er = 3 '14.
+ . See Art.
parent
394.
Var. 1. Ordinary: either (a) crystallized; (b) massive, granular embedded or com-
in color; (c) earthy and bright red. Of a
pact; bright red to reddish brown
2. Hepatic.
fiver-brown color, with sometimes a brownish streak, occasionally slaty in structure, though
commonly granular or compact.
Mercuric sulphide, HgS = Sulphur 13'8, mercury 86'2 = 100.
Comp.
Usually impure from the admixture of clay, iron oxide, bitumen.
Pyr. In the closed tube alone a black sublimate of mercuric sulphide, but with sodium
carbonate one of metallic mercury. Carefully heated in the open tube gives sulphurous
fumes and metallic mercury, which condenses in minute globules on the cold walls of the
tube. B.B. on charcoal wholly volatile, but only when quite free from gangue.
Diff. Characterized by its color and vermilion streak, high specific gravity (reduced,
however, by the gangue usually present), softness; also by the blowpipe characters (e.g., in
the closed tube) . Resembles some varieties of hematite and cuprite.
Artif. Cinnabar has been produced artificially by several methods which are, how-
ever, in general modifications of the two following types: (1) When the black mercury sul-
phide formed byjthe direct union of mercury and sulphur is sublimed, cinnabar is the prod-
uct; (2) the black sulphide when treated with solutions of alkaline sulphides is converted
into cinnabar. In general cinnabar is formed under alkaline conditions and metacinnabarite
under acidic conditions.
Obs. Cinnabar is the only common mineral of mercury and with rare exceptions
constitutes the ore of the metal. It occurs in veins filling fissures and cavities in rocks which
are commonly sedimentary in character, being often slates, shales, sandstones or limestones.
While infrequently occurring in igneous rocks such rocks are commonly near by and are
thought to have been the source of the metal. Cinnabar is deposited from hot alkaline
solutions or as the result of solfataric action. Pyrite and marcasite, sulphides of copper,
stibnite, realgar, gold, etc., are associated minerals; calcite, quartz or opal, also barite,
fluorite, are gangue minerals; a bituminous mineral is common.
The most important European deposits are at Almaden in Spain, and at Idria in Car-
niola, where it is usually massive; also at Bakmut.in southern Russia. Crystallized at
Moschellandsberg and Wolfstein in the Palatinate and at the mines of Mt. Avala, near
Belgrade, Servia; at Ripa in Tuscany; at Als6sajo, Hungary; in the Ural Mts., the Ner-
chinsk region in Transbaikalia; in large twinned rhombohedrons from Province of Kwei-
chow, China; Japan; Mexico; Huancavelica, Peru; Chile.
In the United States forms extensive mines in Cal., the most important at New Almaden
and the vicinity, in Santa Clara Co.; also at Altoona, Trinity Co.; it is now forming by
solfataric action at Sulphur Bank, Cal., and Steamboat Springs, Nev.; has been found in
southern Utah; important deposits occur in Brewster Co., Texas; also mined in Nev. and
Ariz.
The name cinnabar is supposed to come from India, where it is applied to the red resin,
dragon's blood. The native cinnabar of Theophrastus is true cinnabar; he speaks of its
affording quicksilver. The Latin name of cinnabar, minium, is now given to red lead, a
substance which was early used for adulterating cinnabar, and so got at last the name.
Only comparatively few localities have furnished the mineral in quantity.
Use. The most important ore of mercury.
COVELLITE.
Monoclinic ? Pseudohexagonal through twinning. Crystals usually thin
hexagonal plates. Often massive.
CleaVage: basal, perfect. H.
= T5-2. G. = 4'6. Luster submetallic to
resinous. Color indigo-blue or darker. Often shows fine purple color when
moistened with water. Streak lead-gray to black. Opaque.
Comp. Cupric sulphide, CuS = Sulphur 33'6, copper 66'4 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Fusible at 2' 5 yielding sulphurous fumes. After roasting and moistening
with hydrochloric acid gives azure-blue flame. Much sulphur in C.T.
Macro. In polished section shows blue color with smooth surface. With KCNbe-
comes instantly deep violet which rubs off, leaving a yellow coating and rough surface.
Artif. Covellite has been prepared artificially by heating in sealed tubes a cupric
solution with ammonium sulphocyanate and by heating sphalerite in a solution of copper
sulphate.
Obs. Covellite is a mineral of secondary origin found in the enriched portions of copper
sulphide veins, associated with chalcocite, bornite, etc. Found in small amounts in many
places. Noteworthy localities are as follows: various places in Germany; in exceptional
crystals at Bor in Timoker Kreis, Servia; on the lavas of Vesuvius; in Chile; Province of
Rikuchu, Japan. In the United States at the Butte district, Mon.; Summitville, Col.;
La Sal district, Utah; Kennecott, Alaska, etc.
GREENOCKITE.
Hexagonal-hemimorphic. Rarely in hemimorphic crystals; also as a

coating.
Cleavage: a(1120) distinct, c(0001) imperfect. Fracture conchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 3-3'5. G. = 4'9-5*0. Luster adamantine to resinous. Color
honey-, citron-, or orange-yellow. Streak between
orange-yellow and brick-red. Nearly transparent.
Optically + co = 2-506, e = 2*529.
.
Comp. Cadmium sulphide, CdS = Sulphur 22'3,

cadmium 77-7 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube assumes a carmine-red color
white hot, fading to the original yellow on cooling. In the
open* tube gives sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal, either
alone or with soda, gives in R.F. a reddish brown coating.
Soluble in hydrochloric acid, affording hydrogen sulphide.
Artif. Greenockite has been prepared artificially in sev-
eral ways. Precipitated cadmium sulphide when fused with
potassium carbonate and sulphur produced greenockite crystals; also when cadmium
sulphate, calcium fluoride and barium sulphide were fused together. Greenockite is
formed when cadmium oxide is heated in sulphur vapor.
Obs. Occurs with prehnite at Bishopton, Renfrewshire, and elsewhere in Scotland.
At Pfibram in Bohemia, as a coating on sphalerite; similarly at other points; so too in the
United States near Friedensville, Pa., and in the zinc region of southwestern Mo.; in
Marion Co., Ark., it colors smithsonite bright yellow; noted at Franklin, N. J. Not un-
common as a furnace product.
Use. An ore of cadmium.
Wurtzite. Zinc sulphide, ZnS, like sphalerite, but in hemimorphic hexagonal crystals;
also fibrous and massive. G. = 3 '98. Color brownish black. See under sphalerite, p. 368,
for the conditions of its formation. From a silver-mine near Oruro in Bolivia; Portugal;
at Mies, Bohemia; Peru. In crystals with sphalerite and quartz at the "Original Butte"
mine, Butte, Mon. In crystals from Joplin, Mo.; from near Frisco, Beaver Co., Utah.
The massive fibrous forms of "Schalenblende" occur at Pfibram, Bohemia; Liskeard,
Cornwall, etc. Other forms, from Stolberg, Wiesloch, Altenberg, Germany, are in part
wurtzite, in part sphalerite.
MILLERITE. Capillary Pyrites.

Rhombohedral. Usually in very slender to capillary crystals, often in
delicate radiating groups; sometimes interwoven like a wad of hair. Also in
columnar tufted coatings, partly semi-globular and radiated. The rhombohe-
dron (0112) is a gliding plane and artificial twins may be formed.
Cleavage perfect parallel to (1011) and (0112). Fracture uneven. Brittle;
capillary crystals elastic. H. = 3-3 '5. G. = 5 '3-5 '65. Luster metallic.
Color brass-yellow, .inclining to bronze-yellow, with often a gray iridescent
tarnish. Streak greenish black.
Comp. Nickel sulphide, NiS = Sulphur 35'3, nickel 64-7 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the open tube sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal fuses to a globule.
When roasted, gives with borax and salt of phosphorus a violet bead in O.F., becoming
gray in R.F. from reduced metallic nickel. On charcoal in R.F. the roasted mineral gives
a coherent metallic mass, attractable by the magnet. Most varieties also show traces of
copper, cobalt, and iron with the fluxes.
Artif . Crystals of millerite have been formed artificially by treating under pressure a
solution of nickel sulphate with hydrogen sulphide.
Obs. Found at Joachimstal and Pfibram in Bohemia; in Germany at Johann-
georgenstadt and Freiberg, Saxony; Wissen, Prussia; in Cornwall, England.
In the United States, at Antwerp, N. Y., in cavities in hematite; in Lancaster Co., Pa.,
at the Gap mine, in thin velvety coatings of a radiated fibrous structure. With calci'te,
dolomite and fluorite, forming delicate tangled hair-like tufts, in geodes in limestone, often
penetrating the calcite crystals, at St. Louis, Mo.; similarly near Milwaukee, Wis. At
Orford, Quebec.
Use. An ore of nickel.
BEYRICHITE. NiS like millerite, but with lower specific gravity (4 '7). Laspeyres con-
siders all millerite as formed by paramorphism from beyrichite. Found in Westerwald,
Rhine-Prussia.
HAUCHECORNITE. Perhaps Ni(Bi,Sb,S). In tabular tetragonal crystals. H. = 5.
G. = 6*4. Color light bronze-yellow. From Hamm a. d. Sieg, Germany.
NICCOLITE. Copper Nickel.
Hexagonal. Crystals rare. Usually massive, structure nearly impal-
pable; also reniform, columnar; reticulated, arborescent. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 7'33-7'67. Luster metallic. Color pale cop-
per-red. Streak pale brownish black. Opaque.
Comp. Nickel arsenide, NiAs = Arsenic 56'1, nickel 43*9 = 100.
Usually contains a little iron and cobalt, also sulphur; sometimes part of the
arsenic is replaced by antimony, and then it graduates toward breithauptite.
The intermediate varieties have been called write.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube on intense ignition gives a faint sublimate of arsenic.
In the open tube a sublimate of arsenic trioxide, with a trace of sulphurous fumes, the
assay becoming yellowish green. On charcoal gives arsenical fumes and fuses to a globule,
which, treated with borax glass, affords, by successive oxidation, reactions for iron, cobalt,
and nickel; the antimonial varieties give also reactions for antimony. Soluble in aqua
regia.
Obs. Accompanies cobalt, silver and copper ores in Germany in the Saxon mines of
Annaberg, Schneeberg, Mansfield, etc.; also in Thuringia, Hesse, and in Styria; at Alle-
mont, Dauphine, at Balen in the Basses Pyrenees, France (arite) at the Ko mines in Nord-
;
mark, Sweden; occasionally in Cornwall, Chile: abundant at Mina de la Rioja, Oriocha,

Argentina. In the United States, sparingly at Franklin Furnace, N. J., Silver Cliff, Col.
In Canada, at Cobalt, Ontario.
Use. An ore of nickel.
TEMISKAMITE. Described as having composition Ni 4 As 3 has been shown to be a mix-
,
ture of niccolite, maucherite and a little cobaltite.

Breithauptite. Nickel antimonide, NiSb. Rarely in hexagonal crystals; usually
massive, arborescent, disseminated. G. = 7'54. Color light copper-fed. From Andreas-
berg in the Harz Mts., Germany.
PYRRHOTITE. Magnetic Pyrites.
Hexagonal, c= 0'8701. 652
cs, 0001 A 1011 = 45 8'.
cu, 0001 A 4041 _ =76 0'.

XC~
cy, 0001 A =
(20-0-20-3) 81 30*'.
gg
Twins: tw. pi. s(10ll), with vertical axes nearly at \
right angles (Fig. 418, p. 167). Distinct crystals rare,
commonly tabular; also acute pyramidal with faces
striated horizontally. Usually massive, with granular structure.
Parting: c(0001), sometimes distinct. Fracture uneven to subconchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 3 -5-4-5. G. = 4-58-4-64. Luster metallic. Color between
bronze-yellow and copper-red, and subject to speedy tarnish. Streak dark
grayish black. Magnetic, but varying much in intensity; sometimes possess-
ing polarity.
Comp. Ferrous sulphide containing variable amounts of dissolved
sulphur. Analyses show variation from FesSe to FeieSi?. Often also contains
nickel. Fe 7 S 8 = Sulphur 39'6, iron 60'4 = 100. (Cf. Art. 473, p. 323.)
Pyrrhotite differs from troilite in containing more or less of dissolved sulphur, while
troilite, occurring in meteorites where there is always an excess of iron, may form the pure
monosulphide.
Pyr., etc. Unchanged in the closed tube. In the open tube gives sulphurous fumes.
On charcoal in R.F. fuses to a black magnetic mass; in O.F. is converted into red oxide,
which with fluxes gives only an iron reaction when pure, but many varieties yield small
amounts of nickel and cobalt. Decomposed by hydrochloric acid, with evolution of hydro-
gen sulphide.
Diff. Distinguished by its peculiar reddish bronze color; also by its magnetic prop-
erties.
Micro. In polished section shows a cream color with a shiny and pitted surface.
With hot HC1 tarnishes quickly, giving bright colors, then blackens and dissolves; with aqua
regia effervesces, becomes iridescent in center of drop and brown at the edge.
Artif.
Pyrrhptite has been synthesized by the direct union of iron and sulphur and
also when pyrite is heated in an atmosphere of hydrogen sulphide at 550. Pyrrhotite
exists in two crystalline modifications, hexagonal at ordinary temperatures and ortho-
rhombic-above 138.
Obs. Occurs at Kongsberg, Modum, Kristiania, etc., in Norway; Falun, Sweden;
Andreasberg in the Harz Mts., Germany; Schneeberg, Saxony; Leoben and Lavantal,
Carinthia; Minas Geraes in Brazil, in large tabular crystals; the lavas of Vesuvius; Corn-
wall.
In North America, in Me., at Standish with andalusite; in Ver., at Stafford, etc. In
N. Y., near Diana, Lewis Co.; Orange Co.; at Tilly Foster mine, Brewsters. In Pa., at the
Gap mine, Lancaster Co., nickeliferous. In Tenn ., at Ducktown mines, abundant. In
Canada, in large veins at St. Jerome, Elizabethtown Ontario; large deposit mined for nickel
,
at Sudbury, Ontario.
Named from irvpporw, reddish.
Use. Often becomes a valuable ore of nickel.
Troilite. Ferrous sulphide, FeS, occurring in nodular masses and in thin veins in
many iron meteorites. G. = 4 -75-4*82. Color tombac-brown. Considered to be the end
member of the pyrrhotite series. See above.
Polydymite. A nickel sulphide, perhaps Ni4 S8 In octahedral crystals; frequently
.
twinned. G. = 4'54-4'81. Color gray. From Griinau, Westphalia, Germany.

Sychnodymite. Essentially (Co,Cu) 4 S 6 Isometric, in small steel-gray octahedrons.
.
From the Siegen district, Germany.

The following species are sometimes regarded as Sulpho-salts, namely,

Sulpho-ferrites, etc.
Peacock Ore. Purple Copper Ore. Variegated Copper Ore. Erubescite.
BORNITE.
Isometric. Habit cubic, faces often rough or curved. Twins: tw. pi.
o(lll), often penetration-twins. Crystals rare. Usually massive, structure
granular or compact.
Cleavage o (1 1 1) in traces. Fracture small conchoidal, uneven. Brittle.
:
,
H. = 3. G. = 4-9-5-4. Luster metallic. Color between copper-red and

pinchbeck-brown on fresh fracture, speedily iridescent from tarnish.
Streak
pale grayish black. Opaque.
Comp. A
sulphide of copper and iron. Cu5 FeS 4 Copper 63-3, iron .
11-1, sulphur 25-6=100.

The mineral often contains small amounts of chalcocite, etc., and therefore shows con-
siderable variation in its percentage composition, giving from 50 to 70 p. c. of copper and
15 to 6*5 p. c. of iron.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives a faint sublimate of sulphur. In the open tube
yields sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal fuses in R.F. to a brittle magnetic globule.
The roasted mineral gives with the fluxes the reactions of iron and copper, and with soda
a metallic globule. Soluble in nitric acid with separation of sulphur.
Diff. Distinguished (e.g., from chalcocite) by the peculiar reddish color on the fresh
fracture and by its brilliant tarnish; B.B. becomes strongly magnetic.
Micro. In polished section shows a pinkish brown color with smooth surface. With
HNO 3 becomes quickly golden-brown with effervescence.
Artif. Bornite has been obtained by fusing pyrite, copper and sulphur together; by
heating a mixture of cuprous, cupric and ferric oxides in hydrogen sulphide at 100 to 200.
Obs. Bornite is often a primary mineral of magmatic origin, being frequently found
in igneous rocks. It is also often a secondary mineral, occurring with chalcocite, etc., in
the enriched portions of copper sulphide veins. It is usually associated with other copper
ores, and is a valuable ore of copper. Crystalline varieties are found in Cornwall, called by
the miners "horse-flesh ore." Occurs massive at Ross Island, Killarney, Ireland; Monte
Catini, Tuscany; the Mansfeld district, Germany; in Norway, Sweden, Siberia, Silesia,
and Hungary. It is the principal copper ore at some Chilian mines; also common in Peru,
Bolivia, and Mexico.
In the United States, found at the copper mine in Bristol, Conn.; massive at Mahoopeny,
near Wilkesbarre, Pa.; in western Idaho; Butte, Mon., etc. A common ore in Canada, at
the Acton and other mines.
Named after the mineralogist Ignatius von Born (1742-1791).
Linnaeite. A sulphide of cobalt, Co 3 S4 = CqS.Co2 S3 analogous to the spinel group.
,
Also contains nickel (var. siegenite). Commonly in octahedrons; also massive. H. = 5 '5.
G. = 4*8-5. Color pale steel-gray, tarnishing copper-red. Occurs at Bastnaes, etc.,
Sweden; Mtisen, near Siegen, Prussia; at Siegen (siegenite), in octahedrons. In the
United States at Mine la Motte, Mo.; Mineral Hill, Md.
Daubreelite. An iron-chromium sulphide, FeS.Cr2 S 3 occurring with troilite in ,
some
meteoric irons. Color black. G. = 5 '01.
CUBANITE. Described as an iron-copper sulphide, perhaps CuFe 2 S4 = CuS.Fe 2 S 3 .
Examination of specimens from several localities show it to be a mixture of pyrite or pyrrho-

tite with chalcopyrite.
CARROLITE. A copper-c9balt sulphide, CuCo 2 S 4 = CuS.Co 2 S 3 Isometric; rarely in .
octahedrons. Usually massive. G. = 4*85. Color light steel-gray, with a faint reddish
hue. From Carroll Co., Md., near Finksburg.
Probably linnseite with intergrown bornite
and chalcopyrite.
Badenite. (Co,Ni,Fe) 2 (As,Bi) 3 Massive granular to fibrous. G. = 7'1. Metallic.
.
Color steel-gray. Fusible. From near

Badeni-Ungureni, Neguletzul valley, Roumania.
CHALCOPYRITE. Copper Pyrites. Yellow Copper Ore.
Tetragpnal-sphenoidal. Axis c = 0-98525.
pp
f
,
111 A 111 = 108 40'. PPl , 111 A 111 = 70 7i'. 001 A 101 = 44
ce, 34|'.
Crystals tetrahedral in aspect, the sphenoidal faces p(lll)

commonly
p/111) small and brilliant. Sometimes both forms
large, dull or oxidized;
equally developed, and then octahedral in form. Twins: (1) tw. pi. p(lll),
663 654 655 656
2(201), 8(513)
resembling spinel-twins (Fig. 417, p. 167); sometimes repeated as a five-

ling (Fig. 655). (2) Tw. pi. and comp.-face e(101) (Fig. 656,) often in
repeated twins. (3) Tw. pi. w(110), tw. axis c, complementary penetration
twins. Often massive, compact.
Cleavage: 2(201), sometimes
distinct; c(001), indistinct. Fracture un-
even. Brittle. H. = 3*5-4. G.
4-1-4-3. =
Luster metallic. Color brass-
yellow; often tarnished or iridescent. Streak greenish black. Opaque.
Comp. A
sulphide of copper and iron, CuFeS 2 =
Sulphur 35-0, cop-
per 34-5, iron 30 '5 = 100. Analyses often show variations from this formula,
often due to mechanical admixture of pyrite.
Sometimes auriferious and argentiferous; also contains traces of selenium and thallium.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube often decrepitates, and gives a sulphur sublimate, in the
open tube sulphurous fumes. On charcoal fuses to a magnetic globule; the residue mois-
tened with hydrochloric acid and then touched with blowpipe flame gives intense blue flame
color. Decomposed by nitric acid giving free sulphur and a green solution; ammonia in
excess changes the green color to a deep blue, and precipitates red ferric hydroxide.
Diff. Distinguished from pyrite by its inferior hardness and deeper yellow color.
Resembles gold when disseminated in minute grains in quartz, but differs in being brittle
and in having a black streak; further it is soluble in nitric acid.
Micro. In polished section shows a bright brass-yellow color with smooth surface.
With hot HNO 8 tarnishes and dissolves. Unaffected by KCN, differing from gold.
Artif. Chalcopyrite has been artificially prepared (1) by fusing pyrite and copper
sulphide together; (2) by gently heating cupric and ferric oxides in an atmosphere of hy-
drogen sulphide.
Obs. -^Chalcopyrite is the most common and important mineral containing copper.
It is commonly of primary origin and from it, by various alteration processes, many other
copper minerals are derived. It has repeatedly been observed as an original constituent of
igneous rocks and the ultimate source of the copper of our ore deposits is to be found in
rocks of this type. It occurs widely disseminated in metallic veins and nests in gneiss and
crystalline schists, also in serpentine rocks; often intimately associated with pyrite, also
with siderite, tetrahedrite, etc., sometimes with nickel and cobalt sulphides, pyrrhotite, etc.
Observed coated with tetrahedrite crystals in parallel position, also as a coating over the
latter. Frequently associated with sphalerite, its crystals often lying with parallel orienta-
tion upon the latter mineral.
Chalcopyrite is so widely distributed as an ore mineral that it is possible to mention
here only those occurrences which are exceptional either because of their size or because of
the quality of the minerals found in them.
It is the principal ore of copper at the Cornwall mines; there associated with cassiterite,
galena, bornite, chalcocite, tetrahedrite, sphalerite. At Falun, Sweden, it occurs in large
masses embedded in gneiss. At Rammelsberg, near Goslar in the Harz Mts., Germany, it
forms a bed in argillaceous schist; occurs with nickel and cobalt ores in the Kupferschiefer
of Mansfield. In Germany the Kurprinz mine at Freiberg affords well-defined crystals;
also Horhausen, Dillenburg, Neudorf, Musen. Common elsewhere as at Mte. Catini in
Tuscany; Rio Tin to, Spain; in New. South Wales; Chile; Japan, etc.
In the United States it is found in large crystals associated with quartz at Ellenville,
N. Y.; in exceptional crystals at the French Creek mines, Chester Co., Pa., associated with
pyrite, magnetite, etc.; in Mo., with sphalerite at Joplin; at various localities in Gilpin
and other counties in Col. The most important sulphide deposits of copper in many of
which chalcopyrite is the chief ore are found in the states of Arizona, Montana, Utah,
Alaska, Nevada, New Mexico, California, and Tennessee.
In Canada there are important copper deposits in British Columbia, Ontario arid Quebec,
Use. The most important ore of copper.
Named from XO\KOS, brass, and pyrites, by Henckel (1725).
D. Bisulphides, Diarsenides, etc.

The disulphides, diarsenides, etc., embrace two distinct groups. The
prominent metals included are the same in both, viz. iron, cobalt and nickel. :
The groups present, therefore, several cases of isodimorphism, as is shown in

the lists of species below. These sulphides are all relatively hard, H. = 5-6;
they hence strike fire with a steel, and this has given the familiar name pyrites
applied to most of them. The color varies between pale brass-yellow and
tin-white.
Pyrite Group. RS^RAs^RSb^ Isometric-pyritohedral

Pyrite FeS 2 Gersdorffite NiS 2 .NiAs 2
Arsenoferrite FeAs2 Corynite NiS 2 .Ni(As,Sb)j
Cobaltnickelpyrite (Co,Ni,Fe)S2 Ullmannite NiS 2 .NiSb 2 (isometric-
Hauerite MnS 2 tetartohedral)
[Smaltite CoAs2 also (Co,Ni)As2
, Sperrylite PtAs 2
|
Chloanthite NiAs2 also (Ni,Co)As 2
, Laurite RuS 2 ?
Cobaltite CoS 2 .CoAs 2
Marcasite Group. RS2 RAS2
, ,
etc. Orthorhombic
a c 110 A 110 101AI01
Marcasite FeS 2 07662 1-2342 74 55' 116 20'
Lollingite FeAs 2 0-6689 1-2331 67 33' 123 3'
Leucopyrite Fe 3 As 4
Arsenopyrite FeS 2 .FeAs2 0-6773 : 1 : 1-1882 68 13' 120 38'
Danaite (Fe,Co)S 2 (Fe,Co) As 2
.
Safflorite CoAs 2
Rammelsbergite NiAs 2
Glaucodot (Co,Fe)S 2 (Co,Fe) As 2
. 0-6942 : 1 : 1-1925 69 32' 119 35'
Alloclasite (Co,Fe) (As,Bi)S
Wolfachite NiS 2 .Ni(As,Sb) 2
The PYRITE GROUP includes, besides the compounds of
Fe, Co, Ni, also
others of the related metals Mn
and Pt. The crystallization is isometric-
pyntohedral.
The species of the MARCASITE GROUP crystallize in the orthorhombic
system with prismatic angles of about 70 and 110 and a prominent macro-
dome of about 60 and 120. Hence fivefold and sixfold
repeated twins are
common with several species, in the one case the prism and in the other the
macrodome named being the twinning-plane.
Pyrite Group
PYRITE. Iron Pyrites.
Isometric-pyritohedral. Cube and pyritohedron e(210) the common

forms, the faces of both often with striations edge a(100)/e(210), due to
||
oscillatory combination of these forms and tending to produce rounded faces;

pyritohedral faces also striated J_ to this edge; octahedron also common.
See Figs. 657-662, also Figs. 133-138, pp. 65, 66. Twins: tw. ax.= a crystal
axis, usually penetration-twins with parallel axes (Fig. 407, p. 166); rarely
contact-twins. Frequently massive, fine granular; sometimes subfibrous
radiated; reniform, globular, stalactitic.
657 658
660 661
Cleavage: a(100), o(lll), indistinct. Fracture conchoidal to uneven.

Brittle. H. = 6-6-5. G. = 4-95-5-10; 4-967 Traversella, 5-027 Elba. Lus-
ter metallic, splendent to glistening. Color a pale brass-yellow, nearly uni-
-
form. Streak greenish black or brownish black. Opaque.

Comp. Iron disulphide, FeS 2 = Sulphur 53'4, iron 46*6 = 100.
Nickel, cobalt, and thallium, and also copper in small quantities, sometimes replace part
of the iron, or else occur as mixtures; selenium is sometimes present in traces. Gold is
sometimes distributed invisibly through it, auriferous pyrite being an important source of
octahedral crystals from French Creek, Pa. (0'2
1
gold. Arsenic is rarely present, as in

p. c. As).
Pyr., etc. Easily fusible, (2'5-3). Becomes magnetic on heating and yields sulphur
dioxide. Gives nn abundant sublimate of sulphur in the closed tube. Insoluble in hydro-
chloric acid. The fine powder is completely soluble in strong nitric acid
.
Diff. Distinguished from chalcopyrite by its greater hardness and paler color; in
form and specific gravity different from marcasite, which has also a whiter color.
Micro. In polished section shows a cream color with a scratched and dull surface.
With HNOa effervesces slowly becoming faintly brown.
Alteration. Pyrite readily changes by oxidation to an iron sulphate or to the hy-
drated oxide, limonite, with sulphuric acid set free. Crystals of pyrite which have been
changed on their surfaces to limonite are common. This change may continue until tho
original mineral has completely disappeared. Large masses of pyrite lying near the surface
may be altered to a cellular mass of limonite tHe iron gossan of the miners while the
sulphuric acid set free travels downward and enters into various important reactions with
the unaltered minerals below. The alteration of pyrite to limonite may be continued until
hematite is formed.
Gbs. Experiments show that pyrite is formed in neutral or alkaline solutions and at
high temperatures. Marcasite, on the other hand, is deposited from acid solutions and
is stable only at temperatures below 450 C. These sulphides can be formed through the
of carbonaceous materials may also
action of hydrogen sulphide, although the reducing action
at times be of importance. Pyrite occurs in rocks of all ages and types, being most common
in the metamorphic and sedimentary rocks, but it is also frequently
found as a minor acces-
sory constituent of igneous rocks. When
disseminated in the rocks it usually occurs in
small crystals, cubes, octahedrons, pyritohedrons, etc., but in veins it may occur in crystals
or with a granular or radiating massive structure. At times it is in nodular or concre-
tionary forms.
the most common sulphide mineral.
Pyrite is very widespread in its occurrence, being
At times it is found in very large amounts and is mined for its sulphur content or because
it contains small amounts of some valuable metal, like copper, gold, etc. It is frequently
found in crystals with a fine luster. Some of ^the more notable localities for its occurrence
are given below.
Important commercial deposits of pyrite are found in Norway, Germany, France,
Italy, Spain and Portugal. The mines at Rio Tinto, Spain, are especially noteworthy.
The mineral has been mined in the United States in Louisa and Prince William Cos., Va.;
in St: Lawrence Co., N. Y.; at Davis, Mass., etc. The following localities furnish exception-
ally fine crystallized specimens: Cornwall, England;
Traversella and Brosso, Piedmont
Italy; Island of Elba; Ardennes, France, in distorted cubes; Minden, Prussia,
in inter-
penetration twins; in various localities in Bohemia, Hungary, Germany, Sweden, etc.; at
Firmeza, Cuba; at French Creek, Pa., in pyramids with apparently tetragonal or ortho-
rhombic symmetry; at Rossie and Scoharie, N. Y.; Roxbury, Conn.; Franklin, N. J.;
Gilpin Co. and at Leadville, Col.; Bin^ham Canyon, Utah.
The name pyrite is derived from irvp, fire, and alludes to the sparks formed when the
mineral is struck with a hammer; hence the early name pyrites, p. 376.
Use. Pyrite often carries small amounts of copper or gold and becomes an impor-
tant ore of these metals. It is also mined for its sulphur content which is used in the form of
sulphur dioxide (used in the preparation of wood pulp for manufacture into paper), as sul-
phuric acid (used for many purposes, especially in the purification of kerosene and in the
preparation of mineral fertilizers), and as the ferrous sulphate, copperas (used in dyeing, in
inks, as a wood preservative, and as a disinfectant).
Bravdite (Fe,Ni)S 2 Contains nearly 20 per cent nickel. In small grains and crystal
.
fragments, apparently octahedral. Pale yellow with a faint reddish tarnish. Occurs dis-
seminated through the vanadium ores at Minasragra, Peru.
Cobaltnickelpyrite.l Iron sulphide with about 20 per cent cobalt and nickel,
(Co,Ni,Fe)S 2 . In minute pyritohedral crystals. Steel-gray color. Gray-black streak.
H. = 5. G. = 4-716. Found. at Musen, Germany.
Arsenoferrite. Iron arsenide, probably FeAs 2 Isometric-pyritohedral.
. In small
crystals. Color dark brown. Fine splinters transparent with ruby-red color. From the
Binnental, Switzerland.
Hauerite. Manganese disulphide, MnS2 In octahedral or pyritohedral crystals;
.
also G. = 3'46. Color reddish brown or brownish black. From Kalinka,

massive.
Hungary; Raddusa, Catania, Sicily.
SMALTITE-CHLOANTHITE.
Isometric-pyritohedral. Commonly massive; in reticulated and other
imitative shapes.
Cleavage: o(lll) distinct; a (100) in traces. Fracture granular and
uneven. Brittle. H. = 5'5-6. G. = 6*4 to 6-6. Luster metallic. Color
.
tin-white, inclining, when massive, to steel-gray, sometimes iridescent, or

grayish from tarnish. Streak grayish black. Opaque.
Comp. SMALTITE is essentially cobalt diarsenide, CoAs2 = Arsenic
71;8, cobalt 28-2 = 100. CHLOANTHITE is nickel diarsenide, NiAs2 = Arsenic
71-9, nickel 28'1 = 100.
Cobalt and nickel are usually both
present, and thus these two species graduate into each
other, and no sharp line can be drawn between them. Iron is also in varying
amount the variety of chloanthite containing much iron has been calledpresent
;
chathamite. Fur-
ther sulphur is usually present, but in small
only
even approximately to the formula RAs 2 the ratio
quantities. Many analyses do not conform
rising
, from less than 1 2 to 1 2 '5 and
: :
nearly 1 3, thus showing a tendency toward skutterudite (RAs 3 ), perhaps due to either
:
molecular or mechanical mixture. examination of polished specimens shows

Microscopic
SULPHIDES, SELENJDES, TELLURIDES, ARSENIDES, ANTIMONIDES 379
probable zoning of different members of the group. Material known as keweenawite is a

mixture of smaltite, niccolite and domeykite.
Much that has been called smaltite is shown by the high specific gravity to belong to the
orthorhombic species safRorite.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives a sublimate of metallic arsenic; in the open
tube a white sublimate of arsenic trioxide, and sometimes traces of sulphur dioxide. B.B.
on charcoal gives a coating of As 2 O 3 the arsenical odor, and fuses to a globule, which,
,
treated with successive portions of borax-glass, affords reactions for iron, cobalt, and nickel.
Obs. Usually occurs in veins, accompanying ores of cobalt or nickel, and ores of
silver and copper; also, in some instances, with niccolite and arsenopyrite. Found at the
Saxon mines; Joachimstal, Bohemia; Wheal Sparnon, Cornwall; Riechelsdorf, Hesse,
Germany; Tunaberg, Sweden; Allemont, Dauphine, France; Cobalt, Ontario. In the
United States, at Chatham, Conn., the chathamite occurs in mica slate, with arsenopyrite
and niccolite; at Franklin Furnace, N. J.
Use. Ores of cobalt and nickel.
COBALTITE.
Isometric-pyrithohedral. Commonly in cubes, or pyritohedrons, or com-
binations resembling common forms of pyrite. Also granular massive to
compact.
Cleavage: cubic, rather perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 5-5.
G. = 6-6 -3. Luster metallic. Color silver-white, inclined to red; also steel-
gray, with a violet tinge, or grayish black when containing much iron. Streak
grayish black.
Comp. Sulpharsenide of cobalt, CoAsS or CoS 2 .CoAs2 = Sulphur 19'3,
arsenic 45'2, cobalt 35'5 = 100.
Iron is present, and in the variety ferrocobaltite in large amount.
Pyr., etc. Unaltered in the closed tube. In the open tube gives sulphurous fumes,
and a crystalline sublimate of arsenic trioxide. B.B. on charcoal gives off sulphur and
arsenic oxides, and fuses to a magnetic globule; with borax a cobalt-blue color. Soluble in
warm nitric acid, with the separation of sulphur.
Obs. Occurs at Tunaberg and Hakansbo in Sweden; at the Nordmark mines; also at
Skutterud in Norway; at Schladming, Styria; Siegen in Westphalia; Botallack mine, near
St. Just, in Cornwall; Khetri mines, Rajputana, India; Cobalt, Ontario, Canada.
Use. An ore of cobalt.
Gersdorffite. Sulpharsenide of nickel, NiAsS or NiS2 .NiAs2 Iron, and sometimes
.
cobalt, replace more or less of the nickel. Isometric-pyritohedral; usually massive.

H. = 5*5. G. = 5'6-6'2. Color silver-white to steel-gray. From Loos, Sweden; the
Harz Mts., and Lobenstein, Reuss-Schleiz, Germany; Schladming, Styria; Sudbury and
Algoma districts, Ontario; Rossland, British Columbia.
CORYNITE is near gersdorffite, but contains also antimony. Probably represents a mix-
ture. From Olsa, Carinthia.
Willyamite. CoS 2 .NiS 2 .CoSb2.NiSb2. Cleavage cubic. Color tin-white to steel-gr.ay.
Broken Hill mines, New South Wales.
Villamaninite. Sulphide of Cu,Ni with smaller amounts of Co,Fe. = 4'5. H
G. = 4-4-4-5. Color, iron-black. In irregular groups of cubo-octahedral crystals and in
radiating nodular masses. In dolomite from Carmenes district, near Villamanm, Prov.
Leon, Spain.
UUmannite. Sulphantimonide of nickel, NiSbS or NiS2 .NiSb 2 arsenic is usually
;
present in small amount. Isometric-tetartohedral; both pyritohedral and tetrahedral forms

occur. Usually massive, granular. H. = 5-5 '5. G. = 6 '2-6 7. Color steel-gray to
silver-white. Occurs in the mines of Siegen, Prussia; Lolling, Carinthia (tetrahedral);
Monte Narba, Sarrabus, Sardinia (pyritohedral).
KALLILITE. Ni(Sb,Bi)S or NiS 2 .Ni(Sb,Bi) 2 .
Massive, color light bluish gray. From
the Friedrich mine near Schonstein a. d. Sieg,
Germany.
Sperrylite. Platinum diarsenide, PtAs 2 In minute cubes, or cubo-octahedrons with
.
at times small pyritohedral or diploid faces. H. = 6-7. G. = 10*6. Luster metallic.

Color tin-white. Streak black. Found at the Vermillion mine, 22 miles west of Sudbury,
Ontario, Canada; also in Macon Co., N. C. Found associated with covellite at the Rambler
mine, Medicine Bow Mts., Wy. This is the only known native compound of platinum.
Laurite. Sulphide of ruthenium and osmium, probably essentially RuS 2 In minute .
octahedrons; in grains. H. = 7 '5. G. = 6 '99. Luster metallic. Color dark iron-black.

From the platinum washings of Borneo. Also reported from Oregon. ^
Skutterudite. Cobalt arsenide, CoAs 3 Isometric-pyritohedral. Also massive granu-
.
lar. Cleavage: a(100), distinct. H.

= 6. G. = 672-6 '86. Color between tin-white
and pale lead-gray. From Skutterud, Norway; the Turtmanntal, Switzerland.
NICKEL-SKUTTERUDITE. (Ni,Co,Fe)As 3 Massive, granular. Color gray.
. From near
Silver City,N. M.
BISMUTO-SMALTITE. Co(As,Bi) 3 A skutterudite containing bismuth.
. Color tin-
white. G. = 6 '92. Zschorlau, near Schneeberg, Saxony.
Marcasite Group
For the list of species and their relations, see p. 376.
MARCASITE. White iron pyrites.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 07662 : 1 : 1*2342.
mm"', 110 A 110 = 74 55'. II', Oil A Oil = 101 58'.
ee', 101 A 101 = 116 20'. cs, 001 A 111
= 63 46'.
Twins: tw. pi. m(110), sometimes in stellate fivelings (Fig. 436, p. 169,
cf. Fig. 664); also tw.
pi. e(101), less common,
the crystals crossing at
angles of nearly 60.
Crystals commonly
tabular || c(001), also
pyramidal;- the bra-
chydomes striated
edge 6(010) /c(001). Of-
ten massive; in stalac-
tites also globular, ren-
;
iform, and other imi-

Folkestone tative shapes.
Cleavage: m(110)
rather distinct; Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 6-6*5.
Z(Oll) in traces.
G = 4-85-4-90. Color pale bronze-yellow, deepening on
Luster metallic.
exposure. Streak grayish or brownish black. Opaque.
Comp. Iron like pyrite, FeS2 = Sulphur 53'4, iron 46'6
= 100. Arsenic is disulphide,
sometimes present in small amount.
Var- The varieties named depend mainly on state of crystallization. Radiated:
Radiated; also the simple crystals. Cockscomb Pyrite: Aggregations of flattened twin crys-
tals in crest-like forms. Spear Pyrite: Twin crystals, with re-entering angles a little like
the head of a spear in form. (Fig. 664.) Capillary: In capillary crystallizations.
Pyr., etc. Like pyrite. Very liable to decomposition, more so than pyrite.
Diff. Resembles pyrite, but has a lower specific gravity, and the color when fresh
e.g., after treatment with acid) is paler: when crystallized easily distinguished by the forms.
(e.
M ore subject to tarnish and final
decomposition than pyrite.
Marcasite can be distinguished chemically from pyrite by the following methods. When
both minerals are finely powdered and treated with a little concentrated nitric
acid, first
in the cold and later, after
vigorous action has ceased, by warming, it will be found that in
the case of pyrite the greater part of the
sulphur of the mineral has been oxidized and taken
into solution as sulphuric
acid, while in the case of marcasite most of the sulphur has sep-
arated in a free state. The Stokes
method, which can be used quantitatively to determine
the amounts of the two minerals in a the difference in their behavior
when boiled with a standard solution of ferric depends upon
mixture,
sulphate. In the case of pyrite about 52 per
cent the sulphur is oxidized to
pj sulphuric acid, while with marcasite only about 12 per cent
is oxidized.
tfr~^
HNO
With 3
polished sections shows a cream color with a scratched
slowly turns brown to black with effervescence.
and dull surface.
Alteration. Marcasite being relatively unstable is easily altered. Specimens often

disintegrate with the formation of ferrous sulphate and sulphuric acid. It also alters to
pyrite, limonite, etc.
Obs. Marcasite is a much more unstable compound than pyrite and is formed under
comparatively limited conditions. Experiments have shown that it is deposited at tem-
peratures below 450 C. and in acid solutions. The higher the temperature the more acid
must the solution contain. At ordinary temperatures marcasite may be deposited from
nearly neutral solutions. Marcasite is formed in general under surface conditions, while in
deep veins where the minerals are deposited from ascending hot and usually alkaline waters
only pyrite is found.
Marcasite occurs abundantly at Littmitz near Carlsbad, Bohemia. Found at several
localities in the Harz Mts., Germany. In its cockscomb form occurs at Tavistock in Devon-
shire and as Spear Pyrites in the chalk-marl between Folkestone and Dover, England. In
the United States a notable locality is at Galena, 111., where it occurs in stalactites with
concentric layers of sphalerite and galena. In fine crystals at Mineral Point, Wis.; in
crystals altered to limonite from Richland Co., Wis. Frequently associated with galena,
sphalerite and dolomite from the Joplin district, Mo.
The word marcasite, of Arabic or Moorish origin (and variously used by old writers, for
bismuth, antimony), was the name of common crystallized pyrite among miners and min-
eralogists in later centuries, until near the close of the eighteenth. It was first given to this
species by Haidinger in 1845.
Lb'llingite. Essentially iron diarsenide, FeAs2, but passing into FesAs4 (leucopyrite) ;
also tending toward arsenopyrite (FeAsS) and safflorite (CoAs2). Bismuth and antimony
are sometimes present. Usually masswe. H. = 5-5*5. G. = T'0-7'4 chiefly, also 6*8.
Luster metallic. Color between silver-white and steel-gray. Streak grayish black.
Occurs in the Lolling-Huttenberg district in Carinthia. Found also sparingly in a number
of other districts.
GEYERITE is near lollingite, but contains sulphur; from Geyer, Saxony.
ARSENOPYRITE, or MISPICKEL.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'6773 : 1 : 1-1882.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 68 13'.
101 A 101 120 38'.
uu', 014 A 014 = 33 5'.
nn f
,
012 A 012 = 61 26'.
Oil A Oil = 99 50'.
665
Twins: tw. pi. ra(110), sometimes repeated like marcasite (Figs. 667 and
437, p. 109); e(101) cruciform twins, also trillings (Figs. 432, 433, p. 169).
Crystals prismatic m(110) or flattened vertically by the oscillatory combina-
tion of brachydomes. Also columnar, straight, and divergent; granular, or
compact.
Cleavage: ra(110) rather distinct;
c(001) in faint traces. Fracture
uneven. Brittle. H. = G. = 5'9-6'2. Luster metallic. Color sil-
5*5-6.
ver-white, inclining to steel-gray. Streak dark grayish black. Opaque.
Comp. Sulpharsenide of iron, FeAsS or FeS 2 .FeAs2 = Arsenic 46 '0, sul-
phur 197, iron 34 -3 = 100. Part of the iron is sometimes replaced by cobalt,
as in the variety danaite (3 to 9 p. c. Co).
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube may give at first a little yellow sulphide of arsenic and
then a conspicuous sublimate of metallic arsenic which is of bright gray crystals near the
heated end and of a brilliant black amorphous deposit farther away. In the open tube gives
sulphurous fumes and a white sublimate of arsenic trioxide. B.B. on charcoal gives arsenical
fumes and a magnetic globule. Decomposed by nitric acid with the separation of sulphur.
Diff. Characterized by its hardness and "tin-white color; closely resembles some of
the sulphides and arsenides of cobalt and nickel, but identified, in most cases easily, by its
blowpipe characters. Lollingite does not give a decided sulphur reaction.
Micro. In polished sections shows a white color with scratched and dull surface.
With HNO 3 darkens quickly through iridescent colors to brown, showing rough surface.
Obs. Found principally in crystalline rocks, its usual mineral associates being ores of
silver, lead, and tin, also pyrite, chalcopyrite, and sphalerite. Abundant at Freiberg, etc.,
in Saxony; at Andreasberg, Harz Mts., Germany; Sala, Sweden; Skutterud, Norway; at
several points in Cornwall. In crystals in the Binnental, Switzerland. Crystals of danaite
from Sulitjelma, Finland.
In the United States, in N. H., in gneiss, at Franconia (danaite). In Conn., at Mine
Hill, Roxbury, with siderite. In crystals at Canton, Ga.; Leadville, Col. In twin crys-
tals in quartz ore veins at Deloro, Hastings Co., Ontario.
The name mispickel is an old German term of doubtful origin. Danaite is from J. Free-
man Dana of Boston (1793-1827), who made known the Franconia locality.
Use. An ore of arsenic.
Safflorite. Like smaltite, essentially cobalt diarsenide, CoAs 2 Form near that of .
arsenopyrite. Usually massive. H. = 4'5-5. G. = 6'9-7*3. Color tin-white, soon tar-

nishing. From Germany at Schneeberg, Saxony; Bieber, Hesse; Wittichen, Baden;
from Tunaberg, Sweden.
Rammelsbergite. Essentially nickel diarsenide, NiAs 2 like chloanthite. Crystals
,
resembling arsenopyrite; also massive. G. = 6'9-7'2. Color tin-white with tinge of red.
Occurs at Schneeberg, Saxony, and at Riechelsdorf, Hesse, Germany.
Sulpharsenide of cobalt and iron, (Co,Fe)AsS. In orthorhombic crystals
Glaucodot.
(axes, etc., p. 376). Also massive. H. = 5. G. = $-90-6'01. Luster metallic. Color
grayish tin-white. Occurs in the province of Huasco, Chile; at Hakansbo, Sweden.
Named from yXavnos, blue, because used for making smalt.
ALLOCLASITE. Probably glaucodot containing bismuth and other impurities. Com-
monly in columnar to hemispherical aggregates. H. = 4'5. G. =6'6. Color steel-gray.
From Orawitza, Hungary.
Wolfachite. Probably Ni(As,Sb)S, near corynite. In small crystals
resembling arse-
nopyrite; also columnar radiated. H. = 4 '5-5. G. = 6 "372. Color silver-white to tin-
white. From Wolfach, Baden, Germany.
Melonite. A nickel telluride, NiTe2 In indistinct granular and foliated particles.
.
Color reddish white, with metallic luster. From the Stanislaus

mine, Cal.; probably also
m Boulder Co., Col. Found at Worturpa, New South Wales.
The following species are tellurides of gold, silver, etc.

SYLVANITE. Graphic Tellurium.
_
Monoclinic. a b c = 1-6339 1 M265;
: : = 89 35'. Often in branch-
: :
ing arborescent forms resembling written characters; also bladed and

imper-
iectly columnar to granular.
Cleavage:6(010) perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 1-5-2.
~' ~ 7 '9-8 -3. Luster Color and streak pure steel-era v
metallic, brilliant.
to silver-white,
inclining to yellow.
Comp. Telluride of gold and silver (Au,Ag)Te 2 with Au
Ag = 1 1: : :
62-1, gold 24-5, silver 134 = 100.

this requires: Tellurium
.
Pyr *' e
, j?-
~
When a little of the powdered mineral is heated in concentrated sulphuric
da reddish violet color is given to the solution. When treated with nitric acid is decom-
rusty colored gold. A few drops of hydrochloric acid added to this
1 leaving residue of
SULPHO-SALTS 383
solution yield an abundant precipitate of silver chloride. In the open tube gives a white sub-
limate of tellurium dioxide which near the assay is gray; when treated with the blowpipe
flame the sublimate fuses to clear transparent drops. B.B. on charcoal fuses to a dark gray
globule, covering the coal with a white coating, which treated in R.F. disappears, giving a
bluish green color to the flame; after long blowing a yellow, malleable metallic globule is
obtained.
Obs. With gold, at OffenMnya, Transylvania; also at Nagyag. With calaverite at
Kalgoorlie district, West Australia. In CaL, Calaveras Co., at the Melones and Stanislaus
mines. In Boulder Co., at Cripple Creek and elsewhere in Col. Named from Transyl-
vania, where first found, and in allusion to sylvanium, one of the names at first proposed
for the metal tellurium.
Use. An ore of gold
Krennerite. A telluride of gold and silver (Au,Ag)Te 2 like sylyanite. In prismatic
crystals (orthorhombic), vertically striated. G. = 8 '353. Color silver-white to brass-
yellow. From Nagyag, Transylvania; Cripple Creek, Col.
Calaverite. A gold telluride, AuTe2 with small amounts of silver. Monoclmic. In
small lath-shaped crystals striated parallel to their length. Massive granular to crystalline.
H. = 2'5. G: = 9*043. Color silver-white with often a faint yellow tinge. Tests similar
to those for sylvanite with smaller amount of silver showing. Occurs with petzite at the
Stanislaus mine, Calaveras county, Cal. An important gold ore at the Cripple Creek dis-
trict, Col. Found elsewhere in that state. Occurs abundantly at Kalgoorlie, West
Australia.
Muthmannite. (Ag,Au)Te. In tabular crystals usually elongated in one direction.
One perfect cleavage parallel to elongation. H. = 2 '5. Color bright brass-yellow, on fresh
fracture gray-white. Probably from Nagyag, Transylvania. Empressite, AgTe, from the
Empress-Josephine mine, in the Kerber Creek District, Col., is probably a gold-free
variety. Massive. H. = 3-3 '5. G. = 7'5. Color pale bronze.
Nagyagite. A sulpho-telluride
of lead and gold; some analyses show also about 7 p. c.
of antimony which was probably due to impurities. Orthorhombic. Crystals tabular
|| 6(010); also granular massive, foliated. Cleavage: b perfect; flexible. H. = 1-1 '5.
G. = 6'85-7'2. Luster metallic, splendent. Streak and color blackish lead-gray. Opaque.
From Nagyag, Transylvania; and at Offenbanya. Reported] from Colorado and Tararu
Creek, New Zealand.
Oxysulphides
Here are included Kermesite, Sb 2 S 2 O, and Voltzite, Zn 5 S 4 0.
Kermesite. Pyrostibite. Antimony oxysulphide, Sb 2 S2 O or 2Sb 2 S 3 .Sb 2 O3 Mono- .
clinic. Usually in tufts of capillary crystals. Cleavage: a(100) perfect. H.

= 1-1 -5.
G. = 4'5-4'6. Luster adamantine. Color cherry-red.
Results from the alteration of stibnite. Occurs at Malaczka, Hungary; Braunsdorf,
Saxony: Allernont, Dauphine, France. At South Ham, Wolfe Co., Quebec, Canada; with
native antimony and stibnite at the Prince William mine, York Co., New Brunswick.
Named from kermes, a name given (from the Persian qurmizq, crimson) in the older
chemistry to red amorphous antimony trisulphide, often mixed with antimony trioxide.
Voltzite. Zinc oxysulphide, Zn 6 S 4 O or 4ZnS.ZnO. In implanted spherical globules.
H. = 4-4'5. G. = 3'66-3'80. Color dirty rose-red, yellowish. Occurs near Pontgibaud,
Puy-de-D6me, France; Joachimstal, Bohemia; Marienberg, Saxony, Germany.
IH. SULPHO-SALTS
I. Sulpharsenites, Sulphantimonites, Sulphobismuthites.
H. Sulpharsenates, Sulphostannates, etc.
Sulpharsenites, Sulphantimonites, etc.

I.
In these sulphosalts, as further explained on p. 320, sulphur takes the

place of the oxygen in the commoner and better understood oxygen acids (as
carbonic acid, H
2 C0 3 sulphuric acid,
,
H
4 S0 4 phosphoric acid, 3 PO 4 etc.).
,
H ,
The species included are salts of the sulpho-acids of trivalent arsenic,

antimony and bismuth. The most important acids are the ortho-acids,
H AsS
3 3, etc., and the meta-acids, H AsS
2 2, etc.; but H As S
4 2 5, etc., and a series
of others are included. The metals present as bases are chiefly copper, silver,
lead; also zinc, mercury, iron, rarely others (as nickel, cobalt} in small amount.
In view of the hypothetical character of many of the acids whose salts are here
represented, there is a certain advantage, for the sake of comparison, in writi ig
the composition after the dualistic method, RS.As2 S 3 2RS.As 2 S 3 etc. , ,
As a large part of the species here included are rare and hence to be men-
tioned but briefly, the classification can be only partially developed. The
divisions under the first and more important section of sulpharsenites, etc.,
with the prominent species under each, are as follows:
A. Acidic Division. RS :
(As,Sb,Bi) 2 S 3 = 1 :
3, 1 :
2, 2 :
3, 3 :
4, 4 : 5.
B. Meta- Division. RS :
(As,Sb,Bi) 2 S 3 = 1:1.
General formula: RAs 2 S 4 ,RSb2 S4,RBi2 S 4 .
;
:
Zinkenite Group
Zinkenite . PbS.Sb2 S 3 Emplectite CuoS.Bi 2 S 3
Sartorite PbS.As2 S 3 Chalcostibite Cu2 S.Sb2 S3 ,
etc.
Also
Miargyrite Ag2 S.Sb2 S3 Lorandite Tl 2 S.As 2 S 3
C. Intermediate Division. RS :
(As,Sb,Bi) 2 S 3 = 5 :
4, 3 :
2, 2 :
1, 5 : 2
Here belong
Plagionite 5PbS.4Sb2 S 3 .
Schirmerite 3(Ag2 ,Pb)S.2Bi 2 S 3 Klaprotholite 3Cu2 S.2Bi 2 S3 etc.

,
Jamesonite Group
Jamesonite 2PbS.Sb 2 S 3 Cosalite 2PbS.Bi 2 S 3 , etc.
Dufrenoysite 2PbS.As2 S 3
Also Freieslebenite 5(Ag2 ,Pb)S.2Sb2 S 3 5PbS.2Sb2 S 3
Boulangerite
D. Ortho- Division. RS =3:1
:
(As,Sb,Bi) 2 S 3
General formula: R AsS ,R SbS R As S ,R Sb S
3 3 3 3 ; 3 2 6 3 2 6, etc.
Bournonite Group
Bournonite 3(Cu 2 ,Pb)S.Sb 2 S 3 Wittichenite 3Cu2 S.Bi2 S 3
Seligmannite 3(Cu 2 ,Pb)S.As2 S 3 LiUianite 3PbS.Bi 2 S 3 etc.
,
Aikmite 3(Pb,Cu 2 )S.Bi 2 S 3
Pyrargyrite Group
Pyrargyrite 3Ag2 S.Sb2 S3 Proustite 3Ag2 S.As2 S3
E. Basic Division. RS =
:
(As,Sb,Bi) 2 S 3 4 :
1, 5 :
1, 6 :
1, 9 :
1, 12 : 1
Tetrahedrite Group
Tetrahedrite 4Cu2 S.Sb2 S3 Tennantite
SULPHO-SALTS 385
Jordanite Group
Jordanite 4PbS.As2 S 3 Meneghinite 4PbS.Sb 2 S 3
Also
Geocronite 5PbS.Sb2 S 3 Stephanite 5Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3
Kilbrickenite 6PbS.Sb 2 S 3 Beegerite 6PbS.Bi2 S 3
Polybasite Group
Polybasite 9Ag2 S.Sb2 S 3 Pearceite
Polyargyrite 12Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3
A. Acidic Division
Eichbergite. (Cu,Fe) 2 S.3(Bi,Sb) 2 S8. Color iron-gray. H. > 6. G. = 5*36. From

Eichberg, Semmering district, Austria.
Livingstonite. HgS.2Sb 2 S 3 . Resembles stibnite in form. Color lead-gray; streak
red. H. =2. G. = 4'81. From Huitzuco, Mexico.
Histrixite. 5CuFeS2.2Sb2S3.7Bi 2 S3. Orthorhombic. In radiating groups of prismatic
crystals. H. =
2. Color and streak steel-gray. Found at Ringville, Tasmania.
Chiviatite. 2PbS.3Bi 2 S 3 Foliated massive. Color lead-gray. From Chiviato, Peru.
.
Cuprobismutite. Probably 3Cu 2 S.4Bi 2 S 3 in part argentiferous. Resembles bismuth-

,
inite. G. = 6*3-67. From Hall valley, Park Co., Col.

Rezbanyite. 4PbS.5Bi 2 S3 .
Fine-granular, massive. Color lead-gray. G. = 6' 1-6*4.
From Rezbanya, Hungary.
B. Meta- Division. RS.As 2 S 3 RS.Sb2 S 3

, ,
etc.
Zinkenite Group. Orthorhombic

ZINKENITE. Zinckenite.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0'5575 1 0*6353. Crystals seldom dis-

: : : :
tinct sometimes in nearly hexagonal forms through twinning. Lateral faces

;
longitudinally striated. Also columnar, fibrous, massive.

Cleavage not distinct. Fracture slightly uneven. H. = 3-3*5. G. =
5*30-5*35- Luster metallic. Color and streak steel-gray. Opaque.
.
Comp. PbSb2 S 4 or PbS.Sb 2 S 3 = Sulphur 22*3, antimony 41*8, lead
35*9 = 100. Arsenic sometimes replaces part of the antimony.
Pyr., etc. Decrepitates and fuses very easily; in the closed tube gives a faint subli-
mate of sulphur, and antimony trisulphide. In the open tube sulphurous fumes and a
white sublimate of oxide of antimony; the arsenical variety gives also arsenical fumes. On
charcoal is almost entirely volatilized, giving a coating which on the outer edge is white,
and near the assay dark yellow; with soda in R.F. yields globules of lead. Soluble in hot
hydrochloric acid with evolution of hydrogen sulphide and separation of lead chloride on
cooling.
Obs. Occurs at Wolfsberg in the Harz Mts.; Kinzigtal, Baden; Val Sugana, Tyrol;
Oruro, Bolivia; Sevier County, Ark.; San Juan Co., Col.
Andorite. Ag2 S.2PbS.3Sb 2 S 3 In prismatic, Orthorhombic crystals. H. = 3-3'5.
.
G. = 5*5. Color dark gray to black. From Felsobanya, Hungary; Oruro, Bolivia.
Webnerite and Sundtite are identical with andorite.
Sartorite. PbS. As2 S 3 In slender, striated crystals, probably monoclinic. G. = 5'4.
.
Color dark lead-gray. Occurs in the dolomite of the Binnental.

Platynite. PbS.Bi 2 Se 3 Rhombohedral. Basal and rhombohedral cleavages. H. =
.
2-3. G. = 7'98. Color like graphite. Streak shining. In small lamellae in quartz at
Falun, Sweden.
Emplectite. Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 In thin striated prisms. G. = 6'3-6'5. Color grayish white

.
to tin-white. Occurs in quartz at Schwarzenberg and Annaberg, Saxony.

Chalcostibite. Cu 2 S.Sb 2 S 3
Wolfsbergite. In small aggregated prisms; also fine
.
granular, massive. G. = 475-5 '0. Color between lead-gray and iron-gray. From Wolfs-
berg in the Harz Mts.; from Huanchaca, Bolivia. Guejarite from Spain is the same species.
Galenobismutite. PbS.Bi 2 S 3 also with Ag,Cu. Crystalline columnar to compact.
;
Color lead-gray to tin-white. G. = b'9. From Nordmark, Sweden; Poughkeepsie Gulch,

Col. (alaskaite, argentiferous) material from Falun, Sweden, containing selenium has been
;
named weibullite and given the formula, 2PbS.Bi 4 S 3 Se 3 .
Berthierite. FeS.Sb 2 S 3 Fibrous massive, granular. G. = 4'0. Color dark steel-

.
gray. From Chazelles and Martouret, Auvergne, France; Charbes, Val de Ville, Alsace;
Braunsdorf, Saxony, etc.
Matildite. Ag2 S.Bi 2 S3 In slender, prismatic crystals. G. = 6-9. Color gray.
.
From Morochoca, Peru; Lake] City, Col. PLENARGYRITE, from Schapbach, Baden,
similar in composition, has been shown to be a mixture.
Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 In complex monoclinic crystals, also massive. H. = 2-2-5.

Miargyrite. .
G. =
5'1-5'30. Luster metallic-adamantine. Color iron-black to steel-gray, in thin splin-
ters deep blood-red. Streak cherry-red. From Braunsdorf, Saxony; Felsobanya and
Nagybanya, Hungary; Pfibram, Bohemia; Zacatecas, Mexico; Bolivia.
Smithite. Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 Monoclinic. Crystals resemble a flattened hexagonal pyra-
.
mid. One perfect cleavage. H. = T5^2. G. = 4'9. Color light red changing to orange-
red on exposure to light. Streak vermilion. From the Binnental, Switzerland.
Trechmanite. Ag2 S.As2 S 3 Rhombohedral, tetartohedral. Crystals minute with pris-
.
matic habit. Good rhombohedral cleavage. H. = T5-2. Color and streak scarlet-
vermilion. From the Binnental, Switzerland.
Lorandite. A
sulpharsenide of thallium, TlAsS2 Monoclinic. Color cochineal-red.
.
From Allchar, Macedonia; Rambler mine, Encampment, Wy.

Vrbaite. TlAs 2 SbS 5 Orthorhombic.
. H. = 3'5. G. = 5'3. Color gray-black to
dark red in thin splinters. Streak light red. From Allchar, Macedonia.
Hutchinsonite. (Tl,Ag,Cu) 2 S.As2 S 3 +PbS.As 2 S 3 (?). Orthorhombic. In flattened rhom-
bic prisms. Cleavage o(100) good. H. = 1-5-2. G. = 4'6. Color scarlet to red. From
the Binnental, Switzerland.
Baumhauerite. 4PbS.3As 2 S 3 . Monoclinic. In complex crystals with varied habit
One perfect cleavage. H. = 3. G. = 3 -3. Metallic. Color lead to steel-gray. From
the Binnental, Switzerland.
Schirmerite. 3(Ag2 ,Pb)S.2Bi 2 S 3 Massive, granular. G. = 674. .

Color lead-gray.
Treasury lode, Park Co., Col.
KLAPROTHOLITE. 3Cu2 S.Bi 2 S 3 In furrowed prismatic crystals.
.
G. = 4'6. Color
steel-gray. Wittichen, Baden. Probably a mixture and not a definite species.
Rathite. 3PbS.2As 2 S 3 Orthorhombic, in prismatic crystals.
.
H. = 3. G. = 5'41. From the Binnental, Switzerland. Wiltshireite is Cleavage,

the same
6(010).
species.
Jamesonite Group. 2RS.As2S 3 2RS.Sb 2 S 3

, ,
etc. Monoclinic
JAMESONITE.
Monoclinic. Axes: a b c = 0'8316 1 0-4260.
: = 88 36'. mm'"
: : :
110 A 110 = 79 Q 28'. In acicular crystals; common in capillary forms; also

fibrous massive, parallel or
divergent; compact massive.
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Fracture uneven to conchoidal. Brittle.
- 2-3- G. = 5-5-6-0. Luster metallic. Color
steel-gray to dark lead-
gray. Streak grayish black. Opaque.
Comp. Pb2 Sb2 S 5 or 2PbS.Sb2 S 3 = Sulphur lead 197, antimony 29'5,
SULPHO-SALTS 387
50-8 = 100. Most varieties show a little iron (1 to 3 p. c.), and some contain
also silver, copper, and zinc.
It has been suggested that the iron shown by the analyses is an integral part of the
mineral and that the formula should be 4PbS.FeS.3Sb 2 S3 and that the usual jamesonite for-
mula, 2PbS.Sb2S3, belongs to the material commonly called plumosite.
Pyr. Same as for zinkenite, p. 385.
Obs. Occurs principally in Cornwall; also in Siberia; Hungary; at Valentia d* Al-
cantara in Spain; at the antimony mines in Sevier Co., Ark.; from Bolivia. Named after
Prof. Robert Jameson of Edinburgh (1774-1854).
The feather ore occurs at Wolfsberg, etc., in the Harz Mts.; Freiberg, Germany; Schem-
nitz, Hungary; in Tuscany, near Bottino, Italy. These so-called feather ores may be di-
vided into flexible and brittle, all the latter being referred to jamesonite and the former to
either zinkenite, plumosite, boulangerite, or meneghinite.
Warrenite has been shown to probably be a mixture of jamesonite and zinkenite.
Dufrenoysite. 2PbS.As 2 S 3 In highly modified crystals; also massive. Cleavage-
.
6(010) perfect. H. =3. G. = 5'55-5'57. Color blackish lead-gray. From the Bin-
nental, Switzerland, in dolomite.
Cosalite. 2PbS.Bi 2 S 3 Usually massive, fibrous or radiated. G. = 6'39-675. Color
.
lead- or steel-gray. Cosala, Province of Sinaloa, Mexico; Bjelke mine (bjelkite), Nord-
mark, Sweden; Deer Park, Wash.; Col.
Kobellite. 2PbS.(Bi,Sb) 2 S 3 Fibrous radiated or granular massive.

. G. = 6'3. Color
lead-gray to steel-gray. From Hvena, Sweden; Ouray, Col.
BRONGNIARDITE. Lead, silver, antimony sulphide. Shown in some cases to be a
mixture. A doubtful species.
Plagionite. Heteromorphite. Semseyite. Lead, antimony sulphides ranging from
5PbS4.Sb 2 S 3 to 9PbS.4Sb 2 S 3 Perhaps a morphotropic series with the vertical crystallo-
.
graphic axis increasing in length with increase in the percentage of lead. Monoclinio.
G. = 5'4-5'9. Plagionite from Wolfsberg, Harz Mts.; heteromorphite from Arnsberg,
Westphalia; semseyite from Felsobanya, Hungary and Wolfsberg. Liveingite from the
Binnental, Switzerland, is said to have the same composition as plagionite. Bismuto-
plagionite, a variety containing bismuth instead of antimony. From Wickes, Jefferson
Co., Mon.
SCHAPBACHITE. A lead, silver, bismuth sulphide. From Schapbach, Baden. Shown to
be a mixture.
FREIESLEBENITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a b c = 0-5871
: 1 :
0-9277; ft = 87 46'. Habit
: :
prismatic. G. = 6-2-6-4. Luster metallic. Color and streak light steel-

gray inclining to silver-white, also to blackish lead-gray.
Comp. (Pb,Ag2 ) 5 Sb 4 Sii or 5(Pb,Ag2 )S.2Sb 2 S 3 .
Obs. From Freiberg, Saxony; Kapnik and Felsobanya, Hungary; Hiendelencina,

Spain; also from the Augusta Mt., Gunnison Co., Col.
Diaphorite. Like freieslebenite in composition but orthorhombic in form. G. = 5'9.
From Pfibram, Bohemia; Lake Chelan district, Wash.
BOULANGERITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b : : c = 0*5527 : 1 : 0*7478. In prismatic or tabu-
lar crystals or crystalline plumose masses; granular, compact. H. = 2*5-3.
G. = 6-18. Luster metallic. Color bluish lead-gray; often covered with
yellow spots from oxidation. Opaque.
Comp. Pb 5Sb 4 Sn or 5PbS.2Sh>S 3 = Sulphur 18'9, antimony 25*7, lead
55-4 = 100.
Pyr. Same as for zinkenite, p. 385.
Obs. In good crystals from Sala, Sweden; Molieres, Depart, du Gard, France; at
Nerchinsk, Siberia; Wolfsberg in the Harz Mts. Pfibram, Bohemia; near Bottino, Tus-
cany, Italy. Echo District, Union county, Nev.
Embrithite and plumbostib are from Nerchinsk; they correspond nearly to 10PbS.3Sb 2 Sj,
but the material analyzed may not have been quite pure.
Mullanite. 5PbS.2Sb 2 S 3 In slender orthorhombic (?) prisms. Cleavage, c(001) and

.
brownish black H. = 3'5. = 6'35. Found at G

6(010). Color, steel-gray. Streak,
near Superior, Mon.
Gold Hunter mine, near Mullan, Idaho, and at Iron Mountain mine,
D. Ortho- Division. 3RS.As2 S 3 3RS.Sb2 S 3

, ,
etc.
Bournonite Group. Orthorhombic. Prismatic angle 86 to 87
BOURNONITE. Wheel Ore.
Orthorhombic. Axes: a b : : c = 0-9380 1 : 0-8969.

mm"' 110 A 110 = 86 C 20' en, 001 A Oil = 41 53'
001 A 101 = 43 43' cu, 001 A 112 = 33 15'
co,
Twins: tw. pi. ra(110),
669 often repeated, forming
cruciform and wheel shaped
crystals. Also massive;
granular, compact.
Cleavage: 6(010) imper-
fect; a(100), c(001) less
distinct. Fracture sub-
conchoidal to uneven.
Harz Rather brittle. H. = 2-5-3.
Kapnik
G. = 5-7-5-9. Lustermetal-
lie, brilliant. and streak steel-gray, inclining to blackish lead-
Color
gray or iron-black. Opaque.
Comp. (Pb,Cu2 ) 3 Sb 2 S 6 or 3(Pb,Cu 2 )S.Sb2 S 3 = PbCuSbS 3 (if Pb Cu 2 :
= 2:1) = Sulphur 19'8, antimony 247, lead 42*5, copper 13*0 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates, and gives a dark red sublimate. In the
open tube gives sulphur dioxide, and a white sublimate of oxide of antimony. B.B. on char-
coal fuses easily, and at first coats the coal white; continued blowing gives a yellow coating
of lead oxide; the residue, treated with soda in R.F., gives a globule of copper. Decom-
posed by a blue solution, and leaving a residue of sulphur, and a white
nitric acid, affording
powder containing antimony and lead.
Obs. From Neudorf in the Harz Mts.; also Wolfsberg, Claustal, and Andreasberg;
Pfibram, Bohemia; Kapnik and Nagybanya, Hungary; Horhausen, Prussia; Liskeard,
Cornwall.
In the United States at the Boggs mine, Yavapai Co., Ariz.; also Montgomery Co., Ark.;
reported from San Juan Co., Col; Austin, Ney. In Canada, in the township of Marmora,
Hastings Co., and Darling, Lanark Co., Ontario.
Seligmannite. (Pb,Cu2) 3 As2 S6 isomorphous with bournonite. Orthorhombic. a b c : :
= 0*9233 1 0'8734. In small complex crystals. Commonly twinned with m(110) as

: :
tw. pi. Color lead-gray. Chocolate streak. H. = 3. Found at Lengenbach quarry,

Binnental, Switzerland; reported from Emery, Mon.
Aikinite. 2PbS.Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 Acicular crystals; also massive. G. = 6'l-6'8. Color
.
blackish lead-gray. From Berezov near Ekaterinburg, Ural Mts.

Wittichenite.3Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 Rarely in crystals resembling bournonite; also massive.
.
G. = Color steel-gray or tin-white. Wittichen, Baden, etc.

4*5.
Stylotypite. 3(Cu 2 ,Ag2 ,Fe)S.Sb 2 S 3 In orthorhombic crystals, in cruciform twins like

.
bournonite. G. = 47-5'2. Color iron-black. Copiapo, Chile; Peru.
Lfflianite. 3PbS.BiSbS 3 and 3PbS.Bi 2 S 3 Orthorhombic. Crystalline and massive.

.
Color steel-gray. Gladhammar, Sweden; Leadville, Col. (argentiferous).

Guitermanite. Perhaps 3PbS.As 2 S 3 Massive, compact. G. = 5-94. Color bluish
.
gray. Zufii mine, Silvertqn, Col.

Lengenbachite. 7[Pb,(Ag,Cu) 2 ]S.2As 2 S 3 Probably triclinic. In thin blade-shaped
.
crystals. One perfect cleavage. Soft. G. = 5*8. Color steel-gray. Streak black.
From the Lengenbach quarry, Binnental, Switzerland.
SULPHO-SALTS 389
TAPALPITE. A
sulpho-telluride of bismuth and silver, perhaps 3Ag2(S,Te).Bii(S,Te) 8 .
Study of polished specimen shows it to be a mixture of unknown components. Massive,
granular. G. = 7 '80. Sierra de Tapalpa, Jalisco, Mexico.
Pyrargyrite Group. Rhombohedral-hemimorphic

PYRARGYRITE. Ruby Silver Ore. Dark Red Silver Ore.
Rhombohedral-hemimorphic. Axis: c = 07892; 0001 A 1011 = 4220J.'

ee', 0112 A 1012
= 42 5' tw', 2131 A 2311 = 74 25'
rr
f
,
=
1011 A 1101 71 22' yyv, 2131 A 3121 = 35 12'
Crystals commonly prismatic. 670 671

Twins: tw. pi. a(1120), very com-
mon, the c axes parallel;
also common. Also massive, compact.
Cleavage: r(1011) distinct; e(0112)
imperfect. Fracture conchoidal to
uneven. Brittle. H. = 2-5. G. = 577-
5*86; 5-85 if pure. Luster metallic-
adamantine. Color black to grayish
black, by transmitted light deep red.
Streak purplish red. Nearly opaque,
'<cd^r=J'
but transparent in very thin splinters.
Optically
- Refractive
.
indices, co = 3'084, e
= 2-881.
Comp. Ag3 SbS 3 or 3Ag2 S.Sb? S 3 = Sulphur 17'8, antimony 22'3, silver
59'9 = 100. Some varieties contain small amounts of arsenic.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube fuses and gives a reddish sublimate of antimony oxysul-
phide; in the open tube sulphurous fumes and a white sublimate of oxide of antimony.
B.B. on charcoal fuses with spirting to a globule, coats the coal white, and the assay is
conyerted into silver sulphide, which, treated in O.F., or with soda in R.F.. gives a globule
of silver. In case arsenic is present it may be detected by fusing the pulverized mineral
with soda on charcoal in R.F. Decomposed by nitric acid with the separation of sulphur
and of
antimony trioxide.
Obs. Occurs at Andreasberg in the Harz Mts.; Freiberg, Saxony; Pfibram and
Joachimstal, Bohemia; Schemnitz and Nagybanya, Hungary; Kongsberg, Norway;
Gaudalcanal, Spain; in Cornwall. In Mexico it is worked at Guanajuato and elsewhere as
an ore of silver. In Chile with proustite at Chanarcillo near Copiapo.
In Col., not uncommon; thus in Ruby district, Gunnison Co.; with sphalerite in
Sneffle's district, Ouray Co., etc. In Nev., at Washoe in Daney Mine; about Austin,
Reese river; at Poorman lode, Idaho, in masses with cerargyrite. In N. M., Utah, and
Ariz, with silver ores at various points. At Cobalt, Ontario.
Named from wvp, fire, and apyvpos, silver, in allusion to the color.
PROUSTITE. Ruby Silver Ore. Light Red Silver Ore.
Rhombuhedral-hemimorphic. Axis c = 0'8039;_ 0001 _A 1011 = 42 52'.
ee', 0112 A 1012
= 42 46' w', 2131 A 2311
= 74 39'
rr', 1011 A 1101
= 72 12' Wv, 2131 A 3121 = 35 18'
Crystals often acute rhombohedral or scalenohedral. Twins: tw. pi.

w(1014) and r(10HX Also massive, compact.
Cleavage: r(1011) distinct. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle.
H. = 2-2-5. = 5-57-5*64; 5'57ifpure. Luster admantine. Color scarlet-
G.
vermilion; streak same, also inclined to aurora-red. Transparent to trans-
lucent. co = 3'084. e = 2-881.
Optically negative,
Comp. AgsAsSa or 3Ag2 S.As2 S 3 = Sulphur 19'4, arsenic 15'2, silver
65*4 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube fuses easily, and gives a faint sublimate of arsenic tri-
sulphide; in the open tube sulphurous fumes and a white crystalline sublimate of arsenic
trioxide. B.B. on charcoal fuses and emits odors of sulphur and arsenic; with soda in
R.F. gives a globule of silver. Decomposed by nitric acid, with separation of sulphur.
Obs. Occurs at Freiberg, Johanngeorgenstadt, etc., in Saxony; Joachimstal, Bohe-
mia; in France at Chalanches in Dauphine and Markirch, Alsace; Guadalcanal in Spain;
Sarrabus, Sardinia; in Mexico; Peru; Chile, at Chanarcillo in magnificent crystallizations.
In Col., Ruby distr., Gunnison Co.; Sheridan mine, San Miguel Co.; Yankee Girl
mine, Ouray Co.; Montezuma, Summit Co. In Ariz., with silver ores at various points.
In Nev., in the Daney mine, and in Comstock lode, rare; Idaho, at the Poorman lode.
Named after the French chemist, J. L. Proust (1755-1826).
Sanguinite. Near proustite in composition. In glittering scales, hexagonal or rhom-
bohedral. From Chanarcillo, Chile.
FALKENHAYNITE. Perhaps 3Cu2S.Sb 2 S 3 Massive, resembling galena. From Joachims-
.
tal, Bohemia. Perhaps identical with stylotypite.

Pyrostilpnite. Like pyrargyrite, 3Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 In tufts of slender (monoclinic) crys-
.
tals. G. = 4'25. Color hyacinth-red. From Andreasberg in the Harz Mts.; Freiberg,
Saxony; Pribram, Bohemia; Heazlewood, Tasmania.
Samsonite. 2Ag2 S.MnS.Sb2S 3 Monoclinic. Habit prismatic. Color, steel-black, red
.
in -transmitted light. Occurs in Samson vein of Andreasberg silver mines, Harz Mts.,
*
Germany.
E. Basic Division
Tetrahedrite Group. Isometric-tetrahedral
TETRAHEDRITE. Gray Copper Ore. Fahlerz.

Isometric-tetrahedral. Habit tetrahedral. Twins: tw. pi. .0(111); also
with parallel axes (Fig. 392, p. 163, Fig. 408, p. 166). Also massive; granular,
coarse or fine; compact.
672 673 674
Cleavage none. Fracture subconchoidal to uneven. Rather brittle.

H- = 3-4. G. = 4-4-5'L Luster metallic, often splendent. Color between
flint-gray and iron-black. Streak like color, sometimes inclining to brown
and cherry-red. Opaque; sometimes subtranslucent (cherry-red) in very thin
splinters.
Comp. Essentially Cu8 Sb2 S 7 or 4Cu2 S.Sb2 S3 = Sulphur 23-1, anti-
mony 24-8, copper 52'1 = 100.
Antimony and arsenic are usually both present and thus tetrahedrite
graduates into the
allied species tennantite. There are also varieties containing bismuth, chiefly at the arsen-
ical end of the
rarely selenium.
series, Further the copper may be replaced by iron, zinc,
silver,mercury, lead, manganese, and rarely cobalt and nickel.
.
\ar. Ordinary. Contains little or no silver. Color steel-gray to dark gray and
iron-black. G. = 4 '75-4*9.
Argentiferous; Freibergite. Contains 3 to 30 p. c. of silver. Color usually steel-gray,
te han the ordinar y varieties; sometimes G. =
,r. J^r. ' iron-black; streak often reddish.
4 oo-o'O.
SULPHO-SALTS 391
Mercurial; Schwatzite. Contains 6 to 17 p. c. of mercury. Color dark gray to iron-

black. Luster often dull. G. = 5'10 chiefly.
Malinowskite, from Peru and a similar variety from Arizona, contain 13-16 p. c. of lead.
Pyr., etc. Differ in the different varieties. In the closed tube alHhe antimonial kinds
fuse and give a dark red sublimate of antimony oxysulphide; if much arsenic is present, a
sublimate of arsenic trisulphide first forms. In the open tube fuses, gives sulphurous fumes
and a white sublimate of antimony oxide; if arsenic is present, a crystalline volatile subli-
mate condenses with the antimony; if the ore contains mercury it condenses in minute
metallic globules. B.B. on charcoal fuses, gives a coating of the oxides of antimony and
sometimes arsenic, zinc, and lead; arsenic is detected by the odor when the coating is treated
in R.F. The roasted mineral gives with the fluxes reactions for iron and copper; with soda
yields a globule of metallic copper. Decomposed by nitric acid, with separation of sulphur
and antimony trioxide.
Diff. Distinguished by form, when crystallized, by its deep black color on fracture
its
and brilliant metallic luster. harder than bournonite and much softer than magnetite;
It is
the blowpipe characters are usually distinctive.
Micro. In polished sections shows a grayish white color with a smooth surface.
Fumes from HNO3 tarnish mineral slowly to a light brown. With aqua regia slowly effer-
vesces leaving a coating of sulphur and a pitted surface.
Obs. Often associated with chalcopyrite, pyrite, sphalerite, galena, and various other
silver, lead, and copper ores; also siderite. Occurs at many Cornish mines; thus at the
Herodsfoot mine, Liskeard, in tetrahedral crystals often coated with iridescent chalcopyrite;
the Levant mine near St. Just. In Germany from Andreasberg and Claustal in the Harz
Mts.; Freiberg, Saxony; Dillenburg and Horhausen in Nassau; at Miisen, Prussia; various
mines in the Black Forest. From Pribram, Bohemia; Kogel near Brixlegg in Tyrol,
Austria; Kapnik, Herrengrund, Hungary. In Mexico, at Durango, Guanajuato; Chile;
Bolivia, etc. The argentiferous variety occurs especially at Freiberg; Pribram; HuaUanca
in Peru, and elsewhere. The mercurial variety at Schmolnitz, Hungary; Schwatz, Tyrol;
valleys of Angina and Castello, Tuscany, Italy.
In the United States, tetrahedrite occurs at the Kellogg mines, Ark. In Col., in Clear
Creek, Summit and Gilpin Cos.; the Ulay mine, Lake Co.; with pyrargyrite in Ruby dis-
trict, Gunnison Co., etc. Much of the Colorado "gray copper" is tennantite (see below).
In Nev., abundant in Humboldt Co.; near Austin in Lander Co.; Isabella mine, Reese
river. In Utah at Bingham Canyon. In Ariz, at the Heintzelman mine; at various points
in British Columbia.
Use. An ore of copper and frequently ore of the other metals, like silver, etc., that
it may contain.
TENNANTITE.
Isometric-tetrahedral. Crystals often dodecahedral. Also massive, com-
pact. H. = 3-4. G. = 4-37-4-49. Color blackish lead-gray to iron-black.
Comp. Essentially Cu 8 As 2 S7 or 4Cii2S.As 2 S 3
= Sulphur 25*5, arsenic
17-0, copper 57'5
= 100.
Var. Often contains antimony and thus graduates into tetrahedrite. The original
tennantite from Cornwall contains only copper and iron. In crystals, habit dodecahedral.
Sandbergerite contains 7 p. c. of zinc. Fredricite from Sweden has, besides copper, also
iron, lead, silver, and tin. Binnite from Binnental, Switzerland, is tennantite.
Found at the Cornish mines, particularly at Wheal Jewel in Gwennap, and Wheal Unity
in Gwinear; in Germany at Freiberg, Saxony, and at the Wilhelmine mine in the Spessart; at
Skutterud, Norway. Near Central City, Idaho Springs and Aspen in Col. At Butte, Mon.
At Capelton, Quebec, Canada. Named after the chemist, Smithson Tennant (1761-1815).
See further above.
Jordanite. 4PbS.As2 S 3 Monoclinic; often pseudohexagonal by twinning. G.

= 6'39.
Color lead-gray. From the Binnental, Switzerland; Nagyag, Transylvania.
Meneghinite. 4PbS.Sb 2 S3 Orthorhombic. In slender prismatic crystals; also mas-
.
sive. G. = 6'34-6'43. Color blackish lead-gray. From Bottino, Tuscany, Italy; Mar-
ble Lake, Barrie Township, Ontario.
GOLDFIELDITE. 5Cu 2 S.(Sb,As,Bi) 2 (S,Te) 3 As a crust. Color, dark lead-gray. Con-
.
choidal fracture. H. = 3-3 '5. At Mohawk mine, Goldfield, Nev. Probably a mixture.
STEPHANITE. Brittle Silver Ore.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b : : c = 0*6292 : 1 : 0'6851.

mm"' 110 A 110 = 64 21' cd, 001 A 021 = 53 52'
c8, 001 A 101 = 47 26' ch, 001 A 112 = 32 45'
ck, 001 A Oil = 34 25' cP, 001 A 111 = 52 9'
675 Crystals usually short prismatic or tabular || c(001).

Twins: tw. pi. w(110), often repeated, pseudo-hexagonal.
Also massive, compact and disseminated.
Cleavage: 6(010), d(021) imperfect. Fracture sub-
conchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 2-2'5. G. = 6'2
-6*3. Luster metallic. Color and streak iron-black.
Opaque.
Comp. Ag SbS 4
5 or 5Ag2 S.Sb2 S 3 = Sulphur 16*3, antimony 15'2, silver
68'5 = 100. .
Pyr. In the closed tube decrepitates, fuses, and after long heating gives a faint
sublimate of antimony oxysulphide. In the open tube fuses, giving off antimonial and
sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal fuses with projection of small particles, coats the coal
with oxide of antimony, which after long blowing is colored red from oxidized silver, and
a globule of metallic silver is obtained. Soluble in dilute heated nitric acid, sulphur and
antimony trioxide being deposited.
Obs. In veins, with other silver ores, at Freiberg, Schneeberg, etc., in Saxony; Pri-
bram, Bohemia; Schemnitz, Hungary; Andreasberg in the Harz Mts., Germany; Kongs-
berg, Norway; Sarrabus, Sardinia; Wheal Newton, Cornwall; Arispe, Sonora and elsewhere,
Mexico; Peru; Chanarcillo, Chile.
In Nev., in the Comstock lode, Reese" river, etc. In Idaho, at the silver mines at Yankee
Fork, Queen's River district.
Named after the Archduke Stephen, Mining Director of Austria.
Geocronite. 5PbS.Sb 2 S 3 Rarely in orthorhombic crystals closely resembling those
.
of stephanite; usually massive, granular. G. = 6 '4. Color lead-gray. From Sala,

Sweden; Val Castello, Tuscany. Kilbrickenite from Kilbricken, Co. Clare, Ireland, is the
same species.
'
Beegerite. 6PbS.Bi 2 S 3 .
Massive, indistinctly crystallized. G. = 7'27. Color light
to dark gray. From Park Co., Col.
Ultrabasite. HAg S.28PbS.2Sb S

2 2 3 .3GeS 2 Orthorhombic. Color and streak gray-
black. H. = 5. G. = 6. From Freiberg, Germany.
Polybasite Group. 9RS 2 As2 S 3, 9RS.Sb2 S 3 .

Monoclinic, pseudo-
rhombohedral
POLYBASITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a b c = 17309 1 1'5796,
: : = 90 0'. Prismatic : :
angle 60 2'. In short six-sided tabular prisms, with beveled edges; c(001)
faces with triangular striations; in part
repeated twins, tw. pi. (110). m
Cleavage: c(001) imperfect. Fracture uneven. H. = 2-3. G. = 6'0-
6'2. Luster metallic. Color iron-black, in thin splinters Streak
cherry-red.
black. Nearly opaque.
Comp. Ag SbS 6
9 or 9Ag 2 S.Sb 2 S 3 = Sulphur 15'0,
= antimony 9'4, silver
75-6 100. Part of the silver is replaced by copper; also the
antimony by
arsenic.
Pry., etc. In the open tube fuses, gives sulphurous and antimonial
fumes, the latter
forming a white sublimate, sometimes mixed with crystalline arsenic trioxide. B.B. fuses
SULPHO-SALTS 393
with spirting to a globule, gives off sulphurous (sometimes arsenical) fumes, and coats the
coal with antimony trioxide; with long-continued blowing some varieties give a faint yellow-
ish white coating of zinc oxide, and a metallic globule, which with salt of phosphorus reacts
for copper, and cupelled with lead gives pure silver. Decomposed by nitric acid.
Obs. Occurs in the mines of Guanajuato, from Las Chipas and Arispe, Sonora,
v
Mexico; at Tres Puntos, desert of Atacama, Chile; At Freiberg, Saxony; and P ibram,
Bohemia; at Sarrabus, Sardinia. In Nev., at the Reese mines and at the Comstock Lode.
In Col, at the Terrible Lode, Clear Creek Co., at Ouray. In Ariz., at the Silver King
mine; at Neihart, Mon.
Named from iro\vs, many, and /3e*<ns, base, in allusion to the basic character of the
compound.
Pearceite. 9Ag2 S.As 2 S 3 .
Monoclinic, pseudo-rhombohedral. The arsenical variety
of polybasite. From Aspen, Col.; Marysville, Lewis and Clarke Co., Mon.
Polyargyrite. 12Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 In indistinct

. isometric crystals. G. = 6'97. Color
iron-black. Wolfach, Baden, Germany.
II. Sulpharsenates, Sulphantimonates ; Sulpho-stannates, etc.

Here are included a few minerals, chiefly sulpho-salts of quintivalent
arsenic and antimony; also several sulpho-stannates and rare sulpho-german-
ates.
ENARGITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes: a b c = 0*8711 1 0'8248. : : : :
Crystals usually small; prismatic faces vertically striated. Twins: tw. pi.
#(320) in star-shaped trillings. Also massive, granular, or columnar.
Cleavage :m(l 10) perfect; a(100), 6(010) distinct; c(001) indistinct.
Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 3. G. = 4'43-^'45. Luster metallic. Color
grayish black to iron-black. Streak grayish black. Opaque.
Comp. Cu 3 AsS 4 or 3Cu2 S.As2S 5 = Sulphur 32'6, arsenic 19*1, copper
48*3 = 100. Antimony is often present, cf. famatinite.
Pyr. In the closed tube decrepitates, and gives a sublimate of sulphur; at a higher
temperature fuses, and gives a sublimate of sulphide of arsenic. In the open tube, heated
gently, the powdered mineral gives off sulphurous and arsenical fumes, the latter condensing
to a sublimate containing some antimony oxide. B.B. on charcoal fuses, and gives a
faint coating of the oxides of arsenic, antimony, and zinc; the roasted mineral with the
fluxes gives a globule of metallic copper. Soluble in aqua regia.
Micro. In polished sections shows a white color with a smooth surface. With KCN
turns black quickly and surface etched; quickly brown with aqua regia.
is
Obs. From Morococha, and Caudalosa, Peru; in Chile and Argentina; Mexico;
Matzenkopfl, Brixlegg, Tyrol, Austria; Mancayan, island of Luzon; Kinkwaseki, Formosa.
In the United States, at Brewer's gold mine, Chesterfield dist., S. C. in Col., at mines ;
near Central City, Gilpi'n Co.; in Park Co., at the Missouri mine; from Red Mountain
district. In southern Utah; also in the Tintic district; Butte, Mon.
Clarite, from the Clara Mine, Schapback, Baden, and luzonite from the island of Luzon,
Philippines, are identical with enargite.
Use. Serves as an ore of copper and arsenic.
Famatinite. 3Cu 2 S.Sb 2 S 5 isomorphous with enargite.
,
G. .= 4*57. Color gray with
tinge of copper-red. From the Sierra de Famatina, Argentina; Goldfield, Nev.
Sulvanite. 3Cu 2 S.V 2 S 5 Massive. H. = 3'5.
. G. = 4'0. Color bronze-yellow. Streak
nearly black. From near Burra, South Australia.
Xanthoconite. 3Ag2 S.As 2 Ss. In thin tabular rhombohedral crystals; also massive,
reniform. G. = 5. Color orange-yellow. From Freiberg, Germany. Rittingerite is the
same species.
Epiboulangerite. 3PbS.Sb 2 S 3 In striated prismatic needles and granular. G. =

.
6-31. Color dark bluish gray to black. From Altenberg, Saxony, Germany.
Epigenite. Perhaps 4Cu 2 S.3FeS.As 2 S 5 In short prisms resembling arsenopyrite.
.
Color steel-gray. From Wittichen, Baden, Germany.
STANNITE. Tin Pyrites. Bell-metal Ore.
Tetragonal-sphenoidal. Pseudo isometric-tetrahedral through twinning.

Twinning, (1) always interpenetrant with e(101) as tw. pi., (2) interpenetrant
with twin axis J_ to p(lll). Also massive, granular, and disseminated, ^.-i
Cleavage: cubic, indistinct. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. =4. G.

=
4 -3-4 -522; 4 -506 Zinnwald. Luster metallic. Streak blackish. Color steel-
gray to iron-black, the former when pure; sometimes a bluish tarnish; often
yellowish from the presence of chalcopyrite. Opaque.
Comp. A sulpho-stannate of copper, iron and sometimes zinc,
Cu 2 FeSnS 4 or Cu 2 S.FeS.SnS 2 = Sulphur 29-9, tin 27-5, copper 29'5, iron 131
= 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates, and gives a faint sublimate; in the open
tube sulphurous fumes. B.B. on charcoal fuses to a globule, which in O.F. gives off sul-
phur dioxide and coats the coal with tin dioxide; the roasted mineral treated with borax
gives reactions for iron and copper. Decomposed by nitric acid, affording a blue solution,
with separation of sulphur and tin dioxide.
Obs. In Cornwall formerly found at Wheal Rock; and at Carn Brea; more recently
in granite at St. Michael's Mount; also at Stenna Gwynn, etc.; at the Cronebane mine, Co.
Wicklow, in Ireland; Zinnwald, in the Erzgebirge, Germany. Crystallized at Oruro,
Bolivia. From the Black Hills, S. D.
Argyrodite. A
silver sulpho-germanate, Ag8 GeS 6 or 4Ag2 S.GeS 2 Isometric, crystals .
usually indistinct; at times they show octahedral and dodecahedral forms with frequent
twinning according to the Spinel Law; also massive, compact. H. = 2'5. G. = 6 '085-
6*266. Luster metallic. Color steel-gray on a fresh fracture, with a tinge of red turning
to violet. From the Himmelsfurst mine, Freiberg, Saxony; from Colquechaca and Aul-
lagas, Bolivia.
Canfieldite. AggSnSe or 4Ag2 S.SnS 2 , the tin in part replaced by germanium. Iso-
metric, in octahedrons with d(l 10). Twins according to Spinel Law. G. = 6 '28. Luster
metallic. Color black. Colquechaca, Bolivia.
Teallite. PbSnS2 . Orthorhombic? In thin flexible folia. Perfect basal cleavage.
H. = 1-2. G. = 6-4. Color blackish gray. Streak black. Probably from Boh' via,
exact locality unknown.
Franckeite. Pb 5 Sn 3 FeSb 2 S 14 or 3PbSnS2 + Pb 2 FeSb 2 S 8 . Massive. G. = 5'55. Color
blackish gray to black. Las Animas, Bolivia.
Cylindrite. Pb 3 Sn4FeSb 2 S 14 or 3PbSnS 2 + SnFeSb 2 S 8 . H. = 2'5-3. G. = 5'42.
Luster metallic. Color blackish lead-gray. In cylindrical forms separating under pressure
into distinct shells or folia. Poopo, Bolivia.
IV. HALOIDS. CHLORIDES, BROMIDES, IODIDES;

FLUORIDES
I. Anhydrous Chlorides, Bromides, Iodides; Fluorides.
II. Oxy chloride s ; Oxyfluorides.
m. Hydrous Chlorides; Hydrous Fluorides.
The Fourth Class includes the haloids, that is, the compounds with the
halogen elements, chlorine, bromine, iodine, and also the less closely related
fluorine.
HALOIDS. CHLORIDES, BROMIDES, IODIDES; FLUORIDES 395
Anhydrous Chlorides, Bromides, Iodides; Fluorides

I.
CALOMEL. Horn Quicksilver.

Tetragonal. Axis c = 17234; 001 A 101 = 59 52'. Crystals sometimes
tabular c(001); also pyramidal; often highly complex.
||
Cleavage: a (100) rather distinct; also r(lll). Fracture conchoidal.

Sectile. H. = 1-2. G. = 6*482. Luster adamantine. Color white, yellow-
ish gray, or ash-gray, also grayish, and yellowish white, brown. Streak pale
yellowish white. Translucent subtranslucent. Optically +. o> = T970.
e = 2-650.
Comp. Mercurous chloride, HgCl = Chlorine 15 -1, mercury 84 -9 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube volatilizes without fusion, condensing in the cold part of
the tube as a white sublimate; with soda gives a sublimate of metallic mercury. B.B. on
charcoal volatilizes, coating the coal white. Insoluble in water, but dissolved by aqua
regia; blackens when treated with alkalies.
Obs. Usually associated with cinnabar. Thus at Moschellandsberg in the Palatinate,
Germany; at Idria in Carniola, Austria; Almaden in Spain; at Mt. Avala near Belgrade
in Servia. In crystals with many forms from Terlingua, Tex.
Calomel is an old term of uncertain origin and meaning, perhaps from KO\OS, beautiful,
and /zeXi, honey, the taste being sweet, and the compound the Mercurius dulcis of early
chemistry; or from /caXos and /xeXas, black.
Kleinite. Mercurammonite. A mercury ammonium chloride of uncertain composition.
Hexagonal. Crystals short prismatic. Basal cleavage. H. = 3*5. G. = 8'0. Color
yellow to orange, darkening on exposure. Volatile. From Terlingua, Tex.
Nantokite. Cuprous chloride, CuCl. Granular, massive. Cleavage cubic. H. =
2-2*5. G. = 3*93. Luster adamantine. Colorless to white or grayish. From Nantoko,
Chile; Broken Hill, New South Wales.
Marshite. Cuprous iodide, Cul. Isometric- tetrahedral. Cleavage dodecahedral.
H. = 2'5. G.=5'59. Color oil-brown.. n = 2'346. Broken Hill mines, New South Wales.
Halite Group. RC1, RBr, RI. Isometric

Halite NaCl Embolite Ag(Cl,Br)
Sylvite KC1 Bromyrite AgBr
Sal Ammoniac (NH 4 )C1 lodobromite Ag(Cl,Br,I)
Cerargyrite AgCl Miersite Agl
The HALITE GROUP includes the halogen compounds of the closely related
metals, sodium, potassium, and silver, also ammonium (NH 4 ). They crystal-
lize in the isometric system, the cubic form being the most common. Sylvite
and sal-ammoniac are plagiohedral, and the same may be true of the others.
HALITE. COMMON or ROCK SALT.
Usually in cubes; crystals sometimes distorted, or with cavern-

Isometric.
ous faces. Also massive, granular
to compact; less often columnar. 676
Cleavage: cubic, perfect. Frac-

ture conchoidal. Rather brittle.
H. = 2-5. G. = 2-1-2-6; pure
crystals 2-135. Luster vitreous.
Colorless or white also yellowish,
reddish, bluish, purplish. Transpar-
ent to translucent. Soluble; taste
saline, n = 1-5442. Highly dia-
thermanous.
Comp. - Sodium NaCl = Chlorine 60 -6, sodium 39 -4 = 100.

chloride,
Commonly mixed with calcium sulphate, calcium chloride, magnesium chlo-
ride, and sometimes magnesium sulphate,
which render it liable to deliquesce.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube fuses, often with decrepitation; when fused on the
the residue gives an
platinum wire colors the flame deep yellow. After intense ignition
alkaline reaction upon moistened test paper. Nitric acid solution gives precipitate of
silver chloride upon addition of silver nitrate. Dissolves readily in three parts of water.
Diff. Distinguished by its solubility (taste), softness, perfect cubic cleavage.
Obs. Common salt occurs in extensive but irregular beds in rocks of various ages,
associated with gypsum, poly halite, anhydrite, carnallite, clay, sandstone, and calcite;
also in solution forming salt springs' similarly in the water of the ocean and salt seas.
The deposits of salt have been formed by the gradual evaporation and ultimate drying up
of enclosed bodies of salt water. Salt beds formed in this way are subsequently covered
by other sedimentary deposits and gradually buried beneath the rock strata thus formed.
The salt strata range from a few feet up to more than one hundred feet in thickness and
have been found at depths of two thousand feet and more beneath the earth's surface.
The principal salt mines of Europe are at Stassfurt, near Magdeburg, Saxony; Wie-
liczka, in Galicia; at Hall, in Tyrol, Austria; and along the range through Reichental in
Bavaria, Hallein in Salzburg, Hallstadt, Ischl, and Ebensee, in Upper Austria, and Aussee
in Styria; in Hungary, at Marmoros and elsewhere; Transylvania; Wallachia, Galicia,
and Upper Silesia; in southern and southeastern Russia; Vic and Dieuze in France;
Valley of Cardona and elsewhere in Spain; Bex in Switzerland; and Northwich in Cheshire,
England.
Salt also occurs, forming hills and covering extended plains, near Lake Urumia, the
Caspian Sea, etc. In Algeria; in Abyssinia. In India in enormous deposits in the Salt
Range of the Punjab. In China and Asiatic Russia; in South America, in Peru, and at
Zipaquera and Nemocon, the former a large mine long explored in the Cordilleras of
Colombia; clear salt is obtained from the Cerro de Sal, San Domingo.
In the United States, salt has been found in large amount in central and western N. Y.
Salt wells had long been worked in this region, but rock salt is now known to exist over a
large area from Ithaca at the head of Cayuga Lake, Tompkins Co., and Canandaigua
Lake, Ontario Co., through Livingston Co., also Genesee, Wyoming, and Erie Cos. The
salt is found in beds with an average thickness of 75 feet, but sometimes much thicker (in
one instance 325 feet), and at varying depths from 1000 to 2000 feet and more; the depth
increases southward with the dip of the strata. The rocks belong to the Salina period of
the Upper Silurian. Extensive deposits of salt occur in Mich., chiefly in Saginaw, Bay,
Midland, Isabella, Detroit, Wayne, Manistee and Mason Counties. Salt has also been
found near Cleveland, Ohio, associated with gypsum; in Kan.; in La., extensive beds
occur in the southern portion of the state at and in the neighborhood of Petite Anse island.
Salt has also been obtained from Nev., Utah, Ariz, and Cal. In Utah and Cal. salt is
chiefly obtained by the evaporation of the waters of Great Salt Lake and the ocean.
Brine springs are very numerous in the Middle and Western States. Vast lakes of salt
water exist in many parts of the world. The Great Salt Lake in Utah is 2000 square miles
in area; L. Gale found in this water 20 '196 per cent of sodium chloride. The Dead and
Caspian seas are salt, and the waters of the former contain 20 to 26 parts of solid matter in
100 parts. Sodium chloride is the prominent salt present in the ocean.
Use. The chief uses of salt are for culinary and preservative purposes. Soda ash is
also made from it, being employed in the manufacture of
glass, soap, bleaching, prepara-
tion of other sodium compounds, etc.
Villiaumite. NaF. Isometric. In small carmine colored grains. Soft. G. = 2'8.
Refractive index = 1'33. Found in nepheline-syenite from the Islands of Los.
Huantajayite. 20NaCl.AgCl. In cubic crystals and as an incrustation. H. = 2.
Wot sectile. Color white. From Huantajaya, Tarapaca, Chile.
SYLVITE.
Also in granular crystalline masses; compact.
Isometric-plagiohedral.
Cleavage: cubic, perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 2. G. =
1-97-1-99. Luster vitreous. Colorless, white, bluish or yellowish red from
inclusions. Soluble; taste resembling that of common but bitter.
salt,
n = 1'490.
Comp. Potassium chloride, KC1 = Chlorine 47-6, potassium 52'4 =
100. Sometimes contains sodium chloride.
Pyr., etc. B.B. in the platinum loop fuses, and gives a violet color to the outer flame
Dissolves completely in water (saline taste). After ignition residue reacts alkaline
upon
moistened test paper. Solution in nitric acid gives precipitate of silver chloride with silver
nitrate.
Obs. Occurs at Vesuvius, about the fumaroles of the volcano. Also in
Germany at
Stassfurt, Saxony; and at Leopoldshall (leopoldite) Anhalt; at Kalusz in Galicia.
,
Use. A source of potash compounds used as fertilizers.

Sal Ammoniac. Ammonium chloride, NH
4 C1. n = 1'642. Observed as a white in-
crustation about volcanoes, as at Etna, Vesuvius, etc.
Cerargyrite Group. Isometric-Normal

An isomorphous which silver chloride, bromide
series of silver haloids in
and iodide may mix in varying proportions. The suggestion has been made
that the name cerargyrite be kept as the group name and that the different
sub-species be named as follows: chlorargyrite, AgCl; bromargyrite, AgBr:
embolite, Ag(Cl,Br); iodembolite, Ag(Cl,Br,I).
CERARGYRITE. Horn Silver.
Isometric. Habit cubic. Twins: tw. pi. o(lll). Usually massive and
resembling wax; sometimes columnar; often in crusts.
Cleavage none. Fracture somewhat conchoidal. Highly sectile. H. =
1-1*5. G. = 5 -552. Luster resinous to adamantine. Color pearl-gray,
grayish green, whitish to colorless, rarely violet-blue; on exposure to the
light turns violet-brown. Transparent to translucent, n = 2-0611.
Comp. Silver chloride, AgCl =Chlorine, 24-7, silver 75-3 = 100. Some
varieties contain mercury.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube fuses without decomposition. B.B. on charcoal gives a
globule of metallic silver. Added to a bead of salt of phosphorus, previously saturated
with oxide of copper and heated in O.F., imparts an intense azure-blue to the flame.
Insoluble in nitric acid, but soluble in ammonia.
Obs. Cerargyrite and the related minerals are products of secondary action and are
commonly found in the upper parts of silver deposits. Descending waters containing
chlorine, bromine or iodine act upon the oxidation products of the primary silver minerals
and so precipitate' these relatively insoluble compounds. Commonly associated with
other silver minerals, with lead, copper and zinc ores and their usual alteration products.
The largest masses are brought from Peru, Chile, Bolivia, and Mexico, where it occurs
with native silver. Also once obtained from Johanngeorgenstadt and Freiberg, Saxony;
occurs in the Altai Mts.; at Kongsberg in Norway.
In the United States, in Col., near Leadville, Lake Co.; near Breckenridge, Summit Co.,
and elsewhere. In Nev. near Austin, Lander Co.; at mines of Comstock lode; Tonapah.
In Idaho, at the Poorrnan mine, in crystals; also at various other mines. In Utah, in
Beaver, Summit and Salt Lake counties. At Tombstone, Ariz.
Named from /cepas, horn, and apyvpos, silver.
Use. An ore of silver.
Embolite. Silver chloro-bromide Ag(Br,Cl), the ratio of chlorine to bromine vary-
ing widely. Usually massive. Resembles cerargyrite, but color grayish green to yellowish
green and yellow, n = 2*15. Abundant in Chile. Found also at Broken Hill, New
South Wales; Tonapah, Nev.; Leadville, Col.,; Yuma County, Ariz.; Georgetown, N. M.
Bromyrite. Silver bromide, AgBr. G. = 5*8-6. Color bright yellow to amber-yel-
low; slightly greenish, n = 2'25. From Mexico; Chile.
lodobromite. 2AgCl.2AgBr.AgI. Isometric. G. = 5713. Color sulphur-yellow,
greenish, n = 2'2. From near Dernbach, Nassau; Broken Hill, New South Wales.
Miersite. Silver, copper iodide, 4AgI.CuI. Isometric; tetrahedral. G. = 5'64. In

bright yellow crystals from the Broken Hill Silver Mines, New South Wales. Cupro-
iodargyrite from Huantajaya, Peru, belongs here also.
lodyrite. Silver iodide, Agl. Hexagonal-hemimorphic; usually in thin plates; pale
G. = 5'5-57. + co = 2 '182. From Mexico, Chile, etc.

yellow or green. Optically .
Lake Valley, Sierra Co., N. M. In crystals from Broken Hill, New South Wales, and
Tonapah, Nev.
ii ii
Fluorite Group. RF 2 ,RC12

The species here included are Fluoritel CaF2T and the rare Hydrophilite,
CaCl 2 Both are isometric, habit cubic. V^
. 4
FLUORITE or FLUOR SPAR.

Isometric. Habit cubic;
less frequently octahedral or dodecahedral ;
forms /(310), e(210) (fluoroids) common; also the vicinal form f (321-0?),
producing striations on a(100) (Fig. 682) hexoctahedron 2(421) also common
;
with the cube (Fig. 681). Cubic crystals sometimes grouped in parallel
position, thus forming a pseudo-octahedron. Twins: tw. pi. 0(111), com-
678 679
monly penetration-twins (Fig. 682). Also massive; granular, coarse or fine-

rarely columnar; compact.
Cleavage: o(lll) perfect. Fracture flat-conchoidal; of
compact kinds
splintery. Brittle. H. = 4
681 682 G. = 3-01-3-25; 318 cryst.
Luster vitreous. Color
white,
yellow, green, rose- and crimson-
red, violet-blue, sky-blue, and
brown; wine-yellow, greenish
blue, violet-blue, most common;
red, rare. Streak white.
- -
Transparent subtranslucent.
Sometimes shows a bluish fluor-
A escence. Some varieties phos-
phoresce when heated (p. 251)
n = 1-4339.
Comp.
--.- Calcium fluoride, CaF2 - Fluorine
nuorme 348'9, calcium 511 =
Oniorme is sometimes present in minute 100.
quantities
ipitatesand sometimes phosphoresces. B. B. in the

on <ne flame orange, to an enamel which reacts
test Fused b a closed i
alkaline
"otassmm bisulphate gives reaction for fluorine.
>rm, octahedral cleavage, relative softness (as
compared with certain also with the
treated with sulphuric i,
feldspars); etching power when
effervesce with acid like calcite
Obs. Fluorite occurs most commonly as a vein mineral either in deposits in which
it is the chief constituent or as a gangue mineral with various metallic ores, especially
those of lead and zinc. It is common in sedimentary rocks, being often found in dolomites
and limestones. It is also found as a minor accessory mineral in granite and other acid
igneous rocks. It occurs as a sublimation product in connection with volcanic rocks.
In the North of England, it is the gangue of the lead veins, which intersect the coal
formation in Northumberland, Cumberland, Durham, and Yorkshire. In Derbyshire it
is abundant, and also in Cornwall, where the veins intersect metamorphic rocks. The
Cumberland and Derbyshire localities especially have afforded magnificent specimens.
Common in the mining district of Saxony; from Stolberg, Harz Mts.; fine near Kongsberg
in Norway. In the dolomites of St. Gothard occurs in pink octahedrons; from Brienz,
Switzerland. From Rabenstein, Tyrol, Austria. Rarely in volcanic regions, as in the
Vesuvian lava. In colorless transparent crystals from Madoc, Hastings Co., Ontario,
Canada.
Some localities in the United States are, Trumbull, Conn, (chlorophane) Muscolonge ;
Lake, Jefferson Co., N. Y., and Macomb, St. Lawrence Co., both in very large sea-green
cubes; Franklin Furnace, N. J.; Amelia Court House, Va. Westmoreland, Ver. Fluorite ;
has been mined in the United States chiefly from Western Kentucky and adjacent sections
in Hardin and Pope counties, 111. Also obtained from Jamestown, Boulder County; Ever-
green, Jefferson County, and near Rosita, Custer County, Col.; from ten miles north of
Deming, N. M.; from Smith, Trousdale and Wilson counties, Tenn.; from Castle Dome
district, Ariz.
Use. As a flux in the making of steel; in the manufacture of opalescent glass; in
enameling cooking utensils; the preparation of hydrofluoric acid; sometimes as an orna-
mental material.
Hydrophilite. Chlorocalcite. Calcium chloride, CaCl2 In white cubic crystals or .
as an incrustation at Vesuvius. Bceumlerite is same material intergrown with halite and

tachhydrite from Leinetal, Germany.
The following are from Vesuvius: Chloromagnesite, MgCl 2 Scacchite. MnCl2 ; ;
ChloraUuminite, A1C1 3 .6H 2 O; Molysite, FeCl 3 Chlormanganokalite, 4KCl.MnCl2

;
.
Sellaite. Magnesium fluoride, MgF2 In prismatic tetragonal crystals.

. H. = 5.
G. = 2 '97-3 15. Colorless. Optically + co = 1'378. From the moraine of theGebrou-
.
laz glacier in Savoie, France. Belonesite is the same species.

Lawrencite. Ferrous chloride, FeCl2. Occurs in meteoric iron.
Rinneite. FeCl 2 .3KCl.NaCl. Rhombohedral. In coarse granular masses. Prismatic
cleavage. H. =3. G. = 2'3. Colorless, rose, violet or yellow when fresh, becomes
brown on exposure due to oxidation. o> = 1'59. Easily fusible. Astringent taste.
Found in Germany at Nordhausen and elsewhere in Saxony and at Diekholzen, Hannover.
Cotunnite. Lead chloride, PbCl2. In acicular crystals (orthorhombic) and in semi-
crystalline masses. Soft. G. = 5 '24. Color white, yellowish. Optically + 8 = 2 '2 17. .
From Vesuvius; also Tarapaca, Chile.

Tysonite. Fluoride of the cerium metals, (Ce,La,Di)Fs. In thick hexagonal prisms,
and massive. Cleavage: c(001), perfect. H. = 4*5-5. G. = 6'13. Color pale wax-
yellow, changing to yellowish and reddish brown. From the granite of Pike's Peak,
El Paso Co., Col. Fluocerite, from Osterby, Sweden, is propably the same species.
Yttrofluorite. (Ca 3 ,Y2 )F 6 near yttrocerite.
,
Isometric. In granular masses. Imperfect
octahedral cleavage. H. = 4*5. G. = 3'55. Color yellow, also with brown or green
shades, n 1*46. Found in pegmatite in northern Norway.
CRYOLITE. 683
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 0'9663 : 1 :
1'3882;
|8
= 89 49'.
mm'", 110 A 1TO = 88 2'. ck, 001 A T01 = 55 17'.
cm, 001 A 110 = 89 52'. cr, 001 A Oil = 54 14'.
cv, 001 A 101 = 55 2'. cp, 001 A 111 = 63 18'.
Crystals often cubic in aspect and grouped in paral-

lel position; often with twin lamellae. Massive.
Parting at times due to j/winning lamellae parallel
to c(001), ra(110) and /c(101). Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 2'5. G. = 2-95-3-0. Luster
vitreous to greasy; somewhat pearly on c(001). Colorless to snow-white,
sometimes reddish or brownish to brick-red or even black. Transparent to

translucent. Optically +. Mean index, 1-364. p_
Comp. A fluoride of sodium and aluminium^ Na AlF 6 3 lor 3NaF.AlF 3 =
Fluorine 54*4, aluminium 12'8, sodium 32*8 = !D6>----rAr-nttle iron sesqui-
oxide is sometimes present as impurity.
Pyr., etc. Fusible in small fragments in the flame of a candle. Heated in C. T. with
potassium bisulphate gives fluorine reaction. In the forceps fuses very easily, coloring
the flame yellow. On charcoal fuses easily to a clear bead, which on cooling becomes
opaque; after long blowing, the assay spreads out, the fluoride of sodium is absorbed by
the coal, a suffocating odor of fluorine is given off, and a crust of alumina remains, which,
when heated with cobalt solution in O.F., gives a blue color. Soluble in sulphuric acid,
with evolution of hydrofluoric acid.
Diff. Distinguished by its extreme fusibility. Because of its low index of refraction
the powdered mineral becomes almost invisible when placed in water. Its planes of part-
ing (resembling cubic cleavage) and softness are characteristic.
Obs. Occurs in a bay in Arksukfiord, in West Greenland, at Ivigtut (or Evigtok),
about 12 m. from the Danish settlement of Arksuk, where it constitutes a large bed in
a granitic vein in a gray gneiss. Cryolite and its alteration products, pachnolite, thom-
senolite, prosopite, etc., also occur in limited quantity at the southern base of Pike's Peak,
El Paso county, Col., north and west of Saint Peter's Dome.
Named from Kpvos, frost, X9os, stone, hence meaning ice-stone, in allusion to the trans-
lucency of the white masses.
Use. In the manufacture of sodium salts, certain kinds of glass and porcelain, and
as a flux in the electrolytic process for the production of aluminum.
Cryolithionite is a variety of cryolite with half the sodium replaced by lithium. G. =
278. Refractive index T34. Associated with cryolite at Ivigtut.
5NaF.3AlF3 In small pyramidal crystals (tetragonal); also massive granu-
Chiolite. .
lar. Cleavages, c(001) perfect, p(lll) distinct. H. = 3'5-4. G. = 2'84-2'90. Color

snow-white. Optically co = 1*349.. From near Miask in the Ilmen Mts., Russia;
.
also with the Greenland cryolite.

Hieratite. A
fluoride of potassium and silicon. In grayish stalactitic concretions;
isometric. From the fumaroles of the crater of Vulcano, Lipari Islands.
II. Oxychlorides, Oxyfluorides

ATACAMITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a :b c = 0-6613 : : 1 : 07515.
684 mm", 110 A 110 = 66 57'. rr'" 111 A 111 = 52 48'.
ee', Oil A Oil = 73 51'. mr,
t
110 A 111 = 36 16*'.

Commonly slender in
prismatic crystals, vertically
striated. Twins according to a complex law. (Paratacamite
is twinned In confused crystalline aggregates;
atacamite.)
also massive, fibrous or granular to
compact; as sand.
Cleavage: 6(010) highly perfect. Fracture conchoidal.
Brittle. = 3-3-5. G. = 375-377. Luster adamantine
H.
to vitreous. Color bright green of various shades, dark
emerald-green to blackish green. Streak apple-green.
Transparent to translucent. Optically a = T831 .
= T861. 7 = 1-880.
Comp. Cu2 ClH 3 3 or CuCl 2 .3Cu(OH) 2 = Chlorine 16'6, copper 14'9,
cupnc oxide 55-8, water 12-7 = 100.
on charcoal _ .
owmsn u ^ w. Viiv, UIMIÎ gioijriBii wince, uuiiuiiueu uiowuig yieias a gioouie oi met
sflv
C
?
a ngs touched
uj
' ^h the R.F., volatilize, coloring the flame azure-blue. In
Obs. Originally from Atacama in the northern part of Chile; also found at Colla-
hurasi, Tarapaca and elsewhere in Chile and Bolivia; at Wallaroo and Bimbowrie, in
South Australia; at Gloncurry, Queensland; at St. Just in Cornwall. In the United
States, with cuprite, etc., at the United Verde mine, Jerome, Ariz.
Percylite. A lead-copper oxychloride, perhaps PbCl2 .CuO.H 2O. In sky-blue cubes.
From Sonora, Mexico; Atacama, Chile; Bolivia, etc.
Boleite. 9PbCl 2 .8CuO.3AgC1.9H 2 O.
Tetragonal, pseudo-isometric. Twinned to
form pseudo Pseudo-boleite. 5PbCl 2 .4CuO.6H 2 O.
cubes. Tetragonal. Cumengite.
4PbCl 2 .4CuO.5H 2 O. Tetragonal. Pseudo-boleite and cumengite occur in parallel growth
upon crystals of boleite. Boleite and pseudo-boleite have pearly luster on cleavage, while
cumengite has not. All three deep blue in color, the first two showing a greenish tinge in
powder. Found at Boleo, near Santa Rosalia, Lower California.
Matlockite. Lead oxychloride, Pb 2OCl 2 In tabular tetragonal crystals. G. = 7-21.
.
Luster adamantine to pearly. Color yellowish or slightly greenish. Optically .
co =2 '15. From Cromford, near Matlock, Derbyshire.

Mendipite. Pb 2 O 2 Cl 2 or PbCl 2 .2PbO. In fibrous or columnar masses; often radiated.
H. =2-5-3. G. = 7-7'l. Color white. Index, 1'93. From the Mendip Hills, Somer-
setshire, England; near Brilon, Westphalia.
Lorettoite. 6PbO.PbCl 2 Tetragonal? Coarse fibers or blades. Perfect basal cleavage.
.
G. = 7-6. H. = 3. Fusible at 1. Color honey-yellow. Uniaxial, -. Indices, 2'37-

2-40. From Loretto, Tenn.
Laurionite. PbClOH or PbCl 2 .Pb(OH) 2 In minute prismatic colorless crystals (ortho-
.
rhombic), in ancient lead slags at Laurion, Greece. Optically /3

= 2-116. Para- .
laurionite. Same composition as laurionite but monoclinic. From Laurion. Rafaelite

from Chile is the same mineral. Suggested that laurionite is the same as paralaurionite
but owing to submicroscopic twinning has apparently orthorhombic symmetry. Fiedlerite,
associated with laurionite, is probably also a lead oxychloride; in colorless monoclinic
crystals.
Penfieldite. Pb 3 OCl 2
or PbO.2PbCl2 In white hexagonal crystals. Laurion, Greece.
.
Daviesite. A
lead oxychloride of uncertain composition. In minute colorless pris-
matic crystals (orthorhombic) from the Mina Beatriz, Sierra Gorda, Atacama, Chile.
Schwartzembergite. Probably Pb(I,Cl) 2 .2PbO. In druses of small crystals; also in
crusts. G. = 6"2. Color honey-yellow. Desert of Atacama, Chile.
Nocerite. Perhaps 2(Ca,Mg)F2 (Ca,Mg)O(?). In white hexagonal acicular crystals
from bombs in the tufa of Nocera, Italy.
Koenenite. An oxychloride of aluminium and magnesium. Rhombohedral. Perfect
cleavage yielding flexible folia. Very soft. G. = 2'0. Color red, due to included hema-
tite. From near Volpriehausen in the Soiling, Germany.
Daubreeite. An earthy yellowish oxychloride of bismuth. From Bolivia.
The following are oxychlorides of mercury from the mercury deposits at Terlingua,
Texas. Associated minerals are montroydite, calomel, native mercury and calcite.
Eglestonite. Hg4 Cl 2 O. Isometric in minute crystals of dodecahedral habit. Many
forms observed. H. = 2-3. G. = 8' 3. Luster adamantine to resinous. Color brownish
yellow darkening on exposure to black, n = 2*49. Volatile.
Terlinguaite. Hg2 ClO. Monoclinic. In small striated prismatic crystals elongated
parallel to the 6-axis. Many forms observed. Cleavage perfect. H. = 2-3. G = 87.
Luster adamantine. Color sulphur-yellow changing to olive-green on exposure.
III. Hydrous Chlorides, Hydrous Fluorides, etc.
CARNALLITE.
Orthorhombic.
Crystals rare. Commonly massive, granular.
Fracture conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 1.
No distinct cleavage. = 1-60. G
Luster shining, greasy. Color milk-white, often reddish. Transparent to
translucent. Strongly phosphorescent. Optically 2 V = 70. a = 1 -466. +
= 1-475. T = 1-494, Taste bitter. Deliquescent.
Comp. KMgCl 3 .6H 2 O or KCl.MgCl 2 .6H 2 O = Chlorine 38'3, potas-
sium 14-1, magnesium 87, water 39'0 = 100.
Obs.Occurs at Stassfurt, in beds, alternating with thinner beds of common salt and
kieserite. In large crystals from Beienrode, near Konigshiitte, Silesia.
Use . Carnallite is a source of potash compounds used in fertilizers.
DOUGLASITE, associated with carnallite, is said to be 2KCl.FeCl 2 .2H 2 O.
Bischofite. MgCl 2 .6H 2O. Crystalline-granular; colorless to white. Optically +.
/3
= 1-507. From Leopoldshall and Stassfurt, Prussia.
Kremersite. KCl.NH 4 Cl.FeCl2 .H 2O. In red octahedrons. From Vesuvius and Mt.
Etna, Sicily.
Mosesite. A mercury-ammonium compound containing chlorine, sulphur trioxide and
water. Near kleinite in composition. Isometric. Minute octahedrons. Spinel twins.
H. = 3 Color yellow. Doubly refracting at ordinary temperatures. Found sparingly
+ .
at Terlingua, Texas.
Erythrosiderite. 2KCl.FeCl3.H 2 O. In red tabular crystals. Vesuvius.
Tachhydrite. CaCl 2 .2MgCl2 .12H 2O. In wax- to honey-yellow masses. From Stass-
furt, Germany.
Fluellite. A1F 3 .H 2O. In colorless or white rhombic, pyramids. Index, 1'47. From
Stenna Gwyn, Cornwall. '
Prosopite. CaF2 .2Al(F,OH) 3 In monoclinic crystals, or granular massive. H. = 4'5.

.
G. = 2-88. Colorless, white, grayish. = 1'502. From Altenberg, Saxony; St. Peter's
Dome near Pike's Peak, Col.; Utah.
Pachnolite and Thomsenolite, occurring with cryolite in Greenland, Col., and Ural Mts.,
have the same composition, NaF.CaF2 .AlF3.H 2 O. Both occur in monoclinic prismatic
crystals; prismatic angle for pachnolite, 98 36', crystal twins, orthorhombic in aspect.
/3
= 1-413. For thomsenolite, 89 46', crystals often resembling cubes, also prismatic;
distinguished by its basal cleavage; also massive. /3
= T414.
Gearksutite. CaF2 .Al(F,OH) 3 .H 2 O. Earthy, clay-like. Index, T448. Occurs with
cryolite.
Ralstonite. (Na 2 ,Mg)F 2 .3Al(F,OH) 3 .2H 2 O. In colorless to white, isometric, octa-
hedrons. H. =
G. = 2-56-2-62. n = 1'43. With the Greenland cryolite.
4-5.
Creedite. 2CaF 2 .2Al(F,OH) 3 .CaSO 4 .2H 2 O. Monoclinic. In grains, prismatic crys-
tals and radiating masses. Usually colorless, rarely purple. H. = 3'5. G. = 2*71. Perfect
cleavage. Indices, 1-46-1-49. 2 V = 64. Y = b axis. Fusible with intumescence.
Soluble in acids. Found near Wagon Wheel Gap, Creed Quadrangle, Col.
Tallingite. A hydrated copper chloride from the Botallack mine, Cornwall; in blue
globular crusts.
Yttrocerite. (Y,Er,Ce)F 3 .5CaF2 .H 2O. Massive-eleavable to granular and earthy.
H. = 4-5. G. = 3'4. Color violet-blue, gray, reddish brown. From near Falun,
Sweden, etc.
V. OXIDES
Oxides of Silicon,
I.
n. Oxides of the Semi-Metals Tellurium, Arsenic, Antimony, Bismuth

:
;
also Molybdenum, Tungsten.

III. Oxides of the Metals.
The Fifth Class, that of the OXIDES, is subdivided into three sections,
according to the positive element present. The oxides of the non-metal
silicon are placed by themselves, but it will be noted that the
compounds of
the related element titanium are included with those of the metals
proper.
This last is made necessary by the fact that in one of its forms Ti0 2 is isomor-
phous with MnO
2 and Pb0 2 .
A oxygen compounds which are properly to be viewed as salts,

series of
e.g., the species of the Spinel Group and a few others, are for convenience also
included in this class.
OXIDES 403
I. Oxides of Silicon
QUARTZ.
Rhombohedral-trapezohedral. Axis: c = 1-09997.
rr
f
1011 ,
A TlOl = 85 46'. mz, 1010 A0111 = 66 52'.
rz, 1011 A 0111 = 46 16'. ms, 1010 A1121 = 37 58'.
mr, 1010 A 1011 = 38 13'. mx, 1010 A. 5161 = 12 1'.
685 686 687 688
Crystals commonly prismauc, with the m(10TO) faces horizontally

striated; terminated commonly by the two rhombohedrons, r(1011) and
2(0111), in nearly equal development, giving the appearance of a hexagonal
pyramid; when one rhombohedron predominates it is in almost all cases r.
Often in double six-sided pyramids or quartzoids through the equal develop-
ment and 2; when r is relatively large the form then has a cubic aspect
of r
(rr
f
=
85 46'). Crystals frequently distorted, when the correct orientation
may be obscure except as shown by the striations on m. Crystals often elon-
gated to acicular 'forms, and tapering through the oscillatory combination of
successive rhombohedrons with the prism. Occasionally twisted or bent.
Frequently in radiated masses with a surface of pyramids, or in druses.
Simple crystals are either right- or left-handed. On a right-handed crystal (Fig. 690)
the right trigonal pyramid, s(1121), if present, lies to the right of the face, which is m
below the predominating positive rhombohedron r, and with this belong the positive
right trapezohedrons, as (5161). On a left-handed crystal (Fig. 691), s lies to the left
of the m
below r. The right- and left-handed forms occur together only in twins. In the
absence of trapezohedral faces the striations on s (|| edge r/m), if distinct, serve to dis-
tinguish the faces r and z, and hence show the right- and left-handed character of the
crystals. The right- and left-handed character is also revealed by etching (Art. 286) and
by pyro-electricity (Art. 438).
Thermal study of quartz shows that it exists in two modifications, known as a-
and /3-quartz. a-quartz is apparently hexagonal, trapezohedral-tetartohedral and is
formed at temperatures below 575 while /3-quartz is hexagonal, trapezohedral-hemihedral
and forms at temperatures ranging from 575 to 800. Above 800 tridymite is formed.
The crystal angles of a-quartz change with increase of temperature up to? 575, the inver-
sion point to /3-quartz, while beyond this point they remain nearly constant. In a similar
manner at this point there is a sudden marked lowering of the refractive indices and birefrin-
gence, a-quartz occurs in veins and geodes and large pegmatites while the /3 modification
is found in graphite granite, granite pegmatites, and porphyries. Tridymite when heated
to about 1470 passes over into cristobalite. Quartz, tridymite and cristobalite are prob-
ably to be considered as polymers of the fundamental molecule, SiO 2 .
Twins: (1) tw. axis c, all axes parallel. (2) Tw. pi. a, sometimes called
the Brazil law, usually as irregular penetration-twins (Fig. 692). (3) Tw. pi.
(1122), contact-twins, the axes crossing at angles of 84 33'_and with a prism
face in common to the two individuals. (4) Tw. pi. r(1011). See further
p. 168 and Figs. 427^429. Massive forms common and in great variety, pass-
ing from the coarse or fine granular and crystalline kinds to those which are
flint-like or cryptocrystalline. Sometimes mammillary, stalactitic, and in
concretionary forms; as sand.
Cleavage not Distinctly observed; sometimes fracture surfaces (|| r(1011),
2(0111) and m(1010), developed by sudden cooling after being heated (see Art.
279). Fracture conchoidal to subconchoidal in crystallized forms, uneven to
splintery in some massive kinds. Brittle to tough. H. = 7. G. = 2-653-
2-660 in crystals; cryptocrystalline forms somewhat lower (to 2 -60) if pure,
but impure massive forms (e.g., jasper) higher. Luster vitreous," sometimes
greasy; splendent to nearly dull. Colorless when pure; often various shades
of yellow, red, brown, green, blue, black. Streak white, of pure varieties; if
impure, often the same as the color, but much paler. Transparent to opaque.
Optically +. Double refraction weak. Polarization circular; right-
handed or left-handed, the optical character
692 corresponding to right- and left-handed
character of crystals, as defined above; in
twins (law 2), both right and left forms
sometimes united, sections then often
showing Airy's spirals in the polariscope
(cf. Art. 394, p. 270, and Fig. 692). Ro-
tatory power proportional to thickness of
plate. Refractive indices for the D line,
co =
1-54418, e = 1-55328; also rotatory
mm
power for section of l thickness, a = 21 71
(D line). Pyroelectric; also electric by
pressure or piezo-electric.- See Arts. 438,
439. On etching-figures, see Arts. 286, 287.
Basal section in polarized light, show- or
Comp. Silica, silicon dioxide,
mg interpenetration of right- and =
Oxygen 53'3, silicon 467 = 100.
left-handed portions. Des Cloi-
In massive varieties often mixed with a little opal
silica. varieties contain- iron oxide, calcium
Impure
carbonate, clay, sand, and various minerals as inclusions.
Artif. Quartz has been produced artificially in numerous ways. Recently crystals
have been obtained at temperatures below 760 from melts
which were composed of (1) a mixture of containing dissolved silica
potassium and lithium chlorides, (2) vanadic
acid, (3) sodium tungstate. At higher temperatures tridymite crystals formed.
Var
~A-, PHENOCRYSTALLINE: Crystallized, vitreous in luster. B. CRYPTOCRYSTAL-
LINE: Flint-like, massive.
The first division includes all
ordinary vitreous quartz, whether having crystalline faces
1 he varieties under the second
are in general acted upon somewhat more by
rition and by chemical
agents, as hydrofluoric acid, than those of the first. In all
kinds made up of layers, as
agate, successive layers are unequally eroded.
OXIDES 405
A. PHENOCRYSTALLINE OR VITREOUS VARIETIES

Ordinary Crystallized; Rock Crystal. Colorless quarts, or nearly so, whether in dis-
tinct crystals or not. Here belong the Bristol diamonds, Lake George diamonds, Brazilian
pebbles, etc. Some variations from the common type are (a) cavernous crystals; (6) cap-
:
quartz made up of separable layers or caps; (c) drusy quartz, a crust of small or minute
quartz crystals; (d) radiated quartz, often separable into radiated parts, having pyramidal
terminations; (e) fibrous, rarely delicately so, as a kind from Griqualand West, South
Africa, altered from crocidolite (see cat's-eye below, also crocidolite, p. 493).
Asteriated; Star-quartz. Containing within the crystal whitish or colored radiations
along the diametral planes. Occasionally exhibits distinct asterism.
Amethystine; Amethyst. Clear purple, or bluish violet. Color perhaps due to man-
ganese.
Rose. Rose-red or pink, but becoming paler on exposure. Commonly massive.
Luster sometimes a little greasy. Color perhaps due to titanium.
Yellow; False Topaz or Citrine. Yellow and pellucid; resembling yellow topaz.
Smoky; Cairngorm Stone. Smoky yellow to dark smoky brown, and often trans-
parent; varying to brownish black. Color is probably due to some organic compound
(Forster). Called cairngorms from the locality at Cairngorm, southwest of Banff, in
Scotland. The name morion is given to nearly black varieties.
Milky. Milk-white and nearly opaque. Luster often greasy.
Siderite, or Sapphire-quartz. Of indigo or Berlin-blue color; a rare variety.
Sagenitic. Inclosing acicular crystals of rutile. Other included minerals in acicular
forms are: black tourmaline; gothite; stibnite; asbestus; actinolite; hornblende; epidote.
Cat's-eye exhibits opalescence, but without prismatic colors, especially when cut en ca-
bochon, an effect sometimes due to fibers of asbestus. Also present in the siliceous pseudo-
morphs, after crocidolite, called tiger-eye (see crocidolite). The highly-prized Oriental
cat's-eye is a variety of chrysoberyl.
Aventurine. Spangled with scales of mica, hematite, or other mineral.
Impure from the presence of distinct minerals distributed densely through the mass.
The more common kinds are those .in which the impurities are: (a) ferruginous, either red
or yellow, from anhydrous or hydrous iron sesquioxide; (6) chloritic, from some kind of
chlorite; (c) actinolitic; (d) micaceous; (e) arenaceous, or sand.
Containing liquids in cavities. The liquid, usually water (pure, or a mineral solution),
or some petroleum-like compound. Quartz, especially smoky quartz, also often contains
inclusions of both liquid and gaseous carbon dioxide.
B. CRYPTOCRYSTALLINE VARIETIES
Chalcedony. Having the luster nearly of wax, and either transparent or translucent.
G. = 2'6-2'64. Color white, grayish, blue, pale brown to dark brown, black. Also of
other shades, and then having other names. Often mammillary, botryoidal, stalactitic,
and occurring lining or filling cavities in rocks. It often contains some disseminated opal-
silica. The thermal study of chalcedony shows that it differs from quartz and may be
therefore a distinct species. The name enhydros is given to nodules of chalcedony con-
taining water, sometimes in large amount. Embraced under the general name chalcedony
is the crystalline form of silica which forms concretionary masses with radial-fibrous and
concentric structure, and which, as shown by Rosenbusch, is optically negative, unlike true
quartz. It has n = 1*537; G. = 2'59-2'64. Often in spherulites, showing the spheru-
litic interference-figure Lussatite of Mallard has a like structure, but is optically
. + and
has the specific gravity and refractive index of opal. It may be a fibrous form of tridymite.
See also quartzine, p. 407.
Carnelian. Sard. A clear red chalcedony, pale to deep in shade; also brownish red
to brown.
Chrysoprase. An apple-green chalcedony, the color due to nickel oxide.
Prase. Translucent and dull leek-green.
Plasma. Rather bright green to leek-green, and also sometimes nearly emerald-green,
and subtranslucent or feebly translucent. Heliotrope, or Blood-stone, is the same stone
essentially, with small spots of red jasper, looking like drops of blood.
Agate. A variegated chalcedony. The colors are either (a) banded; or (6) irregu-
larly clouded or (c) due to visible impurities as in moss agate, which has brown moss-like
;
or dendritic forms, as of manganese oxide, distributed through the mass. The bands are
delicate parallel lines, of white, pale and dark brown, bluish and other shades; they are
sometimes straight, more often waving or zigzag, and occasionally concentric circular.
The bands- are the edges of layers of deposition, the agate having been formed by a deposit
of silica from solutions intermittently supplied, in irregular cavities in rocks, and deriving
their concentric waving courses from the irregularities of the walls of the cavity. The
layers differ in porosity, and therefore agates may
be varied in color by artificial means,
and this is done now to a large extent with the agates cut for ornament. There is also
agatized wood; wood petrified with clouded agate.
Onyx. Like agate in consisting of layers of different colors, white and black, white and
red, etc., but the layers in even planes, and the banding straight, and hence its use for
cameos.
Sardonyx. Like onyx in structure, but includes layers of carnelian (sard) along with
others of white or whitish, and brown, and sometimes black colors.
Agate-jasper. An agate consisting of jasper with veinings of chalcedony.
Siliceous -sinter. Irregularly cellular quartz, formed by deposition from waters con-
taining silica or soluble silicates in solution. See also under opal, p. 408.
Flint. Somewhat allied to chalcedony, but more opaque, and of dull colors, usually
gray, smoky, brown, and brownish black. The exterior is often whitish, from mixture with
lime or chalk, in which it is embedded. Luster barely glistening, subvitreous. Breaks
with a deeply conchoidal fracture, and a sharp cutting edge. The flint of the chalk forma-
tion consists largely of the remains of diatoms, sponges, and other marine productions.
The coloring matter of the common kind is mostly carbonaceous matter. Flint implements
play an important part among the relics of early man.
Hornstone. Resembles flint, but is more brittle, the fracture more splintery. Chert
is a term often applied to hornstone, and to any impure flinty rock, including the jaspers.
Basanite; Lydian Stone, or Touchstone. A velvet-black siliceous stone or flinty jasper,
used on account of its hardness and black color for trying the purity of the precious metals.
The color left on the stone after rubbing the metal across it indicates to the experienced
eye the amount of alloy. It is not splintery like hornstone.
Jasper. Impure opaque. colored quartz; commonly red, also yellow, dark green and
grayish blue. Striped or riband jasper has the colors in broad stripes. Porcelain jasper is
nothing but .baked clay, and differs from true jasper in being B.B. fusible on the edges.
C. Besides the above there are also:
Granular Quartz, Quartz-rock, or Quartzite. A rock consisting of quartz grains very
firmly compacted; the grains often hardly distinct. Quartzose Sandstone, Quartz-con*
glomerate. A rock made of pebbles of quartz with sand. The pebbles sometimes are
jasper and chalcedony, and make a beautiful stone when polished. Itacolumite, or Flexible
Sandstone. A friable sand-rock, consisting mainly of quartz-sand, but containing a little
mica, and possessing a degree of flexibility when in thin laminae. Buhrstone, or Burrstone.
A cellular, flinty rock, having the nature in part of coarse chalcedony.
Pseudomorphous Quartz. Quartz appears also under the forms of many of the mineral
species, which it has taken through either the alteration or replacement of crystals of those
species. The most common quartz pseudomorphs are those of calcite, barite, fluorite, and
siderite. Silicified wood is quartz pseudomorph after wood (p. 326).
Pyr., etc. B.B. unaltered; with borax dissolves slowly to a clear glass; with soda
dissolves with effervescence; unacted upon by salt of phosphorus. Insoluble in hydro-
chloric acid, and only slightly acted upon by solutions of fixed caustic
alkalies, the crypto-
crystalline varieties to the greater extent. Soluble only in hydrofluoric acid. When fused
and cooled it becomes opal-silica having G. = 2'2.
Diff. Characterized in crystals by the form, glassy luster, and absence of cleavage;
also in general by hardness and inf
usibility.
Micro. Easily recognized in rock sections by its low refraction (" low relief," p. 212)
and low birefringence (e - co = 0'009); the interference colors in good sections not
rising
above yellow of the first order; also by its limpidity and the positive uniaxial cross
yielded
by basal sections (p. 270, note), which remain dark when revolved between crossed nicols.
Commonly in formless grains (granite), also with crystal outline (porphyry, etc.).
Obs. Quartz is an essential component of certain igneous rocks, as granite, granite-
porphyry quartz-porphyry and rhyolite in the granite group; in such rocks it is com-
nonly in tormless grains or masses filling the interstices between the feldspar, as the last
product of crystallization. Further it is an essential constituent in
quartz-diorite, quartz-
diorite porphyry and dacites in the diorite
group; in the porphyries frequently in distinct
crystals. It occurs also as an accessory in other such as syenite
feldspathic igneous
and trachyte. Among the metamorphic rocks it is an essential rocks,
component of certain
varieties of gneiss, of quartzite, etc. It forms the mass of common sandstone. It occurs
as the vein-stone m various rocks, and forms a large part of mineral
veins; as a foreign min-
OXIDES 407
eral insome limestones, etc., making geodes of crystals, or of chalcedony, agate, carnelian,
etc.; asembedded nodules or masses in various limestones, constituting the flint of the Chalk
formation, the hornstone of other limestones these nodules sometimes becoming con-
tinuous layers; as masses of jasper occasionally in limestone. It is the principal material
of the pebbles of gravel-beds, and of the sands of the seashore, and sandbeds everywhere.
In graphic granite (pegmatite) the quartz individuals are arranged in parallel position in
feldspar, the angular particles resembling written characters. The quartz grains in a
fragmental sandstone are often found to have undergone a secondary growth by the depo-
sition of crystallized silica with like orientation to the original nucleus. From a general
study of the chemical and mineralogical character of the rocks of the earth's crust it has
been estimated that quartz forms about twelve per cent of their constituents.
Switzerland; Dauphine, France; Piedmont, Italy; the Carrara quarries, Italy; and
numerous other foreign localities afford fine specimens of rock crystal; also Japan, from
which are cut the beautiful crystal spheres, in rare cases up to 6 inches in diameter; also
interesting twin crystals from Kai, Japan; Bourg d'Oisans, Dauphine, France. Smoky
quartz crystals of great beauty, and often highly complex in form, occur at many points in
the central Alps, also at Cairngorm, Scotland. The most beautiful amethysts are brought
from India, Ceylon, and Persia, Nova Scotia, Brazil, Guanajuato, Mexico; inferior speci-
mens occur in Transylvania. The finest carnelians and agates are found in Arabia, India,
Brazil, Uruguay, Surinam, also formerly at Oberstein and Saxony. Scotland affords
smaller but handsome specimens (Scotch pebbles). The banks of the Nile afford the
Egyptian jasper; the striped jasper is met with in Siberia, Saxony, and Devonshire.
In N. Y., quartz crystals are abundant in Herkimer Co., at Middleville, Little Falls,
etc., loose in cavities hi the Calciferous sand-rock, or embedded in loose earth. Fine
quartzoids, at the beds of hematite in Fowler, Herman, and Edwards, St. Lawrence Co.,
also at Antwerp, Jefferson Co. On the banks of Laidlaw Lake, Rossie, large implanted
crystals; at Ellenville lead mine, Ulster Co., in fine groups. At Paris, Me., handsome
crystals of brown or smoky quartz. Beautiful colorless crystals occur at Hot Springs,
Ark. Alexander Co., N. C., has afforded great numbers of highly complex crystals, with
rare modifications. Fine crystals of smoky quartz come from the granite of the Pike's
Peak region, Col. Geodes of quartz crystals, also enclosing calcite, sphalerite, etc., are
common in the Keokuk limestone of the west.
Rose quartz occurs at Hebron, Albany, Paris, Me. ; Acworth, N. H. Southbury, Conn. ;
;
Custer Co., S. D. Amethyst, in trap, at Keweenaw Point, Lake Superior; Specimen Mt.,
Yellowstone Park; Jefferson Co., Mon.; in Pa., at East Bradford, Chester, and Provi-
dence (one fine crystal over 7 Ibs. in weight), in Chester Co.; at the Prince vein, Lake
Superior; large crystals, near Greensboro, N. C.; crystallized green quartz, in talc, at
Providence, Delaware Co., Pa. Chalcedony and agates abundant and beautiful on north-
west shore of Lake Superior. Red jasper is found on Sugar Loaf Mt., Me.; in pebbles on
the banks of the Hudson at Troy, N. Y.; yellow, with chalcedony, at Chester, Mass.
Agatized and jasperized wood of great beauty and variety of color is obtained from the
petrified forest called Chalcedony Park, near Carrizo, Apache Co., Ariz.; also from the
Yellowstone Park; near Florissant and elsewhere in Col.; Amethyst Mt., Utah; Napa
Co., Cal. Moss agates from Humboldt Co., Nev., and many other points.
The word quartz is of German provincial origin. Agate is from the name of the river
Achates, in Sicily, whence specimens were brought, as stated by Theophrastus.
Use. In its various colored forms as ornamental material; for abrading purposes;
manufacture of porcelain, of glass; as wood filler; in paints, scouring soaps, etc.; as sand
in mortars and Cements; as quartzite, sandstone, etc., for building stone, etc.; as an acid
flux in certain smelting operations.
QUARTZINE is a name which has been given to a form of silica which is present in
chalcedony and is inferred to be triclinic in crystalline structure. Lutecite belongs here.
TRIDYMITE.
Hexagonal or pseudo-hexagonal. Axis c
= 1*6530. Crystals usually
minute, thin tabular c(0001); often in twins; also united in fan-shaped
||
groups.
Cleavage: prismatic, not distinct; parting c, sometimes observed. Frac-
1 1
ture conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 7. G. = 2*28-2*33. Luster vitreous, on c

pearly. Colorless to white. Transparent. Optically +. co
= 1*477. e =
1'479. Often exhibits anomalous refraction phenomena.
Comp. Pure silica, SiO 2 like quartz.

,
Tridymite is formed above 800 C. See further under Quartz, p. 403.

Pyr., etc. Like quartz, but soluble in boiling sodium carbonate.
Obs. Occurs chiefly in acidic volcanic rocks, rhyolite, trachyte, andesite, liparite,
less often in dolerite;usually in cavities, often associated with sanidine, also hornblende,
augite, hematite; sometimes in opal. First observed in crevices and druses in an augite-
andesite from the Cerro San Cristobal, near Pachuca, Mexico; later proved to be rather
generally distributed. Thusin trachyte of the Siebengebirge, Germany; of Euganean
Hills in northern Italy; Puy Capucin (Mont-Dore) in Central France, etc. In the ejected
masses from Vesuvius consisting chiefly of sanidine. In the lavas of Mt. Etna, Sicily, and
Mt. Pelee, Martinique. From Kibosan, Prov. Higo, Japan. With quartz, feldspar,
fayalite in lithophyses of Obsidian cliff, Yellowstone Park. In the andesite of Mt. Rainier,
Washington.
Named from rpiSu/zos, threefold, in allusion to the common occurrence in trillings.
ASMANITE. A form of silica found in the meteoric iron of Breitenbach, in. very minute
grains, probably identical with tridymite; by some referred to the orthorhombic system.
CRISTOBALITE. Christobalite. Silica in white octahedrons (pseudo-isometric?). G. =
2'27. n = 1*486. With tridymite in andesite of the Cerro S. Cristobal, Pachuca, Mexico,
Also noted in lava at May en, Germany, and in meteorites. For thermal relations to quartz
and tridymite see under quartz, p. 403.
MELANOPHLOGITE. In minute cubes and spherical aggregates. Occurring with calcite
and celestite implanted upon an incrustation of opaline silica over the sulphur crystals of
Girgenti, Sicily. Consists of SiO2 with 5 to 7 p. c. of S0 3 perhaps SiO 2 with SiS 2
, The .
mineral turns black superficially when heated B.B.

OPAL.
Amorphous. Massive; sometimes small reniform, stalactitic, or large
tuberose. Also earthy.
H. = 5-5-6-5. G. = 1-9-2-3; when pure 2-1-2-2. Luster vitreous, fre-
quently subvitreous; often inclining to resinous, and sometimes to pearly.
Color white, yellow, red, brown, green, gray, blue, generally pale; dark colors
arise from foreign admixtures; sometimes a rich play of colors, or different
colors by refracted and reflected light. Streak white. Transparent to nearly
opaque, n = 1-44-1-45.
Often shows double refraction similar to that observed in colloidal substances due to
tension. The cause of the play of color in the precious opal was investigated by Brewster,
who ascribed it to the presence of microscopic cavities. Behrends, however, has given a
monograph on the subject (Ber. Ak. Wien, 64 (1), 1871), and has shown that this explana-
tion is incorrect; he refers the colors to thin curved lamellae of
opal whose refractive power
may differ by O'l from that of the mass. These are conceived to have been originally
formed in parallel position, but have been changed, bent, and finally cracked and broken
in the solidification of the groundmass.
Comp. Silica, like quartz, with a varying amount of water, Si02 .nH 2 0.
The water is sometimes regarded as non-essential.
The opal condition is one of lower degrees of hardness and specific gravity, and, as
generally believed, of incapability of crystallization. The water present varies from 2 to 13
p. c. or more, but mostly from 3 to 9 p. c. Small quantities of ferric oxide, alumina, lime
magnesia, and alkalies are usually present as impurities.
Var. Precious Opal Exhibits a play of delicate colors.
Fire-opal Hyacinth-red to honey-yellow colors, with fire-like reflections, somewhat
insed on turning.
Gir'asol. Bluish white, translucent, with reddish reflections in a
bright light.
Common Opal In part translucent; (a) milk-opal, milk-white to
greenish, yellowish,
bluish; (6) Resin-opal, wax-, honey- to ocher-yellow, with a resinous luster; (c) dull olive-
green and mountain-green (d) brick-red.
; Includes Semiopal; (e) Hydrophane, a variety
which becomes more translucent or transparent in water.
Cacholong. Opaque, bluish white, porcelain-white, pale yellowish or reddish.
Upal-agate. Agate-like in structure, but consisting of opal of different shades of color.
Memlite. In concretionary forms; opaque, dull
grayish.
OXIDES 409
Jasp-opal. Opal-jasper. Opal containing some yellow iron oxide and other impurities,
and having the color of yellow jasper, with the luster of common opal.
Wood-opal. Wood petrified by opal.
Hyalite. Muller's Glass. Clear as glass and colorless, constituting globular concre-
tions, and crusts with a globular or botryoidal surface; also passing into translucent, and
whitish. Less readily dissolved in caustic alkalies than other varieties.
Schaumopal. A
porous variety from the Virunga district, German East Africa.
Fiorite, Siliceous Sinter. Includes translucent to opaque, grayish, whitish or brownish
incrustations, porous, to firm in texture; sometimes fibrous-like or filamentous, and, when
so, pearly in luster (then called Pearl-sinter)', deposited from the siliceous. waters of hot
springs.
Geyserite. Constitutes concretionary deposits about the geysers of the Yellowstone
Park, Iceland, and New Zealand, _presenting white or grayish, porous, stalactitic, fila-
s
mentous, cauliflower-like forms, often of great beauty: also compact-massive, and scaly-
massive.
Float-stone. In light porous concretionary masses, white or grayish, sometimes
cavernous, rough in fracture.
Tripolite. Formed from the siliceous shells of diatoms (hence called diatomite) and
other microscopic species, and occurring in extensive deposits. Includes Infusorial Earth,
or Earthy Tripolite, a very fine-grained earth looking often like an earthy chalk, or a clay,
but harsh to the feel, and scratching glass when rubbed on it.
Pyr., etc. Yields water. B.B. infusible, but becomes opaque. Some yellow vari-
eties, containing iron oxide, turn red. Soluble in hydrofluoric acid somewhat more readily
than quartz; also soluble in caustic alkalies, but more readily in some varieties than in
others.
Obs. Occurs filling cavities and fissures or seams in igneous rocks, as trachyte, por-
phyry, where it has probably resulted from the action of hot, magmatic waters upon the
silicates of the rocks, the liberated silica being deposited in the cavities in the form of opal.
Also in some metallic veins. Also embedded, like flint, in limestone, and sometimes,
like other quartz concretions, in argillaceous beds; formed from the siliceous waters of
some hot springs; often resulting from the mere accumulation, or accumulation and partial
solution and solidification, of the siliceous shells of infusoria, of sponge spicules, etc., which
consist essentially of opal-silica. The last mentioned is the probable source of the opal
of limestones and argillaceous beds (as it is of flint in the same rocks), and of part of that
in igneous rocks. It exists in most chalcedony and flint.
Precious opal occurs in porphyry at Czerwenitza, near Kashau in Hungary; at Gracias
a Dios in Honduras; Queretaro in Mexico; a beautiful blue opal on Bulla Creek, Queens-
land; from White Cliffs, New South Wales, as filling openings in sandstone, in fossil wood,
in the material of various fossil shells and bones and in aggregates of radiating pseudo-
morphic crystals. Fire-opal occurs at Zimapan in Mexico; the Faroe Islands; near San
Antonio, Honduras. Gem opal, often of "black opal" type, comes from Humboldt Co.,
Nev. Common opal is abundant at Telkebanya in Hungary; near Pernstein, etc., in
Moravia; in Bohemia; Stenzelberg in Siebengebirge, Germany; in Iceland. Hyalite
occurs in amygdaloid at Schemnitz, Hungary; in clinkstone at Waltsch, Bohemia; at San
Luis Potosi, Mexico; Kamloops, British Columbia.
In the United States, hyalite occurs sparingly in connection with the trap rock of N. J.
and Conn. A water-worn specimen of fire-opal has been found on the John Davis river,
in Crook Co., Ore.
Common opal is found at Cornwall, Lebanon Co., Pa.; at Aquas Calientes, Idaho
Springs, Col.; a white variety at Mokelumne Hill, Calaveras Co., Cal., and on the Mt.
Diablo range. Geyserite occurs in great abundance and variety in the Yellowstone region
(cf. above); also siliceous sinter at Steamboat Springs, Nev.
Use. In the colored varieties as a highly prized gem-stone.
II. Oxides of the Semi-Metals; also Molybdenum, Tungsten

Arsenolite. Arsenic trioxide, As2Os. In isometric octahedrons; in crusts and earthy.
Colorless or white. G. = 37. n = 1755. Occurs with arsenical ores.
Claudetite. Also As2 O 3 but monoclinic in form. In thin plates.
,
Senarmontite. Antimony trioxide. Sb2 O 3 In isometric octahedrons; hi crusts and

.
granular massive. G. = 5;3. Colorless, grayish, n

= 2 087. Occurs with ores of anti-
P
mony. From Algeria; South Ham, Quebec.

Valentinite. Sb 2 O 3 ,
in prismatic orthorhombic crystals. Index = 2-34. From South
Ham, Quebec.
Bismite. Bismuth trioxide, Bi2 3 O
Pulverulent, earthy; color straw-yellow. From
.
Goldfield, Nevada, in minute silvery white, pearly scales that are hexagonal, rhombo-
hedral; optically Analyses of a number of so-called bismites show them to be bis-
.
muth hydroxide or other compounds.

Tellurite. Tellurium dioxide, TeO 2 In white to yellow slender prismatic crystals.
.
Molybdite. Molybdenum trioxide, MoO 3 In capillary tufted forms and earthy.

.
Color straw-yellow. Analyses of molybdic ocher from various localities show it to be not
the oxide but a hydrous ferric molybdate, Fe 2 O 3 .3MO3.7H 2 O. Indices, 178-1 '90.
Tungstite. Tungsten trioxide, 3 WO
Pulverulent, earthy; color yellow or yellowish
.
green. Indices, 2'09-2'26. Analysis of tungstic ocher from Salmo, B. C., prove it to
have the composition WO
3 .H 2 O; perhaps identical with meymacite (a hydrated tungstic
oxide from Meymac, Correze, France).
Cervantite. Sb 2O 3 .Sb 2O 6 In yellow. to white acicular crystals; also massive, pul-
verulent.
Stibiconite. H Sb O
2 2 6. Massive, compact. Color pale yellow to yellowish white.
Index, 1-83.
HI. Oxides of the Metals

ANHYDROUS OXIDES
A.
I. Protoxides, R2 O and RO.
H. Sesquioxides, RÔa.
ii in
m. Intermediate, RR-A or RO.RgOg, etc.
IV. Dioxides, RO 2.
The Anhydrous Oxides include, as shown above, three distinct divisions,

the Protoxides, the Sesquioxides and the Dioxides. The remaining Inter-
mediate division embraces a number of oxygen compounds which are properly
to be regarded chemically as salts of certain acids (aluminates, ferrates, etc.) ;
here is included the well-characterized SPINEL GROUP.
Among the Protoxides the only distinct group is the PERICLASE GROUP,
which includes the rare species Periclase, MgO, Manganosite, MnO, and
Bunsenite, NiO. All of these are isometric in crystallization.
The Sesquioxides include the well-characterized HEMATITE GROUP, R 2 O 3 ,
The Dioxides include the prominent RUTILE GROUP, R0 2 Both of these .
groups are further defined later.
I. 'Protoxides, RaO and RO

CUPRITE. Red Copper Ore.
Isometric-plagiohedral. Commonly in octahedrons; also in cubes and

dodecahedrons, often highly modified. Plagiohedral faces sometimes distinct
(see p. 71). At times in capillary crystals. Also massive, granular; some-
times earthy.
Cleavage: o(lll) interrupted. Fracture conchoidal, uneven. Brittle.
H. = 3*5-4. G. = 5'85-6*15. Luster adamantine or submetallic to
earthy.
Color red, of various shades,
particularly cochineal-red, sometimes almost
black; occasionally crimson-red by transmitted light. Streak several shades
of brownish red,
shining. Subtransparent to subtranslucent. Refractive
index, n = 2*849.
OXIDES 411
Var. 1. Ordinary,
Crystallized;
(a) commonly in octahedrons, dodecahedrons,
cubes, and intermediate forms; the crystals often with a crust of malachite; (6) massive.
2. Capillary; Chalcotrichite. Plush Copper Ore. In cap-
illary or acicular crystallizations, which are sometimes cubes
elongated in the direction of the cubic axis.
3. Earthy; Tile Ore. Brick-red or reddish brown and
earthy, often mixed with red oxide of iron; sometimes nearly
black. ,
Comp. Cuprous oxide, Cu2O = Oxygen 11*2,

copper 88'8 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Unaltered in the closed tube. B.B. hi the

forceps fuses and colors the flame emerald-green. On char-
coal first blackens, then fuses, and is reduced to metallic
copper. With the fluxes gives reactions for copper. Soluble
in concentrated hydrochloric acid, and a strong solution when Arizona
cooled and diluted with cold water yields a heavy, white
precipitate of cuprous chloride.
Diff . Distinguished from hematite by inferior hardness, but is harder than cinnabar
and proustite and differs from them in the color of "the streak; reactions for copper, B.B.,
are conclusive.
Micro. In polished sections shows white with shining surface, usually pitted. With
oblique illumination, transparent deep red. With HNO
3 instantly plated with metallic
copper which blackens and dissolves. On drying a thin film of copper remains. With HC1
darkens and is coated with white, seen by oblique light.
Obs. Cuprite is a mineral of secondary origin. It is often formed as a furnace prod-
uct and has been rioted as a coating upon ancient copper or bronze objects. Occurs at
Kamsdorf in Thuringia; in Cornwall, in fine crystals, at Wheal Gorland and other mines;
in Devonshire near Tavistock; in isolated crystals, more or less altered to malachite, at
Chessy, near Lyons, France; in the Ural Mts.; South Australia; also abundant in Chile,
Peru, Bolivia.
In the United States observed at Somerville, etc., N. J.; at Cornwall, Lebanon Co.,
Pa.; in the. Lake Superior region. From Ariz, with malachite, limonite, etc., at the Cop-
per Queen mine, Bisbee, sometimes in fine crystals; beautiful chalcotrichite at Morenci;
at Clifton, Graham Co., in crystals, and massive.
Ice. H
2 O. Hexagonal. Familiarly known in six-rayed snow crystals; also coating
ponds in whiter, further as glaciers and icebergs.
Periclase Group
Periclase. In cubes or octahedrons, and in grains. Cleavage cubic'.
Magnesia, MgO.
H. =6. G. = 3'67-3'90. n = 174. Artif. Crystallized from a melt containing magne-
sium chloride and silica. Occurs in white limestone at Mte. Somma, Vesuvius; at the
Kitteln manganese mine, Nordmark, Sweden.
Manganosite Manganese protoxide, MnO. In isometric octahedrons. Cleavage
cubic. H. = 5-o. G. = 5'18. n = 2'18. Color emerald-green, becoming black on ex-
posure. From Langban and Nordmark, Sweden; Franklin Furnace, N. J.
Bunsenite. Nickel protoxide, NiO. In green octahedrons. From Johanngeorgen-
stadt, Germany.
Cadmium oxide. Isometric. In minute octahedrons. Forms a thin coating of black
color and brilliant metallic luster upon calamine from Monte Poni, Sardinia. Also formed
artificially.
ZINCITE. Red Oxide of Zinc.
Axis c = 1*5870. Natural crystals rare (Fig.

Hexagonal-hemimprphic.
44, p. 22) ; usually foliated massive, or in coarse particles and grains; also with
granular structure.
Cleavage: c(0001) perfect; prismatic, sometimes distinct. Fracture sub-

conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 4-4'5. G. = 5-43-57. Luster subadamantine.
Streak orange-yellow. Color deep red, also orange-yellow. Translucent to
subtranslucent. Optically +.
Comp. Zinc oxide, ZnO = Oxygen 197, zinc 80*3 = 100. Manga-
nese protoxide is sometimes present.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible; with the fluxes, on the platinum wire, gives reactions for
manganese, and on charcoal in R.F. gives a coating of zinc oxide, yellow while hot, and
white on cooling. The coating, moistened with cobalt solution and treated in O.F., as-
sumes a green color. Soluble in acids.
Diff. Characterized by its color, particularly that of the streak; by cleavage; by
reactions B.B.
Artif. Zincite is often formed as a furnace product. It is also produced when zinc
chloride and water vapor act upon lime at red heat.
Obs. Occurs with franklinite and willemite, at Sterling Hill near Ogdensburg, and at
Mine Hill, Franklin Furnace, Sussex Co., N. J., sometimes in -lamellar masses in pink
calcite. Has been reported from Poland. A not uncommon furnace product.
Use.' An ore of zinc.
Massicot. Lead monoxide, PbO. Massive, scaly or earthy. Color yellow, reddish.
Probably orthorhombic. Index, 1735. Optically.
Tenorite. Cupric oxide, CuO. In minute black scales with metallic luster; from
Vesuvius. Also black earthy massive (melaconite) occurring with ores of copper as at
;
Ducktown, Tenn., and Keweenaw Point, Lake Superior. Pitchy black material asso-
ciated with cuprite, chrysocolla and malachite from Bisbee, Ariz., has been called melano-
chaldte.
Paramelaconite is essentially cupric oxide, CuO, occurring in black pyramidal crystals
referred to the tetragonal system. From the Copper Queen mine, Bisbee, Ariz.
Orthorhombic. In minute highly modified crystals. H. =
Montroydite. HgO.
T5-2. Color and streak orange-red. Index, 2'55. Volatile. Found at Terlingua, Tex.
Hematite Group. R 2 3. Rhombohedral

rr' c
Corundum A12 3 93 56' 1*3630
Hematite Fe 2 O 3 94 0' 1*3656
Ilmenite (Fe,Mg)O.Ti0 2 Tri-rhombohedral 94 29' 1*3846
MnO.Ti02 "
Pyrophanite 94 5J' 1'3692
The HEMATITE GROUP embraces the sesquioxides of aluminium and iron.

These compounds crystallize in the rhombohedral class, hexagonal system,
with a fundamental rhombohedron differing but little in
angle from a cube.
Both the minerals belonging here, Hematite and Corundum, are hard.
To these species the titanates of iron (and magnesium) and manganese,
Ilmenite and Pyrophanite, are closely related in form
though belonging to the
tri-rhombohedral class (phenacite type) in other words, the relation between
;
hematite and ilmenite may be regarded as

analogous to that between calcite
and dolomite. It is to be noted, further, that hematite often contains tita-
nium, and an artificial isomorphous compound, Ti 2 3 has been described. ,
Hence the ground for writing the formula of ilmenite

(Fe,Ti) 2 O 3 as is done by ,
some authors. It is shown by Penfield,

however, that the formula (Fe,Mg)Ti0 2
is more correct.
OXIDES 413
CORUNDUM.
Rhombohedral. Axisc = 1-3630.
694 695 697
cr, 0001 A 1011 = 57 34'

en, 0001 A 2243 = 6l 11'
rr' 1011 A 1101 = 93 56'
nn', 2243 A 2423 = 51 58'
w', 4483 A 4843 = 57 38'
zz', 2241 A 2421 = 58 55'
Twins: tw. pi. r(10ll), sometimes penetration-twins; often polysynthetic,

and thus producing a laminated structure. Crystals usually rough and
rounded. Also massive, with nearly rectangular parting or pseudo-cleavage;
granular, coarse or fine.
Parting: c(0001), sometimes perfect, but interrupted; also r(1011) due
to twinning, often prominent; a(1120) less distinct. Fracture uneven to
conchoidal. Brittle, when compact very tough. H. =9. G. = 3-95-4-10.
Luster adamantine to vitreous; on c sometimes pearly. Occasionally show-
ing asterism. Color blue, red, yellow, brown, gray, and nearly white; streak
uncolored. Pleochroic in deeply colored varieties. Transparent to trans-
lucent. Normally uniaxial, negative; for sapphire co = 17676 to 1*7682 and
e = 17594 to 17598. Often abnormally biaxial.
Var. There are three subdivisions of the species prominently recognized in the arts,
but differing only in purity and state of crystallization or structure.
VAR. 1. SAPPHIRE, RUBY. Includes the purer kinds of fine colors, transparent to
translucent, useful as gems. Stones are named according to their colors: Sapphire blue;
true Ruby, or Oriental Ruby, red; Oriental Topaz, yellow; Oriental Emerald, green; Oriental
Amethyst, purple. The term sapphire is also often used as a general term to indicate corun-
dum gems of any color except red. A variety having a stellate opalescence when viewed in
the direction of the vertical axis of the crystal is the Asteriated Sapphire or Star Sapphire.
2. CORUNDUM. Includes the kinds of dark or dull colors and not transparent, colors
light blue to gray, brown, and black. The original adamantine spar from India has a dark
grayish smoky brown tint, but greenish or bluish by transmitted light, when translucent.
3. EMERY. Includes granular corundum, of black or grayish black color, and contains
magnetite or hematite intimately mixed. Sometimes associated with iron spinel or hercy-
nite. Feels and looks much like a black fine-grained iron ore, which it was long considered
to be. There are gradations from the evenly fine-grained emery to kinds in which the corun-
dum is in distinct crystals.
Comp. Alumina, A1 2 3 = Oxygen 47' 1, aluminium 52'9 = 100. The

O
crystallized varieties are essentially pure; analyses of emery show more or less
impurity, chiefly magnetite.
Artif Crystallized corundum has been produced artificially in a number of differ-
.
ent ways. Alumina dissolved in molten sodium sulphide, in a fused mixture of a fluoride
and potassium carbonate or in fused lead oxide, will separate out as crystallized corundum.
Gem material has been produced in this way, colored red, with a chromium salt, or blue
in an electric
by cobalt. Crystallized material can also be produced by fusing alumina
arc. The artificial abrasive, alundum, is made by heating bauxite to 5000-6000 in an
electric furnace. Pear-shaped drops of gem material are made by fusing together small
fragments of natural or artificial stones. Gems cut from them are known as. "recon-
"
structed stones and have the crystalline and other physical properties of the natural
mineral.
Pyr., etc. B.B. unaltered; slowly dissolved in borax and salt of phosphorus to a
clear glass, which is colorless when free from iron; not acted upon by soda. The finely
pulverized mineral, after long heating with cobalt solution, gives a beautiful blue color.
Not acted upon by acids, but converted into a soluble compound by fusion with potassium
bisulphate.
Diff. Characterized by hardness (scratching quartz and topaz), by its adaman-
its
tine luster, high specific gravity and
infusibility. The massive variety with rhombohedral
parting resembles cleavable feldspar but is much harder and denser.
Micro, In thin sections appears nearly colorless with high relief and low interfer-
ence colors.
Obs. Usually occurs in crystalline rocks, as granular limestone or dolomite, gneiss,
granite, mica slate, chlorite slate. The associated minerals often include some species of
the chlorite group, as prochlorite, corundophilite, margarite, also tourmaline, spinel,
cyanite, diaspore, and a series of aluminous minerals, in part produced from its alteration.
Occasionally found as an original constituent of igneous rocks containing high percentages
of alumina. In the Ural Mts. are found an anorthite rock containing nearly 60 per cent of
corundum, a corundum syenite with 18 per cent, and a pegmatite with 35 per cent. A
corundum anorthosite and corundum syenites are found in Canada. Important deposits
of corundum in North Carolina and Georgia are associated with dunite rocks. Rarely
observed as a contact-mineral. The fine sapphires are usually obtained from the beds of
rivers, either in modified hexagonal prisms or in rolled masses, accompanied by grains of
magnetite, and several kinds of gems, as spinel, etc. The emery of Asia Minor occurs in
granular limestone.
The best rubies come from the mines in Upper Burma, north of Mandalay, in an area
covering 25 to 30 square miles, of which Mogok is the center. The rubies occur in situ in
crystalline limestone, also in the soil of the hillsides and in gem-bearing gravels of the Irra-
waddy River. Blue sapphires are brought from Ceylon from the Ratnapura and Rakwena
districts, often as rolled pebbles, also as well-preserved crystals. Corundum occurs in the
Carnatic on the Malabar coast, on the Chantibun hills in Siam, and elsewhere in the East
Indies; also near Canton, China; from Naegi, Mino, Japan. At St. Gothard, Switzerland,
it occurs of a red or blue tinge in
dolomite, and near Mozzo in Piedmont, Italy, in white
compact feldspar. Adamantine spar is met within large, coarse, hexagonal pyramids in
Gellivara, Sweden. Other localities are in Bohemia, near Petschau, in Russia, in the
Ilmen mountains, not far from Miask and in the gold-washings northeast of Zlatoust.
Corundum, sapphires, and less often rubies occur in rolled pebbles in the diamond gravels
on the Cudgegong river, at Mudgee and other points in New South Wales. Emery is found
in large bowlders at Naxos, Nicaria, and Samos of the Grecian islands also in Asia Minor,
;
12 m. E. of Ephesus, near Gumuchdagh and near

Smyrna, associated with margarite,
chloritoid, pyrite. ->
In North America, in Mass., at Chester, with magnetite, diaspore, ripidolite, 'mar-
garite, etc., was mined for use as emery. In Conn, near Litchfield. In N. Y., at Warwick,
bluish and pink, with spinel; Amity, in
granular limestone; emery with magnetite and
green spinel (hercynite) in Westchester Co., near Cruger's Station, and elsewhere. In
N. J., at Newton, blue crystals in granular
limestone; at Vernon, at Sparta and elsewhere
in Sussex Co. In Pa., in Delaware Co., in Aston, near Village Green, in large crystals; at
Mineral Hill, in loose crystals; in Chester Co., at
Unionville, abundant in crystals; in large
crystals loose m
the soil at Shimersville, Lehigh Co. In Va., in the mica schists of Bull Mt.,
Patrick Co.
Common at many points along a belt extending from Virginia across western North and
South Carolina and Georgia to
Dudleyville, Alabama; especially in Madison, Buncombe,
Haywood, Jackson, Macon, Clay, and Gaston counties in N. C. The localities at which
most work has been done are the Culsagee mine, Corundum
hill, near Franklin, Macon Co.,
ik
U !
'md 26 miles S E. of this, at Laurel Creek, Ga. The
1
corundum occurs in beds in
chrysolite (and serpentine) and hornblendic gneiss, associated with a species of the chlorite
group, also spinel, etc., and here as elsewhere with many minerals resulting from its altera-
tion. Some fine rubies have been found. Fine pink crystals of corundum occur at Hia-
OXIDES 415
wassee, Towns Co., Ga. In Col., small blue crystals occur in mica schist near
Salida
Chaffee Co. Gem sapphires are found near Helena,
Mon., in gold-washings and in bars in
the Missouri river, especially the Eldorado bar; at
Yogo Gulch on the Judith river and at
other points in the state. 1 hese latter occur embedded in an igneous dike that cuts
through
the limestone formation. In Cat, in Los Angeles Co., in the drift of San
Francisqueto Pals.
In Canada, at Burgess, Ontario, red and blue
crystals; in a syenite from Renfrew Co
Ontario.
Use. Clear varieties of corundum form valuable gem stones as noted above.
Also
formerly largely used as an abrasive; at present various artificial abrasives are mostlv
used instead. *
HEMATITE.
Rhombohedral. Axis c = 1*3656.
cr, 0001 A 1011 = 57 37'. uu', 10T4 A 1104 = 37 2'.
rr', 1011 A 1101 = 94 0'.
nn', 2243 A 2423 = 51 59'.
dd',0112 A 1012 = 64 51'. en, 0001 A 2243 = 61 13'.
Twins: tw. pi. (1) c(0001), penetration-twins; (2) r (0112), less

common,
usually as polysynthetic twin-
ning lamellae, producing a fine 700
striation on c(0001), and giv-
ing rise to a distinct parting
or pseudo-cleavage r(1011). \\
Crystals often thick to thin

tabular c, and grouped in paral-
\
j
lel position or in
rosettes;_c faces
striated edge c/d (0112) and
\\
other forms due to oscillatory combination; also in cube-like rhombohedrons;

rhombohedral faces w(1014) horizontally striated and often rounded over in
701 702 703
convex forms. Also columnar to granular, botryoidal, and stalactitic shapes;

also lamellar, laminae joined parallel to c, and variously bent, thick or thin;
also granular, friable, earthy or compact.
Parting: c(0001), due to lamellar structure; also r(1011), caused by twin-
ning. Fracture subconchoidal to uneven. Brittle in compact forms; elastic
in thin laminae; soft and unctuous in some loosely adherent scaly varieties.
H. = 5'5-6'5. G. = 4'9-5'3; of crystals mostly 5'20-5'25; of some compact
varieties, as low as 4'2. Luster metallic and occasionally splendent; some-
times dull. Color dark steel-gray or iron-black; in very thin particles blood-
red by transmitted light; when earthy, red. Streak cherry-red or reddish
brown. Opaque, except when in very thin laminae.
Var. 1. Specular. Luster metallic, and crystals often splendent, whence the name
specular iron. When the structure is foliated or micaceous, the ore is called micaceous
hematite: some of the micaceous varieties are soft and unctuous. Some varieties are
magnetic, but probably from admixed magnetite (Arts. 441, 443).
2. Compact Columnar; or fibrous. The masses often long radiating; luster submetallic
to metallic; color brownish red to iron-black. Sometimes called red hematite, to contrast it
with limonite and turgite. Often in reniform masses with smooth fracture, called kidney ore.
3. Red Ocherous. Red and earthy. Reddle and red chalk are red ocher, mixed with
more or less clay.
4. Clay Iron-stone; Argillaceous hematite. Hard, brownish black to reddish brown,
often in part deep red; of submetallic to nonmetallic luster; and affording, like all the
iron with clay or sand, and sometimes other
preceding, a red streak. It consists of oxide of
impurities.
Comp. Iron sesquioxide, Fe2 3 = Oxygen 30, iron 70 = 100. Some-

times contains titanium and magnesium, and is thus closely related to ilmenite,
p. 417.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible; on charcoal in R.F. becomes magnetic; with borax gives
the iron reactions. With soda on charcoal in R.F. is reduced to a gray magnetic powder.
Slowly soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Distinguished from magnetite by its red streak, also from limonite by the same
means, as well as by its not containing water: from turgite by its greater hardness and by
not decrepitating B.B. It is hard in all but some micaceous varieties (hence easily dis-
tinguished from the black sulphides); also infusible, and B.B. becomes strongly magnetic.
Micro. In polished sections shows white color with a shining, pitted surface. Un-
affected by
reagents.
Artif . Crystals of hematite have been made by decomposing ferric chloride by steam
at a high temperature; also by the action of heated air and hydrochloric acid upon iron.
Hematite has been crystallized from various artificial magmas, which must contain little
or no ferrous iron.
Obs. This ore occurs in rocks of all ages. The specular variety is mostly confined
to crystalline or metamorphic rocks, but is also a result of igneous action about some vol-
canoes, as at Vesuvius. Many of the geological formations contain the argillaceous variety
or clay iron-stone, which is mostly a marsh-formation, or a deposit over the bottom of
shallow, stagnant water; but this kind of clay iron-stone (that giving a red powder) is
less common than the corresponding variety of limonite. The beds that occur in meta-
morphic rocks are sometimes of very great thickness, and, like those of magnetite in the
same situation, have resulted from the alteration of stratified beds of ore, originally of
marsh origin, which were formed at the same time with the enclosing rocks, and underwent
metamorphism, or a change to the crystalline condition, at the same time.
Beautiful crystallizations of this species are brought from the island of Elba, which has
afforded it from a very remote period; the surfaces of the crystals often present an irised
tarnish and brilliant luster. St. Gothard in Switzerland affords beautiful specimens, com-
posed of crystallized tables grouped in the form of rosettes; near Limoges, France, in large
crystals; fine crystals are the result of volcanic action at Etna and Vesuvius. Arendal in
Norway, Langban and Nordmark in Sweden; Dognacska, Hungary; Framont in Lorraine,
Dauphine, France; Binnental and Tavetsch, Switzerland; also Cleator Moor in Cumber-
land, and Minas Geraes, Brazil, afford splendid specimens. Crystals from Ascension Island
and from Cernero do Campo, Brazil. Red hematite occurs in reniform masses of a fibrous
concentric structure, near Ulverstone in Lancashire, in Saxony, Bohemia, and the Harz
Mts., Germany.
In North America, widely distributed, and sometimes in beds of vast thickness in rocks of
the Archaean age. Very extensive and important hematite deposits are found along the
southern and northwestern shores of Lake Superior. The various districts are known as
ranges and are located as follows The Marquette and Menominee Ranges in northern Mich.,
:
the Penokee-Gogebic Northern Wis., the Mesabi, Vermilion and Cuyuna Ranges
Range in
in Minn. Another the Michipico en, is farther north in Canada. The ore bodies
district,
are the results of the concentration in favorable localities of the iron content of the
original
sedimentary rocks. These rocks contained cherty iron carbonates, pyrite-bearmg iron
carbonates and ferrous silicates. The ore bodies vary widely in form, many of them
lying
in trough-like structures formed
by the deformation of an impervious rock strata. The
character of the ores varies from hard specular hematites to soft ores. The latter
earthy
are often mined by the use of steam shovels. Hematite is found in Wyoming in schist
formations in Lararnie and Carbon Counties.
In N. Y., in Oneida, Herkimer,
Madison, Wayne Cos., a lenticular argillaceous variety,
constituting one or two beds in the Clinton group of the Upper Silurian; the same in Pa.,
and as far south as Ala., and in Canada, and Wis., to the west; in Ala. there are extensive
OXIDES 417
beds; prominent mines are near Birmingham. Besides these regions of enormous beds,
there are numerous others of workable value, either crystallized or argillaceous. Some of
these localities, interesting for their specimens, are in northern N. Y., at Gouverneur,
Antwerp, Hermon, Edwards, Fowler, Canton, etc.; Woodstock and Aroostoqk, Me.; at
Hawley, Mass., a micaceous variety; in N. and S. C. a micaceou variety in schistose rocks,
constituting the so-called specular schist, or itabirite. Hematite is mined in Nova Scotia
and Newfoundland.
Named hematite from cuâ, blood.
Use. The most important iron ore. Used also in red paints, as polishing rouge, etc.
MARTITE. Iron sesquioxide under an isometric form, occurring in octahedrons or
dodecahedrons like magnetite, and believed to be pseudomorphous after magnetite; perhaps
in part also after pyrite. Parting octahedral like magnetite. Fracture conchoidal. H. =
6^7. G. = 4 '8-5*3. Luster submetallic. Color iron-black, sometimes with a bronzed tar-
nish. Streak reddish brown or purplish brown. Not magnetic, or only feebly so. The
crystals are sometimes embedded in the massive sesquioxide. They are distinguished from
magnetite by the red streak, and very feeble, if any, action on the magnetic needle. Found
in the Marquette iron region south of Lake Superior, where crystals are common in the ore;
Monroe, N. Y.; Twin Peaks, Milliard Co., Utah; Digby Co., N. S.; at the Cerro de Mer-
cado, Durango, Mexico, in large octahedrons; in the schists of Minas Gera s, Brazil; near
Rittersgriin, Saxony.
ILMENITE or MENACCANITE. Titanic Iron Ore.
Tri-rhombohedral; Axis c = 1'3846.

cr, 0001 A 1011 = 57 58*'.
rr', 1011 A TlOl = 94 29'.
en, 0001 A 2243 = 61 33'.
Crystals usually thick tabular; also acute rhombohedral. Often in thin

plates or laminae. Massive,
compact in embedded grains,
;
704 705
also loose as sand.
Fracture conchoidal. H.
- 5-6. G. = 4-5-5. Luster
submetallic. Color iron-black.
Streak submetallic, powder
black to brownish red.
Opaque. Influences slightly
the magnetic needle.
Comp. If normal, FeTi0 3 or FeO,Ti0 2 = Oxygen 31-6, titanium 31-6,
iron 36 *8 = 100. Sometimes written (Fe,Ti) 2 O 3 but probably to be regarded
,
as an iron titanate. Sometimes also contains magnesium (picrotitanite) ,
replacing the ferrous iron; hence the general formula (Fe,Mg)O.Ti02 (Pen-
field). (Compare geikielite, p. 586.)
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible in O.F., although slightly rounded on the edges in R.F.
With borax and salt of phosphorus reacts for iron in O.F., and with the latter flux assumes
a more or less intense brownish red color in R.F.; this treated with tin on charcoal changes
to a violet-red color when the amount of titanium is not too small. The pulverized mineral,
heated with hydrochloric acid, is slowly dissolved to a yellow solution, which, filtered from
the undecomposed mineral and boiled with the addition of tin-foil, assumes a beautiful blue
or violet color. Decomposed by fusion with bisulphate of sodium or potassium.
Diff. Resembles hematite, but has a submetallic, nearly black, streak; not magnetic
like magnetite.
Obs. Occurs, as an accessory component, in many igneous rocks in grams, assuming
the place of magnetite, especially in gabbros and diorites. In these occurrences, it is often
found in veins or large segregated masses near the borders of the igneous rock where it is
supposed to have formed by local differentiation or fractional crystallization in the molten
mass. It is also found at tunes in metamorphic rocks. Some principal European localities
are St. Cristophe, Dauphine, France (cricktonite) Miask in the Ilmen Mts. (ilmenite)} in
;
th'e form of sand at Menaccan, Cornwall (menaccanite) Gastein in Tyrol (kibdelophane)

; ;
Binnental, Switzerland. One of the most remarkable is at Kragero, Norway, where it

occurs in veins or bed in diorite, which sometimes afford crystals weighing over 16 pounds.
3
Others are Egersund, Arendal, Snarum in Norway; St. Gothard, Switzerland, etc.
Fine crystals, sometimes an inch in diameter, occur in Warwick, Amity, and Monroe,
Orange Co., N. Y.; Litchfield, Conn, (washingtonite) Crystals from Chester and Quincy,
.
Mass. Vast deposits or beds of titanic ore occur at Bay St. Paul in Quebec, Canada, in
tyenite; also in the Seignory of St. Francis, Beauce Co. Grains are found in the gold sand
of California.
The titanic iron of massive rocks is extensively altered to a dull white opaque substance,
called leucoxene by Gumbel. This for the most part is to be identified with titanite.
Senaite. (Fe,Mn,Pb)O.TiO 2 Tri-rhombohedral.
. H. =6. G. = 5'3. Color black.
Streak brownish, black. Found in the diamond-bearing sands of Diamantina, Brazil.
Arizonite. Fe 2 O 3 .3TiO 2.Monoclinic? Crystal faces rough. H. = 5'5. G. = 4'25.
Color dark steel-gray. Streak brown. Decomposed by hot concentrated sulphuric acid.
Found with gadolinite, 25 miles southeast of Hackberry, Ariz.
Pyrophanite. Manganese titanate, MnTiOa. In thin tabular rhombohedral crystals
and scales, near ilmenite in form (p. 417). H. = 5. G. = 4'537. Luster vitreous to sub-
t
metallic. Color deep blood-red. Streak ocher-yellow. From the Harstig mine, Pajsberg,
Sweden.
SITAPARITE. 9Mn2O 3 .4Fe 2 O3.MnO2.3CaO. Notary stallized. Good cleavage. H. == 7.
G. = 5*0. Color deep bronze. Streak black. Weakly magnetic. Found at Sitapdr,
District Chhindwara, India.
VREDENBURGITE. 3 3Mn O
4 .2Fe 2 O 3 Cleavage parallel to octahedron or tetragonal
.
pyramid. H. = 6 5.
-
G. = 4 '8. Color bronze to dark steel-gray. Streak dark brown.
Strongly magnetic. Completely soluble in acids. Found at Beldongri, District Ndgpur
and at Gravidi, District Vizagapatam, India.
III. Intermediate Oxides
The species here included are retained

among the oxides, although chem-
ically considered they are properly oxygen-salts, aluminates, ferrates, manga-
nates, etc., and hence in a strict classification to be placed in section 5 of the
Oxygen-salts. The one well-characterized group is the Spinel Group.
ii in ii in
Spinel Group. RR 2 4 or RO.R2 O 3. Isometric
Spinel MgO.Al2 O3
Ceylomte (Mg,Fe)O.Al 2 O 3
Chlorospinel MgO. (Al,Fe) 2 O3
Picotite (Mg,Fe)0.(Al,Cr) 2 3
Hercynite FeO.Al 2 O 3
Gahnite (Automolite) ZnO.Al 2 O 3
Dysluite (Zn,Fe,Mn)0.(Al,Fe) 2 O 3
Kreittonite (Zn,Fe,Mg)0.(Al,Fe) 2 O3
Magnetite FeO.Fe2 O 3
(Fe,Mg)O.Fe2 3
Magnesioferrite MgO.Fe2 O 3
Franklinite (Fe,Zn,Mn)O.(Fe,Mn) 2 O3
Jacobsite (Mn,Mg)O.(Fe,Mn) 2 O 3
Chromite FeO.Cr2 3
(Fe,Mg)0.(Cr,Fe) 2 3
OXIDES 419
The species of the Spinel Group are characterized by isometric crystalli-

sation, and, further, the octahedron is throughout the common form. All of
the species are hard; those with nonmetallic luster up to 7*5-8, the others
from 5*5 to 6*5.
SPINEL.
Isometric. Usually in octahedrons, sometimes with dodecahedral trunca-
tions, .rarely cubic. Twins: tw. pi. and comp. face o(lll) common (Fig.
707), hence often called spinel-twins; also repeated and polysynthetic, pro-
ducing tw. lamellae.
Cleavage: o(lll) imperfect. Fracture conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 8.
G. = 3'5-4'L Luster vitreous; 706 707
splendent to nearly dull. Color
red of various shades, passing into
blue, green, yellow, brown and
black; occasionally almost white.
Streak white. Transparent to
nearly opaque. Refractive index :
n= 17155.
Comp. Magnesium alumin-
ate, MgAl O 42 or MgO.Al 2 O 3 =
Alumina 71*8, magnesia 28*2 =
100. The magnesium may be in part replaced by ferrous iron or man-
ganese, and the aluminium by ferric iron and chromium. .
Var. RUBY SPINEL or Magnesia Spinel. Clear red or reddish; transparent to

translucent; sometimes subtranslucent. G. = 3 '63-3 71. Compo ition normal, with
little or no iron, and sometimes chromium oxide to which the red color has been ascribed.
The varieties are: (a) Balas-Ruby, rose-red; (c) Rubicette,
Spinel-Ruby, deep red; b)
yellow or orange^red; Almandine, violet.
(d)
CEYLONITE or Pleonaste, Iron-Magnesia Spinel. Color dark green, brown to black,
mostly opaque or nearly so. G. = 3 '5-3 '6. Contains iron replacing the magnesium and
perhaps also the aluminium, hence the formula (Mg,Fe)O.Al2C>3 or (Mg,Fe)O.(Al,Fe)2O3 .
CHLOROSPINEL or Magnesia-Iron Spinel. Color grass green, owing to the presence of

copper. G. = 3'591-3*594. Contains iron replacing the aluminium, MgO.(Al,Fe 3 O 3 .
PICOTITE or Chrome-Spinel. Contains chromium and also has the magnesium largely
repla ed by iron (Mg,Fe)O.(Al,Cr) 2 O 3 hence lying be ween spinel prope and chromite.
,
G. = 4 '08. Color dark yellowish brown or greenish brown Translucent to nearly opaque.
Pyr., etc. B.B. alone infusible. Slowly soluble in borax, more readily in salt of
phosphorus, with which it gives a reddish bead while hot, becoming faint chrome-green
on cooling. Black varieties give reactions for iron with the fluxes. Soluble with difficulty
in concentrated sulphuric acid. Decomposed by fusion with potassium bisulphate.
Diff. Distinguished by its octahedral form, hardness, and inf usibility zircon Jias a;
higher specific gravity; the true ruby (p. 413) is harder and is distinguished optically;
garnet is softer and fusible.
Micro. In thin section shows light color and high relief. Isotropic.
Artif . Artificial spinel crystals may be obtained by direct crystallization from the
pure melt fused in the electric arc. They also form from melts of the oxides or fluorides of
magnesium and aluminium dissolved in boric acid. The addition of chromium and iron
oxides will produce various colors.
Obs. Spinel occurs embedded in granular limestone, and with calcite hi serpentine,
gneiss, and allied rocks. Ruby spinel is a common associate of the true ruby. Common
spinel is often associated with chondrodite. It also occupies the cavities of masses ejected
from some volcanoes. Spinel (common spinel, also picotite and chromite, occurs as an
accessory constituent in many basic igneous rocks especially those of the peridotite group;
it is the result of the crystallization of a magma very low in silica, high in magnesia and con-
taining alumina; since, as in many of the peridotites alkalies are absent, feldspars cannot
form, and the A1 2O 3 and Cr 2 Os (also Fe 2 O 3 perhaps) are compelled to form spinel (or corun-
dum). The serpentines which yield spinel are altered peridotites.
In Ceylon, in Siam, and other eastern countries, occurs with beautiful colors, as rolled
pebbles; in upper Burma with the ruby (cf. p. 414)* Plepnaste is found at Candy, in
Ceylon; at Aker, in Sweden, a pale blue and pearl-gray variety in limestone; small black
splendent crystals occur in the ancient ejected masses of Monte Somma, Vesuvius; also at
Pargas, Finland, with chondrodite, etc.; in compact gehlenite at Monzoni, in the Fassa
valley, Austria.
From Amity, N. Y., to Andover, N. J., a distance of about 30 miles, is a region of gran-
ular limestone in which localities of spinel abound; colors, green, black,
and serpentine,
brown, and less commonly red, along with chondrodite and other minerals. Localities
are numerous about Warwick, and also at Monroe and Cornwall; Gouverneur, 2 m. N. and
f m. W. of Somerville, St. Lawrence Co.; green, blue, and occasionally red varieties occur
at Bolton, Boxborough, etc., Mass. Franklin, N. J., affords crystals of various shades of
black, blue, green, and red: Newton, Sterling, Sparta, Hamburgh and Vernon, N. J., are
other localities. With the corundum of N. C. as at the Culsagee mine, near Franklin,
Macon Co.; similarly at Dudleyville, Ala. Spinel ruby at Gold Bluff, Humboldt Co., Cal.
Good black spinel is found in Burgess, Ontario; a bluish spinel having a rough cubic
form occurs at Wakefield, Ottawa Co.; blue with clintonite at Daillebout, Joliette Co.,
Quebec.
Use. The colored transparent varieties are used as gems.
.
Hercynite. Iron Spinel, FeAl 2O 4 Isometric; massive, fine granular.
. H. = 7-5-8.
G. = 3 '9 1-3 '95. Color black. From Ronsberg, at the eastern foot of the Bohmerwald,
Bohemia. A related iron-alumina spinel, with about 9 p. c. MgO, occurs with magnetite
and corundum in Cortlandt township, Westchester Co., N. Y. From the tin drift,
Moorina, Tasmania.
GAHNITE. Zinc-Spinel.
Isometric.Habit octahedral, often with faces striated edge between ||
dodecahedron and octahedron; also less commonly in dodecahedrons and

modified cubes.- Twins: tw. pi. 0(111).
Cleavage: o(lll) indistinct. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle.
H. = 7-5-8. G. = 4-0-4-6. n gr = 1'82 (Finland). Luster vitreous, or some-
what greasy. Color dark green, grayish green, deep leek-green, greenish
black, bluish black, yellowish, or grayish brown; streak grayish. Subtrans-
parent to nearly opaque.
Comp. Zinc aluminate, ZnAl 2 4
= Alumina 55-7, zinc oxide 44-3 =
100. The zinc is sometimes replaced by manganese or ferrous iron, the
aluminium by ferric iron.
Var. AUTOMOLITE, or Zinc Gahnite. ZnAl2 O 4 with sometimes a little iron. G. =
,
4-1-4 '6. Colors as above given.

DYSLUITE, or Zinc-Manganese-Iron Gahnite. (Zn,Fe,Mn)O.(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 Color yellow-
.
ish brown or grayish brown. G. = 4-4*6.

KREITTONITE, or Zinc-Iron Gahnite. (Zn,Fe,Mg)O.(Al,Fe) 2 O 3
. In crystals, and
granular massive. H. = 7-8. G. = 4 '48-4 '89. Color velvet-black to greenish black;
powder grayish green. Opaque.
Pyr., etc. Gives a coating of zinc oxide when treated with a mixture of borax and
soda on charcoal; otherwise like spinel.
Obs. Occurs at Falun and Farila parish, Helsingland, Sweden (automolite) Trask-;
bole, Finland; at Tiriola, Calabria, Italy; at Bodenmais, Bavaria (kreittonite) ',

Minas
Geraes, Brazil; Ambatofisikely, Madagascar. In the United States, at Franklin Furnace,
N. J., with franklinite and willemite; also at Sterling Hill, N. J. (dysluite); with pyrite at
Rowe, Mass.; at a feldspar quarry in Delaware Co., Pa.; sparingly at the Deake mica
mine, Mitchell Co., N. C.; at the Canton Mine, Ga.; with galena, chalcopyrite, pyrite at
the Cotopaxi mine, Chaffee Co., Col. In Canada at
Raglan, Renfrew Co., Ontario.
Named after the Swedish chemist Gahn. The name Automolite, of Ekeberg, is from
a deserter, alluding to the fact of the zinc occurring in an unexpected place.
,
MAGNETITE. Magnetic Iron Ore.

Isometric. Most commonly in octahedrons, also in dodecahedrons with
faces striated || edge between dodecahedron and octahedron
(Fig. 710); in
dendrites between plates of mica; crystals sometimes
highly modified; cubic
OXIDES 421
forms rare. Twins: tw. pi. o(lll), sometimes as polysynthetic twinning

lamellae, producing striations on an octahedral face and often a pseudo-cleav-
708 709 710
age (Fig. 474, p. 176). Massive with laminated structure; granular, coarse
or fine; impalpable.
Cleavage not distinct; parting octahedral, often highly developed. Frac-
ture subconchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 5 '5-6*5.
G. = 5-168-5-180, crystals. Luster metallic and 711
splendent to submetallic and rather dull. Color iron-
black. Streak black. Opaque, but in thin dendrites
in mica nearly transparent and pale brown to black.
Strongly magnetic; sometimes possessing polarity
(lodestone) .
ii in
Comp. or FeO.Fe2 O 3 = Iron sesquioxide
FeFe 2 O 4
69.0, iron protoxide 31 '0 = 100; or, Oxygen 27-6, iron
72 '4 = 100. The ferrous iron sometimes replaced by
magnesium, and rarely nickel; also sometimes contains
titanium (up to 6 p. c. TiO2 ).
Var. Ordinary. (a) In crystals. (&) Massive, with pseudo-cleavage, also granular,
coarse or fine, (c) As loose sand, (d) Ocherous: a black earthy kind. Ordinary magne-
tite is attracted by a magnet but has no power 6f attracting particles of iron itself. The
property of polarity which distinguishes the lodestone (less properly written loadstone) is
exceptional.
Magnesian. G. = 4-41-4*42; luster submetallic; weak magnetic; in crystals from
Sparta, N. J., and elsewhere.
Manganesian. Containing 3'8 to 6 '3 p. c. manganese (Manganmagnetite). From
Vester Silfberg, Sweden.
Pyr., etc. B.B. very difficultly fusible. In O.F. loses its influence on the magnet.
With the fluxes reacts like hematite. Soluble in hydrochloric acid and solution reacts for
both ferrous and ferric iron.
Diff. Distinguished from other members of the spinel group, as also from garnet, by
its being attracted by the magnet, as well as by its high specific gravity; franklinite and
chromite are only feebly magnetic (if at all), and have a brown or blackish brown streak;
also, when massive, by its black streak from hematite and limonite; much harder than
tetrahedrite.
Micro. In polished sections shows white color with a shining, pitted surface.. With
cone. HC1 slowly turns brown.
Artif. Magnetite is frequently formed as a furnace product. It is easily formed in
artificial magmas when they are low in the percentage of silica. It is formed by the
breaking down of various minerals or by interreactions among minerals in processes simi-
lar to those of contact metamorphism.
Obs. Magnetite is mostly confined to crystalline rocks, and is most abundant in
metamorphic rocks, though widely distributed also in grainy in eruptive rocks. It is found
most abundantly in the ferro-magnesian rocks, occurring at times in large segregated
masses. These are often highly titaniferous. In the Archaean rocks the beds are of im-
mense extent, and occur under the same conditions as those of hematite. It is an ingre-
dient in most of the massive variety of corundum called emery. The earthy magnetite
is found in bogs like bog-iron ore.- Occurs in meteorites, and forms the crust of meteoric
irons.
Present in dendrite-like forms in the mica of many localities following the direction of
the lines of the percussion-figure, and perhaps of secondary origin. A common alteration-
product of minerals containing iron protoxide, e.g., present in veins in the serpentine
resulting from altered chrysolite.
The beds of ore at Arendal, Norway, and nearly all the celebrated iron mines of Sweden,
consist of massive magnetite, as at Dannemora and the Taberg in Smaland. Falun,
in Sweden, and Corsica, afford octahedral crystals, embedded in chlorite slate. Splendid
dodecahedral crystals occur at Nordmark in Wermland. The most powerful native
magnets are found in Siberia, and in the Harz Mts., Germany; they are also obtained on
the island of Elba. Other localities for the crystallized mineral are Traversella in Piedmont,
in the Ural Mts.; Scalotta, near Predazzo, at Rothenkopf and Wild-
Italy; Achmatoysk
kreuzjoch, Austrian Tyrol; the Binnental, Switzerland; Sannatake, Bufen, Japan.
In North America, it constitutes vast beds in the Archaean, in the Adirondack region,
Warren, Essex, and Clinton Cos., in Northern N. Y., while in St. Lawrence Co. the iron
ore is mainly hematite; fine crystals and masses showing" broad parting surfaces and yield-
ing large pseudo-crystals are obtained at Port Henry, Essex Co.; similarly in N J.; in
Canada, in Hull, Greenville, Madoc, etc.; at Cornwall in Pa., and Magnet Cove, Ark. It
occurs also in N. Y., in Saratoga, Herkimer, Orange, and Putnam Cos.; at the Tilly Foster
iron mine, Brewster, Putnam Co., in crystals and massive accompanied by chondrodite, etc.
In N. J., at Hamburg, near Franklin Furnace and elsewhere. In Pa., at Goshen, Chester
Co., and at the French Creek mines; delineations forming hexagonal figures in mica at
Pennsbury. Good lodestones are obtained at Magnet Cove, Ark. In Cal., in Sierra Co.,
abundant, massive, and in crystals; in Plumas Co.; and elsewhere. In Wash., in large
In crystals from Millard Co., Utah. Fine crystals from
deposits. Fiqrmeza, Cuba.
Named from the loc. Magnesia bordering on Macedonia. But Pliny favors Nicander's
derivation from Magnes, who first discovered it, as the fable runs, by finding, on taking his
herds to pasture, that the nails of his shoes and the iron ferrule of his staff adhered to the
ground.
Use. An important ore of iron.
FRANKLINITE.
Isometric. Habit octahedral; edges often rounded, and crystals passing
into rounded grains. Massive, granular, coarse or fine to compact.
Pseudo-cleavage, or parting, octahedral, as in magnetite. Fracture con-
choidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 5'5-6'5. G. = 5-07-5-22. Luster
metallic,
sometimes dull. Color iron-black. Streak reddish brown or black.
Opaque.
Slightly magnetic.
Comp. (Fe,Zn,Mn)O.(Fe,Mn) 2 O 3 but varying rather widely in the
,
relative quantities of the different metals

present, while conforming to the
general formula of the spinel group.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible. With borax in O.F. gives a reddish
amethystine bead
(manganese), and in R.F. this becomes bottle-green (iron). With soda gives a bluish
green manganate, and on charcoal a faint coating of zinc oxide, which is much more marked
when a mixture with borax and soda is used. Soluble in
hydrochloric acid, sometimes
with evolution of a small amount of chlorine.
Diff. Resembles magnetite, but is only slightly attracted by the
dark brown streak; it also reacts for zinc on charcoal B.B. magnet, and has a
bs> 1 ( erman y occurs in cubic
T"* ^ ^ crystals near Eibach in Nassau; in amorphous
masses at Altenberg, near Aix-la-Chapelle. Abundant at Mine Hill, Franklin Furnace
JN. J., with wulemite and zmcite in
granular limestone; also at Sterling Hill, two miles
distant, associated with willemite.
*;' Use. An ore of zinc.

Ma
gnofernte.
H4t>54. Luster color, and streak as ?in
about the fumaroles of Vesuvius-, and
at iviont jJor
O
MgFe 4 In octahedrons. H. = 6-6'5 G. =
.
magnetite. Strongly magnetic. Formed

especially those of the eruption of 1855; also found
OXIDES 423
Jacobsite. (Mn,Mg)O.(Fe,Mn) 2 O 3 Isometric; in distorted octahedrons. H. = 6.

.
G. = 475. Color deep black. Magnetic. _ From Jakobsberg, in Nordmark, Wermland,

and at Langban, Sweden. Reported from Bulgaria.
CHROMITE.
Isometric.In octahedrons. Commonly massive; fine granular to compact.
Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 5-5. G. = 4-32-4-57. Luster sub-
metallic to metallic. Color between iron-black and brownish black, but
sometimes yellowish red in very thin sections. Streak brown. Translucent
to opaque. Sometimes feebly magnetic.
Comp. FeCr2 O 4 or FeO.Cr2 O 3 = Chromium sesquioxide 68'0, iron
protoxide 32-0 = 100.
The iron may be replaced by magnesium; also the chromium by alu-
minium and ferric iron. The varieties containing but little chromium (up
to 10 p. c.) are hardly more than varieties of spinel and are classed under
picotite, p. 419.
Pyr., etc. B.B. in O.F. infusible; in R.F. slightly rounded on the edges, and becomes
magnetic. With borax and salt of phosphorus gives beads which, while hot, show only a
reaction for iron, but on cooling become chrome-greeny the green color is heightened by
fusion on charcoal with metallic tin. Not acted upon by acids, but decomposed by fusion
with potassium or sodium bisulphate.
Diff. Distinguished from magnetite by feeble magnetic properties, streak and by
yielding the reaction for chromic acid with the blowpipe.
Artif. Chromite can be prepared artificially by fusing together chromic, ferric and
boric oxides.
Obs. Occurs in peridotite rocks and the serpentines derived from them, forming
veins, or in embedded masses. It is one of the earliest minerals to crystallize in a cooling
magma and its large ore bodies are probably formed during the solidification of the rock
by the process of magmatic differentiation. It assists in giving the variegated color to
verde-antique marble. Not uncommon in meteoric irons, sometimes in nodules as in the
Coahuila iron, less often in crystals (Lodran).
Occurs in the Gulsen mountains, near Kraubat in Styria; in crystals in the islands of
Unst and Fetlar, in Shetland; in the province of Trondhjem in Norway; in the Department
du Var in France; in Silesia and Bohemia; abundant in Asia Minor; in the Eastern and
Western Ural Mts.; in New Caledonia, affording ore for commerce.
In Md. at Baltimore, in the Bare Hills, in veins or masses in serpentine; also in Mont-
gomery Co., etc. In Pa., Chester Co., near Unionville, abundant; at Wood's Mine, near
Texas, Lancaster Co., very abundant. Massive and in crystals at Hoboken, N. J., in ser-
pentine and dolomite. In various localities in N. C. In the southwestern part of the town
of New Fane, etc., Vt. A magnesian variety (mitchellite) from Webster, N. C. In Cal.,
in Monterey Co.; 'also Santa Clara Co., near the New Almaden mine.
Use. An ore of chromium; used in refractory bricks for metallurgical furnace linings;
as source of certain red and yellow pigments and dyes.
CHROMITITE. Material in minute octahedral crystals occurring in sand at Zeljin Mt.,
Servia, said to have composition, FeCrO 3 .
712 ..
CHRYSOBERYL. Cymophane.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b : : c =
0-47011:1:
Crystals generally tabular a(100) Face a striated .
angles (Fig. 395, p. 164) . 1 1
a feather-like striation (Fig. 713).

vertically, in twins
Cleavage: "(QH) quite distinct; 6(010) imperfect; a(100)
more so. Frac-
ture uneven to conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 8-5. G. = 3'5-3'84. Luster
vitreous. Color asparagus-green, grass-green, emerald-green, greenish white,
and yellowish green; greenish brown; yellow; sometimes raspberry- or colum-
bine-red by transmitted light. Streak uncolored. Transparent to trans-
lucent. Sometimes a bluish opalescence or chatoyancy, and asteriated.
Pleochroic, vibrations || (= b axis) orange-yellow, Z (= c axis) emerald-
Y
green, ( X
= a axis) columbine-red. Optically +. Ax. pi. || 6(010). Bx. _L
c(001). a = 1747. = 1748. 7 = 1'757. 2E = 84 43'.
Var. 1. Ordinary. Color pale green, being colored by iron; also yellow and trans-
parent and then used as a gem.
2. Alexandrite. Color emerald-green, but columbine-red by transmitted light; valued
as a gem. G. = 3 '644, mean of results, ûpposed to be colored by chromium. Crystals
often very large, and in twins, like Fig. 395, either six-sided or six-rayed.
3. Cat's-eye. Color greenish and exhibiting a fine chatoyant effect; from Ceylon.
Comp. Beryllium aluminate, BeAl 2 O 4 or BeO.Al 2 3

= Alumina 80'2,
glucina 19 '8
= 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. alone unaltered; with soda, the surface is merely rendered dull.
With borax or salt of phosphorus fuses with great difficulty. Ignited with cobalt solu-
tion, the powdered mineral gives a bluish color. Not attacked by acids.
Diff. Distinguished by its extreme hardness, greater than that of topaz; by its in-
fusibility; also characterized by its tabular crystallization, in contrast with beryl.
Obs. In Minas Geraes, Brazil, in rolled pebbles; from Ceylon in pebbles and crystals;
at Marschendorf in Moravia; in the Ural Mts., 85 yersts from Ekaterinburg, in mica slate
with beryl and phenacite, the variety alexandrite; in the Orenburg district, southern Ural
Mts., yellow; in the Mourne Mts., Ireland.
In the United States at Haddam, Conn., in granite traversing gneiss, with tourmaline,
garnet, beryl; at Greenfield, near Saratoga, N. Y., with tourmaline, garnet, and apatite;
has been found in crystals in the rocks of New York City; in Me. at Norway, in granite
with garnet and at Stoneham, with fibrolite, at Topsham, Buckfield and Greenwood.
Chrysoberyl is from xpvvos, golden, ftrjpvXXos, beryl. Cymophane, from Kv/j.a, wave, and
<f>aij>a),appear, alludes to a peculiar opalescence the crystals sometimes exhibit. Alexandrite
is after the Czar of Russia, Alexander I.
Use. As a gem stone; see under Var. above.
Hausmannite. 3 Mn O
4 or MnO. 2 3 Mn O
In tetragonal octahedrons and twins (Fig. 414,
.
167); also granular massive, particles strongly coherent. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 4'856.

E.uster submetallic. Color brownish black. Streak chestnut-brown. Occurs near Ilme-
nau in Thuringia, Germany; .Ilefeld in the Harz Mts., Germany; Filipstad, Langban,
Nordmark, in Sweden; from Brazil.
Coronadite. (Mn,Pb)Mn 3 O 7 Massive with delicate fibrous structure.
. H. = 4.
G. = 5'2. Color black. Streak brownish black. Occurs in Coronado vein of the Clifton-
Morenci district, Arizona. Hollandite is a similar manganate of manganese, barium 'and
ferric iron from the Kaljlidongri manganese
mine, Central India.
Cesllrolite. H
2 PbMn 3 O 8 In cellular masses. Color, steel-gray. H. = 4'5. G. = 5'29.
.
From Sidi-Amer-bers-Salem, Tunis.

Minium. Pb 3 4 or 2PbO.PbO 2 Pulverulent, as crystalline scales.
.
G. = 4'6. Color
vivid red, mixed with yellow; streak
orange-yellow. Occurs in Germany at Bleialf in the
Jjjifel; Badenweiler in Baden, etc.
Crednerite. Cu 3 Mn O
4 93CuO.2Mn 2 O 3 Foliated crystalline. H. = 4'5. G.
or . = 4'9-
5*1. Luster metallic. Color iron-black to steel-gray. Streak black, brownish. From
Fnednchroda, Germany.
Pseudobrookite. Probably Fe 4 (TiO 4 ) 3 Usually in minute orthorhombic crystals, tab-
.
ular a(100) and often prismatic the macro-axis.

|| G. = 4-4-4'98. Color dark brown to
||
black, btreak ocher-yellow. Found with

hypersthene (szaboite) in cavities of the andesite
ot Aranyer Berg,
Transylvania, and elsewhere; on recent lava (1872) from Vesuvius; at
Havredal, Bamle, Norway, embedded in kjerulfine (wagnerite) altered to apatite.
OXIDES 425
BRAUNITE.
Tetragonal. Axis c
= 0;9850. Commonly in octahedrons, nearly iso-
metric in angle (pp 111 A 111 = 70 7'). Also massive.
f
Cleavage p(lll) perfect.

: Fracture uneven to subconchoidal. Brittle.
H. = 6-6-5. G. = 4-75-4-82. Luster submetallic. Color and streak, dark
brownish black to steel-gray.
Comp. 3Mn2 3 .MnSiO 3 = Silica lO'O, manganese protoxide 11 '7, man-
ganese sesquioxide 78 -3
= 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible. With borax and salt of phosphorus gives an amethystine
bead in O.F., becoming colorless in R.F. With soda gives a bluish green bead. Dissolves
in hydrochloric acid leaving a residue of gelatinous silica. Marceline gelatinizes with acids.
Obs. Occurs in veins traversing porphyry, at Oehrenstock, near Ilmenau, Thuringia,
and near Ilefeld in the Harz Mts., Germany; St. Marcel in Piedmont, Italy; at Elba;
at Botnedal, Upper Tellemark, in Norway; at the manganese mines of Jakobsberg, also at
Langban, and at the Sjo mine, Grythyttan, Orebro, Sweden. Marceline (heterocline) from
St. Marcel, Ptedmont, is impure braunite.
Bixbyite. Essentially FeO.MnO 2 In black isometric crystals.

. H. = 6-6'5. G. =
4'945. Occurs with topaz in cavities in rhyolite; from Utah.
IV. Dioxides, RO 2.
Rutile Group. Tetragonal

c c
Cassiterite SnO2 0-6723 Rutile TiO2 0-6442
Polianite MnO 2 0'6647 Plattnerite PbO2 0'6764
'
The RUTILE GROUP includes the dioxides of the elements tin, manganese,
titanium, and lead. These compounds crystallize in the tetragonal system
with closely similar angles and axial ratio; furthermore in habit and method
of twinning there is much similarity between the two best known species
included here. Chemically these minerals are sometimes considered as salts
of their respective acids, as stannyl metastannate, (SnO)SnO 3 ,
for cassiterite
and titanyl metatitanate, (TiO)TiO 3 for rutile. ,
With the Rutile Group is also sometimes included Zircon. ZrO 2 SiO 2 ; c = 0'6404.
In this work, however, Zircon is classed among the silicates, with the allied species Thorite,
c = 0-6402.
ThO 2 .SiO 2 ,
A
tetragonal form, approximating closely to that of the species of the Rutile Group,
belongs also to a number of other species, as Xenotime, YPO4; Sellaite, MgF2; Tapiolite,
Fe(Ta,Nb) 2 O 6 .
It may be added that ZrO 2 as the species Baddeleyite,

, crystallizes in the monoclinic
system.
CASSITERITE. Tin-stone, Tin Ore
Tetragonal. Axis c = 0-6723.
ee', 101 A Oil = 46 28'. ms, 110 A 111 = 46 27'.

ee", 101 A 101 = 67 50'. zz', 321 A 231 = 20 53'
',
111 A 111 = 58 19'. zzv, 321 A 321 = 61 42'.
ss", 111 A 111 = 87 7'
Twins common: tw. pi. e(101); both contact- and penetration-twins (Fig.
717); often repeated. Crystals low pyramidal; also prismatic and acutely
terminated. Often in reniform shapes, structure fibrous divergent; also mas-
sive, granular or impalpable; in rolled grains.
Cleavage: a(100) imperfect; 8(111)

more so; m(110) hardly distinct.
Fracture subconchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H.
= 6-7. G. = 6-8-71. Luster
adamantine, and crystals usually splendent. Color brown or black; some-
714 715 716 717
times red, gray, white, or yellow. Streak white, grayish, brownish. Nearly
transparent to opaque. Optically + Indices: co = 1-9966, e = 2-0934.
.
Var. Ordinary. Tin-stone. In crystals and massive.

Wood-tin. In botryoidal and reniform shapes, concentric in structure, and radiated
fibrous internally, although very compact, with the color brownish, of mixed shades, looking
somewhat like dry wood in its colors. Toad's-eye tin is the same, on a smaller scale. Stream-
tin is the ore in the state of sand, as it occurs along the beds of streams or in gravel.
Comp. Tin dioxide, Sn0 2 = Oxygen 21'4, tin 78'6 = 100. A little
Ta2O is5sometimes present, also Fe2 O 3 .
Pyr., etc. B.B. alone unaltered. On charcoal with soda reduced to metallic tin, and
gives a white coating. With the fluxes sometimes gives reactions for iron and manganese.
Only slightly acted upon by acids.
Artif . Cassiterite has been artificially prepared by the action of aqueous vapor upon
tin tetrachloride in a heated tube and by other similar methods employing heated vapors.
Obs. Cassiterite has been noted as an original constituent of igneous rocks but usu-
ally it occurs in veins traversing granite, rhyolite, quartz porphyry, pegmatite, gneiss, mica
schist, chlorite or clay schist; also in finely reticulated veins forming the ore-deposits
called stockworks, or simply impregnating the enclosing rock. It is most commonly
found in quartz veins traversing granite, accompanied by minerals containing boron and
fluorine which indicates a pneumatolytic origin. The commonly associated minerals are
quartz, wolframite, scheelite; also mica, topaz, tourmaline, apatite, fluorite; further
pyrite, arsenopyrite, sphalerite; molybdenite, native bismuth, etc.
Formerly very abundant, now less so, in Cornwall, in fine crystals, and also as wood-tin
and stream-tin; in Devonshire, near Tavistock and elsewhere; in pseudomorphs after
feldspar at Wheal Coates, near St. Agnes, Cornwall; in fine crystals, often twins, at
Schlackenwald, Graupen, Joachimstal, Zinnwald, etc., in Bohemia, and at Ehrenfrieders-
dorf, Altenberg, etc., in Saxony; at Limoges, France, in splendid crystals; Sweden, at
Fmbo; Finland, at Pitkaranta.
In the East Indies, on the Malay peninsula of Malacca and the neighboring islands,
Banca, and Bilitong near Borneo. In New South Wales abundant over an area of 8500 sq.
miles, also in Victoria, Queensland and Tasmania. In Bolivia in veins containing silver,
lead, and bismuth; Mexico, in Durango, Guanajuato, Zacatecas, Jalisco.
In the United States, in Me., sparingly at Paris, Hebron, etc. In
Mass., at Chesterfield
and Goshen, rare. In N. H., at Jackson. In Va.. on Irish Creek, Rockbridge Co., with
wolframite, etc. In N. C. and S. C. In Ala., in Coosa Co. In S. D., near Harney Peak
and near Custer City in the Black Hills, where it has been mined. In
Wy., in Crook Co.;
in Mon., near Dillon. In Cal., in San Bernardino Co., at Temescal. Has been mined in
the York district, Seward Peninsula, Alaska.
Use. The most important ore of tin.
OXIDES 427
Polianite. Manganese dioxide, MnO 2 In composite parallel groupings of minute

.
forming the outer shell of crystals having the form of manganite. H. = 6-6'5.
crystals; also
G. = 4'992. Luster metallic. Color light steel-gray or iron-gray. Streak black. From
Flatten, Bohemia. It is distinguished from pyrolusite by its hardness and its anhydrous
character. Like pyrolusite it is often a pseudomorph after manganite.
RUTILE.
Tetragonal. Axis_c
= 0-64415.
vu, 310 A 310 =* 36 54'. ss', 111 A 111 = 56 25|'.
ee' t 101 A Oil = 45 2'. ", 111 A 111 = 84 40'.
ee", 101 A 101 = 65 34*'. it', 313 A 133 = 29 6'.
718 719 720
Twins: tw. pi. (1) e(101); often geniculated (Figs. 720, 721
721) ;
also contact-twins of very varied habit, sometimes
sixlings and eightlings
(Fig. 399, p. 164; Fig. 413, p. 166).
contact-twins (Fig. 415, p. 167). Crys-
(2) v(301) rare,
tals commonly prismatic, vertically striated or fur-
rowed; often slender acicular. Occasionally compact,
massive.
Cleavage: a(100) and w(110) distinct; s(lll) in traces. Fracture sub-
conchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = G. = 4'18-4'25; also to 5'2.
6y6'5.
Luster metallic-adamantine. Color reddish brown, passing into red; some-
times yellowish, bluish, violet, black, rarely grass-green; by transmitted light
deep red. Streak pale brown. Transparent to opaque. Optically +.
Refractive indices high: co = 2-6158, e = 2-9029. Birefringence very high.
Sometimes abnormally biaxial.
Comp. Titanium dioxide, Ti0 2 = Oxygen 40'0, titanium 60'0 = 100.
A little iron is usually present, sometimes up to 10 p. c. While the iron present
is often reported as ferric the probability is that in the unaltered mineral it
existed in the ferrous state.
The formula for rutilebe written as a titanyl metatitanate (TiO)TiO 3
may With this
the ferrous titanate FeTiO 3 may be considered isomorphous and
so account for the iron
frequently present. It has been suggested that the tapiolite molecule, FeO.Ta 2 O 5 is also
isomorphous and that tapiolite belongs in the same group as rutile and cassiterite, see
ilmenorutile, below.
Var. Ordinary. Brownish red and other shades, not black. G. = 4* lS-4'25. Trans-
parent quartz (sagenite) is sometimes penetrated thickly with acicular or capillary crystals.
Dark smoky quartz penetrated with the acicular rutile or "rutilated quartz," is the Filches
d'amour Fr. (or Venus hair-stone). Acicular crystals often implanted in parallel position
on tabular crystals of hematite; also somewhat similarly on magnetite.
Ferriferous, (a) Nigrine is black in color, whence the name; contains up to 30 p. c. of
ferrous titanate. (b) Ilmenorutile is a black variety from the Ilmen Mts., Russia; contain-
ing iron in the form of ferrous titanate, niobate and tantalate. G. = 5'14. Struverite is
the same mineral with greater amounts of the niobate present, (c) Iserine from Iserweise,
Bohemia, formerly considered to be a variety of ilmenite is probably also a ferriferous rutile.
pyr e tc. B.B. infusible. With salt of phosphorus gives a colorless bead, which in
R.F. assumes a violet color on cooling. Most varieties contain iron, and give a brownish
treatment of the bead with
yellow or red bead in R.F., the violet only appearing after
metallic tin on charcoal. Insoluble in acids; made soluble by fusion with an alkali or
alkaline carbonate. The solution containing an excess of acid, with the addition of tin-
foil, gives a beautiful violet color
when concentrated.
Diff. Characterized by its peculiar sub-adamantine luster and brownish red color.
Differs from tourmaline, vesuvianite, augite in being entirely unaltered when heated alone
B.B. Specific gravity about 4, of cassiterite 6'5.
Micro. In thin sections shows red-brown to yellow color, very high relief and high
order of interference color.
Artif . Rutile has been formed artificially by heating titanic oxide with boric oxide,
with sodium tungstate, etc. Rutile, octahedrite and brookite have all been formed by heat-
ing potassium titanate and calcium chloride in a current of hydrochloric acid gas and air.
RutUe is formed at the highest temperature, brookite at lower temperatures, and octahedrite
at the lowest of all.
Obs. Rutile occurs as an accessory mineral in granite, gneiss, mica schist, and sye-
nitic rocks, and sometimes in granular limestone and dolomite; common, as a secondary
product, in the form of microlites in many slates. A
dike rock from Nelson Co., Va., con-
sists essentially of rutile and apatite. It is generally found in embedded crystals, often in
masses of quartz or feldspar, and frequently in acicular crystals penetrating quartz also ;
in phlqgopite (which see), and has been observed in diamond. It has also been met with in
hematite and limenite, rarely in chromite. It is common in grains or fragments in many
auriferous sands.
Prominent localities are: Arendal and Kragero in Norway; Horrsjoberg, Sweden, with
lazuliteand cyanite; Saualpe, Carinthia; in the Ural Mts.; in the Tyrol, Austria; at St.
Gothard and Binnental, Switzerland; at Yrieux, near Limoges in France; at Ohlapian in
Transylvania, nigrine in pebbles; in large crystals in Perthshire, Scotland; in Donegal Co.,
Ireland.
In Me., at Warren. In Ver., at Waterbury; also in loose bowlders in middle and
northern Vermont, acicular, some specimens of great beauty in transparent quartz. In
Mass., at Barre, in gneiss; at Shelburne, in mica slate, at Chester. In N. Y., in Orange Co.,
Edenville; Warwick; east of Amity. In Pa., at Sudsbury, Chester Co., and the adjoining
district in Lancaster Co.; at Parksburg, Concord, West Bradford, and Newlin, Chester Co.;
at the Poor House quarry, Chester Co. In N. J., at Newton, with spinel. In N. C., at
Crowder's Mountain; at Stony Point, Alexander Co., in splendent crystals. In Ga., in
Habersham Co.; in Lincoln Co., at Graves' Mountain, with lazulite in large and splendent
crystals. In Ark., at Magnet Cove, commonly in twins, with brookite and perovskite, also
as paramorphs after brqokite.
Fine specimens of "rutilated quartz," from Minas Geraes, Brazil; Madagascar;
Tavetch and elsewhere, Switzerland; West Hartford, Ver.; Alexander Co., N. C.
Use. A source of titanium.
Plattnerite. Lead PbO 2 Rarely in prismatic crystals, usually massive.
dioxide, .
H. = 5-5*5. G. =
Luster submetallic. Color iron-black. Streak chestnut-brown.
8'5.
From Leadhill and Wanlockhead, Scotland. Also at the "As You Like" mine, Mullan,
Cceur d'Alene Mts., Idaho.
Baddeleyite. Zirconium dioxide, ZrO 2 In tabular monoclinic crystals. H. = 6'5.
.
t. =
5-5-6-0. Colorless to yellow, brown and black.

Index, 174. From Ceylon; from Brazil
near Caldas, Minas Geraes and Jacupiranga, (brazilite) where it is associated with
zirkelite,
(Ca,Fe)0.2(Zr,Ti,Th)O 2 Noted at Mte. Somma, Vesuvius. Also near Boseman, Mon.
.
Various minerals occurring as rolled pebbles in the diamond sands of Brazil are known as
favas (beans). Some of them consist of nearly pure TiO 2 others of nearly pure ZrO 2 while ,
others are various phosphates. Paredrite is a "fava," composed of TiO 2 with a little
water.
Uhligite. Ca(Ti Zr)0 5 .Al(Ti,Al)0 6 . Isometric. Octahedral. Color black. Brown
and transparent on thin edges. Found in a nepheline syenite on the shore of Lake Magad,
ri.QQt. A TT1OQ
OCTAHEDRITE. Anatase.
Tetragonal. Axis c = 17771.

Commonly octahedral in habit, either acute (p, 111), or obtuse (v, 117);
OXIDES 429
also tabular, c(001) predominating; rarely prismatic crystals; frequently

highly modified.
ee',. A 101 Oil = 76 5' 722 723
ee", 101 A 101 = 121 16'
pp 111 A
f
,
111 = 82 9'
pp",Ul A 111 = 136 36'
zz', 113 A 113 = 54 1'
vv' 117 A 117 = 27 39'
Cleavage: c (001) and p (111)

perfect. Fracture subconchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 5-5-6. G. = 3-82-3-95;
sometimes 4-11-4-16 after heating.
Luster adamantine or metallic-ad-
amantine. Color various shades of
brown, passing into indigo-blue, and
black; greenish yellow by transmitted
light. Streak uncolored. Transparent to nearly opaque. Optically .
Birefringence rather high. Indices: o> = 2-554, e = 2-493. Sometimes abnor-

mally biaxial.
Comp. Titanium dioxide, TiO 2 = Oxygen 40'0, titanium 60*0 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Same as for rutile.
Artif. See under rutile.
Obs. Most abundant at Bpurg d'Oisans, in Dauphine, France, with feldspar, axinite,
and ilmenite; near Hof in the Fichtelgebirge, Germany; at Selva and Naderanertal, Swit-
zerland; Norway; the Ural Mts.; in chlorite in Devonshire, near Tavistock; with brookite
at Tremadoc, in North Wales in Cornwall, near Liskeard and at Tintagel Cliffs in Brazil
; ;
in quartz,and in detached crystals. In Switzerland in the Binnental the variety wiserine,

long supposed to be xenotime; also Cavradi, Tavetsch; Rauris, Salzburg, in the Eastern
Alps; also at Pfitsch Joch.
In the United States, at the Dexter lime rock, Smithfield, R. L, in dolomite; from granite
pegmatite, Quincy, and from Somerville, Mass.; in the washings at Brindletown, Burke
Co., N. C., in transparent tabular crystals; at Magnet Cove, Ark.; in unusual crystals from
Beaver Creek, Gunnison Co., Col.
BROOKITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0-8416 : 1 : 0-9444.
mm'", 110 A lIO = 80 10'. ee', 122 A 122 = 44 23'.
zz', 112 A 112 = 53 48'. ee'", 122 A 122 = 78 57'.
zz"' 112 A 112 = 44 46'. me, 110 A 122 = 45 42'.
725 726 727
Only incrystals, of varied habit.

Cleavage: w(110) indistinct; c(001) still more so. Fracture subcon-
choidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 5-5-6. G. = 3-87-4-08. Luster metallic-
adamantine to submetallic. Color hair-brown, yellowish; reddish, reddish
also brown to iron-black, opaque. Streak uncolored

brown and translucent; =
to grayish or yellowish, a = 2-583. = 2*586. 7 2741. Other optical
characters, see p. 298.
Titanium dioxide, TiO 2 = Oxygen 40*0, titanium 60'0
== 100.
Comp.
Pyr. Same as for rutile.
Obs.' Occurs at Bourg d'Oisans in Dauphine, France; in Switzerland at St. Gothard,

of Zlatoust, near Miask,
with albite and quartz, and Maderanertal; in the Ural Mts.; district
and in the gold-washings in the Sanarka river and elsewhere; at Fronolen, near Tremadoc,
Wales. From Companhia, Lencoes, Bahia, Brazil.
In the United States in thick black crystals (arkansite) at Magnet Cove, Ozark Mts.,
Ark. with elaeolite, black garnet, schorlomite, rutile, etc.; in small crystals from the gold-
N. Y., on quartz, with chal-
washings of N. C.; at the lead mine at Ellenville, Ulster Co.,
copyrite and galena; at Paris, Me., Somerville,
Mass.
Named after the English mineralogist, H. J. Brooke (1771-1857).
PYROLUSITE.
Orthorhombic, but perhaps only pseudomorphous. Commonly columnar,
often divergent; also granular massive, and frequently in reniform coats.
Soft, often soiling the fingers. H. = 2-2-5. G. = 473-4-86. Luster
metallic. Color iron-black, dark steel-gray, sometimes bluish. Streak black
or bluish black, sometimes submetallic. Opaque.
Comp. Manganese dioxide, MnO
2 like polianite (p. 427).
, Commonly
contains a little water (2 p. c.), it having had usually a pseudomorphous
origin (after manganite).
It is uncertain whether pyrolusite is an independent species, with a crystalline form of
its own, or only a secondary mineral derived chiefly from the dehydration of manganite;
also from polianite (Breith.). Pseudomorphous crystals having distinctly the form of
manganite are common.
etc. Like polianite, but most varieties yield some water in the closed tube.
I^r.,
Diff. Hardness less than that of psilomelane. Differs from iron ores in its reaction
for manganese B.B. Easily distinguished from psilomelane by its inferior hardness, and
usually by being crystalline. Its streak is black; that of manganite is more or less brown.
Obs. Manganese ore deposits in general are secondary in origin, the manganese
content of the rocks having been concentrated in favorable places. They often occur as
irregular bodies in residual clays. Pyrolusite is extensively worked at Elgersberg near
Ilmenau, and other places in Thuringia, Germany; at Vorderehrensdorf in Moravia; at
Flatten in Bohemia, and elsewhere; near Johanngeorgenstadt, at Hirschberg in West-
phalia, Germany; Matzka, Transylvania; in Australia; in India.
Occurs in the United States' with psilomelane, abundantly in Ver., at Brandon, etc.;
at Plainfield and West Stockbridge, Mass.; Augusta Co., Va.; Pope, Pulaski, Montgomery
Cos., Ark. Negaunee, Mich.; Lake Co., N. M. In New Brunswick, 7 m. from Bathurst.
In Nova Scotia, at Teny Cape; at Walton, etc.
The name is from -nvp, fire, and \oveiv, to wash, because used to discharge the brown
and green (FeO) tints of glass; and for the same reason it is whimsically entitled by the
French le savon de verriers.
Use. An ore of manganese; as an oxidizing agent in manufacture of chlorine, bro-
mine and oxygen; as a drier in paints, a decolorizer in glass and in electric
batteries, as color-
ing material in bricks, pottery, glass, etc.
B. HYDROUS OXIDES.
Among the hydrous oxides
ddes the DIASPORE Gi GROUP is well characterized.
Here belong the hydroxides3 of aluminium, iron and
an The
in
manganese. general
formula is properly written RO(OH). The three species here included are
OXIDES 431
orthorhombic in crystallization with related angles and axial ratios; this rela-
tion is deviated from by manganite in the prismatic zone.
Another less prominent group is the BRUCITE GROUP, including the
rhombohedral species Brucite, Mg(OH), and Pyrochroite, Mn(OH).
Gibbsite, A1(OH) 3 and
, Sassolite, B(OH) 3, are also related, and further
Hydrotalcite and Pyroaurite.
. TTT
Diaspore Group.
p. RO(OH)
Var. In thin scale-like or tabular crystals, usually attached by one edge. Also in
acicular or capillary (not flexible) crystals, or slender prisms, often radiately grouped: the
Needle-Ironstone. It passes into a variety with a velvety surface; the Przibramite (Sammet-
blende) of Pfibram, Bohemia, is of this kind. Also columnar, fibrous, etc., as above.
Comp. FeO(OH) or Fe 2 3 .H2 O = Oxygen 27'0, iron 62'9, water 101

= 100, or Iron sesquioxide 89*9, water 10*1
= 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives off water and is converted into red iron sesqui-
oxide. With the fluxes like hematite; most varieties give a manganese reaction, and some,
treated in the forceps in O.F., after moistening in sulphuric acid, impart a bluish green
color to the flame (phosphoric acid). Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Distinguished from hematite by its yellow streak; from limonite by crystalline
nature; it also contains less water than limonite. .
Obs. Found with the other oxides of iron,^ especially hematite or limonite. Occurs
at Eiserfeld near Siegen, in Nassau, Germany; Pfibram, Bohemia; at Clifton, near Bristol,
England; in Cornwall. In the United States, at the Jackson Iron mine, Negaunee, Lake
Superior; in Conn., at Salisbury; in Pa., near Easton; in the Pike's Peak region and at
Crystal Peak, Col. Named Gothite (Goethite) after the poet-philosopher Goethe (1749-1832) .
A colloidal form of iron hydroxide having the composition of goethite and occurring as
pseudomorphs after pyrite has been called ehrenwerthite.
Use. An ore of iron.
Lepidocrocite. Adimorphous form of goethite. Orthorhombic but with different
axial ratio. Scaly, fibrous.
= 4'09.
G = 2*20. Strongly pleochroic.
MANGANITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0*8441 1 : 0-5448.
hh'", 410 A 410 = 23 50'.
729 730 A 110 = 80 20'.
mm'", 110
ee', 205 A 205 = 28 57'.
ee', Oil A Oil = 57 10'.
111 A Til = 59
f
pp , 5|'.
Crystals commonly prismatic, the

faces deeply striated vertically; often
grouped in bundles. Twins: tw. pi.
e(011). Also columnar; stalactitic.
Cleavage: 6(010) very perfect; w(110)
perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle.
H. = 4. G. = 4-2-4-4. Luster sub-
metallic. Color dark steel-gray to iron-black. Streak reddish brown,
sometimes nearly black. Opaque; in minute splinters sometimes brown
by transmitted light.
Comp. MnO(OH) or Mn2 O 3 .H2 = Oxygen 27'3, manganese 62'4,
water 10'3 = 100, or Manganese sesquioxide 897, water 10-3 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water; manganese reactions with the
fluxes, p. 339,
Obs. Occurs in Germany at Ilefeld in the Harz Mts.; Ilmenau in
Thuringia; Lang-
ban and Bolet, Sweden; Cornwall, at various places; also in
Cumberland, etc. In the
Lake Superior mining region at the Jackson mine,
Negaunee; Devil's Head, Douglas Co.,
Col. In Nova Scotia, at Cheverie, Hants In New Brunswick, at Shep-
Co., and Walton.
ody mountain, Albert Co., etc.
Sphenomanganite is a variety of manganite from Langban, Sweden, showing sphenoidal
forms.
Use. An ore of manganese.
LIMONITE. Brown Hematite.

Not Usually in stalactitic and botryoidal or mammillary
crystallized.
torms, having a fibrous or subfibrous structure; also concretionary, massive-
and occasionally earthy.
OXIDES 433
H. = 5-5*5. G. = 3'6-4-0. Luster silky, often submetallic; sometimes

dulland earthy. Color of surface of fracture various shades of brown, com-
monly dark, and none bright; sometimes with a nearly black varnish-like
exterior; when earthy, brownish yellow, ocher-yellow. Streak yellowish
brown. Opaque.
Var. (1) Compact, Submetallic to silky in luster; often stalactitic, botryoidal, etc.
(2) Ocherous or earthy, brownish yellow to ocher-yellow, often impure from the presence of
clay, sand, etc. (3) Bog ore. The ore from marshy places, generally loose or porous in
texture, often petrifying leaves, wood, nuts, etc. (4) Brown clay-ironstone, in compact
masses, often in concretionary nodules.
Comp. Approximately 2Fe2 3 .3H 2 O = Oxygen 257, iron 59'8, water

14'5 = 100, or Iron sesquioxide 85 '5, water 14*5 = 100. The water content
varies widely and it is probable that limonite is essentially an amorphous
form of goethite with adsorbed and capillary water. In the bog ores and
ochers, sand, clay, phosphates, oxides of manganese, and humic or other
acids of organic origin are very common impurities.
Pyr., etc. Like gpthite. Some varieties leave a siliceous skeleton in the salt of phos-
phorus bead, and a siliceous residue when dissolved in acids.
Diff .
Distinguished from hematite by its yellowish streak, inferior hardness, and its
reaction for water. Does not decrepitate B.B., like turgite. Not crystallized like gothite
and yields more water.
Obs. In all cases a result of the alteration of other ores, or minerals containing
iron, through exposure to moisture, air, and carbonic or organic acids; derived largely
from the change of pyrite, magnetite, siderite, ferriferous dolomite, etc.; also various
species (as mica, pyroxene, hornblende, etc.), which contain iron in the ferrous state (FeO).
Waters containing iron in solution when brought into marshy places deposit the metal
usually in the form of limonite. The evaporation of the carbonic acid in the water which
held the iron in solution is one cause for the separation of the iron oxide. This separation
is also aided by the so-called "iron bacteria" which absorb the iron from the water and
later deposit it again as ferric hydroxide. Limonite consequently occupies, as a bog ore,
marshy places, into which it has been borne by streamlets from the hills around. It is
also found in deposits associated with iron-bearing limestones where the original iron con-
tent of the rock has been largely dissolved and redeposited later in some favorable spot.
Limonite forms the capping or gossan, iron hat, of many metallic veins. It is often asso-
ciated with manganese ores. Limonite is a common ore in Bavaria, the Harz Mts., Ger-
many, Luxemburg, Scotland, Sweden, etc.
Abundant in the United States. Extensive beds exist at Salisbury and Kent, Conn.,
also in the neighboring towns of N. Y., and in a similar situation in Berkshire Co., Mass.,
and in Ver.; in Pa., widely distributed; also in Tenn., Ala., Ohio, etc.
Named Limonite from Xei/icoi>, meadow.
Use. An ore of iron; as a yellow pigment.
TURGITE. Hydrohematite. Approximately 2Fe2 O3.H2 O. Probably to be considered
as a solid solution of goethite with hematite together with enclosed and adsorbed water.
Resembles limonite but has a red streak. G. = 4'14-4'6. Decrepitates B.B. From the
Turginsk mine in the Ural Mts., etc.; also from Salisbury, Conn. Intermediate between
hematite and limonite.
HYDRO GOETHITE. 3Fe2 03.4H 2 0. Orthorhombic, radiating fibrous. H. =4. G. =
37. Color and streak brick-red. With limonite at various localities in Tula, Russia.
Xanthosiderite. Fe 2O 3 .2H 2 O. In fine needles or fibers, stellate and concentric; also
as an ocher. Color golden yellowish, brown to brownish red. Associated with manganese
ores at Ilmenau, Thuringia, Germany, etc.
Esmeraldaite. Fe 2 3 .4H 2 O. In small pod-shaped masses enclosed in limonite. Con-
choidal fracture. H. = 2'5. G. = 2 '58. Color coal black. Yellow-brown streak. From
Esmeralda Co.,
BAUXITE. Beauxite.
In round concretionary disseminated grains. Also massive, oolitic; and
earthy, clay-like. G. = 2'55. Color whitish, grayish, to ocher-yeHow, brown,
and red.
Var. 1. In concretionary grains, or oolitic; bauxite. 2 Clay-like, wocheinite; the

purer kind grayish, clay-like, containing very little iron oxide; also red from the iron
oxide present.
Comp. Essentially A1 2 3 .2H 2 O

= Alumina 73'9, water 26'1 = 100;
some analyses, however, give A1 2 O 3 .H 2 O like diaspore.
Bauxite is probably a mixture of varying character but containing large amounts of '
a colloidal form of Al2 Os.H2 O. This substance has been called sporogelite or diasporogelite,
cliachite and alumogel.
Iron sesquioxide is usually present, sometimes in large amount, in part replacing
alumina, in part only an impurity. The name hematogelite has been suggested for this
colloidal form of ferric oxide. Silica, phosphoric acid, carbonic acid, lime, magnesia are
common impurities.
Obs. Bauxite is a product of the decomposition of certain rocks, particularly those
rich in plagioclase feldspars, and has been found under various conditions. The later ites
of India, etc., are probably similar in origin and might be considered as iron-rich bauxites.
Bauxite is certainly not a definite mineral species but consists of a mixture of several
different materials. From Baux (or Beaux), near Aries, and elsewhere in France, dissemi-
nated in grains in compact limestone, and also oolitic. Wocheinite occurs in Carniola,
Austria, between Feistritz and Lake Wochein. The purest bauxite is used for the manu-
facture of aluminium (aluminum), and is called aluminum ore. In the United States,
bauxite occurs in Saline and Pulaski Cos., Ark.; also in Cherokee and Calhoun Cos., Ala.,
and in Floyd, Barton and Walker Cos., Ga.
Use. As an aluminum ore.
Brucite Group. R(OH) 2 . Rhombohedral

BRUCITE.
Jlhombohedral. Axis c = 1-5208; cr 0001 A 1011 = 60 20i', rr' 1011
A 1101 = 97 37J'.
Crystals usually broad tabular. Also commonly foliated massive; fibrous,
fibers separableand elastic.
H. = 2-5. G. = 2-38-2-4. Cleavage: c(0001) eminent. Folia separable
and flexible, nearly as in gypsum. Sectile. Luster c pearly, elsewhere ||
waxy to vitreous. Color white, inclining to gray, blue, or green. Transparent

to translucent. Optically + . Indices: o> r = 1-559, er = 1-5795.
Comp. --Magnesium hydroxide, Mg(OH) 2 or MgO.H 2 O = Magnesia
69*0, water 31*0 = 100. Iron and manganese protoxide are sometimes
present.
Var -
Ordinary, occurring in plates, white to pale
greenish in color; strong pearly
luster on the cleavage surface. Nemalite is a fibrous variety containing 4 to 5 p. c. iron
protoxide, with G. = 2 "44. Manganbrucite contains manganese; occurs granular; color
honey-yellow to brownish red. Ferrobrucite contains iron.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives off
water, becoming opaque and friable, sometimes
turning gray to brown; the manganesian variety becomes dark brown. B.B. infusible,
glows with a bright light, and the ignited mineral reacts
slightly alkaline to test-paper.
ignited with cobalt solution gives the pale pink color of
magnesia. The pure mineral is
soluble in acids without effervescence.
i, P^vT D
harder than /
S tingU S
acters separate
i i ^
by its infusib ility, softness, cleavage, and foliated structure. Is
-
talc and differs in its

.
solubility in acids; the magnesia test and optical char-

from gypsum, which is also somewhat softer.
it
A secon dary mmf1
accompanying other magnesian minerals in serpentine,
ln f^'r^-
also found m r a.
limestone. At Swmaness in
Unst, Shetland Isles; at the iron mine of Cogne
Aosta Italy; near Fihpstadt in Sweden. At
Foster iron nime, Brewster N. Hoboken, N. J, in serpentine; at the Tilly
Y, well crystallized; Richmond Co N. Y.; at Wood's
*' m r m asses and often
,
e
?
5 -
From
crystallizations several inches across,
'
rom Crestmore, verse Co.,

resmore, Riverside a. Nemalite,
fibrvHHp
the fibrous hydjomagnesite o., Cal.
ur
variety, occurs at Hoboken, N. J., and at Xettes in the
Vosges Mts. Mangos
OXIDES 435
brucite occurs with hausmannite and other manganese minerals in the granular limestone
of Jakobsberg, Nordmark, Sweden.
Named after the early American mineralogist, A. Bruce (1777-1818).
Pyrochroite. Manganese hydroxide, Mn(OH) 2 Usually foliated, like brucite. Lus-
.
ter pearly. Color white, but growing dark on exposure, to = 1723. e = 1'681. In
Sweden occurs in magnetite at Pajsberg, also at Nordmark and Langban; in N. J. at
Franklin Furnace.
Backstromite. Manganese hydroxide, Mn(OH) 2 . Orthorhombic. From Langban,

Sweden.
GIBBSITE. Hydrargillite.
Monoclinic. Axes a b c = 17089 1:
1-9184;
:
= 85 29'. Crystals-
: :
tabular c(001), hexagonal in aspect. Occasionally in spheroidal concretions.

|
Also stalactitic, or small mammillary, incrusting, with smooth surface, and

often a faint fibrous structure within.
Cleavage: c(001) eminent. Tough. H. = 2-5-3 -5. G. = 2-3-2-4.
Color white, grayish, greenish, or reddish white. Luster of c(001) pearly; ot
other faces vitreous; of surface of stalactites faint. Translucent; sometimes
transparent in crystals. Indices, 1-535-1-558. A strong argillaceous odor
when breathed on.
Comp. Aluminium hydroxide, A1(OH) 3 or A12 3 .3H 2 = Alumina
65-4, water 34-6 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube becomes white and opaque, and yields water. B.B. in-
''usible, whitens, and does not impart a green color to the flame. Ignited with cobalt
solution gives a deep blue color. Soluble in concentrated sulphuric acid.
Artif .When solutions of sodium aluminate are slowly decomposed by carbon dioxide
gibbsite is
precipitated.
Obs. The crystallized gibbsite (hydrargillite) occurs in the Shishimsk mountains near
Zlatoust in the Ural Mts. ;
also in crystals filling cavities in natrolite at Langesundfiord,
Norway; Ouro Preto, Minas Geraes, Brazil. Occurs in nodular plates at Kodikanal, Palni
Hills, Madras, and at Talevadi, Bombay, India. In the United States, in stalactitic form
at Richmond, Mass., in a bed of limonite ; at the Clove Mine, Union Vale, Dutchess Co.,
N. Y., on limonite; in Orange Co., N. Y.
Named after Col. George Gibbs.
Sassolite. Boric acid, B(OH) 3 Crystals tabular c(001) (triclinic).
.
Usually small,
||
white, pearly scales. G. = 1'48. Index, 1*46. From the waters of the Tuscan lagoons
of Monte Rotondo and Castelnuovo, Italy. Exists also in other natural waters, as at
Clear Lake, in Lake Co., Cal. Occurs also abundantly in the crater of Vulcano, Lipari isles.
Hydrotalcite. Perhaps Al(OH) 3 .3Mg(OH) 2 .3H 2O. Lamellar-massive, or foliated, some-
what fibroiR. H. =2. G. = 2 -04-2 '09. Color white. Luster pearly. Uniaxial, -.
w = 1'47. Occurs at the mines of Shishimsk, district of Zlatoust, Ural Mts.; at Snarum,
Norway, in serpentine.
Pyroaurite. Perhaps Fe(OH) 3 .3Mg(OH) 2 .3H2O. Rhombohedral. Thin tabular crys-
tals. H. = 2-3. G. = 2-07. Luster pearly to greasy. Color yellow to yellow-brown.
Optically Occurs at the Langban iron-mine, Wermland, Sweden, in gold-like sub-
.
metallic scales (pyroaurite) From the Moss mine, Norway. In thin seams of a silvery
.
white color in serpentine in the island Haaf-Grunay, Scotland (igelstromite).

Chalcophanite. Hydrofranklinite. (Mn,Zn)O.2MnO 2 .2H 2O. In druses of minute
tabular rhombohedral crystals; sometimes octahedral in aspect. Also in foliated aggre-
gates; stalactitic and plumose. G. = 3 '907. Luster metallic, brilliant. Color oluish
black to iron-black. Streak chocolate-brown, dull. Occurs at Sterling Hill, near Ogdens-
burg, Sussex Co., N. J. From Leadville, Col.
Hetserolite. 2ZnO.2Mn 2 O 3 .lH2 O. In radiating botryoidal masses. Black. Brown-
black streak. H. =5. G. = 4 '85. From Franklin, N. J., and Leadville, Col. (Wolf-
tonite).
ALAITE. VÔe.HÔ. Rare. Found in dark bluish red moss-like masses in Alai Mts.,
Turkestan.
SHANYAVSKWE. A12O 8 .4H 2 O. Amorphous, transparent material found in dolomite,
near Moscow, Russia.
PSILOMELANE.
Massive and botryoidal; reniform; stalactitic. H. = 5-6. G. = 37-4-7.
Luster submetallic, dull. Streak brownish black, shining. Color iron-black,
passing into dark steel-gray. Opaque.
Comp. A hydrous manganese manganate in wjrich part of the man-
ganese is often replaced by barium or potassium, perhaps conforming to
H 4Mn0 6 The material is generally very impure, and the composition hence
.
doubtful.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube most varieties yield water, and all lose oxygen on igni-
tion; with the fluxes reacts for manganese. Soluble in hydrochloric acid, with evolution
of chlorine.
Obs. A
common but impure ore of manganese; frequently in alternating layers with
pyrolusite. From Devonshire and Cornwall. In Germany at Ilefeld in the Harz Mts.,
at Ilmenau, Siegen, etc. From the Crimea, Russia; also various localities in India.
Forms mammillary masses at Brandon, etc., Vt. In Independence Co., and elsewhere in
Ark. With pyrolusite at Douglas, Hants Co., Nova Scotia. Named from î\6s, smooth
or naked, and ne\as, black.
Use. An ore of manganese.
The following mineral substances here included are mixtures of various oxides, chiefly
of manganese (MnO 2 also MnO), cobalt, copper, with also iron, and from 10 to 20 p. c.
,
water. These are results of the decomposition of other ores partly of oxides and sul-
phides, partly of manganesian carbonates, and can hardly be regarded as representing
distinct mineral species.
WAD. In amorphous and reniform masses, either earthy or compact; also in crusting
or as stains. Usually very soft, soiling the fingers; less often hard to H. =6. G. = 3'0-
4-26; often loosely aggregated, and feeling very light to the hand. Color dull black,
bluish or brownish black.
BOG MANGANESE consists mainly of oxide of manganese and water, with some oxide of
iron, and often silica, alumina, baryta.
ASBOLITE, or Earthy Cobalt, contains oxide of cobalt, which sometimes amounts to
32 p. c.
LAMPADITE, or Cupreous Manganese, is a wad containing 4 to 18 p. c. of oxide of copper,

and often oxide of cobalt also.
SKEMMATITE. 3MnO 2 .2Fe2O 3 .6H2 q. Color black. Streak dark brown. H. = 5'5-6.
Fusible to magnetic globule. Alteration product of pyroxmangite. From Iva, Anderson
Co., S. C.
BELDONGRITE. 6Mn 3 6 .Fe2O 3 .8H 2 0. Luster pitchy. Color black. From Beldongri,
District Ndgpur, India.
VI. OXYGEN-SALTS
TheSixth Class includes the salts of the various
oxygen acids. These fall
into the following seven sections: 1.
Carbonates; 2. Silicates and Titanates;
3. Niobates and
Tantalates; 4. Phosphates, Arsenates, etc.; also the
Nitrates; 5. Borates and Uranates; 6. Sulphates, Chromates and Tellurates;
7. Tungstates and Molybdates.
1. CARBONATES
A. Anhydrous Carbonates
The Anhydrous Carbonates include two distinct
isomorphous groups,
the CALCITE GROUP and the ARAGONITE GROUP. The metallic elements
CARBONATES 437
present in the former are calcium, magnesium, iron, manganese, zinc and
cobalt; in the latter, they are calcium, barium, strontium and lead.
The species included are as follows:
1. Calcite Group. RCO 3. Rhombohedral

rr' c
Calcite CaC0 3 74 55' 0-8543
Dolomite (Ca,Mg)C0 3 Tri-rhombohedral 73 45' 0-8322
Normal Dolomite CaC0 .MgC0 3 3
Ankerite CaC03 .(Mg,Fe)C0 3 73 48' 0-8332
Magnesite MgC0 3 72 36' 0-8112
Breunnerite (Mg,Fe)C0 3
Mesitite 2MgC0 3 .FeC0 3 72 46' -8141
Pistomesite MgCO3 .FeCO3 72 42' 0-8129
Siderite FeCO3 73 0' 0-8184
Oligonite (Fe,Mn)C0 3
Rhodochrosite MnCO 3 73 0' 0-8184
Manganosiderite (Mn,Fe)C0 3
Manganocalcite pt. (Mn,Ca)CO3
Smithsonite ZnCO 3 72 20' 0-8063
Monheimite (Zn,Fe)C03
Sphaerocobaltite CoCO 3
This list gives not only the prominent species of this group, but also some of the isomor-
phous intermediate compounds.
The CALCITE GROUP is characterized by rhombohedral crystallization.

All the species show, when distinctly crystallized, perfect rhombohedral
cleavage, the angle varying from 75 (and 105) in calcite to 73 (and 107)
in siderite. This is exhibited in the table above.
2. Aragonite Group. RC0 3. Orthorhombic

mm'" a : b : c
Aragonite CaCO 3 63 48' 0-6224 : 1 : 07206
Bromlite (Ca,Ba)CO,
Witherite BaCO 3 62 12' 0-6032 : 1 : 07302
Strontianite SrC03 62 41' 0-6090 : 1 : 0*7239
Cerussite PbC0 3 62 46' 0-6100 : 1 : 07230
The species of the ARAGONITE GROUP crystallize in the orthorhombic
system, but the relation to those of the Calcite Group is made more close by
the fact that the prismatic angle varies a few degrees only from 60 (and 120)
and the twinned forms with the fundamental prism as twinning-plane are
pseudo-hexagonal in character.
1. Calcite Group. RC0 3. Rhombohedral

CALCITE. Calc Spar; Calcareous Spar.
731 732 733 734 735
cr* 0001 A 1011 = 44 36'. w', 2131 A 2311 = 75 22'.

ce, 0001 A 0112 = 26 15'. 2131 A 3121 = 35 36'.
= wv,
me, 1010 A 0112 63 45'. wvi, 2131 A 1231 = 47 1|'.
rr'. 1011 A 1101 = 74 55'. yy' 3251 A 3521 = 70 59'.
MM', 4041 A 4401 = 114 10'.
t
3251 A 5231 = 45 32'.

yyv,
0112 A 1012 = 45 3' 3251 A 2351 = 29 16'.
yy*,
0554 A 5054 = 84 324'. v 2134 A 3124 = 20 36f '.
ff', 0221 A 2021 = 101 9'.
,
3145 A 4135 = 16 0'.

wv,
*
See the stereographic
projection, Fig. 269, p. 108.
CARBONATES 439
Habit of crystals very varied, as shown in the figures, from obtuse to acute
rhombohedral from thin tabular to long prismatic; and scalenohedral of
;
many types, often highly modified.

Twins (see Figs. 419-426, p. 168): (1) Tw. pi. c(0001), common, the crys-
tals having the same vertical axis. (2) Tw.
pi. 6(0112), very common, the vertical axes 750
inclined 127 29 J' and 52 30 J'; often producing
twinning lamellae as in Iceland Spar, which are,
in many cases, of secondary origin as in granular
limestones (Fig. 750) this twinning may be
;
produced artificially (see p. 188). (3) Tw. pi.

r(10Tl), not common; the vertical axes inclined
90 46' and 89 14'. (4) Tw. pi. /(0221), rare;
the axes intersect at angles of 53 46' and
126 14'.
Also fibrous, both coarse and fine; sometimes
lamellar; often granular; from coarse to impal- Section of crystalline limestone
pable, and compact to earthy. Also stalactitic, in polarized light,
tuberose, nodular, and other imitative forms.
Cleavage: r(1011) highly perfect. Parting e(0112) due to twinning.
||
Fracture conchoidal, obtained with difficulty. H. = 3, but varying with

the direction on the cleavage face; earthy kinds softer. G. = 2'714, in pure
crystals, but varying somewhat widely in impure forms, as in those contain-
ing iron, manganese, etc. Luster vitreous to sub vitreous to earthy. Color
white or colorless; also various pale shades of gray, red, green, blue, violet,
yellow; also brown and black when impure. Streak white or grayish.
Transparent to opaque.
Optically .
Birefringence very high. Refractive indices for the D line :
co = 1-65849, e = 1-48625.
Comp. Calcium carbonate, CaC0 3 = Carbon dioxide 44'0, lime 56*0
= 100. Small quantities of magnesium, iron, manganese, zinc, and lead may
be present replacing the calcium.
Var. The varieties are very numerous, and diverse in appearance. They depend
mainly on the following points: differences in crystallization and structural condition,
presence of impurities, etc., the extremes being perfect crystals and earthy massive forms;
also on composition as affected by isomorphous replacement.
A. VARIETIES BASED CHIEFLY UPON CRYSTALLIZATION AND ACCIDENTAL IMPURITIES

Ordinary. In crystals and cleavable masses, the crystals varying very widely in
1.
habit as already noted. Dog-tooth Spar is an acute scalenohedral form; Nail-head Spar,
a composite variety having the form suggested by the name. The transparent variety
from Iceland, used for polarizing prisms, etc., is called Iceland Spar or Doubly-refracting
Spar. As regards color, crystallized calcite varies from the kinds which are perfectly
clear and colorless through yellow, pink, purple, blue, to brown and black. The color is
usually pale except as caused by impurities. These impurities may be pyrite, native
copper, malachite, sand, etc.; they are sometimes arranged in symmetrical form, as
depending upon the growth of the crystals and hence produce many varieties.
Fontainebleau limestone, from Fontainebleau and Nemours, France, contains a large
amount of sand, some 50 to 63 p. c* Siliceous calcite crystals come from S. D., Wy., Cal.,
etc.
2. Fibrous and lamellar kinds. Satin Spar is fine fibrous, with a silky luster; resembles
fibrous gypsum, also called satin spar, but is much harder than gypsum and effervesces
with acids. Lublinite is a fibrous variety, probably pseudomorphous after some organic
material.
calcite, the lamellae more or less undulating;

is a pearly lamellar color white,
Argentine
is a foliated white
grayish, yellowish. Aphrite, in its harder and more sparry variety,
pearly calcite, near argentine; in its softer
kinds it approaches chalk, though lighter,
soft and greasy to the touch, and more
pearly in luster, silvery white or yellowish in color,
or less scaly in structure. Aphrite has been thought to be aragonite pseudomorphous
after gypsum.
3. Granular massive to cryptocrystalline kinds: Limestone, Marble, Chalk.
Granular limestone or Saccharoidal limestone, so named because like loaf sugar in frac-
ture, varying from coarse to very fine granular,
and hence to compact limestone; colors
are various, as white, yellow, reddish, green; usually they are clouded and give a handsome
effect when the material is polished. When such limestones are fit for polishing, or for
architectural or ornamental use, they are called marbles. Many varieties have special
names. Shell-marble consists largely of fossil shells; Lumachelle or fire-marble is a dark
brown shell-marble, with brilliant fire-like or chatoyant internal reflections. Ruin-marble
is a kind of a yellow to brown color, showing, when polished, figures bearing some resem-
blance to fortifications, temples, etc., in ruins, due to infiltration of iron oxide, etc.
Lithographic stone is a very even-grained compact limestone, of buff or drab color; as
that of Solenhofen, Bavaria. Hydraulic limestone is an impure limestone which after igni-
tion sets, i.e., takes a solid form under water, due to the formation of a silicate. The
French varieties contain 2 or 3 p. c. of magnesia, and 10 to 20 of silica and alumina (or
clay). The varieties in the United States contain 20 to 40 p. c. of magnesia, and 12 to 30
p. c. of silica and alumina. Hard compact limestone varies from nearly pure white, through
grayish, drab, buff, yellowish, and reddish shades, to bluish gray, dark brownish gray, and
black, and sometimes variously veined. Many kinds make beautiful marble when pol-
ished. Red oxide of iron produces red of different shades. Shades of green are due to
iron protoxide, chromium oxide, iron silicate.
Chalk is white, grayish white, or yellowish, and soft enough to leave a trace on a board.
It is composed of the shells of minute sea organisms. Calcareous marl is a soft earthy
deposit, with or without distinct fragments of shells; it generally contains much clay, and
graduates into a calcareous clay.
Oolite is a granular limestone, its grains minute concretions, looking somewhat like the
roe of fish, the name coming from u6i>, egg. Pisolite consists of concretions as large often
as a small pea, or larger, having usually a distinct concentric structure.
Deposited from calcareous springs, streams, or in caverns, etc. (a) Stalactites are cal-
careous cylinders or cones that hang from the roofs of limestone caverns, and which are
formed from the waters that drip through the roof; these waters hold some calcium
bicarbonate in solution, and leave calcium carbonate to form the stalactite when evapora-
tion takes place. Stalactites vary from transparent to nearly opaque; from a crystalline
structure with single cleavage directions to coarse or fine granular cleavable and to radi-
ating fibrous; from a white color and colorless to yellowish gray and brown. (6) Stalag-
mite is the same material covering the floors of caverns, it being made from the waters
that drop from the roofs, or from sources over the bottom or sides; cones of it sometimes
rise from the floor to meet the stalactites above. It consists of layers, irregularly curved,
or bent. Stalagmite, or a solid kind of travertine (see below) when on a large scale, is the
alabaster stone of ancient writers, that is, the stone of which ointment
vases, of a certain
form called alabasters, were made. A locality near Thebes, now well known, was largely
explored by the ancients, and the material has often been hence called Egyptian alabaster.
It was also formerly called onyx and
onychites because of its beautiful banded structure.
In the arts it is often now called Oriental alabaster or
onyx marble. Very beautiful marble
of this kind is obtained in Algeria. Mexican onyx is a similar material obtained from
lecah, Puebla, Mexico; also in a beautiful brecciated form from the extinct crater of Zem-
poaltepec in southern Mexico. Similar kinds occur in Missouri, Arizona, San Luis Obispo
Co., California, (c) Calc-sinter, Travertine, Calc Tufa. Travertine is of essentially the
same origin with stalagmite, but is distinctively a
deposit from springs or rivers, especially
where m large deposits, as along the river Anio, at
Tivoli, near Rome, where the deposit is
icores ot feet in thickness. Similar material is being deposited at the Mammoth Hot
Springs, Yellowstone Park, (d)Agaric mineral; Rock-milk is a very soft white material,
breaking easily m the fingers, deposited sometimes in
caverns, or about sources holding
lime in solution, Rock-meal is white and
(e) light, like cotton, becoming a powder on
the slightest pressure.
B. VARIETIES BASED UPON COMPOSITION

These include: Dolomitic calcite. Contains
toward true dolomite. Also baricalcite
magnesium carbonate, thus graduating
(which contains some BaCO 3 ); similarly, stron-
CARBONATES 441
tianocalcite (SrCO 3 ), ferrocalcite (FeCO 3 ), manganocalcite (MnCOa) (see under agnolite,

p. 582), zincocalcite (ZnCO 3 ), plumbocalcite (PbCOs), cobal'ocalcite (CoCO 3 ).
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible, glows, and colors the flame reddish yellow; after ignition
the assay reacts alkaline; moistened with hydrochloric acid imparts the characteristic
lime color to the flame. In the solid mass effervesces when moistened with hydrochloric
acid, and fragments dissolve with brisk effervescence even in cold acid. See further under
aragonite, p. 447.
Diff. Distinguishing characters: perfect rhombohedral cleavage; softness, can be
scratched with a knife; effervescence in cold dilute acid; infusibility. Less hard and of
lower specific gravity than aragonite (which see). Resembles in its different varieties the
other rhombohedral carbonates, but is less hard, of lower specific gravity, and more
readily attacked by acid. Also resembles some varieties of barite, but has lower specific
gravity; it is less hard than feldspar and harder than gypsum.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its low refraction and very high birefringence,
the polarization colors in the thinnest sections attaining white of the highest order. The
negative interference figure, with many closely crowded colored rings, is also character-
istic. The rhombohedral cleavage is often shown in the fine fracture lines; systems of
twinned lamellae often conspicuous (Fig. 750), especially in crystalline limestone.
Artif
.
Crystals of calcite are formed when a solution of calcium carbonate in dilute
carbonic acid is evaporated slowly at ordinary temperatures. Calcite is formed when
aragonite is heated, the transformation being complete at 470.
Obs. Calcite, in its various forms, is one of the most widely distributed of
minerals. Beds of sedimentary limestone, formed from organic remains, shells, crinoids,
corals, etc., yield on metamorphism crystalline limestone or marble, and in connection
with these crystallized calcite and also deposits in caves of stalactites and stalagmites often
occur. Common with the zeolites in cavities and veins of igneous rocks as a result of
alteration, and similarly though less abundant with granite, syenite, etc. A frequent
mineral in metalliferous deposits, with lead, copper, silver, etc. Deposited from lime-
bearing waters as calc sinter, travertine, etc., especially in connection with hot springs as
at the Mammoth Hot Springs in the Yellowstone region.
Some of the best known localities for crystallized calcite are the following: Andreas^-
berg in the Harz Mts.; the mines of Freiberg, Schneeberg, etc., in Saxony; Kapnik in
Hungary; Aussig in Bohemia; Bleiberg in Carinthia; Traversella in Piedmont, Italy;
Elba. In England at Alston Moor and Egremont in Cumberland; Matlock, Derbyshire;
Beer Alston in Devonshire; at numerous points in Cornwall; Weardale in Durham;
Stank mine, Lancashire, In twin crystals of great variety and beauty at Guanajuato,
Mexico. The Iceland spar has been obtained from Iceland near Helgustadir on the Eske-
fiord. It occurs in a large cavity in basalt. The crystals, usually showing the fundamental
rhombohedron, are often coated with tufts of stilbite.
In the United States, crystallized calcite occurs in N. Y., in St. Lawrence Co., especially
at the Rossie lead mine; in Jefferson Co., near Oxbow; dog-tooth spar, in Niagara Co.,
near Lockport, with pearl spar, celestite, etc.; in Lewis Co., at Leyden nd Lowville, and
at the Martinsburg lead mine; at Anthony's Nose on the Hudson, formerly groups of
large tabular crystals; twins from Union Springs, Cayuga Co In N. J., at Bergen, yel-
low calcite with datolite, etc. In Va., at Wier's cave, stalactites of great beauty; also in
the large caves of Ky. In pyramidal crystals from Kelly's Island, Lake Erie. At the
Lake Superior Copper mines, complex crystals often containing scales of native copper.
At Warsaw, 111., in great variety of form, lining geodes and implanted on quartz crystals;
at Quincy. In Mo., with dolomite, near St. Louis; also with sphalerite at Joplin and other
points in the zinc region in the south-western part of the state, the crystals usually scaleno-
hedral and of a wine-yellow color. Wis., from Hazel Green. From the Bad Lands,
S.
p. In Nova Scotia, at Partridge Island, a wine-colored calcite, and other interesting
varieties.
Use. In the manufacture of mortars and cements; as a building and ornamental
material; as a flux in metallurgical operations; Iceland spar is used to make polarizing
prisms; chalk as a fertilizer, in whitewash, etc.
THINOLITE. A tufa deposit of calc um carbonate occurring on an enormous scale in
north-western Nev.; also occurs about Mono Lake, Cal. It forms layers of interlaced
crystals of a pale yellow or light brown color and often skeleton structure except
when
covered by subsequent deposit of calcium carbonate.
DOLOMITE. Pearl Spar pt.
Tri-rhombohedral. Axis c = 0-8322.

= MM', 4041 A 4401 = 113 53'.
or 0001 A 10T1 43 52'.
rr\ lOll A Ilt)l = 73 45'.
of rhom-
Habit rhombohedral, usually r(10ll) or M(4041); the presence
bohedrons of the second or third
751 752 series after the phenacite type very
characteristic. The r faces com-
monly curved or made up of sub-
individuals, and thus passing into
saddle-shaped forms (Fig. 752).
Also granular, coarse or fine,
resembling ordinary marble.
Cleavage: r(1011) perfect.
Fracture subconchoidal. Brittle.
H. = 3-5-4. G. = 2-8-2-9. Luster vitreous, inclining to pearly in some vari-

eties. Color white, reddish, or greenish white; also rose-red, green, brown,
translucent. w = 1-68174.
gray and black. Transparent to Optically .
e = 1-50256.
Comp. Carbonate of calcium and magnesium (Ca,Mg)CO 3 for nor- ;
mal dolomite CaMgC 2 O 6 or CaC0 3 MgCO 3 = Carbon dioxide 47-9, lime 30-4,
magnesia 21'7
= 100, or Calcium carbonate 54-35, magnesium carbonate 45*65
= 100. Varieties occur in which the ratio of the two carbonates varies from
1:1. The carbonates of iron and manganese also frequently enter replacing
the magnesium carbonate and grading to ankerite ; rarely cobalt and zinc
carbonates.
Pyr. t e tc. B.B. acts like calcite. In solution gives tests for magnesium and usually
for iron. Fragments thrown into cold acid, unlike calcite, are only very slowly acted upon,
if at all, while in powder in warm acid the mineral is readily dissolved with effervescence.
The ferriferous dolomites become brown on exposure.
Diff. Resembles calcite (see p. 441), but generally to be distinguished in that it does
not effervesce readily in the mass in cold acid.
Artif. Artificial dolomite has been formed in several ways. The results of many ex-
periments would indicate that heat and pressure are favorable for its formation. Sea
water in contact with calcium carbonate when heated in a sealed tube produced dolomite.
It has been observed that such reactions take place more readily with aragonite than
with calcite, indicating the possibility of coral deposits (aragonite) being transformed
into dolomite.
Micro. Similar to calcite in thin sections except that it more often shows crystal
outlines and less commonly polysynthetic twinning.
Obs. Massive dolomite constitutes extensive strata, called limestone strata, in various
regions, as in the dolomite region of the southern Tyrol. Crystalline and compact varieties
are often associated with serpentine and other magnesian rocks, and with ordinary lime-
stones. Dolomite, as a rock, is of secondary origin, having been transformed from ordinary
limestone by the action of solutions containing magnesium. This change, called dolomiti-
zaiion, may take place in various ways. The more favorable conditions would involve
heat, pressure, high magnesium content of waters and long periods of time. Consequently
the older and more deeply buried in the earth's crust the greater is the probability of a lime-
stone being converted into dolomite. Dolomite is also commonly a vein mineral, frequently
occurring with various metallic ores. Some prominent localities are: Leogang in Salzburg,
Austria; Schemnitz and Kapnik in Hungary; Freiberg in Saxony, Germany. In Switzer-
land, at Bex, in crystals; also in the Binnental; Traversella in Piedmont and Campolongo,
Italy. In unusual dark colored crystals from Teruel, Spain.
In the United States, in Ver., at Roxbury. In N. J., at Hoboken. In N. Y. at Lock-
port, Niagara Falls, etc.; at the Tilly Foster iron mine, Brewster, Putnam Co., with mag-
netite, chondrodite. In Pa. at Phoenixville. In saddle-shaped crystals with the sphalerite
CARBONATES 443
of Joplin, Mo. In N. C. at Stony Point, Alexander Co. In fine crystals from Alamosa,
Alaska.
Named after Dolomieu (1750-1801), who announced some of the marked characteristics
of the rock in 1791 its not effervescing with acids, while burning like
limestone, and
solubility after heating in acids.
Use. As a building and ornamental stone; for the manufacture of certain cements;
for the production of magnesia used in the preparation of refractory linings in metallurgical
furnaces .
Ankerite. CaCO 3 .(Mg,Fe,Mn)CO 3 ,_or for normal ankerite 2CaCO 3 .MgCO3 .FeCO3 .
In rhombohedral crys als; rr' 1011 A 1101 =73 48' also crystalline massive, granular,
compact. G. = 2 -95-31. Color white, gray, reddish. Occurs with siderite at the Styrian
mines. From Traversella, Italy. With the hematite of northern New York/
MAGNESITE.
Rhombohedral Axis: c = 0-8112. rr' 1011 A TlOl = 72 36'.
Crystals
rare, usually rhombohedral, also prismatic. Commonly massive; granular
cleavable to very compact; earthy.
Cleavage: r(1011) perfect. Fracture flat conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 3-5-
4-5. G. = 3-0-3-12, cryst. Luster vitreous; fibrous varieties sometimes
silky. Color white, yellowish, or grayish white, brown. Transparent to
opaque. Optically co = 1*717. .c = 1*515.
Comp. Magnesium carbonate, MgC0 = 3 Carbon dioxide 52'4, mag-

nesia 47-6 = 100. Iron carbonate is often present.
Breunnerite contains several p. c. of FeO; G. = 3-3 '2; white, yellowish, brownish,
rarely black and bituminous; often becoming brown on exposure, and hence called Brown
Spar.
Pyr., etc. B.B. resembles calcite and dolomite, and like the latter is but slightly acted
upon by cold acids; in powder is readily dissolved with effervescence in warm hydro-
chloric acid. In solution gives strong test for magnesium with little or no calcium.
Obs. Found as a secondary mineral formed by the alteration of various magnesian
minerals; in talcose schist, serpentine and other magnesian rocks, also gypsum; as veins
in serpentine, or mixed with it so as to form a variety of
verd-antique marble. Occurs
at Hrubschiitz in Moravia; at Kraubat and Maria-ZeU, Styria; Greiner in the Zillertal,
Tyrol, Austria; Snarum, Norway.
In the United States, in Mass., at Bolton; at Roxbury, veining serpentine; in Md., at-
Barehills, near Baltimore; in Pa., in crystals, at West Goshen, Chester Co., near Texas,
Lancaster Co.; in Cal. it is mined in Tulare, Kern, Santa Clara, Sonoma Cos. and else-
where. A white saccharqidal magnesite resembling statuary marble has been found as
loose blocks on an island in the St. Lawrence River, near the Thousand Island Park. In
small prismatic crystals from Orangedale, Nova Scotia.
Use. In the preparation of magnesite brick for the linings of metallurgical furnaces;
in the manufacture of various chemical compounds, as epsom salts, magnesia, etc.
Intermediate between magnesite and siderite are:
MESITITE. 2MgCO 3 rr' lOll A TlOl = 72 46'.
.FeCO 3 . G. = 3-35-3-36. Usually
in flat rhombohedrons 0112) with rounded faces. Traversella, Piedmont, Italy.
(e,
PISTOMESITE. MgCOs.FeCOs = Magnesium carbonate 42'0, iron carbonate 58'0 = 100.

rr' 1011 A TlOl = 72 42'. G. = 3 '42. Thurnberg, Salzburg, Austria; also Traversella,
Italy.
SIDERITE. Chalybite, Spathic Iron.

Rhombohedral. Axis c = 0-8184.
cr, 0001 A lOTl = 43 23'. rr', 1011 A 1101 = 73 0'.
cM, 0001 A 4041 = 75 11'. MM', 4041 A 4401 = 113 42'.

cs, 0001 A 0551 = 78 3'. ss', 0551 A 5051 = 115 50'.
cd, 0001 A 0881 = 82 28'. dd', 0881 A 8081 = 118 18'.
Crystals commonly rhombohedral r (1011) or e(0112) the faces, often

curved and built up of sub-individuals like dolomite. Often cleavable massive
to coarse or fine granular. Also in botryoidal and globular forms, subfibrous

within, occasionally silky fibrous; compact
and earthy.
Cleavage: r(1011) perfect. Fracture uneven or subconchoidal. Brittle.
H. = 3'5-4. G. = 3-83-3-88. Luster vitreous, inclining to pearly. Color
ash-gray, yellowish gray, greenish gray, also brown
and brownish red, rarely
green; and sometimes white. Streak white. Translucent to subtranslucent.
Optically -.
= 1'873. = 1-633.
Comp. Iron protocarbonate, FeC0 3 = Carbon dioxide 37-9, iron pro-
toxide 62-1 = 100 (Fe = 48'2 p. c.). Manganese may be present (as in
oligonite, manganospherite) also magnesium and calcium.
,
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates, gives off CO 2 blackens and becomes mag-
,
netic. B.B. blackens and fuses at 4 '5-5. With the fluxes reacts for iron, and with soda
and niter on platinum foil generally gives a manganese reaction. Only slowly acted upon
by cold acid, but dissolves with brisk effervescence in hot hydrochloric acid. Exposure to
the atmosphere darkens its color, rendering it often of a blackish brown or brownish red
color.
Diff. Characterized by rhombohedral form and cleavage. Specific gravity higher
than that of calcite, dolomite and ankerite. Resembles some sphalerite but lacks the
resinous luster, differs in cleavage angle and yields COa (not H^S) with hydrochloric acid.
" "
Obs. ,Siderite may form as bog ore by the action, out of contact with the air, of
organic matter in a bicarbonate solution. It may also be formed by the action of ferrous
solutions upon limestones. It frequently occurs also as a vein mineral. It occurs in many
of the rock strata, in gneiss, mica slate, clay slate, and as clay iron-stone in connection with
the Coal formation and many other stratified deposits. It is often associated with metallic
ores. At Freiberg, Saxony, it occurs in silver mines. In Cornwall it accompanies tin. It
is also found accompanying copper and iron pyrites, galena, chalcocite, tetrahedrite. Occa-
sionally it is to be met with in trap rocks as spherosiderite in globular concretions. Exten-
sive deposits occur in the Eastern Alps, in Styria and Carinthia at Tavetsch, Switzerland.
At Harzgerode and elsewhere in the Harz Mts., it occurs in fine crystals in gray-wacke;
also in Cornwall of varied habit at many localities; at Alston-Moor, and Tavistock, Devon-
shire. In large rhombohedrons from Allevard, France. Fine cleavage masses occur with
cryolite in Greenland.
In the United States, in Ver., at Plymouth. In Mass., at Sterling. In Conn., at Rox-
bury, an extensive vein in quartz, traversing gneiss. In N. Y., a series of deposits occur in
Columbia Co.; at the Rbssie iron mines, St. Lawrence Co. In N. C., at Fentress and Har-
lem mines. The argillaceous carbonate, in nodules and beds (clay ironstone), is abundant
in the coal regions of Pa., Ohio, and many parts of the country. In a clay-bed under the
Tertiary along the west side of Chesapeake Bay for 50 m.
Use. An ore of iron.
RHODOCHROSITE. Dialogite.
Rhombohedral. c = 0-8184, rr' 1011 A TlOl
Axis =_73 0'. Distinct
crystals not common; usually the rhombohedron r(1011); also e(0112),
with rounded striated faces. Cleavable, massive to granular-massive and
compact. Also globular and botryoidal, with columnar structure, sometimes
indistinct; incrusting.
Cleavage: r(10Tl) perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 3-5-4-5.
G. = 3-45-3*60 and higher. Luster Color
vitreous, inclining to pearly.
shades of rose-red; yellowish gray,
fawn-colored, dark red, brown. Streak
Optically -. co = 1-820. e = 1*600.
white. Translucent to subtranslucent.
Comp. Manganese protocarbonate, 3
= Carbon dioxide 38'3,
MnCO
manganese protoxide 61-7 = 100. Iron carbonate is usually present even up
to 40 p. c as in manganosiderite; sometimes the carbonate of
,
calcium, as in
manganocalcite, also magnesium, zinc, and rarely cobalt.
green manganate.
CARBONATES 445
effervescence in warm hydrochloric acid. On exposure to the air changes to brown, and
some bright rose-red varieties become paler.
Diff. Characterized by its pink color, rhombohedral form and cleavage, effervescence
in acids.
Obs. Occurs commonly in veins along with ores of silver, lead and copper, and with
other ores of manganese. Found at Schemnitz and Kapnik in Hungary Nagyag in Tran- ;
sylvania; ponite is a ferriferous variety from Roumania; in Germany at Freiberg in Sax-

ony; at Diez near Oberneisen in Nassau; at Daaden, Rheinprovinz in Belgium at ;
Moet-Fontaine in the Ardennes. A variety containing 45 per cent of zinc carbonate from
Rosseto, Elba, has been called zincorodochrosite. In the United States at Branchville,
Conn.; in N. J., with franklinite at Mine Hill, Franklin Furnace. In Col., at the John
Reed mine, Alicante, Lake Co., in beautiful clear rhombohedrons also at the Oulay mine, ;
near Lake City and Alma, Park Co.; in Chaff ee, Gilpin and Ouray Cos. In Mon., at Butte
City. Abundant at the silver mines of Austin, Nev. At Placentia Bay, Newfoundland.
Named rhodochrosite from podov, a rose, and xpoxris, color; and dialogite, from 5ux\oyrj,
doubt.
Use. A minor ore of manganese.
SMITHSONITE. Calamine pt. Dry-bone ore Miners.

Rhombohedral. Axis c = 0-8063. rr
f
lOll A IlOl = 72 20'. Rarely
well crystallized; faces r(1011) generally curved and rough. Usually reni-
form, botryoidal, or stalactitic, and in crystalline incrustations; also granular,
and sometimes impalpable, occasionally earthy and friable.
Cleavable: r(1011) perfect. Fracture uneven to imperfectly conchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 5. G. = 4*30-4 '45. Luster vitreous, inclining to pearly.
Streak white. Color white, often grayish, greenish, brownish white, some-
times green, blue and brown. Subtransparent to translucent. Optically .
co = 1-818. e - 1-618.
Comp. Zinc carbonate, ZnCO 3 = Carbon dioxide 35-2, zinc protoxide

64-8 = 100. Iron carbonate is often present (as in monheimite) also manga- ',
nese and cobalt carbonates; further calcium and magnesium carbonates in

traces; rarely cadmium and indium.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube loses carbon dioxide, and, if pure, is yellow while hot
and white on cooling.B.B. infusible, giving characteristic zinc flame; moistened with co-
balt solution and heated in O.F. gives a green color on cooling. With soda on charcoal
coats the coal with the oxide, which is yellow while hot and white on cooling; this coating,
moistened with cobalt solution, gives a green color after heating in O.F. Soluble in
hydrochloric acid with effervescence.
Diff. Distinguished from calamine, which it often closely resembles, by its efferves-
cence in acids.
Obs. Found both in veins and beds, especially in company with galena and sphalerite;
also with copper and iron ores. It usually occurs in calcareous rocks, and is generally asso-
ciated with calamine, and sometimes with limonite. It frequently replaces limestone, pseu-
domorphs after calcite crystals being often observed. Commonly a secondary mineral and
is often produced by the action of carbonated waters upon zinc sulphide. Often is in a
porous, honey-comb-like material, known commonly as "dry-bone" ore.
Found at Nerchinsk in Siberia; at Dognaczka in Hungary; Bleiberg and Raibel in
Carinthia; Wiesloch in Baden and at AJtenberg, Germany. Moresnet in Belgium and
Altenberg. In the province of Santander, Spain, at Puente Viesgo. In England, at
Roughten Gill, Alston Moor, near Matlock, in the Mendip Hills, and elsewhere; in Ireland,
at Donegal. At Laurion, Greece, varieties of many colors; from Sardinia. From Broken
Hill, New South Wales.
In the United States, in Pa., at Lancaster abundant, the variety called "dry-bone"; at
the Ueberroth mine, near Bethlehem, in scalenohedrons. In Wis., at Mineral Point,
Shullsburg, etc., pseudomorphs after sphalerite and calcite. In la., at Swing's diggings,
N. W. of Dubuque, etc. In south-western Mo., associated with sphalerite and calamine.
In Ark., at Calamine, Lawrence Co.; in Marion Co. A pink cobaltiferous variety occurs
at Boleo, Lower California. In N. M. from Socorro Co. and in translucent green botryoidal
masses from Kelly. In Tooele Co., Utah.
Institution in
Named after James Smithson (1754-1829), who founded the Smithsonian
used in England, cf. calamme, p. 539.
Washington. The name calamine is frequently
Use. An ore of zinc.
In small spheri-
Sphserocobaltite. Cobalt protocarbonate, CoCO 3 Rhombohedral .
in crystals. G. = 4 '02-4-13. Color rose-red.

cal masSs with crystalline surface, rarely
From Schneeberg, Saxony. From Boleo, Lower California.
2. Aragonite Group. RC0 3. Orthorhombic

For list of species, see p. 437.
ARAGONITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'62244 : 1 : 072056.
mm"', 110 A 110 = 63 48'.
kk' Oil A Oil = 71 33'.
pp' 111 A 111 = 86 24'.

pp"', 111 A 111 = 50 27'.
and characterized by the presence of acute domes

Crystals often acicular,
or pyramids. Twins: tw. pi. ra(110) commonly repeated, producing pseudo-
763
'
754 755 756 757
\ \
hexagonal forms (see Figs. 755-757) Also globular, renif orm, and coralloidal
.
shapes; sometimes columnar, straight or divergent; alsostalactitic; incrusting.

Cleavage: 6(010) distinct; also ra(110); fc(Oll) imperfect. Fracture
subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 3'5^. G. = 2*93-2-95. Luster vitreous,
inclining to resinous on surfaces of fracture. Color white; also gray, yel-
low, green and violet; streak uncolored. Transparent to translucent. Op-
tically -. Ax. pi. || a(100). Bx J_ c(001). Dispersion p > v small. 2 E
= 30 54'. a = 1-531. = 1-682. 7 = 1-686.
Comp. Calcium carbonate, CaCO 3= Carbon dioxide 44'0, lime 56*0
= 100. Some varieties contain a little strontium, others lead, and rarely zinc.
Aragonite changes to calcite at 470.
Var. Ordinary, (a) Crystallized in simple or compound crystals, the latter much the
most common; often in radiating groups of acicular crystals. Columnar; also fine fibrous
with silky luster, (c) Massive.
Stalactitic or stalagmitic: Either compact or fibrous in structure, as with calcite; Spru-
from Carlsbad, Bohemia. Coralloidal: In groupings of delicate inter-
delstein is stalactitic
lacing and coalescing stems, of a snow-white color, and looking a little like coral; often called
Flosferri. Tarnowitzite is a kind containing lead carbonate (4 to 8 p. c.), from Tarnowitz
in Silesia; with G. = 2 '99. Zeyringite is a calcareous sinter, probably aragonite, colored
greenish white or sky-blue with nickel, from Zeyring, Styria. Nicholsonite is aragonite
containing zinc from Leadville, Col., and the Tintic District, Utah.
CARBONATES 447
Pyr., etc. B.B. whitens and falls to pieces, and sometimes, when containing strontia,
imparts a more intensely red color to the flame than lime; otherwise reacts like calcite.
When immersed in cobalt nitrate solution powder turns lilac and the color persists on boiling
while calcite under like conditions remains uncolored or becomes blue on long boiling. It
is stated that these tests are not always strictjy reliable.
DM. Distinguished from calcite by higher specific gravity and absence of rhombo-
hedral cleavage; from the zeolites (e.g., natrolite), etc., by effervescence in acid. Stron-
tianite and witherite are fusible, higher in specific gravity and yield distinctive flames B.B.
The resinous luster on fracture surfaces is to be noted.
Artif .
Aragonite will form when solutions of calcium carbonate are evaporated at
temperatures from 80 to 100; it will form at lower temperatures if the solution contains
some sulphate or small amounts of the carbonates of strontium or lead.
Obs. The most common repositories of aragonite are beds of gypsum; also beds of
iron ore, as the Styrian mines, where it occurs in coralloidal forms, and is denominated flos-
ferri, "flower of iron"', in cavities in basalt and lavas often associated with copper and iron
;
pyrites, galena, and malachite. It constitutes the pearly layer of shells and the skeleton
material of corals.
First discovered in Aragon, Spain (whence its name), at Molina and Valencia, in six-
sided prisms, with gypsum, similarly at Dax, France. Prominent localities are Bilin,
Bohemia; Racanbunto, Silesia; Leogang in Salzburg, Austria; Herrengrund, Hungary;
with sulphur in Sicily in fine prisms; also at Alston Moor and elsewhere, England, fine
frequently replaced by native copper from Coro-Coro, Bolivia.
In fibrous crusts at Hoboken, N. J.; at Edenville and Rossie, N. Y.; Wood's Mine,
Lancaster Co., Pa.; Warsaw, 111., lining geodes; Mine-la-Motte, Mo., in crystals. Flos-
ferri in the Organ Mts., N. M.; from Bisbee, Ariz.
Ktypeite is calcium carbonate in the form of pisolites from Carlsbad, Bohemia, and
Hammam-Meskoutine, Algeria. G. = 2'58-270. Decrepitates when heated and changes
to calcite.
WITHERITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0-6032 1 07302. Crystals always re-
: : : :
peated twins, simulating hexagonal pyramids. Also massive, columnar or

granular.
Cleavage: 6(010)distinct; m(110) imperfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle.
H. = 33*75. G. = 4'27-4'35. Luster vitreous, inclining to resinous on sur-
faces of fracture. Color white, yellowish, grayish. Streak white. Subtrans-
parent to translucent. Optically -. a = 1'529. = 1-676. 7 = 1-677.
Comp. Barium carbonate, BaCO = Carbon
3 dioxide 22*3, baryta 77 -7
= 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 2 to a bead, coloring the flame yellowish green; after fusion
reacts alkaline. B.B. on charcoal with soda fuses easily, and is absorbed by the coal. Solu-
ble in dilute hydrochloric acid; this solution, even when very much diluted, gives with sul-
phuric acid a white precipitate which is insoluble in acids.
Diff. Distinguished by its high specific gravity; effervescence in acid; green colora-
tion of the flame B.B. Barite is insoluble in hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Occurs at Alston Moor in Cumberland, with galena; at Fallowfield near Hex-
ham in Northumberland; Tarnowitz in Silesia. Leogang in Salzburg, Austria. Near
Lexington, Ky., with barite. In a silver-bearing vein near Rabbit Mt., Thunder Bay, Lake
Superior. From Tsubaki mine, Prov. Ugo, Japan.
Use. A minor source of barium compounds.
Bromlite. (Ba,Ca)CO 3 In pseudohexagonal pyramids (Figs. 611, 612, p. 299).
. In-
dices, 1*525-1 '670. Bromley Hill, near Alston, Cumberland, England.
STRONTIANITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0-6090 1 07239.
: : : :
Crystals often acicular or acute spear-shaped, like aragonite. Twins: tw.

pi. m(110) common. Also columnar, fibrous and granular.
Cleavage: ra(110) nearly perfect; 6(010) in traces. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 3-5-4. G. = 3-680-3-714. Luster vitreous; inclining to
resinous on faces of fracture. Color pale asparagus-green, apple-green; also

white, gray, yellow, and yellowish brown. Streak white. Transparent to
translucent. Optically -. Ax. pi. Z>(&10). Bx _L c(001). Dispersion
||
p < v small. 2E r = 12 17'. a = t'52f6. (3 = T667. y = T667.

Comp. Strontium carbonate, SrCOs = Carbon diozide 29*9, strontia
70-1 = 100. A little calcium is sometimes present.
Pyr., etc. B.B. swells up, throws out minute sprouts, fuses only on the thin edges, and
colors the flame strontia-red; the assay reacts alkaline after ignition. Moistened with
hydrochloric acid and treated either B.B. or in the naked lamp gives an intense red color.
Soluble in hydrochloric acid; the mediumly dilute solution when treated with sulphuric
acid gives a white precipitate.
Diff. Differs from related minerals, not carbonates, in effervescing with acids; has a
higher specific gravity than aragonite and lower than witherite; colors the flame red B.B.
Obs. Occurs at Strontian in Argyllshire and in Yorkshire, England; Claustal in the
Harz Mts., Germany; Braunsdorf, near Freiberg, Saxony; Leogang in Salzburg, Austria;
near Brixlegg, Tyrol, Austria (calciostrontianite) in Westphalia, Germany in fine crystals
;
near Hamm, and at the Wilhelmine mine near Altahlen.

In the United States, occurs in N. Y. at Schoharie, at Muscalonge Lake, Chaumont
Bay and Theresa, in Jefferson Co.; Mifflin Co., Pa.
Use. A minor source of strontium compounds.
CERUSSITE. White Lead Ore.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : 6 : c = 0-60997 : 1 : 072300.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 62 46'.
758 759 760 oil A Oil = 71 44'.
J*',
ii', 021 A 021 = 110 40'.
cp, 001 A 111 = 54 14'.
pp'j 111 A 111 = 87 42'.
pp'", 111 A 111 = 49 59'.
Simple crystals often
tabular 6(010), pris-
||
matic caxis; also pyr-

||
amidal. Twins: tw. pi.

m(110) very common,
contact- and penetration-
twins, often repeated
yielding six-rayed stellate groups. Crystals grouped in clusters, and
aggregates. Rarely fibrous, often granular massive and compact- earthv
Sometimes stalactitic.
Cleavage: m(110) and {(021) distinct; 6(010) and z(012) in traces.
Fracture conchoidal. Very brittle. H. = 3-3-5. G. =
6-46-6-574. Luster
adamantine, inclining to vitreous, resinous, or pearly; sometimes submetallic.
Color white gray, grayish black, sometimes
tinged blue or green (copper);
streak uncolored. Transparent to subtranslucent. Optically-. Ax. nil
6(010). Bx _L c(001). Dispersion p > v large. 2 V = 8 14'. a = 1-804
p = 2*076. 7 = 2-078.
mP Lead carbonate p bC03 = Carbon dioxide 16-5, lead oxide
Q rF = i nVT~
oo.o
>
1UU-
ecrepitates, loses carbon

at dioxide, turns first yellow, and
- n yellow on coolin B on cha al^ B ' '
d Soluble in dilute nitric acid with

'
Aiding
CAEBONATES 449
Artif . Cerussite has been produced artificially by the slow diffusion of a carbonate
solution into a lead solution through a porous membrane; by the action of a carbonate
solution upon a lead plate.
Obs. A secondary mineral occurring in connection with other lead minerals, and is
formed from galena, which, as it passes to a sulphate, may be changed to carbonate by
means of solutions of calcium bicarbonate. It is tound in Germany at Johanngeorgenstadt
in beautiful crystals; Friedrichssegen, Nassau; Badenweiler, Baden; at Claustal in the
Harz Mts. Other important localities are Monte Poni, Sardinia; at Bleiberg in Carinthia;
at Mies and Pfibram, Bohemia; in England, in Cornwall; at East Tamar mine, Devonshire;
near Matlock and Wirksworth, Derbyshire; at Leadhill and Wanlockhead, Scotland.
Fine crystals from Broken Hill, New South Wales.
Found in Pa., at Phenixyille. In Va., at Austin's mines, Wythe Co. In N. C., in King's
mine. In lead mines of Wis. but rarely in crystals; at Hazelgreen, crystals coating galena.
In Col., at Leadyille, and elsewhere. In Ariz., at the Flux mine, Pima Co., in large crys-
talline masses; in crystals at the Red Cloud mine, Yuma
Co. In Utah from Flagstaff
mine; in Idaho at Wardner and Kingston.
Use. An ore of lead.
BARYTOCALCITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 07717 : 1 :
0-6254; /3
= 73 52'. In crys-
tals; also massive.
Cleavage: ra( 110) perfect; c(001) less so. Fracture uneven to subcon-
choidal. Brittle. H. = 4. G. = 3 -64-3 '66. Luster vitreous, inclining to
resinous. Color white, grayish, greenish or yellowish. Streak white. Trans-
parent to translucent. Optically -. a = 1-525. = 1'684. 7 = 1-686.
Comp. Carbonate of barium and calcium, 3 .CaCO 3
= Carbon BaCO
dioxide 29'6, baryta 51 '5, lime 18'9 = 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. colors the flame yellowish green, and at a high temperature fuses on
the thin edges and assumes a pale green color; the assay reacts alkaline after ignition.
Soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid with effervescence. Dilute solution gives an abundant
precipitate, BaSO 4 with a few drops of sulphuric acid.
,
Obs. Occurs at Alston Moor in Cumberland, England, in limestone with barite and
fluorite.
ROSASITE. 2CuO.3CuC0 3 .5ZnC0 3 ?. Mammillary fibrous of a bright green to sky-
blue color. From Rosas mine at Sulcis, Sardinia.
Bismutospharite. Bi 2 (CO3)3.2Bi 2 O3. In spherical forms with radiated structure.
G. = 7 '42. Color yellow to gray or blackish brown. From Schneeberg, Saxony. Also
sparingly at Willimantic and Portland, Conn., as a result of the alteration of bismuthinite.
From the Stewart mine, Pala, San Diego Co., Cal.
Rutherfordine. Uranyl carbonate, UO 2 CO 3 A yellow ocher resulting from alteration
.
of uraninite. G. = 4*8. From Uruguru Mts., German East Africa.

Parisite. A
fluocarbonate of the cerium metals, [(Ce,La,Di)F] 2Ca(C0 3 )2. Rhombo-
hedral. Crystals small and slender. Habit pyramidal or prismatic. Crystals horizontally
grooved due to oscillatory combination of faces. H. = 4'5. G. = 4*358. Color brownish
yellow. Optically co = 1*676.
+ . e = 1757. From the emerald mines, Muso, Colom-
bia; Ravalli, Mon.; Quincy, Mass.; Montorfano, Italy; Narsarsuk, Greenland (syn-
chisite) .
Cordylite is a parisite containing barium from Narsarsuk, South Greenland. Other

material from Narsarsuk thought to be a new species and named synchisite is parisite.
Bastnasite. Hamartite. A fluocarbonate of the cerium metals (RF)COs. H. = 4 '5-
G. = 4 '948. Color wax-yellow to reddish brown. Uniaxial, +. Strong birefringence.
cc = 1715. From the Bastnas mine, Riddarhyttan, Sweden. Also in parallel growth with
tysonite in the granite of the Pike's Peak region in Colorado. Found to the east of Ambo-
sitra, Madagascar.
Ancylite. 4Ce(OH)CO 3 .3SrCO 3 .3H 2 O. Orthorhombic. In small pyramids with curved
faces and edges. H. =4'5. G. = 3 '9. Color light yellow, orange, brown, gray. Infu-
sible. From Narsarsuk, Greenland. WeibyeUe is a related mineral.
Ambatoarinite. A
carbonate of strontium and the rare earths. Orthorhombic? In
crystals with parallel axes, forming skeleton-like groups. Index, > 1'66. From Arnba-
toarina, near Ambositra, Madagascar.
PHOSGENITE.
Tetragonal. Axis c = 1-0876. Crystals prismatic; sometimes tabular
Rather sectile. H. =
Cleavage: m(110), a(100) distinct; also c(001).
275-3. G. = 6-0-6-3. Luster adamantine. Color white, gray, and yellow.
Streak white. Transparent to translucent. Optically +. w = 2-114. e =
Chlorocarbonate of lead, (PbCl) 2 CO 3 or PbCO 3 .PbCl 2 = Lead

Comp.
carbonate 49'0, lead chloride 51*0 = 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. melts readily to a yellow globule, which on cooling becomes white
and crystalline. On charcoal in R.F. gives metallic lead, with a white coating of lead
chloride. Dissolves with effervescence in dilute nitric acid and solution reacts for chlorine
with silver nitrate.
Obs. At Cromford near Matlock in Derbyshire; at Gibbas, Monte Pom and Monte-
vecchio in Sardinia. From BrokenHill, New South Wales; Dundas, Tasmania.
Northupite. MgCO .Na 2 CO3.NaCl. In isometric octahedrons. H. = 3'5-4. G. =

3
2'38. White to yellow or gray, n = T514. From Borax Lake, San Bernardino Co., Cal.
Tychite. 2MgCO 3 .2Na2 CO3.Na2SO4. Isometric. Octahedral habit. H. = 3'5. G.
= 2'5. n = l;51. Very rare. From Borax Lake, San Bernardino Co., Cal., associated
with northupite.
B. ACID, BASIC, AND HYDROUS CARBONATES

Teschemacherite. Acid ammonium carbonate, 4 CO 3 HNH . Orthorhombic. In yel-
lowish to 'white crystals. G. = 1'45. Indices, 1'423-1'536. From guano deposits of
Africa, Patagonia, the Chincha Islands.
MALACHITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 0-8809 : 1 :
0-4012; $
= 61 50'.
Crystals rarely distinct, usually slender, acicular prisms (mm"' 110 110 A
= 75 40'), grouped in tufts and rosettes. Twins: tw. pi. a(100) common.
Commonly massive or incrusting, with surface botryoidal, or stalactitic, and
structure divergent; often delicately compact fibrous, and banded in color;
frequently granular or earthy.
Cleavage: c(001) perfect; 6(010) less so. Fracture subconchoidal, un-
even. Brittle. H. = 3-5-4. G. = 3-9-4-03. Luster of crystals admantine,
inclining to vitreous; of fibrous varieties more or less silky; often dull and
earthy. Color bright green. Streak paler green. Translucent to sub-
translucent to opaque. Optically /3
= 1'88. .
Comp. Basic cupric carbonate, CuC0 3 .Cu(OH) 2 = Carbon dioxide

19-9, cupric oxide 71-9, water 8'2 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube blackens and yields water. B.B. fuses at 2, coloring the
flame emerald-green; on charcoal is reduced to metallic copper; with the fluxes reacts like
cuprite. Soluble in acids with effervescence.
Diff. Characterized by green color and -copper reactions B.B.; differs from other
copper ores of a green color in its effervescence with acids.
Artif. Malachite has been formed artificially by heating precipitated copper carbon-
ate with a solution of ammonium carbonate for several
days.
Obs. Common with other ores of copper and as a product of their alteration thus ;
as a pseudomorph after
cuprite and azurite. Occurs abundantly in the Ural Mts.; at
Chessy in France; in Cornwall and in Cumberland, England; in Germany at Rheinbreit-
bach; Dillenburg, Nassau; Betzdorf near Siegen. At the copper mines of Nizhni Tagilsk,
Russia; with the copper ores of Cuba; Chile; at the Cobar mines and elsewhere in New
bouth Wales; South Australia; Rhodesia. In
crystals from Katanga, Congo, and Min-
douh, French Congo.
CARBONATES 451
Occurs in N. at Schuyler's mines, and at New Brunswick.

J., In Pa., at Cornwall,
Lebanon Co.; Perkiomen and Phenixville lead-mines. In Wis., at the copper mines,
at the
of Mineral Point, and elsewhere. Abundantly in fine masses and acicular crystals, with
calcite at the Copper Queen mine, Bisbee, Cochise Co., Ariz.; also in Graham Co., at
Morenci (6 m. from Clifton), in stalactitic forms of malachite and azurite in concentric
bands. At the Santa Rita mines, Grant Co., and elsewhere in N. M. Tintic district,
Utah. In pseudomorphs from Good Springs, Nev. Named from naXaxi), mallows, in
allusion to the green color.
Use. An ore of copper; at times as an ornamental stone.
AZURITE.
0-8805; = 87 36'.
761 762 763
mm'", 110 A 110 = 80 41'. pp

f
,
021 A 021 = 120 47'.
ac, 100 A 001 = 87 36'. cm, 001 A 110 = 88 10'.
ca, 001 A 101 = 44 46'. cd, 001 A 243 = 54 29'.
II', 023 A 023 = 60 47'. hh
f
,
221 A 221 = 73 56'.
Crystals varied in habit and highly modified. Also massive, and present-
ing imitative shapes, having a columnar composition; also dull and earthy.
Cleavage: p(021) perfect but interrupted; a(100) less perfect; ra(HO) in
traces. Fracture conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 3-5-4. G. = 3-77-3-83. Lus-
ter vitreous, almost adamantine. Color various shades of azure-blue, passing
into Berlin-blue. Streak blue, lighter than the color. Transparent to sub-
translucent, a = 1730. 0-= 1-758. 7 = 1-838.
Comp. Basic cupric carbonate, 2CuCO 3 .Cu(OH) 2
= Carbon dioxide
25-6, cupric oxide 69-2, water 5 -2
= 100.
Pyr., etc. Same as in malachite.
Diff. Characterized by its blue color; effervescence in nitric acid; copper reactions
B.B.
Artif . Azurite has been formed by allowing a solution of copper nitrate to lie in con-
tact with fragments of calcite for several years.
Obs. Occurs in splendid crystallizations in France at Chessy, near Lyons, whence it
derived the name Chessy Copper or chessylite. Also in fine crystals in Siberia; Moldawa in
the Banat, Hungary; at Wheal Buller, near Redruth in Cornwall; in Devonshire and Derby-
shire, England; at Broken Hill and elsewhere in New South Wales; South Australia.
Occurs in Pa., at Phenixville, in crystals. In N. J., near New Brunswick. In Wis.,
near Mineral Point. In Ariz., at the Longfellow and other mines in Graham Co.; with
malachite in beautiful crystals at the Copper Queen mine, Bisbee; at Morenci. In Grant
Co., N. M. At the Mammoth mine in the Tintic district and in Tooele Co., Utah. In
Cal., Calaveras Co., at Hughes's mine, in crystals.
Aurichalcite. A basic carbonate of zinc and copper, 2(Zn,Cu)CO3 ,.3(Zn,Cu)(OH) 2 .
Orthorhombic? In drusy incrustations. G. = 3'54-3'64. Luster pearly. Color pale

green to sky-blue. Indices, 1 '634^1 '682. From the Altai Mts., Mongolia; Chessy, near
Lyons, France; Rezbdnya, Hungary; Ondarroa, Vizcaya, Spain; Chihuahua, Mexico. In
the United States, at Lancaster, Pa.; Salida, Col.; the Santa Caterina Mts., Ariz.; Beaver
Co., Utah; Kelly, N. M.
Hydrozincite. A basic zinc carbonate, perhaps ZnCO 3 .2Zn(pH) 2 Massive, fibrous, .
earthy or compact, as incrustations. G.

= 3'58-3'8. Color white, grayish or yellowish.
In great quantities at the
Index, 1-695. Occurs at mines of zinc, as a result of alteration.
Dolores mine, Santander, Spain. From Chihuahua, Mexico; Bleyberg, Belgium; Mal-
fidano, Sardinia. In the United States at Friedensville, Pa.; at Linden, in Wis.; Granby,
Mo.
OTAVITE. A basic cadmium carbonate of uncertain composition. In crusts showing min-
ute rhombohedral crystals. Color white to reddish. From the Otavi district, German
Southwest Africa.
Hydrocerussite. A basic lead carbonate, probably 2PbCO3 .Pb(pH) 2 In thin color- .
less hexagonal plates. Index, 2 '07. Occurs as a coating on native lead, at Langban,
Sweden; with galena at Wanlockhead, Scotland.
Dundasite. A basic carbonate of lead and aluminium, Pb(AlO)2(CO 3 )2.4H 2 O. In
small spherical aggregates of radiating acicular crystals. Color white. From Dundas and
Mt. Read, Tasmania, and from near Trefriw, Carnarvonshire, Wales; Wensley, Derbyshire;
near Maam, County Gal way, Ireland.
Dawsonite. A basic carbonate of aluminium and sodium, Na 3 Al(CO 3 ) 3 .2Al(OH)3.
Orthorhombic. In thin incrustations of white radiating bladed crystals. Perfect cleavage,
ra(110). G. = 2-40. Indices, 1-466-1-596. Found on a feldspathic dike near McGill
College, Montreal. From the province of Siena, Pian Castagnaio, Tuscany, Italy
Thermonatrite. Hydrous sodium carbonate, Na 2 CO 3 .H2 O. G. = l'S-1'6. Occurs m

various lakes, and as an efflorescence over the soil in many dry regions.
Nesquehonite. Hydrous magnesium carbonate, 3 .3H 2 O. In radiating groups MgCO
of prismatic crystals. G. = 1 '83-1-85. Colorless to white. Biaxial, Indices, 1-495- .
1'526. From a coal mine at Nesquehoning, Schuylkill Co., Pa. See lansfordite, p. 453.
Natron. Hydrous sodium carbonate, Na 2 CO 3 .10H 2O. Occurring in nature only in
solution, as in the soda lakes of Egypt, and elsewhere, or mixed with the other sodium
carbonates.
Pirssonite. CaCO 3 .Na 2 CO 3 .2H2 O. In prismatic crystals, orthorhombic-hemimorphic.
H. =3. G. = 2'35. Colorless to white. Optically +. Indices, I'504-r575. Borax
Lake, San Bernardino, Cal.
GAY-LUSSITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 1 -4897 : 1 :
1-4442; = 27'.
_78
mm'", 110 A UO = 111 10'.
764 765 ee', Oil A Oil = 109 30'.
me, 110 A Oil = 42 21'.
rr
f
,
112 A 112 = 69 29'.
Crystals often elongated a axis; also ||
flattened wedge-shaped. Cleavage:

m (110) perfect; c (001) rather difficult.
Fracture conchoidal. Very brittle.
H. = 2-3. G. = 1-93-1-95. Luster
vitreous. Color white, yellowish white.
Streak uncolored to grayish. Translu-
cent. Optically . a = 1*444 6 =
T517., 7 = 1-518.
Comp. Hydrous carbonate of calcium and sodium, CaCO 3 .Na2CO 3 .
Calcium carbonate 33-8, sodium carbonate

35-8, water 30-4 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Heated in a closed tube and becomes opaque.
decrepitates B.B. fuses
y e
brisk effervescence;
effervesoen ^^'l ""Vu^ the flameandinten
partly soluble in water,
^ly yellow. Dissolve! in acids with a
reddens turmeric paper.
the botton" of
Lake or So
r^ll V
iM '
a
n 'SV
La ?Un
&
th Cars m
1
^
^Desertdaynearcoverm
f
a
^Merida >
in Venezuela, in crystals disseminated at
g ona. Also abundant in Little Salt
' tr
tion of the ttPr 'F %Sweetwater f Ragtown, Nev, deposited upon the evapora-
VaUey Wv Named after Gay '
the French
cms 1850)
'
Lussac,
CARBONATES 453
Lanthanite. La2 (CO 3 ) 3 .9H2 O. In thin tabular orthorhombic crystals; also granular,
earthy. G. = 2 '605. Color grayish white, pink, yellowish. Optically Found coat- .
ing cerite at Bastnas, Sweden; with zinc ores of the Saucon valley, Lehigh Co., Pa.; at the
Sandford iron-ore bed, Moriah, N. Y.
TRONA.' Urao.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 2-8460: 1: 2-9700; = 77 23'.
ca, 001 A 100 = 77 23'.

001 A Til = 75 53^. 766
co,
oo", 111 A 111 = 47 35|'.
Often fibrous or columnar massive. . .
Cleavage: a (100) perfect; o (111) c (001) in traces. ;

\
Fracture uneven to subconchoidal. H. = 2*5-3. \
G. = 2-11-2-14. Luster vitreous, glistening. Color
gray or yellowish white. Translucent. Taste alkaline. Optically.
Index, 1-507.
Comp. Na2CO3.HNaCO3.2H2 O or 3Na2O.4CO 3 .5H 2 = Carbon diox-
ide 38-9, soda 41-2, water 19-9 = 100.
Chatard established the above composition for urao, and showed that trona, sometimes
"
called sesquicarbonate of soda," is an impure form of the same compound.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water and carbon dioxide. B.B. imparts an
intensely yellow color to the flame. Soluble in water, and effervesces with acids. Reacts
alkaline with moistened test-paper.
Obs. Found in the province of Fezzan, Africa, forming thin superficial crusts; Na-
troun lakes, Egypt; from Vesuvius; at the bottom of a lake at Lagunilla, Venezuela.
Efflorescences of trona occur near the Sweetwater river, Rocky Mountains. An extensive
bed in Churchill Co., Nev. In fine crystals at Borax lake, San Bernardino Co., Cal., with
hanksite, glauberite, thenardite, etc.
Hydromagnesite. Basic magnesium carbonate, 3MgCO3 .Mg(OH) 2 .3H2O. Crystals
small, tufted. Also amorphous; as chalky crusts. Color and streak white. Index, 1 '530.
Often occurs with serpentine; thus at Hrubschiitz, in Moravia; at Kraubat, Styria, etc.
Also similarly near Texas, Pa.; Hoboken, N. J. Material closely similar from saline crusts
on lava at Alpharoessa, Santorin Island, has been called giorgiosite.
Hydrogiobertite. MgCO 3 In light gray spherical forms. From the
.Mg(OH) 2 .2H 2 O.
neighborhood of Pollena, Italy. Deposited from Phillips Springs, Napa Co., Cal.
Artinite. MgCO 3 .Mg(OH) 2 .3H2O. Orthorhombic. Radiating fibrous. H. = 2'0.
G. = 2-0. White, ft = 1'54. From Val Laterna and Emarede, Val Aosta, Piedmont,
Italy.
Lansfordite. 3MgCO 3 .Mg(OH) 2 .21H2 O. Biaxial -. Indices, 1'42-1-503. Occurs as
small stalactites in the anthracite mine at Nesquehoning near Lansford, Schuylkill Co.,
Pa.; changed on exposure to nesquehonite.
Brugnatellite. MgCO 3 .5Mg(OH) 2 .Fe(OH) 3 .4H 2O. Micaceous/ lamellar. Perfect cleav-
age. Color flesh-pink, co = T53. Found in an old asbestos mine at Torre Santa
Maria, Val Malenco, Lombardy, Italy.
GAJITE. A basic hydrous calcium, magnesium carbonate. Rhombqhedral cleavage.
Granular structure. H. = 3'5. G. = 2'62. Color, white. Strong birefringence. Found
near Plesce, in the district Gorskikotar, Croatia.
Stichtite. 2MgCO 3 .5Mg(OH) 2 .2Cr(OH) 3 Micaceous. In scales. G.= 2'16. Color
.
lilac. Optically uniaxial or feebly biaxial. Optically Index, 1'54. An alteration

.
product of serpentine from Dundas, Tasmania.

Zaratite. Emerald Nickel. NiCO 3 .2Ni(OH) 2 .4H 2 O. Inmammillary incrustations; also
massive, compact. Color emerald-green. Occurs on chromite at Texas, Lancaster Co.,
Pa.; at Swinaness, Unst, Shetland; Igdlokunguak, Greenland.
Remingtonite. A hydrous cobalt carbonate. A rose-colored incrustation, soft and
earthy. From a copper mine near Finksburg, Carroll Co., Md.; Boleo, Lower California.
Tengerite. A supposed yttrium carbonate.

In white pulverulent coatings. On gado-
linite atYtterby, Sweden. A similar mineral isassociated with the gadolinite of Llano
Co., Tex.
Bismutite. A basic bismuth carbonate, perhaps Bi2 O3.CO2.H 2 O. Incrusting, or earthy
and pulverulent; amorphous. G. = 6'86-6'9 Breith.; 7 '67 Rg. Color white,- green, yel-
low and gray. Index, 2'25. Occurs in Germany, at Schneeberg and Johanngeorgenstadt,
with native bismuth, and at Joachimstal, Bohemia. In the United States, in S. C., at
Brewer's mine; hi Gaston Co., N. C.
Uranothallite. 2CaCO .U(CO
3 3 )2.10H2 O. In scaly or granular crystalline aggregates.
Color siskin-green. Occurs on uraninite at Joachimstal, Bohemia.
Liebigite. A hydrous carbonate of uranium and calcium. In mammillary concretions,
or thin coatings. Color apple-green. Occurs on uraninite near Adrianople, Turkey; also
Johanngeorgenstadt, Germany, and Joachimstal, Bohemia.
Voglite. A hydrous carbonate of uranium, calcium and copper. In aggregations of
crystalline scales. Color emerald-green to bright grass-green. From the Elias mine, near
Joachimstal, on uraninite, Bohemia.
Oxygen Salts
2. SILICATES
The Silicates are in part strictly anhydrous, in part hydrous, as the zeolites
and the amorphous clays, etc. -Furthermore, a large number of the silicates
yield more or less water upon ignition, and in many cases it is known that they
are, therefore, to be regarded as basic (or acid) silicates. The line, however,
between the strictly anhydrous and hydrous silicates cannot be sharply drawn,
since with many species which yield water upon ignition the part played by
the elements forming the water is as yet uncertain. Furthermore, in the cases
of several groups, the strict arrangement must be deviated from, since the
relation of the species is best exhibited by introducing the related hydrous
species immediately after the others.
This chapter closes with a section including the Titanates, Silico-titanates,
Titano-niobates, etc., which connect the Silicates with the Niobates and
Tantalates. Some Titanates have already been included among the Oxides.
Section A. Chiefly Anhydrous Silicates

I. Disilicates, Polysilicates
II. Metasilicates
III. Orthosilicates
IV. Subsilicates
The DISILICATES, RSi2 5, are salts of disilicic acid, 2 Si 2 O 5 H

and have an ,
oxygen ratio of silicon to bases of 4 1, as seen when the formula is written

:
after the dualistic method, RO.2Si0 2 .
The POLYSILICATES, R Si
are salts of polysilicic acid,
2 3 8, 4 Si 3 O 8 and H ,
have an oxygen ratio of 3 1, as seen in 2R0.3Si0 2

:
.
The METASILICATES, RSiO3 are salts of metasilicic 2 SiO 3 and have H

,
acid, ,
an oxygen ratio of 2 1. They have hence been called bisilicates.

:
The ORTHOSILICATES, 2 Si0 4 R

are salts of orthosilicic acid,
, 4 Si0 4 and H ,
have an oxygen ratio of 1 : 1. They have hence been called unisilicates. The
majority of the silicates fall into one of the last two groups.
SILICATES 455
Furthermore, there are a number of species characterized by an oxygen

ratio of less than 1:1, e.g., 3 4, 2 3, etc. These basic species are grouped
: :
as SUBSILICATES. Their true position is often in doubt; in most cases they

are probably to be regarded as basic salts belonging to one of the other
groups.
The above classification cannot, however, be carried through strictly, since
there are many species which do not exactly conform to any one of the groups
named, and often the true interpretation of the composition is doubtful.
Furthermore, within the limits of a single group of species, connected closely
in all essential characters, there
may be a wide variation in the proportion of
the acidic element. Thus the triclinic feldspars, placed among the polysili-
cates, range from the true polysilicate, NaAlSisOg, to the orthosilicate,
CaAl 2 Si 2 O 8 with many intermediate compounds, regarded as isomorphous
,
mixtures of these extremes. Similarly of the scapolite group, which, how-

ever, is included among the orthosilicates, since the majority of the compounds
observed approximate to that type. The micas form another example.
I. Disilicates, RSi 2 5. Polysilicates, R Si2 3 8
PETALITE.
Monoclinic. Crystals rare (castorite). Usually massive, foliated cleavable
(petalite) .
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; o (201) easy; z (905) difficult and imperfect.

Fracture imperfectly conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 6-6-5. G. = 2-39-2*46.
Luster vitreous, on c (001) pearly. Colorless white, gray, occasionally reddish
j
or greenish white. Streak uncolored. Transparent to translucent, a =

1-504. ft
= 1-510. y = 1-516.
Comp. LiAl(Si 2 O 5 ) 2 or Li 2 O.Al 2 O 3 .8SiO 2 = Silica 78'4, alumina 167,
lithia, 4-9
= 100.
Pyr., etc. Gently heated emits a blue phosphorescent light. B.B. fuses quietly at
4 and gives the reaction for lithia. With borax it forms a clear, colorless glass. Not acted
on by acids.
Obs. Petalite occurs at the iron mine of Uto, Sweden, with lepidolite, tourmaline,
spodumene, and quartz; on Elba (castorite). In the United States, at Bplton, Mass., with
scapolite; at Peru, Me., with spodumene in albite. The name petalite is from TreraXov, a
leaf,alluding to the cleavage.
Milarite. HKCa
2 Al2(Si 2 5) 6 O . In hexagonal prisms. H. = 5'5-6. G. = 2'55-2'59.
Colorless to pale green, glassy. From Val Giuf, Grisons, Switzerland.
Eudidymite. HNaBeSisOs. Monoclinic. In white, glassy, twinned crystals, tabular in
habit. H. =6. G. =
2 '553. Optically +. Indices, 1 '545-1 '551. Occurs very spar-
ingly in elaeolite-syenite on the island Ovre-Aro, in the Langesundfiord, Norway; from Nar-
sarsuk, Greenland.
Epididymite. Same composition as eudidymite. Orthorhombic. Tabular c (001). ||
Cleavage, 6(010) and c(001), perfect. H. = 5 '5. G. = 3 "55. Optically -. Indices,

1-565-1-569. Narsarsuk, Greenland.
RIVAITE. (Ca,Na 2 )Si 2 O 5 Monoclinic? In fibrous aggregates. H. =5. G. = 2*55.
.
Color, pale lavender to dark blue. Fibers show parallel extinction with positive elongation.
Easily fusible. Insoluble in hydrochloric acid. Found in loose nodules on Vesuvius.
Feldspar Group
a. Monoclinic Section
a
Orthoclase KAlSi 3 O 8 0-6585 : 0'5554 116 3'
{ (K,Na)
AlSi 3 O 8
Soda-Orthoclase
\(Na,K)AlSi 3 O 8
(K2 ,Ba)Al 2 Si 4 Oi 2 0*6584 0'5512 115 35'
Hyalophane
Celsian BaAl 2 Si2 8 0-657 0'554 115 2'
j8. Triclinie Section
Microcline KAlSi 3 O 8
Soda-microcline (K,Na)AlSi 3 O8
Anorthoclase (Na,K)AlSi 3 O 8
Albite-anorthite Series. Plagioclase Feldspars
Albite NaAlSi 3 8 0' 6335 :'l: 0*5577 94* 3' 116 29' 88 9'
0'6321: 1:0'5524 93 4' 116 23' 90 5'
Oligoclasej
n a 8
0'5521 93 23' 116 29' 89 59'
Andesine ( f f!?J?9v ^ 0'6357 : 1 :
Labra- 93 31' 116

0-6377:1:0-5547 3' 8954J'
dorite J
Anorthite CaAl 2 Si 2 8 0-6347:1:0-5501 93 13' 115 55' 91 12'
The general characters of the species belonging in the FELDSPAR GROUP

are as follows :
1, Crystallization in the monoclinic or triclinie systems,

the crystals of the
different species resembling each other closely in angle, in general habit, and
in methods of twinning. The prismatic angle in all cases differs but a few
degrees from 60 and 120.
2, Cleavage in two similar directions parallel to the base c (001) and clino-
pinacoid (or brachypinacoid) 6 (010), inclined at an angle of 90 or nearly 90.
3, Hardness between 6 and 6'5. 4, Specific Gravity varying between 2"5 and
2'9, and mostly between 2-55 and 275. 5, Color white or pale shades of
yellow, red or green, less commonly dark. 6, In composition silicates of alu-
minium with either potassium, sodium, or calcium, and rarely barium, while
magnesium and iron are always absent. Furthermore, besides the several
distinct species there are many intermediate compounds having a certain
independence of character and yet connected with each other by insensible
gradations; all the members of the series showing a close relationship not only
in composition but also in crystalline form and optical characters.
The species of the Feldspar Group are classified, first as regards form, and
second with reference to composition. The monoclinic species include (see
above) ORTHOCLASE, potassium feldspar, and SODA-ORTHOCLASE, potassium-
:
sodium feldspar; also HYALOPHANE and CELSIAN, barium feldspars.

The triclinie species include MICROCLINE and ANORTHOCLASE, potassium-
:
sodium feldspars; ALBITE, sodium feldspar; ANORTHITE, calcium feldspar.

Also intermediate between albite and anorthite the isomorphous sub-
species, sodium-calcium or calcium-sodium feldspars: OLIGOCLASE, ANDESINE,
LABRADORITE.
SILICATES 457
a. Monoclinic Section
ORTHOCLASE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 0*6585 : 1 :
0-5554; 63 57'.
767 768 769 770
m m
mm'", 110 A 110 = 61 13'. cn, 001 A 021 = 44

zz', 130 A 130 = 58 48'. nn', 021 A 021 = 89 53
ex, 001 A 101 = 50 16|'. cm, 001 A 110 = 67 47
cy, 001 A 201 = 80 18'. co, 001 A Til = 55 14
Twins: tw. pi. (1) a (100), or tw. axis c, the common Carlsbad twins,
either of irregular penetratipm (Fig. 772) or contact type; the latter usually
with b (010) as composition-face, often then (Fig. 773) with c (001) and
x (101) nearly in a plane, but to be distinguished by luster, cleavage, etc.
(2) n (021), the Baveno ..twins forming nearly square prisms (Fig. 774), since
cn = 44 hence cc = 89 53'; often repeated as fourlings (Fig. 447,
SGJ'ând
p. 171),/also in*square prisms, elongated ||
a axis. (3) c (001), the Manebach
771 772 773 774 776
twins (Fig. 775), usually contact-twins with c as comp.-face. Also other rarer
laws.
Crystals often prismatic c axis; sometimes orthorhombic in aspect (Fig.
||
770) since c (001) and x (101) are inclined at nearly equal angles to the vertical
axis ;
also elongated a axis (Fig. 771) with b (010) and c (001) nearly equally
||
developed; also thin tabular 6 (010): rarely tabular

||
a (100), a face not ||
often observed. Often massive, coarsely cleavable to granular; sometimes

lamellar. Also compact crypto-crystalline, and flint-like or jasper-like.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; 6 (010) somewhat less so; prismatic (110) m
imperfect, but usually more distinct parallel to one prismatic face than to the
other. Parting sometimes distinct parallel to a (100), also to a hemi-ortho-
dome, inclined a few degrees to the orthopinacoid; this may produce a satin-
like luster or schiller (p. 251), the latter also often present when the parting
is not distinct. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. =6. G.

=
2'57. Luster vitreous; on c (001) often pearly. Colorless, white, pale yellow
and flesh-red common, gray; rarely green. Streak uncolored.
Ax. pi. usually J_ b (010),
Optically negative in all cases (Fig. 776).
sometimes 6, also changing from the former to the latter on increase of tem-
axis = - 69
1 1
?i ___ T->__ !ro i r ID,,

,*m<-,\
perature (see p 297). For

adularia Bx a r
A .7.
. Ac
A
11', Bx a .w A
. -i
c axis = 69 37'. Hence Bx a and the.extinction-

776 direction (Fig. 776) inclined a few degrees only
to a axis, or the edge b/c; thus +3 to +7
usually, or up to +10 +12
in varieties rich
or
in Na20. Dispersion p >v\
also horizontal,
strongly marked, or inclined, according to position
of ax. pi. Axial angles variable. Birefringence
low, 7
-
a = 0-007 0-005. -
For adularia
ay = 1-5190, fty
= 1-5237, yy = 1'5260.
/. 2V y = 69 43', 2E y = 121 6'.
Comp. A silicate of aluminium and

potas-
sium, KAlSi 3 8 or K O.Al O .6SiO2 = Silica
2 2 3
647, alumina 18-4, potash 16'9

= 100. Sodium
is often also present, replacing part of the potassium, and sometimes exceeds it
in amount; these varieties are embraced under the name soda-orthoclase
(the name barbierite has been proposed for this material whose existence, as a
distinct though rare mineral, seems to have been proven).
Var. The prominent varieties depend upon crystalline habit and method of occur-
rence more than upon difference of composition.
1. Adularia. The pure Usually in crystals, like
or nearly pure potassium silicate.
Fig. 770 inhabit; often with vicinal planes; G. = 2 '565. Trans-
Baveno twins common.
parent or nearly so. Often with a pearly opalescent reflection or schiller or a delicate play
of colors; some moonstone is here included, but the remainder belongs to albite or other of
the triclinic feldspars. The original adularia (Adular) is from the St. Gothard region in
Switzerland. Valencianite, from the silver mine of Valencia, Mexico, is adularia.
2. Sanidine or glassy feldspar. Occurs in crystals, often transparent and glassy,
embedded in rhyolite, trachyte (as of the Siebengebirge, Germany), phonolite, etc. Habit
often tabular 6 (010) (hence named from (ravls, a tablet, or board)
||
also in square prisms ;
(6, c) Carlsbad twins common. Most varieties contain sodium as a prominent constituent,
;
and hence belong to the soda-orthoclase. Natronsanidine is a sanidine-like soda-ortho-

clase from a soda liparite from Mitrowitza, Servia.
Rhyacolite. Occurs in glassy crystals at Monte Somma, Vesuvius; named from pva,
stream (lava stream).
3. Isothose is said to be a variety having a different optical orientation than normal
orthoclase.
4.Ordinary. In crystals, Carlsbad and other twins common; also massive or cleavable,
varying in color from white to pale yellow, red or green, translucent; sometimes avent urine.
Here belongs the common feldspar of granitoid rocks or granite veins. Usually contains a
greater or less percentage of soda (soda-orthoclase). Compact cryptocrystalline orthoclase
makes up the mass of much felsite, but to a greater or less degree admixed with quartz; of
various colors, from white and brown to deep red. Much of what has been called ortho-
clase, or common potash feldspar, has proved to belong to the related triclinic species,
microcline. Cf. p. 461 on the relations of the two species. Chesterlite and Amazon stone
are microcline; also most aventurine orthoclase. Loxoclase contains sodium in considerable
amount (7 '6 Na2 O); from Hammond, St. Lawrence Co., N. Y. Murchisonite is a flesh-
red feldspar similar to perthite (p. 460), with
gold-yellow reflections in a direction _|_ b (010)
and nearly parallel to 701 or 801 (p. 457) from Dawlish and Exeter, England.
;
The spherulities noted in some volcanic rocks, as in the rhyolite of Obsidian Cliff in the
Yellowstone Park, are believed to consist essentially of orthoclase needles with
quartz.
SILICATES 459
(from Iddings; much magnified)
777 778
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 5; varieties containing much soda are more fusible. Loxo-
clase fuses at 4. Not acted upon by acids. Mixed with powdered gypsum and heated
B. B. gives violet potassium flame visible through blue glass.
Diff . Characterized by its crystalline form and the two cleavages at right angles to
each other; harder than barite and calcite; not attacked by acids; difficultly fusible. Mas-
sive corundum is much harder and has a higher specific gravity.
Micro. Distinguished in rock sections by its low refraction (low relief) and low'inter-
f erence-colors, which last scarcely rise to white of the first order hence lower than those
of quartz; also by its biaxial character in convergent light and by the distinct cleavages.
It is colorless in ordinary light and may be limpid, but is frequently turbid and brownish
from the presence of very minute scales of kaolin due to alteration from weathering; this
change is especially common in the older granular rocks, as granite and gneiss.
Artif. Orthoclase has not been produced artificially by the methods of dry fusion.
It can, however, be crystallized from a dry melt when certain other substances, like tungstic
acid, alkaline phosphates, etc., are added. The function of these additions in the reactions
is not clear. Orthoclase is more easily formed by hydrochemical methods. It has been
produced by heating gelatinous silica, alumina, caustic potash and water in a sealed tube.
Orthoclase has also been formed by heating potassium silicate and water together with
muscovite.
Obs. Orthoclase in its several varieties belongs especially to the crystalline rocks,
occurring as an essential constituent of granite, gneiss, syenite, also porphyry, further (var.,
sanidine) trachyte, phonolite, etc. In the massive granitoid rocks it is seldom in distinct,
well-formed, separable crystals, except in veins and cavities; such crystals are more com-
mon, however, in volcanic rocks like trachyte.
Adularia occurs in the crystalline rocks of the central and eastern Alps, associated with
smoky quartz and albite, also titanite, apatite, etc.; the crystals are often coated with
chlorite; also ^n Elba. Fine crystals of orthoclase, often twins, are obtained from Baveno,
Lago Maggiore, Italy; the Fleimstal, Tyrol, Austria, a red variety; Bodenmais, Carlsbad,
and Elbogen in Bohemia; Striegau, etc., in Silesia. Also Arendal in Norway, and near
Shaitansk in the Ural Mts.; Land's End and St. Agnes in Cornwall; the Mourne Mts.,
Ireland, with beryl and topaz. From Tamagama Yama, Japan, with topaz and smoky
quartz. Moonstone is brought from Ceylon. Crystals of gem quality from Itrongahy,
Madagascar Valencianite from Guanajuato, Mexico. Crystals from Eganville, Ontario.
In the United States, orthoclase is common in the crystalline rocks of New England, also
of States south, further Colorado, California, etc. Thus at the Paris tourmaline locality,
Me. In N. H., at Acworth. In Mass., at South Royalston and Barre. In Conn., at
Haddam and Middletown, in large coarse crystals. In N. Y., in St. Lawrence Co., at
Rossie; at Hammond (loxoclase)', in Lewis Co., in white limestone near Natural Bridge; at
Amity and Edenville. In Pa., in crystals at Leiperville, Mineral Hill, Delaware Co.; sun-
stone in Kennett Township. In N. C., at Washington Mine, Davidson Co. In Col., at the
summit of Mt. Antero, Chaffee Co., in fine crystals, often twins; at Gunnison; Black
Hawk; Kokomp, Summit Co., Robinson, also at other points. Also similarly in Nev. and
Cal. Large twin crystals from Barringer Hill, Llano Co., Texas.
Alter. Orthoclase is frequently altered, especially through the action of carbonated or
alkaline waters; the final result is often the removal of the potash and the formation of
kaolin. Steatite, talc, chlorite, leucite, mica, laumontite, occur as pseudomorphs after
orthoclase; and cassiterite and calcite often replace these feldspars by some process of solu-
tion and substitution.
Use. In the manufacture of porcelain, both in the body of the ware and in the glaze
on its surface.
PERTHITE. As first described, a flesh-red aventurine feldspar from Perth, Ontario,
Canada, called a soda-orthoclase, but shown by Gerhard to consist of interlaminated ortho-
clase and albite. Many similar occurrences have since been noted, as also those in which
microcline and albite are similarly interlaminated, the latter called microcline-perthite, or
microcline-albite-perthite; this is true in part of the original perthite. When the structure
is discernible only with the help of the microscope it is called microperthite. Brogger has
investigated not only the microperthites of Norway, but also other feldspars characterized
by a marked schiller; he assumes the existence of an extremely fine interlamination of albite
and orthoclase 801, not discernible by the microscope (cryptoperthite), and connected
||
with secondary planes of parting 100 or 801, which is probably to be explained as due to
|| ||
incipient alteration.
Hyalophane. K
(K2 ,Ba)Al 2 (SiO3 )4 or 2 O.BaO.2Al 2 O 3 .8SiO 2 Silica 51 '6, alumina 21'9,
.
baryta 16*4, potash 101 = 100. In crystals, like adularia in habit (Fig. 770, p. 457); also
massive. Cleavage: c (001) perfect; b (010) somewhat less so. H. = 6-6*5. G. =2*805.
Optically -. a. = 1*542. ft = 1*545. 7 = 1-547. Occurs in a granular dolomite in the
Binnental, Switzerland; also at the manganese mine of Jakobsberg, Sweden. Some other
feldspars containing 7 to 15 p. c. BaO have been described.
Celsian. BaAl 2 Si 2 Og, similar in composition to anorthite, but containing barium in-
stead of calcium. Monoclinic. In crystals showing a number of forms; twinned according
to Carlsbad, Manebach and Baveno laws. Usually cleavable massive. H. = 6-6*5.
G. = 3'37. Extinction on 6 (010) = 28 3'. Colorless. Optically a = 1*584. ft =
+ .
1*589. 7 = 1*594. From Jakobsberg, Sweden. Name baryta-orthoclase given to mixtures

of celsian and orthoclase. Paracelsian from Candoglia, Piedmont, Italy, is the same species.
ft. Triclinic Section
MICROCLINE.
Triclinic. Near orthoclase in angles and habit, but the angle be (010 A
001) = about 89 30'. Twins: like
779
orthoclase, also polysynthetic twinning
according to the albite and pericline laws
(p. 464), common, producing two series of
fine lamellae nearly at right
angles to each
other, hence the characteristic grating-
structure of a basal section in polarized
light (Fig. 779). Also massive cleavable
to granular compact.
Cleavage: c(001) perfect; 6(010) some-
what less so; M(1TO) sometimes distinct;
m (110) also sometimes distinct, but less
easy. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 6-6'5. = 2'54-2*57
G Luster
vitreous, on c (001) sometimes pearly. Color white to pale cream-yellow
also red, green
Transparent to translucent. Optically -. Ax. pi. nearly
perpendicular (82-83) to 6 (010). Bx inclined 15 26' to a
normal to 6
*' Bx -
Extinction-angle on c (001), +15
.
= 1-522.
SILICATES 461
The essential identity of orthoclase and microcline has been urged by Mallard and
Michel-Levy on the ground that the properties of the former would belong to an aggregate
of submicroscopic twinning lamellae of the latter, according to the albite and pericline laws.
Comp. Like orthoclase, KAlSi 3 O 8 or K 2 O.Al 2 = Silica 647,

O3.6Sip2
alumina 18 -4, potash 16*9 = 100. Sodium is usually present in small amount:
sometimes prominent, as in soda-microcline.
Pyr. As for orthoclase.
Diff. Resembles orthoclase but distinguished by optical characters (e.g., the grating
structure in polarized light, Fig. 779); also often shows fine twinning-striations on a basal
surface (albite law).
Micro. In thin sections like orthoclase but usually to be distinguished by the grating-
like structure in polarized light due to triclinic twinning.
Obs. Occurs under the same conditions as much common orthoclase. The beautiful
amazonstone from the Ural Mts., also that occurring in fine groups of large crystals of deep
color in the granite of Pike's Peak, Col., is microcline. Crystals from Ivigtut, Greenland.
From Antsongombato and Antoboko (amazonstone), Madagascar. Chesterlite from Poor-
house quarry, Chester Co., Pa., and the aventurine feldspar of Mineral Hill, Pa., belong here.
A pure variety occurs at Magnet Cove, Ark. Ordinary microcline is common at many points.
Use. Same as for orthoclase; sometimes as an ornamental material (amazonstone).
Anorthoclase. Soda-microcline. A triclinic feldspar with a cleavage-angle, be, 010 A 001,
varying but little from 90. Form like that of the ordinary feldspars. Twinning as
with orthoclase; also polysynthetic according to the albite and pericline laws; but in many
cases the twinning laminae very narrow and hence not distinct. Rhombic section (see p.
462) inclined on 6 (010) 4 to 6 to edge b/c. G. = 2 '57-2 "60. Cleavage, hardness, luster,
and color as with other members of the group. Optically Extinction-angle on c (001)
._
+5 45' to +2; on b (010) 6 to 9.8. Bx a nearly _L y (201). Dispersion p > v; hor-

izontal distinct, a = 1'523. /3
= 1'529. 7 = 1'531. Axial angle variable with tem-
perature, becoming in part monoclinic in optical symmetry between 86 and 264 C., but
again triclinic on cooling; this is true of those containing little calcium.
Chiefly a soda-potash, feldspar NaAlSisOs and KAlSi 3p 8 the sodium silicate usually in
,
larger proportion (2 1, 3
:
1, etc.), as if consisting of albite and orthoclase molecules.
: Cal-
cium (CaAl 2 Si 2p8) is also present in relatively very small amount.
These triclinic soda-potash feldspars are chiefly known from the andesitic lavas of
Pantelleria. Most of these feldspars come from a rock, called pantellerite. Also prominent
" "
from the augite-syenite of southern Norway and from the Rhomben-porphyr near Chris-
tiania. Here is referred also a feldspar in crystals, tabular c (001), and twinned according
j|
to the Manebach and less often Baveno laws occurring in the lithophyses of the rhyolite of
Obsidian Cliff. Yellowstone Park. It shows the blue opalescence in a direction parallel
with a steep orthodome (cf. p. 457).
*
Albite-Anorthite Series. Plagioclase Feldspars
Between the isomorphous species

ALBITE NaAlSisOg Ab
ANORTHITE CaAl 2 Si 2 08 An
there are a number of intermediate subspecies, regarded, as urged by Tscher-
mak, as isomorphous mixtures of these molecules, and defined according to the
ratio in which they enter; their composition is expressed in general by the
formula Ab nAnm .
They are:
OLIGOCLASE Ab 6Ani to Ab 3 Ani
ANDESINE Ab3 Ani to
LABRADORITE AbiAni to
and Bytownite AbiAn 3 to AbiAn 6
From albite through the successive intermediate compounds to anorthite
with the progressive change in composition (also specific gravity, melting
*
The triclinic feldspars of this series, in which the two cleavages 6 (010) and c (001) are
oblique to each other, are often called in general plagioclase (from Tr\ayios, oblique).
points, etc.), there is also

a corresponding change in crystallographic form, and
in certain fundamental optical properties.
Crystalline Form. The axial ratios and angles given on p. 456 show that
these triclinic feldspars
780 781
approach orthoclase close-
ly in form, the most ob-
vious difference being in
the cleavage-angle 6c010
A 001, which is 90 in
orthoclase, 86 24' in albite,
and 85 50' in anorthite.
There is also a change in
the axial angle 7, which is
88 in albite, about 90 in
oligoclase and andesine,
and 91 in anorthite. This
transition appears still
Plagioclase with twinning lamellae. Fig. 780 section c
more strikingly in the
||
ordin-
(001) showing vibration-directions (cf. Fig. 784), "
ary light; Fig. 781 section in polarized light. position of the rhombic
section," by which the
twins according to the pericline law are united as explained below.
Twinning. The plagioclase feldspars are often twinned in accordance
with the Carlsbad, Baveno, and Manebach laws common with orthoclase
(p. 457). Twinning is also almost universal according to the albite law
twinning plane the brachypinacoid; this is usually polysynthetic, i.e.,
repeated in the form of thin lamellae, giving rise to fine striations on the basal
cleavage surface (Figs. 780, 781). Twinning is also common according to the
pericline law twinning axis the macrodiagonal axis 6; when polysynthetic
this gives another series of fine striations seen on the brachypinacoid.
The composition-plane in this pericline twinning is a plane passing through the crystal in
such a direction that its intersections with the prismatic faces and the brachypinacoid make
equal plane angles with each other. The position of this rhombic section and the consequent
direction of the striations on the brachypinacoid change rapidly with a small variation in
the angle 7. In general it may be said to be approximately parallel to the base, but in
albite inclined backward (+, Figs. 782 and 784) and in anorthite to the front (
it is Fig. ,
783) ;
for the intermediate species its position varies progressively with the composition.
782 783 784
Fig. 782, Rhombic section in albite. 783, Same in anorthite. 784, Typical form showing
+ and extinction-directions on c (001) and 6 (010).
Thus for the angle between the trace of this plane on the brachypinacoid and the
edge
6/c, we have for Albite +22 to +20; for Oligoclase +9 to +3; for Andesine +1
to -2; for Labradorite -9 to -10; for Anorthite -15 to -17.
SILICATES 463
the
togeth
of microline.
785
Optical Characters. There
is also a progressive change
in the position of the ether-
axes and the optic axial
plane in passing from
albite to anorthite. This
is most simply exhibited by
the position of the planes
of light- vibration, as observed
in sections parallel to the
two cleavages, basal c and
brachy-pinacoidal 6, in other
words the extinction-angle
formed on each face with the
edge b/c (cf. Fig. 784). _
The approximate position

of the ether-axes for the
different feldspars is shown
in Fig. 785 (after Iddings).
The axis Z does not vary very Projection of the optical directions X, Y and Z upon
much from the zone bc\ b (010). 1, Albite; 2, Oligoclase; 3, Andesine;
010 A 001, but the axis X
4 Labradorite; 5, Anorthite. (After Iddings.)
varies widely, and hence the axial plane has an entirely different position
in albite from what it has in anorthite. Furthermore albite is optically pos-
786
Albife or*. Andesine Anorthite
+20
-10
-20
-30
-40
Ab 100 90 80 70* 60 50 40 30 20
An 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Extinction Angles on (001) and (010) in the Lime-soda feldspars. (After Iddings.)
itive,that is Z Bx, while anorthite is negative or

= Bx; for certain X
andesines the axial angle is sensibly 90.
Fig. 786 (after Iddings) shows the variation in the extinction angles on
the cleavage faces, c (001) and b (010), for the different mixtures of the albite
and anorthite molecule.
Micro. In rock sections the plagioclase feldspars are distinguished by their lack of
color, low refractive relief, and low interference-colors, which in good sections are mainly
dark gray and scarcely rise into white of the first order; also by their biaxial character in
converging light. In the majority of cases they are easily told by the parallel bands or fine
lamellae which pass through them due to the multiple twinning according to the albite
law; one set of bands or twin lamellae exhibits in general a different interference-color
from the other (cf. Figs. 780, 781). They are thus distinguished not only from quartz and
orthoclase, with which they are often associated, but from all the common rock-making
minerals. To distinguish the different species and sub-species from one another, as albite
from laboradorite or andesine, is more difficult. In sections having a definite orientation
(||
c (001) and 6 (010) ) this can generally be done by determining the extinction angles (cf
||
.
p. 462 and Fig. 784). In general in rock sections special methods are required; these are
discussed in the various texts devoted to this subject.
ALBITE.
Triclinic. Axed a : b : c = 0*6335 : 1 :
0-5577; a = 94 3', (3
= 116 29',
= 88 9'.
be, 010 A 001 = 86 24'.

787 788 = 59
mM, 110 A 110 14'.
bm, 010 A 110 = 60 26'.
cm, 001 A 110 = 65 17'.
cM, 001 A 110 = 69 10'.
ex, 001 A 101 = 52 16'.
Twins as with orthoclase;

also very common, the tw. pi.
b (010), albite law (p.
462),
usually contact-twins, and
polysynthetic, consisting of
thin lamellae and with con-
sequent fine striations on
c(001) (Fig. 790); tw. axis b axis, peridine law, contact-twins whose compos-
ition-face is the rhombic section (Figs. 782 and 792); often polysynthetic
and showing fine striations which on 6 (010)
are inclined backward +22 to the edge b/c.
Crystals often tabular b (010); also ||
elongated 6 axis as in the variety pericline.

||
Also massive, either lamellar or granular; the

laminae often curved, sometimes
divergent;
granular varieties occasionally quite fine to
impalpable.
Cleavage: c(001) perfect; 6(010) somewhat
less so; m(110) imperfect. Fracture uneven
to conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 6-6*5. G. =
2-62-2-65. Luster vitreous; on a cleavage
surface often pearly. Color white; also occa-
sionally bluish, gray, reddish, greenish, and
green; sometimes having a bluish opalescence
or play of colors on c Streak uncolored.
(001). Transparent to sub-
translucent.
SILICATES 465
Optically-!-. Extinction-angle with edge b/c =4-4 30' to 2 on c,

and = +20 to 15 on b (Fig. 782). Dispersion for Bx a p < v; also in- ,
clined, horizontal; for Bx ,

^91 ^ 92
p > v, inclined, crossed.
a=l-531. J3
= l'
1-540. 2V= 77.
=
fringence weak, y a
0-009.
Comp. A silicate of
aluminium and sodium, Pericline
NaAlSi 3 O 8 or NaaO.Al2 0.
6SiO 2 = Silica 687, alumina 19'5, soda 11 -8 =100. Calcium is usually
present in small amount, as anorthite (CaAl2 Si 2 O8), and as this in-
creases it graduates through oligoclase-albite to oligoclase (cf. p. 466). Potas-
sium may also be present, and it is then connected with anorthoclase and
microcline.
Var. Ordinary. In crystals and massive. The crystals often tabular b (010). The
||
massive forms are usually nearly pure white, and often show wavy or curved laminae. Per-
isterite is a whitish adularia-like albite, slightly iridescent, named from Trepto-repa, pigeon.
Aventurine and moonstone varieties also occur. Pericline from the chloritic schists of the
Alps is in rather large opaque white crystals, with characteristic elongation in the direction
of the 6 axis, as shown in Figs. 791 and 792, and commonly twinned with this as the twinning
axis (pericline law).
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 4 to a colorless or white glass, imparting an intense yellow to
the flame. Not acted upon by acids.
Diff. Resembles barite in some forms, but is harder and of lower specific gravity;
does not effervesce with acid (like calcite). Distinguished optically and by the common
twinning striations on c (001) from orthoclase; from the other tri clinic feldspars partially
by specific gravity and better by optical means (see p. 463).
Artif. Albite acts, in regard to its artificial formation, like orthoclase, which see.
Obs. Albite is a constituent of many igneous rocks, especially those of alkaline type,
as granite, elaeolite-syenite, diorite, etc.; also in the corresponding feldspathic lavas. In
perthite (p. 460) it is interlaminated with orthoclase or microcline, and similar aggrega-
tions, often on a microscopic scale, are common in many rocks. Albite is common also
in gneiss, and sometimes in the crystalline schists. Veins of albitic granite are often
repositories of the rarer minerals and of fine crystallizations of gems, including beryl, tour-
maline, allanite, columbite, etc. It is found in disseminated crystals in granular limestone.
Some of the most prominent European localities are in cavities and veins in the granite
or granitoid rocks of the Swiss and Austrian Alps, associated with adularia, smoky quartz,
chlorite, titanite, apatite, and many rarer species it is often implanted in parallel position
:
upon the orthoclase. Thus in the Alps the St. Gothard region; Roc Tourne near Modane,
Savoie; on Mt. Skopi (pericline); Tavetschtal; in Austria at Schmirnand Greiner, Tyrol;
also Pfitsch, Rauris, the Zillertal, Krimml, Schneeberg in Passeir, Tyrol, in simple crystals.
Also in DaupLine, France, in similar association; Elba. Also Hirschberg in Silesia; Penig
in Saxony; with topaz at Mursinka in the Ural Mts. and near Miask in the Ilmen Mts.;
Cornwall, England; Mourne Mts. in Ireland. Fine crystals from Greenland.
In the United States, in Me., at Paris, with red and blue tourmalines, also at Topsham.
In Mass., at Chesterfield, in lamellar masses (cleavelandite) slightly bluish, also fine granu-
,
lar. In N. H., at Acworth and Alstead. In Conn., at Haddam; at the Middletown feld-
spar quarries, at Branchville, in fine crystals and massive. In N. Y., at Moriah, Essex
Co., of a greenish color; at Diana, Lewis Co., and Macomb, St. Laurence Co. In Pa., at
Union ville, Chester Co. In Va., at the mica mines near Amelia Court-House in splendid
crystallizations. In Col., in the Pike's Peak region with smoky quartz and amazonstone.
The name albite is derived from albus, white, in allusion to its common color.
Use. Same as orthoclase but not so commonly employed; some varieties which
show an opalescent play of colors when polished form the ornamental material known as
moonstone.
Oligoclase.
Triclinic. Axes, see p. 456. be, 010 A 001

= 86 32'. Twins observed
according to the Carlsbad, albite, and pericline laws. Crystals not common.
Usually massive, cleavable to compact.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; 6 (010) somewhat less so. Fracture conchoidal
to uneven. Brittle. H. = 6-6 -5. G. = 21-65-2 '67. Luster vitreous to some-
what pearly or waxy. Color usually whitish, with a faint tinge of grayish
green, grayish white, reddish white, greenish, reddish; sometimes aventurine.
Transparent, subtranslucent. Optical characters, see p. 463.
Comp. Intermediate between albite and anorthite and corresponding
to Ab 6 Ani to Ab 2 Ani, but chiefly to Ab 3 Ani, p. 461.
Var. 1. Ordinary. In crystals or more commonly massive, cleavable. The varieties
containing soda up to 10 p. c. are called oligoclase-albite. 2. Aventurine oligoclase, or sun-
stone, is of a grayish white to reddish gray color, usually the latter, with internal yellowish
or reddish fire-like reflections proceeding from disseminated crystals of probably either
hematite or gothite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 3-5 to a clear or enamel-like glass. Not materially acted
upon by acids.
Diff. See orthoclase (p. 459) and albite (p. 465); also pp. 456, 463.
Obs. Occurs in porphyry, granite, syenite, and also in different effusive rocks, as
andesite. It is sometimes associated with orthoclase in granite or other granite-like rock.
Among its localities are Danviks-Zoll near Stockholm, Sweden; Pargas in Finland; Shai-
tansk, Ural Mts.; in syenite of the Vosges Mts., France; at Albula in Orisons, Switzerland;
Marienbad, Bohemia; in France at Chalanches in Allemont, and Bourg d'Oisans, Dauphine;
as sunstone at Tvedestrand, Norway; at Hittero, Norway; Lake Baikal, Siberia.
In the United States, at Fine and Macomb, St. Lawrence Co., N. Y., in good crystals;
at Danbury, Conn., with orthoclase and danburite; Haddam, Conn.; at the emery mine,
Chester, Mass., granular; at Unionville, Pa., with euphyllite and corundum; Mineral Hill,
Delaware Co., Pa.; at Bakersville, N. C., in clear glassy masses, showing cleavage but no
twinning. Named in 1826 by Breithaupt from 0X1705, little, and /cXao-is, fracture.
Andesine.
Triclinic. Axes, see p. 456. be, 010 A 001 = 86 14'. Twins as with
albite. Crystals rare. Usually massive, cleavable or granular.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; b (010) less so; also M
(110) sometimes
observed. H. = 5-6. G. = 2'68-2'69. Color white, gray, greenish, yellow-
ish, flesh-red. Luster subvitreous to pearly. Optical characters, see p. 463.
Comp. Intermediate between albite and anorthite, corresponding to
Ab : An in the ratio of 3 2, 4
: 3 to 1
:
1, see p. 461.
:
_ r., etc. Fuses in thin splinters before the blowpipe. Imperfectly soluble in acids:
Obs. Observed in many granular and volcanic rocks; thus occurs in the Andes, at
Marmato, Colombia, as an ingredient of the rock called andesite; in the porphyry of
1
JLsterel, Dept. du Var, France; in the syenite of Alsace in the Vosges Mts.; at
Vapnefiord,
Iceland; Bodenmais, Bavaria; Frankenstein, Silesia. Sanford, Me., with vesuvianite
Common in the igneous rocks of the Rocky Mts. Crystals from Sardinia and Greenland.
Labradorite. Labrador Feldspar.
Triclinic. see p. 456.
Axes, Cleavage angle be 010 001 = 86 4'.
A
Forms and twinning similar to the other plagioclase species.
Crystals often
very thin tabular b (010)
1
and rhombic in outline bounded by cy or ex (Fig.
1 ;
455, p. 172). Also massive, cleavable or granular; sometimes crvptocrvstal-

hne or hornstone-like.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; b (010) less so;
~~ 5~b<
G< = 270-272. Duster on c
M
(110) sometimes distinct.
*T pearly, passing into vitreous; else-
where vitreous or subresinous. Color
gray, brown, or greenish; sometimes
SILICATES 467
colorless and glassy; rarely porcelain- white; usually a beautiful change of

colors in cleavable varieties, especially || 6 (010). Streak uncolored. Trans-
lucent to subtranslucent. Optical characters, see p. 463.
Play of colors a common character, but sometimes wanting as in some colorless crys-
tals. Blue and green are the predominant colors; but yellow, fire-red, and pearl-gray also
occur. Vogelsang regards the common blue color of labradorite as an interference-phenom-
enon due to its lamellar structure, while the golden or reddish schiller, with the other colors,
is due to the presence of black acicular microlites and yellowish red microscopic lamellae, or
to the combined effect of these with the blue reflections. Schrauf has examined the inclu-
sions, their position, etc., and given the names microplakite and microphyllite to two groups
of them. (See references on p. 181.)
Comp. Intermediate between albite and anorthite and corresponding

chiefly to Ab :An in a ratio of from 1 1 to 1 3, p. 461. : :
The feldspars which lie between labradorite proper and anorthite have been embraced
by Tschermak under the name bytownite. The original bytownite of Thomson was a
greenish white feldspathic mineral found in a boulder near Bytown (now Ottawa) in Onta-
rio, Canada.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 3 to a colorless glass. Decomposed with difficulty by hydro-
chloric acid, generally leaving a portion of undecomposed mineral.
Diff. The beautiful play of colors is a common but not universal character. Other-
wise distinguished as are the other feldspars (pp. 459, 465).
Obs. Labradorite is an essential constituent of various igneous rocks, especially of
the basic kinds, and usually associated with some member of the pyroxene or amphibole
groups. Thus with hypersthene in norite, with diallage in gabbro, with some form of
pyroxene in diabase, basalt, dolerite, also andesite, tephrite, etc. Labradorite also occurs
in other kinds of lava, and is sometimes found in them in glassy crystals, as in those of Etna,
Vesuvius, at Kilauea, Hawaiian Islands.
The labradoritic massive rocks are most common among the formations of the Archaean
era. Such are part of those of British America, northern New York, Pennsylvania, Arkan-
sas; those of Greenland, Norway, Finland, Sweden, and probably of the Vosges Mts.
On the coast of Labrador, labradorite is associated with hornblende, hypersthene, and
magnetite. It is met with in many places in Quebec. Occurs abundantly through the cen-
tral Adirondack region in northern N. Y.; in the Wichita Mts., Ark.
Labradorite was first brought from the Isle of Paul, on the coast of Labrador, by Mr.
Wolfe, a Moravian missionary, about the year 1770.
Use. The varieties showing a play of colors are used as ornamental material.
MASKELYNITE. In colorless isotropic grains in meteorites; composition near labradorite.
ANORTHITE. Indianite.
Triclinic. Axes a : b : c = 0-6347 1 :

0-5501; a = 93 13', ft
= 115 55|',
7 = 91 12'.
be, 010 A 001 = 85 50'. 793 794
mM, 110 A 110 = 59 29'.
bm, 010 A 110 = 58 4'.
cm, 001 A 110 = 65 53'.

cM, 001 A 110 = 69 20'.
cy, 001 A 201 = 81 14'.
Twins as with albite (p. 462

and p. 464). Crystals usually
prismatic c axis (Fig. 793, also
||
Fig. 364, p. 146), less often elon-

gated b axis, like pericline (Fig.
1
1
794). Also massive, cleavable,

with granular or coarse lamellar
structure.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; b (010) somewhat less so. Fracture conchoidal
to uneven. Brittle. H. = 6-6'5. G. = 2-74-276. Color white, grayish,

reddish. Streak uncolored. Transparent to translucent.
Optically -. Ax. pi. nearly _L e (021), and its trace inclined 60 to the
edge c/e from left above behind to right in front below. Extinction-angles
on c -34 to -42 with edge 6/c; on b (010), -35 to -43 (Fig.
(001),
Dispersion p < v, also inclined. 2 V = 78. a = 1'576.
784, p. 462).
j8
= 1*584. 7 =
1*588. Birefringence stronger than with albite.
Comp. A silicate of aluminium and calcium, CaAl 2 Si 2 O 8 or CaO.Al2 3 .
2SiO 2 = Silica 43'2, alumina 367, lime 20-1 = 100. Soda (as NaAlSi 3 O 8 ) is
usually present in small amount, and as it increases
there is a gradual transi-
tion through bytownite to labradorite.
Var. Anorthite was described from the glassy crystals of Mte. Somma, Vesuvius; and
christianite and biotine are the same mineral. Thiorsauite is the same from Iceland. In-
dianite is a white, grayish, or reddish granular anorthite from India, where it occurs as the
gangue of corundum, first described in 1802 by Count Bournon. Cyclopite occurs in small,
transparent, and glassy crystals, tabular b (010), coating cavities in the dolerite of the
||-
Cyclopean Islands and near Trezza on Etna. Amphodelite, lepolite, latrobite also belong to
anorthite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 5 to a colorless glass. Anorthite from Mte. Somma, and
indianite from the Carnatic, India, are decomposed by hydrochloric acid, with separation.of
gelatinous silica.
Artif. Anorthite is the easiest of the feldspars to be formed artificially. Unlike the
can be easily formed in a dry fusion of its constituents. This method
alkalic feldspars it
becomes progressively more difficult as the albite molecule is added to the composition.
Anorthite is frequently observed in slags and is easily produced in artificial magmas. It
further is when more complex silicates are broken down by fusion.
often produced
Obs. Occurs in some diorites; occasionally in connection with gabbro and serpentine
rocks; in some cases along with corundum; in many volcanic rocks, andesites, basalts, etc.;
as a constituent of some meteorites ( Juvenas, Stannern) .
Anorthite (christianite and biotine) occurs at Mount Vesuvius in isolated blocks among
the old lavas in the ravines of Monte Somma; in the Albani Mts.; on the Pesmeda Alp,
Monzoni, Tyrol, as a contact mineral; Aranyer Berg, Transylvania, in andesite; in Ice-
land; near Bogoslovsk in the Ural Mts. In the Cyclopean Islands (cyclopite). In the lava
of the island of Miyake, Japan.
In crystals from Franklin, N. J.; from Phippsburg, Me.
Anorthite was named in 1823 by Rose from avopdos, oblique, the crystallization being
triclinic.
Anemousite. A feldspar having the composition, Na2 O.2CaO.3Al 2 O3.9SiO 2 .This does
not agree with any possible member of the albite-anorthite series. This is explained by
assuming the presence in small amount of a sodium-anorthite molecule, Na 2 O.Al 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 ,
to which the name carnegieite has been given. Cleavage angle = 85 59'. G. = 2 '68.
a = 1-555. j8 = 1-559. 7 = 1'563. 2 V = 82 48'. Found as loose crystals on Mte.
Rosso, Island of Linosa. Name derived from the ancient Greek name of the island. Car-
negieite is named in honor of Andrew Carnegie.
;H. Metasilicates. RSiO 3

Salts of Metasilicic Acid,
H^SiOs; characterized by an oxygen ratio of 2 1 :
for silicon to bases. The Division closes with a number of species, in part of
somewhat doubtful composition, forming a transition to the Orthosilicates.
The metasilicates include two prominent and well-characterized
groups,
viz., the Pyroxene Group and the Amphibole Group. There are also others
less important.
SILICATES 469
Leucite Group. Isometric

In several respects leucite is allied to the species of the FELDSPAR GROUP, which imme-
diately precede.
Leucite KAl(SiO 3 ) 2 Isometric at 500
Pseudo-isometric at ordinary temperatures.
Pollucite H
2 Cs4Al 4 (Si03)9 Isometric
LEUCITE. Amphigene.
Isometric at 500 C.; pseudo-isometric under ordinary conditions (see p.
302). Commonly in crystals varying in angle but
little from the tetragonal trisoctahedron n (211),
sometimes with a (100), and d (110) as subordinate
forms. Faces often showing fine striations due to
twinning (Fig. 795). Also in disseminated grains;
rarely massive granular.
Cleavage: d (110) very imperfect. Fracture
conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 5'5-6. G. = 2-45-2-50.
Luster vitreous. Color white, ash-gray or smoke-
gray. Streak uncolored. Translucent to opaque.
Usually shows very feeble double refraction: co =
1-508,6 = 1-509 (p. 302).
Comp. KAl(Si0 3 ) 2 or K
2 O.Al 2 O 3 .4Si0 2
= Silica 55*0, alumina 23'5.
potash 21'5 = 100.
Soda is present only in small quantities, unless as introduced by alteration; traces of
lithium, also of rubidium and caesium, have been detected. Leucite and analcite are closely
related chemically as is shown by the fact that the two species can be converted into each
other when heated with sodium or potassium chlorides or carbonates.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible; with cobalt solution gives a blue color (aluminium). De-
composed by hydrochloric acid without gelatinization.
Diff . Characterized by its trapezohedral form, absence of color, and infusibility. It
is softer than garnet and harder than analcite; the latter yields water and fuses.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its extremely low refraction, isotropic charac-
ter, and the symmetrical arrangement of inclusions (Fig. 796; also Fig. 485, p. 180). Larger
796
Leucite crystals from the leucitite of the Bearpaw Mts., Montana (Pirsson). These show
the progressive growth from skeleton forms to complete crystals with glass inclusions .
crystals are commonly not wholly isotropic and, further, show complicated systems of
twinning-lines (Fig. 795); the birefringence is, however, very low, and the colors scarcely
rise above dark gray; they are best seen by introduction of the quartz or gypsum plate
yielding red of the first order. The smaller leucites, which lack this twinning or the inclu-
sions, are only to be distinguished from sodalite or analcite by chemical tests.
Artif . Leucite is easily prepared artificially by simply fusing together its constitu-
ents in proper proportion and allowing the melt to crystallize slowly. The addition of
potassium vanadate produces larger crystals. Leucite has been formed when microcline
and biotite were fused together and also when muscovite was fused alone.
Obs. Leucite occurs only in igneous rocks, and especially in recent lavas, as one of
the products of crystallization of magmas rich in potash and low in silica (for which reason
this species rather than orthoclase is formed) The larger embedded crystals are commonly
.
anisotropic and show twinning lamellae; the smaller ones, forming the groundmass, are
isotropic and without twinning. Found in leucitites and leucite-basalts, leucitophyres,
leucite-phonolites and leucite-tephrites; also in certain rocks occurring in dikes. Very rare
in intruded igneous rocks, only one or two instances being known; but its former presence
under such conditions is indicated by pseudomorphs, often of large size (pseudoleucite)
consisting of neph elite and orthoclase, also of anal cite.
The prominent Vesuvius and Mte. Somma, where it is thickly
localities are, first of all,
disseminated through the lava in grains, and in large perfect crystals; also in ejected
masses; also near Rome, at Capo di Bove, Rocca Monfina, etc. Further in leucite-tephrite
at Proceno near Lake Bolsena in central Italy; in Germany about the Laacher See and at
several points in the Eifel; at Riedennear Andernach; at Meichesin the Vogelsgebirge; in
the Kaiserstuhlgebirge; Wiesental, Bohemia. Occurs in Brazil, at Pinhalzinho. From the
Cerro de las Virgines, Lower California. In the United States it is present in a rock in
the Green River Basin at the Leucite Hills, Wy. also in the Absaroka range, in north-
;
western Wy.; in the Highwood and Bearpaw Mts., Mon. (in part pseudoleucite). On the
shores of Vancouver Island, where magnificent groups of crystals have been found as drift
boulders.
Pseudoleucite (see above) occurs in the phonolite (tinguaite) of the Serra de Tingua,
Brazil; at Magnet Cove, Ark.; near Hamburg, N.J.; Mon.; also in the Cariboo District,
British Columbia.
Named from Xewcos, white, in allusion to its color.
Pollucite. Essentially H
2 O.2Cs2O.2Al 2 O3.9SiO2. Isometric; often in cubes; also mas-
sive. H. = G. = 2-901. Colorless, n = 1-525. Occurs very sparingly in the island
6'5.
of Elba, with petalite (castorite); also at Hebron and Rumford, Me.
Ussingite. HNa Al(Si0 2 3) 3 . Triclinic. Three cleavages. G. = 2-5. H. = 6-7. Color

reddish violet. Indices, 1-50-1 '55. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Easily fusible. Found
in rolled masses from pegmatite at
Kangerdluarsuk, Greenland.
Pyroxene Group
Orthorhombic, Monoclinic, Triclinic
Composition for the most part that of a metasilicate, RSiO 3 with ,
R=
Ca,Mg,Fe chiefly, also Mn,Zn. RSiO 3 with R(Fe,Al) 2 SiO 6 less often
Further ,
containing alkalies (Na,K), and then RSiO 3 with RAl(Si0 3 ) 2 Rarely includ- .
ing zirconium and titanium, also fluorine.
.
Orthorhombic Section
_,
a : b : c or b : a *
c
Enstatite MgSi0 3 0'9702 1 0'5710 1'0307
: :
1 0'5885
Bronzite (Mg,Fe)Si0 3
Hypersthene (Fe,Mg)SiO 3 0'9713 : 1 : 0'5704 T0319 : 1 : 0'5872
ut the similarity of the form to the
0. Monoclinic Section
Pyroxene .1-0921 1 1 ': 0-5893 74 10'

I. NON-ALUMINOUS VARIETIES:
1. DIOPSIDE
{CaMg(Si0 3 ) 2
Ayr , r, .
iCa(Mg,Fe)(Si03 ) 2
Malacohte, Sahte, Diallage, etc.
2. HEDENBERGITE CaFe(SiO3 ) 2
Manganhedenbergite Ca(Fe,Mn) (SiO 3 ) 2
3. SCHEFFERITE (Ca,Mg) (Fe,Mn)(SiO 3 ) 2
Jeffersomte (Ca,Mg) (Fe,Mn,Zn) (Si03 ) 2
SILICATES 471
II. ALUMINOUS VARIETIES.-
4 AUGITE {Ca(Mg,Fe)(Si0 3 ) 2
(with (Mg,Fe)(Al,Fe) 2 Si0 6
Leucaugite, Fassaite, Êgirite-augite.
AcmiteU^Sgiritel NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 1'0996 : 1 : 0'6012 73 11'

Spodumene LiAl(SiO 3 ) 2 1*1238 : 1 : 0'6355 69 40'
Jadeite NaAl(Si0 3 ) 2 1*103 : 1 : 0'613 72 44|'
a : b : c /8
WoUastonite CaSiO 3 1'0531 : 1 : 0'9676 84 30'

Pectolite HNaCa(SiOi)s 1'1140 : 1 : 0'9864 84 40'
7- Triclinic Section
Rhodonite MnSiO3 1-0729 :' 1 ': 0-6213 103 18' 108 44' 81 39'
also
(Mn,Ca)Si0 3
(Mn,Fe)SiO 3
(Mn,Zn,Fe,Ca)Si0 3
Babingtonite (Ca,Fe,Mn)SiO 3 .Fe2 (Si0 3 ; 3
1-0691 : 1 : 0-6308 104 21|' 108 31' 83 34'
The rare species Rosenbuschite, Layenite, Wohlerite also belong under the monoclinic
section and Hiortdahlite under the triclinic section of this group.
The PYROXENE GROUP embraces a number of species which, while falling

in different systems orthorhombic, monoclinic, and triclinic are yet
closely related in form. Thus all have a fundamental prism with an angle of
93 and 87, parallel to which there is more or less distinct cleavage. Further,
the angles in other prominent zones show a considerable degree of similarity.
In composition the metasilicates of calcium, magnesium, and ferrous iron are
ii m i
most prominent, while compounds of the form R(Al,Fe) 2 SiOe, RAl(Si0 3 ) 2 are
also important.
The species of the pyroxene group are closely related in composition to the
corresponding species of the amphibole group, which also embraces members
in the orthorhombic, monoclinic, and triclinic systems. In a number of cases
the same chemical compound appears in each group; furthermore, a change
by paramorphism of pyroxene to is often observed.
amphibole In form also
the two groups are related, as shown
in the axial ratio; also in the parallel
growth of crystals of monoclinic amphibole upon or about those of pyroxene
(Fig. 461, p. 173). The axial ratios for the typical monoclinic species are:
Pyroxene a : b :c = 1'0921 : 1 : 0'5893 /3
= 74 10'
Amphibole a : 6 : c = M022 : 1 : 0-5875 /?

= 73 58'
See further on p. 486.

The optical relations of the prominent members of the Pyroxene Group,
especially as regards the connection between the position of the ether-axes and
the crystallographic axes are exemplified in the following figures (Cross).
A corresponding exhibition of the prominent amphiboles is given under that
group, Fig. 826, p. 486,
797
I, Enstatite, etc. II, Spodumene. Ill, Diopside, etc. IV, Hedenbergite, Augite.
V, Augite. VI, Acmite.
a. Orthorhombic Section
ENSTATITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'9702 : 1 0'5710.
:
mm'", 110 A 110 = 88 16'. rr', 223 A 223 = 40 16^.

f
qq ,
023 A 023 = 241 41'. XT'", 223 A 223
= 39 H'.
Twins rare: tw. pi. h (014) as twinning lamellae; also tw. pi. (101) as -stel-
late twins cros'sing at angles of nearly 60, sometimes six-rayed. Distinct
crystals rare, habit prismatic. Usually massive, fibrous, or lamellar.
Cleavage: m
(110) rather easy. Parting || 6 (010); also a (100). Frac-
798 ture uneven. Brittle. H. = 5*5. G. 31-3-3. =
Luster, a little pearly on cleavage-surfaces to vitreous;
often metalloidal in the bronzite variety. Color
grayish, yellowish or greenish white, to olive-green
and brown. Streak uncolored, grayish. Translucent
to nearly opaque. Pleochroism weak, more marked in
varieties relatively rich in iron. Optically +. Ax.
pi. b (010)
1 1
Bxa J_ c (001) Dispersion p
. v weak. . <
Axial angle large and variable, increasing with the
Bamle
amount of iron, usually about 90 for FeO = 10 p. c.
j8
= 1-669; 7 a = 0'009. -
Comp. MgSiO 3 or MgO.SiO 2 = Silica 60, magnesia 40 = 100. Also
(Mg,Fe)SiO 3 with
=
Mg : Fe 799 800
8 :
1, 6 :
1, 3 :
1, etc.
Var. 1. With little or no 001

001
iron; Enstatite. Color white,
yellowish, grayish, or green-
ish white; luster vitreous to
pearly; G. = 3'10-3'13. 100
Chladnite (Shepardite of Rose),

100
which makes up 90 p. c. of the
Bishopville meteorite, belongs
x^-H *K h-
here and is the purest kind.
Victorite, occurring in the Deesa
meteoric iron in rosettes of
acicular crystals, is similar.
2. Ferriferous; Bronzite. Col-
or grayish green to
olive-green t
and brown. Luster on cleav- ,-, ., .-
age-surface often adamantine- ^nstatite (Bronzite) Hypersthene

pearly to submetallic or bronze-like; this,
however, is usually of secondary origin and is
SILICATES 473
not essential. With the increase 9f iron (above 12 to 14 p. c.) bronzite passes to hyper-
sthene, the optic axial angle changing so that in the latter X = Bxa _L (100). This is
illustrated by Figs. 799, 800.
Pyr., etc. B.B. almost infusible, being only slightly rounded on the thin edges;
F. = 6. Insoluble in hydrochloric acid.
Artif . Enstatite is formed from a melt having the proper composition at temperatures
slightly under 1100. At higher temperatures the monoclinic pyroxenes appear. Enstatite
has also been formed by fusing olivine with silica. When serpentine is melted it breaks
down into enstatite and olivine.
Micro. In thin sections is colorless or light yellow or green; marked relief; prominent
cleavage with parallel extinction; little pleochroism but becoming stronger with increase of
iron; inclusions common lying parallel to brachypinacoid, producing characteristic schiller
of mineral.
Obs. Enstatite (including bronzite) is a common constituent of peridotites and the
serpentines derived from them; it also occurs in crystalline schists. It is often associated
in parallel growth with a monoclinic pyroxene, e.g., diallage. common mineral in mete- A
oric stones often occurring in chondrules with eccentric radiated structure.
Occurs near Aloystal in Moravia, in serpentine; at Kupferberg in Bavaria; at Baste in
the Harz Mts., Germany (protobastite) ; in the so-called olivine bombs of the Dreiser Weiher
in the Eifel, Germany; in immense crystals, in part altered, at the apatite deposits of
Kjorrestad near Bamle, Norway; in the peridotite associated with the diamond deposits of
South Africa.
In. the United States, in N. Y. at the Tilly Foster magnetite mine, Brewster, Putnam Co.,
with chondrodite and at Edwards; Texas, Pa.; bronzite from Webster, N. C.; Bare Hills,
Baltimore, Md.
Named from evaaTT-rjs, an opponent, because so refractory. The name bronzite has
priority, but a bronze luster is not essential, and is far from universal.
HYPERSTHENE.
mm 110 A 110 = 88 20'. oo'", 111 A 111 = 52' 23'.
hh', 014 A 014 = 16 14'. uu'" 232 t
A 232 = 72< 50'.
Crystals rare, habit prismatic, often tabular a (100), less often b (010). || ||
Usually foliated massive sometimes in embedded spherical forms.

;
Cleavage: b (010) perfect; m (110) and a (100) distinct but interrupted.

Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 5-6. G. = 3 '40-3 '50. Luster somewhat
pearly on a Cleavage-surface, and sometimes metalloidal. Color dark brown-
ish green, grayish black, greenish black, pinchbeck-brown. Streak grayish,
801 802 803
Figs. 801, Amblystegite, Laacher See. 802, Malnas. 803, Section 6 (010) || showing inclu-
sions; the exterior transformed to actinolite; from Lacroix.
brownish gray. Translucent to nearly opaque. Pleochroism often strong,

especially in the kinds with high iron percentage; thus or a axis brownish 1 1
X
red, Y
or b axis reddish yellow, Z or c axis green. Optically Ax. pi. || .
b (010). Bxa J_ a (100). Dispersion p v. >

Axial angle rather large and
cf enstatite, p. 472, and Figs. 799,

variable, diminishing with increase of iron,
.
800, p. 472.
= 1702; y -
a = 0-013.
of a brown color, arranged
Hypersthene often encloses minute tabular scales, usually
vertical or inclined 30 to
mostly parallel to the basal plane (Fig. 803), also less frequently
c axis; they may be brookite (gothite, hematite), but their true nature is doubtful. They
are the cause of the peculiar metalloidal luster or schiller, and are often of secondary origin,
"
being developed along the so-called solution-planes" (p. 189)'.
Comp. (Fe,Mg)SiO 3 with Fe Mg

= 1 3(FeO = 167 p. c.), 1 2
: : .
(FeO = 217 p. c.) to nearly 1 l(FeO = 31 '0 p. c.).:Alumina is sometimes

present (up to 10 p. c.) and the composition then approximates to the alu-
minous pyroxenes.
Of the orthorhombic magnesium-iron metasilicates, those with FeO > 12 to 15p. c. are
usually to be classed with hypersthene, which is further characterized by being optically
negative and having dispersion p > v.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses to a black enamel, and on charcoal yields a magnetic mass;
fuses more easily with increasing amount of iron. Partially decomposed by hydro-
chloric acid.
Micro. In thin sections similar, to enstatite except shows distinct reddish or greenish
color with stronger pleochroism and is optically .
Artif
. Similar to enstatite, which see.
Obs. Hypersthene, associated with a triclinic feldspar (labradorite), is common in
certain granular eruptive rocks, as norite, hyperite, gabbro, also in some andesites (hyper-
sthene-andesite) a rock shown to occur rather extensively in widely separated regions.
,
It occurs at Isle St. Paul, Labrador; in Greenland; at Farsund and elsewhere in Nor-
way; Elfdalen in Sweden; Penig in Saxony; Ronsberg in Bohemia; the Tyrol; Neurode
in Silesia; Bodenmais, Bavaria. Amblystegite is from the Laacher See, Germany. Sza-
boite occurs with
pseudobrookite and tridymite, in cavities in the andesite of the Aranyer
Berg, Transylvania, and elsewhere.
Occurs in the norites of the Cortlandt region on the Hudson river, N.' Y.; also common
with labradorite in the Adirondack Archa3an region of northern N. Y. and northward in
Canada.- In the hypersthene-andesites of Mt Shasta, Cal.; Buffalo Peaks, Col., and
other points.
Hypersthene is named from virep and <r0ei>os, very strong, or tough.
BASTITE, or SCHILLER SPAR. An altered enstatite (or brqnzite) having approximately
the composition of serpentine. It occurs in foliated form in certain granular eruptive
rocks and is characterized by a bronze-like metalioidal 'luster or schiller on the chief
cleavage-face 6 (010), which "schillerization" (p. 251) is of secondary origin. H. = 3'5-4.
G. = 2 '5-2 '7. Color leek-green to olive- and pistachio-green, and pinchbeck-brown.
Pleochroism not marked. Optically -. Double refraction weak. Ax. pi. a (010) ||
(hence normal to that of enstatite). Bx a b (010). Dispersion p > v. The original

bastite was from Baste near Harzburg in the Harz Mts.,
Germany; also from Todtmoos
in the Schwarzwald, Germany.
PECKHAMITE, 2(Mg,Fe)SiO 3 .(Mg,Fe)SiO 4 . Occurs in rounded nodules hi the meteorite

of Estherville, Emmet Co., Iowa, May 10, 1879. G. = 3 '23. Color light greenish yellow.
)8. Monoclinic Section

PYROXENE.
Monoclinic. : b : c = 1-0921 : 1 0-5893; = 74 10'.
Axes_a '
:
J3
mm'", 110 A 110 = 92 50'. &>, 001 A 221 = 49 54'.

co, 001 A 100 = 74 10'. en, 001 A 110 = 79 9'.
cp, 001 A 101 = 31 20'. a, 001 A Til = 42 2'.
ee', Oil A Oil = 59 6'. uu', 111 A ill = 48 29'/
22', 021 A 021 = 97 11'. SS
f
111, A TTl = 59 11'.
cu, 001 A 111 = 33 49*'. oo', 221 A 221 = 84 11'.
Twins: tw. pi. (1) a (100), contact-twins, common (Fig. 810), sometimes
polysynthetic. (2) c (001), as twinning lamellae producing striations on the
vertical faces and
pseudocleavage or parting c (Fig. 811); very common, ||
SILICATES 475
often secondary. (3) y (101) cruciform-twins, not common (Fig. 451, p. 171).
(4)W (122) the vertical axes crossing at angles of nearly 60; sometimes re-
peated as a six-rayed star (Fig. 450, p. 171). Crystals usually prismatic in
804 805 806 807 808
100
habit, often short and thick, and either a square prism (a (100), 6 (010) prom-
inent), or nearly square (93, 87) with m (110) predominating; sometimes a
nearly symmetrical 8-sided prism with a, 6, m (Fig. 811). Often coarsely
lamellar, || c (001) or a (100). Also granular, coarse or fine; rarely fibrous
or columnar.
Cleavage: m (110) sometimes rather perfect, but interrupted, often only
observed in thin sections J_ caxis (Fig. 812).
813
Parting ||
c (001), due to twinning, often
prominent, especially in large crystals and
lamellar masses (Fig. 811); also ||
a (100)
less distinct and not so common. Fracture
uneven to conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 5-6.
G. = 3*2-3*6, varying with the compo-
sition. Luster vitreous inclining to res-
inous; often dull; sometimes pearly ||
c(001) in kinds showing parting. Color

usually green of various dull shades, varying
from nearly colorless, white, or grayish
white to brown and black; rarely bright
green, as in kinds containing chromium;
also blue. Streak white to gray and grayish
X
green. Transparent to opaque. Pleo-
chroism usually weak, even in dark-colored
varieties; sometimes marked, especially in violet-brown kinds containing
titanium. (Violaite is name given to a highly pleochroic variety from the
Caucasus Mts.)
v,
Optically +. a) = 0'02
Birefringence strong, (7 0'03. Ax. pi. ||
b (010). Bx a or Z A c axis =^4-36 in diopside, to -j-52 in augite (which
see), or Z A c (001)
= 20 to gg, the angle in general increasing with amount
of iron. For diopside 2 = 59-. a = 1-673.
V 1-680. 7 = 1702. =
Comp. For the most g^rt
a normal metasilicate, RSiO 3 chiefly of ,
calcium and magnesium, also iron, less often manganese and zinc. The
alkali metals potassium anc^ sodium present rarely, except in very small
amount. Also in certain varieties containing the trivalent metals aluminium,
ferric iron, and manganese. These last varieties may be most simply con-
sidered as molecular compounds of Ca(Mg,Fe)Si 2 O 6 and (Mg,Fe)(Al,Fe) 2 Si0 6 ,
as suggested by Tschermak. Chromium is sometimes present in small

amount; also titanium "replacing silicon.
The name Pyroxene is from iryp, fire and evps, stranger, and records Haiiy's idea that
the mineral was, as he expresses it, "a stranger in the domain of fire," whereas, in fact, it
is, next to the feldspars, tjje most Tmiversal constituent
of igneous rocks.
The varieties are numerous and depend upon variations in composition chiefly; the
more prominent of the varieties p*>perly rank as sub-species .
Artif. The monoclinic pyroxene, MgSiOs, can be crystallized from a melt having the
theoretical composition at temperatures about 1500 or at a lower temperature from solu-
tion in molten calcium or magnesium vanadate. It is the most stable form of MgSiO?.
It has no true melting point but af about 1550 breaks down into forsterite and silica.
I. Containing little or no Aluminium

1. DIOPSIDE.
Malacolite, Alalite. Calcium-magnesium pyroxene. For-
mula CaM"g(Si0 3 ) 2 = Silica 55-6, lime 25-9, magnesia 18-5 = 100. Color
white, yellowish, grayish white to pale green, and finally to dark green and
nearly black; sometimes transparent and colorless, also rarely a fine blue. In
prismatic crystals, often slender; also granular and columnar to lamellar mas-
sive. G. = 3-2-3-38. Bxa A c axis = + 36 and upwards. 7 - a = 0-03.
Iron present usually in small amount as noted below,
is and the amount
increases as it graduates toward true hedenbergite.
The following belong here: Chrome-diopside, contains chromium (1 to 2'8 p. c. CÔa),
often a bright green.
Malacolite, as originally described, was a pale-colored translucent variety from Sala,
Sweden.
Alalite occurs in broad right-angled prisms, colorless to faint
greenish or clear green,
from the Mussa Alp in the Ala valley, Piedmont, Italy.
Traversellite, from Trayersella, Piedmont, Italy, is similar.
Violan is a fine blue diopside from St. Marcel, Piedmont,
Italy; occurring in prismatic
crystals and massive.
Canaanite is a grayish-white or bluish-white pyroxene rock
occurring with dolomite at
Canaan, Conn.
Lavrovite is a pyroxene, colored green
by vanadium, from the neighborhood of Lake
Baikal, in eastern Siberia.
Diopside is named from 6is, twice or double, and oîs, appearance. Malacolite is from
na\otKos, soft, because softer than feldspar, with which it was associated.
2. HEDENBERGITE. Calcium-iron pyroxene. Formula CaFe(Si0 3 ) 2 =
Silica 48'4, iron protoxide 29'4, lime 22'2 = 100. Color black. In crystals,
and also lamellar massive. G. = 3-5-3-58. Bx a A c axis = + 48. Man-
ganese is present in manganhedenbergite to 6 -5 p. c. Color grayish green.
G. = 3'55.
Between the two extremes, diopside and
hedenbergite, there are numerous transitions
jonformmg to the formula Ca(Mg,Fe)Si2 O 6 As the amount of iron increases the color
.
langes irom light to dark green to nearly black, the specific

gravity increases from 3 -2 to
3-6, and the angle Bxa A c axis also from 36 to 48.
SILICATES 477
The following are varieties, coming under these two sub-species, based in part upon
structure, in part on peculiarities of composition.
Salite (Sahlite), color grayish green to deep green and black; sometimes grayish and
yellowish white; in crystals; also lamellar (parting c (001)), and granular massive; from
||
Sala in Sweden. Baikalite, a dark dingy green variety, in crystals, with parting c (001), j|
from Lake Baikal, in Siberia.

Coccolite is a granular variety, embedded in calcite, also forming loosely coherent to
compact aggregates; color varying from white to pale green to dark green, and then con-
taining considerable iron; the latter the original coccolite. Named from KOKKOS, a grain.
DIALLAGE. A lamellar or thin-foliated pyroxene, characterized by a fine lamellar
structure and parting a (100), with also parting
||
6 (010), and less often
|j
c (001). Also a ||
fibrous structure c axis.

|| Twinning a (100), often poly synthetic interlamination with
|| ;
an orthorhombic pyroxene common. Color grayish green to bright grass-green, and deep
green; also brown. Luster of surface a (100) often pearly, sometimes metalloidal or
exhibiting schiller and resembling bronzite, from the presence of microscopic inclusions of
secondary origin. Bx a A c axis = +39 to 40; = 1-681; y - a = 0;024. H. = 4;
G. = 3'2-3'35. In composition near diopside, but often containing alumina and some-
times in considerable amount, then properly to be classed with the augites. Often changed
to amphibole, see smaragdite, and uralite, p. 490. Named from dta^Xayrj, difference,
in allusion to the dissimilar planes of fracture. This is the characteristic pyroxene of
gabbro, and other related rocks.
Omphacite. The granular to foliated pyroxenic constituent of the garnet-rock called
eclogite, often interlaminated with amphibole (smaragdite); color grass-green. Contains
some AÔs.
3. SCHEFFERITE. A manganese pyroxene, sometimes also containing
much iron. Color brown to black.
In crystals, sometimes tabular c (00_1), also with p (101) prominent, more often elongated
||
in the direction of the zone b (010) p (101), rarely prismatic, c axis. Twins, with a (100)
:
||
as tw. pi. very common. Also crystalline, massive. Cleavage prismatic, very distinct.
Color yellowish brown to reddish brown; also black (iron-schefferite} .Ôptically +.
Bx a or Z A c axis = 44 25'. The iron-schefferite from.Pajsberg, Sweden, is black in
color and has Z A c axis = +
49 to 59 for different zones in the same crystal. The
brown iron-schefferite (urbanite) from Langban, Sweden, has Z A c axis = 69 3'. It
resembles garnet in appearance.
Jeffersonite is a manganese-zinc pyroxene from Franklin Furnace, N. J. (but the zinc
may be due to impurity). In large, coarse crystals with edges rounded and faces uneven.
Color greenish black, on the exposed surface chocolate-brown.
Blanfordite. A pyroxene containing some sodium, manganese and iron. Strongly pleo-
chroic (rose-pink to sky-blue). Found with manganese ores in the Central Provinces,
India.
Clinoenstatite has been suggested as the name for the monoclinic magnesium pyroxene.
II. Aluminous
4. AUGITE. Aluminous pyroxene. Composition chiefly CaMgSi 2 Oe with
(Mg,Fe)(Al,Fe) 2 SiO 6 and occasionally also containing alkalies and then gradu-
,
ating toward acmite. Titanium is also sometimes present. Here belong:

a. LEUC AUGITE. Color white or grayish. Contains alumina, with lime and magnesia,
and little or no iron. Looks like diopside. H. = 6'5; G. = 3*19. Named from Xeu/cos,
white.
b. FASSAITE. Includes the pale to dark, sometimes deep-green crystals, or pistachio-
green and then resembling epidote. The aluminous kinds of diallage also belong here.
Named from the locality in the Fassatal, Tyrol. Pyrgom is from irvpyu/jia, a tower.
c. AUGITE. Includes the greenish or brownish black and black kinds, occurring mostly
in eruptive rocks. It is usually in short prismatic crystals, thick and stout, or tabular ||
a (100); often twins (Figs. 809, 810). Ferric iron is here present, in a relatively large
amount, and the angle Bx a A c axis becomes +50 to 52. = 1717; y a '= 0'022.
TiO 2 is present in some kinds, which are then pleochroic. Named from avyij, luster.
d. ALKALI- AUGITE. Here belong varieties of augite characterized by the presence of
alkalies, especially soda; they approximate in composition and optically to acmite and
ajgirite (Bx a A c axis = 60, Fig. 814), and are sometimes called aegirite-augite (cf. Fig. 818,
-Known from rocks rich in alkalies, as elseolite-syenite, phonolite, leu-

p. 480). chiefly
in the
Pyr. etc. Varying widely, owing to the wide variations in composition differ-
ent varieties, and often by
insensible gradations.
Fusibility, 3*75 in diopside; 3 '5 in salite, baikalite,
814 and omphacite; 3 in jeffersonite and augite; 2 '5 in
hedenbergite. Varieties rich in iron afford a mag-
netic globule when fused on charcoal, and in general
the fusibility varies with the amount of iron. Many
varieties give with the fluxes reactions for man-
ganese. Most varieties are unacted upon by acids.
Diff. Characterized by monoclinic crystallization
and the prismatic angle of 87 and 93, hence yield-
ing nearly square prisms; these may be mistaken for
scapolite if terminal faces are wanting or indistinct
(but scapolite fuses easily B. B. with intumescence).
The oblique parting (|| c (001), Fig. 811) often
distinctive, also the common dull green to gray and
browncolors. Amphibole differs in prismatic angle
(55ând 124|) and cleavage, and in having com-
mon columnar to fibrous varieties, which are rare
with pyroxene. (See also p. 486.)
Micro. The common rock-forming pyroxenes
are distinguished in thin sections by their high relief; usually greenish to olive tones of
color; distinct system of interrupted cleavage-cracks crossing one another at nearly right
angles in sections _L c axis (Fig. 812); high interference-colors; general lack of pleo-
chroism; large extinction-angle, 35 to 50 and higher, for sections b (010). The last-
||
named sections are easily recognized by showing the highest interference colors; yielding
no optical figures in convergent light and having parallel cleavage-cracks, the latter in
the direction of the vertical axis. See also segirite, p. 480.
A zonal banding is common, the successive laminae sometimes differing in extinction-
angle and pleochroism; also thje hour-glass structure occasionally distinct
(Fig. 815, from Lacroix).
Obs. Pyroxene is a very common mineral in igneous rocks, being the
most important of the ferromagnesian minerals. Some rocks consist almost
entirely of pyroxene. It most commonly occurs in volcanic rocks but is
found also, but less abundantly, in connection with granitic rocks. It is
a common mineral in crystalline limestone and dolomite, in serpentine and
metamorphic schists; sometimes forms large beds or veins, especially in
Archaean rocks. It occurs also in meteorites. The pyroxene of limestone
is mostly white and light green or gray in color, falling under diopside
(malacoh'te, salite, coccolite); that of most other metamorphic rocks is

sometimes white or colorless, but usually green of different shades, from
pale green to greenish black, and occasionally black; that of serpentine is
sometimes in fine crystals, but often of the foliated green kind called
diallage; that of eruptive rocks is usually the black to greenish black augite.
In limestone the associations are often amphibole, scapolite, vesuvianite, garnet, ortho-
clase, titanite, apatite, phlogopite, and sometimes brown tourmaline, chlorite, talc, zircon,
spinel, rutile, etc.; and in other metamorphic rocks mostly the same. In eruptive rocks it
may be in distinct embedded crystals, or in grains without external crystalline form; it
often occurs with similarly disseminated chrysolite (olivine), crystals of orthoclase (sani-
dine), labradorite, leucite, etc.; also with a rhombic pyroxene, amphibole, etc.
Pyroxene, as an essential rock-making mineral, is especially common in basic eruptive
rocks. Thus, as augite, with a triclinic feldspar (usually labradorite), magnetite, often
chrysolite, in basalt, basaltic lavas and diabase; in andesite; also in trachyte; in peridotite
and pikrite; with nephelite in phonolite. Further with elseolite, orthoclase, etc., in
elaeohte-syenite and augite-syenite; also as diallage in gabbro; in many peridotites and the
serpentines formed from them; as diopside (malacolite) in crystalline schists. In limburg-
ite, augitite and pyroxenite, pyroxene is present as the prominent constituent, while feld-
spar is absent; it may also form rock masses alone nearly free from associated minerals.
Diopside (alalite, mussite) occurs in fine crystals on the Mussa Alp in the Ala valley in
Piedmont, Italy, associated with garnets (hessonite) and talc in veins traversing serpentine;
in fine crystals at
Traversella, Piedmont; at Zermatt in Switzerland; Schwarzenstein in the
Zillertal, Ober-Sulzbachtal, and elsewhere in Tyrol and in the Salzburg Alps; Reichenstein,
SILICATES 479
Silesia, Germany; Ober-Sulzbachtal and elsewhere in Tyrol and in the Salzburg Alps;
Reichenstein Lake; Rezbanya, Hungary; Achmatoysk in the Ural Mts., with almandite,
clinochlore; Lake Baikal (baikalite) in eastern Siberia; Pargas in Finland; at Nordmark,
Sweden.
Hedenbergite is from Tunaberg and Nordmark, Sweden; Arendal, Norway. Mangan-
hedenbergite from Vester Silfberg, Sweden; schefferite from Langban, Sweden.
Augite (including fassaite) occurs on the Pesmeda Alp, Mt. Monzoni, and elsewhere in the
Fassatal, Tyrol, as a contact formation; at Carlsbad and Teplitz, Bohemia; Traversella,
Piedmont, Italy; the Laacher See, Eifel and Sasbach in the Kaiserstuhl, Germany; in
Italy at Vesuvius, white rare, green, brown, yellow to black, Frascati, Etna; the Azores and
Cape Verde Islands; the Hawaiian Islands, and many other regions of volcanic rocks.
In North America, occurs in Me., at Raymond and Rumford, diopside, salite, etc. In
Vt., at Thetford, black augite, with chrysolite, in bowlders of basalt. In Conn., at Canaan,
white crystals, often externally changed to tremolite, in dolomite; also the pyroxenic rock
called canaanite. In N. Y., at Warwick, fine crystals; in Westchester Co., white, at the
Sing Sing quarries; in Orange Co., in Monroe, at Two Ponds, crystals, often large, in lime-
stone; near Greenwood furnace, and also near Edenville; in Lewis Co., at Diana, white
and black crystals; in St. Lawrence Co., at Fine, in large crystals; at De Kalb, fine diopside;
also at Gouverneur, Rossie, Russell, Pitcairn; at Moriah, coccolite, in limestone. In N. J.,
Franklin Furnace, Sussex Co., good crystals, also jeffersonite. In Pa., near Attleboro,
crystals, and granular; in Pennsbury, at Burnett's quarry, diopside; at the French Creek
mines, Chester Co., chiefly altered to fibrous amphibole. In Tenn., at the Ducktown mines.
In Canada, at Calumet Island, grayish green crystals in limestone; in Bathurst, color-
less or white crystals; at Grenville, dark green crystals, and granular; Burgess, Lanark
Co.; Renfrew Co., with apatite, titanite, etc.; crystals from Adams Lake, Ontario; Orford,
Sherbrooke Co., white crystals, also of a chrome-green color with chrome garnet; at Hull
and Wakefield, white crystals with nearly colorless garnets, honey-yellow vesuvianite, etc.
At many other points in the Archaean of Quebec and Ontario, especially in connection with
the apatite deposits.
Pyroxene undergoes alteration in different ways. A change of molecular constitution
without essential change of composition, i.e., by paramorphism (using the word rather
broadly), may result in the formation of some variety of amphibole. Thus, the white
pyroxene crystals of Canaan, Conn., are often changed on the exterior to tremolite; sim-
ilarly with other varieties at many localities. See uralite, p. 490. Also changed to steatite,
serpentine, etc.
PIGEONITE, is the name given to a pyroxene with small and variable axial angle from
Pigeon Point, Minn.
ACMITE.
Monoclinic. Axes: a b c = 1-0996 1 0-6012;
: :
= 73 11'.
: :
Twins: tw. pi. a (100) very common; crystals often polysynthetic, with
enclosed twinning lamellae. Crystals long prismatic, vertically striated or
channeled; acute terminations very characteristic.
The above applies to ordinary acmite. For cegirite, crystals prismatic, bluntly termi-
nated; twins not common; also in groups or tufts of slender acicular to capillary crystals,
and in fibrous forms.
Cleavage: m
(110) distinct; 6 (010) less so. Fracture uneven. Brittle.
H. = 6-6*5. = 3-50-3-55. Luster vitreous, inclining to resinous. Streak
G.
pale yellowish gray. Color brownish or reddish brown, green; in the fracture
blackish green. Subtransparent to opaque. Optically Ax. pi. b (010).
.
||
Bxa or X
A c axis = +2| acmite, to 6 segirite. a = 1-763. = 1799,
7 = 1-813.
Var. Includes acmite in sharp-pointed crystals (Fig. 816) often twins. Bxa A c axis
= 5|-6. Also cegirite (Fig. 817)' in crystals bluntly terminated, twins rare, Bxa A c axis
= 2-3*.
show a marked zonal structure, green within and brown on the
Crystals of acmite often
exterior, particularly a (100), b (010), p (101), s (111). The brown portion (acmite) is
X
||
feebly pleochroic, the green (agirite) strongly pleochroic. Both have absorption > Y
X
> Z, but the former has light brown with tinge of green, Y greenish yellow with tinge of
brown, Z brownish yellow; the latter has X deep grass-green, Y lighter grass-green, Z yel-
lowish brown to yellowish.
With some authors (vom Rath, etc.) s = (Oil) and X A c axis =
- 2 to 6, as in
Fig. 819. Fig. 818 shows the optical orientation according to Brogger.
Ill
Comp. Essentially NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 or Na2 O.Fe 2 O 3 .4Si0 2

=
Silica 52'0, iron sesquioxide 34'6, soda 13'4 = 100. Ferrous
iron is also present.
Pyr.. etc. B.B. fuses at 2 to a lustrous black mag-

netic globule, coloring the flame deep yellow; with the
fluxes reacts for iron and sometimes manganese. Slightly
acted upon by acids.
Micro. Êgirite is characterized in thin sections by
itsgrass-green color; strong pleochroism in tones of green
and yellow; the small extinction-angle in sections &(010).
||
Distinguished from common green hornblende, with which

it might be confounded, by the fact that in such sections
the direction of extinction lying near the cleavage is neg-
ative (X), while the same direction in hornblende is pos-
itive (Z).
Êgirite Acmite can be produced artificially by fusing
Artif .
together its constituent oxides but usually under such
conditions only a glass containing crystals of magnetite is formed.
Obs. The original acmite occurs in a pegmatite vein; at Rundemyr,
east of the little lake called Rokebergskjern, in the parish of Eker, near
Acmite Kongsberg, Norway. It is in slender crystals, sometimes a foot long,
embedded in feldspar and quartz.
jEgirite occurs especially in igneous rocks rich in soda and containing iron, commonly in
rocks containing leucite or. nephelite; thus in aegirite-granite, nephelite-syenite, and some
varieties of phonolite; often in such cases iron-ore grains are wanting in the rock, their
place being taken by aegirite crystals.
In the sub-variety of phonolite
called tinguaite, the rock has often
818
a deep greenish color due to the
abundance of minute crystals of
Large crystals are found
aegirite.
in the pegmatite facies of nephelite-
syenites as in West Greenland,
Southern Norway, the peninsula
Kola in Russian Lapland, Ditro in
Transylvania.
Prominent American occurrences
'
are the following: Magnet Cove,

Ark. (large crystals); Salem and
Quincy, Mass.; Libertyville, N. J.
(dike); Trans Pecos district in
Texas; Black Hills, S. D.; Cripple
Creek, Col.; Bearpaw Mts., Judith
Mts. and the Crazy Mts. in Mon.;
also vanadium-bearing aegirites from
Libby, Mon., also at Montreal, Canada.
Acmite is named from &KM, point, in allusion to the pointed extremities of the
crystals;
Mginte is from Êgir, the Icelandic god of the sea.
SPODUMENE. Triphane.
Monoclinic. Axes a
c b
1-1238 1 0*6355;
: :
= = 69 40'. : :
Twins: tw. pi. Crystals prismatic (mm'" 110 A HO = 93 0'),

a (100).
often flattened a (100); the vertical planes striated and
||
furrowed;' crystals ,
sometimes very lar,ge. Also massive, cleavable.

Cleavage m
(110) perfect. A lamellar structure a (100) sometimes very ||
SILICATES 481
prominent, a crystal then separating into thin plates. Fracture uneven

to subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 6'5-7. G. = 3-13-3-20. Luster vitreous,
on cleavage surfaces somewhat pearly. Color greenish white, grayish white,
yellowish green, emerald-green, yellow, ame- 820
thystine purple. Streak white. Transparent
to translucent. Pleochroism strong in deep
green varieties. Optically Ax. pi.+ .
||
b (010). Bxa A c axis = 26. +

Dispersion
p > v, horizontal. 2 V = 58. a = 1-651.
j8
= 1-669. 7 = 1-677.
Hiddenite has a yellow-green to emerald-green color;
the latter variety is used as a gem. In small ( to 2
inches long) slender prismatic crystals, faces often
etched.
Kunzite is a clear lilac-colored variety found near
Pala,San Diego Co., California, and also at Vanakarata,
Madagascar The unaltered material from Branch ville,
.
Conn., shows the same color. Used as a gem stone.

Norwich, Mass Hiduenite
Comp. LiAl(SiO 8 ) 2 or Li 2 O.Al 2 O 3 .4SiO2 =
Silica 64-5, alumina 27-4, lithia 8*4 = 100. Generally contains a little
sodium; the variety hiddenite also chromium, to which the color may
be due.
Pyr., etc. B.B. becomes white and opaque, swells up, imparts a purple-red color
(lithia) to the flame (sometimes obscured by sodium), and fuses at 3 '5 to a clear or white
glass. Not acted upon by acids. Kunzite shows strong phosphorescence with an orange-
pink color when excited by an oscillating electric discharge, by ultra violet rays, X-rays, or
radium emanations.
Diff. Characterized by its perfect parting a (100) (in some varieties) as well as
||
by prismatic cleavage; has a higher specific gravity and more pearly luster than feldspar
or scapolite. Gives a red flame B.B. Less fusible than amblygonite.
Alter. Spodumene undergoes very commonly alteration. First by the action of solu-
tions containing soda it is changed to a mixture of eucryptite, LiAlSiO 4 and albite, NaAl
,
SisOg. Later through the influence of potash salts the eucryptite is changed to muscovite.
This resulting mixture of albite and muscovite is known as cymatolite, having a wavy
fibrous structure and silky luster . These alteration products are well shown in the specimens
from Branch ville, Conn.
Artif . An artificial spodumene has been obtained together with other silicates by
fusing together lithium carbonate, alumina and silica. This spodumene differs, however,
from the natural mineral in its optical properties and has been called ^-spodumene. The
natural mineral, or spodumene, is transformed into the /3 modification on heating to 1000.
Obs. Spodumene occurs in pegmatite veins, sometimes in crystals of very great size.
Crystals from the Etta tin mine, S. D., with faces up to 40 feet in length have been reported.
Occurs on the island of Uto, Sweden; at Killiney Bay, Ireland; in small transparent crystals
of a pale yellow in Brazil, province of Minas Geraes. Variously colored spodumene from
Madagascar.
In the United States, in granite at Goshen, Mass.; also at Chesterfield, Chester, Hunt-
ington (formerly Norwich), and Sterling, Mass.; at Windham, Me., with garnet and stau-
rolite and at Peru, with beryl, triphylite, petalite. In Conn., at Branchville, the crystals
often of immense size; near Stony Point, Alexander Co., N. C. (hiddenite)', in S. D. at the
Etta tin mine in Pennington Co. Kunzite from Pala, Cal.
The name spodumene is from awodios, ash-colored. Hiddenite is named for W. E.
Hidden and Kunzite for Dr. G. F. Kunz.
Use. The colored transparent varieties are used as gem stones; see above.
JADEITE.
Monoclinic. Axes, see p. 471. Cleavage and optical characters like
pyroxene. Usually massive, with crystalline structure, sometimes granular,
also obscurely columnar, fibrous foliated to closely compact.
Cleavage: prismatic, at angles of about 93 and 87; also

a (100) diffi- ||
cult. Fracture splintery. Extremely tough. H. = 6'5-7. G. = 3-33-3-35.

Luster subvitreous, pearly on surfaces of cleavage. Color apple-green to
nearly emerald-green, bluish green, leek-green, greenish white,
and nearly
white; sometimes white with spots of bright green. Optically Bxa A + .
c axis = 30 to 40. 2 V = 72. 0=1-654. Streak uncolored. Trans-

lucent to subtranslucent.
Comp. Essentially a metasilicate of sodium and aluminium corre-
sponding to spodumene, NaAl(SiO 3 ) 2 or Na2 O.Al 2 O3.4SiO2
= Silica 59*4,
alumina 25 -2, soda 15 -4 = 100.
Chloromelanite is a dark green to nearly black kind of jadeite (hence the name), contain-
ing iron sesquioxide and not conforming exactly to the above formula.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses readily to a transparent blebby glass. Not attacked by acids
after fusion, and thus differing from saussurite.
Obs. Occurs chiefly in eastern Asia, thus in the Mogoung district in Upper Burma,
in a valley 25 miles southwest of Meinkhoom, in rolled masses in a reddish clay; in Yung-
chang, province of Yunnan, southern China; in Thibet. Much uncertainty prevails, how-
ever, as to the exact localities, since jadeite and nephrite have usually been confused with
each other. May occur also on the American continent, in Mexico and South America ;
perhaps also in Europe.
Jadeite has long been highly prized in the East, especially in China, where it is worked
into ornaments and utensils of great variety and beauty. It is also found with the relics of
early man, thus in the remains of the lake-dwellers of Switzerland, at various points in
France, in Mexico, Greece, Egypt, and Asia Minor.
A pyroxene, resembling jadeite in structure and consisting of the molecules of jadeite,
diopside, and acmite in nearly equal proportions, occurs at the manganese mines of St.
Marcel, Italy.
Use. As the material jade, is used as an ornamental stone. See below.
JADE is a general term used to include various mineral substances of tough, compact
texture and nearly white to dark green color used by early man for utensils and ornaments,
and still highly valued in the East, especially in China. It includes properly two species
only; nephrite, a variety of amphibole (p. 489), either tremolite or actinolite, with G. =
2 '95-3-0. and jadeite, of the pyroxene group and in composition a soda-spodumene, with
G. = 3-3-3-35; easily fusible.
The jade of China belongs to both species, so also that of the Swiss lake-habitations and
of Mexico. Of the two, however, the former, nephrite, is the more common and makes the
jade (ax stone or Punamu stone) of the Maoris of New Zealand; also found in Alaska.
The name jade is also sometimes loosely used to embrace other minerals of more or less
similar characters, and which have been or might be similarly used thus sillimanite, pec-
tolite, serpentine; also vesuvianite, garnet. Bowenite is a jade-like variety of serpentine.
The "jade tenace" of de Saussure is now called saussurite.
WOLLASTONITE. Tabular Spar

Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 1-0531 1
:
0*9676; :
= 84 30'.
822 mm"', 110 A 110 = 92 42'.
hh f
", 540 A 540 = 79 58'.
gg' t Oil A Oil = 87 51'.
co, 001 A 101 = 40 3'.
cr, 001 A 301 = 74 59'.
ct, 001 A 101 = 45 5'.
Diana, N. Y.
Twins:
tw. pi. a (100). Crystals commonly
tabular a (100) or c (001); also short
||
prismatic. Usually cleavable mas-
sive to fibrous, fibers parallel or
reticulated; also compact.
Cleavage: a (100) perfect; also c (001); t (101) less so. Fracture uneven,
brittle. H. = 4-5-5. G. = 2-8-2-9. Luster
vitreous, on cleavage surfaces
pearly. Color white, inclining to gray, yellow, red, or brown. Streak white,
bubtransparent to translucent. Optically -. Bxa A c axis = 32. Dis- +
SILICATES 483
persion p > v, inclined distinct. Ax. pi. ||

b (010). 2E = 70; a = T621.
ft
= 1-633. 7 = 1*635.
Comp. Calcium metasilicate, CaSi0 3 or CaO.SiO 2 = Silica 51*7, lime
48-3,
= 100.
When wollastonite is heated above 1190 C. it develops a basal cleavage, becomes pseudo-
hexagonal, optically positive, nearly uniaxial but probably monoclinic. This material has
been called pseudowollastonite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses quietly to a white, almost glassy globule. With hydrochloric
acid decomposed with separation of silica; most varieties effervesce slightly from the pres-
ence of calcite. Often phosphoresces.
Micro. In thin sections wollastonite is colorless with a moderate relief and medium
birefringence. The plane of the optic axes is usually normal to the elongation of the
crystals.
Artif . Wollastonite may be obtained artificially by heating a glass of the composition
CaSiOs to between 800 and 1000. At higher temperatures the pseudowollastonite modi-
fication is obtained.
Obs. Wollastonite is found especially in granular limestone, and in regions of granite,
as a contact formation; it is very rare in eruptive rocks. It is often associated with a lime
garnet, diopside, etc.
Occurs in Hungary in the copper mines of Cziklowa in the Banat; at Pargas in Finland;
at Harzburg in the Harz Mts., Germany; at Auerbach, Hesse, Germany, in granular lime-
stone; at Vesuvius, rarely in fine crystals; on the islands of Elba and Santorin.
In the United States, in N. Y., at Willsborough Diana, Lewis Co.; Bonaparte Lake,
;
Lewis Co. In Pa., Bucks Co., 3m. west of Attleboro; in Cal., at Crestmore. In Canada,
at Grenville; at St. Jerome and Morin, Quebec, with apatite.
Named after the English chemist, W. H. Wollaston (1766-1828).
Alamosite. Lead metasilicate, PbSiOs. Closely related to wollastonite in crystal
forms. Monoclinic. In radiating fibrous aggregates. Cleavage 6 (010). G. = 6'5. ||
H. = 4'5. Colorless or white. Refractive index about T96. Found near Alamos, Sonora,
Mexico.
PECTOLITE.
Moneclinic. Axes a b c = 1-1140 1 0-9864; ft = 84 40'.
: : : :
Commonly in close aggregations of acicular crystals; elongated ||

b axis,
but rarely terminated. Fibrous massive, radiated to stellate.
Cleavage: a (100) and c (001) perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 5.
G. = 2 '68-2 -78. Luster of the surface of fracture silky or subvitreous.
Color whitish or grayish. Subtranslucent to opaque. Optically +. Ax. pi.
and Bx a _L b (010); Bx nearly _L a (100). 2 V = 60. ft = 1-61.
Comp. HNaCa2(SiO 3 ) 3 or H O.Na2O.4CaO.6Si0 =
2 2 Silica 54-2, lime
33-8, soda 9 -3, water 27 = 100.
Pectolite is sometimes classed with the hydrous species allied to the zeolites.
- In the closed tube B.B. fuses at 2 to a white enamel. De-
Pyr., etc. yields water.
composed in part by hydrochloric acid with separation of silica as a jelly. Often gives out
light when broken in the dark.
Obs. A
secondary mineral, occurring like the zeolites mostly in basic eruptive rocks,
in cavities or seams; occasionally in metamorphic rocks. Found in Scotland near Edin-
burgh; at Kilsyth, Corstorphine Hill (walkerite); Island Skye. Also at Mt. Baldo and Mt.
Monzoni in the Tyrol; at Niederkirchen, Bavaria (osmelite).
Occurs also at Bergen Hill, Paterson and Great Notch, N. J.; Lehigh Co., Pa.; compact
at Isle Royale, Lake Superior; at Magnet Cove, Ark., in elseqlite-syenite (manganpectolite
with 4 p. c. MnO); compact, massive in Alaska, where used, like jade, for implements.
Schizolite.Like manganpectolite, HNa(Ca,Mn)2(SiOs)3, but triclinic. In prismatic
crystals. Two
cleavages. H. = 5-5 '5. G. = 3'0-3'1. Color light red to brown. From
the nepheline syenite of Julianehaab, southern Greenland.
Rosenbuschite. Near pectolite, but contains zirconium. Index, 1-65. From Norway.
In nephelite-syenite-porphyry, Red Hill, Moultonboro, N. H.
A zirconium-silicate and niobate of Ca, Na, etc. In prismatic, tabular

Wohlerite.
1700-1 726. Occurs in on several
crystals, yellow to brown. Indices, elseolite-syenite^
from Red Hill, N. H.
In syenite
islands of the Langesund fiord, near Brevik, in Norway.
A of Mn, Ca, containing Ta. etc.
also F, Ti,
Lavenite. complex zirconuim-silieate etc.,
In yellow to brown prismatic crystals. Index, 1750. Found

on the island Laven in the
in eheolite-syemte.
.Langesund fiord, southern Norway; also elsewhere
7. Triclinic Section
RHODONITE.
Triclinic. Axes a : b : c = 1*07285 : 1 :
0-6213; a = 103 18'; ]8
= 108
44'- y = 81 39'.
Crystals usually large and rough with

rounded edges. Commonly tabular
1|
c (001);sometimes resembling pyroxene in habit. Commonly massive,
cleavable to compact; also in_ embedded grains.
Cleavage: (110),m M
(110) perfect; c (001) less perfect. Fracture con-
choidal to uneven; very tough when compact. H. = 5-5-6-5. G. = 3-4-
3-68. Luster vitreous; on cleavage surfaces somewhat pearly. Color light
brownish red, flesh-red, rose-pink; sometimes greenish or yellowish, when
to
impure; often black outside from exposure. Streak white. Transparent
translucent. Optically .0
= 173. .
Manganese metasilicate, MnSiOa or MnO.SiO 2

= Silica 45-9,
Comp.
manganese protoxide 54-1 = 100. Iron, calcium (in bustamite), and occasion-
ally zinc (in 'fowlerite) replace part of the manganese.
823 824 825
Franklin Furnace, N. J.
db, 100 A 010 = 94 26'. mM, 110 A 110 = 92 28|'.

ac, 100 A 001 = 72 36*'. en, 001 A 221 = 73 52'.
be, 010 A 001 = 78 42i'. ck, 001 A 221 = 62 23'.
am, 100 A 110 = 48 33'. kn, 221 A 221 = 86 5'.
Pyr., etc. B.B. blackens and fuses with slight intumescence at 2'5; with the fluxes
gives reactions for manganese; fowlerite gives with soda on charcoal a reaction for zinc.
Slightly acted upon by acids. The calciferous varieties often effervesce from mechanical
admixture of calcium carbonate. In powder, partly dissolves in hydrochloric acid, and
the insoluble part becomes of a white color. Darkens on exposure to the air, and some-
times becomes nearly black.
Diff. Characterized by its pink color; distinct cleavages; hardness; fusibility and
manganese reactions B.B.
Obs. Occurs in Sweden at Langban, Wermland in iron-ore beds, in broad cleavage-
;
plates, and also granular massive, and at the Pajsberg iron mines near Filipstad (paisbergite)
sometimes in small brilliant crystals; in the district of Ekaterinburg in the Ural Mts., mas-
sive like marble, whence it is obtained for ornamental
purposes; with tetrahedrite at Kap-
nik and Rezbanya, Hungary; St.
Marcel, Piedmont, Italy; Mexico (bustamite, containing
CaO). In crystals from Broken Hill, New South Wales.
Occurs in Cummington, Mass.; on Osgood's farm, Blue Hill Bay, Me.; fowlerite (con-
SILICATES 485
taining ZnO) at Mine Hill, Franklin Furnace, and Sterling Hill, near Ogdensburgh, N. J.,
usually embedded in calcite and sometimes in fine crystals.
Named from podov, a rose, in allusion to the color.
Rhodonite is often altered chiefly by oxidation of the MnO (as in marceline, dyssnite);
also by hydration (stratopeite, neotocite, etc.); further by introduction of CO 2 (allagite,
photidte, etc.).
Use. used as an ornamental stone.
Rhodonite at times is
Pyroxmangite. A manganese-iron pyroxene. In cleavage masses. Indices,

triclinic,
175-1 -76. H. = 5-5-6. G. = 3'8. Color, amber to dark brown. Easily fusible to black
magnetic globule. Alters to skemmatite. Found near Iva, Anderson Co., South Carolina.
Babingtonite. (Ca,Fe,Mn)SiO 3 with Fe2 (SiO3)a. In small black triclinic crystals, near
rhodonite in angle (axes on p. 471). H. = 5'5-6. G. = 3'35-3'37. Index, 172. From
Arendal, Norway; at Herbornseelbach, Nassau, Germany; at Baveno, Italy. From Somer-
ville and Athol, Mass.; in the zeolite deposits of Passaic Co., N. J.
Hiortdahlite. Essentially (Na2,Ca) (Si,Zr)Oa, with also fluorine. In pale yellow tab-
ular crystals (triclinic). Index, 1'695. Occurs sparingly on an island in the Langesund
fiord, southern Norway.
Sobralite. A triclinic pyroxene. Optically Colorless. +
From eulysite rock at
.
Sodermanland, Sweden.
3. Amphibole Group
Orthorhombic, Monoclinic, Triclinic
Composition for the most part that of a metasilicate, RSi0 3 with = ,
R
Ca,Mg,Fe chiefly, also Mn,Na2 ,K2 ,H 2 Further often containing aluminium
.
and ferric iron, in part with alkalies as NaAl(Si0 3 ) 2 or NaFe(SiO 3 )2; perhaps
ii in
also containing RR SiOe. 2
a :b
Anthophyllite (Mg,Fe)SiO 3 0-5138 : 1
GEDRITE (Mg,Fe)Si0 3 with (Mg,Fe)Al2 Si0 6
a : b : c /3
Amphibole . 0-5511 : 1 : 0-2938 73 58'
I. NONALUMINOUS VARIETIES.
1. TREMOLITE CaMg 3 (SiO 3 ) 4
2. ACTINOLITE Ca(Mg,Fe) 3 (SiO3 ) 4
Nephrite, Asbestus, Smaragdite, etc.
Cummingtonite (Fe,Mg)SiO 3
Dannemorite (Fe,Mn,Mg)SiO 3
Grtinerite FeSiO 3
3. RICHTERITE (K2 ,Na2Mg,Ca,Mn) 4 (SiO 3 )4
II. ALUMINOUS VARIETIES-

4. HORNBLENDE
Edenite
Chiefly Ca(Mg,Fe) 3 (SiO 3 ) 4 with
Pargasite and Na2 Al2 (SiO 3 ) 4 and (Mg,Fe) 2 (Al,Fe) 4 Si 2 Oi 2
Common Hornblende
Glaucophane NaAl(Si0 3 ) 2 .(Fe,Mg)Si0 3

a : b : c /3
Riebeckite 2NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .FeSiO 3 0'5475 1 0'2925 = 76

: : 10'
Crocidolite NaFe(Si0 3 ) 2 .FeSi0 3
Arfvedsonite Na8 (Ca,Mg) 3 (Fe,Mn) 14 (Al,Fe) 2 Si21 045
0-5509 : 1 : 0*2378 = 73 2'
7. Triclinic Section
Ênigmatite.
The only species included under the triclinic section is the rare and im-
perfectly known aenigmatite (cossyrite).
The AMPHIBOLE GROUP embraces a number of species which, while falling
in different systems, are yet closely related in form as shown in the common
prismatic cleavage of 54 to 56
-
also in optical characters and chemical com-
position. As already noted (see p. 471), the species of this group form chem-
ically a series parallel to that of the closely allied Pyroxene Group, and between
them there is a close relationship in crystalline form and other characters.
The Amphibole Group, however, is less fully developed, including fewer
species, and those known show less variety in form.
Thechief distinctions between pyroxene and amphibole proper are the following:
Prismatic angle with pyroxene 87 and 93; with amphibole 56 and 124; the prismatic
cleavage being much more distinct in the latter.
With pyroxene, crystals usually short prismatic and often complex, structure of massive
kinds mostly lamellar or granular; with amphibole, crystals chiefly long prismatic and
simple, columnar and fibrous massive kinds the rule.
The specific gravity of most of the pyroxene varieties is higher than of the like varieties
of amphibole. In composition of corresponding kinds, magnesium is present in larger
amount in amphibole (Ca :
= 1 1 in diopside, = 1 3 in tremolite) alkalies more
Mg : :
;
frequently play a prominent part in amphibole.
The optical relations of the prominent members of the group, as regards

the position of the ether-axes, is exhibited by the following figures (Cross) ;
compare Fig. 797, p. 472, for a similar representation for the corresponding
members of the pyroxene group.
I. II.
Anthophyllite. Glaucophane. III. Tremolite, etc. IV. Hornblende.
V. Arfvedsonite. VI. Riebeckite.
ANTHOPHYLLITE.
Orthorhombic. Axial ratio a b = 0*5137 1. Crystals rare, habit pris-
: :
matic (mm"' 110 A 110 = 54 23).

Commonly lamellar, or fibrous massive;
fibres often very slender; in
aggregations of prisms.
SILICATES 487
Cleavage: prismatic, perfect; b (010) less so; a (100) sometimes distinct.

H. = 5 -5-6. G. = 3 1-3 -2. Luster vitreous, somewhat pearly on the
cleavage face. Color brownish gray, yellowish brown, clove-brown, brownish
green, emerald-green, sometimes metalloidal. Streak uncolored or grayish.
Transparent to subtranslucent. Sometimes pleochroic Usually optically
+ also
; +
for red, for yellow, green. Ax. pi. always b (010). Bxa ||
usually J_ c (001) also _L c (001) for red, J_ a (100) for yellow, green.
;
2 V =
84. a = 1-633. = 1'642. 7 = 1-657.
Comp. (Mg,Fe)SiO 3 corresponding to enstatite-bronzite-hypersthene
,
in the pyroxene group. Aluminium is sometimes present in considerable

amount. There is the same relation in optical character between anthophyl-
lite (+) and gedrite ( ) as between enstatite and hypersthene (cf. Figs. 799
803, p. 472).
Var. ANTHOPHYLLITE, Mg : Fe = 4 :
1, 3 :
1, etc. For 3 :
1, the percentage compo-
sition is: Silica 55*6, iron protoxide 16'6, magnesia 27 '8 = 100. Anthophyllite sometimes
occurs in forms resembling asbestus.
Aluminous, GEDRITE. Iron is present in larger amount, and also aluminium; it hence
corresponds nearly to a hypersthene, some varieties of which are highly aluminous.
Ferroanthophyllite is a name given to an iron anthophyllite from Idaho and elsewhere.
Hydrous anthophyllites have been repeatedly described, but in most cases they have been
shown to be hydrated monoclinic amphiboles.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses with difficulty to a black magnetic enamel; with the fluxes gives
reactions for iron; unacted upon by acids.
Micro. In sections colorless, non-pleochroic. Parallel extinction. Commonly fibrous.
Artif Anthophyllite is formed artificially when magnesium metasilicate is heated
.
considerably above its melting point and then quickly cooled.

Obs. Anthophyllite occurs in mica schist near Kongsberg in Norway: at Hermann-
schlag, Moravia. In the United States, at the Jenks corundum mine, Franklin, Macon Co.,
N. C.; from Rockport, Mass. A colorless or pale red variety from Edwards, N. Y., has
been called valleite. The original gedrite is from the valley of Heas, near Gedres, France.
Named from anthophyllum, clove, in allusion to the clove-brown color.
AMPHIBOLE. Hornblende.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 0*5511 :
0-2938; = 73 58'.
mm 110 A 110 = 55 49'. rr',Oil A Oil = 31 32'.
ca, 001 A 100 = 73 58'. ii, 031 A 031 = 80 32'.
cp, 001 A 101 = 31 0'. pr, 101 A Oil = 34 25'.
Twins: (1) tw. pi. a (100), common as contact-twins; rarely polysyn-

827 829 830 831
thetic. (2) c (001), as tw. lamellae, occasionally producing a parting analogous

to that more common with pyroxene (Fig. 461, p. 173). Crystals commonly
prismatic; usually terminated by

the low clinodome, r (Oil), sometimes by
r and p (101) equally developed and then suggesting rhombohedral forms (as
of tourmaline). Also columnar or fibrous, coarse or fine, fibres often like flax;
rarely lamellar; also granular massive, coarse
or fine, and usually strongly
coherent, but sometimes friable.
Cleavage: m
(110) highly perfect; a (100), b (010) sometimes distinct.
Fracture subconchoidal, uneven. Brittle. H. = 5-6. G. = 2-9-3-4, vary-
ing with the composition. Luster vitreous to pearly on cleavage faces fibrous ;
varieties often silky. Color between black and white, through various shades
of green, inclining to blackish green; also dark brown; rarely yellow, pink,
rose-red. Streak uncolored, or paler than color. Sometimes nearly trans-
parent; usually subtranslucent to opaque.
Pleochroism strongly marked in all the deeply colored varieties, as described
beyond. Absorption usually Z > Y > X. Optically rarely -f ,
Ax. pi. .
||
b (010). Extinction-angle on b (010), or Z A c axis
= +
15 to 18 in most
cases, but varying from about 1 up to 37; hence also Bxa A c axis
= 75
to 72, etc. See Fig. 832. Dispersion p < v. Axial angles variable; see
beyond.
Optical characters, particularly indices of refraction, birefringence and extinction angles
vary with change in composition, particularly with the total amount of iron present. In
general the indices and extinction angles increase with increase of iron content while the
birefringence decreases.
Comp. In 'part a normal metasilicate of calcium and magnesium,

RSi0 3 usually with iron, also manganese, and thus in general analogous to the
,
pyroxenes. The alkali metals, sodium and potassium, also present, and more
commonly so than with pyroxene. In part also aluminous, corresponding to
the aluminous pyroxenes. Titanium sometimes is present and also rarely
fluorine in small amount.
The aluminium is in part present as NaAl(SiO 3 ) 2 but many amphiboles containing
,
aluminium or ferric iron are more basic than a normal metasilicate; they may sometimes be
n m
explained as containing R(Al,Fe) 2 SiO 6 but the exact nature of the compound is often
,
doubtful. The amphibole formulas are in many cases double the corresponding ones for
832 833
pyroxene Thus, for most tremolite and actinolite, Ca

kte is CaMgaSuOw, while
:
Mg(Fe) = 1 3, and hence tremo-
diopside is CaMgSi 2 6 etc.
,
SILICATES 489
Rammelsberg has shown that the composition of most aluminous amphiboles may be
expressed in the general form mRSiO3.nAl 2 O 3 while Scharizer, modifying this view, pro-
;
poses to regard the amphiboles as molecular compounds of Ca(Mg,Fe) 3 Si4Oi2 (actinolite),

i ii in
and the orthosilicate (R2,R) 3 R2Si 3 Oi2, for which he uses Breithaupt's name syntagmatite,
originally given to the Vesuvian hornblende.
Penfield concludes that (1) amphibole is a metasilicate, (2) that fluorine and hydroxyl
are isomorphous with the protoxides and (3) that the presence of sesquioxides is explained
by their introduction into the molecule in the form of various bivalent radicals.
The crystallographic position here adopted is that suggested by Tschermak, which best
exhibits the relation between amphibole and_pyroxeme. Some authors retain the former
position, according to which p
= (001), r = (111), etc. Fig. 833 shows the corresponding
optical orientation.
I. Containing little or no Aluminium

1. TEEMOLITE. Grammatite, nephrite in part. Calcium-magnesium
amphibole. Formula CaMg3 (SiO 4 ) 3 = Silica 577, magnesia 28*9, lime 13'4 =
100. Ferrous iron, replacing the magnesium, present only sparingly, up to
3 p. c. Colors white to dark gray. In distinct crystals, either long-bladed or
short and stout.. In aggregates long and thin columnar, or fibrous; also com-
pact granular massive (nephrite, below). G. = 2'9-3'l. Sometimes trans-
parent and colorless. Optically Extinction-angle on b (010), or Z A
.
c axis = +16 to 18, hence Bxa A c axis = - 74 to - 72. 2V = 80 to

88. a = 1-609. (3 = 1-623. 7 = 1'635.
Tremolite was named by Pini from the Tremola valley on the south side of the St.
Gothard.
Winchite is the name given to a blue amphibole near tremolite from the manganese mines
of Central India.
2. ACTINOLITE. Calcium-magnesium-iron amphibole. Formula Ca(Mg,Fe) 3

(Si0 3 ) 4.Color bright green and grayish green. In crystals, either shortx-
or long-bladed, as in tremolite; columnar or fibrous; granular massive.
G. = 3-3 '2. Sometimes transparent. The variety in long bright-green
crystals is called glassy actinolite; the crystals break easily across the prism.
The fibrous and radiated kinds are often called asbestiform actinolite and
radiated actinolite. Actinolite owes its green color to the ferrous iron present.
Pleochroism distinct, increasing as the amount of iron increases, and hence
the color becomes darker; Z emerald-green, Y yellow-green, greenish yellow. X
Absorption Z > Y> X, Zillertal. Optically .
Extinction-angle on b (010),
Z A c axis = + 15 and Bxa A c axis = - 75. 2V = 78; p < v, a =
1-611. (3
= 1-627. 7 = 1-636.
Named atfinolite from a/cris, a ray, and XZ0os, stone, a translation of the German
Strahlslein or radiated stone. Name changed to actinote by Haiiy, without reason.
NEPHRITE. Jade in part. A
tough, compact, fine-grained tremolite (or actinolite).
breaking with a splintery fracture and glistening luster. H. = (M5'5. G. = 2'96-3'l.
Named from a supposed efficacy in diseases of the kidney, from >e</>p6s, kidney. It varies
in color from white (tremolite) to dark green (actinolite), in the latter, iron protoxide being
present up to 6 or 7 p. c. The latter kind sometimes encloses distinct prismatic crystals of
actinolite. A
derivation from an original pyroxenic mineral has been suggested in some
cases. Nephrite or jade was brought in the form of carved ornaments from Mexico or Peru
soon after the discovery of America. A
similar stone comes from Eastern Asia, New Zea-
land and Alaska. See jadeite, p. 481; jade, p. 482.
Szechenyiite is an amphibole occurring with jadeite from Central Asia.
ASBESTUS. Asbestos. Tremolite, actinolite, and other varieties of amphibole, except-
ing those containing much alumina, pass into fibrous varieties, the fibers of which are some-
times very long, fijie, flexible, and easily separable by the fingers, and look like flax. These
kinds are called asbestus (from the Greek for incombustible) The colors vary from white to
.
490 DESCRIPTIVE MINEEALOGY
is applied usually to the finer and more silky

green and wood-brown. The name amianthus
kinds. Much that is popularly called asbestus is chrysotile, or fibrous serpentine, containing
12 to 14 p. c. of water. Byssolite is a stiff fibrous variety.
Mountain leather is in thin flexible sheets, made of interlaced fibers; and mountain cork
the same in thicker pieces; both are so light as to ftoat on water, and they are often hydrous,
color white to gray or yellowish. Mountain wood is compact fibrous, and gray to brown in
color, looking a little like dry wood.
SMARAGDITE. A thin-foliated variety of amphibole, near actinolite in composition but
carrying some alumina. It has a light grass-green color, resembling
much common green
diallage. In many cases derived from pyroxene (diallage) by uralitization, see below. It
retains much of the structure of the diallage and also often encloses remnants of the original
mineral. It forms, along with whitish or greenish saussurite, a rock called saussurite-
gabbro, the euphotide of the Alps. The original mineral is from Corsica, and the rock is
the verde di Corsica duro of the arts.
URALITE. Pyroxene altered to amphibole. The crystals, when distinct, retain the
form of the original mineral, but have the cleavage of amphibole. The change usually
commences on the surface, transforming the outer layer into an aggregation of slender
amphibole prisms, parallel in position to each other and to the parent pyroxene (cf Fig. .
803, p. 473). When the change is complete the entire crystal is made up of a bundle of
amphibole needles or fibers. The color varies from white (tremolite) to pale or deep green,
the latter the more common. In composition uralite appears to conform nearly to actinolite,
as also in optical characters. The most prominent change in composition in passing from
the original pyroxene is that corresponding to the difference existing between the two species
in general, that is, an increase in the magnesium and decrease in calcium. The change,
therefore, is not strictly a case of paramorphism, although usually so designated. Uralite
was originally described by Rose in a rock from the Ural Mts. It has since been observed
from many localities. The microscopic study of rocks has shown the process of "uralitiza-
tion" to be very common, and some authors' regard many hornblendic rocks and schists to
represent altered pyroxenic rocks on a large scale.
CUMMINGTONITE. Amphibole-Anthophyllite. Iron-Magnesium Amphibole. Here be-
long certain varieties of amphibole resembling anthophyllite and essentially identical with
it in composition, but optically monoclinic. From Kongsberg, Norway; Greenland. The
original cummingtonite is gray to brown in color; usually fibrous or fibre-lamellar, often
radiated. G. = 3'l-3'32; from Cummington, Mass.
DANNEMORITE. Iron-Manganese Amphibole. Color yellowish brown to greenish gray.
Columnar or fibrous, like tremolite and asbestus. Contains iron and manganese. From
Sweden. Juddite is a manganese amphibole found at Kacharwahi, India.
GRUNERITE. Iron-Amphibole. Asbestiform or lamellar-fibrous. Luster silky; color
brown; G. = 3713. Formula FeSiO 3 .
3. RICHTERITE. Sodium-Magnesium-Manganese Amphibole. (K 2 ,Na 2 ,M2;,

Ca,Mn) 4 (Si03 ) 4 .
In elongated crystals, seldom terminated. G. = 3 '09. Color

brown, yellow, rose-red.
Transparent to^ranslucent. Z A c axis = + 17-20; /3 = 1-63; 7 - a = 0'024. From
Pajsberg and Langban, Sweden. Characterized by the presence of manganese and alkalies
in relatively large amount.
Imerinite is a soda-amphibole, related to soda-richterite from the
province Imerina,
Madagascar.
Breislakite occurs in wool-like forms at Vesuvius and
Capo di Bove, Italy. Color dark
brown to black, pleochroism strongly marked. Inferred to
belong near richterite.
II. Aluminous.
4. ALUMINOUS AMPHIBOLE. Hornblende. Contains alumina or ferric
iron, and usually both, with ferrous iron (sometimes
manganese), magnesium,
calcium, and alkalies. The kinds here included range from the light-colored
edemte containing but little iron,
through the light to dark green pargasite,
to the dark-colored or black
hornblende, the color growing darker with increase
in amount of iron.
Extinction-angle variable, from to see below.
37,
Pleochroism strong. Absorption usually Z < Y < X.
EDENTTE. Aluminous Magnesium-Calcium
Amphibole. Color white to gray and pale
SILICATES 491
green, and alsocolorless; G. =3'0-3'059. Resembles anthophyllite and tremolite.

Named from the locality at Edenville, N. Y. To this variety belong various pale-colored
amphiboles, having less than 5 p. c. of iron oxides.
Koksharovite is a variety from the neighborhood of Lake Baikal, Siberia, named after the
Russian mineralogist, von Koksharov.
Soretite is an aluminous amphibole from the anorthite-diorite rocks of Koswinsky in the
northern Ural Mts.
COMMON HORNBLENDE, PARGASITE. Colors bright or dark green, and bluish green to
grayish black and black. G. = 3'05-3'47. Pargasite is usually made to include green and
bluish green kinds, occurring in stout lustrous crystals, or granular; and Common horn-
blende the greenish black and black kinds, whether in stout crystals or long-bladed, colum-
nar, fibrous, or massive granular. But no line can be drawn between them. The extinction-
angle on 6 (010), or Z A c axis = + 15 to 25 chiefly. Absorption Z > Y > X.
Pargasite occurs at Pargas, Finland, in bluish green and grayish black crystals. Z A c
axis = + 18; = 1'64; y
- a = 0'019; 2V
= 59. Pleochroism: Z greenish blue; Y
emerald-green; X greenish yellow.
The dark brown to black hornblendes from basaltic and other igneous rocks vary some-
what widely in optical characters. The angle Z A c axis = to +
10 chiefly; = 1725;
y a = 0'072 (maximum). Pleochroism: Z brown, Y yellow, X
yellow-green, but
variable.
Speziaite, from Traversella, Italy, is an iron amphibole with strong pleochroism; = X
green, Y = yellow-brown, Z
= azure-blue, Z A c axis = 23.
The Kataforite of Norway (Brogger) has Z A c axis = 30 to 60; absorption Y Z > X;
>
pleochroism: Z yellow, Z violet, X yellow-brown; it approximates toward arfvedsonite
(p. 494).
Kupfferite, from a graphite mine in the Tunkinsk Mts., near Lake Baikal, Siberia, is a
deep green amphibole (aluminous) formerly referred to anthophyllite.
Syntagmatite is the black hornblende of Vesuvius.
Bergamaskite is an iron-amphibole containing almost no magnesia. From Monte Altino,
Province of Bergamo, Italy.
Kaersutite is a titaniferpus amphibole from Kaersut, Umanaks fiord, North Greenland.
Hastingsite is an amphibole low in silica and high in iron and soda, from the nephelite-
syenite of Dungannon, Hastings Co., Ontario.
Philipstadite from Philipstad, Sweden, is an iron-magnesium amphibole showing unusual
pleochroism.
Pyr. Essentially the same as for the corresponding varieties of pyroxene, see p. 478.
Diff. Distinguished from pyroxene (and tourmaline) by its distinct prismatic cleav-
age, yielding angles of 56 and 124. Fibrous and columnar forms are much more common
than with pyroxene, lamellar and foliated forms rare
(see also pp. 478, 486). Crystals often long, slender,
or bladed. Differs from the fibrous zeolites in not
gelatinizing with acids. Epidote has a peculiar green
color, is more fusible, and shows a different cleavage.
Micro. In rock sections amphibole generally
shows distinct colors, green, sometimes olive or brown,
and is strongly pleochroic. Also recognized by its
high relief; generally rather high interference-colors;
by the very perfect system of cleavage-cracks crossing
at angles of 56 and 124 in sections _L c axis (Fig.
834). In sections b (010) (recognized by yielding no axial figure in convergent light, by
||
showing the highest interference-colors, and by having parallel cleavage-cracks, ||

c axis),
the extinction-direction for common hornblendes makes a small angle (12-15) with the
cleavage-cracks (i.e., with c axis); further, this direction is positive Z (different from com-
mon pyroxene and aegirite, cf. Figs. 813 and 818).
Artif .
Experiments on the artificial production of the amphiboles have shown that
in general they are unstable at high temperatures and that their formation in igneous rocks
is due either to the rapid cooling of the magma, to the presence of water or to some unusual
conditions of pressure, etc. In general when the amphiboles are fused they are transformed
into the corresponding pyroxenes.
Obs. Amphibole occurs only sparingly in volcanic rocks but is found in many crys-
talline limestones, and granitic and schistose rocks. Tremolite, the magnesia-lime vari-
ety, is especially common in limestones, particularly magnesian or dolomitic; actinolite (also
nephrite), the magnesia-lime-iron variety, in the crystal line schists, in steatitic rocks and
with serpentine; and dark green and black hornblende, occurs in both igneous and meta-
diorites and some varieties of peridotite, in

morphic rocks. It is found in granites, syenites,
gneisses and the hornblende schists.
Hornblende-rock, or amphibolite, consists of massive hornblende ot
a dark greenish black
or black color, and has a granular texture. Occasionally the green hornblende, or actino-
as at St. Francis, in Canada. Hornblende-schist has the same
lite, occurs in rock-masses,
in structure. It often contains a little
composition as amphibolite, but is schistose or slaty
feldspar. In some varieties of it the hornblende is in part in minute needles. Granite and
diorite it is a common constituent.
syenite often contain hornblende, and with
This is
also true of the corresponding forms of gneiss. In these cases it is usually present in small,
irregular masses, often fibrous in structure; also
as rough bladed crystals.
Prominent foreign localities of amphibole are the following: Tremolite (grammatite)
in dolomite at Campolongo, Switzerland; also at Orawitza, Rezbanya, Hungary; Gulsjo,
Wermland, Sweden. Actinolite in the crystalline schists of the Central and Eastern Alps,
especially at Greiner in the Zillertal, Tyrol; at Zoblitz in Saxony; Arendal, Norway.
Asbestus at Sterzing, Zillertal, and elsewhere in Tyrol; in Savoie, France; also in the island
of Corsica. Pargasite at Pargas, Finland; Saualpe in Carinthia. Hornblende at Arendal,
Kongsberg and Kargero, Norway; in Sweden and Finland; at Vesuvius; Aussig and Tep-
"
litz, Bohemia; etc. Nephrite, which in the form of jade" ornaments and utensils is widely
distributed among the relics of early man (see jade, p. 482), is obtained at various points in
Central Asia. The most important source is that in the Karakash valley in the Kuen Lun
Mts., on the southern borders of Turkestan; also other localities in Central Asia. In New
Zealand. Nephrite has been found in Europe as a rolled mass at Schwemmsal near Leipzig;
in Swiss Lake habitations and similarly elsewhere.
In the United States, in Me., black crystals- occur at Thomaston; pargasite at Phipps-
burg. In Ver., actinolite in the steatite quarries of Windham and New Fane. In Mass.,
tremolite at Lee; black crystals at Chester; asbestus at Pelham; cummingtonite at Cum-
mington. In Conn., in large flattened white crystals and in bladed and fibrous forms
(tremolite) in dolomite, at Canaan. In N. Y., Warwick, Orange Co.; near Eden ville; near
Amity; at the Stirling mines, Orange Co.; in short green crystals at Gouverneur, St.
Lawrence Co.; with pyroxene at Russell; a black variety at Pierrepont; at Macomb; Pit-
cairn; tremolite at Fine; in Rossie, 2 miles north of Oxbow; in large white crystals at
Diana, Lewis Co.; asbestus near Greenwood Furnace. Hudsonite from Cornwall, N. Y.,
formerly classed as a pyroxene has been shown to be an amphibole. In N. J., tremolite or
gray amphibole in good crystals at Bryam, and other varieties of the species at Franklin and
Newton, radiated actinolite. In Pa., actinolite at Mineral Hill, in Delaware Co. at Union-
;
vllle; at Kennett, Chester Co. In Md., actinolite and asbestus at the Bare Hills in serpen-
tine; asbestus is mined at Pylesville, Harford Co. In Va., actinolite at Willis's Mt., in
Buckingham Co.; asbestus at Barnet's Mills, Fauquier Co. Nephrite occurs in Alaska.
In Canada, tremolite is abundant in the Laurentian limestones, at Calumet Falls, Litch-
field, Pontiac Co., Quebec; also at Blythfield, Renfrew Co., and Dalhousie, Lanark Co.
Black hornblende at various localities in Quebec and Ontario with pyroxene, apatite,
titanite, etc., as in Renfrew Co. Asbestus and mountain cork at Buckingham, Ottawa Co.,
Quebec; a bed of actinolite at St. Francis, Beauce Co., Quebec; nephrite has been found
in British Columbia and Northwest Territory.
GLAUCOPHANE.
Mpnoclinic; near amphibole in form. Crystals prismatic in habit, usually
indistinct commonly massive, fibrous, or columnar to granular.
;
Cleavage: m (110) perfect. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle.

L = 6-6-5. G. = 3-103-3-113. Luster vitreous to pearly. Color azure-blue,
lavender-blue, bluish black, grayish. Streak grayish blue. Translucent.
Plepchroism strongly marked Z sky-blue to ultramarine-blue, Y reddish or
:
bluish violet, X
yellowish green to colorless. Absorption Z > Y > X. Opti-
cally + Ax. pi. 6 (010)
.
1
Z A c axis = 4 to 6, rarely higher values. 2V =
1
.
45. a = 1-621. 18
= 1-638. T = 1-638.
Comp. Essentially If Fe = 2 1, the
NaAl(SiO) s .(Fe,Mg)SiQ,. Mg : :
formula requires: Silica 57'6, alumina

16'3, iron protoxide 77, magnesia 8-5,
soda 9-9 = 100.
Obs. Occurs as the hornblendic constituent of certain
crystalline schists, called
icophane-schuts, or glaucophanite; also more or less prominent in mica
schists, am-
SILICATES 493
eclogites, etc. It is often associated with mica,

phibolites, gneiss, garnet, diallage and
omphacite, epidote and zoisite, etc. First described from the island of Syra, one of the
Cyclades; since shown to be rather widely distributed, as on the southern slope of the Alps
(gastaldite) Corsica, Japan, etc.
,
Rhodusite is a fibrous variety from the Island Rhodus
and Asskys river, Minassinsk, Siberia. Holmquistite is a lithium-bearing variety from the
Island of Uto.
In the United States, glaucophane schists have been described from the Coast Ranges
of California, as at Sulphur Bank, Lake Co.
Glaucophane is named from
yXavKos, bluish green, and âtj/eo-tfm, to appear.
Crossite. An amphiboleintermediate in composition between glaucophane and
riebeckite, being optically more nearly related to the latter. Occurs in lath shaped crystals.
Color blue. Strongly pleochroic. Found in the crystalline schists of the Coast Ranges of
California.
RIEBECKITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = = 76 10'. In em-
: 1 :
0-2925;
0;5475
bedded prismatic crystals, longitudinally striated.
Cleavage prismatic (56) :
perfect. Luster vitreous. Color black. Pleochroism very strongly marked :
X
Z green, Y ( = b axis) deep blue, (nearly c axis) dark blue. Optically .
XA
1 1
Extinction-angle small, c axis = 4-5 (=b?). Axial angle large. =

1-687.
in
Comp. Essentially 2NaFe(Si0 3 ) 2 .FeSiO 3 = Silica 50-5, iron sesqui-

oxide 26-9, iron protoxide 12-1, soda 10*5 = 100. It corresponds closely to
acmite (segirite) among the pyroxenes.
Obs. Originally described from the granite and syenite of the island of Socotra in the
Indian Ocean, 120 m. N. E. of Cape Guardafui. the eastern extremity of Africa; occurs in
groups of prismatic crystals, often radiating and closely resembling tourmaline; also in
granophyre blocks found at Ailsa Crag and at other points in Scotland and Ireland. A simi-
lar amphihqle occurs at Mynydd Mawr, Carnarvonshire, Wales. Also another in granu-
lite in Corsica. Found at Narsarsuk. Greenland. From pegmatite at Quincy, Mass. A
so-called arfvedsonite from St. Peter's Dome, Pike's Peak region, Col., occurring with astro-
phyllite and zircon, is shown by Lacroix to be near riebeckite. Extinction-angle on 6,
X A c axis = 3 to 4. A soda amphibole, related to riebeckite, from Bababudan Hills,
Mysore, India, has been named bababudanite.
CROCIDOLITE. Blue Asbestus.
Fibrous, asbestus-like fibers long but delicate, and easily separable.

; Also
massive or earthy. Cleavage: prismatic, 56. H. = 4. G. = 3-20-3-30.
Luster silky; dull. Color and streak lavender-blue or leek-green. Opaque.
Fibers somewhat elastic. Pleochroism: Z green, Y violet, blue. Optically X
+ .
Extinction-angle on b (010) inclined 18 to 20 with c axis. 2E = 95
approx. 7 a = 0'025.
in
Comp. NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .FeSiO 3
(nearly) Silica 49-6, iron sesquioxide =
22-0, iron protoxide 19'8, soda 8'6
= 100.
Magnesium and calcium replace part of the ferrous iron, and hydrogen part of the
sodium.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses easily with intumescence to a black magnetic glass, coloring the
flame yellow (soda). With the fluxes gives reactions for iron. Unacted upon by acids.
Obs. Occurs in South Africa, in Griqualand-West, north of the Orange river, in a
range of quartzose schists called the Asbestos Mountains. In a micaceous porphyry near
Framont, in the Vosges Mts. At Golling in Salzburg, Austria. In the United States, at
Beacon Pole Hill, near Cumberland, R. I. Emerald Mine, Buckingham, and Perkin's Mill,
Templeton, Ottawa Co., Ontario, Canada.
Abriachanite is an earthy amorphous form occurring in the Abriachan district, near
Loch Ness, Scotland. Crocidolite is named from KOOK'IS, woof, in allusion to its fibrous
structure.
The South African mineral is largely altered by both oxidation of the iron and infiltra-
fibrous structure, chatoyant
tion of silica, resulting in a compact siliceous stone of delicate
luster, and bright yellow to brown color, popularly
called tiger-eye (also cat's-eye). Many
varieties occur forming transitions from the original blue mineral
to the final product; also
varieties depending upon the extent to which the original mineral
has penetrated the quartz.
ARFVEDSONITE.
Monoclinic. b c = 0-5569
Axes a : : 1 0*2978;
:
= 73 2'.
:
Crystals long prisms, often tabular ||

b (010), but seldom distinctly termi-
in prismatic aggregates. Twins:
nated; angles near those of amphibole; also
tw. pi. a (100).
Cleavage: prismatic, perfect; b (010) less perfect.
Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. 6. =G. = 3 -44-3 -45 Luster vitreous. Color pure black; in
thin scales deep green. Streak deep bluish gray. Opaque except in thin
splinters. Pleochroism strongly marked: Z deep greenish blue, lavender, Y
X pale greenish yellow. Absorption Z > Y > X; sections || a (100) are deep
-
greenish blue, ||
b (010) olive-green. Optically Axial angle, large, a =
.
1'687. = 1707. 7 = 1708. Extinction-angle on b (010), with c axis

= 14.
Comp. A slightly basic metasilicate of sodium, calcium, and ferrous
iron chiefly.
The supposed arfvedsonite from Greenland has been shown to be segirite; that from
Pike's Peak, Col., has been referred to riebeckite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 2 with intumescence to a black magnetic globule; colors the
flame" yellow (soda) ; with the fluxes gives reactions for iron and manganese. Not acted
upon by acids.
Micro. In thin sections shows brown- or gray-green or gray- violet colors; strongly
pleochroic in blue and green tints; negative elongation?
Obs. Arfvedsonite and amphiboles of similar character, containing much iron and
soda, are constituents of certain igneous rocks which are rich in alkalies, as nephelite-syenite,
certain porphyries, etc. Large and distinct crystals are found only in the pegmatite veins
in such rocks, as at Kangerdluarsuk, Narsarsuk, Greenland, where the associated minerals
are sodalite, eudialyte, feldspar, etc. Arfvedsonite occurs also in the nephelite-syenites and
related rocks of the Christiania region in southern Norway; on the Kola peninsula in
Russian Lapland; Dungannon township, Ontario; Trans Pecos district, Texas. The re-
lated brownish pleochroic amphiboles(cf. barkevikite) occur in similar rocks at Montreal,
Canada; Red Hill, N. H.; Salem, Mass.; Magnet Cove, Ark.; Black Hills, S. D.; Square
Butte, Mon. St. Peter's Dome, Col., etc.
Osannite from an amphibole-gneiss at Cevadaes, Portugal, and Tschernichewite from a
magnetite bearing quartzite in the northern Ural Mts., are near arfvedsonite.
BARKEVIKITE. An amphibole near arfvedsonite but more basic. In prismatic crys-
tals. Cleavage: prismatic (55 44f')- G. = 3*428. Color deep velvet-black. Pleochro-
ism marked, colors brownish. Extinction-angle with c axis on b (010) = 12|. Occurs at
the wohlerite locality near Barkevik, on the Langesund fiord, and elsewhere in southern
Norway. In large crystals at Lugar, Ayrshire, Scotland.
JEnigmatite. Cossyrite. Essentially a titano-silicate of ferrous iron and sodium, but

containing also aluminium and ferric iron. In prismatic triclinic crystals. Cleavage:
prismatic, distinct (66). G. = 3 74-3 "80. Color black, ^nigmatite is from the sodalite-
syemte of Tunugdliarfik and Kangerdluarsuk, Greenland. Cossyrite occurs in minute
crystals embedded in the liparite lavas of the island Pantellaria (ancient name Cossyra) ;
also widespread in the rocks of East Africa. Rhonite is like senigmatite but contains much
less ferrous oxide and alkalies with increase in
alumina, ferric oxide, etc. From basaltic
rocks in the Rhon district and elsewhere in
Germany and Bohemia.
'
WEINBERGERITE. Perhaps NaAlSiO 4 .3FeSiO 3 Orthorhombic. In spherical aggregates

.
of radiating fibers. Black color. From a meteoric iron at Codai Canal, Palni Hills,
Madras, India.
SILICATES 495
BERYL.
Hexagonal. Axis c =
0*4989.
Crystals usually long prismatic, often striated vertically, rarely trans-
versely; distinct terminations exceptional. Occasionally in large masses,
coarse columnar or granular to compact.
Cleavage: c (0001), imperfect and indistinct. Fracture conchoidal to
uneven. Brittle. H. = 7*5-8. G. = 2-63-2-80; usually 2-69-2-70. Lus-
ter vitreous, sometimes resinous. Colors emerald-green, pale green, passing
into light blue, yellow and white; also pale rose-red. Streak white. Trans-
parent to subtranslucent. Dichroism more or less distinct. Optically .
Birefringence low. Often abnormally biaxial, co = 1-5820, e = 1-5765,

aquamarine.
835 836 837
m
Transparent beryls are found in Siberia, India and Brazil.

In Siberia they occur at
Mursinka and Shaitanka, near Ekaterinburg; near Miask with topaz; in the mountains of
Adun-Chalon with topaz, in E. Siberia. A clear aquamarine crystal weighing 110'5 kg.
was found at Marambaya, Minas Geraes, Brazil. Beautiful crystals also occur at Elba;
the tin mines of Ehrenfriedersdorf in Saxony, and Schlackenwald in Bohemia. Other local-
ities are the Mts., Ireland; yellowish green at Rubislaw, near Aberdeen, Scotland
Mourne
(davidsonite); Limoges in France; Finbo and Broddbo in Sweden; Tamela in Finland;
in Bavaria; in New South Wales.
Pfitsch-Joch, Tyrol; Bodenmais and Rabenstein Pink,
alkali-rich beryls are found in Madagascar.
In the United States, beryls of gigantic dimensions have been found in N. H., at Acworth
and Grafton, and in Mass., at Royalston. In Me., at Albany; Norway; Bethel; at
Hebron, a ca3sium beryl (Cs 2 O, 3*60 p. c.), associated with pollucite; in Paris, with black
tourmaline; at Topsham, pale green or yellowish; at Stowe and Stoneham. In Mass., at
Barre; at Goshen (goshenite), and at Chesterfield. In Conn., at Haddam, and at the Mid-
dletown and Portland feldspar quarries; at New Milford, of a clear golden yellow to dark
amber color; Branchville. In Pa., at Leiperville and Chester; at Mineral Hill. In ya.,
at Amelia Court House, sometimes white. In N. C., in Alexander Co., near Stony Point,
fine emeralds; in Mitchell Co.; Morganton, Burke Co., and elsewhere. In Ala., Cposa
Co., of a light yellow color. In Col., near the summit of Mt. Antero, beautiful aquamarines.
In S. D., in the Black Hills in large crystals. Rose-pink crystals, often showing prominent
pyramid faces, from San Diego Co., Cal., also colorless and aquamarine.
Use. The transparent mineral is used as a gem stone; see above under Varieties.
Eudialyte. Essentially a metasilicate of Zr,Fe(Mn),Ca,Na, etc. In red to brown
tabular or rhombohedral crystals; also massive. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 2'9-3'0. Optically
-J-. o> = 1'606. 6 = 1'611. From Kangerdluarsuk, West Greenland, etc., with arfved-
sonite and sodalite; at Lujaor on the Kola peninsula, Russian Lapland, in elseolite-syenite,
there forming a main constituent of the rock-mass. Eucolite, from islands of the Langesund
fiord in Norway, is similar (but optically ). Eudialyte and eucolite also occur at Magnet
Cove, in Ark., of a rich crimson to peach-blossom red color, in feldspar, with elseolite and
aegirite.
Elpidite. Na2 O.ZrO 2 .6SiO 2 .3H2 O. Massive, fibrous. H. = 7. G. = 2'54. Color

white to brick-red. Biaxial, +. Indices = 1 '560-1 '574. Southern Greenland.
ASTROLITE. .H
(Na,K) 2 Fe(Al,Fe) 2 (SiO3) 5 2 O?. In globular forms with radiating
structure. H. = 3'5. G. = 2'8. Color green. Fusible, 3'5. Found in a diabase tuff
near Neumark, Germany.
The following are rare species of complex composition, all from the Lange-
sund fiord region of southern Norway.
Catapleiite. H
4 (Na 2) Ca)ZrSi 3
pii.
In thin tabular hexagonal prisms. H. 6. G. = =
2-8. Color light yellow to yellowish brown. Biaxial, +. Indices, 1 '591-1 '627. Natron-
or soda-catapleiite, contains only and white; on heat-
catapleiite, sodium; color blue to gray
ing the blue color disappears.
Cappelenite. A boro-silicate of yttrium and barium. In greenish brown hexagonal
crystals.
Melanocerite. A fluo-silicate of the cerium and yttrium metals and calcium
chiefly
(also B, Ta, etc.). In brown to black tabular rhombohedral crystals.
Caryocerite. Near melanocerite, containing ThO 2 .
Steenstrupine (from Greenland) is allied to the two last-named species. Rhombohe-

H. =4. G. = 3'4. Color dark brown to
nearly black. Optically .
Tritomite. A fluo-silicate of thorium, the cerium and

yttrium metals and calcium,
with boron. In dark brown crystals of acute
triangular pyramidal form.
The following are also from the same region :
Leucophanite. Na(BeF)Ca(SiO 3 ) 2 . In glassy greenish tabular crystals (orthorhombic-

sphenoidal). H. =4. G. = 2'96. Optically -. Indices, 1'571-1'598.
Meliphanite. A fluo-silicate of beryllium, calcium, and sodium near leucophanite. In
low square pyramids (tetragonal). Color yellow. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 3*01.
Optically -
Indices, 1 '593-1 '612.
SILICATES 497
Custerite. Ca 2 (OH,F)SiO 3 Monoclinic. . In fine granular masses. Cleavages par-

allel to base and prism, all making nearly 90 with each other. Twinning plane c (001),
showing in twin lamellae. H. =5. G. = 2 -91. Color greenish gray. Transparent.
+. Bxa nearly perpendicular toe
Optically (001). Indices, 1 '58-1 '60. Difficultly fusible.
Decomposed by hydrochloric acid. Found in limestone contact zone at the Empire
mine,
Custer Co., Idaho.
Didymolite. 2CaO.3Al 2 O 3 .9SiO 2 Monoclinic. In small twinned crystals. H. = 4-5.
.
G. = 271. Color dark gray. Opaque. Index 1 '5. Difficultly fusible. Insoluble. Found
as contact mineral in limestone from Tatarka River, Yenisei District, Siberia.
IOLITE. Cordierite. Dichroite.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0-5871 1 : : : :

0;5585.
Twins: tw. pi. m (110), also d (130), both yielding pseudo-hexagonal forms.
Habit short prismatic (mm
60 50') (Fig. 838). As embedded 839
grains; also massive, compact.

Cleavage: b (010) distinct;
a(100) and c(001) indistinct. Crys-
tals often show a lamellar structure
||
c (001), especially when slightly
altered. Fracture subconchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 7-7 '5. G. = 2-60-
2*66. Luster vitreous. Color va-
rious shades of blue, light or dark,
smoky blue. Transparent to trans-
lucent. Pleochroism strongly
marked except in thin sections.
Axial colors variable. Thus:
Bodenmais Z (= b axis) dark Berlin-blue. Y (= a axis) light Berlin-blue. X (
= c axis)
yellowish white.
Absorption Z> Y > X.

Pleochroic halos common, often bright yellow;
best seen in sections Exhibits idiophanous figures. Optically
||
c axis. .
Ax. pi. a (100). Bx. J_ c (001). Dispersion feeble, p < v. 2V = 70 23'

||
(also 40 to 84). Indices variable, from 1'534 to 1-599.

Comp. H
2 (Mg,Fe) 4 Al 8 Siio0 3 7or H
2 O.4(Mg,Fe)O.4Al 2 O 3 .10SiO 2 .
If Mg Fe = 7 2, the percentage composition is: Silica 49*4, alumina

: :
33'6, iron protoxide 5*3, magnesia 10-2, water 1-5

= 100. Ferrous iron re-
places part of the magnesium. Calcium is also present in small amount.
Pyr., etc. B.B. loses transparency and fuses at 5-5'5. Only partially decomposed by
acids. Decomposed on fusion with alkaline carbonates.
Diff. Characterized by its vitreous luster, color and pleochroism; fusible on the edges
unlike quartz; less hard than sapphire.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by lack of color; low refraction and low inter-
ference-colors; it is very similar to quartz, but distinguished by its biaxial character; in
volcanic rocks commonly shows distinct crystal outlines and a twinning of three individuals
like aragonite. In the gneisses, etc., it is in formless grains, but the common occurrence of
inclusions, especially of sillimanite needles, the pleochroic halos of a yellow color around small
inclusions, particularly zircons, and the constant tendency to alteration to micaceous pinite
seen along cleavages, help to distinguish it.
Obs. Occurs in granite, gneiss (cordierite-gneiss) hornblendic, chloritic and talcose
,
schist, and allied rocks, with quartz, orthoclase or albite, tourmaline, hornblende, andalu-
site, sillimanite, garnet, and sometimes beryl. Less commonly in or connected with igne-
ous rocks, thus formed directly from the magma, as in andesite, etc.; also in ejected masses
(in fragments of older rocks) further formed as a contact-mineral in connection with erup-
;
tive dikes, as in slates adjoining granite.

Occurs at Bodenmais, Bavaria, in granite, with pyrrhotite, etc.; Orijarvi, in Finland
(steinheilite)-; Tunaberg, in Sweden; from Switzerland; in colorless crystals from Brazil;
Ceylon affords a transparent variety, the saphir d'eau of jewelers; from Ibity, Madagascar;
from Greenland.
In the United States, at Haddam, Conn., associated with tourmaline in a granitic vein in
gneiss. In large altered crystals from Litchfield, Conn. AtBrimfield, Mass.; at Richmond
N. H.
Named Ielite from 'lov, violet, and X10os, stone; Dichroite (from dixpoos, two-colored),
from its dichroism; Cordierite, after Cordier, the French geologist (1777-1861).
Alteration. The alteration of iolite takes place so readily by ordinary exposure, that
the mineral most commonly found in an altered state, or enclosed in the altered iolite.
is
This change may be a simple hydration; or a removal of part of the protoxide bases by car-
bon dioxide; or the introduction of oxide of iron; or of alkalies, forming pinite and mica.
The first step in the change consists in a division of the prisms of iolite into plates parallel
to the base, and a pearly foliation of the surfaces of these plates; with a change of color to
grayish green and greenish gray, and sometimes brownish gray. As the alteration proceeds,
the foliation becomes more complete; afterward it may be lost. The mineral in this altered
condition has many names as hydrous iolite ( including bonsdorffite and auralite) from Abo,
:
Finland; fahlunite from Falun, Sweden, also pyrargillite from Helsingfors; esmarkite and
praseolite from near Brevik, Norway, also raumite from Raumo, Finland, and peplolite from
Ramsberg-, Sweden; chlorophyllite from Unity, Me.; aspasiolite and polychroilite from
Kragero. There are further alkaline kinds, as pinite, cataspilite, gigantolite, iberite, belong-
ing to the Mica Group.
Use. Iolite is sometimes used as a gem.
Jurupaite. H 2 (Ca,Mg) 2 Si 2 O7. Monoclinic? Radiating fibrous. White. H =4

G. = 275. n = 1-57. Crestmore, Cal.
The following are rare lead, zinc, and barium silicates:

Barysilite. Pb 3 Si2 O
Rhombohedral. In embedded masses with curved lamellar
7.
structure. Cleavage: H. = 3. G. = 611-6-55. Color white; tarnishing on

basal.
exposure. From the Harstig mine, Pajsberg, and Langban, Sweden.
Molybdophyllite. (Pb,Mg)SiO 4 .H 2 O. Hexagonal. In irregular foliated masses with
perfect basal cleavage. H. = 3-4. G. = 47. Colorless to pale green, co = 1-81
Difficultly fusible. From Langban, Sweden.
Ganomalite. Pb 4 (PbOH) 2 Ca4(Si 2 O 7 )3. In prismatic crystals (tetragonal); also mas-
sive granular. H =3
G. =574. Colorless to gray. Indices, 1'83-1'93. From
Langban, Sweden; also Jakobsberg.
Nasonite.
Closely related to ganomalite. Pb 4 (PbCl) 2 Ca 4 (Si2 O 7 )3. Probably tetragonal.
Massive, granular cleavable. H. =4. G. = 5'4. White. Fusible. From Franklin^N. J.
Margarosanite. Pb(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 Triclinic. Slender prismatic crystals and cleav-
.
able granular. Three cleavages, one perfect. Colorless and transparent with pearly lus-
= 2-5-3. G. = 3-99. Easily fusible. From
Franklin, N. J., and Langban, Sweden.
Hardystonite. CasZnSisOr. Tetragonal. In granular masses. Three cleavages.
H. = 3-4. G. = 3'4. Color white. From
Franklin, N. J.
Hydotekite.
= 5 -5-5. G. =Approximately (Pb,Ba,Ca)B 2 (SiO 3 )i 2 Massive; coarsely crystalline.
.
U. 3-81. Color white to From Langban, Sweden.

pearly gray. .
Barylite. In groups of
Ba^SiAt
Lust e
colorless prismatic
=
orthorhombic crystals.
' '
I ; n- rlimestone
?' T r
gr eas y- Optically +. ft 1-685. Occurs with hedyphane
in crystalline at Langban, Sweden.
ii in
Taramellite. Ba 4 FeFe 4 Si 10 31
Candoglia Italy
O .
K ^ ^^ "** ^^
Orthorhombic?
t
Fibrous.
tO
Color reddish
F Und
brown.
ln lime-
n.
Roeblingite.
6. u. = ,H CaSiO
From
6 433.
).2(CaPbSO
2 In
Furnace
4
Franklin
4 ). dense, white, compact, crystalline masses.
N. J.
SILICATES 499
III. Orthosilicates. R SiO2 4
Salts of Orthosilicic Acid, H SiO4 4 ;

characterized by an oxygen ratio of
1 : 1 for silicon to bases.
The following list includes the more prominent groups among the Ortho-
silicates.
A number which yield water upon ignition;
of basic orthosilicates are here included,
also others which are more or than a normal orthosilicate, but which are of
less basic
necessity introduced here in the classification, because of their relationship to other normal
salts. The MICA GROUP isso closely related to many Hydrous Silicates that (with also
Talc, Kaolinite, and some others) it is described later with them.
Nephelite Group. Hexagonal. Scapolite Group. Tetragonal-

Soda lite Group. Isometric. pyramidal.
Helvite Group. Isometric-tetrahe- Zircon Group. Tetragonal.
draL Danburite Group. Orthorhom-
Garnet Group. Isometric. bic.
Chrysolite Group. Orthorhombic. Datolite Group. Monoclinic.
Phenacite Group. Tri-rhombohe- Epidote Group. Monoclinic.
dral.
Nephelite Group. Hexagonal

i
Typical formula RAlSiO 4

Nephelite K^NaeA^C^ c = 0-8389
Soda-nephelite (artif.) NaAlSi0 4
Eucryptite LiAlSiO 4 Kaliophilite KAlSi0 4
Cancrinite H Na Ca(NaC0 )2Al

6 6 3 8 (SiO 4 )9 2c = 0'8448
Microsommite (Na,K)ioCa4Ali2Sii 2 5 2SCl 4 2c = 0'8367
The species of the NEPHELITE GROUP are hexagonal in crystallization and

i
have in part the typical orthosilicate formula RAlSi0 4 From this formula .
nephelite itself deviates somewhat, though an artificial soda-nephelite,

NaAlSiO 4 conforms to it. The species Cancrinite and Microsommite are
,
related in form and also in composition, though in the latter respect some-
what complex. They serve to connect this group with the sodalite group
following.
NEPHELITE. Nepheline. Elseolite.
Hexagonal-hemimorphic (p. 101). Axis c = 0-83893.

In thick six- or twelve-sided prisms with plane or modified summits.
Also massive compact, and in embedded grains; structure sometimes thin
columnar.
Cleavage: m
(110) distinct; c (001) imperfect. Fracture subconchoidal.
Brittle. H.
5'5-6. =
G. = 2-55-2-65. Luster vitreous to greasy; a little
opalescent in some varieties. Colorless, white, or yellowish; also, when mas-
sive, dark green, greenish or bluish gray, brownish red and brick-red. Trans-
parent to opaque. Optically Indices: o> = 1-542, e = 1-538.
.
Var. 1. Nephelite. Glassy. Usually in small glassy crystals or grains, transparent

with vitreous luster, first found on Mte. Somma, Vesuvius. Characteristic particularly of
In large coarse crystals, or more com-

younger eruptive rocks and lavas. 2. Elceolite.
brownish or gray in color.
monly massive, with a greasy luster, and reddish, greenish,
Characteristic of granular crystalline rocks, syenite,
Usually clouded by minute inclusions.
etc.
Comp. NaAlSiO4. This is the composition of the artificial mineral.

Natural nephelite always contains silica in varying excess and also small
amounts of potash. The composition usually approximates to NaeKÂlgSigCV
like nephelite with the composition NaAlSiO 4
Synthetic experiments, yielding crystals ,
lead to the conclusion that a natural soda-nephelite would be an orthosilicate with this
varieties may be explained by the presence,
formula, while the higher silica in the potash
in molecular combination, of KAlSiO 4 and NaAlSi 3 O 8 (albite in hexagonal modification).
The variation in composition may be more simply explained by considering normal nephe-
lite, NaAlSiO 4 to take up
,
in solid solution silica or other silicate molecules. The other
species of the group are normal orthosilicates, viz., eucryptite
LiAlSiO 4 and kaliophilite,
.
Pyr. ? etc. B.B. fuses quietly at 3 '5 to a colorless glass, coloring the flame yellow.
Gelatinizes with acids.
Diff. Distinguished by its gelatinizing with acids from scapolite and feldspar, as
also from apatite, from which it differs too in its greater hardness. Massive varieties have
a characteristic greasy luster.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its low refraction; very low interference-
colors, which scarcely rise to gray; parallel extinction when in crystals; faint negative
uniaxial cross yielded by basal sections in converging light. The negative character is best
told by aid of the gypsum plate (see p. 266). Micro-chemical tests serve to distinguish non-
characteristic particles from similar ones of alkali feldspar; the section is treated with dilute
acid, and the resultant gelatinous silica, which coats the nephelite particles, stained with
cosine or other dye.
Artif. Nephelite is easily prepared artificially by fusing its constituents together in
the proper proportions.
Obs. Nephelite is rather widely distributed (as shown by the microscopic study of
rocks) in igneous rocks as the product of crystallization of a magma rich in soda and at the
same time low in silica (which last prevents the soda from being used up in the formation
of albite). It is thus an essential component of the nephelite-syenites and phonolites where
it is associated with alkali feldspars chiefly. It is also a constituent of more basic augitic
rocks such as nephelinite, nephelite-basalts, nephelite-tephrites, theralite, etc., most of
which are volcanic in origin. The variety elceolite is associated with the granular plutonic
rocks, while the name nephelite was originally used for the fresh glassy crystals of the
modern lavas; the terms have in this sense the same relative significance as orthoclase and
sanidine. Modern usage, however, tends to drop the name elceolite.
The original nephelite occurs in crystals in the older lavas of Mte. Somma, Vesuvius, with
mica, vesuvianite, etc.; at Capo di Bove, near Rome; in the basalt of Katzenbuckel, near
Heidelberg, Germany; Aussig in Bohemia; Lobau in Saxony. Occurs also in massive forms
foyaite); Ditro, Hungary (in the rock ditroite)

_
Pousac, France; Brazil; South Africa.
;
Elaeolite occurs massive and crystallized at Litchfield, Me., with cancrinite; Salem,
Mass.; Red Hill, N. H.; in the Ozark Bits., near Magnet Cove, Ark.; elseolite-syenite
is also found near Beemersville, northern N.
J.; near Montreal, Canada; at Dungannon
township, Ontario, in enormous crystals. Nephelite rocks also occur at various points, as
the Transpecos district, Texas; Pilot Butte, Texas; also in western North America, as in
Col. at Cripple Creek; in Mon., in the Crazy Mts., the Highwood, Bearpaw and Judith
|Cts.; Black Hills in S. D.; Ice River, British Columbia.
Named nephelite from i/eêXrj, a cloud, in allusion to its becoming cloudy when immersed
in strong acid; elceolite is from eXaiov, oil, in allusion to its
greasy luster.
Gieseckite is a pseudomorph after nephelite. It occurs in Greenland in six-sided green-
ish gray prisms of greasy luster; also at Diana in Lewis
Co., N. Y. Dysyntribite from
Diana is similar to gieseckite, as is also liebenerite, from the valley of Fleims, in Tyrol,
Austria. See further FINITE under the MICA GROUP.
Eucryptite. LiAlSi0 4 . In symmetrically arranged crystals (hexagonal), embedded,
in albite and derived from the alteration of spodumene at Branchville, Conn, (see Fig. 488,
p. 181). G. = 2-667. Colorless or white.
SILICATES 501
Kaliophilite. KAlSiO 4 Phacellite.

. Phacelite. Facellite. In bundles of slender
acicular crystals (hexagonal), also in fine threads, cobweb-like. H. =6. G. = 2*493-
2'602. Colorless. Occurs in ejected masses at Mte. Somma, Vesuvius.
CANCRINITE.
_Hexagonal. Axis c
= 04224; and mp 1010 A 1011 = 64, pp f 1011 A
0111 = 25 58'. Rarely in prismatic crystals with a low terminal pyramid.
Usually massive.
Cleavage: prismatic, m (1010) perfect; a (1120) less so. H. = 5-6.
G. = 2 -42-2 -5. Color white, gray, yellow, green, blue, reddish. Streak
uncolored. Luster subvitreous, of a little pearly or greasy. Transparent to
translucent. Optically -. co = 1-524. e = 1-496.
Comp. H Na Ca(NaC0 )2Al8(SiO4)9
6 6 3 or 3H2 O.4Na2 O.CaO.4Al2 O 3.
9Si0 2 .2C0 2 = Silica 387, carbon dioxide 6-3, alumina 29-3, lime 4-0, soda
17-8, water 3-9
= 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives water. B.B. loses color, and fuses (F. = 2) with
intumescence to a white blebby glass, the very easy fusibility distinguishing it readily from
nephelite. Effervesces with hydrochloric acid, and forms a jelly on heating, but not
before.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its low refraction; quite high interference-
colors and negative uniaxial character. Its common association with nephelite, socialite,
etc., are valuable characteristics. Evolution of CO
2 with acid distinguishes it from all other
minerals except the carbonates, which show much higher interference-colors.

Artif. Cancrinite has been prepared artificially by heating under pressure a mixture
of sodium silicate, alumina and sodium carbonate; also by the treatment of nephelite and
labradorite by sodium carbonate at high temperatures.
Obs. Cancrinite occurs only in igneous rocks of the nephelite-syenite and related
rock groups. It is in part believed to be original, i.e., formed directly from the molten mag-
ma; in part held to be secondary and formed at the expense of nephelite by infiltrating
waters holding calcium carbonate in solution. Prominent localities are Miask in the Ilmen
Mte., Russia, in coarse-grained nephelite-syenite; similarly at Barkevik and other localities
on the Langesund fiord in southern Norway; in the parish of Knolajarvi in northern Finland
(where, associated with orthoclase, segirite and nephelite, it composes a mass of cancrinite-
syenite); at Ditro, Transylvania, etc.; in nephelite-syenite of Sarna and Alno in Sweden,
and in Brazil; also in small amount as an occasional accessory component of many phono-
litic rocks at various localities.
In the United States at Litchfield and West Gardiner, Me., with ela3olite and blue soda-
lite. Named after Count Cancrin, Russian Minister of Finance.
SULPHATIC CANCRINITE with nearly one-half the CO
2 replaced by SO 3 is found in an
altered rock on Beaver Creek, Gunnison Co., Col. Has lower refractive indices and' bire-
fringence than cancrinite.
Microsommite. Near cancrinite; perhaps (Na,Et)i Ca4Ali 2 Sii2O52SCl 4 ). In minute
colorless prismatic crystals (hexagonal. See Fig. 30, p. 19). From Vesuvius (Monte
Somma). H. =6. G. = 2'42-2'53. co = 1-521. e = 1'529.
Davyne. Near microsommite. From Mte. Somma; Laacher See, Germany. o> =
1-518. e = 1'521.
Sodalite Group. Isometric
Sodalite Na 4 (AlCl)Al 2 (SiO 4 )3

Haiiynite (Na 2 ,Ca) 2 (NaSO4.Al)Al2 (Si04)3
Noselite Na (NaSO4.Al)Al (Si0
4 2 4 )3
Lazurite Na (NaS .Al)Al (SiO

4 3 2 4) 3
The species of the Sodalite Group are isometric in crystallization and per-
haps tetrahedral like the following group. In composition they are peculiar
(like cancrinite of the preceding group) in containing
radicals with Cl, S0 4 and
S, which are elements usually absent in the
silicates. These are shown in the
formulas written above in the form suggested by Brogger,

who shows that
this group and the one following may
be included with the garnets in a broad
and a close resemblance in
group characterized by isometric crystallization
composition. See further under
the GARNET GROUP proper, p. 505.
The formulas are also often written as if the compound consisted of a sili-
cate and chloride (sulphate, sulphide) thus for sodalite, 3NaAlSiO 4 NaCl, +
etc.
SODALITE.
Isometric, perhaps tetrahedral.
Common form the dodecahedron.
Twins- tw. pi. o (111), forming hexagonal prisms by elongation in the direction
of an octahedral axis (Fig. 406, p. 165). Also massive, in embedded grains; in
concentric nodules resembling chalcedony, formed from elaeolite.
Fracture conchoidal to
Cleavage: dodecahedral, more or less distinct.
uneven. Brittle. H. = 5-5-6. G. = 2'14-2'30. Luster vitreous, sometimes
inclining to greasy. Color gray, greenish, yellowish, white; sometimes blue,
lavender-blue, light red. Transparent to translucent. Streak uncolored.
n = 1-4827.
Comp. Na 4 (AlCl)Al2 (SiO 4)3 = Silica 37'2, alumina 31*6, soda 25'6,
chlorine 7'3 = 1017, deduct (0 2C1) 17 = 100.
= Potassium replaces a
small part of the sodium. The formula may also be written 3NaAlSiO 4 +
NaCl.
Pyr.. etc. In the closed tube the blue varieties become white and opaque. B.B.
fuses with intumescence, at 3 '5-4, to a colorless glass. Soluble in hydrochloric acid and
upon evaporation.
yields gelatinous silica
Diff. Distinguished from much analcite, leucite and haiiynite by chemical tests alone;
dissolving the mineral in dilute nitric acid and testing for chlorine is the simplest and
best.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its very low refraction, isotropic character and
lack of good cleavage; also, in most cases, by its lack of color. In uncovered rock sections
the minerals of this group may be distinguished from each other by covering them with a
little nitric acid which is allowed to evaporate slowly. With sodalite crystals of sodium
chloride will form; with haiiynite crystals of gypsum; with noselite crystals of both com-
pounds after the addition of calcium chloride; lazurite will evolve hydrogen sulphide which
will blacken silver.
Aftif. can be obtained by fusing nephelite with sodium chloride; also by the
.Sodalite
action of sodium carbonate and caustic soda upon muscovite at 500. It has been pro-
duced also in various artificial magmas at temperatures below 700.
Obs. Sodalite occurs only in igneous rocks of the nephelite-syenite and related rock
groups, as a product of the crystallization of a magma rich in soda; also as a product asso-
ciated with enclosed masses and bombs ejected with such magmas in the form of lava, as at
Vesuvius. Often associated with nephelite (or elseolite), cancrinite and eudialyte. With
sanidine it forms a sodalite-trachyte at Scarrupata in Ischia, Italy, in crystals. In Sicily,
Val di Noto, with nephelite and analcite. At Vesuvius, in bombs on Monte Somma in white,
translucent, dodecahedral crystals; massive and of a gray color at the Kaiserstuhl and near
Lake Laach, Germany. A variety from Monte Somma containing 2 per cent of molybde-
num trioxide has -been called molybdosodalite. At Ditro, Transylvania, in an elaeolite-
syenite. In the foyaite of southern Portugal. At Miask, in the Ilmen Mts., Russia; in
the augite-syenite of the Langesund-fiord region in Norway. Further in West Greenland
in sodalite-syenite; the peninsula of Kola, Russia.
A blue massive variety occurs at Litchfield and West Gardiner, Me. Occurs in the
theralite of the Crazy Mts., Mon., also at Square
Butte, Highwood Mts., and in the Bear-
paw Mts., in tinguaite. Occurs also in the ela3olite-syenite of Brome, Brome Co., and of
Montreal and Beloeil, province of Quebec; at
Dungannon, Ontario, in large blue masses
and in small pale pink crystals. At Kicking Horse
Pass, Bristish Columbia.
Hackmanite. . A sodalite containing about 6 per cent of the molecule Na 4 [Al(NaS)]Al 2
(biO 4 ) 3 trom a rock called tawite from the Tawa valley on the Kola peninsula, Lapland.
SILICATES 503
HAUYNITE. Haiiyne.
Isometric. Sometimes in dodecahedrons, octahedrons, etc.
Twins: tw. pi. o (111); contact-twins, also poly synthetic; penetration-
twins (Fig. 405, p. 165). Commonly in rounded grains, o ten looking like
crystals with fused surfaces.
Cleavage: dodecahedral, rather distinct. Fracture flat .conchoidal to
uneven. Brittle. H. = 5*5-6. G. = 2-4-2 -5. Luster vitreous, to some-
what greasy. Color bright blue, sky blue, greenish blue asparagus-green,
;
red, yellow. Streak slightly bluish to colorless. Subtransparent to translu-

cent; often enclosing symmetrically arranged inclusions (Fig. 840): n =
T4961.
Comp. Na2Ca(NaSO4.Al)Al2 (SiO4)3. This is analogous to the garnet
formula (Brogger) where the place of the R3 is taken by Na2 Ca and the ,
group Na-0-SO 2-O-Al. The percentage composition is: Silica 32*0, sulphur
trioxide 14-2, alumina 27 -2, lime 10*0, soda 16*6 = 100. The ratio of Na* Ca :
also varies from 3:2; potassium may be present in small amount. The
formula may also be wr tten 2(Na2,Ca)Al 2 (Si0 4 ) 2 +
(Na ,Ca)SO 4 .
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube retains its color. B.B. in the forceps fuses at 4*5 to a
white glass. Soluble in hydrochloric acid and yields gelatinous silica upon evaporation.
The solution gives a -test for the sulphate radical with barium chloride.
Micro. Similar to sodalite, which see.
Artif. Has been produced artificially in the same ways as with sodalite with the use
of a sulphate instead of a chloride.
Obs. Common in certain igneous rocks, thus in hauynophyre, in phonolite, tephrite ;
very commonly associated with nephelite and leucite. Occurs in the Vesuvian lavas, on
Mte. Somma; at Melfi, on Mt. Vultur, Naples; in the lavas of the Campagna, Rome, also
Section of crystals of haiiynite (after Mohl)
in a basalt tuff near Albano, Italy; at Niedermendig, in the Eifel, Germany; the phonolites
of Hohentwiel, Baden, Germany.
Noselite or Nosean. Near haiiynite, but contains little or no lime. Color grayish,
bluish, brownish; sometimes nearly opaque from the presence of inclusions (cf. Fig. 840).
n = 1-495. Not uncommon in phonolite. In Germany at Andernach, the Laacher See,
and elsewhere.
LAZURITE. LAPIS-LAZULI. Lasurite.
Isometric. In cubes and dodecahedrons. Common y massive, compact.
Cleavage: dodecahedral, imperfect. Fracture uneven. H. = 5-5*5.
G. = 2-38-2-45. Luster vitreous. Color rich Berlin-blue or azure-blue,
violet-blue, greenish blue.Translucent, n = 1*500.
Comp. Essentia ly
4 Na (NaS
.Al) Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 but containing also in mo-
,
lecular combination haiiynite and sodalite. The percentage composition of

this ultramarine compound is as follows: Si ica 31*7, alumina 26*9, soda
27*3, sulphur 16*9 = 102*9, or deduct (O = S) 2*9 = 100.
The heterogeneous character of what had long passed as a simple mineral under the name
Lapis-lazuli was shown by Fischer (1869), Zirkel (1873), and more fully by Vogelsang (1873).
^ V
amount scapolite plagioclase,

orthoclase (microperthite?), apatite, titanite, zircon, and
n undetermined' mineral optically +
and probably uniaxial. Regarded by Brogger as
limestone.
a result of contact metamorphism in
Micro. _
Similar to sodalite, which see.
Pvr etc Heated in the closed tube gives off some moisture; the variety from Chile
of the mineral remains blue on cooling Fuses
clows with a beetle-green light, but the color
easily (3) with intumescence to
a white glass. Soluble in hydrochloric acid and yields gelati-
nous silica upon evaporation and evolves hydrogen sulphide.
Obs Occurs in Badakshan, India, in the valley of the Kokcha, a branch of the Oxus,
end of Lake Baikal Siberia. Further, in
a few miles above Firgamu. Also at the south
Chile in the Andes of Ovalle. In ejected
masses at Monte Somma, Vesuvius, rare. From
Siberiaand Persia.
Use The richly colored varieties of lapis lazuli are highly esteemed for costly vases
of mosaics; and when pow-
and ornamental furniture; also employed in the manufacture
dered constitutes the rich and durable paint called ultramarine.
This has been replaced,
however, by artificial ultramarine,
now an important commercial product.
>, Helvite Group. Isometric-tetrahedral
Helvite (Mn,Fe) 2 (Mn 2 S)Be 3 (Si04) 3

Danalite (Fe,Zn,Mn) 2 ( (Zn,Fe) 2 S)Be 3 (Si0 4)3
Eulytite Bi 4 (SiO 4 ) 3
Zunyite (Al(OH,F,Cl) 2 ) 6 Al2 (SiO 4 ) 3
The HELVITE GROUP includes several rare species, isometric-tetrahedral in
crystallization and in composition
related to the species of the SODALITE
GROUP and also to those of the GARNET GROUP which follows:
HELVITE.
Isometric-tetrahedral. Commonly in tetrahedral crystals ;
also in spheri-
cal masses.
Cleavage: octahedral in traces. Fracture uneven to conchoidal. Brittle.
H. = 6-6*5. G. = 3'16-3'36. Luster vitreous, inclining to resinous. Color
honey-yellow, inclining to yellowish brown, and siskin-green, reddish brown.
Streak uncolored. Subtransparent. n = 1 739. Pyroelectric.
Comp. (Be,Mn,Fe) 7 Si 3 Oi 2 S. This may be written (Mn,Fe) 2 (Mn2 S)Be 3
(SiO4 ) 3 analogous to the Garnet Group, the bivalent group -Mn-S-Mn taking
the place of a bivalent element, R, and 3Be corresponding to 2A1, cf. p. 505.
Composition also written 3(Be,Mn,Fe) 2 SiO 4 .(Mn,Fe)S.
Pyr., etc. Fuses at 3 in R.F. with intumescence to a yellowish brown opaque bead,
becoming darker in R.F. With the fluxes gives the manganese reaction. Soluble in hydro-
chloric acid, giving hydrogen sulphide and yielding gelatinous silica upon
evap9ration.
Obs. Occurs at Schwarzenberg and Breitenbrunn, in Saxony; at Kapnik, Hungary;
also in the pegmatite veins of the augite-syenite of the Langesund fiord, Norway; in the
Ilmen Mts., Russia, near Miask, in pegmatite. In the United States, with spessartite, at the
mica mines near Amelia Court-House, Amelia Co., Va.; etc. Named by Werner, in allu-
sion to its yellow color, from -Xios, the sun.
Danalite. (Be,Fe,Zn,Mn) 7 Si 3 Oi2S. In octahedrons; usually massive. H. = 5'5-6.
G. = 3-427. Color flesh-red to gray. Occurs in small grains in the
Rockport granite,
Cape Ann, Mass.; at the iron mine at Bartlett, N. H.; El Paso Co., Col. In England at
Eulytite. Bi4 Si 3 Oi 2 .
Usually in minute tetrahedral crystals; also in spherical forms.
H. = 4'5. G. = 6'106. Color dark hair-brown to grayish, straw-yellow, or colorless.
n Found witn native bismuth near Schneeberg, Saxony;
^ 2?'
m crystals on quartz.
also at Johanngeorgen-
stadt, Germany,
SILICATES 505
Zunyite. A highly basic orthosilicate of aluminium, (Al(OH,F,Cl) 2 )6Al2 Si3Oi2. In

minute transparent tetrahedrons. H. =7. G. = 2*875. From the Zuni mine, near Sil-
verton, San Juan Co., and on Red Mountain, Ouray Co., Col.
4. Garnet Group. Isometric
or 3RO.R2 O 3 .3Si02 .
II II H III III
Ill III
R= Ca,Mg,Fe,Mn. Al,Fe,Cr,Ti.
Garnet
A. GROSSULARITE Ca3 Al2 (SiO 4 ) 3 E. ANDRADITE Ca3 Fe2 (SiO4) ;
B. PYROPE Mg Al (Si0
3 2 4) 3 Also (Ca,Mg) 3 Fe 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 ,
C. ALMANDITE Fe Al (SiO
3 2 4) 3 Ca3 Fe2 ((Si,Ti)0 4) 3
D. SPESSARTITE Mn Al (SiO
3 2 4) 3 F. UVAROVITE Ca3 Cr2 (Si0 4) 3 ,
Schorlomite Ca3 (Fe,Ti) 2 ( (Si,Ti)O 4 )
The GARNET GROUP includes a series of important sub-species included

under the same specific name. They all crystallize in the normal class of
the isometric system and' are alike in habit, the dodecahedron and trapezo-
hedron being the common forms. They have also the same general formula,
and while the elements present differ widely, there are many intermediate
varieties. Some of the garnets include titanium, replacing silicon, and thus
they are connected with the rare species schorlomite, which probably also has
the same general formula.
Closely related to the GARNET GROUP proper are the species of the Sodalite and llelvite
Groups (pp. 501, 504). All are characterized by isometric crystallization, and all are
orthosilicates, with similar chemical structure. Thus the formula of the Garnet Group is
Hill
RR3 2 (SiO 4 )3; to this Sodalite conforms if written Na 4 (AlCl)Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 where Na 4 and the ,
bivalent radical A1C1 are equivalent to 3 R

similarly for Noselite (Haliynite) if the presence
;
of the bivalent group NaSO 4-Al is assumed.

In the Helvite Group, which is characterized by the tetrahedral character of the species
(perhaps true also of the Sodalites), the chemical relation is less close but probably exists,
as exhibited by writing the formula of Helvite (Mn,Fe)(Mn 2 S)Be 3 (SiO4) 3 where the bivalent ,
group -S-Mn-S- enters, and 3Be may be regarded as taking the place of 2A1.
GARNET.
Isometric. The dodecahedron and trapezohedron, n (211), the common
841 842 843
simple forms; also these in combination, or with the hexoctahedron s (321).

Cubic and octahedral faces rare. Often in irregular embedded grains. Also
massive; granular, coarse or fine,

and sometimes friable; lamellar, lamellae
thick and bent. Sometimes compact, cryptocrystalline like nephrite.
Fracture subconchoidal to
Parting: d (110) sometimes rather
distinct.
844 845 846
uneven. Brittle, sometimes friable when granular massive; very tough when
compact cryptocrystalline. H.
= 6'5-7'5. G. = 3-15-4-3, varying with the
composition. Luster vitreous to resinous. Color red, brown, yellow, white,
apple-green, black; some red and green, colors often bright. Streak white.
Transparent to subtranslucent. Often exhibits anomalous double refraction,
especially grossularite (also topazolite, etc.), see Art. 429. Refractive index
rather high, and varying directly with the composition. The different pure
molecules have approximately the following indices.
Pyrope 1705, Grossularite 1-735, Spessartite I'SOO, Almandite 1'830, Uvarovite 1'870,
Andradite 1'895.
II III
Comp. An orthosilicate having the general formula R 3 R 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 or ,
3RO.R20 3 .3Si0 2 .The bivalent element may be calcium, magnesium, ferrous

iron or manganese; the trivalent element, aluminium, ferric iron or chro-
mium, rarely titanium; further, silicon is also sometimes replaced by titanium.
The different garnet molecules are isomorphous with each other although
there are apparently definite limits to their miscibility. The greater majority
will be found to have two or three component molecules in the case, however,
;
where three are present one is commonly in subordinate amount. The index
of refraction and specific gravity vary directly with the variation in composition.
Var. There are three prominent groups, and various subdivisions under
each, many of these blending into each other.
I. Aluminium Garnet, including
A. GROSSULARITE Calcium- Aluminium Garnet Ca3 Al2 (Si0 4) 3
B. PYROPE Magnesium- Aluminium Garnet Mg3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3
C. ALMANDITE Iron- Aluminium Garnet Fe 3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3
D. SPESSARTITE Manganese- Aluminium Garnet Mn3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3
II. Iron Garnet, including

E. ANDRADITE Calcium-Iron Garnet Ca3 Fe 2 (SiO 4 )3
(1) Ordinary. (2) Magnesian. (3) Titaniferous. (4) Yttriferous,
III. Chromium Garnet.
F. UVAROVITE Calcium-Chromium Garnet Ca3 Cr 2 (SiO 4 ) 3
The name Garnet from the Latin granatus, meaning like a grain, and directly from
is
pomegranate, the seeds of which are small, numerous, and red, in allusion to the aspect oi
the crystals.
SILICATES 507
A. GROSSULARITE. Essonite or Hessonite. Cinnamon-stone. Calcium-

aluminium Garnet. Formula 3CaO.Al 2 O 3 .3Si0 2 = Silica 40 -0, alumina 227,
lime 37 '3 = 100. Often containing ferrous iron replacing the calcium, and
ferric iron replacing aluminium, and hence graduating toward groups C and
E. G. = 3-53. Color (a) colorless to white; (6) pale green; (c) amber-
and honey-yellow; (d)wine-yellow, brownish yellow, cinnamon-brown; (e)
rose-red; rarely (/) emerald-green from the presence of chromium. Often
shows optical anomalies (Art. 429).
The original grossularite (wiluite in part) included the pale green from Siberia, and was
so named from the botanical name for the gooseberry; G. = 3-42-372. Cinnamon-stone,
or essonite (more properly hessonite), included a cinnamon-colored variety from Ceylon,
there called hyacinth; but under this name the yellow and yellowish red kinds are usually
included; named from fjvauv, inferior, because of less hardness than the true hyacinth
which it resembles. Succinite is an amber-colored kind from the Ala valley, Piedmont,
Italy. Romanzovite is brown.
Pale green, yellowish, and yellow-brown garnets are not invariably grossularite; some
(including topazolite, demantoid, etc.) belong to the group of Calcium-Iron Garnet, or
Andradite.
B. PYROPE. Precious garnet in part. Magnesium-aluminium Garnet.

Formula 3MgO.Al 2 3 .3Si0 2 = Silica 44-8, alumina 25*4, magnesia 29*8 =
100. Magnesia predominates, but calcium and iron are also present; the
original pyrope also contained chromium. G. = 3'51. Color deep red to
nearly black. Often perfectly transparent and then prized as a gem. The
name pyrope is from TTUPCOTTOS, fire-like.
Rhodolite, of delicate shades of pale rose-red and purple, brilliant by reflected light,
corresponds in composition to two parts of pyrope and one of almandite; from Macon Co.,
N. C.
C. ALMANDITE. Almandine. Precious garnet in part. Common garnet

in part. Iron-aluminium Garnet. Formula 3FeO.Al 2 3 .3SiO 2 = Silica 36 -2,
alumina 20 '5, iron protoxide 43 '3 = 100. Ferric iron replaces the aluminium
to a greater or less extent. Magnesium also replaces the ferrous iron, and
thus it graduates toward pyrope, cf. rhodolite above. G. = 4-25. Color fine
deep red, transparent, in precious garnet; brownish red, translucent or sub-
translucent, in common garnet; black. Part of common garnet belongs to
Andradite.
The Alabandic carbuncles of Pliny were so called because cut and polished at Alabanda.
Hence the name almandine or almandite, now in use.
D. SPESSARTITE. Spessartine. Manganese-aluminium Garnet. Formula

3MnO.Al 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 = Silica 36'4, alumina 20'6, manganese protoxide 43'0 =
100. Ferrous iron replaces the manganese to a greater or less extent, and
the aluminium.
ferric iron also G. = 4-18. Color dark hyacinth-red, some-
times with a tinge of violet, to brownish red.
E. ANDRADITE. Common Garnet, Black Garnet, etc. Calcium-iron
Garnet. Formula 3CaO.Fe 2 O 3 .3Si0 2 = Silica 35'5, iron sesquioxide 31 -5, lime
33*0 = 100. Aluminium replaces the ferric iron; ferrous iron, manganese
and sometimes magnesium replace the calcium. G. = 375. Colors various:
wine-, topaz- and greenish yellow, apple-green to emerald-green; brownish
red, brownish yellow; grayish green, dark green; brown; grayish black, black.
Named Andradite after the Portuguese mineralogist, d'Andrada, who in 1800 described
and named one of the included subvarieties, Allochroite. Chemically there are the follow-
ing varieties:
are wholly or almost wholly
1 Simple Calcium-iron Garnet, in which the protoxides
color and transparency of topaz, and also
lime' Includes- (a) Topazolite, having the
hexoctahedron. Demantoid a grass-green
sometimes green; crystals often showing a vicinal
!
used as a gem. (6) Colophonite,

o emerald-green variety with brilliant diamond-like luster,
to dark reddish brown in color resinous in luster,
a coarse granular kind, brownish yellow
(c) Melamte (from
and usually with iridescent hues; named after the
resin colophony,
but all black garnet is not here included.
ueXas black] black, either dull or lustrous;
black melanite. (d) Dark green garnet, not distinguishable from some
Pyreneite is grayish
allochroite except by chemical trials.
2 Manganesian Calcium-iron Garnet, (a) Rothoffite. The original allochroite was a
and of fine-grained massive
manganesian iron-garnet of brown or reddish brown color,
is similar, yellowish brown to liver-brown.
structure. Rothoffite, from Langban, Sweden,
Other common kinds of manganesian iron-garnet are light and dark, dusky green and black,
and often in crystals. Polyadelphite is a massive brownish yellow kind, from Franklin Fur-
nace N. J. Bredbergite, from Sala, Sweden, contains a large amount of magnesia. (6) Ap-
lome (properly haplome) has its dodecahedral faces striated parallel to the shorter diagonal,
whence Haiiy inferred that the fundamental form was the cube; and as this form is simpler
than the dodecahedron, he gave it a name derived from airXoos, simple. Color of the origi-
nal aplome (of unknown locality) dark brown; also found yellowish green and brownish
green at Schwarzenberg in Saxony,
and on the Lena in Siberia.
3. Titaniferous. Contains titanium and probably both TiO 2 and Ti 2 O 3 formula hence
;
3Ca6.(Fe,Ti,Al) 2 O 3 .3(Si,Ti)O 2 It thus graduates toward schorlomite.

. Color black.
4. Yttriferous Calcium-iron Garnet. Contains yttria in small amount; rare.
F. UVAROVITE. Ouvarovite. Uwarowit. Calcium-chromium Garnet.

Formula 3CaO.Cr2 3 .3SiO 2 = Silica 35'9, chromium sesquioxide 30*6, lime
33-5 = 100. Aluminium takes the place of the chromium in part. H. = 7 '5.
G. = 3-41-3-52. Color emerald-green.
Pyr. etc. Most varieties of garnet fuse easily to a light brown or black glass; F. = 3
in almandite, spessartite, and grossularite; 3 '5 in andradite and pyrope; but uvarovite, the
chrome-garnet, is almost infusible, F.
= 6. Andradite and almandite fuse to a magnetic
globule. Reactions with the fluxes vary with the bases. Almost all kinds react for iron;
strong manganese reaction in spessartite, and less marked in other varieties; a chromium
reaction in uvarovite, and in most pyrope. Some varieties are partially decomposed by
acids; all except uvarovite after ignition become soluble in hydrochloric acid, and generally
yield gelatinous silica on evaporation. Decomposed on fusion with alkaline carbonates.
The density of garnets is largely diminished by fusion. Thus a Greenland garnet fell
from 3'90 to 3'05 on fusion, and a Vilui grossularite from 3'63 to 2'95.
Diff. Characterized by isometric crystallization, usually in isolated crystals, dode-
*
cahedrons or trapezohedrons; massive forms rare, then usually granular. Also distin-
guished by hardness, vitreous luster, and in the common kinds the fusibility. Vesuvianite
Fuses more easily, zircon and quartz are infusible; the specific gravity is higher than for
tourmaline, from which it differs in form; it is much harder than sphalerite.
Micro. Distinguished in thin sections by its very high relief; lack of cleavage; iso-
tropic character; usually shows a pale pink color; sometimes not readily told from some of
the spinels.
Artif. While members of the garnet group have been formed artificially their synthe-
Apparently they can be produced only under exact conditions of tempera-
sis is difficult.
ture and pressure that are difficult to reproduce. Natural garnets when fused break down
into various other minerals.
Obs. Grossularite is especially characteristic of metamorphosed impure calcareous
rocks, whether altered by local igneous or general metamorphic processes; it is thus com-
monly found in the contact zone of intruded igneous rocks and in the crystalline schists.
Almandite is characteristic of the mica schists and metamorphic rocks containing alumina
and iron; it occurs also in some igneous rocks as the result of later dynamic and metamor-
phic processes; it forms with the variety of amphibole called smaragdite the rock eclogite.
Pyrope is especially characteristic of such basic igneous rocks as are formed from magmas
containing much magnesia and iron with little or no alkalies, as the peridotites, dunites,
etc.; also found in the serpentines formed from these rocks; then often associated with
spinel, chromite, etc. Spessartite occurs in granitic rocks, in quartzite, in whetstone schists
(Belgium) it has been noted with topaz in lithophyses in rhyolite (Colorado). The black
;
variety of andradite, melanite, is common in eruptive rocks, especially with nephelite, leucite,
thus in phonohtes,
leucitophyres, nephelinites in such cases often titaniferous or associated
:
SILICATES 509
with a titaniferous garnet, sometimes in zonal intergrowth; it also occurs as a
product of
contact metamorphism. Demantoid occurs in serpentine. Uvarovite belongs particularly
with chromite in serpentine; it occurs also in granular limestone.
Garnet crystals often contain inclusions of foreign matter, but only in part due to altera-
tion; as, vesuvianite, calcite, epidote, quartz (Fig. 486, p. 180); at times the garnet is a
mere shell, or perimorph, surrounding a nucleus of another species. A black garnet from
Arendal, Norway, contains both calcite and epidote;
crystals from Tvedestrand, Norway, are wholly calcite
within, there being but a thin crust of garnet. Crystals
from East Woodstock, Me., are dodecahedrons with a
thin shell of cinnamon-stone enclosing calcite; others from
Raymond, Me., show successive layers of garnet and
calcite. Many such cases have been noted.
Garnets are often altered, thus to chlorite, serpentine;
even to limonite. Crystals of pyrope are sometimes
surrounded by a chloritic zone (kelyphite of Schrauf)
not homogeneous, as shown in Fig. 847.
Among prominent foreign localities of garnets, besides
those already mentioned, are the following GROSS-
ULARITE: Fine cinnamon-stone comes from Ceylon; on
the Mussa-Alp in the Ala valley in Piedmont, Italy, with
clinochlore and diopside; at Zermatt, Switzerland;
pale yellow at Auerbach, Germany; brownish (romanzovite) at Kimito in Finland; honey-
yellow octahedrons in Elba; pale greenish from the banks of the Vilui in Siberia, in serpentine
with vesuvianite; also from Cziklowa and Orawitza in the Banat, Hungary; with vesu-
vianite and wollastonite in ejected masses at Vesuvius; in white or colorless crystals in
Tellemark, in Norway; also dark brown at Mudgee, New South Wales; dark honey-yellow
at Guadalcazar, and clear pink or rose-red dodecahedrons at Xalostoc, Morelos, Mexico,
called variously, landerite, xalostocite and rosolite.
PYROPE: In serpentine (from peridotite) near Meronitz and the valley of Krems, in
Bohemia (used as a gem); at Zoblitz in Saxony; in the Vosges Mts.; in the diamond dig-
gings of South Africa ("Cape rubies"). ALMANDITE: Common in granite, gneiss, eclogite,
etc., in many localities in Saxony, Silesia, etc.; at Eppenreuth near Hof, Bavaria; in large
dodecahedrons at Falun in Sweden; hyacinth-red or brown in the Zillertal, Tyrol, Austria.
Precious garnet comes in fine crystals from Ceylon, Pegu, British India, Brazil, and Green-
land. SPESSARTITE: From Aschaffenburg in the Spessart, Bavaria; at St. Marcel, Pied-
mont, Italy; near Chanteloube, Haute Vienne, France, etc.
ANDRADITE: The beautiful green demantoid or "Uralian emerald" occurs in transparent
greenish rolled pebbles, also in crystals, in the gold washings of Nizhni-Tagilsk in the Ural
Mts.; green crystals occur at Schwarzenberg, Saxony; brown to green at Morawitza and
Dognacska, Hungary; emerald-green at Dobschau, Hungary; in the Ala valley, Piedmont,
Italy, the yellow to greenish topazolite. Allochroite, apple-green and yellowish, occurs at
Zermatt, Switzerland; black crystals (melanite), also brown, at Vesuvius on Mte. Somma;
near Bareges in the Hautes-Pyrenees, France, (pyreneite). Aplome occurs at Schwarzen-
berg in Saxony, in brown to black crystals. Other localities are Pfitschtal, Tyrol, Austria;
Langban, Sweden; Pitkaranta, Finland; Arendal, Norway. UVAROVITE: Found at Sara-
novskaya near Bisersk, also in the vicinity of Kyshtymsk, Ural Mts., in chromic iron; at
Jordansmuhl, Silesia; Pic Posets near Venasque in the Pyrenees on chromite.
In North America, in Me., beautiful crystals of cinnamon-stone (with vesuvianite) occur
at Parsonsfield, Phippsburg, and Rumford, at Raymond. In N. H., at Hanover, small
clear crystals in gneiss; at Warren, cinnamon garnets; at Graf ton. In Ver., at New Fane,
in chlorite slate. In Mass., in gneiss at Brookfield; in fine dark red or nearly black trape-
zohedral crystals at Russell, sometimes very large. In Conn., trapezohedrons, in mica
slate, at Reading and Monroe; dodecahedrons at Southbury and Roxbury; at Haddam,
crystals of spessartite. In N. Y., brown crystals at Crown Point, Essex Co.; colophonite
as a large vein at Willsboro, Essex Co.; in Middletown, Delaware Co., large brown crystals;
a cinnamon variety at Amity. In N. J., at Franklin, black, brown, yellow, red, and green
dodecahedral garnets; also near the Franklin Furnace (polyadelphite] . In Pa., in Chester
Co., at Pennsbury, fine dark brown crystals; near Knauertown; at Chester, brown; in
Concord, on Green's Creek, resembling pyrope; in Leiperville, red; at Mineral Hill, fine
brown; at Avondale quarry, fine hessonite; uvarovite at Woods' chrome mine, Lancaster
Co. In Va., beautiful transparent spessartite, used as a gem, at the mica mines at Amelia
Court-House. In N. C., fine cinnamon-stone at Bakers ville; red garnets in the gold wash-
ings of Burke, McDowell, and Alexander counties; rhodolite in Macon Co.; also mined near
"
Morgantown and Warlich, Burke Co., to be used as "emery," and as garnet-paper." In
Ky., fine pyrope in the peridotite of Ellis Co.
In Ark., at Magnet Cove, a titaniferous
melanite with schorlomite. Large dodecahedral crystals altered to chlorite occur at the
Spurr Mt. iron mine, Lake Superior, Mich. In Col., at Nathrop, fine spessartite crystals
in lithophyses in rhyolite; in large dodecahedral crystals at Ruby Mt., Salida, Chaff ee Co.,
the exterior altered to chlorite. In Ariz., .yellow-green crystals in the Gila canon; pyrope
on the Colorado river in the western part of the territory. N. M., fine pyrope on the
Navajo reservation with chrysolite and a chrome-pyroxene. In Cal., green with copper
ore, Hope Valley, El Dorado Co.; uvarovite, in crystals on chromite, at New Idria. Fine
crystals of a rich red color and an inch or more in diameter occur in the mica schists at
Fort Wrangell, mouth of the Stickeen river, in Alaska.
In Canada, at Marmora, dark red; at Grenville, a cinnamon-stone; an emerald-green
chrome-garnet, at Orford, Quebec, with millerite and calcite; fine colorless to pale olive-
green, or brownish crystals, at Wakefield, Ottawa Co., Quebec, with white pyroxene, honey-
yellow vesuvianite, etc., also others bright green carrying chromium; dark red garnet in
the townships of Villeneuve (spessartite) and Templeton; at Hull, Quebec.
Use. The various colored and transparent garnets are used as semiprecious gem
s'ones. At times the mineral is also used as an abrasive.
Schorlomite. Probably analogous to garnet, 3CaO.(Fe,Ti) 2 O 3 .3(Si,Ti)O 2 Usually .
massive, black, with conchoidal fracture and vitreous luster. H. = '5. G. = 3'81 77
3*88. From Magnet Cove, Ark.; in nepheline-syenite on Ice River, British Columbia.
Partschinite. (Mn,Fe) 3 Al 2 Si 3 Oi 2 like spessartite. In small dull crystals (monoclinic).

H. = 6-5-7. G. = 4-006. Color yellowish, reddish, From the auriferous sands of Oldh-
pian, Transylvania.
Agricolite. Same as for eulytite, Bi 4 Si 3 Oi 2 but monoclinic.
, In globular or semi-
globular forms. From Johanngeorgenstadt, Germany.
Chrysolite Group. R Si0

2 4. Orthorhombic
mm" 1
110 A 110
Monticellite GaMgSiO4
Forsterite Mg SiO
2 4
Chrysolite (Mg,Fe) 2 SiO 4

Hortonolite (Fe,Mg,Mn) 2 SiO 4
Fayalite Fe 2 SiO 4
Knebelite (Fe,Mn) 2 SiO 4
Tephroite Mn 2 Si0 4
SILICATES 511
CHRYSOLITE. Olivine. Peridot.

mm'", 110 A 1TO = 49 57'
= 848
ss' 120 A 120 94 4'
dd', 101 A 101 103 6'
kk, 021 A 021 99 6' /e\ a

f
ee ", 111 A 111 40 5
W", 121 A 121 72 13
of occurrence: (a) in igneous
Obs. Chrysolite (olivine) has two distinct methods
rocks, as peridotite, norite, basalt, diabase
and gabbro, formed by the crystallization of
magmas low in silica and rich in magnesia; from an accessory component in such rocks
852 853
the olivine increase in amount until it is the mam rock constituent as in the dunites;
may
also (6) as theproduct of metamorphism of certain sedimentary rocks containing magnesia
and silica, as in impure dolomites. In the dunites and peridotites of igneous origin the
chrysolite is commonly associated with chromite, spinel, pyrope, etc., which are valuable
indications also of the origin of serpentines derived from olivine. In the metamorphic
rocks the above are wanting, and carbonates, as dolomite, breunnerite, magnesite, etc.,
are the common associations; chrysolitic rocks of this latter kind may also occur altered
to serpentine.
Chrysolite also occurs in grains, rarely crystals, embedded in some meteoric irons.
Also present in meteoric stones, frequently in spherical forms, or chondrules, sometimes
made up of a multitude of grains with like (or unlike) optical orientation enclosing glass
between.
Among the more prominent localities are: Vesuvius in lava and on Monte Somma in
ejected masses, with augite, mica, etc. In Germany observed in the so called sanidine
bombs at the Laacher See; at Forstberg near May en in the Eifel and forming the mass of
"olivine bombs" in the Dreiser Weiher near Daun in the same region; at Sasbach in the
Kaiserstuhl, Baden (hyalosiderite) In crystals of gem-quality from Egypt. In Sweden,
.
with ore-deposits, as at Langban, Pajsberg, Persberg, etc. In serpentine at Snarum, Nor-

way, in large crystals, themselves altered to the same mineral. Common in the volcanic
rocks of Sicily, the Hawaiian Islands, the Azores, etc.
In the United States, in Thetford and Norwich, Ver., in boulders of
coarsely crystallized
basalt, the crystals or masses several inches through. In olivine-gabbro of Waterville, in
the White Mts., N. H.; at Webster, in Jackson Co., N. C., with
serpentine and chromite;
with chromite in Loudon Co., Va.; in Lancaster Co., Pa. In small clear
olive-green grains
with garnet at some points in Ariz, and N. M. In basalt in
Canada, near Montreal, at
Rougemont and Mounts Royal and Montarville, and in eruptive rocks at other points.
Alteration of chrysolite often takes place through the oxidation of the
iron; the mineral
becomes brownish or reddish brown and iridescent. The
process may end in leaving the
cavity of the crystal filled with limonite or red oxide of iron. A very common kind of
alteration is to the hydrous magnesium
silicate, serpentine, with the partial removal of the
iron or its separation in the form of
grains of magnetite, also as iron sesquioxide; this
change has often taken place on a large scale. See further under serpentine, p. 573.
Chrysolite is named from xpvris, gold, and Al0os. The hyalosiderite, from oaXos,
glass, and o-iSrjpos, iron. The chrysolithus of Pliny was probably our topaz and his topaz
;
our chrysolite.
Use. The clear, fine green varieties are used as a gem stone; usually caUed peridot.
Fr m
the r ck armeloite of Carmelo
Bay, Cal.; a silicate resembling an
T^Y-*
chrysolite,
* ?
exact composition undetermined. Has been noted as a pseudomorph
Mittelgebirge ' Bohemi a. Orthorhombic, foliated and
cleavable^G h*
SILICATES 513
The members of the Chrysolite Group are given in the table on

axial ratios of the other
p. 510. The species are briefly characterized as follows:
Monticellite. CaMgSiO 4 Occurs in colorless to gray crystals on Mte. Somma, Vesu-
.
vius; in masses (batrachite) on Mt. Monzoni, Tyrol, Italy; in crystals or grains in lime-
stone at Magnet Cove, Ark. G. = 3'03-3'25. Optically -. Indices, 1 '651-1 '668.
Glaucochroite. CaMnSiO 4 . In embedded prismatic crystals. Crystal constants and
optical properties near those of Chrysolite Group. Color, delicate bluish green. Found
at Franklin Furnace, N. J. H. =6. G. = 3 '4.
Forsterite. Mg
2 SiO 4 Occurs in white crystals at Vesuvius; in greenish or yellowish
.
embedded grains at Bolton, Mass, (boltonite). G. = 3'21-3'33. Optically +. ft = 1'659.

Hortonolite. (Fe,Mg,Mn) 2 SiO 4 In rough dark-colored crystals or masses. Occurs at
.
the iron mine of Monroe, Orange Co., N. Y. Iron Mine Hill, Cumberland, R. I. G. = 3'91.
;
Optically -. Indices, 1768-1 '803.

Fayalite. Fe 2 SiO 4 From the Mourne Mts., Ireland; the Azores; the Yellowstone
.
Park; Rockport, Mass., etc. From Cuddia Mida, Island of Pantelleria, Italy. Crystals
and massive, brown to black on exposure. G. = 4'1 Optically Indices, 1 '824-1 '874. .
Manganfayalite is a manganese variety found at Sodermanland, Sweden.

Knebelite. (Fe,Mn) 2 SiO 4 From Dannemora, and elsewhere in Sweden. G. = 4-1.
.
Tephroite. MnoSiO 4 also with zinc, in the variety roeppetite. From Sterling Hill and
;
Franklin Furnace, N. J.; also from Sweden; from Benderneer, New South Wales. Color
flesh-red to ash-gray. G. = 41. Optically Index about T80. .
Phenacite Group. R Si0

2 4. Tri-rhombohedral
rr' c
Willemite Zn 2 SiO 4 64 30' 0-6775
Troostite (Zn,Mn) 2 SiO 4
Phenacite Be 2 SiO 4 63 24' 0-6611
The PHENACITE GROUP includes the above orthosilicates of zinc (man-

ganese) and beryllium. Both belong to the tri-rhombohedral class of the
trigonal division of the hexagonal system, and have nearly the same rhombo-
hedral angle. The rare species trimerite, MnSiO 4 .BeSiO 4 which is pseudo- ,
hexagonal (triclinic) is probably to be regarded as connecting this group with

the preceding Chrysolite Group.
The following rare species are related:
rr' c
Dioptase H CuSiO
2 4 Tri-rhombohedral 54 5' 0'5342
Friedelite H (MnCl)Mn (SiO
7 4 4) 4 56 17' 0'5624
Pyrosmalite H (Fe,Mn)Cl)(Fe,Mn) (SiO
7( 4 4) 4 53 49' 0'5308
These species are very near to each other in form, as shown in the above axial ratios;
they further approximate to the species of the Phenacite Group proper. They are also
closely related among themselves in composition, since they are all acid orthosilicates, and
have the general formula H
2 RSiO 4
= H 8 R 4 (SiO 4 )4, where (e.g. for Friedelite) in the latter
form the place of one hydrogen atom is taken by the univalent radical (MnCl).
WILLEMITE.
Tri-rhombohedral. Axis c = 0*6775; rr' (1011) A (IlOl) = 64 30'; ee r
(0112) A (1012) = 36 47'.
In hexagonal prisms, sometimes long and slender, again short and stout;
rarely showing subordinate faces distributed according to the phenacite type.
Also massive and in disseminated grains; fibrous.
Cleavage: c (000 1) easy, Moresnet; difficult, N. J.-; a (1120) easy, N. J.
Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 5'5. G. = 3 -89-4 -18. Luster
vitreo-resinous, rather weak. Color white or greenish yellow, when purest;

brown- often dark brown
apple-green, flesh-red, grayish white, yellowish
854 855 856
Figs. 854-857, New Jersey, e (0112), s (1123), u (2ll3), x (3121).
when impure. Streak uncolored. Transparent to opaque. Optically + .
<o = 1-693. e =1712.

Comp. Zinc orthosilicate, Zn 2 Si0 4 or 2ZnO.Si0 2 = Silica 27-0, zinc
oxide 73*0 = 100. Manganese often replaces a considerable part of the zinc
(in troostite), and iron is also present in small amount.
Pyr., etc. B.B. in the forceps glows and fuses with difficulty to a white enamel; the
varieties from New
Jersey fuse from 3 '5 to 4. The powdered mineral on charcoal in R.F.
gives a coating, yellow while hot and white on cooling, which, moistened with solution of
cobalt, and treated in O.F., is colored bright green. With soda the coating is more readily
obtained. Soluble in hydrochloric acid and yields gelatinous silica upon evaporation.
Obs. From Altenberg near Moresnet, Belgium; at Stolberg, near Aix-la-Chapelle.
From Musartut, Greenland; Mindouli, French Congo; Kristiania, Norway. In N. J.
at Mine Hill, Franklin Furnace, and at Sterling Hill, two miles distant. Occurs with zincite
and franklinite, varying in color from white to pale honey-yellow and light green to dark
ash-gray and flesh-red; sometimes in large reddish crystals (troostite). Rare at the Merritt
mine, Socorro Co., N. M.; also at the Sedalia mine, Salida, Col. Named by Levy after
William I., Kinfc of the Netherlands.
PHENACITE.
Tri-rhombohedral. Axis c = 0-6611; rr' (1011) A (1101) = 63 24'.
Crystals commonly rhombohedral in habit, often lenticular in form, the
858 859 860
Miask. Florissant. Col. Mt. Antero, Col., Pfd.
prisms wanting; also prismatic, sometimes terminated by the rhombohedron

of the third series, x (see
further, pp. 110-112).
SILICATES 515
Cleavage: a (1120) distinct; r (1011) imperfect. Fracture conchoidal.

Brittle. H. =
7 '5-8. G. = 2-97-3-00. Luster vitreous. Colorless; also
bright wine-yellow, pale rose-red; brown. Transparent to subtranslucent
Optically + . co = 1'6540; e = 1'6697.
Comp. Beryllium orthosilicate, Be 2 SiO 4 or 2BeO.SiO 2 = Silica 54*45, glu-
cina 45-55 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Alone remains unaltered; with borax fuses with extreme slowness, unless
pulverized, to a transparent glass. With soda affords a white enamel; with more, intu-
mesces and becomes infusible. Dull blue with cobalt solution.
Obs. Occurs at the emerald and chrysoberyl mine of Takovaya, 85 versts east of Eka-
terinburg, Ural Mts.; also in the Ilmen Mts., near Miask, Russia; near Framont in the
Vosges Mts.; Kragero, Norway; at the Cerro del Mercado, Durango, Mexico; crystals
from San Miguel di Piracicaba, Minas Geraes, Brazil.
In Col., on amazon-stone, at Topaz Butte, near Florissant, 16 miles from Pike's Peak;
also on quartz and beryl at Mt. Antero, Chaffee county. Occurs at Chatham, N. H.
Named from (j>va, a deceiver, in allusion to its having been mistaken for quartz.
Trimerite. (Mn,Ca) 2 SiO 4 .Be 2 SiO 4 In thick tabular prismatic crystals, pseudo-
.
hexagonal form and angle. H. = 6-7. G. = 3 '474. Color salmon-pink to

(triclinic) in
nearly colorless in small crystals. Optically. Indices, 1715-1 725. From the Harstig
mine, Wermland, Sweden.
JDioptase. H CuSiO
2 4 or H O.CuO.SiO
2 2. Commonly in prismatic crystals (ss r 0221
A 2021 =84 33$') Also in crystalline aggregates; massive. Cleavage: r (lOTl) per-
fect. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. H. = 5. G. =
3 '28-3 '35. Luster vitreous. Color emerald-green. Opti- 861
cally +. co = 1-654. e = 1-707.
Occurs in druses of well-defined crystals on quartz,
occupying seams in a compact limestone west of the hill
of Altyn-Tiibe in the Kirghiz Steppe, Russia; in the
gold washings at several points in Siberia; atRezbanya,
Hungary. From Copiapo, Chile, on quartz with other
copper ores. In fine crystals at the Mine Mindouli, two
leagues east of Comba, in the French Congo State. Also
at the copper mines of Clifton, Graham Co., and from
Metcalfe and near Florence, Ariz.
Plancheite. H Cu7 (Cu.OH)
2 8 (SiO 3 )i 2 .
Fibrous, often
mammillary. Blue color. G, = 3'4. Found associated with dioptase, etc., at Mindouli,
French Congo.
Friedelite. H 7 (MnCl)Mn 4 Si 4 Oi 6 .
c (0001) also massive,
Crystals commonly tabular \\ ;
cleavable to closely compact. H. =

Color rose-red. From the man-
4-5. G. = 3'07.
ganese mine of Adervielle, vallee du Louron, Hautes Pyrenees, France; from Sjo mine,
Wermland, Sweden; from Franklin Furnace, N. J.
Pyrosmalite. H
7 ((Fe,Mn)Cl)(Fe,Mn) 4 Si 4 Oi 6 Crystals thick hexagonal prisms or.
tabular; also massive, foliated. H. = 4-4'5. G. = 3*06-3 '19. Color blackish green to
pale liver-brown or gray. Index about 1'66. From the iron mines of Nordmark in Werm-
land and at Dannemora, Sweden.
Scapolite Group. Tetragonal-pyramidal

Meionite c = 0-4393 Mizzonite, Dipyre c = 0-4424
Wernerite c = 0-4384 Marialite c = 0-4417
The species of the SCAPOLITE GROUP crystallize in the pyramidal class of

the tetragonal system with nearly the same axial ratio. They are white or
grayish white in color, except when impure, and then rarely of dark color.
Hardness = 5-6*5; G. = 2-5-2-8. In composition they are silicates of

aluminium with calcium and sodium in varying amounts; chlorine is also
often present, sometimes only in traces. Iron, magnesia, potash are not
present unless by reason of inclusions or of alteration. Carbon dioxide and
sulphur trioxide have been noted in certain analyses. It has been suggested
that these radicals enter into the composition in the same manner as the
chlorine.
The Scapolites are analogous to the Feldspars in that they form a series
with a gradual variation in composition, the amount of silica increasing with
the increase of the alkali, soda, being 40 p. c. in meionite and 64 p. c. in mari-
alite. A corresponding increase is observed also in the amount of chlorine
present. Furthermore there is also a gradual change in specific gravity, in
the strength of the double refraction, and in resistance to acids, from the easily
decomposed meionite, with G. = 2-72, to marialite, which is only slightly
attacked and has G. = 2-63. Tschermak has shown that the variation in
composition may be explained by the assumption of two fundamental end
compounds, viz. :
Meionite Ca4Al 6 Si6025 Me

Marialite NaiAlgSigC^Cl Ma
By the isomorphous combination of these compounds the composition of
the species mentioned above may be explained; no sharp line can,
however,
be drawn between them.
Optically the series is characterized by the decrease in the strength of the double refrac-
tion in passing from meionite to marialite. Thus (Lacroix) for meionite e = 0'036'
for typical wernerite 0'03-0-02; for dipyre 0'015.
'
The tetragonal species melilite and gehlenite are near the Sca*polites in
angle. The more common vesuvianite is also related.
MEIONITE.
Tetragonal. Axis c =
In prismatic crystals (Fig. 201, "p. 86),
0-43925.
either clear and glassy or milky white;
also in crystalline grains and massive.
Cleavage: a (100) rather perfect, m (110) somewhat less so. Fracture con-
choidal. Brittle. H. = 5-5-6 G. = 2-70-2-74. Luster vitreous. Color-
less to white. Transparent to translucent; often cracked within. Opticallv
-. co = 1-597; e = 1-560.
Comp. Ca 4 Al 6 Si 6 2 5or4CaO.3Al 2 O 3 .6Si02 = Silica 40-5, alumina 34-4,
hme 25' 1 = 100.
The varieties included here range from
nearly pure meionite to those consisting: of
rneiomte and marialite in the ratio of 3 Ma = 3 1. No sharp line can be
1, i.e., Me : : :
drawn between meionite and the

following species.
Obs. Occurs in small crystals in
cavities, usually in limestone blocks, on Monte
bomma Vesuvius. Also in ejected masses at the Laacher A mineral
See, Germany. in
h^11 m *h Black Foi> est, Germany,
neiS which is like meionite except for a
basal cleavage"\
has u
l
been called pseudomeionite.
WERNERITE. COMMON SCAPOLITE.
Tetragonal-pyramidal. Axis c = 0-4384.

Crystals prismatic, usually
coarse, with uneven faces and often large. The
f the
pyramidal class sometimes shown in the development of the
SILICATES 517
faces z (311)and z x (131). Also massive, granular, or with a faint fibrous

appearance; sometimes columnar.
ee
r
,
101 A Oil = 32 59'.
rr', 111 A 111 = 43 45'.
mr, 110 A 111 = 58 12'.
zz'", 311 A 311 = 29 43'.
Cleavage: a (100) and (110) rather dis- m

tinct, but interrupted.Fracture subconchoidal.
Brittle. H.= 5-6. G. = 2-66-273. Luster
vitreous to pearly externally, inclining to res-
inous; cleavage and cross-fracture surface
vitreous. Color white, gray, bluish, greenish,
and reddish, usually light; streak uncolored.
Transparent to faintly subtranslucent. Optically, co = 1-570. e = 1-549.
Comp. Intermediate between meionite and marialite and correspond-
ing to a molecular combination of these in a ratio 3 1 to 1 2. The silica : :
varies from 46 to 54 p.c., and as its amount increases the soda and chlorine
also increase. Scapolites with silica from 54 p. c. to 60 p. c. are classed with
mizzonite; they correspond to Me Ma from 1 2 to 1 3 and upwards. : : :
The percentage composition for a common compound is as follows:

Me Ma: 3 : 1 SiO 2 46*10 A1 2 O 3 30'48 CaO 19'10 Na O
2 3'54 Cl 1 -01 =100*23
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses easily with intumescence to a white blebby glass giving a strong
sodium flame color. Imperfectly decomposed by hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Characterized by its square form and prismatic cleavage (90) resembles :
feldspar when massive, but has a characteristic fibrous appearance on the cleavage surface;
it is also more fusible, and has a higher specific gravity; also distinguished
by fusibility
with intumescence from pyroxene (which see, p. 478).
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its low refraction; lack of color; rather high
interference-colors reaching the yellows and reds of the first order, sections showing which
extinguish parallel to the cleavage; by the distinct negative axial cross of basal sections
which show the cleavage-cracks crossing at right angles.
Obs. Occurs in metamorphic rocks, crystalline schists, gneisses, amphibolites and
most abundantly in granular limestone near its junction with the associated granitic or
allied rocks; sometimes in beds of magnetite accompanying limestone. It is often asso-
ciated with a light-colored pyroxene, amphibole, garnet, and also with apatite, titanite,
zircon; amphibole is a less common associate than pyroxene, but in some cases has resulted
from the alteration of pyroxene. Scapolite has been^sjjown also to be frequently. a com-
ponent of basic igneous rocks, especially those rich in plaglOuLiuLj uiwitaining much lime;
it is regarded as a secondary product through a certain kind of. alteration. The scapolites
are easily altered; pseudormorphs of mica, more rarely other minerals, are com-
mon.
Prominent localities are at Pargas, Finland, where it occurs in limestone; Arendal in
Norway, and Malsjo in Wermland, Sweden, where it occurs with magnetite in limestone.
Passauite is from Obernzell, near Passau, in Bavaria. The pale blue or gray scapolite from
Lake Baikal, Siberia, is called glaucolite. In the United States, occurs in Ver., at Marl-
borough, massive. In Mass., at Bolton; at Chelmsford. In N. Y. in Orange Co., Essex
Co., Lewis Co.; Grasse Lake, Jefferson Co.; at Gouverneur, in limestone. In N. J., at
Franklin and Newton. In Pa., at the Elizabeth mine, French Creek, Chester Co.
In Canada, at Calumet Island, massive; at Grenville; .Templeton; Wakefield, Ottawa
Co.; at Bedford and Bathurst, Ont Scapolite rocks occur at several points.
:
Mizzonite. Dipyre. Here are included scapolites with 54 to 57 p. c. SiO 2 correspond- ,
ing to a molecular combination from Me Ma = 1 2 to Me Ma = 1:3. Mizzonite : : :
occurs in clear crystals in ejected masses on Mte. Somma, Vesuvius.

Dipyre occurs in elongated square prisms, often slender, sometimes large and coarse, in
limestone and crystalline schists, chiefly from the Pyrenees; also in diorite at Bamle, Nor-
way; Saint-Nazaire, France; Algeria. Couseranite from the Pyrenees is a more or less
altered form of dipyre.
DESCRIPTIVE MINERALOGY
Theoretically Na4 Al 3 Si 9O 24 Cl,

see p. 516. Indices, 1- 541-1- 554. The
Marialite = 1
actual iinerkl corresponds
to Me : Ma : 4. It occurs in a basalt tuff, at Pianura,
near Naples.
In small tetragonal crystals. H. 6. G. = = 2-545-

Sarcolite. (Ca,Na,) 3 Al2 (SiO 4 ) 3
.
2-932. Color flesh-red. Indices, 1 '640-1 '656. From Monte Somma, Vesuvius.
MELILITE.
Tetragonal. Axis c
= 0-4548. Usually in short square prisms (a (100))
or octagonal prisms (a, m
(110)), also in tetragonal
tables.
a (100) indistinct. Fracture conchoidal to
Cleavage: c (001) distinct;
uneven. Brittle. H. = 5. G.
= 2-9-3-10. Luster vitreous, inclining to
resinous. Color white, pale yellow, greenish, reddish, brown. Pleochroism
distinct in yellow varieties. Sometimes exhibits optical anomalies. Opti-
cally -. co = 1-634.
= 1-629.
Comp. Perhaps R 12 R 4 Si 9 036 or Na2 (Ca,Mg)i 1 (Al,Fe) 4 (Si0 4 )9 for meli-

lite. If Ca Mg = 8:3, and Al Fe = 1 1, the percentage composition is:
:
: :
Silica 37-7, alumina 7'1, iron sesquioxide 11-2, lime 31-3, magnesia 8'4, soda 4'3
= 100. Potassium is also present.
The composition of the melilite-gehlenite group can be explained as isomorphous mix-
tures of the three compounds, sarcolite, 3CaO.Al 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 or soda-sarcolite 3Na 2 O.Al 2 3 O .
3SiO 2 dkermanite, 8CaO.4MgO.9SiO 2 velardeiiite, 2CaO.Al 2 O 3 .SiO 2

; ;
The last is noted in
.
large amount in gehlenite from the Velardena mining district,

Mexico.
Artif. Melilite has been formed artificially by fusing together its constituent
oxides. It is found in slags and has been produced in various artificial magmas.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 3 to a yellowish or greenish glass. With the fluxes reacts for
iron. Soluble in hydrochloric acid and yields gelatinous silica upon evaporation.
Micro. Distinguished in thin sections by its moderate refraction; very low interfer-
ence-colors, showing often the "ultra blue" (Capo di Bove); parallel extinction; negative
character; usual development in tables parallel to the base and very common "peg struc-
ture" due to parallel rod-like inclusions penetrating the crystal from the basal planes
inward: this, however, is not always easily seen.
Obs. Melilite is a component of certain igneous rocks formed from magmas very low
in silica, rather deficient in alkalies, and containing considerable lime and alumina. In
such cases melilite appears to crystallize in the place of the more acid plagioclase.
Melilite of yellow and brownish colors is found at Capo di Bove, near Rome, in leucito-
phyre with nephelite, augite, hornblende; at Vesuvius in dull yellow crystals (somervillite) ',
not uncommon in certain basic eruptive rocks, as the melilite-basalts of Hochbohl near Owen
in Wurttemberg, of the Swabian Alp, of Gorlitz, the Erzgebirge, Germany; also in the
nephelite basalts of the Hegau, of Oahu, Hawaiian Islands, etc.; perovskite is a common
associate. Occurs as chief constituent of rock on Beaver Creek, Gunnison Co., Col. Com-
mon in furnace slags. Melilite is named from n f \t, honey, in allusion to the color.
Humboldtilite occurs in cavernous blocks on Monte Somma, Vesuvius, with greenish mica,
also apatite, augite; the crystals are often rather large, and covered with a calcareous coat-
ing; less common in transparent lustrous crystals with nephelite, sarcolite, etc., in an
augitic rock. Zurlite is impure humboldtilite. Deeckeite is a pseudomorph after melilite
with the composition (H,K,Na) 2 (Mg,Ca)(Al,Fe) 2 (Si 2 O 6 )5.9H2 O, found in a melilite basalt
from the Kaiserstuhl, Baden, Germany.
Cebollite. H
2 Ca5Al<>Si 3 Oi6. Orthorhombic (?). Fibrous. H. =5. G. = 2'96. Color
white to greenish gray. Indices, 1 '59-1 '63. Fusible at 5. Soluble in acids. Found as
an alteration product of melilite near Cebolla Creek, Gunnison Co., Col.
Gehlenite. Ca3 Al2 Si2 Oi usually short square prisms. Axis c = 0-4001.
= 2 -9-3 '07. Different shadesCrystals
.
^
y- of grayish green to liver-brown. From Mount Monzoni,
m the Fassatal, in Tyrol, Austria. From Velardena
mining Mexico.
district,
FUGGERITE Corresponds to a member of the gehlenite-akermanite series, 3 ak : 10 geh.
From Monzonite of Monzonital, Tyrol, Austria.
SILICATES 519
AKERMANITE. Tetragonal, isomorphous with melilite and gehlenite. Found in certain
as. See further under Melilite.
VESUVIANITE. Idocrase.

ce, 001 A 101 = 28 15'. pp 111 A Til = 50 39'.
cp, 001 A 111 = 37 13|'. 311 A 311 = 31 38'.
ct, 001 A 331 = 66 18'.
865 866 867
Zermatt Sandford, Me.
Often in crystals, prismatic or pyramidal. Also massive; columnar,

straightand divergent, or irregular; granular massive; cryptocrystalline.
Cleavage: m (110) not very distinct; a (100) and c (001) still less so.
Fracture subconchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 6*5. G. = 3 '35-3 '45.
Luster vitreous; often inclining to resinous. Color brown to green, and the
latter frequently bright and clear; occasionally sulphur-yellow, and also pale
blue. Streak white. Subtransparent to faintly subtranslucent. Dichroism
not usually strong. Optically also -+- rarely.
; Birefringence very low.
Sometimes abnormally biaxial. Indices variable, from 1715 to 1720.
Comp. A basic calcium-aluminium silicate, but of uncertain formula;
perhaps Ca6[Al(OH,F)]Al 2 (SiO 4 )5. Ferric iron replaces part of the aluminium
and magnesium the calcium. Fluorine and titanium may be present.
Another general formula has been proposed, RtCayALzSieO^, in which R 4
may be Ca2 ,(AlOH) 2 ,(A10 2 H) 4 or H 4 ,

.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 3 with intumescence to a greenish or brownish glass. With
the fluxes gives reactions for iron, and some varieties a strong manganese reaction. Cyprine,
a blue variety, gives a reaction for copper with salt of phosphorus. Partially decomposed
by hydrochloric acid, and completely when the mineral has been previously ignited.
Diff. Characterized by its tetragonal form and easy fusibility. Resembles some
brown varieties of garnet, tourmaline, and epidote.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its high refraction producing a very strong
*
relief and extremely low birefringence;
its also in general by its color, pleochroism, and
uniaxial negative character; the latter, on account of the low birefringence, being difficult
to determine. The low birefringence, however, aids in distinguishing it from epidote, with
which at times it may be confounded.
Obs. Vesuvianite was first found among the ancient ejections of Vesuvius and the
dolomitic blocks of Monte Somma, whence its name. It commonly occurs as a contact
mineral from the alteration of impure limestones, then usually associated with lime garnet
(grossularite), phlogopite, diopside, wollastonite; also epidote; also in serpentine, chlorite
schist, gneiss and related rocks.
Prominent localities are Vesuvius; the Albani Mts.; in Switzerland at Zermatt, etc.;
the Mussa Alp in the Ala valley, in Piedmont, Italy; Mt. Monzoni in the Fassatal, Austria;
at Orawitza and Dognaczka, Hungary; Haslau near Eger in Bohemia (egeran); near
Jordansmiihl, Silesia; on the Vilui river, near Lake Baikal, Siberia (sometimes called wiluite
or viluite, like the grossular garnet from the same region); Achmatovsk, Ural Mts.; in
"
Norway; at Arendal, colophonite" ; at Egg, near Christiansand; at Morelos, Mexico.
In North America, in Me. at Phippsburg and Rumford; at Sandford. In N. H., at
Warren with cinnamon-stone. In N. Y., near Amity. In N. J., at Newton. In Lewis
and Clark Co., Mon. In Cal. near San Carlos in Inyo Co.; at Crestmore, Riverside Co.
In Canada, at Calumet Falls, Litchfield, Pontiac Co.; at Grenville in calcite; at Templeton,
Ottawa Co., Quebec. A lavender-colored variety, known as mangan-vesuvianite comes
from near Black Lake, Quebec.
Californite is a closely compact variety of an olive-green to a grass-green color from
Siskiyou, Fresno and Tulare Cos., Cal.
Zircon Group. .
Tetragonal
Zircon ZrSi0 4 c = Q'6404
Thorite ThSiO 4 c = 0-6402
This group includes the orthosilicates of zirconium and thorium, both
alike in tetragonal crystallization, axial ratio and crystalline habit.
.These species are sometimes regarded as oxides and then included in the RUTILE GROUP
(p. 425), to which they approximate closely in form. A similar form belongs also to the
tantalate, Tapiolite, and to the phosphate, Xenotime; further, compound groups consisting
of crystals of Xenotime and Zircon in
parallel position are not uncommon (Fig. 462, p. 173) .
ZIRCON.
ee', 101 A Oil = 44 50' mp 110 A 111 = 47 50'.
ee", 101 A 101 = 65 16'. mu, 110 A 331 = 20 12'
pp', 111 A 111 = 56 40'. xx, 311 A 311 = 32 57'.
uu' 331 A 331 83 9' ax, 100 A 311 = 31 43'.
871 872 873
Frequently minerals which, like vesuvianite, melilite and

zoisite, are doubly refract-
ing but of extremely low birefringence and
possibly (where they are positive for one color
SILICATES 521
Twins: tw. pi. e (101), geniculated twins like rutile (Fig. 412, p. 166).
Commonly in square prisms, sometimes pyramidal. Also in irregular forms
and grains.
875 876 877
c
'Pi
Colorado
Cleavage: m p (111) less distinct. Fracture conchoidal.

(110) imperfect;
Brittle. H. =
G. = 4-68-470 most common, but varying widely to 4 '2
7*5.
and 4 '86. Luster adamantine. Colorless, pale yellowish, grayish, yellowish
green, brownish yellow, reddish brown. Streak uncolored. Transparent to
subtranslucent and opaque. Optically +. Birefringence high, co = 1-9239,
e = 1*9682, Ceylon. Sometimes abnormally biaxial.

Hyacinth is the orange, reddish and brownish transparent kind used for gems. Jargon
isa name given to the colorless jor smoky zircons of Ceylon, in allusion to the fact that
while resembling the diamond in luster, they are comparatively worthless; thence came
the name zircon.
Comp. ZrSi0 4 or Zr0 2 .SiO 2 = Silica 32-8, zirconia 67-2 = 100. A

little iron (Fe2O 3 ) is usually present.
Pyr., etc. Infusible; the colorless varieties are unaltered, the red become colorless,
while dark-colored varieties are made white; some varieties glow and increase in density
by ignition. Not perceptibly acted upon by salt of phosphorus. In powder decomposed
when fused with soda on the platinum wire, and if the product is dissolved in dilute hydro-
chloric acid it gives the orange color characteristic of zirconia when tested with turmeric
paper. Not acted upon by acids except in fine powder with concentrated sulphuric acid.
Decomposed by fusion with alkaline carbonates and bisulphates.
Diff. Characterized by the prevailing square pyramid or square prism; also by its
adamantine luster, hardness, high specific gravity, and infusibility; the diamond is optically
isotropic.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its very high relief; very high interference-
colors, which approach white of the higher order except in very thin sections; positive
uniaxial character. It is distinguished from cassiterite and rutile only by its lack of color,
and from the 1-itter also in many cases by method of occurrence.
Artif . Zircon has been prepared artificially by heating zirconium oxide with quartz
in gaseous silicon fluoride.
Obs. A
common accessory constituent of igneous rocks, especially those of the more
acid feldspathic groups and particularly the kinds derived from magmas containing much
soda, as granite, syenite, diorite, etc. It is one of the earliest minerals to crystallize from a
cooling magma. Is generally present in minute crystals, but in pegmatitic facies often in
large and well-formed crystals. Occurs more rarely elsewhere, as in granular limestone,
chloritic and other schists; gneiss; sometimes in iron-ore beds. Crystals are common in
most auriferous sands. Sometimes found in volcanic rocks, probably in part as inclusions
derived from older rocks.
Zircon in distinct crystals is so common in the pegmatitic forms of the nephelite-syenite
but negative for another), do not show a gray color between crossed nicols but a curious
blue, at times an intense Berlin blue, which is quite distinct from the other blues of the color
scale and is known as the "ultra blue."
and augite-syenite of southern Norway (with segirite, etc.) that this rock there and else-
"
where has sometimes been called a zircon-syenite."
Found in alluvial sands in Ceylon; in the gold regions of the Ural Mts.; in Norway, at
Laurvik, at Arendal, in the iron mines, at Fredriksyarn, and in veins in the augite-syenite
of the Langesund fiord; Pfitschtal, Tyrol, Austria; in Germany in lava at Niedermendig in
the Eifel, red crystals; from Madagascar; from Minas Geraes, Brazil.
In North America, in Me., at Litchfield; in N. Y., in Moriah, Essex Co., cinnamon-
red; near the outlet of Two Ponds, Orange Co., with scapolite, pyroxene and titantite; at
Warwick, chocolate-brown, near Amity; in St. Lawrence Co.. in the town of Hammond;
at Rossie, Fine, Pitcairn. In Pa., near Reading. In N. C., abundant in the gold sands of
Burke, McDowell, Polk, Rutherford, Henderson, and other counties. In Col., with astro-
phyllite, etc., in the Pike's Peak region in El Paso Co.; at Cheyenne Mt. In CaL, in auri
ferous gravels.
In Canada, at Grenville, Argenteuil Co.; in Templeton and adjoining townships in
Ottawa Co., Quebec; in Renfrew Co., sometimes very large; in North Burgess, Lanark Co.
Use. Zircon in its transparent varieties serves frequently as a gem stone; also as a
source of zirconium oxide used in the manufacture of the incandescent gas mantles.
Malacon is an altered zircon. Cyrtolite is related but contains uranium, yttrium and
other rare elements.
Naegite is apparently zircon with yttrium, niobium-tantalum, thorium, and uranium
oxides. Occurs in spheroidal aggregates near Takoyama, Mino, Japan. Color green, gray
brown. H. = 7'5. G. = 4'1.
Thorite. Thorium silicate, ThSiO 4 like zircon in form; usually hydrated, black in
,
color, and then with G. = 4 '5-5; also orange-yellow and- with G. = 5 '19-5 -40 (orangite).
From the Brevik region and Arendal, Norway.
Auerlite. Like zircon in form; supposed to be a silico-phosphate of thorium. Hender-
son Co., N. C.
Danburite-Topaz Group. Orthorhombic. RR 2 (Si0 4 ) 2 or (RO)RSi0 4

Danburite CaB 2 (Si0 4 )2 a : b c = G'5444 0-4807
Topaz [Al(F,OH) 2 ]AlSiO 4 a : b c = 0-5285 0-4770
Andalusite (A10)AlSiO 4 J b a f c : :
= 0'5070 0-4749
or a b c : :
= 0'9861 0-7025
Sillimanite Al 2 SiO 5 Orthorhombic a :b = 0-970 : 1

Cyanite Al 2 Si0 5 -
Triclinic
a b : : c 0-8994 : 1 :
07090; a = 90 5J', ft
= 101 2' 7 = 105 44J'.
DANBURITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c : 1 0-4807.
=_0'5444 :
878 mm'", 110 A 110 = 57 8'. dd', 101 A 101 = 82 53'

II', 120 A 120 = 85 8'. ww', 041 A 041 = 125 3'.'
Habit prismatic, resembling topaz. Also in indistinct

embedded crystals, and disseminated masses.
Cleavage: c (001) very indistinct. Fracture uneven
to subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 7-7-25. G. = 2*97-
in
3-02. Color pale wine-yellow to
colorless, yellowish white,
dark wine-yellow, yellowish brown. Luster vitreous to
greasy, on crystal surfaces brilliant.
Transparent to
translucent. Streak white. Optically - 2V = 88 .
a = 1-632. ft
= 1-634. 7 = 1-636.
i or CaO.B 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 = Silica 48'8, boron trioxide
28-4
SILICATES 523
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses at 3'5 to a colorless glass, and imparts a green color to the O. F.
(boron). Not decomposed by hydrochloric acid, but sufficiently attacked for the solution
to give the reaction of boric acid with turmeric paper. When previously ignited gelatinizes
with hydrochloric acid. Phosphoresces on heating, giving a reddish light.
Obs. Occurs at Danbury, Conn., with microcline and oligoclase in dolomite. At
Russell, N. Y., in fine crystals. On the Piz Valatscha, the northern spur of Mt. Skopi
south of Dissentis in eastern Switzerland, in slender prismatic crystals and elsewhere in
Switzerland. In crystals from Takachio, Hinga, and from Obira, Bungo, Japan. From Mt.
Bity and Maharitra, Madagascar.
BARSOWITE. This doubtful species, occurring with blue corundum in the Ural Mts., is
by some authors classed with danburite; composition CaAl 2 Si 2 Q8 like anorthite.
TOPAZ.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0-52854 : 1 : 047698.
879 880 881 882
^
I
the form probably the same; and Des Cloizeaux showed that the optical characters were
those of topaz.
Comp. (AlF) 2 SiO 4 usually containing hydroxyl and then [A1(F,OH)] 2

;
SiO 4 or as given on p. 522. The former requires Silica 32 '6, alumina 55 '4,
fluorine 207 = 1087, deduct (O = 2F) 87 = 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible. Fused in the closed tube, with potassium bisulphate gives
the characteristic fluorine reactions. With cobalt solution the pulverized mineral gives a
fine blue on heating. Only partially attacked by sulphuric acid. A variety of topaz from
Brazil, when heated, assumes a pink or red hue, resembling
the Balas ruby.
Diff. Characterized by its prismatic crystals with angles of 56 (124) or 87 (93);
also by the perfect basal cleavage; hardness; infusibility; yields fluorine B.B.
Artif. Topaz has been made artificially by heating a mixture of silica and aluminium
fluoride and then igniting this mixture in silicon fluoride gas.
Obs. Topaz occurs especially in the highly acid igneous rocks of the granite family,
as granite and rhyolite, in veins and cavities, where it appears to be the result of fumarole
action after the crystallization of the magma; sometimes also in the surrounding schists,
gneisses, etc., as a result of such action. In these occurrences often accompanied by fluor-
tie, cassiterite, tourmaline. Frequently occurs in tin-bearing pegmatites. Topaz alters
aesily into a compact mass of muscovite.
Fine topaz comes from Russia from the Ural Mts., from Alabashka, in the region of
Ekaterinburg; from Miask in the Ilmen Mts.; also the gold-washings on the River Sanarka
in Govt. Orenburg; in Nerchinsk, beyond Lake Baikal, in the Adun-Chalon Mts., etc.; in
the province of Minas Geraes, Brazil, at Ouro Preto and Villa Rica, of deep yellow color; in
Germany at the tin mines of Zinnwald and Ehrenfriedersdorf, and smaller crystals at
Schneckenstein and Altenberg; sky-blue crystals in Cairngorm, Aberdeenshire, Scotland;
the Mourne mountains, Ireland; on the island of Elba. Physalite occurs in crystals of
great size, at Fossum, Norway; Finbo, Sweden. Pycnite is from the tin mine of Altenberg
in Saxony; also of Schlackenwald, Zinnwald, etc. Fine crystals occur at Durango, Mexico,
with tin ore; at San Luis Potosi in rhyolite. Mt. Bischoff, Tasmania, with tin ores;
similarly in New South Wales. In Japan in pegmatite from Otani-yama, Province of Omi,
near Kioto.
In the United States, in Me., at Stoneham, in albitic granite. In Conn., at Trumbull,
with fluorite; at Willimantic. In N. C., at Crowder's Mountain. In Col., in fine crystals
colorless or pale blue from the Pike's Peak
region; at Nathrop, Chaff ee Co., in wine-colored
crystals with spessartite in lithophyses in rhyolite; similarly in the rhyolite of Chalk Mt.
In Texas in fine crystals at Streeter. In Utah, in fine transparent colorless crystals with
quartz and sanidine in the rhyolite of the Thomas Range, 40 miles north of Sevier Lake.
In Col. in Ramona Co.
The name topaz is from ro-n-aôs, an island in the Red Sea, as stated by Pliny. But
the topaz of Pliny was not the true "
topaz, as it yielded to the file." Topaz was included
by Pliny and earlier writers, as well as by many later, under the name chrysolite.
Use. As a gem stone.
ANDALUSITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0-9861 : 1 : 070245.
885 886 mm'", 110 A 110 89 12'.
88' Oil A Oil 70 10'.
Usually in coarse prismatic forms, the

prisms nearly square in form. Massive,
imperfectly columnar; sometimes radiated
and granular.
Cleavage: m
(110) distinct, sometimes
perfect (Brazil); a (100) less perfect;
b (010) in traces. Fracture uneven, sub-
conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 7-5. = 3'16 G
-3 '20. Luster vitreous; often weak. Color
whitish, rose-red, flesh-red, violet, pearl-gray, reddish brown, olive-green.
SILICATES 525
Streak uncolored. Transparent to opaque, usually sub translucent. Pleo-

chroism strong in some colored varieties. Absorption strong, > Y > Z. X
Sections normal to an optic axis are idiophanous or show the polarization-
brushes distinctly (p. 288). Optically Ax. pi. .
b (010).
||
Bx J_ c (001). 2V = 85. a = T632. 887
= 1*638. 7 = 1-643.
Var. Chiastolite, or Made is a variety in stout crystals
having the axis and angles of a different color from the rest,
owing to a regular arrangement of carbonaceous impurities
through the interior, and hence exhibiting a colored cross, or
a tesselated appearance in a transverse section. Fig. 888
shows sections of a crystal. Viridine is a green variety con- 100
taining some iron and manganese from near Darmstadt, Ger-

*z
many.
Comp. Al 2 SiO 5 = (A1O) AlSiO 4 or Al2 O 3 .SiO 2 =

Silica 36-8, alumina 63*2 = 100. Manganese is
sometimes present, as in manganandalusite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible. With cobalt solution gives a
blue color after ignition. Not decomposed by acids. De-
composed on fusion with caustic alkalies and alkaline carbonates.
Diff. Characterized by the nearly square prism, plepchroism, hardness, infusibility;
reaction for alumina B.B.
Micro. Distinguished in thin sections by its high relief; low interference-colors,
which are only slightly above those of quartz; negative biaxial character; negative exten-
sion of the crystals (diff from sillimanite) rather distinct prismatic cleavage and the con-
.
;
stant parallel extinction .(diff. from pyroxenes, which have also greater birefringence); also
by its characteristic arrangement of impurities when these are present (Fig. 888). The
pleochroism, which is often lacking, is, when present, strong and characteristic.
888
Obs. Most common in argillaceous schist, or other scnists imperfectly crystalline;

also in gneiss, mica schist and related rocks; rarely in connection with serpentine. The
variety chiastolite is commonly a contact mineral in clay-slates, e.g., adjoining granitic dikes.
Sometimes associated with sillimanite with parallel axes.
Found in Spain, in Andalusia; in Austria in the Tyrol, Lisens Alp; in Saxony, at Brauns-
dorf ; Bavaria, at Wunsiedel, etc. In Brazil, province of Minas Geraes, in fine crystals and
as rolled pebbles. Remarkable crystals of chiastolite from Mt. Howden, near Bimbowrie,
South Australia.
In North America, in Me., at Standish. N. H., White Mtn. Notch; Mass., at West-
ford; Lancaster, both varieties; Sterling, chiastolite. Conn., at Litchfield and Washing-
ton. Pa., in Delaware Co., near Leiperville, large crystals; Upper Providence.
Named from Andalusia, the first locality noted. The name made is from the Latin
macula, a spot. Chiastolite is from X*O"TOS, arranged diagonally, and hence from chi,
the Greek name for the letter X.
Use. When clear and transparent may serve as a gem stone.
Guarinite. 2(K,Na) 2 O.8CaO.5(Al,Fe,Ce) 2 O 3 .10SiO2 Orthorhombic. In minute thin
.
tables, flattened b (010), nearly tetragonal in form.

||
H. = 6'5. G. = 2 -9-3-3. Color
sulphur-yellow, honey-yellow. Pleochroic, canary-yellow to colorless. Found in a grayish
trachyte on Mte. Somma, Vesuvius. Axial ratio and optical properties agree closely with
those of danburite.
SILLIMANITE. Fibrolite.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b = 0'970 1. mm'" 110 A 110 = 88 15',

: :
hh' 230 A 230 = 69. Prismatic faces striated and rounded. Commonly in
slender not distinctly terminated; often in close parallel groups,
long crystals
passing into fibrous and columnar massive forms;
sometimes radiating.
Cleavage: b (010) very perfect. Fracture uneven.
H. = 6-7. G. =
3-23-3-24. Luster vitreous, approaching subadamantine. Color hair-brown,
white, grayish green, pale olive-green. Streak un-
grayish brown, grayish
colored. Transparent to translucent. Pleochroism sometimes distinct.
Optically +. Double refraction strong. Ax. pi. b (010). Bx J_ c (001). ||
= 20 (approx.).
Dispersion p > v. Axial angle and indices variable. 2V
a = 1-638. = 1-642. 7 = 1*653.
Comp. Al 2 SiO 5 = (A10)AlSi0 4 ,
like andalusite. Silica 36'8, alumina
63'2 = 100.
Sillimanite is the most stable of the three aluminium silicates. Both andalusite and
cyanite are converted into sillimanite when strongly heated.
Pyr. Same as andalusite.
Diff. Characterized by its fibrous or columnar form; perfect cleavage; infusibility;
reaction for alumina.
Micro. In thin sections recognized by its form, usually with transverse fractures;
parallel extinction; high interference-colors.
Artif. Sillimanite has been made, artificially by fusing its oxides together. Both
andalusite and cyanite are converted into sillimanite when strongly heated.
Obs. Often present in the quartz of gneisses and sometimes granites in very slender,
minute prisms commonly aggregated together and sometimes intergrown with andalusite;
iolite is also a common associate; rarely as a contact mineral; often occurs with corundum.
Observed in many localities, thus near Moldau in Bohemia; at Fassa in Tyrol, Austria
(bucholziie) ;
in the Carnatic, India, with corundum (fibrolite} at Bodenmais, Bavaria; ;
Freiberg, Saxony; in France, near Pontgibaud and other points in Auvergne; forms rolled
masses in the diamantiferous sands of Minas Geraes, Brazil.
In the United States, in Mass., at Worcester. In Conn.; near Norwich, with zircon,
monazite and corundum; at Willimantic. In N. Y., at Yorktown, Westchester Co.; in
Monroe, Orange Co., (monrolite). In Pa., at Chester on the Delaware, near Queensbury
forge; in Delaware Co.; Del., at Brandywine Springs. With corundum in N. C.
Named fibrolite from the fibrous massive variety; sillimanite. after Prof. Benjamin
Silliman of New Haven (1779-1864).
Bamlite, xenolite, worthite probably belong to sillimanite; the last is altered.
CYANITE. Kyanite. Disthene.
Triclinic. Axes a 0-8994 1 07090; a = 90 5|',

: b : c = = 101 2',
: :
7 = 105 44i'. ac,

= 78 30'; be, 010 A 001 = 86 45'.
100 A 001
889 Usually in long bladed crystals, rarely terminated. Also
>, ^ coarsely bladed columnar to subfibrous.
Cleavage a (100) very perfect b (010) less perfect also
:
; ;
parting c (001). H. = 5-7 -25; the least, 4-5, on a (100)

1 1
caxis; 6-7 on a (100)

|
edge a (100)/ c (001); 7 on ||
b (010). G. = 3-56-3-67. Luster vitreous to pearly.

Color blue, white; blue along the center of the blades or
crystals with white margins; also gray, green, black.
Streak uncolored. Translucent to transparent. Pleo-
chroism distinct in colored varieties. Optically .
Ax. pi. nearly 1 a (100) and inclined to

edge a/b on a about 30, and
about 7i on 6 (010), cf. Fig. 889. 2V = 82. a = 1-717. B = 1722.
7 = 1'729.
SILICATES 527
Comp. Empirical formula Al 2 SiO 6 or Al 2 3 .Si0 2 like andalusite and ,
sillimanite. Perhaps a basic metasilicate, (A10) 2 Si0 3 .
Pyr., etc. Same as for andalusite. At a high temperature cyanite assumes the physical
characters of sillimanite.
Diff. Characterized by the bladed form; common blue color; varying hardness; in-
fusibility; reaction -for alumina.
Obs. Occurs principally in gneiss and mica schist (both the ordinary variety with
muscoyite and also that with paragonite) often accompanied by garnet and sometimes by
staurolite; also in eclogite schist. It is often associated with corundum.
Found in transparent crystals at Monte Campione in the St. Gothard region in Switzer-
land in paragonite schist; on Mt. Greiner, Zillertal, and in the Pfitschtal (rhcetizite, white)
in Tyrol, Austria; in eclogite of the Saualpe, Carinthia; Horrsjoberg in Wermland, Sweden;
Villa Rica, Brazil, etc.
In Mass., at Chesterfield, with garnet in mica schist. In Conn., at Litchfield, Washing-
ton, Canton, Barkhamstead, etc. In Ver., at Thetford. In Pa., in Chester Co. and in
Delaware Co. In Va., Buckingham Co. In N. C., with rutile, lazulite, etc., at Crowder's
Mt., Gaston Co.; in Gaston and Rutherford counties associated with corundum, damourite;
beautiful clear green in Yancey Co. Named from KVCXVOS, blue.
Datolite Group. Monoclinic

ii in ii in
Basic Orthosilicates. HRRSiO or R R2(SiO ) 2 Oxygen ratio for R Si = 3 2.
5 3 5 . : :
ii in
R= Ca,Be,Fe, chiefly; R
= Boron, the yttrium (and cerium) metals, etc.
a
Datolite 0'6345 1 1-2657 89 51
HCaBSiO 5 or Ca(BOH)SiO
Homilite 0'6249 1-2824 89 21'
CaaFeBsSisOig or Ca2 Fe(BO) 2 (Si0 4 ) 2
2a 4c ft
Euclase 0'6474 1 1-3330 79 44'
HBeAlSi0 5 or Be(A10H)Si0 4 a
Gadolinite 0'6273 1 T3215 89 26*'
Be 2 FeY2 Si2 Oi or Be 2 Fe(YO) 2 (Si0 4 ) 2
The DATOLITE GROUP are usually regarded as basic ortho-
species of the
silicates,the formulas being taken in the second form given above. They all
crystallize in the monoclinic system, and all but Euclase conform closely in
axial ratio; with the latter there is also a distinct morphological relationship.
DATOLITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 0'6345 : 1 :
1-2657; ft
= 89 51^'.
mm'", 110 A HO = 64 47'. en, 001 A = 111 66 57'.
ac, 100 A 001 = 89 51'. cm, 001 A = 110 89 53'.
ax, 100 A 101 = 45 0'. ce, 001 A = Tl2 49 49'.

012 A 012 = 64 39*'. nn', 111 A 111 = 59 4*'.
Oil A Oil = 103 23'. ce', Tl2 A U2 = 48 19*'.
Crystals varied in habit;

usually short prismatic with either (110) or m
wx (Oil) predominating; sometimes tabular
x (201); also of other types, ||
and often highly modified (Figs. 890-893). Also botryoidal and globular,
having a columnar structure; divergent and radiating; sometimes massive,
granular to compact and crypto-crystalline.
Cleavage not observed. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle.
H =5-5-5. G. = 2-9-3-0. Luster vitreous, rarely subresinous on a surface of

or ame-
fracture. Color white; sometimes grayish, pale green, yellow, red,
olive-green or honey-yellow. Streak white. Trans-
thystine, rarely dirty
890 891
Bergen Hill
parent to translucent; rarely opaque

white. Optically -. 2V = 74. a
1-625. |8
= 1-653. 7 = 1*669.
893
Bergen Hill Andreasberg

Var. 1. Ordinary. In glassy crystals of varied habit, usually with a greenish tinge.
The angles in the prismatic and clinodome zones vary but little/e. g., 110 A 110 = 64 47,
while Oil A Oil = 66 37', etc. 2. Compact massive. White opaque cream-colored, pink;
breaking with the surface of porcelain or Wedge wood ware. From the Lake Superior region.
3. Betryoidal; Botryolite. Radiated columnar, having a botryoidal surface, and containing
more water than the crystals, but optically identical.
Comp. A basic of boron and calcium;

orthosilicate empirically
HCaBSiO5 or H 0.2CaO.B O3.2SiO
2 2 this may be written Ca(BOH)Si0 4
2 ;
=
Silica 37-6, boron trioxide 21-8, lime 35-0, water 5'6 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives off much water. B.B. fuses at 2 with intumescence
to a clear glass, coloring the flame bright green. Gelatinizes with hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Characterized by its glassy, greenish, complex crystals; easy fusibility and
green flame B. B.
Obs. Datolite is found chiefly as a secondary mineral in veins and cavities in basic
eruptive rocks, often associated with calcite, prehnite and various zeolites; sometimes
associated with danburite; also in gneiss, diorite, and serpentine; in metallic veins; some-
times in beds of iron ore. Found in Scotland, in trap, at the Kilpatrick Hills, etc.; in
a bed of magnetite at Arendal in Norway (botryolite) at Uto in Sweden; at Andreasberg,
;
Germany, in diabase and in veins of silver ores; in Rhenish Bavaria (the humboMtite) at ;
the Seisser Alp, Tyrol, Austria, and at Theiss, near Claussen, Hungary; in geodes in amygda-
SILICATES 529
loid; in Italy, in granite at Baveno near Lago Maggiore, at Toggiana in Modena, in serpen-
tine, at Monte Catini in Tuscany.
In the United States not uncommon with the diabase of Conn, and Mass. Thus at
the Rocky Hill quarry, Hartford, Conn.; at Middlefield Falls and Roaring Brook, Conn.;
Westfield, Mass. In N. J., at Bergen Hill and Great Notch in splendid crystals; at Pater-
son, Passaic Co. Both crystals and the opaque compact variety, in the Lake Superior region.
Named from daTeurdai, to divide, alluding to the granular structure of a massive
variety.
Homilite. (Ca,Fe) 3 2 Si 2 OiBor (Ca,Fe) 3 (BO) 2 (SiO 4 )2. Crystals often tabular
H. = 5. G. =
||
c (001); angles near those of datolite. 3'38. Color black, blackish brown.
Index about T68. Found on Stoko and other islands, in the Langesund fiord, Norway.
Euclase. HBeAlSiO 5
or Be(AlOH)SiO 4 In prismatic crystals. Cleavage || 6 (010)
.
perfect. H. = 7*5. G. =
3'05-3'10. Luster vitreous. Colorless to pale green or blue.
Optically +.
= 1'655. From Brazil, in the province of Minas Geraes; in the aurif-
erous sands of the Orenburg district, southern Ural Mts., near the river Sanarka; in the
Glossglockner region of the Austrian Alps; from Epprechtstein, Fichtelgebirge, Bavaria.
Gadolinite. Be 2 FeY 2 Si 2 Oi or Be 2 Fe(YO) 2 (SiO 4 ) 2 Crystals, often prismatic, rough
.
and coarse; commonly in masses. Cleavage none. Fracture conchoidal or splintery.

Brittle. H. = 6'5-7. G. = 4'0-4'5; normally 4'36-4 '47 (anisotropic), 4'24-4 '29 (isotropic
and amorphous from alteration). Luster vitreous to greasy. Color black, greenish black,
also brown. From near Falun and Ytterby, Sweden; Hittero, Norway; also in Llano Co.,
Texas, in nodular masses and rough crystals, sometimes up to 40 or 60 pounds in weight.
Crystals from Kumak, East" Greenland.
The yttrium earths or gadolinite-earths " (partly replaced by the oxides of cerium,
lanthanum and didymium) form a complex group which contains considerable erbium,
also several new elements (ytterbium, scandium, etc.) of more or less definite character.
Yttrialite. A silicate of thorium and the yttrium metals chiefly. Massive; amor-
phous. G. = 4-575. Color on the fresh fracture olive-green, changing to orange-yellow
on surface. Associated with the gadolinite of Llano Co., Texas.
Rowlandite. An yttrium silicate, occurring massive with gadolinite of Llano Co.,
Texas; color drab-green.
Thalenite. An yttrium silicate. In tabular or prismatic monoclinic crystals. H.
= 6*5. G. = 4'2. Color flesh-red. /3
= 174. Found in Sweden at Osterby in Dale-
carlia and at Askagen in Wermland.
Thortveitite. A the yttrium metals, (Sc,Y) 2 Si2 O 7
silicate of Orthorhombic. In radi- .
ating groups of large tapering crystals. Prismatic cleavage. H. = 6-7. G. = 3*57.

Color grayish green to white when altered. Usually translucent. Difficultly fusible.
Found in pegmatite in Iveland parish, Satersdalen, Norway.
Mackintoshite. Silicate of uranium, thorium, cerium, etc. Massive. Color black.
Llano Co., Texas.
Epidote Group. Orthorhombic and Monoclinic

ii in ii in in
Basic Orthosilicates, HR^R Si O or R (ROH)R (SiO 3
3 3 13 2 2 4)
ii in in in ii
R = Ca,Fe; R = Al,Fe,Mn,Ce, etc.

a
Zoisite Ca2 (AlOH)Al2 (SiO 4) 3 0'6196 1 0'3429
j8. Monoclinic Section
mCa (AlOH)Al
2 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 1-8036 64 37'
Piedmontite Ca2(AlOH)(Al,Mn) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 1-6100 1-8326 64 39'

Allanite (Ca,Fe) 2 (A10H) (Al,Ce,Fe) 2
(SiO 4 ) 3 1*5509 1-7691 64 59'
The EPIDOTE GROUP includes the above complex orthosilicates. The

monoclinic species agree closely in form. To them
the orthprhombic species
related in its zone corresponding to the mono-
zoisite is also angle, prismatic
clinic orthodomes, etc. Thus we have:
Zoisite mm'", 110 A 110
= 63 34'. Epidote cr, 001 A 101 = 63 42'.
021 A 021 = 68 54'. mm', 110 A 110 = 70 4', etc.
.
uu',
There seems to be, however, a monoclinic

calcium compound, having the com-
position of zoisite, but monoclinic and strictly isomorphous with ordinary
epidote; it is called dinozoisite.
ZOISITE.
J
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'6196 : 1 : 0-34295.
^
A HO = 63 Oil A Oil = 37 52'.
mm'", 110 34'. jf,
101 A 101 = 57 56'. oo'", 111 A 111 = 33 24'.
dd',
or furrowed vertically, and seldom

Crystals prismatic, deeply striated
distinctly terminated. Also massive; columnar to compact.
Cleavage: b (010) very perfect. Fracture uneven to subconchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 6-6 -5. G. = 3-25-3-37. Luster vitreous; on the cleavage-
face, b (010), pearly. Color grayish white, gray, yellowish brown, greenish
also peach-blossom-red to rose-red. Streak uncolored.
gray, apple-green;
Transparent to subtranslucent.
i Pleochroism strong in pink varieties. Optically +. Ax. pi. usually || b
(010); also || c (001). Bx _L a (100). Dispersion strong, p v; also p v. < >
Axial angle variable even in the same crystal. 2V = 0-60. a = 1-700.
= 1-703. 7 = 1*706.
Var. 1.Ordinary. Colors gray to white and brown; also green. Usually in indistinct
prismatic or columnar forms; also in fibrous aggregates. G.
= 3'226-3'381. Unionite is a
very pure zoisite. 2. Rose-red or Thulite. Fragile; pleochroism strong. 3. Compact,
massive. Includes the essential part of most of the mineral material known as saussurite
(e.g., in saussurite-gabbro), which has
arisen from the alteration of feldspar.
Comp. HCa2 Al3 Si 3 13 or 4CaO.3Al 2 O 3 .6SiO2 .H2 O = Silica 397, alu-

mina 33-7, lime 24-6, water 2*0 = 100. The alumina is sometimes replaced
by iron, thus graduating toward epidote, which has the same general for-
mula.
Pyr., etc. B.B. swells up and fuses at 3-3'5 to a white blebby mass. Not decom-
posed by acids; when previously ignited gelatinizes with hydrochloric acid. Gives off water
when strongly ignited.
Diff. Characterized by the columnar structure; fusibility with intumescence; re-
sembles some amphibole.
Micro. Distinguished in thin sections by its high relief and very low interference-
colors; lack of color and biaxial character. From epidote it is distinguished by its lack of
color and low birefringence; from vesuvianite by its color and biaxial character. Thin
sections frequently show the "ultra blue" (p. 520) between crossed nicols.
Obs. Occurs especially in those crystalline schists which have been formed by the
dynamic metamorphism of basic igneous rocks containing plagioclase rich in lime. Com-
monly accompanies some one of the amphiboles (actinolite, smaragdite, glaucophane, etc.);
thus in amphibolite, glaucophane schist, eclogite; often associated with corundum.
The original zoisite is that of the eclogite of the Saualpe in Carinthia (saualpite] Other .
localities are: Kauris in Salzburg; Sterzing, etc., in Tyrol, Austria; the Fichtelgebirge in
Bavaria; Marschendorf in Moravia; Saastal in Switzerland; the island of Syra, one of the
Cyclades, in glaucophane schist. In crystals from Chester, Mass.. Thulite occurs at
Kleppan in Tellemarken, Norway, and at Traversella in Piedmont, Italy.
SILICATES 531
EPIDOTE. Pistacite.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c 1-5787 : 1 :

1-8036; 64 37'.
= 0_=
mm' 110 A 110 109 56'. d, 001 A 201 = 89 26'
ca, 001 A 100 = 64 37'. co, 001 A Oil = 58 28'
ce, 001 A 101 = 34 43'. en, 001 A 111 = 75 11'
cr, 001 A 101 = 63 42'. an"', 100 A 111 = 69 2'
ar'. 100 A 101 = 51 41'. rm"', 111 A 111 = 70 29'
894 897
Twins: tw. pi. a (100) common, often as embedded tw. lamellae. Crystals
usually prismatic the ortho-axis b and terminated at one .extremity only;
||
passing into acicular forms; the faces in the zone a (100) /c (001) deeply
striated. Also fibrous, divergent or parallel; granular, particles of various
sizes, sometimes fine granular, and forming rock-masses.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; a (100) imperfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle.
H. = 6-7. G. = 3-25-3-5. Luster vitreous; on c (001) inclining to pearly
or resinous. Color pistachio-green or yellowish green to brownish green,
greenish black, and black; sometimes clear red and yellow; also gray and
grayish white, rarely colorless. Streak uncolored, grayish. Transparent to
opaque: generally subtranslucent.
Pleochroism strong vibrations Z green, Y brown and strongly absorbed,
:
X
1 1
X yellow. Absorption usually Y > Z > X] but sometimes Z > Y >

- in
the variety of epidote common in rocks. Often
exhibits idiophano-us figures; best in sections
normal to an optic axis, but often to be observed
in natural Crystals (Sulzbach), especially if flat-
tened r(101). (See p. 288.) Optically-.
Ax. pi.
||
||
b (010). Bx.a.r A c axis = 2 56'. -
Hence Z J_ a (100) nearly. Dispersion inclined,
strongly marked; of the axes feeble, p > v.
Axial angle large, a = 1-729. /3
= 1'754. 7 =
1-768.
Var. Epidote has ordinarily a peculiar yellowish green
(pistachio) color, seldom found in other minerals. But
this color passes into dark and light shades black on one
side and brown on the other; red, yellow and colorless
varieties also occur.
Var. 1. Ordinary. Color green of some shade, as described, the )istachio tint rarely
absent, In crystals,
(a) (b) Fibrous, (c) Granular massive, (d) >corza is epidote sand
from the gold washings in Transylvania. The Arendal, Norway, epidote (Arendalite) is
mostly in dark green crystals; that of Bourg d'Oisans, Dauphine, France, (Thallite, Del-
phinite Oisanite) in yellowish green crystals,

sometimes transparent. Puschkinite includes
crystals from the auriferous sands of Ekaterinburg,
Ural Mts. Achmatite is ordinary epi-
dote from Achmatovsk, Ural Mts. A
variety from Garda, Hoste Island, Terra del Fuego,
is and resembles zoisite.
colorless
2. The Bucklandite from Achmatovsk, Ural Mts., described by Hermann, is black with
a tinge of green, and differs from ordinary epidote in having the crystals nearly symmetrical
and not, like other epidote, lengthened in the direction of the ortho-axis. G. = 3 '51.
3. Withamite. Carmine-red to straw-yellow, strongly pleochroic; deep crimson and
straw-yellow. H.
= 6-6'5; G. = 3 '137; in small radiated groups. From Glencoe, in
Argyleshire, Scotland. Sometimes referred to piedmontite, but contains little MnO.
4. Tawmanite is a chromium-bearing epidote from Tawman, Kachin Hills, Upper Burma.
Deep green color and strong pleochroism, emerald-green to bright yellow.
Comp. HCa*(Al,Fe) 8 SiOi8 or H 2 O.4CaQ.3(Al Fe 8 ) 2 O 8 .6SiO2, the ratio

>
of aluminium to iron varies commonly from 6 1 to 3 2. Percentage com-

: :
position:
For Al : Fe SiO 2 37'87, A1 2 O 3 24'13, Fe 2 O 3 12'60, CaO 23'51, H 2 O 1'89 = 100
= 3 : 1
Clinozoisite is an epidote without iron, having the composition of zoisite; fouqueite is

probably the same from an anorthite-gneiss in Ceylon. Picroepidote is supposed to contain
Mg in place of Ca.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives water on strong ignition. B.B. fuses with in-
tumescence at 3-3 '5 to a dark brown or black mass which is generally magnetic. Reacts
for iron and sometimes for manganese with the fluxes. Partially decomposed by hydro-
chloric acid, but when previously ignited, gelatinizes with acid. Decomposed on fusion
with alkaline carbonates.
Diff . Characterized often by its peculiar yellowish green (pistachio) color readily ;
fusible and yields a magnetic globule B.B. Prismatic forms often longitudinally striated,
but they have not the angle, cleavage or brittleness of tremolite; tourmaline has no distinct
cleavage, is less fusible (in common forms) and usually shows its hexagonal form.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its high refraction; strong interference-colors
rising into those of the third order in ordinary sections; decided color and striking pleochro-
ism; also by the fact that the plane of the optic axes lies transversely to the elongation of
the crystals.
Obs. Epidote is commonly formed by the metamorphism (both local igneous and of
general dynamic character) of impure calcareous sedimentary rocks or igneous rocks con-
taining much lime. It thus often occurs in gneissic rocks, mica schist, amphibole schist,
serpentine; so also in quartzites, sandstones and limestones altered by neighboring igneous
rocks. Often accompanies beds of magnetite or hematite in such rocks. Has also been
found in granite (Maryland), and regarded as an original mineral.
It is often associated with quartz, It some-
feldspar, actinolite, axinite, chlorite, etc.
times forms with quartz an epidote rock, called epidosite. A
similar rock exists at Mel-
bourne in Canada. A gneissoid rock consisting of flesh-colored orthoclase, quartz and
epidote from the Unaka Mts. (N. C. and Tenn.) has been called unakyte.
Beautiful crystallizations come from Bourg d'Oisans, Dauphine, France; the Ala valley
and Traversella, in Piedmont, Italy; Elba; Zermatt, Switzerland; Zillertal in Tyrol,
Austria; also in fine crystals from the Knappenwand in the Untersulzbachtal, Pinzgau,
Austria, associated with asbestus, adularia, apatite, titanite, scheelite; further at Striegau,
Silesia; Zoptau, Moravia; Arendal, Norway; the Achmatovsk mine near Zlatoust,
Ural Mts.
In North America, occurs in N. H., at Franconia and Warren. In
Mass., at Hadlyme
and Chester in crystals in gneiss; at Athol, in
syenitic gneiss, in fine crystals; Newbury,
limestone In Conn., at Haddam, in large splendid crystals. In N. Y., near Amity;
-
Sr
Monroe, Orange Co.; Warwick, pale yellowish green, with titanite and pyroxene. In
N. C., at Hampton's, Yancey Co.; White's
mill, Gaston Co.; Franklin, Macon Co.; in
crystals and crystalline masses in quartz at White Plains, Alexander Co. In Mich., in the
Lake Superior region, at many of the mines.
Crystals from Seven Devils mining district,
Idaho; from Riverside, Cal.; from Sulzer, Prince of Wales Island, Alaska.
((
Epidote was named by Haiiy, from the Greek e7ri5o<m, increase, translated by him,
qui a recu un accroissement," the base of the prism (rhomboidal prism)
having one side
than the other. Pistacite, from
TriaraKux, the pistachio-nut, refers to the color.
ie d 10n te
?- o'5.
? ?i =
Similar in an 8le to ordinary epidote, but contains 5 to 15
'
p. c. 2 O3 Mn .
G. 3'404. Color reddish brown and reddish black. Pleochroism strong.

SILICATES 533
Absorption X> Y > Z. Ax. pi.

Optically +.
b (010). Bx a r A c axis = 82 34', .
+
= - - ||
X A caxis 6 to 3. = 173.
Occurs with manganese ores at St. Marcel, Pied-
mont, Italy. In crystalline schists on lie de Groix, France; in glaucophane-schist in Japan.
Occasionally in quartz porphyry, as in the antique red porphyry of Egypt, also that of
South Mountain, Pa.
Hancockite. Belongs in Epidote Group containing, PbO, MnO, CaO, SrO, MgO,
A1 2 O 3 Fe 2 O 3 Mn 2 Os. Crystals which are very small and lath shaped show characteristic
, ,
epidote habit and closely related angles. Brownish red. H. = 6-7. G. = 4'0. Found
at Franklin, N. J.
ALLANITE. Orthite.
Monoclinic. Axes, p. 529. In angle near epidote. Crystals often tabu-

lar a (100) also long and slender to acicular prismatic by elongation axis b.
1 1 ; 1 1
Also massive and in embedded grains.

Cleavage: a (100) and c (001) in traces; also m (110) sometimes observed.
Fracture uneven or subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 5-5-6. G. = 3-0-4-2.
Luster submetallic, pitchy or resinous. Color brown to black. Subtranslu-
cent to opaque. Pleochroism strong: Z brownish yellow, Y reddish brown,
X greenish brown. Optically Ax. pi. b (010). Bxa A caxis = 32J
.
||
approx. j8
= 1*682. Birefringence variable. Also isotropic and amorphous
by alteration analogous to gadolinite.
Var.-^ Allanite. The original mineral was from East Greenland, in tabular crystals
or plates. Color black or brownish black. G. = 3'50-3'95. Bucklandite is anhydrous
allanite in small black crystals from a magnetite mine near Arendal, Norway. Bagration-
ite occurs in black crystals which are like the bucklandite of Achmatovsk (epidote).
Orthite included, in its original use, the slender or acicular prismatic crystals, containing
some water, from Finbo, near Falun, Sweden. But these graduate into massive forms, and
some orthites are anhydrous, or as nearly so as most allanite. The name is from 6p66s
straight.
ii in ii
Comp. Like epidote HRR Si Oi 3 3 3 or H 0.4R0.3R

2 2 3 .6Si02 with R
m
= Ca and Fe, and R. = Al,Fe, the cerium metals Ce, Di, La, and in smaller
amounts those of the yttrium group. Some varieties contain considerable
water, but probably by alteration.
varieties give much water in the closed tube, and all kinds yield a
Some 1
Pyr., etc.
small amount on strong ignition. B.B. fuses easily and swells up (F. = 2 '5) to a dark,
blebby, magnetic glass. With the fluxes reacts for iron. Most varieties gelatinize with
hydrochloric acid, but if previously ignited are not decomposed by acid.
Obs. Occurs in albitic and common feldspathic granite, gneiss, syenite, zircon syenite,
porphyry. Thus in Greenland; Norway; Sweden; Striegau, Silesia. Also in white lime-
stone as at Auerbach on the Bergstrasse, Germany; often in mines of magnetic iron. Rather
common as an accessory constituent in many rocks, as in andesite, diorite, dacite, rhyolite,
the tonalite of Mt. Adamello, Austria, the scapolite rocks of Odegaarden, Norway, etc.
Sometimes inclosed as a nucleus in crystals of the isomorphous species, epidote. From
Madagascar.
At Vesuvius in ejected masses with sanidine, sodalite, nephelite, hornblende, etc.
Similarly in trachytic ejected masses at the Laacher See, Germany (bucklandite).
In Mass., at the Bolton quarry. In N. Y., Moriah, Essex Co., with magnetite and
apatite; at Monroe, Orange Co. In N. J., at Franklin Furnace with feldspar and mag-
netite. In Pa., at South Mountain, near Bethlehem, in large crystals; at East Bradford;
near Eckhardt's furnace, Berks Co., abundant. In Va., in large masses in Amherst Co.;
also in Bedford, Nelson, and Amelia counties. In N. C., at many points. At the Devil's
Head Mt., Douglas Co., Col. In Texas in Llano Co.
AXINITE.
Axes a b c = 04921 : 1 : 0-4797; a
= 82 54', ft
= 91 52',
Triclinic. : :
T = 131 32'.
ftoa 900 901
Dauphine" Poloma Bethlehem, P;
am, 100 A 110 = 15 34'. Mr, 110 A 111 = 45 15'.
aM, 100 A 110 = 28 55'. mr, 110 A 111 = 64 22'.
as, 100 A 201 = 21 37'. ras, 110 A 201 = 27 57'.
Crystals usually broad and acute-edged, but varied in habit, Also mas-
often curved; sometimes granular.
sive, lamellar, lamellae
Cleavage: b (010) distinct. Fracture conchoidal. Brittle. H.
= 6'5-'
G. = 3-271-3-294. Luster highly glassy. Color clove-brown, plum-blue,
and pearl-gray; also honey-yellow, greenish yellow. Streak uncoloi
Transparent to subtranslucent. Pleochroism strong. Optically . Ax. pi.
and Bxa approximately J_ x (111). Axial angles variable. 2V = 65-70.
= 1-68 (approx.). Pyroelectric (p. 307).
Comp. A
boro-silicate of aluminium and catcium with varying
amounts of iron and manganese. Formula, RyR^ (SiOJs. R = Calcium

chiefly, sometimes in large excess, again in smaller amount and manganese
prominent; iron is present in small quantity, also magnesium and basic hydro-
gen.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses readily with intumescence, imparts a pale green color to the
O.F., and fuses at 2 to a dark green to black glass; with borax in O.F. gives an amethystine
bead (manganese), which in R.F. becomes yellow (iron). Fused with a mixture of bisul-
phate of potash and fluorite on the platinum loop colors the flame green (boric acid) Not .
decomposed by acids, but when previously ignited, gelatinizes with hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Axinite occurs in clove-brown crystals; near Bourg d'Oisans in Dauphine,
France; at Andreasberg, Harz Mts., Germany; Striegau, Silesia; on Mt. Skopi, in eastern
Switzerland; Elba; at the silver mines of Kongsberg, Norway; Nordmark, Sweden; near
Miask in the Ural Mts.; in Cornwall, England, of a dark color, at the Botallack mine near
St. Just, etc. From Obira, Japan.
In the United States, at Phippsburg, Me.; Franklin Furnace, N. J., honey-yellow; at
Bethlehem, Pa.; in Cal. at Bonsall, San Diego Co., at Riverside, Riverside Co., and at
Consumers Mine, Amador Co.
Named from a^lvij, an axe, in allusion to the form of the crystals.
PREHNITE.
Orthprhombic-hemimorphic. Axes a b c = 0-8401 1 0-5549. : : : :
Distinct individual crystals rare; usually tabular || c (001); sometimes

7"
prismatic, mm
(110) A (HO) = 80 4'; again acute pyramidal. Commonly
SILICATES 535
in groups of tabular crystals, united by c (001) making broken forms, often

barrel-shaped. Reniform, globular, and stalactitic with a crystalline surface.
Structure imperfectly columnar or lamellar, strongly coherent; also compact
granular or impalpable.
Cleavage: c (001) distinct. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 6-6 '5.
G. = 2 -80-2 -95. Luster vitreous; on base weak pearly. Color light green,
oil-green, passing into white and gray; often fading on exposure. Sub-
transparent to translucent. Streak uncolored.
Comp. An acid orthosilicate, 2 Ca2 Al2 (Si04)3 = Silica 43*7, alumina
H
24-8, lime 27'1, water 4-4
= 100.
Prehnite is sometimes classed with the zeolites, with which it is often associated; the,
water here, however, has been shown to go off only at a red heat, and hence plays a differ-
ent part.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water. B.B. fuses at 2 with intumescence to a
blebby enamel-like glass. Decomposed slowly by hydrochloric acid without gelatinizing;
after fusion dissolves readily with gelatinization.
Diff. B.B. fuses readily, unlike beryl, green quartz, and chalcedony. Its hardness is
greater than that of the zeolites.
Obs. Occurs chiefly in basic eruptive rocks, basalt, diabase, etc., as a secondary min-
eral in veins and cavities, often associated with some of the zeolites, also datolite, pectolite,
calcite, but commonly one of the first formed of the series; also less often in granite, gneiss,
syenite, and then frequently associated with epidote; sometimes associated with native
copper, as in the Lake Superior region.
At St. Christophe, near Bourg d'Oisans in Dauphine, France; Fassatal, Tyrol, Austria;
the Ala valley in Piedmont, Italy; in the Harz Mts. near Andreasberg, Germany; in granite
at Striegau, Silesia; Arendal, Norway; Êdelfors in Sweden (edelite)', at Corstorphine Hill,
near Edinburgh, Scotland; Mourne Mts., Ireland.
In the United States, finely crystallized at Farmington, Conn.; Paterson and Bergen
Hill, N. J.; in syenite, at Somerville, Mass.; on north shore of Lake Superior, and the
copper region.
Named (1790) after Col. Prehn, who brought the mineral from the Cape of Good Hope.
Harstigite. An acid orthosilicate of manganese and calcium. In small colorless pris-
matic crystals. H. = 5'5. G. = 3 '049. Indices, 1 '678-1 '683. From the Harstig mine,
near Pajsberg, Wermland, Sweden.
Cuspidine. Contains silica, lime, fluorine, and from alteration carbon dioxide: formula
perhaps Ca 2 Si(O,F 2 ) 4
. In minute spear-shaped crystals. H. = 5-6. G. = 2-853-2'860.
Color pale rose-red. Indices, 1 '590-1 '602. From Vesuvius, in ejected masses in the tufa
of Monte Somma. From Franklin, N. J.
IV. Subsilicates
The species here included are basic salts, for the most part to be referred
either to the metasilicates or orthosilicates, like many basic compounds already
included in the preceding pages. Until their constitution is definitely settled,
however, they are more conveniently grouped by themselves as SUBSILICATES.
It may be noted that those species having an oxygen ratio of silicon to bases
of 2 3, like topaz, andalusite, sillimanite, datolite, etc., also calamine, car-
:
pholite, and perhaps tourmaline, are sometimes regarded as salts of the hypo-
thetical parasilicic acid, HeSiOs.
The only prominent group in this subdivision is the HUMITE GROUP.
Humite Group
Prolectite
a :b
C
Monoclmic 1-0803 1 T8861 90

[Mg(F,OH)] Mg[SiO
: :
2 4 ]i?
Chondrodite C
Monoclmic 1-0863 3-1447 90

[Mg(F,OH)] 2 Mg 3 [Si0 4 ]2
1 :
Humite 6 c
Orthorhombic 1-0802 4-4033
[Mg(F,OH)] 2 Mg5[Si0 4 ]3
Clinohumite
[Mg(F,OH)] 2 Mg 7 [SiO 4 ] 4 Monoclinic T0803 : 1 : 5'6588 90
C
series both as regards crys-

species here included form a remarkable
The
form and chemical composition. In crystallization they have sensibly
talline
the same ratio for the lateral axes, while the vertical axes are almost exactly
in the ratio of the numbers 3:5:7:9 (see also below). Furthermore,
though one species is orthorhombic, the others monoclinic, they here also
correspond closely, since the axial angle in the latter cases does not sensibly
differ from 90.
In composition, as shown by Penfield and Howe (also Sjogren), the
three species are basic orthosilicates in each of which the univalent g
(MgF) or (MgOH) enters, while the Mg
atoms present are in the rati<^;
3 5 7. The composition given for Prolectite is theoretical only,
: : 1 -i
that which would be expected from its crystallization. In physr

characters these species are very similar, and several of them may
o<|ij
together at the same locality and even intercrystallized in pa
lamellae. % .
The species of the group approximate closely in angle to chrysolite and chrysoi
The axial ratios may be compared as follows:
Prolectite a b :
\c = 1-0803
Chondrodite. a
Humite b
Clinohumite a
Chrysolite b
Chrysoberyl b
CHONDRODITE HUMITE CLINOHUMITE.

Axial ratios as given above. Habit varied, Figs. 902 to 910. Twins
common, the twinning planes inclined 60, also 30, to c (001) in the brachy-
dome or clinodome zone, hence the axes crossing at angles near 60; often
repeated as trillings and as polysynthetic lamellae (cf. Fig. 609, p. 299). Also
twins, with c (001) as tw. plane. Two of the three species are often twinned
together.
Cleavage: sometimes distinct. Fracture subconchoidal to uneven.
c (001)
Brittle. H. = G. = 3-1-3-2.
6-6-5. Luster vitreous to resinous. Color
white, light yellow, honey-yellow to chestnut-brown and garnet- or hyacinth-
red. Pleochroism sometimes distinct. Optically .+ .
Chondrodite. Absorption X > Z > Y. Optically +. Ax. pi. and Bxa J_ b (010).
Bx A c axis = X A c axis = + 25 52' Brewster; 28 56'
= 1-619; 7 - a = 0'031. 2V = 80. Kafveltorp; 30 approx., Mte.
Somma.
Humite. Ax. pi. c (001).
||
Bx J_ a (100). = 1'643. 7 - a = 0'035.
Clinohumite. Ax. pi. and Bxa _L b (010). Bx A c axis = + 11-12; 7^ approx.,
Brewster. 2V = 76. = 1-670. 7 - a = 0'038.
SILICATES 537
903
904
Figs. 902, 903, Chondrodite, Brewster, N. Y. Chondrodite, Sweden

906
907
905 103
Projection on (001)
Projection on (Olb)
Figs. 905, 906, Chondrodite, Mte. Somma Humite, Sweden

910
908
Projection on (010)
Humite, Vesuvius Clinohumite, Brewster Clinohumite, Mte. Somma
Comp. Basic fluosilicates of magnesium with related formulas as

shown in the table above. Hydroxyl replaces part of the fluorine, and iron
often takes the place of magnesium.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible; some varieties blacken and then burn white. Fused with
potassium bisulphate in the closed tube gives a reaction for fluorine. With the fluxes
a reaction for iron. Gelatinizes with acids. Heated with sulphuric acid gives off silicon
fluoride.
Obs. -Chondrodite, humite, and elinohumite all occur at Vesuvius in the ejected
masses both of limestone or feldspathic type found on Monte Somma. They are associated
with chrysolite, biotite, pyroxene, magnetite, spinel, vesuvianite, calcite, etc.; also less
often with sanidine, meionite, nephelite. Of the three species, humite is the rarest and
elinohumite of most frequent occurrence. They seldom all occur together in the same
mass, and only rarely two of the species (as
humite and elinohumite) appear together.
Occasionally elinohumite interpenetrates crystals of humite,
and parallel intergrowths with
chrysolite have also been observed.
Chondrodite occurs at Mte. Somma, Vesuvius, as above noted; at Pargas, Finland, honey-
associated with chalcopyrite,
yellow in limestone; at Kafveltorp, Nya-Kopparberg, Sweden,
galena, sphalerite. At Brewster, N. Y., at the Tilly Foster magnetic iron mine in deep
garnet-red crystals. Also probably at numerous points where the occurrence of "chon-
drodite" has been reported.
Humite also occurs at the Ladu mine near Filipstadt, Sweden, with magnetite in crys-
talline limestone. In crystalline limestone with elinohumite in Andalusia, Spain. Also in
large, coarse, partly altered crystals at the Tilly
Foster iron-mine at Brewster, N. Y. Noted
at Franklin Furnace, N. J.
Clinohumite occurs at Mte. Somma and in Andalusia; in crystalline limestone near
Lake Baikal in East Siberia; at Brewster, N. Y., in rare but highly modified crystals.
Hydroclinohumite is a titaniferous variety (originally called titanolivine) from Ala
Valley, Piedmont, Italy.
Prolectite is from the Kq mine, Nordmark, Sweden; very rare; imperfectly known.
Numerous other localities of "chondrodite" have been noted, chiefly in crystalline
limestone; most of them are probably to be referred to the species chondrodite, but the
identity in many cases is yet to be proved. At Brewster large quantities of massive "chon-
drodite" occur associated with magnetite, enstatite, ripidolite, and from its extensive
alteration serpentine has been formed on a large scale. The granular mineral is common
in limestone in Sussex Co., N. J., and Orange Co., N. Y., associated with spinel, and occa-
sionally with pyroxene and corundum. Also in Mass., at Chelmsford, with scapolite;
at South Lee, in limestone. In Canada, in limestone at St. Jerome, Grenville, etc.,
abundant.
The name chondrodite is from xwSpos, a grain, alluding to the granular structure.
Humite is from Sir Abraham Hume.
Leucophcenicite. Mn
5 (MnOH) 2 (SiO4)3, similar to the humite type of formula.
Monoclinic. In striated crystals elongated parallel to ortho-axis. Massive. H. = 5*5-6.
G. = 3'8. Color light purplish red. Fusible. From Franklin, N. J. .
ILVAITE. Lievrite. Yenite.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'6665 : 1 : 0*4427.

oil mm'", 110 A lIO = 67 22'. rr' 101 A 101 = 67 11'.
as', 120 A 120 = 73 45'. oo', 111 A Til = 62 33'.
Commonly in prisms, with prismatic faces vertically striated.

Columnar or compact massive.
Cleavage: 6(010), c(001) rather distinct. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 5-5-6. G. = 3'99-4'05. Luster submetallic.
Color iron-black or dark grayish black. Streak black, inclining
to green or brown. Opaque.
^
Comp. - - CaFe2 (FeOH) (SiO 4 ) 2 or H O.CaO.4FeO.Fe O
2 2 3.
4SiO 2 = 29 -3, iron sesquioxide 19 -6, iron protoxide 35 -2,
Silica
lime 137, water 2-2 = 100. Manganese may replace part
of the ferrous iron.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses quietly at 2'5 to a black magnetic bead. With the fluxes reacts
lor iron. Some varieties give also a reaction for manganese. Gelatinizes with hydro-
chloric acid.
Obs. Found on Elba in dolomite; on Mt. Mulatto near Predazzo, Tyrol, Austria, in
granite; Schneeberg, Saxony; Fossum, in Norway. In crystals from Siorarsiut, South
Lrreenland. Reported as found at R. also at Milk Row quarry,
formerly Cumberland, I.;
SILICATES 539
Somerville, Mass. In fine crystals from South Mountain mine, Owyhee Co., Idaho. Named
Ilvaite from the Latin name of the island (Elba).
Ardennite. Dewalquite. A
vanadio-silicate of aluminium and manganese; also con-
taining arsenic. In prismatic crystals resembling ilvaite. H. = 6-7. G. = 3*620. Yel-
low to yellowish brown. Index about 179. Found at Salm Chateau in the Ardennes,
Belgium.
Langbanite. Manganese silicate with ferrous antimonate; formula doubtful. Rhom-
bohedral-tetartohedral. In iron-black hexagonal prismatic crystals. H. = 6'5.
G. = 4'918. Luster metallic. From Langban, Sweden.
The following are rare lead silicates. See also p. 498.
Kentrolite. Probably 3PbO.2Mn 2 O3.3SiO 2 In minute prismatic crystals; often in
.
sheaf-like forms; also massive. H. =5. G. =6'19. Color dark reddish brown; black
on the surface. From southern Chile; Langban and Jakobsberg, Sweden; Bena Padru,
near Ozieri, Sardinia.
Melanotekite. 3PbO.2Fe 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 or (Fe 4 O8)Pb 8 (SiO 4 )s. Orthorhombic; prismatic.
Massive; cleavable. H. = 6'5. G. = 573. Luster metallic to greasy. Color black to
blackish gray. Occurs with native lead at Langban, Sweden. Also in crystals resembling
kentrolite at Hillsboro, N. M.
Bertrandite. H
2 Be 4 Si?O 9 or 2 O.4BeO.2SiO 2 H
Orthorhombic-hemimorphic. In small
.
tabular or prismatic crystals. H. = 6-7. G. = 2'59-2'60. Colorless to pale yellow.

Optically
= T603. Usually occurs in feldspathic veins, often with other beryllium
.
minerals as a result of the alteration of beryl. At the quarries of Barbin near Nantes,
France; Pisek, Bohemia; Irkutka Mt., Altai Mts., Russia; Ireland, Southern Norway;
Cornwall, England; Mt. Antero, Chaff ee Co., Col., with phenacite; Amelia Court-House,
Va.; Oxford Co., Me.
CALAMINE. Smithsonite. Hemimorphite.

Orthorhombic-hemimorphic. Axes a : b : c 07834 : 1 : 04778.
mm'", 110 A 101 = 76 9'.
= 912 913
ss', 101 A 101 62 46'.
',
301 A 301 = 122 41'.
ee', Oil A Oil = 51 5'.
w', 031 A 031 = 110 12'.

w'", 121 A 121 = 78 26'.
Crystals often tabular b (010); also pris- ||
matic; faces 6 vertically striated. Usually

implanted and showing one extremity only.
Often grouped in sheaf -like forms and form-
ing drusy surfaces in cavities. Also stalac-
titic, mammillary, botryoidal, and fibrous
forms; massive and granular.
Cleavage: m
(110) perfect; s( 101) less so;
c (001) in traces. Fracture uneven to subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 4-5-5,
the latter when crystallized. G. = 3 -40-3 -50. Luster vitreous; c (001)
subpearly, sometimes adamantine. Color white; sometimes with a delicate
bluish or greenish shade; also yellowish to brown. Streak white. Trans-
parent to translucent. Optically +. 2V = 46. a = 1-614. (3
= 1*617.
7 = 1-636.Strongly pyroelectric.
Comp. H
2 ZnSiO 5 or (ZnOH) 2 SiO 3 or 2 O.2ZnO.SiO 2
= Silica 25-0,
H
zinc oxide 67 -5, water 7-5 = 100. The water goes off only at a red heat;
unchanged at 340 C.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates, whitens, and gives off water. B.B. almost
infusible (F. =6). On charcoal with soda gives a coating which is yellow while hot, and
white on cooling Moistened with cobalt solution, and heated in O.F., this coating assumes
a bright green color, but the ignited mineral itself
becomes blue. Gelatinizes with acids
even when previously ignited. ,,..,. .,, .
.,
f)iQ Characterized by its mfusibihty; reaction for zinc; gelatimzation with acids.
Resembles some smithsonite (which effervesces with acid), also prehnite.
Obs. Calamine and smithsonite are usually found associated in veins or beds in
stratified calcareous rocks accompanying sulphides of zinc, iron and lead. Thus at Aix-la-
in Carinthia; Moresnet in Belgium; Rezbanya,
Chapelle Germany; Raibel and Bleiberg,
and Schemnitz, Hungary. At Roughten Gill, in Cumberland; at Alston Moor, white;
near Matlock, in Derbyshire; Leadhill, Scotland; at Nerchinsk, eastern Siberia. From m
Santa Eulalia, Chihuahua, Mexico.
In the United States occurs at Sterling Hill, near Ogdensburg, N. J., in fine clear crystal-
line masses. In Pa., at the Perkiomen and Phenixville lead mines; at Friedensville.
Abundant in Va., at Austin's mines in Wythe Co. With the zinc deposits of southwestern
Missouri, especially about Granby, both as crystallized
and massive calamine. Crystals
from Leadville, Col; from Organ Mts., N. M.; Elkhorn Mts., Mon. At the Emma mine,
Cottonwood Canon, Utah.
The name Calamine (with Galmei of the Germans) is commonly supposed to be a cor-
ruption of Cadmia. Agricola says it is from calamus, a reed, in allusion to the slender
forms (stalactitic) common in the cadmia fornacum.
Clinohedrite. H
2 CaZnSiO 5 Monoclinic-clinohedral (see Figs. 352, 353, p. 138).
.
H. = 5'5. G. = 3'33. Colorless or white to amethystine. Index, 1 '67. From Franklin, N. J.

Stokesite. Perhaps HâSnSisOn. Orthorhombic. Prismatic cleavage. H. = 6.
G. = 3'2. Colorless. = 1*61. From Roscommon Cliff, St. Just, Cornwall.
Carpholite. H MnAlsSi2O
4 In radiated and stellated tufts.
10 . G. = 2'935. Color
straw- to wax-yellow. = 1*63. Occurs at the tin mines of Schlaggenwald,
Biaxial, .
Bohemia; Wippra, in the Harz Mts., on quartz, etc.

Lawsonite. H
4 CaAl2Si 2 Oio. In prismatic orthorhombic crystals; mm'", 110 A 110
= 67 16'. G. = 3*09. Luster vitreous to greasy. Colorless, pale blue to grayish blue.
Optically -f-. /3
=
1'669. Occurs in crystalline schists of the Tiburn peninsula, Marin
Co., Gal.; also in the schists of Pontgibaud, France, and New Caledonia.
Hibschite. Same as for lawsonitc, H4CaAl 2 Si2Oio. In minute isometric crystals, usually
octahedrons. H. = 6. G. = 3'0. Colorless or pale yellow. Refractive index, 1 '67. In-
fusible. From the phonolite of Marienberg, Bohemia. Associated with melanite.
Cerite. A
silicate of the cerium metals chiefly, with water. Crystals rare; commonly
massive; granular. H. = 5'5. G. = 4*86. Color between clove-brown and cherry-red
to gray. Indices, 1 '83-1 '93. Occurs at Bastnas, near Riddarhyttan, Sweden.
Toernebohmite. A silicate of the cerium metals, chiefly, R3(OH)(SiO 4 ) 2 Monoclinic? .
Color, green to olive. /3

= 1'81. Biaxial, +. Strong dispersion, P < v. Pleochroic, rose
to blue-green. From Bastnas, near Riddarhytta.n, Sweden.
Beckelite. Ca3(Ce,La,Di) 4 Si3O 15 Isometric Crystals small, often microscopic. Cubic
.
cleavage. H. = 5. G. = 4*1. Color yellow. Infusible. Occurs with nepheline syenite

rocks near Mariupol, Russia.
Hellandite. A
basic silicate chiefly of the cerium metals,
aluminium, manganese and
calcium. Monoclinic. Prismatic habit. H. = 5*5. G. = 37. Color brown. Fusible.
Found in pegmatite near Kragero, Norway.
Bazzite.A silicate of scandium with other rare earth metals, iron and a little soda.
Hexagonal. In minute prisms, often barrel shaped. H. = 6*5. G. = 2'8. Color azure-
Transparent in small individuals. Optically -. Refractive indices, co = 1'626.
e = rb05.
Strongly dichroic, co = pale greenish yellow, e = azure-blue. Infusible. In-
i
soluble m
ordinary acids. Found at Baveno, Italy.
ANGARALITE 2(Ca,Mg)0.5(Al,Fe) 2 O.,.6SiO 2 In thin tabular hexagonal(?) crystals.
.
U. - Color black from carbonaceous impurities.

2-b2.
Uniaxial, +. In contact zone of
limestone, southern part of Yenisei District, Siberia.
TOURMALINE.
Rhombohedral-hemimorphic._ Axis c = 0-4477.
cr, 0001 A = lOll 27 20'. rr' 1011A 1101 W im' 39^1 A Q^91 AA T
co, 0001 A 0221 = 45 57'. oof, oil A 20*1 = # %\
4fi
%i, l|i ^ 1}
66
I 42 gj/
SILICATES 541
Crystals usually prismatic in habit, often slender to acicular; rarely

flattened, the prism nearly wanting. Prismatic faces strongly striated ver-
914 515 916 917
918
ma
tically,and the crystals hence often much rounded to barrel-shaped. The

cross-section of the prism three-sided (m, Fig. 921), six-
sided (a), or nine-sided (m and a). 921
Crystals commonly
hemimorphic. Sometimes isolated, but more com-
monly in parallel or radiating groups. Sometimes mas-
sive compact; also columnar, coarse or fine, parallel
or divergent.
Cleavage a (1 120) r (101 1) difficult. Fracture sub-
:
,
conchoidal to uneven. Brittle and often rather friable.

H. = 7-7-5. G. = 2-98-3-20. Luster vitreous to res-
inous. Colur black, brownish black, bluish black,
most common; blue, green, red, and sometimes of rich
shades; rarely white or colorless; some specimens red internally and green
externally; and others red at one extremity, and green, blue or black at
the other; the zonal arrangement of different colors widely various both as
to the colors and to crystallographic directions. Streak uncolored. Trans-
parent to opaque.
Strongly dichroic, especially in deep-colored varieties; axial colors varying
widely. Absorption for co much stronger than for e, thus sections c axis trans-
1 1
mit sensibly the extraordinary ray only, and hence their use (e.g., in the tour-
maline tongs (p. 243) ) for giving polarized light. Exhibits idiophanous figures
(p. 288). Optically . Birefringence rather high, co e = OO2. Indices:
co y = 1-6366, ey = 1-6193 colorless variety; o>r
= 1*6435, er =. 1-6222 blue-
green. Sometimes abnormally biaxial. Becomes electric by friction; also

strongly pyroelectric.
Var. Ordinary. In crystals as above described; black much the most common,
(a) Rubellite; the red, sometimes transparent; the Siberian is mostly violet-red (siberite),
the Brazilian rose-red; that of Chesterfield and Goshen, Mass., pale rose-red and opaque;
that of Paris, Me., fine ruby-red and transparent. (6) Indicolite, or indigolite; the blue,
either pale or bluish black; named from the indigo-blue color, (c) Brazilian Sapphire (in
jewelry); Berlin-blue and transparent, (d) Brazilian Emerald, Chrysolite (or .Peridot) of
Brazil; green and transparent, (e) Peridot of Ceylon; honey-yellow. (/) Achroite; color-
less tourmaline, from Elba, (g) Aphrizite; black tourmaline, from Kragero, Norway.
(h) Columnar and black; coarse columnar. Resembles somewhat common hornblende,
but has a more resinous fracture, and is without distinct cleavage or anything like a fibrous
appearance in the texture; it often has the appearance on a broken surface of some kinds of
soft coal.
Comp. A complex silicate of boron and aluminium, with also either

magnesium, iron or the alkali metals prominent. A general formula may be
written as
HgAlaCB.OH^Siîp (Penfield and Foote) in which the hyrogen
may be replaced by the alkalies and also the bivalent elements, Mg,Fe,Ca.
Fluorine is commonly present in small amounts.
The varieties based upon composition fall into three prominent groups, between which
there are many gradations:
1. ALKALI TOURMALINE. Contains sodium or lithium, or both; also potassium.
G. = 3-0-3-1. Color red to green; also colorless. From pegmatites.
2. IRON TOURMALINE. G. = 3-1-3-2. Color usually deep black. Accessory mineral
in siliceous igneous rocks and in mica schists, etc.
3. MAGNESIUM TOURMALINE. G. = 3-0-3'09. Usually yellow-brown to brownish
black; also colorless. From limestone or dolomite.
A chromium tourmaline also occurs. G. = 3*120. Color dark green.
Pyr., etc. The magnesia varieties fuse rather easily to a white blebby glass or slag;
the iron-magnesia varieties fuse with a strong heat to a
blebby slag or enamel; the iron
varieties fuse with difficulty, or, in some, only on the
edges; the iron-magnesia-lithia
varieties fuse on the edges, and often with great
difficulty, and some are infusible; the lithia
varieties are infusible. With the fluxes many varieties give reactions for iron and man-
ganese. Fused with a mixture of potassium bisulphate and fluor-spar gives a distinct re-
action for boric acid. Not decomposed by acids. Crystals, especially of the lighter colored
varieties, show strong pyroelectricity.
Diff. Characterized by its crystallization, prismatic forms usual, which are three-,
six-, or nine-sided, and often with rhombohedral
terminations; massive forms with colum-
nar structure; also by absence of
cleavage (unlike amphibole and epidote); in the common
black kinds by the coal-like
fracture; by hardness; by difficult fusibility (common kinds),
compared with garnet and vesuvianite. The boron test is conclusive.
Micro. Readily distinguished in thin sections by its somewhat high relief; rather
ng n erence~ colors ne"gative uniaxial
u u i i
'
character; decided colors in ordinary light in
which basal sections often exhibit a zonal structure.
Also, especially, by its remarkable
-bsorption when the direction of crystal elongation is _]_ to the
vibration-plane of the lower
nicol; this with its lack of cleavage distinguishes it from biotite and
amphibole, which alone
among rock-making minerals show similar strong absorption.
Ubs. Commonly found in granite and gneisses as a result of fumarole action or of
legalizing gases m the fluid magma, especially in the
pegmatite veins associated with
icn rocks; at the
periphery of such masses or in the schists, or altered limestones, gneisses,
!tc., immediately adjoining them. It marks especially the boundaries of granitic
its associate minerals are those
masses,
characteristic of such occurrences; quartz, albite,
microcline muscovite etc. The
variety in granular limestone or dolomite is commonly
vn, tne bluish-black variety sometimes associated with tin
ores; the brown with
e lithium
variety is often associated with lepidolite. Red or green varieties,
CUr near kat F mb
d Ppn- Q ? u
rg in the Ural Mts - Elba Campolongo in Tessin, Switzer-
;
XOny; * he P rovince Min as

^lr ?: -
Geraes, Brazil; yellow and brown from
br n netles rom
?T Eibenstock, Saxony; the Zillertal, Tyrol, Austria;
"
A
'
N
dal
.
rwa y; Snarum and Kragero,
Norway; pale yellowish brown at
i
crystais ccur in c n at different iocaiities

-
SILICATES 543
In the United States, in Me. at Paris and Hebron, magnificent red and green tourmalines
with lepidolite, etc.; also blue and pink varieties; and at Norway; pink at Rumford, em-
bedded in lepidolite; at Auburn in clear crystals of a delicate pink or lilac with lepidolite,
etc.; at Albany, green and black. In Mass., at Chesterfield, red, green, and blue; at
Goshen, blue and green; at Norwich, New Braintree and Carlisle, good black crystals. In
N. H., Grafton, Acworth; at Orford, brownish black in steatite. In Conn., at Monroe,
dark brown in mica-slate; at Haddam, black in mica slate; also fine pink and green; at
New Milford, black. In N. Y., near Gouverneur, brown crystals, with tremolite, etc.,
in granular limestone; black near Port Henry, Essex Co.; near Edenville; splendid black
crystals at Pierrepont, St. Lawrence Co.; colorless and glassy at De Kalb; dark brown at
McComb. In N. J., at Hamburg and Newton, black and brown crystals in limestone,
with spinel; also grass-green crystals in crystalline limestone near Franklin Furnace. In
Pa., at Newlin, Chester Co.; near Unionville, yellow; at Chester, fine black; Middle-
town, black; Marple, green in talc; near New Hope on thej)elaware, large black crystals.
A chrome yvariety from the chromite beds in Montgomery Co., Md. In N. C., Alexander
e black crystals with emerald and hiddenite.
Co., in fine In Cal., fine groups of rubellite in
lepidolite from Mesa Grande, Pala, etc. in San Diego Co.
In Canada, in the province of Quebec, yellow crystals in limestone at Calumet Falls,
Litchfield, Pontiac Co.; at Hunterstown; fine brown crystals at Clarendon, Pontiac Co.;
black at Grenville and Argenteuil, Argenteuil Co. In Ontario, in fine crystals at North
Burgess, Lanark Co.; Gal way and Stoney Lake in Dummer, Peterborough Co.
The name turmalin from Turamali in Cingalese (applied to zircon by jewelers of Cey-
lon) was introduced into Holland in 1703, with a lot of gems from Ceylon.
Use. The variously colored and transparent varieties are used as gem stones; see
under "Var." above.
Dumortierite. A basic aluminium borosilicate, perhaps SAloOsÔs.GSiC^.HaO (Schaller) .
The water and boric oxide have been considered as variable in amount and basic in charac-
ter with the general formula, (AlO)i 6 Al 4 (SiO4) 7 (Ford).
Orthorhombic. Prismatic angle approximately 60. Usually in fibrous to columnar
aggregates. Cleavage: a (100), distinct; also prismatic, imperfect. H. =7. G. = 3'26-
3'36. Luster vitreous. Color bright smalt-blue to greenish blue. Transparent to trans-
lucent. Pleochroism very strong: X
deep-blue or nearly colorless, Y yellow to red- violet
or nearly colorless, Z colorless or pistachio-green. Exhibits idiophanous figures, analogous
to andalusite. Optically -. Ax. pi. b (010). Bx J_ c (001).
||
= 1-678. = 1'686.
7 = 1-689.
Recognized in thin section by its rather high relief; low interference-colors (like those
of quartz); occurrence in slender prisms, needles or fibers, with negative optical extension;
parallel extinction; biaxial character and "especially by its remarkable pleochroism.
Found embedded in feldspar in blocks of gneiss at Chaponost, near Lyons, France;
from Wolfshau, near Schmiedeberg, Silesia; in the iolite of the gneiss of Tvedestrand,
Norway; Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. In the United States, it occurs near Harlem, New York
Island, in the pegmatoid portion of a biotite-gneiss in a quartzose rock at Clip, Yuma Co.,
;
Arizona; from San Diego Co., Cal.; Woodstock, Wash.

STAUROLITE. Staurotide.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c 0-4734 : 1 : 0-6828.
mm"', 110 A 110 = 50 40'. cr, 001 A 101 = 55 16'.
rr', 101 A 101 = 110 32'. m,r, 110 A 101 = 42 2'.
922 923 924
Twins cruciform: tw. pi. x (032), the crystals crossing nearly at right
angles; tw. pi. z (232), crossing at an angle of 60 approximately; tw. pi.
439, 440, 441, p 170).

y (230) rare, also in repeated twins (cf. Figs. 397, p. 164;
.
and flattened b axis; often with rough surfaces.

Crystals commonly prismatic ||
Cleavage: b (010) distinct, but interrupted; (110) m

traces. m
Fracture
subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 7-7-5. G. = 3 '65-3 77. Subvitreous, inclin-
ing to resinous. Color dark reddish brown to brownish black, and yellowish
brown. Streak uncolored to grayish. Translucent to nearly or quite opaque.
Pleochroism distinct Z ( = c axis) hyacinth-red
:
to blood-red, X, Y yellowish red; or Z gold-yellow,

**&* x
Y light yellow to colorless. Optically +. Ax.
pi. a (100).
||
Bx _L c (001). 2V = 88 (ap-
\ MI a = 1-736. = 1741. 7 = 1*746.
I / prox.). ft
Comp. HFeAl 5 Si2 Oi3, which may be writ-

ten (A10)4(AlOH)Fe(SiO4) 2 or H
2 O.2Fe0.5Al 2 O 3 .
010 010 4SiO2 = Silica 26*3, alumina 55 '9, iron protoxide

x
> 15-8, water 2'0 = 100. Magnesium (also man-
ganese) replaces a little of the ferrous iron; ferric
/\
iron part of the aluminium.
Nordmarkite from Nordmark, Sweden, contains man-
ganese in large amounts.
\g Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible, excepting the manganesian
& variety, which fuses easily to a black magnetic glass.
Z With the fluxes gives reactions for iron, and sometimes
for manganese. Imperfectly decomposed by sulphuric acid.
Diff. Characterized by the obtuse prism (unlike andalusite, which is nearly square) ;
by the frequency of twinning forms; by hardness and infusibility.

Micro. Under the microscope, sections show a decided color (yellow to red or brown)
and strong pleochroism (yellow and red); also characterized by strong refraction (high
relief), rather bright interference-colors, parallel extinction and biaxial character (generally
positive in the direction of elongation). Easily distinguished from rutile (p. 427) by its
biaxial character and lower interference-colors.
Obs. Usually found in crystalline schists, as mica schist, argillaceous schist, and
gneiss, as a result of regional or contact metamorphism; often associated with garnet, silli-
manite, cyanite, and tourmaline. Sometimes encloses symmetrically arranged carbon-
aceous impurities like andalusite (p. 524) Other impurities are also often present, especially
.
silica, sometimes up to 30 to 40 p. c.; also garnet, mica, and perhaps magnetite, brookite.
Occurs with cyanite in paragonite schist, at Mt. Campione, Switzerland; in the Zillertal,
Tyrol, Austria; Goldenstein in Moravia; Aschaffenburg, Bavaria; in large twin crystals in
the mica schists of Brittany and Scotland. In the province of Minas Geraes, Brazil.
Abundant throughout the mica schists of New England. In Me., at Windham. In
N. H., brown at Franconia; at Lisbon; on the shores of Mink Pond, loose in the soil. In
Mass., at Chesterfield, in fine crystals. In Conn., at Bolton, Vernon, etc.; Southbury with
garnets; at Litchfield, black crystals. In N. C., near Franklin, Macon Co.; also in Madi-
son and Clay counties. In Ga., in Fannin Co., loose in the soil in fine crystals. In large
crystals from Ducktown, Tenn.
Named from (rravpos, a cross.
Use. Occasionally a transparent stone is cut for a gem.
Kornerupine. Near MgAl2 SiO 6 . In fibrous to columnar aggregates, resembling silli-
mamte. H. = 6'5. G. = 3'273 kornerupine; 3'341 prismatine. Colorless to white, or
brown. Biaxial, -. Indices, 1 '669-1 '682.
Kornerupine occurs at Fiskernas on the west coast of Greenland. Prismatine is from
Waldheim, Saxony. Found in large, clear crystals of a sea-green color and gem quality
trom near Betroka, Madagascar.
Sapphirine. Mg
6 Ali 2 Si 2 O27. In indistinct tabular crystals. Usually in disseminated
grains, or aggregations of grains. H. 7'5.= G. = 3'42-3'48. Color pale to dark blue or
green. Biaxial, -. Indices, 1705-1711. From Fiskernas, southwestern Greenland.
Occurs near Betroka, Madagascar. From St. Urbain, Quebec.
r\ .p^didierite.
A basic silicate of aluminium, ferric iron, magnesium, ferrous iron, etc.
Orthornombic. In elongated crystals. Two
cleavages. G. = 3'0. Color bluish green.
SILICATES 545
/3
= 1-64. Strongly pleochroic. Found in pegmatite at Andrahomana in southern
Madagascar.
Serendibite. 10(Ca,Mg)O.5Al 2 p 3 .B 2 O 3 .6SiO2 In irregular grains showing polysyn-
.
thetic twinning; probably monoclinic or triclinic. H. = 6*7. G. = 3*4. Color blue.

Pleochroism marked. Refractive index, 17. Infusible. From Gangapitiya near Am-
bakotte, Ceylon.
Silicomagnesipfluorite. A fluosilicate of calcium and magnesium, perhaps, 2 Ca 4 Mg3 H
Si 2 O 7 Fi .
Radiating fibrous in spherical forms. H. = 2'5. G. = 2'9. Color ash-gray,
light greenish or bluish. Fusible. From Lupikko, near Pitkaranta, Finland.
Grothine. A calcium with aluminium and a little iron of uncertain compo-
silicate of
sition. In small tabular crystals. Colorless. Transparent. G. = 3'09.
Orthorhombic.
Optically +. Infusible. Decomposed by sulphuric acid. Found with microsommite on
limestone near Nocera and Sarno, Campagna, Italy.
ALOISIITE. Luigite. A
basic silicate containing ferrous oxide, lime, magnesia, and
soda. Amorphous. Color, brown to violet. Acts as a cement in a tuff found at Fort
Portal,Uganda.
POCHITE. Hi6Fe8 Mn 2 Si 3 O 2 9. Amorphous. H. = 3'5-4. G. = 370. Color reddish
brown. Opaque. Found in iron ore near Vares, Bosnia.
SILICATES
Section B. Chiefly Hydrous Species
The SILICATES second section include the true hydrous compounds,
of this
that is, those which contain water of crystallization, like the zeolites; also the
hydrous amorphous species, as the clays, etc. There are also included certain
species as the Micas, Talc, Kaolinite which, while they yield water upon
ignition, are without doubt to be taken as acid or basic metasilicates, orthosili-
cates, etc. Their relation, however, is so close to other true hydrous species
that it appears more natural to include them here than to have placed them
in the preceding chapter with other acid and basic salts. Finally, some
species are referred here about whose chemical constitution and the part
played by the water present there is still much doubt. The divisions recog-
nized are as follows:
I. Zeolite Division
1. Introductory Subdivision. 2. Zeolites
II. Mica Division

1. Mica Group. 2. Clintonite Group. 3. Chlorite Group
III. Serpentine and Talc Division
Chiefly Silicates of Magnesium.
IV. Kaolin Division
Chiefly Silicates of Aluminium; for the most part belonging to the group
of the clays.
V. Concluding Division
Species not included in the preceding divisions; chiefly silicates of the
heavy metals, iron, manganese, etc.
I. Zeolite Division
1. Introductory Subdivision
Of the species here included, several, as Apophyllite, Okenite, etc., while not strictly
ZEOLITES, are closely related to them in composition and method of occurrence. Pectolite
(p. 483) and Prehnite (p. 534) are also sometimes classed "here.
Inesite. H
2 (Mn,Ca)6Si 6 Oi 9 .3H 2 O. Crystals small, prismatic; also fibrous, radiated and
spherulitic. H. = 6. G. = 3'029. Color rose- to flesh-red. Occurs at the manganese
mines near Dillenburg, Germany. Rhodotilite is the same species from the Harstig mine,
Pajsberg, Sweden. From Jakobsberg and Langban, Sweden Villa Corona, Durango, Mexico.
;
Hillebrandite. Ca 2 SiO 4 .H 2O. Orthorhombic; radiating fibrous. H. = 5'5. G.= 27.

Refractive index = 1*61. Color white. Fusible with difficulty. Found in contact zone
between limestone and diorite in the Velardena mining district, Mexico.
Crestmoreite. Probably 4H 2 CaSiO 4 .3H 2 O. Compact. Color, snow-white. H. = 3.
G. = 2'2. ft = T59. An alteration product of Wilkeite. From Crestmore, Riverside Co.,
Riversideite. 2CaSiO 6 .H 2 O. In compact fibrous veinlets. Silky luster. H. = 3.

G. = 2-64. Indices, 1 "59-1 '60. Easily fusible. From Crestmore, Riverside Co., Cal.
Ganophyllite. 7MnO.Al 2 O 3 .8SiO 2 .6H 2 O. In short prismatic crystals; also foliated,
micaceous. Color brown. H. = 4~4'5. G. = 2'84. Biaxial, -. Indices, 17Q5-1730.
From the Harstig mine, near Pajsberg, Sweden.
Lotrite. 3(Ca,Mg)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 3 .4SiO 2 .2H 2 O. O
Massive, in an aggregate of small
grains and leaves. One cleavage. H. = 7'5. G.= 3'2. Color green. Refractive index,
1'67. Found in small veins in a chlorite schist in the valley of the Lotru, Transylvania.
. Okenite. H
2 CaSi 2 O 6 .H 2 O. Commonly fibrous; also compact. H. = 4'5-5. G. = 2'28-
2 '36. Color white, with a shade of yellow or blue. Biaxial,
Index, 1'556. Occurs in
.
basalt or related eruptive rocks; as in the Faroe Islands; Iceland; Disko,

Niorkornat, etc.,
Greenland; Poona, India. From Crestmore, Riverside Co., Cal.
Gyrolite. H
2 Ca 2 Si 3 O 9 .H 2 O. Rhombohedral-tetartohedral. In white concretions,
lamellar-radiate in structure. Optically -. co = 1'56. From the Isle of Skye, with
stilbite, laumontite, etc.; in India, etc. With apophyllite of New Almaden, California;
also Nova Scotia. Found also at various places in Bohemia; from Scotland and the Faroe
Islands; Sao Paulo, Brazil. Reyerite from Greenland is similar to gyrolite. Zeophyllite is
a similar species which may be identical with gyrolite. Rhombohedral. In
spherical
forms with radiating foliated structure. Perfect basal cleavage. H. = 3. G. = 2*8.
Color white, u = 1'56. From various localities in Bohemia and elsewhere.
APOPHYLLITE.
Tetragonal. Axis c = 1 -2515.
926 927 928 929
ay, 100 A 310 18 26'.

op, 100 A 111 52 0'.
cp, 001 A 111 60 32'.
pp', 111 A Til 76 0'.
it aried in sc uare P risms ( (100)) usually short and terminated by

/ T ' l
-) or by o and p (111), and then resembling a cube or

cubo-octahedron;
SILICATES 547
also acute pyramidal (p (111)) with or without c and a; less often thin tabu-
lar II
Faces c often rough; a bright but vertically striated; p more or less
c.
uneven. Also massive and lamellar; rarely concentric radiated.

Cleavage: c (001) highly perfect; m (110) less so. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 4-5-5. G. = 2-3-2-4. Luster of c pearly; of other faces
vitreous. Color white, or grayish; occasionally with a greenish, yellowish, or
rose-red tint, flesh-red. Transparent; rarely nearly opaque. Birefringence
low; usually +, also Often shows anomalous optical characters (Art.
.
429, Fig. 617). Indices, 1-535-1-537.

Comp. H
7 KCa4(SiO 3 )8.4fH 2 or K
2 0.8Ca0.16SiO 2 .16H 2 = Silica
537, lime 25-0, potash 5-2, water 16*1 = 100. A small amount of fluorine
replaces part of the oxygen.
The above formula differs but little from H2 CaSi 2 O6.H 2 O, in which potassium replaces
part of the basic hydrogen. The form often accepted, H 2 (Ca,K)Si 2 O 6 .H2 O, corresponds
less wellwith the analyses.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube exfoliates, whitens, and yields water, which reacts acid.
B.B. exfoliates, colors the flame violet (potash), and fuses to a white vesicular enamel.
F. = 1*5. Decomposed by hydrochloric acid, with separation of slimy silica.
Diff. Characterized by its tetragonal form, the square prism and pyramid the com-
mon habits; by the perfect basal cleavage and pearly luster on this surface.
Obs. Occurs commonly as a secondary mineral in basalt and related rocks, with
various zeolites, also datolite, pectolite, calcite; also occasionally in cavities in granite,
gneiss, etc. Greenland, Iceland, the Faroe Islands, and British India, especially at Poonah,
afford fine specimens of apophyllite in amygdaloidal basalt or diabase. Occurs also at
Andreasberg, Harz Mts., Germany, of a delicate pink; Radautal in the Harz Mts.; at
Orawitza, Hungary, with wollastonite; Uto, Sweden; on the Seisser Alp in Tyrol, Austria;
Guanajuato, Mexico, often of a beautiful pink upon amethyst.
In the United States, large crystals occur at Bergen Hill, Paterson, West Paterson,
and Great Notch, N. J.; in Pa., at the French Creek mines, Chester Co.; at the Cliff,
Phoenix and other mines, Lake Superior region; Table Mt. near Golden, Col.; in Cal.,
at the mercury mines of. New Almaden often stained brown by bitumen; also from Nova
Scotia at Cape Blomidon, and other points.
Named by Haiiy in allusion to its tendency to exfoliate under the blowpipe, from airb
and (f>v\\oi>, a leaf. Its whitish pearly aspect, resembling the eye of a fish after boiling, gave
rise to the earlier name Ichthyophthalmite, from ixOvs, fish, 6<f>da\iJi6s, eye,
2. Zeolites
The ZEOLITES form a family of well-defined hydrous silicates, closely re-
lated to each other in composition, in conditions of formation, and hence in
mode of occurrence. They are often with right spoken of as analogous to
the Feldspars, like which they are all silicates of aluminium with sodium and
calcium chiefly, also rarely barium and strontium; magnesium, iron, etc., are
absent or present only through impurity or alteration. Further, the com-
position in a number of cases corresponds to that of a hydrated feldspar; while
fusion and slow recrystallization result in the formation from some of them of
aiiorthite (CaAl 2 Si 2 Og) or a calcium-albite (CaA^SieOie) as shown by Doelter.
The Zeolites do riot, however, form a single group of species related in crystal-
lization, like the Feldspars, but include a number of independent groups
widely diverse in form and distinct in composition; chief among these are
the monoclinic PHILLIPSITE GROUP; the rhombohedral CHABAZITE GROUP,
and the orthorhombic (and monoclinic) NATROLITE GROUP. A transition in
composition between certain end compounds has been more or less well-
established in certain cases, but, unlike the Feldspars, with these species cal-
cium and sodium seem to replace one another and an increase in alkali does not
necessarily go with an increase in silica.
Like other hydrous silicates they are characterized by inferior hardness,
chiefly from 3-5 to 5-5, and the specific gravity is also lower than with corre-
2 -4. Corresponding to these charac-
sponding anhydrous species, chiefly 2 -0 to
ters; they are rather readily decomposed by acids, many of them' with gela-
tinization. The intumescence B.B., which gives the name to the family (from
is characteristic of a large part of the species.
fefi>, to boil, and \iBos, stone)
The Zeolites are all secondary minerals, occurring most commonly in
cavities and veins in basic igneous rocks, as basalt, diabase, etc.; less fre-
lime and the soda in part
quently in granite, gneiss,, etc. In these cases the
have been chiefly yielded by the feldspar; the soda also by elseolite, sodalite,
etc. ; potash by leucite, etc. The different species of the family are often asso-
ciated together; also with pectolite and apophyllite (sometimes included with
the zeolites), datolite, prehnite and, further, calcite. Many of the zeolites
have been produced synthetically by various hydrochemical reactions. In
general they appear to have been formed in nature by reactions upon the feld-
spar or feldspathoid minerals.
Ptilolite. RAl 2 SiioO24.5H 2 O. Here = Ca 2 R : K

Na2 = 6 2 1 approx. In short : : :
capillary needles, aggregated in delicate tufts. Colorless, white. Biaxial, +. Indices,

1 '480-1 '485. Occurs upon a bluish chalcedony in cavities in a vesicular augite-andesite
found in fragments in the conglomerate beds of Green and Table mountains, Jefferson Co.,
and from Silver Cliff, Custer Co., Col., also from Elba and Iceland.
Mordenite. 3RAl 2 Si 10 24 .20H;.O, where
-
p 2 Na2 Ca 1 1R =K
1. In minute : :
= : :
crystals resembling heulandite in habit and angles; also in small hemispherical or reniform
concretions with fibrous structure. H. = 3-4. G. = 215. Color white, yellowish or
pinkish. Occurs near Morden, King's Co., Nova Scotia, in trap; also in western Wyoming
near Hoodoo Mt., on the ridge forming the divide between Clark's Fork and the East Fork
of the Yellowstone river.Also from Seiseralpe, Tyrol, Austria and the Faroe Islands.
HEULANDITE. Stilbite some authors.

0-4293; = 88 34J'.
mm'", 110 A 1TO = 43 56'. cs, 001 A 201 = 66 0'.
ct, 001 A 201 = 63 40'. ex, 001 A 021 = 40 38|'

v
Crystals sometimes flattened b (010), the surface of pearly 1 1
\ luster (Fig. 930; also Fig. 21, p. 12); form often suggestive of
t the orthorhombic system, since the angles cs and ct differ but
little. Also in globular forms; granular.
Cleavage: b (010) perfect. Fracture subconchoidal to un-
even. Brittle.
3-5-4. G. = 2-18-2-22.
H. = Luster of 6
strong pearly; of other faces vitreous. Color various shades
of wmt e, passing into red,
gray and brown. Streak white.
Transparent to subtranslucent. Optically +. Ax. pi. and
Bxa _L b (010). Ax. pi. and Bx for some localities nearly c ||
also for others
nearly _L c in white light. Bx A c axis = 57J +
Axial angle
variable, from to 92; usually 2Er = 52. a = 1-498.
P = 1-^:99. 7 = 1-505.
Comp. H CaAl
4 2 (Si0 3 ) 6 .3H 2 or 5H2 O.CaO.Al O 2 3 .6SiO 2 = Silica 59'2,
alumina 16'8, lime 9'2, water 14'8 = 100.
Strontia is usuaUy
present, sometimes up to 3 '6 p. c.
Pyr. As with stilbite, p. 551.
SILICATES 549
Obs. Heulandite occurs principally in basaltic rocks, associated with chabazite, stil-
bite and other also in gneiss, and occasionally in metalliferous veins.
zeolites;
The finest specimens of this species come from Berufiord, and elsewhere in Iceland;
the Faroe Islands; in British India, near Bombay; also in railroad cuttings in the Bhor
and Thul Ghats. Also occurs in the Kilpatrick Hills, near Glasgow; on the Island of
Skye; Fassatal, Tyrol, Austria; Andreasberg, Harz Mts., Germany; Viesch and elsewhere,
Switzerland.
In the United States, in diabase at Bergen Hill, West Paterson and Great Notch, N. J.;
on north shore of Lake Superior; with haydenite at Jones's Falls near Baltimore (beau-
montite), Md. At Peter's Point, Nova Scotia; also at Cape Blomidon, and other points.
Named after the English mineralogical collector, H. Heuland, whose cabinet was the
basis of the classical work (1837) of Levy.
Brewsterite. H
4 (Sr,Ba,Ca)Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .3H 2 O. In prismatic crystals. H. =5. G. = 2-45.
Color white, inclining to yellow and gray. Biaxial, +. Index, 1*45. From Strontian
in Argyleshire, Scotland; near Freiburg in Breisgau, Germany.
Epistilbite. Probably like heulandite, H 4 CaAl 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .3H 2 O. Crystals monoclinic,

uniformly twins; habit prismatic. In radiated spherical aggregations; also granular.
G. = 2-25. Color white. Biaxial,-. Indices, 1 '502-1 '512. Occurs with scolecite at the,
Berufiord, Iceland; the Faroe Islands; Poona, India; in small reddish crystals, at Mar-
garet ville, Nova Scotia, etc. Reissite is from Santorin Island.
Phillipsite Group.
Wellsite
Phillipsite
Harmotome
Stilbite
PHILLIPSITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a : b : c = 07095 : 1 :
1-2563; ft
= 55 37'.
mm"' 110 A HO = 60 42'. cm, 001 A 110 = 60 50'.

100 A 101 = 34 23'. ee', Oil A Oil = 92 4'.
a/,
933 Crystals uniformly penetration-twins, but often

simulating orthorhombic or tetragonal forms. Twins
sometimes, but rarely, simple (1) with tw. pi. c (001) .
and then cruciform so that diagonal parts on b (010)

belong together, hence a fourfold striation, || edge
b/m, may be often observed on b. (2) Double twins,
the simple twins just noted united with e (Oil) as
tw. pi., and, since ee' varies but little from 90,
the a nearly square prism, terminated
result is
by what appear to be pyramidal faces each with a

double series of striations away from the medial line.
See Figs. 452-454, p. 172; also Fig. 400, p. 164.
Faces 6 (010) often finely striated as just noted, but striations sometimes
absent and in general not so distinct as with harmotome; also (110) m
striated edge b/m. Crystals either isolated, or grouped in tufts or spheres,
||
radiated within and bristled with angles at surface.

Cleavage: c (001), 6 (010), rather distinct. Fracture uneven. Brittle.
H. = 4-4-5. G. = 2-2. Luster vitreous. Color white, sometimes reddish.
Streak uncolored. Translucent to opaque. Optically +. Ax. pi. and Bx
J_ b (010) The ax. pi. lies in the obtuse angle of the a-c axes, and is usually
.
inclined to a axis about 15 to 20, or 75 to 70 to the normal to c (001) The .
position, however, is variable. Indices, 1-48-1-57. 2Ha . r

= 71-84.
Comp. In some cases the formula is (K2 ,Ca) Al2 Si4Oi 2 .4H 2 O = Silica
48-8, alumina 207, lime 7-6, potash 6-4, water 16-5
= 100. Here Ca 2 : K
= 2:1.
Pyr., etc. B.B. crumbles and fuses at 3 to a white enamel. Gelatinizes with hydro-
chloric acid.
Obs. In translucent crystals in basalt, at the Giant's Causeway. Ireland; at Capo di
Bove, near Rome; Aci Castello and elsewhere in Sicily; among the lavas of Mte. Somma,
Vesuvius; in Germany at Stempel, near Marburg; Annerod, near Giessen; in the Kaiser-
stuhl, with faujasite, at Salesl, Bohemia; in the ancient lavas of the Puy-de-D6me, France;
from Richmond, Victoria. Pseudophillipsite, found near Rome, Italy, differs from phillips-
ite only in the manner in which it loses water on heating.
HARMOTOME.
1-2310; ft
= 934
55 10'.
Crystals uniformly cruciform penetration-twins with c

(001) as tw. pi; either (1) simple twins (Fig. 934) or (2)
united as fourlings with tw. pi. e (Oil). These double
twins often have the aspect of a square prism with diag-
onal pyramid, the latter with characteristic feather-like
striations from the medial line. Also in more complex
groups analogous to those of phillipsite.
Cleavage: b (010) easy, c (001) less so. Fracture
uneven to subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 4-5. G. = 2-44-
2-50. Luster vitreous. Color
white; passing into gray,
yellow, red or brown. Streak white. Subtransparent to translucent,
SILICATES 551
Ax. pi. and Bx a J_ b (010). Ax. pi. in obtuse angle a-c axes and inclined about
65 to a axis and 60 to c axis. Optically + . 2V = 43. a = 1-503. ft =
1-505. 7 = 1-508.
Comp. In part H 2 (K 2 ,Ba)Al 2 Si5Oi5.4H 2 O or (K2 ,Ba)O.Al 2 O 3 .5SiO 2 .
5H O =2 Silica 47-1, alumina

16-0, baryta 20'6, potash 2-1, water 14-1 100. =
Pyr., etc. B.B. whitens, then crumbles and fuses without intumescence at 3'5 to a
white translucent glass. Some varieties phosphoresce when heated. Decomposed by
hydrochloric acid without gelatinizing.
Obs. Occurs in basalt and similar eruptive rocks, also phonolite, trachyte; not infre-
quently on gneiss, and in some metalliferous veins. AtStrontian, in Scotland; in a metal-
liferous vein at Andreasberg in the Harz Mts., Germany; at Rudelstadt, Silesia; Oberstein,
Germany, on agate in siliceous geodes; at Kongsberg, Norway.
In the United States, in small brown crystals with stilbite on the gneiss of New York
Island; near Port Arthur, Lake Superior.
Named from ap/zos, joint, and r'env&v, to cut, alluding to the fact that the pyramid
(made by the prismatic faces in twinning position) divides parallel to the plane that passes
through the terminal edges.
STILBITE. Desmine.
Axes a:b:.c = 0-7623 1 1-1940; ft = 50 50'.
Monoclinic. : :
Crystals uniformly cruciform penetration-twins with tw. pi. c (001), analo-

gous to phillipsite and harmotome. The apparent form a rhombic pyramid
whose faces are in fact formed by the prism faces of the two individuals; the
vertical faces being then the pinacoids 6 (010) and c (001) (cf.
Figs. 613-615, p. 299). Usually thin tabular b (010). These 935 ||
compound crystals are often grouped in nearly parallel position,

forming sheaf -like aggregates with the side face (b), showing
its characteristic pearly luster, often deeply depressed. Also
divergent or radiated; sometimes globular and thin lamellar-
columnar.
Cleavage: 6 (010) perfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle.
H. = 3-5-4. G. = 2-094-2-205. Luster vitreous; of b (010)
pearly. Color white; occasionally yellow, brown or red, to
brick-red. Streak uncolored. Transparent to translucent.
Optically Ax. pi.
. b (010).
|| Bxa inclined 5 to axis a in
obtuse angle a-c axes; hence Bxa A caxis = 55 50'. 2V =
33 (approx.). a = 1-494. ft = 1-498. 7 = I'SOO.
Comp. For most varieties H4(Na2,Ca)Al 2 Si 6 Oi8.4H 2 O or
(Na 2 ,Ca)O.Al 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 .6H 2 O = Silica 57-4, alumina 16-3, lime 7-7, soda
1-4, water 17 -2
= 100. Here Ca Na, = 6 1. : :
Some kinds show a lower percentage of silica, and these have been called hypostilbite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. exfoliates, swells up, curves into fan-like or yermicular forms, and
fuses to a white enamel. F. = 2-2*5. Decomposed by hydrochloric acid, without gelati-
nizing.
Diff. Characterized by the frequency of radiating or sheaf-like forms; by the pearly
luster on the clinopinacoid. Does not gelatinize with acids.
Obs. Stilbite occurs mostly in cavities in amygdaloidal basalt, and similar rocks. It
is also found in some metalliferous veins, and in granite and gneiss.
Abundant on the Faroe Islands; in Iceland; on the Isle of Skye, in amygdaloid also in ;
Dumbartonshire, Scotland, in red crystals; the Giant's Causeway, Ireland; at Andreas-

berg in the Harz Mts., Germany, and Kongsberg and Arendal in Norway, with iron ore;
on the Seisser Alp in Tyrol, Austria, and at the Puflerloch (puflerite) on the granite of ;
Striegau, Silesia. A common mineral in the Deccan trap area of British India.
In North America, sparingly in small crystals at Chester and at the Somerville syenite
quarries, Mass.; at Phillipstown, N. Y.; and at Bergen Hill, West Paterson and Great
Notch, N. J.; also at the Michipicoten Islands, Lake Superior. In Nova Scotia at Part-
ridge Island, also at Isle Haute, Two Islands, Digby Neck, Cape Blomidon, etc.
The name stilbite is from arlX^rj, luster, and desmine from d'caw, a bundle.
H 26 .2H 2 0. Monoclinic. In slender prismatic crystals.

Flokite. 8 (Ca,Na 2 )Al 2 Si 9
Perfect cleavages parallel to (100) and (010).

H. = 5. G. = 2 -10. Colorless and trans-
'472-1 '474. Fuses with intumescence. From Iceland.
parent. Indices, 1
Gismondite. Perhaps CaAl 2 Si2 O 8 .4H 2 O. In pyramidal crystals, pseudo-tetragonal.
H = 4'5 G. = 2-265. Colorless or white, bluish white, grayish, reddish. Biaxial. -.
Index 1-539. Occurs in the leucitophyre of Mt. Albano, near Rome, at Capo di Bove,
and elsewhere, etc.; on the Gorner glacier, near Zermatt, Switzerland; Schlauroth near
Gorlitz in Silesia; Salesl, Bohemia, etc.
LAUMONTITE. Leonhardite. Caporcianite.
Monoclinic. Axes a = M451 1 0-5906; = 68 46'.

: b : c : :
Twins- tw. pi. a (100). Common form the prism m (mm'" 110 A 110 =
93 440 with oblique termination e, 201 (ce 001 A 201
= 56 55'). Also
columnar, radiating and divergent.
Cleavage: 6 (010) and m
(110) very perfect; a (100) imperfect. Fracture
uneven. Not very brittle. H. = 3 -5-4. G. = 2-25-2-36. Luster vitreous,
inclining to pearly upon the faces of cleavage.
Color white, passing into
yellow or gray, sometimes red. Streak uncolored. Transparent to trans-
lucent; becoming opaque and usually pulverulent on exposure. Optically .
Ax. pi. b (010).

||
Bxa A c axis = + 65 to 70. Dispersion large, p < v;
inclined, slight. 2Er = 52 24'. a = 1-513. = 1'524. 7 = 1*525.

Comp. H 4 CaAl2 Si4Oi4.2H 2 =. 4H O.CaO.Al O
2 2 3 .4SiO 2 = Silica 51%
alumina 217, lime 11-9, water 15-3 = 100.
Var. is a laumontite which has lost part of its water (to one molecule),
Leonhardite
and the same probably true of caporcianite. Schneiderite is laumontite from the serpen-
is
tine of Monte Catini, Italy, which has undergone alteration through the action of magnesian
solutions.
Pyr., etc. B.B. swells up and fuses at 2'5-3 to a white enamel. Gelatinizes with
hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Occurs in the cavities of basalt and similar eruptive rocks; also in porphyry
and syenite, and occasionally in veins traversing clay slate with calcite.
Its principal localities are the Faroe Islands; Disko in Greenland; in Bohemia, at Eule
in clay slate; St. Gothard in Switzerland; Baveno, Italy; Nagyag, Transylvania; the
Fassatal, Tyrol, Austria; the Kilpatrick hills, near Glasgow, Scotland; the Hebrides, and
the north of Ireland. In India, in the Deccan trap area, at Poona, etc.
Peter's Point, Nova Scotia, affords fine specimens of this species. Found at Phipps-
burg, Me. Abundant in many places in the copper veins of Lake Superior in trap, and on
Isle Royale; on north shore of Lake Superior, between Pigeon Bay and Fond du Lac.
Found also at Bergen Hill, N. J.; at the Tilly Foster iron mine, Brewster, N. Y.
Laubanite. CaaAUSuOu.GHjjO. Resembles stilbite. H. = 4'5-5. G. = 2'23. Color
snow-white. Occurs upon phillipsite in basalt at Lauban, Silesia.
Chabazite Group. Rhombohedral

rr'. c
Chabazite (Ca,Na2 )Al 2 Si 4 12 .6H 2 85 14' 1;0860
Gmelinite (Na2 Ca)Al 2 Si 4 Oi2 .6H2 68 8' 07345 or fc = 1*1017
Levynite CaAl 2 Si 3 Oi .5H 2 73 56' 0'8357 fc = 1-1143
The Chabazite Group includes these three rhombohedral species. The

fundamental rhombohedrons have different angles, but, as shown in the axial
ratios above, they are closely related,
since, taking the rhombohedron of
Chabazite as_ the basis, that of Gmelinite has the symbol (2023) and of
Levynite (3034).
The variation in composition often observed in the first two species has led to the rather
SILICATES 553
plausible hypothesis that they are to be viewed as isomorphous mixtures of the feldspar-like
compounds
(Ca,Na2)Al 2 Si 2 O 8 .4H2O, (Ca,Na2 )Al 2 Si 6 Oi 6 .8H2 O.
CHABAZITE.
Rhombohedral. Axis c = 1-0860; 0001 A 1011 = 51 25f.
936 937 938
Phacolite
Twins: (1) tw. axis c axis, penetration-twins common. (2) Tw. pi.
r(1011); contact-twins, rare. Form commonly the simple rhombohedron
varying little in angle from a cube (rr 1101 A 1101 = 85 14'); also r and
f
e (0112), (ee = 54 47').

'
f
Also in complex twins. Also amorphous.
Cleavage: r (1011) rather distinct. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. =
4-5. G. = 2-08-2-16. Luster vitreous. Color white, flesh-red; streak
uncolored. Transparent to translucent. Optically also (Andreas- ; +
berg, also haydenite). Birefringence low.
interference-figure usually The
confused; .sometimes distinctly biaxial; basal sections then divided into
sharply defined sectors with different optical orientation. These anomalous
optical characters probably secondary and chiefly conditioned by the variation
in the amount of water present. Mean refractive index 1-5.
Var. 1. Ordinary. The most common form is the fundamental rhombohedron, in
which the angle is so near 90 that the crystals were at first mistaken for cubes. Acadialite,
from Nova Scotia (Acadia of the French of 18th century), is a reddish chabazite; sometimes
nearly colorless. Haydenite is a yellowish variety in small crystals from Jones's Falls, near
Baltimore, Md. 2. Phacolite is a colorless variety occurring in twins of hexagonal form
(Fig. 938), and lenticular in shape (whence the name, from 0a/c6s, a bean)', the original
was from Leipa in Bohemia. Here belongs also herschelite (seebachite) from Richmond,
Victoria; the composite twins of great variety and beauty. Probably also the original
herschelite from Sicily. It occurs in flat, almost tabular, hexagonal prisms with rounded
terminations divided into six sectors.
Comp. Somewhat uncertain, since a rather wide variation is often

noted even among specimens from the same locality. The ratio of
(Ca,Na2,K 2 ) :Al is nearly constant (= 1 1), but of A1 2 Si varies from 1 3
: : :
to 1 : 5 ;
the water also increases with the increase in silica. The composition
usually corresponds to (Ca,Na2)Al 2 Si4Oi 2 .6H2O, which, if calcium alone is
present, requires: Silica 47 -4, alumina 20'2, lime 11-1, water 21 -3 = 100. If
Ca Nao = 1:1, the percentage composition is: Silica 47*2, alumina 20*0,
:
lime 5-5, soda 6-1, water 21-2 = 100.

Potassium is present in small amount, also sometimes, barium and strontium. Streng
explains the supposed facts most satisfactorily by the hypothesis that the members of the
group are isomorphous mixtures analogous to the feldspars, as noted above.
Pyr., etc. B.B. intumesces and fuses to a blebby glass, nearly opaque. Decomposed
by hydrochloric acid, with separation of slimy silica.
Diff Characterized by rhombohedral form (resembling a cube). It is harder than

calcite and does noteffervesce with acid; unlike calcite and fluonte in cleavage; fuses B.B.
with intumescence unlike analcite.
Obs. Occurs mostly in basaltic rocks, and occasionally m
gneiss, syenite, mica schist,
hornblendic schist. Occurs at the Faroe Islands, Greenland, and Iceland,
associated with
chlorite and stilbite; at Aussig in Bohemia; in Germany
at Oberstem, with harmotome,
and at Annerod, near Giessen; at the Giant's Causeway, Antrim, Ireland, and Renfrew-
shire, Scotland; Isle of Skye, etc.
In Australia (phacolite) at Richmond, near Melbourne,
etc
In the United States, in syenite at Somerville, Mass.; at Bergen Hill and West Paterson,
Falls near Baltimore, Md. (haydenite). In Nova Scotia, wine
N. J., in crystals; at Jones's
yellow or flesh-red (the last the acadialite), associated
with heulandite, analcite and calcite,
at Five Islands, Swan's Creek, Digby Neck, Two Islands, Wasson's Bluff, etc.
The name chabazite is from x<*/3ôs, an ancient name of a stone.
GMELINITE.
Crystals usually hexagonal in aspect; sometimes p (0111) smaller

than r(1011),_and habit rhombo-
939 940
hedral; rr' 10_11 A 1101
= 68 8',
rp 1011 A 0111
= 37 44'.
Cleavage: m (1010) easy;
c (0001) sometimes distinct. Frac-
ture uneven. Brittle. H. = 4*5.
G. = 2-04-2-17. Luster vitreous.
Colorless, yellowish white, green-
ish white, reddish white, flesh-
red. Transparent to translucent.
Optically positive, also nega-
tive. Birefringence very low. Interference-figure often disturbed, and basal
sections divided optically into sections analogous to chabazite. Mean refrac-
tive index, 1'47.
Comp. In part (Na2,Ca)Al 2 Si40i2.6H 2 O. If sodium alone is present
this requires: Silica 46-9, alumina 19-9, soda 12-1, water 21-1 = 100. See also
p. 552.
Pyr., etc. B.B. fuses easily (F. =

2'5-3) to a white enamel. Decomposed by hydro-
chloric acid with separation of silica.
Obs. Occurs in flesh-red crystals in amygdaloidal rocks at Montecchio Maggiore,
Italy; at Andreasberg, Germany; in Transylvania; Antrim, Ireland; Talisker in Isle of
Skye, in large colorless crystals. In Australia at Flinders, Victoria.
In the United States in fine white crystals at Bergen Hill, Great Notch and Paterson,
N. J. At Cape Blomidon, Nova Scotia (ledererite) also at Two
Islands and Five Islands.
;
Named Gmelinite after Prof. Gmelin of Tubingen (1792-1860).

Levynite. CaAl 2 Si 3 Oi .5H.,p. In rhombohedral crystals. H. = 4-4'5. G. = 2'09-2'lG.
Colorless, white, grayish, reddish, yellowish. Optically co = T50. Found at Glen-
.
arm and at Island Magee, Antrim, Ireland; at Dalsnypen, Faroe Islands, in Iceland; in
East Greenland; in the basalt of Table Mountain near Golden, Col.
Offretite. A potash zeolite, related to the species of the chabazite group. In basalt
of Mont Simiouse, France.
ANALCITE. Analcime.
Isometric. Usually in trapezohedrons; also cubes with faces n (211);

again the cubic faces replaced by a vicinal trisoctahedron. Sometimes in
composite groups about a single crystal as nucleus (Fig. 389, p. 161). -Also
massive granular; compact with concentric structure.
SILICATES 555
Cleavage: cubic, in traces. Fracture subconchoidal. Brittle. H. =

5-5 -5. G. = 2-22-2-29. Luster vitreous. Colorless, white;
occasionally
grayish, greenish, yellowish, or reddish white. Transparent to nearly opaque.
Often shows weak double refrac-
which is apparently con- 942
tion,
nected with loss of water and
consequent change in molecular
structure (Art. 429). n = 1-4874.
Comp. Na AlSi O H O = 2 6 2
Na20.Al 2 O3.4Si0 .2H O = Silica

2 2
54.5, alumina 23-2, soda 14-1,

water 8-2 = 100.
Analyses show always a varying
excess of and water above
silica
amounts required by formula. It has
been assumed that a molecule containing the acid H Si O
2 2 6 is present in soild solution in
small amounts.
Pyr., etc. Yields water in the closed tube. B.B. fuses at 2'5 to a colorless glass.
Gelatinizes with hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Characterized by trapezohedral form, but is softer than garnet, and yields water
B.B., unlike leucite (which is also infusible); fuses without intumescence to a clear glass
unlike chabazite. From leucite and spdalite surely distinguished only by chemical tests,
i.e., absence of chlorine in the nitric-acid test (see sodalite, p. 502), absence of much potash
and abundance of soda in the solution, anol evolution of much water from the powder in a
closed glass tube below a red heat.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its very low relief and isotropic character;
often shows optical anomalies.
Obs. Occurs frequently with other zeolites., also prehnite, calcite, etc., in cavities and
seams in basic igneous rocks, as basalt, diabase, etc.: also in granite, gneiss, etc. Recently
shown to be also a rather widespread component of the groundmass of various basic
igneous rocks, at times being the only alkali-alumina silicate present, as in the so-called
analcite-basalts. Has been held in such cases to be a primary mineral produced by the
crystallization of a magma containing considerable soda and .water vapor held under pres-
sure.
The Cyclopean Islands, near Catania, Sicily, afford pellucid crystals; also the Fassatal
in Tyrol, Austria; other localities are, in Scotland, in the Kilpatrick Hills; Co. Antrim,
etc., in Ireland; the Faroe Islands; Iceland; near Aussig, Bohemia; at Arendal, Norway,
in beds of iron ore; at Andreasberg, in the Harz Mts., Germany, in silver mines.
In the United States, occurs at Bergen Hill and West Paterson, N. J.; in gneiss near
Yonkers, Westchester Co., N. Y.; abundant in fine crystals with prehnite, datolite, and
calcite, in the Lake Superior region; at Table Mt. near Golden, Col., with other zeolites.
Nova Scotia affords fine specimens.
The name analcime is from avaXms, weak, and alludes to its weak electric power
when heated or rubbed. The correct derivative is analcite, as here adopted for the species.
Faujasite. Perhaps
In isometric octahedrons. H. =5. G. = 1'923. Colorless, white, n = 1'48. Oc-
curs with augite in the limburgite of Sasbach in the Kaiserstuhl, Baden, Germany, etc.
Edingtonite. Perhaps BaAl 2 Si 3 Oio.3H2O. Crystals pyramidal in habit (orthorhombic,
pseudo-tetragonal); also massive. H. = 4-4 -5. G. = 2*694. White, grayish white, pink.
Optically .
Indices, 1*538-1 '554. Occurs in the Kilpatrick Hills, near Glasgow, Scot-
land, with harmotome. From Bohlet, Sweden.
Natrolite Group. Orthorhombic and Monoclinic
a
Natrolite 0*9785 0-3536
a c
Scolecite Ca(A10H) 2 (SiO 3 )3.2H 2 O 0-9764 0-3434 89 18'
(Na2 Al 2 Si 3 O 10 .2H 2 O
Mesolite
[2[CaAl 2 Si 3 Oio.3H 2 O]
The three species of the NATROLITE GROUP agree closely in angle, though varying m
also rarely monoclmic ; fecolecite is
crystalline system; Natrolite is orthorhombic usually,
seems to be both monoclmic and tn-
monoclinic, perhaps also in part triclinic; Mesolite
clinic. Fibrous, radiating or divergent groups are
common to all these species.
The Natrolite Group includes the sodium silicate, Natrolite, with the empirical formula
Na2Al 2 Si 3 .2H
Oi 2 the calcium silicate, Scolecite, CaAlaSigOio.SHaO; also Mesolite
O;
, .
\ mNa Al2Si Oio.2H O
2 3 2
intermediate between these and corresponding to n CaAl 2 Si3Oio.3H 2 O.
NATROLITE.
Orthorhombic.* Axes a : b c = 0-9785 1 : 0*3536.:
mm"', 110 A 1TO = 88'
944 mo, 110 A 111 = 63 11'.

943
oo 111 A 111 37 38'.
oo' 111 A 111 36 47'.
Crystals prismatic, usually very slender to

acicular; frequently divergent, or in stellate
groups. Also fibrous, radiating, massive, gran-
ular, or compact.
Cleavage: m
(110) perfect; b (010) imper-
perhaps only a plane of parting.
fect, Frac-
ture uneven. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 2'20-2'25.
Luster vitreous, sometimes inclining to pearly,
especially in fibrous varieties. Color white, or colorless; to grayish, yellow-
ish, reddish to red. Transparent to translucent. Optically +. Ax. pi. ||
6 (010). Bx _L c (001). 2V = 63. a = 1'480. ft = T482. 7 = T493.

Var. Ordinary. either () in groups of slender colorless prismatic crys-
Commonly
tals, varying but little from square prisms, often acicular, or (6) in fibrous diver-
in angle
gent or radiated masses, vitreous in luster, or but slightly pearly (these radiated forms often
resemble those of thomsonite and pectolite) often also (c) solid amygdules, usually radiated
;
fibrous, and somewhat silky in luster within; (d) rarely compact massive. Galactite is
ordinarily natrolite, in colorless needles from southern Scotland.
Bergmannite, spreustein, brevicite, are names which have been given to the natrolite
from the augite-syenite of southern Norway, on the Langesund fiord, in the "Brevik"
region, where it occurs, fibrous, massive, and in long prismatic crystallizations, and from
white to red in color. Derived in part from elaeolite, in part from sodalite. Iron-natrolite
is a dark green opaque variety, either crystalline or amorphous, from the Brevik region; the
iron is due to inclusions.
Comp. Na2Al 2 Si 3 Oio.2H 2 or Na 2 O.Al 2 3 .3Si0 2 .2H 2 = Silica 474, alu-

mina 26-8, NasO 16-3, water 9-5 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube whitens and becomes opaque. B.B. fuses quietly at 2
to a colorless glass. Fusible in the flame of an ordinary wax candle. Gelatinizes with acids.
Diff. Distinguished from aragonite and pectolite by its easy fusibility and gelati-
nization with acid.
Obs. Occurs in cavities in amygdaloidal basalt, and other related igneous rocks;
sometimes in seams in granite, gneiss, and syenite. Found at Aussig and Teplitz in Bohe-
mia; in fine crystals in Auvergne, France; Fassatal, Tyrol, Austria; Kapnik, Hungary. In
red amygdules (crocalite) in amygdaloid of Ireland, Scotland and Tyrol; the amygdaloid of
Bishopton, Scotland (galactite) and at Glen Farg (fargite) in Fifeshire. Common in the
augite-syenite of the Langesund fiord, near Brevik, southern Norway. From various local-
ities in Greenland.
In North America, in the trap of Nova Scotia; at Bergen Hill and West Paterson, N. J.;
at Copper Falls, Lake Superior; from benitoite locality, San Benito
Co., Cal.
Named Mesotype by Haiiy, from M e<n>s, middle, and TVTTOS, type, because the form of
the crystal in his view a square prism was intermediate between the forms of stilbite
*
In rare cases the crystals seem to be monoclinic.
SILICATES 557
and analcite. Natrolite, of Klaproth, isfrom natron, soda; it alludes to the presence of soda,
whence also the name soda-mesotype, in contrast with scolecite, or lime-mesotype.
SCOLECITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a b c = 0-9764 : : : 1 :
0*3434; /3
= 89 18'.
Crystals slender prismatic (mm'" 110 A 110 = 88 37%'), twins showing a
feather-like striation on b '(010), diverging upward; also as penetration-twins.
Crystals in divergent groups. Also massive, fibrous and radiated, and in
nodules.
Cleavage: m (110) nearly perfect. H. = 5-5-5. G. = 2-16-2-4. Luster
vitreous, or silky when fibrous. Transparent to subtranslucent. Optically .
Ax. pi. and Bx J_b (010). Bxa A c axis = 15-16. 2V = 36 (approx.).

a - 1-512. |8
= 1-519. 7 = 1'519.
Comp. O
CaAl 2 Si 3 10 .3H 2 or CaO.Al2 O O 3 .3SiO 2 .3H 2 = Silica 45'9, alu-
mina 26-0, lime 14-3, water 13*8 = 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. sometimes curls up like a worm (whence the name from o-KuXqg, a
worm, which gives scolecite, and not scolesite or scolezite)', other varieties intumesce but
slightly, and all fuse at 2-2*2 to a white blebby enamel. Gelatinizes with acids like natrolite.
Obs. Occurs in the Berufiord, Iceland; in Scotland in amygdaloid at Staffa Island
and in Isle of Skye, at Talisker; near Eisenach, Saxony; in Auvergne, France; common in
fine crystallizations in the Deccan trap area, in British India. In crystals from Karsanan-
guit-Kakait, Greenland. In the United States, in Col. at Table Mountain near Golden
in cavities in basalt. In Canada, at Black Lake, Megantic Co., Quebec.
Mesolite. Intermediate between natrolite and scolecite (see p. 556). In acicular and
capillary crystals; delicate divergent tufts, etc. G. = 2 -29. White or colorless. Indices,
1 '505-1 '506. In amygdaloidal basalt at numerous points. Crystals from Faroe Islands
appear to be triclinic, pseudomonoclinic through twinning. Pseudomesolite is name given
to a zeolite from Carlton Peak, Minn., like mesolite except for its optical characters.
Gonnardite. (Ca,Na 2 )2Al 2 Si5Oi5.5H2O. In spherules with radiating structure.
G. = 2-25-2-35. From basalt of Gignat, Puy-de-D6me, France.
THOMSONITE.
Distinct crystals rare; in prisms, mm'" 110 A,110 = 89 37'. Commonly
columnar, structure radiated; in radiated spherical concretions; also closely
compact.
Cleavage: 6 (010) perfect; a (100) less so; c (001) in traces. Fracture
uneven subconchoidal. Brittle.
to H. = 5-5*5. G. = 2-3-2-4. Luster
vitreous, more or less pearly. Snow-white; reddish, green; impure varieties
brown. Streak uncolored. Transparent to translucent. Pyroelectric. Op-
tically + . Ax. pi. 1 1
c (001). Bx J_ 6 (010). Dispersion p > v strong. 2V =
54 (approx.). a = 1-497. ft
= 1-503. 7 = 1'525.
Var. 1. Ordinary, (a) In regular crystals, usually more or less rectangular in out-
line, prismatic in habit. (6) Prisms slender, often vesicular to radiated, (c) Radiated
fibrous, (d) Spherical concretions, consisting of radiated fibers or slender crystals. Also
massive, granular to impalpable, and white to reddish brown, less often green as in Union-
ite. The spherical massive forms also radiated with several centers and of varying colors,
hence of much beauty when polished. Ozarkite is a white massive thomsonite from Arkan-
sas.
Comp. (Na 2 ,Ca) Al 2 Si 2 O 8 .2JH 2 or (Na2 ,Ca)O.Al 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 .2iH2 0. The

ratio of Na 2 : Ca varies from 3 : 1 to 1 : 1. If Ca Na^ = 3:1 the percentage
:
composition requires: SiO 2 37'0, A1 2 O 3 31-4, CaO 12'9, NaaO 4-8, H2 13'9 =
100.
B.B. fuses with intumescence at 2 to a white enamel. Gelatinizes with

Pyr., etc.
hydrochloric acid.
'
Diff. Resembles some natrolite, but fuses to an opaque, not to a clear glass.
Obs. Found in cavities in lava in amygdaloidal igneous rocks, sometimes with
elseolite as a result of its alteration. Occurs near Kilpatrick, Scotland; in the lavas of
Mte Somma (comptonite) Vesuvius; in basalt at the Pflasterkaute in Saxe Weimar, Ger-
,
Bohemia, in phonolite; the Cyclopean near Brevik, Norway; the

many in islands, Sicily;
at Mt. Monzoni, Fassatal, Tyrol,
Faroe' Islands; Iceland (carphostilbite, straw-yellow);
Occurs at Peter's Point, Nova Scotia. In the United States, at West Paterson, N. J.;
atMagnet Cove (ozarkite) in the Ozark Mts,, Ark.; in the amygdaloid of Grand Marais,
Lake Superior, which yields the water-worn pebbles resembling agate, in part green (linton-
ite) in the basalt of Table Mt. near Golden, Col.
;
HYDROTHOMSONITE. (H2 ,Na2) Ca)Al2Si2O8.5H 2 O. An alteration product of thomsonite

or scolecite from Tschakwa near Batum on the Black Sea.
Arduinite. A zeolite containing lime and soda. In radiating fibrous aggregates.
G. = 2-26. Color red. From Val dei Zuccanti, Venetia, Italy.
Echellite. (Ca,Na2 )O.2Al2 O 3 .3SiO 2 ,4H 2 O. In radiating, fibrous, spheroidal masses.
White. H. = 5. ft
= T533. Elongated Y. From Sextant Portage, Abitibi River,
|[
Northern Ontario.
Epidesmine. Comp. same as for stilbite. Orthorhombic. In minute crystals, only the
three pinacoids showing. Cleavages parallel to both vertical pinacoids. Colorless to yel-
low. Index = 1 '50. Bx a perpendicular to c (001). Optically-. G. =2*16. Easily
fusible with intumescence. Occurs as a crust on calcite from Schwarzenberg, Saxony.
Stellerite. CaAl2 Si 7 Oi 8 .7H 2 O. Orthorhombic. Crystals tabular parallel to b (010).
Cleavage perfect parallel to b (010), imperfect parallel to a (100) and c (001). H. = 3 '5-4.
G. = 2*12. Indices, 1 '48-1 '50. Found in cavity in a diabase tuff, Copper Island, Com-
mander Islands.
Erionite. H
2 CaK 2 Na 2 Al 2 Si 6 Oi 7 .5H 2 O. Orthorhombic. In aggregates of very slender
fibers,resembling wool. G. = 1'997. White. Occurs in cavities in rhyolite from Durkee,
Oregon.
Bavenite. Ca 3 Al2 (SiO3)6.H 2 O. Monoclinic. Fibrous-radiated groups of prismatic
crystals. One cleavage. H. = 5'5. G. = 2*7. Color white. = 1'58. Occurs in peg-
matitic druses in the granite of Baveno, Italy.
Bityite. A
hydrous silicate of calcium and aluminium, with small amounts of the
alkalies. Pseudo-hexagonal. In minute hexagonal plates which in polarized light show
division into six biaxial sectors. Cleavage parallel to base. H. = 5*5. G. = 3*0. In-
dices 1 '62-1 '64. Found as crystal crusts in pegmatite veins at Maharitra, Madagascar.
Hydronephelite. HNa
2 Al 3 Si 3 Oi 2 .3H 2 O. Massive, radiated. H. = 4'5-6. G. = 2'263.
Color white; also dark gray. Index, 1'50. From Litchfield, Me.; said however to be a
mixture of natrolite, hydrargillite and diaspore. Ranite from the Langesund fiord, Norway,
is similar.
II. Mica Division

The species embraced under this Division fall into three groups: 1, the
MICA GROUP, including the Micas proper; 2, the CLINTONITE GROUP, or the
Brittle Micas; 3, the CHLORITE GROUP.
Supplementary to these are the
Vermiculites, hydrated compounds, chiefly results of the alteration of some
one of the micas.
All of the above species have the characteristic micaceous
structure, that
is, they have highly perfect basal cleavage and yield
easily thin laminae. They
belong to the monoclinic system, but the position of the bisectrix in general
deviates but little from the normal to the plane of
cleavage; all of them show
on the basal section plane angles of 60 or 120,
marking the relative position
of the chief zones of forms
present, and giving them the appearance of hex-
SILICATES 559
agonal or rhombohedral symmetry; further, they are more or less closely

related among themselves in the angles of prominent forms.
The species of this Division all yield water upon ignition, the micas mostly
from 4 to 5 p. c., the chlorites from 10 to 13 p. c.; this is probably to be
regarded in all cases as water of constitution, and hence they are not properly
hydrous silicates.
More or less closely related to these species are those of the Serpentine and
Talc Division and the Kaolin Division following, many of which show dis-
tinctly a mica-like structure and cleavage and also pseudo-hexagonal sym-
metry.
Mica Group. Monoclinic
1.
Muscovite Potassium Mica H 2 KAl3 (Si0 4 ) 3

a : b c = 0-57735 : 1 : 3-3128 ft
= 89 54'
Paragonite Sodium Mica H2 NaAl 3 (SiO 4 )3
Lepidolite Lithium Mica KLi[Al(OH,F) 2 ]Al(Si0 3 ) 3 in part.
Zinnwaldite Lithium-iron Mica
Biotite Magnesium-iron Mica (H,K) 2 (Mg,Fe) 2 (Al,Fe) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 in part.
a : b : c = 0-57735 : 1 : 3-2743 = 90 0'
Phlogopite (H,K,(MgF)) 3 Mg3 Al(Si0 4 ) 3

Magnesium Mica; usually containing fluorine, nearly free from iron.
Lepidomelane Annite.
Iron Micas. Contain ferric iron in large amount.
The species of the MICA GROUP crystallize in the monoclinic system, but
with a close approximation to either rhombohedral or orthorhombic symmetry;
the plane angles of the base are in all cases 60 or 120. They are all charac-
terized by highly perfect basal cleavage, yielding very thin, tough, and more
or less elastic laminae. The negative bisectrix, X, is very nearly normal to the
basal plane, varying at most but a few degrees from this; hence a cleavage
plate shows the axial interference-figure, which for the pseudo-rhombohedral
kinds is often uniaxial or nearly uniaxial. Of the species named above,
biotite has usually a very small axial angle, and is often sensibly unaxial; the
axial angle of phlogopite is also small, usually 10 to 12; for muscovite, para-
gonite, lepidolite the angle is large, in air commonly from 50 to 70.
The Micas may be referred to the same fundamental axial ratio with an
angle of obliquity differing but little from 90; 945
they show to a considerable extent the same
forms, and their isomorphism is further indicated
by their not infrequent intercrystallization in par-
allel position, as biotite with muscovite, lepidolite
with muscovite, etc.
A blow with a somewhat dull-pointed instrument
on a cleavage plate of mica develops in all the
species a six-rayed percussion-figure (Fig. 945, also
Fig. 491, p. 189), two lines of which are nearly par-
allel the third, which is the
to the prismatic edges ;
most strongly characterized, isparallel to the clino-

pinacoid or plane of symmetry. The micas are often divided into two classes,
according to the position of the plane of the optic axes. In the first class
is normal to b (010), the

belong those kinds for which the optic axial plane
the axial plane is parallel to
plane of symmetry (Fig. 945) in the second class
;
the plane of symmetry. The percussion figure serves to fix the crystallo-
graphic orientation when crystalline faces are wanting.
A second series of
lines at right angles to those mentioned may be more or less distinctly developed
by pressure of a dull point on an elastic surface, forming the so-called pressure-
figure; this is sometimes six-rayed, more often shows three
branches only, and
sometimes only two are developed. In Fig. 945 the position of the pressure-
figure is indicated by the broken lines. These lines are connected with gliding-
planes inclined some 67 to the plane of cleavage (see beyond).
The micas of the first class include Muscovite, paragonite, lepidolite, also
:
some rare varieties of biotite called anomite.

The second class embraces: Zinnwaldite and most biotite, including
lepidomelane and phlogopite.
Chemically considered, the micas are silicates, and in most cases orthosili-
cates, of aluminium with potassium and hydrogen, also often magnesium,
ferrous iron, and in certain cases ferric iron, sodium, lithium (rarely rubidium
and caesium); further, rarely, barium, manganese, chromium. Fluorine is
prominent in some species, and titanium is also sometimes present. Other
elements (boron, etc.) may be present in traces. All micas yield water upon
ignition in consequence of the hydrogen (or hydroxyl) which they contain.
MUSCOVITE. Common Mica. Potash Mica.

Monoclinic. Axes a b : c = 0*57735 : 1 :
3-3128; /3
= 89 54'.
Twins common according to the mica-law: tw. pi. a plane in the zone
cM 001 A 221 normal to c (001) the crystals often united by c. Crystals
rhombic or hexagonal in outline with plane angles of 60 or 120. Habit
tabular, passing into tapering forms with planes more or less rough and
strongly striated horizontally; vicinal forms common. Folia often very small
and aggregated in stellate, plumose, or globular forms; or in scales, and scaly
massive; also cryptocrystalline and compact massive.
Cleavage basal, eminent. Also planes of secondary cleavage as shown in
:
the percussion-figure (see pp. 559 and 189) natural plates hence often
; yield
cM, 001 A 221 = 85 36'.
CM, 001 A 111 = 81 30'.
MM', 221 A 221 = 59 48'.
MM', HI A 111 = 59 16'.
narrow strips or thin fibers

||
axis b, and less distinct in
directions inclined 60 to this.
Inin laminae flexible and elastic when
bent, very tough, harsh to the
L
touch, passing into kinds which are less elastic and have a more or less
unctuous or talc-like feel.
Etching-figures on c (001) monoclinic in symmetry ,
(rig. 495, p. 190).

.~~' T* ^' = ^ '76-3. Luster vitreous to more or less pearly or
i ^*'
Iky. Colorless, gray, brown, hair-brown, pale green, and violet, yellow,
dark olive-green, Streak uncolored. Transparent to trans-
rarely rose-red.
lucent.
Pleochroism usually feeble; distinct in some
deep-colored varieties (see
>eyond). Absorption in the direction normal to the cleavage plane (vibra-
X aj strong, much more so than
transversely (vibrations X) hence a
,
1 1 ;
'i
SILICATES 561
crystal unless thin is nearly or quite opaque in the first direction though
translucent through the prism. Optically Ax. pi. J_ b (010) and nearly
.
J_ c (001). Bxa (= X) inclined about -- 1 (behind) to a normal to c (001).

Dispersion p > v. 2V variable, usually about 40, but diminishing in kinds
(phengite) relatively high in silica, a 1*561. ft
= T590. 7 = T594.
Var. 1. Ordinary Muscovite. In crystals as above described, often tabular c (001),
||
also tapering with vertical faces rough and striated; the basal plane often rough unless as
developed by cleavage. More commonly in plates without distinct outline, except as
developed by pressure (see above) the plates sometimes very large, but passing into fine
;
scales arranged in plumose or other forms. In normal muscovite he thin laminae spring
back with force when bent, the scales are more or less harsh to the touch, unless very small,
and a pearly luster is seldom prominent.
2. DAMOURITE. Including margarodite, gilbertite, hydro-muscovite, and most HYDRO-
MICA in general. Folia less elastic; luster somewhat pearly or silky and feel unctuous like
talc. The scales are usually small and it passes into forms which are fine scaly or fibrous,
as sericite, and finally into the compact crypto-crystalline kinds called oncosine, including
much pinite. Often derived by alteration of cyanite, topaz, corundum, etc. Although
often spoken of as hydrous micas, it does not appear that damourite and the allied varieties
necessarily contain more water than ordinary muscovite; they may, however, give it off
more readily.
Margarodite, as originally named, was the talc-like mica of Mt. Greiner in the Zillertal,
Tyrol, Austria; granular to scaly in structure, luster pearly, color grayish white. Gilbertite
occurs in whitish, silky forms from the tin mine of St. Austell, Cornwall. Sericite is a fine
scaly muscovite united in fibrous aggregates and characterized by its silky luster (hence the
name from O-T/PIKOS, silky}.
Comp. For the most part an orthosilicate of aluminium and potas-

sium (H,K)AlSiO 4 If, as in the common kinds, H
. K = 2 1, this becomes
: :
H2 KAl 3 (SiO4 )3 = 2H 2 O.K2 O.3Al2 O 3 .6SiO 2 = Silica 45-2, alumina 38*5, potash
11-8, water 4-5
= 100.
Some kinds give a larger amount of silica (47 to 49 p. c.) than corresponds to a normal
orthosilicate, and they have been called phengite. As shown by Clarke, these acid mus-
covites can be most simply regarded as molecular mixtures of H^KA^SiO^s and
H KAl
2 3 (Si 3 8) 3 .
Iron usually present in small amount only. Barium is rarely present, as in oellacherite.
is
G. = 2'88-2*99. Chromium is also present in fuchsite from Schwarzenstein, Zillertal,
Tyrol, and elsewhere.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives water. B.B. whitens and fuses on the thin edges
(F. = 5'7) to a gray or yellow glass. With fluxes gives reactions for iron and sometimes
manganese, rarely chromium.* Not decomposed by acids. Decomposed on fusion with
alkaline carbonates.
.
Diff. Distinguished in normal kinds from all but the species of this division by the
perfect basal cleavage and micaceous structure, the pale color separates it from most biotite;
the laminae are more flexible and elastic than those of phlogopite and still more than those of
the brittle micas and the chlorites.
Micro. In thin sections recognized by want of color and by the perfect cleavage
shown by fine lines (as in Fig. 951, p. 564) in sections _1_ c (001), in a direction parallel to c.
By reflected light under the microscope the same sections show a peculiar mottled surface
with satin-like luster; birefringence rather high, hence interference-colors bright.
Obs. Muscovite is the most common of the micas. It is an essential constituent of
mica schist and related rocks, and is a prominent component of certain common varieties
of granite and gneiss; also found at times in fragmental rocks and limestones; in volcanic
rocks it is rare and appears only as a secondary product. The largest and best developed
crystals occur in the pegmatite dikes associated with granitic intrusions, either directly
cutting the granite or in its vicinity. Often in such occurrences in enormous plates from
which the mica or "isinglass" of commerce is obtained. It is then often associated with
crystallized orthoclase, quartz, albite; also apatite, tourmaline, garnet, beryl, columbite,
etc., and other mineral species characteristic of granitic veins. Further, muscovite often
encloses flattened crystals of garnet, tourmaline, also quartz in thin plates between the
sheets; further not infrequently magnetite in dendrite-like forms following in part the direc-
tions of the percussion-figure.
Some of the best known localities, are: Abiihl in the Sulzbachtal, Austrian Tyrol; with
adularia; Rothenkopf in the Zillertal, Tyrol; Soboth, Styria; St. Gothard, Binnental, and
elsewhere in Switzerland; Mourne Mts., Ireland; Cornwall; Uto, Falun, Sweden; Skut-
terud, and Bamble, Norway. Obtained in large plates from Greenland and the East Indies.
In Me., at Mount Mica in the town of Paris; at Buckfield, in fine crystals. In N. H., at
Acworth, Graf ton. In Mass., at Chesterfield; South Royalston; at Goshen, rose-red. In
Conn., at Monroe; at Litchfield, with cyanite; at the Middletown feldspar quarry; at
Haddam; at Branch ville, with albite, etc.; New Milford. In N. Y., near Warwick; Eden-
ville; Edwards. In Pa., at Pennsbury, Chester Co.; at Unionville, Delaware Co., and at
Middletown. In Md., at Jones's Falls, Baltimore. In Va., at Amelia Court-Hquse. In
N. C., extensively mined at many places in the western part of the state; the chief mines
are in Mitchell, Yancey, Jackson and Macon Cos.; crystals from Lincoln Co. The mica
mines have also afforded many rare species, as columbite, samarskite, hatchettolite, uran-
inite, etc.; good crystals in Alexander Co. In S. C., there are also muscovite deposits;
in
also in Ga.and Ala.
Mica mines have also been worked to some extent in the Black Hills, S. D.; in Wash.,
at Rockford, Spokane Co.; in Col. The important states for the production of mica are
North Carolina, New Hampshire, Idaho, South Dakota, Virginia, Alabama, New York,
Connecticut.
Muscovite is named from Vitrum Muscoviticum or Muscovy-glass, formerly a popular
name of the mineral.
Use. As an insulating material in electrical apparatus; as a non-inflammable trans-
parent material for furnace doors, etc.; in a finely divided form as a non-conductor of heat
and fireproofing material; mixed with oil as a lubricant, etc.
Finite. A
general term used to include a large number of alteration-products especially
of iolite, also spodumene, nephelite, scapolite, feldspar and other minerals. In composi-
tion essentially a hydrous silicate of aluminium and potassium corresponding more or less
closely to muscovite, of which it is probably to be regarded as a massive, compact variety,
usually very impure from the admixture of clay and other substances. Characters as fol-
lows: Amorphous; granular to cryptocrystalline. Rarely a submicaceous cleavage. H. =
2'5-3'5. G. = 2'6-2'85. Luster feeble, waxy. Color grayish white, grayish green, pea-
green, dull green, brownish, reddish. Translucent to opaque. The following are some of
the minerals also classed as pinite: gigantolite, gieseckite (see p. 500), liebenerite, dysyntribite,
par ophite, rosite, polyargite, wilsonite, killinite.
Agalmatolite (pagodite) is like ordinary massive pinite in its amorphous compact texture,
luster, and other physical characters, but contains more silica, which may be from free
quartz or feldspar as impurity. The Chinese has H. = 2-2'5; G. = 2785-2'815. Colors
usually grayish, grayish green, brownish, yellowish. Named from aja\na, an image;
pagodite is from pagoda, the Chinese carving the soft stone into miniature pagodas, images,
etc. Part of the so-called agalmatolite of China is true pinite in composition, another
part
is compact pyrophyllite, and still another steatite
(see these species).
Paragonite. A sodium mica, corresponding to muscorite in composition; formula,
HaNaAlsCSiCMs. In fine pearly scales; also compact. G. = 278-2-90. Index, 1'60.
Color yellowish, grayish, greenish; constitutes the mass of the rock at
Monte'Campione near
Faido in Canton Tessin, Switzerland, containing cyanite and
staurolite; called paragonite-
schist. Occurs associated with tourmaline and corundum at Unionville, Delaware
Co., Pa.
Hallerite, a mica with an iridescent silver color and pearly luster. Perhaps a lithium-bear-
ing paragonite. Found at Mesores, near Autun, France.
BADDECKITE, an iron mica related to muscovite. In small scales with a copper-red color.
From near Baddeck, Nova Scotia.
LEPIDOLITE. LithiaMica.
In aggregates of short prisms, often with rounded terminal faces.
Crys-
tals sometimes twins or
trillings according to the mica law. Also in cleavable
plates, but commonly massive coarse or fine.
scaly-granular,
Cleavage: basal, highly eminent. H. = 2-5-4. G. = 2 -8-2 -9. Luster
pearly Color rose-red, violet-gray or
lilac, yellowish, grayish white, white.
Translucent Optically -. Ax. pi. usually b (010); rarely 6. Bxa (X)
n 1 d *nd "
33 *' ellow to normal to c
||
i Si 7oJ
irom ou iZ p = 1'5975.
,
f '
T
SILICATES 563
Comp. In part a metasilicate, R 3 Al(SiO 3 ) 3 or KLi[Al(OH,F) 2 ]Al(Si0 3 ) 3 .
The ratio of fluorine and hydroxyl is variable.

It has been suggested that the puro lepidolite molecule is represented by 3Li 2 O.2K 2 O.
3Al 2 O3.8F.12SiO 2 and that most lepidolites are mixtures of this and the muscovite molecule.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives water and reaction for fluorine. B.B. fuses with
intumescence at 2-2 '5 to a white or grayish glass sometimes magnetic, coloring the flame
purplish red at the moment of fusion (lithia) With the fluxes some varieties give reactions
.
for iron and manganese. Attacked but not completely decomposed by acids. After fusion,
gelatinizes with hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Occurs in granite and gneiss, especially in granitic veins; often associated with
lithia-tourmaline; also with amblygonite, spodumene, cassiterite, etc.; sometimes associ-
ated with muscovite in parallel position.
Found near TJto in Sweden; Penig, Saxony; Rozena (or Rozna), Moravia; Madagascar,
etc. In the United States, common in the western part of Me., in Hebron, Auburn, Paris,
etc.; at Chesterfield, Mass.; Middletown and Haddam Neck, Conn.; with rubellite near
San Diego, Cal.
Named lepidolite from XeTm, scale, after the earlier German name Schuppenstein, allud-
ing to the scaly structure of the massive variety of Rozena.
Use. As a source of lithium compounds.
COOKEITE is a micaceous mineral occurring in rounded aggregations on rubellite, also
with lepidolite, tourmaline, etc., at Hebron, Me. An alteration of lepidolite or tourmaline.
Composition Li[Al(OH) 2 l3(SiO 3 ) 2 .
Zinnwaldite. An iron-lithia mica in form near biotite. Color pale violet, yellow to
brown and dark gray. Occurs at Zinnwald and Altenberg, Germany; similarly in Corn-
wall, England. From Narsarsuk, Greenland, and the York region, Alaska.
Cryophyllite is a related lithium mica from Rockport, Mass. Polylithionite is a lithium
mica from Kangerdluarsuk, Greenland. Irvingite is an alkalie mica containing lithium from
near Wausau, Wis.
Manandonite. A basic boro-silicate of lithium and aluminium, H
24 Li4Ali4B 4 Si6O53.
Micaceous. In lamellar aggregates or mammillary crusts of hexagonal plates. Perfect

basal cleavage. Color white. Luster pearly. Optically +. Axial angle small and vari-
able. Easily fusible giving red flame. Unattacked by acids. Found in pegmatite at An-
tandrokomby, near the Manandona River, Madagascar.
BIOTITE.
Monoclinic; pseudo-rhombohedral. Axes a : b : c = 0-57735 : 1 : 3 -2743;
= 90.
Habit tabular or short prismatic; the pyramidal faces often repeated in
oscillatory combination. .Crystals often apparently rhombohedral in sym-
metry since r (101) and z (132), z' (132), which are inclined to c (001) at sen-
sibly the same angle, often occur together; further, the zones to which these
faces belong are inclined 120 to each other, hence the hexagonal outline of
basal sections. Twins, according to the mica law, tw. pi. a plane in the
prismatic zone _L c (001) Often in disseminated scales, sometimes in massive
.
aggregations of cleavable scales.

948 960
001 A 112 73 1'. cr, 001 A T01 = 80 0'.

co,
A 132 = 80
cM, 001 A 221 85 38'. cz, 001
= 59
0'.
c/*, 001 A 111 81 19'. MM', 221 A 221 48*'.

of separation shown in the percus-

Cleavage: basal, highly perfect; planes
sion-figure; also
gliding-planes /> (205), f (135)
shown in the pressure-figure
,
inclined about 66 to c (001) and yielding pseudo-crystalline forms (Fig. 489,

p. 188). H. = 2-5-3. G. = 27-3-1. Luster splendent, and more or less
pearly on a cleavage surface, and sometimes submetallic when black; lateral
surfaces vitreous when smooth and shining. Colors usually green to black,
often deep black in thick crystals, and sometimes even in thin laminae,
unless the lamina? are very thin; such thin lamina? green, blood-red, or brown
by transmitted light; also pale yellow to dark brown; rarely white. Streak
uncolored. Transparent to opaque.
Pleochroism strong; absorption Y = Z nearly, for much stronger. X
Hence sections c (001) dark green or brown to opaque; those J_ c lighter and
||
deep brown or green for vibrations c, pale yellow, green or red for vibrations
1 1
J_ c. Pleochroic halos often noted, particularly about microscopic inclusions.

Optically Ax. pi. usually
. b (010), rarely _L b. Bxa (=X) nearly coinci-
||
dent with the normal to c (001), but inclined about half a degree, sometimes
to the front, sometimes the reverse. Axial angle usually very small, and often
sensibly uniaxial; also up to 50. Birefringence high, y a = 0*04 to 0-06.
Comp. In most cases an orthosilicate, chiefly ranging between (H,K) 2
(Mg,Fe) 4 (Al,Fe) 2 (Si0 4 ) 4 and (H,K) 2 (Mg,Fe) 2 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 Of these the second .
formula may be said to represent typical biotite. The amount of iron varies
widely.
Var. divided into two classes by Tschermak:
Biotite is
I. MEROXENE.Axial plane 6 (010). II. ANOMITE.
||
Ax. pi. J_ 6 (010). Of these
two kinds, meroxene includes nearly all ordinary biotite, while anomite is, so far as yet
observed, of restricted occurrence, the typical localities being Greenwood Furnace, Orange
Co., N. Y., and Lake Baikal in East Siberia. Meroxene is a name early given to the Vesu-
vian biotite. Anomite is from aw^tos, contrary to law.
Haughtonite and Siderophyllite are kinds of biotite containing much iron.
Manganophyllite is a manganesian biotite. Occurs in aggregations of thin scales. Color
bronze- to copper-red. Streak pale red. From Pajsberg and Langban, Sweden; Pied-
mont, Italy.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives a water. Some varieties give the reaction for
little
fluorine in the open tube; some kinds give or no reaction for iron with the fluxes, while
little
others
give strong reactions for iron. B. B.
whitens and fuses on the thin edges. Completely
decomposed by sulphuric acid, leaving the silica in
thin scales.
DM. Distinguished by its dark green to brown
and black color and micaceous structure, usually
nearly uniaxial.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by 'its
^ brown (or green) color; strong pleochroism and
strong absorption parallel to the elongation (unlike
tourmaline). Sections c (001) are non-pleochroic,
|
commonly exhibit more or less distinct hexagonal

outlines and yield a negative sensibly uniaxial figure.
Sections _|_ c are strongly pleochroic and are marked
by fine parallel, cleavage lines (Fig. 951); they also
have nearly parallel extinction, and show high
,.
'
polarization colors; by reflected light they exhibit
01 Vv a tered sheen which is vei
them from ^ro u h 1
T characteristic and aids in distinguishing
iotit is an im P rtant constituent of
î ~V? r , many different kinds of igneous rocks,
illy those formed from magmas
containing considerable potash and magnesia
non in certain varieties of granites, syenite,
diorite, etc., of the massive granular type;
i
rhyohte trachyte, and andesite among the lavas; in minettes, kersantites, etc. It
.curs also as the product of
metamorphic action in a variety of rocks. It is not infre-
SILICATES 565
quently associated in parallel position with muscovite, the latter, for example, forming the
outer portions of plates having a nucleus of biotite.
Some of the prominent localities of crystallized biotite are as follows: Vesuvius, com-
mon particularly in ejected limestone masses on Monte Somma, with augite, chrysolite,
nephelite, humite, etc. The crystals are sometimes nearly colorless or yellow and then
usually complex in form; also dark green to black; Mt. Monzoni in the Fassatal and
Schwarzenstein, Zillertal, Tyrol, Austria; Rezbanya and Morawitza in Hungary; in Ger-
many at Schelingen and other points in the Kaiserstuhl and the Laacher See; on the west
side of Lake Ilmen near Miask, Russia.
In the United States ordinary biotite is common in granite, gneiss, etc.; but notable
localities of distinct crystals are not numerous. It occurs with muscovite (which see) as a
more or less prominent constituent of the pegmatite veins in the New England States; also
Pennsylvania, Virginia, North Carolina. From Greenwood, Orange Co., N. Y. Sidero-
phyllite is from the Pike's Peak region, Col.
CASWELLITE. An altered biotite from Franklin Furnace, N. J.
PHLOGOPITE.
Monoclinic. In form and angles near biotite. Crystals prismatic, taper-
ing; often large and coarse; in scales and plates.
Cleavage: basal, highly eminent. Thin laminae tough and elastic. H. =
2-5-3. G. = 278-2-85. Luster pearly, often submetallic on cleavage surf ace.
Color yellowish brown to brownish red, with often something of a copper-like
reflection; also pale brownish yellow, green, white, colorless. Often exhibits
asterism in transmitted light, due to regularly arranged inclusions. Pleo-
chroism distinct in colored varieties: brownish red, Z
brownish green, Y X
yellow. Absorption Z> Y > X.
Optically-. Ax. pi. b (010). Bxa ||
nearly _!_ c (001). Axial angle small but variable even in the same specimen,
from to 50. Dispersion p < v. The axial angle appears to increase with
the amount of iron. Indices variable, from 1-541-1-638.
Comp. A magnesium mica, near biotite, but containing little iron;
potassium is prominent as in all the micas, and in most cases fluorine. Typi-
i i
cal phlogopite is R Mg3Al(SiO

3 4 )3, where R= H,K,MgF.
Obs. Phlogopite especially characteristic of crystalline limestone or dolomite.
is It
is often associated with pyroxene, amphibole, serpentine, etc. Thus as at Pargas, Fin-
land; in St. Lawrence Co. and Jefferson Co., N. Y.; Franklin, N. J.; also Burgess, Ontario,
and elsewhere in Canada.
Named from </>Xoyco7r6s, fire-like, in allusion to the color.
The asterism of phlogopite, seen when a candle-flame is viewed through a thin sheet, is
a common character, particularly prominent in the kinds from northern New York and
Canada. It has been shown to be due to minute acicular inclusions, rutile or tourmaline,
arranged chiefly in the direction of the rays of the pressure-figure, producing a distinct six-
rayed star: also parallel to the lines of the percussion-figure, giving a secondary star, usually
less prominent than the other.
Taeniolite. Essentially a potassium-magnesium silicate. Monoclinic, belonging to the
mica group. Perfect basal cleavage. Folia somewhat elastic. H. = 2 '5-3. G. = 2 "9.
Colorless. Fusible. From Narsarsuk, southern Greenland.
Lepidomelane. Near biotite, but characterized By the large amount of ferric iron
present. From Langesund fiord, Norway; Haddam, Conn. Annite from Cape Ann, Mass.,
belongs here. In small six-sided tables, or an aggregate of minute scales. H. = 3. G.
= 3 '0-3 -2. Color black, with occasionally a leek-green reflection.
Alurgite. A manganese mica from St. Marcel, Piedmont, Italy. Color copper-red.
Index, 1'59. Mariposite may belong here.
Roscoelite. A vanadium mica; essentially a muscovite in which vanadium has partly

replaced the aluminium. In minute scales; structure micaceous. G. = 2'92-2'94. Color
704. Occurs in Cal. at the gold mine at

clove-brown to greenish brown. Indices, 1 '610-1
El Dorado Co.
Granite Creek, Placerville, and elsewhere,
2. Clintonite Group. Monoclinic
The minerals here included are sometimes called the Brittle Micas. They
are near the micas in cleavage, crystalline form and optical properties, but are
marked physically by the brittleness of the laminae, and chemically by their
basic character.
In several respects they form a transition from the micas proper to the
of aluminium and
chlorites. Margarite, or calcium mica, is a basic silicate
while Chloritoid is a basic silicate of aluminium and ferrous iron
calcium,
(with magnesium), like the chlorites.
MARGARITE.
Rarely in distinct crystals. Usually in intersecting or
Monoclinic.
aggregated laminae; sometimes massive, with a scaly structure.
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Laminae rather brittle. H.
= 3 -5-4*5. G. =
2-99-3-08. Luster of base pearly, of lateral faces vitreous. Color grayish,
reddish white, pink, yellowish. Translucent, subtranslucent.
Optically Ax. pi.
. J_ b (010). Bxa approximately J_ c (001), but vary-
ing more widely than the ordinary micas. A c axis = X
6^. Dispersion +
p <
v. Axial angle large, from 76 to 128 in air. Refractive index ft =1-64-
1-65.
Comp. H CaAl Si Oi2 =
2 4 2 Silica 30'2, alumina 51 '3, lime 14'0, water
4'5 = 100.
etc. Yields water in the closed tube. B.B. whitens and fuses on the edges.
Pyr.,
Slowly and imperfectly decomposed by boiling hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Associated commonly with corundum, and in many cases obviously formed
directly from it; thus at the emery deposits of Gumuch-dagh in Asia Minor, the islands
Naxos, Nicaria, etc. Occurs in chlorite of Mt. Greiner, Sterzing, Tyrol. In the United
States at the emery mine at Chester, Mass.; at Unionville, Chester Co., Pa.; with corun-
dum in Madison Co. and elsewhere in N. C.; at Gainesville, Hall Co., Ga.; at Dudley ville,
Ala.
.
Named Margarite from fj.apyapiTt]s, pearl.
SEYBERTITE. Clintonite. Brandisite.
Monoclinic, near biotite in form. Also foliated massive; sometimes

lamellar, radiate.
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Structure foliated, micaceous. Laminae brittle.
Percussion- and pressure-figures, as with mica. H. = 4-5. G. = 3-3-1.
Luster pearly submetallic. Color reddish brown, yellowish, copper-red.
Streak uncolored, or slightly yellowish or grayish. Pleochroism rather feeble.
Optically Ax. pi. J_ 6 (010) seybertite;
.
b brandisite. Bxa nearly J_ c
\\
(001). Axial angles variable, but not a = 1*646. ft = 1-657. 7 =

large,
1 '658.
y**-
! The Amity seybertite (dintonite} is in reddish brown to copper-red brittle foli-
ated masses; the surfaces of the folia often marked with equilateral triangles like some
mica and chlorite. Axial angle 3-13.
2. Brandisite
(disterrite) from the Fassatal, Tyrol, is in hexagonal prisms of a yellowish
,
lor to reddish gray; H. = 5 of

ffTb ?mm
(010).
^Tên
Axial angle 15-30. Some of it
base; of sides, 6-6-5. Ax. pi.
||
pseudomorphous, after fassaite.
SILICATES 567
Comp. In part H 3 (Mg,Ca)5Al 5 Si 2 O 18 = 3H 0.10(Mg,Ca)0.5Al2 O 3

2 .
4SiO 2 .
Pyr., etc. Yields water. B.B. infusible but whitens. In powder acted on by con-
centrated acids.
Obs. Seybertite occurs at Amity, N. Y., in limestone with serpentine, associated with
amphibole, spinel, pyroxene, graphite, etc.; also a chlorite near leuchtenbergite. Brandis-
ite occurs on Mt. Monzoni in the Fassatal, Tyrol, Austria, in white limestone, with fassaite
and black spinel.
Xanthophyllite. Perhaps HsCMgjCaÂl^SisOsa. The original xanthophyllite is in
crusts or in implanted globular forms. Optically negative. Axial angle usually very small,
or sensibly uniaxial; sometimes 20. Indices, -1 '649-1 '661. From near Zlatoust in the
Ural Mts. Found at Crestmore, Riverside Co., Cal.
Waluewite is the same species occurring in distinct pseudo-rhombohedral crystals. Folia
brittle. H. = 4'6. G. = 3 '093. Luster vitreous; on cleavage plane pearly. Color leek-
to bottle-green. Transparent to translucent. Pleochroism rather feeble: c axis fine
||
green; _L c axis reddish brown. Optically Ax. pi.

. b (010).
||
Bx sensibly J_ c (001).
Axial angle 17 to 32. Found with perovskite and other species in chloritic schists near
Achmatovsk, in the southern Ural Mts.
CHLORITOID. Ottrelite. Phyllite.
Probably Rarely in distinct tabular crystals, usually hexagonal

triclinic.
in outline, often twinned with the individuals turned in azimuth 120 to each
other. Crystals grouped in rosettes. Usually coarsely foliated massive;
folia often curved or bent and brittle; also in thin scales or small plates dis-
seminated through the containing rock.
Cleavage: basal, but less perfect than with the micas; also imperfect
parallel to planes inclined to the base nearly 90 and to each other about 60 ;
b (010) difficult. Laminae brittle. H. = 6'5. G. = 3'52-3'57. Color dark

gray, greenish gray, greenish black, grayish black, often grass-green in very
thin plates. Streak uncolored, or grayish, or very slightly greenish. Luster
of surface of cleavage somewhat
pearly.
Pleochroism strong: green, Y indigo-blue,
Z yellow olive-green. XOpti-
cally +Ax. pi. nearly
.
||
b (010). Bxa inclined about 12 or more to the nor-
mal to c (001). Dispersion p >
v, large, also horizontal. Axial angles, in air
65 to 120. = 175. Birefringence low, 7 -
a = 0'007-0'016.
Comp. For chloritoid H
2 (Fe,Mg)Al 2 Si0 7 If iron alone is present,
.
this requires: Silica 23 '8, alumina 40'5, iron protoxide 28*5, water 7-2 = 100.
Micro. Recognized in thin sections by the crystal outlines and general micaceous
appearance; high relief green colors; distinct cleavage; frequent twinning; strong phleo-
;
chroism and low interference-colors. By the last character readily distinguished from the
micas; also by the high relief and extinction oblique to the cleavage from the chlorites.
Obs: Chloritoid (ottrelite, etc.) are characteristic of sedimentary rocks which have
suffered dynan^c metamorphism, especially in the earlier stages; thus found in argillites,
conglomerates, etc., which have assumed the schistose condition. With more advanced
.degree of metamorphism it disappears.' Often grouped in fan-shaped, sheaf-like forms, also
in irregular or rounded grains.
The original chloritoid from Kosoibrod, near Ekaterinburg in the Ural Mts., is in large
curving laminae or plates, grayish to blackish green in color, often spotted with yellow from
mixture with limonite. Other localities are He le Groix (Morbihan), France; embedded in
large crystals at Vanlup, Shetland; Ardennes, France, and Belgium, in schists with ottrelite;
also from Upper Michigan; Leeds, Canada, etc.
Sismondine (HnFeyAlieSigOs-i) is from St. Marcel, Piedmont, Italy; it occurs also with
glaucophane at Zermatt in the Valais, Switzerland, and elsewhere.
Salmite is a manganesian variety occurring in irregular masses, having a coarse saccha-
roidal structure and grayish color. G. = 3'38. From Vielsalm, Belgium.
Masonite, from Natic, R. I., is in very broad plates of a dark grayish green color, but
bluish green in very thin laminae parallel to c (001) and grayish green at right angles to this;
occurs in argillaceous schist.
with chloritoid, though it is not certain that they are iden-

Ottrelite is generally classed
tical; seems to have the composition H 2 (Fe,Mn)Al 2 Si 2 O 9
it . It occurs in small, oblong,
shining scales or plates, more or less hexagonal in form and gray to black
in color; in argil-
laceous schist near Ottrez, on the borders of Luxemburg, and from the Ardennes, France,
and Belgium; also near Serravezza, Tuscany, Italy; Tintagel in Cornwall. Venasquite is
from Venasque in the Pyrenees, and from Teule, Finistere, France. Phyllite is from the
schists of New England.
3. Chlorite Group. Monoclinic
The CHLORITE GROUP takes its name from the fact that a large part of the
minerals included in are characterize^ by the green color common with sili-
it
cates in which ferrous iron is prominent. The species are in many respects
closely related to the micas. They crystallize in the monoclinic system, but
in part with distinct monoclinic symmetry, in part with rhombohedral symme-
try, with corresponding uniaxial optical character. The plane angles of the
base are also 60 or 120, marking the mutual inclinations of the chief zones
of forms. The mica-like basal cleavage is prominent in distinctly crystallized
forms, but the laminae are tough and comparatively inelastic. Percussion
and pressure-figures may be obtained as with the micas and have the
same orientation. The etching-figures are in general monoclinic in
symmetry, in part also asymmetric, suggesting a reference to the triclinic
system.
Chemically considered the chlorites are silicates of aluminium with ferrous
iron and magnesium and chemically combined water. Ferric iron may be
present replacing the aluminium in small amount chromium enters similarly
;
in some forms, which are then usually of a pink instead of the more common
green color. Manganese replaces the ferrous iron in a few cases. Calcium
and alkalies characteristic of all the true micas are conspicuously absent,
or present only in small amount.
The only distinctly crystallized species of the Chlorite Group are Clino-
chlore and Penninite. These seem to have the same composition, but while
the former is monoclinic in form and
habit, the latter is pseudo-rhombohedral
and usually uniaxial. Prochlorite (including some
ripidolite) and Corundo-
philite also occur in distinct cleavage masses.
Besides the species named there are other kinds less distinct in
form, occur-
ring in scales, also fibrous to massive or earthy; they are often of more or less
undetermined composition, but in many cases, because of their extensive occur-
rence, of considerable geological importance. These latter forms occur as
secondary minerals resulting from the alteration especially of ferro-magnesian
silicates, such as biotite, pyroxene,
amphibole; also garnet, vesuvianite,
tc. I hey are often
accompanied by other secondary minerals, as ser-
pentine, hmonite, calcite, etc., especially in the altered forms of basic
rocks. .
The rock-making chlorites are recognized in thin sections

teristic
by their charac-
appearance in thin leaves, scales or fibers, sometimes aggregated into
irulites; by their greenish color;
pleochroism; extinction parallel to the
cleavage (unlike choritoid and ottrelite); low relief and
extremely low inter-
ference-colors, which frequently exhibit the " ultra-blue."
?r they are
By this latter char-
readily distinguished from the micas, which they strongly
resemble and with which
they are frequently associated.
SILICATES 569
CLINOCHLORE. Ripidolite in part.

2-2772; = 89 40'.
952 953 954
/ m<
Pfitsch Wchwarzenstem Zillertal
Crystals usually hexagonal in form, often tabular c (001). Plane angles ||
of the basal section = 60 or 120, and since closely similar angles are found in
the zones which are separated by 60, the symmetry
955
approximates to that of the rhombohedral system.
Twins: (1) Mica law, tw. pi. _L c (001) in the zone
cmo 001 A 112; sometimes contact-twins with c as com-
position face, the one part revolved 60 or a multiple of
60 in azimuth with reference to the other; also in three-
fold twins. (2) Penninite law, tw. pi. c, contact-twins
also united by c (Fig. 954); here corresponding faces
differ 180 in position. Massive, coarse scaly granular
to fine granular and earthy.
Cleavage: c (001) highly perfect. Laminae flexible Achmatovsk
tough, and but slightly elastic. Percussion-figure and
pressure-figures orientated as with the micas (p. 559). H. = 2-2*5.
G. = 2-65-2-78. Luster of cleavage-face somewhat pearly. Color
deep grass-green to olive-green; pale green to yellowish and white;
also rose-red. Streak greenish white to uncolored. Transparent to
translucent. Pleochroism not strong, for green varieties usually green, Z X
yellow. Optically usually +. Ax. pi. in most cases 6 (010). Bxa inclined ||
somewhat to the normal to c (001), forward; for Achmatovsk 2 30'. Disper-

sion p < v. Axial angles variable, even in the same crystal, 0-90; some-
times sensibly uniaxial. Birefringence low. Indices approximately; a =
1-585. = 1-586. 7 = 1-596.
Var. Ordinary; green clinochlore, passing into bluish green; (a) in crystals, as
1.
described, usually with distinct monoclinic symmetry; (6) foliated; (c) massive.
Leuchtenbergiie. Contains usually little or no iron. Color white, pale green, yellowish;
often resembles talc. From near Zlatoust in the Ural Mts.
Kotschubeite. Contains several per cent of chromium oxide. Crystals rhombohedral
in habit. Color rose-red. From the southern Ural Mts.
Manganiferous. Manganchlorite. A
chlorite from the Harstig mine near Pajsberg,
Sweden, is peculiar in containing 2 -3 p. c. MnO.
Comp. Normally H Mg Al Si Oi8 = 4H O.5MgO.Al O
8 5 2 3 2 2 3 .3SiO2 = Silica
32-5, alumina 18-4, magnesia 36-1, water 13-0 = 100. Ferrous iron usually
replaces a small part of the magnesia, and the same is true of manganese rarely;
sometimes chromium replaces the aluminium.
Pyr., etc. Yields water. B.B. in the platinum forceps whitens and fuses with diffi-
culty on the edges to a grayish black glass. With borax, a clear glass colored by iron,
and sometimes chromium. In sulphuric acid wholly decomposed.
Micro. In thin sections characterized by pale green color and pleochroism; dis-
tinctly biaxial and usually +.
talcose rocks or schists and serpen-

Orr-nrs in connection with chloritic'and
tine;
iswasSffislfii ^û^Tys:
u
A
ssr
Marienberg, Saxony; Zoptau,
Moravia. manganesian vanety occurs
at r d
iS
in large crystals and plates; also Unionville
the ilJted States, at Westchester, Pa.,
^n
Pa the iron mine at Brewster, N. Y, in part changed to serpen-
and Tex^, fat magnetic
in crystals.
tine; near' Lowell, Ver.,
PENNINITE. Pennine.
in form but strictly pseudo-rhombohedral and
Apparently rhombohedral
L C
âbit r'hombohedral: sometimes thick tabular with c (001) prominent,
also in
again steep rhombohedral;
tapering six-sided pyramids. Rhombo-
hedral faces often horizontally striated.
Crystals often in crested groups.
Also massive, consisting of an aggre-
gation of scales; also compact crypto-
crystalline.
Cleavage: c (001) highly perfect.
Laminae flexible. Percussion-figure
Texas Zermatt and pressure-figure as with clinochlore
but less easy to obtain; not elastic.
H. = 2-2-5. G. = 2-6-2-85. Luster of cleavage-surface pearly; of lateral
plates vitreous, and sometimes brilliant. Color emerald- to olive-green;
also violet, pink, rose-red, grayish red; occasionally yellowish and silver-
white. Transparent to subtranslucent. Pleochroism distinct: usually || c
(001) green; _L c yellow. Optically +, also and sometimes both in adja-
,
cent lamina of the Usually sensibly uniaxial, but sometimes

same crystal.
distinctly biaxial (occasionally 2E = 61) and both in the same section.
Sometimes a uniaxial nucleus while the border is biaxial with 2E = 36, the
latter probably to be referred to clinochlore. Indices 1-576 and 1-579.
Var. 1. Penninite, as first named, included a green crystallized chlorite from the
Penninine Alps.
Kammererite. In hexagonal forms bounded by steep six-sided pyramids. Color
kermes-red; peach-blossom-red. Pleochroism distinct. Optically from Lake Itkul,
Bisersk, Perm, Russia; +
Texas, Pa. Uniaxial or biaxial with axial angle up to 20. Rho-
dophyllite from Texas, Pa., and rhodochrome from Lake Itkul belong here.
Pseudophite is compact massive, without cleavage, and resembles serpentine.
Comp. Essentially the same as clinochlore, H8(Mg,Fe) 5 Al 2 Si3Oi8.

Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water. B.B. exfoliates somewhat and is diffi-
cultly fusible. With the fluxes all varieties give reactions for iron, and many varieties react
for chromium. Partially decomposed by hydrochloric and completely by sulphuric acid.
Micro. In thin sections shows pale green color and pleochroism usually nearly
;
uniaxial, .
Obs. Occurs with serpentine in the region of Zermatt, Valais, Switzerland, near
Mt. Rosa, especially in the moraines of the Findelen glacier; crystals from Zermatt are
sometimes 2 in. long and H
in. thick; also at the foot of the
Simplon Pass, Switzerland; at
Ala, Piedmont, Italy, with clinochlore; at Schwarzenstein in Tyrol, Austria; at Taberg
in Wermland,
Sweden; at Snarum, Norway, greenish and foliated.
Kammererite is found at the localities already mentioned; also near Miask in the Ural
Mts.; at Haroldswick in Unst, Shetland Isles. In large crystals enclosed in the talc in
crevices of the chromite from
Kraubat, Styria. Abundant at Texas, Lancaster Co., Pa.,
along with clmochlore, some crystals being embedded in clinochlore, or the reverse. Also
SILICATES 571
in N. C., with chromite at Culsagee, Macon Co.; Webster, Jackson Co.; and other points.
From Washington, Cal.
PROCHLORITE. Ripidolite in part.
In six-sided tables or prisms, the side planes strongly fur-

Monoclinic.
rowed and Crystals often implanted by their sides, and in divergent
dull.
groups, fan-shaped, vermicular, or spheroidal. Also in large folia. Massive,
foliated, or granular.
H. = 1-2. G. = 278-2-96. Translucent to opaque; transparent only in
very thin folia. Luster of cleavage surface feebly pearly. Color green, grass-
green, olive-green, blackish green; across the axis by transmitted light some-
times red. Streak uncolored or greenish. Laminae flexible, not elastic.
Pleochroism distinct. Optically in most cases. +
Bx inclined to the normal
to c (001) some 2. Axial angle small, often nearly uniaxial; again 2E = 23-
30. Dispersion p < v.
Comp. Lower in silicon than clinochlore, and with ferrous iron usu-
ally, but not always, in large amount.
Obs. Like other chlorites in modes of occurrence. Occasionally formed from amphi-
bole. Sometimes in implanted crystals, as at St. Gothard, Switzerland, enveloping often
adularia, etc.; Mt. Greiner in the Zillertal, Tyrol, Austria; Rauris in Salzburg, Austria;
Traversella in Piedmont, Italy; at Mts. Sept Lacs and St. Cristophe in Dauphine, France;
in Styria, Bohemia. Also massive in Cornwall, England, in tin veins; at Arendal in Nor-
way; Salberg and Dannemora, Sweden; Dognacska, Hungary. In Scotland at various
points. In the United States, near Washington, D. C.; on Castle Mt., Batesville, Va., a
massive form resembling soapstone, color grayish green, feel greasy; Steele's mine, Mont-
gomery Co., N. C.; also with corundum at the Culsagee mine, in broad plates of a dark
green color and fine scaly; it differs from ordinary prochlorite in the small amount of ferrous
iron.
Corundophilite. A chlorite occurring in deep green laminae resembling clinochlore but

more brittle; contains but 24 p. c. SiO 2 /3
= 1'583. Occurs with corundum at Chester,
.
Mass.
AMESITE. H 4 (Mg,Fe)2Al 2 SiO9. Silica 21'4 p. c. In hexagonal plates, foliated, resem-
bling the green talc from the Tyrol. H. = 2-5-3. G. = 271. Color apple-green. Luster
pearly on cleavage face. Optically +, sensibly uniaxial. Occurs with diaspore at Chester,
Mass.
SHERIDANITE. A chlorite from Sheridan Co., Wy., containing only little iron.
OTHER CHLORITES. Besides the chlorites already described which occur usually in
distinct crystals or plates, there are, as noted on p. 568, forms varying from fine scaly to
fibrous and earthy, which are prominent in rocks. In some cases they may belong to the
species before described, but frequently the want of sufficient pure material has left their
composition in doubt. These chlorites are commonly characterized by their green color,
distinct pleochroism and low birefringence (p. 568).
The follow, ng are names which have been given particularly to the chlorites filling
cavities or seams in basic igneous rocks aphrosiderite, diabantite, delessite, epichlorite, eural-
:
ite, chlorophceite, hullite, pycnochlorite.

The following are other related minerals.
Moravite. 2FeO.2(Al,Fe)oO3.7SiO 2 .2H2 O. In lamellar, scaly and granular forms with
perfect basal cleavage. H. = 3"5. G. = 2'4. Color iron-black. Fuses difficultly.
Found at iron mines of Gobitschau near Sternberg, Moravia.
Cronstedite. 4FeO.2Fe 2 O3.3SiO2.4H 2 O. Occurs tapering in hexagonal pyramids; also
in diverging groups; amorphous. Cleavage: basal, highly perfect. Thin laminae elastic.
G. = 3 '34-3 '35. Color coal-black to brownish black; by transmitted light in thin scales
emerald-green. Streak dark olive-green. /3
= 1*80. From Pfibram in Bohemia; also in
Cornwall, England.
8FeO.4(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 .9H 2 O. Massive; an aggregation of minute pearly
Thuringite.
scales. Color olive-green to pistachio-green. /3 = 1*63. From near Saalfeld, in Thurin-
gia; Hot Springs, Ark., etc.; from the metamorphic rocks on the Potomac, near Harper's
to an alteration product of thuringite from

Ferry (owenite). Stilpnochloran is name given
In yellow to bronze-red scales.
Gobitschau, near Sternberg, Moravia.
Brunsvigite. 9(Fe,Mg)O.2Al 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 .8H 2
O. In cryptocrystalline and foliated masses
folia show hexagonal
sometimes forming spherical radiated aggregates. Under microscope
outline. Color olive-green to yellow-green. H.
= 1-2. G. = 3U Occurs in cavities in
the gabbro of the Radautal in the Harz Mts., Germany.
Griffithite. 4(Mg,Fe,Ca)O.(Al,Fe)2O3.5SiO 2 .7H 2 O.
A member of the Chlorite Group.
Color dark green. H. = 1. G. = 2 '31. Fusible to magnetic slag. Pleochroic, pale yel-
Indices 1 '48-1 '57. Occurs in amygdaloidal cavities in a
low, olive-green, brown-green.
basalt from Cahuenga Pass, Griffith Park, Los Angeles, Cal.
CHAMOSITE. Contains iron (FeO) with but little MgO. Occurs compact or oolitic
with H. about 3; G. = 3-3'4; color greenish gray to black. From Chamoson, near St.
Maurice, in the Valais, Switzerland.
also fibrous, or as a velvety coat-
Stilpnomelane. An iron silicate. In foliated plates;
ing. G. = 2 '77-2 '96. Color black, greenish black. Occurs at Obergrund and elsewhere
in Silesia; also hi Moravia; near Weilburg, Nassau, Germany. Chalcodite, from the Sterling
Iron mine, in Antwerp, Jefferson Co., N. Y., coating hematite and calcite, is the same
mineral in velvety coating of mica-like scales with a bronze color.
Minguetite. A member of Chlorite Group. A silicate of ferric and ferrous iron, inter-
mediate between stilpnomelane and lepidomelane. G. = 2'86. Color blackish green.
Strongly pleochroic, light yellow to opaque black. Optically Fuses to a black mag-
.
netic enamel. Decomposed by hydrochloric acid. From Minguet mine, near Segre,
Maine-et-Loire, France.
Strigovite. H4Fe2(Al,Fe) 2 Si2 Oii. In aggregations of minute crystals. Color dark
green. Occurs as a fine coating over the minerals in cavities in the granite of Striegau in
Silesia.
Rumpfite. Probably a variety of clinochlore. Massive; granular, consisting of very

fine scales. Color greenish white. Occurs with talc near St. Michael and elsewhere in
Styria.
Spodiophyllite. (Na2,K 2 )2(Mg,Fe)3(Fe,Al)2(SiO 3 )8. In rough hexagonal prisms. Mica-
ceous cleavage. Laminae brittle. H. = 3-3'2. G. = 2 '6. Color ash-jgray. Fusible.
From Narsarsuk, southern Greenland.
APPENDIX TO THE MICA DIVISION. VERMICULITES.

The VERMICULITE GROUP includes a number of micaceous minerals, all hydrated sili-
cates, in part closely related to the chlorites, but varying somewhat widely in composi-
tion. They are alteration-products chiefly of the micas, biotite, phlogopite, etc., and retain
more or less perfectly the micaceous cleavage, and of ten-show the negative optical character
and small axial angle of the original species.- Many of them are of a more or less indefinite
chemical nature, and the composition varies, with that of the original mineral and with the
degree of alteration.
The laminae in general are soft, pliable, and inelastic; the luster pearly or bronze-like,
and the color varies from white to yellow; and brown. Heated to 100-110 or dried over
sulphuric acid most of the vermiculites lose considerable water, up to 10 p. c., which is
probably hygroscopic; at 300 another portion is often given off; and at a red heat a some-
what larger amount is
expelled. Connected with the loss of water upon ignition is the
common physical character of exfoliation; some of the kinds especially show this to a
marked degree, slowly opening out, when heated gradually, into
long worm-like threads.
Ihis character has given the name to the
group, from the Latin vermiculari, to breed worms.
Ihe minerals included can hardly rank as distinct
species and only their names can be
given here: Jefferisite, vermiculite, culsageeite, kerrite, lennilite, hallite, philadelphite, vaalite,
macomte, dudleyite, pyrosclerite.
HI. Serpentine and Talc Division

The leading species belonging here, Serpentine and Talc, are closely related
Chlorite Group of the Mica Division
preceding, as noted beyond.
borne other magnesium
silicates, in part amorphous, are included with them.
SILICATES ,
573
SERPENTINE.
Monoclinic. In distinct crystals, but only as pseudomorphs. Sometimes
foliated, folia rarely separable; also delicately fibrous, the fibers often easily
separable, and either flexible or brittle. Usually massive, but microscopically
finely fibrous and felted, also fine
granular to impalpable or cryptocrystalline ;
slaty. Crystalline in structure but often by compensation nearly isotropic;

amorphous.
Cleavage b (010), sometimes distinct; also prismatic (50) in
chrysotile.
Fracture usually conchoidal or splintery. Feel smooth, sometimes greasy.
H. = 2-5-4, rarely 5-5. G. = 2-50-2-65; some fibrous varieties 2-2-2-3;
retinalite, 2-36-2-55. Luster subresinous to greasy, pearly, earthy; resin-like,
or wax-like; usually feeble. Color leek-green, blackish green; oil- and siskin-
green; brownish red, brownish yellow; none bright; sometimes nearly white.
On exposure, often becoming yellowish gray. Streak white, slightly shining.
Translucent to opaque.
Pleochroism feeble. Optically - perhaps also
, +
in chrysotile. Double
refraction weak. Ax. pi. a (100). Bx (X) J_ 6 (010) the cleavage surface;
|
Z || elongation of fibers. Biaxial, angle variable, often large; 2V = 20 to 90.

Indices variable, from 1*490-1' 571.
Var. Many unsustained species have been made out of serpentine, differing in struc-
ture (massive, slaty, foliated, fibrous), or, as supposed, in chemical composition; and these
now, in part, stand as varieties, along with some others based on variations in texture, etc.
A. IN CRYSTALS PSEUDOMORPHS. The most common have the form of chrysolite.
Other kinds are pseudomorphs after pyroxene, amphibole, spinel, chondrodite, garnet,
phlogopite, etc. Bastite or Schiller Spar is enstatite (hypersthene) altered more or less
completely to serpentine. See p. 474.
B. MASSIVE. 1. Ordinary massive, (a) Precious or Noble Serpentine is of a rich oil-
green color, of pale or dark shades, and translucent even when in thick pieces.
(b) Common Serpentine is of dark shades of color, and sub translucent. The former has a
hardness of 2*5-3; the latter often of 4 or beyond, owing to impurities.
Resinous. Retinalite. Massive, honey-yellow to light oil-green, waxy or resin-like
luster.
Bowenite (Nephrite Bowen) .
Massive, of very fine granular texture, and much resembles
nephrite, and was long so called. It is apple-green or greenish white in color; G. = 2 '594-
2*787; and it has the unusual hardness 5 "5-6. From Smithfield, R. I..; also a similar kind
from New
Zealand.
is a banded variety with a fine green color from Mexico.
Ricolite
C. LAMELLAR. Antigorite, thin lamellar in structure, separating into translucent folia.
H. = 2-5; G. = 2*622; color brownish green by reflected light; feel smooth, but not greasy.
From Antigorio valley, Piedmont, Italy.
D. THIN FOLIATED. Marmolite, thin foliated; the laminae brittle but separable.
G. = 2*41; colors greenish white, bluish white to pale asparagus-green. From Hoboken,
N. J.
E. FIBROUS. Chrysotile. Delicately fibrous, the fibers usually flexible and easily
separating; luster silky, or silky metallic; color greenish white, green, olive-green, yellow
and brownish; G. = 2 -2 19. Often constitutes seams in serpentine. It includes most of
the silky amianthus of serpentine rocks and much of what is popularly called asbestus
(asbestos). Cf. p. 489.
Picrolite, columnar, but fibers or columns not easily flexible, and often not easily sepa-
rable, or affording only a splintery fracture; color dark green to mountain-green, gray,
brown. The original was from Taberg, Sweden. Baltimorite is picrolite from Bare Hills,
Md.
Radiotine is like serpentine except in regard to its solubility and specific gravity. In
spherical aggregates of radiating fibers from near Dillenburg, Nassau.
F. SERPENTINE ROCKS. Serpentine often constitutes rock-masses. It frequently
occurs mixed with more or less of dolomite, magnesite, or calcite, making a rock of clouded
green, sometimes veined with white or pale green, called verd antique, ophiolite, or ophicalcite.
Serpentine rock is sometimes mottled with red, or has something of the aspect of a red
porphyry; the reddish portions containing an unusual

amount of oxide of iron. Any ser-
is called serpentine marble.
pentine rock cut into slabs and polished
Microscopic examination has established the fact that serpentine in rock-masses has been
largely produced by the alteration of chrysolite,
and many apparently homogeneous ser-
pentines show more or less of this original mineral.
In other cases it has resulted from the
alteration of pyroxene or amphibole. Sections of the serpentine derived from chrysolite
often show a peculiar structure, like the meshes of a net (Fig. 958) the lines marked by
;
grains of magnetite also follow the original cracks and cleavage

directions of the chrysolite
(Fig. 959, a). The serpentine from amphibole and pyroxene commonly shows an analogous
structure; the iron particles following the former cleav-
968 age lines. Hence the nature of the original mineral can
often be inferred. Cf. Fig. 959, a, b, c (Pirsson).
Comp. A magnesium silicate, H 4 Mg3 Si2 09

or 3MgO.2SiO 2 .2H 2 = Silica 44.1, magnesia
43-0, water 12-9 = 100. Iron protoxide often
replaces a small part of the magnesium nickel ;
in small amount is sometimes present. The

water is chiefly expelled at a red heat.
-<- In the closed tube
Pyr., etc. yields water. B. B.
fuseson the edges with difficulty. F. ==6. Gives usually an iron reaction. Decom-
posed by hydrochloric and sulphuric acids. From chrysotile the silica is left in fine
fibers.
Diff. Characterized by softness, absence of cleavage and feeble waxy or oily luster;
low by yielding much water B.B.
specific gravity;
Micro. Readily recognized in thin sections by its greenish or yellowish green color;
low relief and aggregate polarization due to its fibrous structure. When the fibers are
parallel, the interference-colors are not very low, but the confused aggregates may show
..Mife
\M i
<lMii$
a, Serpentine derived from chrysolite; 6, from amphibole; c, from pyroxene
the "ultra blue" or even be isotropic. The constant association with other
magnesia bear-
ing minerals like chrysolite, pyroxene, hornblende, etc., is also characteristic. The presence
oi lines of iron oxide as noted above (Fig. 959) is characteristic.
particles
Obs. Serpentine is a
always secondary mineral resulting, as noted above, from the
alteration of silicates containing
magnesia, particularly chrysolite, amphibole or pyroxene.
frequently torms large rock-masses, then being derived from the alteration of peridotites
dumtes and other basic rocks of igneous
origin; also of amphibolites, or pyroxene and
chrysolite rocks of metamorphic origin. In the first case it is usually accompanied by
spinel, garnet, chromite and sometimes nickel ores; in the second case
nates such as dolomite, by various carbo-
magnesite, breunnerite, etc.
Crystals of serpentine, pseudomorphous after
monticellite, occur in the Fassatal Tyrol
Austria. A variety containing soda from the Zillertal, Near
Miask at Lake Aushkul, Tyrol, is called nemaphyllite
Barsovka, Ekaterinburg, and elsewhere in Russia; in Norway,
Fine precious serpentines come from Falun and
iL of M?' ?vT nei Gulsjo in Sweden, the
w^l F^lAn P
wall,
^b0
^
od of Ports y in Aberdeenshire,
Q
England; Corsica, Siberia, Saxony, etc.
Scotland; the Lizard in Corn-
Roxbnrv
Al er
^
? lf
'
m
e '' a De
^ VNewburyport.
Isle Preciou s serpentine.
f ' In Ver, at New Fane,
Roxbury, etc. In Mass, fine at In R. at I, Newport; bowenite at Smith-
SILICATES 575
field. In Conn., near New Haven and Milford, at the verd-antique quarries. In N.
Y.,
at Port Henry, Essex Co.; at Antwerp, Jefferson Co., in crystals; in Gouverneur St!
Lawrence Co., in crystals; in Cornwall, Monroe, and Warwick, Orange Co., sometimes in
large crystals at Warwick; and from Richmond to New Brighton, Richmond Co.; Brew-
sters. In N. J., at Hoboken, with brucite, magnesite, etc.; at Montville, Morris
Co.,
chrysotile and retinalite, with common serpentine, produced by the alteration of pyroxene!
In Pa., massive, fibrous, and foliated, at Texas, Lancaster Co.; at West Chester, Chester
Co., williamsite; at Mineral Hill, Newtown, Marple, and Middletown, Delaware Co. In
Md., at Bare Hills; at Cooptown, Harford Co., with diallage. In Cal., at various points
in the Coast Range. Asbestus in notable deposits is found in the Grand Canyon, Ash
Creek and Sierra Ancha Mts., Ariz.
In Canada, abundant among the metamorphic rocks of the Eastern
Townships and
Gaspe peninsula, Quebec; at Thetford, Coleraine, Broughton, Orford, South Ham, Bolton,
Shipton, Melbourne, etc. The fibrous variety chrysotile (asbestus, bostonite) often forms
seams several inches in thickness in the massive mineral, and is now extensively mined for
technical purposes. Massive Laurentian serpentine also occurs in Grenville, ArgenteuU
Co., Quebec, and North Burgess, Lanark Co., Ontario. In New Brunswick, at Crow's
Nest in Portland.
The names Serpentine, Ophite, Lapis colubrinus, allude to the green serpent-like cloud-
ings of the serpentine marble. Retinalite is from perivr), resin; Picrolite, from
TTLKPOS,
bitter, in allusion to the magnesia (or Bittererde) present; Thermophyllite, from depurj, heat,
and <t>v\\ov, leaf, on account of the exfoliation when heated; Chrysotile, from XPWOS, golden,
and rtXos, fibrous; Metaxite, from nerafe, silk; Marmolite, from juap/xmpco, to shine, in allu-
sion to its peculiar luster.
Use. As an ornamental stone; the fibrous variety furnishes the greater part of the
heat insulating material known as asbestus.
Deweylite. A magnesian silicate near serpentine but with more water. Formula
perhaps 4MgO.3SiO 2 .6H 2 O. Amorphous, resembling gum arabic, or a resin. H. = 2-3 -5.
G. = 2'0-2'2. Color whitish, yellowish, reddish, brownish. Index, 1/55. Occurs with
serpentine in the Fleimstal, Tyrol, Austria; also at Texas, Pa., and the Bare Hills, Md.
Gymnite of Thomson, named from yvnvos, naked, in allusion to the locality at Bare Hills,
Md., is the same species.
Genthite. Nickel Gymnite. A gymnite with pait of the magnesium replaced by nickel,
2NiO.2MgO.3SiO 2 .6H 2 O. Amorphous, with a delicate stalactitic surface, incrusting.
H. = 3-4; sometimes very soft. G. = 2 -409. Luster resinous. Color pale apple-green,
or yellowish. From Texas, Lancaster Co., Pa., in thin crusts on chromite.
Nepouite. 3(Ni,Mg)O.2SiO 2 .2H2 O. In microscopic crystal plates with hexagonal out-
line. Good cleavages. H. = 2-2;5. G. = 2*5-3-2. Color pale to deep green. = 1'62-
1'63. Occurs in the nickel deposits of New Caledonia.
Garnierite. Noumeite. An important ore of nickel, consisting essentially of a hy-
H
drated silicate of magnesium and nickel, perhaps 2 (Ni,Mg)SiO 4 +water, but very variable
in composition, particularly as regards the nickel and magnesium; not always
homogene-
ous. Amorphous. Soft and friable. G. = 2'3-2'8. Luster dull. Color bright apple-
green, pale green to nearly white. Index, 1/59. In part unctuous; sometimes adheres to
the tongue. Occurs in serpentine rock near Noumea, capital of New Caledonia, associated
with chromic iron and steatite, where it is extensively mined. A similar ore occurs at Riddle
in Douglas County, southern Oregon; also at Webster, Jackson Co., N. C.
TALC.
Orthorhombic or monoclinic. Rarely in tabular crystals, hexagonal or
rhombic with prismatic angle of 60. Usually foliated massive; sometimes in
globular and stellated groups; also granular massive, coarse or fine; fibrous
(pseudomorphous) also compact or cryptocrystalline.
;
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Sectile. Flexible in thin laminse, but not

elastic. Percussion-figure a six-rayed star, oriented as with the micas. Feel
greasy. H. = 1-1-5. G. = 27-2-8. Luster pearly on cleavage surface.
Color apple-green to white, or silvery white; also greenish gray and dark
green; sometimes bright green perpendicular to cleavage surface, and brown
and translucent at right angles to this direction; brownish to blackish

less
of dark green varie-
green and reddish when impure. Streak usually white;
ties lighter than the color. Subtransparent to translucent. Optically nega-
tive Ax. pi. a (100). Bx _L c (001). Axial angle small, variable. Indices
=
1 1
= = 1'589.
approx.; a 1'539. 1-589. 7
Var. Foliated, Talc. usually easily separated, having a greasy feel,
Consists of folia,
and presenting ordinarily light green, greenish white, and white colors. G.
= 2'55-278.
Steatite or Soapstone. a. Coarse granular, grayish green, and brownish gray
Massive,
in color; H. = l-2'5. Pot-stone is ordinary soapstone, more or less impure. 6. Fine granu-
lar or cryptocrystalline, and soft enough to be used as chalk; as the French chalk, which is
milk-white with a pearly luster, c. Indurated talc. An impure slaty talc, harder than
ordinary talc.
Pseudomorphous. a. Fibrous, fine to coarse, altered from enstatite and tremohte.
6. Rensselaerite, having the form of pyroxene from northern New York and Canada.
Comp. An acid metasilicate of magnesium, H 2 Mg3 (SiO 3 )4 or H2 O.

3MgO.4Si0 2 = Silica 63 -5, magnesia 317, water 4*8
= 100. The water goes
off only at a red heat. Nickel is sometimes present in small amount.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube B.B., when intensely ignited, most varieties yield
water.
In the platinum forceps whitens, exfoliates, and fuses with difficulty on the thin edges to a
white enamel. Moistened with cobalt solution, assumes on ignition a pale red color. Not
decomposed by acids. Rensselaerite is decomposed by concentrated sulphuric acid.
Diff. Characterized by extreme softness, soapy feel; common foliated structure;
pearly luster; it is flexible but inelastic. Yields water only on intense ignition.
Obs. Talc or steatite is a very common mineral, and in the latter form constitutes
extensive beds in some regions. It is often associated with serpentine, talcose or chloritic
schist, and dolomite, and frequently contains crystals of dolomite, breunnerite, also asbes-
tus, actinolite, tourmaline, magnetite.
Steatite is the material of many pseudomorphs, among which the most common are
those after pyroxene, hornblende, mica, scapolite, and spinel. The magnesian minerals are
those which commonly afford steatite by alteration; while those like scapolite and nephelite,
which contain soda and no magnesia, most frequently yield pinite-like pseudomorphs.
There are also steatitic pseudomorphs after quartz, dolomite, topaz, chiastolite, staurolite,
cyanite, garnet, vesuvianite, chrysolite, gehlenite. Talc in the fibrous form is pseudomorph
after enstatite and tremolite.
Apple-green talc occurs at Mt. Greiner in the Zillertal, Tyrol, Austria; in the Valais and
St. Gothard in Switzerland; in Cornwall, England, near Lizard Point, with serpentine; the
Shetland islands.
In North America, foliated talc occurs in Me., at Dexter. In Ver., at Bridgewater,
handsome green talc, with dolomite; Newfane. In Mass., at Middlefield, Windsor, Blan-
fprd, Andover, and Chester. In R. I., at Smithfield, delicate green and white in a crystal-
line limestone. In N. Y., at Edwards, St. Lawrence Co., a fine fibrous talc (agalite) asso-
ciated with pink tremolite; on Staten Island. In N. J., Sparta. In Pa., at Texas,
Nottingham, Unionville; in South Mountain, ten miles south of Carlisle; at Chestnut Hill,
on the Schuylkill, talc and also soapstone, the latter
quarried extensively. In Md., at
Cooptown, of green, blue, and rose colors. In N. C., at Webster, Jackson Co. The im-
portant states for the production of talc and soapstone are New York, Vermont and Virginia.
In Canada, in the townships
Bolton, Button, and Potton, Quebec, with steatite in beds of
Cambrian age; in the township of Elzevir, Hastings Co., Ontario, an
in Archaean rocks.
impure grayish variety
Use. In the form of soapstone used for wash
tubs, sinks, table tops, switchboards,
hearth stones, furnace linings,
etc.; the tips of gas burners, tailors' chalk, slate pencils,
3rnaments etc> P ow
' dered form
;
m
as filler in papers, as a lubricant, in toilet powders,
etc
G is a PP arent ly a variety of talc, differing in the amount of water present and
% ^?M . in
its solubility in acids. From Gava valley, Italy.
SEPIOLITE. Meerschaum.
Compact, with a smooth feel, and fineearthy texture, or clay-like; also
rarely fibrous. H. = 2-2-5. G. = 2. Impressible by the nail. In dry
SILICATES 577
masses floats on water. Color grayish white, white, or with a faint yellowish
or reddish tinge, bluish green. Opaque. Biaxial,. /3 = 1-55.
Comp. 4 H
Mg2Si3O 10 or 2H 2 O.2MgO.3SiO 2
= Silica 60-8, magnesia
27-1, water 12-1
= 100. Some analyses show more water, which is probably
to be regarded as hygroscopic. Copper and nickel may replace part of the
magnesium.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields
hygroscopic moisture, and at a higher tem-
first
perature gives much water and a burnt B.B. some varieties blacken, then burn
smell.
white, and fuse with difficulty on the thin edges. With cobalt solution a pink color on
ignition. Decomposed by hydrochloric acid with separation of silica.
Obs. Occurs in Asia Minor, in masses in stratified earthy or alluvial deposits at the
plains of Eskihi sher; at Hrubschitz in Moravia; in Morocco, called in French Pierre de
Savon de Maroc; at Vallecas in Spain, in extensive beds.
A fibrous mineral, having the composition of sepiolite, occurs in Utah.
The word meerschaum is German for sea-froth, and alludes to its lightness and color.
Sepiolite is from <rr}Tria, cuttle-fish, the bone of which is light and porous.
Connarite. A hydrous nickel silicate, perhaps H^N^SisOio. In small fragile grains.

G. = 2'459-2'619. Color yellowish green. From Rottis, in Saxon Voigtland.
Spadaite. Perhaps 5MgO.6SiOa.4H2O. Massive, amorphous. Color reddish. From
Capo di Bove, near Rome.
SAPONITE. Piotine.
Massive. In nodules, or filling cavities. Soft, like butter or cheese, but

brittle on drying. G. = 2 '24 2 '30. Luster greasy. Color white, yellowish,
grayish green, bluish, reddish. Does not adhere to the tongue.
Comp. A hydrous silicate of magnesium and aluminium; but the
material is amorphous and probably always impure, and hence analyses give
no uniform results. Contains SiO 2 40-45 p. c., A1 2 O 3 5-10 p. c., MgO 19-26
p. c., H
2 19-21 p. c.; also Fe 2 O 3 FeO, etc. ,
Pyr., etc. B.B. gives out water very readily and blackens; thin splinters fuse with
difficulty on the edge. Decomposed by sulphuric acid.
Obs. Occurs in cavities in basalt, diabase, etc.; also with serpentine. Thus at Lizard
Point, Cornwall, in veins in serpentine; at various localities in Scotland, etc.
Saponite is from sapo, soap; and piotine from TTIOT^S, fat.
LASSALLITE. Composition perhaps 3MgO.2Al 2 p 3 .12SiO 2 .8H 2 O. In snow-white fibrous
masses. G. = 1.5. From the antimony mine at Miramont and at Can Pey near Arles-sur-
Tech, France.
Celadonite. A silicate of iron, magnesium and potassium. Earthy or in minute
scales. Very soft. Color green. Index, 1 '63. From cavities in amygdaloid at Mte. Baldo
near Verona, Italy.
Glauconite. Essentially a hydrous silicate of iron and potassium. Amorphous, and
resembling earthy chlorite; either in cavities in rocks, or loosely granular massive. Color
dull green. Index, 1'61. Occurs in rocks of nearly all geological ages; abundant in the
"green sand," of the Chalk formation, sometimes constituting 75 to 90 p. c. of the whole.
Found abundantly in ocean sediments near the continental shores. A manganese glauco-
nite from the Marsjat forest, Ural Mts., has been called marsjatskite. Greenalite is a green
hydrated ferrous silicate found as granules in the cherty rock associated with iron ores of the
Mesabi district, Minn. Resembles glauconite but contains no potash.
Pholidolite. Corresponds approximately to 2 K
q.l2(Fe,Mg)O.Al2 O 3 .13SiO 2 .5H 2 O. In
minute crystalline scales. G. = 2*408. Color grayish yellow. From Taberg in Werm-
land, Sweden, with garnet, diopside, etc.
IV. KAOLIN DIVISION

KAOLINITE. Kaolin.
or hexagonal scales or plates
Monoclinic; in thin rhombic, rhomboidal
with angles of 60 and 120. Usually constituting a clay-like mass, either
compact, friable or mealy.
Cleavage: basal, perfect. Flexible, inelastic.
H. = 2-2-5. G. = 2-6-2-63.
Luster of plates, pearly; of mass, pearly to dull earthy. Color white, grayish
sometimes brownish, bluish or reddish. Scales transparent
white, yellowish,
to translucent; usually unctuous and plastic.
Optically biaxial, negative. Bx _L b (010). Bxa and ax. pi. inclined
behind some 20 to normal to c (001). Axial angle large, approx. 90.
=
1-482.
Var. 1. Kaolinite. In crystalline scales, pure white and with a satin luster in the
mass. 2. Ordinary. Common kaolin, in part in crystalline scales but more or less impure
including the compact lithomarge.
Comp. H Al Si209,
4 2 or 2H2 O.Al 2 03.2SiO 2 = Silica 46.5, alumina 39.5,
water 14-0 = 100. The water goes off at a high temperature, above 330.
Pyr., etc. Yields water. B.B. infusible. Gives a blue color on ignition with cobalt
solution. Insoluble in acids.
Diff. Characterized by unctuous, soapy feel and the alumina reaction B.B. Re-
sembles infusorial earth, but readily distinguished under the microscope.
Obs. Ordinary kaolin is a result of the decomposition of aluminous minerals, espe-
cially the feldspar of granitic and gneissoid rocks and porphyries. In some regions where
these rocks have decomposed on a large scale, the resulting clay remains in vast beds of
kaolin, usually more or less mixed with free quartz, and sometimes with oxide of iron from
some of the other minerals present. Pure kaolinite in scales often occurs in connection with
iron ores of the Coal formation. It sometimes forms extensive beds in the Tertiary forma-
tion, as near Richmond, Va. Also met with accompanying diaspore and emery or
corundum.
Occurs in the coal formation in Belgium; Schlan in Bohemia; in argillaceous schist at
Lodeve, Dept. of H6rault, France; as kaolin at Diendorf (Bodenmais) in Bavaria; at
Schemnitz, Hungary; with fluoriteat Zinnwald, Germany. Yrieix, near Limoges, France,
is the best locality of kaolin in Europe (a discovery of 1765) it affords material for the
;
famous Sevres porcelain manufactory. Large quantities of clay (kaolin) are found in Corn-
wall and West Devon, England.
In the United States, kaolin occurs at Newcastle and Wilmington, Del.; at various
localities in the limonite region of Ver. (at Brandon,
etc.), Mass., Delaware Co., Pa.; Jack-
sonville, Ala.; near Webster, N. C.; Edgefield, S. C.; near Augusta, Ga. In crystal plates
from National Belle mine, Silverton, Col. From Lawrence Co., Ind.
The name Kaolin is a corruption of the Chinese Raiding, meaning high-ridge, the name
of a hill near Jauchau Fu, where the material is obtained.
Use. The finer, purer grades used in the manufacture of porcelain, china, etc.; in the
form of clay in pottery, stoneware, bricks, etc.
Pholerite. Near kaolinite, but some analyses give 15 p. c. water. The original was
from the coal mines of Fins, Dept. of 'Allier, France.
Faratsihite. (Al,Fe) 2 O ? .2SiO 2 .2H 2 O. Intermediate between kaolinite and chloropal.
Monoclinic. In microscopic hexagonal plates. Soft. G. = 2. Color pale yellow. Index
a little higher than that of kaolinite.
Difficultly fusible. Decomposed by hydrochloric
acid. From Faratsiho, Madagascar.
HALLOYSITE.
Massive. Clay-like or earthy.
Fracture conchoidal. Hardly plastic. H. = 1-2. G. = 2-0-2-20. Luster
somewhat pearly, or waxy, to dull. Color white, grayish, greenish, yellowish,
SILICATES 579
bluish, reddish. Translucent to opaque, sometimes becoming translucent or

even transparent in water, with an increase of one-fifth in weight.
Var. Ordinary. Earthy or waxy in luster and opaque massive. Galapectite is hal-
loysite of Angleur, Belgium. Pseudosteatite is an impure variety, dark green in color, with
H. = 2'25. G. = 2'469. Indianaite is a white porcelain clay from Lawrence Co., Indiana,
where it occurs with allophane in beds four to ten feet thick.
Smectite is greenish, and in certain states of humidity appears transparent and almost
gelatinous; it is from Conde, near Houdan, France.
Bole, in part, may belong here; that is those colored, unctuous clays containing more
or less iron oxide, which also have about 24 p. c. of water; the iron gives them a brownish,
yellowish or reddish color; but they may be mixtures. Here belongs Bergseife (mountain-
soap).
Comp. A silicate of aluminium (Al2 O 3 .2SiO2 ) like kaolinite, but amor-

phous and containing more water; the amount is somewhat uncertain, but the
formula is probably to be taken as H 4 Al2 Si2O9.H2O or 2H 2 O.Al2 O 3 .2SiO 2 .H 2 O
= Silica 43-5, alumina 36 -9, water 19 -6 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Yields water. B.B. infusible. A fine blue on ignition with cobalt solu-
tion. Decomposed by acids.
Obs. Occurs often in veins or beds of ore, as a secondary product; also in granite
and other rocks, being derived from the decomposition of some aluminous minerals.
TERMIERITE. A clay-like substance resembling halloysite of uncertain composition from
the antimony mines of Miramont, France.
Newtonite. HgA^SiÔn-HÔ. In soft white compact masses resembling kaolin.
Found on Sneed's Creek in the northern part of Newton Co., Ark.
BATCHELORITE. Al 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 .H 2 O. A green foliated mineral from Mt. Lyell mine,

Tasmania.
Cimolite. A hydrous silicate of aluminium, 2Al 2 O3.9SiO 2 .6H2 O. Amorphous clay-
like,or chalky. Very soft. G. = 2' 18-2*30. Color white, grayish white, reddish. From
the island of Argentiera (Kimolos of the Greeks).
Montmorillonite. Probably H
2 Al 2 SLiOi 2 .nH 2 O. Massive, clay-like. Very soft and
tender. Luster feeble. Color white or grayish to rose-red, and bluish also pistachio-green. ;
Unctuous. Montmorillonite, from Montmorillon, France, is rose-red. Confolensite is paler

rose-red; from Confolens, Dept. of Charente at St. Jean-de-Cole, near Thiyiers.
Stolpenite is a clay from the basalt of Stolpen, Germany. Saponite of Nickl&s is a white,
plastic, soap-like clay from the granite from which issues one of the hot springs of Plom-
bieres, France, called Soap Spring; it was named smegmatite by Naumann.
PYROPHYLLITE.
Monoclinic? Foliated, radiated lamellar or somewhat fibrous; also granu-
lar to compact or cryptocrystalline; the latter sometimes slaty.
Cleavage: basal, eminent. Laminae flexible, not elastic. Feel greasy.
H. = 1-2. G. = 2 -8-2 -9. Luster of folia pearly; of massive kinds dull and
glistening. Color white, apple-green, grayish and brownish green, yellowish
to ocher-yellow, grayish white. Subtransparent to opaque. Optically .
Bx _L cleavage. Ax. angle large, to 108. Mean index, 1*58.

Var. (1) and often radiated, closely resembling talc in color, feel, luster and
Foliated,
structure. Compact massive, white, grayish and greenish, somewhat resembling com-
(2)
pact steatite, or French chalk. This compact variety includes part of what has gone under
the name of agalmatolite, from China; it is used for slate-pencils, and is sometimes called
pencil-stone.
Comp. H Al
2 2 (SiO 3 )4 or H O.Al O
2 2 3 .4SiO 2 = Silica 667, alumina 28*3,
water 5'0 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Yields water, but only at a high temperature. B.B. whitens, and fuses
with difficulty on the edges. The radiated varieties exfoliate in fan-like forms, swelling
Moistened with cobalt solution and
UD to many times the original volume of the assay
heated gives a deep blue color (alumina). Partially decomposed by sulphuric acid,
and
carbonates.
completely on fusion with alkaline
Diff. Resembles some talc, but distinguished by the reaction for alumina with cobalt
Obs Compact pyrophyllite is the material or base of some schistose rocks. The foli-
in the Ural Mts.; at Westana, Sweden;
ated variety is often the gangue of cyanite. Occurs
near Ottrez, Luxemburg; Ouro Preto, Brazil.
Also in white stellate aggregations in Cottonstone Mt., Mecklenburg Co., N. C.; in
in Lincoln Co., Ga., on Graves Mt.
Chesterfield Dist., S. C., with lazulite and cyanite;
The compact kind, at Deep River, N. C., is extensively used for making slate-pencils and
resembles the so-called agalmatolite or pagodite of China, often used for ornamental
carvings.
U
S e. For the same purposes as talc, which see.
ALLOPHANE.
Amorphous. In incrustations, usually thin, with a mammillary surface,
and hyalite-like; sometimes stalactitic. Occasionally almost pulverulent.
Fracture imperfectly conchoidal and shining, to earthy. Very brittle.
H. = 3. G. = 1-85-1-89. Luster vitreous to subresinous; bright and waxy
internally. Color pale sky-blue, sometimes greenish to deep green, brown,
yellow or colorless. Streak uncolored. Translucent, n = 1*49.
Comp. Hydrous aluminium silicate, Al 2 Si0 5 .5H 2 =
Silica 23'8, alu-
mina 40-5, water 35-7 = 100. Some analyses give 6 equivalents of water
=
Silica 22-2, alumina 37-8, water 40'0 = 100.
Impurities are often present. The coloring matter of the blue variety is due to traces
of chrysocolla, and substances intermediate between allophane and chrysocolla (mixtures)
are not uncommon. The green variety is colored by malachite, and the yellowish and
brown by iron.
Pyr., etc. Yields much water in the closed tube. B.B. crumbles but is infusible.
Gives a blue color on ignition with cobalt solution. Gelatinizes with hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Allophane is regarded as a result of the decomposition of some aluminous sili-
cate (feldspar, etc.); and it often occurs incrusting fissures or cavities in mines, especially
those of copper and limonite, and even in beds of coal.
Named from aXXos, other, and âiveadai, to appear, in allusion to its change of appear-
ance under the blowpipe.
Melite. 2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .SiO2.8H 2 O. In imperfect prisms. Stalactitic, massive. H. = 3.
2-2.Color bluish brown. Infusible. From Saalfield, Thuringia.
Collyrite. 2Al 2 O3.SiO2.9H 2 O. A clay-like mineral, white, with a glimmering luster,
greasy feel, and adhering to the tongue. G. = 2-2 -15. From Ezquerra in the Pyrenees.
SchrStterite. 8Al 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .30H2 O. Resembles allophane; sometimes like gum in
appearance. H. = 3-3 -5. G. = 1-95-2 -05. Color pale green or yellowish. From Dollin-
ger mountain, near Freienstein, in Styria; at the Falls of Little River, on the Sand Mt.,
Cherokee Co., Ala.
The following are clay-like minerals or mineral substances:
Sinopite, smectite, catlinite.
Cenosite. I^CaÊr^CSi^n. Orthorhombic. G. = 3'38. Color yellowish brown.

From Norway; Nordmark, Sweden.
Hittero,
Britholite. A complex silicate and phosphate of the cerium metals and calcium. Hex-
agonal. In minute crystals. H. = 5'5. G. = 4-4. Color brown. From nepheline
syenite region of Julianehaab, South Greenland.
Erikite.Composition uncertain; essentially a silicate and phosphate of the cerium
rthorhombic. In prismatic crystals. H. = 5'5. G. = 3'5. Color
light yel-
low-brown to dark gray-brown. From
nepheline-syenite in South Greenland.
Plazolite 3CaO Al 2 2(Si0 2 ,C0 2 ).2H 20. In minute dodecahedrons.
A
b5. G. =3-13. Colorless to
Isometric.
n = 171. From Crestmore, Cal.
light yellow,
SILICATES 581
Thaumasite. CaSiO 3 .CaCO 3 .CaSO 4 .15H2 O. Massive, compact, crystalline. Cleavage

in traces. H. = 3'5. G. = 1-877. Color white. Uniaxial, -. co = 1'507, = 1'468.
o
Occurs and crevices at the Bjelke mine, near Areskuta, Jemtland, Sweden;
filling cavities
at first soft but hardens on exposure to the air. Also in fibrous crystalline masses at Pat-
erson, N. J.; from Beaver Co., Utah.
Spurrite. 2Ca2 SiO 4 .CaCO 3 Probably monoclinic.
. In granular cleavable masses.
H. = 5. Color pale gray, ft = T67. Infusible. .From contact zone between limestone
and diorite in Velardena mining district, Mexico.
Uranophane. Uranotil. CaO.2UO3.2'SiO 2 .GH 2 O. In radiated aggregations; massive,
fibrous. G. = 3-81-3-90. Color yellow. Biaxial,-. Indices, 1'650-1'670. From the
granite of Kupferberg, Silesia. Uranotil occurs at Wolsendorf, Bavaria; Mitchell Co.,
Dixenite. MnSiO 3 .2Mn 2 (OH)AsO 3 Hexagonal.

. In aggregates of thin folia.
H. = 3-4. Basal cleavage. Color nearly black, red by transmitted light. Optically
+ . n = 1*96. From Langban, Sweden.
A
hydrated calcium borosilicate, 8CaO.5B 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 .6H2O. In compact
Bakerite.
masses resembling unglazed porcelain. H. = 4'5. G. = 2'7-2'9. Color white. Fusible.
From borax deposits in Mohave desert, 16 miles N. E. of Daggett, San Bernardino Co.,
Cal.
CHRYSOCOLLA.
Cryptocrystalline; often opal-like or enamel-like in texture; earthy. In-
crusting or filling seams. Sometimes botryoidal. In microscopic acicular
crystals from Mackay, Idaho.
Fracture conchoidal. Rather sectile; translucent varieties brittle. H. =
2-4. G. = 2-2*238. Luster vitreous, shining, earthy. Color mountain-
green, bluish green, passing into sky-blue and turquois-blue; brown to black
when impure. Streak, when pure, white. Translucent to opaque. Crystals
from Idaho gave: Uniaxial, +; w 1-46; e
=
= 1-57; weakly pleochroic,
co =colorless, e =
pale blue-green.
Comp. True chrysocolla appears to correspond to CuSiO 3 .2H 2 O =
Silica 34-3, copper oxide 45 -2, water 20 -5 = 100, the water being double that of
dioptase.
Composition varies much through impurities; free silica, also alumina, black oxide of
copper, oxide of iron (or limonite) and oxide of manganese may be present; the color con-
sequently varies from bluish green to brown and black. It has been suggested that the
composition of most chrysocolla is not definite but that it is usually in the form of a mineral
gel with copper oxide, silica and water occurring in varying proportions according to the
conditions of formation.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube blackens and yields water. B.B. decrepitates, colors the
flame emerald-green, but is infusible. With the fluxes gives the reactions for copper.
With soda and charcoal a globule of metallic copper. Decomposed by acids without
gelatinization.
Obs. Accompanies other copper ores, occurring especially in the upper part of veins.
Found in copper mines in Cornwall, England; Hungary; Siberia; Saxony; South Australia;
Chile, etc.
In the United States, similarly at the Schuyler's mines, N. J.; at Morgantown, Pa.; at
the Clifton mines, Graham Co., 'in Gila Co., Ariz.; Emma mine, Utah. In crystals from
Mackay, Idaho.
Chrysocolla is from XP V(T OS, gold, and KO\\<X, glue, and was the name of a material used
in soldering gold. The name is often applied now to borax, which is so employed.
Use. Chrysocolla may serve as a minor ore of copper.
Shattuckite. 2CuSiO 3 .H 2 O. Compact, granular, fibrous. G. = 3-8. Color blue.
Indices, 1 '73-1 '80. Pleochroic, dark to light blue. Found at Shattuck mine, Bisbee,
Ariz.,forming pseudomorphs after malachite.
CuSiO 3 .H 2 O. Orthorhombic, fibrous.
Bisbeeite. Color pale blue to nearly white;
Elongation of fibers positive. Indices 1-59 to 1-65. Pleochroic, very pale green to pale
olive-brown. Found at Shattuck mine at Bisbee, Ariz., resulting from the hydration of
shattuckite.
CHLOROPAL.
Compact massive, with an opal-like appearance; earthy.
H. 2-5^-5. G. = 1727-1-870, earthy varieties, the second a conchoidal
=
specimen; 2-105, Ceylon. Color greenish yellow and pistachio-green.
Opaque to subtranslucent. Fragile. Fracture conchoidal and splintery
to earthy. Adheres feebly to the tongue.
Var. Chloropal has the above-mentioned characters, and was named from the Hunga-
rian mineral occurring at Unghwar.
Nontronite is pale straw-yellow or canary-yellow, and greenish, with an unctuous feel;
flattens and grows lumpy under the pestle, and is polished by friction; from Nontron,
Dept. of Dordogne, France. Pinguite is siskin- and oil-green, extremely soft, like ftew-
made soap, with a slightly resinous luster, not adhering to the tongue; from Wolkenstein
in Saxony. Graminite has a grass-green color (whence the name), and occurs at Menzen-
berg, in the Siebengebirge, Germany; in thin fibrous seams, or as delicate lamellaB.
Comp. A hydrated silicate of ferric iron, perhaps with the general

formula HeF^CSiOâÎÔ or Fe 2 O3.3SiO2 .5H 2 O = Silica 41-9, iron sesqui-
oxide 37 -2, water 20*9 = 100. Alumina is present in some varieties.
The water and silica both vary much. The Hungarian chloropal occurs mixed with
opal, and graduates into it, and this accounts for the high silica of some of its analyses.
Obs. Localities mentioned above. Chloropal occurs also at Meenser Steinberg near
Gottingen, Germany; pinguite at Sternberg, Moravia. On Lehigh Mt., Pa., south of
Allentown, occurs in connection with iron deposits. From Palmetto Mts., Esmeralda Co.,
Nev.
HCBFERITE. An iron silicate near chloropal. From Kfitz, Bohemia.
Color green.
Miillerite. Zamboniniie. Fe2 Si 3 9 .2H 2 O. O Massive. Resembles nontronite. Soft.
G. = 2-0. Color yellowish green. Infusible. From Nontron, Dordogne, France.
Hisingerite. A
hydrated ferric silicate, of uncertain composition. Amorphous, com-
pact. Fracture conchoidal. H. =3. G. = 2'5-3'0. Luster greasy. Color black to
brownish black. Streak yellowish brown. From Riddarhyttan, Tunaberg, Sweden;
Langban, etc., Norway; from Greenland.
Morencite. A hydrated ferric silicate of uncertain composition. Fibrous. Color
brownish yellow. From Morenci, Ariz.
The following are hydrous manganese silicates.

Bementite. HeMn^SiO^. Orthorhombic. to three pinacoids. In soft
Cleavages ||
radiated masses resembling pyrophyllite. G. = 2 "981. Color pale grayish yellow. From
the zinc mines of Franklin
Furnace, N. J. .
T
Ec
J P^
r e- Mn*Si 8O 28 .7H2 O. Monoclinic(?). In thin tabular crystals.Good cleavage.
H. =4. G. = 2-46. Color brown. Opaque. Indices, 1 "62-1 -63. From Langban, Sweden.
Agnolite. 2 H Mn
3 (SiO 3 )4.H 2 O. Name given to the manganese silicate occurring as
part of the material from Schemnitz, Hungary, known as Triclinic. In
manganocalcite.
radiating fibrous masses. Color flesh-red to rose. H. =5. G. = 3'0.
Orientite. Ca 4 M n4 (SiO )5.4H O.
4 2 Orthorhombic. Radiating prismatic. Brown to
7& ^
y =^1795.
H = G. = 3. =
I
opaq -4-&-5. Optically +. 1758.
77
776. From ;f
Onente Province, Cuba.
d 0n z *LMn te ' 3< Monoclinic. In acute
PprS?t h^1
- 1 76.
?
H= )9|iO*-H*>.
Perfect basal cleavage. G. =
4-5-5. 3*91.
pyramidal crystals.
Color, bright pink to reddish brown.
crepitates and then fuses readily. Soluble in acids. From Franklin, N. J.
6' ~
A 1 ydro of
ran,??;* } jf sjjicate manganese, magnesium and zinc, 8RO.3SiO 2 .2H 2 O. In
radiating groups of needle-like crystals. Colorless and transparent. From Franklin, N. J.
%&?*** Mn0 3S KV3H 0. In and reniform
G ~ brown. i
stalactitic
-^T^-Qi -
2
From the Harstig mine near Pajsberg, Sweden.
olor shapes.
e e
1 [ man Sane se and
ica1
allv d erived frnm &?!]* ?
alteration of rhodonite.
iron, of doubtful composition, usu-
and liverTbro^n Amorphous. Color black to dark brown
TITANO-SILICATES, TITANATES 583
Searlesite. Monoclinic (?). In minute spherulites composed of

NaB(SiO 3 )2.H2 O.
radiating Color white. Indices, 1-52-1-53. Fusible. Decomposed by hydro-
fibers.
chloric acid. Found at Searles Lake, San Bernardino Co., Cal.
Colerainite. 4MgO.Al 2 O 3 .2SiO2.5H 2 O. Hexagonal. In minute, thin, hexagonal plates.
H. = 2-5-3. G. = 2-51. Colorless or white. Optically +. Index, 1*56. Found in Black
Lake area, Coleraine township, Quebec.
TARTARKAITE. A
complex hydrous silicate of aluminium, magnesium, etc. Tabular
crystals. G. = 27. Color dark gray to black. Uniaxial, +. In limestone on the Tar-
tarka river, Yenisei District, Siberia.
ITANO-SILICATES, TITANATES
This section includes the common calcium titano-silicate, Titanite; also a
number of silicates which contain titanium, but whose relations are not alto-
gether clear; further the titanate, Perovskite, and niobo-titanate, Dysanalyte,
which is intermediate between Perovskite and the species Pyrochlore, Micro-
lite, Koppite of the following section.
In general the part played by titanium in the many silicates in which it enters is more
or less uncertain. It is probably in most cases, as shown in the preceding pages, to be taken
as replacing the silicon; in others, however, it seems to play the part of a basic element; in
schorlomite (p. 510) it may enter in both relations.
TITANITE. Sphene.
Monoclinic. Axes a b:c = 0-7547 1 :
0-8543; p = 60
(
17'.
mm 110 A 110 = 66 29'. IV, Tl2 A 112 46 7*'.
ex. 001 A 102 21 0'. en, 001 A 111 = 38 16'.
021 A 021 = 112 3'. cm, 001 A 110 = 65 30'.
nri Ill A 111 = 43 49'. d t
001 A 112 = 40 34'.
960 961 962
963 964
Twins: tw. pi. a (100) rather common, both contact-twins and cruciform
penetration-twins. Crystals very varied in habit; often wedge-shaped and
flattened c (001); also prismatic. Sometimes massive, compact; rarely

||
1 $} in f*l 1 1\ T*
Cleavage-(110) rather distinct; m a (100), I (112) imperfect; in greeno-

n less so. Parting often easy 77 (221) due to twinning
vite (111) easy, (111)
t 1 1
lamellae. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 3 -4-3 -56. Luster adamantine to resinous.

Streak white, slightly
Color brown, gray, yellow, green, rose-red and black.
reddish in greenovite. Transparent to opaque.
Pleochroism in general rather feeble, but distinct in deep-colored kinds:
Z red with tinge of yellow;. 7, yellow, often greenish; X, nearly colorless.
Ax. pi. || b (010). Bx nearly J_ x (102), i.e., Bx A c axis
+ =
Optically .
> and hence the of the axial

+ 51. Dispersion p v very large, peculiarity
2V = 27. a =
interference-figure in white, light. Axial angles variable.
1-900. ft
= 1-907. 7 = 2-034.
Var.
Ordinary, (a) Titanite; brown to black,
the original being thus colored, also
or subtranslucent. Sphene (named from a^v, a wedge)', of light shades, as
opaque (6)
the original was yellow. Ligurite is an apple-
yellow, greenish, etc., and often translucent;
green sphene. Spinthere (or Semeline)
a greenish kind. Lederite is brown, opaque, or sub-
translucent, of the form in Fig. 960.
rutile and ilmemte, not
Titanomorphite is a white mostly granular alteration-product of
uncommon in certain crystalline rocks; here also belongs most leucoxene (see p. 418).
Manganesian; Greenovite. Red or rose-colored, owing to the presence of a little man-
ganese; from St. Marcel, Piedmont, Italy; from Jothvad
in Narukot, India.
Containing yttrium or cerium. Here belong grothite, alshedite, eucolite-titanite.
Comp. CaTiSiO 5 or CaO.TiO 2 .Si0 2 = Silica 30-6, titanium dioxide

40-8, lime 28*6
=
present in varying
100. Iron is amounts, sometimes man-
ganese and also yttrium in some kinds.
Pyr., etc. B.B. some varieties change color, becoming yellow, and fuse at 3 with
intumescence, to a yellow, brown or black glass. With borax they afford a clear yellowish
green glass. Imperfectly soluble in heated hydrochloric acid; and if the solution be con-
centrated along with tin, it assumes a fine violet color. With salt of phosphorus in R. F.
gives a violet bead; varieties containing much iron require to be treated with the flux on
charcoal with metallic tin. Completely decomposed by sulphuric and hydrofluoric acids.
Diff. Characterized by its oblique crystallization, a wedge-shaped form common; by
resinous (or adamantine) luster; hardness less than that of staurolite and greater than that
of sphalerite. The reaction for titanium is distinctive, but less so in varieties containing
much iron.
Micro. Distinguished in thin sections by its acute-angled form, often lozenge-shaped;
its generally pale brown tone; very high relief and remarkable birefringence, causing the
section to show white of the higher order; by its biaxial character (showing many lemnis-
cate curves); and by its great dispersion, which produces colored hyperbolas.
Artif. Titanite is apparently produced artificially only with difficulty. It has been
obtained by fusing together silica and titanic oxide with calcium chloride.
Obs. Titanite, as an accessory component, is widespread as a rock forming mineral,
though confined mostly to the acidic feldspathic igneous rocks; it is much more common
in the plutonic granular types than in the volcanic forms. Thus it is found in the more
especially common and character-
basic hornblende granites, syenites, and diorites, and is
istic in the nephelite-syenites. It occurs also in the metamorphic rocks and especially in
the schists, gneisses, etc., rich in magnesia and iron and in certain granular limestones. It
is also found in beds of iron
ore; commonly associated minerals are pyroxene, amphibole,
chlorite, scapolite, zircon, apatite, etc. In cavities in gneiss and granite, it often accom-
panies adularia, smoky quartz, apatite, chlorite, etc.
Occurs at various points in the Grisons,
Switzerland, associated with feldspar and
chlorite; Tavetsch; Binnental; in the St. Gothard region; Zermatt in the Valais Mader- ;
anertal in Uri; also elsewhere in the

Alps; in Dauphine (spinthere), France; in Italy at
Ala (hgunte) and at St. Marcel, in
Piedmont; at Schwarzenstein and in the
XT /uif i r'
T y ro1 z P ta u, Moravia; near Tavistock, England; Rothenkopf
' near Tremadoc, in
JNorth Wales; from Kragero and in titanic iron at Arendal, Norway; with magnetite at
TITANO-SILICATES, TITANATES 585
Nordmark, Sweden; Achmatovsk, Ural Mts. Occasionally found among volcanic rocks,
as atLake Laach (semeline) and at Andernach on the Rhine.
In Me., in fine crystals at Sandford. In Mass., in gneiss, in the east part of Lee; at
Bolton with pyroxene and scapolite in limestone. In N. Y., at Roger's Rock on Lake
George, abundant in small brown crystals; at Gouverneur, in black crystals in granular
limestone; in Diana near Natural Bridge, Lewis Co., in large dark brown crystals, among
Statesville, Iredell Co., yellowish white with sunstone; also Buncombe Co., Alexander Co.,
and other points.
Occurs in Canada in Quebec at Grenyille, Argenteuil Co.; also Buckingham, Templeton,
Wakefield, Hull, Ottawa Co.; in Ontario at North Burgess, honey-yellow; near Eganville,
Renfrew Co., in very large dark brown crystals with apatite, amphibole, zircon.
Molengraaffite. A titano-silicate of lime and soda. Monoclinic (?). In imperfect pris-
matic crystals. Cleavage (100) perfect. Color yellow-brown. Indices, 173-177. From
a rock, "lujaurite," in Pilandsberg, near Rustenberg, Transvaal.
Keilhauite. A titano-silicate of calcium, aluminium, ferric iron, and the yttrium
metals. Crystals near titanite in habit and angles. H. = 6'5. G. = 3'52-377. Color
brownish black. From near Arendal, Norway.
Tscheffkinite. A titano-silicate of the cerium metals, iron, etc., but an alteration
product, more or less heterogeneous, and the composition of the original mineral is very
uncertain. Massive, amorphous. H. = 5-5'5. G. = 4'508-4'549. Color velvet-black.
From the Ilmen mountains in the Ural Mts. Also from South India, Kanjamalai Hill,
Salem district. An isolated mass weighing 20 Ibs. has been found on Hat Creek, near Mas-
sie's Mills, Nelson Co., Va.; also found, south of this point, in Bedford Co.
Astrophyllite. Probably R4 R4Ti(SiO 4 ) 4 with R = H, Na, K, and R = Fe, Mn chiefly,

including also Fe2 O 3 .Orthorhombic. In elongated crystals; also in thin strips or blades;
sometimes in stellate groups. Cleavage: 6 (010) perfect like mica, but laminae brittle.
H. = 3. G. = 3 '3-3 '4. Luster submetallic, pearly. Color bronze-yellow to gold-yellow.
Optically +. Indices,'678-1733.
1
Occurs on the small islands in the Langesund fiord, near Brevik, Norway, in elseolite-
syenite, embedded in feldspar, with catapleiite, segirite, black mica, etc. Similarly at
Kangerdluarsuk and Narsarsuk, Greenland. Also with arfvedsonite and zircon at St.
Peter's Dome, Pike's Peak, El Paso Co., Col.
Johnstrupite. A
silicate of the cerium metals, calcium and sodium chiefly, with titan-
ium and fluorine. In prismatic monoclinic crystals. G. = 3 '29. Color brownish green.
Index, 1 -646. From near Barkevik, Norway.
Mosandrite. Near Johnstrupite in form and composition and from the same region.
Rinkite, also near Johnstrupite, is from Greenland. f
Narsarsukite. A highly acidic titano-silicate of ferric iron and sodium. Tetragonal.

In tabular crystals. Fine prismatic cleavage. H. =7. G. = 27. Color honey-yellow,
on weathering brownish gray or ocher-yellow. w = T55. Fusible. In pegmatite at
Narsarsuk, southern Greenland.
Neptunite. A titano-silicate of iron (manganese) and the alkali metals. In prismatic
monoclinic crystals. H. = 5-6. G. = 3 '23. Color black. Streak, cinnamon-brown.
Mean index, 170. Pleochroic, yellow to deep-red. Found at Narsarsuk and elsewhere,
southern Greenland, and at the benitoite locality in San Benito Co., Cal. (originally called
carlosite) .
Benitojte. BaTiSi 3 O 9 Hexagonal, trigonal (ditrigonal-bipyramidal)

.
. In crystals
with p(1011) prominent. H. = 6'2-6'5. G .= 3'6. Color sapphire-blue to light blue and
colorless. Transparent. Strongly dichroic, deep blue to colorless, co
= 177. Fusible
at 3. Found associated with neptunite and natrolite near the headwaters of the San Benito
River in San Benito Co., Cal.
Leucosphenite. Na 4 Ba(TiO)2(Si 2 O5)5. Monoclinic. In minute wedge-shaped crystals.
Distinct cleavage. H. = 6'5. G. = 3'0. Color white. /8 = 1'66. Difficultly fusible.
Orthorhombic. In
Lorenzenite. Nao(TiO) 2 Si2 O 7
Contains considerable zirconia.
.
minute acicular crystals.

H. = 6. G. = 3 -4. /3 about 1 '78. Fusible.
Distinct cleavage.
Joaquinite. A titano-silicate of calcium and iron. Orthorhombic. Color, honey-
yellow. Associated with benitoite from San Benito Co., Cal.
PEROVSKITE. Perofskite.
Isometric or pseudo-isometric. Crystals in general (Ural Mts., Zermatt,

Switzerland) cubic in habit and often highly modified,
but the faces often
irregularlydistributed. Cubic faces striated parallel to the edges and appar-
individuals. Also in reniform
ently penetration-twins, as if of pyritohedral
masses showing small cubes.
Cleavage: cubic, rather perfect. Fracture uneven to subconchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 5*5. G. = 4-017-4-039. Luster adamantine to metallic-ada-
mantine. Color pale yellow, honey-yellow, orange-yellow, reddish brown,
grayish black. Streak colorless, grayish. Transparent to opaque. Usually
exhibits anomalous double refraction. Mean index, about 2*38.
Geometrically considered, perovskite conforms to the isometric system; optically, how-
ever, it is uniformly biaxial and usually positive. The molecular structure (also as devel-
oped by etching) seems to correspond to Orthorhombic symmetry. Cf. Art. 429.
Comp. Calcium titanate, CaTiO 3 = Titanium dioxide 58-9, lime 41-1
= 100. Iron present in small amount replacing the calcium.
is
Pyr., etc. In the forceps and on charcoal infusible. With salt of phosphorus in O.F.
dissolves easily, giving a greenish bead while hot, which becomes colorless on cooling; in
R.F. the bead changes to grayish green, and on cooling assumes a violet-blue color. En-
tirely decomposed by boiling sulphuric acid.
Obs. Occurs in small crystals, associated with chlorite, and magnetic iron in chlorite
slate, at Achmatovsk, near Zlatoust, in the Ural Mts.; at Schelingen in the Kaiserstuhl,
Germany, in granular limestone; in the valley of Zermatt, Switzerland, near the Findelen
glacier; at Wildkreuzjoch, between Pfitsch and Pfunders in Tyrol, Austria; various
localities, Piedmont, Italy. Sometimes noted in microscopic octahedral crystals as a rock
constituent; thus in nephelite- and melilite-basalts; also in serpentine (altered peridotite)
at Syracuse, N. Y.; in igneous rocks, Beaver Creek, Gunnison Co., Col.
Knopite. Near perovskite but contains cerium. In black isometric crystals. From
Alno, Sweden.
Dysanalyte. A and iron, like perovskite with lime replaced
titano-niobate of calcium
to some extent by Pseudo-isometric, probably Orthorhombic.
iron, etc. In cubic crystals.
Color, iron-black. From the granular limestone of Vogtsburg, Kaiserstuhl, Baden, Ger-
many. Has previously been called perovskite, but is in fact intermediate between the
titanate, perovskite, and the niobates, pyrochlore and koppite. From Mte. Somma,
Vesuvius.
A related mineral, which has also long passed as perovskite, occurs with magnetite,
brookite, rutile, etc., at Magnet Cove, Ark. It is in octahedrons or cubo-octahedrons,
black or brownish black in color and submetallic in luster.
See also the allied titanate, bixbyite, mentioned on p. 425.
Geikielite.Magnesium iron titanate, (Mg,Fe)TiO 3 Hexagonal, rhombohedral. Usu-
.
ally massive, as roUed pebbles. H. =6. G. = 4. Color bluish or brownish black.

Index, very high. From Ceylon.
Delorenzite. A titanate of iron, uranium and yttrium of uncertain
composition. Or-
thorhombic. Prismatic habit. Color black. Resinous luster. Found in
pegmatite at
Graveggia, Val Vigezzo, Piedmont, Italy.
Yttrocrasite. A hydrous titanate of the yttrium earths and thorium. Orthorhombic.
**_? 5 5~6 ;
'
G- = 4-8. Black color with pitchy to resinous luster. Infusible. Found

inBurnet Co., three miles east of Barringer Hill, Texas.
Brannerite. Essentially (UO,TiO,UO 2 )TiO 3 Prismatic crystals or granular. Blank.
.
greenish brown> H< = 4 5> G " 4 5-5 4 F und in gold placers, Stanley
' ' '
" -
Basin Idh
Oxygen Salts
3. NIOBATES, TANTALATES
The Niobates (Columbates) and Tantalates are chiefly salts of metaniobic
and metatantalic acid, RNb 2 O 6 and RTaÂ; also in part Pyroniobates,
R 2Nb2 O7, etc. Titanium is prominent in a number of the species, which are
hence intermediate between the niobates and titanates. Niobium and tanta-
lum also enter into the composition of a few rare silicates, as wohlerite, laven-
ite, etc.
The following groups may be mentioned:
The isometric PYROCHLORE GROUP, including pyrochlore, microlite, etc.
The tetragonal FERGUSONITE GROUP, including fergusonite and sipylite.
The orthorhombic COLUMBITE GROUP, including columbite and tantalite.
Also the orthorhombic SAMARSKITE GROUP, including yttrotantalite, samarsk-
ite, and annerodite.
The
species belonging in this class are for the most part rare, and are
hence but briefly described.
PYROCHLORE.
Isometric. Commonly in octanedrons; also in grains.
Cleavage octahedral, sometimes distinct.
: Fracture conchoidal. Brittle.
H. = 5-5-5. G. = 4 -2-4 -36. Luster vitreous or resinous, the latter on frac-
ture surfaces. Color brown, dark reddish or blackish brown. Streak light
brown, yellowish brown. Subtranslucent to opaque,
Comp. Chiefly a niobate of the cerium metals, calcium and other
bases, with also titanium, thorium, fluorine. Probably essentially a metanio-
bate with a titanate, RNb
2 O 6 .R(Ti,Th)0 3 fluorine is also present.
;
Obs. Occurs in elseolite-syenite at Fredriksvarn and Laurvik, Norway; on the island

Lovo, opposite Brevik, and at several points in the Langesund fiord; near Miask in the Ural
Mts. Named from -n-vp, fire, and x^wpos, green, because B.B. it becomes yellowish green.
A variety of pyrochlore from near Wausau, Wis., has been called marignadte.
Neotantalite. Composition near that of tantalite. Isometric, in octahedrons.
H. = 5-6. G. = 5'2. Color clear yellow. Refractive index, 1*9. Found with kaolin
at Colettes and Echassieres, Dept. PAllier, France,
ii ii
Chalcolamprite. RNb 2 OeF2.RSiO3. Isometric. In small octahedrons. H. = 5-5.

G. = 3 '8. Color dark gray-brown. Crystal faces show a copper-red metallic iridescence.
Occurs sparingly at Narsarsuk, South Greenland. Endeiolite is a similar mineral from the
same locality supposed to have the same composition with the substitution of the hydroxyl
group for the fluorine.
Koppite. Essentially a pyroniobate of cerium, calcium, etc., near pyrochlore. In
minute brown dodecahedrons. G. = 4'45-4'56. From Schelingen, Kaiserstuhl, Germany,
embedded in limestone.
Hatchettolite. A tantalo-niobate of uranium, near pyrochlore. In octahedrons with
a (100) and m (311). G. = 477-4-90. Color yellowish brown. Occurs with samarskite,
at the mica mines of Mitchell Co., N. C.; from Mesa Grande, Cal.
Samiresite. A niobate of uranium, etc. Isometric. In octahedrons. G. = 5 24.
Color golden-yellow. From Antsirabe, on Samiresy Hill, Madagascar.
Microlite. Essentially a calcium pyrotantalate, CauTa2O7, but containing also nio-
bium, fluorine and a variety of bases in small amount. Isometric. Habit octa-
hedral; crystals often very small and highly modified. H. = 5'5. G. = 5'485-5'562;
6*13 Virginia. Color pale yellow to brown, rarely hyacinth-red, n = T94. From
Chesterfield, Mass., in albite; Branchville, Conn.; Rumford, Me.; Uto, Sweden; Green-
land. Also in fine crystals up to 1 in. in diameter at the mica mines at Amelia Court-
House, Amelia Co., Va.
PYRRHITE. Probably a niobate related to pyrochlore, and perhaps identical with
microlite. Occurs in minute orange-yellow octahedrons. From Alabashka, near Mursinka
in the Ural Mts.; from Mte. Somma, Vesuvius.
RISORITE. A niobate of the yttrium metals. Isotropic. Color yellow-brown.
H. = 5'5. G. = 4-18. In pegmatite at Risor, Norway.
FERGUSONITE. Tyrite. Bragite
Tetragonal-pyramidal. Axis c = T4643. Crystals pyramidal or pris-

matic in habit.
Cleavage: s (111) in traces. Fracture subconchoidal. Brittle. H. =
5-5-6. G. = 5-8, diminishing to 4 -3 when largely hydrated. Luster exter-
nally dull, on the fracture brilliantly vitreous and submetallic. Color brown-
ish black; in thin scales pale liver-brown. Streak pale brown. Subtrans-
lucent to opaque. Index, 2-19.
Comp. Essentially a metaniobate (and tantalate) of yttrium with
erbium, cerium, uranium, etc., in varying amounts; also iron, calcium, etc.
in in
General formula R(Nb,Ta)O 4 with R = Y,Er,Ce.
Water is usually present and sometimes in considerable amount, but probably not an
original constituent; the specific gravity falls as the amount increases.
Obs. From Cape Farewell in Greenland, in quartz; also at Ytterby and Kararfvet,
Sweden. From near Beforona, Madagascar; South Africa; Australia; Ceylon; Taka-
yama, Mino, Japan. Tyrite is associated with euxenite at Hampemyr on the island of
Tromo, and Helle on the mainland, Norway; bragite is from Helle, Naresto, etc., Norway.
Found in the United States, at Rockport, Mass., in granite; in the Brindletown gold
district, Burke Co., N. C., in gold washings; with zircon in Anderson Co., S. C.; at the
gadolinite locality in Llano Co., Texas, in considerable quantity.
Sipylite. A niobate of erbium chiefly, also the cerium metals, etc., near fergusonite
in form. Rarely in octahedral crystals. Usually in irregular masses. G. = 4 '89. Color
brownish black to brownish orange. Occurs sparingly with allanite in Amherst Co., Va.
COLUMBITE-TANTALITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'8285 : 1 : 0'8898.
yy'", 210 A 2lO = 45 0'. ce, 001 A 021 = 60 40'.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 79 17'. 100
ao, A 111 = 51 16'.
gg', 130 A 130 = 43 50'. cu, 001 A 133 = 43 48'.

cfc, 001 A 103 = 19 42'. uu', 133 A 133 = 29 57'.
cq, 001 A 023 = 30 41'. uu"' 133 ,
A 133 = 79 54'.
Twins: tw. pi. e (021) common, usually contact-twins, heart-shaped (Fig.

385, p. 160), also penetration-twins; further tw. pi. q (023) rare (Fig. 434, p.
169). Crystals short prismatic, often rectangular prisms with the three pina-
coids prominent; also thin tabular || a (100); the
pyramids often but slightly
developed, sometimes, however, acutely terminated by u (133) alone. Also in
large groups of parallel crystals, and massive.
Cleavage: a (100) rather distinct; 6 (010) less so. Fracture subconchoidal
to uneven. Brittle. H. = 6. G. = 5 -3-7 -3, varying with the composition
(see below). Luster submetallic, often very brilliant, sub-resinous. Color
iron-black, grayish and brownish black, opaque; rarely reddish brown and
translucent; frequently iridescent. Streak dark red to black. Optically 4-

.= 2-26. = 2-20. 7 = 2-34.
967 968 969
Middletown Black Hills Greenland
Comp. Niobate and tantalate of iron and manganese, (Fe,Mn)(Nb,

Ta) 2 passing by insensible gradations from normal COLUMBITE, the nearly
6,
pure niobate, to normal TANTALITE, the nearly pure tantalate. The iron and
manganese also vary widely. Tin and tungsten are present in small amount.
The percentage composition for FeNb 2 O 6 = Niobium pentbxide 82-7, iron
protoxide 17 '3
= 100; for FeTaÔe = Tantalum pentoxide 86-1, iron protox-
ide 13-9 = 100.
In some varieties, manganocolumbite or manganotantalite, the iron is largely replaced by
manganese.
The connection between the specific gravity and the percentage of -metallic acids is
shown in the following table:
G. TaaOe G. Ta2 O 5
Greenland 5 '36 3 '3 Bodenmais 5 '92 27-1
Acworth, N. H. 5'65 15'8 Haddam 6'05 30-4
Limoges 570 13 '8 Bodenmais 6 '06 35-4
Bodenmais (Dianite) 574 13'4 Haddam 613 31-5
Haddam 5'85 lO'O
Tantalite 7-03 65-6
Diff. Distinguished (from black tourmaline, etc.) by orthorhombic crystallization,

rectangular forms common; high specific gravity; submetallic luster, often with iridescent
surface; cleavage much less distinct than for wolframite.
Pyr., etc. For tantalite, B.B. alone unaltered. With salt of phosphorus dissolves
slowly, giving an iron glass, which in R.F. is pale yellow on cooling; treated with tin on char-
coal it becomes green. Decomposed on fusion with potassium bisulphate in the platinum
spoon, and gives on treatment with dilute hydrochloric acid a yellow solution and a heavy
white powder, which, on addition of metallic zinc, assumes a smalt-blue color; on dilution
with water the blue color soon disappears. Columbite, when decomposed by fusion with
caustic potash, and treated with hydrochloric and sulphuric acids, gives, on the addition of
zinc, a blue color more lasting than with tantalite. Partially decomposed when the powdered
mineral is evaporated to dryness with concentrated sulphuric acid, its color is changed to
white, light gray, or yellow, and when boiled with hydrochloric acid and metallic zinc it
gives a beautiful blue.
Obs. Columbite occurs at Rabenstein and Bodenmais, Bavaria, in granite; Tam-
mela, in Finland; Chanteloube, near Limoges, France, in pegmatite with tantalite; near
Miask, in the Ilmen Mts., Russia, with samarskite; in the gold-washings of the Sanarka
region in the Ural Mts.; in Greenland, in cryolite, at Ivigtut (or Evigtok), in brilliant
crystals. In crystals from Ampangabe and Ambatofotsikely, Madagascar.
In the United States, in Me., at Standish, in splendent crystals in granite; also at Stone-
ham with cassiterite, etc., manganotantalite from Rumford. In N. H., at Acworth, at the
mica mine. In Mass., at Chesterfield; Northfield. In Conn., at Haddam, in a granite
vein; near Middletown; at Branch ville, Fairfield Co., in a vein of albitic granite, in large
also in minute translucent

crystals (manganocolumbite}
crystals and aggregates of crystals, ,
In Pa., Mineral Hill, Dela-

upon spodumene. In N. Y., at Greenfield, with chrysoberyl.
ware Co. In Va., Amelia Co., in fine splendent crystals with microlite, monazite, etc.
In N. C., with samarskite at the mica mines of Mitchell Co. In Col., on microcline at
the Pike's Peak region; Turkey Creek, Jefferson Co. In S. D. in the Black Hills region,
common in the granite veins. In Cal., King's Creek district, Fresno Co., from Rinc.on and
manganotantalite from Pala.
Mangantantalite (Nordenskiold) from Uto, Sweden, occurs with petalite, lepidolite,
microlite, etc. Manganotantalite (Arzruni) is from gold-washings in the Sanarka region in
the Ural Mts.; from Pilbarra district, West Australia.
Massive tantalite occurs in Finland, in Tammela, at Harkasaari near Torro; in Kimito,
at Skogbole; in Somero at Kaidasuo, and in Kuprtane at Katiala, with lepidolite, tourma-
line, and beryl; in Sweden, near Falun,
at Broddbo and Finbo; in France, at Chanteloube
near Limoges, in pegmatite. In the United States, in Yancey Co., N. C.; Coosa Co., Ala.;
also in the Black Hills, S. D.; in large masses near Canon City, Col.
Use. Source of tantalum used in making filaments for incandescent electric lights.
Fe(Ta,Nb)aO6. Like tantalite, but occurring in square tetragonal octa-
Tapiolite.
hedrons. Tapiolite shows close similarities with the minerals of the Rutile Group, in
which some authors place it. G. = 7'496. Color pure black. From the Kulmala farm,
Tammela, Finland. In twin crystals from Topsham, Me. Mossite, a niobium tapiolite.
Found at Berg near Moss, Norway. Skogbolite and ixiolite are twinned varieties of tapio-
lite.
Stibio tantalite.(Sbp)2(Ta,Nb)2Oe. Orthorhombic, hemimorphic in direction of a

axis. Polysynthetic twinning parallel to a (100). Cleavage a (perfect). H. = 5*5.
G. = 6'0-7'4 (varying with composition). /S.
= 2'40-2'42. Fusible. Color brown, reddish
yellow, yellow. Luster adamantine to resinous. Originally found in tin-bearing sands of
Greenbushes, Australia. In crystals from Mesa Grande, San Diego Co., Cal.
YTTROTANTALITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0-5412 1 M330. Crystals prismatic,
: : :
mm'" 110 A 110 = 56 50'.

Cleavage: b (010) very indistinct. Fracture small conchoidal. H. =
5-5-5. G. = 5 '5-5 -9. Luster submetallic to vitreous and greasy. Color
black, brown, brownish yellow, straw-yellow. Streak gray to colorless.
Opaque to subtranslucent.
n m n in
Comp. Essentially RR 2 (Ta,Nb) 4 Oi 5 .4H 2 O, with R = Fe, Ca, R = Y,
Er, Ce, etc. The water may be secondary.
The so-called yellow yttrotantalite of
Ytterby and Kararfvet belongs to fergusonite.
Obs. Occurs in Sweden at Ytterby, near Vaxholm, in red feldspar; at Finbo and
Broddbo, near Falun, in southern Norway.
SAMARSKITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0*5456 1 : 0-5178. Crystals rectangu-
lar prisms (a (100), b (010), with e (101) prominent).
Angles, mm'" 110 A 110 = 57 14'; ee' 101 A 101 = 87.
Faces rough. Commonly massive, and in flattened
embedded grains.
Cleavage: b (010) imperfect. Fracture conchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 5-6. G. = 5-6-5-8. Luster vitreous to
resinous, splendent. Color velvet-black. Streak dark
reddish brown. Nearly opaque. Index, 2*21.
n
Comp;
m RTRs(Nb,Ta) 6 O 2 i with R = Fe, Ca, U0 2,
etc. ;
R = cerium and yttrium metalschiefly.
- In the closed tube
decrepitates, glows, cracks open, and turns black. B.B,
edges to a black glass. With salt of
phosphorus in both flames an emerald-
green bead. With soda yields a manganese reaction. Decomposed on fusion with potas-
sium bisulphate, yielding a yellow mass which on treatment with dilute hydrochloric acid
separates white tantalic acid, and on boiling with metallic zinc gives a fine blue color. In
powder sufficiently decomposed on boiling with concentrated sulphuric acid to give the
blue reduction test when the acid fluid is treated with metallic zinc or tin.
Obs. Occurs in reddish brown feldspar, with seschynite and columbite in the Ilmen
mountains, near Miask, Ural Mts.; from Antanamalaza, Madagascar. In the United
States rather abundant and sometimes in large masses up to 20 Ibs. at the mica mines in
Mitchell Co., N. C., intimately associated with columbite; sparingly elsewhere.
Ampangabeite. A niobate of uranium, etc. In rectangular prisms, probably ortho-
rhombic. Color brownish red. Luster greasy. H. = 4, G. = 3'97-4-29. Fuses to a
black slag. Easily soluble in hydrochloric acid. Radioactive. Found in parallel growth
with columbite at Ampangabe and Ambatofotsikely, Madagascar.
Annerodite. Essentially a pyro-niobate of uranium and yttrium. In prismatic crys-
tals, often resembling columbite. H. =6. G. = 5'7. Color black. From the pegmatite
vein at Annerod, near Moss, Norway.
Hielmite. A stanno-tantalate (and niobate) of yttrium, iron, manganese, calcium.
Crystals (orthorhombic) usually rough; massive. G. = 5*82. Color pure black. From
the Kararfvet mine, Falun, Sweden.
Êschynite. A niobate and titanate (thorate) of the cerium metals chiefly, also in
small amount iron, calcium, etc. Crystals prismatic, orthorhombic. Fracture small con-
choidal. Brittle. H. = 5-6. G. = 4 -93 Hittero; 5 '168 Miask. Luster submetallic to
resinous, nearly dull. Color nearly black, inclining to brownish yellow when translucent.
From Miask in the Ilmen Mts., Russia, in feldspar with mica and zircon; also with euclase
in the gold sands of the Orenburg District, Southern Ural Mts. From Hittero, Norway.
Named from aurxwh, shame, by Berzelius, in allusion to the inability of chemical science,
at the time of its discovery, to separate some of its constituents.
Polymignite. A niobate and titanate (zirconate) of the cerium metals, iron, calcium.
Crystals slender prisms, vertically striated. G.
= 4'77-4'85. Color black. Occurs at
Frederiksvarn, Norway.
Euxenite. A niobate and titanate of yttrium, erbium, cerium and uranium. Crystals
rare; commonly massive. H. = 6*5. G. = 47-5'0. Color brownish black.
Occurs in Norway, at Jolster near Tvedestrand; at Alve, etc., near Arendal; from
Greenland; from various localities in Madagascar.
Loranskite and Wiikite are euxenite-like minerals from Impilaks, Finland. Usually
in irregular masses but orthorhombic crystals are noted. H. =6. G. = 3'8-4'8. Color
black to brown and yellow.
Polycrase. A niobate and titanate of yttrium, erbium, cerium, uranium, like euxenite.
Crystals thin prismatic, orthorhombic. Fracture conchoidal. H.
= 5-6. G. = 4'97-5'04.
Luster vitreous to resinous. Color black, brownish in splinters.
From Hittero, Norway, in granite with gadolinite; at Slattakra, Smaland, Sweden. In
the United States, in N. C., in the gold-washings on Davis land, Henderson
Co., with zircon, monazite, xenotime, magnetite; also in S. C., four miles
from Marietta in Greenville Co. Named from TTO\US, many, and /cpaais,
mixture.
Blomstrandine-Priorite. Niobates and titanates of yttrium, erbium,
cerium and uranium, similar to the euxenite-poly erase series. The two
series may be dimorphous. The ratio of Nb 2 O 6 TiO 2 ranges from
:
1:2 in priorite to 1:6 in blomstrandine. Orthohombic. Crystals

tabular parallel to b (010). Most prominent forms are 6 (010), c (001)
and n (130). G. = 4'8-4'9. Color brownish black. Originally found in
a pegmatite vein at Urstad, Island of Hittero, Norway. Also noted from
Arendal and elsewhere in southern Norway and from Miask, Ilmen Mts.,
Russia.
Betafite. A niobate and titanate of uranium, etc. Isometric with
octahedron and dodecahedron. G. = 3 75-4 '17. Color, a greenish black.
Opaque. Greasy luster. Found in pegmatites from various localities
in Madagascar, including Ambolotara, near Betafo.
A niobate of uncertain composition. Analysis shows chiefly SiO 2 TiO 2

Epistolite. , ,
NaÔ, H O.
2Monoclinic. In rectangular plates, also in aggregates of curved folia. Basal
cleavage perfect. H.
= 1-1 '5. G. = 2 '9. Color white, grayish, brownish. Refractive
index 1 '67. Found in pegmatite veins or in massive albite from Julianehaab, Greenland.
Plumboniobite. A niobate of yttrium, uranium, lead, iron, etc. Amorphous.
H. = 5-5-5. G. = 4*81. Color dark brown to black. Found in mica mines at Morogoro,
German East Africa.
Oxygen Salts
4. PHOSPHATES, ARSENATES, VANADATES, ANTIMONATES

A. Anhydrous Phosphates, Arsenates, Vanadates, Antimonates
Normal phosphoric acid is H PO3 4, and consequently normal phosphates

i n m
have the formulas R 3 P0 4 R3 (PO 4 )2 and RPO4 and similarly for the arse-
, ,
nates, etc. Only a comparatively small number of species conform to this

simple formula. Most species contain more than one metallic element, and in
the prominent Apatite Group the radical (CaF), (CaCl) or (PbCl)
enters;
n
in the Wagnerite Group we have similarly (RF) or (ROH).
XENOTIME.
Tetragonal. Axisc = 0-6187, zz' (111 A 111) = 55 30', zz" (111 A Til)
82 22'. In crystals resembling zircon in habit; sometimes
compounded
with zircon in parallel position (Fig. 462, p. In
972 973 173).
rolled grains.
Cleavage: m (110) perfect. Fracture uneven and
splintery. Brittle. H. = 4-5. G. = 4-45-4-56.
Luster resinous to vitreous. Color yellowish brown,
reddish brown, hair-brown,
flesh-red, grayish white,
wine-yellow, pale yellow; streak pale brown, yellow-
o> = 1 -72. +
ish or reddish.
Opaque. Optically .
e = 1*81.
Comp. Essentially yttrium phosphate, YPO 4

or Y 03.P O5 = Phosphorus
2 2
pentoxide 38 yttria -6,
=
100 The yttrium metals may include erbium
m large amount; cerium is sometimes present; also silicon and thorium as in
monazite.
moi tene d with sulphuric acid colors the flame

nl
Difficultly soluble m saltu of phosphorus.
? ,
D
Diff
and pfrfe7t
PP
' ** ^^^ f rm
'
'
Insoluble in acids.
but Distinguished by inferior hardness
g ram te veins . ; sometimes in minute embedded

!?
uent iftfe musoovT^Hesof B, 6

S *
1
' Switzerland:
& *
An
fr
accessory constit-
m Braz " errone-
ously thought to ^taKgfaluSf of SO
lte t
^
I
d shings of Clarksville, in N. C., Burke Co.,
Hender^n C o Mftch e n'Co t^f Ga,
ty S onite Ml Co -
"tile, etc, with'
PHOSPHATES, ARSENATES, ETC. 593
MONAZITE
clusters of fine needles; also in sphe-
Carminite. Perhaps Pb 3 As2 O 8 .10FeAsO4. In
Luise mine at Hor-
roidal forms. G. = 4105. Color carmine to tile-red. From the
hausen, Nassau, Germany.
Georgiadesite. Pb 3 (AsO 4 ) 2 .3PbCl 2 Orthorhombic. In small crystals with hexago-
.
nal outline. H. = 3'5. G. = 7'1. Resinous luster. Color white, brownish yellow.
Found on lead slags at Laurium, Greece.
Pucherite. Bismuth vanadate, BiVO 4 In small orthorhombic crystals. H. = 4.
.
G. = 6-249. Color reddish brown. Optically -. = 2 -50. From the Pucher Mine,
Schneeberg, Saxony; San Diego Co., Cal.
Mn 3 (AsO 3 ) 2 Hexagonal-rhombohedral. Prismatic habit. H. = 4.
Armangite. .
G. = 4-23. Poor basal cleavage. Color black, streak brown. Optically -. High
refractive index. From Langban, Sweden.
Triphylite Group. Orthorhombic

a : b : c
Li(Fe,Mn)P0 4 0'4348 : 1 : 0'5265

Triphylite
Lithiophilite Li(Mn,Fe)PO 4
Natrophilite NaMnPO 4
Orthophosphates of an alkali metal, lithium or sodium, with iron and man-

ganese.
TRIPHYLITE-LITHIOPHILITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0-4348 1 0'5265. Crystals rare, usu-
: : : :
ally coarse and faces uneven. Commonly massive, cleavable to compact.

Cleavage: c (001) perfect; b (010) nearly perfect; (110) interrupted. m
Fracture uneven to subconchoidal. H. = 4-5-5. G = 3-42-3-56. Luster
vitreous to resinous. Color greenish gray to bluish in triphylite; also pale
pink to yellow and clove-brown in lithiophilite. Streak uncolored to grayish
white. Transparent to translucent. Axial angle variable, 0-90. Mean
index, 1-68.
Comp. A phosphate of iron, manganese and lithium, Li(Fe,Mn)P0 4 ,
varying from the bluish gray TRIPHYLITE with little manganese to the salmon-
pink or clove-brown LITHIOPHILITE with but little iron.
Typical Triphylite is LiFePO 4 = Phosphorus pentoxide 45 '0, iron protoxide 45 '5, lithia
9'5 = 100. Typical Lithiophilite is LiMnPO4 = Phosphorus pentoxide 45 '3, manganese
protoxide 45'1, lithia 9'6 = 100. Both Fe and Mn are always present.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube sometimes decrepitates, turns to a dark color, and gives
off traces ofwater. B.B. fuses at T5, coloring the flame beautiful lithia-red in streaks,
with a pale bluish green on the exterior of the cone of flame. With the fluxes reacts for
iron and manganese; the iron reaction is feeble in
pure lithiophilite. Soluble in hydro-
chloric acid.
Obs. Triphylite is often associated with spodumene; occurs at Rabenstein, near
Zwieselîn Bavaria; Keityo, Finland; Norwich, Mass.; Peru, Me.; Grafton, N. H. Named
from Tpis, threefold, and <j>v\ri, family, in allusion to its containing three phosphates.
Lithiophilite occurs at Branch ville, Fairfield Co., Conn., in a vein of albitic granite, with
spodumene, manganese phosphates, etc.; also at Norway, Me., in crystals from Pala, Cal.
Named from lithium and <j>t\6s, friend.
Natrophilite. NaMnPO 4. Near triphylite in form. Chiefly massive, cleavable.
H. = 4-5-5. G. = 3-41. Color deep wine-yellow. Occurs sparingly at Branchville, Conn.
Graftomte. (Fe,Mn,Ca) 3 P2 O 8 Monoclinic. H. =5. G. = 37. Color when fresh

.
salmon-pink, usually dark from alteration. Fusible. Occurs in laminated intergrowths

with tnphyllite in a pegmatite from
Grafton, N. H.
PHOSPHATES,- ARSENATES, ETC. 595
Beryllonite. A phosphate of sodium and beryllium, NaBePCX. Crystals short pris-

matic to tabular, orthorhombic. H. = 5'5-6. G. = 2*845. Luster vitreous; on c (001)
pearly. Colorless to white or pale yellowish. Optically /3
= 1*558. From Stone- .
ham, Me.
Apatite Group
General formula R 5 (F,Cl)[(P,As,V)0 4 ] 3
= (R(F,Cl))R4 [(P,As,V)0 4 ]3 ;
Apatite (CaF)Ca 4 (PO 4 ) 3 Fluor-apatite c = 0-7346

or (CaCl)Ca 4 (PO 4 ) 3 Chlor-apatite
Pyromorphite (PbCl)Pb 4 (PO 4 ) 3 0-7362
Mimetite (PbCl)Pb 4 (AsO 4 ) 3 0-7224
Vanadinite (PbCl)Pb 4 (VO 4 ) 3 0-7122
In addition to the above species, there are also certain intermediate compounds contain-
ing lead and calcium; others with phosphorus and arsenic, or arsenic and vanadium, as
noted beyond. Further the rare calcium arsenate, Svabite, also seems to belong in this
group. The radicals CaO, Ca.OH, may possibly replace the CaF radical in apatite. A
probable member of the group, wilkeite, contains CO 3 SiO 2 and SO 4 in addition to usual ,
radicals. Fermorite contains strontium.
The species of the APATITE GROUP crystallize in the hexagonal system,

but all show, either by the subordinate faces, or in .etching-figures, that they
belong to the pyramidal class (p. 100). They are chemically phosphates,
arsenates, vanadates of calcium or lead (also manganese), with chlorine or
fluorine. The latter element is probably present as a univalent radical
CaF (or CaCl), etc., in general RF (or RC1), replacing one hydrogen atom in
i n n
the acid R 9 (P0 4 ) 3 so that the general formula is (RF)R4 (PO 4 ) 3 and similarly
, ,
for the arsenates. This is a more correct way of viewing the composition than
the other method sometimes adopted, viz., 3R3 (PO 4 ) 2 .RF2 etc. ,
APATITE.
Hexagonal-pyramidal. Axis c = 07346.
976 977 978 979
cr, 0001 A 1012 = 22 59'. xx

r
,
lOTl A 1011 = 37
ex, 0001 A lOll = 40 18'. 88', 1121 A 1211 = 48 50'.
cy, 0001 A 2021 = 59 29'. m^ 1010 A 2131 = 30 20'.
rr', 1012 A 0112 = 22 31'. ms, 1010 A 1121 = 44 17'.
Crystals varying from long prismatic to short prismatic and tabular. Also
globular and reniform, with a fibrous or imperfectly columnar structure;
massive, structure granular to compact.
Cleavage: c (0001) imperfect; (1010) more m so. Fracture conchoidal
and uneven. Brittle. sometimes 4-5 when massive. G = 3-17-

H. = 5,
3-23 crystals. Luster vitreous, inclining to subresmous. btreak white.
sometimes white;
Color usually sea-green, bluish green; often violet-blue;
flesh-red and brown. Transparent to opaque.
occasionally yellow, gray, red, = 1-6417.
low. co = 1-6461, e
Optically -. Birefringence
Var 1 Ordinary Crystallized, or cleavable
and granular massive. Colorless to
(a) The asparagus-stone, originally
from Murcia Spain is
ereen blue yellow, flesh-red,
is in greenish blue and bluish crystals
yellowish green. Moroxite, from Arendal, Norway,
(6) Lasurapatite is a sky-blue variety
with lapis-lazuli in Siberia, (c) Francohte, from Wheal
occurs in small crystalline stalactitic masses
Franco, near Tavistock, Devonshire, England,
and in minute curving crystals. .
often with only a trace of chlorine,

Ordinary apatite is fluor-apatite, containing fluorine
sometimes fluorine is entirely absent.
up to 0'5 p. c.; rarely chlorine preponderates, and
2. Manganapatite contains manganese replacing calcium to 10'5 p. c. MnO; color dark
3 Voelckerite is name given to the possible isomorphous molecule, Ca 4 (CaO)(PO 4 ) 3 and

.
4. Fibrous, concretionary, stalactitic. Phosphorite includes the fibrous concretionary

and partly scaly mineral from Estremadura, Spain, and elsewhere. Eupyrchroite, from
Crown Point, N. Y., belongs here; it is concentric in structure. Staffelite occurs incrust-
or stalactitic masses,
ing the phosphorite of Staffel, Germany, in botryoidal, reniform,
fibrous and radiating. See p. 597.
5. Earthy apatite; Osteolite. Mostly altered apatite; coprolites are impure calcium
phosphate.
Comp. For (CaF)Ca 4 (PO 4 ) 3

Fluor-apatite and for Chlor-apatite ;
(CaCl)Ca4 (PO 4 )3; 3Ca 3 P 2 O8.CaF2 and SCaaPaOs.CaCl;. There

also written
are also intermediate compounds containing both fluorine and chlorine. The
percentage composition for these normal varieties is as follows :
Fluor-apatite PO
2 5 42'3 CaO 55'5 F 3'8 = 101'6 or 775 = 100
Ca3 Ps O 8 92'25 CaF 2
Chlor-apatite PO
2 5 41'0 CaO
C16'8
53 '8 = 101-6 orCaCl 2 10'6 = 100
Ca 3 P2 8 89'4
Fluor-apatite is much more common than the other variety; here belongs the apatite of
the Alps, Spain, St. Lawrence Co., N. Y., Canada. Apatites in which chlorine is promi-
nent are rare; this is true of some Norwegian kinds.
Pyr., etc. B.B. in the forceps fuses with difficulty on the edges (F. = 4-5-5), coloring
the flame reddish yellow; moistened with sulphuric acid and heated colors the flame pale
bluish green (phosphoric acid). Dissolves in hydrochloric and nitric acids, yielding with
sulphuric acid a copious precipitate of calcium sulphate; the dilute nitric acid solution gives
sometimes a precipitate of silver chloride on addition of silver nitrate. Most varieties will
give a slight test for fluorine, when heat ed with potassium bisulphate in a closed tube.
Diff. Characterized by the common hexagonal form, but softer than beryl, being
scratched by a knife; does not effervesce in acid (like calcite) difficultly fusible; yields a
;
green flame B.B. after being moistened with sulphuric acid.

Micro. Recognized in thin sections by its moderately high relief; extremely low bire-
fringence (hence not often showing a disti net axial figure in basal sections), the interference
colors in ordinary sections scarcely rising above gray of the first order; parallel extinction
and negative extension; columnar form; lack of color and cleavage; and by the rude cross
parting seen as occasional cracks crossing the prism.
Artif. Apatite may be prepared artificially by fusing sodium phosphate with calcium
fluoride or calcium chloride.
Obs. Apatite occurs in rocks of various kinds and ages, but is most common in meta-
morphic crystalline rocks, especially in granular limestone and in many metalliferous
veins, particularly those of tin, in gneiss, syenite, hornblendic gneiss, mica schist, beds of
iron ore; occasionally in serpentine. In the form of minute microscopic crystals it has an
almost universal distribution as an accessory rock-forming mineral. It is found in all kinds
of igneous rocks and is one of the earliest
products of crystallization. In larger crystals it is
especially characteristic of the pegmatite facies of igneous rocks, particularly the granites,
and occurs there associated with quartz, feldspar, tourmaline, muscovite, beryl, etc. It is
sometimes present in ordinary stratified limestone, beds of sandstone or shale of the Silurian,
Carboniferous, Jurassic, Cretaceous, or Tertiary. It has been observed as the petrifying
matenal of wood.
Among its localities are Ehrenfriedersdorf in Saxony; Schwarzenstein, the

Knappen-
wand in Untersulzbachtal and Zillertal in the Tyrol, Austria; St. Gothard, Tavetsch, etc.,
in Switzerland; Mussa-Alp in Piedmont, Italy, white or colorless; Zinnwald and Schlacken-
wald in Bohemia; at Gellivare, Sweden; in England, in Cornwall, with tin ores; in Cum-
berland, at Carrock Fells; in Devonshire, cream-colored at Bovey Tracey, and at Wheal
Franco (francolite). The asparagus-stone or spargelstein of Jumilla, in Murcia, Spain, is
pale yellowish green in color. Large quantities of apatite are mined in Norway at Kragero;
also at Odegaard, near Bamle, and elsewhere.
In Me., on Long Island, Blue-hill Bay; in fine purple crystals of gem-quality from
Auburn. In N. H., Westmoreland. In Mass., at Norwich; at Bolton abundant. In
Conn., at Branch ville (manganapatite) also greenish white and colorless; at Haddam
,
Neck. In N. Y., common in St. Lawrence Co., in granular limestone, also Jefferson Co.;
Sandford mine, East Moriah, Essex Co., in magnetite; near Edenville, Orange Co.; at Tilly
Foster iron mine. In Pa., at Leiperville, Delaware Co.; in Chester Co. In N. C., at
Stony Point, Alexander Co., etc. In lavender-colored crystals from Mesa Grande, Cal.
In extensive beds in the Laurentian gneiss of Canada, usually associated with limestone,
and accompanied by pyroxene, amphibole, titanite, zircon, garnet, vesuvianite and many
other species. Prominent mines are in Ottawa County, Quebec, in the townships of Buck-
ingham, Templeton, Portland, Hull, and Wakefield. Also in Renfrew county, Ontario,
and in Lanark, Leeds, and Frontenac counties.
Apatite was named by Werner from diraTaew, to deceive, older mineralogists having
referred it to aquamarine, chrysolite, amethyst, fluorite, tourmaline, etc.
Besides the definite mineral phosphates, including normal apatite, phosphorite, etc.,
there are also extensive deposits of amorphous phosphates, consisting largely of "bone
phosphate" (CasPjOs), of great economic importance, though not having a definite chemi-
cal composition, and hence not strictly belonging to pure mineralogy. Here belong the
phosphatic nodules, coprolites, bone beds, guano, etc. Extensive phosphatic deposits also
occur in North Carolina, Alabama, Florida, Tennessee, and in the western states, Idaho,
Utah, and Wyoming. Guano is bone phosphate of lime, mixed with the hydrous phos-
phates, and generally with some calcium carbonate, and often a little magnesia, alumina,
iron, silica, gypsum, and other impurities.
Use. Apatite and phosphate rock are used chiefly as sources of mineral fertilizers.
Some clear finely colored varieties of apatite may be used as gem stones. The mineral is
too soft, however, to permit of extensive use for this purpose.
STAFFELITE. A Occurs incrusting the phosphorite of
carbonated calcium phosphate.
Staffel, stalactitic masses, fibrous and radiating; it is the result
Germany, in botryoidal or
of the action of carbonated waters. H. =4. G. = 3 '128. Color leek- to dark green,
greenish yellow. Dahllite, from Bamle, Norway, is similar.
Fermorite. A member of the Apatite Group. (Ca,Sr) 4 [Ca(OH,F)][(P,As)O 4 3
]
.
H. = G. = 3-52. Color pale pinkish white to white.

5. Uniaxial,
-. Index = 1'66.
Found with manganese ores at Sitapar, Chhindwara District, Central provinces, India.
Wilkeite. 3Ca3(PO 4 )o.CaCO 3 .3Ca 3 ((SiO 4 )(SO 4 )].CaO. Probably a member of Apatite
Group. Hexagonal. H. =5. G.
= 3*23. Color pale rose-red, yellow. Optically .
Index, 1-64. Fusible at 5 '5. Dissolves in acids with separation of silica. In crystalline
limestone at Crestmore, Riverside Co., Cal.
PYROMORPHITE. Green Lead Ore.

Hexagonal pyramidal. Axis c = 07362.
Crystals prismatic, often in rounded barrel-shaped forms;
also in branching groups of prismatic crystals in nearly parallel
position, tapering down to a slender point. Often globular,
reniform, and botryoidal or in wart-like shapes, with usually
a subcolumnar structure; also jibrous, and granular.
Cleavage: m
(1010), x (1011) in traces. Fracture subcon-
choidal, uneven. Brittle. H. = 3-5-4. G. = 6-5-7-1 mostly,
when pure; 5-9-6-5, when containing lime. Luster resinous.
Color green, yellow, and brown, of different shades;
sometimes wax-yellow and fine orange-yellow; also grayish
white to milk-white. Streak white, sometimes yellowish.
Subtransparent to subtranslucent. Optically co = 2*050.
. e = 2-042.
Var 1 Ordinary, (a) In crystals as described;

sometimes yellow and in rounded
forms resembling campylite (pseudo-campylite) (6) In acicular and moss-like aggregations.
.
or masses of crystals, having the surface angular, (d) Fibrous,

(c) Concretionary groups
(e) Granular massive. (/) Earthy; incrusting.
2 Polysphcerite. Containing lime; color brown of different shades, yellowish gray,
pale yellow to nearly white; streak white;
G. = 5'89-6'44. Rarely in separate crystals;
from Mies in Bohemia, is a brown
usually in groups, globular, mammillary. Miesite,
variety Nussierite is similar and impure, from Nussiere, near Beaujeu, Prance; color
yellow greenish or grayish; G.
= 5'042. 3. Chromiferous; color brilliant red and orange.
4. Arseniferous; color green to white; G. = 5 '5-6 '6. 5. Pseudomorphous; (a) after
galena; (6) cerussite.
Comp. (PbCl)Pb 4 (PO 4 )3 or also written 3Pb 3 P2 O8.PbCl 2 = Phosphorus

= 100-5, or Lead phosphate
pentoxide 157, lead protoxide 82-2, chlorine 2-6
897, lead chloride 10-3
= 100.
The phosphorus is often replaced by arsenic, and as the amount increases the species
passes into mimetite. Calcium also replaces the lead to a considerable extent.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives a white sublimate of lead chloride. B.B. in the
forceps fuses easily (F.
= T5), coloring the flame bluish green; on charcoal fuses without
reduction to a globule, which on cooling assumes a crystalline polyhedral form, while the
coal is coated white from lead chloride and, nearer the assay, yellow from lead oxide. With
soda on charcoal yields metallic lead; some varieties contain arsenic, and give the odor of
garlic in R.F. on charcoal. Soluble in nitric acid.
Diff. Distinguished by its hexagonal form; high specific gravity; resinous luster;
blowpipe characters.
Obs. Pyromorphite occurs principally in veins, and accompanies other ores of lead.
At Poullaouen and Huelgoet in Brittany, France; at Zschopau and other places in Saxony,
Germany; at Pfibram, Bleistadt, in Bohemia; in fine crystals at Ems, Braubach, in Nassau,
Germany; also at Dernbach in Nassau; in Siberia at Beresov and in the Nerchinsk mining
district; in England, in Cornwall, green and brown; Devon, gray; Derbyshire, green and
yellow; Cumberland, golden yellow in Scotland, Leadhill, red and orange.
;
From Broken
Hill and elsewhere, New South Wales.
In the United States, has been found very fine at Phenixville, Pa. also in Me., at Lubec
;
and Lenox; in N. Y., a mile south of Sing Sing; in Davidson Co., N. C., also in Cabarrus
and Caldwell Cos.; from Mullan, Burke, Wardner and Mace, Idaho.
Named from irvp, fire, vop<f>r), form, alluding to the crystalline form the globule assumes
on cooling. This species passes into mimetite.
Use. A minor ore of lead.
MIMETITE.
Habit of crystals like pyromorphite; sometimes rounded to globular forms.
Also in mammillary crusts.
Cleavage: x (1011) imperfect. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 3-5.
G. = 7-0-7-25. Luster resinous. Color pale yellow, passing into brown;
orange-yellow; white or colorless. Streak white or nearly so. Sub trans-
parent to translucent. Optically, co = 2-135. = 2-118.
Var - 1- Ordinary, (a) In crystals, usually in rounded aggregates. (6) Capillary or
filamentous, especially marked in a variety from St. Prix-sous-Beuvray, France; somewhat
like asbestus, and straw-yellow in color, (c) Concretionary.
Campylite, from Drygill in Cumberland, England, has G. = 7*218, and is in barrel-
shaped crystals (whence the name, from K anirv\os, curved), yellowish to brown and brown-
ish red; contains 3 p. c. P2 O 6 .
Comp. (PbCl)Pb 4 (AsO 4 ) 3 also written 3Pb 3 As 2 8 .PbCl 2 = Arsenic

;
pentoxide 23'2, lead protoxide 74-9, chlorine 2-4 = 100'5, or Lead arsenate
90-7, lead chloride 9-3 = 100.
Phosphorus replaces the arsenic in part, and calcium the lead. Endlichite
(p. 599) is intermediate between mimetite and vanadinite.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube like pyromorphite. B.B. fuses at

1, and on charcoal
gives m R.F. an arsenical odor, and is easily reduced to metallic
lead, coating the coal at
first with lead chloride, and later with arsenic trioxide and lead oxide.
Soluble in nitric
acid.
Obs. Occurs in England near Redruth and elsewhere in
Cornwall; Beer Alston Dev-
onshire; in Cumberland; in France near Pontgibaud, Puy-de-D6me; in Germany at
Johanngeorgenstadt, m
fine yellow crystals, at
Zinnwald; at Nerchinsk, Siberia; Langban,
Sweden; from Santa Eulalia, Chihuahua, Mexico; at the Brookdale mine Phenixville Pa
Eureka, Utah.
Named from /it/z^r^s, imitator, it closely resembling pyromorphite.
Use. A minor ore of lead.
VANADINITE.
Crystals prismatic, with smooth faces and sharp edges; sometimes cavern-
ous, the crystals hollow prisms; also in rounded forms and in parallel group-
ings like pyromorphite. In implanted globules or incrustations.
Fracture uneven, or flat conchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 275-3. G. '= 6'66- 982
7'10. Luster of surface of fracture
resinous. Color deep ruby-red, light
brownish yellow, straw-yellow, reddish
brown. Streak white or yellowish.
Subtranslucent to opaque. Opti-
= = m
cally -. co 2-354. e 2-299.
- -
Comp.. (PbCl)Pb 4 (V0 4 ) 3 ,
also
written 3Pb 3 V2 O 8 .PbCl2 = Vanadium
pentoxide 19-4, lead protoxide 78-7,
chlorine 2-5 = 100*6, or Lead vanadate
90-2, lead chloride 9-8 = 100.
Phosphorus is sparingly present, also sometimes arsenic, both* replacing
vanadium. In endlichite the ratio of As = 1 1 nearly.
V : :
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates and yields a faint white sublimate. B.B.
fuses easily, and on charcoal to a black lustrous mass, which in R.F. yields metallic lead
and a coating of lead chloride; after completely oxidizing the lead in O.F. the black residue
gives with salt of phosphorus an emerald-green bead in R.F., which becomes light yellow
in O.F. Decomposed by hydrochloric acid.
Obs. First discovered at Zimapan in Mexico. Later obtained at Wanlockhead in
Dumfriesshire, Scotland; also at Berezov in the Ural Mts., with pyromorphite; and near
Kappel in Carinthia, in crystals; at Undenas, Bolet, Sweden. In the Sierra de Cordoba,
Argentine Republic.
In the United States, sparingly near Sing Sing, N. Y. Abundant in the mining regions
of Arizona and New Mexico, often associated with wulfenite and descloizite; in Ariz., at
the mines in Yuma Co., in brilliant deep red crystals; Vulture, Phoenix, etc., in Maricopa
Co.; the Mammoth gold mine, near Oracle, Pinal Co.; from Yavapai Co. In N. M. at
Lake Valley, Sierra Co. (endlichite); and the Mimbres mines near Georgetown; Hillsboro;
Magdalena.
Use. A source of vanadium and a minor ore of lead.
HEDYPHANE. From Langban, Sweden; has ordinarily been included as a calcium
variety of mimetite. Massive, cleavable. Color yellowish white. From Harstig mine,
Pajsberg, Sweden.
Svabite. A calcium arsenate, related to the species of the Apatite Group. Crystals
hexagonal prisms; colorless; c = 07143. H. =5. G. = 3 -52. From the Harstig mine,
Pajsberg, and near Nordmark, Sweden.
6QO DESCRIPTIVE MINERALOGY
Wagnerite Group. Monoclinic

a :b : c ft
Wagnerite (MgF)MgP0 4
1'9145 : 1 :
1'5059; 71 53'
=
(RF)RP0 R = Fe Mn =2 1, 1 1, etc.
4, : : :
Triplite
Triploidite ROH)RP0 R = Mn Fe 3 1 T8572 1
4, : : : :
1*4925; 71 46'
AdSlte (MgOH)CaAs0 2'1978 1
4
: :
1-5642; 73 15'
Tilasite (MgF)CaAs0 4
Sarkinite (MnOH)MnAsO 4 2'0017 : 1 : 1 5154; 62 13*'

iron and manganese
Phosphates (and arsenates) of magnesium (calcium),
containing fluorine (also hydroxyl). Formula 2 FPO 4 or (RF)RPO 4 etc. R ,
WAGNERITE.
Monoclinic. Axes, see above. Crystals sometimes large and coarse. Also
massive.
Cleavage: a (100), m
(110) imperfect; c (001) in traces. Fracture uneven
and splintery. H. = 5-5*5.
Brittle. G. = 3*07-3' 14. Luster vitreous.
Streak white. Color yellow, of different shades; often grayish, also flesh-red,
greenish. Translucent. Optically +. 2V = 26 (approx.). a = 1*569.
ft
= 1'570. 7 = 1*582.
A
fluo-phosphate of magnesium, 4 or 3 P2 (MgF)MgPO Mg
Comp. 8 .
MgF 2
= Phosphorus pentoxide 43 '8, magnesia 49*3, fluorine 11*8 = 104*9,
deduct (O = 2F) 4'9 = 100. A
little calcium replaces part of the magnesium.
Pyr., etc. B.B. in the forceps fuses at 4 to a greenish gray glass; moistened with
sulphuric acid colors the flame bluish green. With borax reacts for iron. On fusion with
soda effervesces, but is not completely dissolved; gives a faint manganese reaction. Re-
acts for fluorine. Soluble in nitric and hydrochloric acids. With sulphuric acid evolves
fumes of hydrofluoric acid.
Obs. Wagnerite (in small highly modified crystals) occurs in the valley of Hollen-
graben, near Werfen, in Salzburg, Austria. Kjerulfine (massive, cleavable; also in coarse
crystals) is from Kjorrestad, near Bamle, Norway. ,
Spodiosite. A calcium fluo-phosphate, perhaps (CaF)CaPO 4 In flattened prismatic .
orthorhombic crystals. G. = 2 '94. Color ash-gray. From the Krangrufva, Wermland,

and Nordmark, Sweden.
TRIPLITE.
Monoclinic. Massive, imperfectly crystalline. Cleavage: unequal in
two directions perpendicular to each other, one much the more distinct. Frac-
ture small conchoidal. H. = 4-5 -5. G. = 3'44-3'S. Luster resinous, inclin-
ing to adamantine. Color brown or blackish brown. Streak yellowish gray
or brown. Subtranslucent to opaque. Optically +. Mean index from 1 66-
1-68.
.
Comp. (RF)RP0 4 or RP 3 2 8 .RF2 with R = Fe and Mn, also Ca and
Mg. The ratio varies widely from Fe : Mn = 1 1 to 2 1 : :
(zwieselite) :
1:2; 1:7.
Talktriplite is a variety from Horrsjoberg, Sweden; contains magnesium and calcium
in large amount.
Pyr. ? etc. B.B. fuses easily at 1*5 to a black magnetic globule; moistened with
sulphuric acid colors the flame bluish green. With borax in O.F. gives an amethystine-
colored glass (manganese) in R.F. a reaction for iron. With soda reacts for man-
; strong
ganese. With sulphuric acid evolves hydrofluoric acid. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
~~
D UMI by Alluaud at Limoges in France; Helsingfors, Finland; Stoneham,
Me.; Branchville, Conn.; from Reagan mining district, White Pine Co., Nev. Zwieselite,
a clove-brown variety, is from
Rabenstein, near Zwiesel in Bavaria.
GRIPHITE. A problematical phosphate related to
triplite occurring in embedded reni-
form masses. From the Riverton lode near
Harney City, Pennington Co., S. D.
II
PHOSPHOFERRITE. H 6 R9(PO 4 ) 3 R = Fe, Mn,Ca, Mg. Columnar. White to yellow or
:
pale green. H. = 4-5. G. = 3' 16. Habendorf, Bavaria.

Triploidite. Like triplite, but with the F replaced by (OH). Monoclinic. Commonly
in crystalline aggregates. Fibrous to columnar. H. = 4'5-5. G. = 3*697. Color yel-
lowish to reddish brown. Optically + = 1726. From Branchville, Fair-field Co.,
.
Conn.
Adelite. (MgOH)CaAsO 4 Monoclinic.
.
Axes, see p. 600; also massive. H. = 5.
G. = 374. Color gray or grayish yellow. Optically +. Mean index, 1 '67. From Nord-
mark and Langban, Sweden.
Tilasite. Like adelite, but contains fluorine. Monoclinic. Optically /3
= 1*660.
.
From Langban, Sweden, and Kajlidongri, Jhabua, India.

(MnOH)MnAsO 4
Sarkinite. In monoclinic crystals; also in spherical forms.
.
G. =
4 '17. Color rose-red, flesh-red, reddish yellow. From the iron-manganese mines
of Pajsberg, Sweden. Polyarsenite and Xantharsenite from the Sjo mine, Grythytte
parish, Orebro, Sweden, and Chondrasenite from Pajsberg, Sweden, are essentially the
same.
Trigonite. Pb 3 MnH(AsO 3 )3. Monoclinic-clinohedral. In small wedge-shaped crystals.
H. = 2-3. Perfect cleavage || (010). Color sulphur-yellow, a. = 2*08. 7 = 216. Ax. pi.
| j (010) . From Langban, Sweden.
A fluo-phpsphate of beryllium and calcium, Ca[Be(F,OH)]PO4. In pris-
Herderite.
matic crystals, monoclinic with complex twinning. H. =5. G. = 2 '99-3 *01. Luster
vitreous. Color yellowish and greenish white. Optically, ft = T612. From the tin
mines of Ehrenfriedersdorf, Saxony; from Epprechtstein, Bavaria; also at Stoneham,
Auburn, Hebron, and Paris, Me.
Hamlinite. A basic phosphate of aluminium, and strontium. In colorless rhombo-
hedral crystals. H. = 4 '5. G. = 3* 16-3 '28. Optically +. o> = 1*620. Occurs with
herderite, bertrandite, etc., at Stoneham, Me. In the diamond sands of Diamantina,
Brazil. Found also in Binnental, Switzerland (originally thought to be a new species and
named bowmannite) .
Plumbogummite. A basic phosphate of lead and aluminium. In chemical group with

hamlinite. Resembles drops or coatings of gum; as incrustations. Color yellowish, brown-
ish. From Roughten Gill, Cumberland, England. Hitchcockite from Canton mine, Ga., is
closely identical. The material from Huelgoet, Brittany, France, is a mixture.
Florencite. A basic phosphate of aluminium and the cerium metals, closely analogous
to hamlinite to which it is related in form. 3Al 2 O3.Ce2O3.2P2 O6.6H2O. Hexagonal, rhom-
bohedral. Habit rhombohedral. Basal cleavage. H. =5. G. = 3*58. Color pale
yellow. Infusible. Found in sands from near Ouro Preto and Diamantina, Minas
Geraes, Brazil.
Georceixite. A basic phosphate of aluminium and barium (with smaller amounts of
calcium and cerium) BaO.2Al 2 p 3 .P 2 O 5 .5H 2 O. Microcrystalline, in rolled pebbles. H. = 6.
.
G. = 3*1. Color brown and white. Refractive index, 1*63. From the diamond sands of
Minas Geraes, Brazil. Geraesite is similar but more acidic in composition.
Crandallite. O
2CaO.4Al/) 3 .2P 2 5 .10H 2 O. In compact to cleavable masses. Micro-
scopically fibrous. Color white to light gray. Indices, 1-58-1*60. Found at Brooklyn
mine near Silver City, Utah.
Harttite. A basic phosphate and sulphate of aluminium and strontium, (Sr,Ca)O.
2A1 2 O 3 .P 2 O 5 .SO 3 .5H 2 O. Hexagonal. Usually microcrystalline as rolled pebbles.
H. = 4'5-5. G. = 3*2. Color flesh-red. From the diamond sands of Minas Geraes,
Brazil.
Jezekite. fluo-phosphate of lime, soda, and alumina, Na 4 CaAl(AlO)(F,OH) 4 (Pp 4 ) 2

A .
Monoclinic. = 4*5. G. = 2*94. Cleavage perfect (100); imperfect (001). Indices,

H.
1 '55-1 '59. Colorless or white. From Ehrenfriedersdorf, Saxony.
Lacroixite. A fluo-phosphate of soda, lime, manganese oxide, and alumina.
Na 4 (Ca,Mn) 4 Al 3 (F,OH) 4 P 3 Oi 6 .2H 2 O. Probably monoclinic. Pyramidal cleavage.
H. = 4-1. G. = 3*13. Color pale yellow or green. Found at Ehrenfriedersdorf,
Saxony.
Durangite. A fluo-arsenate of sodium and aluminium, Na(AlF)AsO 4 In monoclinic
.
crystals. G. = 3*94-4*07. Color orange-red. Mean index, 1*673. From Durango,

Mexico.
AMBLYGONITE. Hebronite.
Crystals large and coarse; forms rarely

Triclinic. distinct. Usually
cleavable to columnar and compact massive. Polysynthetic twinning lamellae
common.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect, with pearly luster; a_(100) somewhat less so,
vitreous; (021) sometimes equally distinct;

e M
(110) difficult; ca (001) A
(100)
= 75 30', ce (001) (021)
= 74 A 40', (001) (110) = 92 20'.
cM A
Fracture uneven to subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 6. G. = 3'01-3'09.
Luster vitreous to greasy, on c (001) pearly. Color white to pale greenish,
bluish, yellowish, grayish or brownish white. Streak white. Subtrans-
to translucent. Optically -. a = 1'579. = 1*593. 7 = 1'597.
parent
Comp. A fluo-phosphate of aluminium and lithium, Li(AlF)PO 4 or
AlPO4 .LiF = Phosphorus pentoxide 47*9, alumina 34-4, lithia 10-1, fluorine
12-9 = 105-3, deduct (0 = 2F) 5*3 = 100. Sodium often replaces part of the
lithium, and hydroxyl part of the fluorine.
etc. In the closed tube yields water, which at a high heat is acid and corrodes
Pyr.,
the glass. B.B. fuses easily (at 2) with intumescence, and becomes opaque white on cool-
ing. Colors the flame yellowish red with traces of green; the Hebron variety gives an in-
tense lithia-red; moistened with sulphuric acid gives a bluish green to the flame. With
borax and salt of phosphorus forms a transparent colorless glass. In fine powder dissolves
easily in sulphuric acid, more slowly in hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Distinguished by its easy fusibility and by yielding a red flame B.B., from feld-
spar, barite, calcite, etc.; also by the acid water in the tube from spodumene.
Obs. Occurs near Penig in Saxony; Arendal, Norway; Montebras, Creuze, France.
In the United States, in Me., at Hebron; also at Paris, Peru, etc.; Branchville, Conn.,
Pala, San Diego Co., Cal.
The name amblygonite is from anftXls, blunt, and yow, angle.
Fremontite. Natramblygonite. Natromontebrasite. (Na,Li)Al(OH,F)PO 4 Mono- .
clinic. Crystals coarse with rough faces. Three cleavages. Usually in cleavage masses.
Polysynthetic twinning shown under microscope. H. = 5'5. G. = 3 '04. Luster vitreous
to greasy. Color, grayish white to white. Translucent to opaque. Optically. Bisec-
trix nearly normal to basal cleavage. Easily fusible to a white enamel with strong sodium
flame color. From a pegmatite near Canon City, Fremont County, Col.
B. Basic Phosphates
This section includes a series of well-characterized basic

phosphates, a
number of which fall into the Olivinite Group. Acid phosphates are repre-
sented by one species only, the little known
monetite, probably HCaPO 4 ,
see p. b06.
Olivenite Group. Orthorhombic
OUvenite Cu2 (OH)AsO4 0-9396 : 1 : 0-6726

Libethenite Cu2 (OH)PO 4 0-9601 : 1 : 0-7019
Adamite Zn2 (OH)AsO 4 0-9733 : 1 : 0-7158
Descloizite (Pb,Zn) 2 (OH)VO 4
a b c : :
= 0-6368 1
: 0-8045 or fa
:
: b : c = 0-9552 : 1 : 0-8045
Cuprodescloizite (Pb,Zn,Cu) 2 (OH)VO 4
The OLIVENITE GROUP includes several basic phosphates, arsenates,
etc., of
copper, zinc, and lead, with the general formula
1
(ROH)RPO ,(ROH)RAsO 4 4 ,
hey crystallize in the orthorhombic

system with similar form. It is to
* ?roup corres P n ds in a measure to the monoclinic Wagnerite
,
Group, p. 600, which also includes basic members.
OLIVENITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0*9396 : 1 : 0-6726.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 86 26'. ee', Oil A Oil = 67 51'.
w' f
101 A TOl = 71 1U'. ve, 101 A Oil = 47 34'.
Crystals prismatic, often acicular. Also globular and

reniform, indistinctly fibrous, fibers straight and divergent,
rarely irregular; also curved lamellar and granular.
Cleavage: m
(110), 6(010), e (Oil) in traces. Fracture
conchoidal' to uneven. Brittle. H. = 3. G. = 4-1-4-4.
Luster adamantine to vitreous; of some fibrous varieties pearly. \
Color various shades of olive-green, passing into leek-, siskin-,
pistachio-, and blackish green; also liver- and wood-brown;
sometimes straw-yellow and grayish white. Streak olive-green to brown.
Subtransparent to opaque. Mean index, 1-83.
Var. (a) Crystallized, (b) Fibrous; finely and divergently fibrous, of green, yellow,
brown and gray, to white colors, with the surface sometimes velvety or acicular; found
investing the common variety or passing into it; called wood-copper or wood-arsenate.
(c) Earthy; nodular or massive; sometimes soft enough to soil the fingers.
Comp. Cu As2O8Cu(OH)
3 2 or 4CuO.As2O 5 .H 2 = Arsenic pentoxide
407, cupric oxide 56-1, water 3-2 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives water. B.B. fuses at 2, coloring the flame bluish
green, and on cooling the fused mass appears crystalline. B.B. on charcoal fuses with
deflagration, gives off arsenical fumes, and yields a metallic arsenide which with soda yields
a globule of copper. With the fluxes reacts for copper. Soluble in nitric acid.
Obs. The crystallized varieties occur in Cornwall, at various mines; Tavistock, in
Devonshire; in Tyrol, Austria; the Banat, Hungary; Nizhni Tagilsk in the Ural Mts.;
Chile. In the United States, in Utah, at the American Eagle and Mammoth mines, Tintic
district, both in crystals and wood-copper. The name olivenite alludes to the olive-green
color.
LIBETHENITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0-9601 : 1 0-7019.
mm"', 110 A 110 = 87 40'. Ill A 111 = 59 4'.
ee', Oil A Oil = 70 8'. Ill A 111 = 61 47|'.
In crystals usually small, short prismatic in habit often ;
united in druses. Also globular or reniform and compact.

Cleavage: a (100), b (010) very indistinct. Fracture
subconchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 4. G. = 3-6-
3*8. Luster resinous. Color olive-green, generally dark.
Streak olive-green. Translucent to subtranslucent. Mean
index, 1'72.
Comp. Cu3 P2 O8 .Cu(OH) 2 or 4CuO.P2 O 5 .H2 O =
Phosphorus pentoxide 29'8, cupric oxide 66*4, water
3'8 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water and turns black, B.B. fuses at 2 and colors
the flame emerald-green. On charcoal with soda gives metallic copper, sometimes also an
arsenical odor. Fused with metallic lead on charcoal is reduced to metallic copper, with
the formation of lead phosphate, which treated in R.F. gives a crystalline polyhedral bead
on cooling. With the fluxes reacts for copper. Soluble in nitric acid.
Obs. Occurs with chalcopyrite at Libethen, near Neusohl, Hungary; at Rhein-
breitenbach and Ehl on the Rhine, Germany; at Nizhni Tagilsk in the Ural Mts.; from
Viel-Salm, Belgium; in small quantities in Cornwall, England. In Clifton-Morenci dis-
trict, Ariz.
Tarbuttite, Zn 3 P2 8 O Zn(OH)
2 Triclinic. Crystals striated and rounded, frequently
.
in sheaf-like aggregates. Perfect basal cleavage. H. = 37. G. = 4'1. Colorless to pale

yellow, brown, red, or green.
Fusible. From Broken Hill, N. W. Rhodesia.
Adamite. Zn 3 As->O 8 .Zn(OH) 2 In small orthorhombic crystals, often grouped in crusts
.
and granular aggregations. H. = 3'5. G. = 4'34-4'35. Color honey-yellow, violet, rose-

red, green, colorless. Mean index, 173. From Chanarcillo, Chile; Cap Garonne, France;
from Mte. Valerio, Campiglia Marittima, Italy; at the ancient zinc mines of Laurion,
Greece. From Island of Thasos, Turkey. Varieties from Cap Garonne, Var, France, con-
cobaltoadamiie and cuproadamite.
taining cobalt and copper have been called
Descloizite. 2 V 2 O 8 .R(OH) 2 or 4RO.V 2 O 6
R .H 2 O; = Pb, Zn chiefly, and usually in R
the ratio 1 1 approx. In small orthorhombic crystals, often drusy; also massive, fibrous
:
radiated with mammillary surface. H. = 3 '5. G. = 5'9-6'2. Color cherry-red and

brownish red, to light or dark brown, black. Streak orange to brownish red or yellowish
gray. Mean index, 1'83.
From the Sierra de Cordoba, Argentina; Kappel in Carinthia. Abundant at Lake
Valley, Sierra Co., N. M., also near Georgetown and at Magdalena; in Ariz, near Tomb-
stone; in Yavapai Co.; at the Mammoth Gold mine, near Oracle, Final Co.
A massive variety, containing copper (6'5 to 9 p. c.), in crusts, and reniform masses with
radiated structure, occurs in San Luis Potosi, also in a vein of argentiferous galena in
Zacatecas, Mexico; it has been variously named cuprodescloizite, tritochorite, ramirite. A
similar variety (11 p. c. CuO) occurs as an incrustation on quartz at the Lucky Cuss mine,
Tombstone, Cochise Co., and in stalactites at Shattuck Arizona mine, Bisbee, Ariz. From
Camp Signal, San Bernardino Co., Cal.
EUSYNCHITE may be identical with descloizite. Massive: in nodular, stalactitic forms.
G. = 5 '596. Color yellowish red, reddish brown, greenish. From Hofsgrund near Frei-
burg in Baden, Germany. The same may be true of arceoxene from Dahn near Nieder-
Schlettenbach, Rhenish Bavaria, Germany.
Pyrobelonite. 4PbO.7MnO.2V2 O 5 .3H 2 O. Orthorhombic. In small acicular crystals.
Fire-red color. H. = 3'5. G. = 5'377. High index. Probably related crystallographic-
ally to descloizite. From Langban, Sweden.
DECHENITE. Composition usually accepted as PbV 2 O 6 Massive, botryoidal, nodular. .
G. = 5'6-5'81. Color deep red to yellowish red and brownish red. From Nieder-Schlet-
tenbach in the Lautertal, Rhenish Bavaria, Germany.
Calciovolborthite. Probably (Cu,Ca)sVXMChi,Ca)(OH)8 In thin green tables; also .
gray, fine crystalline granular. Mean index, 2 '05. From Friedrichsrode, Thuringia, Ger-
many. Minerals from Richardson, southeastern Utah, and from near Baker City, Oregon,
probably belong here.
Higginsite. CuCa(OH)AsO4 Orthorhombic. Small prismatic crystals. H. = 4'5.
.
G. = 4 '33. n = 1745. Pleochroic, green, yellow-green, blue-green. From

Higgins mine,
Bisbee, Ariz.
Brackebuschite. Near descloizite (monoclinic?). From the State of Cordoba, Ar-
gentina.
TURANITE. A copper vanadate, 5CuO.V2 O 5 .2H 2 O. Radiating fibrous. From Tyuya-
Muyun, south of Andidjan, Alai Mts., Turkestan.
Psittacinite. A
vanadate of lead and copper, from the Silver Star District, In Mon
thin coatings; also pulverulent. Color siskin- to olive-green.
MOTTRAMITE. A
vanadate of lead and copper; possibly identical with
psittacinite;
in velvety black incrustations. From Mottram St. Andrew's, Cheshire, England.
Furnacite. A basic chrom-arsenate of lead In dark olive-green and copper. small
.prismatic crystals. From Djocie, French Equatorial Africa.
Tsumebite. Preslite. A basic lead and copper phosphate. Orthorhombic? In
small tabular crystals. H = 3'5. G. = 6'1. Index, > 178. Coloremerald-green.
Pleochroic, blue-green to yellow-green. From
o. W Alrica.
.
Easily fusible. Tsumeb, Otavi, German
CLINOCLASITE. Aphanese.
3-8507; = 80 30'
Crystals prismatic (TO (110)); also elongated 6 axis; of ten* grouped in
||
nearly spherical forms. Also massive, hemispherical or reniform; structure

radiated fibrous.
Cleavage: c (001) highly perfect. Brittle. H. = 2'5-3. G. = 4'19-4'37.
Luster: c pearly; elsewhere vitreous to resinous. Color internally dark verdi-
gris-green; externally blackish blue-green. Streak bluish green. Subtrans-
parent to translucent.
Comp. Cu3 As2 O 8 .3Cu(OH)2 or 6CuO.As2 O 5 .3H2 = Arsenic pentoxide
30'3, cupric oxide 62'6, water 71
= 100.
Pyr., etc. Same as for olivenite.
Obs. Occurs in Cornwall, with other ores of copper. In Utah, Tintic district, at the
Mammoth mine. From Collahurasi, Tarapaca, Chile. Named in allusion to the basal
cleavage being oblique to the sides of the prism.
Erinite. Cu3As2O8.2Cu(OH) 2 In mammillated crystalline groups.
. Color fine emer-
ald-green. From Cornwall; also the Tintic district, Utah.
Dihydrite. Cu3P2Og.2Cu(OH)2. In dark emerald-green crystals (monoclinic).
H. = 4'5-5. G.= 4-4'4. From Ehl near Linz on the Rhine, Germany the Ural Mts., etc. ;
Pseudomalachite. In part Cu 3 P2O8.3Cu(OH)2. Massive, resembling malachite in

color and structure. Indices, 1*83-1*93. From Rheinbreitenbach, Germany; Nizhni
Tagilsk, Russia, etc. Ehlite is closely allied.
DUFRENITE. Kraurite.
Orthorhombic. Crystals rare, small, and indistinct. Usually massive, in
nodules; radiated fibrous with drusy surface.
Cleavage: a (100), probably also b (010), but indistinct. H. = 3*5-4.
G. = 3'2-3'4. Luster silky, weak. Color dull leek-green, olive-green, or
blackish green; alters on exposure to yellow and brown. Streak siskin-green.
Subtranslucent to nearly opaque. Strongly pleochroic. Indices, 1'83-1'93.
Comp. Doubtful; in part FeP0 4 .Fe(OH) 3 = 2Fe 2 O3.P2O5.3H2 O =
Phosphorus pentoxide 27 -5, iron sesquioxide 62'0, water 10*5 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Same as for vivianite, but less water is given out in the closed tube. B.B.
fuses easily to a slag.
Obs. Occurs near Anglar, Dept. of Haute Vienne, France; in Germany at Hirsch-
berg in Westphalia and from the Rothlaufchen mine near Waldgirmes; St. Benigna,
Bohemia; East Cornwall, England.
In the United States, at Allentown, N. J.; in Rockbridge Co., Va., in radiated coarsely
fibrous masses; from Graf ton, N. H. Dufreniberaunite is a variety intermediate in com-
position between dufrenite and beraunite from Hellertown, Pa.
LAZULITE.
Monoclinic: Axes a : b : c = 0-9750 : 1 1-6483;
= 89 14'.
:_
at, 100 A 101 = 30 24'. ee',Til A 111 = 80 20'. 986

pp
f
,
111 A 111 = 79 40'. pe, 111 A 111 = 82 30'.
Crystals usually acute pyramidal in habit. Also

massive, granular to compact.
Cleavage: prismatic, indistinct. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 5-6. G. = 3-057-3-122. Luster vitreous.
Color azure-blue; commonly a fine deep blue viewed
along one axis, and a pale greenish blue along another.
Streak white. Subtranslucent to opaque. Optically .
2V = 69. = 1-603. = 1'632. 7 = 1-639.

a (3
Comp. RAL(OH) P O 8 or 2AlPO 4 .(Fe,Mg)(OH) 2 with

2 2
Fe Mg(Ca) = 1 12, 1 6, 1 2, 2 3. For 1 2 the for-

: : : : : :
mula requires: Phosphorus pentoxide 45*4, alumina 32*6, iron protoxide 7*7,
magnesia 8'5, water 5*8 100. =
Pyr etc In the closed tube whitens and yields water. In the forceps whitens, cracks
the flame bluish green. B.B.
open swells up, and without fusion falls to pieces, coloring
with cobalt solution the blue color of the mineral is restored. The green color of the flame
is made more intense by moistening the assay
with sulphuric acid. With the fluxes gives an
iron glass; with soda on charcoal an infusible mass. Unacted upon by acids, retaining
perfectly its blue color.
Obs. Occurs near Werfen in Salzburg, Austria; Kneglach, in Styna; also Horrs-
joberg,Sweden; from Madagascar.
Abundant with corundum at Crowder's Mt., Gaston Co., N. C.; and on Graves Mt.,
Lincoln Co., Ga., with cyanite, rutile, etc.
The name lazulite is derived from an Arabic word, azw, meaning heaven, and alludes to
the color of the mineral.
Tavistockite. O
Ca 3 P 2 8 .2Al(OH) 2 In microscopic acicular crystals,
. sometimes stellate
groups. Color white. From Tavistock, Devonshire.
Cirrolite. Perhaps Ca3Al(PO 4 )3.Al(OH) 3 Compact. G. = 3'OS. Color pale yellow.
.
Occurs at the iron mine at Westana, in Scania, Sweden.

Arseniosiderite. Ca3Fe(AsO 4 ) 3 .3Fe(OH) 3 In yellowish brown fibrous concretions.
.
G. = 3'520. Index, 3'83. From Romaneche, near Macon, France; also at Schneeberg,
Saxony.
Allactite. Mn As O
.4Mn(OH) 2 Monoclinic. In small brownish red prismatic crys-
3 2 8 .
stals. Mean From the Moss mine, Nordmark, and at Langban, Sweden.
index, 1786.
Synadelphite. 2(Al,Mn)AsO 4 .5Mn(OH) 2 In prismatic crystals; also in grains. G.=
.
3 '45-3 -50. Color brownish black to black. From the Moss mine, Nordmark, Sweden.
Flinkite. MnAsO 4 .2Mn(OH) 2 In minute orthorhombic crystals, tabular c (001);
.
||
grouped in feather-like aggregates. G. = 3 '87. Color greenish brown. From the Harstig
mine, Pajsberg, Sweden.
Hematolite. Perhaps (Al,Mn)AsO 4 .4Mn(OH) 2 In rhombohedral crystals. G. =
.
3 -30-3 '40. Color brownish red, black on the surface. Mean Index, 1730. From the
Moss mine, Nordmark, Sweden.
Retzian. A basic arsenate of the yttrium earths, manganese and calcium. In ortho-
rhombic crystals. H. =4. G. = 415. Color chocolate- to chestnut-brown. From the
Moss mine, Nordmark, Sweden.
n m ii ni
Arseniopleite. Perhaps RgRÔHÂsOê; = Mn, Ca, also Pb, Mg; R = Mn, R
also Fe. Massive, cleavable. Color brownish red. Occurs at the Sjo mine, Grythytte
parish, Sweden, with rhodonite in crystalline limestone.
Manganostibiite. Hematostibiite. Highly basic manganese antimonates. In em-

bedded grains. Color black. Manganostibiite occurs at Nordmark,
Sweden; hematostibiite
is from the
Sjo mine, Grythytte parish, Sweden.
Atelestite. Basic bismuth arsenate, H 2 Bi 3 AsO8 In minute tabular crystals G =
.
6'4. Color sulphur-yellow. From Schneeberg, Saxony.
C. Normal Hydrous Phosphates, etc.
The only important group among the normal hydrous phosphates is the
monoclinic VIVIANITE GROUP.
Struvite. Hydrous ammonium-magnesium phosphate. In orthorhombic-hemimorphic
P ' 6 r yeUowish; sli 8htl y soluble. Index, 1'502. From
Sanod
Collophanite. Ca P2 O 8 .H 2 O. In layers resembling gymnite or
3
opal. Colorless or
L59 From the island of So mbrero, West Indies.
'
Monile is similar,
r*k i' A
Mona and Mon eta in the West Indies, where it is associated with monetite,
4 occurring in yellowish white triclinic crystals.
Hopeite. zinc phosphate, Zn 3 P 2 O8.4H 2 O.

Hydrous Orthorhombic. In minute pris-
matic crystals. Also in reniform masses. Three cleavages: a (100), perfect; 6 (010), good;
c (001), poor. Crystals from Broken Hill show interbanding of two modifications, a- and
/3-hopeite which have the same composition but differ in their optical characters. H. =
3'2. G. = 3-0-3' 1. Color grayish white. Optically-, ft = 1'59. Found in cavities in
calamine at the zinc mines of Moresnet, Belgium; at the Broken Hill mines, Rhodesia.
Parahopeite. Zn 3 P 2 O 8 .4H 2 O. Same as for hopeite. Triclinic. In tabular crystals
with deep striations. Good cleavage. H. = 37. G. = 3'3. Colorless. Found at
Broken Hill, Rhodesia.
O
Dickinsonite. 3R 3 P2 8 .H 2 O with = Mn, Fe, Na2 chiefly, also Ca, 2 , Li2 In
R K .
tabular, pseudo-rhombohedral crystals; commonly foliated to micaceous. G. = 3 '338-

3-343. Color olive- to oil-green, grass-green. ft = 1-662. From Branchville, Fairneld
Co., Conn.
Fillowite. Formula as for dickinsonite and also from Branchville, Conn., but differing
in angle. In granular crystalline masses. G. = 3'43. Color wax-yellow, yellowish to
reddish brown, colorless. ft
= T672.
The three following triclinic species are related in composition and may be in crystalline
form.
Roselite. (Ca,Co,Mg) 3 As2 O 8 .2H 2 O. In small crystals; often in druses and spherical
aggregates. G. = 3'5-3*6. Color light to dark rose-red. From Schneeberg, Saxony.
Brandtite. Ca 2 MnAs2 Os.2H 2 O. In prismatic crystals; crystals often united in radi-
ated groups. G. = 3'671-3'672. Colorless to white. From the Harstig mine, near Pajs-
berg, Sweden.
Fairfieldite.A hydrous phosphate of calcium and manganese, Ca2MnP2 O8 .2H2 O.
Triclinic. In prismatic crystals; usually in foliated or fibrous crystalline aggregates.
G. =3'07-3'15. Color white or greenish white to pale straw-yellow, ft = T644. From
Branchville, Fairfield Co., Conn.; Rabenstein, Bavaria (leucomanganite) .
Messelite. (Ca,Fe) 3 P2 O 8 .2^H 2 O. In minute tabular crystals. Colorless to brownish.

ft
=
1'653. From near.Messel in Hesse, Germany. Perhaps an alteration of Anapaite
through loss of water.
Anapaite. Tamanite. (Ca,Fe) 3 P2 O 8 .4H 2 O. Triclinic. In tabular crystals. One per-
fect cleavage. H. = 3 '5. G. = 2 '8. Color greenish white. From the limonite mines
near Anapa on the Taman peninsula, Russia.
Reddingite. Mn
3 P 2 O 8 .3H 2 O. In orthorhombic crystals near scorodite in angle; also
granular. G. = 3'102. Color pinkish white to yellowish white. Optically +. ft = 1'656 .
From Branchville, Conn.

Palaite. Hydrous manganese phosphate, 5MnO.2P2 O 6 .4H 2 O. Monoclinic? In crys-
talline masses. G. = 3'2. Color, flesh-pink. Indices 1 '65-1 "66. From Pala, San Diego
Co., Cal. Derived by alteration from lithiophilite and alters into hureaulite.
Stewartite.Hydrous manganese phosphate, 3MnO.P2 O 5 .4H 2 O. Triclinic? In fibers
or minute crystals. G. = 2 '94. Indices, 1 '63-1 '69. Pleochroic, colorless to yellow.
Found as an alteration product of lithiophilite from Pala, Cal.
Picropharmaoolite. R 3 As 2 O 8 .6H 2 O, with R
= Ca Mg = 5 1. In small spherical
: :
forms. Color white. From Riechelsdorf and Freiberg, Germany; Joplin, Mo.
Trichalcite. CusAs^s.SHÔ. In radiated groups, columnar; dendritic. Color verdi-
gris-green. From the Turginsk copper mine near Bogoslovsk, Ural Mts.
Vivianite Group. Monoclinic

Vivianite Fe 3 P 2 O8.8H 2 O a b c = : : 0-7498 : 1 : 0-7015 ft
= 75 34'
Symplesite Fe 3 As 2 8 .8H 2 O 0-7806 : 1 : 0-6812 72 43'

Bobierrite Mg3 P2 O 8 .8H2
Hoernesite Mg3 As2 O 8 .8H 2 O
Erythrite Co 3 As2 O 8 .8H2 O 0-75 : 1 : 0-70 75
Annabergite Ni 3 As2 O 8 .8H 2 O
Cabrerite (Ni,Mg) 3 As2 O 8 .8H 2 O
Kbttigite Zn 3 As2 O 8 .8H 2
The VIVIANITE GROUP includes hydrous phosphates of iron, magnesium,

cobalt, nickel and zinc, all with eight molecules of water. The crystallization
is monoclinic, and the angles, so far as known, correspond closely.
VIVIANITE.
Monoclinic. Crystals prismatic (mm'" 110 A
110 = 71 58'); often in
stellate groups. Also reniform and globular; structure divergent, fibrous, or
earthy; also incrusting.
in traces; also fracture fibrous
Cleavage: b (010) highly perfect; a (100)
_L c axis. Flexible in thin laminae; sectile. H. = 1'5 2. = 2'58 G
nearly
- 2*68. Luster, b (010) pearly or metallic pearly; other faces vitreous.
Colorless when unaltered, blue to green, deepening on exposure. Streak
colorless to bluish white, changing to indigo-blue and to liver-brown.
Transparent to translucent; opaque after exposure. Pleochroism strong;
X= cobalt-blue, Y and Z= pale greenish yellow. Optically -f. a = 1*581.
ft
= 1'604. 7 = 1-636.
Comp. Hydrous ferrous phosphate, Fe3P2 08.8H 2
= Phosphorus pent-
oxide 28'3, iron protoxide 43'0, water 287 = 100.
Many analyses show the presence of iron sesquioxide due to alteration.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields neutral water, whitens, and exfoliates. B.B.
fuses at 1 "5, coloring the flame bluish green, to a grayish black magnetic globule.
.
With
the fluxes reacts for iron. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Occurs associated with pyrrhotite and pyrite in copper and tin veins; some-
times in narrow veins with gold, traversing graywacke; both friable and crystallized in beds
of clay, and sometimes associated with limonite, or bog iron ore; often in cavities of fossils
or buried bones.
Occurs at St. Agnes and elsewhere in Cornwall, England; at Bodenmais, Germany; the
gold mines of Verespatak in Transylvania. From Ashio, Shimotsuke, Japan. A variety
from the Kertsch and Taman peninsulas, South Russia, that contains small quantities of
manganese and magnesium has been called paravivianite. The earthy variety, sometimes
called blue iron-earth or native Prussian blue (Fer azure), occurs in Greenland, Carinthia,
Guatemala, Bolivia, Victoria, Australia, etc.
In North America, in N. J., at Allentown, Monmouth Co., both crystallized, in nodules,
and earthy; at Mullica Hill, Gloucester Co. (mullicite}, in cylindrical masses. In Va., in
Stafford Co. In Ky., near Eddyville. In Col. at Leadville; in Idaho, at Silver City. In
Canada, with limonite at Vaudreuil.
Symplesite. Probably Fe 3 As 2 O 8 .8H 2O. In small prismatic crystals and in radiated
spherical aggregates. G. = 2 '957. Color pale indigo, inclined to celandine-green. From
Lobenstein, Germany; Hiittenberg, Carinthia.
Bobierrite. Mg3P2 O 8 .8H 2 O. In aggregates of minute crystals; also massive. Color-
less to white. From the guano of Mexillones, on the Chilian coast. Hautefeuillite
is like bobierrite, but contains calcium. Monoclinic. Index 1*52. From Bamle,
Norway.
Hoernesite. Mg3As2p8.8H2O. In crystals resembling gypsum; also columnar; stellar-
foliated. Color snow-white. From the Banat, Hungary.
ERYTHRITE. Cobalt bloom.

Monoclinic. Crystals prismatic and vertically striated. Also in
globular
and reniform shapes, having a drusy surface and a columnar
structure; some-
times stellate. Also pulverulent and earthy,
incrusting.
Cleavage:b (010) highly perfect. Sectile. H. = T5-2'5; least on b.
G. = Luster of 6 pearly; other faces adamantine to
2'948.
vitreous; also
dull, earthy. Color crimson- and peach-red, sometimes Streak a little
gray.
paler than the color. Transparent to subtranslucent. Strongly pleochroic.
Optically -. a = 1'626. ft
= 1'661. 7 = 1'699.
Comp. Hydrous cobalt arsenate, Co 3 As208.8H 2 O = Arsenic pentoxide

38*4, cobalt protoxide 37'5, water 24' 1 = 100. The cobalt is sometimes re-
placed by nickel, iron, and calcium.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water at a gentle heat and turns bluish; at a
higher heat gives off arsenic trioxide which condenses in crystals on the cool glass, and the
residue has a dark gray or black color. B.B. in the forceps fuses at 2 to a gray bead, and
colors the flame light blue (arsenic). B.B. on charcoal gives an arsenical odor, and fuses
to a dark gray arsenide, which with borax gives the deep blue color characteristic of cobalt.
Soluble in hydrochloric acid, giving a rose-red solution.
Obs. Occurs at Schneeberg in Saxony, in micaceous scales; Wolfach in Baden;
Modum in Norway. From the Veta Rica mine, Sierra Mojada, Coahuila, Mexico; Chile.
In the United States, in Pa., sparingly near Philadelphia; in Nev., at Lovelock's station.
In Cal. In crystals from Cobalt, Canada. Named from epi>0p6s, red.
Annabergite. NiaAsaOs.SHÔ. Monoclinic. In capillary crystals; also massive and
disseminated. Color fine apple-green. Optically Mean index, 1'68. From Alle- .
mont in Dauphine, France; Annaberg, Schneeberg and Riechelsdorf, Germany; in Col.;

Nev.; Cobalt, Ontario, Canada.
Cabrerite. (Ni,Mg) 3 As2O 8 .8H 2 O. Like erythrite in habit. Also fibrous, radiated;
reniform, granular. Color apple-green. From the Sierra Cabrera, Spain; at Laurion,
Greece.
Kottigite. Hydrous zinc arsenate, ZnsAs2O8.8H2O. Massive, or in crusts. Color
light carmine- and peach-blossom-red. Occurs with smaltite at the cobalt mine Daniel,
near Schneeberg, Germany.
Rhabdophanite. Scovillite. A hydrous phosphate of the cerium and yttrium metals.

Massive, small mamillaryj as an incrustation. G. = 3'94-4'OL Color brown, pinkish or
yellowish white. Rhabdophanite is from Cornwall; Scovillite is from the Scoville (limonite)
ore bed in Salisbury, Conn.
Churchite. A hydrous phosphate of cerium and calcium. As a thin coating of minute
crystals. G. = 3'14. Color pale smoke-gray tinged with flesh-red. From Cornwall, Eng-
land.
Uvanite. 2UO3.3V 2 O 6 .15H 2 O. Orthorhombic. Fine granular. Two pinacoidal cleav-

ages. Color brownish yellow. Indices, 1 '82-2 '06. Found disseminated in rocks near
Temple Rock, 45 miles southwest of Greenriver, Utah.
Ferganite. U3(VO 4 )2.6H 2 O. In scales. Color sulphur-yellow. From province of
Fergana, Russian Turkestan.
Fernandinite. CaO.VÔ^SVaOe.MHaO. Massive. Color dull green. Readily soluble
in acids, partly soluble in water. Found at Minasragra, Peru.
Pascoite. Hydrous calcium vanadate, possibly 2CaO.3V 2 O6.11H2 O. Monoclinic. In
grains. H. = 2'5. G. = 2'46. Color orange. Streak yellow. Indices, 177-1 '83.
Easily fusible. Soluble in water. Found at Minasragra, Province of Pasco, Peru.
Pintadoite. Hydrous calcium vanadate, 2CaO.V2 O 6 .9H2 O. As an efflorescence. Color
green. Found coating surfaces of sandstone in Canyon Pintado, Utah.
SCORODITE. 987
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0*8658 : 1 : 0-9541.

dd', 120 A 120 = 60 1'. .
pp", 111 A 111 = 111 6'.
pp', 111 A 111 = 77 8'. pp'", 111 A 111 = 65 20'.
Habit octahedral, also prismatic. Also earthy, amorphous.

Cleavage: d (120) imperfect; a (100), 6(010) in traces. Frac-
ture uneven. Brittle. H. = 3'5-4. G. = 3'l-3'3. Luster vit-
reous to subadamantine and subresinous. Color pale leek-green
or liver-brown. Streak white. Subtransparent to translucent.
Mean index, 1'84.
Comp. Hydrous ferric arsenate, FeAsO 4 .2H 2 = Arsenic pentoxide
49'8, iron sesquioxide 34'6, water 15'6 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields neutral water and turns yellow. B.B. fuses
easily, coloring the flame blue. B.B. on charcoal gives arsenical fumes, and with soda a
black magnetic scoria. Wit^h the fluxes reacts for iron. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Often associated with arsenopyrite. From Schwarzenberg, Saxony; Dern-
bach, Nassau, Germany; Lolling, Carinthia; Schlaggenwald, Bohemia; Nerchinsk, Siberia,
in fine crystals; leek-green, in the Cornish mines. From Congo Free State. From Obira,
Japan.
Occurs near Edenville, N. Y., with arsenopyrite; in Utah, Tintic district,, at the Mam-
moth mine on enargite. As an incrustation on siliceous sinter of the Yellowstone geysers.
From Cobalt, Ontario, Canada.
Named from anopodov, garlic, alluding to the odor before the blowpipe.
Vilateite. Hydrousiron phosphate with a little manganese. Monoclinic. H. = 3-4.
G. = 275. Color violet. Index, 174. Found in pegmatite at La Vilate near Chante-
loube, Haute Vienne, France.
Purpurite. 2(Fe,Mn)PO 4 .H2 O. Orthorhombic(?). In small irregular masses. Two
cleavages at right angles. H.
= 4-4*5. G. = 3 '4. Color deep red or reddish purple
Refractive index, 1*66-1*65, Fusible. Found at Kings Mt., Gaston Co., N. C., sparingly
from Pala, San Diego Co., Cal., Hill City, S. D., and Branchville, Conn.
Strengite. FePO4.2H 2 O. Crystals rare; in habit and angle near scorodite; generally
in spherical and botryoidal forms. G. = 2 '87. Color pale red. Optically +. = 172'.
From iron mines near Giessen, Germany; also in Rockbridge Co., Va., with dufrenite; irom
Pala, Cal.
Phosphosiderite. 2FePO 4 .3H2 O. An iron phosphate near strengite, but with 3|H 2 O.
Color red. Index 173. From the Siegen mining district, Germany; from Sardinia.
Barrandite. (Al,Fe)PO 4 .2H2 O. In spheroidal concretions, color pale shades of
gray.
Index, 1-57. From Bohemia.
Variscite. A1PO 4 .2H2 O. Orthorhombic. Commonly in crystalline aggregates and
incrustations with reniform surface. Color green. Optically -. = 1'556. Strongly
pleochroic. From Messbach in Saxon Voigtland; Montgomery Co., Ark., on quartz in
nodular masses from Tooele Co., Utah (Utahlite); crystalized from
Lucin, Utah.
Lucinite. Comp. same as for varisdte, A1PO 4 .2H 2 O. Orthorhombic. Octahedral
habit. Also compact, massive. H. = 5. G. = 2*52. Color green. Indices, 1 -56-1 '59
Found with varisdte at Utahlite Hill, near Lucin, Boxelder Co., Utah.
Callainite. A1PO 4 .2H2 O. Massive; wax-like. Color apple- to emerald-green
a Celtic grave in Lockmariaquer, Brittany.
From
Zepharovichite. A1PO 4 .3H2 O. Crystalline to compact. Color yellowish or grayish
white. From Trenic in Bohemia.
Palmerite. HK
2 A1 2 (PO 4 ) 3 .7H 2 O.
Amorphous, pulverulent. Color white. Occurs as
a stratum in a guano deposit on Mte. Alburno,
Salerno, Italy.
A hydrous phosphate of
Rosieresite. aluminium with lead and copper. In stalao-
68
^
G J = 2 2 C.olor yellow to brown.
'
'
Index, 1*5. Found
^ ^^
u Isotropic. Infusible. in
abandoned copper mine at
yelbwm
5 rite
R^Su
Rosieres, Tarn, France.
******* f ^^ needles ' Color
wÂ ^ hydrous iron-manganese phosphate with lithia, Fe 2 O 3 .6MnO.4P2 O 6

3>rr
Li,H) 2 0.
;
G. = 3*45.
flamf Trom
In cleavable masses.
piTaCai
ange "red
^ Color dark brown. Indices, 171-175
perpendicular to cleava S e
'
Fusibl e> giving lithium
-
SaLmonsite. A hydrous iron-manganese phosphate, Fe2 O 3 .9MnO.4P2 O 5 14H,O Cleav-

COl0rbUff '
^4,1-65-1.67. Fou^d
Acid Hydrous Phosphates, etc.

PHARMACOLITE.
" C mmonly in delicate si
Cleavage: 6 (010) perfect. Fracture uneven. Flexible in thin laminse.

H. = G. = 2'64-273. Luster vitreous; on 6 (010) inclining to pearly.

2-2;5.
Color white or grayish; frequently tinged red. Streak white. Translucent
to opaque. Optically -. a = 1'583. = 1'589. 7 = 1'594.
Comp. Probably HCaAsO 4 .2H 2 O = Arsenic pentoxide 53*3, lime 25'9,
water 20'8 = 100.
Obs. Found with arsenical ores of cobalt and silver, also with arsenopyrite; at
Andreasberg in the Harz Mts., Germany; Riechelsdorf in Hesse, Germany; Joachimstal in
Bohemia, Markirch, Alsace, etc. Named from âp/za/cop, poison.
Haidingerite. HCaAsO 4 .H 2 O. In minute crystal aggregates, botryoidal and drusy.
G. = 2 -848. Color white. Index, 1 '67. From Joachimstal, Bohemia, with pharmacolite.
Wapplerite. HCaAsO 4 .3H 2 O. In minute crystals; also in incrustations. Colorless
to white. Found with pharmacolite at Joachimstal, Bohemia.
Brushite. HCaPO 4 .2H 2 O. In small slender monoclinic prisms: concretionary massive.
Colorless to pale yellowish. = 1*545. Occurs in guano. Metabrushite, similarly asso-
ciated, is 2HCaPO4.3H 2 O. Stoffertite is a mineral similar to brushite but said to contain a
little more water. From guano deposits on the island of Mona, West Indies.
Martinite. H Ca5(PO4)4.|H O.
2 2 From phosphorite deposits (from guano) in the island
of Curacoa, West Indies.
Hewettite. CaO.3V 2 O 5 .9H 2 O. In microscopic needles. G. = 2'5-2'6. Color deep
red. Pleochroic, light orange-yellow to red. On heating loses water changing color through
shades of brown to a bronze. Easily fusible. Found as an alteration of patronite at Minas-
ragra, Peru. Also observed from Paradox Valley, Col.
Metahewettite. Comp. same as for hewetlite. In minute tabular orthorhombic crys-
tals. On heating loses water changing from dark red to yellow-brown. From Paradox
Valley, Col., and at Thompson's, Utah.
Newberyite. HMgPO4.3H2 O. In white orthorhombic crystals. Index, 1'52. From
guano of Skipton Caves, Victoria. Hannayite, from same locality, is a hydrous phosphate
of ammonium and magnesium. Schertelite, Mg(NH 4 ) 2 H 2 (PO 4 ) 2 .4H 2 O. Occurs in small
tabular crystals in hot guano deposits near Skipton, southwest of Ballarat, Australia.
Stercorite. Microcosmic salt. HNa(NH4 )PO 4 .4H2 O. In white crystalline masses and
nodules in guano.
Hureaulite. H
2 Mn6(PO 4 ) 4 .4H 2 O. In short prismatic crystals (monoclinic). Also
massive, compact, or imperfectly fibrous. Color yellowish, orange-red, rose, grayish.
Optically .
(3
= T654. From Limoges, commune of Bureaux, France. In the United
States, at Branchville, Conn.; Pala, Cal.
Forbesite. H
2 (Ni,Co) 2 As 2 O 8 .SH 2 O. Structure fibro-crystalline. Color grayish white.
From Atacama, Chile.
FERRAZITE. 3(Ba,Pb)O.2P2 O 6 .8H2 O. A "fava" found in the diamond sands of Brazil.
Color dark yellowish white. G. = 3 '0-3 '3.
Basic Hydrous Phosphates, etc.

Isoclasite. Ca 3 P2 O 8 .Ca(OH) 2 .4H2 O. In minute white crystals; also columnar. From
Joachimstal, Bohemia.
Hemafibrite. Mn
3 As 2 O8.3Mn(OH) 2 .2H2 O. Commonly in spherical radiated groups.
Color brownish red to garnet-red, becoming black. From the Moss mine, Nordmark,
Sweden.
EUCHROITE.
Orthorhombic. Habit prismatic mm'" 110 A 110 = 62 40'. Cleavage:
m (110), n (Oil) in traces. Fracture small conchoidal to uneven. Rather
brittle. H. = 3 -5-4. G. = 3-389. Luster vitreous. Color bright emerald-
or leek-green. Transparent to translucent. Mean index, 1-70.
Comp. Cu As2Os.Cu(OH)2.6H O =
3 2 Arsenic pentoxide 34'2, cupric
oxide 47-1, water 187 = 100.
Obs. Occurs in quartzose mica slate at Libethen in Hungary, in crystals of consider-
able size, having much resemblance to dioptase. Named from evxpoa, beautiful color.
Conichalcite. Perhaps (Cu,Ca) 3 As2 O8.(Cu,Ca)(OH)2.|H 2 O. Orthorhombic. Usually

reniform and massive, resembling malachite. Color pistachio-green to emerald-green
From Andalusia, Spain; Maya-Tass, Akmolinsk, Siberia (crystals); Tintic district, Utah.
(Pb,Cu)3As2O8.(Pb,Cu)(OH)2.H 2 O. In mamillary concretions, drusy.

Bayldonite.
Color green. From Cornwall, England.
Tagilite. Cu 3 P2O8.Cu(OH)2.2H 2.O. In reniform or spheroidal concretions; earthy.
Color verdigris- to emerald-green. From the Ural Mts.
Leucochalcite. Probably Cu3As2 O 8 .Cu(OH)2.2H 2 O. In white, silky acicular crystals.
From the Wilhelmine mine in the Spessart, Germany.
Barthite. 3ZnO.CuO.3As2 O 6 .2H 2 O. In small monoclinic (?) crystals. H. = 3.
G. = 419. Color grass-green. Found in druses of a dolomite at Guchab, Otavi, German
Southwest Africa.
Volbprthite.
A hydrous vanadate of copper, barium, and calcium. In small six-sided
tables; in globular forms. Color olive-green, citron-yellow. Index, 1 '90. From the Ural
.
Mts.
Hiigelite. A
hydrous lead-zinc vanadate. Monoclinic. In microscopic hair-like
crystals. Color orange-yellow to yellow-brown. From Reichenbach near Lahr, Baden,
Germany.
Cornwallite. Cu 3 As2O8.2Cu(OH)2.H O. 2 Massive, resembling malachite. Color emer-
ald-green. From Cornwall; England.
Tyrolite. Tirolit. O
Perhaps Cu 3 As2 8 .2Cu(OH) 2 .7H 2 O. Usually in fan-shaped crystal-
line groups; in foliated aggregates; also massive. Cleavage perfect, yielding soft thin
flexible laminae. Color pale green inclining to sky-blue. Index, T70. From Libethen,
Hungary; Nerchinsk, Siberia; Falkenstein, Tyrol; etc. In the United States, in the Tin-
tic district, "Utah. Some analyses yield 3 CaCO
usually regarded as an impurity, but it
,
may be essential.
Spencerite. Zn 3 (PO 4 )2.Zn(OH) 2 .3H 2 p. Monoclinic. In radiating and reticulated
crystals. Cleavages parallel to three pinacoids. Color white. G. = 3*12. H. = 2*7.
= 1-61. Optically -. From Hudson Bay Mine, Salmo, B. C.
Hibbenite. 2Zn 3 (PO 4 ) 2 .Zn(OH) 2 .6fH 2 O. Orthorhombic. Tabular parallel to a (100).
Cleavages parallel to three pinacoids. Color white. G. = 3 '21. H. = 3 7. Optically .
From Hudson Bay Mine, Salmo, British Columbia.
CHALCOPHYLLITE.
Rhombohedral. Axis c = 2761. cr 0001 A 1011 = 72 2'.
In tabular crystals; also foliated massive; in
druses.
Cleavage: c (0001)
highly perfect; r (lOll) in
traces. H. =
2'4-2'66.
2. G. =
Luster of c pearly;
______^__ of other faces vitreous or subadamantine. Color
emerald- or grass-green to verdigris-green. Streak
somewhat paler than the color. Transparent to translucent. Opticallv -
1-632. = 1-575.
( I lp " A highly basic arsenate of copper; formula uncertain, perhaps
??
uO. 7"
!
As2O5. 14H20.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates,
-
yields much water, and gives a residue of

olive-green scales. In other respects like olivenite. Soluble in nitric
acid, and in ammonia.
Ubs. *rom the copper mines near Redruth in
Cornwall; at Sayda, Saxony; Moldawa
gary; from ChUe In the United States, in the Tintic
-
Bisbi Ariz district, Utah;
Veszelyite. A
hydrous phospho-arsenate of copper and zinc, formula uncertain.
a greenish blue crystalline incrustation at
Morawitza, in the Banat, Hungary.
WAVELLITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c = 0*5049 1 0-3751.
Crystals rare Usu-
: : : :
hemispherical or S lobul ar with crystalline surface, and

Cleavage: p (101) and b (010) rather perfect. Fracture uneven to sub-

conchoidal. Brittle. H. = 3-25-4. G. = 2-316-2-337. Luster vitreous,
inclining to pearly and resinous. Color white, passing into yellow, green'
gray, brown, and black. Streak white. Translucent. Mean index, T526
Comp. 4A1PO 4 .2A1(OH) 3 .9H 2 O = Phosphorus pentoxide 35'2, alu-
mina 38'0, water 26-8 = 100. Fluorine is sometimes present, up to 2 p. c.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives off much water, the last portions of which
react acid (fluorine).
may
B.B. in the forceps swells up and splits into fine infusible particles
coloring the flame pale green. Gives a blue on ignition with cobalt solution. Soluble in
hydrochloric acid, and also in caustic potash.
Obs. From Barnstaple in Devonshire, England; at Zbirow in Bohemia: at Franken-
berg, Saxony; Arbrefontaine, Belgium; Montebras, France; Minas Geraes, Brazil, etc.
In the United States at the slate quarries of York Co., Pa.; White Horse Station Ches-
ter Valley R. R., Pa.; Magnet Cove, Ark.
Fischerite. AlPO 4 .Al(OH) 3 .2^H 2 p. In small prismatic crystals and in drusy crusts.
Color green. Index, 1'55. From Nizhni Tagilsk in the Ural Mts.
Peganite. A1(PO 4 ).A1(OH)3.UH 2 O. Occurs in green crusts, of small prismatic crys-
tals, at Striegis, near Freiberg, Saxony.
TURQUOIS. Turquoise.
Crystals minute and in angle near those of chakosiderite with

Triclinic.
which it may be isomorphous. Usually massive; amorphous or cryptocrystal-
line. Reniform, stalactitic, or incrusting. In thin seams and disseminated
grains. Also in rolled masses.
Cleavage in two directions in crystals none in massive material. Fracture
;
small conchoidal. Rather brittle. H. = 5-6. G. = 2-6-2-83. Luster some-

what waxy, feeble. Color sky-blue, bluish green to apple-green, and greenish
gray. Streak white or greenish. Feebly subtranslucent to opaque. Opti-
cally + .a = 1-61. j8 = 1-62. 7 = 1-65.
Comp. A hydrous phosphate of aluminium and copper CuO.3Al2 3 .
2P 2 5 .9H 2 O or perhaps H
6 (CuOH)[Al(OH) 2 6 (PO 4 )4
= Phosphorus pentox-
]
ide 34-12, alumina 36-84, cupric oxide 9-57, water 19-47 = 100.
Penfield considers that the H,(CuOH) and A1(OH) 2 mutually replace each other in the
orthophosphoric molecule.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube decrepitates, yields water, and turns brown or black.
B.B. in the forceps becomes brown and assumes a glassy appearance, but does not fuse;
colors the flame green; moistened with hydrochloric acid the color' is at first blue (copper
chloride). With the fluxes reacts for copper. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Obs. The highly prized oriental turquois occurs in narrow seams (2 to 4 or even 6 mm.
in thickness) or in irregular patches in the brecciated portions of a porphyritic trachyte
and the surrounding clay slate in Persia, not far from Nishapur, Khorassan; in the Megara
Valley, Sinai; in the Kara-Tube Mts. in Turkestan, 50 versts from Samarkand.
In the United States, occurs in the Los Cerillos Mts., 20 m. S.E. of Santa Fe, New
Mexico, in a trachytic rock, a locality long mined by the Mexicans and in recent years re-
opened and extensively worked; in the Burro Mts., Grant Co., N. M.; pale green variety
near Columbus, and in Lincoln Co., Nevada. In crystals near Lynch Station, Campbell
Co., Va.
Natural turquois of inferior color is often artificially treated to give it the tint desired.
Mor-ovrr, many ctcncs vrhich are of a fine blue when first found retain the color only so
long as they arc kept moist, and when dry they fade, become a dirty green, and are of littlo
value. Much of the turquois (not artificial) used in jewelry in former centuries, as well
as the present, and that described in the early works on minerals, was bone-turquois (called
also odontolite, from o*oy~, tooth), which is fossil bone, or tooth, colored by a phosphate of
iron. Its organic origin becomes manifest under a microscope. Moreover, true turquois.
when decomposed by hydrochloric acid, gives a fine blue color with ammonia, which is not
true of the odontolite.
Use. As an ornamental material.
Wardite. 2A1 2 O3.P2 O6.4H 2 O. Forms light green or bluish green concretionary incrus-
from Cedar Valley, Utah. H. = 5.
tations in cavities of nodular masses of variscite
G. = 277.
In globular drusy concretions. Color light
Sphserite. Perhaps 4A1PO 4 .6A1(OH) 3.
gray, bluish. From near St. Benigna, Bohemia.

Liskeardite. (Al,Fe)AsO4.2(Al,Fe)(OH)3.5H2 O. In thin incrusting layers, white or
bluish. From Liskeard, Cornwall, England.
Evansite. 2A1PO 4 .4A1(OH) 3 .12H 2 O. Massive; reniform or botryoidal. Colorless, or
milk-white, n - 1'485. From Zsetcznik, Hungary; Gross-Tresny, Moravia; Tasmania;
Coosa coalfield, Ala.; Goldburg, Idaho.
CCERULEOLACTITE. Perhaps 3A12 O 3 .2P2 O 6 .10H 2 O. Crypto-crystalline; milk-white to
light copper-blue. From near Katzenellnbogen, Nassau, Germany; also East Whiteland
Township, Chester Co., Pa.
Augelite. 2A12 O3.P2 O 5 .3H 2O. In tabular monoclinic crystals and massive. G. = 27.
Colorless to white. Optically +.
= T576. From Bolivia; from the iron mine of
Westana, Sweden. The same locality has also yielded the three following aluminium
phosphates.
BERLINITE. 2A12O 3 .2P2 O 5 .H2 0. Compact, massive. G. = 2 '64. Colorless to grayish
or rose-red.
TROLLEITE. 4Al2O3.3P2 06.3H 2O. Compact, indistinctly cleavable. G. = 310. Color
pale green.
ATTACOLITE. P2O 5 ,Al2 3 ,MnO,CaO,H2O, etc.; formula doubtful. Massive. G.=3'09.
Color salmon-red.
MINASITE. An aluminium phosphate. In rolled pebbles from Brazil.
VASHEGYITE. 4A1 2 3 .3P 2 6 .30H 2 0. Massive. H.= 2-3. G. = 1'96. Color white
or yellow to rust-brown when colored by iron oxide. From iron mine at Vashegy in Comi-
tat Gomor, Hungary.
Soumansite. A fluo-phosphate of aluminium and sodium with water. Tetragonal.
Pyramidal habit. H. = 4'5. G. = 287. Colorless. Indices, 1 '55-1 '56. Optically +.
Fusible with intumescence. From Montebras in Soumans, Creuse, France.
PHARMACOSIDERITE.
Isometric-tetrahedral. Commonly in cubes; also tetrahedral. Rarely
granular.
Cleavage: a (100) imperfect. Fracture uneven. Rather sectile. H. =
2 -5. G. = 2*9-3. Luster adamantine to greasy, not
989
very distinct. Color olive-, grass- or emerald-green,
yellowish brown, honey-yellow. Streak green to
brown, yellow, pale. Subtransparent to subtranslu-
cent. n = 1-676. Pyroelectric.
Comp. Perhaps 6FeAs0 4 .2Fe(OH) 3 .12H 2 O =
Arsenic pent oxide 43% iron sesquioxide 40
'0, water
16 -9 = 100. Some varieties contain K2O.
Pyr., etc. Same as for scorodite.
Obs. Obtained at the mines in Cornwall. England, with
ores of copper; at
v .. . , . Schneeberg and Schwarzenberg, Saxony; at
Konigsberg, near Schemmtz, Hungary. In Utah, at the Mammoth mine, Tintic district,
from QapucxKov, poison, and aidrjpos, iron.
* 2F pA.Fe(OH) 2 .8H 2 O. Occurs in small green tabular crystals (mono-
^
Iruro, Cornwall, England.
.-
In radiated tufts of a y ellow or brownish color.
From near St. Benigna in Bohemia; Lancaster Co Pa
rnnnl
stem Bavaria
P ii
W '
Pleochroic
with FeO, MnO, CaO, MgO, A1 2 O 3
- G = 2 '^- From
-
Mono- .
Hiihnerkobel, Raben-
Beraunite.Perhaps 2FePO 4 .Fe(OH) 3 .2H 2 O. Commonly in druses and in radiated
globules and crusts. Color reddish brown to dark hyacinth-red. From St.
Benigna near
Beraun, in Bohemia. From Hellertown, Pa. Eleonorite, in tabular crystals, is the' same
mineral. From the Eleonore mine near Giessen, Germany.
GLOBOSITE, PICITE, DELVAUXITE, KERTSCHENITE, OXYKERTSCHENITE, are other
hydrated ferric phosphates.
CHILDRENITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 07780 : 1 : 0-52575.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 75 46'. rr'", 131 A 131 = 105 9'
rr', 131 A 131 = 39 47'. ss', 121 A 121 = 49 56'.
Only known in Cleavage: a (100) imperfect. Fracture uneven.
crystals.
H. = 4-5-5. G. = Luster vitreous to resinous. Color yellowish
3-18-3-24.
white, pale yellowish brown, brownish black. Streak white to yellowish.
Translucent. 2E = 74. Optically -. a = 1-631. ft = 1-660. 7 = 1*664!
Comp. In general 2AlPO 4 .2Fe(OH) 2 .2H 2 O. Phosphorus pentoxide
30'9, alumina 22-2, iron protoxide 31-3, water 15-6 = 100. Manganese
replaces part of the iron and it hence graduates into eosphorite.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives off neutral water. B.B. swells up into ramifica-
tions, and fuses on the edges 'to a black mass, coloring the flame pale green. Heated on
charcoal turns black and becomes magnetic. With soda gives a reaction for manganese.
With borax and salt of phosphorus reacts for iron and manganese. Soluble in hydro-
chloric acid.
Obs. From Tavistock, Devonshire, England; from Greifenstein, Germany. In
United States, at Hebron, Me.
KREUZBERGITE. Aluminium phosphate with Fe,Mn,H 2 O. Orthorhombic. White to
yellow. From the Kreuzberg, Pleystein, Bavaria.
Eosphorite. Form and composition as for childrenite, but containing chiefly man-
ganese instead of iron. In prismatic crystals; also massive. Color rose-pink, yellowish,
etc. |8
= 1*65. From Branchvi lie, Conn.
Mazapilite. Ca3Fe 2 (AsO 4 )4.2FeO(OH).5H 2 O. In slender prismatic crystals. G. =
3-567-3-582. Color black. From Mazapil, Mexico.
YUKONITE. (Ca 3 ,Fe2 '")(AsO4)2.2Fe(OH) 3 .5H 2 O. Amorphous. In irregular concre-
tions. H. 2-3. G. = 2*8. Color nearly black with brown tinge. Decrepitates at low
heat, also when immersed in water. Easily fusible with intumescence. From Tagish Lake,
Yukon Territory.
Ca 3 Fe 2 (PO 4 ) 4 .Fe(OH) 3 .8H 2 O. Occurs in yellow to green nodules in clay
Calcioferrite.
at Battenberg, Rhenish Bavaria, Germany.
Borickite. Perhaps Ca 3 Fe 2 (PO 4 )4.12Fe(OH) 3 .6H 2 O. Reniform massive; compact.
Color reddish brown. From Leoben in Styria; Bohemia. Foucherite, possibly same as
borichite from Foucheres, Aube, France.
Egueiite. A hydrous basic phosphate of ferric iron with calcium and aluminium.
Amorphous. In small nodules with fibrous-lamellar structure. Index, 1 '65. Fusibility 1.
Easily soluble in hydrochloric acid. Found embedded in clay from Egue'i, Sudan.
RICHELLITE. Perhaps 4FeP2 O 8 .Fe2 OF2 (OH) 2 .36H 2 O. Massive, compact or foliated.
Color yellow. From Richelle, Belgium.
990
LIROCONITE.
1-6808; ft
=
88 33'.
mm"' 110 A 110 = 105 39'. me, 110 A Oil = 46 10'.
ee', Oil A Oil = 118 29'. m'e, IlO A Oil = 47 24'.
Crystals resembling rhombic octahedrons. Rarely

granular. Cleavage: m
(1 10), e (Oil) indistinct. Frac-
ture subconchoidal to uneven. Imperfectly sectile.
H. = 2-2-5. G. = 2-882-2-985. Luster vitreous, inclining to resinous. Color
and streak sky-blue to verdigris-green.
TomnP - - copper, formula uncertain;

A hvdrous arsenate of aluminium and
to CueAl(As0 4 ) 5 3CuAl(OH),20H 2 O
= Arsenic
analysS 'correspond nearly water 24-9 = 100. Phos-
oxide 35-9,
pentoxide 28-9, alumina 10-3, cupric
the arsenic.
phorus replaces part of
In the closed tube gives much water and turns olive-green.
B.B cracks
Pvr etc
less readily than olivenite to a dark gray slag; on
open but does not decrepitate; fuses Soluble in nitric acid.
reactions like olivenite.
charcoal cracks open, deflagrates, and gives
Obs. From Cornwall; Herrengrund m Hungary.
Chenevixite. Perhaps Cu 2 (FeO) 2 As 2 O8.3H 2 O.
Massive to compact. Color dark green
to greenish yellow. From Cornwall; Utah.
HENWOODITE. A hydrated phosphate of aluminium and copper. In botryoidal globu-
lar masses. Color turquois-blue. From Cornwall.
Ceruleite. CuO.2Al 2 O 3 .As2 O5.8H 2 O. Compact, made up of very minute crystals.
G. = 2-8. Color, turquois-blue. Soluble in acids. From Huanaco, Taltal province,
Chile.
Chalcosiderite. Probably isomorphous with turquois and
CuO.3Fe 2 O 3 .2P 2 O5.8H 2 O.
should have 9H In sheaf-Jike crystalline groups, as incrustations. Color light siskin-
2 O.
green. Indices, 1 '83-1 '93. From Cornwall.
ANDREWSITE, also from Cornwall, is near chalcosiderite.
Kehoeite. A hydrated phosphate of aluminium, zinc, etc. Massive. G. = 2'34.
From Galena, D.
S.
Goyazite. Perhaps Ca 3 AljoP 2 O 2 3.9H 2 O. Strontia has been found in the mineral and
In small rounded grains. Color yellowish
possible that it is identical with
it is hamlinite.
white. From Minas Geraes, Brazil.
Roscherite. (Mn,Fe,Ca) 2 Al(OH)(PO 4 ) 2 .2H 2 O. Monoclinic. From Ehrensfriedersdorf ,
Saxony.
Uranite Group ^
TORBERNITE. Copper Uranite.

Tetragonal. Axis c 2*9361. Crystals usually square tables, sometimes
very thin, again thick; less often pyramidal. Also foliated, micaceous.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect, micaceous. Laminae brittle. H. = 2-2-5.
G. = 3'4-3'6. Luster of c pearly, other faces subadamantine. Color emerald-
!
and grass-green, and sometimes leek-, apple-, and siskin-green. Streak paler
than the color. Transparent to subtranslucent. Optically uniaxial; negative,
w = 1-61.
Comp. A hydrous phosphate of uranium and copper, Cu(UO2 )2P2O 8 .
12H 2 O = Phosphorus pentoxide 14-1, uranium trioxide 56*6, copper 7'9, water
21*4 = 100. Arsenic may replace part' of the phosphorus.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water. Fuses at 2*5 to a blackish mass, and
colors the flame green. With salt of phosphorus gives a green bead, which with tin on char-
coal becomes on cooling opaque red (copper). With soda on charcoal gives a globule of
copper. .Soluble in nitric acid.
Obs. From Germany at Schneeberg, etc., Saxony; Reichenbach, Baden; at
Joachimstal, Ambert, Puy-de-D6me France.
Bohemia; From Mt. Painter, South
;
Australia. The material from Gunnis Lake, Cornwall corresponds to Cu(UO 2 ) 2 P 2 O 8 .8H 2O
and is the same as the first dehydration product of torbernite, which has been called
meta-torbernite I. G. = 3'68. o> = T623. e=l'625.
Zeimerite. Cu(UO>) ; A>,O 8 .SH 2 O. In tabular crystals resembling torbernite in form
and color. G. = 3'2. co = 1-64. From Schneeberg,
Saxony; near Joachimstal, Bohemia;
Cornwall.
AUTUNITE. Lime Uranite.

Orthorhombic. In thin tabular crystals,
nearly tetragonal in form and
deviating but slightly from torbernite in angle; also foliated, micaceous.
Cleavage: basal, eminent. Laminae brittle. H. = 2-2'5. G. = 3-05-

3*19. Luster of c (001) pearly, elsewhere subadamantine. Color lemon- to
sulphur-yellow. Streak yellowish. Transparent to translucent. Optically
-. Ax. pi. 6 (010).
||
Bx _L c (001). a = 1-553. = 1-575. 7 = 1-577.
Comp. A hydrous phosphate of uranium and calcium, probably analo-
gous to torbernite, Ca(UO 2 ) 2 P 2 O 8 .8H 2 O or CaO.2UO 3 .P2 O 5 .8H 2 O = Phos-
phorus pentoxide 15*5, uranium trioxide 62-7, lime 6-1, water 15-7 = 100.
Some analyses give 10 and others 12 molecules of water, but it is not certain that the
additional amount is essential.
Pyr., etc. Same as for torbernite, but no reaction for copper.
Obs. With uraninite, as in Germany at Johanngeorgenstadt and Falkenstein; in Italy
at Lurisia, Cuneo; in Madagascar; at Tinh-Tuc, Tongking, China; from Mt. Painter,
South Australia. In the United States, at Middletown and Branchville, Conn. In N. C.,
at mica mines in Mitchell Co.; in Alexander Co.; Black Hills, S. D.
Bassetite. Composition probably the same as autunite. Monoclinic. /3 = 89 17'.
Twinned; tw. pi. 6 (010).Cleavage parallel to three pinacoids. G. = 3'10. Color yel-
low. Transparent. Indices, 1 '57-1 '58. From the Basset mines, Cornwall. Previously
considered to be autunite.
Uranospinite. Probably Ca(UO 2 )2As2O 8 .8H2 O. In thin tabular orthorhombic crystals
rectangular in outline. Color siskin-green. /3 = T63. From near Schneeberg, Saxony.
Uranocircite. Ba(UO 2 ) 2 P2 O 8 .8H2O. In crystals similar to autunite. Color yellow-
green. j8-= 1'62. From Falkenstein, Saxon Voigtland, Germany.
Carnotite. Approximately, K
2 O.2U 2 O 3 .V 2 O 6 .3H 2 O. Orthorhombic. In the form of
powder, sometimes in crystalline plates c (001) | j
Basal cleavage. Color yellow. /3 = 1 '86.
.
Occurs as a yellow crystalline powder, or in loosely cohering masses, intimately mixed with
quartzose material. It is found in large quantities in western Colorado and eastern Utah.
Is mined there not only for its uranium and vanadium content but also for the small amount
of radium it contains. Noted also from Radium Hill, near Olary, South Australia, and from
nearMauch Chunk, Pa.
TYUYAMUNITE. CaO.2UO 3 .y 2 O 5 .4H 2O. Perhaps a calcium carnotite. Found at
Tyuya-Muyun, Fergana, Russian Central Asia.
Uranospathite. A hydrated uranyl phosphate. Orthorhombic, pseudo- tetragonal. In
elongated tabular crystals. Cleavages parallel to the three pinacoids. Color yellow to
pale green. From Redruth, Cornwall. Previously considered to be autunite.
(yO-2)3P2 O 8 .6H 2 O.
Phosphuranylite. As a pulverulent incrustation. Color deep
4emon-yellow. From Mitchell Co., N. C.
Trogerite. (UO 2 ) 3 As2 O 8 .12H 2 O. In thin druses of tabular crystals. Probably tetrago-
nal. Color lemon-yellow. From near Schneeberg, Saxony.
Walpurgite. Probably Biio(UO 2 ) 3 (OH)24(AsO 4 )4. In thin yellow crystals resembling
gypsum. G. = 5'76. Color yellow. Index, 2 '00. From near Schneeberg, Saxony.
Rhagite. Perhaps 2BiAsO 4 .3Bi(OH) 3 In crystalline aggregates.
. Color yellowish
green, wax-yellow. From near Schneeberg, Saxony.
ARSENO-BISMITE. A hydrous bismuth arsenate. In cryptocrystalline aggregates.
Color yellowish green with tinge of brown. G. = 5'7. Index, 1-6. Found at Mammoth
mine, Tintic district, Utah.
Mixite. A hydrated basic arsenate of copper and bismuth, formula doubtful. In
acicular crystals; as an incrustation. Color green to whitish. From Joachimstal, Bo-
hemia; Wittichen, Baden; Tintic district, Utah.
Antimonates ;
also Antimonites, Arsenites.
A number of antimonates have been included in the preceding pages

among the phosphates, arsenates, etc.
Bindheimite. A hydrous antimonate of lead. Amorphous, reniform; also earthy or
incrusting. Color gray, brownish, yellowish. Index, 2'0. A result of the decomposition
thus at Horhausen, Germany; in Cornwall, England; Sevier

of other antimonial ores;
antimonite of calcium, perhaps CaSb 2 O 4

In groups of minute square
meite.' An
G. = 4713.' Color hyacinth- or honey-yellow, n = 183-
octahedrons H. above
5'5.
From St. Marcel, Piedmont; Miguel Burnier, Mmas Geraes. Atopite
from Lang-
1 87
ban, Sweden, is probably the same species.

PbClSbO 2 In orthorhombic crystals. H.
= 3'5-4. G. = 7'02. Color
Nadorite .
brownish yellow. = 2 '35. From Djebel-Nador, Constantme. Algeria.

In crystals, massive, and as an
Ecdemite. Heliophyllite. Perhaps Pb 4As 2 O 7 .2PbCl2.
incrustation. G. = 6'89-7'14. Color bright yellow to green. From Langban, Sweden;
also Pajsberg (heliophyllite) .
Ochrolite.Probably Pb 4 Sb 2 O 7 .2PbCl 2 In small crystals, united in diverging groups.

.
Color sulphur-yellow. From Pajsberg, Sweden.

Trippkeite. nCuO.As 2 O 3 In small bluish green, tetragonal crystals. From Copiapo,
.
Chile.
Schafarzikite is described as isomorphous with trippkeite with the formula, nFeO.P 2 O 3 .
From Pernek, Comitat Pozsony, Hungary.
Tripuhyite. An iron antimonate. 2FeO.Sb2 O 5 . In microcrystalline aggregates of a

dull greenish yellow color. From Tripuhy, Brazil.
Flajolotite. 4FeSbO 4 .3H 2 O. Compactor earthy. Color lemon-yellow. In nodular

masses. From HammamN'Bail, Constantine, Algiers.
Catoptrite. 14(Mn,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 .Sb 2O 5 Monoclinic. Crystals minute tab-
.
ular parallel to 6 (010). Perfect basal cleavage. H. = 5 '5. G. = 4 '5. Color black. In
thin splinters, red. Pleochroic, red-brown to red-yellow. From Brattsfor mine, Nord-
marken, Sweden.
Derbylite.An antimo-titanate of iron. In prismatic, orthorhombic crystals. H. = 5.
G. = Color black. Tripuhy, Brazil.
4-53.
Lewisite. 5CaO.2TiO 2 .3Sb 2 O 6 In minute yellow to brown isometric octahedrons.
.
Tripuhy, Brazil.
Mauzeliite. A titano-antimonate of lead and calcium, related to lewisite. In dark
brown isometric octahedrons. Jakobsberg, Sweden.
AMMIOLITE. A doubtful antimonite of mercury; forming a scarlet earthy mass. Chile.
Phosphates or Arsenates with Carbonates, Sulphates, Borates

Podolite. 3Ca 3 (PO 4 ) 2 .CaCO 3 Hexagonal. In microscopic prismatic crystals,
. also in
spherulites. G. = 3'1. Color yellow, ft = 1'64. Occurs in cavities in the phosphorite
nodules from near the Uschitza River, Podolien, southern Russia. See also staffelite and
dahllite, p. 597.
Diadochite. A
hydrated phosphate and sulphate of ferric iron. Index, 1*606. From
Thuringia. is similar; from Belgium.
Destinezite
Pitticite. A hydrated arsenate and sulphate of ferric iron. Reniform and massive.
Yellowish and reddish brown. Index, 1 -63. From Saxony, Cornwall, etc.
Svanbergite. A hydrated phosphate and sulphate of aluminium and calcium. In
rhombohedral crystals. Color yellow to yellowish brown, rose-red, co = T64. From
Horrsjoberg, Sweden.
Beudantite. A phosphate or arsenate with sulphate of ferric iron and lead; formula
perhaps, 3Fe2 O 3 .2PbO.2SO 3 .As 2 O 5 .6H 2 O. In rhombohedral crystals. Color green to brown
and black. Indices, 175-1 '94. From Dernbach and Horhausen, Nassau. Corkite is same
mineral from Cork, Ireland; Beaver Co., Utah.
Phosphophyllite. O
3Fe 3 P2 8 .2Al(OH)SO 4 .9H 2O, with Ca,Ba,Mg,Mn,K 2 Monoclinic.
Colorless to pale blue-green. 3 pinacoidal cleavages. H. = 3-4. G. = 3 '08. n = T65.
From Habendorf, Bavaria.
Hinsdalite. 2PbO.3Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .P2 O 5 .6H 2 O. Pseudo-rhombohedral. In coarse, dull
crystals. Cleavage, basal perfect. H. = 4'5. G. = 4'65. Colorless with greenish tone.
Indices 1 -67-1 -69. Found at Golden Fleece mine, Hinsdale
Co., Col.
Lindackerite. Perhaps 3NiO.6CuO.SO 3 .2As2 O 5 .7H 2 O. In rosettes, and in reniform
masses. Color verdigris- to apple-green. From Joachimstal, Bohemia.
BO RATES 619
Liineburgite. 3MgO.B 2 O 3 .P2O5.8H2 O. Monoclinic? In flattened masses, fibrous to

earthy structure. Biaxial, Index, T53. From Ltineburg, Hannover.
.
Lossenite. A hydrous iron arsenate and lead sulphate from Laurion, Greece.
Nitrates
The Nitrates being largely soluble in water play but an unimportant role
in Mineralogy.
SODA NITER.
Rhombohedral. Axis c = 0-8276; rr" 1011 A 1101 = 73 30'. Homceo-
morphous with calcite. Usually massive form, as an incrustation or in beds.
Cleavage: r Fracture conchoidal, seldom observable.
(1011)
perfect.
Rather sectile. T5-2. H.G. = 2'24-2'29.
= Luster vitreous. Color
white; also reddish brown, gray and lemon-yellow. Transparent. Taste
Optically -. co = T5874, e = 1'3361.
cooling.
Comp. Sodium nitrate, NaNO 3 = Nitrogen pentoxide 63'5, soda 36'5
= 100.
Pyr., etc. Deflagrates on charcoal with less violence than niter, causing a yellow
light, and also deliquesces. Colors the flame intensely yellow. Dissolves in three parts of
water at 60 F.
Obs. From Tarapaca, northern Chile, and also the neighboring parts of Bolivia; also
in Humboldt Co., Nev.; near Calico, San Bernardino Co., Cal.
Use. A
source of nitrates. The deposits in Chile are of great importance.
Niter. Potassium nitrate, KNO 3. Orthorhombic. = T505. In thin white crusts
and silky tufts.
Nitrocalcite. Hydrous calcium nitrate, Ca(NO 3 ) 2 .nH2 O. In efflorescent silky tufts

and masses. In many limestone caverns, as those of Kentucky.
Nitromagnesite. Mg(NO 3 )2.nH 2 O. In efflorescences in limestone caves.
Nitrobarite. Barium nitrate, Ba(NO 3) 2 . Isometric-tetartohedral. n = 1'57. From
Chile.
Gerhardtite. Basic cupric nitrate, Cu(NO 3 )2.3Cu(OH) 2 . In pyramidal orthorhombic
crystals. G. = 3 '426.Color emerald-green. /3 = 1713. From the copper mines at
Jerome, Ariz.
Darapskite. NaNOs.Na2SO4.H2O. Monoclinic. In square tabular crystals. Color-
less. From Atacama, Chile.
Nitroglauberite. 6NaNO 3 .2Na2SO 4 .3H 2 O. From Atacama, Chile.
Lautarite. Calcium iodate, Ca(IO3) 2 In prismatic, monoclinic crystals, colorless to

.
yellowish. From the sodium nitrate deposits of Atacama, Chile.

Dietzeite. -A calcium iodo-chromate. Monoclinic; commonly fibrous or columnar.
H. = 3-4. G. = 370. Color dark gold-yellow. From the same region as lautarite.
Oxygen Salts
5. BORAXES
The aluminates, ferrates, etc., allied chemically to the borates, have been already intro-
duced among the oxides. They include the species of the Spinel Group, pp. 418-423, also
Chrysoberyl, p. 423, etc.
SUSSEXITE.
In fibrous seams or veins. H. = 3. G. = 3 -42. Luster silky to pearly.
Color white with a tinge of pink or yellow. Translucent. Index, T59.
Comp. HRB0 3, where R = Mn, Zn and Mg = Boron trioxide 34 1,

41 '5, magnesia 15'6, water 8'8 = 100. Here Mn
manganese protoxide,
(+ Zn) :
Mg = 3 : 2.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube darkens in color and yields neutral water. If turmeric
then with dilute hydrochloric acid, it assumes a
paper is moistened with this water, and = 2), and B.B. in
red color (boric acid). In the forceps fuses in the flame of a candle (F.
O F. yields a black crystalline mass, coloring the flame intensely yellowish green. With
the fluxes reacts for manganese. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Obs. Found on Mine Hill, Franklin Furnace, Sussex Co., N. J., with franklinite,
zincite willemite, etc. An intimate mixture of zincite and calcite, not uncommon at Min?
Hill, is often mistaken for sussexite,
but the ready fusibility of the genuine mineral is dis-
tinctive.
Ludwigite. Perhaps 3MgO.B O .FeO.Fe O

2 3 2 3. Orthorhombic. In finely fibrous masses.
G. = 3-91-4-02. Color blackish green to nearly black. Index, T86. Strongly pleochroic.
From Morawitza, Hungary. Collbranite from Korea is ludwigite.
VONSENITE. 3(Fe,Mg)O.B 2O3.FeO.Fe 2O3. Similar to ludwigite with more ferrous iron.
Riverside Cal.
;
Magnesioludwigite. 3MgO.B 2 O3.MgO.Fe 2 O 3 . From Mountain Lake mine, south of

Brighton, Utah.
Pinakiolite. 3MgO.B 2 3 .MnO.Mn 2 3 O O . In small rectangular crystals. H. = 6.
G.= 3-881. Luster metallic. Color black. From Langban, Sweden.
Nordenskioldine. A calcium-tin borate, CaSn(BOi) 2 . In tabular rhombohedral
crystals. H. = 5*5-6. G. = 4'20. Color sulphur-yellow. From the Langesund fiord,
Norway.
Jeremejevite. Eichwaldite. Aluminium borate, A1BO 3 In prismatic hexagonal .
crystals. H. = 6'5. G. = 3/28. Colorless to pale yellow. Index, 1'64. From Mt.
Soktuj, Adun-Chalon range in Eastern Siberia.
Hambergite. Be 2 (OH)BO 3 In grayish white orthorhombic prismatic crystals.
.
H. = 7-5. G. = 2-347. Optically +. = 1'588. From Langesund fiord, southern Nor-

way; various localities in Madagascar.
Szaibelyite. 2Mg5B 4Ou.3H 2O. In small nodules; white outside, yellow within. From
Rezbdnya, Hungary.
BORACITE.
Isometric and retrahedral in external form under ordinary conditions, but
in molecular structure orthorhombic and pseudo-isometric; the structure
becomes isotropic, as required by the form, only when heated to 265. (See
Art. 429.)
991 993
\7
Habit cubic and tetrahedral or octahedral; also dodecahedral.

Crystals
usually isolated, embedded; less often in groups. Faces o (111) bright and
smooth, o, (111) dull or uneven.
Cleavage: o,o y in traces. Fracture conchoidal, uneven. Brittle
in crystals. G. = 2-9-3. Luster vitreous,
H =7
inclining to adamantine. Color
white, inclining to gray, yellow and green. Streak white. Subtransparent to
BORATES 621
translucent. Commonly shows double refraction, which, however, disappears

upon heating to 265, when a section becomes isotropic. Refractive index,
n = 1-667; 7 - a = 0-0107.
Strongly pyroelectric, the opposite polarity corresponding to the position
of the and - tetrahedral faces (see pp. 306, 307). The faces of the dull
+
tetrahedron o (111) form the analogous pole, those of the polished form o
/
(111) the antilogous pole.

Comp. Mg7Cl 2 B 16 O 3 o or 6MgO.MgCl 2 .8B 2 O 3 = Boron trioxide 62*5,
magnesia 31'4, chlorine 7'9 = 101'8, deduct (O= Cl) 1'8 = 100.
Var. 1. In crystals of varied habit. 2. Massive, with sometimes a sub-
Ordinary.
columnar structure; Rose. It resembles a fine-grained white marble or
stassfurtite of
granular limestone. Parasite of Volger is the plumose interior of some crystals of boracite.
3. Eisenstassfurtite contains some Fe.
Pyr., etc. The massive variety gives water in the closed tube. B.B. both varieties
fuse at 2 with intumescence to a white crystalline pearl, coloring the flame green; heated
after moistening with cobalt solution assumes a deep pink color. Mixed with oxide of
copper and heated on charcoal colors the flame deep azure-blue (copper chloride). Soluble
in hydrochloric acid.
Alters very slowly on exposure, owing to the magnesium chloride present, which takes
up water. It is the frequent presence of this deliquescent chloride in the massive mineral,
thus originating, that led to the view that there was a hydrous boracite (stassfurtite).
Parasite of Volger is a result of the same kind of alteration in the interior of crystals of
boracite; this alteration giving it its somewhat plumose character, and introducing water.
Obs. Observed in beds of anhydrite, gypsum or salt. In crystals in Germany at
Kalkberg and Schildstein in Llineburg, Hannover; at Segeberg, near Kiel, in Holstein;
massive, or as part of the rock, also in crystals, at Stassfurt, Prussia; at Luneville, La
Meurthe, France.
Ascharite. A hydrous magnesium borate. In white lumps with boracite. G. = 2'7.
Index, 1*54. From Aschersleben and Neustassfurt, Germany. Paternoite. A similar
mineral from Sicily.
Rhodizite. A
borate of aluminium and potassium, with caesium and rubidium. Iso-
metric-tetrahedral; in white, translucent dodecahedrons.H. = 8. G. = 3 '41. n = T69.
Found on red tourmaline from near Ekaterinburg, Ural Mts.; from Madagascar.
Warwickite. (Mg, Fe) 3 TiB 2 O 8 In elongated prismatic crystals. G. = 3'36. Color
.
dark brown to dull black. From Edenville, N. Y.

Howlite. A silico-borate of calcium, 5 Ca 2 6 SiOi 4 H B
In small white rounded nodules;
.
also earthy. From Nova Scotia; Lang, Los Angeles Co., and in San Bernardino Co., Cal.
Lagonite. Fe 2 O3.3B2O3.3H 2 O. An incrustation at the Tuscan lagoons, Italy.
(NH
Larderellite. 4) 2 Bi O 16 .5H 2 O. From the Tuscan lagoons, Italy.
COLEMANITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a b c = 07748 1 0'5410;j3 = 69 51'.
: : : :
Crystals usually short prismatic (mm'" 110 A 110

= 72 4'). Massive
cleavable to granular and compact.
Cleavable: b (010) highly perfect; c (001) distinct. Fracture uneven to
subconchoidal. H. = 4-4'5. G. = 2*42. Luster vitreous to adamantine,
brilliant. Colorless to milky white, yellowish white, gray. Transparent to
translucent. Optically + . a = 1'586. = 1'592. 7 = 1'614.
Comp. Ca2 B On.5H 2 O, perhaps HCa(BO 2 ) 3 .2H 2
6
= Boron trioxide
50'9, lime 27*2, water 21*9
= 100.
Pyr. B.B. decrepitates, exfoliates, sinters, and fuses imperfectly, coloring the flame
yellowish green. Soluble in hot hydrochloric acid with separation of boric acid on cooling.
Obs. First discovered in Death Valley, Inyo Co., Cal.; later in Calico district, San
Bernardino Co. Neocolemanite from Lang, Los Angeles Co., Cal., is identical with cole-
manite.
PRICEITE. Near colemanite. Massive, friable and chalky. Color snow-white. From
Curry Co., Oregon. Pandermite is similar; in compact nodules from Asia Minor;
Argentina.
Inyoite. 2CaO.3B 2 O 3 .13H2 O.

Monoclinic. In large tabular crystals. Cleavage,
c (001). H. =2.G. = 1-87. Indices, 1 '49-1*52. Decrepitates and fuses with intu-
mescence, giving green flame. Largely altered into meyerhofferite. From Mt. Blanco dis-
trict, on Furnace Creek, near Death Valley, Inyo Co., Cal. Associated with colemanite.
Meyerhofferite. 2CaO.3B 2 O 3 .7H 2 O. Triclinic crystals prismatic, often tabular parallel
to a (100). Fibrous. Cleavage, b (010). H.
= 2. G. = 2*12. Colorless to white. In-
dices, 1 '50-1 '56. Fuses without decrepitation but with intumescence. Found with inyoite
(which see) as an alteration product.
Pinnoite. MgB 2 O 4 .3H2 O. Tetragonal-pyramidal. Usually in nodules, radiated fibrous.
G. = 2 '29. Color sulphur- or straw-yellow, co = 1'56. From Stassfurt, Germany.
Heintzite. Hintzeite. Kaliborite. A hydrous borate of magnesium and potassium.
In small monoclinic crystals, sometimes aggregated together. H. = 4-5. G. = 2*13.
Colorless to white, ft
= T525. From Leopoldshall, Stassfurt, Germany.
Hulsite. 12(Fe,Mg)O.2Fe 2 O 3 .lSnO 2 .3B 2 O.2H2 O. Orthorhombic (?) as small crystals
or tabular masses. H. = 3. G. = 4 '3. Color and streak black. Fusible. Found in
metamorphosed limestone at a granite contact at Brooks mountain, Seward Peninsula,
Alaska. Paigeile is a similar mineral from the same locality with the composition
30FeO.5Fe2 O 3 .lSnO 2 .6B 2 O 3 .5H 2 O.
BORAX.
0-5632; = 73 25'.
994 ca, 001 A 100 = 73 25'. cz, 001 A 221 = 64 8'.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 93 0'. oo', III A Til = 57 27'.

co, 001 A 111 = 40 31'. zz', 221 A 221 = 83 28'.
Crystals prismatic, sometimes large; resembling

pyroxene in habit and angles.
Cleavage: a (100) perfect; m (110) less so; 6](010) in
traces. Fracture conchoidal. Rather brittle. H. = 2-2*5.
G. = T69-172. Luster vitreous to resinous; sometimes
earthy. Color white; sometimes grayish, bluish or green-
ish. Streak white. Translucent to opaque. Taste sweet-
ish alkaline, feeble.
Optically
- Ax. pi. b (010). .
Bxa _L 6 (010). Bxo. r A c axis = - 56 50'. 2V = 39. a = 1-447. =

T470. 7 = 1-472.
Comp. Na2 B O 4 7 .10H 2 O or Na2O.2B 2 O 3 .10H 2 O Boron trioxide 36'6.
soda 16-2, water 47-2 = 100.
'
B: U S
Up. and afterward fuses to a transparent globule, called the glass
of bomx F,~^ ? fE fl
and Pt*?*um bisulphate, it colors the flame around the
a alkaline soMon - Boi ^g water
f Tibet; the crude mineral is called .
the i
two small alkaline lakes in
Co -
;
at
, which included also the niter (sodium carbonate)

t
inolderin^ gold
Called <= h ^ -- by
o Agricola
^
a sclent
tJLEXITE.
t^^^^^^^^^^Boronatrocalcite. Natronborocalcite.
preservative;
are
S
acTcu& ,Tn
Colorr white.
r
^ "f^ycrystas.
Tasteless.
ed mass
H. =
Ophcally +.
f ',
Ioos e m texture, consisting of fine fibers, which
1.
=
G. - 1'65.
1'500. (3
Luster silky within.
1-508. 7 = T520.
BORATES, URANATES 623
Comp. A hydrous borate of sodium and calcium, probably NaCaB O 5 9.

8H O = Boron
2 trioxide 43'0, lime 13'8, soda 77, water 35'5 = 100.
Pyr., etc. Yields water. B.B. fuses at 1 with intumescence to a clear
blebby glass,
coloring the flame deep yellow. Moistened with sulphuric acid the color of the flame is
momentarily changed to deep green. Not soluble in cold water, and but little so in hot;
the solution alkaline in its reactions.
Obs. From the dry plains of Iquique, Chile. In Nev., in large quantities in the salt
marshes of the Columbus Mining District, Esmeralda Co.
Named after the German chemist, G. L. Ulex.
Bechilite. CaB 4O 7 .4H 2 O. In crusts, as a deposit from springs in Tuscany, Italy.
Hydroboracite. CaMgB On.6H O.
6 2 Resembles fibrous and foliated gypsum; color
white. /3
= T587. From the Caucasus Mts.
Sulphoborite. 2MgSO .4MgHBO
4 3 .7H 2 O. In colorless prismatic orthorhombic crys-
tals. H. = 4. G. = 2-38-2-45. Optically -. ft
= 1'540. From Westeregeln, and
Wittmar, Germany.
Uranates
URANINITE. Cleveite. Broggerite. Nivenite. Pitchblende.
Isometric. In octahedrons
(o), also with dodecahedral faces (d) ; less often
in cubes with o and d. Crystals rare. Usually massive and botryoidal; also
in grains; structure sometimes columnar, or curved lamellar.
Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle. H. = 5'5. G. = 9'0 to 97 of
crystals; of massive altered forms from 6*4 upwards. Luster submetallic, to
greasy or pitch-like, and dull. Color grayish, greenish, brownish, velvet-
black. Streak brownish black, grayish, olive-green, a little shining. Opaque.
Comp. A
uranate of uranyl, lead, usually thorium (or zirconium),
often the metals of the lanthanum and yttrium groups; also containing the
gases nitrogen, helium and argon, in varying amounts up to 2'6 p. c. Calcium
and water (essential?) are present in small quantities; iron also, but only as an
impurity. The relation between the bases varies widely and no definite for-
mula can be given. Radium was first discovered in this mineral and it has been
shown that it and the helium present are products of the breaking down of
the uranium.
Var. The minerals provisionally included under the name uraninite are as follows:
1. Crystallized. Uranniobite from Norway. In crystals, usually octahedral, with G.
varying for the most part from 9'0 to 9 '7; occurs as an original constituent of coarse granites.
The variety from Branchville, Conn., which is as free from alteration as any yet examined,
contains chiefly UO
2 with a relatively small amount of 3 UO
Thoria is prominent, while
.
the earths of the lanthanum and yttrium groups are only sparingly represented.
Broggerite, as analyzed by Hillebrand, gives the oxygen ratio of tlOs to other bases of
about 1:1; it occurs in octahedral crystals, also with d (110) and a (100). G. = 9'03.
Cleveite and nivenite contain UO
3 in larger amount than the other varieties mentioned,
and are characterized by containing about 10 p. c. of the yttrium earths. Cleveite is a
variety from the Arendal, Norway, region occurring in cubic crystals modified by the dodeca-
hedron and octahedron. G. = 7'49. It is particularly rich in the gas helium. Nivenite
occurs massive, with indistinct crystallization. Color velvet-black. H. = 5'5. G. = 8'01.
It is more soluble than other kinds of uraninite, being completely decomposed by the action
for one hour of very dilute sulphuric acid at 100.
2. Massive, probably amorphous. Contains no thoria; the rare earths
Pitchblende.
also absent. Water is prominent and the much lower, in some cases not
specific gravity is
above 6'5; these last differences are doubtless largely due to alteration. Here belong
the kinds of pitchblende which occur in metalliferous veins, with sulphides of silver, lead,
cobalt, nickel, iron, zinc, copper, as that from Johanngeorgenstadt, Germany; Pfibram,
Bohemia, etc.; probably also that from Black Hawk, Col.
Pyr., etc. B.B. infusible, or only slightly rounded on the edges, sometimes coloring
the outer flame green (copper). With borax and salt of phosphorus gives a yellow bead in
O.F., becoming green in R.F. (uranium).
With soda on charcoal gives a coating of lead
oxide, and frequently the odor of arsenic. Many specimens give reactions for sulphur and
arsenic in the open tube. Soluble in nitric and sulphuric acids; the solubility differs widely
in different varieties, being greater in those kinds containing the rare earths. Not attract-
able by the magnet. Strongly radioactive.
Obs. As noted above, uraninite occurs either as a primary constituent of granitic rocks
or as a secondary mineral with ores of silver, lead, copper, etc. Under the latter condition
it is found in Germany at Johanngeorgenstadt, Marienberg, and Schneeberg in Saxony;
in Bohemia at Joachimstal and Pfibram; in Hungary at Rezbanya. Occurs in Norway in
pegmatitic veins at several points near Moss, viz.: Annerod (broggerite), Elvestad, etc.,
also near Arendal at the Garta feldspar quarry (deveite), associated with orthite, fergusonite,
thorite, etc.
In the United States, at the Middletown feldspar quarry, Conn., in large octahedrons,
rare; at Hale's quarry in Glastonbury, a few miles N.E. of Middletown. At Branchville,
Conn., in a pegmatite vein, as small octahedral crystals, embedded in albite. In N. C., at
the Flat Rock mine and other mica mines in Mitchell Co., rather abundant, but usually
altered, in part or entirely, to gummite and uranophane; the crystals are sometimes an inch
or more across and cubic in habit. In S. C., at Marietta. In Texas, at the gadolinite
locality in Llano Co. (nivenite). In large quantities at Black Hawk, near Central City,
Col. Rather abundant in the Bald Mountain district, Black Hills, S. D. Also with
monazite, etc., at the Villeneuye mica veins, Ottawa Co., Quebec, Canada.
Use. As a source of uranium and of radium salts.
Gummite. An alteration-product of uraninite of doubtful composition. In rounded
or flattened pieces, looking much like gum. G. = 3'9-4'20. Luster greasy. Color red-
dish yellow to orange-red, reddish brown, n = 1'61. From Johanngeorgenstadt, Ger-
many, also Mitchell Co., N. C.
YTTROGUMMITE. Occurs with cleveite as a decomposition-product.
THOROGUMMITE. Occurs with fergusonite, cyrtolite, and other species at the gadolinite
locality inLlano Co., Texas.
Thorianite. Chiefly thorium and uranium oxides.
Isometric, cubic habit. G. = 9'3.
Color black. Radioactive. Obtained from gem gravels of
Balangoda, Ceylon. Also noted
from Province of Betroka, Madagascar.
Uranosphaerite. (BiO) 2 U2 O 7 .3H 2 O. In half-globular aggregated forms. Color orange-
yellow, brick-red. From near Schneeberg, Saxony.
Oxygen Salts
6. SULPHATES, CHROMATES, TELLURATES

A.
Anhydrous Sulphates, etc.
The important BARITE GROUP is the only one
among the anhydrous sul-
phates and chromates.
g ite * A mo sulphate, (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 Orthorhombic. Usually in crusts and

^
.
ip forms, ft
= 1'523. Occurs about volcanoes, as at Etna, Vesuvius, etc.
0r 80 *' ^ C m
T^^T*
dal hTrf nr^m
s
?
diu sulphate, Na 2 S0 4 In orthorhombic crystals, pyrami-
.
i/77 ^ti^
aS twlnS (Fig> 384 ' p 160) White to brownish.
- '
Opticanv m Sol b water Often ob ^rved in connection with salt
^
"
vT reS
n thp /V ke , f
AnSfof ?n T n
Taa r aP nJf TIrBalk ,
hash Central Asia; similarly elsewhere; also in South
t he
>
nited States f rms extensive

vSde
erae An"
Ariz. T n rT'
In ?
at Borax Lake, y ,
deposits on the Rio >
Cal., San Bernardino Co.

Co^wh^^ 6 -
laSerite K Na )Ô
in' Rhombohedral; also in
"
( 4.
cruste '
massive,
many
3
,' k U
SULPHATES, CHROMATES, ETC. 625
GLAUBERITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a b : c = i'2200 : 1 :
T0275; /3 67 49'.
ca, 001 A 100 = 67 49'. cs, 001 A 111 = 43 2'
mm'", 110 A 110 = 96 58'. cm, 001 A 110 = 75 30f. 995
In crystals tabular c (001); also prismatic.
||
Cleavage: c perfect. Fracture conchoidal. Brittle.

H. = 2-5-3. G. = 2-7-2-85. Luster vitreous. Color
pale yellow or gray; sometimes brick-red. Streak
white. Taste slightly saline. Optically. 2V =
7. a =
1-515. j8 1-532. =y 1'536. Optical
=
characters change on heating, see p. 297.
Comp. Na2 SO 4.CaSO 4 = Sulphur trioxide 57'6,
lime 20'1, soda 22'3 = 100; or, Sodium sulphate
51'1, calcium sulphate 48 "9 100. =
Pyr., etc. B.B. decrepitates, turns white, and fuses at 1'5 to a white enamel,
coloring
the flame intensely yellow. On charcoal fuses in O.F. to a clear bead; in R.F. a portion
is absorbed by the charcoal, leaving an infusible residue. Soluble in
hepatic hydrochloric
acid. In water it loses its transparency, is partially dissolved, leaving a residue of calcium
sulphate, and in a large excess this is completely dissolved.
Obs. In crystals in rock salt at Villa Rubia, in New Castile, Spain; also at Aussee and
Hallstatt, Upper Austria; in Germany at Berchtesgaden, Bavaria; Westeregeln; Stassfurt.
In crystals in the Rio Verde Valley, Ariz., with thenardite, mirabilite, etc.; Borax lake, San
Bernardino Co., Cal.
Langbeinite. K Mg
2 2 (SO 4 )3. Isometric-tetartohedral. In highly modified colorless
crystals. G. = 2'83. n = 1'533. From Westeregeln and Stassfurt, Germany; Hall,
Tyrol; Punjab, India.
Vanthoffite. 3Na2 SO 4 .MgSO 4 . Almost colorless crystalline material found at Wil-
helmshall, near Stassfurt, Prussia.
Barite Group. RS0 4. Orthorhombic

mA m'" dd'_ 00'
110 A 110 102 A 102
Barite BaSO 4 78 22J' 77 43'
Celestite SrSO 4 75 50' 78 49'
Anglesite PbSO 4 76 16J' 78 47'
Anhydrite CaS0 4 (83 33') (58 31')
white marble, and

laminae convergent and often curved; granular, resembling
earthy; colors sometimes banded as in stalagmite.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; m
(110) also perfect, Fig. 996
the form yielded
997 998 999

996
1001 1002 1003

1000
1004 by cleavage; also 6 (010) imperfect. Fracture un-

even. Brittle. H.
2'5-3;5.
G. = 4'3-4'6. Lus-
=
ter vitreous, inclining to resinous; sometimes pearly
on c (001), less often on (110). m
Streak white.
Color white; also inclining to yellow, gray, blue, red,
or brown, dark brown. Transparent to translucent
to opaque. Sometimes fetid, when rubbed. Opti-
cally +. Ax. pi. || 6(010). Bx J_ a (100). 2V =
37 30'. a = 1.636. = 1-637. 7 = 1-648.
Var. Ordinary, (a) Crystals usually broad or stout; sometimes very large; again in
slender needles. (6) Crested; massive aggregations of tabular crystals, the crystals project-
ing at surface into crest-like forms, (c) Columnar; the columns often coarse and loosely
aggregated, and either radiated or parallel; rarely fine fibrous, (d) In globular or nodular
concretions, subfibrous or columnar within. Bologna Stone (from near Bologna) is here
included; it was early a source of wonder because of the phosphorescence it exhibited after
heating with charcoal. "Bologna phosphorus" was made from it. (e) Lamellar, either
straight or curved; the latter sometimes as aggregations of curved scale-like plates.
(/) Granular, (g) Compact or cryptocrystalline. (h) Earthy, (i) Stalactitic and stalag-
mitic; similar in structure and origin to calcareous stalactites and stalagmites and of much
beauty when polished, (h) Fetid; so called from the odor given off when struck or when
two pieces are rubbed together, which odor may be due to carbonaceous matters present.
The barite of Muzsaj and of Betler, near Rosenau, Hungary, was early called Wolnyn.
Cawk is the ordinary barite of the Derbyshire lead mines. Dreelite, supposed to be rhom-
bohedral, is simply barite. Michel-levyte from Perkin's Mill, Templeton, Quebec (described
as monoclinic), is peculiar in its pearly luster on m, twinning striations, etc.
Comp. Barium sulphate, BaSO 4 = Sulphur trioxide 34'3, baryta 657

= 100.
Strontium sulphate is often present, also calcium sulphate; further, as impurities, silica,
clay, bituminous or carbonaceous substances.
Pyr, etc. B.B. decrepitates and fuses at 3, coloring the flame yellowish green; the,
fused mass reacts alkaline with test paper. On charcoal- reduced to a sulphide. With soda
gives at first a clear pearl, but on continued blowing yields a hepatic mass, which spreads
out and soaks into the coal. This reacts for sulphur Insoluble in acids.
(p. 340).
DifE. Characterized by high specific gravity (higher than celestite, aragonite, albite,
calcite, gypsum, etc.); cleavage; insolubility; green coloration of the blowpipe flame.
Albite is harder and calcite effervesces with acid.
Obs. Occurs commonly in connection with beds or veins of metallic ores, especially of
lead, also copper, silver, cobalt, manganese, as part of the gangue of the ore; also often
accompanies stibmte. Sometimes present in massive forms with hematite deposits. It is
met with msecondary limestones and sandstones, sometimes forming distinct veins, and in
the former often in crystals along with calcite and celestite; in the latter often with
coooer
ores. Sometimes occupies the cavities of amygdaloidal basalt, porphyry, etc forms earthv
masses in beds of marl. Occurs as the petrifying material of fossils and
occupying cavities
in them.
Fine crystals are obtained in England at the Dufton lead mines, Westmoreland-
also in
Cumberland and Lancashire; in Derbyshire, Staffordshire, etc.; Cleator Moor-' Alston
Moor. In Scotland, in Argyleshire, at Strontian, Some of the most important of the
many European localities are Felsobanya, Nagybanya. Schemnitz, and Kremnitz in
Hungary, andJlef eld, often with stibnite; Huttenberg, Carinthia; Freiberg, Marienberg in
Saxony; Claustal in the Harz Mts.; Pribram, Bohemia; Auvergne, France.
In the United States, formerly in Conn., at Cheshireîntersecting the red sandstone in
veins with chalcocite and malachite. In N. Y., at Pillar Point, opposite Sackett's Harbor
massive; at Scoharie, fibrous; in St. Lawrence Co., crystals at DeKalb; the crested variety
at Hammond. In Pa., in crystals at Perkiomen lea^mine. In Va., at
Eldridge's gold
mine in Buckingham Co. In N. C., white ma^swâTCrowders Mt., Gaston Co., etc In
Tenn., on Brown's Creek; at Haysboro' near Nashville; in large veins in sandstone on
the west end of Isle Roy ale, Lake Superior, and on Spar Island, north shore. In Mo.
not uncommon with the lead ores; in concretionary forms at Salina, Saline Co., Kan In
Col., at Sterling, Weld Co.; Apishapa Creek; also in El Paso and Fremont Cos. In fine
crystals, near Fort Wallace, N. M. Crystals enclosing quartz sand, "sand barite," from
Norman, Oklahoma. In distorted crystals from the Bad Islands, S. D.
In Ontario, in Bathurst, and North Burgess, Lanark Co.; Malway,
Peterborough Co.'
as large veins on Jarvis, McKellars, and Pie islands, in Lake Superior, and near Fort William'
Thunder Bay. In Nova Scotia, in veins in the slates of East River of the Five Islands)
Colchester Co.
Named from papvs, heavy.
Use. Source of barium hydroxide used in the refining of sugar; ground and used as a
pigment, to give weight to paper, cloth, etc.
CELESTITE. Coelestine.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 07790 : 1 : 1-2800.
1005 1006
mm"', 110 A 110 = 75 50'. cd, 001 A 102 = 39 24'.

d, 001 A 104 = 22 20'. co, 001 A Oil = 52 0'.
Crystals resembling those of barite in habit; commonly tabular c (001) or 1 1
prismatic axis a or 6; also more rarely pyramidal by the prominence of the

||
forms \j/ (133) or x (144). Also fibrous and radiated; sometimes globular;
occasionally granular.
Cleavage: c (001) perfect; ra (110) nearly perfect; b (010) less distinct.
Fracture uneven. H. =
3-3'5. G. = 3'95-3'97. Luster vitreous, sometimes
inclining to pearly. Streak white. Color white, often faint bluish, and some-
times reddish. Transparent to subtranslucent. Optically +. Ax. pi. || b (010).
Bx _L a (100). 2V = 51. a = 1'622. ft = 1'624. 7 = 1'631.
Var. 1. In crystals of varied habit as noted above; a tinge of a deli-
Ordinary, (a)
cate blue is very common and sometimes
belongs to only a part of a crystal. The variety
from Montmartre, near Paris, France, called apotome, is prismatic by extension of o (Oil)
and doubly terminated by the pyramid ^ (133). (6) Fibrous, either parallel or radiated.
(c) Lamellar; of rare occurrence, (d) Granular, (e) Concretionary. (/) Earthy; impure
usually with carbonate of lime or clay.
Comp. Strontium sulphate, SrSO 4 = Sulphur trioxide 43'6, stron-

tia 56'4 = 100. Calcium and barium are sometimes present.
Pyr.j e tc. B.B. frequently decrepitates, fuses at 3 to a white pearl, coloring the flame
strontia-red; the fused mass reacts alkaline.
On charcoal fuses, and in R.F. is converted
into a difficultly fusible hepatic mass; this treated with hydrochloric acid and alcohol gives
an intensely red flame. With soda on charcoal reacts like barite. Insoluble in acids.
Diff. Characterized by form,' cleavage, high specific gravity, red coloration of the
blowpipe flame. Does not effervesce with acids like the carbonates (e.g.,- strontianite);
specific gravity lower than that
of barite.
Obs. Usually associated with limestone, or sandstone of various ages; occasionally
with metalliferous ores, as with galena and sphalerite at Condorcet, France; at Rezbanya,
Hungary; also in beds of gypsum, rock salt, as at Bex, Switzerland; Ischl, Austria; Liine-
berg, Hannover; sometimes fills cavities in fossils, e.g., ammonites; with sulphur in some
volcanic regions as at Girgenti, Sicily. From Yate, Gloucester, England.
Specimens, finely crystallized, of a bluish tint, are found in limestone about Lake Huron,
particularly on Drummond Island, also on Strontian Island, Put-in-Bay, Lake Erie, and
at Kingston in Ontario, Canada; Chaumont Bay, Lake Ontario, Schoharie, and Lockport,
N. Y. From near Syracuse, N. Y. A
blue fibrous celestite occurs at Bell's Mills, Blair
Co., Pa. From near Cumberland, Md. In Mineral Co., W. Va., a few miles south of Cum-
berland, Md., in pyramidal blue crystals. At Tifflin, Ohio. In Texas, at Lampasas, large
crystals. With colemanite at Death Valley, San Bernardino Co., Cal. In Canada, in
crystalline masses at Kingston, Frontenac Co.; Lansdowne, Leeds Co.; in radiating fibrous
masses in the Laurentian of Renfrew Co.
Named from ccelestis, celestial, in allusion to the faint shades of blue often present.
Use. Used in the preparation of strontium nitrate for fireworks; other salts used in
the refining of sugar,
ANGLESITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 07852 : 1 : 1*2894.
1007 1008 1009
110 A 110 = 76 16*'. 001 A 102 =

cd, 39 23'.
d, 001 A 104 = 22 19'. 001 A Oil =
co, 52 12'.
Some times tabular c (001) ; more often

n 1 1
prismatic in habit, and in

all
1
the three axial directions, m (110), d (102), o (Oil), predominating in the
ifferent cases; pyramidal of varied
types. Also massive, granular to com-
pact; stalactitic; nodular.
m (1 1
di.1
C1age C
vJr y h tt
-
H ^\ isti ct but
= , Sl 8o ?, interrupted. Fracture conchoi-
G = 6 3 ~6 39 Luster WBUy adaman -
'
m^t
' '
&
tme in tn
:
6;
some specimens,
'
;-
others inclining to resinous and vitreous.
-
-
Color
-
white, tinged yellow, gray, green, and sometimes blue.

Transparent to opaque. Optically +. Ax.
strong, P <. pi. 6 (010)
Streak uncolored
Bx
2V = 60-75.
100)
a =
||
1-877, > -1-882

T T= L
B^persion
Comp. Lead sulphate, PbSO 4 = Sulphur trioxide 26*4, lead oxide 73*6
= 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. decrepitates, fuses in the flame of a candle (F. = 1*5). On charcoal
in O.F. fuses to a clear pearl, which on cooling becomes milk-white; in R.F. is reduced
with effervescence to metallic lead. With soda on charcoal in R.F. gives metallic lead,
and the soda is absorbed by the coal. Difficultly soluble in nitric acid.
Diff. Characterized by high specific gravity; adamantine luster; cleavage; and by
yielding lead B.B. Cerussite effervesces in nitric acid.
Obs. A result of the decomposition of galena, and often found in its cavities; also
surrounds a nucleus of galena in concentric layers. First found in England at Pary's mine
in Anglesea; in Derbyshire and in Cumberland in crystals; at Leadhill, Scotland; in Ger-
many at Claustal, in the Harz Mts.; near Siegen in Prussia; Schapbach and Badenweiler
in Baden; in Hungary at Felsobanya and elsewhere; Nerchinsk, Siberia; and at Monte
Poni, Sardinia; Granada and Andalusia, Spain; massive in Siberia; in Australia, whence
it is exported to England. At Broken Hill, New South Wales. In the Sierra Mojada,
Mexico, in immense quantities, mostly massive.
In the United States in crystals at Wheatley's mine, Phenixville, Pa. in Missouri lead ;
mines; in crystals of varied habit at the Mountain View mine, Carroll Co., Md. In Col. at
various points, but less common than cerussite. At the Cerro Gordo mines of Cal. (argen-
tiferous galena), with other lead minerals. In Ariz., in the mines of the Castle'Dome dis-
trict, Yuma Co., and elsewhere. In fine crystals from Kingston and Wardner, Idaho;
Eureka, Utah.
Named from the locality, Anglesea, where it was first found.
Use. An ore of lead.
ANHYDRITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a : b : c = 0'8933 : 1 : 1'OOOS.
mm'", 110 A 1TO = 83 33' ss', Oil A Oil = 90 3'
rr\ 101 A TOl = 96 30' bo, 010 A 111 = 56 19'
Twins: 1, tw. pi. d (012); 2, r (101) occasionally as tw. lamellae. Crystals

not common, thick tabular, also
1010 1012
prismatic axis 6.
|| Usually
massive, cleavable, fibrous,
lamellar, granular, and some-
times impalpable.
Cleavage in the three pinac-
:
oidal directions yielding rec-

tangular fragments but with
varying ease, thus, c (001) very
perfect; b (010) also perfect;
a (100) somewhat less so.
1010, 1011, 'Stassfurt 1012, Aussee
Fracture uneven, sometimes
splintery._ Brittle. G. = 2-899-2-985.
H. = 3-3' 5. Luster: c pearly,
especially after heating in a closed tube; a somewhat greasy; 6 vitreous; in
massive varieties, vitreous inclining to pearly. Color white, sometimes a
brick-red. Streak grayish white.
grayish, bluish, or reddish tinge; also
Optically + Ax. pi. || b (010).
. Bx J_ a (100). 2V = 42. a = 1-571.
(3
= 1-576. 7 = 1'614.
Var. 1. Ordinary, (a) Crystallized; crystals rare, more commonly massive and
cleavable in three rectangular directions.
its (6) Fibrous; either parallel, radiated or
plumose, (c) Fine granular, (d) Scaly granular. Vulpinite is a scaly granular kind from
Vulpino in Lombardy, Italy; it is cut and polished
for ornamental purposes. A kind in
contorted concretionary forms is the tripestone.
2. Pseudomorphous; in cubes after rock-salt.
= Sulphur
Comp. Anhydrous calcium sulphate, CaS0 4 trioxide, 58'8,
lime 41-2 = 100.
Pyr., etc. coloring the flame reddish yellow, and yielding an enamel-
B.B. fuses at 3,
like bead which reacts alkaline. On charcoal in R.F. reduced to a sulphide; with soda
does not fuse to a clear globule, and is not absorbed by the coal like barite; is, however,
decomposed, and yields a mass which blackens silver. Soluble in hydrochloric acid.
Diff. Characterized by its cleavage in three rectangular directions (pseudo-cubic in
aspect); harder than gypsum; does not effervesce with acids like the carbonates.
Obs. Occurs in rocks of various ages, especially in limestone strata, and often the same
that contain ordinary gypsum, and also very commonly in beds of rock-salt; at the salt
mine near Hall in Tyrol, Austria; of Bex, Switzerland; at Aussee, upper Austria, crystal-
lized and massive; Liineburg, Hannover, Germany; Kapnik in Hungary; Wieliczka in
Poland; Ischl in Upper Austria; Berchtesgaden in Bavaria; Stassfurt, Germany, in fine
crystals,
" embedded in kieserite; in cavities in lava at Santorin Island.
In the United States, at Meriden, Conn.; at Lockport, N. Y., fine blue, in geodes of
black limestone, with calcite and gypsum; at West Paterson, N. J.; in limestone at Nash-
ville, Tenn., etc. In the salt beds of central Kansas. In Nova Scotia it forms extensive beds.
Anhydrite by absorption of moisture changes to gypsum. Extensive beds are some-
times thus altered in part or throughout, as at Bex, in Switzerland, where, by digging down
60 to 100 ft., the unaltered anhydrite may be found. Sometimes specimens of anhydrite
are altered between the folia or over the exterior.
Bassanite. CaSO4. In white opaque crystals having form of gypsum but. composed
of slender needles in parallel arrangement. These show parallel extinction and positive
elongation. G. = 2 '69-2 76. Transformed into anhydrite at red heat. Found in blocks
ejected from Vesuvius.
Zinkosite. ZnSO 4 Reported as occurring at a mine in the Sierra Almagrera, Spain.
.
Hydrocyanite. CuSO 4 Found at Vesuvius as a pale green to blue incrustation after

.
the eruption of 1868.

HOKUTOLITE. A mixture in variable proportions of lead and barium sulphates. A
radioactive crystalline crust deposited by hot springs at Hokuto, Formosa.
Millosevichite. Normal ferric and aluminium sulphate. As a violet incrustation, Alum
Grotto, Island of Vulcano, Lipari Islands.
CROCOITE.
0*9159; = 77 33'.
mm'", 110 A 1TO = 86 19'. 111 A 111 = 60 50'.
1n1Q ',
ck, 001 A 101 = 49 32'. ct, 001 A 111 = 46 58'.
Crystals usually prismatic, habit varied. Also imperfectly

columnar and granular.
Cleavage: m
(110) rather distinct; c (001), a (100) less so.
Fracture small conchoidal to uneven. Sectile. H. = 2*5-3. G. =
5*9-6*1. Luster adamantine to vitreous. Color various shades
Of bright hyacinth-red. Streak orange-yellow. Translucent.
p 4<.
Comp. Lead chromate, PbCrO 4 = Chromium trioxide
3rl, lead protoxide 68*9 = 100.
With
and
Tn
nea'r
HuSLrv
NiT.rfH,*'
Molrf^ TT
rTi
Ura Mt '
^ ^mV?'
;
tS n cr y stals
BraZl1 ' at Con
in I** veins
S^^ do Campo;
;
ali at
at
_
Mursinka
Rezbanya
infineCryStal8fr0m
î^
Lead chromate containing arsenious oxide. Hexagonal. In aggregates of

Bellite.
H. = 2' 5. G. = 5'5. Color crimson red, yellow to orange. Fusible.
delicate tuffs.
From Magnet, Tasmania.
Sulphates with Chlorides, Carbonates, etc. In part hydrous

LEADHILLITE.
Monoclinic. Axes a b : : c = 17476 : 1 :
2'2154; = 89 48'.
mm'", 110 A 110 = 120 27'. ex, 001 A 111 = 68 31'.
cw, 001 A 101 = 51 36'. cm, 001 A 110 = 89 54'.
Twins: tw. pi. m (110), analogous to aragonite. Crystals commonly tabu-

lar ||
c (001).
Cleavage: c (001) very perfect; a (100) in traces. Fracture conchoidal,
scarcely observable. Rather sectile. H.
= 2'5. G. = 6'26-6'44. Luster of
c pearly, other parts resinous, somewhat adamantine. Color white, passing
into yellow, green, or gray. Streak uncolored. Transparent to translucent.
Optically -.
= 1*93.
Comp. Sulphato-carbonate of lead, 4PbO.S0 3 .2C0 2 .H 2 or PbSO 4 .
2PbCO3 .Pb(OH) 2 = Sulphur trioxide 7'4, carbon dioxide 8'2, lead oxide 827,
water 17 = 100.
Pyr., etc. B.B. intumesces, fuses at 1'5, and turns yellow; but becomes white on
cooling. Easily reduced on charcoal. With soda affords the reaction for sulphuric acid.
Effervesces briskly in nitric acid, and leaves white lead sulphate undissolved. Yields water
in the closed tube.
Obs. Found at Leadhill, Scotland, with other ores of lead; in England at Red Gill,
Cumberland, and at Matlock, Derbyshire. -From the Mala-Calzetta lead mine near
Iglesias, Sardinia (maxite). Observed from Arizona, at the Schulz gold mine with wul-
fenite, yanadinite, cerussite; partly altered to cerussite. From Tintic district, Utah; from
from Granby, Mo.
Searchlight, Nev.,
SUSANNITE. Regarded at one time as rhombohedral and dimorphous with leadhillite,
but probably only a modification of that species. From the Susanna mine, Leadhill, in
Scotland.
Sulphohalite. 3Na 2 SO 4 NaCl.NaF. In pale greenish yellow octahedrons and dodeca-
hedrons, n = T455. From Borax lake, and Searles lake, San Bernardino Co., Cal.
Caracolite. Perhaps Pb(OH)Cl.Na 2 SO 4 . As a crystalline incrustation. Colorless.
From Atacama, Chile.
Kainite. 4 .KC1.3H 2 O.
MgSO Usually granular massive and in crusts. Color white
to dark flesh-red. Optically = 1'509. From Stassfurt, Germany, and Wolfenbrittel,
.
Brunswick; Kalusz, Galicia.

Connellite. Probably CuSO 4 .2CuCl 2 .19Cu(OH) 2 .H2 O. Crystals slender, hexagonal
prisms. Color fine blue. Optically +. co = 1724. From Cornwall, England; from
Eureka, Utah; Bisbee, Ariz. Footeite, originally described as a hydrous oxy chloride of
copper from Bisbee, Ariz., is identical with connellite.
Spangolite. A highly basic sulphate of aluminium and copper, Cu 6 AlClSOio.9H 2p. In
dark green hexagonal crystals (hemimorphic), tabular or short prismatic. Usually in very
small crystals. From the neighborhood of Tombstone, Ariz.; Clifton and Bisbee, Ariz.;
Tintic district; Utah; from Cornwall, England; Sardinia.
Hanksite. 9Na SO .2Na2CO
2 4 3 .KCl. In hexagonal prisms, short prismatic to tabular;
also in quartzoids. Color white to yellow. Optically. o> = T481. From Borax Lake,
San Bernardino Co., Cal.; also from Death Valley, Inyo Co
B. Acid and Basic Sulphates

Misenite. Probably acid potassium sulphate, HKSO 4. In silky fibers of a white color.
From Cape Misene, near Naples, Italy.
BROCHANTITE.
Orthorhombic. Axes a b c
= 07739 1 0'4871.
: : _ : :
In groups of prismatic acicular crystals (mm"' 110 A 110

= 75 28') and
massive with reniform structure.
drusy crusts;
Cleavage: 6(010) very perfect m (110)
in traces. Fracture uneven. H.=
;
3'5-4. G. = 3'907. Luster vitreous; a little pearly on the cleavage-face
6(101). Color emerald-green, blackish green. Streak paler green. Trans-

parent to translucent.
Comp. basic sulphate of. copper, CuSO 4 .3Cu(OH) 2 or 4CuO.S0 3
A .
3H O = = 100.
2 Sulphur trioxide 17'7, cupric oxide 70'3, water 12'0
Pyr., etc. Yields water, and at a higher temperature sulphuric acid, in the closed tube,
and becomes black. B.B. fuses, and on charcoal affords metallic copper. With soda gives
the reaction for sulphuric acid.
Obs. Occurs in the Ural Mts. the konigme (or komgite) was from Gumeshevsk,
;
Ural Mts.; in England near Roughten Gill, in Cumberland and in Cornwall (in part waring-
tonite); at Rezbanya, Hungary;
in small beds at Krisuvig in Iceland (krisuvigite) in ;
Mexico (brongnartine); Atacama and Tarapaca, Chile. In the United States, at Monarch
mine, Chaffee Co., Col.; in Utah, at Frisco, in Tintic district, at the Mammoth mine; in
Ch'fton-Morenci district, and Bisbee, Ariz.
Lanarkite. Basic lead sulphate, Pb 2 SO 6 In monoclinic crystals. Color greenish
.
white, pale yellow or gray. From Leadhill, Scotland; Siberia; the Harz Mts., Germany.
Dolerophanite. A basic cupric sulphate, Cu 2 SOs(?). In small brown monoclinic
crystals. From Vesuvius (eruption of 1868).
Caledonite. A basic sulphate of lead and copper, perhaps 2(Pb,Cu)O.SO 3 .H 2 O. Said
at times to contain CO 2 In small prismatic orthorhombic crystals. Color deep verdigris-
.
green or bluish green. Index, 1'85. From Leadhill, Scotland; Red Gill, Cumberland,
etc., England; Inyo Co., Cal.; Organ Mts., N. M.; Butte, Mon.; Atacama, Chile; New
Caledonia.
Linarite. A basic sulphate of lead and copper, (Pb,Cu)SO 4 .(Pb,Cu)(OH) 2 In deep .
blue monoclinic crystals. Optically = T838. From Leadhill, Scotland; Cumber-

.
land, England; the Ural Mts.; Broken Hill, New South Wales; Sardinia. Also Inyo Co.,
Cal.; Eureka, Utah; Schiilz, Ariz.; Slocan, British Columbia.
Antlerite. Perhaps CuSO .2Cu(OH) 2
4 . In light green soft lumps. From the Antler
mine, Mohave Co., Ariz. Stelznerite from Remolinos, Vallinar, Chile, is probably the same
as antlerite. In prismatic crystals. G. = 3 '9.
Alumian. Perhaps A1 2 O 3 .2SO 3 . White crystalline or massive. Sierra Almagrera,
C. Normal Hydrous Sulphates

Three well-characterized groups are included here. Two of these, the
EPSOMITE GROUP and the MELANTERITE GROUP, have the same general
formula, RS0 4 .7H 2 0, but in the first the crystallization is orthorhombic,
in the second monoclinic. The species are best known from the artificial
crystals of the laboratory; the native minerals are rarely crystallized. There
is also the isometric ALUM
GROUP, to which the same remark is applicable.
Lecontite. (Na,NH 4 ,K) 2 SO4.2H 2 O. From bat guano in the cave of Las Piedras, near
Comayagua, Central America.
MIRABILITE. Glauber Salt.

Monoclinic. Crystals like pyroxene in habit and angle. Usually in
efflorescent crusts.
Cleavage: a (100), perfect; e (001), b (010) in traces. H. = I' 5-2. G. =
1*481. Luster vitreous. Color white. to Taste
Transparent opaque. cool,
then feebly saline and bitter. Optically . 2V = 76. a = 1-396 6 =
T410. 7 = 1-419.
Comp. Hydrous sodium sulphate, Na SO
2 4 .10H2 O = Sulphur trioxide
24'8, soda 19'3, water 55'9
= 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube much water; gives an intense yellow to the flame,
Very
soluble in water. Loses its water on exposure to dry air and falls to powder.
Obs. Occurs at Ischl, Hallstadt, and Aussee in Upper Austria; also in
Hungary,
Switzerland, Italy; at the hot springs at Carlsbad, Bohemia, etc. Large quantities of this
sodium sulphate are obtained from the waters of Great Salt Lake, Utah.
Kieserite. MgSO 4 .H2 O. Monoclinic. Usually massive, granular to compact. Color
white, grayish, yellowish. Optically +. ft
= 1'535. From Stassfurt, Germany; Hall-
stadt, Austria; India.
Szomolnokite. FeSO 4 .H2 O. Monoclinic. Isomorphous with kieserite. In pyramids.
G. =3 '08. Color yellow or brown. Found with other iron sulphates from Szomolnok,
Hungary. Apparently identical with ferropallidite from near Copiapo, Chile.
Szmikite. MnSO 4 .H 2 O. Stalactitic. Whitish, reddish. From Felsobdnya,
Hungary.
GYPSUM.
Monoclinic. Axes a b : : c = 0'6899 0-4124; = 42'.
_80
mm' 110 A 110 = 68 30'. ', 111 A 111 = 36 12'.
cd, 001 A 101 = 28 17'. nn', 111 A Til = 41 20'.
ct, 001 A 101 = 33 8*'. ml, 110 A 111 = 49 9'.
ce, 001 A 103 = 11 29'. mn, 110 A 111 = 59 15'.
vv', Oil A Oil = 44 17|'.
1014 1015 1016 1017 1018
Crystals usually simple in habit, common form flattened 6 (010) or pris- ||
matic to acicular c axis; again prismatic by extension o{l (111). Also lentic-
1 1
ular by rounding of I (111) and e (103). The form e (103), whose faces are
usually rough and convex, is nearly at right angles to the vertical axis (edge
m (110)/w'" (110), hence the apparent hemimorphic character of the twin
(Fig. 1018). Simple crystals often with warped as well as curved surfaces.
Also foliated massive; lamellar-stellate; often granular massive; and some-
times nearly impalpable. Twins: tw. pi. a (100), very common, often the
familiar swallow-tail twins.
Cleavage: 6(010) eminent, yielding easily thin polished folia; a (100),
giving a surface with conchoidal fracture; n(lll), with a fibrous fracture ||
(101); a cleavage fragment has the rhombic form of Fig. 1019, with plane
angles of 66 and 114. H.
= l'5-2. G. = 2*3 14-2'328, when in pure crystals.
Luster of b (010) pearly and shining, other faces sub vitreous. Massive
varieties often glistening, sometimes dull earthy. Color usually white; some-
times gray, flesh-red, honey-yellow, ocher-yellow, blue; impure varieties often
black, brown, red, or reddish brown. Streak white. Transparent to opaque.
and Bx A c axis = 4 (at 9*4

Optically + . Ax. pi. ||
6 (010), 52i C.),
Dispersion p > v; also inclined strong. Bxr A Bxw = Q

(cf. Fig. 1019).
2V = 58. 1-520. |8
= 1
?
523. 7 = 1-530. On the effect of
30'. <
heat on the optical properties, see p. 297.

1019 Var. Crystallized, or Selenite; colorless, transpar-
1.
ent; in distinct crystals, or broad folia,

often large. Us-
fracture t (101), but
ually flexible and yielding a fibrous ||
the variety from Montmartre near Paris, France, rather

brittle.
2. coarse or fine.
Fibrous; Called Satin spar, when
fine-fibrous, with pearly opalescence.
3. Massive; Alabaster, a fine-grained variety, white or
delicately shaded; earthy or rock-gypsum, a dull-colored

rock, often impure with clay, calcium carbonate or silica.
Also, in caves, curious curved forms, often grouped in
rosettes and other shapes.
Comp. Hydrous calcium sulphate,
CaS0 4 .2H2 O = Sulphur trioxide 46-6, lime 32-5,
water 20'9 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube gives off water and becomes opaque. Fuses at 2 '5-3,
coloring the flame reddish yellow. For other reactions see ANHYDRITE, p. 629. Ignited
at a temperature not exceeding 260 C., it again combines with water when moistened, and
becomes firmly solid. Soluble in hydrochloric acid, and also in 400 to 500 parts of water.
Diff. Characterized by its softness in all varieties, and by cleavages in crystallized
kinds; it does not effervesce with acids like calcite, nor gelatinize like the zeolites; harder
than talc and yields much water in the closed tube.
Obs. Gypsum often forms extensive beds in connection with various stratified rocks,
especially limestones, and marlites or clay beds. It occurs occasionally in crystalline
rocks. It is also a product of volcanoes, occurring about fumaroles, or where sulphur
gases are escaping, being formed from the sulphuric acid generated, and the lime afforded
by the decomposing lavas. It is also produced by the decomposition of pyrite when lime
is present. Gypsum is also deposited on the evaporation of sea-water and brines, in which
it exists in solution.
Fine specimens are found in the salt mines of Bex in Switzerland; Hall in Tyrol, Austria;
the sulphur mines of Sicily; in the clay of Shotover Hill, near Oxford, England; and large
lenticular crystals at Montmartre, near Paris, France. A
noted locality of alabaster occurs
at Castelino, 35 m. from Leghorn, Italy, whence it is taken to Florence for the manufacture
of vases, figures, etc.
Occurs in extensive beds in several of the United States, and more particularly N. Y.,
Iowa, Mich., Okla., Texas, Ohio, and Ark., and is usually associated with salt springs, also
with rock salt. Also on a large scale in Nova Scotia, etc.
Handsome selenite and snowy gypsum occur in N. Y., near Lockport in limestone.
In Md., large grouped crystals on the St. Mary's in clay. In Ohio, large transparent
crystals have been found at Ellsworth and Canfield, Trumbull Co. In Tenn., selenite and
alabaster in Davidson Co. In Ky., in Mammoth Cave, it has the forms of rosettes, or
flowers, vines, and shrubbery. Also common in isolated crystals and masses, in the Cre-
taceous clays in the western United States. In enormous crystals, several feet in length, in
Wayne Co., Utah. In Nova Scotia, in Sussex, Kings Co., large single and grouped crystals,
which mostly contain much symmetrically disseminated sand.
Named from yyôs, the Greek for the mineral, but more especially for the calcined
mineral. The derivation' ordinarily suggested, from 777, earth, and tyeiv, to cook, corre-
sponds with this, the most common use of the word among the Greeks.
Burnt gypsum is called Plaster-of-Paris, because the Montmartre gypsum
quarries, near
Pans, are, and have long been, famous for affording it.
Use. In the manufacture of plaster-of-Paris used for molds and casts and as "staff "
in erection of temporary
buildings; in making adamant plaster for interior use; as land
plaster for fertilizer; as alabaster for ornamental purposes.
Hesite. (Mn,Zn,Fe)SO 4 .4H2 O. In loosely adherent aggregates. Color clear green,
from Colorado.
Epsomite Group. RS0 4 .7H 2 0. Orthorhombic

Epsomite MgS0 4 .7H 2 O a : b : c = 0-9902 : 1 : 0-5709
(Fe,Mg)S0 4 .7H 2
Goslarite ZnSO .7H2 O
4 0-9807 : 1 : 0-5631
Ferro-goslarite (Zn,Fe)SO 4 .7H 2 O
Morenosite NiSO 4 .7H2 O 0-9816 : 1 : 0-5655
EPSOMITE. Epsom Salt.
Orthorhombic. Usually in botryoidal masses and delicately fibrous crusts.

Cleavage: 6 (010) very perfect. Fracture conchoidal. H. = 2-0-2-5. G. =
= 1*751. Luster vitreous to earthy. Streak and color white. Transparent
to translucent. Taste bitter and saline. Optically 2V = 52. a = .
1-433. ft
= 1-455. T = 1-461.
Comp. Hydrous magnesium sulphate, 4 .7H 2 O
= Sulphur triox-
MgSO
ide 32-5, magnesia 16-3, water 51-2 = 100.
Obs. Common in mineral waters, and as a delicate fibrous or capillary efflorescence on
rocks, in the galleries of mines, and elsewhere. In the former state it exists at Epsom,
England, and at Sedlitz and Saidschitz (or Saidschiitz) in Bohemia. At Idria in Carniola,
Austria, it occurs in silky fibers, and is hence called hair salt by the workmen. Also ob-
tained at the gypsum quarries of Montmartre, near Paris. Also found at Vesuvius, at
the eruptions of 1850 and 1855.
The floors of the limestone caves of Kentucky, Tennessee, and Indiana, are in many
instances covered with epsomite, in minute crystals, mingled with the earth. In the
Mammoth Cave, Ky., it adheres to the roof in loose masses like snowballs. From Laramie
Basin, Wy.; near Leona Heights, Alameda Co., Cal.; Cripple Creek, Col.
Goslarite. ZnSO 4 .7H 2 O. Commonly massive. Color white, reddish, yellowish.
Optically .
= 1'480. Formed by the decomposition of sphalerite, and found in the
passages of mines, as at the Rammelsberg mine near Goslar, in the Harz Mts., Germany,
etc. In Mon. at the Gagnon mine, Butte. Ferro-goslarite (4*9 p. c. FeSO 4 ) occurs with
sphalerite at Webb City, Jasper Co., Mo. Cuprogoslarite (13 '4 p. c. CuSO-j) occurs as a
light greenish blue incrustation on the wall of an abandoned zinc mine at Galena, Kan.
Morenosite. NiSO4.7H 2 O. In acicular crystals; also fibrous, as an efflorescence.
Color apple-green to greenish white. = 1 '489. A result of the alteration of nickel ores,
as near Cape Hortegal, in Galicia; Riechelsdorf, in Hesse, Germany; Zermatt, Switzerland,
containing magnesium.
Melanterite Group. RS0 4 .7H2 O. Monoclinic

a : b : c
Melanterite FeSO 4 .7H2 1 -1828 : 1 : 1 -5427 ft

= 75 44'
Luckite (Fe,Mn)SO 4 .7H 2 O
Mallardite MnSO 4 .7H2 O
Pisanite (Fe,Cu)SO 4 .7H 2 O 1-1609 : 1 : 1-5110 74 38'
Bieberite CoSO 4 .7H2 1-1815 : 1 : 1-5325 75 20'
Cupromagnesite (Cu,Mg)SO 4 .7H 2 O
Boothite CuSO 4 .7H2 O 1-1622 : 1 ; 1-500 74 24'
Chalcanthite CuSO 4 .5H2 O Triclinic
a b c = 0-5656 1 0-5507; a = 82
: : : : 21', ft
= 73 11', 7 = 77 37'.
The species here included are the ordinary vitriols. They are identical in
general formula with the species of the Epsomite group, and are regarded as
the same compound essentially under oblique crystallization. The copper
in crystallization, and con-
sulphate, chalcanthite, diverges from the others
tains but 5 molecules of water.
MELANTERITE. Copperas.
and concretionary;
Monoclinic. Usually capillary, fibrous, stalactitic,
also massive, pulverulent. Cleavage: c (001) perfect; (110) less so. Frao- m
Brittle. H. = 2. G. = 1-89-1-90. Luster vitreous. Color,
turernchoidal.
on exposure.
various shades of -green, passing into white; becoming yellowish
to translucent. Taste sweetish astrin-
Streak uncolored. Subtransparent
+ 2V = 86. a = 1-471. ft
= 1-478. 7 =
gent, and metallic. Optically .
1 *486
Comp Hydrous ferrous sulphate, FeSO 4 .7H 2 O = Sulphur trioxide
45*3 = 100. Manganese and magnesium
28-8, iron protoxide 25-9, water
sometimes replace part of the iron.
thus near Goslar in the
Obs Proceeds from the decomposition of pyrite or marcasite;
and e sewhere. Usually
Harz Mts Germany; Bodenmais in Bavaria; Falun, Sweden,
as an efflorescence. In crystals from near Leona
accompanies pyrite in the United States,
c. MnO) is from the "Lucky Boy mine,
Heights, Alameda Co., Cal. Luckite (1'9 p.
Butterfield Canon, Utah.
Mallardite. MnSO 4 .7H 2O. Fibrous, massive; colorless. From the mine Lucky
Boy," south of Salt Lake, Utah.
and stalactitic
Pisanite. (Fe,Cu)SO 4 .7H 2O. CuO 10 to 15 p. c. In concretionary
forms. Color blue. From Turkey. From Bingham, Utah; Ducktown,
Tenn. near
Leona Heights, Cal.
SALVADORITE. A copper-iron vitriol near pisanite. From the Salvador mine Quetena,
Chile.
Bieberite. CoSO 4 .7H 2O. Usually in stalactites and crusts. Color flesh- and rose-red.
From Bieber, in Hesse, Germany, etc.
Boothite. CuSO 4 .7H 2O. Usually massive. H. = 2-2'5. G. = 1'94. Color blue,
paler than chalcanthite. Found at Alma pyrite mine, near Leona Heights, Alameda Co.,
and at a copper mine near Campo Seco, Calaveras Co., Cal.
CUPROMAGNESITE. (Cu,Mg)SO 4 .7H 2 O. From Vesuvius.
CHALCANTHITE. Blue Vitriol.
Crystals commonly flattened

Triclinic. p (111). Occurs also massive,
||
stalactitic,reniform,_sometimes with fibrous structure.

Cleavage: M
(110), m
(110), p (111) imperfect. Fracture conchoidal.
Brittle. H. = 2-5. G. = 212-2 -30. Luster vitreous. Color Berlin-blue
to sky-blue, of different shades sometimes a little greenish.
;
Streak uncolored.
Subtransparent to translucent. Taste metallic and nauseous. Optically .
2V = 56. a = 1-516. ft
= 1-539. 7 = 1'546.
Comp. Hydrous cupric sulphate, CuSO 4 .5H 2 = Sulphur trioxide
32-1, cupric oxide 31-8, water 361 = 100.
Pyr., etc. In the closed tube yields water, and at a higher temperature sulphur tri-
oxide. B.B. with soda on charcoal yields metallic copper. With the fluxes reacts for
copper. Soluble in water; a drop of the solution placed on a surface of iron coats it with
metallic copper.
Obs. Found in waters issuing from mines and in connection with rocks containing
chalcopyrite, by the alteration of which it is formed; thus at the Rammelsberg mine near
Goslar in the Harz Mts., Germany; Falun in Sweden; Parys mine, Anglesea, England; at
various mines in County Wicklow, Ireland; Rio Tinto mine, Spain; Zajecar, Servia. From
the Hiwassee copper mine, also in large quantities at other mines, in Polk Co., Tenn. In
near Clifton, Graham Co., and Jerome, Yavapai Co.;
Ariz., in Cal. near Leona Heights,
Alameda Co.; from Ely and Reno, Nev.
Syngenite. Kaluzite. CaSO 4 .K 2SO 4 .H 2O. In prismatic (monoclinic) crystals. Color-
less or milky-white. = 1 '517. From Kalusz, Galicia.
SULPHATES. CHROMATES, ETC. 637
Loweite. MgSO 4 .Na 2 SO 4 .2|H 2 O. Tetragonal. Massive, cleavable. Color pale yel-
low. Index, 1'49. From Ischl, Austria.
Blodite. MgSO4.Na 2 SO4.4H 2 O. Crystals short prismatic, monoclinic; also massive
granular or compact. Colorless to greenish, yellowish, red. Optically ft
= 1/488. .
From the salt mines of Ischl and at Hallstadt (simonyite), Austria; at Stassfurt, Germany;
the salt lakes of Astrakhan (astrakanite), Asia; India; Chile, etc. From Soda Lake, San
Luis Obispo Co., Cal
Leonite. MgSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .4H 2 O. In monoclinic crystals from Westeregeln and Leo-
poldshall, Germany. = 1-487.
Boussingaultite. (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 .MgSO 4 .6H 2 O. From the boric acid lagoons, Tuscany.
Italy. Index, 1-474.
Picromerite. .K 2 SO 4 .6H 2 .O. As a white crystalline incrustation. Monoclinic.
MgSO 4
Optically +. /3
= From Vesuvius with cyanochroite, an isomorphous species in
1'463.
which copper replaces the magnesium. Also at Stassfurt (schoenite) and Aschersleben,
Germany; Galusz in East Galicia.
Polyhalite. 2CaSO 4 .MgSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .2H 2O. Triclinic. Usually in compact fibrous or
lamellar masses. Color flesh- or brick-red. Optically ft
= 1'562. Occurs at the .
mines of Ischl, Hallstadt, etc., in Austria; in Germany at Berchtesgaden, Bavaria;

Stassfurt, Prussia.
Hexahydrite. MgSO 4 .6H 2 O. Columnar to fibrous structure. Cleavage prismatic.
G. = 1"76. Color, white with light green tone. Pearly luster. Opaque. Salty, bitter
taste. B.B. exfoliates and yields water but does not fuse. Found in Lillooet district,
British Columbia.
Alum Group. Isometric
RA1(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O or R SO2 4 .A1 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H 2 O.

Kalinite PotashAlum KA1(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2
Tschermigite Ammonia Alum (NH 4 )A1(S0 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O
Mendozite Soda Alum NaAl(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O
The ALUMS proper are isometric in crystallization and, chemically, are
hydrous sulphates of aluminium with an
alkali metal and 12 (i.e., if the for-
mula is doubled, 24) molecules of water. The species listed above occur very
sparingly in nature, and are best known in artificial form in the laboratory.
The HALOTRICHITES are oblique in crystallization, very commonly fibrous
in structure,and are hydrous sulphates of aluminium with magnesium, man-
ganese, etc. the amount of water in some cases is given as 22 molecules, and in
;
others 24, but it is not always easy to decide between the two. Here belong:
Pickeringit. Magnesia Alum. MgSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 )3.22H 2O. In long fibrous masses;
and in efflorescences.
Halotrichite. Iron Alum. FeSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 )3.24H 2O. In yellowish silky fibrous forms.
Index, 1.48.
Bilinite. FeSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H 2 O. Radiating fibrous. Color white to yellow. From
Schwaz, near Bilin, Bohemia.
Apjohnite. MnSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H2O. Bushmanite contains
Manganese Alum. MgO.
In fibrous or asbestiform masses; also as crusts and efflorescences.
Dietrichite. (Zn,Fe,Mn)SO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .22H2 O.
Coquimbite. Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .9H 2 O. Rhombohedral. Granular massive. Color white, yel-

lowish, brownish. Optically +. = 1-550. From the Tierra Amarilla near Copiapo,
Chile (not from Coquimbo).
Quenstedtite. Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .10H 2O. In reddish tabular crystals. With coquimbite,
Chile.
Ihleite. An orange yellow efflorescence on graphite. From Mu-

Fe2 (SO 4 ) 3 .12H 2 O?
grau, Bohemia. Perhaps identical with copiapite.
in delicate fibrous masses or crusts; massive.
Alunogen. A1 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .18H 2 O. Usually
Color white, or tinged with yellow or red. From near Bilm, Bohemia; Bodenmais, Ger-
Elba. Fjom Cripple Creek, Doughty
many; Pusterthal, Tyrol, Austria; from Vesuvius;
Springs, and Alum Gulch, Col.
DOUGHTYITE. A hydrated aluminium sulphate deposited by the alkaline waters of the
Doughty Springs in Col.
Krohnkite. CuSO 4 .Na2 SO 4 .2H 2 O. Monoclinic crystalline; massive, coarsely fibrous.
Color azure-blue. Optically /3.
= 1'577. From Calama, Atacama, Chuquicamata,
Autofagasta, and Collahurasi, Tarapaca, Chile.
Natrochalcite. Cu 4 (OH) 2 (SO 4 )2.Na2 SO4.2H 2 O. Monoclinic. Habit pyramidal. Per-
fect basal cleavage. H. = 4 -5. G. = 2 '3. Color bright emerald-green. = 1-65.
Found at Chuquicamata, Autofagasta, Chile.
PHILLIPITE. Perhaps CuSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .nH 2 O. In blue fibrous masses. Found at the
copper mines in the Cordilleras of Condes, province of Santiago, Chile.
Ferronatrite. 3Na 2 SO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .6H 2 O. Rhombohedral. Rarely in acicular crystals;
Color greenish or gray to white. Optically eo = 1-558.
+
usually in spherical forms.
From Sierra Gorda near Caracoles, Chile.
Romerite. FeSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .14H 2 O. In tabular triclinic crystals; granular, massive.
Color chesnut-brown. From Goslar in the Harz Mts., Germany; Persia; Chile.
Basic Hydrous Sulphates
Langite. Near brochantite. CuSO 4 .3Cu(OH) 2 .H 2 O. Usually in fibre-lamellar, con-

cretionary crusts. Color blue to greenish blue. From Cornwall.
Herrengrundite. 2(CuOH) 2 SO 4 .Cu(OH) 2 .3H 2 O with one-fifth of the copper replaced
by calcium. In thin tabular monoclinic crystals; usually in spherical groups. Color
emerald-green, bluish green. From Herrengrund, Hungary.
Vernadskite. 3CuSO 4 .Cu(OH) 2 .4H 2 O. In aggregates of minute crystals. H. = 3'5.
Occurs as an alteration of dolerophanite at Vesuvius.
Kamarezite. A hydrous basic copper sulphate from Laurion, Greece.
Cyanotrichite. Lettsomite. O
Perhaps 4CuO.Al 2 3 .SO 3 .8H 2 O. In velvet-like druses; in
spherical forms. Color bright blue. From Moldawa in the Banat, Hungary;
Cap Ga-
ronne, France. In Utah and Arizona.
Serpierite. A and zinc. In minute crystals, tabular, in tufts.
basic sulphate of copper
Color bluish green. From
Laurion, Greece.
Beaverite. CuO.PbO.Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .4H2 O. Hexagonal ? In microscopic plates Color
canary-yellow. Refractive index > 174. From Horn Silver mine, Frisco, Beaver Co
Utah.
Vegasite. PbO.3Fe 2 O 3 .3SO 3 .6H 2 O. Hexagonal. In microscopic fibrous crystals some-
times showing hexagonal plates. Optically -
Indices, 1 75-1 '82.
.
Found in Yellow Pine
district, near Las Vegas, Nev.
COPIAPITE.
Monoclinic. Usually in loose aggregations of crystalline scales, or granular
massive; mcrusting.
Cleavage: b (010).. H. = 2-5. G. = 2-103. Luster pearly. Color sul-
phur-yellow, citron-yellow. Translucent. Optically -. a = 1-527. ='
l'O4/. y = 1'572.
Comp.A basic ferric sulphate,
perhaps 2Fe 2 O 3 .5SO 3 .18H 2 O = Sul-
phur tnoxide 38 -3, iron sesquioxide 30-6, water 31-1 = 100.
Wh Ch S been 8 mew
^t vaguely applied. It seems to belong in
arSe^nrl
t here and fnl^l
in part also / !l?
to other 3
related .
species. Janosite identical with
is
copiapit?.
Pyr., etc. Yields water, and at a higher temperature sulphuric acid. On charcoal
becomes magnetic, and with soda affords the reaction for sulphuric acid. With the fluxes
reacts for iron. Soluble in water, and decomposed by boiling water.
Obs. The original copiapite was from Copiapo, Chile. Also from Elba and from
near Leona Heights, Alameda Co., Cal.
Other hydrated ferric sulphates:

Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .8H 2 O. Color chestnut-brown. From Sierra Gorda, Chile.
Castanite.-
Utahite. 3Fe 2 O3.2SO 3 .7H 2 O. In aggregates of fine scales. Color
orange-yellow
From the Tintic district, Utah; Guanaco, Taltal, Chile. Perhaps identical with carpho-
'
siderite.
Amarantite. Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .7H 2 O. Triclinic. Usually in columnar or bladed
masses, also
radiated. Color amaranth-red. From near Caracoles, Chile. Hohmannite is the same
partially altered; this is probably also true of paposite.
Fibroferrite. FeÔs^SO-j-lOHaO. Orthorhombic. In delicately fibrous aggregates.
Color pale yellow, nearly white. From the Tierra Amarilla near Copiapo, Chile.
Raimondite. 2Fe 2 O 3 .3SO 3 .7H2 O. In thin six-sided tables. Color between honey- arid
ocher-yellow. From the tin mines of Ehrenfriedersdorf mines of Bolivia. Perhaps iden-
;
tical with carphosiderite.
Carphosiderite. 3Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .7H 2 O.

In reniform masses, and incrustations; also in
micaceous lamellae. Color straw-yellow. From Greenland. Utahite, apatelite, raimon-
dite and cyprusite are probably identical with carphosiderite.
Planoferrite. Fe 2 O 3 .SO 3 .15H2 O. Orthorhombic? In rhombic or hexagonal plates.
Yellowish green to brown. From near Morro Moreno, Autofagasta, Chile.
Glockerite. O
2Fe 2 3 .SO 3 .6H 2 O. Massive, sparry or earthy; stalactitic. Color brown
to ocher-yellow to pitch-black; dull green. From Goslar, Harz Mts., Germany.
Knoxvillite. A
hydrous basic sulphate of chromium, ferric iron, and aluminium. In
rhombic plates. Color greenish yellow. From the Redington mercury mine, Knoxville,
Cal.
REDINGTONITE. A hydrous chromium sulphate, in finely fibrous masses of a pale
purple color. From Redington mercury mine, Knoxville, Cal.
Cyprusite. Perhaps 7Fe 2 O 3 .Al 2 O 3 .10SO 3 .14H 2 O. An aggregation of microscopic
crystals. Color yellowish. From the island of Cyprus. Perhaps identical with carpho-
siderite.
Aluminite ( Websterite) A1 2 O 3 .SO 3 .9H 2 O. Usually in white earthy reniform masses,
.
compact. Index, 1'48. From near Halle, Germany, in clay; also at Newhaven, Sussex,
England, and elsewhere.
Paraluminite. Near aluminite, but supposed to be 2A1 2O 3 .SO 3 .15H 2 O.
Felsobanyite. 2A1 2 O 3 .SO 3 .10H2 O. Massive; in scaly concretions. Color snow-white.
From near Felsobanya, Hungary.
Botryogen. Perhaps MgO.FeO.Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .18H 2 O. Monoclinic. Usually in reniform
and botryoidal shapes. Color deep hyacinth-red, ocher-yellow. 13 = 1*548. From Falun,
Sweden; also from Persia; from Lake and Napa Cos., Cal.
Sideronatrite. 2Na2 O.Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .7H 2 O. Fibrous, massive. Color yellow. From the
province of Tarapaca, Chile. Also on the Urus plateau, near Sarakaya, on the island,
Cheleken, in the Caspian Sea (urusite).
Voltaite. Perhaps 3(K 2 ,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6SO 3 .9H 2 O. In octahedrons, etc. Color
dull oil-green to brown or black. From the solfatara near Naples; Schmolnitz, Hungary;
also Persia.
Metavoltine. Perhaps 5(K 2 ,Na 2 ,Fe)O.3Fe 2 O 3 .12SO 3 .18H 2 O. In aggregates of minute
yellow scales. Occurs with voltaite in Persia. From Vesuvius; found in fumeroles on
islands of Milo and Vulcano; from Miseno, Italy.
ALUNITE. Alumstone.
Rhombohedral. Axis c = 1-2520. In rhombohedrons, resembling cubes

(rr' 1011 A 1101 = 90 50'). Also massive, having a fibrous, granular, or
impalpable texture.
Cleavage: c (0001) distinct; r (lOll) in traces. Fracture flat conchoidal,

uneven; of massive varieties splintery; and sometimes earthy. Brittle. H.
=
3-5-4. G. = 2-58-2:752. Luster of r vitreous, basal plane somewhat pearly.
Color white, sometimes grayish or reddish. Streak white. Transparent to
subtranslucent. Optically co +
1-572. . e 1'592. = =
Comp. Basic hydrous sulphate of aluminium and potassium, 2 A1 6 K
(OH)i 2 (SO 4 ) 4 = Sulphur trioxide 38'6, alumina 37'0, potash 11-4, water 13 -0
=
100. Sometimes contains considerable soda, natroalunite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. decrepitates, and is infusible. In the closed tube yields water, some-
times also ammonium sulphate, and at a higher temperature sulphurous and sulphuric
oxides. Heated with cobalt solution affords a fine blue color. With soda and charcoal
infusible, but yields a hepatic mass. Soluble in sulphuric acid.
Obs. Forms seams in trachytic and allied rocks, where it has been formed as a result
of the alteration of the rock by means of sulphurous vapors; as at Tolfa, near Civitavecchia,
Italy; in Hungary; on Milo, Grecian Archipelago; at Mt. Dore, France; Kinkwaseki,
Formosa. In the United States, associated with diaspore, in rhombohedral crystals, tabu-
lar through the presence of c (0001) at the Rosita Hills, Custer Co., and from Red Mt., Col.;
Marysvale, Utah; Goldfield and near Sulphur, Nev.
JAROSITE.
_Rhombohedral. Axis c = 1-2492; rr' lOll A TlOl = 90 45', cr 0001 A
1011 = 55 16'. Often in druses of minute crystals; also fibrous, granular
massive; in nodules, or as an incrustation.
Cleavage: c (0001) distinct. Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. = 2-5-3-5.
G. = 3-15-3-26. Luster vitreous to subadamantine brilliant, also dull. :
Color ocher-yellow, yellowish brown, clove-brown. Streak yellow, shining.

Optically +. co = 1-74. e = 177.
Comp. K
2 Fe 6 (OH)i 2 (SO 4 ) 4 = Sulphur trioxide 31*9, iron sesquixoide
47-9, potash 9-4, water 10'8 = 100.
Obs. The original Gelbeisenerz was from Luschitz, between Kolosoruk and Bilin,
Bohemia, in brown coal; and later from Modum, Norway, in alum slate. The jarosite was
from Barranco Jaroso, in the Sierra Almagrera,
Spain; Schlaggenwald, Bohemia; Elba;
Chocaya, Potosi, Bolivia. In the United States on quartz in the Vulture mine, Ariz.; in
Chaffee County, Col.; Tintic district,
Bisbee, Ariz.; Brewster Co., Texas.
Utah; Lawrence Co., S. D.; Dona Ana Co. N. M
^
Natrojarosite. Na*Fe 6 (OH) 12 (SO 4 ) 4 Rhombohedral. In minute tabular
.
crvstals.
Color yellow-brown. From Soda Springs Valley, Esmeralda Co., Nev.
Plumbojarosite. PbFe 6 (OH) 12 (SO 4 ) 4 Rhombohedral. In minute tabular crystals.
.
Color dark brown. From Cook's Peak, N. M., and in Beaver County, Utah.
Palmierite. 3(K,Na) 2 SO 4 .4PbSO 4 ? In microscopic plates, often hexagonal in outline.
Colorless. Fusible. Found in fumerole deposits at Vesuvius.
K 0.3A1
2 2 3 .4SO 9H 0.
2 In rounded masses, similar to compact
N^S 4 - Al2 ( S 4) 3 - 5A1 (OH) 3 .H 2 0. Compact. White. From Almeria,

6*
From^m^ ?erihapS 6 ? a 9- A1 ^3.3S0 3 .33H 2 0. In minute colorless acicular crystals.
From limestone-inclusions m
lava, near Rhenish Mayen, Prussia; Tombstone, An/
of
TUNGSTATES, MOLYBDATES 641
canary-yellow. H. =2. G. > 3 '3. Indices, 1 '57-1 -61. Infusible. Readily soluble in
acids. From Gilpin Co., Col.
Uranopilite. Perhaps CaUgSaOai^SHÔ. In velvety incrustations; yellow. From
Johanngeorgenstadt, Germany.
Zippeite, voglianite, uraconite are uncertain uranium sulphates, from Joachimstal,
Bohemia.
Minasragrite. An acid hydrous vanadyl sulphate (V2 O2)H 2 (SO4).15HjO. Probably

monoclinic. In granular aggregates, small mammillary masses, or in spherulites. Two
cleavages. Color blue. Indices 1-5 1-1 '54. Strongly pleochroic, deep blue to colorless.
Easily fusible. Soluble in cold water. Found as an efflorescence on patronite from Minas-
ragra, Peru.
Rhomboclase. A hydrated acid ferric sulphate. Fe 2 O 3 .4SO3.9H2O. In rhombic plates.
Basal cleavage. Colorless. Occurs at Szomolnok, Hungary.
Tellurates; also Tellurites, Selenites

Montanite. In earthy incrustations; yellowish to white. From
Highland, Mon., with tetradymite.
Emmonsite. Probably a hydrated ferric tellurite. In thin yellow-green scales. From
near Tombstone, Ariz.
Durdenite. Hydrous ferric tellurite, Fe2(TeOs)3.4H2O. In small mammillary forms;
greenish yellow. Honduras.
Chalcomenite. Hydrous cupric selenite, CuSeO 3 .2H 2 O. In small blue monoclinic

crystals. From the Cerro de Cacheuta, Argentina, with silver, copper selenides.
MOLYBDOMENITE is lead selenite and COBALTOMENITE probably cobalt selenite, from
the same locality as chalcomenite.
Oxygen Salts
7. TUNGSTATES, MOLYBDATES
The monoclinic Wolframite Group and the tetragonal Scheelite Group are
included here.
Wolframite Group
Wolframite (Fe,Mn)WO 4 a : b : c = 0-8300 : 1 : 0-8678 89 22'
Hiibnerite MnWO 4 0-8362 : 1 : 0-8668 89
WOLFRAMITE.
Monoclimc. Axes a : c = 0-8300 : 1 :
0-8678; 89 22'
mm'", 110 A 110 = 79 23'. ay', 100 A 102 = 62 54' 1020

at, 100 A 102 = 61 54'. ff', Oil A Oil = 81 54'.
Twins: (1) tw. axis c with a (100) as comp.-face; (2)

tw. pi. k (023), Fig. 449, p. 171. Crystals commonly
tabular || a (100); also prismatic. Faces in prismatic
zone vertically striated. Often bladed, lamellar, coarse
divergent columnar, granular.
Cleavage: b (010) very perfect; also parting ||
a (100), and || t (102). Fracture uneven. Brittle. H. =
5-5-5. G. = 7-2-7-5. Luster submetallic. Color dark
grayish or brownish black. Streak nearly black. Opaque, Sometimes weakly
magnetic. = 1*93.
Comp. Tungstate of iron and manganese (Fe,Mn)W0 4 Fe . : Mn =

chiefly 4 : 1 (FeO 18-9, MnO 47 p. c.) and 2 3 (FeO 9'5, MnO 14-0). :
Pyr., etc. Fuses B.B. easily (F. = 2-5-3) to a globule, which has a crystalline surface
and is magnetic. With salt of phosphorus gives a clear reddish yellow glass while hot
which is paler on cooling; in R.F. becomes dark red; on charcoal with tin, if not too satu-
rated, the bead assumes on cooling a green color, which continued treatment in R.F. changes
to reddish yellow. With soda and niter on platinum foil fuses to a bluish green manganate.
Decomposed by aqua regia with separation of tungstic acid as a yellow powder. Suffi-
ciently decomposed by concentrated sulphuric acid, or even hydrochloric acid, to give a
colorless solution, which, treated with metallic zinc, becomes intensely blue, but soon
bleaches on dilution.
Obs. Wolframite is often associated with tin ores; also in quartz, with native bismuth,
scheelite, pyrite, galena, sphalerite, etc. In Bohemia in fine crystals at Schlackenwald,
Zinnwald, Bohemia; in Germany at Schneeberg, Freiberg, Altenberg, Neudorf; at Ner-
chinsk, Siberia; Chanteloup, near Limoges, France; near Redruth and elsewhere in Corn-
wall with tin ores. From Sardinia; Greenland; Central Provinces, India. In South
America, at Oruro in Bolivia. With tin stone at various points in New South Wales.
In the United States at Lane's mine, Monroe, Conn.; Flowe mine, Mecklenburg Co.,
N. C., with scheelite; in Mo., near Mine la Motte; Laurence Co., S. D.; Boulder Co.]
Col.; Ariz.
Use. An ore of tungsten.
Hiibnerite. Near wolframite, but containing 20 to 25 p. c. MnO. Usually in bladed
forms, rarely in distinct terminated crystals. Color brownish red to hair-brown to nearly
black. Streak yellowish brown, greenish gray. Often translucent, ft = 2 '24. Mammoth
Nev.; Ouray County, Col., and near Silyerton, San Juan Co.; Black Hills,
district, S. D.;
Dragoon, Ariz. Also in Peru, and in rhodochrosite at Adervielle in the Pyrenees.
Scheelite Group. Tetragonal-pyramidal

Scheelite CaW0 4 pp' (111 A 111) = 79 55J' c = 1-5360
Cuprotungstite CuWO 4
Cuproscheelite (Ca,Cu)W0 4
Powellite Ca(Mo,W)04 80 1' c = 1-5445
Stolzite PbW0 4 80 15' c = T5667
Wulfenite PbMo0 4 80 22' c = 1-5771
The SCHEELITE GROUP includes the tungstates and molybdates of calcium
and lead; also copper.In crystallization they belong to the
Pyramidal class
of the Tetragonal System. Wulfenite is probably hemimorphic.
SCHEELITE.
Tetragonal-pyramidal. Axis c = 1-5356.
ee', 101 A Oil = 72 40*'. 111 A ill =
= pp', 79 55*'
ce, 001 A 101 56 56'. cp, 001 A 111 = 65 16|'.
1021 1022 1023 1024
Forms: (102), e (101). ft (113), p (111), k (515), ft (313), ,,(131)

TUNGSTATES, MOLYBDATES 643
Twins: (1) tw. pi. a (100), both contact- and penetration-twins (Fig.
416,
p. 167). Habit octahedral, also tabular. Symmetry shown by faces k, h, s
(Fig. 1023). Also reniform with columnar structure; massive granular.
Cleavage: p (111) most distinct; e (101) interrupted. Fracture uneven.
Brittle. H. = 4-5-5. G. = 5-9-6-1. Luster vitreous, inclining to adaman-
tine. Color white, yellowish white, pale yellow, brownish, greenish, reddish.
Streak white. Transparent to translucent. Optically -f. Indices: w =
1-918. e = 1-934.
Comp. Calcium tungstate, CaWO = 4 Tungsten trioxide 80-6, lime
19-4 = 100.
Molybdenum is usually present (to 8 p. c.). Copper may replace calcium, see cupro-
scheelite.
Pyr., etc. B.B. in the forceps fuses at 5 to a semi-transparent glass. Soluble with
borax to a transparent glass, which afterward becomes opaque and crystalline. With salt
of phosphorus forms a glass, colorless in outer flame, in inner green when hot, and fine
blue when cold; varieties containing iron require to be treated on charcoal with tin before
the blue color appears. In hydrochloric or nitric acid decomposed, leaving a yellow powder
soluble in ammonia. The hydrochloric acid solution treated with tin and boiled assumes
a blue color, later changing to brown.
Obs. Scheelite is usually associated with crystalline rocks, and is commonly found in
connection with cassiterite, topaz, fluorite, apatite, molybdenite, or wolframite, in quartz;
also associated with gold. Thus at Schlackenwald and Zinnwald, Bohemia; Altenberg,
Saxony; Riesengrund in the Riesengebirge, Germany; the Knappenwand in the Unter-
sulzbachtal, Tyrol, Austria; Carrock Fells in Cumberland, England; Traversella in Pied-
mont, Italy; Meymac, Correze, France (containing Ta 2 O 5 ); Sweden; Pitkaranta in Fin-
land. In New South Wales, at Adelong, from a gold mine; New Zealand, massive; Mt.
Ramsay, Tasmania, with cassiterite. From Sonora, Mexico.
In the United States, at Lane's Mine, Monroe, and at Trumbull, Conn.; Flowe mine,
Mecklenburg Co., N. C.; the Mammoth mining district, Nev.; with gold at the Charity
mine, Warren's, Idaho; Lake Co., Col.; Atolia mining field, Cal.; White Pine Co., Nev.;
Dragoon, Ariz. In quartz veins in Risborough and Marlow, Beauce county, Quebec.
Use. An ore of tungsten.
Cuprotungstite. Cupric tungstate, CuWO 4 From the copper mines of Llamuco, near
.
Santiago, Chile. CUPROSCHEELITE, from the vicinity of La Paz, Lower California, is

(Ca,Cu)WO 4 with 6'8 p. c. CuO; color green. From Montoro, Spain; from Yeoral, New
,
South Wales.
Powellite. Calciuni molybdate with calcium tungstate (10 p. c. WO
3 ), Ca(Mo,W)O 4 .
In minute yellow tetragonal pyramids. G. = 4'349. w = 2 '00. From western Idaho;

Houghton Co., Mich.; from Llano Co., Texas, and Nye Co., Nev.
Stolzite. Lead tungstate, PbWO 4 In pyramidal tetragonal crystals. H. = 2-75-3.
.
G. = 7-87-8-13. Color green to gray or brown. Optically -. <o = 2'269. Zinnwald,

Bohemia; Sardinia; Minas Geraes, Brazil; Broken Hill, New South Wales. From Loud-
ville, Mass.
Raspite. Has the same composition as stolzite, but is referred to the monoclinic
system. In small tabular crystals. Color brownish yellow. Index, 2*60. From the
Broken Hill mines, New South Wales;. Minas Geraes, Brazil.
Chillagite. 3PbWO 4 .PbMoO 4 In tabular tetragonal crystals, apparently hemimorphic.
.
Color yellow to brownish. H. = 3 -5. G. = 7'5. From Chillagoe, Queensland.
WULFENITE.
Tetragonal-pyramidal; hemimorphic. Axis c = 1-5771.
cu, 001 A 102 = 38 15'. uu', 102 A 012 = 51 56'.
ce, 001 A 101 = 57 37'. ee', 101 A Oil = 73 20'.
en, 001 A 111 = 65 51'. nn' t 111 A Til = 80 22'.
Crystals commonly square tabular, sometimes extremely thin; less fre-

quently octahedral; also prismatic. Hemimorphism sometimes distinct.
Also granularly massive, coarse or fine, firmly cohesive.
less distinct. Fracture

Cleavage- n (111) very smooth; c (001), s (113)
subconchoidal. Brittle. H. = 275-3. G. = 67-7-0. Luster resinous or
adamantine. Color wax- to orange-yellow, siskin- and olive-green, yellowish
1028
1027
also orange to bright red.

gray, grayish white to nearly colorless, brown;
Streak white. Subtransparent to subtranslucent. Optically negative.
Indices: <* = 2-402, er = 2-304.
Comp. Lead molybdate, 4
= Molybdenum trioxide 39'3, lead
PbMo0
oxide 607 = 100. Calcium sometimes replaces the lead.
Pyr., etc.
B.B. decrepitates and fuses below 2. With salt 9f phosphorus in O.F. gives
a yellowish green glass, which in R.F. becomes dark green. With soda on charcoal yields
metallic lead. Decomposed on evaporation with hydrochloric acid, with the formation of
lead chloride and molybdic oxide; on moistening the residue with water and adding metallic
zinc, it gives an intense blue color, which does not fade on dilution of the liquid.
Obs. -Ôccurs in veins with other ores of lead. At Bleiberg, Carinthia; Rezbanya,
Hungary; Pfibram, Austria; Moldawa in the Banat, Hungary; Annaberg, Schneeberg,
Germany; Sardinia; Broken Hill, New South Wales.
In the United States, sparingly at the Southampton lead mine, and at Quincy, Mass.,
and near Sing Sing, N. Y.; near Phenixville, Pa.; at the Comstock lode and at Eureka in
Nev. in large thin orange-yellow tables at the Tecomah mine, Utah. In N. M., pale yellow
;
in the Organ Mts. In Ariz., large deep red crystals at the Hamburg and* other
crystals
mines, Yuma Co., often with red vanadinite; also at the Castle Dome district, 30 miles
distant; at the Mammoth gold mine near Oracle, Pinal Co., with vanadinite and descloizite.
Named after the Austrian mineralogist Wulfen (1728-1805).
Use. An ore of molybdenum.
Reinite. Ferrous tungstate, FeWO

In blackish brown tetragonal pyramids, perhaps
4.
pseudomorphous. H. = 4. G. = 6*64.
Kimbosan, Japan.
Koechlinite. A molybdate of bismuth, Bi2 O 3 .MoO 3 Orthorhombic. In minute tabu-
.
lar crystals. Cleavage, a (100). Color, greenish yellow. Index, 2'55. Easily fusible.
From Schneeberg, Saxony, Germany.
Ferritungstite. Fe2O3.WO3.6H 2O. In microscopic hexagonal plates. Color pale yel-
low to brownish yellow. Decomposed by acids leaving yellow Product of
tungstic oxide.
oxidation of Wolframite from Germania Tungsten mine. Deer Trail district, Wash.
VII. SALTS OF ORGANIC ACIDS

Oxalates, Mellates
Whewellite. Calcium oxalate, CaC 2 O 4 .H 2 O. In sfmall colorless monoclinic
crystals.
Optically+. 555. From Saxony, with coal; also from Bohemia and Alsace.
Oxammite. Ammonium oxalate, (NH 4) 2 C 2 O4.2H 2 O. From the guano of the Guanape
Islands, Peru.
Humboldtine. Hydrous FeC 2 O 4 .2H 2 O. Orthorhombic. Color yellow.
ferrous oxalate,
/5
= 1-561. From near Bohemia; Capo d'Arco, Elba.
Bilin,
Mellite. Hydrous aluminium mellate, Al 2 Ci2Oi2.1SH 2 O. In square tetragonal pyra-
mids; also massive, granular. G. = 1 -55^-1 '65. Color honey-yellow. Optically .
w = T539. Occurs in brown coal in Thuringia, Bohemia, etc.
VIII. HYDROCARBON COMPOUNDS

The Hydrocarbon compounds in general, with few exceptions, are not homogeneous sub-
stances, but mixtures, which by the action of solvents or by fractional distillation may be
separated into two or more component parts. They are hence not definite mineral species
and do not strictly belong to pure Mineralogy, rather, with the recent gums and resins, to
Chemistry or, so far as they are of practical value, to Economic Geology. In the following
pages they are treated for the most part with great brevity.
1. Simple Hydrocarbons. Chiefly members of the Paraffin Series C H

2n +2.
ra
SCHEERERITE. In whitish monoclinic crystals. Perhaps a polymer of marsh-gas

(CH 4 ). Found in brown coal at Uznach, Switzerland.
HATCHETTITE. Mountain Tallow. In thin plates, or massive. Like soft wax. Color
yellowish. '47-1 '50.
Indices, 1 Ratio of C to = nearly 1:1. H Fromthe Coal-measures
near Merthyr-Tydvil in Glamorganshire, England; from Galicia.
PARAFFIN. A
native crystallized paraffin has been described as occurring in cavities
in basaltic lava near Paterno, Sicily. Indices, 1*49-1 '52.
OZOCERITE. Mineral wax in part. Like wax or spermaceti in appearance and consis-
tency. Colorless to white when pure; often leek-green, yellowish, brownish yellow, brown.
Indices, 1 '51-1 "54. Essentially a paraffin, and consisting chiefly of one of the higher mem-
bers of the series. Occurs in beds of coal, or associated bituminous deposits, as at Slanik,
Moldavia; Roumania; Boryslaw in the Carpathians. Also occurs in southern Utah on a
large scale.
Zietrisikite, Chrismatite, Urpethite are near ozocerite.
FICHTELITE. In white monoclinic tabular crystals. Perhaps CsHg. Occurs in thin
layers of pine wood from peat-beds, near Redwitz, in the Fichtelgebirge, Bavaria; from
Borkovic, Bohemia. Hartite has a similar occurrence.
NAPALITE. A yellow bituminous substance of the consistency of shoemaker's wax.
H
C 3 4 From the Phoenix mercury mine in Pope Valley, Napa county, Cal.
.
2. Oxygenated Hydrocarbons
AMBER. In irregular masses, with conchoidal fracture. H. = 2-2 '5. G. = 1'096.
Luster resinous. Color yellow, sometimes reddish, brownish, and whitish, often clouded,
sometimes fluorescent. Transparent to translucent. Heated to 150 begins to soften,
and finally melts at 250-300. Ratio for C O = 40 64 4.
: H : : :
Part of the so-called amber is separated mineralogicatly as succinite (yielding succinic

acid). Other related fossil resins from many other regions (e.g., the Atlantic coast of the
United States) have been noted. Some of them have been called retinite, gedanite, glessite,
rumanite, simetite, krantzite, chemawinite, delatynite, etc.
Amber occurs abundantly on the Prussian coast of the Baltic from Dantzig to Memel;
also on the coasts of Denmark, Sweden, and the Russian Baltic provinces. It is mined
extensively, and is also found on the shores cast up by the waves after a heavy storm.
Amber and the similar fossil resins are of vegetable origin, altered by fossilization; this is
inferred both from its native situation with coal, or fossil wood, and from the occurrence of
insects incased in it. Amber was early known to the ancients, and called yXtxTpov,
electrum, whence, on account of its electrical susceptibilities, has been derived the word
electricity.
COPALITE, or Highgate resin, is from the London blue clay. It is like the resin copal in
hardness, color, luster, transparency, and difficult solubility in alcohol. Color clear pale
yellow to dirty gray and dirty brown. Emits a resinous aromatic odor when broken.
occurring with coal and peat deposits etc :

following are oxygenated hydrocarbons
The
in the torbamte or Boghead coal
BATHVILLITE Occurs in dull, brown, porous lumps
the lands of Torbane Hill, Bathville, Scotland.
fnf the Crrbonfferous formation) adjoining
else material which has filtrated into
the cavity from the
I? may be anâtoed riin, or
surrounding torbanite.
a laminated shale;
TASMANITE In minute reddish brown scales disseminated through
of scales about 0'03 in. Not dissolved at all by alcohol, ether, benzene.
average diameter
turpentine Tcarbon disulphide, even
when heated. Remarkable as yielding 5 '3 p. c,
the rock is called combustible
sufpto! Vom
the river Mersey, north side of Tasmania;
or greenish gray. Analy-

DYSODILE In very thin folia, flexible, slightly elastic yellow
;
sulphur and 1 7 p. c. nitrogen.

From lignite deposits at Melili, Sicily, and
sis gave 2 3 p. c.
elsewhere.
GEOCERITE separated from the brown coal ot Gesterwitz,
A white, wax-like substance,
near Weissenfels. Geomyricite and geocerellite
are other products from the same source.
LEUCOPETRITE. Also from the Gesterwitz brown coal. Between a resin and wax in
physical characters.
PYRORETINITE. From brown coal near Aussig, Bohemia.
DOPPLERITE. In elastic or partly jelly-like masses; brownish black.
An acid sub-
stance or mixture of different acids, related to humic acid.
Ratio for C, H, O, nearly
Bavaria.
10 12 5. From peat beds near Aussee in Styria; Fichtelgebirge,
: :
IDRIALITE. Occurs with the cinnabar of Idria. In the pure state white and crystalline
in structure. In nature found only impure, being mixed with cinnabar, clay, and some
pyrite and gypsum in a brownish
black earthy material, called, from its combustibility
and the presence of mercury, inflammable cinnabar.
POSEPNYTE. Occurs in hard, brittle plates or nodules, light green in color. From the
Great Western mine, Lake Co., Cal. See also napalite, p. 645.
mercury
FLAGSTAFFITE. Ci2H 24O 3 . Orthorhombic. In minute prisms. Colorless, n = T51.
G. = 1'092. Found in cracks of buried tree trunks, near Flagstaff. Ariz.
The following are still more complex native hydrocarbon compounds of great importance
from an economic standpoint.
Petroleum. NAPHTHA; PETROLEUM. Mineral oil. Kerosene.
PITT ASPHALT: Maltha. Mineral Tar.
Liquids or oils, in the crude state of disagreeable odor; varying widely in color, from
colorless to dark yellow or brown and nearly black, the greenish brown color the most
common; also in consistency from thin flowing kinds to those that are thick and viscous;
and in specific gravity from 0'6 to 0*9. Petroleum, proper, passes by insensible gradations
into pittasphalt or maltha (viscid bitumen) and the latter as insensibly into asphalt or solid
;
bitumen.
Chemically, petroleum consists for the most part of members of the paraffin series,
H
C n 2 n+2, varying from marsh gas, 4 CH
to the solid forms.
, The olefines, C re 2w are H ,
also present in smaller amount. This is especially true of the American oils. Those of the"
Caucasus have a higher density, the volatile constituents are less prominent, they distill at
about 150 and contain the benzenes, CnH2 n-6, in considerable amount. There are present
also members of the series C n 2n - 8 H
The German petroleum is intermediate between the
.
American and the Caucasian. The Canadian petroleum is especially rich in the solid
paraffins.
Petroleum occurs in rocks or deposits of nearly all geological ages, from the Lower
Silurian to the present epoch. It is associated most abundantly with argillaceous shales,
sands, and sandstones, but is found also permeating limestones, giving them a bituminous
odor, and rendering them sometimes a considerable source of oil. From these oleiferous
shales, sands and limestones the oil often exudes, and appears floating on the streams or
lakes of the region, or rises in oil springs. It also exists collected in subterranean cavities
in certain rocks, whence it issues in
jets or fountains whenever an outlet is made by
Coring.
The oil which fills the cavities has
ordinarily been derived from the subjacent rocks; for
the strata in which the cavities exist are
frequently barren sandstones. The conditions
required for the production of such subterranean accumulations would be therefore a bitu-
minous oil-bearing or else oil-producing stratum at a greater or less
depth below; cavities
to receive the oil; an
overlying stratum of close-grained shale or limestone, not allowing of
the easy escape of the naphtha vapors.
The important petroleum districts in the United States are: (1) The Appalachian in-
cluding fields in N. Y., Pa., Ohio, W. Va., Ky., Tenn., (2) The Ohio-Indiana, (3) Illinois
(4). Kansas-Oklahoma, (5) Louisiana-Texas, (6) California, (7) Wyoming. In Canada oil
chiefly produced in Ontario. Important fields in Mexico from Tampico to Tuxpam. The
chief foreign districts are in the Baku region, Russia, in Galicia and
Roumania, also in
Borneo.
Asphaltum. Mineral Pitch. Asphalt.

Asphaltum, or mineral pitch, is a mixture of different hydrocarbons, part of which are
oxygenated. Its ordinary characters are as follows: Amorphous. G. = 1-1-8; some-
times higher from impurities. Luster like that of black pitch. Color brownish black
and black. Odor bituminous. Melts ordinarily at 90 to 100, and burns with a bright
flame. Soluble mostly or wholly in oil of turpentine, and partly or
wholly in ether; com-
monly partly in alcohol. The more solid kinds graduate into the pittasphalts or mineral
tar, and through these there is a gradation to petroleum. The fluid kinds change into the
solid by the loss of a vaporizable portion on exposure, and also by a process of
oxidation,
which consists first in a loss of hydrogen, and finally in the oxygenation of a portion of the
mass. The action of heat, alcohol, ether, naphtha and oil of turpentine, as well as direct
analyses, show that the so-called asphaltum from different localities is very various in com-
position.
Asphaltum belongs to rocks of no particular age. The most abundant deposits are
superficial. But these are generally, if not always, connected with rock deposits contain-
ing some kind of bituminous material or vegetable remains. Some of the noted localities
of asphaltum are the region of the Dead Sea, or Lake Asphaltites, whence the most of the
asphaltum of ancient writers; a lake on Trinidad, 1| m. in circuit, which is hot at the
center, but is solid and cold toward the shores, and has its borders over a breadth of f m.
covered with the hardened pitch with trees flourishing over it; at various places in South
America; in California, near the coast of St. Barbara; also in smaller quantities, elsewhere.
ELATERITE. Elastic Bitumen. Mineral Caoutchouc. Soft, elastic, sometimes much
like india-rubber; occasionally hard and brittle. Color usually dark brown. Found at
Castleton in Derbyshire, and elsewhere.
ALBERTITE. Differs from ordinary asphaltum in being only partially soluble in oil of
turpentine, and in its very imperfect fusion when heated. H. = 1-2. G. = T097. Luster
brilliant, pitch-like; color jet-black. Occurs filling an irregular fissure in rocks of the
Lower Carboniferous in Nova Scotia. Impsonite from Impson valley, Indian Territory, is
like albertite except that it is almost insoluble in turpentine.
GRAHAMITE. Resembles albertite in its pitch-black, lustrous appearance. H. = 2.
G. = 1'145. Soluble mostly in oil of turpentine; partly in ether, naphtha or benzene; not
at all in alcohol; wholly in chloroform and carbon disulphide. Melts only imperfectly, and
with a decomposition of the surface. Occurs in W. Va., about 20 m. S. of Parkersburg,
filling a fissure in a Carboniferous sandstone; from Kunda, Esthonia, Russia.
GILSONITE, also called Uintahite or Uintaite. A variety of asphalt from near Ft. Du-
chesne, Utah, which has found many applications in the arts. Occurs in masses several
inches in diameter, with conchoidal fracture; very brittle. H. = 2-2'5; G. = 1 '065-1 '070.
Color black, brilliant and lustrous; streak and powder a rich brown. Fuses easily in the
flame of a car idle and burns with a brilliant flame, much like sealing-wax. Named after
Mr. S. H. Gilson of Salt Lake City.
NIGRITE is a variety of asphaltum from Utah.
Mineral Coal. Compact massive, without crystalline structure or cleavage; sometimes
breaking with a degree of regularity, but from a jointed rather than a cleavage structure.
Sometimes laminated; often faintly and delicately banded, successive layers differing
slightly in luster. Fracture conchoidal to uneven. Brittle; rarely somewhat sectile.
H. = 0-5-2-5. G. = 1-1 '80. Luster dull to brilliant, and either earthy, resinous or sub-
metallic. Color black, grayish black, brownish black, and occasionally iridescent; also
sometimes dark brown. Opaque. Infusible to subfusible; but often becoming a soft,
pliant or paste-like mass when heated. On distillation most kinds afford more or less of
oily and tarry substances, which are mixtures of hydrocarbons and paraffin.
The varieties recognized depend partly (1) on the amount of the volatile ingredients
afforded on destructive distillation; or (2) on the nature of these volatile compounds, for
ingredients of similar composition may differ widely in volatility, etc.; (3) on structure,
luster and other physical characters.
Coal is in general the result of the gradual change which has taken place in geological
history in organic deposits, chiefly vegetable, and its form and composition depend upon
the extent to which this change has gone on.

Thus it passes from forms which still retain
1
S
he origmal structure of the wood (peat, lignite) and through
bituni
ANTHRACITE H
those with less of volatile or
matter to anthracite and further to kinds which approach graphite.
= 2-2 '5. G. = 1'32-1'7. Luster bright, often submetalhc, iron-
Volatile matter after drying 3^6
black and frequently iridescent. Fracture conchoidal.
'
Burns with a feeble flame of a pale color The anthracites of Pennsylvania contain
p. c.
those of South Wales 88-95; of France 80-83; of
ordinarily 85-93 per cent of carbon;
94 per cent. Anthracite graduates through
Saxony 81; of southern Russia, sometimes
semi-anthracite into bituminous coal, becoming less
hard and containing more volatile
anthracite.
matter; and an intermediate variety is called free-burning
2 BITUMINOUS COAL. Burns in the fire with a yellow, smoky flame,
and gives out on
distillation hydrocarbon oils or tar; hence the name bituminous.
The ordinary bituminous
coals contain from 5-15 p. c. (rarely 16 or 17) of oxygen (ash excluded);
while the so-called
brown coal or lignite contains from 20-36 p. c., after the expulsion, at 100 of 15-36 p. c. of
,
water. The amount of hydrogen in each is from 4-7 p. c. Both have usually a bright,
are rather fragile compared with anthracite,
pitchy, greasy luster, a firm compact texture,
and have G. = 1 '14-1 '40. The brown coals have often a brownish black color, whence the
name, and more oxygen, but in these respects and others they shade into ordinary bitumin-
ous coals. The ordinary bituminous coal of Pennsylvania has G.
= 1 '26-1 '37; of New-
castle, England, 1'27; of Scotland, 1 '27-1 '32;
of France, 1 "2-1 "33; of Belgium, 1'27-1'3.
The most prominent kinds are the following:
(a) Caking or Coking Coal. A bituminous coal which softens and becomes pasty or semi-
viscid in the fire. This softening takes place at the temperature of incipient decomposition,
and is attended with the escape of bubbles of gas. On increasing the heat, the volatile
products which- result from the ultimate decomposition of the softened mass are driven off,
and a coherent, grayish black, cellular or fritted mass (coke) is left. Amount of coke left
(or part not volatile) varies from 50-85 p. c.
(6) Non-Caking Coal. Like the preceding in all external characters, and often in ulti-
mate composition; but burning freely without softening or any appearance of incipient
fusion. There are all gradations between caking and non-caking bituminous coals.
(c) Cannel Coal (Parrot Coal). A variety of bituminous coal, and often caking; but
differing from the preceding in texture, and to some extent in composition, as shown by its
products on distillation. It is compact, with little or no luster, and without any appearance
of a banded structure; and it breaks with a conchoidal fracture and smooth surface; color
dull black or grayish black. On distillation it affords, after drying, 40 to 66 p. c. of vola-
tile matter, and the material volatilized, includes a large proportion of burning and lubri-
cating oils, much larger than the above kinds of bituminous coal; whence it is extensively
used for the manufacture of such oils. It graduates into oil-producing coaly shales, the
more compact of which it much resembles. Torbanite is a variety of cannel coal of a dark
brown color, from Torbane Hill, near Bathgate, Scotland; also called Boghead Cannel.
(d) Brown Coal (Lignite). The prominent characteristics of brown coal have already
been mentioned. They are non-caking, but afford a large proportion of volatile matter;
sometimes pitch-black, but often rather dull and brownish black. G. = 1 '15-1 '3. Brown
coal is often called lignite. But this term is sometimes restricted to masses of coal which
still retain the form of the original wood. Jet is a black variety of brown coal, compact in
texture, and taking a good polish, whence its use in jewelry.
Coal occurs in beds, interstratified with shales, sandstones, and conglomerates, and
sometimes limestones, forming distinct layers, which vary from a fraction of an inch to 30
feet or more in thickness. In the United States, the anthracites occur east of the Alleghany
range, in rocks that have undergone great contortions and fracturings, while the bitumin-
ous coals are found extensively in many States farther west, in rocks that have been less
disturbed; and this fact and other observations have led geologists to the view that the
anthracites have lost their bitumen by the action of heat. The origin of coal is mainly
vegetable, though animal life has contributed somewhat to the result. The beds were once
beds of vegetation, analogous, in most respects, in mode of formation to the
peat beds of
modern times, yet in mode of burial often of a very different character. This
vegetable
origin is proved not only by the occurrence of the leaves, stems and logs of plants in the coal,
but also by the presence throughout its
res also by the direc t observation that
texture, in many cases, of the forms of the original
i
peat is a transition state between unaltered vege-
s * brown coa l being sometimes found passing completely into true brown
i
coal. Peat differs from true coal in want of
homogeneity, it visibly containing vegetable
fibers only
partially altered; and wherever changed to a fine-textured homogeneous ma-
terial, even though hardly consolidated, it
.bor an account of the chief coal
may be true brown coal.
fields, as also of the geological relations of the different
coal deposits, reference is made to works on
Economic Geology.
APPENDIX A.
ON THE DRAWING OF CRYSTAL FIGURES

IN the representation of crystals by figures it is customary to draw their edges as if they
were projected upon some definite plane. Two sorts of projection are used; the ortho-
graphic in which the lines of projection fall at right angles and the clinographic where they
fall at oblique angles upon the plane of projection. The second of these projections is the
more important, and must be treated here in some detail. Two points are to be noted in
regard to it. In the first place, in the drawings of crystals the point of view is supposed to
be at an infinite distance, and it follows from this that all lines which are parallel on the
crystal appear parallel in the drawing.
In the second place, in all ordinary cases, it is the complete ideal crystal which is repre-
sented, that is, the crystal with its full geometrical symmetry as explained on pp. 10 to
13 (cf. note on p. 13).
In general, drawings of crystals are made, either by constructing the figure upon a
projection of its crystal axes, using the intercepts of the different faces upon the axes in order
to determine the directions of the edges or by constructing the figure from the gnomonic
(or stereographic) projection of the crystal forms. Both of these methods have their
advantages and disadvantages. By drawing the crystal figure by the aid of a projection
of its crystal axes the symmetry of the crystal and the relations of its faces to the axes are
emphasized. In many cases, however, drawing from a projection of the poles of the
crystal faces is simpler and takes less time. The student should be able to use both methods
and consequently both are described below.
DRAWING OF CRYSTALS UPON PROJECTIONS OF THEIR

CRYSTAL AXES
PROJECTION OF THE AXES .
/
The projection of the particular axes required is obviously the first step in the process.
These axes can be most easily obtained by making use of the Penfield Axial Protractor,
illustrated in Fig. 1030. * The customary directions of the axes for the isometric, tetragonal,
orthorhombic and hexagonal systems are given on the protractor and it is a simple matter,
as explained below, to determine the directions of the inclined axes of the monoclinic and
tri clinic systems. Penfield drawing charts giving the projection of the isometric axes,
which are easily modified for the tetragonal and orthorhombic systems, and of the hexag-
onal axes, (see Figs. 1031, 1032) are also quite convenient.
Isometric System. The following explanation of the making of the projection of the
isometric axes has been taken largely from Penfield's description, f
Figure 1033 will make clear the principles upon which the projection of the isometric
axes are based. Figure 1033A is an orthographic projection (a plan, as seen from above)
of a cube in two positions, one, a b c d, in what may be called normal position, the other,
A B C D, after a revolution of 18 26' to the left about its vertical axis. The broken-
dashed lines throughout represent the axes. Figure 1033B is likewise an orthographic
projection of a cube in the position A D
B C of A, when viewed from in front, the eye
or point of vision being on a level with the crystal. In the position chosen, the ap-
parent width of the side face B C B' C' is one-third that of the front face ABA'
B f this ,
being dependent upon the angle of revolution 18 26', the tangent of which is equal to f.
To construct the angle 18 26', draw a perpendicular at any point on the horizontal line,
X Y, figure 1033A as at o, make op equal one-third Oo, and join O and p. The next
step in the construction is to change from orthographic to clinographic projection. In
order to give crystal figures the appearance of solidity it is supposed that the eye or point
* The various Penfield from the Mineralogical. Laboratory of the
crystal drawing apparatus may be obtained
Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University, New Haven, Conn,
t On Crystal Drawing; Am. J. Sc., 19, 39, 1905.
649
650 APPENDIX A
1030
Protractor for plotting crystallographic axes; one-third natural size (after Penfield)
1031 1032
Scheme of the engraved axes of the isometric and hexagonal systems, one-sixth natural
size (after Penfield)
APPENDIX A 651
of vision is raiseji, so that one looks down at an
angle upon the crystal; thus, in the case
under consideration, figure 1033C, the top face of the cube comes into view. The
position
of the crystal, however, is not changed, and the plane upon which the
projection is made
remains vertical. From A it may be seen that the
positive ends of the axes a\ and a2 are forward of the 1033
ImeXY, the distances a\x and 2 y being as 3 1. In :
B it must be imagined, and by the aid of a model it

may easily be seen, that the extremities of these same
axes are to the front of an imaginary vertical plane (the
projection ofXY above) passing through the center of
the crystal, the distance being the same as ai x and a2
y of the plan. In D the distance ax is drawn the
same length as a\x of the plan, and the amount to
which it is supposed that the eye is raised, indicated
by the arrow, is such that a, instead of being projected
horizontally to x, is projected at an inclination of 9
28' from the horizontal to w, the distance xw being one-
sixth of ax; hence the angle 9 28' is such that its
tangent is |. Looking down upon a solid at an angle,
and still making the projection on a vertical plane, may
be designated as clinographic projection; accordingly,
to plot the axes of a cube in clinographic projection
in conformity with figures A, B and D draw the
horizontal construction line hk, figure C, and cross it
by four perpendiculars in vertical alignment with the
points i, iand a2 ,
a 2 of figures A and B. Then
determine the extremities of the first, a\, a\ axis by
laying off distances equal to xw of figure D, or one-
sixth ai x of figure A, locating them below and above
the horizontal line hk. The line ai, a\ is thus the
projection of the first, or front-to-back axis. In like
manner determine the extremities of the second axis,
2, 02, by laying off distances equal to one-thircUcw
of figure D, or one-sixth a 2 y of figure A, plotted below
and above the line hk. The line a2 ,
a2 is thus~tKe~
projection of the second, or right-tp-left axis. It is
important to keep in mind that in clinographic projec-
tion there is no foreshortening of vertical distances.
In figure C the axis a 2 ,
a 2 is somewhat, and a\, i
much foreshortened, yet both represent axes of the'

same length as the vertical, a 3,
.a3
It is wholly a matter of choice that the angle of
revolution shown in figure 1033A is 18 26', and that
the eye is raised so as to look down upon a crystal at Development of the axes of the
an angle of 9 28' from the horizontal, as indicated by isometric system in orthographic
figure 1033D. Also it is evident that these angles may and clinographic projection
be varied to suit any special requirement. As a mat- (after Penfield)
ter of fact, however, the angles 18 26' and 9 28' have
been well chosen and are established by long usage, and practically all the figures in clin-
ographic projection, found in modern treatises on crystallography and mineralogy, have
been drawn in accordance with them.
Tetragonal and Orthorhombic Systems. The projection of tetragonal and orthor-
hombic axes can be easily obtained from the isometric axes by modifying the lengths of the
various axes to conform to the axial ratio of the desired crystal. For instance with zircon
the vertical axis has a relative length of c = 0.64 in respect to the equal lengths of the hori-
zontal axes. By taking 0.64 of the unit length of the vertical axis of the isometric projec-
tion the crystal axes for a zircon figure are obtained. The Penfield axial charts all give
decimal parts of the unit length of the isometric vertical axis, so that any proportion of
this length can be found at once. In the orthorhombic system the lengths of both the a
and c axes must be modified. The desired point upon the c axis can be obtained as de-
scribed above. In the case of the a axis the required point can be found by some simple
method of construction. If, as is the case in the Penfield charts, a plan of the unforeshort-
ened horizontal axes is given in a top view, the desired length can be laid off directly upon
652 APPENDIX A
of the decimal scale and then projected
the a axis in this orthographic projection by means
Or the proper distance can be laid oft
vertically down upon its clinographic projection.
this point parallel to a line
on the vertical axis and then by means of a line drawn from
ioinine the extremities of the c and a axes of the
isometric projection the proper proportional
part of the a axis can be determined by intersection.
Hexagonal System. For projecting the hexagonal axes
1034
exactly the same principles may be made use of as were
employed in the construction of the isometric axes. Figure
1034A is an orthographic projection, a plan, of a hexagonal
prism in two positions, one of them, ai, 02, etc., after a
revolution of 18 26' from what may be called normal posi-
tion. In figure 1034B the extremities of the horizontal axes
of A have been projected down upon the horizontal construc-
tion line hk, and a\, a 2 and a 3 which are forward of the
line XY in A are located below the line hk in the clin-
ographic projection, the distances from hk being one-sixth
of dix, (hy and a s z of A. Figure 1034C is a scheme for
getting the distances which the extremities of the axes are
dropped. The vertical axis in 1034B has been given the
same length as the axes of the plan.
Monoclinic System. In the case of the monoclinic
axes the inclination and length of the a axis must be
determined in each case. The axial chart, Fig. 1030, can
be most conveniently used for this purpose. The ellipse
in the figure, lettered A, C, A, C gives the trace of
the ends of the a and c axes as they are revolved in the
A C plane. To find, therefore, the inclination of the a
axis it is only necessary to lay off the angle /8 by means
of the graduation given on this ellipse. The unit length of
the a axis may be determined in various ways. The plan of
the axes given at the top of the chart may be used for this
Development of the axes of purpose. Fig. 1035 will illustrate the method of procedure
the hexagonal system in as
applied in the case of orthoclase, where = 64 and
orthographic and clin- a = 0.66. The foreshortened length of the a axis is de-
ographic projection (after termined as indicated and then this length can be projected
Penfield) vertically downward upon the inclined a axis, the direction
of which has been previously determined as described above.
Triclinic System. In the construction of triclinic axes the inclination of the a axis
and its length are determined in exactly the same manner as described in the preceding
paragraph in the case of the monoclinic system. The direction of the 6 axis is determined
as follows. The vertical plane of the 6 and c axes is
revolved about the c axis through such an angle as 105
will conform to the angle between the pinacoids
100 and 010. Care must be taken to note whether
this plane is to be revolved toward the front or
toward the back. If the angle between the normals
to 100 and 010 is greater than 90 the right hand
end of this plane is to be revolved toward the front.
Figure 1036, which is a simplified portion of the
axial chart, shows the necessary construction in
order to obtain the direction of the 6 axis in the
case of rhodonite in which 100 A 010 = 94 26' and
a = 103 18'. The plane of the b-c axes will pass
through the point p which is 94 26' from -a. To
locate the point 6', which is the point where the 6
axis would emerge from the
sphere, draw through
the point p two or more chords from
points where
the vertical ellipses of the chart cross the horizontal
ellipse, as lines a-p. -a-p. b-p, in figure 1036.
Ihen from points on these same vertical
ellipses
which are 13 18' below the horizontal
plane draw
chords parallel to the first series as The point where these three chords
x-x', y-y', z-z'.
meet determines the position of 6' and a line from this
point drawn through the center of the
APPENDIX A 653
chart determines the direction of the b axis, since it Ues in the proper vertical
plane and
makes the angle a, 103 18', with the c axis. The foreshortened length of the 6 axis can
be determined by the use of the orthographic projection of the a and b axes at the
top of
the chart in exactly the same manner as described under the monoclinic system and the
point thus determined may be projected vertically downward upon the line of the b axis
of the clinographic projection as
already determined. It must be 1036
remembered, however, that the
position of the b axis in the ortho-
graphic projection must conform
to the position of the plane of
the b and c axes or in the case of
rhodonite have its right hand end
at an angle of 94 26' with the
negative end of the projection of
the a axis.
Drawing of Crystal Figures by
Aid of Projections of their
Axes. In order to determine in
the drawing the direction of any
edge between two crystal faces it
is necessary to establish two points, both of which shall be common to these two faces.
A line connecting two such points will obviously have the desired direction. The posi-
tions of these points is commonly established by use of the linear or Quendstedt projec-
tion as explained in the following paragraphs, which have been taken almost verbatim
from Penfield's description of the process.
The principle upon which the linear projection is based is very simple: Every face of a
crystal (shifted if necessary, but without change of direction) is made to intersect the vertical
axis at UNITY, and then its intersection with the horizontal plane, or the plane of the a and b
axis is indicated by a line. For instance if a given face has the indices 111 it is clear that
its linear projection would be a line passing through la and 16, since the face under these
conditions will also pass through Ic. If, however, the indices of the face are 112 it will
only pass through 1/2 c when it passes through la and 15. In
order to fulfill, therefore, the requirements of the linear projec-
1037 tion that the plane should pass through Ic the indices must
be multiplied by two and then under these conditions the line
in which the plane intercepts the horizontal plane, or in other
words the linear projection of the face, will pass through 2a and
26. In the case of a prism face with the indices 110, its linear
projection will be a line having the same direction as a line join-
ing la and 16 but passing through the point of intersection of
these axes, since a vertical plane such as a prism can only
pass through Ic when it also includes the c axis and so must
have its linear projection pass through the point of intersection
of the three axes. -
When it is desired to find the direction of an edge made by the
meeting of any two faces, the lines representing the linear projec-
tion of the faces are first drawn, and the point where they inter-
sect is noted. Thus a point common to both faces is deter-
mined, which is located in the plane of the a and 6 axes. A
second point common to the two faces is unity on the vertical
axis, and a line from this point to where the lines of the linear
projection intersect gives the desired direction.
A simple illustration, chosen from the orthorhombic system,
will serve to show how the linear projection may be employed
in drawing. The example is a combination of barite, such as
is shownin figure 1037. The axial ratio of barite is as follows:
a b c = 0'8152 1 1'3136
: : : :
The forms shown in the figure and the symbols are, base c (001),
prism m(110), brachydome o (Oil) and macrodome d (102).
Figure 1038 represents the details of construction of the
orthographic and clinographic projections shown in figure 1037.
On the orthographic axes the axial lengths a and 6 are located, the vertical axis c being
654 APPENDIX A
1038
(2a oo 6
: ;
c), the lines xy and x'y', through 2a parallel to the 6 axis: The prism m (110)
is parallel to the vertical axis, hence in order that such a plane shall satisfy the
con-
ditions of the linear projection and pass through unity on the vertical axis, it must be
considered as shifted (without change of direction) until it passes through the center:
Its linear projection therefore is represented by the lines yz and y'z', parallel to the
directions la to 16 on the two sets of axes. Since a linear projection is made on the
plane of the a and 6 axes, the intersection of any face with the base (001) has the same
direction as the line representing its linear projection. It is well to note that the inter-
sections x, y and z and x', y' and z' are in vertical alignment with one another.
Concerning the drawing of figure 1038, it is a simple matter to proportion the general
outline of the barite crystal in orthographic projection. The direction of the edge between
d, 102, and o, Oil, is determined by finding the point x, where the lines of the linear pro-
jection of d and o intersect, and drawing the edge parallel to the direction from x to the
center c. The intersection of the prism m, 110, with d and o is a straight line, parallel to
the direction la to 16 or y to z. To construct the clinorraphic figure, at some convenient
point beneath, the axes the horizontal middle edges of the crystal may be drawn parallel
to the a and 6 axes, their
lengths and intersections beingdetermined by carrying down
perpendiculars from the orthographic projection above. The intersection between d,
APPENDIX A 655
102, and o, Oil, is determined by finding the point x' of the linear projection and
the edge parallel to the direction from x' to 1 (unity] on the vertical
drawing
axis, while the corre-
sponding direction below is parallel to the direction x' to - 1, The size of the prism m
and its intersections with d and o may all be determined by
110, carrying down perpendicu-
lars from the orthographic projection above, but it is well to control the directions
by
means of the linear projection: The edges between m, 110, and d, 102; and
m, 110, and
o, Oil, are parallel respectively to the directions y' to 1 and z' to 1. Having completed
a figure, a copy free from construction lines may be had by
placing the .drawing over a
clean sheet of paper and puncturing the intersections of all
edges with a needle-point:
An accurate tracing may then be made on the lower paper.
Should it happen that the linear projection made on the plane of the a and b axes
gives
intersections far removed from the center of the figure, a linear
projection may be made on
the clinographic axes either on the plane of the a and c or b and c axes,
supposing that the
faces pass, respectively, through unity on the b or the a axes.
Importance of an Orthographic in connection with a Clinpgraphic Projection. Many
students, on commencing the study of crystallography, fail to derive the benefit they should
from the figures given in text-books. Generally
clinographic projections are given almost exclus- 1039
ively, with perhaps occasional basal or ortho-
graphic projections, and beginners find it hard
to reconcile many of the figures with the ap-
pearance of the models and crystals which they
are intended to represent. For example, given
only the clinographic projection of barite, figure
1037, it takes considerable training and knowledge
of the projection employed to gain from the figure
a correct idea of the proportions of the crystal
which it actually represents. This may be shown
by comparing figures 1037 and 1039, which rep-
resent the same crystal, drawn one with the a,
the other with the 6 axis to the front. It is
seen from figure 1039 that the crystal is far longer in the direction of the a axis than one
would imagine from 'inspection of only the clinographic projection of figure 1037. The
front or a axis is much foreshortened in clinographic projection,
1040 consequently by the use of only this one kind of projection there
is a two-fold tendency to err; on the one hand, in drawing, one
is inclined to represent those edges running parallel to the a
axis by lines which are considerably too long, while, on the
other hand, in studying figures there is a tendency to regard
them as representing crystals which are too much compressed
in the direction of the a axis. By using orthographic in con-
nection with clinographic projections these tendencies are over-
come. Having in mind the proportions of a certain crystal, or
having at hand a model, it is easy to construct an orthographic
projection in which the a and b axes are represented with their
true proportions; then the construction of a clinographic projec-
tion of correct proportions follows as a comparatively simple
matter. Without an orthographic projection it would have been
a difficult task to have constructed the clinographic projection
of figure 1039 wth the proportions of the intercepts upon the
a and 6 axes the same as in figure 1037, while with the ortho-
graphic projection orientated as in figure 1039 it was an easy
matter. A combination of the two projections is preferable in
many cases and from the two figures a proper conception of
the development of the crystal may be had.
Drawing of Twin Crystals. The axial protractor furnishes a
convenient means for plotting the axes of twin crystals. The
actual operation will differ with different problems but the gen-
eral methods are the same. The two examples given will illus-
trate these methods.
(1). To plot the axes for the staurolite twin shown in Fig. 1040.
In this _ case the twinning plane is parallel to the crystal
face 232 which has the axial intercepts of -3/2a, b, -3/2c.
For staurolite, a b c = 0'473 1 0'683, while the # and p angles of the twinning plane
: : : :
656 APPENDIX A
are A = 010 A 230 = 54 37' and P

= 001 A 232 = 60 31'. To insure accuracy in plot-
ting the full lengths of the axes of the protractor have been regarded as unity. The first
steD is to locate on the clinographic projection the position of
the twinning plane, 232.
This is shown in Fig. 1041 as the triangle
1041 from 3/2a to b to -
3/2c.
-
The next step is
to find the position of the twinning axis
which will be normal to this plane. The
coordinates of this twinning axis are given
by the and p angles quoted abov. The
<f>
point p which is 54 37' back from the pole

to 010 or b marks _the place where the normal
to the prism face 230 would ejnerge from the
sphere. The normal to 232, which is the
twinning axis will emerge on the meridian
that runs through the point p and at such a
distance below it that it will make the angle
60 31' with the negative end of the c axis.
Chords are drawn to p from the points where
the a and b axes meet the equator of the
sphere and then chords parallel to these are
drawn from the points x, y and z which are in
each case 60 31' from the point where the
negative end of the c axis cuts the spherical
surface. The common meeting point of
these chords T marks the place where the twinning axis pierces the spherical surface.
The next step is to determine the point t at which the twinning axis cuts the
twinning plane. The line OPp is by construction at right angles to the line connecting
-3/2a and 16. Therefore a vertical plane which is normal to the twinning plane would
intersect that plane in the line connecting 3 /2c and P. The twinning axis would He OT
in this plane also. Consequently the point t, where OT and -3/2c-P intersect would Ke
both on the twinning axis and in
the twinning plane. In order to 1042
make the method of construction
clearer Fig. 1042 is given. Here
the twinning axis is repeated
from Fig. 1041. The twin posi-
tion of the crystal is to be found
by revolving it from its normal
position through an arc of 180,
using the twinning axis as the
axis of revolution. This will
turn the twinning plane about
upon the point t as a pivot and
so transpos3 the points -3/2a, 6
and -3/2c to points equidistant
from it in an opposite position.
By drawing lines through t and
laying off equal distances beyond
that point the new points -3/2 A,
B and -3/2C will be obtained.
These points lie upon the three
axes in their twin position and so
determine their directions.
The plotting of the twin axes
in the top view follows similar
methods. In order to make the
construction learer a separate
figure. Fig. 1043, is given. The
line 0-t is laid off at an
angle of
4 37' to the 6 axis.
Upon this
h foun
l 6by
1S
it th^ Projection upward from the clinographic view below. This
*
meS 1 a r U d which the axes are ôlved 180 to their twin
"? , u
Y methods of construction and the directions of
APPENDIX A 657
Upon the twin axes found in this the portion of the crystal in twin position is drawn
way
in exactly the same manner as if it was
in the normal position.
(2). To plot the axes for the calcite twin shown in Fig. 1044. In this case it was desired
to represent a scalenohedron
twinned upon the rhombohedron
/ (0221) and so drawn that the 1043
twinning plane should be vertical
and have the position of 6 (010) of
an orthorhombic crystal. The
angle from c (001) to / (0221)
equals 63 7'. In order to make \
the face / vertical, the vertical axis \
must be inclined at an angle of
26 53', or the angle between the
c axes of the two individuals com-
posing the twin would be double
this or 53 46'. These relations are
shown in Fig 1045. As indicated
in Fig. 1046 the position of these
axes, c and C in the figure, are easily
obtained at inclinations of 26 53*
by use of the graduation of the
vertical ellipse that passes through
B and -B. The points X,X' and
Y, Y' indicate the intersections with
this same eclipse of the two planes
containing the a\, a-2 and a 3 axes in
their respective inclined positions,
the angles -BX, BX', and BY and
-BY' being in each case equal to 26 53'. In order to have the twinning plane occupy a posi-
tion parallel to the 010 plane of an orthorhombic crystal it is necessary to revolve the axes so
1044 1045
1045
that one of the a hexagonal axes shall coincide with the position of the a axis of the orthor-
hombic system, as -a 3 a 3 in Fig. 1046. The two other hexagonal axes corresponding to the
axis c must therefore lie in a plane which includes -a 3 a s and the points X and X' and have
,
such positions that they will make angles of 60 with -o3 a 3 ,

. The construction necessary
APPENDIX A
to determine the ends of these axes is as follows: Draw

the two chords lettered x-x'
and a 3 and a chord that
parallel to the direction
of
SrouKh^Snte that are 60 from -a s
would ^Hhrough -B and X. In a similar way draw the two chords y-y through the
of a chord that
second r of Ststhat are 60 from -a, and a,, parallel to the direction
intersections of these two sets of chords
wou?d pis through the points B and X. The
ends of these respective axes. The hexagon
determfnTthe points * and -a* which are the
a axes that lie in a plane perpendicular
shown in the figure connects the ends of the fll 2 and s
,
m
to the axis c. The set of axes that belong to the axis C are to be found a similar way.
that of calcite c = 0'854
The length of the vertical axis is to be obtained by multiplying This is transferred
line the length obtained or 2'562
by three and laying off on the vertical to the line p-p. The desired figure of
to the twin axis c by drawing the line p'-p' parallel
the calcite twin is to be drawn upon these two sets
of inclined axes.
DRAWING CRYSTALS BY USE OF THE STEREOGRAPHIC AND GNOMONIC

PROJECTIONS
of drawing crystals from the projections of
The following explanation of the methods
their forms has been taken with only minor modifications from Penfield's description.*
1. USE OF THE STEREOGRAPHIC PROJECTION
In explaining the method, a general example has been chosen; the construction of a
1047A represents a steno-
drawing of a crystal of axinite, of the triclinic system. Figure
graphic projection of the ordinary forms of axinite,
m
(110), a (100), M
(110), p (111),
r (111) and s (201). As shown by the figure, theirs* meridian, locating the position of 010,
has been chosen at 20 from the horizontal direction SS'.
of an axinite crystal, as it appears
Figure 1047B is a plan, or an orthographic projection
when looked at in the direction of the vertical axis. It may be derived from the stereo-
graphic projection in a simple manner, as
follows: The direction of the parallel edges
made by the intersections of the faces in the zone m, s, r, m', A, is parallel to a tangent at
either m
or m', and this direction may be had most easily by laying a straight edge from
m to m' and, by means of a 90 triangle, transposing the direction to B, as shown by the
construction.
The construction of C, which may be called a parallel-perspective view, may next be
explained: It is not a clinographic projection like the usual crystal drawings from axes,
but an orthographic projection, made on a plane intersecting the sphere, represented by
the stereographic projection, A, along the great circle SES'; the distance being 10. EC
The plane on which a drawing is to be made may, of course, have any desired inclination
or position, but by making the distance CE
equal 10 and taking the first meridian at 20
from S, almost the same effects of plan and parallel perspective are produced as in the
conventional method of drawing from axes^ where the eye is raised 9 28' and the crystal
turned 18 26'.
The way to explain the construction of C from A is to imagine the sphere, repre-
easiest
sented by the stereographic projection, as revolved 80 about an axis joining S and S', or
until the great circle SES' becomes horizontal. After such a revolution, the stereographic
projection shown in A would appear as in D, and the parallel-perspective drawing, E,
could then be derived from D
in exactly the same manner as B was derived from A. This
is, for example, because the great circle through m, s and r, D, intersects the graduated
circle at x, where the pole of a vertical plane in the same zone would fall, provided one
were present; hence the intersection of such a surface with the horizontal plane, and, con-
sequently, the direction of the edges of the zone, would be parallel to a tangent at z: In
other words, E is a plan of a crystal in the position represented by the stereographic pro-
jection, D. Although not a difficult matter to transpose the poles of a stereographic
projection so as to derive D
from A, it takes both time and skill to do the work with ac-
curacy, and it is not at all necessary to go through the operation. To find the direction
of the edges of any zone in C, for example m
s r, note first in A the point x, where the great
circles m s r and SES' cross. During the supposed revolution of 80 about the axis SS',
the pole x follows the arc of a small circle and falls finally at x' (the same
position as x of
D) and a line at right angles to a diameter through x', as shown by the construction, is
the desired direction for C. Similarly for the zones pr, MrM' and MspM', their inter-
sections with SES' at w, y and z are
transposed by the revolution of 80 to w', y' and z'.
The transposition of the poles w, x, y and z, A, to w', x', y' and z' may easily be accomplished
* Am. J. Sc., 21, 206, 1906.

APPENDIX A 659
in the following ways: (1) By means of the Penfield transparent, small-circle
tractor (*ig- 68, p. 39) the distances of w, pro-
x, y and z from either S or S' may be deter-
mined and the corresponding number of degrees counted off on the
graduated
circle. (2)
1047
Development of a planand parallel-perspective figure of axinite, triclinic system

from a stereographic projection (after Penfield)
Find first the pole P of the great circle SES', where P is 90 from E or 80 from C, and
is located by means of a stereographic scale or protractor (Fig. 62, p. 35) : A straight line
drawn through P and x will so intersect the graduated circle at x', that S'x and S'x' are
equal in degrees. The reason for this is not easily comprehended from A, but if it is im-
agined that the projection is revolved 90 about an axis A A', so as to bring S' at the center,
the important poles and great circles to be considered will appear as in figure 1048, where
P and C' are the poles, respectively, of the great circles ES'E' and AS' A', and x is 41
from S' as in figure 1047 A. It is evident from the symmetry of figure 1048 that a plane
surface touching at C', P and x will so intersect the great circle AS' A' that the distances
S'x and S'x' are equal. Now a plane passing through C", P, x and x', if extended, would
intersect the sphere as a small circle, shown in the figure, but since this circle passes through
C', which in figure 1047A is the pole of the stereographic projection (antipodal to C), it
will be projected in figure A as a straight line, drawn through P and x, since the intersec-
tions upon the plane of projection of all planes that pass through the point of vision of the
projection will appear as straight lines. (3) In figure 1048 B is located midway between E
660 APPENDIX A
It now evident from the
and A' BS'B' is a great circle, and W, 40 from C,
is its pole: is
symmetry of the figure that a great circle through

W and x so intersects the great circle
A&A' that the distances S'x and S'x' are equal. Transferring the foregoing relations
to figure 1047A, W, 40 from C, is the pole of the
great circle SBS', and a great circle drawn
through W
and x falls at x'. However, it is not
necessary to draw the great circle through W
and x to locate the point x' on the graduated
circle: By centering the Penfield transparent
great circle protractor, (Fig. 67, p. 39) at C, and
turning it so that W
and x fall on the same great
circle, the point x may be transposed to x', and
other points, w y' and z', would be found in
f
,
like manner.
The three foregoing methods of transposing x
tox',z to z', etc., are about equally simple,
and
may be pointed out that, supplied with
it
transparent stereographic protractors, and
having the poles of a crystal plotted in stereo-
graphic projection, it is only necessary to draw
the great circle SES' and to locate one point,
either W
or P, in order to find the directions
needed for a parallel-perspective drawing, cor-
responding to figure 1047C. Thus, with only a
great circle protractor, the great circle through
the poles of any zone may be traced, and its
intersection with SES' noted and spaced off with dividers from either S or S'; then
the great circle through the intersection just found and W
is determined, and where
it falls on the divided circle noted, when the desired direction may be had by means of
a straight edge and 90 triangle, as already explained.
2. DRAWING OF TWIN CRYSTALS BY USE OF THE STEREOGRAPHIC PROJECTION

In the great majority of cases the drawing of twin crystals can be most advantageously
accomplished by the use of a stereographic projection of their forms. It is only necessary
first to prepare a projection showing the poles of the faces in the normal and twin po-
sitions and then follow the methods outlined above. The preparation of the desired pro-
jection may, however, need some explanation. An illustrative example is given below
taken from an article by Ford and Tillotson on some Bavenno twins of orthoclase.*
According to the Baveno law of twinning the n (021) face becomes the twinning plane
and as the angle c A n = 44 56 1/2' the angle between c and c' (twin position) becomes
89 53'. For the purposes of drawing it is quite accurate enough to assume that this
angle is exactly 90 and that accordingly the face of the twin will occupy a position paral-
r.
lel to that of the b face of the normal individual.
Fig. 1049 shows the forms observed of the crystals both in normal and in twin positions,
the faces in twin position being indicated by open circles and a prime mark (') after their
respective letters, while the zones in twin position are drawn in dashed lines. Starting
out with the forms in normal position, the first face to
transp9se is the base c. This form,
from the law of the twinning, will be transposed to c' where it occupies the same position
as 6 of the normal individual, and it
necessarily follows that 6 itself in being transposed will
come to b' at the point where the normal c is located.
In turning therefore the crystal to the left from normal to twin
position, the fades c
and 6 travel along the great circle I through an arc of 90 until
they reach their respective
twin positions. We have, in other
words, revolved the crystal 90 to the left about an axis
which is parallel to the faces of the zone I. The
pole of this axis is located on the stereo-
graphic projection at 90 from the great circle I and falls on the straight line II, another
great circle which intersects zone I at right angles. This pole P is readily located by the
stereographic protractor on the great circle II at 90 from c. The problem then is to re-
volve the poles of the faces from their normal
positions about the point P to the left and
through an arc of 90 in each case.
During the revolution the poles of the n faces remain on the great circle I and as the
angle n A n = K) the location of their poles when in twin
,
position is identical with that of
Am. J. Sc., 26, 149, 1908.

APPENDIX A 661
the normal position and n' falls on top of n. We can now transpose the great circle II from
its normal to its twin
position, since P remains stationary during the revolution and we
have determined the twin position of c. The dashed arc II'
gives the twin of the
position
1049
great circle II. The twin position of y must lie on arc II' and can be readily located at y',
the intersection of arc II' with a small circle about P having the radius P Ay. It is now
possible to construct the arc of the zone III in its transposed position III', for we have two
of the points, y' and n' of the latter, already located. By the aid of the Penfield transparent
great circle protractor the position of the arc of the great circle on which these two points
lie can be determined. On this arc, III', o' and m' must also lie. Their positions are most
easily determined by drawing arcs of small circles about b' with the required radii, 6 A o
= 63 8', b A //* = 59 22 1/2' and the points at which they intersect arc III' locate the
position of the poles o' and m f
At the same time the corresponding points on IV may be
.
Jocated, it being noted that IV and III are the same arc. But one other form remains
to be transposed, the prism z. We
have already 6' and m' located and it is a simple matter
with the aid of the great circle protractor to determine the position of the great circle
upon which they lie. Then a small circle about 6' with the proper radius, b/\z = 29 24',
determines at once by its intersections with this arc the position of the poles of the z faces.
It may be pointed out that if it should be desired to make use of the methods of the
gnonomic projection for the drawing of the figures as described below, the stereographic
projection of the forms may be readily transformed into a gnomonic projection by doubling
the angular distance from the center of the projection to each pole by the use of the stereo-
graphic protractor, Fig. 62, p. 35.
3. USE OF THE GNOMONIC PROJECTION
As an illustration, the method of drawing a simple combination of barite has been chosen.
The forms shown in figure 1050 are c (001), m (110), o (Oil) and d (102). The location
of the poles in the gnomonic projection is shown in A, where, as in figure 1047A. the first
662 APPENDIX A
meridian taken at 20 from the horizontal direction

is
SS The poles of the prism
. and m
fall in the gnomonic projection at infinity.
locations of S and S' (compare figure 1047A)
direction of an edge made by the meeting of two faces
In any plan such as figure 1050B, the
1050
A at oo
tfatoo
y at oo
isat right angles to a line joining the poles of the faces, shown in figures A and B by the di-
rection at 90 to the line joining m" and c.
The parallel-perspective view, 1050C, is an orthographic projection (compare figures
1047 A and C) drawn on a plane passing through S and S', and intersecting the sphere on
which the gnomonic projection is based as a great circle passing through E, figure 1050A,
and drawn parallel to SS', the distance cE being 10: This great circle is called by Gold-
schmidt the Leitlinie. To find such intersections as between m"' and c, and m
and d,
figure C, note, as in figure 1047A, where the great circles through the poles of the faces
intersect the Leitlinie; thus, the one through m'" and c at x, and that through and d m
(through d parallel to m
m", since m
and m" are at infinity) at y. Next imagine the points
x and y transposed as in figure 1047 A to x' and y', which latter pomts, however, are located
at infinity: This transposition is done by locating first the so-called Winkelpunkt, W, of
Goldschmidt, 40 from c in figure 1050A, and as in figure 1047A, 90 from a point B, which
is an equal number of degrees from E and A' (compare figure 1048). Of the three methods
given above for transposing x and y to x' and y', the third may be easily applied in the gnom-
onic projection. Great circles, or straight lines, through W
and x and W
and y, figure
1050A, if continued to infinity, would determine x' and y', which is accomplished by draw-
ing lines parallel to Wx and Wy through the center. It is not necessary, however, to
draw the lines Wx and Wy, nor the parallel lines through the center; all that is needed to
find the directions of the edges m'" A c and m
A d is to lay a straight edge from W
to x, re-
spectively W
to y, and with a 90 triangle transpose the directions to C, as indicated in
the drawings. The principles are exactly the same as worked
put for the interrelations
of figures 1047A and C. As in the case of the stereographic projection, it is evident that,
given the poles of a crystal plotted in the gnomonic projection, it would be necessary to
draw only one line, the Leitlinie, and to locate one point, the Winkelpunkt, W, in order to
find all possible directions for a
plan and parallel-perspective views, corresponding to
figures 1050B and C.
APPENDIX B
TABLES USEFUL IN THE DETERMINATION

OF MINERALS
THIS Appendix contains a series of tables, more or less complete, of minerals arranged
according to chemical composition or to certain prominent crystallographic or physical
characters. These, it is believed, will be of service not only to the student, but also to
the skilled mineralogist.
The type used in the printing of the mineral names indicates their relative importance.
Table I is a complete list of the species named in this book arranged first according to the
prominent basic elements which they contain and secondly according to their acid radicals.
Table II is of Minerals arranged according to their System of Crystallization. The other
tables make no claim to completeness, being limited often to common and important
species.
For an exhaustive system of Determinative Tables based particularly upon blowpipe
and chemical characters, the student is referred to the work of Professors Brush and Pen-
field, mentioned on p. 330.
TABLE I. MINERALS ARRANGED ACCORDING TO

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
The following lists include all definitely described mineral species arranged first according
to their important basic elements and secondly according to their acid radicals. If a
given mineral contains two or more prominent bases its name is repeated in all the ap-
propriate sections.
ALUMINIUM
NOTE : Aluminium of such common occurrence among the silicate minerals tnat
is
it is impracticable to list all of these minerals that contain it. Therefore only those sili-
cates which are essentially aluminium minerals are included in the following list.
Chloralluminit ,
A1C1 3 .6H 2 O. GIBBSITE, A1 2 O 3 .3H 2 O.
CRYOLITE, Na AlF
3 6. Hydrotalcite, Al(OH) 3 .3Mg(OH) 2 .3H 2 O.
Koenenite, Al,Mg, oxy chloride. Shanyavskite, A12 O 3 .4H 2 O.
Fluellite, A1F 3 .H2 O. Dundasite, Pb(AlO) 2 (CO 3 ) 2 .
Prosopite, CaF2 .2Al(F,OH) 3 Dawsonite, Na 3 Al(CO 3 ) 3 .2Al(OH) 3

. .
Pachnolite, Thomsenolite, NaF.CaF2 .AlF 3 Zunyite, (Al(OH,F,Cl) 2 )6Al2 Si 3Oi 2

. .
H 2 O. Topaz, [Al(F,OH)] 2 SiO 4 .
Gearksutite, CaF2 .Al(F,OH) 3 .H 2 O. ANDALUSITE, Al 2 SiO 5 .
Ralstonite, (Na 2 ,Mg)F2 .3Al(F,OH) 3 .2H2 O. SILLIMANITE, Al 2 SiO 6 .
Creedite, 2CaF2 .2Al(F,OH) 3 .CaSO 4 .2H 2O. Cyanite, Al 2 SiO 5 .
Corundum, A1 2 O 3 .
Dumortierite, 8Al 2 O 3 .B 2 O 8 .6SiO 2 .H 2 O.
Spinel, MgO.Al 2 O 3 .
Staurolite, (AlO) 4 (AlOH)Fe(SiO 4 ) 2 .
Hercynite, FeO.Al 2 O 3 .
Kaolinite, 4 Al 2 Si 2 O 9 H .
Gahnite, ZnO.Al 2 O 3 .
Faratsihite, (Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 .2H 2O.
Chrysoberyl, BeO.Al 2 O 3 .
Halloysite, H
4 Al 2 Si 2 O 9 .H 2 O.
Uhligite, Ca(Ti,Zr)O 6 .Al (Ti,Al)O 6 Newtonite,

. H
8 Al 2 Si 2 On.H 2 O.
DIASPORE, A1 2 O 3 .H 2 O. Cimolite, 2Al 2 O 3 .9SiO 2 .6H 2 O.

Bauxite, A1 2 O 3 .2H 2 O. Montmorillonite, H
2 Al 2 Si 4 Oi 2 .nH 2 O.
663
664 APPENDIX B
PYROPHYLLITE, H Al
2 2 (Si0 3 ) 4 . Dietrichite,(Zn,Fe,Mn)SO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 )H3 .22 2 O.
Allophane, Al 2 Si06.5H 2 0. Alunogen, A12 (SO 4 ) 3 .18H 2 O.
Melite, 2(Al,Fe) 2 3 .S10 2 .8H 20. Cyanotrichite, 4CuO.Al 2 O 3 .SO 3 .8H 2 O.
Collyrite, 2Al 2 O 3 .SiO 2 .9H 2 Knoxvillite, Hydrous, Fe,Al,Cr, sulphate.
O.
Schrotterite, 8Al 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .30H 2O. Cyprusite, 7Fe 2 O 3 A1 2 O 3 10SO 3 14H 2 O.
. . .
Hamlinite, Al,Sr, phosphate Aluminite, A1 2 O 3 .SO 3 .9H 2 O.

Plumbogummite, Pb,Al, phosphate. Paraluminite, 2A1 2 O 3 .SO 3 .10H 2 O.
Florencite, Al,Ce, phosphate. Felsobanyite. 2A1 2 O 3 .SO 3 .10H 2 O.
Georceixite, BaO.2Al 2 O 3 .P2 O 6 .5H 2 O. Voltaite, 3(K2 ,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6SO 3 .9H 2 O.
Crandallite, 2CaO.4 A1 2 O 3 .2P2 O 5 10H2 O. .
ALUNITE, K
2 A1 6 (OH) 12 .(SO 4 ) 4 .
Harttite, (Sr,Ca)O.2Al 2 O 3 .P 2 O 6 .SO 3 .5H 2O. Lowigite, K

2 O.3A1 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .9H 2 O.
Durangite, Na(AlF)AsO 4 .
Almeriite,Na 2 SO 4 .Al2 (SO 4 ) 3 .5Al(OH) 3 .H 2 O.
Amblygonite, Li(AlF)PO 4 Ettringite,6CaO.Al 2 O 3 .3SO 3 .33H 2 O.
Fremontite, (Na,Li)Al(OH,F)PO 4 .
Zincaluminite, 2ZnSO 4 .4Zn(OH) 2 .6Al(OH) 3 .
Lazulite, 2AlPO 4 .(Fe,Mg)(OH) 2 . 5H 2 O.

O
Tavistockite, Ca 3 P 2 3 .2Al(OH) 2 .
Mellite, A1 2 C O12 12 .18H 2 O.
Cirrolite,Ca 3Al(PO 4 ) 3 .Al(OH) 3.
Synadelphite, 2(Al,Mn)AsO 4 .5Mn(OH) 2 .

ANTIMONY
Hematolite, (Al,Mn)AsO 4 .4Mn(OH) 2 .
Barrandite, (Al,Fe)PO 4 .2H 2 O.

NOTE : The antimonates are not in-
cluded in this list.
Variscite, A1PO 4 .2H 2 O.
Lucinite, A1PO 4 .2H 2 O. Allemontite, SbAs 3 .
Callainite,A1PO 4 .2H2 O. NATIVE ANTIMONY, Sb.

Zepharovichite, A1PO 4 .3H2O. Stibnite, Sb2 S 3 .
Palmerite, HK A1
2 2 (PO 4 ) 3 .7H 2 O. Kermesite, Sb 2 S 2 O.
Rosier6site, Hydrous, Al,Pb,Cu, phosphate. Senarmontite, Valentinite, Sb 2 O 3 .
WAVELLITE, 4A1PO 4 .2A1(OH) 3 .9H 2 O. Cervantite, Sb 2 O 3 .Sb2 O 6 .
Fischerite, AlPO 4 .Al(OH) 3 .2iH 2 O. Stibiconite, 2 Sb 2H5 O .
Peganite, A1PO 4 .A1(OH) 3 .HH 2 O. Stibiotantalite, (SbO) 2 (Ta,Nb) 2 O6 .
TURQUOIS, CuO.3Al2 O 3 .2P2 O 5 .9H 2 O.

Wardite, 2A1 2 O 3 .P2 O 6 .4H 2O. ARSENIC
Sphserite, 4A1PO 4 .6A1(OH) 3 .
Liskeardite, (Al,Fe)AsO 4 .2(Al,Fe) (OH). NOTE : The arsenates are not included
5H 2 O.
'
in this Ust.
Evansite, 2A1PO 4 .4A1(OH) 3 .12H 2 O. NATIVE ARSENIC, As.
O
Coeruleolactite, 3 A12 3 .2P 2 5 10H2 O. O .
SbAs 3
Allemontite, .
O O
Angelite, 2Al 2 3 .P2 6 .3H2 q. REALGAR, AsS.
Berlinite,Trolleite, Attacolite Hydrous 1 ORPIMENT, As 2 S 3 .
Minasite, Vashegyite Arsenopyrite, FeAsS.

j Alphosphates As 2 O 3
Arsenolite, Claudetite, .
Soumansite, Hydrous, Al,Na, fluo-phosphate.

Childrenite,2AlPO 4 .2Fe(OH) 3 .2H 2 O.
Eosphorite, 2AlPO 4 .2(Mn,Fe) (OH) 3 .2H 2 O.
BARIUM
Egueiite, Hydrous, Fe,Al,Ca, phosphate. Witherite, BaCO 3 .
Liroconite, Cu Al(AsO
6 4) 5 .3CuAl(OH) 6 . Bromlite, (Ba,Ca)CO 3 .
20H 2 O. Barytocalcite, BaCO 3 .CaCO 3 .
Henwoodite, Al,Cu, hydrous phosphate. Hyalophane, (K 2 ,Ba)Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 4 .
Ceruleite, CuO.2Al 2 O 3 .As 2 O 5 .8H 2 O. Celsian, BaAl 2 Si 2 O 8 .
Kehoite, Hydrous, Al,Zn, phosphate. Cappelenite, Y,Ba, boro-silicate.

Goyazite, Ca 3 Al 10 P 2 O 23 .9H 2 O. Hyalotekite, (Pb,Ba,Ca)B 2 (SiO 3 ) 12 .
Rosch6rite, (Mn,Fe,Ca) 2 Al(OH) (PO 4 ) 2 .2H 2O. Barylite, Ba 4 Al 4 Si 7O 24 .
'"
Svanbergite, Hydrous Al, Ca, phosphate Taramellite, Baê'' Fe 4 SiidO M .
and sulphate. Brewsterite, H

(Sr,Ba,Ca)Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .3H 2O.
4
Teremejevite, A1BO 3 .
Wellsite, (Ba,Ca,K 2 )Al 2 Si 3Oi .3H 2 O.
Rhodizite, A1,K, borate. Harmotone, (K 2 ,Ba)Al 2 Si 5Oi 4 .5H 2 O.
Millosevichite, (Fe,Al) 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .
Edingtonite, BaAl 2 Si 3Oi .3H 2 O.
Spangolite, Cu6AlClSO 10 .9H 2O. Benitoite, BaTiSi 3O 9 .
Alumian, A12O 3 .2SO 3 .

Leucosphenite, Na 4 Ba(TiO) 2 (Si 2 O 5 ) 5 .
KaUnite, KA1(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O. Georceixite, BaO.2Al 2 O 3 .P 2 O 5 .5H 2 O.

Tschermigite, (NH 4 )A1(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O. Ferrazite, 3(Ba,Pb)O.2P 2 O 5 .8H 2 O.
Mendozite, NaAl(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O. Volborthite, Cu,Ba,Ca, vanadate.
Pickeringite, MgSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .22H 2 O. Uranocircite, Ba(UO 2 ) 2 P 2 O 8 .8H 2O.
Halotrichite, FeSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H 2 O. Nitrobarite, Ba(NO 3 ) 2 .
Apjohnite, MnSO 4 .Al 2 (S0 4 ) 3 .24H 2O. Barite, BaS0 4 .

APPENDIX B 665
BERYLLIUM CESIUM
Chrysoberyl, BeAl 2 O 4 .
Pollucite, 2Cs2O.2Al2 O 3 .9SiO 2 .H2O.
Eudidymite, Epididymite, HNaBeS.\ 3O 8 .
Rhodizite, Al,K,Cs, borate.

Beryl, Be 3 Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .
CALCIUM
Helvite, (Be,Mn,Fe) Si 3Oi 2 S. 7 Oldhamite, CaS.
Danalite, (Be,Fe,Zn,Mn) 7 Si 3Oi 2 S. Fluorite, CaF 2.
Phenacite, Be 2 SiO 4 .
Hydrophilite, CaCl 2 .
Trimerite, (Mn,Ca) 2 SiO 4 .Be 2 SiO4 .

Yttrofluorite, (Ca 3 ,Y2 )F 6 .
Euclase, HBeAlSiO 5 .
Nocerite, 2(Ca,Mg)F2 .(Ca.Mg)O.
Gadolinite, Be 2 FeY 2 Si 2 O 10 .
Tachhydrite, CaCl 2 .2MgCl 2 .12H2 O.
Bertrandite, H
2 Be 4 Si 2 O 9 .
Prosopite, CaF2 .2Al(F.OH) 3 .
Beryllonite, NaBePO 4 .
Pachnolite, Thomsenolite, NaF.CaF2 .AlF3 .
Herderite, Ca[Be(F,OH)]PO4 . H O.
2
Hambergite, Be 2 (OH)BO 3 . Gearksutite. CaF2 .Al(F,OH) 3 .H2 O.

Creedite, 2CaF2 .2Al(F,OH) 3 .CaSO 4 .2H2 O.
BISMUTH Yttrocerite, (Y,Er,Ce)F3 .5CaF2 .H2 O.
NATIVE BISMUTH, Bi. UhUgite, Ca(Ti,Zr)O 5 .Al(Ti,Al)O5 .
Calcite,CaCO 3.
BlSMUTHINITE, Bl2 S 3
Dolomite, CaCO .MgCO
.
3 3.
Guanajuatite, Bi2 Se 3
Ankerite, CaCO .(Mg,Fe,Mn)CO
.
3 3.
Tetradymite, Bi 2 (Te,S) 3
Aragonite, CaCO
.
3.
Grunlingite, Bi 4TeS 3 .
Bromlite, (Ba,Ca)CO 3 .
Joseite, Wehrlite, bismuth tellurides.

Barytocalcite, BaCO 3 .CaCO 3
Daubreete, Bi, oxychloride.
Parisite, [(Ce,La,Di)F] 2 Ca(CO 3 ) 2
Bismite, Bi 2 O 3
.
Pirssonite, CaCO 3 .Na2 CO3 .2H2 O.

.
Bismutosparite, Bi 2 (CO 3 ) 3 .2Bi 2 O3

Gay-Lussite, CaCO 3 .Na2 CO 3 .5H 2 O.
.
Bismutite, Bi 2 O 3 .CO 2 .H2 q.

Gajite, basic, hydrous, Ca, Mg, carbonate.
Eulytite, Agricolite, Bi 4 Si 3 Oi 2 .
Uranothallite, 2CaCO 3 .U(CO 3 ) 2 10H 2 O.

Pucherite, BiVO4
.
.
H Bi AsO Liebigite, Hydrous Ca,U, carbonate.

Atelestite, 2 3 8.
Voglite, Hydrous U,Ca,Cu, carbonate.
Walpurgite, Bi 10 (UO 2 ) 3 (OH) 24 (AsO 4 ) 4 .
HKCa
2 Al 2 (Si 2 O 5 ) 6
Milarite, .
Rhagite, 2BiAsO 4 .3Bi(OH) 3

Rivaite, (Ca,Na 2 )Si 2 O 6
.
Arseno-bismite, hydrous Bi arsenate.

Mixite, Hydrous Cu, Bi, arsenate. A^desinT Mixtures of NaAlSi 3 8 and
Uranosphaerite, (BiO) 2 2 O 7 .3H 2 O. U Labradorite
CaAl 2 Si 2 O 8 .
Montanite, Bi 2 3 .Te0 3 .2H 2 O.

p CaAl 2 Si 2 O8
Anorthite,
Koechlinite, Bi 2 O 3 .MoO 3
.
Anemousite, Na2 O.2CaO.3Al2 O 3 .9SiO2

.
Pyroxene, Ca,Mg, etc., silicate.

BORON Wollastonite, CaSiO3 .
NOTE : The borates are not included in PECTOLITE, HNaCa (SiO 3 ) 3 2 .
this list. Schizoh'te, HNa(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Sassolite, B(OH) 3 . Rosenbuschite, near pectolite with Zr.

Cappelenite, Y,Ba, boro-silicate. Wohlerite, Zr-silicate and niobate of Ca,Na.
Hy alotekite,(Pb Ba, Ca) B 2 (SiO 3 )
. . Lavenite, Zr-silicate of Mn,Ca.
DANBURITE, CaB 2 (SiO 4 ) 2 . Babingtonite, (Ca,Fe,Mn)SiO 3 with
HCaBSiO Fe2 (SiO 3 ) 3
.
Datolite, 5.
Homilite, Ca 2 FeB 2 Si 2 Oi .
Hiortdahlite, (Na 2 ,Ca)(Si,Zr)O 3 .
Axinite, Ca,Al, boro-silicate. Amphibole, Ca, Mg, etc., silicate.

Tourmaline, complex boro-silicate. Arfvedsonite, Na,Ca,Fe, silicate.
Dumortierite, 8AL>O 3 .B,O 3 .6SiO 2 .H 2 O. Leucophanite i
ATT> n a -i-
***&,<& fluo-sihcate.
10(Ca,Mg)O.5Al 2 O 3 .B 2 O 3 .6SiO2 Meliphanite I
Serendibite, .
Ca2 (OH,F)SiO 3
Manandonite, H 4Li 4Ali 4 B 4 .Si6O 53 Custerite, .
4 .
Bakerite, Hydrous Ca, boro-silicate. Didymolite, 2CaO.3Al 2 O 3 .9SiO2 .
Searlesite, NaB(SiO 3 ) 2 .H2 O.

Ganomalite, Pb 4 (PbOH) 2 Ca4 (Si 2 O 7 ) 3 .
Luneburgite, 3MgO.B 2 O 3 .P 2 O 5 .8H 2 O. Nasonite, Pb 4 (PbCl) 2 Ca 4 (Si 2 O 7 ) 3 .
Margarosanite, Pb(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Hardystonite, Ca2 ZnSi 2 O 7

CADMIUM Rocblingite, 5(H2 CaSiO 4 ).2(CaPbSO4 ).
.
Greenockite, CdS. Haiiynite, Na 2 Ca(NaSO 4 .Al)Al 2 (SiO4 ) 3 .
Cadmiumoxide, CdO. Grossularite, Ca 3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Otavite, Cd carbonate. Andradite, Ca 3 Fe2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .

566 APPENDIX B
UVAROVITE, Ca3 Cr2 (SiO 4 )3. Thomsonite, (Na2 ,Ca)Al2 Si 2 O 8 .2H 2O.
Schorlomite, Ca3 (Fe,Ti 2 ) [(Si,Ti)O]. Hydrpthomsonite (H 2 ,Na 2 ,Ca)Ali<Si 2 O8.
;
MonticeUite, CaMgSiO 4 .
5H O.
2
Glaucochroite, CaMnSiO4 . Arduinite, Ca,Na, zeolite.

Trimerite, (Mn,Ca) 2 SiO4 .Be2SiO4 . Echellite, (Ca,Na2 )O.2Al 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .4H2O.
SCAPOLITE GROUP, Mixtures of Epidesmine, (Na 2 ,Ca)Al2 Si 6Oi 6 .6H 2 O.
Ca4Al 6Si 6O25 and Na4Al3 Si 9O24 Cl. Stellerite, CaAl 2 Si 7Oi 8 .7H 2 O.
Sarcolite, (Ca,Na 2 )3Al2 (SiO 4 ) 3
. Erionite, H
2 CaK 2 Na 2 Al 2 Si 6 Oi 7 .5H 2 O.
Melilite, Na2 (Ca,Mg) n (Al,Fe) 4 (SiO4 ) 9

. Bavenite, Ca3Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .H 2 O.
Cebollite, Bityite, Hydrous, Ca,Al, silicate.
Gehlenite, Margarite, H
2 CaAl 4 Si 2 Oi 2 .
Vesuvianite,Ca 6 [Al(OH,F)]Al2 (Si0 4 ) 6 . Seybertite, H

3 (M g ,Ca) 5 Al 5 Si 2 Oi 8 .
DANBURITE, CaB 2 (SiO 4 ) 2 . Xanthophyllite, H

8 (Mg,Ca)i 4 Al 16 Si 5 O 62 .
Guarinite, 2(K,Na) 2O.8CaO.5(Al,Fe,Ce) 2O 3

.
Griffithite, 4(Mg,Fe,Ca)O(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .5SiO 2 .
10SiO 2 .
7H 2 O.
Datolite, HCaBSiO 5 . Cenosite, H Ca
4 2 (Y,Er) 2 CSi 4 Oi 7 .
Homilite, CazFeBîAo. PlazoUte,3CaO.Al 2 O 3 .2(SiO 2 ,CO 2 ).2H 2 O.

ZOISITE, Ca2(AlOH)Al2 (SiO4 ) 3 . Thaumasite, CaSiO 3 .CaCO 3 .CaSO 4 15H2 O. .
Epidote, Ca2 [(Al,Fe)OH](Al,Fe) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .

Spurrite, 2Ca 2 SiO 4 .CaCO 3 .
Piedmontite, Ca2 (AlOH) (Al,Mn) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .

Uranophane, CaO.2UO 3 .2SiO 2 .6H2 O.
Allanite, (Ca,Fe) 2 (AlOH) (Al,Ce,Fe) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Bakerite, Hydrous Ca boro-silicate.
AXINITE, Ca,Al, boro-silicate. TINANITE, CaTiSiO5 .
PREHNITE, HzCa^SiO^. Molengraafite, Ca,Na, titano-silicate.

Harstigite, Mn,Ca, silicate Keilhauite, Ca,Al,Fe,Y, titano-silicate.
Cuspidine, Ca2 Si(O,F2 ) 4 .
Joaquinite, Ca,Fe, titano-silicate.
ILVAITE, CaFe 3 (FeOH)(SiO4 ) 2 .
Perovskite, CaTiO 3 .
Clinohedrite, H CaZnSiO 2 6. Dysanalyte, Ca,Fe, titano-niobate.

Stokesite, H4CaSnSi Oii. 3 Pyrochlore, Ca,Ce, niobate.
Lawsonite, Hibschite, H CaAl Si Oi 4 2 2 .
Koppite, Ca,Ce,niobate
Beckelite, Ca 3 (Ce,La,Di) 4Si 3O 15 .
Angaralite,2(Ca,Mg)0.5(Al.Fe) 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 . Chalcolamprite, RNb O F 2 6 2 .RSiO 3 .
Serendibite, 10(Ca,Mg)O.5Al2 O 3 .B 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 . Microlite, Ca 2 Ta 2 O 7 .
Silicomagnesiofluorite, H Ca Mg Si O Fi
2 4 3 2 7 . Berzeliite, (Ca,Mg,Mn,Na1)8A8aO8.
Gro thine, Ca,Al, silicate. , Graftonite, (Fe,Mn,Ca) 3P2 8 O .
Aloisite, Fe,Ca,Mg,Na, silicate. Apatite, Ca 4 (CaF)(PO 4 ) 3 .
Inesite, H 2 (Mn,Ca) 6Si 6Oi 9 .3H2O. Fermorite, (Ca,Sr) 4 [Ca(OH,F)][(P,As)O 4 ] 3 .

Hillebrandite, Ca2SiO 4 .H 2 O. Wilkeite,3Ca 3 (PO 4 ) 2 .CaCO 3 .3Ca 3 [(SiO 4 )
Crestmoreite, 4H 2 CaSiO 4 .3H 2 O. (SO 4 )].CaO.
Riversideite, -2CaSiO 5 .H2 O. Svabite, Ca arsenate.
Lotrite,3(Ca,Mg)0.2(Al,Fe) 2 3 .4Si0 2 .2H2 Spodiosite, (CaF)CaPO 4 .
Okenite, H
2 CaSi 2 O 5 .H 2 O. AdeHte (MgOH)CaAsO 4 .
Gyre-lite, H
2 Ca 2 Si 3 O 9 .H 2 O. Tilasite (MgF)CaAsO 4 .
APOPHYLLITE, H 7 KCa 4 (SiO 3 ) 8 .4H 2 O. Herderite, Ca[Be(F,OH)]PO 4 .
Ptilolite. (Ca,K2 ,Na,)Al2 Si 10O 24 .5H 2 O. Jezekite, Na 4 CaAl(AlO) (F,OH) 4 (PO 4 ) 2 .

Mordemte, (Ca,K2 ,Na2)Al2 Sii O 24 .20H 2O. Crandallite, 2CaO.4Al 2 3 .2P 2 5 10H 2 0. O O .
H
HEULANDITE, 4 CaAl 2 (SiO 3 )6.3H 2 O. Lacroixite, Na 4 (Ca,Mn) 4 Al 3 (F,OH) 4 P 3Oi 6.
Brewsterite, H
4 (Sr,Ba,Ca)Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .3H 2 O. 2H O.
2
Epistilbite, H
4 CaAl 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .3H 2 O.
Calciovolborthite, (Cu, Ca) 3V 2 O 8 (Cu, Ca) .
Wellsite, (Ba,Ca,K 2 )Al2 Si 3O 10 .3H 2 O. (OH) 2 .
Phillipsite, (K2 ,Ca)Al 2 Si 4Oi 2 .4iH 2 O. Tavistockite, Ca 3P 2 O 8 .2Al(OH) 2 .
StUbite, (Na2 ,Ca)Al2 Si 6Oi 6 .6H 2 O. Cirrolite,Ca 3Al(PO 4 ) 3 .Al(OH) 3.
Flokite, H
8 (Ca,Na 2 )Al 2 Si 9O 26 .2H 2 O.
Arseniosiderite, Ca 3 Fe (AsO 4 ) 3 .3Fe (OH) 3 .
Gismondite, CaAl2 Si 2 O 8 .4H 2 O. Retzian, Y,Mn,Ca, arsenate.

Laumontite, H
4 CaAl 2 Si 4 Oi 4 .2H 2 O.
Arseniopleite, (Mn, Ca) 9 (Mn, Fe) 2 (OH) 6
Laubanite, Ca2Al2 Si 5 Oi 5 .6H 2O. (AsO 4 ) 6 .
CHABAZITE, (Ca,Na 2 )Al 2 Si 4Oi 2 .6H2 O. Collophanite, Ca 3 P 2 O 8 .H 2 O.

Gmelinite, (Na2 ,Ca)Al 2 Si 4Oi 2 .6H2 O. Pyrophosphorite, Mg2 P 2 O 7 .4(Ca 3P2 O 8 .
Levynite, CaAl 2 Si 3O 10 .5H 2 O. Ca 2 P2 ). 7
Faujasite, H
4 Na 2 CaAl 4 Si, O 38 18H 2 O. .
Roselite, (Ca,Co,Mg) 3As 2 O 8 .2H2O.
Scolecite, Ca(AlOH) 3 (SiO 3 ) 3 .2H n O. Ca 2 MnAs 2 O 8 .2H2 O.
MS5% N^^SiaOio^HaO +2[CaAl 2 Si 3 O 10
Brandite,
Fairfieldite, Ca 2 MnP 2 O 8 .2H 2 O.
3H OJ.
Messelite, (Ca,Fe) 3 P 2 O 8 .2iH 2 O.
2
Gonnardite, (Ca,Na2 ) 2 Al2 Si 6O 15 .5^H 2 O. Anapaite, (Ca,Fe) 3P 2 O 8 .4H2 O.

APPENDIX B 667
Picropharmacolite, (Ca,Mg)As 2O 8 .6H 2 O. Bastnasite, (CeF)CO 3 .
Churchite, Hydrous Ca,Ce phosphate. > Ancylite, 4Ce(OH)CO 3 .3SrCO 3 .3H 2 O.

Fernandinite, CaO.V2 O4.5V 2 O5.14H 2O. Ambatoarinite, Rare earths, Sr, carbonate.
Pascoite, 2CaO.3V 2 O 5 .llH 2 O. Lanthanite, La 2 (CO 3 ) 3 .9H 2 O.
Pintadoite, 2CaO.V 2 O 5 .9H 2O. Melanocerite
Pharmacolite, HCaAsO 4 .2H 2 O. Caryocerite Ca,Ce,Y, fluo-sihcates.
Haidingerite, HCaAsO 4 .H 2 O. Steenstrupine
Wapplerite, HCaAsO 4 .3H 2O. Tritomite, Th,Ce,Y,Ca, fluo-silicate.
Brushite, HCaPO 4 .2H 2 O. Mackintoshite, U,Th,Ce, sihcate.
Martinite, H
2 Ca 5 (PO 4 ) 4 2 O. 4H Allanite, Ca,Fe,Ce,Al, silicate.
Hewettite \p a o
Metahewettite }<-aO.3V
QTT O
2 O 5 .9H 2 O.
W Cerite, Ce, etc., silicate.
Beckelite, Ca 3 (Ce,La,Di) 4 Si 3O 15 .
Isoclasite, Ca 3 P 2 O 8 .Ca(OH) 2 .4H 2 O. Hellandite, Ce, etc., Al,Mn,Ca, silicate.

Conichalcite, (Cu,Ca) 3 As 2 O 8 (Cu,Ca) (OH) 2 . .
Bazzite, Sc., etc., silicate.
-
^H 0.2 Britholite, Ce, etc., silicate and phosphate.
Volborthite, Cu,Ba,Ca, vanadate. Erikite, Ce, etc., sihcate and phosphate.
Mazapilite, Ca 3 Fe 2 (AsO 4 ) 4 .2FeO(OH).5H 2 O. Tscheffkinite, Ce,Fe, titano-silicate.
Yukonite, (Ca 3 ,Fe 2 '")(AsO 4 ) 2 .2Fe(OH) 3 .
Johnstrupite ]
5H 2 O. Mosandrite |Ce, etc., titano-silicates.
Calcioferrite,Ca Fe 2 (PO 4 ) 4 .Fe(OH) 3 .8H 2 O.
3 Rinkite
Borickite, Ca 3 Fe 2 (PO 4 ) 4 .12Fe(OH) 3 .6H 2 O. Knopite, Ca,Ce, titanate.
Egueiite, Hydrous Fe,Al,Ca, phosphate. Pyrochlore, Ca,Ce, niobate.
Goyazite, Ca 3 Ali P 2 O 23 .9H 2 O.
Roscherite, (Mn,Fe,Ca) 2 Al(OH) (PO 4 ) 2 . Chalcplamprite,
2H 2 O. Koppite, Ca,Ce, niobate.
Fergusonite, Y,Er,Ce,U, niobate.
Ca(UO 2 ) 2 P2 O,8H O. 2
Sipylite, Er,Ce, niobate.
Uranospinite, Ca(UO 2 As O 8 .8H O. 2) 2 2 Yttrotantalite, Fe,Ca,Y,Er,Ce, tantalate.
Tyuyamunite, CaO.2UO .V2 O 5 .4H O. 3 2 Samarskite, Fe,Ca,U,Ce,Y, niobate.
Romeite, CaSb 2 O 4 . Aeschynite, Ce, niobate-titanate.
Lewisite, 5CaO.2TiO 2 .3Sb 2 5 O . Polymignite, Ce, Fe, Ca, niobate-titanate.
Euxenite
Mauzeliite, Pb,Ca, titano-antimonate. Y,Ce,U, niobate-
Podolite, 3Ca 3 (PO 4 ) 2 .CaCO 3 . Polycrase titanates.
Al,Ca, phosphate and
Blomstrandine-Priorite
Svanbergite, Hydrous
sulphate. MONAZITE, (Ce,La,Di)P'O 4 .
Nitrocalcite, Ca(NO ) 3 2 .rcH 2 O. Florencite, Ce,Al, phosphate.

Lautarite, Ca(IO 3 ) 2 . Rhabdophanite, Hydrous Ce,Y, phosphate.
Dietzeite, Ca iodo-chroniate. Churchite, Hydrous Ce,Ca, phosphate.
Nordenskioldine, CaSn(BO 3 ) 2 .
Howlite, H
5 Ca 2 B 5 SiOi 4 .
CHROMIUM
COLEMANITE, Ca2 B 6 On.5H 2 O. Daubreelite, FeS.Cr2 S 3 .
Inyoite, 2CaO.3B 2 O 3 .13H 2 O. Chromite, FeO.Cr2 O 3 .
Meyerhofferite, 2CaO.3B 2 O 3 .7H2 O. Stichtite, 2MgCO .5Mg(OH)3 2 .2Cr(OH) 3 .
Ulexite, NaCaB 5 O 9 .8H 2 O. Uvarovite, Ca 3 Cr2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Bechilite, CaB 4 O 7 .4H 2 O. Furnacite, Pb,Cu, chrom-arsenate.

Hydroboracite, CaMgB On.6H O. 6 2 Dietzite, Ca iodo-chromate.
GLAUBERITE, Na SO .CaSO 2 4 4. CROCOITE, PbCrO 4.
Anhydrite \r<oQr Phcenicochroite, 3PbO.2CrO 3 .
CaSO ^
Bassanite | Vauquelinite,, 2(Pb,Cu)CrO 4 .(Pb,Cu) 3 P2 O8 .
Gypsum, CaSO .2H O. 4 2 Bellite, Pb, arseno-chromate.

Syngenite, CaSO .K SO .H O. 4 2 4 2 Knoxvillite,Hydrous Fe,Al,Cr, sulphate.
Polyhahte, 2CaSO 4 .MgSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .2H 2 O. Redingtonite, Hydrous Cr sulphate.
Ettringite, 6CaO.Al 2 O .3SO .33H O.
3 3 2
Uranopilite, CaU 8S 2 O i.25H O.

3 2 COBALT
SCHEELITE, CaWO 4.
Sychnodymite, (Co,Cu) 4 S 5 .
Powellite,Ca(Mo,W)O 4 .
Co 3S 4
,
.
Whewellite, CaC 2 O 4 .H 2 O. Carrollite, CuCo 2 S 4 .
Badenite, (Co,Ni,Fe) 2 (As,Bi) 3 .
CERIUM EARTHS Cobaltnickelpyrite, (Co,Ni,Fe)S 2 .
Tysonite, (Ce,La,Di)F3 .
SMALTITE, CoAs 2 .
Fluocerite, (Ce,La,Di) 2 OF4 .

COBALTITE, CoAsS.
Yttrocerite, (Y,Er,Ce)F 3 .5CaF2 .H 2 Q. Willyamite, CoS2 .NiS 2 .CoSb2 .NiSb2 .
Parisite, [(Ce,La,Di)F] 2 .CaCO 3 .

Villamaninite, Cu,Ni,Co,Fe, sulphide.
668 APPENDIX B
Skutterudite, CoAs3 . Cumengite, 4PbCl 2 .4CuO.5H 2O.

CoAs 2 .
Tallingite, Hydrous Cu chloride.
Safflorite,
Cuprite, Cu 2O.
Glaucodot, (Co,Fe)AsS.
Tenorite, Paramelaconite, CuO.
Crednerite, 3CuO.2Zn 2 3 O .
Rosasite, 2CuO.3CuCO 3 .5ZnCO 3 ?

iwocuKCj vjv) 0/5 *
CuCO 3 .Cu(OH) 2
Erythrite, Co As O
.8H O.
3 2 8 2 Malachite, .
2CuCO 3 .Cu(OH) 2
Forbesite, H (Ni,Co) As O .8H
2
O. 2 2 8 2 Azurite, .
Bieberite, CoSO 4 .7H 2O. Aurichalcite,2(Zn,Cu)CO 3 .3(Zn,Cu)(OH).

Voglite, Hydrous U,Ca,Cu, carbonate.
COPPER Dioptase, H CuSiO
2 4.
Native Copper, Cu. Plancheite, H Cu (Cu.OH)

4 7 8 (SiO 3 ) 12 .
Horsfordite, CueSb.
CHRYSOCOLLA, CuSiO 3 .2H 2 O.
Cu 3As. Shattuckite, 2CuSiO 3 .H O. ii
Domeykite,
Mohawkite, Cu As. 3 Bisbeeite, CuSiO 3 .H 2 O
Olivenite, Cu 2 (OH)AsO 4 .
Algodonite, CuoAs.
Whitneyite, CuÂs. Libethenite, Cu 2 (OH)PO 4 .
Cocinerite, Cu4AgS. Calciovolborthite, (Cu,Ca) 3 VO 2 8.

'
Rickardite, Cu4Te 3 . (Cu,Ca)(OH),.

Berzelianite, Cu 2Se. Turanite, 5CuO.V 2 O 5 .2H 2 O.
Eucairite, Cu2 Se.Ag2 Se.
Zorgite, Pb,Cu, selenide.
Crookesite, Cu,Tl, selenide. Furncite, Pb,Cu, chrom-arsenate.
Umangite, CuSe.Cu 2 Se. Tsumebite, Pb,Cu, phosphate.
Chalcocite, Cu2 S. CUnoclasite, Cu 3 As O .3Cu(OH) 2 2 8 .
Stromeyrite, (Ag,Cu) 2S. Erinite, Cu As O .2Cu(OH) 2

3 2 8 .
Chalmersite,Cu 2 S.Fe4S 6 . Dihydrite, Cu P O 8 .2Cu(OH)

3 2 2.
COVELLITE, CuS. Pseudomalachite, Cu P 2 O 8 .3Cu (OH) 2 3 .
Sychnodymite, (Co,Cu)4S 6 . Trichalcite, Cu As O .5H O. 3 2 8 2
Boniite, Cu 6FeS 4 . Rosieresite, Hydrous Al,Pb,Cu, phosphate.

CarroUite, CuS.Co2 S 3 . Eucroite, Cu 3As 2 O 8 .Cu(OH) 2 .6H 2 O.
Chalcopyrite, CuFeS2 . Conichalcite, (Cu,Ca) 3As 2 O 8 (Cu,Ca) (OH) 2 . .
Villamaninite, Cu,Ni,Co,Fe, sulphide.

Eichbergite, (Cu ; Fe) 2 S.3(Bi,Sb) 2 S 3 .
Bayldonite, (Pb,Cu) 3 As 2 O 8 (Pb,Cu) (OH) 2 . .
Histrixite, 5CuFeS 2 .2Sb2 S 3 .7Bi 2 S 3 .
Cuprobismutite, 3Cu 2 S.4Bi 2 S 3 .

Tagihte, Cu 3 P 2 O 8 .Cu(OH) 2 .2H2 O.
Emplectite, Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 .
Leucochalcite, Cu3As 2O 8 .Cu(OH) 2 .2H 2 O.
Chalcostibite, Cu2 S.Sb S 2 3. Barthite, 3ZnO.CuO.3As 2 O 5 .2H 2 O.
Hutchinsonite, (Tl,Ag,Cu) 2 S.As 2 S 3 + PbS. Volborthite, Hydrous, Cu,Ba,Ca, vanadate.
As2 S 3 ? Cornwallite, Cu 3 As 2 O 8 .2Cu(OH) 2 .H 2 O.
Klaprotholite, 3Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 .
Tyrolite, Cu3As 2 O 8 .2Cu(OH) 2 .7H 2 O.
Bournonite, 3(Pb,Cu 2 )S.Sb 2 S 3 .
Chalcophyllite, 7CuO. As 2 O 5 14H 2 O. .
Seligmannite, 3(Pb,Cu 2 )S.As 2 S 3 .

Veszelyite, Hydrous Cu,Zn, phospho-ar-
Aikinite, 2PbS.Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 . senate.
Wittichenite, 3Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 .
Turquois, CuO.3Al 2 O 3 .2P 2 O 5 .9H 2 O.
Stylotypite, 3(Cu 2 ,Ag2 ,Fe)S.Sb 2 S 3 .
Liroconite,Cu 6 Al(AsO 4 )5.3CuAl(OH)5.20H 2
Lengenbachite, 7[Pb, (Ag,Cu) 2 ]S.2As2 S 3 . Chenevixite, Cu 2 (FeO) 2 As 2 O 8 .3H 2 O.
Falkenhaynite, 3Cu 2 S.Sb2 S 3 .
Henwoodite, Al,Cu, hydrous phosphate.
Tetrahedrite, 4Cu 2 S.Sb 2 S 3 .
Ceruleite, CuO.2Al 2 O3.As 2 O 6 .8H 2 O.
TENNANTITE, 4Cu 2 S.As 2 S 3 .
Chalcosiderite, CuO.2Fe 2 O 3 .2P 2 O 5 .8H 2 O.
Goldfieldite,5Cu 2 S. (Sb, As,Bi) 2 (S.Te) 8 .
Torbernite, Cu(UO 2 ) 2 P 2 O 8 .8H 2 O.
Enargite, 3Cu 2 S.As 2 S 5 .
Zeunerite, Cu(UO 2 ) 2 As 2 O 8 .8H 2O.
Famatinite, 3Cu 2 S.Sb2 S 5 .
Mixite, Hydrous Cu,Bi, arsenate.
Sulvanite, 3Cu S.V2 S 6 2 .
Trippkeite, Cu, arsenite.
Epigenite, 4Cu 2 S.3FeS.As2S 6 .
Lindackerite, 3NiO.6CuO.SO 3 .2As 2 O 5 .7H 2 O.
STANNITE, Cu2 S.FeS.SnS2 .
Gerhardtite, Cu(NO 3 ) 2 .3Cu(OH) 2 .
Nantokite, CuCl. Hydrocyanite, CuSO 4 .
Marshite, Cul. Vauquehnite, 2(Pb,Cu)CrO 4 (Pb,Cu) 3 P 2 O 8 . .
Miersite, 4AgI.CuI. Connellite, CuSO 4 .2CuCl 2 19Cu(OH) 2 .H 2 O. .
ATACAMITE, CuCl 2 .3Cu(OH) 2 .

Spangolite, Cu 6 AlClSOi .9H 2 O.
Percylite, PbCl2 .CuO.H 2O. BROCHANTITE, CuSO 4 .3Cu(OH) 2 .
Boleite. 9PbCk8CuO.3AgC1.9H 2 O. Dolerophanite, Cu 2 SO 5 .
Pseudoboleite, 5PbCl2 .4CuO.6H 2O. Caledonite, 2(Pb,Cu)O.SO 3 .H 2O.

APPENDIX B 669
Linarite, (Pb,Cu)SO 4 (Pb,Cu) (OH)* .

Vredenburgite, 3Mn 3O 4 .2Fe 2 O 3 .
Anthrite, CuSO 4 .2Cu(OH) 2 .

Hercynite, FeO.Al 2 O 3 .
Pisanite, (Fe,Cu)SO 4 .7H 2O. Magnetite, FeO.Fe 2 O 3 .
Boothite, CuSO 4 .7H 2 O. FRANKLINITE, (Fe.Zn.Mn)O.

Cupromagnesite, (Cu,Mg)SO 4 .7H 2 O. (Fe,Mn),O s .
CHALCANTHITE, CuSO 4 .5H 2 O. Magnesioferrite, MgO.Fe 2 O 3 .
Krohnkite, CuSO 4 .Na2 SO 4 .2H 2 O. Jacobsite, (Mn,Mg)O.(Fe,Mn) 2 Oa.

Natrochalcite,Cu 4 (OH) 2 (SO 4 ) 2 .Na2 SO4 .2H2O Chromite, FeO.Cr2 O 3
Phillipite, CuSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .nH 2 O. Pseudobrookite, Fe 4 (TiO 4 ) 3 .
Langite, CuSO 4 .3Cu(OH) 2 .H 2 O. Bixbyite, FeO.MnO 2 .
Herrengrundite, 2(CuOH) 2 SO 4 .Cu(OH) 2 .

Gothite, Fe 2 O 3 .H2 O.
Vernadskite, 3CuSO 4 .Cu(OH) 2 .4H 2 O. Lepidocrocite, Fe 2 O 3 .H 2 O.
Kamarezite, Hydrous basic Cu sulphate. Limonite, 2Fe 2 O 3 .3H 2 O.
Cyanotrichite, 4CuO.Al ? O 3 .SO 3 .8H 2 O. Turgite, 2Fe 2 O 3 .H2 O.
Serpierite, Hydrous basic Cu,Zn, sulphate. Hydrogothite, 3Fe2 O 3 .4H 2 O.
Beaverite, CuO.PbO.Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .4H 2 O. Xanthosiderite, Fe 2 O 3 .2H 2 O.
Johannite, Hydrous Cu,U, sulphate. Esmeraldaite, Fe 2 O 3 .4H 2 O.
Gilpinite, (Cu,Fe,Na 2 )O.UO 3 .SO 3 .4H 2 O. Pyroaurite, Fe(OH) 3 .3Mg(OH) 2 .3H2O.
Chalcomenite, CuSeO 3 .2H 2 O. Skemmatite, 3MnO 2 .2Fe 2 O 3 .6H 2 O.
Cuprotiungstite, CuWO 4. Beldongrite, 6Mn 2 O 3 .Fe 2 O 3 .8H 2 O.
Ankerite, 2CaCO 3 .MgCO 3 .FeCO 3 .
GOLD Mesitite, 2MgCO .FeCO 3 3.
Native Gold, Au. Pistomesite, MgCO .FeC0 3 3.
Petzite, (Ag,Au) 2 Te. Siderite, FeCO 3 .
SYLVANITE, (Au,Ag)Te2 . BrugnateUite,MgCO 3 .5Mg(OH) 2 .Fe(OH) 3 .
Krennerite, (Au,Ag)Te 2 . 4H O.
2
CALAVERITE, AuTe 2 .
HYPERSTHENE, (Fe,Mg)SiO 3 .
Muthmannite, (Ag,Au)Te. ACMITE, NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .
Nagyagite, Au,Pb, sulpho-telluride. Pyroxmangite, Mn,Fe, pyroxene.

Babingtonite, (Ca,Fe,Mn)SiO 3 with ,
IRON Fe2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Native Iron, Fe. ANTHOPHYLLITE, (Mg,Fe)SiO 3 .
Awaruite, FeNi 2 .
GLAticopHANE, NaAl(SiO3 ) 2 .
Josephinite, FeNi 3 . (Fe,Mg)SiO 3 .
Chalmersite, Cu S.Fe 4 S 5
2 . RIEBECKITE, 2NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .FeSiO3.
Sternbergite, Ag S.Fe 4S 6
2 . CROCIDOLITE, NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .FeSiO 3 .
Peritlandite, (Fe,Ni)S. ARFVEDSONITE, Na,Ca,Fe, silicate.
Pyrrhotite, FeS. Ênigmatite, Fe,Na,Ti-sihcate.

Troilite,FeS. Weinbergerite, NaAlSiO 4 .3FeSiO 3 .
Daubreelite, FeS.Cr2 S 3 . Astrolite, (Na,K) 2 Fe(Al,Fe) 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .H2 0?

Badenite, (Co,Ni,Fe) 2 (As,Bi) 3 . lolite, H 2 (Mg,Fe) 4 Al 8 Si 10 O 37 .
Taramellite, Ba 4 Fe 'Fe 4 'Sii O 31 .

' ''
Chalcopyrite, CuFeS 2 .
Pyrite, FeS 2 .
Helvite, (Be,Mn,Fe) 7 Si 3Oi 2 S.
Bravoite, (Fe,Ni)S 2 . Almandite, Fe 3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Cobaltnickelpyrite, (Fe,Co,Ni)S2 . Andradite, Ca 3 Fe 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Arsenoferrite, FeAs 2 . Partschinite, (Mn,Fe) 3Al2 Si 3Oi 2 .

Marcasite, FeS 2 .
Fayalite, Fe 2 SiO 4 .
Lollingite, FeAs2 . Knebelite, (Fe,Mn) 2 SiO 4 .
Arsenopyrite, FeAsS. Pyrosmalite, H

7 ((Fe,Mn)Cl)(Fe,Mn) 4 Si 4 O, 6 .
Eichbergite, (Cu,Fe) 2 S.3(Bi,Sb) 2 S 3 . Homilite, (Ca,Fe) 3 B 2 Si 2 O 10 .
Histrixite, 5CuFeS 2 .2Sb2 S 3 .7Bi 2 S 3. Allanite, (Ca,Fe) 2 (AlOH) (Al,Ce,Fe) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Berthierite,FeS.Sb 2 S 3 . ILVAITE, CaFe2 (FeOH)(SiO 4 ) 2 .
Stylotypite, 3(Cu 2 ,Ag2 ,Fe)S.Sb2 S 3. Melanotekite, 3PbO.2Fe 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .
Molysite, FeCl 3 . Angaralite, 2(Ca,Mg)O.5(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6Si0 2 .
Lawrencite, FeCl2 . STAUROLITE, (AlO) 4 (AlOH)Fe(SiO 4 ) 2 .
Rinneite, FeCl 2 .3KCl.NaCl. Grandidierite, Al,Fe,Mg, silicate.

silicate.
Kremersite, KCl 2 .NH 4 Cl.FeCl 2 .H2O. Aloisite, Fe,Ca,Mg,Na,
Erythrosiderite, 2KCl.FeCl 3 .H 2 O. Pochite, Hi 6 Fe 8 Mn Si O 2 3 29 .
.4Si0 2 .2H 2 0.
Hematite, Fe 2 O 3 Lotrite,3(Ca,Mg)0.2(Al,Fe) 2 8
.
ILMENITE, FeTiO 3 . Zinnwaldite, Li-Fe mica.

Senaite, (Fe,Mn,Pb)O.TiO 2 . Biotite, Mg-Fe mica.
Arizonite, Fe 2 O 3 .3TiO 2 . Lepidomelane, Iron mica.
Sitaparite, 9Mn O2 3 .4Fe 2 O 3 .MnO 2 .3CaO. Chloritoid, H 2 (Fe,Mg)Al2Si0 7 .
670 APPENDIX B
Prochlorite, Fe,Mg,chlonte.
Pharmacosiderite,6FeAs0 4 .2Fe(OH) 3 .
.7Si0 2 .2H 20. 12H 2 0.

Moravite, 2Fe0.2(Al,Fe) 2 3
Cronstedtite, 4FeO.2Fe 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .4H 2O. Ludlamite, 2Fe 3 P2 O 8 .Fe(OH) 2 .8H 2 O.

Thuringite, 8FeO.4(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6SiO 2
.9H 2 O. Cacoxenite, FePO 4 .Fe(OH) 3 .4^H 2 O.
m,O. Beraunite, 2FePO 4 .Fe(OH) 3 .2|H 2 O.
Brunsvigite, 9(FeMÔ.2A\f)Ô 2
4(Mg,Fe,Ca)0.(Al,Fe) 2 3 .5Si0 2
. Childrenite, 2AlPO 4 .2Fe(OH) 2 .2H 2 O.
Griffithite,
7H 2O. Mazapilite, Ca 3 Fe 2 (AsO 4 ) 4 .2FeO(OH).5H 2 O.
'/
Chamosite, Fe,Mg, silicate. Yukonite, (Ca 3 ,Fe 2 ') (AsO 4 ) 2 .2Fe(OH) 3 .
Stilpnomelane \ Fe silicate s.
5H2 O.
Calcioferrite, Ca 3 Fe 2 (PO 4 ) 4 Fe (OH ) 3 8H
. .
2 O.
Mmgu6tite /
Strigovite, H Fe2(Al,Fe)
4 2 Si 2 Oii. Borickite, Ca 3 Fe 2 (PO 4 ) 4 12Fe(OH) 3 .6H 2 O.
.
(Na 2 ,K2 ) 2 (Mg,Fe) 3 (Fe,Al) 2 Egueiite, Hydrous Fe,Al,Ca, phosphate.

Spodiophyllite,
(SiO 3 ) 8 .
O
Richelite, 4FeP 2 8 .Fe 2 OF
2 (OH) 2 .36H 2 O.
Celadonite, Fe,Mg,K, silicate. Chenevixite, Cu 2 (FeO) 2 As 2 O 8 .3H 2 O.

Glauconite, Hydrous Fe,K, silicate. Chalcosiderite, CuO.3Fe 2 O 3 .2P 2 O 5 .8H 2 O.
Pholidolite, K 0.12(Fe,Mg)O.A}
2 2 3 .13Si0 2 . Roscherite, (Mn,Fe,Ca) 2 Al(OH) (PO 4 ) 2 .
5H 2 O. 2H 0.
2
Faratsihite, (Al,Fe) 2 3 .2Si0 2 .2H 2 O. O Tripuhyite, 2FeO.Sb 2 O 5 .
Melite, 2(Al,Fe) 2 3 .Si0 2 .8H 20. Flajolotite, 4FeSbO 4 .3H2 O.

Chloropal, H 6 Fe 2 (SiO 4 ) 2 .2H 2O. Catoptrite, 14(Mn,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2O 3 .2SiO2 .
Mullerite, Fe2 Si 3 O 9 .2H 2O.

Hisingerite \ Derbylite, Fe antimo-titanate.
Hydrous f erric s ili ca tes.
Morencite /
J
Diadochite, Hydrous Fe phosphate and
Astrophyllite, Na, K, Fe, Mn, titano-sil- sulphate.
icate. Pitticite, Hydrous Fe arsenate and sul-
Narsarsukite, Fe,Na, titaim-silicate. phate.
Neptunite, Fe,Mn,Na,K, titano-silicate. Beudantite, 3Fe 2 O 3 .2PbO.2SO 3 .As 2 O 8 .6H 2 O.
Joaquinite, Ca,Fe, titano-silicate. Hinsdalite, 3Fe 2 O 3 .2PbO.2SO 3 .P 2 O 5 .6H 2 O.
Dysanalyte, Ca,Fe, titano-niobate. Lossenite, Hydrous Fe,Pb, arsenate and
Geikielite, (Mg,Fe)Ti0 3 .
sulphate.
Delorenzite, Fe,U,Y, titanate. Ludwigite, 3MgO.B 2 O 3 .FeO.Fe 2 O 3 .
Neotantalite, Fe tantalate. Vonsenite, 3(Fe,Mg)O.B 2 O 3 .FeO.Fe 2 3 O .
COLUMBITE, TANTALITE, (Fe,Mn) Magnesioludwigite, 3MgO.B 2 O 3 .MgO.Fe 2 O 3 .

(Nb,Ta) 2 6 .
Warwickite, (Mg,Fe) 3 TiB 2 O 8 .
Tapiolite, Fe(Ta,Nb) 2 O 6 .
Lagonite, Fe 2 O 3 .3B 2 O 3 .3H 2 O.
Yttrotantalite, Fe,Ca,Y,Er,Ce, tantalate. Hulsite, 12(Fe,Mg)O.2Fe 2 O 3 .lSnO 2 .3B 2 O3 .
Samarskite, Fe,U,Y, etc., niobate-tantalate. Millosevichite, (Fe,Al) 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .
Hielmite, Y,Fe,Mn,Ca, stanno-tantalate. Szomolnokite, FeSO4 .H 2 O.

Monimolite, Pb,Fe, antimonate. Ilesite, (Mn,Zn,Fe)SO 4 .4H2 O.
TRIPHYLITE, Li(Fe,Mn)PO4 .
Melanterite, FeSO 4 .7H 2O.
Graftonite, (Fe,Mn,Ca) 3 P2 O 8. Pisanite; (Fe,Cu)SO 4 .7H 2 O.
Triplite. (RF)RPO 4
Fe,Mn. ;
R= Halotrichite, FeSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H 2O.
Triploidite (ROH)RPO 4 R = Fe,Mn. ; Bilinite, FeSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H 2 O.
Dufrenite, FePO 4 .Fe(OH) 3 .
Dietrichite, (Zn,Fe,Mn)SO 4 .Al 2 (SO4 ) 3 .
LazuUte, 2AlPO 4 .(Fe,Mg)(OH) 2 . 22H 2 O.

Arseniosiderite, Ca 3 Fe(AsO 4 ) 3 .3Fe(OH) 3 .
Coquimbite, Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .9H 2O.
Dickinsonite Hydrous Mn,Fe,Na, i
Quenstedtite, Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 8 .10H 2 O.
Fillowite phosphate. /
Ihleite, Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .12H2 O.
Messelite (Ca,Fe) 3 P 2 O 8 .2H2 O. Phillipite, CuSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .nH 2 O.
Anapaite, (Ca,Fe) 3 P 2 O 8 .4H 2O. Ferronatrite,3Na2 SO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .6H2O.
Vivianite, Fe 3 P 2 O 8 .8H 2 O. Romerite, FeSO 4 .Fe 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .14H 2 O.
Symplesite, Fe 3 As->O 8 .8H2O. Beaverite, CuO.PbO.Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .4H 2 O.
Scorodite, FeAsO 4 .2H 2 O. Vegasite, PbO.3Fe 2 O 3 .3SO 3 .6H 2 O.
Vilateite, Hydrous Fe, Mn, phosphate. Copiapite, 2Fe 2 O 3 .5SO 3 .18H 2 O.
Purpurite, 2(Fe,Mn)PO 4 .H 2 O. Castanite, Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .8H 2 O.
Strengite, FePO 4 .2H 2 O. Utahite, 3Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .7H 2 O.
Phosphosiderite, 2FePO 4 .3^H 2O. Amaranthite, Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .7H2 O.
Barrandite, (Al,Fe)PO 4 .2H 2O. Fibroferrite, Fe 2 O 3 .2SO 3 .10H 2 O.
Koninckite, FePO 4 .3H 2 O. Raimondite, 2Fe 2 O 3 .3SO 3 .7H 2 O.
Sicklerite, Fe 2 O 3 .6MnO.4P 2 O 5 .3(Li,H) 2O. Carphosiderite, 3Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .7H 2 O.
Salmonsite, Fe 2 O 3 .9MnO.4P 2 O 5 14H,O. .
Planoferrite, Fe 2 O 3 .SO 3 .15H 2 O.
Liskeardite, (Al,Fe) AsO 4 .2(Al,Fe) (OH) 3 .
Glockerite, 2Fe 2 O 3 .SO 3 .6H 2 O.
5H 2 O.
Knoxvillite, Hydrous Fe,Al,Cr, sulphate.
APPENDIX B 671
Cyprusite, 7Fe2 O 3 A1 2 O 3
10SO 3 14H 2 O.
. . .
Percylite, PbCl 2 .CuO.H 2 O.
Botryogen, MgO.FeO.Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 18H 2 O. .
Boleite, 9PbCl 2 .8CuO.3AgC1.9HoO.
Sideronatrite, 2Na2 O.Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .7H 2 O. Pseudo-boleite, 5PbCl2 .4CuO.6H 2 O.
Voltaite, 3(K 2 ,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6SO 3 .9H 2 O. Cumengite, 4PbCl2 .4CuO.5H 2 O.
Metavoltine, 5(K 2 ,Na 2 ,Fe)O.3Fe2 O 3 .12SO 3 .
Matlockite, PbCl 2 .PbO.
18H 2 O. Mendipite, PbCl 2 .2PbO.
Jarosite, K Fe
2 6 (OH) 2 (SO 4 ) 4 .
Lorettoite, PbCl 2 .6PbO.
Natrojarosite, Na Fe (OH) 2 6 12 (SO 4 )4. Laurionite, PbCl 2 .Pb(OH) 2 .
Plumbo jarosite, PbFe(OH)ij(SO4) 4 .

Penfieldite, 2PbCl 2 .PbO.
Quetenite, MgO.FeoO 3 .3SO 3 .13H 2 O. Daviesite,Pb oxychloride.
Rhomboclase, Fe 2 O 3 .4SO 3 .9H 2 O. Schwartzenbergite, Pb(I,Cl) 2 .2PbO.
Emmonsite, Hydrous Fe tellurate. Massicot, PbO.
Durdenite, Fe 2 (TeO 3 ) 3 .4H 2 O. Senaite, (Fe,Mn,Pb)O.TiO2 .
WOLFRAMITE, (Fe,Mn)WO 4 .
(Mn,Pb)Mn 3 O 7
Qoronadite, .
Reinite, FeWO 4. Minium, 2PbO.PbO 2 .
Ferritungstite, Fe 2 O 3 .WO 3 .6H 2O. Plattnerite,PbO 2.
Humboltine, FeC 2 4 .2H 2 0. Cerussite, PbCO 3.
PHOSGENITE, PbCO .PbCl 3 2.
LEAD Hydrocerussite, 2PbCO .Pb(OH) 3 2.
Dundasite, Pb(AlO) 2 (CO 3 ) 2 .
Native Lead, Pb Alamosite, PbSiO 3 .
Galena, PbS. Barysilite, Pb 3 Si 2 O 7 .
Altaite, Pb,Te. Molybdophyllite, (Pb,Mg)SiO 4 .H 2 O.

Clausthalite, PbSe. Ganomalite, Pb4 (PbOH) 2 Ca 4 (Si 2 O 7 ) 3 .
Naumannite, (Ag2 ,Pb)Se. Nasonite, Pb 4 (PbCl) 2 Ca 4 (Si 2 O 7 ) 3 .
Zorgite, Pb,Cu, selenide. Margarosanite, Pb(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Chiviatite, 2PbS.3Bi 2 S 3 .
Hy alotekite, (Pb, Ba, Ca) B 2 (SiO 3 ) 2 , .
Rezbanyite, 4PbS.5Bi 2 S 3 .
Roeblingite, 5(H2 CaSiO 4 ).2(CaPbSO4 )
Zinkenite, PbS.Sb 2 S 3 .
Hancockite, Pb,Mn,Ca,Al, etc., silicate.
Andorite, Ag 2 S.2PbS.3Sb2 S 3 .
Kentrolite, 3PbO.2Mn 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .
Sartorite, PbS.As 2 S 3 .
Melanotekite, 3PbO.2Fe 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .
Platynite, PbS.Bi 2 Se 3 .
Plumboniobite, Y,U,Pb,Fe, niobate
Galenobismutite, PbS.Bi 2 S 3 .
Monimolite, Pb,Fe, antimonate.
Hutchinsonite, (Tl,Ag,Cu) 2 S.As2S 3 + PbS. Carminite, Pb 3 As 2 O 8 .10FeAsO 4 .
As 2 S 3 ? Georgiadesite, Pb 3 (AsO 4 ) 2 .3PbCl2 .
Baumhauerite, 4PbS.3As 2 S 3 .
PYROMORPHITE, Pb 4 (PbCl)(PO 4 ) 3 .
Schirmerite, 3(Ag2 ,Pb)S.2Bi 2 S 3 .

Mimetite, Pb 4 (PbCl)(AsO 4 ) 3 .
Rathite, 3PbS.2As2 S 3 .
Vanadinite, Pb4 (PbCl)(VO 4 ) 3 .
Jamesonite, 2PbS.Sb 2 S 3 .
Trigonite, Pb3 MnH(AsO 3 ) 3 .
Dufrenoysite, 2PbS.As 2 S 3 .
Plumbogummite, Pb,Al, phosphate.
Cosalite, 2PbS.Bi 2 S 3 .
Descloizite, (Pb,Zn) 2 (OH)VO 4 .
Kobellite, 2PbS.(Bi,Sb) 2 S 3 .
Pyrobelonite, 4PbO.7MnO.2V 2 O 5 .3H 2 O.
Plagionite, Heteromorphite, Semseyite, Pb, Dechenite, PbV2 O 6 .
Sb, sulphides. Psittacinite \ TÎ^ !, ,
Mottramite ) Pb,Cu, vanadates.

Freieslebenite, 5(Pb,Ag2 )S.2Sb 2 S 3 .
Diaphorite, 5(Pb,Ag2 )S.2Sb 2 S 3 .

Furnacite, Pb,Cu, chrom-arsenate.
Boulangerite 5PbS.2Sb 2 S 3 .
Tsumebite, Pb,Cu, phosphate.
Mullanite, 5PbS.2Sb 2 S 3 .
Hydrous Al,Pb,Cu, phosphate.
Rosiere"site,
Bournonite, 3(Pb,Cu 2 )S.Sb 2 S 3 .
Ferrazite,3(Ba,Pb)O.2P 2 O 5 .8H 2 O.
Seligmanite, 3(Pb,Cu 2 )S.As 2 S 3 .
Bayldonite, (Pb,Cu) 3 As 2 O 8 (Pb,Cu) (OH) 2 . .
Aikinite, 2PbS.Cu 2 S.Bi 2 S 3 .
Lillianite, 3PbS.(Bi,Sb) 2 S 3 .
Hiigelite, Hydrous Pb,Zn, vanadate.
Guitermanite, 3PbS.As 2 S 3 .
Bindheimite, Hydrous Pb antimonate.
Lengenbachite, 7[Pb, (Ag,Cu) 2 ]S.2As2 S 3 . Nadorite, PbClSbO 2 .
Jordanite, 4PbS.As 2 S 3 .
Ecdemite, Pb 4 As 2 O 7 .2PbCl 2 .
Meneghinite, 4PbS.Sb 2 S 3 OchroUte, Pb 4 Sb 2 O 7 .2PbCl 2 .
Geocronite, 5PbS.Sb 2 S 3 .
Mauzeliite, Pb,Ca,titano-antimonate.
Beegerite, 6PbS.Bi 2 S 3 .
Beudantite, 3Fe 2 O 3 .2PbO.2SO 3 .As2 O 6 .6H2 O.
Epiboulangerite, 3PbS.Sb 2 S 3 . Hinsdalite, 3Fe 2 O 3 .2PbO.2SO 3 .P 2 O 6 .6H 2 O.
Teallite,PbSnS 2 . Lossenite, Hyclrous Fe, Pb, arsenate and
Franckeite, Pb 5 Sn 3 FeSb Su. 2 sulphate.
Cylindrite, Pb Sn 4 FeSb 2 Si 4
3 . Anglesite, PbSO 4 .
Cotunnite, PbCl 2 . CROCOITE, PbCrO4

672 APPENDIX B
Phcenicochroite, 3PbO.2Cr0 3 . HYPERSTHENE, (Fe,Mg)Si0 3 .
PO
Vauquelinite, 2(Pb,Cu)CrO 4 (Pb,Cu) 3 2 . s Pyroxene, Ca,Mg, etc., silicate.
Bellite, Pb arseno-chromate. ANTHOPHYLLITE, (Mg,Fe)SiO 3 .
Leadhillite, PbSO 4 .2PbCO .Pb(OH) 2 3 .

Amphibole, Ca,Mg, etc., silicate.
Caracolite, Pb(OH)Cl.Na2 SO 4 . GLAUCOPHANE, NaAl (SiO 3 ) 2 (Fe,Mg)SiO8 .
,
Lanarkite, Pb2 SO 6 . IOLITE, H (Mg,Fe) Al SiioO

2 4 8 3 7.
Caledonite, (Pb,Cu)S0 4 (Pb,Cu) (OH) 2 . .

Molybdophyllite, (Pb,Mg)SiO 4 .H2 O.
Linarite, (Pb,Cu)SO 4 (Pb,Cu) (OH) 2 . .
Pyrope, Mg3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Beaverite, CuO.PbO.Fe 2 O 3 .2SO3.4H 2 O. Chrysolite, (Mg,Fe) 2 SiO 4 .
Vegasite, PbO.3Fe 2 O 3 .3SO 3 .6H 2 O. Monticellite, CaMgSiO 4 .
Plumbojarosite, PbFe 6 (OH)i 2 (SO 4 ) 4 .

Fosterite, Mg
2 SiO 4 .
Palmierite, 3(K,Na) 2 SO 4 .4PbSO 4 .

Hortonolite, (Fe,Mg,Mn) 2 SiO 4 .
CHONDRODITE, [Mg(F,OH)] 2 Mg3 (SiO 4 ) 2 .
Humite, [Mg(F,OH)] 2 Mg5 (Si0 4 ) 3 .
Chillagite, 3PbW0 .PbMo0 4 4. Clinohumite, [Mg(F,OH)] 2 Mg 7 (SiO 4 ) 4 .
WULFENITE, PbMoO 4. Kornerupine, MgAl 2 SiO 6 .
Sapphirine, Mg
5 Ali 2 Si 2 2 7. O
LITHIUM Serendibite, 10(Ca,Mg)O.5Al 2 O 3 .B 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 .
Petalite, LiAl(Si O 2 5) 2. Silicomagnesiofluorite, 2 Ca 4 3 Si 2 7 Fi

H Mg O
Spodumene, LiAl(SiO 3 ) 2 .
Lptrite,3(Ca,Mg)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .4SiO 2 .2H 2 O.
Eucryptite, LiAlSiO 4 .
Biotite,Magnesium-iron mica.
LEPIDOLITE, Lithium mica. Phlogopite, Magnesium mica.
Zinnwaldite, Lithium-iron mica. Ta3niolite,K, Mg, silicate.
Manandonite, H
24 Li 4 Ali 4 B 4 Si6()5 3 .
Seybertite, H3 (Mg,Ca) 6Al 5 Si 2Oi 8 .
TRIPHYLITE, Li(Fe,Mn)PO 4 .
Xanthophyllite, H 8 (Mg,Ca) 14 Al 16 Si 6 O 52 .
Lithiophilite, Li(Mn,Fe)PO. Chloritoid, H 2 (Fe,Mg)Al 2 SiO 7 .
AMBLYGGNITE, Li(AlF)PO 4 .
Clinochlore, Penninite, 8 H Mg Al,Si O 5 3 18 .
Fremontite, (Na,Li)Al(OH,F)PO 4 .
Prochlorite, Fe,Mg, chlorite.
Sicklerite, Fe2 O 3 .6MnO.4P 2 O 5 .3(Li,H) 2 O. Brunsvigite, 9(Fe,Mg)O.2Al 2 O 3 .6SiO 2 .8H2 O.
Griffithite, 4(Mg,Fe,Ca)O. (Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .5SiO 2
MAGNESIUM 7H O.
2
.
Chloromagnesite, MgCl 2 .
Spodiophyllite, (Na 2 ,K 2 ) 2 (Mg,Fe) 3 (Fe,Al) 2
Sellaite, MgF 2. .
Nocerite, 2(Ca,Mg)F2 (Ca,Mg)O. Serpentine, 4 H Mg

3 Si 2 O 9 .
Koenenite, Al,Mg, oxy chloride. Deweylite, 4MgO.3SiO 2 .6H 2 O.

"
Carnallite, KCl.MgCl 2 .6H 2 O.
Mi Jl 2 .6H 2 0.
Genthite, 2NiO.2MgO.3SiO 2 .6H2 O.
Bischofite, _.-
,
Nepouite, 3(Ni,Mg)O.2SiO2 .2H2 O.
Tachhydrite, CaCl 2 .2MgCl 2 .12HoO Garnierite, H
2 (Ni,Mg)SiO 4 water. +
Ralstonite, (Na 2 ,Mg)F2 .3Al(F.OH) 3 .2H 2 O. Talc, HM2 g3 (Si0 3 ) 4 .
Periclase, MgO. SEPIOLITE, 4 H Mg

2 Si 3 Oi .
Spinel, MgO.Al 2 O 3.
Spadaite, 5MgO.6SiO 2 .4H 2 O.
Magnesioferrite, 2 3 MgO.Fe O .
Saponite, Hydrous Mg,Al, silicate.
Jacobsite, (Mn,Mg)O.(Fe,Mn) 2 O 3. Celadonite, Fe,Mg,K, silicate.
BRUCITE, Mg(OH) 2.
Pholidolite, K
2 0. 12(Fe,Mg)0. A1 2 3 13SiO 2 .
Hydrotalcite, Al(OH) 3 .3Mg(OH) 2 .3H2 O. 5H 2 O.

Pyroaurite, Fe(OH) 3 .3Mg(OH) 2 .3H 2 0. Colerainite, 4MgO.Al 2 O 3 .2SiO 2 .5H2 O.
Dolomite, CaCO .MgCO 3 3.
Tartarkaite, Al,Mg, hydrous silicate.
Ankerite, CaCO .(Mg,Fe,Mn)CO
3 3.
Geikielite, (Mg,Fe)TiO3 .
Magnesite, MgCO 3.
Berzeliite, (Ca,Mg,Mn,Na 2 ) 3 As 2 O 8 .
Mesitite, 2MgCO .FeCO 3 3.

Wagnerite, (MgF)MgPO 4 .
Pistomesite, MgCO .FeCO 3 3.

Adelite, (MgOH)CaAsO4 .
Northupite, MgCO .Na CO .NaCl. 3 2 3

Tilasite, (MgF)CaAs0 4 .
Tychite, 2MgCO .2Na CO .Na SO

Lazulite, 2AlPO 4 .(Fe,Mg)(OH) 2
3 2 3 2 4 .
Nesquehonite, MgCO .3H O. 3 2

Struvite, Hydrous, NH ,Mg, 4 phosphate.
Hydromagnesite, 3MgCO .Mg(OH) 2 .3H 2 O. 3
Pyrophosphorite, Mg P O 2 2 7 .4(Ca3 P2 O 8 .
Hydrogiobertite,MgC0 3 .Mg(OH) 2 .2H 2 0. Ca2 P2 O 7 ).

Artimte, MgCO 3 .Mg(OH) 2 .3H 2 O.
Lansfordite, 3MgC0 3 .Mg(OH) 2 .21H2 0.
Roselite, (Ca,Co,Mg) 3 As 2 8 .2H2 O. O
Brugnatelhte, MgCO 3 .5Mg(OH) 2 .Fe(OH) 3
Bobierrite, Mg O
3 P2 8 .8H 2 O.
4ji2v-J
.
Hcernesite, Mg O
3 As 2 8 .8H 2 O.
Gajite basic, hydrous Ca,Mg, carbonate.

Cabrerite, (Ni,Mg) 3 As 2 8 .8H 2 O. O
Stichtite,2MgC0 3 .5Mg(OH) 2 .2Cr(OH) 3
Newberyite, HMgPO .3H 2 O. 4
ENSTATITE, MgSiOs.
.
Hannayite i
Hydrous, 4 ,Mg, NH
Schertelite /
phosphates.
APPENDIX B 673
Liineburgite, 3MgO.B O 2 3 .P2 O 6 .8H2O. MnCO

Rhodochrosite, 3.
Nitromagnesite, Mg(NO 3) 2 .nH2 O. Schizolite, HNa(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3
Sussexite, H(Mn,Zn,Mg)BO 3.
Lavenite, Zr-silicate of Mn, Ca.
Ludwigite. 3MgO.B 2 O 3 .FeO.Fe 2 O 3 .
Rhodonite, MnSiO 3 .
Vonsenite, 3(Fe,Mg)O.B 2 O 3 .FeO.Fe 2 O 3 .

Pyroxmangite, Mn,Fe pyroxene.
Magnesioludwigite, 3MgO.B 2 O 3 .MgO.Fe2 O 3 .
Babingtonite, (Ca,Fe,Mn)SiO 3 with
Pinakiolite, 3MgO.B O .MnO.Mn 2 O 3 2 3 .
Fe 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Szaibelyite, 2Mg B4Oi,.3H O. 5 2

Margarosanite, Pb(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
BORACITE, Mg Cl Bi O 30
7 2 6 .
Helvite, (Be,Mn,Fe) 7 Si 3 O 12 S.
Ascharite, Hydrous Mg, borate. Danalite, (Be,Fe,Zn,Mn) 7 Si 3 O 12 S.
Spessartite, Mn
3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Pinnoite, MgB 2 O 4 .3H 2 O. Partschinite, (Mn,Fe) 3 Al 2 Si 3 Oi 2 .
Heintzite, Hydrous Mg,K, borate. Glaucochroite, CaMnSiO 4 .
Hulsite, 12(Fe,Mg)O.2Fe 2 O 3 !SnO 2 .3B 2 O 3 . .

Knebelite, (Fe,Mn) 2 SiO 4 .
2H O.
2
Tephrdite, Mn
2 SiO 4 .
Hydroboracite, CaMgB On.6H O. 6 2

Trimerite, (Mn,Ca) 2 SiO 4 .Be 2 SiO 4 .
Sulphoborite, 2MgSO4.4MgHBO 3 .7H2 O. Friedelite, H 7 (MnCl)Mn 4 Si 4Oi 6

Langbeinite, 2 K Mg
2 (SO4) 3 .
Pyrosmahte, H ((Fe,Mn)Cl)(Fe,Mn) 7
.
4 Si 4 Oi 6
Vanthoffite, 3Na 2 SQ4.MgSO 4 .
Piedmontite, Mn epidote.
Kainite, MgSO 4 .KC1.3H 2 O. Hancockite, Pb,Mn,Ca,Al, etc., silicate.
Kieserite, MgSO 4 .H 2 O. Harstigite, Mn,Ca, silicate.
Epsomite, MgSO 4 .7H 2 O. Leucophoenicite, 5 Mn (MnOH) 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Cupromagnesite, (Cu,Mg)SO 4 .7H2 O. Ardennite, Al,Mn,V, silicate.

Loweite, MgSO .Na SO .2H O.
4 2 4 2
Langbanite, Mn silicate with Fe antimon-
Blodite, MgSO 4 .Na SO 4 .4H O.
2 2 ate.
Leonite, MgSO 4 .K SO .4H O.
2 4 2
Kentrolite, 3PbO.2Mn 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .
Boussingaulite, (NH 4 ) 2 SO 4 .MgSO 4 .6H 2 O. Carpholite, H

4 MnAl 2 Si 2 O 10 .
4 .K 2 SO 4 .6H 2 O.
MgSO Mn
Picromerite, Pochite, Hi6Fe 8 2 Si 3 O 2 9.
Polyhalite, 2CaSO 4 .MgSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .2H 2 O. Inesite, H
2 (Mn,Ca) 6 Si 6 Oi9.3H 2 O.
Hexahydrite, MgSO .6H O. 4 2
Ganophyllite, 7MnO.Al 2 O 3 .8SiO 2 .6H2 O.
Pickeringite, MgSO 4 .Al (SO .22H O. 2 4) 3 2
Alurgite, Manganese mica.
Botryogen, MgO.FeO.Fe O .4SO 18H,O. 2 3 3.
Dixenite, MnSiO 3 .2Mn (OH)AsO 3 2 .
Quetenite, MgO.Fe O .3SO .13H O. 2 3 3 2

Bementite, H Mn 6 5 (SiO 4 ) 4 .
Ectropite, Mn 2 Si 8 O 28 .7H 2 O.
. MANGANESE Agnolite, H Mn
2 3 (SiO 3 ) 4 .H 2 O.
Alabandite, MnS. Hodgkinsonite, 3(Zn,Mn)O.SiO 2 .H2 O.

Hauerite, MnS 2 .
Gageite, Hydrous, Mn,Mg,Zn, silicate.
Samsonite, 2Ag2 S.MnS.Sb2 S 3 .
Caryopilite, 4MnO.3SiO 2 .3H2 O.
Sacchite, MnCl2 .
Neotocite, Hydrous, Mn, Fe, silicate.
Chlormanganokalite, 4KCl.MnCl 2 .
Astrophyllite, Na,K,Fe,Mn,Ti-silicate.
Manganosite, MnO. Neptunite, Fe,Mn,K,Na, titano-silicate.
Senaite, (Fe,Mn,Pb)O.TiO 2 .
COLUMBITE-TANTALITE, (Fe,Mn)
Pyrophanite, MhTiO 3. (Nb,Ta) 2O 6 .
Sitaparite,9Mn O .4Fe O .MnO

2 3 2 3 2 .3CaO. Hielmite, Y,Fe,Mn,Ca, stanno-tantalate.
Vredenburgite, 3Mn O .2Fe O 3 4 2 3. Berzeliite, (Ca,Mg,Mn,Na 2 ) 3 As 2 O 8 .
FRANKLINITE, (Fe,Zn,Mn)O. (Fe,Mn) 2 O 3 .

Lithiophilite, Li(Mn,Fe)PO 4 .
Jacobsite, (Mn,Mg)O.(Fe, Mn) 2 O 3 .

Natrophilite, 4 NaMnPO .
Hausmannite, MnO.Mn2O 3 .
Graftonite, (Fe,Mn,Ca) 3 P2 O 8 .
Coronadite, (Mn,Pb)Mn 3 O 7 .
Triplite, (RF)RPO 4 ;
R= Fe,Mn.
Crednerite, 3CuO.2Mn 2O 3 .
Triploidite (ROH)RPO 4 ; R = Mn.Fe.
BRAUNITE, 3Mn O .MnSiO 3
2 3 .
Sarkinite, (MnOH)MnAsO4 .
Bixbyite, FeO.MnO 2 .
Trigonite, Pb3 MnH(AsO 3 ) 3 .
MnO
Polianite, 2. Lacroixite, Na4 (Ca,Mn) 4 Al3(F,OH) 4 P3 Oi .
MnO
Pyrolusite, 2. 2H 0.
2
Manganite, Mn O 2 3 .H2 O. Pyrobelonite, 4PbO.7MnO.2V2 O 6 .3H 2 O.

Pyrochroite, Mn(OH) 2 .
Allactite, 2Mn As O
8 .4Mn(OH) 2
3 .
Backstromite, Mn(OH) 2 .
Synadelphite, 2(Al,Mn)AsO 4 .5Mn(OH) 2 .
Chalcophanite, (Mn,Zn)O.2MnO 2 .2H 2 O Flinkite, MnAsO 4 .2Mn(OH) 2 .
Heta3roHte, 2ZnO.2Mn 2 O 3 .lH 2 O. HematoHte, (Al,Mn)AsO 4 .4Mn(OH) 2 .
Psilomelane, Hydrous manganate. Mn Retzian, Y,Mn,Ca, phosphate.

Wad, Mn oxides. Arseniopleite, (Mn,Ca) 9 (Mn,Fe) 2 (OH)
Skemmatite, 3MnO .2Fe O .6H O. 2 2 3 2 (AsO 4 ) 6.
Beldongrite, 6Mn O5.Fe O .8H O.

3 2 8 2 Manganostibiite, Mn antimonate.
674 APPENDIX B
Dickinsonite l
Hydrous Mn,Fe,Na, Bravoite, (Fe,Ni)S 2 .
Fillowite I phosphates. Cobaltnickelpyrite, (Co,Ni,Fe)S 2 .
Brandite, Ca2 MnAs2O 8 .2H 2 O. CHLOANTHITE, NiAs 2 .
Fairfieldite, Ca3 MnP2 O 8 .2H 2 O. Gersdorffite, NiAsS.

Reddingite, Mn 3 P2 O 8 .3H 2O. Willyamite, CoS 2 .NiS 2 .CoSb 2 .NiSb 2 .
Palaite, 5MnO.2P2 O 6 .4H2 O. Villamaninite, Cu,Ni,Co,Fe, sulphide.

Stewartite, 3MnO.P2 O 5 .4H2 O. Ullmanite, NiSbS.
Purpurite, 2(Fe,Mn)PO4 .H 2O. Kallilite, Ni(Sb,Bi)S.
Sicklerite, Fe 2 O 3 .6MnO.4P 2 O 5 .3(Li,H) 2 O. Rammelsbergite, NiAs 2 .
Salmonsite, Fe 2O 3 .9MnO.4P2 O 6 14H 2 O. .

Wolfachite, Ni(As,Sb)S.
Hureaulite, H 2 Mn 6 (PO 4 ) 4 .4H 2 O. Melonite, NiTe2 .
Hemafibrite, Mn 3 As 2 O 8 .3Mn (OH) 2 .2H 2 O. Bunsenite, NiO.

Eosphorite, 2AlPO 4 .2(Mn,Fe) (OH) 2 .2H 2 O. Zaratite, NiCO .2Ni(OH) .4H O.
3 2 2
Rosche-rite, (Mn,Fe,Ca) 2 Al(OH) (PO 4 )o.2H,O Genthite, 2NiO.2MgO.3SiO 2 .6H 2 O.

Catoptrite, 14(Mn,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O3 .2SiO 2 .
Nepouite, 3(Ni,Mg)O.2SiO 2 .2H 2 O.
Garnierite, H
2 (Ni,Mg)SiO 4 water. +
Sussexite, H(Mn,Zn,Mg)BO 3 .
Connarite, H
4 Ni 2 Si 3 Oi .
Pinakiolite, 3MgO.B 2 3 .MnO.Mn 2 O O 3. Annabergite, Ni 3 As 2 O 8 .8H 2 O.

Szmikite, MnSO 4 .H 2 O. Cabrerite, (Ni,Mg) 3 As 2 O 8 .8H 2O.
Ilesite,(Mn,Zn,Fe)SOi.4H 2 O. Forbesite, H
2 (Ni,Co) 2 As 2 O 8 .8H 2 O.
Mallardite, MnSO 4 .7H 2 O. Lindackerite, 3NiO.6CuO.SO3 .2As 2 6 O 7H 0.

.
2
Apjohnite, MnSO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .24H 2 O. Morenosite, NiSO4 .7H2 O.
Dietrichite, (Zn,Fe,Mn)S0 4 .Al2 (SO 4 ) 3 .
22H.O. PLATINUM
Hiibnerite, MnWO 4. Native Platinum, Pt.
Sperrylite, PtAs2
MERCURY .
Native Mercury, Hg. POTASSIUM

Amalgam, (Ag,Hg). SYLVITE, KC1.
Metacinnabarite, HgS. Chlormanganokalite, 4KCl.MnCl2 .
Tiemannite, HgSe. Rinneite, FeCl 2 .3KCl.NaCl.

Onofrite, Hg(S,Se). Hieratite, K,Si, fluoride.
Cotoradoite, HgTe. CARNALLITE, KCl.MgCl 2 .6HoO.
Cinnabar, HgS. Kremersite, KCl,NH 4 Cl.FeCl 2 .H 2 O.
Livingstonite, HgS.2Sb2 S3 .
Erythrosiderite, 2KCl.FeCl 3 .H 2 O.
Calomel, HgCl. Milarite, HKCa Al 2 2 (Si 2 O 5) 6.
Kleinite, Hg,NH4 chloride. ,
Orthoclase, Microcline, KAlSi 3 O 8 .
Eglestonite, Hg4 Cl 2 O. Hyalophane, (K 2 ,Ba)Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 4 .
Terlinguaite, HgClO. Anorthoclase, (Na,K)AlSi 3O 8 .
Mosesite,Hydrous Hg,NH4 , chloride. Leucite, KAl(SiO 3 ) 2 .
Montroydite, HgO. Kaliophilite, KAlSiO 4 .
Ammiolite, Hg antimonite.
ApophylUte, H KCa
(SiO 3 ) 8 .4|H2O.
7 4
PtiloHte, (Ca,K 2 ,Na2 )Al 2 Si 10O 24 .5H 2 O.

MOLYBDENUM Mordenite, (Ca,K ,Na 2 )Al 2 SiioO 24 .20H20.
2 -
Molybdenite, MoS2 .
Wellsite, (Ba,Ca,K 2 )Al 2 Si 3 O 10 .3H 2 0.
Molybdite, MoO 3 .
Phillipsite, (K 2 ,Ca)Al 2 Si 4O, 2 .4iH 2O.

Powellite, Ca(Mo,W)O 4 .
Harmotone, (K 2 Ba) Al 2 Si 6Oi 4 5H O 2

3PbWO4 .PbMoO4
. .
,
Chillagite, .
Potash zeolite.
Offretite,
WULFENITE, PbMoO4 .
Muscovite, H KAl
2 3 (SiO 4 ) 3
Koechlinite, Bi 2 O .Mo0 3 3.
TaBniolite,K,Mg, silicate.
.
NICKEL K
Sppdiophyllite, (Na2 2 ) 2 (Mg,Fe) 3 (Fe,Al) 2
(SiO3 ) 8 .
Awaruite, FeNi 2 .
Celadonite, Fe,Mg,K, silicate.

Jbsephinite, FeNi 3 .
Glauconite, Hydrous Fe, K, silicate.

Maucherite, Ni3 As2 .
Astrophyllite, Na,K,Mn,Fe, titano-sih'cate.

PENTLANDITE, (Fe,Ni)S. Palmerite, HK
2 Al 2 (PO 4 ) 3 .7HoO.
Millerite,NiS
Carnotite, K
2 O.2U 2 3 .V 2 5 .3H 2 O. O O
Beyrichite, NiS.
Niter, KNOs.
Hauchecornite, Ni(Bi,Sb,S)?
Niccolite, NiAs.
Rhpdizite, A1,K, borate.
Heintzite, Hydrous Mg,K, borate.
Breithauptite, NiSb
Taylorite, 5K 2 SO 4 (NH 4 ) 2 S04 . .
Polydymite, Ni 4 S 6 .
Aphthitalite, (K,Na) 2 SO4 .
Badenite, (Co,Ni,Fe) 2 (As,Bi) 8 .

Langbeinite, K Mg 2 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .
APPENDIX B 675
Kainite, MgSO 4 .KC1.3H2 O. lodobromite, 2AgCl.2AgBr.AgI.

Hanksite, 9Na SO4.2Na CO 3 .KCl.
2 2 Miersite, 4AgI.CuI.
Misenite, HKSO 4. lodyrite, Agl.
Lecontite, (Na,NH 4 ,K)SO 4 .2H 2 O.
Syngenite, CaSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .H 2 O.
SODIUM
Leonite, MgSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .4H 2 O. Halite, NaCl.
Picromerite, MgSO 4 .K2 SO 4 .6H 2 O. Villiaumite, NaF.
Polyhalite, 2CaSO 4 .MgSO 4 .K 2 SO 4 .2H 2O. Huantajayite, 20NaCl.AgCl.
Kalinite, KA1(SO 4 ) 2 .12H 2 O. Rinneite, FeCl3 .3KCl.NaCl.
Voltaite, 3(K 2 ,Fe)O.2(Al,Fe) 2 O 3 .6SO 3 .9H 2O. CRYOLITE, Na3 AlF 6 .
Metavoltine, 5(K 2 ,Na 2 ,Fe)O.3Fe 2 O 3 .12SO 8 .

ChioUte, 5NaF.3AlF3 .
18H 2 O. Ralstonite, (Na 2 ,Mg)F 2 .3Al(F,OH) 3 .2H 2 O.

ALUNITE, K A1 (OH) (SO
2 6 12 4) 4. Northupite, 3 .Na 2 CO 3 .NaCl.
MgCO
Jarosite,K Fe (OH) (SO
2 6 12 4) 4. Tychite, 2MgCO 3 .2Na 2 CO 3 .Na2 SO 4 .
Palmierite, 3(K,Na) SO .4PbSO 2 4 4, Dawsonite, Na3 Al(CO 3 .2Al(OH) 3 )3 .
Lowigite, K O.3A1 O .4SO .9H O.

2 2 3 3 2 Thermonatrite, Na CO .H O. 2 3 2
Natron, Na CO 10H O. 2 3. 2
SILVER Pirssonite, CaCO .Na CO .2H O. 3 2 3 2
Native Silver, Ag. Gay-Lussite, CaCO 3 .Na CO .5H 2 O. 2 3
Amalgam, (Ag,Hg). Trona, Na CO .HNaCO .2H 2O.

2 3 3
Dyscrasite, Ag Sb. 3 Eudidymite, Epididymite, HNaBeSi 3 O 8 .
Chilenite, Ag Bi. 6 Rivaite, (Ca,Na2 )Si 2O 6 .
Cocinerite, Cu AgS. 4 Anorthoclase, (Na,K)AlSi 3O 8 .
Albite, NaAlSi 3 O 8
Stutzite, Ag Te.
.
4
Naumannite, (Ag2 ,Pb)Se Oligoclase Mixtures of and

Andesine
Argentite, Ag2 S.
Labradorite 2 2 8 CaAl Si O ,
Hessite, Ag2 Te.

Anemousite, NaO.2CaO.3Al 2 O 3 .9SiO2
,
.
Petzite, (Ag,Au) 2 Te.
Aquilarite, Ag2 (S,Se). Ussingite, HNa Al'(SiO 2 3)3.
Eucairite, Cu 2 Se.AgSe. ACMITE, NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .
Crookesite, (Cu,Tl,Ag) 2 Se.

:
JADEITE, NaAl(SiO 3 ) 2 .
S. PECTOLITE, HNaCa 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Stromeyrite, (Ag,Cu) 2
Acanthite, Ag2 S. Schizolite, HNa(Ca,Mn) 2 (SiO 3 ) 3 .
Sternbergite, Ag2 S.Fe 4 S 5 . Rosenbuschite, near pectolite with Zr.

Wohlerite, Zr-silicate and niobate of Ca,Na.
Sylvanite, (Au,Ag)Te 2 .
Krennerite, (Au,Ag)Te 2 .
(Na 2 .Ca) (Si,Zr)O3
Hiortdahlite, .
Muthmannite, (Ag,Au)Te. GLAUCOPHANE, NaAl(SiO 3 ) 2 .(Fe,Mg)

Si0 3
Andorite, Ag2 S.2PbS.3Sb2 S3
.
.
Matildite, Ag2 S.Bi 2 S 3 .

RIEBECKITE, 2NaFe(SiO 3 )o.FeSiO 3 .
Miargyrite, Ag 2 S.Sb2 S 3 .
CROCIDOLITE, NaFe(SiO 3 ) 2 .FeSiO 3 .
Smithite, Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 . Arfyedsonite, Naâê" silicate.

jiEnigmatite, Fe,Na,Ti-silicate.
Trechmanite, Ag2 S.As 2 S 3 .
NaAlSiO 4 .3FeSiO 3
Hutchinsonite, (Tl,Ag,Cu) 2 S.As 2 S 3 + PbS. Weinbergerite, .
As 2 S 3 (?). Elpidite, Na2 O.ZrO 2 .6SiO 2 .3H 2 O.

Schirmerite, 3(Ag2 .Pb)S.2Bi 2 S 3 .
Catapleiite, H
4 (Na 2 Ca) ZrSi 3 On ,
.
Freieslebenite, 5(Pb,Ag2 )S.2Sb 2 S3 .
Diaphorite, 5(Pb,Ag2 )S.2Sb2 S 3 .
NaAlSiO 4
Nephelite,
Stylotypite, 3(Cu 2 ,Ag2 ,Fe)S.Sb2 S 3
.
Lengenbachite, 7[Pb, (Ag,Cu) 2 ]S.2As2 S8

.
.
CANCRINITE, H 6 Na6Ca(NaCO3 ) 2 Al 8
(Si0 4 ) 9
PYRARGYRITE, 3Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3
.
.
Microsommite, Davyne, near cancrimte.

PROUSTITE, 3Ag2 S.As 2 S 3 .
SODALITE, Na 4 (AlCl)Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3

Pyrostilpnite, 3Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 .
Samsonite, 2Ag2 S.MnS.Sb 2 S 3 . Hackmanite, near sodalite.

STEPHANITE, 5Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 . HAITTNITE, (Na2 ,Ca) 2 (NaSO 4 .Al)Al2
POLYBASITE, 9Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 . (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Pearceite, 9Ag S.As 2 S 3 2 . Noselite, Na4 (NaSO 4 .Al)Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Polyargyrite, 12Ag2 S.Sb 2 S 3 . LAZURITE, Na4 (NaS 3 .Al)Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Xanthoconite, 3Ag S.As 2 Ss. 2

SCAPOLITE GROUP, Mixtures of
Argyrodite, 4Ag2 S.GeS 2 . Ca 4 Al 6 Si 6 O 26 and Na 4 Al 3 Si 9O 24 Cl.
Canfieldite, 4Ag S.SnS2 2 . Sarcolite, (Ca,Na2 ) 3 Al 2 (SiO 4 ) 3 .
Cerargyrite, AgCl. Melilite, Na2 (Ca,Mg) n (Al,Fe) 4 (SiO 4 ) 9 .
Embolite, Ag(Br,Cl). Mordenite, (Ca,K 2,Na 2 )Al 2 Si, O 24 .20H 2O.

Bromyrite, AgBr. Stilbite, (Na 2 ,Ca)Al 2 Si 6 Oi 6 .6H 2 O.
676 APPENDIX B
Flokite, H 8 (Ca,Na2)Al 2 Si 9O26 .2H2 O. Palmierite, 3(K,Na) 2 SO 4 .4PbSO4 .
CHABAZITE, (Ca,Na2 )Al2 Si4 Oi 2 .6H2O. Almeriite, Na2 SO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .5Al(OH) 3 .H2O.
Gmelinite, (Na 2 Ca)Al2 Si 4 O I2 .6H 2 O.
Analcite, NaAlSi 2 O 6 .H 2O.
STRONTIUM
Faujasite, H4Na 2 CaAl4Si 10 O3 8 .
Strontianite, SrCO 3 .
Natrolite, Na 2 Al 2 Si 3 Oi .2H2 O. Ancylite, 4Ce(OH)CO 3 .3SrCO 3 .3H 2 O.

Mesolite, Na2 Al 2 Si 3 Oi .2H 2 O + 2[CaAl 2 Si3 Ambatoarinite. Rare earths, Sr, carbonate.
Oi .3H 2 O]. Brewsterite, H
4 (Sr,Ba,Ca)Al 2 (SiO 3 ) 6 .3H 2 O.
Gonnardite, (Ca,Na2 ) 2 Al2 Si 6O, 5 .5|H2 O. Fermorite, (Ca,Sr) 4 [Ca(OH,F)][(P,As)O 4 ] 3 .
Thomsomte, (Na 2 ,Ca)Al 2 Si 2 O 8 .2H2 O. Hamlinite, Sr,Al, phosphate.

Hydrothomsonite, (H2 ,Na2 ,Ca)Al 2 Si 2 O 8 .
Harttite, Sr.Al. phosphate and sulphate.
5H q.
2 Celestite, SrSO4 .
Arduinite, Ca,Na, zeolite.

Echellite,(Ca,Na2 )O.2Al 2 O 3 .3SiO 2 .4H 2 O. THORIUM
&
Epidesmine, (Na2 ,Ca)Al2 Si 6 Oi 6 .6H2 O. fluo-silicates.
Erionite, H
2 CaK 2 Na 2 Al 2 Si6O 17 .5H 2 O.
Trftomfte /Ca,Ce,Y,Th,
Hydronephelite, HNa2 Al 3 Si 3 Oi 2 .3H 2 O. Thorite, ThSiO 4 .
Paragonite, H
2 NaAl 3 (SiO 4 ) 3 . Auerlite, Th silico-phosphate.
Spodiophyllite, (Na 2 ,K2 ) 2 (Mg,Fe) 3 (Fe,Al) 2 Yttrialite, Th,Y, silicate.
(Si0 3 ) 8 . Mackintoshite, U,Th,Ce, silicate.
Searlesite, NaB(SiO 3 ) 2 .H 2 O. Yttrocrasite, Hydrous Y,Th, titanate.
Molengraafite, Ca,Na, titano-silicate. Pyrochlore, RNb O
.R(Ti,Th)O 3 2 6 .
Astrophyllite, Na,K,Mn,Fe,titano-silicate. MONAZITE, (Ce,La,Di)PO 4 with ThO2 .
Narsarsukite, Fe,Na, titano-silicate. Thorianite, Th and U oxides.

Leucosphenite, Na 4 Ba(TiO) 2 (Si 2 O 5 ) 5 .
Lorenzenite, Na2 (TiO) 2 Si 2 O 7 .

TIN
Epistolite, Ti,Na,etc., niobate. Stannite, Cu 2 S.FeS.SnS2 .
Berzeliite, (Ca,Mg,Mn,Na2 ) 3 As 2 O 8 . Canfieldite, 4Ag2"S.SnS 2 .
Natrophilite, 4NaMnPO . Teallite, PbSnS 2 .
Beryllonite, NaBePO 4 .
Franckeite, Pb 5 Sn 3 FeSb2 S 14 .
Jezekite, Na 4 CaAl(AlO) (F,OH) 4 (PO 4 ) 2 . Cylindrite, Pb3 Sn 4 FeSb2 Si 4 .
Lacroixite, Na 4 (Ca,Mn) 4Al3 (F,OH) 4 P3 O 16 . Cassiterite, SnO 2 .
2H2O. Stokesite, H.CaSnSisOu.

Durangite, Na(AlF)AsO 4 .
Hielmite, Y,Fe,Mn,Ca, stanno-niobate.
Fremontite, (Na,Li)Al(OH,F)PO4 Nordenskioldine, CaSn(BO 3 ) 2
11 ^ .
Hulsite, 12(Fe,Mg)0.2Fe 2 3 !SnO 2 .3B 2 O 3

.
}3(Mn,Fe,Na2 ) 3 P2
.
raiowite 8 .H 20. 2H 2O.

.
Stercorite, HNa(NH4 )PO 4 .4H 2 O. TITANIUM

Soumansite, Hydrous Al,Na, fluophosphate. ILMENITE, FeTiO 3 .
SODA NITER, NaNO 3.

Senaite, (Fe,Mn,Pb)O.TiO 2
Darapskite, NaNO .Na SO
3 2 4 .H 2 O. O
Arizonite, Fe 2 3 .3TiO 2 .
.
Nitroglauberite, 6NaNO3 .2Na 2 SO4 .3H 2 O Pyrophanite, 3MnTiO

Borax, Na 2 B 4 O 7 .10H O.
.
Pseudobrookite, Fe4 (TiO 4 ) 3

2
Ulexite, NaCaB 5 O 9 .8H2 O.

.
Rutite, Ti0 2 .
Thenardite, Na 2 SO 4 .
Octahedrite, Brookite, TiO2 .
Aphthitalite, (K,Na) 2 SO 4 .
Uhligite, Ca(Ti,Zr)O 5 .Al(Ti,Al)O 6
GLAUBERITE, Na SO .CaSO
2 4 4.
.
Vanthoffite, 3Na2 SO 4 .MgSO4 .
Sulphohalite, 3Na2 SO 4 .NaCl.NaF.

Molengraafite, Ca,Na, titano-silicate.
Caracolite, Pb(OH)Cl.Na2 SO4 .
Keilhauite, Ca,Al,Fe,Y, titano-silicate.

Hanksite, 9Na2 SO 4 .2Na2 CO 3 .KCl
Ischeffkmite, Ce, etc., titano-silicate
Lecontite, (Na,NH4 ,K) 2 SO 4 .2H2 O.
Astrophyllite, Na,K,Fe,Mn, titano-silicate.
Mirabikte, Na2 SO 4 10H2 O. .
Johnstrupite
Loweite, MgSO 4 .Na2 SO 4 .2iH2 O. Mosandrite
Blodite, MgSO 4 .Na2 SO 4 .4H2 O. Ce, etc., titano-silicates
Rmkite
Mendozite, NaAI(SO 4 ) 2 .12H2 O.
Narsarsukite, Fe,Na, titano-silicate.
Krohnkite, CuSO 4 .Na2 SO 4 .2H 2 O.
NatrochalciteCu4 (OH) 2 (S0 4 ) 2 .Na2 S0 4 .2H 2 0. Neptunite, Fe,Mn,Na,K, titano-silicate.
Ferronatnte, 3Na2 S0 4 .Fe 2 (S0 4 ) 3 .6H 2 6
Benitoite, BaTiSi 3 O 9.
Leucosphenite, Na4 Ba(TiO) 2 (Si 2 O 6 ) 6 .

Sideronatrite, 2Na20.Fe203.4S03.7H20 Lorenzenite, Na 2 (TiO) 2 Si 2 O 7 .
3 . 12S0 3 .
Joaquinite, Ca,Fe, titano-sih'cate.
Natrojarosite, Na Fe 6 (OH) (S0
2
PEROVSKITE, CaTiO 3 .
12 4)4
Knopite, Ca,Ce, titanate.
APPENDIX B 677
Dysanalyte, Ca,Fe, titano-silicate. Phosphuranylite, (UO 2 ) 3 P2 O 8 .6H 2 O.
Mg,Fe, titanate.
Geikielite, Trogerite,(UO 2 ) 3 As 2 O 8 .12H 2 O.
Delorenzite, Fe,U,Y, titanate. Walpurgite, Bi 10 (UO 2 ) 3 (OH) 24 (AsO 4 ) 4 .
Yttrocrasite, Hydrous Y, Th, titanate. .URANINITE, Uranyl, etc., uranate.

Brannerite, (UO,TiO,UO 2 )TiO 3 .
Gummite, alteration of uraninite.
Pyrochlore, 2 RNb
p 6 .R(Ti,Th)O 3 .
Thorianite, Th and oxides. U
Aeschynite, Ce, niobate-titanate. Uranosphaerite, (BiO) 2 2 O 7 .3H2 O. U
Polymignite, Ce,Fe,Ca, niobate-titanate. Johannite, Hydrous Cu,U, sulphate.
Euxenite ^ r ^ TT
Y i_
Ce,U mobate-
j 1
Gilpinite, (Cu,Fe,Na2 )O.UO 3 .SO 3 .4H2O.
Polvcrase
tltanates -
Uranopilite, CaU 8 S 2 O 3 i.25H 2 O.
Blomstrandine-Priorite j
Betafite, U, etc., niobate-titanate. VANADIUM fcS
Epistolite, Na,Ti, etc., mobate.

Lewisite, 5CaO.2Tiq 2 .3Sb 2 O 5 .
PATRONITE, VS 4 .
Mauzeliite, Pb,Ca, titano-antimonate. Sulvanite, 3Cu 2 S.V2 S 5 .

Alaite, VO.H 2 O.
2 5
Ardennite, Al,Mn,V, silicate.
TUNGSTEN Roscoelite, Vanadium mica.

Pucherite, BiVO4
Tungstenite, WS 2.
Vanadinite, Pb 4 (PbCl)(VO 4 ) 3
.
Tungstite, WO 3.
Descloizite, (Pb,Zn) 2 (OH)VO 4
.
WOLFRAMITE, (Fe,Mn)WO 4 .
Pyrobelonite, 4PbO.7MnO.2V2 O 5 .3H 2 O.
Hubnerite, MnWO
4 .
Dechenite, PbV O 2
SCHEELITE, CaWO 4
.
6
(Cu,Ca) 3 V2 O 8 (Cu,Ca)
.
Calciovolborthite,
Cuprotungstite, CuWO 4.
(OH) 2 .
.
Powellite, Ca(Mo,W)O 4 .
Turanite, 5CuO.V 2 O 5 .2HoO.

}Pb,Cu,nadates.
Chillagite, 3PbWO .PbMoO4 4 .
Uvanite, 2UO 3 .3V 2 O 5 .15H 2 O.

Reinite, FeWO 4.
Ferganite, U
3 (VO 4 ) 2 .6H 2 O.
Fe O .WO .6H O.
Ferritungstite, Fernandinite, CaO. V2 O 4 .5V2 O 5 14H2O.
2 3 3 2
.
Pascoite, 2CaO.3V 2 O 5 .llH 2 O.

URANIUM Pintadoite, 2CaO.V 2 O 6 .9H 2 O.
Rutherfordine, UO CO 2 3.
CaO.3V !O ,9H 2O.
Uranothallite, 2CaCO .U(CO 3 3)2 .10H2 O. MeUhewettite }
Liebigite, Hydrous, U,Ca, carbonate. Volborthite, Hydrous, Cu,Ba,Ca, vanadate.

Voglite, Hydrous, U, Ca, Cu, carbonate. Hiigelite, Hydrous, Pb,Zn, vanadate.
Mackintoshite, U,Th,Ce, silicate. CARNOTITE, K 2 O.2U2 O 3 .V2 O 5 .3H 2 O.
Uranophane, CaO.2UO 3 .2SiO 2 .6H2 O. Tyuyamunite, CaO.2UO 3 .V2 O 5 .4H 2 O.
Delorenzite, Fe,U,Y, titanate. Minasragrite, (V 2 O 2 )H 2 (SO 4 ) 3 15H2 O. .
Brannerite, (UO,TiO,UO 2 )TiO 3 .
Hatchettolite, U, tantalo-niobate. YTTRIUM, Etc.

Samiresite, U, etc., niobate.
Yttrofluorite, (Ca 3 ,Y 2 )F 6 .
Fergusonite, Y,Er U, niobate.

Yttrocerite, (Y,Er,Ce)F3 .5CaF2 .H 2 O.
;
Samarskite, Fe,Ca,U,Ce,Y, niobate. Y

carbonate.
Tengerite,
Ampangabeite, U, etc., niobate. Cappelenite, Y,Ba, boro-silicate.
Annerodite, U,Y, niobate. Melanocerite \
Euxenite 1 v n^ U
Y Ce>
TT
> '
u
mobate- ^ Caryocerite [Ca,Y,Ce, fluo-silicates.
Polvcrase \
Steenstrupine
tltanates -
J
Blomstrandine-Priorite j Tritomite, Th,Ce,Y,Ca, fluo-silicate.

Betafite, U, niobate-titanate. Gadolinite, Be 2 FeY2 Si 2 Oi .
Plumboniobite, Y,U,Pb, niobate. Yttriah'te, Th,Y, silicate.

Uvanite, 2UO3 .3V O 2 6 .15H 2 O. Rowlandite, Y sih'cate. .
Ferganite, U
3 (VO 4 ) 2 .6H 2 O. Thalenite, Y
silicate
Torbernite, Cu(UO 2 ) 2 P2 O 8 .8H 3 O. Thortveitite, (Sc,Y) 2 Si 2 O 7 .
Zeunerite, Cu(UO 2 ) 2 As 2 O 8 .8H 2 O. Cenosite, H

4 Ca 2 (Y,Er) 2 CSiOi 7 .
P O 8 .8H O.
2 )2 2 2
Keilhauite, Ca,Al,Fe,Y, titano-silicate.
Bas'sTtfte }Ca(UO Delorenzite, Fe,U,Y, titanate.
Uranospinite, Ca(UO As 2 O .8H O. 2)2 8 2 Yttrocrasite, Hydrous Y,Th, titanate.
Uranocircite, Ba(UO P O 8 .8H O. 2)2 2 2 Risorite, Y
niobate.
CARNOTITE, K
2 O.2U 2 O.V 2 O 6 .3H 2 O. Fergusonite, Y,Er r niobate.
Tyuyamunite, CaO.2UO 3 .V2 O 5 .4H 2 O. Sipylite, Er niobate.
Uranospathite, Hydrous uranyl phosphate. Yttrotantalite, Y, etc., tantalate-niobate.
678 APPENDIX B
Samarskite, Fe,Ca,U,Ce,Y, niobate-tanta- Adamite, Zn 2 (OH)AsO 4 .
late. Descloizite, (Pb,Zn) 2 (OH)VO 4 .
Annerodite, U,Y, niobate. Par^peite }

^P O .4H!O 2 8 .
Hielmite, Y,Fe,Mn,Ca, stanno-tantalate. O

Kottigite, Zn 3 As 2 8 .8H 2 O.
Euxenite Y ,Ce,U, O
niobate- Barthite, 3ZnO.CuO.3As 2 5 .2H 2 O.
!
Hugelite, Hydrous, Pb, Zn, vanadate

Spencerite, Zn 3 (PO 4 ) 2 .Zn (OH) 2 .3H 2 O.
Plumboniobite, Y,U,Pb,Fe, niobate. Hibbenite, 2Zn 3 (PO 4 ) 2 .Zn(OH) 2 .6iH 2 O.
XENOTIME, YPO4 .
Veszelyite, Hydrous, Cu, Zn, phospho-

Retzian, Y,Mn,Ca, arsenate. arsenate.
Rhabdophanite, Hydrous Ce,Y, phosphate. Kehoeite, Hydrous, Al, Zn, phosphate.
ZINC Sussexite, H(Mn,Zn,Mg)BO 3.
Zinkosite, ZnSO 4 .
Sphalerite, ZnS. Ilesite, (Mn,Zn,Fe)SO 4 .4H 2 O.

Wurtzite, ZnS. Goslarite, ZnSO 4 .7H 2 O.
Voltzite, ZnÔ. Dietrichite, (Zn,Fe,Mn)SO 4 .Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .
ZINCITE, ZnO. 22H 2 O.

Gahnite, ZnO.A] 2 O 3 .
Serpierite, Hydrous, Cu, Zn, sulphate.
FRANKLINITE, (Fe,Zn,Mn)O. (Fe,Mn) 2 3 .
Zincaluminite, 2ZnSO 4 .4Zn(OH) 2 .6Al(OH) 3 .
Chalcophanite, (Mn,Zn)O.2MnO 2 .2H 2 O. 5H 2 O.

Hetserolite, 2ZnO.2Mn 2 O 3 .lH 2 O.
Smithsonite, ZnCO 3.
ZIRCONIUM
Rosasite, 2CuO.CuCO 3 .5ZnCO 3 ? Baddeleyite, ZrO 2 .
Aurichalcite, 2(Zn,Cu)CO 3 ,3(Zn,Cu)(OH) 2 . Uhligite, Ca(Ti,Zr)O 6 .Al(Ti,Al)O 6 .
Hydrozincite, ZnCO 3 .2Zn(OH) 2 .

Rosenbuschite, Na,Ca,Zr, silicate.
Hardystonite, Ca2 ZnSi 2 O 7 .
Wohlerite, Na,Ca,Zr, silicate and niobate.
Danalite, (Be,Fe,Zn,Mn) 7 Si 3 Oi 2 S. Lavenite, Mn,Ca,Zr, silicate.
Willemite, Zn 2 SiO 4 .
Hiortdahlite, (Na 2 Ca) (Si, Zr) O 3
,
.
Calamine, H ZnSiO
2 5. Eudialyte, Zr,Fe,Ca,Na, silicate.
Clinohedrite, H CaZnSiO
2 5. Elpidite, Na 2 O.ZrO 2 .6SiO 2 .3H 2 O.
Hodgkinsonite, 3(Zn,Mn)O.SiO 2 .H 2 0. Catapleiite, H 4 (Na2 ,Ca)ZrSi3O n .
Gageite, Hydrous, Mn, MR, Zn, silicate. Zircon, Zr SiO 4 .
Tarbuttite, Zn 3 P2 O 8 .Zn(OH) 2 .
Chalcolamprite, R '
'Nb .O 6 . R '
'SiO 3 .
APPENDIX B 679
TABLE II. MINERALS ARRANGED ACCORDING TO THEIR

SYSTEM OF CRYSTALLIZATION.
The following lists are intended to include all well-recognized
species, whose crystalliz-
ation is known, arranged according to the system to which they belong, and further classi-
fied by their luster and specific gravity; the hardness is also given in each case.
I. CRYSTALLIZATION ISOMETRIC.*
A. LUSTER NONMETALLIC.
680 APPENDIX B
B. LUSTER METALLIC (AND SUBMETALLIC) .

APPENDIX B 681
II. CRYSTALLIZATION TETRAGONAL.

682 APPENDIX B
III. CRYSTALLIZATION HEXAGONAL.*

by a letter R.
Rhombohedral species are distinguished
APPENDIX B 683
B. LUSTER METALLIC (AND SUB METALLIC).
684 APPENDIX B
A. LUSTER NONMETALLIC
APPENDIX B 685
B. LUSTER METALLIC (AND SUBMETALLIC) .
686 APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B 687
688 APPENDIX B
VI. CRYSTALLIZATION TRICLINIC.

APPENDIX B 689
TABLE III. CRYSTALLINE HABIT.

I. ISOMETRIC SYSTEM.
In the following lists some species are enumerated whose crystalline habit is often so
marked as to be a distinctive character.
Cubes. METALLIC LUSTER: Pyrite.
!
Galem^
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: FluonTe Cuprite (at times elongated into capillary forms)
:
Cerargyrite; Halitej Sylvite; Boracite; Pharmacosiderite. Also Percy lite; Perovskite.

Cube-like forms occur with the following: Apophyllite (tetragonal); Cryolite (mono-
clinic). Also with the rhombohedral species: Chabazite: Alunite; Calcite; rarely Quartz
and Hematite.
Octahedrons. METALLIC AND SUBMETALLIC LUSTER: Magnetite: Franklinite; Chro-
mite; Uraninite. Also sometimes, Galena; Pvrite; Linnaeite; Dysanalyte.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Spinel (incl."Hercynite and Gahnite) Cuprite; Diamond; Pyro-
;
chloreand Microlite; Ralstonite; Periclase; Alum.

Forms somewhat resembling regular octahedrons occur with some tetragonal species, as
Braunite; Hausmannite; Chalcopyrite; Zircon,- etc.; also with some rhombohedral species,
as Dolomite.
Dodecahedrons. METALLIC LUSTER: Magnetite; Amslgam.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Garnet; Cuprite; SoH^lif^
Tetrahexahedrons. Native Copper; Fluorite.
Trapezohedrons. NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Garnet; Leucite; Analcite.
Pyritohedrons. METALLIC LUSTER: JPyrite^ (Jobaltite. Also Gersdorffite;
Gersd Hauerite
(submetallic).
Tetrahedrons. METALLIC LUSTER: Tetrahedrite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Sphalerite; Boracite; Helvite; Eulytite; Diamond; Zunyite.
The tetragonal sphenoids of Chalcopyrite sometimes closely resemble tetrahedrons.
II. TETRAGONAL SYSTEM.

Square Pyramids. SUBMETALLIC LUSTER: Braunite; Hausmannite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Zircon; Wulfenite; Vesuvianite; Octahedrite; Xenotime.
Square Prisms. NONMETALLIC LUSTER: zircon: vesuvianite.: Scapolites; Apophyllite;
""""
Phosgenite.
Square tabular crystals occur with Apophyllite; Wulfenite; Torbernite.
Prisms nearly square are noted with a itiuritDer of orthorhombic species, e.g., Topaz;
Andalusite; Danburite: also with the monoclinic Pyroxene (100 A 010 = 90,
110 A 110 = 87)
III. HEXAGONAL SYSTEM.
Hexagonal Prisms. NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Bervl: Apatite: Pyromprphite; Vanadi-
nite; Mimetite (usually indistinct rounded forms). Also Nephelite; Milarite: Tysonite,
and others.
Hexagonal prisms are also common with the rhombohedral species: Quartz; Calcitej
Tourmaline L Willemite; Phenacite; Dioptass, etc. Again, with the Micas, efc. Numef^
ous rare specit could be included here. -
Many orthorhombic (or monoclinic) species having a prismatic angle of about 60 (and
120) simulate this form both in simple crystals and still more as the result of twinning.
Thus, Aragonite; Strontianite; Leadhillite; lolite. It is also to be noted that the isometric
dodecahedron, e.g., of Garnet, has often the form of a hexagonal pyramid with trihedral
terminations (cf. Fig. 470, p. 175).
Tabular hexagonal prisms are noted with various species. Thus, METALLIC LUSTER:
Graphite; Molybdenite; Hematite; Ilmenjte; Pyrrhotite. NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Tri^
Hexagonal Pyramids. Apatite: Corundum, (rhombohedral); Quartz (rhombohedral-

trapezohedral) Hanksite.
:
This form is often simulated by various orthorhombic species, in part as the result of
twinning. For example, METALLIC LUSTER: Chalcocite; Stephanite; Polybasite; Jor-
danite; etc. Also Brookite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Witherite; Bromlite; Cerussite; lolite.
Trigonal Prisms. Tourmaline.
u
Rhombohedrons. Angle ?5 (and 105): Calcite JDolomitej. Siderite PJiodochrosite.
:
;
:
Angle not far from 90: Chabazite; Alunite Talciter'also Quartz Hematite.
; ;
Scalenohedrons. Calcite and allied Carbonates^ ProustifE7~~

690 APPENDIX B
IV. ORTHORHOMBIC, MONOCLINIC AND TRICLINIC SYSTEMS.

Prismatic Crystals. METALLIC LUSTER: Stibnite; Arsenopyrite; Bournonite; Manga-
m
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: (orthorhombic) Tojmz; Sjîjrolite; Andalusite; arite: Celes-
tite; Danburite. Also (monoclinic) Pyroxene; Amphibole; Qrthoclase, and many others.
in aspect (Fig. 894, p. 531JT
Epidote crystals are often prismatic
Tabular Crystals. Barite; Cerussite; Calamine; Diasppre; Wollastonite; 4 lhl'te,
Acicular Crystals. METALLIC LUSTER: Stibnite; BismutEimtej Miflente; Jame-
sonite; Aikinite, and other species.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: gectolite; Natrolite: Scolecite; Thomsonite, and other Zeolites.
Also Aragonjie; Strontianite; lesd 6f ten Calcite. Also many other species.
'
TwinTrystals. The habit of the twins occurring with many species is very character-
istic. Reference is made to pp. 165 to 172 and the accompanying figures for a presentation
of this subject.
TABLE IV. STRUCTURE OF MASSIVE MINERALS

Fibrous. Fibers separable: Asbestus (amphibole); also the similar asbestiform va-
riety of serpentine (chrysotile) ; Crocidolite (color blue).
Fibers not separable, chiefly straight: Anthophyllite; Calcite; Gypsum. Also Aragonite;
Barite; Celestite; Anhydrite; Brucite; Enstatite; Wollastonite; Dufrenite; Vivianite.
See also Columnar below.
Fibrous-Radiated. Wavellite; Pectolite; Thomsonite; Natrolite; Stilbite, Scolecite;
and other Zeolites; Gothite; Malachit .
Columnar. METALLIC LUSTER: Stibnite; Hematite; Jamesonite; Zinkenite, etc.

NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Limonite; Gothite; Aragonite; Amphibole (tremolite, actino-
lite, etc.);Epidote; Zoisite; Tourmaline; Sillimanite; Natrolite and other Zeolites: Stron-
tianite; Witherite; Topaz.
Cyanite has often a bladed tructure. ,
Fibrous and columnar varieties pass into one another.

Lamellar-Stellate. Gypsum; Pyrophyllite; Talc.
Foliated. METALLIC LUSTER: Graphite; Molybdenite; Tetradymite; Sternbergite-
Nagyagite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Talc; Orpiment; Gypsum; Pyrophyllite; Serpentine; Gypsum
Micaceous. The Micas, p. 559: also the Brittle Micas, p. 566, and the Chlorites, p. 568
Also Brucite; Orpiment; Talc;
Torberîte; Autunite.
Granular. METALLIC LUSTER: Galena; Hematite; Magnetite. Many sulphides,
sulpharsemtes; have varieties which are fine-granular to compact and impalpable
etc.,
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Pyroxene (coccolite); Garnet; Calcite; Barite, etc
Botryoidal, Mammillary, Reniform, etc. METALLIC LUSTER: Hematite; Arsenic-
Allemontite.
Malachite; Prehnite; Smithsonite; Calamine; Chalcedony;
Stalactitic. METALLIC LUSTER: Limonite; Psilomelane; Marcasite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Calcite; Aragonite; Gibbsite; Chalcedony.
Granular Cleavable. METALLIC LUSTER: Galena.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Calcite; Dolomite; Sphalerite; Fluorite.
Oolitic. Calcite; Aragonite; Hematite.
fcartny. NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Magnesite; piolite
TABLE V. PHYSICAL CHARACTERS.

I. CLEAVAGE.
Cubic. METALLIC LUSTER: Galena.
STER: Halite: The
Sylvite. cleavage of Anhydrite (also of Cyro-
Ui. also Corundum, p. 413.
Diamond. Magnetite (also Franklinite) has often distinct
drall '~ ^ Sodalite; Hauynite.

alcite and other s P ecies of th ^ wine group (pp.
75 105!
>
437-445) angles
Square Prismatic (90). - Scapolite; Rutile; Xenotime.
APPENDIX B 691
Prismatic. Barite (78 i, 101^); Celestite; Amphibole (54 and 126), etc.
Basal. METALLIC LUSTER: Graphite; Molybdenite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Apophyllitej Topaz; Talc; the Micas and Chlorites; Chalco-
phyllite, etc. Pyroxene often shows marked basal parting.
Pinacoidal. METALLIC LUSTER: Stibnite.
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Gypsum; Orpiment; Euclase; Diaspore; Sillimanite; Cyanite;
Feldspars.
II. HARDNESS.
1. Soft Minerals. The
following minerals are conspicuously Soft, that is, = 2 H
or less; they hence have a greasy feel. (See further the Tables, pp. 679 to 688.)
METALLIC LUSTER: Graphite; Molybdenite; Tetradymite; Sternbergite; Argentite;
Nagyagite; some of the Native Metals (Lead, etc.).
NONMETALLIC LUSTER: Talc; Pyrophyllite; Brucite; Tyrolite; Orpiment; Cerargyrite;
Cinnabar; Sulphur; Gypsum.
Also Calomel, Arsenolite, and many hydrous sulphates, phosphats, etc.
2. Hard Minerals. Minerals whose hardness is equal to or greater than 7 (Quartz = 7).
The following minerals are here included:
LUSTER NONMETALLIC
QUARTZ (p. 403) 7 Hambergite (p. 620) 7'5
Tridymite (p. 407) 7 ZIRCON (p. 520) 7'5
Barylite (p. 498).- 7 ANDALUSITE (p. 524) 7'5
Dumortierite (p. 543) 7 BERYL (p. 495) 7'5-8
Danburite (p. 522) 7-7'25 Lawsonite (p. 540) 7'5-8
BORACITE (p. 620) 7 Phenacite (p. 514) 7'5-8
Zunyite (p. 505) 7 Gahnite (p. 420) 7'5-8
CYANITE (p. 526) 5-7'25 Hercynite (p. 420) 7 '5-8
TOURMALINE (p. 540) 7-7*5 SPINEL (p. 419) 8
GARNET (p. 505) 6'5-7'5 TOPAZ 523)
(p. 8
IOLITE (p. 497) 7-7-5 Rhodizite (p. 621) 8
STAUROLITE (p. 543) 7-7 "5 CHRYSOBERYL (p. 423) 8'5
Schorlpmite (p. 510) 7-7*5 CORUNDUM (p. 413) 9
Sapphirine (p. 544) 7'5 DIAMOND (p. 345) 10
Euclase (p. 529) 7'5
The following minerals have hardness equal to 6 to 7, or 6 '5 7.

LUSTER METALLIC: Iridosmine (p. 355); Iridium (p. 355); Sperrylite (p. 379).
LUSTER NONMETALLIC: Ardennite (p. 539); Axinite (p. 534); Bertrandite (p. 539);
Cassiterite (p. 425); Chrysolite (p. 511); Diaspore (p. 431); Elpidite (p. 496); Epidote
(p. 531); Forsterite (p. 513); Gadolinite (p. 529); Jadeite (p. 479); Partschinite (p. 510);
Sillimanite (p. 526); Spodumene (p. 480); Trimerite (p. 515).
III. SPECIFIC GRAVITY.

Attention is called to the (p. 199), on the relation of specific gravity to
remarks in Art. 302
chemical composition. Also to the statements in Art. 303 as to the average specific gravity
among minerals of metallic and norimetallic luster respectively. The species in each of the
separate lists of Table II of minerals classified with reference to crystallization are arranged
according to ascending specific gravities. Hence the lists give at a glance minerals dis-
tinguished by both low and high density.
IV. LUSTER. (See Art. 364, p. 249)

Metallic. Native metals; most Sulphides; some Oxides, those containing iron, man-
ganese, lead, etc.
Submetallic. Here belong chiefly certain iron and manganese compounds, as Ilmenite;
Ilvaite; Columbite; Tantalite (and allied species); Wolframite; Braunite;
Hausmannite.
Also Brookite; Uraninite, etc.
Adamantine. Here belong minerals of high refractive index: (a)
Some hard minerals:
Diamond; Corundum; Cassiterite; Zircon; Rutile. (6) Many species of high density, as
compounds of lead, also of silver, copper, mercury. Thus, Cerussite, Anglesite, Phos-
genite, etc.; Cerargyrite; Cuprite; some Cinnabar, (c) Also certain varieties of Sphal-
etc.
erite, Tjtanite and Octahedrite.

(592 APPENDIX B
of the following: Cuprite, Cerus-
Metallic-Adamantine. Pyrargyrite; some varieties
site, Octahedrite, Rutile, Brookite.
Resinous or Waxy. Sphalerite; Sulphur; Elseohte; Serpentine; many Phosphates.
etc.
Vitreous. Quartz and many Silicates, as Garnet, Beryl,
Pearly The foliated species: Talc, Brucite, Pyrpphylhte. Also (on cleavage sur-
Heulandite. Also, less promi-
faces) conspicuously the following: Apophyllite, Stilbite,
nent: Barite; Celestite; Diaspore; some Feldspar, and others.
Silky. Some fibrous minerals, as Gypsum, Calcite; also Asbestus; Malachite.
V. COLOR.
The following listsmaybe of some use in the way of suggestion. It is to be noted, how-
ever, that especially in the case of metallic
minerals a slight surface change may alter the
effect of color. Further, among minerals of nonmetallic luster particularly, no sharp
line can be drawn between colors slightly different, and many variations of shade occur
in the case of a single species. For these reasons no lists, unless inconveniently extended,
could make any claim to completeness.
(a) METALLIC LUSTER.

Silver-white, Tin-white. Native silver; Native Antimony, Arsenic and Tellurium;
Amalgam; Arsenopyrite and Lollingite;several sulphides, arsenides, etc., of cobalt or
nickel, as Cobaltite (reddish); some Tellurides; (Bismuth (reddish).) No sharp line can
be drawn between these and the following group.
Steel-gray. Platinum; Manganite; Chalcocite; Sylvanite; Bournonite.
Blue-gray. Molybdenite; Galena.
Lead-gray. Many sulphides, as Galena (bluish); Stibnite; many Sulpharsenites, etc.,
as Jamesonite, Dufrenoysite, etc.
Iron-black. Graphite; Tetrahedrite; Polybasite; Stephanite; Enargite; Pyrolusite;
Magnetite; Hematite; Franklinite.
Black (with submetallic luster). Ilmenite; Limonite; Columbite; Tantalite, etc.;
Wolframite; Ilvaite; Uraninite, etc. The following are usually brownish black: Braunite;
Hausmannite.
Copper-red. Native copper.
Bronze-red. Bornite (quickly tarnished giving purplish tints) Niccolite.
;
Bronze-yellow. Pyrrhotite; Pentlandite; Breithauptite.

Brass-yellow. Chalcopyrite; Millerite (bronze). Pale brass-yellow: Pyrite; Mar-
casite (whiter than Pyrite).
Gold-yellow. Native gold; chalcopyrite and pyrite sometimes are mistaken for gold.
Streak. The following minerals of metallic luster are notable for the color of their
streak:
Cochineal-red: Pyrargyrite.
Cherry-red: Miargyrite.
Dull Red: Hematite; Cuprite; some cinnabar.
Scarlet:Cinnabar (usually nonmetallic).
Dark Brown: Manganite; Franklinite; Chromite.
Yellow: Limonite.
Tarnish. The following are conspicuous for their bright or variegated tarnish: Chal-
copyrite; Bornite (purplish tints); Tetrahedrite; some Limonite.
(6) NONMETALLIC LUSTER.
Colorless. IN CRYSTALS: Quartz; Calcite; Aragonite;

Gypsum; Cerussite; Angles-
ite; Albite; Barite; Adulana; Topaz; Apophyllite; Natrolite and other Ce-
Zeolites;
lestite; Diaspore; Nephelite; Meionite; Calamine;
Cryolite; Phenacite, etc
MASSIVE: Quartz; Calcite; Gypsum; Hyalite
White. - (botryoidal)
CRYSTALS: Amphibole (tremolite); Pyroxene
(diopside, usually greenish).
IVE Ml k Q uartz Felspars, especially Albite;
l7
;
lit^T l iCr i^
5
Barite; Cerussite, Scapo-
lite; Talc; Meerschaum; Magnesite;
Kaolinite; Amblygonite, etc.
Blue. BLACKISH BLUE: Azurite; Crocidolite.
INDIGO-BLUE: Indicolite (Tourmaline); Vivianite.
AZURE-BLUE: Lazulite; Azurite; Lapis
Lazuli; Turquois
IN"BLUE: Sapphire; Cy anite Mite; Azurite; Chalcanthite and
m ;
many copper
APPENDIX 693
SKY-BLUE, MOUNTAIN-BLUE: Beryl; Celestite.

VIOLET-BLUE: Amethyst; Fluorite.
GREENISH BLUE: Amazon-stone; Chrysocolla; Calamine; Smithsonite; some Turquois;
Beryl.
Green. BLACKISH GREEN: Epidote; Serpentine; Pyroxene; Amphibole.
EMERALD-GREEN: Beryl (Emerald); Malachite; Dioptase; Atacamite; and many other
copper compounds; Spodumene (hiddenite); Pyroxene (rare); Gahnite; Jadeite and Jade.
BLUISH GREEN: Beryl; Apatite; Fluorite; Amazon-stone; Prehnite; Calamine; Smith-
sonite; Chrysocolla; Chlorite; some Turquois.
MOUNTAIN GREEN: Beryl (aquamarine); Euclase.
APPLE-GREEN: Talc; Garnet; Chrysoprase; Willemite; Garnierite; Pyrophyllite: some
Muscovite; Jadeite and Jade, Pyrophyllite.
PISTACHIO-GREEN: Epidote.
GRASS-GREEN: Pyromorphite; Wavellite; Variscite; Chrysoberyl.
GRAYISH GREEN: Amphibole and Pyroxene, many common kinds; Jasper; Jade.
YELLOW-GREEN to OLIVE-GREEN: Beryl; Apatite; Chrysoberyl; Chrysolite (olive-
green); Chlorite; Serpentine; Titanite Datolite; Olivenite; Vesuvianite.
Yellow. SULPHUR-YELLOW: Sulphur; some Vesuvianite.
ORANGE-YELLOW: Orpiment; Wulfenite; Mimetite.
STRAW-YELLOW, also WINE-YELLOW, WAX- YELLOW: Topaz; Sulphur; Fluorite; Can-
crinite; Wulfenite; Vanadinite; Willemite; Calcite; Barite; Chrysolite; Chondrodite;
Titanite; Datolite, etc.
BROWNISH YELLOW: Much Sphalerite; Siderite; Gothite.
OCHER- YELLOW: Gothite: Yellow ocher (limonite).
Red. RUBY-RED: Ruby (corundum); Ruby spinel; much Garnet; Proustite; Vana-
dinite; Sphalerite; Chondrodite.
COCHINEAL-RED: Cuprite; Cinnabar.
HYACINTH-RED. Zircon; Crocoite.
ORANGE-RED. Zincite; Realgar; Wulfenite.
CRIMSON-RED: Tourmaline (rubellite); Spinel, Fluorite.
SCARLET-RED: Cinnabar.
BRICK-RED: Some Hematite (red ocher).
ROSE-RED to PINK: Rose quartz; Rhodonite; Rhodochrosite; Erythrite; some Scapo-
lite. Apophyllite and Zoisite; Eudialyte; Petalite; Margarite.
PEACH-BLOSSOM RED to LILAC: Lepidolite; Rubellite.
FLESH-RED: Some Orthoclase; Willemite (the variety troostite); some Chabazite;
Stilbite and Heulandite; Apatite; rarely Calcite; Polyhalite..
BROWNISH RED: Jasper; Limonite; Garnet; Sphalerite; Siderite; Rutile.
Brown. REDDISH BROWN: Some Garnet; some Sphalerite; S aurolite; Cassiterite;
Rutile.
CLOVE-BROWN: Axinite; Zircon; Pyromorphite.
YELLOWISH BROWN: Siderite and related carbonates; Sphalerite; Jasper; Limonite;
Gothite; Tourmaline; Vesuvianite; Chrondrodite; Staurolite.
BLACKISH BROWN: Titanite; some Siderite; Sphalerite.
SMOKY BROWN: Quartz.
Black: Tourmaline; black Garnet (melanite); some Mica (especially biotite): also
some Amphibole, Pyroxene and Epidote (these are mos'ly greenish or brownish back);
further, some Sphalerite and some kinds of Quartz (varying
from smoky brown to black);
also Allanite; Samarskite. Some black minerals with submetalhc luster are mentioned
on p. 692.
Streak. The streak is to be noted in the case of some minerals with nonmetallic luster.
By far the majority have, even when deeply colored in the mass (e.g. Tourmaline), a streak
differing but little from white. The following may be mentioned:
ORANGE-YELLOW: Zincite, Crocoite.
COCHINEAL-RED: Pyrargyrite and Proustite.
SCARLET RED: Cinnabar.
BROWNISH RED: Cuprite; Hematite.
BROWN: Limonite. ,. ,
, ., A
The streak of the various copper, green and blue minerals, as Malachite, Azunte, etc.,
is about the same as the color of the mineral itself, though often a little paler.
GENERAL INDEX
B
Abbreviations, 5 Barium, tests for, 338
Absorption of light, 222 Basal pinacbid, 78, 95, 122, 134
biaxial crystals, 287 Bases, chemical, 318
uniaxial crystals, 268 Basic salts, 319
Acicular structure, 183 Baveno twins, 171
Acid salts, 319 Becke test, 216
Acids, 318 Belonite, 180
Adamantine luster, 209 Betrand ocular, 279
Aggregate polarization, 300 Berylloid, 98
Aggregates, crystalline, 182 Bevel, Bevelment, 57
optical properties, 300 Biaxial crystals, behavior of light in, 270
Airy's spirals, 270 positive and negative, 277
Albite law (twinning), 172 Biaxial indicatrix, 274
Alkalies, test for, 319 interference figure, 281
Alkaline taste, 310 optic axes, 281
Alliaceous odor, 310 Binary symmetry, 11
Aluminium (aluminum), tests for, 338 Bi-quartz wedge plate, 280
Amorphous structure, 8, 183 Birefringence, determination of, 237
Amplitude of vibration, 203 Bisectrix, acute, 277
Amygdaloidal structure, 183 obtuse, 277
Analyzer, 229 Bismuth, tests for, 338
Analysis, blowpipe, 331 Bitter taste, 310
chemical, 326 Bituminous odor, 310
microchemical, 326 Bivalent element, 317
Angle, critical, 210 Bladed structure, 182
of extinction, 278 Blebby bead, 332
Angles, measurement of, 152 Blowpipe, 330
of isometric forms, 63, 66, 70 flame, 331
Anisometric crystals, 252 Borax bead tests, 336
Anisotropic crystals, 252 Boron, tests for, 338
Anomalies, optical, 301 Botryoidal structure, 183
Anorthic system, 143 Brachy-axis, 121
Antimony, test.- for, 338 Brachydome, 123
Aborescent structure, see Dendritic, 183 Brachypinacoid, 122
Argillaceous odor, 310 Brachyprism, 123
Arsenic, tests for, 338 Brachypyramid, 124
Artificial minerals, 1, 326 Brazil law (twin). 168, 404
Asterism, 250 Brewster's law, 227
Astringent taste, 310 Bri;
Asymmetric class, 147
Atom, 311
Atomic weight, 311
Axes, crystallographic, 15
of symmetry, 11 Cadmium
optic, 276, 285
dispersion of, 289, 292 7, 73, 91, 116, 130,
Axial angle, optic, 277 s
\ measurement of, 284 formula, 321
plane, 26
ratio, 26 >r, 338
696 GENERAL INDEX
Carlsbad twin, 170 Crystalline aggregate, 8, 182

structure, 8
Center of symmetry, 12
Charcoal tests, 334 Crystallites, 180
Chemical compound, 318 Crystallization, systems of, 15
composition and optical
char- Crystallography, 7
literature of, 2
acters, 298
elements, 311, 312 Cube, 54
Cubic system, 52
formula, 312
Curved crystals and faces, 177
mineralogy, 311
radicals, 317
reactions, 317 D
symbol, 312
tests, 328, 338 Decrepitation, 332, 333
Deltoid dodecahedron, 69
Chlorides, tests for, 338
Dendritic structure, 173, 183
Chromium, tests for, 339 .
Circular polarization, 240, 270 Density, 195

imitated by mica sec- Description of species, 343
tions, 300 Determination of minerals, 341
Classification of minerals, 343 Diamagnetic minerals, 309
Cleavage, 186 Diamagnetism, 309
basal, 187
Diametral prism, monoclinic system, 134
cubic, 187
orthorhombic system, 122
dodecahedral, 187 Diaphaneity, 247
octahedral, 187 Diathermancy, 305
prismatic, 187
Dibasic acid, 318
rhombohedral, 187 Dichroism, 247, 268
Clino-axis, 133 Dichroscope, 269
Clinodome, 135 Diffration, 223
Clinohedral class, 138 Dihexagonal bipyramidal class, 95
Clinopinacoid, 134 Dihexagonal pyrism, 96
Clinoprism, 135 Dihexagonal pyramid, 98
Clinopyramid, 135 Dihexagonal pyramidal class, 98
Closed tube tests, 333 Dimorphism, 325
Cobalt, tests for, 339 Diploid, 65
nitrate, use of, 332 Dispersion, 221
Cohesion, 186 crossed, 294
Colloid structure, 183 horizontal, 293
Colloidal minerals, 324 inclined, 292
Color, 204, 247, 248 of bisectrices, 293, 294
complementary, 205 of optic axes, 289
Columnar structure, 182 Distorted crystals, 13, 174
Complementary colors, 205 Ditetragonal bipyramidal class, 77
Composition-plane, 161 Ditetragonal prism, 79
Compound crystals, 160 pyramid, 82
Concentric structure, 182 Ditetragonal pyramidal class, 84
Conchoidal fracture, 191 Ditrigonal bipyramidal class, 103
Conductivity, for electricity, 306 Ditrigonal prism, 103
for heat, 304 pyramid, 103
Conical refraction, 276 Ditrigonal pyramidal class, 109
Conoscope, 243 ,, -
Ditrigonal scalenohedral class, 104

Contact goniometer 182
Divergent structure,
J.
Contact-twin, 162 Dodecahedron, 54

Cooling taste, 310 deltoid, 69
Copper, tests for, 389^ dyakis, 65
Coralloidal struetur
pentagonal, 64
Corrosion forms, 191^. tetrahedral, 72
Cotangent relation,; Jlffi rhombic, 54
Critical angle, 210 h Domatic class, 138
Crossed dispersion,
Crypto-crystalline,
Crystal, definition,
H
H
Domes, 31, 123, 135, 145
Double refraction, 223
Drusy, 183
distorted
Dyakis-dodecahedron, 65
form, 30 Dyakisdodecahedral class, 63
GENERAL INDEX 697
E Glistening luster, 250
Globular structure, 183
Earthy fracture, 191
Globulites, 180
Effervescence, 328
Eightling, 164
Glowing, 332, 333
Gnomonic projection, 40
Elasticity, 186, 194
Elastic minerals, 194
Gnomonic projection of isometric forms, 62
Electrical conductivity in minerals, 306 hexagonal forms, 99,
109
Electro-negative elements, 313
-positive elements, 313 tetragonal forms, 84
triclinic forms, 147
Elements, angular, 128, 139, 148
monoclinic forms,
axial, 128, 139, 148
137
chemical, 312
orthorhombic forms,
Elliptically polarized light, 240
127
Elongation, negative or positive, 280
Enantimorphous forms, 71, 113
Goniometer, contact or hand, 152
horizontal, 155
Epoptic figures, 288
189 reflecting, 154
Etching figures,
theodolite, 157
Exfoliation, 332
two-circle, 157
Expansion by heat, 304 Granular structure, 182
Exterior conical refraction, 276
Extinction, 230
Greasy luster, 249
Grouping, molecular, 22
directions, character of, 239
parallel, 172, 173
inclined, 260, 278
Gyroidal forms, 71
parallel, 260, 278
Extinction-angle, 278 H
Extraordinary ray, 254
Habit, crystal, 10
Hackly fracture, 191
Hand goniometer, 152
Feel, 310 Hard minerals, 193
Fetid odor, 310 Hardness, 191
Fibrous structure, 182 Heat, 303
Filiform, 183 effect on optical properties, 296
First order prisms, 79, 95 Heavy solutions, 198
pyramids, 80, 97 Hemihedral forms, 21
Fiveling, 164 Hemimorphic class, hexagonal system, 98
Flame coloration, 332 monoclinic system,
oxidizing, 331 138
reducing, 331 orthorhombic system,
Flexible, 194 126
Fluorescence, 251 tetragonal system, 84
Fluorides, test for, 339 Hexagonal axes, 94
Fluxes, 336 bipyramidal class, 100
Foliated structure, 182 prisms, 95, 96
Forceps, 330 prism of third order, 111
Form, 30 pyramidal class, 101
Formula, chemical, 312, 320 pyramids, 97, 98
calculation of, 321 symmetry, 11
Fracture, 191 system, 17, 94
Frictional electricity in minerals, 306 trapezohedral class, 102
Fundamental form, 30 trapezohedron, 102
Fusibility, 304, 332 Hexakistetrahedron, 70
scale of, 332 Hexoctahedral class, 52
Hexoctahedron, 59
Hextetrahedral class, 66
Hextetrahedron, 70
Gels, 324 Holohedral forms, 21
General mineralogy, literature of, 3 Horizontal dispersion, 292
Gladstone law, 210 goniometer, 155
Glass, optical characters of, 252, 300 Horse-radish odor, 310, 334
Glass tubes, 331, use of, 333 Houppes, 288
Gliding planes, 187 Hour-glass structure, 478
Glimmering luster, 250 Hydroxides, 318
698 GENERAL INDEX
Light-waves, 202
Liquids with high refractive indices, 213
Icosahedron, 65, 67 Lithium, test for, 339
Icositetrahedron, 58 Lorentz law, 210
Impalpable structure, 182 Lorenz law, 210
Indicatrix, biaxial, 274 Luster, 249
uniaxial, 257
Indices, crystallographic, Dana, 29 M
Goldschmidt, 29
Naumann, 29 Macro-axis, 121, 144
Weiss, 29 Macrodome, 123, 145
rational,29 Macropinacoid, 122, 145
refractive,207 Macroprism, 123
determination of, 280, Macropyramid, 124
213, 216 Magnesium, test for, 339
Incidence, angle of, 206 Magnetic minerals, 308
Inclined dispersion, 292 Magnetism, 308
hemihedrons, 67 Magnets, natural, 308
Inclusions, 179 Malleable minerals, 193
Inelastic minerals, 194 Mammillary structure, 183
Insoluble minerals, 329 Manganese, test for, 339
Interference of light, 224, 230 Manebach twin, 171, 457
colors, 236 Margarites, 180
biaxial crystals, 260 Measurement of crystal angles, 152
uniaxial crystals, Mercury, test for, 339
278 Meta-colloids, 325
figures, biaxial, 281 Metagenetic twins, 163
inclined, 267, 283 Metallic-adamantine luster, 249
uniaxial, 260 Metallic luster, 249
Interior conical refraction, 276 Metallic pearly luster, 249
Intumescence, 332 Metals, 313
Iridescence, 250 Mica plate, use of, 264
Iron, test for, 339 Mica sections superposed, 300
Iron cross, 166 Micaceous structure, 182
Isodiametric crystals, 252 Microchemical analysis, 326
Isodimorphism, 325 Microcosmic salt, v. Salt of Phosporus, 336
Isometric crystals, optical Microlites, 180
properties 252
system, 16, 52 Microscope, 245
Isomorphism, 322 Miller hexagonal axes, 117
Isomorphous group, 322 indices, 117
mixtures, 323 indices, 28
Isotropic crystals, 252 Mimetic crystals, 14
Mineral, artificial, 326
literature of, 4
definition of, 1
Jolly balance, 196
synthesis, 326
Mineral kingdom, 1
K Mineralogical journals, 4
Klein solution, 198 Mineralogy, chemical and determinative,
literature of, 4
science of, 1, 2
Models of crystals, 21
Lamellar polarization, 302 Mohs scale of hardness, 191
Molecular networks, 22, 25
. structure, 182
Lamp for blowpipe, 330 structure, 7
Law of rational indices, 29 weight, 316
Lead, test for, 339 Molecule, 311
Left-handed crystal,
114,403 Molybdenum, test for, 339
Monobasic acid, 318
polarization, 241
Light, nature of, 200 Monoclinic axes, 133
Light-ray, 204 crystals, 134
Light velocity, relation to optical characters, 291
refractive index,
system, 17, 133
Mossy structure, 183
GENERAL INDEX 699
N Oscillatory combination, 176

Natural magnets, 308 Oxides, 318
Naumann's indices, 29 Oxidizing flame, 331
Negative crystal, biaxial, 277, 286
uniaxial, 254, 258, 264
element, 313 Paragenetic twins, 163
elongation, 280 Parallel extinction, 260, 278
Network, molecular, 22 grouping, 172
Neutral salt, 319 hemihedrons, 64
Newton's rings, 225 Paramagnetic minerals, 309
Nickel, test for, 339 Paramagnetism, 309
Nicol prism, 228 Parameter, 27
Niobium, test for, 339 Paramorph, 27'
Nitrates, test for, 339 Paramorphism, 27
Nodular structure, 183 Parting, 188
Non-metallic luster, 249 Pearly luster, 249
Non-metals, 313 Penetration-twin, 162
Normal angles, 44 Penfield beam balance, 197
class, isometric system, 52 Pentagonal dodecahedron, 64
hexagonal system, 95 tetrahedral, 72
monoclinic system, 133 hemihedral class, 63
orthorhombic system, 121 icositetrahedral class, 71
tetragonal system, 77 icositetrahedron, 71
triclinic system, 144 Pentavalent element, 317
salt, 319 Percussion figure, 188
Pericline law (twinning), 172, 462
Periodic law, 314, 315
Phanero-crystaUine, 182
Oblique system, 133 Phosphates, test for, 339
Octahedron, 54 Phosphorescence, 251
Ocular, Bertrand, 279 Phosphoric acid, test for, 339
Odor, 310 Photo-electricity, 307
Opalescence, 250 Physical characters, 185
Opaque, 247 mineralogy, literature of, 2
Open tube tests, 334 Piezo-electricity, 307
form, 30 Pinacoid, 31
Optic axes, 273, 276 Pinacoidal class, 144
axial angle, 277 Plagiohedral class, 71
axis, 254 Plagiohedral hemihedral class, 71
Optical anomalies, 301 Plane-polarized light, 226
characters of crystalline aggregates, Plane of polarization, 226
300 Planes of symmetry, 10
twin crystals, 298 Platinum wire, 330, 336
effect of heat upon, 296 Play of colors, 250
pressure on, 300 Pleochroic halos, 288
to chemical
relation Pleochroism, 247, 287
composition, 298 Pleomorphism, 325
tests, methods and order of, 295 Point system, 23
Ordinary ray, 254 Polariscope, 229, 243
Ortho-axis, 133 Polarization, 226
Orthodome, 135 Polarization-brushes, 288
Orthopinacoid, 134 -microscope, 245
Orthoprism, 135 Polarized light, 226
Orthopyramid, 135 Polarizer, 229
Orthorhombi
ombic axes, 121 Polysynthetic twinning, 163
bipyramidal class, 121 Positive crvstal, biaxial, 277, 286
bisphenoidal class, 128 uniaxial, 254, 258, 264
crystals, 121 element, 313
optical characters, elongation, 280
288 Potassium, test for, 340
dispersion, 289 Pressure, effect upon optical characters,
pyramidal class, 126 300
system, 17, 121 figures, 189
700 GENERAL INDEX
Primary optic axes, 276 Reflecting goniometer, 154

Reflection of light, 205
Prism, 30
hexagonal system, dihexagonal, 96 angle of, 205
first order, 95 Refraction, 206
second order, 96 double, 223
third order, 100 strength of, 224
monoclinic system, 135 Refractive index, 207
orthorhombic system, 123 determination of, 213.
tetragonal system, ditetragonal, 79 216, 180
first order, 79 relation to light velocitv,
second order, 79 208
third order, 85 indices, principal, 209
triclinic system, 145 Refractometer, 241
Prismatic class, 133 Regular system, 52
Projection, gnomonic, 40 Relief, high or low, 212
literature of, 44 Reniform structure, 183
horizontal, 31 Resinous luster, 249
spherical, 31 Reticulated structure, 182
stereographic, 32 Rhombic section, 462
literature of, 44 sphenoid, 128
Pseudo-hexagonal crystals, 14, 169, 437 Rhombohedral class, 104, 110
-isometric crystals, 301 Rhombohedral division, 103
Pseudomorph, 183, 326 Rhombohedral hemihedral class, 104
Pseudomorphism, 326 hemimorphic class, 109
Pseudosymmetry, 14, 60, 164, 174, 297 tetartohedral class, 110
Pycnometer, 197 Rhombohedron, positive and negative,
Pyramid, 31 104, 105
hexagonal system, dihexagonal, 98 second order, 110
first order, 97 third order, 110
second order, 97 Right-handed crystal, 114, 403
third order, 100 polarization, 241
monoclinic system, 135 Roasting, 334
orthorhombic system, 124 Rontgen rays, 25
tetragonal system, ditetragonal, 79
first order, 79
second order, 79
third order, 85
triclinic system, 145
Saccharoidal structure, 182
Saline taste, 310
Pyramidal hemihedral hemimorphic class,
101 Salt of phosporus, 337
Salts,319
Pyramidal-hemimorphic class, hexagonal
system, 101 Scalenohedron, 106
tetragonal tetragonal, 88
system, 86
Scalenohedral class, 87
Scale of fusibility, 332
Pyritohedral class, 63
Scale of hardness, 191
Pyritohedron, 64
Pyro-electricity, 306 Schiller, 251
Pyrognostics, 338 Schillerization, 251
Sclerometer, 192
Second order prism, hexagonal system, 96
Q
tetragonal system, 79
Quarter-undulation mica plate, 264 pyramid, hexagonal system,
Quartz wedge, 231 97
use of, 286 tetragonal system, 79-
rhombohedron, 110
Secondary optic axes, 276
Radiated structure, 182 twinning, 165, 188
Sectile, 193
Radical, chemical, 317
Rational indices, law of, 29 Selenite-plate, 236, 266
Selenium, test for, 340
Reaction, chemical, 317
Semi-metals, 313
Reagents, chemical, 328
Semi-transparent, 247
Reducing flame, 331 Sensitive tint, 236
Reduction of metals, 334
use of, 266
GENERAL INDEX 701
Separable, 182 Symmetry, 10

Shining luster, 250 axis of, 11
Silica, test for, 340 center of, 12
Silky luster, 249 classes, 15
Silver, test for, 340 exhibited by Stereographic pro-
Soda, use of, 330, 336 jection, 45
Sodium, test for, 340 of systems, 18, 19
Soft minerals, 193 planes of, 10
Solid solution, 323
Synthesis, mineral, 326
Solubility in minerals, 328 System, hexagonal, 94
Solution planes, 189 isometric, 52
Sonstadt solution, 198 monoclinic, 133
Sound waves, 201 .
orthorhombic, 121
Specific gravity, 195 tetragonal, 77
determination of, 196 triclinic, 143
Spectroscope, 221 Systems of crystallization, 15
Sphenoid, 87
rhombic, 128
Sphenoidal class, monoclinic system, 138
orthorhombic system, Tangent relation 49,
128 Tarnish, 250

tetragonal system, 87 Taste, 310
hemihedral class, 87 Tautozonal faces, 45
tetartohedraj class, 89 Tellurium, test for, 340
Spherical projections, 31 Tenacity, 193
Spherulites, 300, 459 Test paper, 330
Splendent luster, 250 Tetartohedral class, isometric system, 72
Splintery fracture, 191 tetragonal system, 89
Stalactitic structure, 183 forms, 22
Stellated structure, 182 Tetragonal bipyramidal class, 85
Stereographic circles and scales, 36 bisphenoidal class, 89
projection, 32 crystals, 77
literature of, 44 pyramidal class, 86
hexagonal forms, scalenohedron, 88
99, 108 sphenoidal class, 87
isometric forms, symmetry, 11
61 system, 16, 77
tetragonal forms, trapezohedral class, 89
83 trapezohedron, 89
triclinic forms, trisoctahedron, 58
146 tristetrahedron, 69
monoclinic forms, Tetrahedral class,66
137 hemihedral class, 66
orthorhombic pentagonal dodecahedral
forms, 126 class, 72
protractor, 35, 39 s/ pentagonal dodecahedron, 72
Streak, 247 Tetrahedron, 67
Strength of double refraction, 224 Tetrahexahedron, 56
Striations, 176 Tetravalent element, 317
Strike-figure, v. Percussion-figure, 188 Theodolite goniometer, 157
Strontium, test for, 340 Thermo-electricity, 307
Structure of minerals, 182 Third-order prism, hexagonal system, 100
Sublimate, 333, 334 tetragonal system, 85
Subtranslucent, 247 pyramid, hexagonal system, TOO
Subtransparent, 247 tetragonal system 85
Subvitreous, 249 rhombohedron, 110
Sulphates, test for, 340 Thoulet solution, 198
Sulphides, test for, 340 Tin, test for, 340
Sulpho-salts, 320 Titanium, test for, 340
Sulphur, test for, 340 Total reflection, 210
Sulphurous odor, 310 refractometer, 219, 241
Swelling up, 332 Tourmaline tongs, 243
Symbol, chemical, 312 Translucent, 247
crystallographic, 27 Transparency, 247
702 GENERAL INDEX
Transparent, 247 U
Trapezohedral class, hexagonal system,
102, 112 Ultra-blue, 521
tetragonal system, 89 Uneven fracture, 191
hemihedral class, 102 Uniaxial crystals, 253
tetratohedral class, 112 behavior of light in,
Trapezohedron, 58 253
hexagonal, 102 determination of refrac-
tetragonal, 89 tive indices, 254
trigonal, 113 examination in conver-
Tribasic acid, 318 gent polarized light,
Trichite, 180
Triclinic axes, 143 examination in polarized
crystals, 143 light, 259
optical characters of, 295 interference colors, 260
system, 17, 143 optical characters, 270
symmetry, 115 positive and negative,
Trigonal bipyramidal class, 114 254
class, 103 indicatrix, 257
division, 103 wave surface, 255
hemihedral class, 103 Unit form, 30
hemimorphic class, 109 Univalent element, 317
prism, 103 Uranium, test for, 340
pyramid, 103 Uralitization, 490
pyramidal class, 114
symmetry, 11
system, 103
tetartohedral class, 114
Valence, 317
hemimorphic class, 114
Vanadium, test for, 340
trapezohedral class, 112
Velocity of light, 203
trapezohedron, 113 relation to refractive in-
trisoctahedron, 57
dex, 208
trictetrahedron, 69 Vicinal forms, 24
Trigondodecahedron, 69 Vitreous luster, 209
Trigonotype class, 103
Trilling, 164
Trimorphous, 325 W
Tripyramidal class, hexagonal system, 100
Water of crystallization, 320
tetragonal system, 85
Trisoctahedron, 57 Water-waves, 201
Trirhombohedral class, 110 Wave-front, 203
Tristetrahedrons, 69 Wave-length, 204
Trivalent element, 317 Wave-motion, 201
Truncate, truncation, 56 Wave-surface, biaxial crystals, 273
Tungsten, test for, 340 uniaxial crystals, 255
Twin crystals, 160 Waxy luster, 249
optical characters of, 298 Westphal balance, 199
Twinning, artificial, 188 White light, 204
axis, 161 Widmanstatten lines, 356
plane, 161
polysynthetic, 163
repeated, 163
secondary, 165 X-rays and crystal structure, 25
symmetrical, 163
Twins, isometric, 165
hexagonal, 167
monoclinic, 170
Zinc, test for, 340
orthorhombic, 169
Zirconium, test for, 341
spinel, 419
' Zirconoid, 82
tetragonal, 166 Zonal equations, 46
triclinic, 172
Two-circle goniometer, 157 Zone, 31
Zone-axis, 31
INDEX TO SPECIES
Allochroite, 508 Ammonium, sulphates, 624,

Alloclasite, Alloklas, 382 etc.
Aarite, v. 372
Arite, Allopalladium, 356 Ampangabeite, 591
Abriachanite, 493 Allophane, 580 Amphibole, 487
Acadialite, 552 Almandine, Almandite, 507, AMPHIBOLE Group, 485
Acanthite, 367 419 Amphibole-anthophyllite,
Acerdese, v. Manganite Almeriite, 640 489
Achmatite, 532 Aloisiite, 545 Amphigene, 469
Achroite, 542 Alpha-quartz, 403 Amphodelite, 468
Acmite, 479 Alshedite, 584 Analcime, 554
Actinolite, Actinote, 489 Alstonite, v. Bromlite, 447 Analcite, 554
Adamantine spar, 413 Altaite, 364 Anapaite, 607
Adamine, 604 Alum, 637 Anatase, 428
Adamite, 604 Alumian, 632 Ancylite, 449
Adelite, 601 Alumina, 413, 418 Andalusite, 524
Adipocire, v. Hatchettite ACUMINATES, 418 et seq. Andesine, 466
Adular, Adularia, 458 Aluminite, 639 Andorite, 385
Êdelite,535 Aluminium borate, 620 Andradite, 507
Êgirine,419 carbonate, 452 Andrewsite, 616
^girite, 479 chloride, 399 Anemousite, 468
Êgirite-augite, 477 fluorides, 399, 400 Angaralite, 540
jEnigmatite, 494 hydrates, 431, 435 Anglesite, 628
JEschynite, 591 mellate, 645 Anhydrite, 629
Agalite, 576 oxide, 413, 431, 435 Animikite, 362
Agalmatolite, 562 phosphates, 605, 610, etc. Ankerite, 443
Agaric mineral, 440 silicates, 523, 524, 5?6, Annabergite, 609
Agate, 405 578, 579, 580, etc. Annerodite, 591 .
Agate-jasper, 406 sulphates, 632, 637, 639 Annite, 565

Agnolite, 582 Aluminium ore, 433 Anomite, 564
Agricolite, 510 Alumstone, 639 Anorthite, 467
Aguilarite, 365 Alundum, 414 Anorthoclase, 461
Aikinite, 388 Alunite, 639 Anthophyllite, 486
Akermanite, 519 Alunogel, 434 Hydrous, 487
Alabandin, 369 Alunogen, 638 Anthracite, 648
Alabandite, 369 Alurgite, 565 Antigorite, 573
Alabaster, 634 Amalgam, 354 Antimonarsen, v. Allemontite
Oriental, 440 Amarantite, 639 ANTIMONATES, 618
Alaite, 436 Amazonite, 461 Antimonblende, v. Kermes-
Alalite, 476 Amazonstone, 461 ite
Alamosite, 483 Ambatoarinite, 449 Antimonglanz, v. Stibnite

Alaskaite, 386 Amber, 276, 645 ANTIMONIDES, 372, etc.
Alaun, v. Alum, Amblygonite, 602 Antimonite, 358
Alaunstein, v. Alunite Amblystegite, 473 ANTIMONITES, 618
Albertite, 647 Amesite, 571 Antimonnickel, v. Breithaup-
Albite, 464 Amethyst, 405 tite
Alexandrite, 424 Oriental, 410 Antimonsilber. v. Dyscras-

Algodonite, 362 Amianthus, 490. 573 ite
Alisonite, 364
Ammiolite, 618 Antimonsilberblende, v. Py-
Allactite, Allaktit, 606 Ammonium, carbonate, 450 rargyrite
Allagite, 485
chloride, 397 Antimony, 349
Allanite, 533 oxalate, 644 Gray, 358
phosphates, 610, etc. Native, 349
Allemontite, 349
703
704 INDEX TO SPECIES
Antimony, Red, Kermesite Ascharite, 621

v. I
Barytocalcite, 449
White, 409 Asmanite, 408
1
Baryturanit, 617
Antimony oxides, 409 Asparagus-stone, 596 Basanite, 406
oxysulphide, 383 Aspasiolite, 498 Bassanite, 630
sulphide, 358 Asphaltum, 647 1
Bassetite, 617
Antimony glance, 358 Asteria, 413 Bastite, 474, 573
Antlerite, 632 Asteriated quartz, 405 Bastnasite, 449
Apatite, 595 sapphire, 413 Batchelorite, 579
I
Aphanese, Aphanesite, 604 Astrakanite, 637 Bathvillite, 646

Aphrite, 440 Astrolite, 496 Batrachite, 512
Aphrizite, 542 Astrophyllite, 585 Baumhauerite, 386
Aphrosiderite, 571 Atacamite, 400 Bauxite, 433
Aphthalose, 624 Atelestite, 606 Bavenite, 558
Aphthitalite, 624 Atopite, 618 Bayldonite, 612
Apjohnite, 637 Attacolite, 614 Bazzite, 540
Aplome, 508 Auerlite, 522 Beaumontite, 549
Apophyllite, 546 Augelite, 614 Beauxite, 433
Apotome, 627 Augite, 477 Beaverite, 638
Aquamarine, 495 Auralite, 498 Bechilite, 623
Araeoxene, 604 Aurichalcite, 451 Beckelite, 540
Aragonite, 446 Auripigmentum, 357 Beegerite, 392
Arcanite, 624 Automolite, 420 v.
|
Beilstein, Nephrite
Ardennite, 539 Autunite, 616 Beldongrite, 436
Arduinite, 558 Aventurine feldspar, 465 Bellite, 631
Arendalite, 531 quartz. 405 Bell-metal ore, 394
Arfvedsonite, 494
|
Ax-stone, 482 Belonesite, 399

Argentine, 440 Axinite, 534 Bementite, 582
Argentite, 364 Awaruite, 356 I
Benitoite, 585
Argentobismutite, v. Matil- Azurite, 451
dite Beraunite, 615
Bergamaskite, 491
Argyrodite, 394
Arite, 372
B Bergblau, v. Azurite
418 Bergkrystall, v. Quartz
Arizonite, Bababudanite, 493
Arkansite, 430
Bergmannite, 556
Babingtonite, 485 Bergsalz, v. Halite
Arquerite, 354 Backstromite, 435 Bergseife, 579
Armangite, 594 Saddeckite, 562
v.
Bergtheer, v.
Pittasphalt
Arragonite, Aragonite, Jaddeleyite, 428
44 O | Berlinite, 614
Jadenite, 374 Bernstein, v. Amber
ARSENATES, 592 Sagrationite, 533
Arsenic, 348 Berthierite, 386
Saikalite, 477
White, 409 Bertrandite, 539
Jakerite, 581 Beryl, 495
Arsenical antimony, 349 Salas ruby, 419
Arsenic oxide, 409" Beryllium aluminate, 423
Saltimorite, 573
sulphide, 357 borate, 620
Samlite, 526
ARSENIDES, 361 phosphate, 601
Sarbierite, 458
Arsenikalkies, v.
Arsenopy- 495,silicate, 496, 514,
3aricalcite, 440
nte 529, 539
iarite, 625
Arsenikkies, y. Beryllonite, 595
Arsenopy- Barium carbonate,
rite
449
447, Berzelianite, 365
Arseniopleite, 606 Berzeliite, 593
nitrate, 619
Arseniosiderite, 606 Betafite, 591
silicate,460, 498, 549, Beta-quartz, 403
Arsenkies, v. Arsenopyrite
550, 555, etc.
Arsenobismite, 617 Beudantite, 618
sulphate, 625
'
Arsenoferrite, 378 Beyrichite, 372

ariumuranit, 617 Bieberite, 636
Arsenolite, 409
arkevikite, 494
Arsenopyrite, 381 Bildstein, v. Agalmatolite
Barrandite, 610 Bilinite, 637
Arsensilberblende, v. Prous- Barsowite, 523
tite Bindheimite, 617
Barthite, 612
Artinite, 453 Binnite, 391
Barylite, 498
Asbestos, Asbestus, 489, Biotina, Biotine, 468
573 Barysilite, 498 563
Biotite,
Baryt, Barytes, 625
Blue, 493 Bisbeeite, 581
,
Baryta, v. Barium
Asbolan, 436 Bischofite, 402
Asbolite, 436 Baryta-feldspar, 460 Bismite, 410
Baryta-orthoclase, 460 I
Bismuth, 349
INDEX TO SPECIES 705
Bismuth arsenate, 606 BORATES, 619 Bunsenite, 411
carbonate, 449, 454 Borax, 622 Buntkupfererz, v. Bornite
oxide, 410 Borickite, 615 Burrstone, 406
oxychloride, 401 Boric acid, 435 Bushmanite, 637
selenide, 359 Bomite, 374 Bustamite, 484
silicate, 504 Boron hydrate, 435 Buttermilcherz, v. Cerargy-
sulphide, 359 silicate, 522, 527 rite
tellurate, 641 Boronatrocalcite, 622 Byssolite, 490
telluride, 360 Bort, 345 Bytownite, 467
uranate, 617 Bostonite, 575
vanadate, 594 Botryogen, 639
Bismuth glance, 359 Botryolite, 528
Bismuth gold, 350 Boulangerite, 387 Cabrerite, 609
Bismuth ocher, 410 Bournonite, 388 Cacholong, 408
Bismuthinite, 359 Boussingaultite, 637 Cacoxenite, 614
Bismutite, 454 Bowenite, 572 Cadmia, 540
Bismutoplagionite, 387 Bowmannite, 601 Cadmium sulphide, 371
Bismutosmaltite, 380 Brackebuschite, 604 Cadmium blende, v. Green-
Bismutosphaerite, 449 Bragite, 588 ockite, 371
Bittersalz, v. Epsomite Brandisite, 566 Cadmium oxide, 411
Bitter spar, Bitterspath, v. Brandtite, 607 Caesium silicate, 470
Dolomite Brannerite, 586 Cainosite, v. Cenosite, 580
Bitumen, 646, 647 Brauneisenstein, v. Limon- Cairngorm stone, 405
Bituminous coal, 648 ite Caking coal, 648
Bityite, 558 Braunile, 425 Calamine, 539, 445
Bixbyite, 425 Braunstein, Grauer, v. Pyro- Calaverite, 383
Bjelkite, 387 lusite Calc sinter, 440
Black jack, 367 Bravoite, 378 spar, 438
Black lead, 347 Brazilian pebble, 325 tufa, 440
Blanfordite, 477 emerald, 542 Calcioferrite, 615
Blatter tellur, v. Nagyagite sapphire, 542
'
Calciostrontianite, 448
Blaueisenerde, v. Vivianite 428
Brazilite, Calciovolborthite, 604
Bleiantimonglanz, v. Zinken- Bredbergite, 508 Calcite, 438
ite Breislakite, 490 Calcium arsenate, 610, etc.
Bleiglanz, v. Galena Breithauptite, 372 antimonate, 618

Bleiniere, Bleinierite, v. Bind- Breunerite, 443 borate, 620, 621, etc.
heimite Breunnerite, 443 carbonate, 438, 446
Bleischweif, 363 Brevicite, 556 chloride, 399
Bleivitrol, v. Anglesite Brewsterite, 549 flouride,398
Blende, 367 Britholite, 580 iodate, 619
Blodite, 637 Brittle silver ore, 392 molybdate, 643
Bloedite, Bloedite, 637 Brochantite, 632 niobate, 587, etc.
Blomstrandine, 591 Broggerite, 623 nitrate, 619

Bloodstone, 405 Bromargyrite, 397 oxalate, 644
Blue asbestus. 493 BROMIDES, 397 oxyfluoride, 401
iron earth, 608 Bromlite, 447 phosphate, 595, 606,
John, 398 Bromyrite, 397 611, etc.
malachite, v. Azurite Brongnartine, 632 silicate, 483, 467, etc.
vitriol, 636 Brongniardite, 387 sulphate, 629, 633, etc.
Bobierrite, 608 Bronzite, 472 sulphide, 369
Bccumlerite, 399 Brookite, 429 Calcium tantalate, 587
Boghead cannel, 648 Brown coal, 648 titanate, 583, 586
Bog-iron ore, 433 iron ore, 432 tungstate, 642
manganese, 436 iron stone, 432 Caledonite, 632
Bole, 579 hematite, 432 Californite, 520
Boleite, 401 ocher, 432 Callainite, 610
Bologna stone, 626 spar, 443 Calomel, 395
Boltonite, 513 Brucite, 434 Campylite, 598
Bone-phosphate, 597 Brugnatellite, 453 Canaanite, 476
turquoise, 613 Brunsvigite, 572 Cancrinite, 501
Bonsdorffite, 498 Brushite, 611 sulphatic, 501
Boort, 345 Bucholzitef526 Canfieldite, 394
Boothite, 636 Bucklandite, 532, 533 Cannel coal, 648
Boracite, 620 Buhrstone, 406 Caoutchouc, Mineral, 647
Chalmersite, 366 Cimolite, 579

Capillary pyrites, 372
Chalybite, 443 Cinnabar, 370
Caporcianite, 552
Chamoisite, Chamosite, 572 Inflammable, 646
Cappelenite, 496
Chathamite, 378 Cinnamon-stone, 507
Caracolite, 631
Chemawinite, 645 Cirrolite, 606
Carbon, 345 405
Carbonado, 345 Chenevixite, 616 Citrine,
Chert, 406 Clarite, 393
CARBONATES, 436
Chessy copper, 451 Claudetite, 409
Carlosite, 585
Chessylite, 451 Clausthalite, 364
Carminite, 594
Carnallite, 401 Chesterlite, 461 Clay, et seq. 578
Carnegieite, 468 Chiastolite, 525 Clay iron-stone, 416
Carnelian, 405 Childrenite, 615 Brown, 433
Carneol, v. Carhelian Chilenite, 362 Cleavlandite, 465
Caraotite, 617 Chillagite, 643 Cleiophane, 368
Carpholite, 540 Chiolite, 400 Cleveite, 623
Carphosiderite, 639 Chiviatite, 385 Cliachite, 434
Carrollite, 374 Chladnite, 472 Cliftonite, 347
Caryinite, 593 Chloanthite, 378 Clinochlore, 569
Caryocerite, 496 Chloralluminite, 399 Ch'noclase, 604
Caryopilite, 582 Chlor-apatite, 595 Clinoclasite, 604
Cassiterite, 425 Chlorargyrite, 397 Clinoenstatite, 477
Castanite, 639 Chlorblei, v. Cotunnite Clinohedrite, 540
Castor, CastorHe, 455 CHLORIDES, 395 Clinohumite, 536
Caswellite, 565 Chlorite, 568 Clinozoisite, 532
Catapleiite, 496 CHLORITE Group, 568 Clintonite, 566
Cataspilite, 498 Chloritoid, 567 CLINTONITE Group, 566
Catlinite, 580 Chloritspath, v. Chloritoid Coal, Mineral, 647, 648
Catoptrite, 618 Chlormanganokalite, 399 Cobalt arsenate, 607, 608
Cat's eye, 405, 424 Chlorocalcite, 399 carbonate, 446, 453
Cauk, Cawk, 626 Chloromagnesite, 399 arsenide, 378, 379, 380,
Cebollite, 518 Chloromelanite, 482 381
'
Celadonite, 577 Chloropal, 582 selenite, 641

Celestine, 627 Chlorophseite, 571 sulph-arsenide, 378
Celestite, 627 Chlorophane, 398 sulphate, 636
Celsian, 460 Chlorophyllite, 498 sulphide, 378
Cenosite, 580 Chlorquecksilber, v Calo-Cobalt bloom, 608
Cerargyrite, 397 mel Cobalt glance, v. Cobaltite
Cerite, 540 Chlorospinel, 419 Cobaltine, 379
Cerium carbonate, 449 Chlorsilber v. Cerargyrite Cobaltite, 379
fluoride, 399 Chondrarsenite, 601 Cobaltnickelpyrite, 378
niobates, 587 Chondrodite, 536 Cobaltoadamite, 604
phosphates, 593, 609, etc. Chrismatine, Chrismatite, Cobaltocalcite, 441
silicates, 533, 540, 585, etc. 645 Cobaltomenite, 641
Ceruleite, 616 Christianite, 468 Coccolite, 477
Cerussite, 448 Christobalite, 408 Cocinerite, 362
Cervantite, 410 Christophite, 368 Cockscomb Pyrite, 380
Cesarolite, 424 CHROMATES, 630, etc. Crelestine, 627
Ceylanite, Ceylonite, 410 Chrome diopside, 476 Coeruleolactite, 614
Chabazite, 552 Chrome spinel, 419 Cohenite, 356
Chalcanthite, 636 Chromeisenstein, v. Chrom- Coke, 648
Chalcedony, 405 ite Colemanite, 621
Chalcocite, 366 Chromic iron, 423 Colerainite, 583
Chalcodite, 572 Chromite, 423 Cb'lestine, v. Celestite
Chalcolamprite, 587 Chromitite, 423 Collbranite, 620
Chalcomenite, 641 Chromium oxide, 423 Collophanite, 606
Chalcophanite, 435 sulphate, 639 Collyrite, 580
Chalcophyllite, 612 sulphide, 374 Colophonite, 508, 520
Chalcopyrite, 374 Chrysoberyl, 423 Coloradoite, 369
Chalcosiderite, 616 Chrysocolla, 581 COLUMBATES V. NlOBATES.
Chalcosine, 366 Chrysolite, 511 587
Chalcostibite, 386 CHRYSOLITE Group, 510 Columbite, 588
Chalcotrichite, 411 Chrysoprase, 405
440 Comptonite, 558
Cfcalk,
Chrysotile, 573 Confolensite, 579
French, 575 Churchite, 609 Conichalcite, 612
Connarite, 577 Couseranite, 517 Daviesite, 401

Connellite, 631 Covellite, 371 Davyne, 501
Cookeite, 563 Crandallite, 601 Dawsonite, 452
Copal, Fossil, 645 Creedite, 402 Dechenite, 604
Copaline, Copalite, 645 Crednerite, 424 Deeckeite, 518
Copiapite, 638 Crestmoreite, 546 Delessite, 571
Copper, 353 Crichtonite, 417 Delatynite, 645
Emerald, v. Dioptase Cristobalite, 408 Delorenzite, 586
515 Crocalite, 556 Delphinite, 531
Gray, 390 Crocidolite, 493 Delvauxite, 615
Indigo, v. Covellite, Crocoite, 630 Demant, v. Diamond, 345
371 Cromfordite, v. Phosgenite Demantoid, 508
Native, 353 Cronstedtite, 571 Derbylite, 618
Red, v. Cuprite, 410 Crookesite, 365 Derbyshire spar, 398
Copper, Vitreous, v. Chalco- Crossite, 493 Descioizite, 604
cite, 366 Cryolite, 399 Desmine, 551
Yellow, 374 Cryolithionite, 400 Destinezite, 618
Copper arsenate, 603, 604, Cryophyllite, 363 Dewalquite, 539
612, etc. Cryptolite, 593 Deweylite, 575
arsenide, 362 Cryptoperthite, 460 Diabantite, 571
carbonate, 450, 451 Cuban, 374 Diadochite, 618
chloride, 395, 400 Cubanite, 374 Diallage, 477
manganate, 424 Cube ore, v. Pharmacosider- Dialogite, 444
iodide, 395 ite Diamant, 345
nitrate, 619 Cube spar, v. Anhydrite Diamond, 345
oxides, 410, 412 Culsageeite, 572 Diamond, Bristol, Lake
oxychlorides, 400 Cumengite, 401 George, 405
phosphates, 603, 612, Cummingtonite, 489 Dianite, 589
etc. Cuprite, 410 Diaphorite, 387
selenides, 365 Cuproadamite, 604 Diaspore, 431
selenite, 641 Cuprobismutite, 385 Diasporogelite, 434
silicates, 515, 581 Cuprodescloizite, 604 Diatomite, 409
sulphantimonate, 393 Cuprogoslarite, 635 Dichroite,.497
sulphantimonites, 386 et Cupromagnesite, 636 Dickinsonite, 607
seq. Cuproplumbite, 364 Didymolite, 497
sulpharsenates, 393 Cuproscheelite, 643 Dietrichite, 637
sulpharsemte, 386 Cuprotungstite, 643 Dietzeite, 619
sulphates, 630, 632; hy- Cuspidine, 535 Dihydrite, 605
drous, 636 et seq. Custerite, 497 Diopside, 476
sulphides, 366, 371, 374 Cyanite, 526 Dioptase, 515
et seq. Cyanochroite, 637 Dipyre, 517
sulpho-bismuthites, 386 Cyanotrichite, 638 Disterrite, 566
tungstate, 643 Cyclopite, 468 Disthene, 526
vanadates, 604 Cylindrite, 394 Dixenite, 581
Copper glance, 366 Cymatolite, 481 Dog-tooth spar, 439
Copper mica, 616 Cymophane, 423 Dolerophanite, 632
Copper nickel, 372 Cyprine, 519 Dolomite, 442
Copper pyrites, 374 Cyprusite, 639 Domeykite, 362
Copper uranite, 616 Cyrtolite, 522 Domingite, 387
Copper vitriol, 636 Doppelspath, v. Calcite
Dopplerite, 646
Copperas, 636 D Double-refracting spar,
Coprolites, 597
Coquimbite, 637 Dahllite, 597 Doughtyite, 638
Cordierite, 497 Damourite, 561 Douglasite, 402
Danaite, 382 Dreelite,626
Cordylite, 449
Gorki te, 618 Danalite, 504 Dry-bone, 445
Cornwallite, 612 Danburite, 522 Dudleyite, 572
Coronadite, 424 Dannemorite, 489 Dufreniberaunite, 605
Corundophilite, 571 Darapskite, 619 Dufrenite, 605
Corundum, 413 Datholite, 527 Dufrenoysite, 387
Corynite, 379 Datolite, 527 Dumortierite, 543
Cosalite, 387 Daubreeite, Daubreite, 401 Dundasite, 452
Cossyri'te, 494 Daubreelite, 374 Durangite, 601
Cotunnite, 399 Davidsonite, 496 Durdenite, 641
Epiboulangerite, 394
FELDSPAR Group, 456
Dysanalyte, 586
Epichlorite, 571 Feldspar, Baryta, 460
Dyscrasite, 361
Epidesmine, 558 Blue v. Lazulite
Dysluite, 420
Dysodile, 646 Epididymite, 455 Common, 457
Dyssnite, 485
EPIDOTE Group, 530 Glassy, 458
Dysyntribite, 500, 562 Epidote, 531 Labrador, 466
Epigenite, 394 Lime, 467
Epistilbite, 549 Potash, 457, 460
E Epistolite, 592 Soda, 464
Ecdemite, 618 Epsom salt, 635 Felsobanyite, 639
Echellite, 558 Epsomite, 635 Felspar, v. Feldspar
Ectropite, 582 Erbium niobate,, 588, 591 Ferganite, 609
ficume de Mer, 576 Erbsenstein, v. Pisolite Fergusonite, 588
Edelite, 535 Erdkobalt, v. Asbolite Fermorite, 597
Edenite, 490 Erikite, 580 Fernandinite, 609
Edingtonite, 555 Erinite, 605 FERRATES, 418
Egeran, 520 Erionite, 558 Ferrazite, 611
Eglestonite, 401 Erubescite, 374 Ferritungstite, 644
Egueiite, 615 Erythrite, 608 Ferroanthophyllite, 487
Ehrenwerthite, 432 Erythrosiderite, 402 Ferrobrucite, 434
Ehlite, 605 Esmarkite, 498 Ferrocalcite, 441
Eichbergite, 385 Esmeraldaite, 433 Ferrocobaltite, 379
Eichwaldite, 620 Essonite, 507 Ferrogoslarite, 635
Eisen, v. Iron Ettringite, 640 Ferronatrite, 638
Eisenblau, Vivianite
v. Eucairite, 365 Ferropallidite, 633
Eisenbliithe, v. Flos ferri Euchroite, 611 Feuerblende v. Pyrostilpnite,
Eiaenglanz, v. Hematite Euclase, 529 Fibroferrite, 639
Eisenglimmer, v. Hematite Eucolite, 496 Fibrolite, 526
Eisenkies, v. Pyrite Eucolite-titanite, 584 Fichtelite, 645
Eisenniekelkies, v. Pentland- Eucryptite, 500 Fiedlerite, 401
ite Eudialyte, 496 Fillowite, 607
Eisenrahm, v. Hematite Eudidymite, 455 Fiorite, 409
Eisenrosen, v. Hematite Eudyalite, 496 Fire opal, 408
v. Siderite
Eisenspath, Eugenglanz, v. Polvbasite marble, 356
Eisenstassfurtite, 621 Eukairite, 365 Fireblende, v. Pyrostilpnite,
Eisspath, v. Rhyacolite Euklas, 529 390
Eisstein. v. Cryolite Eulytine, 504 Fischerite, 613
Ekdemite, 618 Eulytite, 504 Flagstaffite, 646
Elseolite, 499 Eupyrchroite, 596 Flajolotite, 618
Elaterite, 647 Euralite, 571 Fleches d' amour, 427
Electrum, 350 Eusynchite, 604 Flinkite, 606
Elements, 344 et seq. Euxenite, 591 Flint, 406
Eleolite, 499 Evansite, 614 Float-stone, 409
Eleonorite, 615 Flokite, 552
Elpidite, 496 Florencite, 601
Embolite, 397 Facellite, 501 Flos 446
ferri,
Embrithite, 387 Fahlerz, 390 Fluellite,402
Emerald, 495 Fahlunite, 498 Fluocerite, 399
Oriental, 413 Fairfieldite, 607 Fluor v.
Fluorite,
Uralian, 508 Palkenhaynite, 390 Fluor-apatite, 595
Emerald copper, v.
Dioptase, False Galena. 367 Fluor spar, 398
515
Famatinite, 393 FLUORIDES, 398 et seq.
Emerald nickel, 453 578
Faratsihite, Fluorite, 398
Emery, 410 556
?argite, Flusspath, v. Fluorite
Emmonsite, 641 ?aserkiesel, v. Fibrolite Foliated tellurium v.
Emplectite, 386
Nag-
?aserzeolith, v. Natrolite yagite, 383
Empressite, 383 ?assaite, 477 Pontainebleau limestone, 439
Enargite, 393 Faujasite, 555 Footeite, 631
Endeiolite, 587 "ava, 428 ?orbesite, 611
Endellionite, v. Bournonite Fayalite, 513 513
388 ?orstereite,
êather-alum, v. Halotrich- Fossil copal, 645
Endlichite, 598 ite
wood, 405, 408
Enstatite, 472 387
feather-ore, ôucherite, 615
Eosphorite, 615 êdererz, v. Jamesonite Fouqueite. 532
GERMANATES, 394 Grossular, Grossularite, 507

Fowlerite, 484 Gersdorffite, 379 Grothine, 545
Franckeite, 394 Geyerite, 381 Grothite, 584
Francolite, 596 Geyserite, 409 Griinbleierz, v. Pyromor-
Franklinite, 420 Gibbsite, 435 phite
Fraueneis, v. Selenite Gieseckite, 500, 562 Griineisenerde, v, Dufrenite
Frauenglas, v. Mica Gigantolite, 498, 562 Griinerite, 490
Fredricite, 391 Gilbertite, 561 Griinlingite, 360
Freibergite, 390 Gilpinite, 640 Guadalcazarite, 369
Freieslebenite, 387 Gilsonite, 647 Guanajuatite, 359
Fremontite, 602 Giorgiosite," 453 Guano, 597
French chalk, 576 Gips, v. Gypsum Guarinite, 525
Frenzelite, 359 Girasol,408 Guejarite, 386
Friedelite, 515 Gismondine, 552 Guitermanite, 388
Frieseite, 367 Gismondite, 552 Gummierz, v. Gummite
Fuchsite, 561 Glance coal, 648 Gummite, 624
Fuggerite, 518 Cobalt, v. Colbaltite Gymnite, 575
Furaacite, 604 Copper, v. Chalcocite Gypsum, 633
Glanzeisenerz, v. Hematite Gyrolite, 546
Glaserite, v. Aphthitalite
Glaskopf, Brauner, v. Limon-
Gadolinite, 529 ite
Gageite, 582 Rother, v. Hematite Haarkies, v. Millerite
Gahnite, 420 Glassy Feldspar, 458 Haarsalz, Epsomite
v.
Gajite, 453 Glauber salt, 632 Hackmanite, 502

Galactite, 556 Glauberite, 625 Hematite, v. Hematite
Galapectite, 579 Glaucochroite, 513 Haidingerite, 610
Galena, Galenite, 363 Glaucodot, 382 Hair salt, 635
Galena, False, 367 Glaucolite, 517 Halite, 395
Galenobismutite, 386 Glauconite, 577 Hallerite, 562
Galmei, v. Calamine Glaucophane, 492 Hallite, 572
Ganomalite, 498 Glaukodot, 382 Halloysite, 578
Ganophyllite, 546 Glessite, 645 Halotrichite, 637
Garnet, 505 Glimmer, v. Mica Hamartite, 449
Cinnamon, 507 Globosite, 615 Hambergite, 620
Chrome, 417 Glockerite, 639 Hamlinite, 601
Grossalur, 507 Glucinum, v.
Beryllium Hancockite, 533
Oriental, 507 Gmelinite, 554 Hanks!
Precious, 507 Goethite, 431 Hannaite, 611
Tetrahedral, v. Helvite Gold, 350
White, v. Leucite Goldfieldite, 391 HaMfouite, 498
Garni erite, 575 Gold tellurides, 382, 383 Harl.
Gastaldite, 493 Gonnardite, 557 Harmotomc
Gavite, 576 Goshenite, 496 Harstigite, 535
Gay-Lussite, 452 Goslarite, 635 Hartite, 645
Gearksutite, 402 Gothite, 431 Harttite, 601
Gedanite, 645 Goyazite, 616 Hastingsite, 491
Gedrite, 487 Graftonite, 594 Hatchettine, Hatchettite,
Gehlenite, 518 Grahamite, 647 645
Geikielite, 586 Gramenite, Graminite, 582 Hatchettolite, 587
Gekrosstein, v. Tripe stone Grammatite, 489 Hauchecornite, 372
Gelbbleierz, v. Wulfenite Granat, v. Garnet Hauerite, 378
Gelbeisenerz, v. Jarosite Grandiderite, 544 Haughtonite, 564
Gelbeisenstein, v. Xantho- Graphic tellurium. 382 Hausmannite, 424
siderite Graphite, 347 Hautefeuillite, 608
Genthite, 575 Gray antimony, 358 Hauyne, 503
Geocerellite, 646 copper, 390 Haiiynite, 503
Geocerite, 646 Greenalite, 577 Haydenite, 552
Georceixite, 601 Green lead ore, 597 Heavy spar, 625
Geocronite, 392 Greenockite, 371 Hebronite, 602
Geomyricite, 646 Greenovite, 584 Hedenbergite, 476
Georgiadesite, 594 Grenat, v. Garnet Hedyphane, 598
Geraesite, 601 Griffithite, 572 Heiiitzite, 622
Gerhardtite, 619** Griphite, 500 Heliodor, 495
546
Heliophyllite, 618
Huantajayite, 396 Inesite,
Hiibnerite, 642
Inflammable cinnabar, 646
Heliotrope, 405 Infusorial earth, 409
Hiigelite, 612
Hellandite, 540
Hudsonite, 492 Inyoite, 622
Helvite, Helvine, 504 '
lodate of calcium, 619
Hemafibrite, 611 Hullite, 571
Hulsite, 622 lodembolite, 397
Hematite, 415
Humboltine, 645 IODIDES, 397
Brown, 432
Humboldtilite, 518 lodobromite, 397
Hematogel, 434
Humboldtite, 528 lodyrite, 397
Hematolite, 606
Humite, 536 lolite, 497
Hematostibiite, 606
Hemimorphite, 539 Huntilite, 362 Hydrous, 498
Henwoodite, 616 Hutchinsonite, 386 Iridium, 355
Hureaulite, 611 Iridosmine, 355
Hepatic cinnabar, 370
Hussakite, 592 Iron, Chromic, v. Chromite
Hercynite, 420
Herderite, 601 Hyacinth,- 521, 507 Magnetic, 420
Herrengrundite, 638 Hyalite, 409 Meteoric, 356
Herschelite, 552 Hyalophane, 460 Native, 356
Hessite, 365 Hyalosiderite, 511 Oligist, v. Hematite
Hyalotekite, 498 Iron aluminate, 420
Hessonite, 507
Hetaerolite, 435 Hydrargillite, 435 arsenates, 608, 609, etc.
Heterocline, 425 Hydraulic limestone, 440 arsenides, 381

Heteromorphite, 387 Hydroboracite, 623 carbide, 356
Heulandite, 548 HYDROCARBONS, 645 carbonate, 443
Hewattite, 611 Hydrocerussite, 452 chlorides, 399
Hexahydrite, 637 Hydroclinohumite, 538 chromate, 423
Hibbenite, 612 Hydrocyanite, 630 columbate, 588
Hibschite, 540 Hydrofranklinite, 435 ferrate, 420
Hielmite, Hjelmit, 591 Hydrogothite, 433 hydrates, 431, 432
Hieratite, 400 Hydrogiobertite, 453 niobate, 588
Hiddenite, 481 Hydrohematite, 433 oxalate, 528
Highgate resin, 645 Hydromagnesite, 452 oxide, 415, 420; hy-
Hipgensite, 604 Hydromica, 561 drated, 431, 432
Hillebrandite, 546 Hydromuscovite, 561 ' phosphates, 605, 608,
Himbeerspath, v. Rhodochro- Hydronephelite, 558 610 etc.
site Hydrophane, 408 silicates, 513, 538, 571,
Hinsdalite, 618 Hydrophilite, 399 572
^jabzeitc, 622 Hydrotalcite, 435 sulphantimonite, 386
Hiortdah'.u Hydrothomsonite, 558 sulpharsenide, 381
Hydroxyapatite, 596 sulphates, 636, 637, 638,
Hydrozincite, 451 etc.
Hypersthene, 473 sulphides, 369, 373, 377,

Hypostiibite, 551 381
magnetic, 373
Hoernesite, 608 tantalates, 588
Hohmannite, 639 tellurite,.641
Hokutolite, 630 Iberite, 498 titanates, 417, 424
Hollandite, 424 Ice, 411 tungstates, 641, 644
Holmquistite, 493 Ice spar, v. Rhyacolite Iron alum, 637
Holzopal, v. Wood-opal Iceland spar, 439 Iron natrolite, 556
Holzzinnerz, v. Wood- tin Iddingsite, 512 Iron pyrites, 377
Homilite, 529 Idocrase, 519 Magnetic, 373
Honey-stone, Honigstein, v. Idrialite, 646 White, 380
Mellite Igelstromite, 435 Irvingite, 563
Hopeite, 607 Ihleite, 638 Iserine, 427
Horn quicksilver, 395 634
Ilesite, Isoclasite, 611
Horn silver, 397 Illmenite, 417 Isothose, 458
Hornblei, v. Phosgenite Ilmenorutile, 427 Itabirite, 417
Hornblende, 490 Hvaite, 538 Itacolumite, 406
Hornesit, Hornsilber, 397 Imerinite, 490 Ixiolitc
Hornstone, 406 Impsonite, 647
Horse-flesh ore, 374
Indianaite, 579
Horsfordite, 362 Indianite. 467
J
Hortonolite, 513 Indicolite, 542 Jacobsite,
Howlite, 621 Indigolite. .542 Jade, 482 489 :
B
Jade tenace, 482 Kibdelophan, 418 Kyanite, 526

Jadeite, 479-^-7 Kidney ore, 416 Kylindrite, 394
Jalpaite, 365 stone, 489
Jamesonite, 386 Kieselwismuth, v. Euytite
Janosite, 638 Kieselzinkerz, v. Calamine
Jargon, 521 Kieserite, 633
Jarosite, 640 Kilbrickenite, 392 Labrador feldspar, 466
Jasper, 406 Killinite, 562 .
Labradorite, 466
Jaspopal, 409 Kjerulfine, 600 Lacroixite, 601
572
Jefferisite, Klaprotholite, 386 Lagonite, 621
477
Jeffersonite, Kleinite, 395 Lampadite, 436
Jeremejevite, 620 Klinoklas, 604 Lanarkite, 632
Jet, 648 Klinozoisit, 532 Landerite, 509
Jezekite, 601 Knebelite, 513 Langbanite, 539
Joaquinite, 586 Knopite, 586 Langbeinite, 625
Johannite, 640 Knoxvillite, 639 Langite, 638
Johnstrupite, 585 Kobaltbliithe, v. Erythrite Lansfordite, 453 .
Jordanite, 391 Kobaltglanz, v. Cobaltite Lanthanite, 453

Joseite, 360 Kobaltkies, v. Linnaeite Lanthanum carbonate, 453
Josephinite, 356 Kobaltspath, v. Sphaerocobal- Lapis-lazuli, 503
Jurupaite, 498 tite Larderellite, 621
Kobellite, 387 Lassalite, 577
Kochsalz, v. Halite Lasurapatite, 596
K Koechlinite, 644 Lasurite, 503
Koenenite, 401 Latrobite, 468
Kaersutite, 491 Kohlenspath, v. Whewellite Laubanite, 552
Kainite, 631 Koksharovite, 491 Laumonite, 552
Kakoxen, 614 Kongsbergite, 354 Laumontite, 552
Kaliborite, 622 Konigite, 632 Laurionite, 401
Kalifeldspath, v. Orthoclase Koninckite, 610 Laurite, 380
Kaligliinmer, v. Muscovite Koppite, 587 Lautarite, 619
Kalinite, 637 Kornerupine, 544 Lavenite, 484
Kaliophilite, 501 Korund, v. Corundum Lavrovite, 476
Kalisalpeter, v. Niter Kotschubeite, 569 Lawrencite, 399
Kalgoorlite, 369 Kottigite, 609 Lawsonite, 540
Kalkglimmer, 470 Krantzite, 645 Lazulite, 605
Kalkspath, v. Calcite Kraurite, 605 Lazurite, 503
Kalkuranit, v. Autunite Kreittonite, 420 Lead, 354
Kallait, v. Turquois Kremersite, 402 Black, 347
Kallfflte, 379 Krennerite, 383 Native, 354
Kalomei, 395 Kreuzbergite, 615 White, v. Cerussite
Kaluszite, 636 Krisuvigite, 632 Lead antimonate, 617
Kamacite, 356 Krohnkite, 638 arsenates, 598
Kammererite, 570 Kronkite, Kronnkite, 638 carbonates, 448, 452
Kamarezite, 638 Kryptoperthit, 460 chloride, 399, 401
Kammkies, v. Marcasite Ktypeite, 447 chloro-carbonates, 450
Kampylite, 598 Kunzite, 481 chromates, 630
Kaolin, 578 Kupfer, v. Copper dioxide, 428
Kaolinite, 578 Kupferantimonglanz, v. Chal- molybdate, 643
Karminspath, v. Carminite costibite oxides, 412, '424, 428
Karneol, v. Carnelian Kupferblende, v. Sandberger- oxychlorides, 401
Karstenite, v. Anhydrite ite phosphate, 597
Karyinite, 593 Kupferglanz, v. Chalcocite selenides, 364, 365
Kataforite, 491 Kupferglimmer, v. Chalco- silicates, 498, 539
Katzenauge, v. Cat's-eye phyllite sulphantimonate, 394
Kehoeite, 616 Kupferindig, v. Covellite sulphantimonites, 385,
Keilhauite, 585 Kupferkies, v. Chalcopyrite etc.
Kelyphite, 509 Kupferlasur, v. Azurite sulpharsenites, 385 etc.
Kentrolite, 539 Kupfernickel, v. Niccolite sulphates, 628 etc.

Kermes, 383 Kupferschaum, v. Tyrolite sulphate-carbonate, 631
Kermesite, 383 Kupferuranit, v. Torbernite sulphide, 363
Kerosene, 646 Kupfervitriol, v. Chalcan- sulphobismuthites, 386
Kerrite, 572 thite etc.
Kertschinite, 615 Kupfferite, 491 telluride, 364

Livingstonite, 385 Manandonite, 563

Lead tungstate, 643
vanadates, 598, 604 Lodestone, 421 MANGANATES, 418
Loeweite, 637 Manganandalusite, 524
Lead glance, 363
Lead Loewigite, 640 Manganapatite, 596
vitriol, v. Anglesite
Leadhillite, 631 Lollingite, 381 Manganblende, v. Alabandite
Lecontite, 632 Lorandite, 386 Manganbrucite, 434
Ledererite, 554 Loranskite, 591 Manganchlorite, 569
Lederite, 584 Lorenzenite, 586 Manganepidote, v. Piedmon-
tite
Ledouxite, 362 Lorettoite, 401
Lehrbachite, 365 Lossenite, 619 Manganese antimonate, 606
546 arsenates, 601, 606
Lengenbachite, 388 Lotrite,
Lennilite, 572 Loweite, 637 carbonate, 444
Leonhardite, 552 Lowigite, 640 disulphide, 378
Leonite, 637 Loxoclase, 458 hydrates, 432, 435
Leopoldite, 397 Lublinite, 439 niobate, 588
Lepidocrocite, 432 Lucinite, 610 oxides, 411, 424, 425,
Lepidolite,.562 Luckite, 636
v
427, 430, 432, 435
Lepidomelane, 565 Ludlamite, 614 phosphates, 594, 600,
Lepolite, 468 Ludwigite, 620
Lettsomite,, 638 Luigite, 545 silicates, 484, 513, 582,
Leucaugite, 477 Lumachelle, 440 etc.
Leuchtenbergite, 569 Liineburgite, 619 sulphates, 633, 636

Leucite, 469 Lussatite, 405 sulphide, 369, 378
Leucochalcite, 612 Lutecite, 407 tantalate, 588
Leucomanganite, 607 Luzonite, 393 titanate, 418
Leucopetrite, 646 Lydian stone, 406 tungstate, 642
Leucophanite, 496 Manganfayalite, 513
Leucophoenicite, 538 M Manganglanz v. Alabandite
Leucopyrite, 381 Mangangranat, v. Spessar-
Leucosphenite, 585 Mackintoshite, 529 tite
Leucoxene, 418 Made, 525 Manganhedenbergite, 476
Levynite, 554 Maconite, 572 Manganite, 432
Lewisite, 618 Magnesioferrite, 420 Manganmagnetite, 420
Libethenite, 603 Magnesioludwigite, 620 Manganocalcite, 441, 444
Liebenerite, 500, 562 Magnesite, 443 Manganocolumbite, 589
Liebigite, 454 Magnesium aluminate, 419 Manganophyllite, 564
Lievrite, 538 arsenate, 608 Manganosiderite, 444
Lignite, 648 borate, 621, 622 Manganosite, 411
Ligurite, 584 carbonates, 443, 452, Manganospherite, 444
Lillianite, 388 453 Manganostibiite, 606
Lime, v. Calcium ferrate, 420 Manganotantalite, 589
Lime-mesotype, 557 fluoride, 399 Manganpectolite, 483
Lime uranite, 515 hydrate, 434 Manganspath) v. Rhodochrc
Limestone, 440 oxides, 411, 434 site
Hydraulic, 440 phosphates, 600, 608, Mangantantalite, 588
Magnesian, 442 611 Mangan-vesuvianite, 520
Limonite, 432 472, 473,
silicates, etc.; Marble, 440
Linarite, 632 513, 536, 573, 576 Verd-antique, 573
Lindackerite, 618 sulphates, 633, 635 Marcasite, 380'
Linnaeite, 374 titanate, 586 Marceline, 425, 485
Linsenkupfer, v. Liroconite Magnetic iron ore, 420 Margarite, 566
Lintonite, 557 Magnetic pyrites, 373 Margarodite, 561
Liroconite, 615 Magnetite, 420 Margarosanite, 498
Liskeardite, 614 Magnetkies, v. Pyrrhotite Marialite, 518
Lithia mica, 562
Magnoferrite, 420 Marignacite, 587
Lithionglimmer, v.
Lepido- Malachite, 450 Mariposite, 565
lite
Blue, v. Azurite Marmatite, 368
Lithiophilite, 594 Green, 450 Marmolite, 573
Lithium phosphates, 594. Malacolite, 476 Marshite, 395
602
Malacon, 522 Marsjakskite, 577
silicates 480, 500, 562 Maldonite, 350 Martinite, 611
Lithographic stone, 440 Malinowskite, 391 Martite, 417
Lithomarge, 578 Mallardite, 636 Mascagnite, 624
Liveingite, 387 Maltha, 646 Maskelynite, 467
Masonite, 567 Mica, Magnesia, 563, 565 Monite, 606

Massicot, 412 Potash, 560 Monrolite, 526
Matildite, 386 Soda, 562 Montanite, 641
Matlockite, 401 Vanadium, 565 Monticellite, 513
Maucherite, 362 Micaceous iron ore, 415 Montmorillonite, 579
Mauzeliite, 618 Michei-levyte, 626 Montroydite, 412
Maxite, 631 Microcline, 460 Moonstone, 458, 465
Mazapilite, 615. Microcosmic salt, 611 Moravite, 571
Meerschaum, 576 Microlite, 587 Mordenite, 548
Meionite, 516 Microsonunite, 501 Morencite, 582
Melaconite, 412 Microperthite, 460 Morenosite, 635
Melanglanz, v. Stephanite Microphyllite, 467 Morganite, 495
Melanite, 508 Microplakite, 467 Morion, 405
Melanocerite, 496 Miersite, 397 Moroxite, 596
Melanophlogite, 408 Miesite, 598 Mosandrite, 585
Melanotekite, 539 Mikroklin, 460 Mosesite, 402
Melanterite, 636 Milarite, 455 Moss agate, 405
Melilite, 518 Milky quartz, 405 Mossite, 590
Melinophane, v. Meliphan- Millerite, 372 Mottramite, 604
ite Millosevichite, 630 Mountain cork, 490
Meliphanite, 496 Mimetene, Mimetesite, 598 leather, 490
Melite, 580 Mimetite, 598 soap, 578
Mellate of aluminium, 645 Minasite, 614 tallow, 645
Mellite, 645 Minasragrite, 641 wood, 490
Meionite, 382 Mineral caoutchouc, 647 Miillerite, 582
Menaccanite, 417 Mineral coal, 647 Mullanite, 388
Mendipite, 401 oil, 646 Muller's glass, 409
Mendozite, 637 pitch, 647- Mullicite, 608
Meneghinite, 391 resin, 645 Mundic, v. Pyrite
Menilite, 408 tallow, 645 Murchisonite, 458
Mennige, v. Minium tar, v. Pittasphalt Muscovite, 560
Mercurammonite, 395 wax, 645 Muscovy glass, 562
Mercury, 354 Minguetite, 572 Mussite, 478
Horn, 395 Minium, 424 Muthmannite, 383
Native, 354 Mirabilite, 632
Mercury antimonite, 618 Misenite, 631 N
chloride, 3Q5 Mispickel, 381
selenides, 369 Misy, 638 Nadeleisenerz, v. Gothite
sulphides, 369, 370 Mitchellite, 423 Nadelerz, v. Aikinite
sulpho-selenide, 369 Mixite, 617 Nadelzeolith, v. Natrolite
telluride, 369 Mizzonite, 517 Nadorite, 618
Mercury amalgam, 354 Mocha stone, v. Moss agate Naegite, 522
Meroxene, 564 Mock lead, 291 Nagyagite, 383
Mesitite, 443 Moissanite, 356 Nailhead spar, 439
Mesitinspath, v. Mesitite Mohawkite, 362 Nantokite, 395
Mesole, v. Thorn sonite Molengraaffite, 585 Napalite, 645
Mesolite, 557 Molybdanbleispath, v, Wul- Naphtha, 646
Mesotype, 556 fenite Narsarsukite, 585
Messelite, 607 Molybdanglanz, v. Molyb- Nasonite, 498
Metabrushite, 611 denite NATIVE ELEMENTS, 344
Metachinabarite, 369 MOLYBDATES, 641 Natramblygonite, 602
Metahewettite, 611 Molybdenum sulphide, 360 Natrium, v. Sodium
Metastibnite, 359 trioxide, 410 Natroborocalcite, 622
Meta-torbernite I, 616 Molybdenite, 360 Natrochalcite, 638
Metavoltine, 639 Molybdic ocher, 410 Natrolite, 556
Metaxite, 575 Molybdite, 410 Natrojarosite, 640
Meteoric iron, 356 Molybdomenite, 641 Natromontebrasite, 602
Mexican onyx, 440 Molybdophyllite, 498 Natron, 452
Meyerhofferite, 622 Molybdosodalite, 502 Natrophilite, 594
Miargyrite, 386 Molysite, 399 Naumannite, 364
MICA Group, 559 Monazite, 593 Needle ironstone, 432
Mica, Iron, 563, 565 Monetite, 606 Needle ore, v. Aikinite
Lime, 566 Monheimite, 445 Needle zeolite, v. Natrolite,
Lithia, 562 Monimolite, 593 556
Oisanite, 532 Paposite, 639

Nemalite, 434
Okenite, 546 Paracelsian, 460
Neocolemanite, 621
Neotantalite, 587 Oldhamite, 369 Paraffin, 645
Neotocite, 485, 582 Oligist iron v. Hematite Paragonite, 562
Nepheline, 499 Oligoclase, 466 Parahopeite, 607
Oligonite, 444 Paralaurionite, 401
Nephelite, 499
Nephrite, 489 Olivenerz, v. Olivenite Paraluminite, 639
Nepouite, 575 Olivenite, 603 Paramelaconite, 412
Neptunite, 585 Olivine, 511 Parasite, 621
Nesquehonite, 452 Omphacite, 477 Paravivianite, 608
Nevyanskite, 355 Oncosin, 561 Paredrite, 428
Newberyite, 611 Onofrite, 369 Pargasite, 490
Newtonite, 579 Onyx, 406 Parisite, 449
Niccolite, 372 Mexican, 440 Parophite, 562
Nicholsonite, 446 Onyx marble, 440 Parrot coal, 648
Nickel antimonide, 372 Oolite, 440 Partschinite, 510
arsenates, 609 Opal, 408 Pascoite, 609
arsenides, 372, 378, 382 Opal jasper, 409 Passauite, 517
carbonate, 453 Ophicalcite, 573 Paternoite. 621
oxides, 411 Ophiolite, 573 Patronite, 361
silicate, 575 Ophite, 575 Peacock Ore, 374
sulphantimonide, 379 Orangite, 522 Pearceite, 393
sulpharsenide, 379, 382 Oriental alabaster, 440 Pearl sinter, 409
sulphate, 635 amethyst, 413 Pearl-spar, 441
sulphides, 369, 372, 373 emerald, 413 Peat, 648
telluride, 382 ruby, 413 Pebble, Brazilian, 405
Nickelantimonglanz, v. Ull- topaz, 413 Pechblende, Percherz, v.
maimite Orientite, 582 Uraninite
Nickelarsenikglanz, v. Gers- Orpiment, 357 Peckhamite, 474
dorffite Orthite, 533 Pectolite, 483
Nickel-gymnite, 575 Orthoclase, 457 Peganite, 613
Nickel-skutterudite, 380 Orthose, v. Orthoclase Pencil-stone, 579
Nigrine, 427 Oruetite, 360 Penfieldite, 401
Nigrite, 647 Osannite, 494 Pennine, 570
NIOBATES, 587 Osmelite, 483 Penninite, 570
Niter, 619 Osmiridium, 355 Pentlandite, 369
Niter, Soda, 619 Osmium sulphide, 379 Peplolite, 498
NITRATES, 619 Osteolite, 596 Percylite, 401
Nitrobarite, 619 Otavite, 452 Periclase, 411
Nitrocalcite, 619 Ottrelite, 567 Pericline, 465
Nitroglauberite, 619 Ouvarovite, 508 Peridot, 511
Nitromagnesite, 619 Owenite, 572 Peristerite, 465
Nivenite, 623 3XALATES, 644 Perthite, 460
Nocerite, 401 Oxammite, 644 Perofskite, 586
Nontronite, 582 3xiDEs, 402 Perovskite, 586
Nordenskipldine, 620 3XYCHLORJDES, 400 Perowskit, 586
Nordmarkite, 544 3XYFLUORIDES, 400 Petalite, 455
Northupite, 450 Dxykertschenite, 61 Petrified wood, 406
Nosean,' 503 DXYSULPHIDES, 383 Petroleum, 646
Noselite, 503 3zarkite, 557 Petzite, 365
Noumeite, 575 Ozocerite, 645 Phacelite, Phacellite, 501
Nussierite, 598 hacolite, 553
Pharmacolite, 610
Pharmacosiderite, 614
Pachnolite, 402 Phenacite, 514
Ocher, Brown, 432 Pagodite, 562 Phengite, 561
Red, 415 Paigeite, 622 Philadelphite, 572
Ochrolite, 618 Paisbergite, 484 Philipstadite, 491
Octahedrite, 428 Palaite, 607 Phillipite, 638
Odontolite 613
Palladium, 355 Phillipsite, 550
(Eil de chat, 424
Palmerite, 610 Phlogopite, 565
(Ellacherite, 561 Palmierite, 640
3
hoenicite, 630
Offretite, 554 Panabase, v. Tetrahedrite Phcenicochroite, 630
Oil, Mineral 646
Pandermite, 621 Pholerite, 578
Pholidolite 577 Polyadelphite, 508 Pyrargyrite, 389

Phosgenite, 450 Polyargite, 562 Pyreneite, 508
PHOSPHATES, 592 Polyargyrite, 393 Pyrgom, 477
Phosphoferrite, 601 Polyarsenite, 601 Pyrite, 377
Phosphorite, 596 Polybasite, 392 .Pyrites, Arsenical, v. Arseno-
Phosphophyllite, 618 Polycrase, 591 pyrite, 381
Phosphorsalz, v. Stercorite Polychroilite, 498 Capillary, 372
Phosphosiderite, 610 Polydymite, 373 Cockscomb, 380
Phosphuranylite, 617 Polyhalite, 637 Copper, 374
Photicite, 485 Polylithionite, 563 Iron, 377
Phyllite, 567 Polymignite, 591 Magnetic, 373
Physalite, 523 Polysphaerite, 598 Radiated, 380
Picite, 615 Ponite, 445 Spear, 380
Pickeringite, 637 Poonahlite, v. Scolecite Tin, 394
Picotite, 419 Porpezite, 350 White iron, 380
Picroepidote, 532 Posepnyte, 646 Pyroaurite, 435
Picrolite, 573 Potash alum, 637 Pyrobelonite, 604
Picromerite, 637 Potassium borate, 622 Pyrochlore, 587
Picropharmacolite, 607 chloride, 396 Pyrochroite, 435
Picrotitanite, 417 nitrate, 619 Pyrolusite, 430
Piedmontite, 532 silicate, 457, 460, 469, Pyromorphite, 597
Pigeonite, 479 560, etc. Pyrope, 507
Pinakiolite, 620 sulphate, 624 Pyrophanite, 418
Pinguite, 582 Potstone, 576 Pyrophosphorite, 606
Pinite, 562, 498 Powellite, 643 Pyrophyllite, 579
Pinnoite, 622 Prase, 405 Pyrophysalite, 523
Pintadoite, 609 Praseolite, 498 Pyroretinite, 646
Piotine, 576 Prehnite, 534 Pyrosclerite, 572
Pirssonite, 452 Preslite, 604 Pyrosmalite, 515
Pisanite, 636 Pfibramite, 368 Pyrostilpnite, 390
Pisolite, 440 Priceite, 621 Pyroxene, 474
Pistacite, 531 Priorite, 591 PYROXENE Group, 470
Pistomesite, 443 Prismatine, 544 Pyroxmangite, 485
Pitchblende, 623 Przibramite, 368 Pyrrharsenite, 593
Pittasphalt, 646 Prochlorite, 571 Pyrrhite, 588
Pitticite, 618 Prolectite, 538 Pyrrhotine, 373
r
Placodine, 3 >2 Prosopite, 402 Pyrrhotite, 373
Plagioclase, 374 Protobastite, 473
7
Plagionite, 38T Proustite, 389
Plancheite, 515 Prussian blue, Native, 608 Q
Planoferrite, 639 Przibramite, 432 Quartz, 403
Plasma, 405 Pseudoboleite, 401 Quartzine, 407
Plaster of Paris, 634 Pseudobrookite, 424 Quartzite, 406
Platina, 355 Pseudocampylite, 598 Quecksilber, Gediegen, v.
Platiniridium,r 355 Pseudoleucite, 470 Cinnabar

Platinum, 35 Pseudomalachite, 605 Quecksilberhornerz, v. Calo-
Platinum, arsenide, 379 Pseudomeionite, 516 mel
Plattnerite, 428 Pseudomesqlite, 557 (uenstedtite, 637
Platynite, 385 Pseudophillipsite, 550 luetenite, 640
Plazolite, 580 Pseudophite, 570 uicksilver, 354
Plenargyrite, 386 Pseudosteatite, 579 uisqueite, 347
Pleonaste, 419 Pseudowollastonite, 483
356
Plessite, Psilomelane, 436 R
Plumbago, 347 Psittacimite, 604
Plumbogummite, 601 Ptilolite, 548 Radelerz, Bournonite
v.
Plombocalcite, 441 Pucherite, 594 Radiated pyrite, 380

Plumbojarosite, 640 Puflerite, 551 Radiotine, 573
Plumboniobite, 592 Punamu, 482 Rafaelite, 401
Plumbostib, 387 Purple copper ore, 374 Raimondite, 639
Plumosite, 387 Purpurite, 610 Ralstonite, 402
Podolite, 618 Puschkinite, 532 Ramirite, 604
Pochite, 545 Pycnite, 523 Rammelsbergite, 382
Polianite, 427 Pycnochlorite, 571 Ranite, 558
Pollucite, 470 Pyrargillite, 498 Raspite, 643
Rathite, 386 Romanzovite, 507 Saponite, 576, 579

Rauchquarz, v. Smoky Romeite, 618 Sapphire, 413
Quartz Romerite, 638 Sapphirine, 544
Raumite, 498 Rosasite, 449 Sarcolite, 518
Realgar, 357 Roscherite, 616 Sard, 405
Red antimony, v. Kermesite Roscoelite, 565 Sardonyx, 406
chalk, 416 Rose quartz, 405 Sarkinite, 601
copper ore, 410 Roselite, 607 Sartorite, 385
hematite, 415 Rosenbuschite, 483 Sassolite, 435
iron ore, 416 Rosieresite, 610 Satin spar, 439, 634
lead ore, 630 Rosite, 562 Saualpite, 530
ocher, 416 Rosolite, 509 Saussurite, 350
silver ore, 389 Rothbleierz, v. Crocoite Scacchite, 399
zinc ore, 411 Rotheisenerz, Rotheisenstein, Scapolite, 516
Reddingite, 607 v. Hematite SCAPOLITE Group, 515
Reddle, 416 Rothgiiltigerz, v. Pyrargy- Schafarzikite, 618
Redingtonite, 639 rite Schalenblende, 368
Redruthite, 366 Rothkupfererz, v. Cuprite Schapbachite, 387
Reinite, 644 Rothnickelkies, v. Niccolite Schaumerde, v. Aphrite
Reissite, 549 Rothoffite, 508 Schaumopal, 409
Remingtonite, 453 Rothspiessglanzerz, v. Ker- Schaumspath, v. Aphrite
Rensselaerite, 576 mesite Scheelbleispath, v. Stolzite
Resin, Mineral, 645 Rothzinkerz, v. Zincite Scheelite, 642
Retinalite, 573 Rowlandite, 529 Scheelspath, v. Scheelite
Retinite, 645 Rubellite, 542 Scheererite, 645
Retzbanyite, 385 Rubicelle, 419 Schefferite, 477
Retzian, 606 Rubin, 419 Schertelite, 611
Rezbanyite, 385 Ruby, Almandine, 419 Schiller-spar, 474
Rhabdophanite, 609 Balas, 419 Schirmerite, 386
Rhaetizite, 527 Oriental, 413 Schizolite, 483
Rhagite, 617 Spinel, 419 Schlangenalabaster, v. Tripe-
Rhodalose, v. Bieberite Ruby blende, 368 stone
Rhodizite, 621 Ruby copper, 410 Schmirgel, Emery
v.
Rhodochrome, 570 Ruby 389

silver, Schneiderite, 552
Rhodochrosite, 444 Ruby zinc, 368 Schoenite, 637
Rhodolite, 507 Ruin marble, 440 Schorlomite, 510
Rhodonite, 484 Rumanite, 645 Schorza, 531
Rhodophyllite, 570 Rumpfite, 572 Schreibersite, 356
Rhodotilite, 546 Ruthenium sulphide, 302 Schrifterz, Schrifttellur, v.
Rhodusite, 493 Rutherfordine, 449 Sylvanite
Rhonite, 494 Rutile, 427 Schrotterite, 580
Rhomboclase, 641 Schuppenstein, v. Lepidolite
Rhyacolite, 458 Schwartzembergite, 401
Riband 406
jasper, Schwatzite, 391
Richellite, 615 Schwefel v. Sulphur
Richterite, 489 382
Safflorite, Schwefelkies, v. Pyrite
Rickardite, 362 Sagenite, 405, 427 Cin-
Schwefelquecksilber, v.
Ricolite, 573 Sahlite, 477 nabar
Riebeckite, 493 Sal Ammoniac, 397 Schwerbleierz, v. Plattnerite
Rinkite, 585 477
Salite, Jchwerspath, v. Barite
Rinneite, 399 Salmiak, 397 Scleroclase, v. Sartorite
Ripidolite, 569 Salmite, 567 Scolecite, Scolezite, 557
Risorite, 588 Salmonsite, 610 Scorodite, 609
Rittingerite, 393 Salt, Rock, 395 Scorza, 531
Rivaite, 455 Saltpeter, v. Niter 609
Scovillite,
Riversideite, 546 Salvadorite, 636 Searlesite, 583
Rizopatronite, 361 Samarskite, 590
Rock crystal, 405 Seebachite, 552
Samiresite, 587 SELENIDES, 364, 365
meal, 440 Sammetblende, 432 634
Selenite,
milk, 440 Samsonite, 390 SELENITES, 641
salt, 395
Sandbergerite, 391 Selenium, 344
Roeblingite, 498 Sanguinite, 390 v. Tieman-
Selenquecksilber,
Romerite, 638 Sanidine, 458 nite
Roepperite, 513 Saphir d'eau, 498 Selensulphur, 348
Selenwismuthglanz, v. Guan- Skemmatite, 436 Spodumene, 480

juatite Skleroklas, v. Sartorite Sporogelite, 434
Seligmannite, 388 Skogbolite, 590 Spreustein, 556
Sellaite, 399 Skutterudite, 380 Sprodglanzerz, v. Polybasite
Semeline, 584 Smaltite, 378. Sprodglaserz, v. Polybasite
Semi-opal, 408 Smaragd, v. Emerald Sprudelstein, 446
Semseyite, 387 Smaragdite, 490 Spurrite, 581
Senaite, 418 Smectite, 579, 580 Staffelite, 596,597
Senarmontite, 409 Smegmatite, 579 Stalactite, 440
Sepiolite, 576 Smirgel, v. Emery Stalagmite, 440
Serendibite, 545 Smithite, 386 Stannite, 394
Sericite, 561 Smithsonite, 445, 539 Stassfurtite, 621
Serpentine, 573 Smoky quartz, 405 Star-quartz, 405
Serpeirite, 638 Soapstone, 576 sapphire, 410
Seybertite, 566 Sobralite, 485 Staurolite, 543
Shanyavskite, 436 Soda alum, 637 Staurotide, 543
Shattuckite, 581 Soda-mesotype, 557 Steatite, 576
Shepardite, 472 Soda microcline, 461 Steenstrupine, 496
Sheridanite, 571 Soda niter, 619 Steinheilite, 498
Shell marble, 440 Soda orthoclase, 458 Steinmannite, 363
Siberite, 542 Soda-sarcolite, 518 Steinmark, v. Lithomarge
Sicklerite, 610 Sodalite, 502 Steinsalz, v. Halite
Siderite, 443 Sodium borate, 622 Stellerite, 558
Sideronatrite, 639 carbonate, 452, 453 Stelznerite, 632
Siderophyllite, 564 hloride, 395 Stephanite, 392
Siegenite, 374 fluoride, 399, etc. Stercorite, 611
Silber, v. Silver nitrate, 619 Sternbergite, 367
Silberamalgam, v. Amalgam phosphate, 594, etc. Stewartite, 607
Silberglanz, v. Argentite silicate, 464, 502, 554, Stibiconite, 410
Silber hornerz, v. Cerargy- 556 Stibiotantalite, 590
rite sulphate, 625: hydrous Stibnite, 358
Silex, Silica, 403 632, etc. Stichtite, 453
SILICATES, 454 Somervillite, 518 Stilbite, 551, 548
Siliceous sinter, 409 Sonnenstein, v. Sunstone Stilpnochloran, 572
Silicified wood, 404 Soretite, 491 Stilpnomelane, 572
Silicomagnesiofluorite, 545 Souesite, 356 Stoffertite, 611
Silicon oxido, 403, 407, 408 Soumansite, 614 Stokesite, 540
Sillimanite, 526 Spadaite, 577 Stolpenite, 579
Silver, 352 Spaerocobaltite, 446 Stolzite, 643
Silver antimonide, 361 Spangolite, 631 Strahlerz, v. Clinoclasite
arsenide, 362 Spargelstein, v. Asparagus Strahlkies, v. Marcasite
bismuthide, 362 stone Strahlstein, 489
bromide, 397 Spathic iron, 443 Stratopeite, 485
chlorides, 397 Spatheisenstein, v. Siderite Stream tin, 426
iodide, 397 Spear pyrites, 380 Strengite, 610
selenide, 364 Speckstein, v. Steatite Strigovite, 572
.
sulphantimonites, 386, Specular iron, 415 Stromeyerite, 366
389 Speerkies, v. Marcasite Strontianite, 447
sulpharsenite, 389 Speiskobalt, v. Smaltite Strontianocalcite, 440
sulphide, 364, 367 Spencerite, 612 Strontium carbonate, 447
sulpho-bismuthite, 386 Spessartine, Spessartite, 507 silicate, 549
sulpho-germanate, 394 Speziaite, 491 sulphate, 627
telluride, 362, 365, 382 Sperrylite, 379 .
Struvite, 606
Silver glance, 364 Sphaerite, 614 Striiverite, 427
Simetite, 645 Sphaerocobaltite, 446 Stiitzite, 362
Simonyite, 637 Sphalerite, 367 Stylotypite, 388
Sinopite, 580 Sphene, 583 Succinic acid, 645
Sinter, Siliceous, 409 Sphenomanganite, 432 Succinite, 645, 507
Sipylite, 588 Spiauterite, v. Wurtzite Sulfoborite, 623
Siserskite, 355 Spinel, 419 SULPHANTIMONATES, 393
Sismondine, Sismondite, 567 Spinel ruby, 419 SULPHANTIMONITES, 383
Sisserskite, 355 Spinthere, 584 SULPHARSENATES, 393
Sitaparite, 418 Spodiophyllite, 572 SULPHARSENITES, 383
Skapolith, 516 Spodiosite, 600 SULPHATES, 624
SULPHIDES, 357 Tellurium oxide, 410 Traversellite, 476

SULPHOBISMUTHITES, 383 Tellurnickel, v. Melonite Travertine, 440
Sulphoborite, 623 Tellursilber, v. Hessite Trechmanite, 386
Sulphohalite, 631 Tellurwismuth, v. Tetrady Tremolite, 489
SULPHOSTANNATES, 315 mite Trichalcite, 607
Sulphur, 347 Temiskamite, 372 Tridymite, 407
Sulvanite, 393 Tengerite, 454 Trigonite, 601
Sundtite, 385 Tennantite, 391 Trimerite, 515
Sunstone, 466 Tenorite, 412 Tripestone, 629
Susannite, 631 Tephroite, 513 Triphane, 480
Sussexite, 619 Terlinguaite, 401 Triphyline, 594
Svabite, 598 Termierite, 579 Triphylite, 594
Svanbergite, 618 Teschemacherite, 450 Triplite, 600
Sychnodymite, 373 Tesseralkies, v. Skutterudite Triploidite, 601
Sylvanite, 382 Tetradymite, 360 Triploite, 409
Sylvite, 396 Tetrahedrite, 390 Trippkeite, 618
Symplesite, 608 Thalenite, 529 Tripuhyite, 618
Synadelphite, 606 Thallite, 531 Tritochorite, 604
Synchisite, 449 Thallium selenide, 365 Tritomite, 496
Syngenite, 636 Thaumasite, 581 Trogerite, 617
Syntagmatite, 489 Thenardite, 624 Troilite, 373
Szaboite, 474 Thennonatrite, 452 Trolleite, 614
Szaibelyite, 620 ThermophyUite, 575 Trona, 453
Szechenyiite, 489 Thinolite, 441 Troostite, 514
Szmikite, 633 Thiorsauite, 468 Tscheffkinite, Tschewkinit,
Szomolnokite, 633 Thomsenplite, 402 585
Thomsonite, 557 Tschermigite, 637
T Thonerde, v. Aluminium Tsumebite, 604
Tabular spar, 482 Thorianite, 624 Tufa, Calcareous, 440
Tachhydrite, 402 Thorite, 522 Tungsten trioxide, 410
Tachyhydrite, Tachydrite, Thorium silicate, 522, 540 Tungstenite, 361
402 Thortveitite, 529 Tungstite, 410
Taeniolite, 565 Thorogummite, 624 Turanite, 604
Taenite, 356 Thulite, 530 Turgite, 433
Tafelspath, v. Wollastonite Thuringite, 571 Tiirkis, 613
Tagilite,612 Tiemannite, 369 Turmalin, 540
Talc, 575 Tiger-eye, 405 Turnerite, 593
Talkeisenerz, v. Magnetite Tilasite, 601 Turquois, Turquoise, 613
Talktriplite, 600 Tile ore, 410
Tychite, 450
Tallingite, 402 Tilkerodite, 364 Tyrite, 588
Tallow, Mineral, 645 Tin, Native, 354 Tyrolite, 612
Tamanite, 607 Tin borate, 620
Tysonite, 399
TANTALATES, 587 oxide, 425 Tyuyamunite, 617
Tantalite, 588 sulphide, 394
Tantalum, 349 Tin ore, Tin stone, 425 U
Tapalpite, 389 Tin pyrites, 394
Uhligite, 428
Tapiolite, 590 Tincal, 622 Uintahite, Uintaite, 647
Taramellite, 498 Tinkal, 622 Ulexite, 622
Tarbuttite, 604 Tirolite, 612 Ullmannite, 379
Tarnowitzite, 446 TlTANATES, 583 Jltrabasite, 392
Tartarkaite, 583 Titaneisen, v. Ilmenite
Tasmanite, 646 Jltramarine, 503
Titanic iron ore, 417
Tavistockite, 606
Umangite, 365
Titanite, 583 Jnionite, 530
Tawmanite, 532 Titaniumoxide, 427, 428, 429 Jraconite, 641
Taylorite, 624
ritanomorphite, 584 Jralite, 490
Teallite, 394
Toernebohnite, 540 JRANATES, 623
Tellur, v. Tellurium
Topaz, 523 Jraninite, 623
TELLURATES, 641 False, 405
Tellurbismuth, 360 Jranite, 616
v.
Oriental, 413 Jranium arsenate, 617
Tellurblei, Altaite
Topazolite, 508 carbonates, 454
TELLURIDES, 364 et sea
Porbanite, 648 niobates, 590, 591
Tellurite, 410
Torberaite, 616
TELLURITES, 641 phosphates, 616
Touchstone, 406 silicates, 581
Tellurium, 349 Tourmaline. 540
sulphate, 641
Uranmica, 616 Voltzite, Voltzine, 383 Wolftonite, 435

Uranocircite, 617 Vonsenite, 620 .
Wollastonite, 482
Uranniobite, 623 Vorobyevite, 495 Wolnyn, 626
Uranophane, 581 Vrbaite, 386 Wood, Fossil, Petrified, 406
Uranopilite, 641 Vredenburgite, 418 Wood copper, 603
Uranosphaerite, 624 Vulpinite, 629 Wood opal, 409
Uranospathite, 617 Wood tin, 426
Uranospinite, 617 W Worthite, 526
Uranothallite, 454 Wad, 436 Wulfenite, 643
Uranotil, 581 Wagnerite, 600 Wiirfelerz, v. Pharmacosider-
Uranpecherz, v. Uraninite Walkerite, 483 ite
Urao, 453 Walpurgite, 617 Wurtzite, 371
Urbanite, 477 Waluewite, 567
Urpethite, 645 Wapplerite, 611
Urusite, 639 Wardite, 614
Ussingite, 470 Waringtonite, 632 Xalostocite, 509
Utahite, 639 Warrenite, 387 Xantharsenite, 601
Utahlite, 610 Warwickite, 621 Xanthoconite, 393
Uvanite, 609 Washingtonite, 418 Xanthophyllite, 567
Uvarovite, Uwarowit, 508 Wassersapphir, v. lolite Xanthosiderite, 433
Wavellite, 612 Xanthoxenite, 614
Webnerite, 385 Xenolite, 526
Websterite, 639 Xenotime, 592
Vaalite, 487, 572 Wehrlite, 360
Valencianite, 458 Weibullite, 386
Valentinite, 410 Weibyeite, 449
Vanadinbleirerz, v. Vanadin- Weinbergerite, 494 Yellow copper ore, 374
ite Weissbleierz, v. Cerussite lead ore, 643
Vanadinite, 598 Weissgiiltigerz, v. Freibergite Yenite, 538
Vanadium silicate, 565 Wellsite, 549 Yttergranat, 508
Vanthoffite, 625 Wernerite, 516 529
Yttrialite,
Variegated copper ore, 374 Wheel 388
ore, Yttrium carbonate, 454
Variscite, 610 Whewellite, 644 Yttrium niobates, 588, etc.
Vashegyite, 614 White antimony, 409 phosphates, 592, 601
Vauquelinite, 630 White arsenic, 409 silicates, 529
Vegasite, 638 garnet, v. Leucite Yttrocerite, 402
Velardenite, 518 iron pyrites, 380 Yttrocolumbite, v. Yttrotan-
Velvet copper ore, v. Lett- lead ore, 448 talite, 590
somite Whitneyite, 362 Yttrocrasite, 586
Venasquite, 568 Wiikite, 591 Yttrofluorite, 399
Venus-hairstone, 427 Wilkeite, 597 Yttrogummite, 624
Verd-antique, 573 Willemite, 513 590
Yttrotantalite,
VERMICULITES, 572 Williamsite, 575 Yukonite, 615
Vermilion, v. Cinnabar Willyamite, 379
Vernadskite, 638. Wilsonite, 562
Vesuvianite, 51i> Wiltshireite,386
Veszelyite, 612 Wiluite, 507, 520 Zamboninite, 582
Victorite, 472 Winchite, 489 Zaratite,453
Vilateite, 610 Wiserine, 428 ZEOLITES, 547
Villamaninite, 379 Wismuth, v. Bismuth Zepharovichite, 610
Villiaumite, 396 Wismuthantimonnickel- Zeunerite, 616
519 v. Kallilite Zeigelerz, v. Tile ore
Viluite, glanz,
Violan, 476 Wismuthblende, v. Eulytite Zeophyllite, 546
Viridine, 525 Wismuthglanz, v. Bismuthin- Zeyringite, 446
Vitreous copper, v. Chalcocite ite Zietrisikite, 645
silver, v. Argentite Wismuthspath, v. Bismutite Zinc, 349
Vitriol, Blue, 636 Withamite, 532 .
Red Oxide of, 411
Vitriolbleierz, v. Anglesite Witherite, 447 Zinc aluminate, 420
Vivianite, 608 Wittichenite, 388 arsenates, 604, 609
Voelckerite, 596 Wocheinite, 434 carbonates, 445
Voglianite, 641 Wohlerite, 484 oxide, 411, 420
Voglite, 454 Wolfachite, 382 oxysulphide, 383
Volborthite, 612 Wolframite, 641 phosphate, 607
Voltaite, 639 Wolfsbergite, 386 silicates, 513, 539, 540
Zinc, sulphates, 630, 635 Zinkblende, v. Sphalerite Zircon, 520

sulphides, 367, 371 Zinkenite, 385. Zirconium dioxide, 428
vanadate, 604 Zinkosite, 630 silicate, 520, 484
Zinc blende, 367 Zinkspath, v. Smithsonite Zirkelite, 428
Zinc ore, Red, 441 Zinnerz, 425 Zoisite, 530
Zincorodochrosite, 445 Zinnkies, v, Stannite Zorgite, 365
Zincaluminite, 640 Zinnober, v. Cinnabar Zunyite, 505
Zincite, 411 Zinnstein, 425 Zurlite, 518
Zinckenite, 385 Zinnwaldite, 563 Zwieselite, 500
Zincocalcite, 441 Zippeite, 641
c
14 DAY USE
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED
ÂRTH SCIENC
on the
This book is due last
on the date to which renewed.
Renewed books are subject to immediate recall.
LD General Library
21-50m-6,'60
(B1321slO)476 University of California
Berkeley

Mineralogy Text 00 Dana Rich

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mineralogy Text 00 Dana Rich

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mineralogy Text 00 Dana Rich

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAUFOR ilA

Third Appendix to the Sixth Edition of Dana's

Minerals, and How to Study Them

BY DANA AND FORD

CRYSTALLOGRAPHY AND PHYSICAL MINERALOGY

EDWARD SALISBURY DANA ft

Professor Emeritus of Physics and Curator of Mineralogy

THIRD EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED

TOTAL ISSUE, TWENTY-SEVEN THOUSAND

LONDON: CHAPMAN & HALL, LIMITED

TECHNICAL COMPOSITION CO.

unwise to attempt any revision of the chemical classification until a new

raphy and The Optical Character of Minerals. He also acknowledges the

THE remarkable advance in the Science of Mineralogy, during the years

PART II. PHYSICAL MINERALOGY

II. Specific Gravity, or Relative Density 195

PART III. CHEMICAL MINERALOGY

PART IV. DESCRIPTIVE MINERALOGY

ON THE DRAWING OF CRYSTAL FIGURES 649

TABLES TO BE USED IN THE DETERMINATION OF MINERALS 663

GENERAL INDEX 695

1. THE SCIENCE OF MINERALOGY treats of those inorganic species called

minerals, which together in rock masses or in isolated form make up the

(1) Crystallography. This comprises a discussion of crystals in general

(2) Physical Mineralogy. This includes a discussion of the physical

Crystallography and Physical Mineralogy

Wallerant. Cristallographie, 1909.

Weisbach. Synopsis Mineralogica, systematische Uebersicht des Mineralfeiches, 1875.

Chemical and Determinative Mineralogy

Bischoff.Lehrbuch der chemischen und physikalischen Geologic, 1847-54; 2d ed.,

Artificial Formation of Minerals

Dittler. Mineralsynthetisches Praktikum, 1915.

Ax. pi. Plane of the optic axes. H. Hardness.

as of elasticity, cohesion, action on light, etc. This is clearly shown by the

grain to grain, or fiber to fiber, it is said to be a crystalline aggregate* since it

however, cannot be resolved into individuals, the mass is said to be crypto-

* The consideration of the various forms of crystalline aggregates is postponed to the

9. External Form. A crystal -is bounded by smooth plane surfaces,

Galena Vesuvianite Chrysolite

10. Variation of Form and Surface. Actual crystals deviate, within

laboratory. These angles, therefore, form one of the im-

below) are more or less closely connected together by certain definite

12.Diversity of Form, or Habit. While in the crystals of a given

may be exceedingly diverse. The accompanying figures (5-8) are examples

14. Symmetry in General. The faces of a crystal are arranged

In the ideal crystal this symmetry is right symmetry in the geometrical

Symmetry Planes in the Cube

(a) A crystal is said to have an axis of binary, or twofold, symmetry when

Chrysolite Calcite Rutile Beryl

Symmetry Axes in the Cube

17. Center of Symmetry. Most crystals, besides planes and axes of

18. Relation of Geometrical to Crystallographic Symmetry. Since

Cube Distorted Cubes

Cube and Octahedron

Further, in the case of a normal cube, a face of an octahedron on any solid

Thus, deferring for the moment the consideration of pseudo-symmetry, an

20. Pseudo-symmetry. The crystals of certain species approximate

* The terms used in this and similar cases explain themselves.

form of the normal class. This is illustrated by a twinned crystal of scheelite

I. ISOMETRIC SYSTEM. Three equal axes at right angles to each other.